Skip to main content

Full text of "Allen and Greenough's Latin grammar : for schools and colleges : founded on comparative grammar"

See other formats 


Google 


This  is  a  digital  copy  of  a  book  that  was  preserved  for  generations  on  library  shelves  before  it  was  carefully  scanned  by  Google  as  part  of  a  project 

to  make  the  world's  books  discoverable  online. 

It  has  survived  long  enough  for  the  copyright  to  expire  and  the  book  to  enter  the  public  domain.  A  public  domain  book  is  one  that  was  never  subject 

to  copyright  or  whose  legal  copyright  term  has  expired.  Whether  a  book  is  in  the  public  domain  may  vary  country  to  country.  Public  domain  books 

are  our  gateways  to  the  past,  representing  a  wealth  of  history,  culture  and  knowledge  that's  often  difficult  to  discover. 

Marks,  notations  and  other  maiginalia  present  in  the  original  volume  will  appear  in  this  file  -  a  reminder  of  this  book's  long  journey  from  the 

publisher  to  a  library  and  finally  to  you. 

Usage  guidelines 

Google  is  proud  to  partner  with  libraries  to  digitize  public  domain  materials  and  make  them  widely  accessible.  Public  domain  books  belong  to  the 
public  and  we  are  merely  their  custodians.  Nevertheless,  this  work  is  expensive,  so  in  order  to  keep  providing  tliis  resource,  we  liave  taken  steps  to 
prevent  abuse  by  commercial  parties,  including  placing  technical  restrictions  on  automated  querying. 
We  also  ask  that  you: 

+  Make  non-commercial  use  of  the  files  We  designed  Google  Book  Search  for  use  by  individuals,  and  we  request  that  you  use  these  files  for 
personal,  non-commercial  purposes. 

+  Refrain  fivm  automated  querying  Do  not  send  automated  queries  of  any  sort  to  Google's  system:  If  you  are  conducting  research  on  machine 
translation,  optical  character  recognition  or  other  areas  where  access  to  a  large  amount  of  text  is  helpful,  please  contact  us.  We  encourage  the 
use  of  public  domain  materials  for  these  purposes  and  may  be  able  to  help. 

+  Maintain  attributionTht  GoogXt  "watermark"  you  see  on  each  file  is  essential  for  in  forming  people  about  this  project  and  helping  them  find 
additional  materials  through  Google  Book  Search.  Please  do  not  remove  it. 

+  Keep  it  legal  Whatever  your  use,  remember  that  you  are  responsible  for  ensuring  that  what  you  are  doing  is  legal.  Do  not  assume  that  just 
because  we  believe  a  book  is  in  the  public  domain  for  users  in  the  United  States,  that  the  work  is  also  in  the  public  domain  for  users  in  other 
countries.  Whether  a  book  is  still  in  copyright  varies  from  country  to  country,  and  we  can't  offer  guidance  on  whether  any  specific  use  of 
any  specific  book  is  allowed.  Please  do  not  assume  that  a  book's  appearance  in  Google  Book  Search  means  it  can  be  used  in  any  manner 
anywhere  in  the  world.  Copyright  infringement  liabili^  can  be  quite  severe. 

About  Google  Book  Search 

Google's  mission  is  to  organize  the  world's  information  and  to  make  it  universally  accessible  and  useful.   Google  Book  Search  helps  readers 
discover  the  world's  books  while  helping  authors  and  publishers  reach  new  audiences.  You  can  search  through  the  full  text  of  this  book  on  the  web 

at|http: //books  .google  .com/I 


/ 


"^ 


N. 


s. 


N 


N. 


'^^^ 


\ 


^LEN  AND  GREENOUGH-S 


Latin  Grammar 


FOR  SCHOOLS  AND  COLLEGES 


FOUNDED  ON  COMPARATIVE  GRAMMAR 


ieiebfeelr  anlr  EnlargeU 

BY 

JAMES  BRADSTREET  GREENOUGH 


ASSISTED  BY 


GEORGE  L.  KITTREDGE 


r       .  -     c 


*  ■»  u     •       .  *  I    >. 


*  •      ♦• 


,••"■.*»•»•...*  m  >..V«^ 


1 


'  •»       •  r     » 


Boston,  U.  S.  A.,  and  London 

GINN    AND    COMPANY 

1891 


-^.. 


Entered  at  Stationers'  Hall. 


Copyright,  t888,  by 
J.  B.  GREENOUGH  and  J.  H.  ALLEN.. 

All  Rights  Rbsbkvbd. 


»    ■  _•  • 


»    •• 


.  •  •    •  • 


•  •  •  •  • 


W  %  V 


» •  •  •      •       • 

•  •  _  •     ••     • 

"••••     ••      • 

*       ••••••    • 

•  •      •  •         •  • 


••     •    • 

•  •     •    * 

•  •  •  • 


•  •  • 
•         •  •  < 


•  •  < 

•  I 

•  •  c 


•    »  V 


fc  >.     fc.'«     k     «•_     _••     •« 


•  •         •  •    •       •    • 


•••••      •••• 

•••     ••••       •       • 


•  •     • 

•  •  • 


Typography  by  J.  S.  Gushing  &  Co.,  Boston,  U.S.A. 
Prbsswork  by  GiNN  &  Co.,  Boston,  U^S.A. 


PREFACE  TO    REVISED   EDITION. 


The  Publishers  have  again  taken  advantage  of  the  opportunity 
offered  by  the  necessary  recasting  of  the  plates  of  this  book  to 
cause  such  improvements  to  be  made  in  it  as  the  advance  of  gram- 
matical knowledge  and  the  experience  of  the  schoolroom  have  shown 
to  be  advisable.  The  revising  editors  have  endeavored  to  simplify 
and  make  plain  the  statement  of  principles,  so  far  as  could  be  done 
without  sacrificing  scientific  correctness ;  but  no  concession  has  been 
made  to  the  prevalent  mechanical  method  of  treating  the  science  of 
language.  Many  additional  explanations  and  suggestions  have  been 
made  in  the  text  and  foot-notes,  for  the  benefit  of  teachers  and 
advanced  scholars.  The  number  and  range  of  examples  have  been 
very  considerably  increased;  and  it  is  hoped  that  scholars  will  find 
no  grammatical  usage  in  their  ordinary  reading  that  is  not  provided 
for  in  the  statements  laid  down. 

The  treatment  of  the  formation  of  words  has  been  much  extended ; 
and  new  light,  it  is  hoped,  has  been  shed  upon  this  difficult  and  ever- 
advancing  branch  of  the  science.  In  cases  where  comparative  philol- 
ogy is  concerned,  the  editors  have  endeavored  to  set  down  the  sure 
results  of  the  so-called  **  New  Grammar,"  but  have  been  conservative 
about  accepting  doctrines  which,  though  likely  to  be  true,  cannot 
yet  be  regarded  as  fiiUy  proved,  and  are  certainly  not  universally 
accepted.  In  conformity  with  the  modern  practice  all  naturally  long 
vowels,  known  to  be  such,  including  those  whose  natural  quantity 
is  concealed  by  position,  have  been  marked  throughout;  but  many 
suspected  to  be  long  have  been  left  unmarked,  where  the  evidence 
did  not  seem  sufficiently  convincing. 

Some  new  doctrines  will  be  found  in  regard  to  the  order  of  words, 
which,  though  not  generally  accepted,  will,  the  editors  are  persuaded, 
meet  with  more  general  approval,  the  better  they  are  applied  and 
understood.  This  subject  has  only  just  begun  to  receive  the  con- 
sideration it  deserves. 

No  changes  of  any  account  have  been  made  in  the  numbering  of 
sections. 

In  conclusion,  the  editors  hope  that  they  have  made  still  more 
plain  some  of  the  devious  ways  of  Latin  grammar,  and  feel  that  if 
their  new  efforts  meet  with  anything  like  the  same  favor  that  has 
been  shown  to  the  book  heretofore,  they  shall  be  amply  rewarded* 


PREFACE   TO  THE    EDITION    OF    1877. 


The  editors  have  taken  advantage  of  the  re-casting  of  the  plates 
to  make  some  unproveraents  in  the  present  edition,  which  have 
grown  upon  their  hands,  until  in  fact  a  thorough  revision  of  the 
book  has  been  made. 

The  principal  changes  are  the  following:    i.  The  matter  of  each 

part  has  been  cast  in  chapters,  with  sub-divisions  by  numbered 

I    paragraphs.     2.  A  considerable  expansion  has  been  given  to  several 

I  portions,  especially  to  those  on  Phonetic  Changes  and  the  Forma- 

I   tion  of  Words ;  inflectional  forms  have  been  more  carefiiliy  exhibited, 

I  and  sections  have  been  added  on  the  Syntax  of  Pronouns  and  Parli- 

I  des.     3.  Stricdy  philological  matter,  not  intended  for  class  use,  has 

I  been  put  in  the  form  of  marginal  notes.     4.  The  several  topics  of 

'  the  Syntax  are  introduced  by  brief  pre&tory  notes,  suggesting  what 

e  consider  to  be  the  tnie  theory  of  the  constructions ;   these  are 

not  designed  for  class  use,  and  are  not  included  in  the  numbered 

sections.     5.  Sotne  important  additions  and  illustrations  have  been 

given  in  the  Prosody,     The  substance  of  the  book  remains  as  be- 

The  form  of  expression,  however,  has  been  carefully  revised ; 

and  a  few  sections  have  been  transferred  to  a  different  connection. 

The  proof-sheets  have  been  submitted  to  several  experienced  teach- 
ers, who  have  generously  aided  us  by  their  criticism,  and  have  con- 
tributed many  valuable  practical  suggestions.  The  editors  have 
pleasure  in  acknowledging,  also,  their  special  indebtedness  to  Pro- 
fessor Castde  Harrison,  of  the  University  of  the  South,  Sewanee, 
Tenn.,  whose  correspondence  has  made  a  very  fidl  running  cora- 
;nfary  extending  over  the  greater  portion  of  the  book,  including 
all  the  Syntax,  with  copious  discussion  of  numerous  incidental 
topics.     His  notes  have  been  of  the  greatest  service  to  them ;  have 

;times  modified  their  views  and  constantly  supplemented  them 
have  urged  important  points  upon  their  attention,  and  have  no 
seldom  suggested  valuable  improvements  through  the  very  antago- 
nism of  opposing  doctrine.  Material  less  easy  to  specify  in  detail, 
not  less  Valuable  or  welcome,  has  been  received  from  Professor 
M.  W.  Humphreys,  of  Nashville,  from  the  principals  of  the  aeade- 

s  at  Aadover.  Exeter,  and  Quincy.  and  from  others,  lo  whom  cc 
dial  thanks  are  due  for  the  interest  tliey  have  testified  in  the  work. 


I 


I 


Cauui 


,  >i71- 


NOTE. 


For  the  convenience  of  those  who  may  wish  to  follow  up  more 
minutely  the  study  of  the  subjects  treated  in  this  book,  a  list  of 
important  works  is  given  below. 

Allen,  F.  D.  :  Remnants  of  Early  Latin. 

American  Journal  of  Philology,  Vols.  I.  to  VIII.  and  continued. 

BoPP:    Vergleichende  Grammatik  des  Sanskrit,  etc.      [Indo-European  lan- 
guages.]    4  vols.     3d  ed.     Berlin:   1868-70. 

The  original  standard  work  on  Comparative  Forms.  Later  researches  have 
corrected  some  erroneous  details.  English  translation  (poor).  London:  1862. 
The  best  form  is  a  French  translation,  with  Notes  and  Introductions  by  Michel 
Br^al.    Paris:  1866. 

Bezzenberger  :    Beitrage   zur   Kunde    der    Indo-Germanischen    Sprachen. 
I-I3- 

Brambach:  Laieinitche  Ortkographie,     1868. 

Brugmann  :  Grundriss  der  Vergleichenden  Grammatik,   Vol.  I.    Strassburg : 
1886. 


Greek  Grammar.    See  "  MUller's  Handbuch." 


CoRSSEN :  Aussprache,  Vokalismus  und  Betonung  der  Lateinischen  Sprache. 
2  vols.    2d  ed.     Leipzig:   1868. 

The  greatest  work  on  Latin  alone^  treating  the  language  in  reference  to  its  own 
individual  development,  particularly  as  to  the  sounds  {Lautlehre),  Must  be  used 
with  caution. 

CuRTius,  G. :    GrundzUge  der  Grieckiscken  Etymologie.      3d  ed.      Leipzig: 
1869. 

Treats  of  Latin  only  by  comparison,  but  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  works  on 
the  general  subject 

Erlauterungen  zu  meiner  Grieckiscken  Sckul-grammatik,      2d  ed. 

Prag:  1870.     English  translation  ("Elucidations").     London:   1870. 

Notes  giving  in  connection  with  the  Greek  Grammar  the  simplest  view  of  the 
doctrine  of  forms. 


Das  Griechische  Verbum. 


DelbrCck:    Das  Conjunctly  und  Optativ,  im  Sanskrit  und  Grieckiscken. 
Halle:  1871. 

Origin  of  the  Moods  treated  scientifically.  Should  be  read  in  connection  with 
a  notice  in  "North  American  Review,"  October,  187 1,  and  "Analysis  of  the  Latin 
Subjunctive/*  by  J.  B,  Greenough  (Cambridge :  1870). 


AbiatiVf  Localis,  Instrumentalis  im  Indiscken,  etc.     Berlin :   1867. 


Origin  of  the  various  Ablative  constructions. 


r 


Note. 


\ 


FiCK:    Vtrgleicitmla  WUrtcrbuch  der  Indo-Cirmanisehen  Sprachtn.     GH- 
tingen;  1S70, 

A  Dictionary  of  Roots  and  Words  suppoEed  to  have  existed  in  the  Indo-European 
tongue,  with  the  corresponding  words  and  derivatives  in  the  various  languages.    It 
can  be  used  mthout  a  knowledge  of  German.    No  such  boolt,  however,  is  safe  to 
use  without  careful  study  of  the  laws  of  consonant  and  vowel  changes, 
Hadleyi  Essays,  PhHolegicat  ana  Critical.    New  York  (Holt  &  Williams). 

1873- 
IlAl^W.  G. :   Cum  Canstructions.     [Cor tiell  Studies.] 

Tht  Sequtnif  of  Ttnsts. 

Hoffman:  Die Cortslraction  dir Lai/i>ti!chett  Zeilpanikcln.    Vienna:  i860. 

[Pamphlet.]  -m 

Marzi  HilfsbUehleia  fiir  dit  Aussfraihe.  elc.     Uerlio;  iSSj.  H 

Meyer,  G.:   GritAiscke  Grammatik.     zd  ed.     Leipzig:  18S5.  ^1 

MOlLER!  BandbuLh  dtr A'lassiscitn  Allerthums-ixiissemchaft.    Vol.  I.    Gritck'    ' 

ische  und Latatdsche  Sprachwissenschaft  (by  BrugnianD,  Stolz  and  SchmaU, 

and  others), 
Neue:  FormenlAre  der  Laleinischea  Sprache.    Stuttgart!  1875. 

Storehouse  of  all  Latin  forms,  izoo  pages,  containing  the  result  of  lale  textual 
criticism.    The  alaadard  work. 
PapilloN!  a  Manual  ef  CemparaHve  Philology,  as  applied  to  thi  lUusira- 

Hon  of  Grttk  and  Latin  Injlections.    Osford :  1876. 

Behind  Iho  times,  but  a  convenient  synopsis  of  the  doctrine  of  forms. 
ROBY,  H.  J.;  A  Grammar  of  Ihi  Latin  Lnnguagf,  from  Plaulus  to  Sucloaxus. 

London  and  New  York  (Macmillan):  VoL  I,  1871;  Vol.  II.,  1873. 

Some errorshavebeen pointed  out  In  the  "North  American  Review,"  January,  1B73, 
Schleicher:    Compendium  der  Vergleichenden  Grammatik  der  Inda-GV'    ' 

manischen  Spracien.    4th  ed.     1876,  '^H 

Antiquated,  but  Indispensoble.  ^| 

Seeuxank,  E.:  Die  Aussprache  des  Lalein.  Heilbronn:  18S5. 
5lEVEKS,E.:  GrundiOge  der  PhoneCik.  3d  ed.  Leipzig:  1885. 
VaniSeK,  A.;  Etymologisches  fVSrterhuh  der  Laleiniichen  Sprache.    Leipiig: 

1B74. 

SuggesflvB,  but  to  be  used  with  caution. 
Westphali  Metrikder  Criechen.     ad  ed.     1867.    a  vols. 

The  great  authority  on  the  metrical  systems  of  the  ancients,  with  full  literair  and 
musical llluslraliun.  A  convenient  summary,  with  some  modifications,  will  be  found 
In  Schmidts  Rhythmik  md  Metrik,  now  translated  by  Prof.  J.  W.  WHITK,  and 
published  \yj  the  publishers  of  this  book. 

Wheeler,  B.  T.  (  Analt^  and  its  Scope  in  Language.     [Cornell  Studies] 
Whitnkyi  Samirit  Grammar.    Leipzig;  1879. 

The  best  grammar  of  the  Sanskrit,  without  some  knowledge  of  which  languago 
It  is  dllGcuU  to  pursue  the  study  of  comparative  grammar  to  advantage. 
ZEITSCHRirr  fSr  ver^ichende  Sprackforschung.     Edited  by  Uc.  A.  Kt'HN. 

—  ..  .    _._      BeclJji;  185 1  and  subsequent  years. 

orrecl  Iheoriei  of  individual  Invcsligaton, 


CONTENTS. 


PART  I.  — ETYMOLOGY. 

PAGE 

Chapter  I. — Letters  and  Sounds 1-13 

Alphabet;  Classification,  Phonetic  Variations 1-9 

Pronunciation;  Quantity  and  Accent      .....'..  10-12 

Chapter  W.'^^  Words  and  their  Forms 13-18 

Inflection;  Root  and  Stem i3)  14 

The  Parts  of  Speech 15,16 

Gender,  Number,  and  Case 16-18 

Chapter  III. — Declension  of  Nouns 19-46 

General  Rules  of  Declension 19,  20 

First  Declension 20-22 

Second  Declension 22-25 

Third  Declension:  Mute  Stems 25-27 

Liquid  Stems 27-29 

Vowel  Stems 29-32 

Irregular  Nouns 32,  33 

Greek  Forms 33>  34 

Rules  of  Gender 34»  35 

Lists  of  Nouns 36-38 

Fourth  Declension 39>  40 

Fifth  Declension 40,41 

Defective  and  Variable  Nouns 42-46 

Proper  Names 46 

Chapter  IV. — Adjectives 47-62 

First  and  Second  Declensions 47-49 

Third  Declension 49-54 

Comparison 55-58 

Numerals S<^^ 


viii  Contents, 

PAGS 

Chapter  V.  —  Pronouns  ••••• 63-72 

Personal,  Reflexive,  Possessive,  Demonstrative   ....    63-68 

Relative,  Interrogative,  Indefinite 68-71 

Correlatives  (Pronouns  and  Adverbs) 72 

Chapter  VI. —  Verbs 73-121 

Inflection 73»  74 

Signification:  Voice,  Mood,  Tense 74-78 

Personal  Endings 78,  79 

Forms:  Verb-Endings 79-^i 

The  Verb  Sum 81-83 

The  Three  Stems .     84 

Regular  Verb :  The  Four  Conjugations 84,  85 

Formation  of  the  Three  Stems    .     .     .    •    86-90 

Synopsis  of  the  Verb 90 

Special  Forms 91 

First  Conjugation 92, 93 

Periphrastic  Conjugations 93 

Second  Conjugation 96-98 

Third  Conjugation 98-103 

Fourth  Conjugation 104-106 

Deponent  Verbs 106-108 

Irregular  Verbs .    •    •    • 109-1 14 

Defective  Verbs 114-117 

Impersonal  Verbs 117,118 

Note  on  the  Origin  and  History  of  Verb-Forms    .     .     ,      119-121 

Chapter  VII.  —  Particles 122-139 

Adverbs 122-127 

Prepositions 127-133 

Conjunctions 133-139 

Interjections •    .  •    •   139 

Chapter  VIII.  —  Formation  of  Words 140-162 

Roots  and  Stems 140,  141 

Suffixes :  Primary ;  Significant  Endings 141-143 

Derivation  of  Nouns  and  Adjectives 143-156 

Derivation  of  Verbs 156-160 

Compound  Words 160-162 


Contents,  ix 

PART  II SYNTAX. 

PAGB 

Introductory  Note 163, 164 

Chapter  I.  —  The  Sentence 165-204 

Definitions:  Subject  and  Predicate ;  Modification.'   •    •  165-170 

Agreement:  the  Four  Concords 170 

Nouns:  Apposition;  Predicate  Agreement 170-172 

Adjectives:  Rules  of  Agreement 172 

Special  Uses 174-177 

Pronouns:  Personal  and  Demonstrative     ......  1 78-1 81 

Reflexive 181-184 

Possessive 184-186 

Relative 186-191 

Indefinite 191, 192 

Alius  and  Alter 193,  194 

Verbs:  Subject,  Incomplete  Sentences 194-196 

Particles:  Adverbs,  Conjunctions,  Negatives     .    .    .  199-201 

Questions 201-204 

Chapter  II.  —  Construction  of  Cases 205-273 

Introductory  Note 205 

Genitive:  With  Nouns 206-211 

Possessive 207 

Material^  Quality  ......       208 

Partitive 209,210 

Objective 211 

With  Adjectives      • 21 1-2 13 

With  Verbs 213-217 

Remembering  and  Forgetting     .    213,214 

Accusing,  etc 214 

Feeling 214 

Interest  and  RSfert;  other  Verbs,  216,  217 
Peculiar  Genitives :  Exclamatory,  etc.      .    •    •       218 

Dative:  Indirect  Object  with  Transitives 219-221 

Indirect  Object  with  Intransitives  .....    221-225 

With  Compounds •    •    225-227 

Of  Possession ;  of  Agency  .......    227-229 

Of  Purpose  or  End ;  Dative  with  Adjectives    .    229-233 
Of  Reference;  Ethical ^.    ■2'i'?>>'i'J><k 


\ 


X  Contents, 

PAGa 

Accusative  :  Direct  Object 235-237 

Cognate  Accusative ;  Two  Accusatives  ....     238-242 

Idiomatic  and  Special  Uses 242-244 

Vocative 4 244 

Ablative  :  its  Several  Uses 244, 245 

1.  Of.  Separation  and  Privation 245-247 

Source,  Material,  Cause 247-250 

Of  Agent ;  of  Comparbon 251-253 

2.  Of  Manner,  Means,  Instrument,  Accompaniment,    253-256 

Of  Difference,  Quality,  Price,  Specification       .     256-259 

3.  Locative :  Special  Uses 260 

Ablative  Absolute 260-26^ 

Time  and  Place  ••••• 263-279 

Use  of  Prepositions     •    • 270-273 

Chapter  III.  —  Syntax  of  the  Verb     •    •    • 274-305 

Note  on  the  Moods • 274 

Moods  :  Indicative 275,  276 

Subjunctive :  General  Use 276 

^  Hortatory 277,278 

^  Optative 279 

"  Deliberative 280 

Imperative 280-283 

Infinitive 283 

Tenses:  Introductory  Note 291 

Tenses  of  Continued  Action 291 

Present 291-294 

Imperfect 294-296 

Future 296 

Tenses  of  Completed  Action 296 

Perfect 296-298 

Pluperfect 298 

Future  Perfect 298 

Epistolary  Tenses 299 

Tenses  of  the  Subjunctive 299 

Sequence  of  Tenses 300-304 

Tenses  of  the  Infinitive  •    •    • 3^4 

Participles: Z^^Z^^ 

Distinctions  of  Tense 307 

Adjective  Use 3°^ 

Predicate  Use 3^9 


Contents,  xi 

PAGE 

Future  Participle 312 

Gerundive  •    .    .    •    • 313 

Gerund  and  Gerundive 314 

Supines 318 

Chapter  IV.  —  Conditional  Sentences 320-339 

Introductory  Note 320 

Protasis  and  Apodosis 321 

Classification  of  Forms 322 

Simple  Conditions 324 

Future  Conditions 325 

Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact .    .    •  327 

General  Conditions 329 

Condition  Disguised 330 

Condition  Omitted 332 

Potential  Subjunctive 332 

Subjunctive  of  Modesty 332 

Verbs  of  Necessity 333 

Complex  Conditions 333 

Particles  of  Comparison 334 

Concessive  Qauses 335 

Proviso • 336 

Use  of  SI  and  its  Compounds 337 

Chapter  V. — Dependent  Constructions  .......    .339-3^8 

Relative  Clauses  :  Introductory  Note 339 

Conditional  Relative  Clauses 339 

Clauses  of  Purpose 340 

Clauses  of  Result 343 

Claases  of  Characteristic 346 

Causal  Clauses 348 

Relations  of  Time 349 

Fostquam,  etc 350 

Cnm  Temporal     •    • 352 

Cum  Causal 353 

Anteqnam,  Friusquam 554 

Dum,  Donee,  and  Quoad 354 

Substantive  Clauses  :  Introductory  Note 355 

Infinitive  Clauses 356 

Clauses  of  Purpose •    •    •    «    .  -^^^^ 


xii  Contents. 

Clauses  of  Result 362 

Clauses  with  Qnod 366 

Indirect  Questions 367 

Indirect  Discourse  :  Introductory  Note 369 

Formal  Indirect  Discourse 370 

Subordinate  Clauses 372 

Tenses  in  Indirect  Discourse 373 

Conditions,  Questions,  Commands 374 

Informal  Indirect  Discourse 379 

Integral  Clauses 380 

Important  Rules  of  Syntax 381 

Chapter  VI.  —  Arrangement 386-393 

GenefalRule 386 

Special  Rules 392 

Structure  of  the  Period 393 


PART   III.  — PROSODY. 

Chapter  I.  —  Quantity 394-401 

Introductory  Note 394 

General  Rules  of  Quantity 394 

Quantity  of  Final  Syllables 396 

Quantity  of  Penultimates 398-401 

Chapter  II.  —  Rhythm 402-406 

Measures  of  Rhythm :  Feet 402-405 

The  Musical  Accent 406 

Chapter  III.  —  Versification 407-424 

The  Verse 407 

Dactylic  Verse :  Hexameter 408 

Elegiac  Stanza ;  Other  Dactylic  Verses    •  410, 41 1 

Iambic  Verse :    Trimeter 41 1 

Other  Iambic  Measures 413 

Trochaic  Verse 413 

Mixed  Measures 414 

Logacedic  Verse 415,416 

Metres  of  Horace 417-421 

Index  to  Metres  of  Horace •    •    420 


Contents,  jciii 

PAGB 

Other  Lyric  Poets 421 

Miscellaneous 422 

Early  Prosody 423,  424 

Miscellaneous:  Reckoning  of  Time 425 

Measures  of  Value 427 

Abbreviations 428 

Glossary  of  Terms 429-432 

Appendix  :  Latin  and  Kindred  Tongues 433-438 

Principal  Roman  Writers 438, 439 

Index  of  Verbs 440-448 

Index  of  Words  and  Subjects 449  ff« 


LATIN  GRAMMAR. 


Latin  Grammar  is  usually  discussed  under  three  heads :  i.  Etymol- 
ogy* 2.  Syntax;  3.  Prosody.  Etymology  treats  of  the  form  of  separate 
words,  as  either  written  or  spoken ;  Syntax  of  their  function  when  joined 
together  as  parts  of  the  sentence ;  Prosody  of  their  arrangement  in 
metrical  composition. 


PART   FIRST.— ETYMOLOGY. 


Chapter  I.  —  Letters  and  Sounds. 

Alphabet. 

The  Latin  Alphabet,  as  the  language  is  usually  written, 

is  the  same  as  the  English  (which,  in  fact,  was  borrowed 

from  it),  except  that  it  has  no  w. 

Properly,  it  consists,  however,  of  only  twenty-three  letters :  a  (called 
ah),  b  {be  \bay\),  c  {ke),  d  {de),  e  {e  [^>%]),  f  {ef),  g  {ge),  h  (Jid), 
1  {ee),  k  {kd)  [see  §  6],  1  (^/),  m  {etn),  n  (^«),  o  (<?),  p  (/^),  q  {koo\ 
r  {er),  s  [ess),  t  (Z^),  u,  v  {pd),  x  (/>),  y  {u  Graeca  ?),  z  (jsetd).  Of 
these,  y  and  z  were  added  in  Cicero's  time  to  express  the  correspond- 
ing sounds  (v,  Q  in  borrowed  Greek  words  (cf.  Cic.  N.  D.  ii.  37). 
1  and  u  (v)  have  a  twofold  value,  which  is  often  in  modern  writing 
indicated  by  a  double  form :  1,  j ;  u,  v.     See  §  4. 

Classification  of  the  Letters. 

1.  The  letters  are  divided,  with  reference  to  their  sounds, 
into  Vowels  {litterae  vocdles)  and  Consonants  {litterae  con- 
sonantes).  Two  vowels  united  so  as  to  express  one  sound 
are  called  a  Diphthong. 


r 


Etymology :   Lelti-rs  and  Sounds. 


i§i.iP 


a.  The  Vowels  are  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  y.  The  resl  of  the  letters  are  Con- 
sonants. The  Diphthongs  are  ae  (te),  au,  ei,  en,  oe  (ca),  ui,  a.nii  in 
Early  Latin  ai,  oi,  and  ou. 

Note. — All  the  divisions  of  ilie  letters  apply  really  lo  llie  sounds  which  (lie 
letters  represent;  but  ai  tlie  iounds  in  Latin  very  nearly  cotrespnnd  lo  the  letters, 
no  real  conftision  need  arise  if  both  are  spoken  of  williout  distinction. 

b.  Vowels  are  Open  (a,  o),  Medial  (e,  u),  or  Close  (i),  according  to 
the  positioD  of  the  organs  in  pronouncing  them. 

Note.— The  vowel  a.  as  In  falktr,  is  the  most  opffn  (i.i.  the  organs  arc  least 

constnuned  In  pronoancing  it).  Starting  from  this  sound,  and  narrowing  the  mouth 

sidewise,  at  the  same  lime  raising  the  middle  of  the  tongue,  we  come  tlirough 

several  gradations  not  always  reeognured,  but  no  doubt 

a  always  more  or  less  existent  in  speech,  lo  the  sound  of 

/  \  e  {as  in  ehT)  and  1  («,  as  i  in  machine).    This  sound, 

iitftal)^!aw>  if  enunciated  rapidly  with  a  following   vowel,  passes 

/m-^ \<not>      i"'"  "•=  ^°"°''  "f  E"El'^l'  y  (consonant).      If,  on  the 

X  \  other  hand,  the  mouth  is  narrowed  up  and  down,  and 

*^i^         ^j---      '""^   at  the  same  lime  the  back  of  the  tongue  is  raised,  we 

German  sound  (5)  lo  o.     If.  starling  from  u,  we  do  the  same,  we  come  to  French 
u,  Germiui  11,  Greek  v,  and  Latin  y.    And  this  sound,  in  turn,  approaches  L 
These  processes  may  be  represented  in  a  vowet  scale  as  above. 

2.  Consonants.  —  a.  p,  b,  c  (k),  ii,  g,  t,  d,  as  also  ab.  and 
th,  are  called  Mutes  (Explosives,  Momentary  sounds). 

These  are  produced  by  an  entire  stoppage  of  the  breath  and  a 
subsequent  explosion.    They  are  classified  as  follows ;  — 

1.  p,  o  (k),  q,  t,  8,  are  called  Surds  {tenuis). 
These  are  without  vocal  tone. 

2.  b,  6,  d,  z,  are  called  Sonants  {mediae). 
These  are  accompanied  by  a  slight  vocal  tone. 

3-  oh  and  th  are  called  Aspirates. 

In  these  a  breath  follows  the  explosion.  They  are  found  chiefly  in 
word.';  borrowed  from  the  Greek,  ph,  which  also  was  borrowed  from 
the  Greek,  probably  was  never  sounded  as  an  aspirate  in  Latin. 

b.  m  and  n  are  called  Nasals, 

These  are  pronounced  with  the  same  position  of  the  organs  as  b  and 
a,  except  that  the  nasal  passage  is  opened  instead  of  closed.  A  third 
nasal,  n  adiiUeriniim  (like  n  in  ink),  corresponding  in  the  same  way  to 

existed  in  the  language,  but  had  no  separate  sign. 


§§  3-5.]  Classification  of  the  Letters.  3 

3.  From  the  organs  of  speech  chiefly  used  in  the  utter- 
ance of  the  mutes  and  nasals  they  are  divided  into  Labials 
(pronounced  with  the  lips),  Palatals  (with  the  palate),  and 
Linguals  (with  the  tongue). 

Their  relations  are  seen  in  the  following  table :  — 

Surd.          Sonant.  Aspirate.  Nasal. 

Labial,        p               b  wanting         xn 

Palatal,       c  (k),  q     g  ch              n  (as  in  ink) 

Lingual,      t                d  th              n  (as  in  reni) 

a.  Other  useful  special  classes  of  sounds  are  distinguished  as :  — 

Liquids:  1,  m,  n,  r. 

Fricatives  (Spirants):  f,  ph,  th  (not  aspirate,  as  in  thin)^  h,  s,  z. 

Sibilants  :  8,  z. 

Double  Consonants :  x  (cs),  z  (ds). 

Semi-vowels:  i,  v  (see  J  4). 

b,  h  is  merely  a  breathing. 

4.  Semi-Vowels. — l  and  v  (u)  before  a  vowel  in  the 
same  syllable  are  consonants  and  have  the  sound  of  Eng- 
lish consonant  y  and  w  respectively.  (Cf.  i  and  u  in  pinion, 
issuing,  rapidly  pronounced.)  They  are  sometimes  called 
Semi'  Vowels, 

Note  i. — The  Latin  alphabet  had  no  separate  signs  for  the  semi-vowels ;  but 
used  i  for  both  vo^el  and  consonant  i,  and  v  or  u  (without  distinction)  for  both  vowel 
and  consonant  v  (u) .  The  character  j  was  unknown  in  classical  times,  and  u  was 
but  a  graphic  variation  of  v.  In  mediaeval  Latin  j  and  V  came  to  be  used  to 
indicate  the  consonant  sounds  of  1  and  V  (u) ,  and  this  usage  is  often  followed  by 
modem  editors  in  writing  small  letters.  In  writing  capitals,  however,  the  forms 
J  and  U  are  avoided.    Thus  iuuenis,  iuvenis,  or  juvenis,  —  but  iwenis. 

In  this  book  vowel  and  consonant  i  are  both  represented  by  the  same  character, 
i ;  but  V  is  used  for  the  consonant,  u  for  the  vowel  sound  of  v  (u).  Thus  itistus, 
vlr,  iuvenis. 

Note  2. — The  English  sounds  of  j  and  v  did  not  exist  in  Latin  in  classical 
times,  though  consonant  v  (u)  began  no  doubt  to  approach  English  v  in  many 
persons'  speech. 

Note  3. — In  the  combinations  qu,  gru,  and  sometimes  su,  u  forms  a  com- 
pound sound  with  the  preceding  consonant,  and  is  reckoned  neither  as  a  vowel 
nor  a  consonant  Thus  aqua,  anfiruis,  cdnsuetus.  (Cf.  English  quill,  anguish, 
suave,) 

5.  The  Romans  distinguished  Long  vowels  from  Short 
in  sound,  but  had  no  regular  characters  to  express  the  dif- 
ference. At  various  times  attempts  were  made  to  mark 
this  distinction,  but  none  came  into  general  ws*^. 


4  Etymology :  Letters  mid  Sounds.  [§§  3 

In  modera  times  short  vowels  are  marked  thus :  S,  ti  i  and  long,  ihus : 
a,  § ;  those  that  may  be  pronounced  either  long  or  short,  thus ;  5,  e. 
In  this  book  all  simple  vowels  not  marked  are  supposed  to  be  short. 
But  final  o  and  i  are  marked  according  to  their  prevailing  length  or 
shortness,  though  they  sometimes  vary  from  this  quantity  in  poetry. 

Note. — Vowels  and  cansonsnK  iarenot  separaled  by  ony  shsrp  line  from  each 
olher,  but  form  a  continuous  scaJe  from  Ibe  most  open  vowel  (a.)  to  the  mutes,  for 
which  the  mouth  is  entirely  closed.  The  general  leodencj  of  phonetic  changes  in 
language  has  been  from  the  livo  extremes  towards  llie  middle. 

Early  Fotiub. 

6.  The  character  c  {surd  palatal)  originally  stood  for  the  sonant 
palatal  (g).  (Hence,  a,  b,  o,  but  Alpha,  BeU,  Gamma.)  This  force  it 
always  retained  in  the  abbreviations  C.  (forO-Siua^iand  Cn.  (GnaeuB). 

Note.  —  In  prehistoric  times  these  two  sounds  were  confounded,  and  O  was 
used  for  both.  The  cliaracler  k  (surd  palatal)  was  thus  supplanted,  except  in  a 
few  words  and  abbreviations :  as,  Kal.  (Kalendae),  KartbaEO- 

About  300  B.C.  G  was  invented  to  distinguish  the  sonant  again,  but  was  put  in 
the  place  in  the  alphabet  once  occupied  by  z,  which  at  that  lime  had  dropped  out  ol 
USB.  When  %  was  afterwards  restored  (in  Greek  words),  it  was  put  at  the  end  of 
the  alphabet. 

7.  Till  al^er  the  age  of  Augustus  the  use  of  u  (vowel)  after  n  (v) 
was  avoided.  This  was  done  either  by  preserving  o,  when  but  for  this 
tendency  it  would  have  become  ti,  as  in  voltus  (but  culttia),  ssrvfia 
(but  dominuB),  bu5b  (but  meus),  quom  (but  turn),  reliqafiB  (but 

H  rellotua)  ;  or  in  case  of  quu,  by  writing  on,  as  in  cfir  (for  quor), 

^H  ecita   (for  equoa,   later  equna),  com  (for  qnoni,  very  late  qttum), 

^B  relloue  (for  reliquos,  later  retiquuB).     Compare  c  for  qu  in  cotldiB, 

^h  written  for  quotldiS.  h 

^B  sigr 

■        the 

I: 


Pbouetic  VaiiattoiiB. 

t.  Variations  of  sound  are  of  two  classes  :  — 

.  Inherited  differences  of  form  in  the  same  root  (see  §  22). 


the  language,  so  that  its  slniclute  cannot  be  explained  mdioii 
2.  Unconscious  alterations  of  sounds  developed  in  1 

:  traces  throughout 
It  taking  them  into 

course  Of  time  in 

the  language  itself. 

Note.— Such  alleraiions  arise  in  every  language  after  long 
articulation  and  an  unconscious  tendency  lo  iecure  an  easier  i 
depend  very  ranch  npon  accent.    Thla  process  is  often  called 

:  use  from  careless 
ilterance;  and  Ihey 

»SS  9, 10.]  Phonetic   Variations. 

9.   Inherited  differences  appear  in  variations  of  vowelsj 
and  less  commonly  in  liquids  connected  with  vowels. 


Vowels  vary  between  long  and  short  of  the  same  kind :  as,  emS, 
buy,  Smi,  I  bought  i  \s%o,  I  read,  lEg^  I  read;  tego,  I  cover,  tSgula, 
tiUi  aonS,  t  sound,  persona,  a  mask  (33  sounded  through)  \  regfi,  / 
ruli,  rSx,  a  kiitg;  dux,  a  leader,  dac6.  /  lead. 

'.  Vowels  vary  in  qualify:   as,  pendS,  I  -weigh,  ■^aoA'OA,  weight., 
D,  I  eovtr,  toga,  a  robe;  RS-vx,  faithful,  foedna,  a  treaty.    (Cf, 
fall,  fell;  bind,  band,  bound.) 

c.  Vowels  vary  between  a  short  vowel  of  one  quality  and 
vowel   or   diphthong   of  another :   mioar,   -wretched, 
Aaixe,  to  give,   dSatxm,  gift ;  asS,  /  lead,  6gi,  /  led. 

d.  Liquids  are  transposed  with  vowels,  sometimes  with  change  of 
the  vowel:  as,  speniS,  f  spurn,  BprSvI,  /spurned;  aternS,  I  strew, 
■tr&vl,  I  strewed}  gXguo,  /beget,  {%)n8.ttiB,  a  son ;  tulgeG,  /  shine, 
flagro,  /burn. 


W      10.    Unconscious  changes  occur  in  both  vowels  and  con- 
sonants. 

a.  Vowels  and  diphthongs  are  weakened,  usually  in  the  directionfl 
marked  on.  the  vowel-scale  (see  page  2)  :  as,  factua,  made,  cSnfectn^ 
madeup;  lubet  (old) f/^J!?fij«j',libet  (later);  Elgmen, n  viar^A, Sgminii 
of  a  march;  oa.idO,/taie,iaoipiQ,/iegl»;  lesO./pici,colUeS, /gather; 
oaedS,  /cut,  aecSAI,  /Aayeatt ;  aaliS.  /leap.  eiaaltO,  / leap  up  and 
dovfn  (for  joy) ;  pell5,  /drive,  pulaua,  driven ;  aervoa,  a  slave  (early), 
servus,  a  slave  (later);  optumus,  optdmaa  (see  g  12.  U);  ebotls, 
of  ivory,  ebnmenB,  made  of  ivory  i  vortS  (early),  /  turn,  vertO 
(later),  /turn. 

Note, — When  vowels  seem  lo  be  changed  contrary  lo  the  direclion  of  Ihe 
voK'et-scaJe,  eilher  both  are  changeii  in  differEni  degrees  from  some  common  vowel 
higher  up  the  scale,  or  the  change  Is  due  to  some  special  cause :  as,  ienB,  etintls 
(for  tslona.i  feiontla');  volentem,  bm  voluntBa  (for  volont.);  BlmlllB, 
almul  (lor  almollB.  eic.) ;  aucepa,  aucupla. 

b.  Two  vowels  coming  together  are  very  often  contracted  :  as,  c5g5 
for  00-agC ;  obit  for  obiit;  nil  for  nihil  (see  §  347.  t);  dS-be5  for 
hibeS  (de-babeo,  see  a,  above) ;  rOrsiiB,  re-veraua  () 
C  below);  amSrat  (for  amBverat)  ;  oUnctua  (for  coiunctus) ;  sGrgS 
(for  sub-rego). 


if 

I 


s,  ienB,  etintla 

ont.);  BlmlllB,     ^^^ 

:ed  :  as,  cagS  ^^H 
le-bed  for  de-  ^^| 
e-vojans.  see  ^^^| 
:tUB) ;  BfirgS    ^^H 


Etymology:  Letters  and  Sounds.         [§|  10, 11, 

c.  Vowels  are  often  entirely  lost  between  two  consonants  (syncope): 
,  auda.oter  for  aiidSoiter;   iurgiuiii  for  iGrigiuni ;  disoIpUna  for 

discipuUna ;  oaldus  (popii!:tr),  calidna  (literary) ;  or  at  the  end  of 
a  word ;  as,  die  for  dice  ;  eatiu  for  eatiaae ;  Ii3iunc  for  hSrunoe. 

d.  Vowels  are  rarely  inserted  between  two  consonants  in  the 
effort  to  pronounce  a  difficult  conibinalion  of  sounds  (cf.  ellinit  for 
eim) ;  as,  HeronlBa  for  HeiclSs,  drachuma  for  draobma,  aeer  for 
aBr{o)  (see  §  38). 

e.  Vowels  found  long  in  the  earlier  language  are  sometimes  shortened 
later :  as,  fidSI  (later  fldelj,  amSt  (later  amat :  g  375.  g^). 

11.  a.  Consonants  are  unconsciously  substituted  one  for  another 
11  accordance  with  regular  tendencies  of  the  language.     Thus  :  — 

I .  r  for  a  between  two  vowels  or  before  m  or  n :  as,  erani  (root  ES), 
generis  (for  fgenesis,  from  genus),  maereS  (cf.  maestUB),  dlrimo 
(dis-emo),  dliibeS  (dls-habeS),  vetemus  (vetus-ntia),  oanuea 
(toaamon,  cf.  CaamSna).     (Compare  Eng,  wiis.  were.') 

3,  B  for  d  or  t,  making  an  easier  combinalion:  as,  cSaua  (for 
oad-ttia),  cSaaum  (ced-tum),  mSnaua  (man-tua),  paaaua  (pad-tua 
and  pat-trua),  equeater  (equet-ter). 

b.  Consonants  are  omitted :  as,  ez3iiieii  (ez&gmen),  caementnm 
(oaed-mentum),  semeatiiB  (ses-mestrls),  ISna  (luc-ua),  dSni  (fdsc- 
nl),  hoc  (abl.  for  hQd-oe),  autumnua  (auctunmug,  root  aug), 
fulmen  (fulg-meu),  pergo  (per-regoj,  lla*(atlla),  oSr  (fcotd),  IKc 
(lact-),  pfiB  (fpeda). 

1.  Especially  h:  as,  praebeS  (prae-habefi),  TlmSna  (for  Tehe- 

2.  And  consonant  1  and  t  ;  as,  cSnioiO  (oon-iaoifl),  prfiraus  (pro- 

3.  Also  a  at  the  end  of  a  word  after  a  short  vowel. 

Note.  — This  is  limiiecl  10  early  Latin  and  colloquial  usage :  pl5nui.a)  fldel, 
q.u&Ust  (qu&lla  est). 

e.  Consonants  are  unconsciously  inserted  in  passing  from  one  sound 
to  another:  as,  Bamfl,  I  take,  sQmpBl,  I  took,  aumptua,  taken  (for 
eQm-El,  B&m-tnB);  Iilempa,  winter,  biemiB,  of  ■winter.  C£  T/iompion 
(Tom's  ,a,i). 

Note.  — These  are  called  Parasitic  sounds. 

d.  Consonants  are  transposed  :  mlaceS,  miztus  (for  mieo-taa). 


p 
I 


§§  11,  12.]  Phonetic   Variations. 

t.  Consonants  and  vowels  are  unconsciously  changed  (^disnmUaiioii^ 
to  avoid  a  repetition  of  the  same  sound  in  two  successive  syllable 
partlia  (for  pallUa,  from  PalSa),  meiidiSa  (for  medl-diSa),  plel 
(for  tpUtas,  as  in  carltaB). 

Note. —  la  sorae  eases  this  principle  prevents  cliangea  which  would 
cording  10  other  tendencies  of  speech. 

f,  A  consonant  is  changed  by  the  influence  of  a  neighboring  sound, 

1 .  Into  the  same  sound  as  the  neighbor  (complete  assimilatioiC) : 
oeBsI(cSd-Bl),aummus  (sup-muB),  sella  (sed-la),  puella  (puer(i 
la),  pieaal  (prem-sl),  occidS  (ob-oado).  mltissimus  (for  mltii 

2.  Info  a  sound  of  the  same  organ  or  the  same  quality  (or  both) 
the  neighbor  (_  partial  assimilation')  (see  table  of  mutes,  §  3) 
tero  (com-teiS,  labial  to  lingual),  ecilptna  (sotlb-tUB,  sonant  tc 
surd),  aSgmentunx  (■faecmentum,  surd  to  sonant),  impet5  (In-perfl, 
lingual  to  labial). 

Note.  —  Sometimes  the  first  consonant  governs  [regressive  aisim 
times  the  second  {_frogressive  assimilatiiin), 

3.  These  changes  affect  especially  the  final  consonant  of  the  prepo^- 
n  in  Compounds:  as,  aocBdo  (ad-oBdo),  affioio  (ad-facio),  oc- 

currS  (ob-ourrS),  oottuS  (com-rud),  efierS  (ec-fero),  auppoaS 
(sub-pono). 

Note. — The  rules  for  this  assimilation  may  be  given  as  follows;  ad  is  assiml- 
laled  belbre  c,  g,  p,  t;  less  tegulatly  before  1,  r,  e,  and  rarely  before  m;  while 
before  f,  n,  q,  the  form  ad  is  to  be  preletred.  ab  is  not  assimilated,  but  may  lake 
the  form  a,  au,  or  aba.  In  com  (con,  co),  m  is  retained  beforcb,  p,  m;  is 
BsaimiJaled  Ijeforel,  n,r;  is  changed  to  n  before  O,  d,  f,  g-,  J.  Q,  a,  T;  sometimes 
becomes  n  before  p;  is  sometimes  assimilated  (otherwises)  befoitland  r;  con 
loses  the  liniU  m  In  cSnectS,  oSnIveC,  cSottor,  cfinQblum. 
changes  n  to  m  before  b,  m,  p;  before  1  the  better  orthography  retains  i 
eub  are  assimilated  before  o,f,  ^,  p,  and  somedmes  before  EU ;  aub  alsi 
Knd,  in  early  Ijitin,  b  of  these  prepositions  sometimes  becomes  p  befc 
The  inseparable  amb  loses  b  before  a  consonant,  and  m  is  sometimes  assiniiiaied. 
circum.  often  loses  m  before  1.  s  of  dis  before  a  vowel  becomes  r,  and  before 
a  consonant  is  lost  or  assimilated.  The  d  of  red  and  aSd  is  generally  lost  before 
a  consonant.  In  most  of  these  cases  the  later  editions  preter  the  unaltered  forms 
throughout;  but  the  changes  given  above  have  good  authority.  Others,  which  are 
corruptions  of  the  middle  ages  (as  aaauin  for  adaum),  had  belter  be  avoided,  1 
Lexicons  vary  in  the  spelling  of  lliese  combinations.  | 

12.   Variations  of   Spelling  occur  in   manuscripts  and 
inscriptions,  and  especially  in  modern  editions.    In  the  fol- 
lowing lists  the  better  forms  are  put  first;  objectionable 
I  forms  in  parenthesis.  ^ 


r 


.1^ 


L 


8  Etymuhgy:  Letleis  and  Sounds.        \_%%  12, 

Note. — These  variations  are  generally  mere  mislakes  In  spelling.  Many  ol 
Ihem  are  due  to  the  praciice  of  noting  from  dictation,  by  which  most  MS.  copies 
of  the  classics  were  made,  A  single  reader  dietaled  to  severa!  copyists,  whos^ 
spellitig  was  often  corrupt.  The  tendency  of  the  best  editions  is  to  restore,  as 
normal,  the  forms  of  the  late  Republic  op  early  Empire  (the  lime  of  Cicero  or 
Augustus), — so  far  as  these  may  be  determined  from  inscriptions,  etc., — but  lo 
preserve.  In  each  author,  any  peculiarities  thai  itiark  the  spelling  of  his  lime.  The 
choice  among  forms  appears  often  to  be  arbitrary,  for  inscriptions  ol  the  same 
[letiod  sometimes  differ  considerably. 

a.  The  letters  and  souniJs  of  oi  and  ti  are  interchanged  before 
a  vowel:  nOntiS  (nQnciS),  contio  (concio),  dlciO  (dltlO), 
condicio  fconditio),  BiiB[£ci5  (auapItiS),  tribiinYoiua  (tribtl- 
ultius). 

Note.  — This  substitution  b^anveiy  early  (Ina  few  words)  while  thee  still  had 
the  sound  of  k.  But  generally  it  belongs  to  a  later  pL'riod  of  the  language,  and 
is  due  to  the  disturbing  Influence  of  consonant  1;  nfitlO  {natyo)  became  Tuicha, 
or  niaio,  or  iiashs.  It  is  this  disturbance  that  has  produced  the  modem  sibilant 
sound  of  C,  as  well  as  that  ol  tt :  as,  nation  (through  the  French)  from  n&tiS  ; 
sfecia,  from  Species. 

i.  Several  words  are  writlen  sometimes  with  atid  sometimes  without 
an  initial  h:  as,  harfina  or  (ar€na),  ems  or  (herua),  umerus  or 
(hmuBmB},  fimoT  or  (hQinor). 

c.  In  later  Latin,  S,  ae,  and  oe  betame  alike  in  sound  Qi\iR  a\a  fiUe), 
and  hence  they  are  often  i:onfoiinded  in  writing:  as,  faeutu  (fCnuB, 
foenus). 

d.  Other  words  variously  spelled  are:  aduieacfns,  adolSecSna ; 
ahSneua,  aCneiia ;  9niilua,  annulua  ;  artua,  (arctua)  ;  autumnus, 
(auctumniia);  caelum  (coelum);  cum,  quom,  (quum) ;  epiatula, 
epiatola  ;  exaul,  ezul ;  fSoundus  (fOGcuadua) ;  fSmiua,  (foemina)  ; 
litera,  littera ;  labet,  libet ;  lubTdS,  UbldS ;  mHia,  millia;  nequT- 
quam,  uequicquam,  nequidquam ;  paulus,  paullua  ;  qnicquam. 
quidquam ;  umquam,  imquam;  verto,  vorto;  voluua,  tuIdus  ; 
proclium,  (praelium) ;  voltus,  vultus ;  aerroa,  servua.  Also 
Ihe  gerundive -form  -endus  or  -uaduB,  and  the  superlative  -imua  or 

At  the  end  of  a  few  words  d  was  anciently  written  t :  aet  for  Bed, 
apat  for  apnd. 
f.  Sojne  variations  in  spelling  mark  the  changes  in  §§  lo  and  il. 


Comblnatloiu. 

13.   Two  words  are  often  united  in  writing,  and  some- 
times in  sound.     Thus, — 


S  13-15.]  Kindred  Forms. 


Ksu 

^H     a.  Conjunctions  or  other  particles  and  pronouns  are  sometimes  coD-fl 

^Hiected:   as  in  etenim,  QnoaquiBque,  iamdfldum,  lamdiQ,  Biqnia,  j 

^^  alquidem ;  also  a  few  siiort  phrases,  as,  quSrS,  quamobrem,  rfispabnfl 

lies,  iuBlitTaindunk,  patetfamilias. 

b.  Tlie  verb  fest,  is.  is  sometimes  joined  with  ihe  preceding  word,J 
_  especially  in  the  old  poets,  when  the  two  would  be  united  by  elision  iT^ 
Lbs,  homSst,  perlculamst,  anauet,  quSllBt  (quails  eat)  (like  thou'rt'm 

.  Similar  contractions  are  found  in  vln'  (vlane),  Boln'  (scIene),] 

a  (bI  via),  aSdea  (ai  audeaj,  afiltia  (al  vultU).     So  in  English,! 

7tCt  iwol  ml). 

Syllablea. 
14.    In  Latin  every  word  has  as  many  syllables  as  it  has  i 
iwels  or  diphthongs. 

In  the  division  of  words  into  syllables  a  single  consonant  between 
■o  Towels  is  to  be  written  and  pronounced  with  the  latter. 

Note.— This  mle  applies  also  )o  T  and  consonnnl  1. 

This  rule  is  somedmes  extended  to  double  consonants,  or ; 
combination  of  consonants  which  can  be  used  to  begin  a  word : 
bo-Bpea,  mS-gnuB,  dX-xit. 

In  compounds,  the  parts  should  be  separated :  as,  ab-eat,  ob-  J 


I: 


> 


C 


i.  A  syllable  preceded  by  a  vowel  in  thii  same  word  is  caHtApure,  \ 
pi'tiB;    a  syllable    preceded    by  a   consonant,  impure,  as  oOa-  1 

BUt. 

Any  syllable  ending  with  a  vowel  or  diphthong  is  called  ofen 
alt  others  are  called  close.     Thus  in  pa-ter  the  first  syllable  is  open,  the  ] 
second  close. 

Kindred  Forms. 
15.  In  English  words  derived  from  the  Latin,  the  original  letters  j 
:  retained  (as  ambitian  from  ambitifi).'     But  in  native  English  I 
words    which    are    cognate    with    the    Latin    (see    Appendix), 
original  sounds  are  rarely  represented  by  the  same  letters  in  the  two   ' 
languages,    but    usually  by  closely  related    letters   which    regularly 
correspond. 

Many  words,  bowever,  coming  tlirougli  the  French  follow  French  changes: 
'ashiea,  fafon  (laotlO) ;  chivalry,  cheval  (oaballua} ;  ckimney,  c^eminit 
.mbiUB),  J 


irD  (rarely) 


Etymology:  Letlers  and  Sounds. 


\  qui,  ■who^  cos,  koHCi  carpo,  harvest;  calo  (1 
daej,  hail;  cord-,  heart. 

\  genus,  kiH\  genu,  knee;  gusto,  choose. 

:  t^,thaH;  tees,  three;  tenuis, /A(«. 

;  stare,  stand;  torreo,  dry. 

:  duo,  ^wo;  d£n&,  tooth;  seAeo,  sit. 

:  pultr, /other ;  pullus,yofl/,-  pzuci,/ezv. 

•  fero  {ifttpui),  bear;  frater  (i^iparj^p).  brother. 

:  fores  {dipa),  doers;  fera  (ftjp).  dier. 

:  veha,  iva^n !  haedu&.  goat ;  hostis,^«/. 
i  cons.,  V       Y,  W:  iugum,  j^iii?;  ovis,  «w. 
Sometimes  3.  consonant  lost  in  the  Latin  appears  in  the  English 
word.     Thus,  (s)niT-,  sncw;  (\{)SjiM6T, goose;  (s)iiervo-,  snare. 


HioTbh) 
I  (for  Jh) 


L5, 16. 

1 


Sounds  of  the  LetterH, 


Note.  —  The  pronunciation  of  Latin  is  differem 
us,  il  usually  foUcnvs  one  oft^io  ways,  which  nmy  t>e  called  tbeSomoH  (ai  Phonetic) 
and  the  Eagliik  method. 

16.   By  the   Roman  (or  Phonetic)  method,  every  letter- 
has  always  the  same  sound. 

Note. — A  long  vowel  in  ou 
difTerenl  quality  irom  a  short  k. 


Consonants, 
as  in  English, 
except  that : 


a  as  in  father;  4  as  in  idea. 

e  as  ehf  (prolonged);  they;       i  as  eAt  (clipped). 

I  as  in  machine;  I  as  in  holiest. 

B  as  in  holy;  fi  as  in  obey. 

fl  as  00  in  boot;  it  as  fiv  ia  foot, 

y  between  u  and  t  (German  «). 

as  like  ay;  oe  like  oy;  au  like  ew  in  now. 

ei  as  in  eight;  eu  as  eh'oo;  ui  as  lue  (oa'ee). 

a  and  g  arc  always  hard,  as  in  come,  get. 

I  is  always  sharp,  as  in  sea,  tips. 

cons,  is  like_>'  inyoung;  v  (cons,  u),  like  w  in  wing; 
qu  as  in  English, 
ba  is  like/.!;  oh  like  k;  ph  like/. 
n  before  a  orf  was  combined  with  the  preceding  vowel 
somewhat  as  French  nasal  n,  making  the  vowel  long. 

I  as  ds  in  ad^e. 

b  as  in  rathole,  later  as  in  thin.  vi 


I 


S§  lfi-18.]  Quantity  and  Accent. 

Note  i.  — Id  Ihc  ancient  prontiaciaiion.  ph  was  distinguished  from  I  by  bdi 
sounded  with  (he  lips  onty,  instead  of  Up  aod  teeth. 

Note  a.  — In  many  words  (asabletta.  tenuia),  1  atid  u 
consonant  sound,  though  usually  in  such  words  reckoned  as  vowels. 

Note  3. — Tiie  diphthong  oe  was  anciently  sounded  as  otiove,  but  early  in  Ihe 
lime  of  the  Empire  acquired  from  popular  or  provincial  use  the  long  sound  of  a. 

Note  4.— When  two  consonants  come  logether  (as  in  OOndO,  pOBteft).  or 
a  consonant  is  doubled  (ai  in  onnUB,  fUlua, mlCtfi),  care  sliould  be  taken  to 
pronounce  both  letters  distinctly.  It  was  doubtless  this  distinct  pronunciation  ol 
consonants  that  made  a  syllable  with  a  short  vowel  long  by  Position  l^\  i3.  d"). 

17.  By  the  English  method,  the  letters  have  the  same 
sounds  as  in  English;  but  — 

a.  Final  a  is  proitounced  as  in  America^  but  in  the  monosyllables 
3,  dS,  qua,  stfi,  sometimes  as  in  pay\  e  in  open  syllables  as  in  me,  in 
close  as  in  men;  i  in  open  syllables  as  in  Hi',  in  close  as  \a.pin;  o  in 
open  syllables  as  in  tone,  in  i:lose  as  in  not;  u  as  in  pull  or  as  in  hull, 
without  any  definite  rules,  as  Qllus  (like  gull  us),  butfuUS  (like/W/ 
oh)\  ylikei'. 

dose  according  to  the  posit: 

b.  The  diphthongs  ae,  oe,  are  pronounced  like  «;  aulike^iu',-  eu 
like^w;  ei  and  ui  like  i' in  kite;  es  and  (in  plural  words)  Sa  at  the 
end  of  a  word  as  in  disease,  ntorose. 

c.  The  consonants  o  and  g  are  made  soft  (like  s  and/)  before  e,  i, 
y,  ao,  oe,  ou;  oh  is  always  hard,  as  in  chasm,  chemist. 

NoTF..^The  English  method  should  be  retained  in  Roman  names  in  English, 
viit  viTsa:  .ifirliori:  vcni,  vidi.  vici,  etc. 

Qnantitj  and  Ac<;ent. 

18.  Vowels  are  long  or  short  {as  affecting  their  pro- 
nnnciatioti)  only  by  nature.  SyJIables  {as  affecting  accent 
and  metrical  value)  are  long  or  short,  according  to  their 
vowel,  but  are  also  made  long  by  Position  through  the 
obstruction  of  consonants.  The  length  or  shortness  in 
both  cases  is  called  Quantity  (cf.  §  347). 

NoTB.  — Some  of  the  rules  of  Quantity  affect  length  by  nature  only,  some 
length  by  position  only,  and  some  both, 

a.  A  vowel  before  another  vowel  or  b  is  short:  as  in  via,  nihil. 

b.  A  diphthong  is  long:  as  in  aedSs,  foedua.  So,  also,  a  vowel 
derived  from  a  diphthong:  as.  ezclQdo  (ex-claudo). 

c.  A  vowel  formed  by  contraction  is  long;  as,  n^  (oiiiWy 


] 


i   mi 


12  Etymology:  Letters  and  Sounds,       [§§  18,19. 

d,  A  syllable  in  which  a  vowel  is  followed  by  two  consonants  (ex- 
cept a  mute  with  1  or  r),  or  a  double  consonant  (z,  z),  is  long  by 
Position ;  as  in  pingS,  sazamy  Mezentiua.  Before  nf  and  ns,  gn  and 
gm,  and  i  consonant  the  vowel  itself  becomes  long  by  nature :  as  in 
Infer5,  praesSns,  mftgntis,  ftgmen,  hiUuB. 

e,  A  syllable  in  which  a  short  vowel  is  followed  by  a  mute  with  1  or  r 
is  common ;  i,e,  it  may  be  long  in  verse :  as  in  alacris,  latebrae. 

f,  A  vowel  before  nd,  nt  is  regularly  short  by  nature :  as,  amSnt, 
am&nduB  from  amftre. 

Note. — A  vowel  is  lengtiiened  before  i  cons,  because  another  i  (vowel)  is 
developed  as  a  vanish ;  thus  &0)yo  becomes  ftiO. 

19.  In  Latin  the  accent  in  words  of  more  than  one 
syllable  is  on  the  Penult  or  Antepenult. 

Definition:  The  Penult  is  the  last  syllable  but  one;  the  Antepenult,  the  last 
but  two. 

a.  Words  of  two  syllables  are  always  accented  on  the  first  syllable : 
R5'ma,  veliS,  i'pse. 

b.  Words  of  more  than  two  syllables  are  accented  on  the  Penult,  if  that 
is  long:  as,  amTcos,  praesen'tis;  if  it  is  short  or  common,  on  the 
Antepenult:  as,  do'mXnus,  alacris,  la'tebrae,  conti'iitto,  praete'- 
ritom,  diasocift'biliJi. 

Note. — In  words  of  more  than  four  syllables  a  secondaiy  accent  nsuaHr  arises  at  a 
convenient  distance  from  the  main  accent :  as,  Iiftvlcril"ti6'nibus,  pectL'lift'ria^ 

c.  When  an  Enclitic  is  joined  to  a  word,  the  accent  fidls  on  the 
syllable  next  before  the  enclitic,  whether  long  or  short :  as,  dS&'qae, 
imftrOe,  tin>i'ne,  it&'qae  {and, . .  so)^  as  distinguished  firom  i'tftqne 
{therefore)*    So  (according  to  some)  exclude,  ec'qnando,  etc 

d.  ElxCEPnoNS:  I.  Certain  apparent  compounds  of  facl5  retain  the 
accent  of  the  simple  verb:  as,  benefft'cit,  calefiL'cit  (see  §  169.  a). 
(These  were  not  true  compounds,  but  phrases.) 

2.  In  the  second  declension  the  genitive  and  \t>cadve  of  noons  in 
4iis.  and  the  genitive  of  those  in  -iiun  retain  the  accent  of  the  nomi- 
native :  as,  ComSH,  Vergill,  inge'nl  (see  §  4a  ^). 

y.  Certain  words  which  have  lost  a  final  vowel  retain  the  accent  of 
the  complete  words :  as,  illTc  for  illfce,  prddli'c  for  prddlice,  sati'ii 
for  sati'aae. 


Note. — Tbe  ancients  reoogmxed  three  accents,  mcmtt  (  '^^grwet  ("  ).  and  at- 
iwm^tr  (*^>«  Accent  no  doubt  originalhr  consisted  in  a  change  of  pi«:\ — eJera- 
tion.  depiessioo,  or  both  combined, — and  not  merehr  in  a  mcvnf  fozviKe  utterance 
0Ctus>.  But  in  Laiin  this  pitch  accent  had  been  suppiuited  br  a  s&^ess  accent  in 
htsioiical  times. 


12*21.] 


Root  and  Stem. 


Chapter  II. —  Words  and  their  Forms. 
^iflectlon. 
K    Inflection  is  a  change  made  in  the  form  of   ; 
ord,  to  show  its  grammatical  relations. 

loflectional  changes  sometimes  take  place  in  the  body  of  a  word,  1 
at  the  beginning,  but  oltener  in  its  tErmination :  as,  vox,  a 

if  a  voice;  vooO,  /  call',    vooat,  he  calls;   vooavit,   ke  hasm 
'led;  tangit,  he  touches  ;  tetigit,  he  touched. 

Terminations  of  inflection  had  originally  independent  meanings^ 
hich  are  now  obscured.     They  correspond  nearly  to  the  use  of  prepo-H 
Ntions,  auxiharies,  and  personal  pronouns  in  English  ;  thus,  in  vocat, 
the  terminatioa  is  equivalent  to  he  or  she;  in  vScia,  to  the  preposition 
of  ox  the  like ;  and  in  vocet  the  change  of  vowel  signifies  a  change  ot 

Inflectional  changes  in  the  body  of  a  verb  usually  denote  relations 

ise  or  mood,  and  correspond  to  the  use  of  auxiliary  verbs  in  Eng- 

franglt,  he  breaks  or  is  breaking;   frSgit,  he  broke  or  has 


broken;  morAet,  he  bites ;  m.oaioz6it,  he  b/i.^ 

Root  and  Stem. 
21.   The  body  of  a  word,  to  which  the  terminations  art 

attached,  is  called  the  Stem.^ 

The  Stem  contains  the  idea  of  the  word  without  relations ;  but, 

except   in   the   tirst  part  of  a  compound,  it  cannot  be  used  without 
le  termination  to  express  them.     Thus  the  stem  v5c-  denotes  voice; 
h  -a  added  it  becomes  voat,  a  voice  or  the  voice,  as  the  subject  or 
nt  of  an  action ;  with  4b  it  becomes  vocia,  and  signifies  of  aik 
e  stem  is  in  many  forms  so  united  with   the   termination  th; 

comparison  with  otlier  forms  is  necessary  to  determine  it. 


1  The  only  fropir  inflectians  of  verbs  ate  those  of  the  personal  endings :  and 
le  changes  here  referred  lo  are  slriclly  changes  of  Stem,  but  have  become 
(the  eystero  of  inflections. 

n  The  name  Stem  is  sometimes  incorreclly  given  to  Ihal  part  ot  a  Word — Bl 
■TV-  in  servjs  —  which  isuDchanged  in  inflection.  TWsma^Xie  taSvei^ne.  b(ii«i 


I 
I 

i 


t 


r4  Etymology:    Words  and  their  Forms.     [§§22-24, 

£2.  A  Root  is  the  simplest  fonn  attainable  by  analysis 
of  a  word  into  its  component  parts.  Such  a  form  contains 
the  main  idea  of  the  word  in  a  very  general  sense,  and  is 
common  also  to  other  words  either  in  the  same  or  kindred 

languages.' 

Thus  the  root  of  the  stem  v5e-  is  voc,  which  does  Dot  mean  to  call, 
oi  I  call,  o\  calling,  but  merely  expresses  vaguely  the  idea  of  calling, 
and  cannot  be  used  as  a  part  of  speech  without  tenninations.  With  H- 
it  becomes  voeS-,  the  stem  of  voolre  (Ja  call)  ;  with  Svi-  it  is  the 
stem  of  vocavit  (^Ae  called);  with  fito-  it  becomes  the  stem  of  vocStns 
{called) ;  with  Stlfiii-  it  becomes  the  stem  of  vocitioiiiB  (o/a  calling). 
With  its  vowel  lengthened  it  becomes  the  stem  of  vBx  (a  voice:  that 
by  which  we  call).  This  stem,  again,  with  -ilia  added,  means  belonging 
to  a  voicci  with  -flla,  a  little  voice. 

Note,  —  In  ioflecled  languages,  words  are  built  up  from  Rools,  which  al  a.  very 
early  dine  were  used  alone  )□  express  ideas,  as  is  Dovr  done  in  Chinese.  Roots  are 
modified  into  Stems,  which,  by  inflection,  Ijecome  Words.  The  process  by  which 
roots  are  modiGed.  in  the  vaiious  forms  of  derivatives  and  compounds,  is  called 
Sim-iuildmg.  The  whole  of  this  piDcessisoriginallyoneofcomposiKon,  by  which 
s^tficant  endings  are  added  one  after  another  to  forms  capable  of  pronuncialion 
and  conyeying  a  meaiting. 

Roots  had  long  ceased  to  be  recogniied  as  such  before  the  Latin  existed  as  a 
sepaiaie  language.  Consequently  the  forms  which  we  assume  as  Laiin  roots 
nerer  really  existed  in  Latin,  but  are  ihe  representatives  of  forms  used  earlier. 

33.  The  Stem  is  sometimes  the  same  as  the  root:  as  in  duc-ia, 
of  a  leader,  fer-t,  he  bears  i  but  it  is  more  frequently  formed  from  the 
rcwt  — 

1.  By  changing  or  lengthening  its  vowel:  as  in  Bcob-a,  joun/uj/ (scab, 
shai/e) ;  reg-iB,  o/a  ting  (reg,  direct)  ;  vSc-ia,  o/a  voice  (voc,  call). 

2.  By  the  addition  of  a  simple  suffix  (originally  another  root) :  as  in 
ia^-a,  fl^kl  (FUG  +  a);  fa^-*.  you  Jfy  (FUG  +  ya);  pangfi,  / /aslen 
(pAG  +  na). 

3.  By  two  or  more  of  these  methods:  as  in  d-^o-it,  he  leadi  (duc+«), 
tolls,  /raise  (TUL+ya). 

4.  By  derivation  and  composition,  following  the  laws  of  development 
peculiar  to  the  language.     (See  Chap.  VIII.) 

24.  Inflectional  terminations  are  variously  modified  by  combination 
with  the  final  vowel  or  consonant  of  the  Stem.  leading  to  the  various 
forms  of  Declension  and  Conjugation  (see  §  32). 


The  Parts  of  Speech. 


H 


Note.  — A  lerminalion  beginning  with  a  vowel  is  called  an  n/cn  afii     one 
sinning  with  a.  consonani,  a  clou  affix.      When  a  close  affix  \f,  joined  lo  a  oon- 
Ihere  is  mnally  either  a  euphonic  change,  hs  in  rfixl  for  rsff-ai,  or  a 
•\  appears,  as  in  rSg-l-buB.     But,  in  mos(  cases,  what  is  called  a  connecting   ] 
eally  belongs  to  the  stem,  as  in  ^'oca-mua,  regl-mUB  (see  §  133). 

The  Parta  of  Speech. 

25.   Words  are  divided  into  nine   Parts  of  Speech: I 

Nouns,  Adjectives,  Pronouns,  Verbs,  Participles,  Adverbs,.! 

Prepositions,  Conjunctions,  and  Interjections. 

.  A  Noun  is  the  name  of  a  person,  place,  thing,  or  idea : 


Jaesar;    Roma,  Rome;   domua,  a  house;   virHU, 

'irttie.      Names 

(f  persons  and  places  are  Proper  Nouns;   other  n 

ouns  are  called 

"OMMON. 

b.  An  Adjective  is  a  word  that  attributes  a  quality : 

s,  bonnB,^(wrf; 

ortia,  brave,  strong. 

Note.  —  Elymologically.  there  is  no  dilTerence  lietween  a  noun  and  an  adjective,  J 
both  being  formed  alike.  So.  too,  all  names  originally  attribute  quality,  and  any  'I 
name  can  still  be  used  to  attribute  a  quality.  Thus,  Kiitg  William  distinguishes  ' ' 
William  from  other  Williams,  by  (he  altribute  of  royalty  expressed  in  the  n 

c.  A  Pronoun  is  a  word  used  to  distinguish  a  person,  place,  thing,  or  j 
iawithot3t  either  naming  or  describing  it:  as,lB,^f,*  qui,  wA0,-iifiB,a 

d.  A  Verb  is  a  word  which  asserts  something;   as,  sam,  I  a>. 
■mat,  he  loves. 


Note.  — In  all  modem  speech  the  vei 
lylhing,  and  a  verb  is  therefore  supposed 
jictly.  however,  any  adjective  oi  noun  n 
ttne,  make  a  complete  assertion.  In  the 
ten  no  other  means  of  asserting,  as  the 


s  usually  1 


e  only  w 


ly,  by  attribuliug  a  quality  or  giving  a 
infancy  of  language  there  could  hove 
ferb  is  of  comparatively  late  develop- 


e.  A  Participle  is  a  word  that  attributes  a  quality  like  an  adj'ec 
L  being  derived  from  a  verb,  retains   in   some  degree    the  power  I 
the  verb   to  assert:    as,  Caesar   conaul   creStua,   C^sar   havir 
n   elected  consul;    Caeaar   PompSium   metuSna,    Casar  fearing   \ 

Pompey. 

f.  An  Adverb  is  a  word  used  lo  express  the  time,  place,  ( 
'  an  assertion  or  attribute:  as,  eplendldS  raeoASiX,  gloriously  false; 
sdifi  nStua,  bom  to~diy. 


.It  have  become  specialiied  bj 


\6  Etymology:    Words  and  their  Forms-     [S5  2S-2& 

g,  A  Preposition  is  a  word  which  shows  the  relation  between  a  noun 
and  some  other  word  or  words  in  the  same  sentence :  per  agrSB  it,  it 
goes  over  the  fields ;  6  plfiribna  finnm,  cne  euf  of  many. 

i>ICiTE.  — Pregiositions  uc  specialiied  adverbs  (cf.  \  15a),  The  rebtiDDS  ex- 
pressed  by  prepositions  were  earlier  expressed  by  cases. 

h.  A  Conjunction  is  a  word  which  connects  words,  phrases,  or  sen- 
tences without  affecting  their  relations :  as,  et,  and;  aed,  but. 


i.  Interjections  are  mere  exclamations.  They  are  not  stricdy  to  be 
classed  as  Parts  of  Speech :  beaa,  halloo'.  8,  oh'. 

Note. —They  sometimes  express  an  emotion  which  aileclssiine  other  things 
mentioned, and  so  hiveaconneciion  like  otherwords:  as,  vaa  VlcUB,  woe  to  the 
cenqiuTidJ  (alas  (or  the  conquered ! ) 

26.  Nouns.  Adjectives,  Pronouns,  and  Participles  have  inflecdons 
oi  declension,  to  denote  gender,  number,  and  case.  Verbs  have  inflec- 
tions of  conjuffition,   to  denote  voice,   mood,   tense,  number,   and 

Note.  —  Adjectives  are  often  said  lo  have  inflections  of  cmnfarisim  10  indicaic 
degree.  These  inflections  ate,  however,  properly  stem-fonnadons  made  by  deriva- 
tion (ct  }  89). 

87.  Those  parts  of  speech  which  are  not  inflected  are  called  Parti- 
cles: these  are  Adverbs.  Prepositions,  Conjunctions,  and  Inter- 
jections. 

Note. — The  term  Panicle  b  sometimes  limited  to  such  words  as  nuin,  -ne. 
an  {iiitrmifalair).  nBn,  nfi  (orfu/itr):  B](ci»r<^ima/).  etc.,  which  are  used  simply 


28-  The  genders  distinguished  in  Latin  arc  three : 
Masculine,  Feminine,  and  Neuter. 

a.  The  gender  of  Latin  nouns  is  either  natural  or  grammalkal. 
Natural  gender  Is  distinction  as  to  the  sex  of  the  object  denoted :  as, 
pnor,  ^;  pneHi^girl;  AOaam.  gi/i. 

Note.  —  Many  nouns  have  boih  a  masculine  and  lisminine  (btm  10  distinguish 
'ex:  as,  cemis,  cervs.  ita^-,  doe;  cliSos,  cllenta,  cliail:  Tlctor.  vlctrix. 

Many  designations  of  persons  (as  uata,  sai/i>r),  ttsually  lb(iu|h  not  Decessarily 
male,  are  always  Irealed  as  masculine. 


General  Rules  of  Gender.  \) 

b.  Grammatical  gender'  is  a  formal  distinction  as  to  sex  where  nt 
actual  sex  exists  in  the  object.  It  is  shown  by  the  form  of  the  adjectivi 
joined  with  the  noun:  as,  lapia  magnua  (M.),  a  great  stone;  nianni 
moa  (f.),  my  hand. 

Note.  —  A  ftw  nculer  nouns  are  used  to  designate  persons  as  belonging  lo  j 
class :  ai,  manciplum  tuum,  ynur  ilave, 

(M.).  ociee  (f),  and  &Bmen  (N.) 
(F.  pi.),  traops. 

Many  pet  names  of  girls  (eis  PaeB-niom,  GlycSriuin)  are  tii 

(Oeneral  Sates  of  Gender. 
29.    I,   Names  of  Male  beings,  Rivers,  Winds,  Months, 
and  Mountains,  are  masculine. 

2.  Names  of  Female  beings.  Cities,  Countries,  Plants, 
Trees,  and  Gems,  of  many  Animals  (especially  Birds),  and 
of  most  abstract  Qualities,  ^\t  feminine. 

Note.  — The  gender  of  most  of  the  above  may  be  rec. 

a.  A  few  names  of  Rivers  ending  in  -a  (as  Allia),  with  the  Greek 
names  Lethe  and  Styi,  are  feminine ;  others  are  variable  or  uncertain. 

Some  names  of  Mountains  take  the  gender  of  (heir  termination; 
as,  AlpfiB  (F.),  the  Alps;  BSraote  (n.). 

Names  of  Months  are  properly  adjectives,  the  masculine  noun 
mSnsia,  month,  being  understood :  as,  lamiSiriiia,  January. 

b.  Some  names  of  Towns  and  Countries  are  masculine :  as,  SulmS, 
Oabil  (plur.) ;  or  neuter,  as  Tarentum,  Dlyrloum. 

A  few  names  of  Plants  and  Gems  follow  the  gender  of  their  termina- 
tion: as,  oeiitaureum(N.),««/<7W;>';  acunthua  (M.),6earsfi/ot ;  opalus 
;iii.).  epal. 

we  call  grammatical  girder  is  in  most  cases  the  product  of  the  imagi- 
rude  age,  when  language  was  in  the  course  of  growth.  Thus  a  River 
ir  a  Wind  was  felt,  as  a  tiviag  crta/uri.  violent  and  strong,  and  so  is 
and  the  iable  of  Alias  shows  how  similar  livi tig  attributes  were  ascribed 
to  Mountains,  which,  in  Ibe  northern  tables,  are  the  bones  of  giants.  Again,  the 
Earth,  or  a  country  or  cily,  seems  the  mothir  of  hs  progeny ;  the  Tree  shelters  and 
ripens  its  fruit,  as  a  brooding  bird  her  nest  of  cggs^  and,  lo  this  day,  a  Ship  is 
always  referred  to  by  a  feminine  pronoun. 

Again,  in  the  East  and  South,  the  Sun,  from  its  Rerce  heat  and  splendor,  is 
masealine,  and  iB  paler  atlendanl,  the  Moon,  feminine;  while,  among  Northern 
nadons,  the  Sun  (perhaps  for  lis  comforting  warmth)  is  feminine,  and  the  Moon 
(the  appointer  of  worlts  and  days),  masculine.  The  niles  of  grai 
nnly  repeat  and  extend  these  early  workings  of  the  fancy. 


i 


I 


r8  Etymology:    Words  and  their  Forms.      [§ 

c.  Indeclinable  nouns,  infinitives,  terms  or  phrases  used  as  oouns, 
and  words  quoted  merely  for  their  form,  are  neuter:  as,  f5a,  right; 
niMl,  nothing;  gumml.^i/w;  ac'ixmta.^ia,  your  knowledge  {Xa^i^a^); 
triate  val6,  a  sad/arewtll;  hoc  ipaum  diu,  this  very  "long.'''' 

30o  Many  nouns  may  be  either  masculine  or  feminine,  according 
to  the  sex  of  the  object.  These  are  said  to  be  of  Common  Gender: 
as,  exBul,  exile;  bSs,  ox  at  cow. 

a.  If  a  noun  signifying  a  thing  without  life  may  be  either  masculine 
or  feminine, — as,  diSa,  day;  finia,  end,  —  it  is  sometimes  said  to  be  of 
Doubtful  Gender. 

b.  Several  names  of  animals  have  a  grammatical  gender,  independent 
of  sex.  These  are  called  Epicene.  Thus  lepus,  hare,  is  always  mascu- 
line, and  viilpBB,  fox,  is  always  feminine.  To  denote  a  male  fox  we 
may  say,  Tolpfis  mascnla;  a  female  hare,  lepus  fSmina. 

ITumber  and  Case. 
31.   Nouns,  Pronouns,  Adjectives,  and  Participles  are  de- 
clined in  two  Numbers,  singular  zad. plural ;  and  in  six  Cases, 
nominative,  genitive,  dative,  accusative,  vocative,  ablative. 

a.  The  Nominarive  is  the  case  of  the  Subject  of  a  sentence. 

b.  The  Genitive  may  generally  be  translated  by  the  English  Pos- 
sessive, or  by  the  Objective  with  the  preposition  of. 

c.  The  Dative  is  the  case  of  the  Indirect  Object  (§  177).  It  may 
usually  be  translated  by  the  Objective  with  the  preposition  to  or  for; 
but  sometimes  by  the  Objective  without  a  preposition. 

d.  The  Accusative  is  the  case  of  the  Direct  Object  of  a  verb  (§  177). 
It  is  used  also  with  many  of  the  Latin  Prepositions. 

e.  The  Vocative  is  the  case  of  Direct  Address. 

/.  The  Ablative  may  usually  be  translated  by  the  Objective  with 
front,  by,  with,  in,  or  at.     It  is  also  often  used  with  prepositions. 

g.  All  the  cases,  except  the  nominative  and  vocative,  may  be  used  as 
object-cases ;  and  are  sometimes  called  Oblique  Cases  {oiaOa  obllqul). 

Note.— A  more  convenienlanangemeQl  of  the  cases  is  Ihe  following  (see  n.,p.aos); 
DiRECr  CASES:  Namiaalwi.  yocalive, Acciaative. 

Indirect  Cases:  Gaiiiive, Datevs,  Ailaiivt. 
h.  In  names  of  towns  and  a  few  other  words  appear  traces  of  another 
case  (the  Locative),  denoting  the  place  where. 

i.  Stillanothercase,the/nj'/r»OTen/ii/,  appears  in  a  fewadverbs(§  148). 

Note.— Aa  Ihe  proper  infleclional  Icrminaiions  early  became  fiiaed  wilh  the  stem 
in  many  cases,  Lalin 
pari  ol  llie  noun  called 
and  case-endings  do  nol  stactly  ci 


§§  32, 33.]  Declension  of  Nouns.  19 


i 

« 

5 

Is 

« 

I  or  a  Consonant 

ils(iiis) 

u 

ii 

ei 

« 

6 

Chapter  III. — Declension  of  Nouns. 

32.  Nouns  are  inflected  in  five  Declensions,  distin- 
guished by  the  case-ending  of  the  Genitive  Singular,  and 
by  the  final  letter  {characteristic)  of  the  Stem.^ 

Decl.  I .  Gen.  Sing,  ae    Characteristic  &  (anciently  &) 
"2.  " 

"      3. 

«      4.  « 

"5.  « 

tf .  The  Stem  of  a  noun  may  be  found,  if  a  consonant-stem,  by  omit- 
ting the  case-ending ;  if  a  vowel-stem,  by  substituting  for  the  case-ending 
the  characteristic  vowel. 

b.  The  Nominative  of  most  masculine  and  feminine  nouns  (except 
in  the  first  declension)  is  formed  from  the  stem  by  adding  s.^ 

Note.  —  But  many,  however,  end  in  o,  or  in  the  liquids,  1,  n,  r, — the  original  8 
(sometimes  with  one  or  more  letters  of  the  stem)  having  been  lost  by  phonetic  decay 
(§  ii).  In  some  (as  in  servus,  st.  servo-)  the  stem-vowel  is  modified  before 
the  final  8 ;  or,  as  in  agrer,  imber,  st.  agro-,  imbri-,  a  vowel  has  intruded  itself 
into  the  stem. 

33.  The  following  are  general  Rules  of  Declension :  — 

a.  The  Vocative  is  always  the  same  as  the  Nominative,  except  in 
the  singular  of  nouns  in  us  of  the  second  declension.* 

1  Declension  is  produced  by  adding  terminations  originally  significant  to  differ- 
ent forms  of  stems,  vowel  or  consonant  The  various  phonetic  corruptions  in  the 
language  have  given  rise  to  the  several  declensions ;  but  it  is  probable  that  originally 
there  was  only  one,  with  perhaps  a  few  variations.  The  original  terminations 
(answering  to  prepositions)  can  no  longer  be  determined  with  certainty,  except  in 
a  few  cases.  Most  of  the  case-endings,  as  given  in  Latin,  contain  also  the  final 
letter  of  the  stem. 

Adjectives  are,  in  general,  declined  like  nouns,  and  are  etymologically  to  be 
classed  with  them.  But  they  have  several  peculiarities  of  inflection,  and  will  be 
more  conveniently  treated  in  a  group  by  themselves  (see  Chap.  IV.). 

^  The  s  of  the  nominative  is  the  remnant  of  an  old  demonstrative  sa,  which  is 
found  (with  modifications)  in  the  Sanskrit  persofial  pronoun^  in  the  Greek  article^ 
and  in  the  English  she, 

*  In  the  first  and  second  declensions  the  vocative  ends  in  the  weakened  stem- 
voweL  Most  of  the  words  likely  to  be  used  in  address  are  of  these  declensions ;  and, 
in  practice,  comparatively  few  other  words  have  a  vocative.  It  is  given  in  the 
paradigms  for  the  sake  of  symmetiy,  but  may  well  be  oxuitted  Vo.  Citc^m^^. 


20  Etymology:  Declension  of  Nouns,       [§§  33-35. 

b.  In  neuters  the  Nominative  and  Accusative  are  always  alike,  and  in 
the  plural  end  in  &. 

c.  The  Accusative  singular  of  all  masculines  and  feminines  ends  in 
m ;  the  Accusative  plural  in  s. 

d.  In  the  last  three  declensions  (and  in  a  few  cases  in  the  others) 
the  Dative  singular  ends  in  I. 

e.  The  Dative  and  Ablative  plural  are  always  alike. 
y.  The  Genitive  plural  always  ends  in  am. 

g.  Final  i,  o,  u  of  inflection  are  always  longi  final  a  is  shorty  except 
in  the  Ablative  singular  of  the  first  declension ;  final  e  is  long  in  the 
first  and  fifth  declensions,  short  in  the  second  and  third. 

34,  The  Case-endings  of  the  several  declensions  are  the  following, 
rare  forms  being  given  in  parenthesis^  Greek  forms  in  italics  :  — 


Decl.  I. 

n. 

III. 

IV. 

V. 

Sing. 

N.  S,  i,  as,  is 

us,  am,  cr,  OS,  on,  eUS  S  (or  modified  stem) 

as,  (1 

68 

G.  ae  (ai)  es 

I  (ius)  0,  u. 

ei 

\&,yos,  OS 

as  (uia) 

61  (fi) 

D.  ae  (ai) 

6  (i)  ei,  eo 

I  {t,  rare) 

ul(ii) 

61  (fi) 

A.  am,  an,  en 

um,  on,  ea 

em  (im) in^yn^d  um,  ii 

em 

V.  S,  /,  a 

g  (I)  er,  eu 

(as  nom.)  t,y 

us,  (1 

68 

A.^i 

b,ed 

6  (I),  I,  ye 

a 

6 

Plur, 

N.v.  ae 

I,  a 

§s,  a,  ia,  is 

Us,  ua 

68 

G.  &rum  Cum) 

5ram  Cum,  I 

vccL\d 

n  iim,  ium,  eon 

uum 

6ram 

d.aIIs  (SLbus)  18  (dbus)  ibus  ibus  (iibas)  6bu8 

A.  as  OS  68  (is),  a,  ia,  ds  Us,  ua  68 

FIRST    DECLENSION. 

35.  The  Stem  of  nouns  of  the  First  Declension  ends 
in  a,  and  except  in  Greek  nouns  the  nominative  is  like  the 
stem. 

Latin  nouns  of  the  First  Declension  are  thus  declined :  — 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NoM.     stell^  a  (or  the)  star,  stellae,  stars. 

Gen.     stellae,  of  a  star.  stellSLrum,  of  stars. 

Dat.     stellae,  to  {ox  for)  a  star.  stellis,  to  {ox for)  stars. 

Ace.      stellam,  a  star,  stellSs,  stars. 

Voc.  -jslMm;  thou  star  !  '"^StfStfUtKt/Mftrs ! 

Abl.      Stella,  with,  from,  etc.,  a  star,     stellis,  7vith,from,  etc.,  start. 
Note.  —  The  a-  of  the  stem  was  originally  long. 


First  Declension:  Greek  Nouns. 


\  Gender. — Nouns  of  the  first  declension  a 
I   Exceptions  :   Nouns  tnasculine  from  their  slgnitication :  as,  nauta^l 
"  r.    So  a  few  family  or  personal  names :  as,  DSQiSua,  Scaevola.> 
,  Hadria,  the  Adriatic. 

Q.  Case-Forms. — a.  The  Genitive  singular  ancieotly  ended  in  -ai,  J 
h  is  occasionally  found :  as,  auiai.     The  same  ending  o 
e  dative,  but  only  as  a  diphthong. 

6.  An  old  genitive  in  -Sb  is  preserved  in  the  word  familias,  used  in  | 
the  combinations  pater  (mSter,  fniuE,  fHia)  familias,  fathir,  e 
of  a  family  (plur.  patrSs  familiaa  or  familiSrum). 

c.  The  Locative  form  (S  31.  i^)  for  the  singular  ends  in -ae;  for  Ihe  | 
^'plural  in  la :  as,  RSmaQ,  at  Rome;  AthSuiB.  at  Athens. 

d.  The  Genitive  plural  is  sometimes  found  in  -fiin  instead  af -Srum, 
(Specially  in  compounds  with  oSla  and  gCna,  signifying  dwilling  a 

,    caelicolDm,    celestials;    TrolugonOni,    sans   of  Trey; 
Leneadam,  sons  of  yEneas ;  so  amphora  and  drachma. 

.  The  Dative  and  Ablative  plural  of  dea,  goddess,  filia,  daughter,  j 
in  an  older  foim  -Sbus.  So  rarely  with  liberta,  freed-womany 
mfila,  she-mule-,  equa,  mare.  But,  except  when  the  two  sexes  (as 
formulas,  documents,  etc.)  are  mentioned  together,  the  form  in  -la 
preferred  in  all  but  dea  and  fllia. 

f.  The  original  ending  of  the  Ablative  -d  is  retained  in  early  Latin  1 
^,  praedSd,  booty. 

O-reek  No  una. 

37.  Many  nouns  of  the  first  declension  borrowed  from  I 
he  Greek  are  entirely  Latinized,  but  many  retain  traces  J 
«f  their  Greek  forms 

tteourt(¥.).      Electraiv.').   asynopsis{F.).  Iheartofm 


NoM.  aulit 

<   Gen.  aulas 

DAT.  aulas 

Ace.  aulam 

V«6_aula— 
Abl.  aula 


Bleotii  (a)        epitome 
Electrae  epitomSs 

Electrae  epitomae 

Electram  (aa)  epilomBn 
-  -  -efHlome  - 
Electra  epitomS 


masica  (6) 


j(Sn) 
milsin  (S) 
mijsic5  (6) 


I 


23  Etymology :  Declension  of  Xouns.        [5S  37,  3a 

Andromache (¥.).    ^-Eneas  (M.).  Lfonidas  (ts.).  aPersian  (M.). 

Noiu.  Andtotnach3  (a)   ABnEas  IieSuidas  PeraSE  (a) 

Gen.  Androniach§s  (ae)   Aeneaa  Leonidae  Persae 

DAT.  Andromachae  Aeneae  Leonidae  Persae 

Ace.  Andrumach6ii(aiii)  A«M3ii(am)  Leoaidam  Persea(i 

Voc.  Aodromache  (a)      AenSi  (5)  Leonids  (3)  Persa 

Abl.  AndromachS  (S)      Aenei  Leonids  PersB  (Si 

AncMses  (M.)-       ion  of  ^neas  (m.)        cornet  (m.)- 
NOM.      AnctalBfia  Aeneades  (&)  comfitEs  (a) 

Gem.      Anchisae  Aeneadae  cometae 

DAT.      AnchTsae  Aeneadae  cometae 

Ace.      ^nchTsSn  (am)        AeneadCii  cometSa  (aia)' 

Voc.       AcchisS  (a,  5)  AcneadS  (S)  cometi 

Abl.       AnchtsS  (5)  AeneadC  (5)  cometS  (8) 

Also  Scipiadam,  from  ScipiadEa,  in  Horace. 

a.  Many  Greek  noucs  var)'  between  the  first,  the  second,  and  the 
third  declensions :  as,  BoStae  (gen.  of  BoStea,  -ia),  Tliuoydidas 
(ace.  plur,  of  TtiScydid§e,  -ia).     See  §  43.  a  and  §  63. 

b.  Greek  forms  are  found  onlyin  the  singular;  the  plural  is  regular: 
as,  cometae,  -5x11111.  etc.  There  are  (besides  proper  names)  about 
thirty-five  of  these  words,  several  being  names  of  plants,  or  names  of 
arts:  as,  crambS,  cabbage;  mflsicS,  music.  Most  have  also  regular 
Latin  forms :  as,  comfita,  but  the  oonunadve  sometimes  has  the  a  long. 

SECOND   DECLENSION. 

38.  The  Stem  of  nouns  of  the  Second  Declension  ends 
in  &'  (as  of  tIt,  vixd-;  Bervos  (-us),  Berv6- ;  dominnfi,  dominfi-). 
The  nominative  is  formed  from  the  stem  by  adding  a  in 
masculines  and  feminines,  m  in  neuters,  the  vowel  6  being 
weakened  to  tt  (see  §§  y  and  10). 

In  most  noims  whose  stem  ends  in  tS-  the  a  is  not  added, 
but  o  is  lost,  and  e  intrudes  before  t,  if  not  already  present 
(cf.  chamber  from  chatnbre) :  as,  ager,  stem  agrft-.  Greek 
dryp^i;.  E};CCptions  are  heeperus.  ictenia,  iuniperus,  m5rus, 
nomexna,  tauma,  umeniB,  ntertis,  vims,  and  many  Greek 
nouns. 

1  ThU  b  Ihe  originnl   masculine  ft-slem   cormponding  lo  Ihe  ft-!iero  ol  Ihc 

ftm  dcelention ;  but  (he  a  had  already  approached  O  befaic  ihe  sepwalloa  of  IhB 

^MMgES  {see  Appendii).  M^ 


S  3B-40.]  Second  Declension. 

atin  nouns  of  the  Second  Declension -^re  thus  declined  :- 

Hng.  slave  (m.).  bay  {M.).  field{it.).  maH{ii..).viar  {tH-)- 
^NoM.      Bervus  (p8)  pner  ager  vir  /bellum  .- 

-Gen.       servi  pueri  3^  virl  '  belli 

JDat.       servS  puer5         'igffi  vir  5  bell5 

.  Acc.       servum  (om)  puerum       agnun         rinim        bellum 

I  'f"",^         iiH"*" vm;      -     bellwfa- 

puer^         agro  viro  bell6 

Ptur. 

NoM.      servl  puetl  agtl  virl  bella 

-Cen-      servStum       puerorum  agrfirutn     virfirum    beUSrum 

DAT.       servia  puerui  agri"  viria  bellia 

,  Acc.       servoB  pueroa         agroa  virSa      •■   bella 

VocK      Bemi  pmrf «grt ml 'bcHw 

^AUL.        servia  puerla         agria  virIa  belllB 

Note.  —The  earlier  forms  for  ntiminalive  and  accusalive  were  -OB,  -on,  and 
:5e  were  always  relained  after  u  and  V  up  to  Ihe  end  of  the  Republic  The 
■minaiions  B  and  m  are  sometimes  omitted  in  inscriptions :  as,  CorsSUo  for 
imallos,  Comeliom. 

39.  Gender.  —  Nouns  ending  in  ub  (os),  er,  ir,  are  Mas- 
dine  ;  those  ending  in  «m  (on)  are  Neuter.     But  — 

a.  Names   of  towns   in   us    (oa)   are   Feraimne;    as,  CoijnthoB. 
/Uso  many  names  of  plants  ajid  gems,  with  the  following :  alvos,  belly ; 

irbaaas,  lineti  (plur3.1  carbaaa,  sails,  n.)  ;  oolua,  distaff;  humnB, 
■oundi  vaimuB,  winntnmng-skgvel.  Many  Greek  nouns  retain  their 
■iginal geuder :  as,  aictna  (p.), thePolarBear; methodua  (f.),  method. 

b.  The  following  in  ua  are  Neuter ;  their  accusative,  as  of  all  nei 
the  same  as  the  nominative :  pelagua  (nora.  acc.  plur.  pelagS), 

poison;  vnlgTia  (rarely  m.),  the  crowd;  so  cSti, sea-monslert 
plural  without  nominative  singular). 

40.  Case-Forms. — a.  The  Locative  form  of  this  declension  endsj 
r  the  singular  in  i :  as,  huml,  on  the  ground;  Coriuthi,  at  Carintkt, 
I  the  plural,  in  Ib  :  as,  Pliilippb,  al  PMlippi. 
b.   The  genitive  of  nouns  in  iua  or  ium  ended,  until  the  Augustai 
ge,  in  a  single  I :  as,  fili.  of  a  son ;  but  tlie  accent  of  the 

relained ;  as,  ingS'iii,  of  gemiis.^  The  same  contraction  o 
the  genitive  singular  and  the  dative  and  ablative  plural  of  nou 
Insand-BiuB;  as,  QrSla,  for  the  Greeks;  PompSi,  of  Pompey. 

1  The  genitive  in  II  occurs  tnice  in  Virgil,  and  conslanlly  in  Ovid,  but  » 


I 
I 


24  Etymology:  Declension  of  Nouns.       [%%  40-42, 

c.  Proper  names  in  -ia*  lose  e  in  die  vocative,  retaining  the  accent 
of  the  nominative:  as.  Tergl'll;  also,  nUus,  son;  eeuitu,  di-viiu 
guardian:  as.  aadi,  mi  (HI,  iuar,  my  san. 

d.  Gre^  names  in  -Tub  have  the  vocative  lot  Adjectives  in  -iua 
form  the  vocative  in  -ie,  and  4J|bF  ^f  these  are  occasionally  used  as 
nonns:  as,  laacedaemonie,  oM  SfmrtaH. 

I.  The  genitive  plural  often  has  fim  or  (after  v)  6m  (cf.  g  7)  for 
Swusi.^peciatlv  in  the  poets :  as,  defem.  BUperibii,  dlvom,  0/  the 
C^s,  Tirfim,  of  HUH.  Also  in  compounds  of  wir,  and  in  many  words 
of  money,  measure,  and  weight :  as.  s^virflia.  of  the  Scviri,  nummSm, 
of  emus,  inseTQm,  of  aeres. 

f.  ^w^god,  has  vocative  dens ;  plural :  nominative  and  vocative  del 
or  dl  {Jot  iUXf;  genitive  deonun,  deum ;  dative  and  ablative  deb  or 
diB  (for  dilsY  For  the  genitive  plur.  diram  or  dIvSm  (from  dlvna, 
divine)  is  often  used.  ' 

g.  The  original  ending  of  the  ablati\'e-d  is  found  iaearly  Latin;  as, 
OnaiTSd  (later,  Giiae5).  Cneius. 

41.  The  following  stems  in  ero-,  in  which  e  belongs  to  the  stem, 
retain  the  e  throughout :  — 

adulter,  adulterer;        ganer,  son-im-^erar;      '  pner,  ioy; 

eocet.fatha--in-laar;      vesper,  atrtiiig. 
Also,  compounds  in  tex  and  gei  (stem  fern-,  ed^o-)  :    as.  Ifioifer, 
montingstar;  annigvz,  squire. 

a.  Some  of  these  have  an  old  nominative  in  -erus :  as,  sooeniB.  So 
vocative  puere.  a  boy,  as  from  pueius  (regularly  pnei^ 

b.  Vir.  man,  has  the  genitive  viil-,  the  adjective  Batnr.  sated,  has 
BatOrl;  vespor,  Avnin^.  hasabl.veapere<loc.  veBp«ii,iBf^nrRii>^). 

c.  IJber  (a  name  of  Bacchus)  has  genitive  labeif :  so,  too.  the 
adjective  liber, /rw.  of  which  libeii.  cAiidrtB.  is  the  plural  (§  82.  b). 

d.  Ibfir  and  CeltibCr.  barbaric  names  not  properly  belonging  to 
this  declension,  retain  fi  throughout. 

t.  Mnlcibar,  I'tthan,  has  -berl  and  -bil  in  the  genidve. 

42.  The  following  not  having  e  in  the  stem  insert  it  in  the  nocni- 
oative  and  vocative  singular.     (Cf.  g  to.  d.) 

ageijle/d,st.mgio-:  oolahat,  snaie ;  magistei,  master  1  ^9 

aper,  toar;  conger,  sea-eel;  minister,  servaiil;  ^H 

arbiter, ym^;  cultet.  knife;  oleaster,  v.ilii-i>livt;        ^V 

».v»Wt,  south  wind;  faber,  smith;  onager  {-eixM),itiitd-ass; 

cancer,  crab;  fiber,  beaver;  acotabvi {-braa), maeierel. 

oaper,  ff>at;  liber.  Soot; 

~  3  of  .'Vtijeclives.sceChap.lv.] 


§§  43, 44.]  Third  Declefision.  25 

43.  Greek  nouns — including  many  flames  in  -eu»  —  are 
declined  as  follows  in  the  Singular,  the  Plural  being 
regular: — •' 

fable  (m.).  mock-sun  (n.).  Delos-^.).  Athos  (m.).   Orpheus  (m.). 

NOM.   m^thoB  parSlion  DSlos  Ath5s(o)    Orpheus 

Gen.    m x^hl  parelil  Dell  Ath6  (I)       Orphel  (eos) 

pAT.    myth6  pareliS  -aj^elS  Ath6  OrpheT* 

Ace.    mython  parelion  Delon  (um)  Athon  (um)  Oi^ea 

Voc.  ,  my  the  parelion  Djle  AthSs  Orpheu 

Abl.    myths  pareliS  D^IS  Ath6  OrpheS 

a.  Many  names  in  -§s  belonging  to  the  third  declension  l^ve  also  a 
genitive  in  -I:  as,  Thilc^didSs,  T^iloydidl  (compare  §§  jf .  b  and  52). 

b.  Several  names  in  -er  have  also  a  nominative  in  -us :  as,  Teuoer 
or  Teucrus.    The  name  PanthfisChas  the  vocative  Fanthtt  (§  63.  /). 

c.  The  genitive  plural  of  certain  titles  of  books  takes  the  Greek  ter- 
mination -6n :  as,  G«orgic5n,  of  the  Georgics. 

d.  The  termination  -oe  (for  Greek  -oC)  is  sometimes  found  in  the 
nominative  plural :  as,  Adelphoe,  the  Adelphi  (a  play  of  Terence). 

THIRD    DECLENSION. 

* 

Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  are  best  classed  accord- 
ing to  their  stems,  as  ending  (i)  in  a  Vowel  (i),  (2)  in  a 
Liquid  (l,  n,  r),  (3)  in  a  Mute. 

A  few  whose  stems  end  in  u,  formerly  long  (grus,  sIIb),  were  treated 
as  consonant-stems. 

•  1.    Mute-Stems. 

44,  Masculine  and  Feminine  nouns,  whose  stem  ends  in 
a  Mute,  form  the  nominative  by  adding  -s.  If  the  mute  is 
a  lingual  (t,  d),  it  is  suppressed  before  -s ;  if  it  is  a  palatal 
(c,  g),  it  unites  with  -s,  forming  -x :  as,  — 

op-is,  ops,  help;  custod-is,  cnatos,  gjmrdian ;  rSg-is,  rSx,  kmg,^ 

Neuters  have  for  the  nominative  the  simple  stem  (with 
some  modifications,  see  §  45). 

capit-is,  caput,  head;  poSmat-is,  poSma,  poem, 

1  In  these  the  genitive  is  given  first  to  show  the  stem  as  it  occurs  irv  ^rafiVvo.^, 


26 


Etymology:  Declension  of  Nouns.       [§§  45,  46. 


46.  The  vowel  -before  the  final  consonant  of  the  stem 
is  often  modified :  — 

a.  Labials.  —  Stems  in  -Ip-  have  e  before  p  in  the  nominative :  *  as, 
adip-is,  adeps.  Most  stems  ^  dp-  are  compounds  of  the  root  cap 
(in  capio,  take) :  as,  particip-is,  particeps,  sharer.  In  these  the 
stem  sometimes  has  the  form  cup-:  as,  aucup-is,  axLceps^  fowler. 

b.  LiNGUALS. — Stems  in  It-  (m.  or  F.)  have  e  (short)  in  the  nomi- 
native: as,  hospit-is,  hospes.  The  neuter  capit-is  has  caput. 
Neuter  stems  ending  in  two  consonants,  and  those  ending  in  &t-  (Greek 
nouns),  drop  the  final  lingual :  as,  oord-is,  cor ;  po6mat-iB,  po6ma. 

c.  Pa«Iatals.  —  Stems  in  Ic-  (short  i)  have  the  nominative  in  -eac, 
with  a  few  exceptions  (§  67.  e),  and  are  chiefly  masculine :  as,  apic-is, 
apez;  indic-is,  index.  Those  ill  ic-  (long  i)  retain  I,  and  are  femi- 
nine :  as,  cornic-is,  comiz.^ 

c 

46.   Nouns  of  this  class  are  declined  as  follows  :  — 

Sing,  helpiy.)    h'ng(M.),  guide  {z^^  soldier  (lA,).  head(j^,). 


Stkm  oi>- 

reg- 

duc- 

lYiTlit- 

capit* 

NoM. 

[ops]* 

rSz 

duz 

miles 

caput 

Gen. 

opis 

regis 

ducis 

mllitis 

capitis 

DAT. 

opi 

regi 

du(^ 

militl 

capi^ 

Ace. 

opem 

regem 

ducem 

militem 

caput 

Voc. 

ops 

rex 

dux 

miles 

caput 

Abl. 

ope 

rege 

duce 

milite 

capite 

Plur. 

wealth 

NOM. 

opSs 

reg§s 

ducSs 

milit6s 

capita 

Gen. 

opum 

regum 

ducum 

militum 

capitum 

DAT. 

opibus 

regibus 

ducibus 

militibus 

capitibuB 

Ace. 

opSs 

reg6s 

ducSs 

mTlit§s 

capita 

Voc. 

opSs 

reg§s 

duc6s 

mllitSs 

capita 

Abl. 

opibus 

regibus 

ducibus 

militibus 

capitibuB 

1  In  these  cases  e  is  a  less  weakened  form  of  the  root  (§  lo.  a),  A  few  whose 
root-vowel  is  i  follow  the  analogy  of  the  others :  as,  indic-is,  index. 

8  In  nix,  nivis,  the  nominative  retains  a  palatal  lost  in  the  other  cases  (original 
stem  snig-,  compare  {  15.  and  ninfirit,  §  146.  a).  Supellex  (-ectilis)  is  partly  a 
lingual-,  partly  an  i-stem.  Of  apparent  s-stems  in  I-atin,  &s  (assis)  is  an  i-stem; 
and  the  original  stem  of  OS  (ossis)  is  osti-  (cf.  o<rr4op  and  Sanskrit  as/At), 
Original  s-stems  have  either  (i)  passed  into  r-stems  (changed  from  8  (§  11.  a.  i)) 
in  most  of  the  cases,  as  honor,  -Oris,  corpus,  -6ris  (see  iiguid  stems) ;  or 
(2)  have  broken  down  into  i-stems,  as  mdlSs  (c£  molestus),  nCLbSs  (Sanskrit 
Habhas)^  8ed§s  (c£  iSos),  via  (plur.  vires),  etc.,  but  vfts  keeps  its  proper  form  in 
the  nominative.  •  Common  gender,  see  }  3a 

*  The  singular  (meaning  help)  is  not  used  in  the  nominative,  except  as  the  name 
of  a  divinity.    The  dative  singular  occurs  but  once. 


$$  47, 48.]  Third  Declension.  27 

47.  In  like  manner  are  declined  — 

prIncepBy  -ipis  (c),  chiefs  ariSs,  -etis  (m.),  ram\ 

lapis,  -idis  (m.),  stone i  iudez,  -icis  (}&'),  Judge; 

custosy  -5dis  {c,),  guard;  corniz,  -icis  (f.),  raven; 

comesy  -itiB  (c),  companion;  poSma,  -atis  (jti.),poem  (§  47.  b). 

a.  Many  apparent  mute-stems,^  having  the  genitive  plural  in  -inm, 
are  to  be  classed  with  i-stems  (§  54) . 

b.  Greek  neuters  (as  poSma),  with  nominative  singular  in  -a, 
frequently  end  in  the  dative  and  ablative  plural  in  -is,  and  in  the  gen- 
itive plural  rarely  in  -drum. 

c.  A  few  nouns  apparent  i-stems  belong  here :  cania,  or.CKnSs,  gen. 
canis  (stem  orig.  can-),  dog, 

2.    Liquid-Stems. 

48.  In  nouns  whose  stem  ends  in  a  Liquid  (l,  n,  r),  the 
nominative  is  the  same  as  the  stem,  except  when  modified 
as  follows: — 

a.  Stems  in  5n-  (m.  and  F.)  drop  n  in  the  nominative :  as  in  leon-is, 
leo,  lion;  legion-is,  legio,  legion, 

b.  Stems  in  din-  or  gin-  (mostly  feminine)  drop  n  and  keep  an 
original  6  in  the  nominative :  as,  virgin-is,  virgo,  maiden.  Also  a  few 
others:^  as,  homin-is,  hom5,  man;  turbin-is,  turbd,  whirlpool; 
ApoUin-is,  ApoUS ;  carn-is,  C3xo,/lesk  (see  §  61) ;  AniSn-is,  Anio. 
Most  other  stems  in  In-  have  e  and  retain  n:  as,  cornicin-is, 
comicen  (m.),  horn-blower;  carmin-is,  carmen  (n.),  song,^ 

c.  Stems  in  tr-  have  -ter  in  the  nominative:  as,  patr-is,  pater, 
father;  mStr-is,  mtter,  mother,^ 

d.  Many  neuter  stems  in  er-  and  or-  (originally  s-stems)  have  -ns  in 
the  nominative:  as,  oper-is,  opus,  work;  corpor-is,  corpus,  body. 
Some  stems  in  er-  have  -is :  as,  ciner-is,  cinis,  ashes, 

A  few  masculine  and  feminine  stems  have  the  nominative  in  -s  as  well 
as -r:  as,  hon5r-is,  hon5s  (or  honor);  arb6r-is,  arb5s  (or arbor),  tree.^ 

Note,— For  some  irregular  nominatives  of  this  kind,  see  §  50, 

1  That  is,  as  would  appear  from  the  nominative. 

2  All  these  had  originally  5  in  the  stem. 

*  These  differences  are  inherited  from  the  parent  speech,  and  depend  upon  dif- 
ferent modifications  of  the  same  original  vowel  ($  10). 

*  These,  no  doubt,  had  originally  ter-  in  the  stem,  but  this  had  become  weak- 
ened to  tr-  in  some  of  the  cases  even  in  the  parent  speech.  In  Latin  only  the  nom. 
and  voc.  sing,  show  the  e.  But  cf.  M&rspitris  and  Mfirspiteris  (M&(r)s-piter). 

<  See  Note  2,  page  26. 


28 


Etymology:  Declension  of  Nouns.       [§§  48-50. 


e.  Stems  in  11-,  rr-  (n.)  lose  one  of  their  liquids  in  the  nominative : 
as,  farr-is»  far,  grain ;  fell-is,  fel,  gall, 

49.   Nouns  of  this  class  are  declined  as  follows :  — 


Sing 

consul  (m.). 

lion  (m.). 

maiden  (f.). 

natne  (n.). 

Stem  c5usal- 

leSn- 

Tirgin- 

nomin- 

NOM. 

c5nsul 

le5 

virg5 

nSmen 

Gen. 

consulis 

leonis 

virginis 

nominis 

DAT. 

consul! 

leonl 

virgini 

n5minl 

Ace. 

consulem 

lednem 

virginem 

n5men 

Voc. 

consul 

leo 

virg5 

n5men 

Abl.  ' 

"  consule 

le5ne 

virgine 

nomine 

Plur. 

NOM. 

consul6s 

leonSs 

virginSs 

nomina 

Gen. 

consulum 

leonum 

virginum 

nominum 

DAT. 

consulibus 

leonibus 

virginibus 

nominibns 

Ace. 

cdnsulSs 

leonSs 

virginSs 

nomina 

Voc. 

consults 

leonSs 

virginSs 

n5mina 

Abl. 

consulibus 

leonibus 

virginibus 

nominibus 

Sing. 

dody  (n.). 

race  (n.). 

ivory  (n.). 

plain  (n.). 

St.  oorpor-,  orig.  oorpos-  gener-  orig.  genets-  ebor-  ^ 

aequor- 

NOM. 

corpus 

genus 

ebur 

aequor 

Gen. 

corporis 

generis 

eboris 

aequoris 

DAT. 

corporl 

generl 

ebori 

aequori 

Ace. 

corpus 

genus 

ebur 

aequor 

Voc. 

corpus 

genus 

ebur 

aequor 

Abl. 

corpora 

genere 

ebore 

aequore 

Plur. 

NOM. 

corpora 

genera 

ebora 

aequora 

Gen. 

corporum 

generum 

ebonuu 

aequonim 

DAT. 

corporibus 

generibus 

eboribus 

aequorlbus 

Ace. 

corpora 

genera 

ebora 

aequora 

Voc. 

corpora 

genera 

ebora 

aequora 

Abl. 

corporibus 

generibus 

eboribus 

aequorlbus 

50.    In  like  manner  are  declined  — 


pater,  patris  {ia.)^ father; 
furfur,  -uris  (m.),  bran ; 
opus,  -eris  (n.),  work; 


arbor  (-6s),  -oris  (f.),  tree. 
honor  (-Ss),  -6ris  (m.),  honor. 
pignus,  -eris  or  -oris,  pledge. 


^  A  foreign  word  forced  into  the  analogy  of  tY\c  r-  ^a-')  slem^ 


§§  50-52.] 


Third  Declension, 


29 


The  following  apparently  liquid  stems  have  the  genitive  plural  in 
-ium,  and  are  to  be  classed  with  the  i-stems :  imber,  llnter,  titer, 
venter ;  fiir,  gUs,  ISr,  m&s,  mils,  [frSn]  ;  also  vlr6s  (pi.  from  vis : 
see  §  61). 

3.    Vcw-el-Stems. 

51.  Vowel-stems  of  the  Third  Declension  end  in  i-  (as 
turris,  stem  turri- ;  mare,  stem  mari-).  The  nominative, 
except  in  neuters,  is  formed  by  adding  -s  to  the  stem. 

a.  Thirty-five  nouns  change  1  to  6  in  the  nominative,^  and  many 
others  vary  between  i  and  6:  as,  cIvSs  or  civis,  citizen;  canes  or 
canis. 

b.  The  nominative  of  a  few  stems  in  bri-  and  tri-  does  not  add  -s, 
but  loses  i,  inserting  e  before  r.  These  are  imber,  linter,  uter, 
venter  (§  54,  and  of.  ager). 

c.  The  nominative  of  neuters  is  the  same  as  the  stem,  with  the 
change  of  I  to  S  (as  in  mare).  But  when  i  was  preceded  by  al  or  ar, 
the  e  was  lost,  as  in  animal  (§  53.  c),'^ 

62.   Nouns  of  this  class  are  declined  as  follows  :  - 


Sing. 

thirst  (p.). 

tower  (¥,), 

cloud  {¥,), 

seat  (n.). 

animal  (n.), 

Stem  siti- 

turrl- 

nubi- 

sedni- 

animftli- 

NOM. 

sitis 

turris 

ndbSs 

sedUe 

animal 

Gen. 

sitis 

turris 

nubis 

sedTlis 

animalis 

DAT. 

sitI 

turri 

nubi 

sedili 

animal! 

Ace. 

sitim 

turrem  (im 

)  nubem 

sedlle 

animal 

Voc. 

sitis 

turris 

nubSs 

sedlle 

animal 

Abl. 

sitI 

turre  (I) 

nube 

sedlll 

animal! 

Plur. 

NOM. 

turr6s 

nubes 

sedilia 

animalia 

Gen. 

turrium 

nubium 

sedilium 

animalium 

DAT. 

turribus 

nubibus 

sedilibus 

animalibus 

Ace. 

turris  (6s) 

nubis  (Ss) 

sedilia 

animalia 

Voc. 

turrSs 

nubSs 

sedllia 

animalia 

Abl. 

turribus 

nubibus 

sedilibus 

animalibus 

1  These  are  acInacSs,  aedes,  alcSs,  caedes,  cautSs,  cl&des,  comp&gSs, 
contasrSs.  famSs,  f§les,  fld@s  (pi.),  indoles,  lg.bes,  lues,  meles,  moles, 
ntlbSs,  palumbSs,  pr51es,  prdpSLges,  ptibes,  sedes,  saepes,  sordes, 
strftgrSs,  struSs,  subolSs,  tabSs,  torques,  tudes,  v&tes,  vehes,  vepres, 
verr§s,  vulpSs  (aedSs  has  also  nom.  aedisV 

^'Except  in  ausrur&le,   coU&re,   f Scale,   mare,  nlu^^\Q,  i^Ti'aX.t^^, 
3catsie,  tibi&le;  alve&re,  caplll&re,  cochleSLre. 


30 


Etymology :  Declension  of  Nouns,       [§§  53,  54. 


53.   Nouns  of  this  class  include:  — 

a.  Nouns  of  the  third  declension  in  -Ss  or  -is  (mostly  feminine)  or 
-e  (neuter)  having  the  same  number  of  syllables  in  the  nominative  and 
genitive  {partsyllabic), 

b.  Those  in  -er,  except  pater,  mSter,  frSter,  accipiter. 

c.  Neuters  in  -al,  -ar  (originally  neuters  of  adjectives  in  4Uis,  4Lris) 
which  have  lost  a  final  -e.^ 

64.  Many  nouns  with  apparently  consonant-stems  were 
originally  i-stems.^    These  are  — 

1.  Monosyllables  with  stem  apparently  ending  in  two  consonants: 
as,  urbs,  m5ns  (gen.  montis),  noz  (gen.  noctis),  arz;  together 
with  imber,  linter,  nter,  venter  (§  51.  b). 

2.  Stems  in  t5t-  (as  civitSs,  -Stis),*  or  in  d  or  t  preceded  by  a 
consonant  (including  participles  used  as  nouns) ;  also  the  monosyllables 
dos,  [ffaux],  fur,  glis,  lis,  mts,  mus,  niz,  [frSn],  striz,  vis,  sorobs 
(cf.  §  50). 

3.  Nouns  denoting  birth  or  abode,  having  stems  in  St-,  It-,  originally 
adjectives:  as,  Arpinas,  -&tis  (§  164.^.), with  penSt6sand  optizuStiSs 
(§  76.  2). 


They  are  thus  declined  :  - 

— 

Sing.  city{F.), 

night  (f.). 

age  (F.). 

mouse  (m.). 

shower  (lA.), 

Stem  urbi- 

nocti- 

aetSti- 

muri- 

imbri- 

NoM.  urbs 

nox 

aetSLs 

mus 

imber 

Gen.  urbis 

noctis 

aetatis 

muris 

imbris 

Dat.  urbi 

nocti 

aetati 

murl 

imbri 

Ace.  urbem 

noctem 

aetatem 

murem 

imbrem 

Voc.  urbs 

nox 

aetas 

mus 

imber 

Abl.   urbe 

nocte 

aetate 

mure 

imbre  (I) 

^  These  are  animal,  bacchanal,  bidental,  capital,  cervical,  cubital, 
lupercal,  minatal,  puteal,  quadrantal,  toral,  tribunal,  vectisral; 
calcar,  cochlear,  exemplar,  lacunar,  laquear,  lacar,  ItLminar,  lupftnar, 
palear,  pulvinar,  torcular ;  with  the  plurals  dent&lia.  front&lia,  srenu&lia, 
rS.ni&lia,  sponsalia;  altarla,  plant§.ria,  specul&ria,  t&l&ria;  also  many 
names  of  festivals  as  Saturnalia. 

2  The  i-declension  was  confused  even  to  the  Romans  themselves,  nor  was  it 
stable  at  all  periods  of  the  language,  early  Latin  having  i-forms  which  afterwards 
disappeared.  There  was  a  tendency  in  nouns  to  lose  the  i-forms,  in  adjectives  to 
gain  them.  The  nominative  plural  (-is)  was  most  thorouglily  lost,  next  the  ac- 
cusative form  (-im),  next  the  ablative  (-i);  while  the  genitive  and  accusative  plural 
(4uxn,  -Js)  were  retained  in  almost  all. 
^  These,  however,  more  commonly  have  the  gemt'ive  p\\xTa\  *\w -'osxu 


; 


§§  54-57.]  Third  Declension.  3 1 

PlUP. 

NoM.  urb6s  noctfis        aetatSs  murSs         imbr6s 

Gen.  urbiuxn  nocdum     aeta turn  (ium)  murium      imbrium 

DAT.  urbibus  noctibus     aetatibus         muribus     imbribus 

Ace.   urbls  (68)  noctis  (Ss)  aetatis  (Ss)      muris  (Ss)  imbrls  (Ss) 

Voc.  urbSs  noctSs         aetatSs  murSs         imbr6s 

Abl.  urbibus  noctibus     aetatibus         muribus     imbribus 

Note.  — The  declension  of  these  nouns  in  the  singular  differs  in  no  respect  from 
that  of  consonant-stems,  and  in  the  plural  in  no  respect  from  that  of  vowel-stems. 

55.  Vowel-stems  show  the  i  of  the  stem  in  the  follow- 
ing forms :  — 

a.  They  all  have  the  genitive  plural  in  -ium  (but  some  monosyllables 
lack  it  entirely).     For  a  few  exceptions,  see  §  59. 

b.  All  neuters  have  the  nominative  and  accusative  plural  in  -ia. 

c.  The  accusative  plural  (m.  or  f.)  is  regularly  -Is. 

d.  The  accusative  singular  (m.  or  F.)  of  a  few  ends  in  -im  (§  56). 

e.  The  ablative  singular  of  all  neuters,  and  of  many  masculines  and 
feminines,  ends  in  -i  (see  §  57). 

56.  The  regular  case-ending  of  the  accusative  singular 
of  i-stems  (m.  or  F.)  would  be  -im :  as,  sitis,  sitim  (cf.  stella, 
-am ;  servos,  -cm) ;  but  in  most  nouns  this  is  changed  to  -em 
(following  the  consonant  declension). 

a.  The  accusative  in  -im  is  found  exclusively  — 

1.  In  Greek  nouns  and  names  of  rivers. 

2.  In  bdris,  cucumis,  rSvis,  sitis,  tussis,  vis. 

3.  In  adverbs  in  -tim  (being  accusative  of  nouns  in  -tis),  as 

partim ;  and  in  amussim. 
b*  The  accusative  in  -im  is  found  sometimes  in  febris,  puppis, 
restis,  turris,  secQris,  sSmentis,  and  rarely  in  many  other  words. 

57.  The  regular  form  of  the  ablative  singular  of  i-stems 
would  be  -1:  as,  sitis,  siti;  but  in  most  nouns  this  is  changed 

to  -e. 

a.  The  ablative  in  -1  is  found  exclusively  — 

1.  In  nouns  having  the  accusative  in  -im  (§  56)  ;  also  securis. 

2.  In  the  following  adjectives  used  as  nouns :  aequSlis,  annalis, 

aqutlis,    consul&ris,    gentilis,    molSris,    primipn&ri^ 
tribulis. 
J.  In  neuters  (whose  nominative  ends  in  -e,  -al,  ^"i)  *.  ^^c.^'^X 
baccar,  iubar,  and  sometimes  (in  verse")  mare^rt^^. 


32  Etymology :  Declension  of  Nouns.       \%%  57-4^| 

b.  The  ablative  in  -I  is  found  sometimes  — 

I.  In  avis,  clSvia,  febria,  finia,  Iguia,'  imber,  n3TiB,  ovig, 
pelvis,  puppis,  BSmentia,  atrigilia,  turns. 

z.  In  the  following  adjecli^-es  used  as  nouns  :  aftlnin,  bipennls, 
caufilis,  familiaiia,  uStSIia,  ilvSIis,  aapiSaa,  tridSns, 
trii&mia,  vSofills. 

c.  The  ablative  of  famSs  is  always  famS  (5  78.  i.  e).  The  defec- 
tive milne  has  sometimes  locative  mSiiI  (§  77.  2,  e)  used  as  ablative. 

d.  Most  names  of  towns  in  -e,^as  Praeneate.  Tergeate,  —  and 
Sdracte,  a  mountain,  have  the  ablative  in  -e.     Caere  has  CaerBte. 

e.  For  canis,  see  §  47,  c. 

58.  The  regular  Nominative  plural  of  1-stems  would  be  -Is,  but  this 
is  very  rarely  found  in  nouns.  The  regular  Accusative  -la  is  common, 
but  not  exclusively  used  in  any  word.  An  old  form  for  both  cases  is 
-ffla  (diphthong). 

59.  The  following  have  -um  (not  -ium)  in  Ihe  Genitive  plural : 
canis,  iuvenlB  (originally  consonant-stems);  ambagBa,  mare  (once 
ouly,  otherivise  wanting),  volucris;  also  (sometimes)  apia,  caedSs, 
olSdSa,  mBnaia,  aSdSa,  atraSs,  aubolSs,  vStSa,  and  (very  rarely) 
patrials  in  -as,  -3.tte ;  -la,  -Itis ;  as,  ArpinSa,  Arpmatum ;  Samnla, 
Samnltum. 

4.    Irregular  Kouna. 
flO.   In  many  nouns  the  stem  is  irregularly  modified  in 
the  nominative  or  other  cases.     Thus  — 

a.  The  vowel-stems  S"^-.  8*l-i  ^^^  -8  in  Ihe  nominative,  and  are  in- 
flected like  mute-stems ;  grfla  has  also  a  nominative  grtiis ;  sua  has 
both  suibue  and  aubua  in  the  dative  and  ablative  plural. 

b.  In  the  stem  bov-  (bou-)  the  diphthong  ou  becomes  5  in  the 
nominative  (boa,  bfivia).  In  nBv-  (nau-)  an  1  is  added  (nSvia,  -ia). 
In  Ifiv-  (=  Z(U!)  the  diphthong  (on)  becomes  3  in  ZQ-piter  (for 
-pater),  gen.  ICvie,  etc, 

c.  In  iter,  itlneria  (k,),  iecur,  leclnorts  (n.),  aupeUez,  aupellec- 
tilia  (F.),  the  nominative  has  been  formed  from  a  shorter  stem,  in 
aenez,  aeuis  from  a  longer ;  so  that  these  words  show  a  combination  of 
two  distinct  forms.     The  shorter  form  is  found  in  the  genitive  iooor-ia. 

d.  Of  the  many  original  s-stems,  only  vfts,  vaeis  (n.)  (pi.  vSaa, 
-Brum)  (see  p.  26,  foot-note  2),  retains  its  proper  form  in  the  nomi- 
native (see  5  48.  rf). 

^^  '  Always  In  Ihe  form  ula  aquil  et  Ignl  Interdict  (^  m-  b>  . 


[  61.   Some  peculiar  forms 


s  thus  declined  :  — 

:^(F.J. 


bovem 

bove 


(u.).^ishiY.\boni{n.).  for. 
E      cars  OB  via 

carnia  ossis         via  (rare) 


rnibua     ossibus   vtiibus 


(sulbus) 


caiih 
N,,  A.,V.  bovBa        senfia 

b.,  Adl.  boboB      senibua    < 
(bubuB) 

5.    Case  Forms. 
62,   The  Locative  form  for  nouns  of  the  third  declen- 
sion ends  in  the  singular  in  -I  or  -e :  as,  rOri,  in  the  country; 
ICarthaglnl  or  Cartbagfne,  at  Carthage ;  in  the  plural  iu  -ibua : 
^a5,  TrallibuB,  at  Trailes. 
Note.— The  Locative  siDgular  in  -o  appears  lo  have  been  first  used  in  poeHy. 
I      a.  An  old  ablative  is  found  ending  in  -d :  as,  oonventiBnld,  dictS- 
Mred  (cf.  praedfid,  §  36,/;  Gnaivfid,  §  i,a.g\  maeilatratad,  g  70.  ky 
6.    Greeh  Forma. 
I     63.    Many    nouns    originally    Greek  —  mostly    proper 
^arnes  —  retain  Greek  forms  of  inflection. 
a.  Steins   in   in-  (i  long)  :    delphiniia,  -I  (m.),  has  also  Ihe  form 
delpbin,  -Inie ;  Salamb,  -is  (f.),  has  ace.  Salamiua. 

b.  Most  stems  in  Id-  (nonn.  -is)  often  have  also  the  forms  of  i-. 
as,  tieriB.  -Idia  (-idoa)  or  -is ;  ace.  -Idem  (-Ida)  or  -im  (-In)  ;  abl.  -Ida 
or  -t  But  many,  including  mosi  feminine  proper  names,  have  ; 
-idem  (-ida),  abl.  -ide,  —  not  -im  or  -T.  (These  stems  are  irregular  also 
in  Greek.) 

c.  Stems  in  on-  sometimes 
nSn  (or  AEamemnS).  -Snis,  accusative  -dna. 

d.  Slems  in  out-  form  the  nom,  ir 
but  a  few  are  occasionally  Latinized 

e.  Stems  in  ant-,  eat-,  have  the  nom.  in -Ss, -Is:  asadainas, -antla; 
Simols,  -entis.  So  a  few  in  fiiit-  (contracted  from  oBiit-^  l\3"ie  -iii 
as,  Trapeaas,  -SntiB.    Occasi'on.iily  the  Latin  form  of  iioni\T\a.>i."Jt 

AOSaa,  eSephSaa.  as  well  as  AtlSs,  eXepliSia. 


i.%.  Again  enir 

I,  borizSa,  Xenophfin; 
I- (nom.  -S):  as,  Draco, 


mAun 


Etymology  :  Declension  of  Non 


f.  Many  Greek  nouns  (especially  in  the  poets)  have  gen.  -6b,  art.  -S; 
plur.  nom.  .£b,  ace.  -&b:  as.  3Sr,  aethSr,  cr&tST,  heios  (-ois).  lampas 


■  -066),  nSIs  (-idOB),  Orphet 


-ya.  ' 

■y,  -ye. 


,  chelya,  -yn. 


(-5dlB  or  -&dOB),  lynx  (-< 

see  §43)- 

g.  A  few  in  -yd  have  act 
-y ;  CapyB,  -yos,  -yl.  -yn, 

h.  Several  feminine  names  in  -6  have  gen.  sing,  -fia,  all  the  other 
eases  ending  in  -o ;  they  may  also  have  regular  forms :  as,  Dido,  gen. 
DldSniB  or  DidfiB ;  dat.  Didoui  or  Dido,  etc. 

i.  Several  Greek  forms  are  irregularly  retained  in  the  vocative;  as, 
Panthas,  voc.  PanthQ  ;  Orpheua,  Orplieu ;  AtlaB,  Atla ;  Daplinis, 
Daphnl;  PericlSa,  PeticlS  {cf  §43). 


64.   Some   of   these  forms 

are   seen  in   the   following 

examples :  — 

Sing.  heroiyL.).  torch[Y.). 

basc(Y.y 

tigeriC).  na 

iad{Y.).fyre{Y.). 

Si'EU  hErS-   lampad- 

baitl- 

liSrld-  (tigri-) 

nald-        cHely- 

N.,  V.  herOs        lampaa 

baaiB 

tigrls 

nSia       chelys 

Gen.    herotB       lam  pad  oa 

baseSa 

tigrls(ido» 

naidos  

Dat.    herol         lam  pad! 

basi 

tign 

naidl     

ACC.    heroa        lam  pad  a 

basin 

tigrin(ida) 

naida    chelyn 

Abl.    he  roe        lampade 

basI 

tigrt(ide) 

naido(V.chely) 

Plur. 

N.,  V.  heroiB      lamijadfiB 

basSa 

ligrSB 

naidSa 

Gen,    heroum    lampadun 

1    basium  ( 

e5n)  tigrium 

naidnm         J 

D.,A.'her6ibuB  lampadib 

ua  basibuB 

tigribuB 

naidibuB       % 

Acc.    hcroSB      lampadSa 

basiB  (ei 

a  J       tigriB(idaB 

naidfiB            1 

NOM.   Atiaa           Dido 

SimolB         Capya 

DaptmiB       1 

Gen.    Atlantia        Didoni 

(OS)      Siraoentia     Capvoa 

Daphnidla    1 

DAT.    Atlantl         Didoni 

(5)          .SimoentI      Capjl 

DaphnidI     ^ 

Acc.    Atlanta        DIdone 

m  (6)     Simoenta      Capyn 

Daphnim  (in) 

Voc.    Atlas  (a)      Dido 

Sin 

ois           Capy 

Daphnl 

Abl.    Atlante         Did  one 

(6J         Simoente      Capye 

Daphni 

Note.  —  The  regular  Lalin 

fonns  can  be 

used  (or  U10SI  D(  th 

e  above. 

7.    Rules  of  Gender. 

65.  The  following  are  general  Rules  for  the  Gender  of 
notins  of  the  third  declension,  classed  according  to  the 
termination  of  the  nominative. 


'  Is  65,  66.]  TMrd  Declension. 

a.  Masculine  endings  are  -6,  -or,  -oa,  -er.  -So  (gen,  -Idis,  -Itia). 

b.  Feminine  endings  are  -Sa  (gen.  -atia),  -6h  (gen.  -i»),  -i«,  -ys,  -j 
■  (following  a  consonant)  ;  also.  -do.  -go,  (gen.  -inia),  -16  (abstrai 

I  and  collective),  and  -ila  (gen.  -iidia.  -titia). 

c.  Neuter  endings  are  -a,  -e,  -I,  -y ;  -o,  -1,  -t ;   -men  (gen.  -mlols)  a 
i-sr,  -ur,  -tU  (gen.  -eria,  -oris}. 

66.   The  following  are  general  Rules  for  the  Gender 
l:nouns  of  the  third  declension,  classed  according  to  their steiTts, 

.  Vowel-Stems.  —  Stems  in  i-,  having  -a  in  the  nomin 
t  Feminine,   except  those   mentioned  below   (g  67,  a).     Those  having 
B  in  the  nominative  and  those  in  'Ol  and  -ar  (which  have  dropped 
he  -o)  are  neuter. 

b.  Liquid-Stems.  —  Stems  in  1-  are  Masculine,  except  an,  UiL,  niel,v 
nd  sometimes  851  (n.).  j 

Those  in  mtn-  are  Neuter,  except  homS,  nfimo,  ft&men  (m.).  Others 
in  in-  are  masculine,  except  pollen,  unguen  (n.).  Those  in  §n-  are 
masculine.  Those  in  din-,  gin-,  ion-,  abstract  and  collective  nouns,  are 
feminine.  Others  in  fin-,  with  oardo,  margo,  ordS,  ilnio,  afinifi, 
quatemio.  are  masculine. 

Those  in  r-  preceded  by  a  short  vowel  are  Neuter,  except  about 
30  given  below  (§  67.  b).  Those  in  r-  preceded  by  a  long  vowel  are 
masculine,  except  soror,  uxor,  glos,  telllia  (f.)  ;  crCa,  IQa,  pOs,  rOa, 
tfia  (Uifla)  (n.),  in  which  the  long  vowel  is  due  to  contraction. 

c.  Labiai,  Stems  (no  neuters). —  Stems  in  b-  and  m-  are  Feminine, 
except  chalyba.  Stems  in  p-  are  chiefly  masculine  (exceptions  helow, 
S  67.  c), 

d.  Lingual  Stems.  —  Stems  in  Sd-,  6d-,  id-,  fld-,  aud-,  nd-,  are 
Femmine.  except  dromaa,  vae  (vadis),  pSs,  quadrupSs.  obaaa, 
piaeaes,  lapis  (m.).  Those  in  9t-,  ut-,  are  feminine,  except  patrials 
(as  AtpInSs),  and  the  masc.  plur.  penStea  and  optim3tSB.  Those  in 
8d-,  St-,  are  masculine,  except  merces  and  quiSa  with  its  compounds 
(f.).  Those  in  6t-,  It^,  are  masculine,  except  abiSa,  merges,  eegea, 
teges  (f.),  and  those  which  are  common  by  signification.  Those  in 
at-  are  neuter;  those  in  nt-  various  (see  list,  §  67.  rf);  those  in  It-,  I 
rt-,  feminine.    (For  a  few  isolated  forms,  see  list,  §  67.)  j 

e.  Palatal  Stems.  —  Stems  in  c-  preceded  by  a  consonant  or  long 
vowel  are  Feminine,  except  oalx,  decunz,  phoeniz,  atorax,  vervSz 
(m.).  Those  in  o-  preceded  by  a  short  vowel  are  chiefly  TWisoiwe  (Iot 
eiceptions,  see  list,  §  67.  e);  those  in  g-i  masculme,  cxte^V  V\liax\, 

\Jfix,  pbBJmnx,  syrinx;  also  nix  fnivis)  (f.).  J| 


I 


36  Etymology :  Declension  of  Noufis. 

67.   The  following  are  the  Forms  of  Inflection  of  nouns 
of  the  Third  Declension,  classed  according  to  their  Stems: 


3.  VOWEL-STEMS. 

e  list,§si.c),  feminiiK 


except  tttdis,  votes. 


-8b,  -!lfl :  about  35  nouns  (s 
■verris,  M. 

A%,  -la :   about  loo  nouns,  chiefly  feminine,  as  ftii!,  pelUs- 

Exc.  —  aediiis,amnis,  anguis,  C.,anaSlis,  antis  (pi.),  assis,  axis, 
bUris,  callis,  c,  candUs,  c,  cams,  c,  cassis,  caulis,  ctvts,  c.,  clsm's, 
c,  collis,  crfnis,  c,  insis,/ascis,fims,  c,foUis,  funis,  c.,fustis, 
Aostis,  C,  ignis,  iuvenis,  C-,  lae/is  (pL),  C,  iares  (pi.),  manes  (pi.), 
Minsis,  molSris,  ndtalis,  arbis,  pSnis,  pedis,  C,  piscis,  poslis, 
sentis,  c,  sodalis,  testis,  c,  terris,  unguis,  vectis,  ueprls  (pi.),  c, 
vermis,  M.  [Those  marked  c.  are  sometimes  feminine ;  the  rest 
are  masculine.] 

-S,  -is :  upwards  of  20  nouns,  all  neuter,  as  mare,  cubile. 

-SI,  -Uia ;  -&r,  -Sria :  34  neuter,  with  several  used  only  in  the  plural,  as 
animal,  SSturnalia  (see  list,  §  53.  e;  for  those  in  -5r,  -SriB,  see 
Liquid  Stems). 

-er, -lis  ;   imber,  linler,  ater,  venter, — all  M.  except  linter,  which  is 

commoniy  f.    [For  other  apparently  consonant  stems,  see  below.] 

Peculiar.  — griis,  gruis,  f.  ;  rkils,  rhois  (ace  rium),  m.  ;  sUs, 

suis,  C,  ^irds,  hirdis,  M. ;  misy,  -yas,  f.  ;  orys,  -yos,  f.  ;  cinnabarf, 

gummt,  sinipr,  N.  (indecl.)  ;  chilys,  -yn,  -y,  F. ;  b6s,  boms,  c. 


b.    LIQUID-STEMS. 

US,  masculiue,  as  cdnsul,  sSt,  except  sll,  and  (sometii 


.fin,  .«iii»:   [^rinl,  spUn,  K. 
-eo, -fiula:   Hymen,  K. 


,  as   tiblcen;   except  palUn.  unguen,  giiiUn, 


1 


tanguen 


ns,  N. ;  hni^ainen,  m. 
;  aedoH,  alcysn,  ancOii, 


;  with  many  femily 


-mSo,  -mlnla  (verbal),  as  agmen ;   about  60  nc 
-fin,  -6nla  (Greek)  ;  caiidn,  daemon,  gnomon,  i 

sinddn,  F. 
-C, -61118;   about  70  nouns,  all  masculine,  as  j 

-IB,  -ISnia  (material  objects,  etc.),  a&pugio:  about 30 nouns, masculine, 
-ifl, -iOnIa  (abstract  and  collective),  as   legio,  regie:   upwards  of  180, 
feminine,  including  many  rare  verbal  abstracts, 
j^  -4  iCbZb.-  Amv/},  (uriS,  Mdmo,  ApollS,  m.  ^^^^^ 


§  67.]  Third  Declension,  37 

-d6,  -dinis :  nearly  50  nouns,  as  grandd,  feminine  except  cardd,  drdo,  M. 

-g6,  -ginis :  about  40  nouns,  as  compdgd^  feminine ;  with  margd,  m.  or  f. 

-ar,  -iriB :   baccar,  iubar^  nectar^  N. ;  Idr,  salar,  M. 

-€r,  -riB :   accipUer^  f rater ^  pater ^  M.,  mater,  F. 

-6r,  -§ri8  (mostly  Greek)  :   crater^  halter,  prester,  M.,  ver^  N. 

-6r,  -^ris :   der,  aether,  M. 

-Sr,  -^ris :  acipenser,  agger,  dnser,  asser,  aster,  cancer,  career,  later, 
passer,  vesper,  vomer,  m.  ;  mulier,  f.  ;  acer,  caddver,  cicer, 
laver,  papdver,  piper,  slier,  siser,  suber,  tuber,  tuber,  fiber, 
verber,  N. 

-6s,  -€riB :    Ceres,  f. 

-Is,  -^ris :   cinis,  cucumis,  pulvis,  vomis,  M. 

-dr  (-6s),  -oris ;  nearly  70  nouns  (besides  many  denoting  the  Agent, 
formed  upon  verb-stems),  as  favor,  orator,  all  M.  except  soror, 
uxor^  F. 

-dr,  -dris :   castor,  rhetor,  M. ;  arbor,  F. ;  ador,  aequor,  marmor,  N. 

-5s,  -5ri8 :  flos,  mos,  ros,  M. ;  glos,  F. ;  os,  N. 

-tir,  -Oris :  fur,  C. 

-fir,  -iiris :  9  masculine,  as  vultur;  vfiihfulgur,  guttur,  murmur,  sul- 
fur, N. 

-ttr,  -dris :   ebur^  femur,  iecur,  rdbur  (-us),  N. 

-tUi,  -^ris :    20  neuter,  as  genus ;  also,  Venus,  f. 

-tts,  -dris :    14  nouns,  as  pectus,  neuter,  except  lepus,  m. 

-fls,  -flris :   mus,  m.  ;  tellus,  F. ;  crils,  ius,  pus,  rils,  tus  (thus)  N. 

Peculiar. — Anio,  -ienis;  delphln,  -fnis;  sanguis  {-en), -Ms; 
senex,  senis,  m.  ;  card,  carnis,  F. ;  aes,  aeris ;  far,  f arris ;  fel, 
fellis;  mel,  mellis;  iter,  itineris;  iecur,  iecindris  (iecoris),  N. ; 
glis,  gliris,  M . 

C.   LABIAL. 

-bs,  -bis :  chalybs,  M. ;  plebs,  trabs,  urbs,  F.;  scobs,  scrobs,  c.^ 
-ms,  -mis :  hiems  (often  written  hiemps),  f. 

-ps,  -pis:  15  nouns,  masculine,  as  prfnceps;  except  \_]daps'\,  merops, 
ops,  stips,  F. ;  forceps,  stirps,^  c. 

d,  LINGUAL. 

-Ss,  -&dis  (mostly  Greek) :    14  nouns,   feminine,   as  lampas ;  except 

dromas,  vas,  M. 
-€s,  -Sdis :   cupes,  hires,  M. ;  merces,  f.  ;  also,  praes,  praedis. 
-Ss,  -Sdis :  pes^  quadrupes,  m.  ;  compes,  F. 
-^8,  -Idis  :   obses,  J>raeses,  c. 

1  These  five  were  originally  1-stems.  2  OngiiiaWv  \-s\euv. 


38  Etymology:  Declension  of  Nouns. 

-Is,  -idi» :    nearly  40  nouns  (mostly  Greelt),  as  cassh,  aegt 

-iH,  -Sdis :   cuslds,  C. 

•6b,  -dtda  :    ttepds,  m.  ;  c6s,  dos,  f.  ;  sacerdos,  c. 

-Uh,  --QdiB  :    inciis,  paliis,  subsciis;  with/rauj,  laus,  pec&s  (^Udis),  1 

^  -Stia  (Creek)  :    nearly  20  nouns,  neuter,  a^  poenia. 

-Sb, -atiB:   about  zo   (besides  derivatives),   m.,  satiSs,  p.;  also,  d 

(-«"),  c. 
-as,  -StdB ;   «i?j,  lebis,  ntSgnls,  M. ;  p«i'Jj,  reqiiies,  inguies,  f, 
-6b,  -«tlB :   aries,  paries,  M. ;  abiis,  F. 
■6a,  -SUB :   seges,  leges,  f.  ;  inlerpres,  C, 
-Sb,  -lUa :  about  20,  masculine  or  common,  as  stipes,  hosfies. 
-fta,  -GtU :   iu-vsiitus,  salas,  seneclSs,  servilSs,  virtSs,  P. 
-hb,  -Qdis :  frons,  glans,  iuglans,  f. 
-na,  -ntfa :    nearly  20  (besides  many  participles  used  as  nouns),  ( 

mon,  as  infans ;  dens,  Jons,  m6as,  pons,  m.  ;  frdns,  gfns,  lins, 

-ra,  -rtia  (originally  i-stems) :    ars,  pars,   cohors,  fors.  Mars,    mors, 

-fa,  .^dlB  ;  -B,  -ntia  (Greek)  :   cklamys,  v. ;  Atlas,  -antis,  m. 

PECULlAa.  —  as,  assis,  m.  ;  l(s,  litis  ;  nox,  Hontis  ;  puis,  pultis, 
F. ;  caput,  -itis ;  car,  cordis ;  kipar,  -atis ;  Us,  ossis ;  vds,  vasts,  N. ; 
also,  compounds  of  -pus,  -pddts,  M.,  (foot),  as  tripus ;  lac,  lactis,  n. 

e.  PALATAL. 
-ax,  -Sola :  anthrax,  cerax,fracis  (pi.),  panax,  scalopax,  m.  |  fax,  styrax 

(star ax'),  P. 
-fix,  -&oiB  :   cnSddx,  cordax,  limSx,  thdrdx,  m.  ;  pax,  f. 
-ex,  -Sois :   sUx,  M.  or  F. ;  vervix,  M. 
-ex,  -Icis :  upwards  of  40  nouns,  masculine,  as  apex,  vertex,  except 

carex,  farfex,  flex,  imbrex,  nex  ijiicis),  peliex,  f.  (imbrexUsa  h.) 
-ix,  -Icia  ;  appendix,  coxendlx,  ftlix,  fornix,  larix,  salix,  sfruix,  vSrtx,  F. 
-Ix,  -Icis :  about  30  nouns,  feminine,  as  cervix,  rSdfx;  besides  many 

in  -trix,  regular  feminines  of  nouns  of  agency  in  -tor  (§  162.  a). 
-53E,  -Sols :   celdx,  7/dx.  f.  ~H 

-ux,  -fiols :   dux,  c. ;  crux,  nux,  f.  ^H 

-tkx,  'Hols  :    dalii.r,  lux,  f.  ^H 

■X,  -qis;   arx,  calx,falx,  lynx,  3nerx(de{.),  f.  ;  calx,  calyx,  M.  B 

-x,-giB:   conirix{-nx),grcx,  rimex  (gea.-igis),  rex,  M.  ore;  [ifrSx] 

(def.),  lex,  phalanx,  p.;  with  a  few  rare  names  of  animals. 

Otier  nouns  in  -x  are  n/x,  nivis:  nox,  noclis;  supelUx,-€cliUs,  e.\  onyx, 

k  ^«r*>,  ST.  and  F. ;  S/yx,  Stygis,  F.  j 


§§  6a-70.] 


Fourth  Declension, 


39 


FOURTH    DECLENSION. 

68.  The  Stem  of  nouns  of  the  Fourth  Declension  ends 
in  n-.  This  is  usually  weakened  to  i  before  -bus.  Mascu- 
line and  feminine  nouns  form  the  nominative  by  adding  -a ; 
neuters  have  for  nominative  the  simple  stem,  but  with  tl 
(long). 

Nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  are  declined  as  follows: — 


kand(¥.). 

lake  (m.). 

knee  (n.). 

Sing. 

Stem  luanu- 

laca- 

grenu- 

NOM. 

manus 

lacus 

genfl 

Gen. 

mantis 

lactls 

genfl  (fls) 

DAT. 

manui  (fl) 

lacul  (fl) 

genfl 

Ace.  , 

Voc. 

Abl. 

• 

manum 

lacum 

genfl 

manfi 

lacfl 

genfl 

Plur. 

NOM. 

mantis 

lacfls 

genua 

Gen. 

manuum 

lacuum 

genuum 

DAT. 

manibus 

lacubus 

genibus 

Ace. 

mantis 

lacfls 

genua 

Voc. 

ma^fig^ -" 

fa€fla      ■ 

''"**'->•«,  SSiOSU^"^'^ 

Abl. 

manibus 

lacubus 

srenibus 

Note. — The  fourth  declension  is  only  a  modified  form  of  the  third.  The  rela- 
tion is  seen  in  the  following  parallel  forms,  uncontracted  (of  the  third)  and  con- 
tracted (of  the  fourth). 


mauus 

tmanuis  (fls) 
manul  (fl) 
manuzn 
manus 

fmanue  (fl) 


manutis  (fls) 
manuum  (um) 
manubus  (ibus) 
fmanues  (fls) 
tmanues  (fls) 
manubus  (ibus) 


69.  Gender. — a.  Most  nouns  in -us  are  Masculine.  The  following 
are  Feminine :  acus,  anus,  colus,  domus,  idus  (pi.),  manus,  nurus, 
porticus,  quinqu&trfls  (pi.),  socrus,  tribus,  with  a  few  names  of 
plants  and  trees.    Also,  rarely,  arcus,  penus,  specus. 

b.  The  only  neuters  are  cornu,  genu,  pecfl  (§  78.  i.  e),  verfl. 

70.  Case-Forms.  —  a.  The  uncontracted  form  -uis  (sorsve.tkcvt's* 
-uos)  is  sometimes  found  in  the  genitive,  as  Ben€Ltu.ott\  ^xi*^  "aca  ^^'^ 

(Irregular)  genitive  in  -I  is  used  by  some  writers ;  as,  oxiA^.,  %exLVa.. 


40  Etymology:  Declension  of  Nouns.        [SS  '0-1 


i.  The  nominative  plural  has  rarely  the  form  -uus. 

c.  The  genitive  plural  is  sometimes  contracted  into  -' 

d.  The  following  retain  the  regular  dative  and  ablative  plural 
-fiboB :  artUB,  partus,  portnis,  tribuB,  -vers  -  also  dissyllables  in  -ona : 
as,  laons  (but  sometimes  portibua,  veribua). 

e.  Most  names  of  plants,  and  coIub,  distaff,  have  also  forms  of  the 
second  declension. 

/.  Domaa,  Anuj-^,  has  (either  origiaally,  or  bj  mistake)  two  stems  end' 
log  in  n-aod  o-  (cf  gen.  in  -I,  §  fo.  a),  and  is  declined  as  follows:' — 


NOM. 

domua 

domuB 

Gen. 

domOs  (doml.  loc.) 

domnum  (domiSrum) 

DAT. 

domui  (domO) 

domibuH 

Ace. 

domum 

domSs  (domSs) 

Voc. 

Ael. 

domes  (doma) 

g.  The  only  locative  form  of  the  fourth    declension  is  domi 
But  even  this  is  rare,  and  doml  is  almost  universally  used  instead. 

h.  An  old  form  of  the  ablative  ends  in  -d :  as,  magiatriltftd  (cf.  g 
62.  a). 

71 .  Most  nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  are  formed  from  verb- 
Ktems,  or  roots,  by  means  of  the  suffix  -tua  (^ua)  (cf.  §  163.  t)  :  as, 
oantaa,  song,  ca:j,  can3,  sing;  casus  (for  ead-tna),  chance.  CAD, 
oado,  fall;  exsulStus,  exils,  from  exsulC,  tti  be  an  exile  (exaul). 
Many  are  formed  either  from  verb-stems  not  in  use,  or  by  analogy :  as, 
cdnaiilB.tus  (as  if  from  fcfinsulS,  -3re),  senStus,  inoeatua. 

a.  The  Supines  of  verbs  (§  109.  e)  are  the  accusative  and  abladve 
(or  dative,  perhaps  both)  of  derivatives  in  -tua  (-aua)  ;  as,  audttum, 
memo  rata. 

b.  Of  many  verbal  derivatives  only  the  ablative  is  used  as  a  noun ; 
as,  lHaafl  (meS),  by  (»y)  command;  so  inlfiaau  (populi),  without  (the 
people's)  order.     Of  some  only  the  dative ;  as,  memoiStuI,  divlaul. 

FIFTH  DECLENSION. 

72.  The  Stem  of  nouns  of  the  Fifth  Declension  ends  in 
§-,  which  appears  in  all  the  cases.  The  nominative  is 
formed  from  the  stem  by  adding  -b. 


I 


Fifth  Dedcns 
e  thus  declined  •- 


|t§  72-74.] 
These  r 
i\-S.a.lhag  (F.)  PLUR.                SING,  day  (M.)  PLUR.  /uf^ 

Stem  tS-                                           die-  fldi 

NoM.      tSb             I  5b                 digs           difis  Gd{ 

Gen.      rSI              i6ium            diSI  (diS)   difinim  HdS 

DAT.      r«              TBbuB             diei(die>   diebuB  fide 

Ace.        rem             rSs                    diem            diSa  fid  a 

Jtee. — cfe rt» ^ difc-^ *s« fids 
Abl.       tB                 rebua              difl               di6tnia  fidfi 

Note,  — The  6  has  been  shortened  in  the  genilive  and  dative  singular  o 
8p59,  res.  bul  in  Ibese  il  is  found  long  in  eariy  Latin. 

73.  Gekoer.  —  All  nouDs  of  this  declension  are  feminine, 
diSs  (usually  M.),  day,  and  merldiSa  (m.),  noon.     Di3a  is  sometimes 
feminine  in  the  singular,  especially  in  phrases  indicating  a  fixed  time, 
and  regularly  feminine  when  used  of  time  in  general :  as,  longa  dtSa, 
a  long  time;  cSnatitata  die,  on  a  set  day;  also  in  the  poets ; 
pnlcbra  di6a,  a  fine  day. 

7-4.  Case-Forms. — a.  The  Genitive  singular  anciently  ended 
-Sa  (cf.  -fifl  of  first  declension,  §  36.  b).  The  genitive  ending  -H  waBi 
sometimes  contracted  into  -S,  -I,  or  -6 :  as,  dil  (.^n.  i,  636),  and  the 
phrases  piebi-ecitam,  tribiUius  plgbgl.  An  old  Dative  in  -I  or  -B  also 
is  mentiouEd  by  grammarians, 

b.  The  fifth  declension  is  only  a  variety  of  the  first,  and  several 
nouns  have  forms  of  both :  as,  materia,  -iSe ;  saevitda,  -ies.^  The 
genitive  and  dative  in  -SI  are  rarely  found  in  these  words, 

c.  The  Locative  form  of  this  declension  ends  in  -B  (cf.  dative  -8 
under  a).  It  is  found  only  in  certain  adverbs  and  expressions  of  time : 
as,  hodiS  (for  hoi-diS,  cf  hulc),  to-day;  perendiB,  day  after  to-mor- 
row; diB  quarts  (old,  quaiH),  the  fourth  dayi  piidiS,  the  day 
before. 

d.  Of  nouns  of  the  fifth  declension,  diSa  and  rBa  only  are  declined 
throughout.  Most  want  the  plural,  which  is,  however,  found  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative  in  the  following:  aciSa,  effiglBs,  eluvieB, 
faciSs,  glaciSa,  ssriEa,  apeciBs.  ap6a.^ 

1  jNouns  in  -tSa  (excepi  dies)  a 

1(eicepting   rSe)    corrupted    a-stcm 
OlurnuB;  &pS9  (cf.  sperS).    Som< 
iron  :  as.  requiSa,  satlSs  (satlAs,  gen,  -fitis),  plebSs  (plSba,  plSbis),  ram€ 
(famfia,  gen.  -Ib), 
^Tbe  farms  facISruin.  specierum,  speciSllua,  BpBrwm.,  bb^^'^'^*i  *^ 
flat  bygrammariaiis,  also  apSres,  spSribua.  j 


1 


1 

les  ^^™ 

SB, 

m 


43  Etymology :  Declension  of  Nouns.       \%%  75,  76. 

DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 

75.  Some  nouns  are  ordinarily  found  in  the  Singular 
number  only  {singuldria  tantitm).     These  are  — 

1 .  Most  proper  names :  as,  Gaeear,  Casar  y  Gallia,  Gaul. 

2.  Names  of  things  not  counted,  but  reckoned  in  mass :  as,  aurum, 
golii;  aSr,  air;  trltioum,  wheat. 

3-  Abstract  nouns:  as,  ambitiS,  ambiiiotti  foxtitiid6,  courage; 
calor,  heat. 

But  many  of  these  are  used  in  the  plural  in  some  other 
sense.     Thus  — 

a.  A  proper  name  may  be  applied  to  two  or  more  persons  or  places, 
or  even  things,  and  so  become  strictly  common :  as,  dnodeoini 
CaBBaiBa,  tht  ivielve  Cissarsf  Oalliae,  tke  tim  Gauk  (Cis-  and  Trans- 
alpine) ;  CaatBtBa,  Castor  and  Pollux;  lovfie,  images  of  Jupiier. 

b.  Particular  objects  may  be  denoted :  as,  aera,  bronze  utensils,  ulvSa, 
snowflakes;  ordifferent  kinds  of  a  tiling;  as,  aerSB,a/yj  (good  and  bad). 

c.  The  plural  of  abstract  nouns  denotes  occasions  or  instances  of  the 
quality,  or  the  like  i  as,  quaedam  esoeUentiae,  some  cases  of  superi- 
ority ;  otia,  periods  of  rest;  calSrSa,  ftigora,  limes  of  heat  and  cold. 

76.  Some  nouns  are  commonly  found  only  in  the  Plural 
{plur&lia  tanttim  (cf .  §  79.  c)).     Such  are  — 

I.  Many  proper  cames:  as,  AtbSnae,  Athens,  ThQiiT,  PMlippI, 
vail,  names  of  towns,  Adelphoe  {Tlie  Adelphi),  the  name  of  a  play; 
but  especially  names  of  festivals  and  games :  as,  Olympia,  the  Olympic 
Games;  Bacchanalia,  yfoj-/  of  Bacchus;  QuiuqultrOa,  festival  of 
Minerva ;  IfldI  RSmanl,  lie  Roman  Games. 

■2.  Names  of  classes:  as,  optimatSs,  the  upper  classes;  mSiSrCe, 
ancestors;  llberl,  children ;  penatBB,  household  gads. 

3.  Words  plural  by  signification :  as,  aLtma, iveapaas ;  ai^^, Joints; 
divitiae,  riches;  HoSlae.  stairs;  -vairiAe,  folding-doors;  forfis,  double- 

These  often  have  a  corresponding  singular  in  some  form 
or  other,  as  noun  or  adjective. 

a.  As  noun,  to  denote  a  single  object :  as,  Bacohanal,  a  spot  sacred 
to  Bacchus ;  optimSs,  an  aristocrat. 

6.  As  adjective :  as,  CatO  Maior,  Cato  the  sillier. 
■    IT.  la  a  sense  rare,  or  found  only  in  early  Lalin  ■.  as,  AcUa.,  a 
vslva,  aaivr;  artaa,  ajoini. 


77.]  Defective  Nouns. 

77.    Many  nouns  are  defective  in  case-forms  :  — 


f9a,  nefas,  Instar,  neoflSie,  nUill,  opiu  J 

<}ptotes) :  as,  — 


I.  Indeclinable 
need).  BeQtu. 
3.  Nouns  found  in  one  case  only  (, 

a.  \a  the  uom.  sing.  bISb,  P. 

b.  In  the  gen.  sing,  diola,  naucl.  N. 

c.  In  the  dat.  sing.  memorStuI,  M.  (cf.  §  71.  b). 

d.  In  the  ace.  sing,  amussim,  M. 

e.  In  the  abl.  sing.  pondS,  N. ;  mane,  N'.     (Both  aUo  treat 

as  mdedioable  nouns.      Of  mane  an   old   locative   fo 
mSnl  is  found.)    iuasu,  iniassu,  m.  (g  71.  b). 

f.  In  the  acc.  plur.  InfitiSs,  suppetias. 
3.  Nouns  found  in  two  cases  only  {dipiotes). 

a.  In  the  nom.  and  ahl.  sing,  fora,  forte,  F. ;  astus,  astu.  m 

b.  In  the  gen,  and  abl.  sing,  apontia.  aponte,  f. 

c.  In  the  dat,  and  acc.  sing,  vfinul  (vEno  in  Tac),  vSnum.  i 

d.  \a  the  acc.  sing,  and  plur.  dioam,  dicSs,  F. 
and  abl,  plur.  foiSa,  forls,  F.  [cf.  fotSa). 

three  cases  only  (tripiotei). 
m.,  acc.,  and  abL  sing,  impettia,  -um,  -fl  (m.)  ; 

>.  -S  (F.). 

.,  acc,  and  dat.  or  abl.  plur.  ST^tSB,  -IbuB  (f.). 
gen.,  and  dat.  or  abl.  plur.  iugera,  -um,  -ibns 
1  the  sing.,  cf,  §  78.  I,  b). 
the  plural,    but   defective   in   the 


,   Nouns  found 

a.  In   the   1 

b.  !n  the  no 

c.  In  the  ni 

(n.,  but  ifigernm,  1 

.  Nouns   declined   regularly   i 


.  Nouns  found  In  the  sing.,  in  gen,,  dat.,  acc,  abl. :  dlciSnis, 
B  (f.)  ;  frOgia,  -I,  -em,  -e  (F,)  ;  opia,  -I  (once  only), 


b.  Nouns  found  11 
e,  Nouas  found  in 

-  (F)- 
d.  Nouns  found  i 
obioe  (c,  no 


divinity,  s 

the  dat.,  acc,  abl. :  preol,  -em,  -e  (f,). 
the  acc.  and  abL :  cassem,  -e  (f,)  ;  aordem 


the  abl.  1 


:   ambagG  (f,)  ;   fauce  (f.)  ; 
n  the  plural. 


Nouns  regular  in  the  singular,  defecdve  ii 

a.  iQs  and  tils  have  only  iura,  tuia. 

b.  oalx,  cor,  c5s,  crux,  fax,  faez,  Iflz,  nez,  Sb,  p9x,  pix, 

praes.  rSa,  sSl,  b61,  tOs  (thQa),  vaa,  want  the  genitive  plural. 
Most  noum  of  the  fifth  declension  waol  tVie  "fl^ioVt  at  ^aiX  a\. 
,tbe plural  (see  g  74.  d). 


i 


ElytMchgy:  DeileHsioH  of  Nouns.        [SS  "» 


1 


7.  Nouns  defective  in  both  siiigvbraad  plnraL 

a.  Nouns  foond  in  the  nom.,  ace  ang. ;  oom.,  ace.,  abl.  pi 

sentds,  -em ;  -Ea,  -fbtia. 

b.  Komis  found  in  the  gen.,  ace-,  abL  sing. ;  nom.,  ace.,  da.t,  abL 

plor. :  Ticis,  -em,  -e ;  -fis.  -ibiM. 

c.  Nouns   found   in  the  gen.,  dat.,  ace,  and  abl.  sing. ;  gen. 

plur.  naDtiDg:  dapis.  -L  -cm.  .e.  h 

VARIABLE    NOUNS.  H 

78.   Many  nouns  var>'  either  in  Declension  or  Gender.  1 

1.  In  Declension  {heteroclites,  notnina  abundantia). 

a.  colas  (f.),  distaff;  domos  (f.),  house  (see  §  70./),  and  many 
ames  of  plants  in  -ns,  vary  between  ttie  second  and  fourth  declensions. 

b.  Some  nouns  vary  between  tiie  second  and  third :  as,  ifigemm,  -I, 
bl.  -e,  plur.  -a,  -um,  etc  :  Mulciber.  gen.  -beil  and  -beris  ;  aequea- 
Br,  gen.  -tii  and  -tris ;  vSa,  vasis,  and  vasuin.  -I. 

c.  Some  vary  between  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  :  peoua,  penum, 
gen.  -I  and  -oria,  abl.  penC 

I.  Many  nouns  varj'  between  the  first  and  tlie  fifth  (see  §  74.  b). 
.  leqnieB  has  gen.  -Stis,  dat.  wanting,  ace.  -etem  or  .em ;  famSa  has 
abl.  fam§  (§  57.  c)-,  pKbSs  (pAbis,  puber)  (u.)  has  -erls,  -em,  -e; 
pecuB  has  pecoris,  etc.,  but  also  nom.  pectt,  dat.  pecitl;  pi.  peoua, 
pecuum,  pecubus. 

f.  Many  vary  between  different  stems  of  the  same  declension :  femni 
(n.),  gen.  KJrl»,  also  4iii8  (as  from  tfemen);  iecur  (n.),  gen.  ieclnoilB, 
iooinorlB,  iecoria ;  mflnus  (N.),  pi.  munera  and  mQaia. 

2.  In  Gender  {heterogeneous  nouns). 

a.  The  following  have  a  masculine  form  in  -us  and  a  neuter  in 
-um :  balteus,  cSseos,  ollpeus,  oollum,  oingulnm,  pIlsiiB,  tergnm, 
vSllum,  with  many  others  of  rare  occurrence. 

b.  The  following  have  in  the  plural  a  different  gender  from  the  singular 
balneum  (n.),  bath\  balneae  (f.),  baths  (an  establishment), 
oaeltun  (n.),  heaven ;         oaeloa  (m.  ace). 

oarbaauB  (f.),  a  sail;  carbasa  (N.),  sails  (-arum).                 ^fl 

deiioinm  (N.).fi!easure;  dfiUciae  (F.),fie/.                                     ^| 

epulum  (N.),/easi;  epalae  (F.),/easi.                                     ^H 

fifinum  (n.),  a  bit ;  frSnl  (m.)  or  frCna  (n.),  a  bridle. 

locuH  (m.),  aj'cst ;  iooa  (n.),  lool  (m.). 

rSBtnun  (n.),  a  ra&e;  rSatrl  (m,),  rSstra  (n.). 

JaooM  (u.},^/afei  loea  (n.),  loci  tM.,usuaJli-  (o()ics,sfotsV  . 


Variable  Nouns. 

b  (old  edition)  see  §  78.  2.  a.  *.] 

79  [79.  t:  in  old  edition].      Many   nouns   have   irregu-'l 
rities  of  Number  either  in  their  ordinary  or  occasionall 


a.  Many  nouns  vary  in  mea 
Plural :  as,  — 
aedes,  -ifl  (f-),  templet 
aqua  (p.),  water; 
aTUrilinin  (n.),  ^Ipi 
boniun  (n.),  agaodi 
career  (m.),  dungeon; 
oaBtrum  (n.),/w/; 
ofidiolllus  (m.),  bil  of-waodi 
comitliim  {^.'),place  of  assem 
cOpla  (f.),  plenty; 
fidSs  (f.),  karp-itring; 
lIniB  (m,),  end; 
fortfina  (v.'),  fortune; 


ning  as  they  are  found  in  the  Singular  or  J 


aedCs,  -lum,  house. 
aquae,  a  -watering-pla, 
auxilla,  auxiliaries. 
bona,  property. 
caxcQifiB,  barriers  (of 

cfidiollli,  tablets. 
;  comitla,  an  election  (lowi 
cOplae,  troops. 
Ed§s,  lyre. 

fluSs,  bounds,  territories. 
fortiinae,  poi 


giStia  {F.^.favcr  {ra.Tf^f, thanks');  grStiao,  thanks  (also,  the  Graces). 
boTtUiJ  (m.),  agarden;  horti,  pleas iire-greiiniii. 

Impedlmeutam  (n.),  hinderance ;  impedimenta,  baggage. 
Uttera  (F.),  letter  (of  alphabet)  ;      UHerae,  epistle. 


locna  (m.),  place  [pL  looa  (N.)]  ; 

.  Indus  (m.),  sport; 

L  nataiifl  (u.).  birthday; 

Fopera  (f.),  vrori; 

r  [op.]  opla  (F.).  A^lp  (§  46)  ! 

pars  (f.),  a  part; 

pUga  (f.),  region  ; 

rSBtrnm  (n.),  ieai  of  a  shiP; 

sSl  {M.  orN.)-  "f^^i 

tabeUa  (f.),  tablet; 

b.  The  singular  of  a  noun 


loci,  topics.     (In  early  writers  the  | 

regular  plur.) 
Ifidi,  public  games. 
iiUa.lBH,  descent. 
operac,  day-laborers  ("hands"). 
opes,  resources,  ■mealth. 
partGa,  part  (on  the  stage),  party. 
plSgae,  snares. 
rostra,  speaker'' s  platform. 
BalSs,  ■aiitticisms. 
tabellae,  documents,  records. 
usually  denoting  an  individual  is 


times  used  collectively  to  denote  a.  group ;  as,  Poenus,  the  Carthagini 
aits;  mDes,  the  soldiery;  equeo,  the  cavalry. 

c.  Of  many  nouns  the  plural  is  usually,  though  not  exclu&wtl'j  ,ms?.4 
(cf,  §  ?6):  as,  oezvloem,  i4i  ft^i ;  QiiMtBa,  Romans  \  -ntacMa,  /lesK',_ 


Etymology :  Declension  of  Nouns.       [§§  l%w 


d.  The  poets  often  use  ihe  plural  number  for  (he  singular 
for  metrical  reasons,  sometimes  from  a  mere  fashion:  as,  Ora  (for  6a), 
the  face  i  acEptta  (for  Bceptrum),  sceptre;  Bllentia  (for  BllentiaiD.), 
sUencc  (cf.  §  75.  cj.  j|h 

PROPER    NAMES.  ^H 

80.  A  Roman  had  regularly  three  names,  denoting  the 
person,  the  gens,  and  Xk^o,  family. 

a.  Thus,  in  the  name  MSrcua  Tullins  CicerS,  we  have  MSrcoa, 
the  pranomen,  or  personal  name  (like  a.  Christiati  or  given  name) ; 
TuUiiu,  the  nSmen  (properly  an  adjective),  i.e.  the  name  of  the  gens, 
or  house,  whose  original  head  was  a  (real  or  supposed)  Tullus  j  Cicero, 
the  cdgnomen,  or  family  name,  often  in  its  origin  a  nickname,  —  in  this 
case  from  oloer,  a  veleh,  or  small  pea. 

Note.  — Wtien  iwo  p 
cognomen  is  usually  pui  ii 

b.  A  fourth  or  fifth  name '  was  sometimes  given.  Thus  the  complete 
name  of  Scipio  the  Younger  was  PabliUB  CameliuH  Scipio  AfricS- 
nus  AemiltSnus :  Afrio&nus,  from  his  exploits  in  Africa;  AemlliS- 
nua,  as  adopted  from  the  ./tmilian  gens. 

c.  Women  had  commonly  in  classical  times  no  personal  names,  but 
were  known  only  by  the  itSmen  of  their  gens.  Thus,  the  wife  of  Cicero 
was  Tereatia,  and  his  daughter  Tullia.  A  younger  daughter  would 
have  been  called  Tullia  secanda  or  minor,  and  so  on. 

d.  The  commonest  pr:enomens  are  thus  abbreviated  :  — 

A,  Aulua.  L.  Lucius.  Q.  QuIntUB. 

App,  Appius.  M.  Marcus.  Ber.  Servius. 

C.  (G.)  Gaiua  iCaius)  (cf.  §  6).  M'.  MSniuB.  Sei.  Seitus. 
Cn.  (Ou.)  aaaeus  {Cneius).  Maxn.  MSmeicus,  Sp.  Spuriua. 

D.  DecimuB.  IT.  NumeriuB.  I.  Titus. 

K.  Kaeao  (^Cizeso).  P.  Piibliua.  Ti.  Tiberius. 

c.  A  feminine  prsnomcn  is  sometimes  abbrevi.ited  with  an  inverted 
letter:  as,  a  for  Oaia  {Cata). 


§  81.]  Inflection  of  Adjectives.  47 


Chapter  IV,  —  Adjectives. 

INFLECTION. 

Adjectives  and  Participles  are  in  general  formed  and 
declined  like  Nouns,  differing  from  them  only  in  their  use. 
In  accordance  with  their  use,  they  distinguish  gender  by 
different  forms  in  the  same  word,  and  correspond  with 
their  nouns  in  gender ^  ntimber^  and  case.  They  are  (i)  of 
the  First  and  Second  Declensions,  or  (2)  of  the  Third 
Declension.^ 

1.    First  and  Second  Declensions. 

81.  Adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  declensions  (a-  and 
o-stems)  are  declined  in  the  Masculine  like  servus,  in  the 
Feminine  like  steUa,  and  in  the  Neuter  like  bellum ;  as,  — 

bonus,  good. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

Stem  bono- 

■  bonft- 

bono- 

NoM.  bonus 

bona 

bonum 

bonI 

bonae 

bona 

Gen.  boni 

bonae 

bonI 

bonorum 

bonarum 

bonorum 

DAT.  bono 

bonae 

bono 

bonis 

bonis 

bonis 

Ace.  bonum 

bonam 

bonum 

bonos 

bonas 

bona 

Voc.  bone 

bona 

bonum 

boni 

bonae 

bona 

Abl.  bono 

bona 

bono 

bonis 

bonis 

bonis 

1  Most  Latin  adjectives  and  participles  are  either  o-stems  with  the  corre- 
sponding feminine  ft-stems,  or  i-stems.  Many,  however,  were  originally  stems 
in  u-  or  a  consonant,  which  passed  over,  in  all  or  most  of  their  cases,  into 
the  i-declension,  for  which  Latin  had  a  special  fondness.  (Compare  the  endings 
-Ss  and  -Is  of  the  third  declension  with  the  Greek  -es  and  -as ;  navis  (nom.)  with 
the  Greek  vo.vs\  $pax^s  with  brevis;  corntl  with  bicomis;  lingrua  with 
bilinsruis ;  cor,  corde,  corda,  with  discors,  -di,  -dia,  -dium ;  suavis  with 
ifdis ;  ferSns,  -entla,  with  ^iptnv,  -oj/tu.)  A  few,  wblcU  m  olYvti  \axv^"a;g&&  "ax^ 
nouns,  retain  the  consonant-form :  as,  vetus  =  iros,  Compaia^ves  ^s^ci  \e\accft. 
tbe  consonant  form  in  most  of  their  cases. 


Etymology:  Adjectives, 
a.  The  masculiae  genitive  siuguiar  of  Adjectives  in  -iua  ends  ii 


and  the 
ZiacedaemoaluB,  il, 

Note.— The  possessii 

83.   Stems  ending 
form  the  tnaiiCuUne 
declension  (cf.  puer,  agar,  §  3I 
miaer,  wretched. 

Bing.  Stem  lulBtno-,  R-.o- 

N. 


Ac. 

V.    miser  n 

Ab.  miserB  n 

Plur. 

N.     niiserl  n 

G.    miserflrum  n 


preceded  by  6  o 
They  art 


1  Nouns  {<±%ip.b,c):  ^ 

«  masculine  ml  (cf.  \  98.3). 
.  consonant  (also  aatur) 
IS  in  ro-  of  the  second 
lus  declined :  —  J^| 


nlger,  black. 
nigro-.  B-,  o- 
niger         nigra 


D. 


seilB 


Ac.  miserfis 
V.  miserl 
Ab.  miseris 


nigri 

nigr6 
igram      nigrum 

nigmm 
igra  nigra 

igrae        nigra 
igrSrum  nigrBrum 
igiia         nigria 
igrSs        nigra    _^H 
igrao        nigni  ^H 
igriB         nigift  ^H 
a,  propSruH,  have 


a.  Stems  in  Sro-  (as  procErua),  with  n 
the  regular  nominative  masculine  in  -us. 

b.  Lilce  miser  are  declined  asper,  gibber,  lacer,  liber,  prosper 
(also  prospenie),  aatvir  (-ura,  -urum).  tener,  with  compounds  of 
-fer  and  -ger ;  as,  saetiger,  -era,  -eium,  bristle-bearing  %  also,  usually, 
dexter.  In  these  the  e  belongs  Id  the  stem ;  but  in  deztia  it  is  often 
omitted;  as,  dextia  manas,  the  right  hand. 

c.  Like  niger  are  declined  aeger,  Star,  orSber,  faber,  glaber, 
Integer,  liidicer,  macer,  piger,  pulclisr,  ruber,  sacer,  acaber. 
sinister,  taeter,  vafer ;  also  the  possessive.^  noster,  vester  (p,  64,  3). 

d.  The  following  feminines  lack  a  masculine  singular  nominative  in 
cla^ic  use :  ofitera,  Infera,  postera,  sapera.  They  are  rarely  found 
in  the  singular  except  in  certain  phrases :  as,  posterB  die,  the  next  day. 

Note.— A  reminine  ablative  in -0  15  found  in  a  few  Greek  adjeciives:  as. 
lectlcA  oatophorS  (Vbtt.  v.  ii). 

83.  The  following  o-stems  with  their  compounds  have  the  geni- 
tive singular  in  -lus  (one  only  having  -lus)  and  the  dative  in  -I  in  all 
genders  —  -^^^^^H 


Infieclion  of  Adjectives.  •  49 

,  other,  totus,  whole,     alter,'  -terlus.  the  other. 
uUu9,  any.         neuter,  -trlua,  neither. 
unus,  one.  uter,  -trlua,  ■which  (of  two). 


anum 

uter 

utra 

utrtiin 

iinius 

utrluB 

ulrlua 

iitrlua 

Dni 

utri 

utrl 

utrl 

uqS 

utrS 

utr5 

QtrS 

alind  ^ 

alter 

altera 

alterum 

allna 

alteriuB 

alleriuB 

alterius 

alll 

alterl 

alteil 

alteti 

aliud 

allerum 

alteram 

altermn 

aliS 

alters 

altera 

altera 

a.  The  plura!  of  these  words  is  regular,  like  that  of  bonoB  (§  8i). 

b.  The  i  of  the  genitive-ending  -In»,  though  originally  long,  may 
be  made  short  in  verse.  Alterius  is  generally  accented  on  the  ante- 
penult, as  having  the  1  permanently  shortened. 

Instead  of  alius,  alterius  is  commonly  used,  or  in  the  possessive' 
sense  the  adjective  aliBnus,  belonging  to  another,  another's. 

In  compounds  —  as  alterfiter  —  sometimes  both  parts  are  declined, 

iwmetimes  only  the  latter.    Thus,  alterl  utrl  or  alterutrl,  to  one  of 


2 ,    Third   Declension. 

Adjectives  of  the   third   declension  are  of  one, 
three  terminations. 


Adjectives  of   the  third  declension   having  stems 
-distinguished  by  being  parisyllabic  (§  53.  a)  —  have 
but  one  form  for  both  Masculine  and  Feminine,  and  one 
for  the  neuter,  and  hence  are  called  adjectives  of  tivo  ter- 
minations.   In  the  neuter  the  nominative  ends  in  -e. 
They  are  declined  as  follows  :  — 

The  suffix  -ter,  In  alter,  uter,  neuter  is  the  same  as  Ihe  Greek  compara- 
suffix  -T(po(i).     The  stem  of  alius  appears  in  early  Lalin  and  in  derivativeb 
nil-  in  tlie  i<na&  alls,  alld  (For  alius,  allud),  allter,  etc.     The  i«gu1ar  forms 
IB  genitive  and  dative  (as  in  bonus)  nre  also  found  in  early  writers. 
The  genitive  in  -lua,  dative  in  -i,  and  neuter  in  -d  ateptonoinma.\(5.\.\vi'C\. 


b 


r 


— n 

50 

Etymology. 
16 via  (stem 

■  Adjectives. 
lovi-),  light. 

N..  V. 

leviB 

leve 

levee 

levia 

r.ys. 

levia 

levia 

levium 

levium 

DAT. 

levi 

levi 

levibuH 

levibuB 

Acc. 

lev-em 

leve 

lev-lB  (Baj 

levia 

Abl. 

levl 

levl 

levibuB 

levibus 

1 


a.  The  following  stems  in  ri-  have  the  masc.  noiti.  in  -er:  3cer, 
alaoer,  oampester,  celeber,  equester,  palftster,  pedester,  puter, 
BalQber,  Bilveater.  teneater,  valucer,  and  are  called  adjectives  of 
thru  ttrmiiiatioas.  So  also,  oeler,  osleije,  celere;  ajid  names  of 
months  in  -ber  (cf.  §  51.  *) :  as,  October. 

These  are  declined  as  follows :  —  '^^H 

3cer.  keen.  ^^^H 


N.,  V.  Seer        Soris      acre 

ScrfiB           acres           Sorla 

Gen.     acriB       aciia 

acrU 

acriam        acrinni        acriom 

DAT.     acrl         acrl 

acri 

acrlbtu       acrlbua       acribUB 

Atr.      acrem     acrei 

n     acre 

acria  (Ss)    acilB  (Sb)   acria 

AuL.     acrl         aeri 

acrl 

acribus       aciibuB       aciibuB 

Note.  —  This  fotmalion  is  tomparalively  lale,  and  liEnce, 
early  Latin,  either  the  mflscultne  or  ihe  feminine  form  of  Ihese 
limes  used  fbr  both  genders :  as,  Ooetus  aJocriS  (t™.).   In  t 
raneUHa,  llltistrls,  lOffubris,  ruediocriB,  mullebrls, 
masculine  form  at  all.    Thus:  — 

in  (lie  poels  and  in 
adjectives  was  sorae- 
iihcTS,  as  tftonebria. 
there  is  no  sepanile 

illuBtrla 

1,  briUiant. 

J 

S1N,;UL 

Stem 

iUnstri. 

1 

m 

N,.  V.    Ulnitris 

tlluBtro 

iUuBtrSB 

illnBtria 

Gen.       illustrlB 

illustiiB 

illustrium 

illustrinm 

DAT,       illustil 

illustrf 

illastribuB 

tl!iistrtbllB 

Acc.       illuatrem 

illustre 

iilustriB  (69) 

illustria 

Abl.        illQstrl 

illustrl 

illuslribna 

b.  Case-Furms —  Adjectives  of  two  and  three  terminations,  being 
true  i-stems,  retain  in  the  ablative  singular  -I,  in  the  neuter  plural  -ia,  In 
the  genitive  plural  -ium,  and  in  the  accusative  plural  regularly  -IB  (see 
I  55  and  p.  30,  n.  2).     But  the  forms  of  some  are  doubtful. 
A'OTS.  —  For  watricKl  reascins,  an  at.laiivc  in  -o  someiiroes  otuvna  "m  ^oettj, .  ^ 


ma  B4. 8 


Inflection  of  Adjectives. 


I 


c.  celer,  swift,  when  used  as  a  noun,  denoting  a  military  tank,  hasfl 
oelerum  in  the  genitive  plural.    The  proper  name  Celer  h35  the  abl&-4 


■ml 


The  remaining  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  I 
are  Consonant-stems ;  but  all  except  Comparatives  have  I 
the  form  of  i-stems  in  the  ablative  singular  -i,  the  nomi- 
native, accusative  and  vocative  plural  neuter  -ia,  and  the  I 
genitive  plural  -ium.  In  the  other  cases  they  follow  the  1 
lie  of  Consonant-stems. 


Note.— The  ablative  singular  otUieso  words  often  lias -e. 

These  adjectives  (except  compaj-ative.s)  have  the  same  nominative 
singular  for  all  genders,  and  hence  are  called  adjectives  of  one  termina- 
y  All  except  stems  in  I-  or  r-  form  the  nominaiive  singular  from 
stem  by  adding  -b. 
.  Adjectives  of  oue  termination  arc  declined  as  follows:  — 


atrax,>CT'«. 

egetiB.  neidy. 

St,  atrfic- 

5..  ecenl- 

Sine. 

M.,  F.                           N. 

N.,  V. 

atrSx 

eg6ii« 

Gen. 

alrociH 

egentia 

'    DAT. 

atrocl 

egenti 

Acc. 

atrocem             atrox 

egentem              egcna 

Abl. 

air6(J  or  atroco 

egenti  or  egente 

Plur. 

N.,  V. 

atrocfis                atiocia 

egentSs               egentia 

Gen. 

atrodum 

egentium 

Uat. 

atrodbuB 

egentibua 

Acc- 

atrocia  (Ba)       atroda 

egentiB  (Ba)       egentia 

Ael. 

atrodbiw 

egentibua 

to«g 


1  The  reBulsr  feminine  of  these  adjectives,  by  analogy  of  cognate  languages, 
would  end  in  Aa :  this  form  does  not  Bppear  in  Laiin  adjectives,  but  is  founti  in 
nbstracii  fimentia  Ifrom  amSiia),  dgsldia  (from  tieaea),  aSconlla  (frotn 
eOcora),  etc.,  and  m  proper  names,  as  FlOrentla  (cF.  Greek  ^ifaoaa.  for  fxpatr-ta). 
The  neuter  would  regularly  have  in  the  nominaiive  and  accusative  singular  the 
simple  stem,  as  oa.puI;,  oorfd-J,  eific,  Greek  iptpopM ;  but  m_a.\\  except  XvojiA.  \ 
■u/ftieforni  in -a  has  (breed  itself  not  only  upon  fticTVt 
'■'■-  alto,  where  It  li  wholly  abnormal. 


52 


Etymology:  Adjectives, 


[§85 


b.  Other  examples  are  the  following :  — 

concors,  harmonious. 
Stem  concord- 
Sing.  M.,  F.  N. 

N.,  V.  concors 

Gen.  Concordia 

DAT.  concordi 

Acc.    concordem        concors 
Abl.  Concorde 

Plur. 

N.,  V.  concordCs  concordia 

Gen.  concordium 

D.,  Abl.  concordibus 

Acc.     concordis  (6s)  concordia 

praeceps,  headlong. 
Stem  praeciplt- 
Sing.  M.,  F.  N. 

N.,  V.  praeceps 

Gen.  praecipitis 

DAT.  praecipiti 

Acc.    praecipitem       praeceps 
Abl.  praecipiti 

Plur. 

N.,  V.  praecipitCs         praecipitia 
Gen.  praecipitium  ^ 

D.,  Abl.  praecipitibus 

Acc.     praecipitts  (6s)  praecipitia 


ifins,  going. 

pftr,  eqtud. 

eont- 

pftr- 

M.,  F.                N. 

M.,F.               N. 

iSns 

pftr 

euntis 

p^ris 

euntit 

paif 

euntem      lens 

oarem      par 

eunte  (I) 

paif 

euntfis       euntia 

parGs        paria 

euntium 

parium 

euntiLbns 

paribus 

eunai(6s)  euntia 

paris  (6s)  paria 

dives,  rich. 

^iber,  fertile. 

dlvit- 

uber- 

M.,  F.                N. 

M.,  F.               N. 

dives 

fiber 

divitis 

uberis 

divitl 

uberl 

divitem     dives 

.  uberem    uber 

dlvite 

ubere 

divitSs      [ditia]  uberfis      ubera 
divitum  uberum 

divitibus  uberibus 

divitis  (6s)  divitia  uber68      ubera 


vetus,  old. 

Stem  veter-  (for  vete"8-) 
SINGULAR. 


N.,V. 
Gen. 

DAT. 

Acc. 
Abl. 


M.,  F.  N. 

vetus 
veteris 
veterl 
veterem  vetus 

vetere 


PLURAL. 
M.,  F.  N. 

veter6s  vetera 

veterum 

veteribus 
veter6s  Vetera 

veteribus 


Note.  —  Of  these  vetus  is  originally  an  s-stem.  In  most  s-stems  the  r  has 
intruded  itself  into  the  nominative  also,  as  bi-corpor  (for  bi-corpo8),  dSffener 
(for  d6-gren@8). 

^,  A  few  adjectives  of  ont  termination,  used  as  nouixs^  have  a  feminine 
/brm  in  -a :  as,  clienta,  iiospita,  with  the  appe\\a\ivft'WjA^^'"gf&3iu 


^  Given  by  grammarians,  but  not  found. 


87.]  luflfctioH  of  Adjectives. 

3.    Compaxatiirea. 

Comparatives  are  declined  as  follows;^ 


Sing. 

M.,  F.                               M. 

Mr                       N 

N.,  V. 

melior                 melius 

—                   Plfi' 

Gen. 

meliona 

plQt 

DAT. 

raeliorl 

Ace. 

inetiorem             melius 

plus 

Ahl. 

meliore  or  meliorl 

plur 

Plur 

N.,V. 

meiiorSi              meliora 

plur§8               plui 

Gen. 

meliomni 

pluiium 

DAT. 

melioribnB 

pliiribus 

Ace. 

meliotb  (SB)      meliora 

pIurlH  {6a)      plut 

Abl. 

meliorlbua 

pluribuB 

:.  The  stent  of  comparatives  properly  ended  in  ob-  ;  but  this  became  J 
in  all  cases  except  the  neuiev  singular  (n.,  a.,  v.),  where  s  is  retained,  J 
6  is  changed  lo  tl  (cf.  honSr,  •oria ;  coipuB,  -fiiiaj.     Thus  com-  \ 
rparadves  appear  to  have  two  terminations. 

b~  The  neuter  singular  pliia  is  used  only  as  a  noun.  The  genitive  i 
(rarely  ablative)  is  used  as  an  expression  of  value  (cf.  §  252.  a).  The  1 
dative  is  not  found  in  classic  use.  The  compound  complOrea,  several,  I 
etimes  neuler  plural  complflria. 
All  other  comparatives  are  declined  like  melior. 

4.  Caae-FormB, 
87.   In   adjectives  of   Consonant   stems   the   foUowmg  ] 

BCase-forms  are  to  be  remarked  :  — 

a-  The  Ablative  singular  commonly  ends  in -I ;  but  adjectives  used  aa 

;  (as  auperstaa,  survivor')  have  -e.     Participles   in  •ua  used  a 

ptcA  (especially  in  the  ablative  absolute,  §  225).  or  as  nouns,  regularly 

;  but  participles  used  as  adjectives  have  regularly  -I. 

The  following  have  uniformly -I:   SmSna,  ancepa,  concora  (and 

pother  compounds  of  oor),  cSnsora  (but  as  a  substantive,  -e),  dSgeuer, 

lt«beB,  ingCDs,  inopa,  memoi  (and  its  compounds),  pSr  (in  prose), 

I  peipea,  ptaecepe,  ptaepes,  teres. 

.  In  the  following,  -e  is  tlie  regular  form  of  the  ablative  ;  caeles. 
loompoB,  [td§aea],  dives,  hospea,  pauper,  particeps,  priiiceps, 
KBDpersteB.  Eoapes:  also  in  pairial.s  (sec  g  54.  j)  a.tid  sXevtia 'u\  iV, 
ft-.at-.rt;  when  used  as  nouns,  and  .sometimes  wVien  used  a&atf^ftctwen 


54  Etymolog)-:  Adjectives. 

e.  The  genitive  pluraJ  ends  commonly  in  -iom.  Tlie  accusative 
plural  regularly  ends  \a  -is,  even  in  comparatives,  which  are  less  inclined 
to  the  i-declension. 

d.  The  genitive  plural  ends  in  ■nin :  — 

I.  Always  in  divea,  compos,  luopa,  partfcepa,  piiDcepa,  praepes, 
snpplex,  and  compounds  of  nouns  which  have  -urn :  as,  quadru-pea. 
bl-color. 

3.  Sometimes,  in  poetry,  in  participles  in  -n» :  as,  BUentam  con- 
cilium, a  eeiincil  of  the  silent  shades  (Virg.). 

e.  In  vetue  (gen.  -Sria),  pQbes  (gen.   -6rl8),  aber  (gen.   -fiiia). 
■  which  did  not  become  i-stems,  the  endings  -e  (abl.  sing.),  -a  (neut. 

noni,  ace.  plur.),  -um  (gen.  plur.)  are  regular,    (Ubet  has  also  -i  in  ahl.) 

f.  I.  Several  adjectives  vary  in  declension:  as,  graoilia  ''-naj, 
hilaris  (-as),  iuermis  (-Qb),  bioolor  (-SruB). 

1.  A  few  are  indeclinable  :  as,  damiiSe,  friiBl  (really  a  dat.  of  ser- 
vice, see  §  233),  nSqnam  (originally  an  adverb). 

3.  Several  are  defective:  as,  (a)exapSa  (only  nom.),  e3tlSx(exl6gem) 
(only  nom.  and  ace,  smg.),  pemox  (pernocte)  (only  nom.  and  abl. 
sing.);  ifi)  primoriB,  sEminscI,  etc.,  which  lack  the  nom.  sing. 

4.  PotiB  is  often  used  as  an  mdcclinable  adjective, 
pote  in  the  neuter. 

5.  Special  iraea. 
88,   The  following  special  uses  are  to  be  observed  :  — 

a.  Many  adjectives  have  acquired  the  meaning  and  construction  0 
nouns:  as,  amicDB,  a  frtettd\  acqnallB,  <i  contemporary j  maiSrSs, 
ancestors  (see  p.  47,  head-note,  and  §  188). 

b.  Many  adjectives,  from  their  signification,  can  be  used  only  in  the 
maacuhne  and  femlnme.  These  may  be  called  adjectives  of  common 
gender.  Such  are  adulSacSna,  youthful;  [fdSeea],  -idia,  slothful; 
InopB,  -opia,  ^opr,-  sSspeB,  -Itia,  safe.  Similarly,  aenex,  old  man. 
and  iuvonls,  young  man,  may  be  called  masculine  adjectives. 

^—  c.  Many  nouns  may  be  used  as  adjectives  :  as,  pedes,  a  footman 
az  on  foot  (see  §  188.  rf).  Such  are  especially  nouns  in  -tor  (m.)  and 
-trix  (f.),  denoting  the  agent  (§  i6z.  a):  as,  victor  exercitua,  the 
conquering  armyj  vlctili  causa,  tfii  winning  cause. 

d.  Certain  forms  of  many  adjectives  are  regularly  used  as  adverbs. 
These  are,  the  accusarive  and  ablative  of  the  neuter  singular  (§  148,  (i^«)  : 
as,  multum,  mnltO,  much  \  the  neuter  singular  of  comparatives  (see 
§  92)  :  as,  melius,  better ;  levlus,  more  lightly. 

NOTIL— Adverbs  ending  in  .S  nnd  -ter  were  also  once  case-formi:  as.oArS, 
dearly;  levltor,  ligla^:  acorrlmS,  moti  tagerh  {\  148.  o,  h\.         ^^^^^^— 


I 


Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

COMPARISON. 

In  Latin,  as  in  English,  there  are  three  degrees  of  com-J 
:  the  Positive,  the  Comparative,  and  the  Supfrla-* 

1.  Regular  Cotnpaiiaon. 

89.   The  Comparative  is  regularly  formed  by  adding -1 
(neuter -ins ^).  the  Superlative  by  adding  -iBHlmuB  (-a,  -um)  to-fl 
le  stem  of  the  Positive,  which  loses  its  final  vowel ;  as,  —  \ 
cfinu,  dear  (st.  caxo-)  ;     cSrior,  dearer;      cariasimus.  dearest. 
levia,  light  (st.  levi-)  ;        lerior,  lighter;       leviasimua,  lightest. 
feilK,  happy  (st.  fSUc-)  ;    fSl\tAox,  happier ;  fBlIciaaimua, //lyJ^/w/.  j 
bebcB.  i/»i7  (at.  bebet-} -,    bebetjoi,  (/»//«/* ;  hebetUaimua,  i//i//i'j'/. 

a.  Adjectives  in  -er  form  the  superlative  by  adding  -: 
The  comijaralive  is  regular :  as,  — 
Seer,  keen;  Scilor.  9cerriniua. 
miaer,  -wretched;  miaerior,  miaerrimus. 
(gen.  veteria)  has  superlative;  veterrimua.  froiJi  the  old 

-form  Teter ;  and  mStiirus,  besides  its  regular  stiperlative  (maturia- 
simus),  has  a  rare  form  iiiS.taiTiinaB. 

For  the  comparative  of  vetua,  vetuatior  (from  vetuattta)  is  used. 

b.  The  folltiwing  in  -lla  add  -limua  to  the  stem  clipped  of  lis  vowel ; 
ia.cills  (st,  faclli-),  dlffioilla,  almilis,  dieaimllla,  gracilis,  bunuljs. 
The  comparative  is  regular:  as,  facllie,  easy;  faoilior,  facillimua, 

c.  Compounds  in  -dioua  (saying)^  -ficua  {doing).,  -volua  {■atilling), 
take  in  their  comparison  the  forms  of  corresponditig  participles  in 
which  were  anciendy  used  as  adjectives  :  as,  — 

male^cxM,  slaiideroHS ;  male  die  eatior,  maledicentiaaimua 
malevolua,  spiteful;  malevolcntior,  malevoleatiaBiinua. 

d.  Adjectives  in  -ub  preceded  by  any  vowel  but  u  rarely  have  forms  I 
of  comparison,  but  are  compared  by  means  of  the  adverbs  maeis,  more^  I 
maaame,  most:  as, — 

iddneua,^ ;  magiB  idSneus,  mSzinie  Idfineua. 
plus  has  pllaainiUB. 

1  The  comparaiive  suffix  (earlier  -lOB)  is  Ihe  same  as  Ihe  Greek  -iair,  or  the  Skr.  \ 

Thai  of  Ihe  superlative  (iBBitaus)  is  a  double  form:   perhaps  foi 

lUiparativeaad  sitperlallve).  or  possibly  for  -ist-timus  (two  superia 

gs  -IlmuB  and  -limua  are  formed  by  assimila.iioa  (\  ii./)  from  -t 

)S.    The  comparaiive  and  superlative  thus  formed  are 


56 


Etymology:  Adjectives. 


[SM 


Most  derivatives  in  -Icob,  -idus.  -alis,  -Sris,  -HiB.  -lUua,  -undua, 
-tlmtu,  'Inns,  -Iviia,  -orus,  with  compounds  (a*^  dBgener.  inops^  are 
also  compared  by  means  of  magis  and  maxlmS. 

c.  Participles  when  used  as  adjectives  are  regularly  compared :  as,-* 

patiSuB,  patient ;  patientior,  patientisBimuB. 

apertns.  open;  apertior.  apertds&imTiB. 
/,  A  lorm  ol  diminulive  is  made  upon  the  stem  of  sora< 
tives :  as,  gran^us-calus,  a  little  larger  (see  S  164.  a). 

2.    Irregular   and   Defective   Compaiisoa. 

90.  Several  adjectives  have  in  their  comparison  irrq 
lar  forms:  as,  — 

bonus,  mellor,  optimuB,  ffiod,  better,  best. 

maluB.  pSior.  peBsimuB,  bad,  worse,  ivorst. 

mSguuB,  mSior,  mSjxiTaxM.  great, greater ,  greatest, 

pamis,  minor,  mlnimiu,  small,  less,  least. 

mnltUB,  plas  (n.)  (S  86.  b),  plfirimua,  much,  more,  most. 

moltl,  plfirEs,  pliiriml.  many,  more,  most. 

ufiquam  (indecl,),  nfiquior,  nequiEsimaB,  ivortkUss  (cf,  §  87./.  2) 

frOgl  (indecl.).  frOgSlior.  frugflliaaimua.  useful,  -worthy  (s-i-  %  87./  i\ 

dexter,  dezteiloi,  deztimiia,  on  the  right,  handy. 

Note.  ~  These  irregiiliirilies  arise  from  the  use  o!  different  slems  (cf.  \  89.  ^ 

91.  Some  Cotnparatives  and  Superlatives  appear  i 
out  a  Positive  :^  — 

a.  The  foUowiag  are  formed  from  stems  not  used  as  adjectives  t  ■ 
cIb,  oltiK  (adv.  on  this  side) :  olterior,  citUnns,  hither,  hitkernt 
lu.  intra  (prep,  in,  within)  :  Interior,  intimua,  itiner,  inmiut. 
prae,  pr5  (prep,  before)  :  prior.  -px^xavA,  former,  first. 
prope  (adv.  near)  :  propior,  proximua,  nearer,  next. 
OltiS.  (adv.  beyond)  :  Olterior,  ^Ititaua,  farther,  fart/iesf. 

b.  Of  the  following  the  positive  foiins  are  rare,  except  when  used  as   - 
nouns  (generally  in  the  plural) ;  — 

1  The  forms  in  -tr&  and  -teriia  were  originally  comparative  (cf.  alter),  so  thai 
the  comparatives  in  -terlor  are  liouble  comparatives.  InTeruB  and  BupeniS  are 
comparatives  of  a  sdll  more  primiiive  form  (ct  the  Englisli  comp.  in  -ei). 

'the  superlatives  in  -timua  (-tumua)  are  relics  of  old  forms  of  comparison ; 
those  in  -muB  like  Imos,  summua,  primuB.  are  slill  more  primitive.  Forms 
like  extrSmuB  are  superlatives  of  a  comparative.  In  fact,  comparison  has  always 
been  irealed  wilh  an  accn  mutation  of  endings,  as  children  aay  fiojAertr  and  filTtiirts/. 


IS§  91. 92.]               Comparison  of  Adverbs.  Si^^l 

externa,  exterior,  eitremua  |,extimuB).  outer,  outmost.  ^H 

[Inferua],  loferlor,  iD&mue  (ImuB),  lower,  lowest  (,§  3i.  li'j  ^^^| 

[poBterua],  poaterior.  poatrSmua  (poatumua),  latter,  last.  ^^^^ 

[Buperue],  euperior,  suprCmua  or  aummus,  higlur,  highest.  ^^H 
The  plurals,  extetl, /aretgners  j  Inlerl,  the  gods  below  i  poateiir^^H 

posterity,  aupetl,  the  heavenly  gods,  are  common.  ^^^ 


I 


iaveuia,  youth,  senex,  old  man  (cf.  §  S8.  b),  are  formed  the 
comparatives   i-ouior,  younger,  aenior,  older.      For   these,    however, 
minor  nStfl  and  mSlor  nStQ  are  sometimes  used  (nSta  being  often 
omitted).     The  superlative  is  regularly  expressed  by  muuinus  and  . 
mSzimua,  with  or  without  nStii.  ■ 

Note.— In  these  phrases  nlttQ  is  ablative  of  specification  (see  \  353).  ■ 

rf.  In  the  following,  one  or  otherof  the  formaofcompanson  is  wanting;  1 

1.  The  positive  is  wanting  in  dSterior,  dfiterrimua ;  Scior.  Scia- 
■Imtia ;  potdot,  potlssitnua. 

2.  The  comparative  is  wanting  in  bsllus,  caeaiua,  faleus.  fidua 
(with  its  compounds),  inolutoa  (or  incUtua),  iavlctua,  iavitiu, 
nOTua,  pliiB,  aacer,  vafer,  vetns  (§  89.  a). 

j.  The  superlative  is  wanting  in  actudaus,  agreatia,  alaoer,  aroX-  j 
nue,  caecuB.  difiturnua,  ezHis,  ingEns.  iSlQuua,  longinquua,  oblE-  J 
quus,  optmua,  proclivis,  ptopTaquua,  satnr.  aegniB,  aSrua.  aupIniia,T 
■nrduB,  taciturnus,  tempestlvi 
adjectives  In  -llis. 

NOTE.^Many  adjetiives  —  as    aureua.  galden  —  s 
incapable  of  comparison;  bnl  each  language  }i3e  lis  dm 
Thus  niEer.  gliuiy  black,  and  oandldua,  shkn'mg  while,  are 
ftter  or  olbUB,  meaning  aisolule  dead  black  or  wliiii^  (exce; 
bas  fitiior). 

3.   Comparison   of    Adirerba. 

92.  The  comparative  of  Adverbs  is  the  neuter  accusa-^ 
I*  tive  of  the  comparative  of  the  corresponding  Adjective'!,  j 
f  the  superlative  is  the  Adverb  in  -8  formed  regularly  frorD-f 
r  the  superlative  of  the  Adjective  :  as,  — 

cStB,  dearly  (from  oSrua,  dear) :  c3rliia,  cSriasime. 

miseifi  (mioeritei),  wretchedly  (from  niiBsr,  wretched) :  miaeriuB,  I 
■niserriinfi. 

leviter  (from  levia,  light) :  levius.  leviasimS. 

ludScter  (aud&citer)  (from  auda^,  bold ) :  audficius,  audSoisaimS.    I 

bsnfi,  well  (from  bonna,  good ) :  meliua,  optimS. 

malfi.  ill  (from  malUB,  iitd ) :  pSiue.  peasimB. 


S8  Etymology:  Adverbs. 

The  following  are  irregular  or  defective :  — 
dlfi,  long  (in  time)  ;  difltins.  divitiBHimS. 
potiTiB.  rather^  ■^o\asBxiaaTa,  first  of  all,  in  prefi 
Baepe,  often ;  saepias,  oftetter,  again ;  saepisaime. 
aatla,  enough^  maMs», preferable. 
Boous,  otherwise  ^  seoins,  worse. 
mnltom  (mnltS),  magis,  mSxime.  much,  ninrt 
pamm,  not  enough,  minus,  Uss.  minime.  Uasl. 

4.  Slgnifioatioti. 
93.   Besides  their  regular  signification  (as  in  English), 
the  forms  of  comparison  are  used  as  follows  :  — 

a.  The  Comparative  denotes  a  considerable  or  excessive  degree  of  a 
quality :  as,  brcvioT,  rather  short;  audScior,  too  bold. 

b.  The  Superlative  {of  eminence)  often  denotes  a  very  high  degree 
of  a  quality  without  implying  a  distinct  comparison  :  as,  majrimua 
DumeruB,  a  very  great  number.  With  quam,  vel,  or  unua  it  denotes 
the  highest  possible  degree:  as,  quam  plurin^,  as  many  as  possible; 
quam  mSxlmfi  potest  (mSxime  quam  potest),  as  much  as  can  be ; 
virum  flnum  doctiBBimum,  the  one  most  learned  man. 

c.  With  quiaque,  each,  the  superlative  has  a  peculiar  signification. 
Thus  the  phrase  dItisBimuB  quiaque  means,  ail  the  richest  (each 
richest  man)  ;  prtmuB  quiaque,  all  the  first  {each  first  man  in  his 

Two  superlatives  with  quiaque  imply  a  proportion ;  as,  — 
Baplentlsaimua  quiaque  aequiasimfi  anlmS  morltur  (Cat.  Maj. 
23).  the  ■wisest  men  die  -witk  the  greatest  equanimity. 

d.  A  high  degree  of  a  quality  is  also  denoted  by  such  adverbs  as 
admodum,  valde,  very,  or  by  per  or  prae  in  composition  (^  170.  c)  ■■ 
as,  valdS  malua,  very  bad  —  peoBiraaa  ;  permSgnua,  very  great ; 
praealtuB,  very  high  (or  deep). 

e.  A  low  degree  ofa  quality  is  indicated  by  aub  in  composition:  as, 
BubrOBtloua,  rather  clownish^  or  by  miuua,  not  very,  mloimS,  not 
at  all;  potum,  not  enough ;  nSn  aatis,  not  much. 

f.  The  comparative  mBiSres  has  the  special  signification  of  an- 
cestors  (cf.  §§  88.  a,  91.  i:)- 

^.  The  comparative  mlnArCs  often  means  descendants. 


NUMERALS. 
1.    Cardinal  and  OidinaL 
04.   Cardinal  numbers  are  the  regular  series  of  numbei 
used   in    counting.     Ordinal  numbers  ^  are  adjectives  de- 
rived from  these  to  express  order  or  place. 

Note,  —  Cardinal  nimibers  ar 
numbers,  the  question  quotUB  ?  : 

These  two  series  are  as  follows  :  — 


I 


.  duo,  duae,  duo,  t-wi>. 

.  tres,  tria,  tMree. 

.  quattuor  (quatuor) 

5.  quinque 


■t  Ires) 


I 


9.  Dovem 

ti.  iindecim 

12.  duodecim 

13.  tredecim  (decen 

14.  qualtuordecim 

15.  quindecira 

16.  sedecim 

17.  septendecim 

18.  duodevigititi  (octodecim) 

19.  undevjginti  (novendecim) 

20.  viginlj 

Lginfl  UDUS 

{or  Onus  et  vlginti) 


primus,  -a,  ■a.m.  first. 
secundus  (aller),  second. 
tertius,  third. 
quartus 
quintus 


decimu.s 
undecimus 

quartus  decimuf 
quintus  decimus 
sextus  decimus 
Septimus  decimus 

s  (\igeDsimus) 
s  primus 
(Ilnu.elvMn«ma.,«^.) 


>  Ttie  OrdinaJs  (except  aecunduB,  tertiua.  octfivOB)  are  fo 

of  the  same  sullixes  a?  EUperlati«es,    Thus  decimus  (compare  the 

may  be  regarded  as  the  last  oi  a  scries  of  ten  ;  primua  is  a.  superla 

ofprC;  the  forms  in -tua  (QU&rtuB,  quintuB,  eextua)  maybe  compared  with 

the   corresponding  Greek  forms  in  -to!,   and  with  irpwroi,  superlative  of  rpi; 

^K   nOnua  is  contracted  from  novimua ;  while  the  others  have  Ihe  regular  superlative 

^Bending  -slmua.     Of  the  exceptions,  secundua  is  a  participle  of  eequor;  and 

^BalMr  is  a  comparslive  form  (compare  -ripat  in  Greek).    The  mulliples  of  ten 

^H  are  compounds  of  Ihe  unit  with  a  fragment  of  decern ;  as.  ylBtntI  -  dvl-giatl 

■  (duldecem-U?). 


H 

Bo                            Etymolog) 

;  Numemls. 

[§9^H 

CAHPINAU 

ORDINAL.                 ROMAN- 

UMERALS, 

30.   triginta 

tricensimus 

XXX. 

40.   quadraginta 

quadragensimus 

XL. 

50.  quinquaginta 

quinquagensimus 

L. 

60.  sexaginta 

seiagensimus 

LX 

70.   septuaginla 

LXX 

80.   octoginta 

octogensimus 

LXXX 

90.    nonagfnta 

nonagensimus 

xc 

100.  centum 

c 

101.   centum  (el)  unus.  etc. 

centensimus  primus,  etc. 

CI 

200.  ducenti,  -ae,  -a 

ducentensimus 

cc 

300.    trecenti 

Irecentensimus 

ccc 

400.   quadringentl 

quadringentensimus 

cccc 

500.    quIngentT 

quingentcnsinius 

13,  or  D 

600.  sexcenti 

sexCEnlensimus 

DC 

700.  septingentr 

sepdngentensimus 

DCC 

800.  octingenll 

octingentensimus 

DCCC 

900.  nongenti 

nongenCensimus 

ncccc 

itxjo.   raille 

CI3,  orM 

5000.   qulnque  mllia  (millia) 

133 

10,000.   decern  milia  (miUia) 

deciens  tnillensimus 

CCIDD 

100,000.  centum  milia  (millia) 

centiens  millensimus 

CCCI333 

Note.  —  The  forms  id  -Snaimua 

ire  often  wriltea  without  the  n 

as,  VlDS- 

SimuB,  elc. 

a.  For  the  m flection  of  Onus, 

see  §  83.     It  often  has  the 

meaning 

of  same  or  otdy.    Tlie  plural  is  used  in  this  sense ;  but  also,  a 

a  simple 

numeral,  to  agree  with  a  plural 

oun  of  a  singular  meaning 

as,  Una 

Diutra,  one  camp  (cf.  §  95.  *). 

The  plural  occurs  also  in  Ihe 

phrase  flnl  et  alterl,  one  party  and  ^B 

the  other  (the  ones  and  the  other 

). 

■ 

b.  Dno,'  two,  and  ambC,  both 

are  thus  declined;  — 

■ 

L                 Nou.          duo 

dnae                   duo 

■ 

^1                   Gen.            duorum 

duarum               duorum 

■ 

H                   DAT.            duoboB 

duabus              du6bu» 

■ 

H                   Acc.             duos  (duo) 

duaa                    duo 

■ 

■                  Abl.           duobns 

duabuB              duobuB 

.■ 

H         c.  TtBb,  tria,  three,  is  an  i-ste 

m.  and  is  regularly  declined  like  ttitt^^l 

H     plural  of  leviB  (see  §  84).    The  other  cardinal  numbers,  up  it 

oauto^t^^l 

■     {iool,are  indeclinable. 

H 

1     ■„.  I.™  ..-0 ,..,—  ..», 

dual  nnmier.  which  was  lost  m 

Latin,  ta 

■ 

^L  .is  found  in  cognate  langunges. 

J 

^ 

Bl§  94,  95.] 

Numerals. 

1 

^H      The  forms  octCdecim,  novencleoim  are 

rare,  duodSvleintl,  iiii-  ^H 

^f  dfivleliia  being  used  in 

stead.    Similar  forms 

for  higher  numliers  are^^^ 

1         occasionally  found:    as 

dnadaquadraelnta 

thirty-eighi  i    flDdfceH^^^H 

turn,  nintlynitte. 

^^1 

d.  The  hundreds,  up 

to  iDoo,  are  o-.'^tems, 

and  are  regularly  declined'^^^ 

like  the  plural  of  bonuB 

^H 

e.  Mille,  a  thousand,  is  in  the  singular  a 

n  indeclinable  adjective.. ^H 

In  the  plural  (mHia  or 

millia.  thousands),  it 

s  used  as  a  neuter  noun,  ^^| 

with  a  genitive  plural. 

Thus,  cum  mille  liomlnlbus,  -with  a  thousand'-      ■ 

jwen;  but  otun  duSbus  mllibufl  bominum, 

with  two  thousand  »ten> 

Note.— The  singular  millo  is  somelimes  found 

And  accusative ;    as,  mill" 

ci^eof  ndlla:  as.  cum 

octs  nilllbue  padltum 

mllle  equfCvim,  vlUh  lighl  Hioinandfiot  and  a  tAous 

and  horn.                                ^^H 

f.  The  ordinals  are  o 

-stems,  and  are  declloed  lilie  bonus.                  ^^H 

2.  DiBtribntiveB. 

^H 

95.    Distributive 

Numerals  are  declined  like  the  plural  ^| 

of  bonus. 

^H 

Note.  — These  answer 

0  ihe  inlerrugilive  quotCnl?  himi  ma«y  ofiach,  or  atJ^^^ 

1.  siaffiM,onebyoni 

18.  octoni  deni  <»- 

loo.  centem               ^H 

2.  h\ia,  iwo-and-two 

duodevIcenT 

200.  duceni              ^^H 

3-  temi.  trinl 

19.  novenf  deni  or 

300,  treceni             ^^H 

4.  quatemi 

undeviceni 

400.  quadringenl     ^^H 

5.  qulnl 

20.  viceni 

500.  quingeni           ^^| 

6.  senl 

21.  viceni  singuli,  etc.     600.  sescenl             ^^^ 

7.  septeni 

30.  trice  ni 

700.  septingenl         ^^H 

8.  octonT 

40.  quadrageni 

goo,  octingeni         -^^H 

9.  noveni 

50.  quinquagcnT 

900.  nongeni            ^^H 

10.  deni 

60.  sexageni 

[ooo.  milleni              ^H 

II.  undeni 

70.  septuageni 

2000.  bina  milia           ^^^k 

12.  duodenl 

80.  octogeni 

10,000.  dena  inllia         ^^| 

13,  terni  deni,  etc. 

90.  nonageni 

[00,000.  centena  milia      ^^| 

Distributives  are  used  as  follows ;  — 

■ 

a.  In  the  sense  of 

so  many  apiece  or  or 

each  side  ■   as,  Blngola  ^^| 

■IngnllB,  one  apiece  ( 

ne  each  to  each  one 

\    agri  eeptena  iageia  ^H 

plBbl  dIvlBa  Bont,  i.e. 
§lc. 

seven  ju^ra  to  each  a 

isen  (seven  jugera  each),  ^1 

'  Or,  in  POEI17,  cum  bis  mllle  homlsibuB,  w 

1(1  tu>i»  .1  <h<.u>and  m.n.      ^H 

Etymology:  Numerals. 


[5§  95-^ 


.  Instead  of  Cardinals,  (a  express  simple  number,  when  a  noun  is 
plural  in  form  but  singular  in  meaning :  as,  bina  castra,  two  camps  (duo 
caatra  would  mean  two  forti).  But  the  plural  fini  is  used  (instead  of 
olngull),  to  signify  one  (see  §  94.  a),  and  trlnl  (not  ternl)  for  thne. 

c.  In  multiplication :  as,,\iiM\i\a»,  twice  two  {  ter  septSnia  difibna, 
in  thrice  seven  days. 

d.  By  the  poets  instead  of  cardinal  numbers,  particularly  where 
or  sets  are  spoken  of:  as,  bina  IiastsUa,  two  shafts  (two  in  a  set). 

3.  Numeral  Adverbs. 
96,    The     Numeral     Adverbs     answer     the     question     quottSna 
(quotifia),  how  many  times,  how  often. 


t<a^m 


I.  semel,  once. 

12.  duodeciens 

40.  quadragiens 

2.  bis,  twice. 

13.  terdeciens 

50.  quinquagiens 

._  3.  ter,  thrice. 

(4.  quale  rdeciens 

60.  sexagiens 

4.  quater 

(5.  quindeciens 

70.  septuagiens 

5.  quinquiens  (-es) 

16.  sedeciens 

So.  octogiens           ■ 

6.  sexiens  (-es) 

17.  septiesdeciens 

90.  nSDagiSn.        J 

7.  septiens  (-es) 

18.  duodeviciens 

,00.  ce„.B..          1 

8.  octiens 

19.  undevlciens 

200.  docentiens 

9.  noviens 

20.  viciens 

300.  trecentiens 

10.  deciens 

21.  semel  et  vTcien; 

i,  etc.      1 

000.  milieus 

II,  undeciens 

30.  triciens 

10, 

,000.  deciens  mTliens 

Note,— They  are  us. 

:d,  in   combinaiion  wr 

ih  mlUo 

.  lo   express  the  hieher 

umbers :  as,  ter  et  triolens  (centena  nulla)  sestertiUm,  ^.yxifro  sestercn. 

orros  in  -ne  are  often  wr 

iltenwilliouilhen:  as, 

,  QuinquiBB. 

I 


4.   Other  Numerals. 
97.  The  adjectives  simplex,  single,    duplex,   double,  two-fold, 
triplex,  quadru-,  quincu-,  aeptem-,  decern-,  centu-,  sfiaqui-  (l)j), 
multi-plex,  manifold,  are  called  Multiplica lives. 

a.  Phoportionals  are ;  duploB,  tripIuB,  elc,  twice  as  great,  etc. 

b.  Temporals;  \ilrcfai,ttlai\M,oftTvo  or  three  years' age;  bionnlB, 
triennls,  lasting  two  or  three  years ;  bimSatrifl,  trim&striB,  of  two  or 
three  months;  biduum,  bieunium,  n  period  0/ two  days  or  years. 

£.  Partitives:  blnariua,  ternStiua.  of  two  or  threeparls. 
d.  Fractions:  dimidia pars  (dlmidlnm),<i/fa{(';tettia para, aMf'M 
Note.  —  But  fractions  are  regularly  e.vpresspd  by  special  words  derived  fiom  M 
(a /»i«rf)  and  the  numerals:  a*,  triSliB,  o  MiVrf,-  Xita.  tiee-thirds. 

t.  Other  derivatives  are:  flniO,  unity;  blniS,  the  two  (of  dice); 
prOnSniiB,  a/ /Ae JSrsl legion  \  prImftrluB,  of  Ihi  first  rank\  dtniiiiui, 
»  sum  of  10  ajiesi  hlnva  (distributive),  doulit.  clc.  _H^^^H 


Chapter  V.  —  Pronouns. 
U8.    Pronouns  have  special  forms  of  declension. 

>r  a  niore  primilive  intra  I 

1.    Peratmal   Pionoans. 

The  Personal  pronouDS  of  the  first  person  are  ego,  /,  uSa,  ■ 
he  stcoHd  person,  Wl,  thou,  -voa.ye  at  you. 


NOM. 

ego,  /; 

n6B,,^e; 

Uen- 

mel,  of  me; 

ao8ttum(tri),  o/kj; 

Dat. 

mihi  (ml).  Co 

le;    aoblB.laas; 

Ace. 

me,  me; 

DOS.  us ; 

Voc. 



. 

Abl. 

mi,  by  me  i 

uobia,  fy  us. 

NOH. 

ta,  thou ; 

vSs'.v^orw;/; 

Gen. 

txil,yau; 

vo8trTim,vOHtrI;TeBtrilm(trI) 

DAT. 

Ubi 

T5blB 

Ace. 

te 

vos 

Voc. 

ta 

voa 

Abl. 

te 

TfibiB 

.  The  personal  pronouns  of  the  third  person  —  lie,  she,  it,  they —  I 
are  wanting  in  Latin,  a  demonstrative  being  someiimes  used  (see  §  lo 
■.  The  plural  hGb  is  often  used  for  the  singular  ego  ;  the  plural  v 
er  for  the  singular  tO. 

.  Old  forms  are  genitive,  mis,  lA ;  accusative  and  ablative  med, 
ted(cf.  §70.A). 

2.   HefleziTe  Froaouna.  ■ 

Reflexive  pronouns  are  used  in  the  Oblique  Cases  to  refer  to  the    I 
Subject  of  the  sentence  or  clause  (see  g  196). 

In  the  first  and  second  persons  the  oblique  cases  of  the  Personal 
3uns  are  used  as  Reflexives :  as.  m6  contuli,   /  lueiif  (I  bcViiCi'A. 
myseifj;   M  laadSa,  you  praise  yourself  i   n6Ma  peiMiM.%to."a»,  wt 
kyvMiTOi'  aurseivei.  B 


H  64 

^M  6.  The  reflei 

^H  declined :  — 
■  Gen. 

H  DAT. 

B  Acc. 


Etymology:  Pronoufts. 


[55  9 


e  pronoua  of  the  Third  Person  ha^  a  special  form  u;ed 
,  the  same  for  both  singular  aad  plural.     It  is  thus 


Gen.      boI,  of  himself,  herself,  themselves. 
DAT.     Bibl,  to  himself,  herself,  thenm'.ves. 
Acc.      bS  (seae),  himself  herself,  thet-.f  elves. 
Abl.      b6  (bBbS),  by  himself,  herself,  tliet/iselves. 
SIb  (genitive)  and  sSd  (accusative  aad  ablative)  are  an 

3,   Foaaeaalve  Pronouna. 


I 


The  Possessive  pronouns  are,  for  the  first  person  :  moua,  my,  noater, 
our;  for  the  second  person;  tutts,  thy,  your,  voBter,  vester,  ^o//r; 
for  the  third  person  ;  Btrna,  his,  her,  their.  These  are  declined  like 
adjectives  of  ihe  first  and  second  declensions  (see  g§  81,  82).  But 
mens  has  regularly  ml  (rarely  meua)  in  the  vocative  singular  mascu- 


otily  r 


il  patrem  31ub  occldit,  hi 


%  referring  lo  the  subject.     For  a  possessive 

m  Buum  oocidlt,  heiUUd  his  [ovm)fit/Ur; 
d  ill  (somebody  else's)  faihtr. 


0».  In  the  meaning  and  use  of  the  Personal,  Reflexive, 
and  Possessive  pronouns  it  is  to  be  observed  that  — 

a.  To  express  Possession  and  similar  ideas  the  possessive  pro- 
nouns must  be  used,  not  the  genitive  of  the  personal  or  reflexive 
pronouns  (cf.  §  19?.  a).     Thus,  my  father  is  pater  meuB,  never  pater 

b.  The  forms  DOatram,  voatrfim,  etc.,  are  used /crWiW/^;  as, — - -^ 

unusquiaquB  noatrOm.  each  one  of  us  \  .so  ^H 

voatrum  omnium,  of  all  of  you.  ^H 

Note.  —  The  forms  of  ihe  genitive  of  the  persona]  pronouDS  are  really  Ihe 
genitives  of  Ihe  possessives;  mel,  tul,  Bul,  nostrl,  TOBtrl,  gen,  sing,  neuter: 
uoatrflm,  voatrdm,  gen.  plu.  masc.  or  neuter  contracted.  So  in  early  and  Inter 
Ijtin  we  finrf  ana  veatrBrum,  om  sf  you  [Tnamiii). 

c.  The  genitives  mel,  tul,  anl,  nostrl,  veatrl,  are  chiefly  used 
objectively  (see  §  ZI3,  R.)  :  as,  — 

memor  bIs  nosttt,  be  mindful  of  hs  (me). 

m6  tul  pudet,  /am  ashamed  of  you.  ^^^^^^^L 


§§  99, 100.]  Demonstrative  Pronouns,  65 

d.  The  reciprocals  one  another  and  each  other  are  expressed  by  inter 
s6  or  alter  . .  .  alteram :  as,  — 

alter  alterius  5va  frangit,  they  break  each  other'' s  eggs  (one  ...  of 
the  other). 

inter  s8  amant,  they  love  one  another  (they  love  among  them- 
selves). 

e.  The  preposition  cum,  with^  is  joined  enclitically  with  the  ablative 
of  the  personal  and  reflexive  pronouns :  as,  tScum  loquitur,  he  talks 
with  you. 

f.  To  the  personal  and  reflexive  (and  sometimes  to  the  pos- 
sessive) pronouns  certain  enclitics  are  joined  for  emphasis :  -met 
to  all  except  tS  (nom.) ;  -te  to  tu  (tiite,  also  tutimet) ;  -pte  to 
the  ablative  singular  of  the  adjectives,  and  in  early  Latin  to  the 
others:  as, — 

vosmetipsoB  'g^xo6iX^&,  you  betray  your  own  very  selves. 
sudpte  pondere,  by  its  own  weight, 

4.  Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

100.  The  Demonstrative  pronouns  are  hie,  this\  is,  ille,  iste, 
that ;  with  the  Intensive  ipse,  self,  and  Idem,  sanie.^ 

a.  Ble  is  a  later  form  of  ollus  (oUe),  which  is  sometimes  used 
by  the  poets;  a  genitive  singular  in  -I,  -ae,  -T,  occurs  in  ille  and 
iste. 

b.  Iste  is  sometimes  found  in  early  writers  in  the  form  ste,  etc., 
with  the  entire  loss  of  the  first  syllable ;  and  the  first  syllable  of  ipse 
and  ille  is  very  often  used  as  short  in  early  poetry. 

c.  Ipse  is  compounded  of  is  and  -pse  (for  -pte,  from  the  same  root 
as  potis)  (cf.  §  99./"),  meaning  self.  The  former  part  was  originally 
declined,  as  in  reSLpse  (for  rS  eSpse),  in  fact.  An  old  form  ipsus 
occurs. 

idem  is  the  demonstrative  is  with  the  affix  -dem. 


1  These  demonstratives  are  combinations  of  o-  and  i-stems,  which  are  not 
clearly  distinguishable.  HIc  is  a  compound  of  the  stem  ho-  with  the  demonstra- 
tive enclitic  -co,  which  appears  in  full  in  early  Latin  (hice),  and  when  followed  by 
the  enclitic  -ne  (hlclne).  In  most  of  the  cases  -ce  is  shortened  to  -c,  and  in  many 
lost ;  but  it  is  often  appended  for  emphasis  to  forms  that  do  not  regularly  retain  it 
(as  htlitisce).  In  early  Latin  -c  alone  is  retained  in  some  of  these  (h5runc). 
nie  and  iste  are  sometimes  found  with  the  same  enclitic :  illic,  illaec,  illtlc ; 
also  illOc  (ace.  or  abl. :  §  loi.  p.  67). 


66 


Etymology:  Pronouns, 


[5  J 


101.  The  demonstratives  are  used  either  with  nouns 
as  Adjectives,  or  alone  as  Pronouns.  From  their  signifi- 
cation they  cannot  (except  ipse)  have  a  vocative,  Thet 
are  thns  declined  :  — 

hio,  thii.  IB.  ihai. 


eSrum      efinuii  j 


Ipsa  ipsiini 

ipatuH      ipaiuB  Ipaius 

ipBi  ipsl 

a      ipBam  ipaum    j 

ipsa  ipaum    i 

ipsa  ipH5 

ipaae  ipsa 
urn  ipBArum  ipa€ru 


.    Idem  eadem       idem         i  Idem  (ei-)    eaedem        eadem 

G.    eiu&dem   Slusdem   Siuadem    eSrundem  e&rundem   eSrunder 
D,    eidem       eldem        eldem  eladem  ar  isdem 

Ac.  eundem    eandem    Idem         i  edsdeiu      cSsdem 
Ah.  eSdem      eftdem       e5dem  eisdem  o 


Sing.       M. 

F. 

N. 

NOM.    hic 

haec 

hac 

Gek.    hfiiuB 

hfllus 

hoioB 

DAT.    hnio 

haic 

taujc 

Ace.    hunc 

haoc 

h6c 

Abl.    1i5o 

hac 

hoc 

Plur. 

NoM,   hi 

hae 

baec 

Ge, 

K.    hoium 

hSmm 

honim 

Da 

T.    Ms 

hiB 

his 

Act 

.    iiSs 

has 

haeo 

Abi 

1,.    hiB 

hU 

his 

Sin 

S- 

ille,  liinl 

No 

I.   ille 

ilia 

illud 

Gk 

V.      lUIUB 

Ultua 

UlIUB 

DA 

r.    illl 

illl 

illl 

AD 

-.    illnm 

illam 

illud 

Vo 

Ab 

,.    illfi 

iU5 

iUo 

P»U 

r. 

No 

I.   illl 

iUae 

Ilia 

Ge 

M.    illorum 

iliarum 

illorum 

Ua 

r.    illis 

illls 

illlB 

Ac 
Vo 
Ab 

.    iU6B 

iiias 

ilia 

.    illls 

illlB 

illlB 

late,  ista,  istud,  Ihat  (yonder),  is  declined  like  ille. 


eSdem  ^^^| 


Kill 


I 


101, 102.]  Demoustralivf  Pronouns. 

Tile  and  iate  arc  combined  with  the  denioaslrative 


~NoH.      llllo      illaec   iI15o(illuc)  iatlc      istaec  latSc  (iatiic) 

Acc.        lUimo  lllauc  llloc(illuc)  isttinc  istauc  istac  (istac) 

Abi_       illSc     illSc     illCc  Utoc     iatSc  is  toe 

'   nor. 

Kf,  Acc. illaeo  ■ iataec 

a.  For  the  dative  and  ablative  plural  of  blc  ihe  old  form  hibua  is 
sometimes  found;  haoo  occurs  (rarely)  for  hae. 

b.  The  normal  forms  iHT,  iBtl  (gen.),  and  illae,  istae  (dat.),  arc 
found ;  also  Ihe  nonilnacive  plural  istaece,  lllaece  (for  istac,  illae). 

c.  The  plural  forms  I.  Is,  Idem,  iBdem,  are  oflen  wriltcn  ii,  ila,  etc. 
Obsolete  forni.i  are  oae  (dat.  for  el),  and  eSbus  or  lbu»  (dat.  plur. 
for  Is}.     For  el  are  found  also  SI  and  £1. 

d.  By  composition  with  ecce  or  Bn.  behold',  are  formed  ecoum, 
eccam,  ecoSa,  ecc3.a ;  eccUlnm,  Cllum,  Bllam.  eilfis.  ellila ; 
eociatam.    These  forms  are  dramatic  and  colloquial. 

e.  The  combinations  b^usmodl  (hOiuacemodl),  eiusmodl,  etc., 
are  used  as  indeclinable  adjectives,  equivalent  to  tEUia.  suck:  as,  t6b 
eioHmodl,  such  a  IMiHg  (a  thing  of  that  sort:  compare  §  215). 

103.  In  the  use  of  these  demonstratives  it  is  to  be 
observed  that  — 

a.  Hie  is  used  of  what  is  near  the  speaker  (in  time,  place,  thought, 

on  the  written  page).  It  is  hence  called  (he  demoHslrative  of  the 
first  person.  It  is  sometimes  used  of  the  speaker  himself;  sometime.i 
for  "the  latter"  of  two  persons  or  things  mentioned  in  speech  or  writ- 
ing ;  more  rarely  for  "  the  former,"  when  that,  though  more  remote  on 
the  ■wrillen  page,  is  nearer  the  speaker  in  time,  place,  or  thought. 

6.  Ule  is  used  of  what  is  remote  (in  time,  etc.) ;  and  is  hence  called 
Hat  demonslratwe  of  the  third  person.  It  is  sometimes  used  to  mean 
"the  former"  (see  under  hlc,  n);  also  (usually  following  lis  noun) 
of  what  is  famous  or  vjell-kn<rwni  often  (especially  the  neuter  lllud) 
to  mean  "  the  following."' 

1  The  inlersivc  -Co  is  also  found  in  numerous  combinations;  ns,  hOlusce, 
buiice,  bSrunce.  h&rvmoe,  hSsce,bIsce  (i^f.  n.,  p.  £5),  Ultusce,  lace ; 
witli  the  inierrogaiive  -□«,  in  hCclne.  tiSecine,  iBtQclne,  tlllclne,  cic. 
intensive  -pse  is  found  in  ihc  forms  eapBe  (nom.),  eumpae,  eampse,  eSpBe,  . 
etpsa  (aU.). 


r 


68  Eiyviology :  Pronouns.  [S5  102- 


)2-lt|^ 


c.  late  is  used  of  what  is  between  the  two  others  ii 
en  in  allusion  to  the  person  addressed,  —  hence  called  Che  demon- 
ative  of  the  second  person.  It  especially  refers  to  one's  opponent  (in 
urt,  etc.),  and  frequently  implies  a  kind  of  contempt. 

d.  Ib  is  a  weaker  demonstrative  than  the  others  and  does  cot  denote 
any  special  object,  but  refers  to  one  just  mentioned,  or  to  be  afterwards 

plained  by  a  relative.  It  is  used  oftener  than  the  others  as  a  personal 
pronoun  (see  §98.  1.  fl)  ;  and  is  often  merely  a  correlative  to  the  relative 
qui:  as,  etun  quern,  one  whom;  eutn  conaulem  qui  n6n  dubitet 
(Cic),  a  consul  -who  will  not  hesitate. 

£.  Ipse  may  be  used  with  a  personal  pronoun  of  either  person,  as 
noa  ipai  (noametipBl),  lue  viirselves ;  or  independently  (the  verb  con- 
taining the  pronoun,  or  the  context  implying  it),  as  ipai  adestaa,  jfn/i 
are  yourselves  present ;  or  with  a  noun,  as  ipal  fontflo  (Virg,),  the  very 
founlaitls. 

Note.  — :n  English,  Ihe  pronouns  kimii!/,  etc.,  are  used  both  intensively  (as, 
hi  will  catHt  hinuel/)  and  refieicively  (as,  hr  ■will  hll  hlmstlf)  :  in  Latin  ihe  former 
would  be  translated  b;  ipse ;  Ihe  [alter,  by  s6  or  Bese. 

f.  The  pronouns  hio,  ills,  and  is  are  used  to  point  in  either  direction, 
back  to  something  Just  mentioned  or  forward  to  something  about  to  be 
mentioned.  The  neuter  forms  are  especially  used  to  refer  to  a  claii.se, 
phrase,  or  idea :  as,  est  illud  quldem  vel  maadmum  anlmum  vf  dfiie 
(Tusc.  i.  22,  52),  that  is  in  truth  <z  -very  great  thing  to  see  t lie  soul. 


5. 

Relative 

Fronoima. 

103. 

The 

relative 

pronoun 

qui,  who, 

iv/iicli,  is 

i  thus  de- 

clined  : 

— 

NOM. 

qui 

quae 

quod 

qui 

quae 

quae      U 

Gen, 

ofiiua 

ofiiua 

□fliuB 

qu5rum 

quarum 

quSnuifl 

DAT. 

cui 

CTli 

oul 

quibua 

quibufl 

quibua  ■ 

Ace. 

quern 

qnam 

quod 

qoSs 

qu&s 

quae      ■ 

Abi- 

qu5 

quS 

qu6 

1      quibua 

quibuB 

quibns  M 

G.  laterrogative  and  Indefinite  Fronoima. 
104.   The  interrogative   or  indefinite  quia   (qui), 
zvliich  ?  any,  is  tieclined  in  the  Singular  as  follows ;  - 
NoM.        quia  (qui)  quae  quid  (quod) 

Gen.         oQlus  cfiiua  cGiua 

DAT.  cui  cul  oul 

Ace,  quern  quam  quid  (quod) 

^^K         Abl,  quo  qufi  qufi 


„Jk 


E„ ■ _ 
04.]  Relative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns.  ^^^H 
The  Plural  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  Relative.  The  singular  quia  ^^| 
are  as  an  indefinite  (see  §  105.  d).  ^^| 

Note.  —  The  Relati™,  Interrogative,  and  Indefinite  Pronouns  are  originally  of 
the  same  Stem,  and  the  foms  for  the  most  [,att  are  the  same  (i;oiiipare  }  103  with 
{  104).  The  aiem  has  two  forms,  quo-  and  qui-.'  The  intertogative  setise  U 
doublless  the  original  one. 

Case-Forms.  —  a.  The  relative  has  always  qui,  quae,  quod.  The 
interrogative  and  indefinite  have  quia,  quae,  quid,  siibstanti-jc:,  and 
qui,  quae,  quod,  adjective!  as,  quia  Tocat?  who  calhf  quid  vidBa? 
•a/hat  do  you  see?  qui  homfi  vooat?  what  man  calls  f  quod  templum  1 
videa  ?  u'hat  iempU  do  you  see?  I 

Note.  — Bui  qui  is  often  used  without  any  apparent  adjective  force;  and  qui*  J 
is  very  common  as  an  odjeclive,  especially  with  words  denoting  a  person ;  as,  qui.  ■ 
uSmluat  me?  vi/io  calls  my  namef  quia  dies  fult?  \Bhat  dtty  was  itt  quia  I 
bomS?  whaimanT  hot  often  qui  homO?  what  sari  0/ a  man  T  neaclS  quIriB,  I 
/  htma  KOI  who  you  ari.  I 

b.  Old  forms  for  the  genitive  and  dative  are  quoiua,  quoi.  I 

c.  The  fonn  qui  is  used  for  the  ablative  of  both  numbers  and  all  >| 
genders ;  but  especially  as  an  adverb  {how,  by  which  way,  in  any  way), 
JUid  in  the  combination  quicum,  iiriih  whom,  as  an  interrogative  or  an  1 
Indefinite  relative. 

d.  A  nominative  plural  quSs  (stem  qui-)  is  found  in  early  Latin.  | 
The  dative  and  ablative  quia  (stem  quo-)  is  old,  but  not  infrequent.        1 

The  preposition  cum  is  joined  enclitically  to  all  forms  of  the « 
ive,  as  with  the  personal  pronouns  (§  99.  e)  :  as,  qnSouni,  qul>  f 
quibnsoum.  I 

ITE.  — But  oceasionally  cum  precedes  as  with  other  wards:  a?,  cum  quS  1 
4.  9). 


y.  The  accusative  form  quom,  cum  (stem  quo-)  is  used  only  as 
)njunctive  adverb,  meaning  when  or  since. 

g.  The  adjective  uter  is  used  as  an  interrogative  and  indefinite  rel 
ve.     It  is  declined  as  an  adjective  of  three  terminations  (see  §  B3). 

Note.  —  This  word  is  probably  the  comparative  of  1  he  stem  quo-;  cf.  Inti 


105.    The  pronouns  quia  and  qui  appear  in  various  com- 
inations. 


From  qui-  are  formed  quia,  quid,  quQm.  quibua.  qui  (abl.)  ;  while  qui, 
«  (nom.),  ate  probably  lengthened  forms  of  qu8-.  qufl-  (see  {  33,  ded.  i), 
nade  t^  the  addition  of  the  demonstrative  particle  i. 


J 


JO  Etymology :  Pronouns.  [§  105. 


Note. — This  suffix,  with  Ihe  same  meaning',  may  be  used  with  any  relative:  as, 
quaiiacumque,  eftohalcvir  lorl;  qaandCcutailue  (also  rarely  qU.andSq.ue). 
,-  UblcumQUe,  lehtrrvir. 

b.  The  interrogative  form  doubled  makes  an  indefinite  relative :  a-^ 
qulaquia,  •whoever  (so  uttit,  howeiier,  ubitibi,  ■wherevir).  Of  quis- 
quiB  both  parts  are  dediaed,  but  the  feminine  is  wanting  in  classic  u: 


r 

H  a.  The  adverb  -cumque  f-ounque)   (cf.  quiaque)  added   to   the 

H  relative  makes  an  indefinite  relative,  which  is  declined  like  the  simple 

^1  word:  as,  qulcumque.  quaecumque,  quodoumque,  w/ine^vr,  ■what- 

^H  ever:  cOiuscuuque,  etc 

I 

I 

qaSquQ,    The  caBe-iurin  quamquom  i:  .  . 

aUhoagh  (strictly  kmervtri.  QulquI  (nom.  sing.)  is  an  early  and  quHqua  a  laiL> 
form.  The  grammarians  give  also  a  regular  genitive  and  Uaiive.  Cuicuimodi 
is  usFd  like  a  genitive,  but  is  probably  locative. 

c.  Indefinite  compounds  are  the  following:  qutdom,  a,  a  eerlai'ii; 
quispiam,  a/y;  quivis,  C]vSli\ie\.,  any yau  pUasc ;  quiaquam,  rt/y  h/ 
all.  Of  these  the  former  part  is  declined  like  quia  and  qui,  but  Ihej- 
all  have  both  quod  (adjective)  and  quid  (substantive)  in  the  neuter. 

d.  The  itidefinite  quia,  otherwise  rare,  is  found  in  the  compounds 
aliquia,  sot/ie  one,  and  the  combinations  ai  quia,  if  any;  ii6  quia,  Ust 
OHy,  thai  iwnej  eoquis,  nam  qviii,  -whether  any. 

These  are  declined  like  quia,  but  have  generally  qua  instead  of 
quae,  except  in  the  nominative  plural  feminine.  The  forms  aliquae, 
ecquae.  nominative  singular  feminine,  occur  rarely. 

Note,  —  The  compounds  quiepiam,  aliquia,  and  qiiisqu&m  are  often  used 
instead  of  quis  with  fa,  nS,  and  num,  and  are  rather  more  emphBtic,  as  a!  quia, 
if  BHy  DKJ,  sialiquie,  Vsomc  enc,  si  qulsquajn,  \{  any  one  {ever,d.fi^. 


NOM. 

quisquia  (qulqtilj 

quidquid  (qvioquid)     ' 

Ace. 

quemquem 

quidquid  (qoioquid)      , 

Abl. 

quoquo          quSquS 

quoquo 

Plur.  NOM. 

quiquT 

D.,  Abl.  quibuaquibus 

Note.— This. 

compound  i^  raie,  except  in  th 

eformsqulaquls,  quicquid,! 

I 


These  compounds  are  ihiia  declined  :  — 
Slug.  aliquia,  some. 

NOM.  aliquia  (aliqui)  aliqua  aliquid  (aliquod) 

Gen.  alicQiuB 

DAT.  alicui 

Acc.  aliquem  allquam  aliquid  (aliquod) 

Abl.  aliquo  aliquS  aliquS 


iquod)      ^^H 
iquod)    ^^^H 


rl05,  106.] 
Flur. 
NoM.       1 
DAT. 
Ate.        i 
Abl. 
The    fnrme    ir 


aUqnl 

Acc. 
The  forms  in  -qui  a 


aliq.ua« 

aliquibuB 
aliquS^ 

aliquibuB 
-quod  are  adject 


aliquorum  ^^M 

allqua  ^^H 

ve ;   those  in  -quis  and   ^^^ 
■  gooiit/iiiij;i  but  allquid 


-qnid,  substantive:  as,  aliquod  boi 
bonl,  something  good  (sotncCala^  of  good). 

Note.  — Aliquia  is  compounded  with  all-,  <ilds(ein  otaliuB  (p.49,  fo 
Bui  Ihe  meaninB  ether  usually  disappears. 


,»). 


e.  The  enclitic  particle  que  added  to  the  interrogative  gives  a 
versal :  as,  qtdeqae,  every  one,  uterque,  either  of  two,  or  botii.     In  this] 
combination  quifl  is  regularly  declined. 

In  the  compound  flttusquiaque,  ei'ery  single  one,  both  parts  s 
declined,  and  they  are  sometimes  separated  by  other  words. 
■''    ~\  Quotua  quiaqus  has  ihe  signification /liMt/ ma/y, /fey  ^  often  ii 
disnaraging  sense. 

/.  The  relative  and  interrogative  have  rarely  a  possessive  adjectiW 

^Bfltna  {-a,  -um),  whose;  and  a  patrial  cuISb  (oflist-),  of  what  country 

g.  QuantMB,  luni'  great,  qxiSliB,  0/11/hat  sort,  are  derivative  adjectiveiH 

from  the  same  stem  as  the  interrogative.    They  are  used  as  interrogativ«« 

or  relative,  corresponding  to  the  demonstratives  tantns,  tUia  (5106),    F 

A.  QuiBquam,  with  fillus,  any,  unquani,  ever,  uHquam,  anywhere, 
are  chiefly  used  in  negative  sentences,  or  where  there  is  an  implied 
negative,  as  in  interrogative  or  conditional  sentences,  or  after  quam, 
than;  sine,  ■wilhoiilj  vix,  scarcely:  as,  necquiequam  ex  9.gmine 
tantS,  and  nobody  from  that  great  throng;  Blqnisquam.  oat  timidua, 
la  ego  anm,  if  any  one  is  timorous.  I  am  the  man;  sine  -0116  dommo, 
without  any  master;  an  quiaquain  uBquam  gentium  eat  aequfi 
ir?  -why!  is  there  anybody  anywhere  in  ihe  ■world so 'd)retc!ied i 

mphatic:  pray,  who?    ecquis  and  aumqiue  are 
mpounded  from  the  indefinite  particle  Sn  and  the  interrogative  num ; 
t  -ivho,  but  any  in  a  question :  as,  ecquia  noa  videt?  doei 
3.  quid  hoc  dubit&a,  do  yon  at  all  doubt  this  / 

7.   Correlatives.  | 

106.    Many  pronouns,   pronominal  adjectives,   and  ad- 
rerbs  have  corresponding  demonstrative,  relative,  interrog- 
^ive,  and  indefinite  forms.     Such  parallel  forms  are  called 
f  They  are  shown  in  the  following  table: — .^ 


Elymolffgj:  Pronouas. 


[HUI6.107 


\%,ihat 

q»l,»,A^ 

taatoa,  /d^rfa/qnaatn* 

taila,  mch 

qnaUs 

qiLSli>  ?      (qii31iftciimqae)     

Ibi.  tktri 

nW 

abi?               ubinbi                       alicabi 

Bfl,  thilhtr 

qaA 

qno  ?             qnoquo                     aliqao 

«a,  thai  -way 

qna 

qaS }              qnSqiiii                     aliqu3 

Inde,  theme 

unde 

nDd«?          <  nndeciunqiiej         alicunde 

turn,  /A-H 

qaom,  ca 

tot,  10  many 

quot 

quot?          qaotquot               aliquot 

totlf,)oo/txn  qaotiSs 

a.  The  forms  tot  (originally  toti),  somany,  quot.  hmv  {as)  many, 
aliquot,  several,  totidem,  as  tunny,  are  indeclinable,  and  may  lake 
Any  gender  or  case:  as,  per  tot  annfis,  tot  proeliia,  tot  imperStorEs 
(Cic),  JO  many  cotnmanders,  for  so  many  years,  in  so  many  battles. 

b.  The  relative  word  in  a  pair  of  correlatives  is  often  lo  be  rendered 
simply  as:  thus,  tantum  aigeati  quatttam  aeris,  as  much  (of)  silver 
a,  (of)  cpM- 

c.  A  frequent  form  of  correlative  is  found  in  the  ablative  quS  or 
quants,  by  how  much ;  eS  or  tanto,  fy  so  much,  used  with  compara- 
tives {rendered  in  English  the  .  .  .  the)^ :  as, — 

qnS  maglB  oSnKrla,  eS  longjuB  prSgredsiiB.  the  more  you  try, 
the  farther  on  you  get  (by  which  the  more,  etc.,  by  that  the 
farther). 

107.  Certain  relative  and  demonstrative  adverbs  are 
used  correlatively  as  conjunctions  :  as,  — 

ut  (re!,)  . . .  Ita,  rfc  (dem.),  as  (white)  ...so  {yet). 

tarn  (dem.)  ,  .  .  quam  (rcl.),  so  {as)  .  .  .  as. 

oum  (rel.)  ,  .  .  turn  (dem.),  both  . . .  anif's  ■while . .  .sn  also ;  not 
. .  .but  also. 

Compare  et . . .  et,  both . . .  and;  aat  (vol)  . . .  aut  (Tel),  either . 
or  s  live  C*flu)  ■  -  ■  alve ;  utrum  .  .  .  an,  whether  ■  .  .  or 


I 


1  In  this  phriue  /»i  ts  not  Ihe  delinile  arlicie  but  a  ] 
Anelo-Saxon  H.  Ilic  in^lrumenlal  case  of  Ilie  pronoi 
I*  iiHd  both  -IS  demonstrative  and  relative.    Thus  lA 


minaL  adverb,  bong  the 


onesponds  eiaeily 


§§loa-lO.]   Inflection  of  the  Verb:    Voice,  Mood,  Tense,     73 


Chapter  VI. —  Verbs, 

I.- INFLECTION    OF    THE    VERB 
1.   Voice,  Mood,  Tense. 

108.  The  inflection  of  the  Verb  denotes  Voice,  Mood, 
Tense,  Number,  and  Person. 

a.  The  Voices  are  two :  Active  and  Passive. 

b.  The  Moods  are  four:  Indicative,  Subjunctive,  Imperative,  and 
Infinitive.^ 

c.  The  Tenses  are  six,  viz. :  — 

1.  For  continued  action.  Present,  Imperfect,  Future. 

2.  For  completed  action.  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  Future  Perfect. 

d.  Person  and  Number.  —  There  are  separate  terminations  for 
each  of  the  three  Persons,  —  first,  second,  and  third,  —  both  in  the 
singular  and  in  the  plural. 

2.  Noun  and  Adjective  Forms. 

109.  The  following  Noun  and  Adjective  forms  are  also 
included  in  the  inflection  of  the  Latin  Verb  :  — 

a.  Four  Participles,^  viz. :  — 

Active:  the  Present  and  Future  Participles. 
Passive :  the  Perfect  Participle  and  the  Gerundive.^ 

b.  The  Gerund  :  this  is  in  form  a  neuter  noun  of  the  second  declen- 
sion, used  only  in  the  oblique  cases  of  the  singular.  A  corresponding 
nominative  is  supplied  by  the  Infinitive  (see  §  114.  note). 

c.  The  Supine:  see  §§  71.  a  and  114.  d. 

3.   Defective  Forms. 

110.  Special  forms  for  some  of  the  tenses  are  wanting 
in  certain  parts  of  the  verb  :  — 

1  The  Infinitive  is  strictly  a  case  of  an  abstract  noun,  expressing  the  action  of 
the  verb  (p.  120./) ;  but  it  plays  so  important  a  part  in  verbal  construction,  that  it 
is  properly  treated  as  a  part  of  the  verb. 

2  The  Participles  are  Adjectives  in  inflection  and  meaning  (see  ^  qlc^.  eV^^^ 
have  the  power  of  Verbs  in  construction  and  in  distingmshitvg  X\me. 

^  The  Gerundive  is  also  used  as  an  adjective,  indicating  necessity  ox  duty  V>^^ 
/  ^^S-  ^)-    In  late  use  ft  became  a  Future  Passive  Part\c\p\e. 


[he    Present    (oi 
originally  all  tei 


F.tytnolog}' :     1  'erbs. 

mood  waots  the  Future  and  the  Future  Perfect, 
these  tenses  are  supplied  without  ambiguity  by 
Imperfect)  and  the  Perfect  (or  Pluperfect);  for 
es  of  the  subjunctive  referred  to  future  lime.  In 
ant  is  supplied  by  the  future  participle  witli 
the  proper  lense  of  the  verb  signifying  to  be  :  as,  oum  eeoiltfiruB 
■it,  since  Its  111111  fallow. 

b.  In  the  Passive  voice  in  all  moods  the  tenses  of  completed  action 
(Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Future  Perfect)  are  supplied  by  the  Perfect 
I'articiple  with  the  present,  imperfect,  and  future  of  the  verb  signifying 
TO  BE :  as,  oocIbus  est,  he  was  killed. 

c.  In  the  Imperative  mood,  the  only  tenses  are  the  Present  and  the 
Future. 

d.  In  the  Infinitive  mood  the  Present  (active  and  passive)  and  the 
Perfect  (active)  only  are  formed  by  inflection,  A  Future  in  the  active 
voice  is  formed  by  the  Future  Participle  with  the  infinitive  signifying 
TO  BE:  as,  am&tOrus  bbbs,  to  be  going  to  love;  in  the  passive,  by 
the  Former  Supine  with  Irl  (inlin.  pass,  of  Ire.  logo)  :  as,  amatum 
M,  to  be  about  to  be  Im-ed.     For  the  Perfect  passive,  see  b  above. 


Il.-SIGMFICATION    OF    THE    FORMS    OF   THE   VERB.       H 
1.   Voices.  ^1 

111.  The  Active  and  Passive  Voices  in  Latin  generally 
correspond  to  the  active  and  passive  in  English;  but^ 

a.  The  passive  voice  often  has  a  Reflexive  meaning :  as,  induitot 
ve^teia,  Ae  puts  an  Ais  (fiwa)  chties ;  Tamils  vettitur,  Turnus  turns 
(himself). 


corresponds  vi 


IK). 


b.  Many  verbs  are  used  only  In  the  passive  form,  but  with  an  active 

or  reflexive  meaning.     These  are  called  Depo.VE.vts  {d/pHHeittia).  «., 

verbs  which  have  laid  aside  (d/psnere)  the  active  form  and  the  pasuvav 

meaning  (see  §  135).  ^M 

2.  Mooda.  ■ 

1 12.   The  Moods  of  the  Latin  verb  are  used  as  follows : 

.  The  Indicative  Mood  is  used  for  drreel  assertiams  and  iKtrrrth 
goiim 

vaUsne?  valeO.  are  you  wellf 


§  112.]  Moods.  75 

b.  The  Subjunctive  Mood  has  many  idiomatic  uses,  as  in  commands, 
conditions^  and  various  dependent  clauses.  It  is  frequently  translated 
by  the  English  Indicative ;  sometimes  by  means  of  the  auxiliaries  nmy^ 
might,  would,  should;  sometimes  by  the  (rare)  Subjunctive;  sometimes 
by  the  Infinitive ;  and  often  by  the  Imperative,  especially  in  prohibi- 
tions.    Thus  — 

efimus,  let  us  go. 

cum  vSnisset,  when  he  had  come. 

adsmn  ut  videam,  I  am  here  to  see  (that  I  may  see). 

tu  nS  quaesieris,  do  not  thou  inquire. 

nSmo  est  qui  ita  exlatiinet,  there  is  no  one  who  thinks  so. 

be&tuB  BIS,  may  you  be  blessed, 

nS  abeat,  let  him  not  depart. 

quid  morer,  why  should  I  delay  f 

sunt  qui  putent,  there  are  some  who  think, 

imperat  ut  scribam,  he  orders  me  to  write  (that  I  write). 

nescid  quid  scribam,  I  know  not  what  to  write. 

licet  e^,you  may  go  (it  is  permitted  that  you  go). 

cave  cadSLs,  donHfaU. 

vereor  n6  eat,  I  fear  he  will  go. 

vereor  ut  eat,  I  fear  he  will  not  go. 

bI  moneam  audiat  (pres.),  if  T  should  warn,  he  would  hear. 

bI  vocSrem  audlret  (imperf.),  if  I  were  (now)  calling,  he  would 

hear, 
quae  cum  dlzisset  abiit,  and  when  he  had  said  this,  he  went  away. 

Note.  —  The  Latin  Subjunctive  is  often  translated,  formally,  by  means  of  the 
English  auxiliaries  may,  might,  could,  would,  etc.,  to  distinguish  it  from  the  Indica- 
tive, because  the  English  has  no  subjunctive  in  general  use.  But  the  Latin  uses  the 
subjunctive  in  many  cases  where  we  use  the  indicative ;  and  we  use  a  colorless 
auxiliary  in  many  cases  where  the  Latin  employs  a  separate  verb  with  more  definite 
meaning.  Thus,  /  may  write  is  often  not  scribam  (subj.),  but  licet  mihi 
scribere ;  /  can  write  is  possum  scribere ;  /  would  write  is  scribam, 
sciiberem,  or  scribere  velim  (vellem) ;  I  should  write,  {if,  etc.),  scriberem 
(rf)  . . . ,  or  (implying  duty)  oportet  mS  scribere. 

c.  The  Imperative  is  used  for  exhortation,  entreaty,  or  command; 
but  its  place  is  often  supplied  by  the  Subjunctive  (§§  266,  269). 

d.  The  Infinitive  is  used  chiefly  as  an  indeclinable  noun,  as  the 
subject  or  object  of  another  verb  (§§  270,  271.  a).  In  special  con- 
structions it  takes  the  place  of  the  Indicative,  and  may  be  translated  by 
that  mood  in  English  (see  "Indirect  Discourse,"  §  335  ff.). 

Note.  —  For  the  Syntax  of  the  Moods,  see  \  264  ff. 


I 


76  Etymology :    Verbs.  [S  lia 

3.  FartioipleB. 

113.  The  Participles  of  the  Latin  verb  are  used  as 
follows:  — 

a.  The  Present  participle  (ending  in  -na)  has  commonly  the  same 
meaning  and  use  as  the  English  participle  in  -ing  :  as,  vooftna,  calling^ 
legentSs,  reading.     tFor  its  inflection,  see  e%%xa,  §  85), 

b.  I .  The  Future  participle  (ending  in  -flrus)  is  oftenesi  used  to  ex- 
press what  is  likely  or  about  to  happen. 

NOTE.— When  thus  used  with  the  lenses  of  the  vpib  To  be  il  form;  what  is 
called  the  Firaf  Periphrastic  conjugatioii  (see  {  129)  r  as,  urtiB  est  cKsOra,  the 
city  u  ^oul  Is  fall;  mKneOrue  exam,  /  VKUgoatg  lo  ilify, 

2.  It  is  also  used,  more  rarely,  to  express  purpose  (see  §  393.  d)  :  as, 
vSnlt  audltilraB,  Ae  cawe  to  hear  (about  to  hear). 

£.  The  Perfect  participle  (ending  in  -tna,  -ana)  has  two  uses ;  — 

1.  It  is  sometimes  equivalent  to  the  English  Perfect  Passive  parti- 
ciple in  -ED:  as,  tSotUB,  skeltered;  acceptua,  accepted;  Ictus,  halving 
been  struck;  and  often  has  simply  an  adjective  meaning;  as,  acceptue, 
acceptabU. 

2.  It  is  also  used  to  form  certain  tenses  of  the  passive(§  iio.^) :  as, 
vocatns  eat,  ie  was  (has  been)  called. 

Note.  — There  ia  no  Perfect  Active  or  Present  Passive  participle  In  Latin.  The 
perfect  participle  of  deponents,  however,  is  generally  used  in  an  active  sense,  as 
aecntUB,  having  followed.  In  Ihe  case  of  other  verbs  some  different  construciioa 
is  used  for  these  missing  participles :  ss,  Cum  vSnlBSOt,  having  come  (when  he 
had  come}  ;  eqUltSitO  praemtesO,  having  seitl  firaiard  lie  cavalry  {th<n:avs.\\y 
having   been   sent   forward};    dura    verberStUr,  loAi/e  he  is  (being)   strMct 

d.  I.  The  Gerundive  (ending  in  -ndus)  is  often  used  as  an  adjective 
implying  obligation  or  necessity  {ought  or  must)  :  as,  audiendne  eat, 
he  must  be  luaid. 

Note,  —  When  Ihiis  used  with  the  tenses  of  the  Terb  TO  BE  it  forms  the  Second 
Periphrastic  conjugation  dSIieerduB  erat,  he  ought  lo  have  teen  chosea  (}  129). 

2.  In  the  oblique  cases  the  Gerundive  commonly  has  the  same  mean- 
ing as  the  Gerund  (cf.  §  114,  a),  though  its  construction  is  different. 
(For  examples,  see  §  295  IT.) 

e.  The  Participles  may  all  be  used  as  simple  adjectives ;  and  the 
present  and  perfect  participles  are  sometimes  compared  as  adjectives ; 
as,  amSna,  amantior,  more  fond;  dllBotiiB,  dUSctiaBlmuk,  dearest. 

f.  The  Present  and  Perfect  participles  are  (like  adjectives)  often 
used  as  nouns,  especially  in  the  plural  (%  iSS")  ■.  aa,  i«^«ii.tta,  ruCtri 

(those  ruling);  mortal,  Ihe  tiead.  X 


i  113-15.] 


mf  Siipih 


g.  As  an  adjective,  the  participle  is  often  used  predicarively  [< 

e  special  drcutnstance  or  situation ;  as.  moritOrl  v5s  BalfltB 
'  at  the  point  of  death  (about  to  diej  salute  you. 

4.   Oerond  and  Supine. 
1 14.   The  Gerund  and  Supine  are  used  as  follows :  — 

,  The  Gerund  is,  in  fornn,  the  neuter  singular  of  ihe  Gerundive 
1  a  verbal  noun,  corresponding  In  meaning  to  the  English  verba 
1  in-DJG  (§  29s):  as,  lo^neadl  aa.\ia&.  for  Ifu  sake  0/ speaking. 

Note. — In  Ihia  use  Ihe  Gerund  15  found  only  in  the  oblique  cases.  A  correiB 
onding  nominative  is  supplied  by  the  Infinitive:  thus,  scrftwre  est  Qtlla,^ 
itiig  (to  write)  is  Hseflil;  but,  ftrs  acrtbendl.  Ihe  art  ofvirUing. 

.  The  Supine  is  in  form  a.  noun  of  the  fourth  declension  (§  71.  a), 

found  only  in  the  accusative  ending  in  -turn,  -Bum  and  the  ablative  (or 

dative,  [ffobably  both)  ending  in  -tfi,  -sfi.     These  are  sometimes  called 

,  the  Former  and  the  Latter  Supine.    The  Former  is  used  after  verbs  and   , 

e  Latter  after  adjectives  (%%  302,  303):  as, — 

1.  vBnit  apeotatum,  he  came  to  see. 

2.  miiSbUe  dicta,  'jjomlerful  to  tell. 

5.   Tenses. 

lia.    The  tenses  of  the  verb  are  of  two  classes,  viz. : —  ■ 

1.  Of  cottlinued  action. 

1.  Present;  aafiba, /am  writing. 

2.  Imperfect;  BorlbSbam,  I  ■was  writing. 

3.  Future:  aaxTbaxa,  I  shall  •write. 

2.  Of  completed  action. 

4.  Perfect:  aciipBi, /have ■written,  f -wrote. 
;.  Pluperfect;  Bcrlpseram,  / had  written. 
6.  Future  Perfect;  scripaerfl,  f  shall  have  ivritlen. 

a.    Tenses  of  the  ludioatlve, 
.  The  tenses  of  the  Indicative  have,  in  general,  the  same  mea 
1  the  corresponding  tenses  in  English;   but  are  in  some  cases 
Btinguished  differently  in  their  use.     Thus  — 

.  The  Future  or  Future  Perfect  is  often  used  in  subordinate  clauses 
re  we  use  the  Present ;  as,  — 
bI  guld  babSbS  dabS,  if /have  (shall  have")  any  thing,  I  luiU  gi-ue. 
venero  BCtibam,  k'/w; /cowe  (shall  have  come.~),  1  will  Tiirite. 


Etymology :    Verbs. 


[I§  115. 1 


2.  The  Present  and  Imperfect  are  often  used  lo  express  continued 
action  where  the  English  uses  tenses  of  compUUd  mlion :  as,  — 
iam  difi  aeE^fitA.  I  have  long  been  (aud  still  am)  sick. 
iam  ditt  aegT3tS.bam,  /  had  long  been  (and  still  was)  sick. 

Note.—  Here  the  Perfect.  aoerOtaTl,  wouid  imply  thai  I  am  now 
Pluperfect,  that  I  was  well  at  the  past  time  designated. 

b.  The  Imperfect  is  used  to  describe  in  past  lime  a  ronlinued  action 
or  a  condition  of  things:  as,  ^o.i^'Sa^X,  he -was  writing;  ardCbat,  ('/ 
■was  on  fire. 

c.  The  Perfect,  having  two  separate  uses,  is  divided  ii>to  the  Perfect 
Definite  and  the  Perfect  Historical  (or  Indefinite). 

1.  The  Perfect  Definite  represents  the  action  of  the  verb  as  com- 
pleted in  present  time,  and  corresponds  to  the  English  (present-  or  com- 
pound-) perfect:  as,  sciIpBl,  I  have  -written. 

2.  The  Perfect  Historical  narrates  a  simple  act  or  state  in  past  LJnse 
without  representing  it  as  in  progress  or  continuing.  It  corresponds 
to  the  English  past  or  preterite  and  the  Greek  aorist :  as,  Hcrlpsit.  he 
wrote;  fiislt,  U  blazed  up.  -^m 

b.    Tenses  of  the  Subjunctive.  I 

d.  The  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  Mood  are  chiefly  used  in  dependent 
clauses,  following  the  rule  for  the  Sequence  ofT«nses  (see  §  336) ;  but 
have  also  special  idiomatic  uses  (see  Syntax,  §§  i66  ff.,  2S3,  308). 

III. -PERSONAL    ENDINGS. 
118.   Verbs  have  regular  terminations^  for  each  of  the 
three  Persons,  both  singular  and  plural,  active  anti  passive. 
These  are :  — 

Sing.  ACtlVE.  PASSIVE. 

1.  -ml-6or-iy.am-6. /toi'C.  -r;  zmo-i.  / am  loved. 

2.  -8:  ama-B,  thoii  tovest.    -lia  or -ve :  ama-Tia,  thou  art  ic 

3.  -t;  3iaa-t,  ie  loves.         -tur;  ama-tur,  Atf 


Pliii 


3-  -nt: 


a-tis,  j'o*  love,     -mini  r 
a-nt,  they  love,     -ntnr ; 


issive. 

•ed.  ^^1 


ama-minT,  you  at 
ama-ntnr,  Mg/n; 


I  These  terminations  are  fragments  of  old  Pronouns,  whose  significalion  iri  ihiis 

added  10  that  of  the  verli-stem  (compare  p.  19.  note  i).     But  the  ending  -mini  in 

the  second  person  plural  of  Ihe  passive  is  a  remnant  of  ttie  participial  form  fijund 

'•n  the  Creek  -fuiHis,  and  has  supplanted  the  proper  foim,  '«\i\c\i  does  m 

Jib  thought  by  some  sehoiars  that  -at  has  aaimi^aT  oripn. 


§§  116-18.]  Forms  of  the   Verb.  79 

Note. — The  present  indicative  of  the  active  voice  has  lost  the  -xn,  and  ends 
in  the  modified  stem- vowel  -0,  except  in  sum  and  inquam  (§§  119, 144.  b).  This 
5  stands  for  in  blended  in  sound  with  a  preceding  vowel  (amO  =  famft-xn).  The 
perfect  the  future  perfect,  and  the  future  in  -b(5  have  also  lost  the  -m. 

a.  The  Perfect  Indicative  active  has  the  special  terminations :  — 

Sing.  2.  -stit :  amav-i-sti,  thoti  lovedst, 

Plur.  2.  -stis :  amav-i-stis,  you  loved, 

3.  -Snint  or-Sre :  amav-6nint  (-Sre),  they  loved, 

b.  The  Imperative  has  the  following  terminations :  — 

Sing*  ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

2.  — :  ama,  love  thou,  -re :       ama-re,  be  thou  loved, 

2.  -to :  ama-t6,  thou  shall  love,  -tor ;     ama-tor,  thou  shall  be  loved, 

3.  -t6 :  ama-t5,  let  him  love,    -tor :     ama-tor,  let  him  be  loved, 

Plur. 

2.  -te :  ama-te,  love  ye.  -mini :  ama-minX,  be  ye  loved, 

2,  -t6te :  2Jti?i-\Ate,yes/ialllove, 

3.  -ntd :  zmai'TLt^,  let  them  love,  -ntor :  ama-ntor,  let  them  be  loved. 


IV.-FORMS    OF    THE    VERB. 

117.  Every  Latin  verb-form  (except  the  adjective  and 
noun  forms)  is  made  up  of  two  parts,  viz. :  — 

1.  The  Stem  (see  §  21).  This  is  either  the  root  or  a  modification 
or  development  of  it. 

2.  The  Ending,  consisting  of — 

a,  the  signs  of  mood  and  tense. 

b,  the  personal  ending  (see  §  116). 

Note  i. — Thus  in  the  verb  vocft-vi-t,  he  called,  the  root  is  VOC,  modified 
into  the  verb-stem  vocft-,  which  by  the  addition  of  the  tense  sign  -ul  (-vl) 
Ijecomes  the  perfect  tense  voc&vi ;  and  to  this  is  added  the  personal  ending  (-t) 
of  the  third  person  singular. 

Note  2. — These  endings  are  of  various  origin.  In  none  of  them,  however, 
is  the  tense  or  mood  sign  strictly  inserted  between  the  root  and  the  personal  ter- 
minations. All  verb-forms  are  either  inherited  from  a  time  when  the  elements  were 
still  significant  and  could  still  be  compounded,  or  are  imitations  of  such  inherited 
forms. 

118.  The  Verb-endings,  as  they  are  formed  by  the  signs 
for  mood  and  tense  combined  with  persouaY  exvdA.w^?»,  -ax^ 
exhibited  in  the  following  table :  — 


8o                                   Etymolog)':    Verbs. 

'•1 

ACTIVK.                                                      PASSIVE. 

■ 

Indic.                  Sub;,                           Indic- 

SUBJ.       ^B 

^H 

Sing.  1.  -C                          -m 

-or 

■ 

3.    -B                    ^^'-9     -B 

-rUor-ze     ^, 

......„H 

3- -t             If;   -t 

-tur             il 

^H 

/Vwr.  T,  -maa        "j^-~    -mua 

-mur          -5  = 

.„„   ■ 

;.  .tds            |22    .tl9 

-mini         .1 3 

-mini       ^M 

3.  -nt              "'=    -at 

-ntur 

-ntur        ^H 

n..I.<r/fof. 

V 

S/ng-.  1.  ~ba-m                   -rem 

-bar 

-re-r 

3.  -bS-a                    -re-a 

-b5-ris{-re) 

-rB-ris  (-te) 

3.  -bat                  -re-t 

■ba-tur 

-re-tur 

Plur.  I.  -ba-mua              -rS-mua 

-ba-mur 

-rS-mur 

2.  -ba-tiB                 -rS-tis 

-ba-miiil 

-rfi-minl 

3,  -ba-nt                  -re-nt 

-ba-ntur 

-re-ntur 

Indicative.             tnt^iv.                Indicative. 

Sing.  1.  -b^5        ,.:-^ 

-a-m 

-bo^r 

-a-i   ' 

It:  m 

-S^ 

-be-riH{-re)i^ 

^--ri8(-rB) 

-e-t 

bl-tur        J  = 

-/-tur 

I'lur.  1.  -bi-mna?!'?! 

-i'-muB 

-.,.„„   « 

-e-muT 

..  -bi-tia   nil 

-(-tie 

-bl-minl     .1 S 

-(--miiii 

3.  -bu-nt  --si 

-f-nt            '             bu-ntur 

-f-ntnr 

iNDIL.                          SUUJ.    rrrftd.           ISDlt. 

SUBJ. 

i/«^.  1.  -I                        -eri-m 

(»\aa 

aim 

2.  -i-a«                    -eri-a 

-tuBtta. 
-turn)     ™ 

s& 

3.  -it                        -eri-t 

'     eat 

sit 

/'liir.  I.  -i-mua                 -eri-mua 

Lsuut 

almaa 

2,  -i-atia                  -eri-tia 

BltlS 

3.  -«ni-ut(;r-6re    -orint 

Bint 

ylupfrfi-el. 

Sing.  I.  -eta-m               -is«e-m 

""^■■f"" 

oBaem 

2.  -etS-»                    isaBB 

esses 

3.  -ora-t                   -iaaet 

'  1  er.t 

easet 

P/ur.  1.  -erS-muB           -isse-mua 

I  Brant 

easSmUB 

2.  -era.t»              -iaae-tifl 

ewfitia 

3.  ^a-nt               -ima-nt 

auent 

. L 

»ii™v 

118,  119.] 


Forms  of  tlu   Verb. 


3 

^r-S 

-eri-t 

'     erit                              1 

Plur.  I 

-erl-mu8 

f  erlmuB 
Lerunt 

2 

-eri-tis 

3 

-erl-nt 

Imperative. 

Sing,  z 

—     Plur 

2.  -te            1     Sing.  1.  -re      Plur.  2.  -mini 

2 

-t5 

2.  -tSte       [               2.  -tor               2.  — 

3 

■t5 

3.  -ntfi        1               3.  -tor               3.  -ntor 

For  convenience  a  table  of  the  Noun  and  Adjective  forms  of  the 

rbis  here  added. 

Infinitives. 

Prro. 

re  (Pres. stem)               1  i.ii.iv.-ri;  iii. -i 

rcrf. 

laae  (Perf.  stem)             \              -tus  {-ta,  -turn)  essa 

Fal. 

tOruB  (-a,  - 

ninj  esse      (               -turn  Irl 
Participles. 

JVes. 

Dfl, -ntlB 

Per/. 

-tuB,  -ta,  -turn 

Fut. 

tOruB,  -a,  - 

un                          Ger.    -ndus,  -a,  -uia 

Gerund. 

Supine. 

-M, 

-d5,  -dum 

-diS 

-turn,  -tn 

.    McBtschol 

rs  regard 

it  as  a 

ngs,  of  pronoi 

liar  (0  Latin  a 

d  Cellic 

and  of 

Note.  —  The  I  oflhe  Perfed,  which  in  early  Latin  is  always  Jbi^f  ticepl  before 
-mus,  is  of  doublful  origin.  It  is  probably  in  all  cases  a  part  of  the  stem,  as  il  Is 
in  dedl,  etetl,  where  il  talies  the  place  of  the  vowel  a.  In  the  suffixes -vi  (of  un- 
known origin)  and  -el  (akin  to  those  of  Greek  tBci^a  and  Skx.  ndikiham) ,  and  in  the 
perfects  of  consooanl-roots,  it  seems  Id  be.  but  probably  is  not,  a  mere  connectine 
vowel  The  B  before  -tl  and  -tlB  Is  al&o  ar 
remnant  of  BB;  but  II  may  be.  like  the  persi 

The  Passive  is  a  middle  (or  reflexive}  fc 

^h  The  Verb  Sam. 

^M    119.   The  verb  aum,  be,  is  both  irregular  and  defective, 

^Kaving  no  gerund  or  supine,  and  no  participle  but  the 

future. 

^H  Its  coaJu£3tion  is  given  al  the  outset,  on  accovkalQ(\\&i.m9tH^a.'CiaCkr| 

^H>  tAe  inSection  of  all  other  verbs. 


^^^^^ 

82                               Elytnology:    Verbs. 

[sua. 

Principal  Parts:  Pres.  Bnni,  Infin.  eue,  Perf.  ful. 

Fut.  Part.  futfiroB. 

Indicative.                                     Subjunctive. 

Sing.  I.  axim,/am. 

Blm* 

2.  ea,  lAou  art  {you  are)- 

BjB 

3.  e>t,  Ae  (jAr.  it)  is. 

sit 

/'lur.  I.  BTiiaua,  ive  are. 

sunns 

2.  BBtia.^oii  are. 

Bitia 

3.  Bimt,  tA/ji  are. 

Bint 

Imprrfect. 

Sing.  I.  Oram,  /iwar. 

easem  (forem) 

3.  eiSA,  you -were. 

eases  (forSs) 

3.  etat,  he  {she,  it)  was. 

esset  ((otet) 

Plur.  1,  erftmna,  ivev/ere. 

esBSmua 

2.  exfitis,  you  were.                 '              easStia 

3.  eraut,  (hey  -a/ere.                               esaent  (foront) 

Ifulurt. 

Sing.  1.  ei5,IshaUde. 

2.  aria,  you  will  be. 

3.  erit.  he  will  be. 

Plur.  I.  eritoM'&.'we  shall  be. 

2.  BA\ia,you-!vinbe.               \ 

3.  eruat,  they  will  be.              | 

^^ 

J-cr/irt. 

M 

Sing.  I.  fnl,  lioas  (have  been). 

faertm 

2.  fuiaO,  you  were 

fueris 

H 

3.  fuit,  A«  was. 

merit 

s 

Plur.  I.  fuimua.  w^  zcirrf. 

fueiimiw 

2.  futstia,  you  were. 

fneiitU 

fl 

3.  (u6runt,fu8re,WfC7(;«^'£. 

fneiint 

9 

Ptuprrf^rt. 

^ 

Sing.  [.  fueram,  I  had  been. 

fuisaem 

2.  Ixieiia,  you  had  been. 

fuiBsCs 

S 

3.  fuetat,  he  had  been. 

fuisSBt 

■ 

Piur.  I.  taer&mxM.we  iadbeen. 

faiasEmiiA 

(■ 

2.  ftier&tiB,  ^0n  >iad  been. 

fuIssBtis 

tT 

3.  fuerant,  they  had  been. 

fnlBBent 

fe  ^vsn. 

*«//«,-[ 

k~      .k 

Fjg  119, 120.] 


2'he    Verb  Sum. 


83 1 


Sing,  I.  tti6T^,f shall  have  been.      Plur.  i.  faeriTa\)A,we  shall  havtbeen^^ 
z.  iy\sr^,yntfwitthavebeen.  2,  tueiiiia,voit  will  have  deen. 

3.  tnexit,  he  will ha-zie  been.  3.  fiieiiat,th^  ■will have  been. 

Impebative. 
jveaefif.  Sing.  3.  6b,  be  thou.  Plur.  1.  eate,  heye. 

titire,  2.  eatBt  f/roii  shall  be.  2.  eatSte, ye  shall  ie. 

3.  SBto,  he  shall  be.  3.  enato, /hey  shall  ie. 

Infinitive. 

J>na«n(.   esBe,  /d  fo. 

rerfert.    fuiflSB,  /o  have  been. 

Futwre.  fore  or  fatnrUB  esBe.  2'1'i  j«  about  io  be. 

Participle. 
j-Vi(ure.   futiiruB,  -a,  -inn,  about  to  be. 

a.  The  present  participle,  which  should  be  faSua  (compare  Sanskrit  1 
tant),  appears  in  that  form  in  ab-sSuB,  prEie-aSna ;  and  as  6ns  (cd 
pare  uni)  in  pot-Bna.  The  simple  form  Sub  is  somelimes  fouod  in  late  j 
or  philosophical  Latin  as  a  participle  or  abstract  noun,  in  the  forms  | 
Sna,  being;  ontia,  things  which  are. 

b.  Rare  Forms. — Indicative;   Future,  eacit,  eacnnt  (strictly  aa  j 
inchoative  present,  see  §  167.  a). 

Subjunctive:  Present,  aiem,  Bi6B,  Biet,  alent;  fOEun,  fuSa,  fnat, 
foant;  Perfect,  ffivimua ;  Pluperfect,  fflviaaet. 

Note,—  For  eBsem,  etc.,  forem,  rorBs,  etc.,  are  often  used  wilhoul  differe 
of  meaning. 

120.   The  verb  eum  appears  in  numerous  compounds, 
which  will  be  treated  under  Irregular  Verbs  {§  137). 

Note. — The  root  of  the  verb  sum  is  ES,  which  in  the  imperfecl  is  changed  to 
ER  (see  {  II.  a.  i),  and  ia  many  cases  is  shoriened  to  s.    Some  of  its  modlfio   " 
■S  found  in  several  languages  mote  or  less  closely  relalcd  to  l,a[in,  may  be  s 

(bllowing  table, — the  "  Indo-European  "  being  the  primitive  or  Iheoredc 
[he  form  ^am  corresponding  to  the  Latin  aim  {BiemJ : — 


H"  The  Perfect  and  Supine  si 
■  Wth  Ibe  Eoslish  ^ 

ems.ful-.futOro-,  ai 

■e  Itindred  \ 

vith  the  Greek  ^«,  and 

^^k                                                   1  OM  form.                                                            ^H 

I 


I4  Etymology:    Verbs.  [§§121,122, 

The  Three  Btenu. 
121.   The  parts  of  the  Latin  verb  may  be  formed  upon 
three  different  steins   {partly  real  and  partly  supposed), 
called  the  Present,  the  Perfect,  and  the  Supine  Stem  (see 
notes,  pp.  S6,  119  ff.). 

:.  The  tenses  of  continued  action,  both  active  and  passive,  together 
witli  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive,  are  formed  upon  the  Present  Stem, 
and  collectively  are  called  the  Present  System. 

b.  The  tenses  ai  completed  action  in  the  active  voice  are  formed  upon 
the  Perfect  Stem,  and  are  called  the  Perfect  System. 

.  The  Perfect  and  Future  Participles  and  the  Supine  are  formed 
upon  the  Sopine  Stem,  and  are  caJIed  the  Supine  System. 

Note  1. — Since  Lalin  verbs  are  commonly  spoken  of  under  the  form  of  their 
ireaent  lease,  the  other  parts  are  usually  said  to  be  derived  from  this.  It  is  only  in 
He  verbs  formed  later  in  the  language  that  this  is  vuc.  Thus  ormftTl,  I  Aavr 
rmid,  does  come  from  annS,  /arm;  bul  bItI, /Aour  ji/Zsumi/,  does  not  come 
-om  HliiS.  /  allow:  but  both  ^nS  and  bIvI  come  from  a,  common  source,  the 
aat  (see  {{  aa,  123.  124),  by  different  processes. 

Note  2.  —  The  Infiutitce  of  Analogy.  Many  Lalin  verbs  were  not  inherited  from 
Ihe  parent  speech,  hul  formed  during  the  separale  existence  of  the  language.  The 
forms  of  these  verbs  are  no(  strictly  compounds  of  root  or  stem  and  ending,  but  are 
ilions  of  verbs  already  enstingin  Latin.  For  it  is  only  by  analogy  thai  elements 
(parts  of  words)  not  complete  and  signiGcant  in  themselves  can  be  used  lo  form  new 
irds  in  a  developed  language.  When  items  are  not  felt  as  significant,  Ihejr  can- 
il  be  used  far  composition.  Tbus  a  form  like  fugftbat  could  be  made  only 
from  a  eomplele  word  fUBa,  or  from  some  form  in  which  fuga  seemed  lo  be 
a  complete  word ;  and  must  be  regarded,  not  as  a  compound  of  stem  and  auiiliaiy, 
fusil- +  bat  (like  arft- +  bat),  but  as  an  Imitstion  of  forms  like  ar&bat,  which 
originally  were  really  compounds.  Simple  Perfects  Uke  ded!  and  compound 
forms  like  vBxJ  have  both  influenced,  by  analogy,  the  production  of  new  forms, 
like  momortU  from  mordeB.  mftnai  from  maneO, 


V.-REGULAR    VERBS. 

Latin  verbs  are  classed  as  Regular  or  Irregular  accord- 
ing as  they  do  or  do  not  follow  the  inflection  of  the  Four 
Conjugations. 

122.  Tliere  are  in  Latin  four  principal  forms  of  Present 
Stems,  ending  respectively  in  a-,  8-,  8-,  I-.  With  this  differ- 
ence of  stem  most  of  the  other  differences  of  conjugation 
coincide.  ^ 


Regular   Verbs. 


85  I 


a.  Verbs  are  accotdingly  classed  in  Four  Regular  Conjugations,  di»»  \ 
tinguished  by  the  stem-vowel  which  appears  before  -re  in  the  Present  ] 
Infinitive  Active. 

b.  The  Principai,  Parts  of  a  verb,  which  determine  its  conjugation  1 
throughout,  are  — 

1.  The  Present  Indicative  [  showing  Ih&present  stem  and 

2.  The  Present  Infinitive  )      the  eonjugation. 

3.  The  Perfect  Indicative,  showing  "Ca^ perfect  stem. 

4.  The  Supine  (or  the  Perfect  Participle),  showing  the  supine 

C.  The  regular  forms  of  the  conjugations  are  seen  in  the  following :  - 
First:  Active,  amS.  amSrs,  amAvI,  amStum, /iiT/f . 
Passive,  amoi.  am3jl,  am5tUB. 

Present-  and  Verb-stem  amS-,  Perfect-slem  amSv-,  Supine 
stem  am3t-. 
Second  :  daieo,  daiSre,  i3616vl.  daetum,  blot  out. 
Passive,  dSIeor,  dSlSrl,  dSlStus. 
Present- and  Verb-stem  dSlB-,  Perfect-stem,  dSlEv-,  Supine- 
stem  deiet-. 
Third:  tegS.  tegCre,  tS^,  tSotum,  cover. 
Passive,  tegor,  tegl,  tSotua. 
Root  TEG,  Verb-stem  tegB-,  Perfect-stem  tfix-,  Supin< 

tect-. 

Fourth :   audl5,  audlre,  audivl,  audltum.  /tear. 
Passive,  audiot,  audirl,  auditUB. 
Present-  and  Verb-stem  audi-,  Perfect-stem,  audiv-.  Supine- 
stem,  audit-. 

Ji  the  Second  conjugation,  however,  the  characteristic  8-  rarely  appears 
i&  the  perfect  and  supine  r  the  type  of  this  conjugation  is,  therefore  — 
Second:  moueo,  moaSre,  monuT,  monitum,  warn. 
mSri,  monitua. 


,   In  many  verbs  tlie  principal  parts  lake  forms  belonging  t 
tore  different  conjugations  (cf.  §  [34)  :  as, — 

1.  1,  dotnS,  domSre,  domui,  domitam.  subdue. 

2.  3,  maueC,  manere,  dSnsi,  mSnsuia,  ranain- 

3.  4,  pets,  petSre,  petivi.  petltum,  seek. 

4-  3,  vinoiS,  vlnolre,  vinxl,  vlnctum,  bind. 

o  wh\c\i  *he  feraX  ot  "^vftsfoX- 


Etymology :    Verbs. 

1.  Preaeat  Stem. 

Note.  —  The  parent  speech  from  which  Latin  comes  possessed  verbs 
with  present  stems  of  three  difTerent  kinds.  These  verbs  were  formed 
as  follows ;  — 

First:  From  roots,  by  adding  the  personal  endings. 

Second:  From  noun-stems,  by  adding  the  personal  endings.  These 
□oun-stems  had  been  formed  from  roots  by  the  addition  of  various 
suffixes,  as  a-,  na-,  ya-,  ta-. 

Third :  From  roots  and  stems,  by  adding  a  common  suiKx  (probably 
■yaml,  etc.,  later  -yomi)  which  already  contained  the  personal  endings. 

Verbs  of  all  these  forms  were  inherited  by  the  Latin.  Of  the  first  class 
i,  and  these  are  counted  as  irregular,  except  such  as  have  been 
forced  into  some  one  of  the  four  conjugations.  Examples  are ;  Sat, 
frttm  edS ;  fert,  from  fero ;  dKa,  from  dd  (clSre)  ;  flfimus,  from  fle6. 

Of  the  second  class  a  large  number  remain.  In  these  the  verb-stem 
ends  in  a  short  vowel,  fi-  (I-).  This  is  a  remnant  of  the  original  vowel 
S-  (B-)  of  the  noun-suffixes.  Besides  this,  the  consonant  of  the  suffix 
is  often  preserved.  Verbs  of  this  form  are  often  called  primiiive  verbs, 
because  the  language  lost  the  power  of  making  new  forms  of  this  type 
except  in  a  few  cases.  They  make  up  the  third  conjugation.  Ex- 
amples are  :  fer3  (slem  fero=-)  for  bher-o-mi  (cf.  fert  in  the  first 
class)  ;  Bternlmue  (stem  sternoe-)  for  Btar-no-maB ;  plectunt  (stem 
pleoto=-)  for  plec-to-nti;  pell5  (stem  pello"-)  for  pel-yo-ml.  So 
dlec3  (stem  dlHoo=-)  for  dI(c)aco-ml.  This  last  form  became  the 
type  for  a  large  number  of  verbs  called  inceptive  (see  §  167.  a). 

Of  the  third  class,  those  verbs  in  which  any  vowel  (except  nj  came 
in  contact  with  the  suffix  (-yaml)  suffered  contraction  so  as  to  present 
a.  long  vowel,  a-,  6-,  I-,  at  the  end  of  the  slem.  These  became  the 
types  of  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjugations  respectively.  In 
imitation  of  these  long  vowel-stems  numerous  verbs  were  formed  by  the 
Romans  themselves  (after  the  mode  of  formation  had  been  entirely 
forgotten)  from  noun  and  adjective  stems.  This  came  to  be  the 
regular  way  of  forming  new  verbs,  just  as  in  English  the  borrowed 
suffix  -ise  can  be  added  to  adjectives  to  make  a  verb ;  as,  jrwdernize. 

Those  verbs  of  the  third  class  in  which  a  consonant  or  n  came  in 
contact  with  the  suffix  -yaml  suffered  various  phonetic  changes.  Such 
verbs  fell  partly  into  the  third  conjugation,  giving  rise  to  an  irregular 
form  of  it,  and  partly  into  the  fourth,  and  some  have  forms  of  both. 

Examples  are:  (oCn)8ptoi3,  -epicere,  for  apek-yomi;  veniS,  venire, 
/or (g)-7en~yoaii  \  ciipio,  cupere,  butcuplv^',  oriot,oAiiM.T,\i\Aiyftn.. 
I  ButpJaS,  pJuere, /"or  plu-yomi:  and  hence, by  a.taiog7,a.Q>\6,acvi«6' 


Present  Stem. 

many  cross-analogies  and  errors  as  well  a 
have  been  at  work  to  produce  irregularities, 
the  traditional  system  -which  may  be  practically  repreaentw 


The  Present  Stem  is  formed  from  the  Root  in  all-l 
regular  verbs  in  one  of  the  following  ways  :  ^  — 

.   In  the  First,  Second,  and  Fourth  conjugations,  by  adding  a  long  J 
vvel  (5-,  S-,  I-)  to  the  root,  whose  vowel  is  somedmes  changed: 
e  (voc),  mone-re  (me.v,  cf.  meminl),  Bopl-i'e  (sop). 


,s  (se, 


all  really  formed  froD 


.  In  the  Third  conjugation,  by  adding  a  s/iorS  vowel  (6-,  t)  ti 
:  as,  tegfr-re  (teg),  all-tiB  (al).     This  vowel  may  be  preceded  — •  I 
.  By  n,  t,  8C,  or  the  terminal  consonant  of  the  root  repeated   (a 
phonetic  representative  of  original  i) ;   as,  tomne-re  (tem),  plect-0 
■LEC),  orSace-To  (CRE),  pell-o  (forpel-io,  pel),  mItt-6  (MIt). 

3.   By  i,  which  in  most  forms  disappears  in  inflection  (see  §  126.  c)  : 
i,  fuB-i-3,  fug-S-re  (fug), 
c.  The  root  may  also  be  changed  — 

1.  By  lengthening  the  vowel :  as,  dlo-e-ro  (dic),  caed-e-re  (CAD?), 

2.  By  the  repetirion  of  a  part  of  it  [rtdupUcation) :  as,  gl-gn-e-r» 
L£gen). 

3.  By  inserting  a  nasal  (m  or  n)  :   as,  find-e-re  (fid)  ;   taug-e-: 
I[tag). 

some  verbs   the  present  stem  is  formed  from   a   noun-ste 
regularly   treated   as   a   root:   as,  Btatu-e-re  (atatu-a),  aestu-a-: 
|[ae8ta-8)  ;  cf.  acno,  acuere, 

.  A  few  isolated  forms  use  the  simple  root  as  a  present  stem :  a 
1,  fer-t;  ee-ee;  vel-le,  vul-t.    These  are  counted  as  irregular. 


1  These  fbtmation 


:d  In  Ihe  foil 


Lg  parallel 


I,  vRch-ayft^nl     voc-{a)-i    a.vah-ft-ml     vrh-i       s.pac-yft-ml    ^c-4-i 
vach-aya^Ed       voc-as  vah-a-si      vth-is        pag-ya-al      spic-i-s 

vach-oya-ti       voc-a-t  voll-ft-tl       vih-i-t        paj-ya-tl      spic-i-t 

vach-ayft-mae  voc-a-mus       ■vaiiSrTaas  v^h-i-mas    ■p^.l-yi-TaoB -sfic-i-mas 
I    vftch-ayo-ttia   voc-d-lii         vah-a-tba   viA-i-iis      pa^-ya-tha  spU-i-tis 
TBOh-aya-ntl     vac-a-nl  vah-a-ntl    veh-u-nt       pag-ya-uti    -spic-i-unl 

p  cases  Ihem  appears  lo  be  3  connecting  vQvieV  not  cT^^Xalmei  *««e\ 
nes  from  Ihe  Irregular  use  of  a  'vert)-alem  in  p\acc  ol  a.  T«A,  »*« 
iFua  (cf.  ortus),  monlttis  (cf.  mens,  mentta),  ■ 


I 
I 


88  Etymology:    Verbs.  [§§123-125. 

f.  A  few  have  roots  ending  in  a  vowel.  These  generally  use  as 
present  stem  the  root  without  additions,  but  sometimes  modified :  as, 
da-mus  (.da),  flC-mue  (stem  fIS-.  root  form  unknowa),  BlBtl-mus 
(sta).  But  others,  as  rui-mus  (ru),  are  formed  with  an  additional 
vowel  according  to  the  analogy  of  if. 

2.  Perfect  Stem. 

124.  The  Perfect  Stem  is  formed  as  follows:^ 

a.  The  suffix  v  (u)  (see  fi.  120,  c)  is  added  to  the  verb-stem:  as. 
vocS-v-l,  audi-v-I;  or  to  the  root:  as,  sou-a-I  (souS-re,  root  SON), 
mon-u-i  (moufi-xe,  mok  treated  as  a  root). 

Note.  — In  a  few  verbs  the  vowel  of  the  root  is  transposed  and  lengthened  (sec 
{  9.  if ) :  as.  strft-v-I  (BtemS,  sfar),  Bpr3-v-I  [Bpem5.  spar). 

6.  The  suffix  b  is  added  to  the  root:  as,  earp-a-I  (carp),  tfix-I 
(for  teg-s-T,  teg). 

Note.  —  The  modifications  of  the  present  stem  sometimes  appear  in  the  perfect : 
as,  tlnz-I  (PIG,  present  stem  flngg-),  eanx-I  (sac.  present  stem  sand-). 

c.  The  root  is  rtduplicated\y^  prefixing  the  first  consonant  —  gener- 
ally with  6,  sometimes  with  the  root-vowel:  as,  ce-cid-I  (cado,  cad), 
to-tond-I  (tondefi,  tond). 

Note.  — In  fldJ  (for  tte-fld-l,  flnd-S),  scid-i  (for  tsci-Bcid-i.  BcindS),  the 
reduplication  has  been  lost,  leaving  merely  the  root. 

d.  The  root-vowel  is  lengthened :  as.  §6-1  (Sg-S),  fug-i  (fiig-i-5). 

e.  The  root  itself  is  used  as  the  perfect  stem :  as,  vert-I  (vert-o, 
vebt),  aolv-I  (bo1v-5,  solv  used  as  root). 

/.   Sometimes  the  perfect  is  formed  from  a  lost  or  imaginary  stem:— 
as,  petl-v-I  (as  if  from  tpeti-6,  tpetl-re,  pet).  .jfl 

3.  Supine  Stem.  ^H 

125.  The  Supine  Stem^  is  formed  by  adding  t-  (or 
phonetically  »-) :  — 

a.  To  the  verb-stem  :  as,  amS-t-um,  dfilfi-t-am,  atidl-t-oin. 

b.  To  the  root,  with  or  without  1:  as,  cap-t-um  (caplS,  CAP), 
moni-t-nm  (moueS,  mon  used  as  root),  cSs-um  (for  oad-t-um,  CAD). 

Note  i.  —  The  modificalions  of  the  present  siem  sometimes  appear  in  the 
supine:  as,  tinc-t-una  (tlngO,  tig),  tfin-B-iim  {ten-d-S,  ten). 

Note  a.  —  The  supine  is  sometimes  from  a  lost  or  imaginary  verb-stem :  ns, 
potl-t-um  (as  if  from  tpeti-fi,  tpoti-re.  pet). 


I 


f  126.]  Supine  Stem. 

126.  The  forms  of  the  several  conjugations  from  which,! 
by  adding  the  verb  endings  in  §  nS,  all  the  moods  and] 
tenses  can  be  made  are  as  follows  :  — 

a.  The    First    Conjugation    indudEs   all   verbs   which    add   S- 

the  root  to  form  the  present  slem:'  as,  amS-re;  with  a  few  whose  1 
root  ends  ia  a  (dC,  dfire;  for,  fSrt;  flS,  flfirs;  nS,  a&ra;  atS,  | 
BOre). 

1.  The  stem-voi^d  S-  b  lost  before  -5  (as,  amS  -  fama-fi),  and  ia  | 
the  present  subjunctive  is  changed  to  6 :  as,  amB-B,  amC-miia. 

2.  The  perfect  stem   regularly  adds  v,  the  supine   stem  t,  li 
present    stem ;     as,    am&-v-I.    ataa-t-um.      For    exceptions,    see   § 
130- 

b.  The  Second  Conjugation  includes  all  verbs  which  add  8-  to  the  J 
root  to  form  the  present  stem,  as  monS-re;  with  a  few  whose  root  I 
ends  in  B  (fIe-3,  fle-re ;  ne5,  ne-re ;  re-or,  rS-rl). 

I,  In  the  present  subjunctive  5  is  added  to  the  verb-stem;  as, 
mone-a-B,  mooe-a-mns  (cf.  §  ii3). 

I.  A  few  verbs  form  the   perfect  stem  by  adding  t  (n),  and  the 

lupine  stem  by  adding  t  to  the  present  stem :  as,  del6-T-i,  delfi-t-um. 

form  the  perfect  stem  by  adding  v  (u)  to  the  root,  and  the 

lupine  stem  by  adding  t  to  a  weaker  form  of  the  present  stem,  having 

I  for  S :  as,  mon-u-I,  monl-t-uni.     For  lists,  see  §  131. 

!■.  The  Third  Conjugation  includes  all  verbs  (not  irregular,  see  S 
137J  which  add  8-  to  the  root  to  form  the  present  stem ;  as, 
tegfi-ro,  oap8-re;  with  a  few  whose  root  ends  in  6:  as,  ae-tS-re  for 
|ae-Be-re  (reduplicated  from  se,  cf.  aatum). 

1.  The  stem-vowel  8-  is  lost  before  -5,  becomes  n-  before  -nt,  and  I 
before  the  other  endings  of  the  indicative  and  imperative:  as,  teg-S, 
teg-it,  togu-nt ;  in  the  imperfect  indicative  it  becomes  6 :  as,  tegS- 
bam ;  in  the  future,  6 :  as,  tegSs ;  in  the  present  subjunctive  S :  as,  tega-a. 

Verbs  in  -iS  retain  the  i  before  a,  8.  u,  and  fi :  as,  capi-at,  oapi-unt, 
oapi-Ebat,  oapi-Cs,  oapl-et>;  but  lose  it  elsewhere:  as,  cap-it  (do! 
loapi-it),  cap-eret. 

2.  All  forms  of  perfect  and  supine  stems  are  found  In  this  conjuga- 
tion. See  lists,  §  132.  But  the  perfect  is  never  formed  from  the 
present  stem,  but  always  from  the  root  (g  131.  n.  i). 


_  presi 


1  The  presenl  slem  is  thus  (he  verb-slem.  For  exceptions,  w 
*  The  geruniHre  i-arfes  between  -endue  and  -undua  (,\  la 
'The  Bin  capiat,  once  long,  was  afterwards  shortened. 


!«,JI|^ 


90  Etymology:    Verbs.  \%%  12^ 

d.  The  Foufih  CoDJagation  includes  all  verbs  which  add  I  to  the 
root  to  form  the  present  slem :  as.  aadl-re.>  In  these  the  perfect  and 
■iipine  stems  rcj^lnrly  add  v,  t,  to  the  verb-stem:  as,  audl-v-t, 
■ndl't>iim.'  The  endings  of  the  third  conjugation  are  added  in  the 
third  pcnwn  plural  of  the  present  (indicative  and  iraperative),  in  the 
imperfect  and  future  indicallve,  and  in  the  present  subjunctive:  as, 
■ndl-tint,  ■ndl-Sbat,  audl-StlB,  aadi-at. 

I.  The  PrcB.  Impuralive  Act,  (second  pers.  sing.)  is  the  same  as  the 
prcnent  Mem:  an.  amfi,  mone.  teg6.  audi.  IJu^verbs  in  -iS  of  the 
third  conjugation  omit  1 :  as,  oapS  (not  foapiej. 

f.  The  teniea  d^  compUUd  action  are  all  regularly  formed  by  adding 
the  Icruc-cndingH  (given  in  §  118)  to  the  perfect  stem:  as,  amav-i, 
■mtT>«run,  amSv-erS,  amSv-erim,  amav-lBsem,  amav-isHo, 

g.  The  lenacM  ai cnmpteted  action  in  the  Passive  voice  are  formed  by 
adding  to  the  perfect  participle  the  corresponding  tenses  of  £<7»/iVi»£i/ 
aetiatt  o!  the  verb  enne :  as,  perf.  ama.tiis  sum;  \:>\up.  amatua  eiam,  etc 

4.    Synopafa  of  the  Verb. 

1S7.  The  following  synopsis  shows  the  forms  of  the 
verba  arranged  according  to  the  several  stems.  AmS,  a 
regular  verb  of  the  first  conjugation,  is  taken  as  a  type. 

Tkesent  stem,  amK-;  Perfect  stem,  amav-;  Supine  stem,  aiaat-. 

PRUS.       IMPEBK.  FI:T.  ;         TERf.  PLUPEHF.         FUT.  PERI 

iNij.     amO      amI-bam  amfi-bB      1  amav-I 

Still,     nma-in  anil-rani  |  amSv-oxlm 

Imi',  3.  aniK      amU-tO       I 


amt-ra ',  amat-ams  j  amB.74aa« 

Part.  Aml-iu  l^amat-Onia 

Inp.     amo-t  amS-bar  aniB-boi     ;aniSt-uaBuii 

SliH.     anie-r    aml-rsr     !  ainSt-na  Bim 

tuisa>ainl-4r« am&tor      ;- — — 

Ink.      iml-fl iam«-tumlil  amSt-ma  eaa< 

Part.  Of-  ama-ndna ;  amSt-us 


'*»*  h«  an  IbnMd  fcwa  aoiwMienis,  u  Ibd-r*  (from  Qnt«>,  ud  1 


Special  Fonns. 

128.  The  following  special  forms  require  notice  : 
a.  In  teases  formed  upon  the  perfect  stem,  v  between  two  vowels  ii 
^ften  lost  and  contraction  takes  place.     Thus,  — 

.  Perfects  in  -avl,  -Cvl,  -fivl,  often  contract  the  two  vowels  into  i^fl 

I,  fi  respectively :  as,  amSaae  for  amSviase  ;  amarim  for  amaverim  jT 

VMii3asein  for  amaTiaaem  ;  oonaugrat  for  oSnauSverat ;  flSatis  tixm 

J-flBvlBtiB;  noaae  for  noviaae.     So  in  perfects  in -vi,  where  the  n 

a  part  of  the  present  stem :  as,  eommorat  for  conunoverat. 

(as  amavl)  ii  n 


Perfects  in  -IvI  regularly  omit  v,  but  rarely  c 
except  before  at  and  aa,  and  very  rarely  in  the  third  person  perfect: 
as,  audieram  for  audiveram ;  audlase  for  audlviase ;  audiati  for 
andlviBti;  abiit  for  abivit.  The  forms  alria,  alrit,  airitja,  slrint, 
for  aivoria,  etc,  (from  aivero  or  siverini),  are  archaic. 

In  many  forms  from  the  perfect  stem,  ia,  isa,  aia  are  lost  in  like 
jnanner  when  8  would  be  repeated  if  they  were  retained :  as,  dizti  for 
diadsti  (x  =  OS) ;  trSxe  for  trSxisae ;  SvastI  for  §vaslstl ;  vixet  for 
-vlxlsaet;  6rSpeemua  for  SrSpaiaaSmua.  These  forms  belong  to 
archaic  and  colloquial  usage. 

■.  Four  verbs  —  dico,  duco,  facio,  fero  —  with  their  compounds, 
drop  the  vowel- terminadon  of  the  imperadve,  making  die,  diio,  fSc,    , 
ipounds  in  -fioiS  retain  it,  as  cSnfice.     The  forms  dto«,  ^ 
flfice,  face  (never  fere),  occur  in  early  Latin. 

d.  For  the  imperative  of  acio,  the  future  form  solto  is  always  used  I 
the  singular,  and  acltote  usually  in  the  plural. 

e.  The  following  ancient  forms  are  chiefly  found  in  poetry ;  - 
I.  In  the  fourth  conjugation  -Ibam,  -ibo  for  -iSbam,  -iam  (future).  J 

•These  forms  are  regular  in  eS,  go  (§  141). 

In  the  present  subjunctive  -im :  as  in  dulm,  peidaim  (for  den 
'^eideiii),  retained  in  religious  formulas.  This  form  is  regular  i 
inm  and  vols  and  their  compounds  (§g  1(9,  138). 

In  the  perfect  subjimctive  and  future  perfect  -aim,  -a5 :  as 
fajcim,  faxfi,  iiisBo,  recEpao,  (=  ffioetS,  etc.}  ;  auBim  (:=  auaii 
■Im). 

:u  the  passive  infinitive  -ier ;  as,  vooarier  for  vocStI ;  agler  for 

5,  A  form  in  -5bsS,  -assere  is  found  used  as  afutaTt  ■^wltcV. -Jfi, 

from  amd;  levaaoo,  from  levo  ^  uupeU%a%«i«,  ^<ST»^^^ 
ftr3;  iSdicAsait,  from  ffldlco.  "*" 


W                     ^^M 

H      gz                                  Etymology:                               ^^^^^H 

H                               FIRST    CONJUOATION.-ACTIVE   VOICE.               ^H 

V                  PrinCipai.  Parts:  Pres.  amB,  Infin.  am5re,  Perf.  amavl,   ^H 

W                                                        Supine  amatum.                                          ^H 

Indicative.                                     Subjunctivb.           ^^| 

Frraeiit.                                                         ^^| 

amS,  /  /oj'.;. 

amem                             ^^1 

amaa,  //jom  /avast  {you  love). 

a 

amat,  /«  (^ske,  it)  lovts. 

^ 

amftmua,  w/  love. 

amSmua                            ^^^ 

xiaUt^,  yoH  hvc. 

ametis                              ^H 

amant,  they  love.             ~ 

^^1 

amBbam,  I  loved.                            /                 atiifirem                           ^^H 

aniSbSB,7,;«/az>^</.                                           amSrea                            ^^| 

amabat,  ^i°  ili^^i/.                                              amSret                            ^^H 

amab5mti8,  we  /(Wfrf.                         '              amaremuB                       ^^H 

amabSti8,^0H/<w«rf.                           j              amSiStia                          ^H 

F^<u»f.                                                              J^^l 

amabS,  /  shall  love. 

^^^^^^^H 

am5biB,^e«  -will  Imie. 

^^^^^^H 

a.mS.hit.  ie  will  love. 

^^^^^^H 

amabimuB,  we  shall  love. 

^^^^^^H 

amabitiH,_j'au  iidll  love. 

j^^^^^^l 

amKbaat,  they  will  love. 

^^^^^^H 

Perfect.                                      "^^^^^H 

amavl,  /  loved. 

amaverim                         ^^H 

amavistl,  you  loved. 

amaveria                           ^^| 

amavit,  he  loved. 

amaverit                          ^^^| 

amavimuB,  we  loved. 

amaverimnfl                     ^^^| 

amavisUs, /(!«  loved. 

amaveiitlA                       ^^| 

amavenint  (-6reJ,  they  loved. 

aniaverint                     ^H 

I'luperfect.                                                    ^^^| 

amaveram,  I  had  loved. 

amavlsBem                     ^^H 

7.ma.y^riM,  you  had  loved. 

amavlsses                     ^^^| 

amaverat,  he  had  loved. 

^^^^^^^1 

amaverSmnB,  ■we  had  loved. 

an,,.l..^..^^^H 

aaia\'eratlB,j'ou  kad  loved. 

amaviuKVift  ^^^^^H 

^^Svmraat,  May  Aad Im-ed.              \             aT<\Avl&«eiA..^^^^^H 

First  Conjugation. 


•INGFI.AR. 

/  ilia//  have  loved. 
,  fom  ■will  haw  lovti 
^thiaveitt,  kt  will  have  laved. 


shall  have  loved. 
amaverjtia,  ynit  will  have  loz'ed. 
amaveiint,  they  ■will  have  loved. 
Imperatcve. 
2.  amS,  love  t/wu.  i  amate,  love  ye. 

2.  amSto,  thou  shall  lo%'e.  amat5te,^if  shall  love. 

3.  aniatd,  he  shall  love.  |  amautS,  they  shall  love. 

iNFINITrVE. 

JVeieiif,  amJirB,  to  love. 

Ferfect.  amSTiBHe  or  amSsae,  to  havt  loved. 

jhiIh™.  aniatiiniH  esse,  to  be  about  to  love. 

Participles. 
Prvsenf.  amSuB,  -antla,  loving. 
Future,  am&tflrtis,  -a,  -um,  about  to  love.  I 

Gerund. 

Gen.  amandi,  of  loving.  Ace.  amandam,  loving. 

DAT.  amando./fw  loving.  Abl.  amando,  by  loving. 

SupiXE. 

rarmer.  amatTim         T.aUtr.  amStfi,  to  love. 

S9.   The  so-called  Periphrastic  conjugations  are  formet 
by  combining  the  tenses  of  ease  with  the  Future  Activftfl 
Participle  and  with  the  Gerundive :  as,  — 

First  Periphrastic  Conjugation. 

Indicative.  SuBjuncTrvE, 

amStfinia  sum,  f  am  about  to  love.  sim 

Jmperf,      amatflrua  eram,  fvjas  about  to  love.  essem 

Fut.  amStaruB  ero,  f  shallbe  about  to  love. 

Ferf.  amStGruB  fui.  /  -was  about,  etc.  fuetim 

Flttpirf.     amatums  fneram,  /  had  been  about,  etc.    fuiaBem 

Fut.  Per/.  3.mituiuatuezo,/shallhavebeeKaioul,etc. 

Infinitive:  Pres.  amatOrua  ease        Per/,  amatams  folABe 
Second  Feripbrastic  Conjngatiou. 

Frei.  amanduB  sum.  /  ai/i  to  be  loved. aim 

Jmperf.      amandus  eram,  I  was  to  be  loved.  essem 

Fut.  amanduB  ^xa.  J sliall be\yiQriSyj'\tobeloved. 

Ferf.  amanduB  fui.  /  was  to  be  loved.  fuerim 

Fluperf.     ainaitdua  fueram,  I  had  been,  etc.  fuiaaeov 

^^^amandwtineio.  J  shall havi  been,  etc. 

>Vi-r,  amanduB  esse         Perf.  amanflLUB  l\»si«.« 


94                               Etymology : 

Verbs.                          I 
i 

FIRST    CONJUGATION.- 

PASSIVE   VOICE.            / 

Principal  Parts:  Pres.  amor,  Infin 

amSiI,  Perf.  amatiu  W 

Indicative. 

SUB/UNCTIVE. 

amor,  lam  loved. 

amer 

amSriB  (-ro),_yi)«  are  loved. 

amSriB  (-re) 

arnStur,  he  is  loved. 

aroetnr 

amSmur,  ive  are  loved. 

aniEmur 

amBminl,  you  are  loved. 

amSminl 

amantur,  tkty  are  loved. 

amentur 

Imperfect 

aniSbar,  Ivias  loved. 

amarer 

amBbariB  {_-t«),you  -mere  loved. 

amarerifl  (-re) 

amabatur,  he  was  loved. 

amSretur 

amabamur,  lue  ttiere  loved. 

amSrSmur 

amabamini,  yoi*  were  loved. 

araftbantur,  tkey  were  loved. 

Futurt. 

amabor,  I  shall  be  loved. 

^^^^^H 

ainaberis  (-re),_j'p«  will  be  loved. 

^^^^^^1 

am&bitur,  he  will  be  loved. 

^^^^^^1 

amftblmiir,  we  shall  be  loved. 

^^^^^^1 

aitiftbimini,  yoit  will  be  lo^ied. 

^^^^^^1 

^^^^^H 

Perfect. 

^^^^H 

amatus  aom,  /  was  loved. 

amatus  aim                ^^^| 

amatus  ea,you  were  loved. 

amatus  bIh                      ^H 

amatus  eat,  he  was  loved. 

'B 

amaS  Bumua,  we  were  laved. 

amati  slj^iu                 ^^H 

amatl  eitia.^dw  were  loved. 

amatl  sItU                    *^^| 

amatl  sunt,  they  were  loved. 

amatialnt                   '^H 

FlMprrferl 

>^H 

amatus  eram,  I  had  been  loved. 

amatus  easem               ^H 

amatus  eiis,you  had  been  loved. 

amatus  easBs                '*^H 

amatus  erat,  hi  had  been  loved. 

amatus  easet                   ^H 

amatl  eramua,  we  had  been  loved. 

amatl  esaemua              ^^| 

nmSS  ersaa.yau  had  deen  loved. 

amati  eAnStia                ^^| 

aaidl2arant,iA^  Mad  beat  loved.    1 

am&ti  QBKBu.^      ^^^^H 

^ 

^ 

First  Conjugation. 


matua  ero,  I  shall  have  6eeti  loved. 

IB,  yiM  will  have,  etc 
tna.tus  erit,  he  will  have,  etc. 


tl  crimus.  we  shall  have,  etc. 
t)  Biitia,_yott  will  have,  el 
tl  enint,  they  will  have,  e 


Imperative. 

2.  amSre,  he  thou  loved.           [  amamlal.  be  ye  loved, 
ut.    2.  amStor.thott  shall  be  ltmed.\ 

3.  amStor,  he  shall  be  loved.    \  amantor,  they  shall  be  loved. 

Infinitive. 
Bl.  araSri,  to  be  loved. 
Derfect.  amStUB  ease,  to  have  been  loved. 

■B.  amattua  Irl  (amStiu  foie),  lo  be  about  to  be  loved. 

Participles. 

Ferfeet.  amStofl,  loved  (beloved,  or  having  been  loved). 

Tntvre   (Gerundive),  amandua,  -a,  -um,  to-be-hved  {lovely). 

130.   There  are  about  360  simple  verbs  of  this  conjugation,  n 

of  tliem  formed  directly  on  a  noun-  or  adjective-stem  :  as,  axmS,  c 

(aima,  arms)  ;  oaeco,  to  blind  (oaeoua,  blind')  \  ezaulo,  be  an  exih 

(b3csu1,  an  exile)  (§  166.0).     Their  conjugation  is  usually  regular 

like  amo ;  though  of  many  only  a  few  forms  are  found  in  use. 

The  following  verbs  form  their  Perfect  and  Supine  si 
Those  marked  •  have  also  regular  forms. 


.  irregularly. 


crepo,  crepul,  crepit-,  resound. 

CTibo.  cubu^  onbit-,  lie  down. 

I  flC,  clSre,  dedi.  d&t-,£ive  (da). 

^BomS,  domu^  domit-,  subdue. 

Hc6,  frioul,  "friot-,  rub. 
fenvO  (ad-iuv3),  iQrt  ifit-,'  hcl^. 
^b5,  -StI  (no  sup.),  totter. 
ttiofl,  miOTii  (no  sup.),  fitter. 


neoS,  'necul,  *iiect-,  Ml. 
plicS,  •-plloul,  *-piicit',  Jbld. 
poto,  pfitavi,  •p6t-,  drink. 

sons,  aonui,  eonit-,'  sound. 
ato,  atetl,  stat-  (-attt-),  stand. 
tonC,  tonn^  tonit-,  thmuier. 
vets,  vettil  -vetit;  forbid. 


Note.  —  Compounds  of  these  verbs  have  ihe  following  forma; 

crepSt   dif-irrpul  OT -crtpOL). 

dS:  ciraat;  aiier-,ptsstim-,siiiis-,siiftr-,vlnBm'da,-dfi^,.ial-,<^S6is  1st  conju- 
gation; o&eiDom^ai\iia,noityie3A,ascBndS,coMiilrc,cmdidi,i(nidUuBi,    I 

mloB :   M-mlcSfn,  -tKicSl-!  i-micid,  ..mical^ 

IdlcB :   rf-,  mi-  (aifi-),  niKlii-pHeS,  .flitadt,  .flicat-;  ex-flicS  (unfbtdl,  -*),  ->^,■  ' 
(explsin).  .Srf,  -5*,-  im-flicf  -5rf  C-bO,  -eoAm  {-i/um), 

BtS:  cdii-s/3,-ifitl,-ilii-(-JiSt-);  ad-.rt-i/S-.stiti.—,-  an/t-(aii/i-),i>i/i 

ta,  -ittS,  — >■  cimm-sf!,  -tteH  (-t/ift),  — ;  dl-iO,  no  perfett  ot  !.\i'5ii«. 


iFi  -I 


•■  Participle  in  -MarMB. 


1 

Etymology:    Verbs. 
SECOND    CONJUGATION. 

^1 

^1          Principal 

Parts:   Active,  monefi,  monSre,  monol,  monitum; 

K 

Passi'oe,  moneor,  monErl,  monitKa  a 

lun.                     -^^ 

■ 

ACTITE.                                                       PASSIVE.                      f^| 

^H                        INDIC 

SUBJ.                                    IKDIC. 

SUBJ.         ^H 

moneS,  Iwc 

rn.     moueam 

moneor 

mo  near 

moneB,^o«  -a 

am.  moneaa 

monSrla  {-re) 

moneitriB  (-re) 

mo  net,  he  ■w 

rns.    m  on  eat 

monStUT 

moneatur 

monemuB 

moneamoa 

monemur 

moueamvir      ^^H 

monetlB 

moneatiB 

monemlnl 

moneSroiid     ^^| 

moaont 

moneant 

monentur 

moneantur     ^H 

Imperfett. 

^H 

manebam 

monSrem 

monfibar 

monSrer 

monSbSs 

monSrSa 

moiiSbaria  (-re) 

monSiBria  {-re) 

mo  neb  at 

mon§ret 

monBbatnr 

monfirfitur 

mon6b3muB 

monSrSmua 

monebamur 

monSremnr 

mon6bStls 

monSrStia 

monebamini 

monfirGminl 

monSbant 

monfirent 

monebantnr 

monSrentur 

Wuturt. 

^    ^^_ 

monebor 

^^H 

monebis 

moneberia  (-ro] 

I^H 

monebit 

nionSbitur 

S 

moneblmiu 

moneblnmr 

s 

monebltis 

monSbimlnl 

monebnnt 

monSbvintur 

S 

Fttt^,rt. 

monui 

monuerim           ;  monitus  auin 

monitus  sim  ^^H 

monuiBtl 

monuetlB 

monitus  es 

monitus  ala    S 

nionuit 

monuerit 

monitus  est 

monitus  alt    ^ 

monuimUH 

monuerlmuB 

moniti  Bumus 

moniti  slmua 

monuiBtlB 

monueriUs 

moniti  eatfa 

moniti  altls 

monuenint 

-re)     monueriat 

moniti  sant 

moniti  Bint 

Phtptrfett. 

monuisBem 

monitus  oram 

monitus  esBem 

Dionueras 

monuiaaes 

tnonitus  eraa 

monitus  eBsfie 

monuerat 

monuiaaet 

monitus  erat 

monitus  eaaet 

monitr  erSmua 

moniti  esaemuB 

monuerStia 

moniilflBetiB 

moniti  ei:5.tt» 

TtvoTiUi  eaaetla 

^     moauarant 

monuisBont        '  monill  e  ~*iit 

vno'ovu  cnMaAgi  v 

UiH.] 

Second  Conjugation. 

9 

iDonuerit 

moniCus  erS 
monitus  eria 
monitus  erit 

1 

montierimas 

raonueiitiB 
monueriat 

monitr  erimTiB 

raoniti  erLtiB 
moniti  emnt 

ti 

SING. 

rna.  3.  monS 
jF«4.   z.  monStS 
3.  monetS 

Imperative, 
plue.                   sfng. 
inonSte              monfire 
monetfite          maiietor 
monentS        1  moDetor 

PLUB. 

monSminl 
moaentor 

Infinitive. 
Pre*.  monSre                                     monerl 
Ferf.  monuisBe                                      monitua  ease 
Ftil.   monitilraB  esse                          monltuin  Iri 

monituH  fore) 

Participles. 
Frtg.  monBna                            1         Ferf.  monitus 
Ftit.   monitflruH                           |          fler.    monemaue 

Gerun-d.                                             Slt 
monendi  -dfi,  -dum,  -dO                            monitum 

monitfl 

131.  There  are  nearly  120  simple  verbs  of  this  conjugation,  most 
of  them  denominative  verbs  oi  condilion,  liaving  a  corresponding  noun 
and  adjective  from  the  same  root,  and  an  inceptive  in  -bc5  (§  167,  a): 
as,  oale5.  be  warm;  calor,  warmth  j  calidus,  warm;  calSacS, grmii 
warm;  tinxe6,/i;ar;  titaoi,/ear;  timidxta,  timid. 

Most  of  the  vert)s  of  the  second  conjugation  form  their  perfect  and 
supine  lilte  moneo.     The  following  have  -8vl  and  -Btum :  d6Ie3,  de- 


—  ang 

E 


stray;  HeB,  weep;  neS,  spin;  vi 
jSU;  -oleS,  grow.    The  remainde 
algeS,  als^  ie  cold. 
SrdeS,  arsi,  flra-,  burn. 
andeo,  ausna  sum.  dare. 
angeS,  auxl,  anct-,  increase. 
oaveO.  oSvI,  caut-,  care. 
iBnaeS,  ceneal,  cBns-,  value. 
\file3,  ctvl,  cit-,  e^x^e. 

ie3,  docal,  doct-,  feach. 


0,  plat;  and  compounds  of  -pleB,  I 

faveS,  favT,  laxAr,  favor. 
ferveC,  fetvl  (ferbul),  ^iW. 
foveS,  fovl,  fot-,  cherish. 
frlgeo,  friil,  be  cold. 
fulgeo,  faial.  sliine. 
gaudeo,  gavlsua  aum,  rejoice. 
haereS.  haeel.  ^aaa-,  cling. 


r 


98 


Etymology :    Verbs. 


[§13L 


inbeS,  IflBHl,  i-OsB-,  order. 
languefi,  laneul,  be  faint. 
Ifquefi,  UquI  (-licul),  mdt. 
IfloeS,  luxl,  -Inct-,  shine. 
lugBo,  liizi,  Ifiot-,  mourtt. 
maneo,  mSnel,  hiSjib-,  viait. 
mlaceo,  -cul,  mlxt-  (mist),  mix. 
mordeS,  momordl.  mors-,  bite. 
moveo.  movl.  mot-,  move. 
mnlceo,  mulal,  miilB-,  soothe. 
mulgeo,  -bI  (-rf),  mulB-  (-mfllct-), 

niveB,  -nlvl  (-nlxl),  t(;;hJ, 
paveS.  p3vi,yiflr. 
peudeS,  pependi,  pSus-,  hang. 
'prandeo,  praudi,  prana-,  dine. 
rIdeS,  rial,  tis-,  laugh. 

Note.  — The  following  have  a  perfec 
maereS.  it  sad)  have  neither  perfecl  no 

aroeO,  ward  off.    egeS,  need. 
QgiUBG,  be  skilful.  Hoieo,  bloom. 


aedeS,  aedT,  seas-,  sii. 
soleo,  aolitua  aiun,  be  1 
aoibefl,  Borbul  {sorpal),  aoipt-, 

apondeS,   epopondl. 


Btrldeo,  atrldl,  ivhiz. 
suadeo,  au9sl,  auaa*,  urge. 
teneo  (-ttned),  tenul,  tent-,  hold. 
tergeS,  terai,  tSrs-,  •wipe. 
toDdeo,  totondl,  t5Ds-, 
torques,  torsi,  tort-,  t-wist, 
torreS,  torrni,  tost-,  roast. 
turgeS,  turai,  swell. 
urged,  Qral,  iirge. 
Tided,  Tidl,  via-,  se- 
voved,  v5vl,  v6t-, 


-ul,  t 


ID  supine. 


It-,  hold. 

1 


pateS,  lie  open,   atudeo,  attend  to. 
ailed,  be  sUent.     tlm.06,  feai 


horreo,  shudder.  cSneo,  be  while. 

THIRD    CONJUGATION- 
PRINCIPAL  Parts;   Active,  tego,  tegfire, 
Passive,  tegor,  tegi,  tSctua  ai: 


teglB.j'ow  . 
tegit,  he  ei 


tegunt 
tegfibara 


tegflbat 
tegSbflmna 
teffSbSOa 
te^ebaat 


;gaa 
tegat 

tegant 

legerem 
tegerBa 
legeret 
:gerGinuB 
tegerStia 
'egerent 


INDIC. 

tegor 

tegimnr 
legiminl 


SUBJ. 

tegar 

tegiriaO 
tegatur 
legamur 
tegaminl 

tegantui 


J 


«r/8rt. 


tegfibar  tegorer 

tegSbSria  (-te)  tcgerErle  (■ 

legSbatur  tegerfitur 

tegEbamur  tegeTEmor 

legSbantux 


.egerfitur     ^^St 
egeTEmor  ^^H 


P" 

r 

Third  Conjugation. 

.1 

^^1 

^H    INDIC. 

SUBJ.                      Indic. 

SUBJ.                    ^^1 

"ttg«n 

legar 

^^^1 

l^h 

tegSria  (-«) 

^^^H 

tegat 

tegBtnr 

^^H 

UeEm» 

tegemnx 

^^^^^^1 

Ugltla 

tegSmlnl 

^^^^^^1 

tegent 

tegentnr 

^^^^^^1 

mrfetit. 

_EiI 

texerim 

tectus  Bum 

tgctos  ^^^^^^H 

■ex1.« 

texeria 

teclus  ea 

tectus  SIB            ^^H 

p.. 

texerit 
t^xerimna 

tectus  eat 
tecti  BumuB 

tectus  ait             ^^H 
tecti  Blmus         ^^H 

■  texiBtiH 

texeritds 

tccti  eatia 

tectr  altls            ^H 

■  texSrunt  (-re) 

tcxerlut 

tecti  annt 

^^H 

f 

PtMperfett. 

^H 

^  texetam 

lexiHaem 

teclus  eram 

tecttiB  eaBGin         ^^ 

texerSB 

texiBH6B 

tectus  erSa 

teclus  esaea 

texerat 

texiBset 

tectus  erat 

tectus  eaaet 

texeramuB 

tgxise§mtiB 

tcctI  etSinuB 

tccti  easSmua 

■   texeratis 

tcxiaaetia 

tecti  eratia 

tectY  eaagtis         ^H 

■  Kxerant 

texiaaent 

tecti  erant 

^H 

P 

Fntvre  Perfert. 

^^1 

■   texero 

tectus  eta 

texorl* 

tectus  eria 

^^^1 

lEjtaiit 

tectus  etit 

^^H 

texerlmiu 

tecti  eiimus 

^^H 

IXOltlB 

tecti  eriias 
tecIT  enmt 

■ 

Imperative. 

PLUR.                             SING. 

^^1 

fr".  2.  lege,  cover 

tegite                    tcgete 

tegitnini                 ^H 

»tai.    2.  tegito 

legitSte                  tegitor 

—          ^H 

3-  teglta 

tegunto                  tegitor 
INFINITIVK. 

teguntor                 ^H 

JVM.  tegore 

1          tegl 

^^k 

Ferf.  lexiBse 

tectuB  eaae 

«.f.   lectGrua 

esB«                   '         tectum  Irl  (tectuB  fore)            ^^1 

Pr«.  legBna 

1          Per/,  tcctua 

^H 

JFut.    lectBrnM 

1         Ci«r.   legendUB  (.-\ui&Qa'^         ^^H 

Gerund:  tegendT,  -dS,  -dum,  -d5         SyPINE 

^ec^uTO.,  \£.^'<^  ^H 

lOO  Etymology:    Verbs. 

Verba  in  -io. 

Verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  in  -16  have  certain  forms  of  the  present 

stem  like  the  fourth  conjugation.    They  retain  the  i  of  the  stem  before 

a,  5,  n,  and  S,  but  lose  it  elsewhere  except  in  the  future  and  in  the 

participle  and  gerund.    Verbs  of  this  class  arc  conjugated  as  follows:  — 

Principal  Parts:   capifi.  cap$re,  o6pI,  captom; 
capior,  capl,  captiu  Bnm. 


ACTIVE. 

PASSIVE. 

INDIC 

SCBJ. 

iNDIC. 

SUBJ. 

eapie,  I  take. 

capiam 

capior 

capiat 

capla,  you  take. 

capias 

caperia  (-re) 

capiariB  (-re) 

caplt,  he  lakes. 

capiat 

capitur 

capiStar 

capimua 

capiJlmus 

capimar 

capiamur 

capltla 

capiatis 

capimini 

capiaminl 

capltmt 

capiant 

capiuntur 

capiantui: 

caplSbam 

caperem 

1    capiSbax 

caperer 

caplam 

capiar 

capiBs 

capifiriB  (-re) 

caplet,  etc. 

capietur,  etc. 
rrrfert. 

cepi 

ccpsrim 

Vhiperfeet. 

captus  aim      ^ 

ceperam 

cepiBsem 

1    captus  cram 
"utiii-e  Terfeet, 

captus  euem 

ceperS 

1    captus  ero 
Imperative. 

Fret.  2.  cape 

capita 

capere 

caplmlnl 

Fut.   3.  capita 

capitate 

capitor 

3.  capita 

capionto 

capitor 

capiuntor 

Infinitive. 

Pre*,  capare 

capl 

per/-  cepiBae 

captuB  eaae 

Jftif.   captaroH  ease 

captumlrl 

Participles, 

Fen.  capifiuB  I  I'erf.  captUB 

J^f.    captQrufl  \  tier,   capietidua 

Gekvnd:  capiendl, -da, -dum, -cl&  Supraa.  ca^tam,-*; 


§  132.]  Third  Conjugation.  lOl 

Note.— Verbs  of  Ihe  third  eonjugalion  ending  in -16  are  Ihe  following;  capIO, 
caplO,  rociS.  (odis.  fURlS,  lacld.  parifi,  quatifi,  rapio,  Bapifi,  wiih 
compouDds  of  -cutis,  41016,  -iBpiciS.  For  their  Principal  Paits.  see  Ihe  lists 
in  §13=. 

132.  The  following  lists  include  most  simple  verbs  of  Ihe 
third  conjugation,  classed  according  lo  the  formation  of  the  perfect 


a.   Forming  the  perfect  si 

ango.  aniT,  anct-,  chobe. 
carpS.  carpBl,  oarpt-,  plmk. 
cSdO:  cSbsT,  dsa-,  yield. 
ciugo,  ciuzi,  cinct-,  binii. 
cisago,  cIeuijlL  saurid. 
claudS,  clauBi,  claua-,  shut. 
clep5.  clepsi,  clept-,  sUal. 
cSmS,  cSmpBl,  cSmpt-,  comb,  deck. 
coquO,  C03tl,  coot-,  cook. 
-cutis,  -cuobI,  -cubs-,  shake. 
demo.  dSmpal,  Aim-^t-,  take  away. 
aicfi,  dijcl,  diet-,  say. 
divido,  divlal,  dlvto-,  divide. 
dilco,  diirf,  dfict.,^H/ab. 
ngS,  fill,  fii-./j-. 
fingo  [fig],  ffmrT,  Rat-,  fashion. 
fleets .  flexi,  flex-,  bend. 
fluS.  fliixi,  flax-,_/iW. 
freodS,  -frCBl.  U^aa-,  gnash. 
ftleO,  frixl,  ftlot-  (ttlx-y/ry. 
B«Si  e^sal.  geflt-,  carry. 
laedo,  laeBl,  laos-,  hurl. 
-Ucio,  -le^  -lect-,  entke  (elicul, 

-licit-). 
UngS,  liuxl,  linct-,  lick. 
Ifido,  laal,  IOb-,  play. 
meigS,  mSrsI,  m6n*-,  plunge. 
mltto,  mlBi,  mlBS-,  send. 
nectS  [s^EC],  nexi  (nexnlj,  nex-, 

DQbS,  nOpmi,  ajipt-,  marry, 
pecta,  peja(pexaS),  pex-,  comb. 


s(x)  (§  124.  b  and  note):  ~ 

pSTgd,  peirSzi,  peri6ot-,£f  i>n. 
piiigo  [pig],  pinil.  plot-,  paint. 
plaudo,  platiEi,  plaus-,  applaud. 
pleotd,  plSxi  (-nil),  ^\^^-,braid, 
premS,  preset,  presB-,  press. 
prfimS,  -mpar.  -mpt-,  bring  ant. 
quatiS,  (-cusal),  quaes-,  shake. 
r3d6,  rSsI,  rSs-,  scrape. 
re  go,  rSrf,  rSot-,  rvU. 
iSpo,  repal,  rSpt-,  creep. 
rodo,  roai,  ros-,  gnaw. 
aarpoi  sarpai.  aarpt-,  prune. 
acalpo,  acalpai,  acalpt-,  scrape. 
BcrTbd,  BCrlpai,  script-,  write. 
aerpS,  aetpBl,  aerpt-,  crawl. 
apargS,  8p3rsl,  spSrs-,  scatter. 
-spiciS,  -spezi,  -spect-,  view. 
-BtinguS.  -Btinrf,  -atinct-,  quench. 
strings,  striml,  Btiiot-,  bind. 
Btru5,  atruzi,  atruot-,  build. 
sflmo,  aiimpBi,  aiinipt-,  take. 
sQrgo,  aurrSxi,  aurrSct-,  rise. 
tegd,  te^,  tect-,  shelter. 
temnS,  tempsl,  -tempt-,  despise. 
tergS,  tSrsi,  tSrs-,  -wipe. 
tingo,  tinxl,  Hnct-,  stain. 
trahd,  traxi,  traot-,  drag. 
tiiida,  tmal,  trfls-,  thrust. 
iiiS,  iiflai,  fiat-,  burn. 
vado,  -vasl,  -vaa-,  ga. 
trehS,  vSsJ,  vecV,  draw. 
vivS,  vi^  ■'rtot-,  line. 


I 
I 


I 


[02  Etymology:    Verbs, 

b.  Reduplicated  in  the  perfect  (§  124.  e): — 


[S  132, 


cado,  cecldi.  cSi^,  fall. 
caed5,  cecldl,  oaes-,  ait. 
oanS,  oeoin^  cant-,  sing. 
ourrS,  cuottnl,  oars-,  run. 
dlaco  [uic].  didici,  (dlBOitorus), 

-do,  -didi,  -dit-  (as  in  ab-dC,  etc, 
with  or6d3,  vends),  ^«/  [dha]. 
faUfi,  fefelU,  fale-,  deceive. 
pango  [pag],  pSgT  (pepi^),  pSot-, 

fasten,fix;  bargain. 
parcS,    paral,    peperci,    pardt- 
(p»l.-),  star,. 


pa.ri5,  peperl,  port-  (paritiiTUB), 

bring  forth. 
pello,  pepull,  puis-,  drive. 
pendo,  pependT.  p€iiB-,  -weigh. 
pOBCo,    popOBcT,     (pOBcituma), 


pungS    [fuu],    papngi,    pilnot-, 

aiflto  [sta],  atltl,  Stat-,  stop. 
tauga  [tag],  totig^  tSct-,  touch. 
tends    [ten],   teteudi   (-tendl), 
tSa»-  (tent-),  stretch.  \beat. 

tundo  [TUD].tntudI,tvliiB-(-tilB-), 


'..  Adding  u  (v)  to  the  verb-rool  (i 
alS,  alul.  alt-  (alit-),  nourish. 

no,  -orSvI,  -or St-,  decree. 
C0I6,  oolul,  cult-,  dwell,  till. 
conipaaco,  compfiaoul,  restrain. 
conaiilo,  -lui,  consult-,  consult. 
orescS,  orBvi,  crGt-,  increase. 
-cumbB   [cub],  cubul,  cubit-,  lie 

depso,  depaul,  depst-,  knead. 
excello,  -celluT,  -cela-,  excel. 
fremo,  fremui,  fremit-,  roar. 
furS,  furul,  rage. 
gsmo,  gemui,  gemit-,  groan. 
gigno  [gen],  genui,  genit-,  deget. 
metS,  mesaui,  nieaa-,  reap. 
molo,  moluT,  raaVit-,  grind. 
oooulo,  occuluT,  ocoult-,  hide. 


24.0):  — 
pasco,  pSvI,  p&Bt;feed. 
percello,  -ouli,  -cula-,  upset. 
pono  [pos],  poaul,  posit-,  put. 
quigscS,  qulEvt,  quiSt-,  rest. 
lapio,  rapul,  rapt- 
BCTacS,  Bclvi,  BOit-,  decree. 
aero,  b§vI,  sat-,  sow. 
aeto,  serul,  sert-,  enlvnne. 
aioS,  alvl,  sit-,  permit. 
aperoo,  aprSvi,  aprBt-,  scorM.  \ 
aterno,  atravl,  sti^t-,  sir 
aterto,  atertui  (aterti),  snore. 
atrepo,  atrepul.  atrepit-,  sound. 
-au6ac5,  -auBvi,  -suSt-,  be  won/. 
tezS,  tezui.  text-,  weavi 
tiemS,  tremui,  tremble. 
vomS,  vomul,  vomit-,  ■vomit!^ 


d.  Adding  iv  to  the  verb-root 
arceaao,  -Ivi.  arcesslt-,  summo 
capGaso.  capeaaTvi,  undertake. 
oupifi,  cnplvl  cupit-.  desire. 
IncesaB,  inoeaalvl.  allaik. 
lacesBS.  laceaajvi,  laceaait-.pi 


I 


t.  S.!4-/):- 
peto,  petlvi,  petit-,  seei. 
quaero,  quaealvl,  quaesit-,  seei 
rudS,  rudlvl,  nidlt-,  bray. 
aapio,  saptvl  (sapul),  den 
tet5,  trtvl,  trlt.,  rub. 


f^—                                               H 

[  132.]                            Third  Conjugation.                                 lOj^l 

e.   Lengtheciiag  the  vowel  of  the  root  (cF.  §  124.  d) :—                         ^^| 

&£»■  ^&-  ^ct-,  .i'-r^c. 

lavB,  ISvI,  lot-  (laut-),  wujA  (aiso^H 

oapiS.  cepi.  capt^,  take. 

reg.oftslconj.).                         ^1 

edfi.  edi,  esum.  eat  (see  §  140). 

lego,^  legi,  lect-,  galker,               ^H 

emS,  Sml,  empt-.  A»/. 

lino  [LI].  l€vl  (llTl),  Ut-,  jMeor.aH 

facio.  fScI,  fact-,  mof  a  (see  1 142). 

linquo  [Lie],  -llqul.  -Uot-,  leave.  ^H 

fodio,  fodi,  foaa-,  Jig. 

□oaco  [GN'O],  ufivl,  n5t-(c&«iil1»>^H 

frango  [fkag],  ir6eT,  frSct-,  i«a4. 

ft-gnit,  ad-gnlt-),  k/iiw.               ^| 

fngio,  fflgl,  fugit-./^^. 

rumpo  [RUP],  rfipl,  rupt,  Swr«-   ^H 

fundo  [FUD],  fudi,  Mb-,  /our. 

Bcabo,  scSbl.  scratch.                       ^H 

iacio,   ieoi.   iact-,  thrcTU,   (-iciS, 

vlncB  [vie],  vici,  viot-,  conquer.  ^H 

-ieot.). 

■ 

/".  Retaining  the  present  stem  or  verb-root  (cf.  §  124,  e): —                  ^H 

arguS,  -ul,  -fltum,  accuse. 

pIusS,  -bI,  piDB-  (plaat-,  plat-), 

bib5,  bibi,  bibit-,  drink. 

bruise. 

-cendo,  -cendi,  -c8lia-,  kindle. 

prehendo,  -dl,  prehSas-,  seize. 

cGdo,  -cfldl-,  -c'as;far^e. 

ru6,  rul,  rut-  (ruit-)./u//. 

facesBo,    facessi,   faoeasit-,   e-ve- 

BCando,  acandl,  acana-,  climb. 

ade. 

BCindS     [scid],     acidi,*    aoia*.. 

-fendo,  -fendi  -fena-,  ward  off. 

tear. 

findo  [Kin],  fidi,^  flM-,  split. 

flIdS,  Bidi  (sBdl),  -BSsB-,  settU. 

loo.  loi,  let-,  /«/. 

aolvS,  aolvl,  solKt,  loose,  pay. 

lambo.  Iambi,  lanibit-,  lap. 

strido,  atridj,  whiz. 

loo,  lui,liiit-.  HW.t-4. 

veUS,  vein  (vnlal),  vula-.  pluck- 

mandS,  mandT,  rnSus-,  chew. 

veiTo,  TeiTi,  vera-,  sweep. 

aoS,  noi,  nuit-,  «<irf. 

verts,  verti,  vera-,  turn. 

pamdS,     paudi,    pane-     (paaa-), 

vise  [vid],  viai,  vis-,  visit. 

open. 

volvo,  volvl,  voiat-,  turn. 

NOIE.  — The  following  have  no  perfei;!  or  supine:—                                                ^H 

clandfi,  Ump.                          Yilaao.yaiun.                                     ^H 

ia.ta^cli.gape.                             laho.  rave.                                             ^H 

fnlgS.^A.                                 toUo  (aoBtuU,  sublStum    supplied^H 

tftoo5,  .ra/*//.                                   from  auffero),  raise.                          B 

BlUbO,  peel.                                 TcrgS,  ('nf//«r.                                          ^| 

IThe    followinE    compounds    of    legS    have    -ISxi:     dniffO,    IntellegO, 

iwfflegO. 

s  IB  iha»  iJjB  pertertswni  is  tJie  same  as  the  veib-iotrt,\ia'jin8\o».  Vne  tttee-ft-         . 

aOoa  (-/ 12^  c.  aole).                                                                                                              ^ 

L^^                       J 

I04 

Etymology ;    Verbs. 
FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 

"^V 

pRmciPAL  Parts:  AcU've.  audio,  audlre,  audlvl,  audltum;^^! 

Passive,  audior.  audlrl,  audltus  b 

^H 

At 

TI\-E.                                                FAservE.                 ^^1 

Indic. 

SuBj.                        Indic 

sijBj.      ^^H 

andifi,  I  hear. 

audiam 

audior 

audlar            ^^* 

audlB,  you  hear 

q>id1iin 

audlrifl  C-re) 

audiSria  C-re) 

audit,  he  hears. 

audiat 

auditur 

audiatur 

audlmuB 

audiflmiia 

audlmur 

audlSmnr        ^^^ 

audlUs 

audiatls 

audiminT 

audl&mini      ^^H 

audinnt 

audlant 

audiuntuj 

audiantnr     ^^H 

audiSbam 

audlrem                   audiSbar 

audlrar 

audiebSfl 

audlrBs 

audifibfiiia  (-re 

audlrSria  (-ro) 

audiSbat 

audlret 

audiSbatur 

audtretur 

audiebamoB 

audlrBmuB 

audiebSmur 

audlremur 

audiebStlB 

audlretda 

audiSbSmini 

audireminl 

audifibant 

audiSbantor 

audlrentur 

.udl.m 

^ 

audlar 

^_ 

audtea 

audiSiia  (-re) 

^^1 

audlet 

audiStur 

^^H 

audiemus 

audlBmnr 

^^^^^^^ 

audietia 

audiSmlnl 

^^^^^^H 

audlont 

audientnr 

^^^^^^H 

audivl 

audiverim 

audit  us  sum 

audltus  aim 

audivisK 

audiveria 

audltus  CB 

audltus  ala 

audlvit 

audlverlt 

audltus  eat 

audltus  sit 

audivimuB 

audlverlmuB 

audi  (I  HumuB 

auditi  slmus 

audlvlstiB 

audiverltlB 

audlll  eatia 

audlQ  altia 

audivBnmt  (-re 

)  audlverint 

auditi  stmt 

audiG  siat 

audiveram 

audlviaaem 

audltus  eram 

audltus  easem 

audiverSa 

audiviaaSfl 

audltus  era* 

audinis  ess6a 

audlverat 

audlviaaet 

audilus  erat 

audltus  esaet 

audlveramue 

auditi  eramue 

auditi  eesemuB 

audiverStia 

audlvisBetiB 

auditi  er5ti« 

audfil  esaStlB 

audjvoiaat 

audfvisBent          \  auditi  exaut 

ii 

Fourth  Conjugation. 


I  audltus  er5 

auditus  erlt 
audTtl  erlmiiB 
auditl  eritis 
I  audit!  emat 


a.  2.  audi         audlte 
I.   2.  audits     audRSte 
3.  audits     audiontS 

JVM.  audire 
rerf.  audlvisBQ 
Fut.    audltaruB  e 

JVeir.  audlSns 
Fui.    audltfirufl 


audire 
auditor 
auditor 


audiuntor 


Infinitive. 

audltUB  esse 
I         audltum  Irl  (audltus  fore) 

Participles. 

I  I'erf.  auditua 

I  (ier.   audiendua 


133.  There  a 
this  conjugation, ; 

toe- 

erSciS,  croak. 
oOcfirifi,  crow. 
IbulIiS,  bubble. 


■e — besides  a  few  deponents  and  some  regular  deriva- 
6BU1I0,  be  hungry  (cf.  §  167.  e)  —about  60  verbs  of  ] 
large  proportion  of  them  being  descriptive  verbs: 


ganniS,  yelp. 
Sl^ti&,  gulp. 
sruuniS,  gi-ii 


^bitinoiS,  twitter.  hinniS,  migh. 


hiiriS,  snarl.  scatflriS,  ^f A. 

mugiS,  bellow.  tinnio.  tinkle. 
muttiS,  iiuiller.  tUBsiS,  cough. 
siugultlS,  hiccup.  vSgiS,  cry. 


Those  verbs  not  conjugated  regularly  like  audio,  are  the  following: 


femlciS,    pTtifTT^    (-oul),    amlct-, 

clothe. 
aperlS,  aperul  apert-,  oP<n. 
comperiS,  -peil,  oompert-.^/fftrf. 
faiciS,  farBl,  farct-  {-tam),  stuff. 
feiiS,  j/zzftf  ('noperltct  or  supine). 


ftiloiS.  fulBi,  fult-,  prop. 
hauiiS.    hausi,   hauBt-    (haua-), 

operio,  operul,  opert-,  cover. 
raucio,  lauai,  laoa-,  be  hoarse. 
reperio,  leppert,  ^eepsT^,  Jind.l 


io6 


Etymology:    Vfrbs. 


BaepiS.  aaepsl,  saept-,  hedg^  in. 
aaUfi(-8iUfi),  aalui(Bamj,  salt- 

(-ault-),  leap. 
sanoiS  [sac],  satu^  sanct-,  sane- 

sarclS.  aarsT,  aart-,  patch. 
The  following  are  regulai 
caecdtiS,  be  purblind. 
dSmentio,  be  mad, 
ferficio  be  fiera. 


S  134,1 


aarrio,  -IvI  (-nlj,  - 
aeutio,  aeual,  a&aa~,feel. 
aepeliS,  sepeLIvI,  eepult-,  I 
aiagultid,  -IvI,  aingultum,  fofiS 


TinciS.  viiud,  vinct-,  Mnd. 
the  perfect,  but  have  no  supine  stem- — 
I     B^stiS,  be  ovetjayed. 

B^5ci0,  cluck  (as  a  hen). 
I     IneptiC,  play  Ihi  irifler. 
Parallel  Forms. 
134.   Many  verbs  Iiave  more  than  one  set  of  forms,  o£ 
which  only  one  is  generally  found  in  classic  use:  as, 
lavS,  lavSre  or  lavfiro,  wash  (see  §  133.  i^. 
aoatfire,  gush  forth. 


scate5,  acatSie  □ 

Ittdjfico,  -Sre  or  Ifldificor,  -5x1,  mock. 

fulgo,  fuigSre  or  fnlgeo,  fialgCre,  sMng. 


DEPONENT   VERBS. 
135.   Deponent  Verbs  have  the  form,  of  the  Passive 
Voice,  with  an  active  or  reflexive  signification  :  as,  — 
1st  cooj.  miror,  mirari,  mirStuB,  admire. 
2d  conj.   veteor,  verEri,  verit:ua, /^or. 
3d  conj.  sequor,  eequi,  a ecutua, /o/Zoo'. 
4th  cotij,  partior,  partiti,  paxtltus,  share. 
Indicative. 


I 


Pres.  mftor 

vereor 

seqnor 

partdor 

mirftria  (-re) 

verSria  (-re) 

sequeris  (-re) 

partltia  (-r 

mlratur 

verStnr 

sequitur 

partltur 

miramur 

verBmur 

sequimur 

partlmur 

mir&mini 

vej6minT 

sequiminl 

partlmini 

mlrantut 

verentur 

sequuntnr 

partiuntnr 

Imp/.  mirSbar 

verebar 

sequBbar 

partiSbar 

Put.     nilrabor 

verSbor 

sequar 

parUar 

Perf.  miratuBsum 

verltus  Bum 

secutuB  anm 

partitua  bu 

PJ»/:  mlratua  eiair 

verltua  eram 

secutUB  ecain 

partituB  er 

j^j^.    mirStaa  erS 

vciltus  erd 

seciitiiB  eto 

^'u\.\'C.tu  «i 

I 


1  139.]                              Deponent    Verbs. 

1 

Subjunctive. 

^s,     1 

i^ts.   oiTrer                    verear                  sequar 

Impf.  mtrarer               verErer                seqiierer 

paitlrer 

Ferf.    miratUB  sim       veritua  aim        secutus  aim        pailltua  aim 

PIup.  mlrStUB  essem  veritus  easem   seciltus  es 

em   partltua  eaaem 

Imperative. 

^H 

mirSie,  -Stor,  etc.  verSre,  -Etor      sequere,  -Itor     partire,  -itor     ^^1 

Infinitive. 

m 

Prts.  mTrSrl                verSrl                 sequt 

partM                ^ 

•Perf.    mTratuB  ease      vetitua  ease       seciituB  ea 

B       partltUB  ease 

Put.     miratania  eaae  veritiSrua  eaae  secuturus 

ssse  partitutua  eaae 

Pahticiplss. 

wL 

Pres.  miritns               verGna                sequSns 

partiSna              ^^1 

Ful.     mTrataruB           veritflius            secatQrua 

partitQrua          ^^| 

Ptrf.    miratUB               Veritas                secfitna 

p.irtituB              ^^1 

Cer.    mirandus           verendua           sequendaa 

pardendiu        ^^| 

Gerund, 

■ 

mlrandl, -5,  etc  verendl,  etc.      Bequeiidl,« 

tc.      partiendl,  etc<  ^^| 

Supine, 

■ 

mlratum,  -tQ      veritum,  -ta      secutum,  - 

u       partitum,  -ta      ^H 

a.  Deponents  have  the  participles  of  both  voice 

■ 

^e^vAoA,  following.                seoQtaruB,  about  to  follow. 

secOtuB,  having  folloTved.     Bequendua,  tc 

b.  The  perfect  participle  generally  has  an  activ 

sense,  but  in  verba 

Otherwise  deponent  it  is  often  passive :  as,  meroStus,  bough!  i  adeptus. 

ptined  (or  having  gained). 

c.  The  future  infinitive  is  always  in  the  active 

form  ;  thus,  aequor 

has  aecfiturna  eaae  (not  eeoiitum  irl). 

d.  The  gerundive,  being  passive  in  meaning,  is 

found  only  in  trans- 

Jtive  verbs,  or  neuter  verbs  used  impersonally:  as, 

— 

hflo  ofinfitendum  eat,  this  must  he  acknowledged. 

moriendom  eat  onmibua,  alt  must  die. 

e.  Most  deponents  are  neuter  or  reflexive  in  meaning,  corresponding 

to  what  in  Greek  is  called  the  Middle  Voice  (§  11 

.a). 

f.  Some  deponents  are  occasionally  used  in 

a  passive  sense:  as, 

O^minor,  T  accuse,  or  I  ani  accused. 

g.  About  twenty  verbs  are,  with  an  active  meatiog,  Imioi  '■Hi\»'^_^ 

•ail's  aad passive  forms:  as,  mere o  or  meieot. 

dtservt,  _  ^^^^^^B 

t^ 

^^1 

r 


Etymology:   Verbs. 


More  Ihan  half  of  all  deponents  are  of  the  First  Conjugation,  and 
all  of  these  are  regular.     The  following  deponents  are  irregular :  — 


nSacor,  -I,  nfttuH,  he  bom. 
nitor,  -I,  niBUB  (nlma),  strive. 
obllviaoor,  -i,  oblitus,  forget. 
oppeiior,  -Irl,  oppertua,  await. 
Srdior,  -iti,  orsus,  begin. 
otlor  (3dJ,  -Irl,  ortus,  (orltaniB), 

paolaoor,  -I,  pSctua,  bargain. 
patior  (-petior),  -I,  paaaus  (-pea- 

-plector,  -1,  -plexuB,  clasp. 
proficiBcor,  -i,  profectuB,  rri*  rirfW 
queror,  -I,  qaestua,  complain.   ^^ 
reor,  r6ri,  ratua,  think.  ^| 

revertor,  -I,  reversua,  return.      ■ 
ringOT,  -I,  riotua,  marl. 
aequor,  -I,  seoutua  (Beqnfitaa), 

follow. 
tueor,  -5rl,  tuitus  (tntua),  defend. 
nloiaoor.  -I,  ultua,  avenge. 
fitor,  -I,  uBoa.  use,  employ. 
Note.  — The  deponent  comperlor,  -Irl,   compertUH,  is  rarely  found  for 
ComperlS,    Revertor,  unlil  Ihc  limc  of  Augustus,  had  regijarly  Ihe  active  forms 
in  the  perfect  system,  revortl,  reverteram,  etc. 

I.  The  following  deponents  have  no  supine  stem :  — 
dBvertor,  -tl,  turn  aside  (to  lodge).  I  medeor,  -Eri,  heal.  ^J 

dlffiteor,  -erI,  deny.  reminlscor,  -I,  call  to  mind.        ^| 

UquoT,  -I,  melt  (ncul.).  |  veacor,  -I,  feed  upon.  ^ 

Note. —  Deponents  are  only  passive  (or  middle)  verbs  whose  active  has  dis- 
appeared. Thera  is  hardly  one  Itiat  does  not  show  at  some  period  of  the 
language  signs  of  being  used  in  [he  aclivc, 

Beml-Deponenta. 
136.   A  few  verbs  having  no  perfect  stem  are  regular 
in  the  present,  but  appear  in  tiie  tenses  of  completed  action 
as  deponents.     These  are  called  semi-deponents  or  neuter 
passives.     They  are  :  — 

audeS,  audBre,  auaua,  dare.  gaudeS,  gaudSre,  gSvIsos,  rejoice. 
HdiS,  ffdSre,  Obub,  trust.  ooleo,  BolBre,  AoUtMa,  bi  wont. 


adsentlor,  -Irl,  adaeneus,  assent. 
aplscor,  (-Ip-),  -I|  aptuB  (-eptua), 

get. 
defetiacor,  -I,  -feaana,  faint. 
ixpSrgiBCOT,  -I,  perrSctua,  rouse. 
expertor,  -iri,  expertua,  Ir)'. 
f ateor,  -firl,  faastta,  confess. 
fatiscor,  -I,  gape. 
fnior,  -I,  fructua  (fmitua),  enjoy. 
fnagor,  -I,  functaa,  fulfil. 
eradior(-gredior),-I,6re«3UB,  step. 
Iraacor,  -I,  Iiatus,  be  angry. 
ISbor,  -I,  lapsus,  _/a//. 
loquoT,  -I,  looQtue  (loqufltua), 

-miaiaoor,  -T,  -mentua,  think. 
metior,  -In,  mSnaua,  measure. 
morior,  -i  (-Tri},  mortaua  (mori- 

tflruB,  die. 
nanciacor, -I,  nactus  (nanctus), 

find. 


j§  136,  137.] 


Deponent   Verbs. 


i09f 


0  old  subjunctive  perfect  atuim.    The 
Ikou  wilt,  is  frequent  m  the  dramatists 


From  a,udeO  tbere  !s 
fonii  89d6e  (for  si  audSs),  a 
are  elsewhere. 

The  active  forms  vSpulS,  T9pulSxe,  be  /logged,  aad  vSneQ, 
vSaire,  be  sold  (contracted  from  vSuum  Ire,  go  to  sale),  have  a  passive 
Ineaning,  and  are  sometimes  called  neutral  passives.  To  these  maj 
be  added  fieri,  to  be  made  (see  §  142),  and  exsulSie,  to  be  baniskeA 
(live  in  esile). 

Note.  — The  followhlE  verbs  are  soraelimcs  found  as  semi-depon^nK ;  mpfl, 
lOrftre.  IQr&tUB,  swear;  nObS.  nQbere,  nQpta,  marry;  plocefi.  placerft^ 


plaottuB,//faj 


[For  the  regular  Deri 


of  Verb; 


e  }  .57.] 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 
137.    Several  verbs  add  some  of  the  personal  endin| 
of  the  present  system  directly  to  the  root,  or  combine  two 
Verbs  in  their  inflection.    These  are  called  Irregular  Verbs 
(cf.  p.  86).      They  are  »«m,  vols,  ferO,  edo,  queO.  eO,  HB,  and 
their  compounds. 

Sum  has  already  been  inflected  in  §  I19. 

a.  Bum  is  compounded  without  any  change  of  inflection  with  the 

prepositions  ab,  ad,  dS,  in,  inter,  ob,  prae,  pro  (prod),  sub,  Buper. 

In  the  compound   prfieum,  pr5   retains  its  original  d   before   8. 

Thus,— 

Indic.  Subj. 

Pres.     proBum,  I  kelp.  piSsim 

prSdea  prosia 

ptSdest  prosit 

pr5samas  proalmus 

prSdeatifl  prositjs 

prSsunt  pro  slut 

Imp.    pr5deram,  Twas  helping,      prodeaaem 
Flit.      ptSderS,  I  shall  help. 
Perf.    proful,  /  helped.  profueriin 

Fbipf.  profueram,  I  had  helped.        prSfuiaaem 
F.P.    ^loiaeTa,  f  shall  have  helped. 
Ihfer.  piodea,  prddestS,  etc. 

JWs.    prSdesBB      Per/.  prSfuisBB       Fui.  ■^sXien^SxsxA «»» 
piSfattiiaB,  about  to  help. 


V 

no 

Etymology:    Verbs 

[§S  137,  138. 

b.  Sum  la  ^0  compounded  with  the  adjecfive  potls,  or  pote,  obit. 

making  the  verb  posanm.     This  is  inflected  as  follows :  — 

Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 

Pres.    posBum,  !can. 

poBBlm 

potea,  jrou  cart. 

poss& 

potest,  A^  can. 

poesit 

poBsTmns 

poteatis,  _j'o7(  can. 

possltis 

poBBunt,  i/u^y  can. 

posBint 

Imp.     poteram,  T  amid. 

poaaem 

Fut.     poterS 

/  shall  be  able. 

Ptrf.    potul. 

I  could. 

potuerlm 

Plupf.  patueram 

F,  P.    potuero,  I  shall  ha-ve  been  able 

Infin.  Pres.    posse 

Per/,  potuisae 

Pabt.               potSns  {z.Ay),  powerful. 

Note.— The  forma  potia  Bum,  pote  sum, 

etc.,  occur  in  early  wrileis. 

-et;  potarint,  potlait  (far 

poBBlt) ;  potestur  («iU 

1.  pass.  inf.  c£  j  143.  a). 

138.   Vol5andit 

compounds  are  inflected  as  follows;  — 

vols,  velle,  volul, 

'diish. 

^B 

nai5  {for  ne  volS) 

nSUe,  nSlui,  bi  unwilling.                                     ^| 

mUS  (for  maglB  or 

mage  void),  mSlle,  m 

aiu!,  wish  rather,  preftJ^m 

Indic          Subj. 

Indic.         Subj. 

iNDtc           Subj.    ^^| 

voia           velim 

nolo            nolim 

mSlS            mfllim      ^^B 

vis              vella 

nSiiTia       nollB 

IU^tIb             tnfilTg             ^^^^ 

volt(vult)  velit 

nfinvolt     nSlit 

mSvolt       maiit 

volumus     VGlTmoB 

nolumus    aoltmua 

malumus   milimua 

voltiB(vii]-)  velltia 
volunt        velint 

nonvultis  nolltia 

mSvultis    mSUtia 

noluut       nolint 

maiunt       maiint        ^g 

voiebam     Telle  m 

nSlebam    nSlleiu 

mSlebam   m5U«in    ^H 

I          Tolam 

Fiitiirr. 

malam                            ^| 

■        voies,  etc. 

ufiies,  etc. 

Ferferl. 

maiea,                        ^1 

\        volul           voluerim 

nSIuI         nSluetim 

maiul         maiuerim 

volueram  volulsBcm  aSlueram  nSlalBsem  miUnenun  malulsaem 

yulure  P«p/»rt. 

voluaiO 

1101  uer  6 

mAl\i«T&        '"^^^^m 

138,  139.J 

Irrtgnlar   Verbs. 

1 

r«. 

Imperative. 
nSli             nSUto,  do  not. 

■ 

Tut. 

nSiltS         nam^te, thou skaitnat.yiihall not.  ^^| 

nemo 

Infinitive. 

Telle    voluiase 

nolle           noluiBBe       mSile 

maiulsBS 

Pahticu'LEs, 

Pr«t.  voieao,  ■mtting 

nClSna,  unwilling. 

Gerund. 

volendl  (late) 

Note.  — The  forms  rfs  for  el  via,  aOltds  farBlToltia 

and  the  fbims  nB 

rol5;  nevlB  (dS-tIs),  maKQ  TOlfi,  m^volQ.  etc.,  occur  in 

early  wrilers. 

139.  Fer5,  ferre,  tOii,  latum,'  bear. 

ArTiTi 

INDIC. 

SUBJ.                        J.NDIC. 

SUBJ. 

Prts. 

fero 

etam 

feror 

ferar 

fera 

erSa 

ferria 

f erarU  (-re) 

'fert 

erat 

fertur 

feratur 

ferlmuB 

eramus 

ferimur 

ferSjnur 

fertfs 

erSUs 

ferimiul 

feramini 

fenmt 

erant 

feruntur 

ferantur 

tmfif. 

ferBbam 

eirem 

fetSbar 

ferrer 

Fui. 

feratn 

ferar 

Per/. 

ttiir 

nlerlm 

IStua  sum 

IStue  aim 

Plup. 

tuleram 

tuliaaem 

latuB  eram 

latua  eaaem 

e.p. 

tulexS 

latua  Gio 

Imperative. 

Pris. 

fer 

erte                       ferre 

ferimini 

Fkt. 

ferta 

ertate                  fertor 

fertfi 

BFunto                  fertor 

iNFlNiriVE. 

feruntor 

Pris. 

ferre 

[      ferri 

firf. 

tuliase 

latna  esae 

put. 

lltflruB  DBBe 

latum  iri  (13t 
Particii-les. 

118  fore) 

Pfes. 

ferSna 

1     Ferf.    latus 

Fut. 

latflrua 

1     Gtr.      fereuduB                            ^^ 

Gerukd;  feren 

ai,  -dO,  -dum,  -flO          Supine 

;  Utum^-tU.         ^H 

'  7 

e  pcrfea  tail  is 

for  toCuII  (whLch  Bomelimcs  occu 

TS\  homTAl  Viwa;^^B 

IIB; 

be  supiae  IStaia 

/sfc.rttiatum(cf.TX7)TiO. 

■ 

I 


112 

Etymology:    Verbs. 

1 

140.  Ed3,  edere,  Sdl,  Csum,  eat,  is  regula 

of  the  third  conju- 

gallon,  but  h< 

s  also  some  forms  directly  from  the  r 
vowel.     These  are  in  full-faced  type. 

oot  (£D)  without  the 

characteristic 

ACnvE.                                            PABSrvE.                      1 

Indic. 

SuBJ.                               INDIC. 
rregent. 

SUBJ.                     1 

ed6 

edam  (edia) 

edor 

edar                      1 

edis  (Sa) 

edas  (edla) 

ederis  (-re) 

edaris  (-re)            J 

edit  (Bat) 

edat  (edit) 

editur  (§atur)  edatur                   | 

edimus 

edam  us  (edrmua) 

edimur 

edamur                 1 

editis  (fistie) 

edatis  (editia) 

ediinini 

edaminl                1 

cdunt 

edant  (edint)              eduntur 

edantur                J 

edebam 

cderem  (SsBem)            edeb^r 

ederer 

edebas 

ederes  (6saS»)               edebaris  (-re 

edereris  (-re) 

edebat 

ederet  (fiaset)              edebaiur 

ederetur  (fiaaBturj 

edam 

edar 

edea 

ederis 

edet,  flfc. 

edetur,  etc. 

edl 

ederim                       [   esus  sum 

Pluperfe^. 

Jsus  Sim 

ederam 

Faturr  l-erfxct. 

esus  essem 

edero 

1   esusero 
Imperative. 

ede  (8a) 

edite  (Bate)                    edere 

edimini 

edito  (SatS) 

editote  (Satate)            editor 

edits  (BstB) 

eduQlo                             editor 
Infinitive. 

eduntor 

edere  (Case) 

edl 

edbse 

esus  esse 

esiirus  esse 

esum  iri 
Participles. 

p™. 

edSna                           1         JP"-/.  esu 

IH<(. 

Ssfirus                             1          Orr.     edendus                       S 

Gerund.                                      '^xivvia.             4^| 

edendT 

•do,  -dum,  -do 

e 

wn,-tft^^^^H 

I 


Irregular   \  'erbs. 


141.  Ea,  fce.  Irt,  Itum.  ^o.i 

Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 

Pres.  S.    eO,  Ih,  it 

earn,  eOa,  eat 

/".     imua,  ItiB,  eunt 

eamua.  cStiB,  eant 

Imperf.     Ibam,  IbSs,  Ibat 

irem,  IrCa,  Itet 

ib^mus,  Ibatis,  ibant 

Ir6mua,  IrSUa,  Ireot 

Future.     Tbo,  Ibis.  Ibit 

Ibimus,  IbitiB,  Ibunt 

Perfect.      IvI  (il) 

Iverim  (ierim) 

Pluperf.    jveram  (ieram) 

ivisBem  (Ibboiu) 

Put.  Per/.  iTOra  (iero) 

Imperative. 

I,  Ite,  Its,  Its,     itote 

1,  euntS 

INFIN-ITIVE. 

Pres.  Ire                      /ir/  Iviaae  (las 

le)       Ful.  itOrua  sBa< 

Participles. 

Pres.  ienB,  oimtiB    Put.  Itama 

Ger.  enndnm 

Gerund:  eandl,  -do,  -dnm,  -do 


Supine;  ituiii,itfi 


.  adeor        /mpf.  adibar 
adliie  Put.     adibor 

aditur       Perf.  aditna  aoiii 
adlmur       Plup.  aditua  eiam 
adOninl      /'".  P.    aditua  er5 
adeantur 


.  The  compounds  adeo,  approach,  iaefi,  enter,  and  some  othen^  I 
They  are  inflected  as  follows  in  the  passive :  — 

Prcs.   adear 
Iinpf.  adirer 
Pirf.   aditus  sim 
Plup.  adituH  eaaem 
INFIN.     aditi,      aditua  eaae 
I'ART.    aditua    adeuadiia 
Thus  inflected,  the  forms  of  e5  are  used  impersonally  in  the  third 
person  singular  of  the  passive ;  as,  itum  eat  {§  146.  d).     The  infini- 
tive M  is  used  with   the  supine  in  -um  to  make  the  future  infinitive 
passive  (S  147.  C.  I).     The  verb  vSned.  be  sold  {i.e.  vinum  e5,  go  la 
sale),  has  also  several  forms  in  the  passive. 

b.  In  the  perfect  system  of  eo  the  forms  without  v  are  more  common, 

and  in  the  compounds  are  regular :  as,  adil,  adieram,  adiiaas  (adlaaej. 

compound  ambiS  is  inflected  regularly  like  a  verb  of  the 

urth  conjugation.   But  it  has  also  amblbat  in  the  imperfect  indicative. 

(/.  FtS  with  e5  retains  its  original  d :  as,  prflde5,  prodia,  prSdlt. 


tiC  ,/ku; 


rands  for  el,  lengthened  (Dxrn  Qi  v\ 


114  Etymology:    Verbs.  [§§142,141 

142.   Faoifi,  facfire,  fed,  factum,  uiaie_  is  regular.     But  it  ha^ 

imperative  fac  in  the  active,  and  besides  the  regular  forms  the  future 

perfect  fax6,  perfect  subjuBCtive  faarim-     The  passive  of  facio  is  — 

fI5,  fiii^  factns  sum,  be  made,  or  become. 


The  tenses  of  the  first  stem  of 

flo 

are  regular  of  the  fourth  con 

jugation,  but  the  subjunctive   imperfei 

;t  is  Eerem,   and  the  infinitivi 

fieri. 

iKDICATIVE. 

Subjunctive. 

Pres.S.    fio,  fiB,flt 

flam,  fSs,  Sat 

P.     fimus,  fitiB,  fltmt 

f»mu8,  fratis.  flaat 

Imperf.     nebam,  Hebas,  eti 

fierem,  fieiSs,  etc. 

Fulure.     flam,  fI6a,  etc. 

Perfect,     factus  anm 

factus  aim                                J 

Huperf.    f  aotna  eram 

factus  essem                            1 

^M/. /■<?/:  f  actus  ero 

1 

IMPER.               fl,  fite,  Kt5,  fltote,  Hunto                                                   K 

Jntin,     Pres.  fieri               Perf. 

iactua  Gsae              Fut.  factum  M 

Part.     Perf.  factua           Cer. 

a.  Most  compounds  of  facio  with  prepositions  change  S  to  I  (preV'B 
It  stem),  or  6  (supine  stem),  and  are  inflected  regularly :  as 

conficiS,  cSnficete,  confeci,  ciixilBatxaa^  finish. 
oSuficior,  conficl,  confectua. 

b.  Other  compounds  retain  a,  and  have  -fiS  in  the  passive  ;  as, 
benefaoiS,  -faoere,  -fScI,  -factum ;  pas.^.  lieDefTS,  -fieri,  .factus, 
benefit.  These  retain  the  accent  of  the  simple  verb ;  as,  bene-f  Jl'ds 
(§  ■9-  '')• 

c.  A  few  isolated  forms  of -fifi  occur  in  other  compounds;  viz., — 

cSnfit,  it  happens,  dfifit,  it  lacks.  Infit,  ke  begins  (to  speak). 

cSnfTet  dSflunt  influnt 

cCnflat  dWIot  efflerl,  to  be  effected. 

cfinfieret  dSflat  iata^cTl.  to  perish. 

cSufieri  deSert  inteiflat,  let  hiiii  perish. 

DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 
143.  Some  verbs  have  lost  their  Present  stem,  and  use 
only  tenses  of  the  Perfect,  in  which  they  are  inflected  reg- 
uJarly.      These  are  — 


I 


S5  143,  144.] 


Defective   Verbs. 


"S 


a.  Coepi,^  I  began ;  IqAd,  ooapiutt;  Fut.  Part  coeptOrtis;  Perf. 
I'asa.  Part.  ooeptUB. 

The  passive  is  used  wiih  the  passive  iniinitive :  as,  coeptua  sum 
vocarl,  /began  la  be  coiled,  but  coepi  vocBre,  /  began  to  call  (cf.  § 
[+(.  g,  note).     For  the  present  incipifi  is  used. 

b.  OdI,  ffiaie;'''  perfect  participle  Bsub,  hating  ox  kaied  {^xG%mm, 
i/tcrly  hateful),  future  participle  SButus,  likely  to  hate. 

c.  ICemiuI,  /  remember i*  with  the  fmperaitve  memento,  me- 
mentdte  ;  Part.  meminSna. 

Note.  —  OdI  and  maminl  have  a  perfect  form  with  a  prc5enl  meaning,  an  J 
are  QaWei,  prileritivi  verbs.  NOvI  and  cOosuevI  (usuailyrelerrcd  iQ  nSaoO  and 
cSneuesoB)  are  oflcn  UEed  in  the  sense  of  /  know  (have  learned),  and  /  am  lucits- 
lomed  (have  become  accuslomed).  as  piEleritive  verbs.  Many  other  verbs  are 
occasonalLy  used  in  the  same  way  (see  \  279,  Remark). 

144,  Many  verba  are  found  only  in  the  present  system.  Such  are 
maerefi,  -Bre,  be  sorrowful  (cf,  maeBtue,  sad) ;  ferlS,  -Ire,  strike. 

In  many  the  simple  verb  is  incomplete,  but  the  missing  parts  c 
in  its  compounds:  as,  T&d5.  videre,  luvSsI,  inv&Bum. 

Some  verbs  occur  very  commonly,  but  only  in  a  few  forms ;  as,  ■ 

a.  AlB,  fmy:  — 

IlNulC.  Fres.   ai6,  ais,  ait ;  — Siunt 
fmpf.  SiCbaiu  (^aibam),  fiiebSs,  etc. 
SUBj.    Pres.   3158,  5iat,  Slant 
like 
as,l 


Part. 


I 


&ifins 


.  laquam,  I  say  (used  only,  except  in  poetry,  ii 
like  the  English  quoth,  which  is  possibly  from  the  sa 
Indic,  Pres.  inquam.  iuquia,  inqult 

iiiquiinus,  inquitia  (tale),  ii 
Impf  inquiebat 
Fut.    inquiSs,  -et 
Perf.  Inqulatl,  inquit 
Impeh,  inque.  inquitS 

'.  The  deponent  fSrl,  lo  spmk,  forms  the  perfei 
(BtuB  som,  erani,  etc.     It  has  also  — 
iNDIC.  Pres.   fatut,  fantur 

Fut.    fSbor,  fabitur 
iHFER.  fare 

Infin.  fSrI 


quiunt 


.P  {as  m  apiscor} 


r 


Etymology:   Verbs. 

Part.  Pres.   (dat.)  fanti 

P4rf.  fatUB,  halting  spoken. 

Ger,   fanduB,  to  be  spoken  of. 
Gek.  fandl,  -do 

Sup.  fata 


[§144. 


Several  forms  compounded  with  the  prepositions  ei,  prae,  pro,  inter, 
occur;  as.  praefatur,  affarl,  pr6f3tuB,  interfatur,  etc.  The  com- 
pound infana  is  regularly  used  as  a  noun  (child).  Infandus,  nefaiiduB, 
are  used  as  adjectives,  unspeakable,  abominable. 

d.  QuasBfi, /oj;^,  itf^(originai  form  of  quaero,  5  132.  i^},  has  — 
Indic.  Pres.  quaeaS,  quaeBflmus 
iNFIN.  quasBere 

Past.  quaeagnB 

■  tft  Ovaie,  to  triumph,  has  the  following :  — 
Indic.  Fres.  ovat 
SUBJ.    Pres.   ovet 

Imperf.   ovaret 
PjtHT.  ovans,  ovatGruB,  ovatua 

Ger.  ovandT 

[  /.  A  few  verbs  are  found  chiefly  in  the  Imperative  :  as, — 

Pres.   sing.  aalvS,  plur.  aalvSte, /w//.'  (from  Balvuo, 

safe  and  sound).   An  infin.  salvSre  also  occurs. 

Fres.   sing.  av6  (or  havfi),  plur.  avSte,  Fui.  avfito, 

hail  Qz  farewell. 
Fres.  sing,  oedo,  plur.  oedite  (cette),^"j/e,  tell. 
Pres.  sing,  apage!  begone!  (properly  a  Greek  word). 
g.  QneO,  /  can,  nequeS,  /  cannot,  are  conjugated  like  e5.     They 
tre  rarely  used  except  in  the  present. 


iNBIC. 

Iqueo 
quit 
qulmm 
quItiH 
queuut 


Sl'bj. 


Indic. 


que  5 

que  am 

quia 

queSa 

quit 

queat 

quImuB 

que  am  u 

quItlB 

quaatiB 

queuut 

queaut 

qulbam 

quire  m 

gurbat 

quiret 

2unaat 

qalrent 

nequeo  (n5n  queS)  nequeani 
nonquTs  nequeas 

uequit  nequeat 

nequlmus  nequeSmua 

nequltis  iiequeatia 

nequeunt  ue queaut 


ne  qulbam 

uequ!rem 

nequibat 

ue  quiret 

iiequTbant 

necivilTent 

§  144,  145,] 


Impersonal   Verbs. 


qulbunt 


qulvfirunt 


nequlbunt 

nequlvl 
nequiviatl 

uequlvlt 
iiBquiv6riiat 


quiBsent  nequlsset 

Infinitive. 
quire  qu!:visse(qiiIsBe)iiequlTe  nequlvisae  ] 

Participles. 
quifins,  gaenntlB  ueqaiSns 

Note, — A  fcw  passive  forms  are  used  by  old  wrilers  wilh  passive  i 
s.  quitur,  qultua,  que&tur.queamtur.neqoitur.nequltum;  t-f.poBaum 
and  coepi  ( j{  137.  note  and  143.  a). 

Impersonal  Verbs. 

145.  Many  verbs,  from  their  meaning,  appear  only  in 
the  third  person  singular,  the  infinitive,  and  the  genmd. 
These  are  called  Impersonal  Verbs,  as  having  no  personal 
subject.*     Their  synopsis  may  be  given  as  follows :  — ^  ■ 

CoNj.  1.  I].  rii.  IV.  Pass.  Conj.i,  ^^ 

iliiflain.  Uisallouxd.         ilckanars.        itremUi,  itisfimgkt.     ^B 

cCiiBtat  licet  acctdit       Svenit  pflenStm" 


y 


c6iiBtabat 

Uo6bat 

acoidSbat  fiveniSbat 

pugnabStur 

cSnstabit 

UoSbit  [est 

accidet       Eveniet 

pflgnabitur 

cSuBtitit 

liciiit,  -itum 

accidit        Svenit 

pflgni.tum  est 

lie  ue  rat 

acciderat  SvSnerat 

pugnatum  erat 

cfinBtlterlt 

licuerit 

acciderit    evSnerit 

pugnatum  erit 

cSnatet 

Uoeat 

acddat       Sveniat 

pugnetur 

cfinBtaret 

lioeret 

accideret  Svenlret 

pOguarBtur 

cStistiterlt 

licuerit 

acoidetit    Sveuerit 

pfignatum  sit 

cfinstitiseet 

Ucuisaet 

accidiaaet  6v8niBBet 

pugnatum  esaet 

cBnBtSre 

UcBre 

accidfire     Svenlre 

pugnarl 

conatitiBBe 

liCUiBBC 

aocidiBBG    evenisBC 

pugnatum  esae 

-flt&tOrunieBe 

le-iturumeBBt 

) -tOrum  esse  pAgaatum  Iri 

Etyinology:    Verbs.  \%  14| 


I 


F 

^H       14«.   Impersonal  Verbs  may  be  classified  as  follows  : 
^f       a.  Verbs  expressing  the  operations  of  nature  and  the  lime  of  days\ 
as.  plult,  it  rains;  nlagit,  it  shows;  grandinat,  it  haih;  fnlpust,  h 
lightens;  veaperSaoit  (inceptive,  g  167- a),  it  grows  late;  liScet  bOo'l 
lam,  it  is  gelling  light  now. 

Note.— In  these  no  subject  is  distinctly  thoughtot.    Somelimes,  h 
verb  I9  used  personally  with  the  name  of  a  divinity  as  Ihe  subject :  as,  IQppit^  1 
tonat,  yupilcr  IkuHderi.    In  poetry  other  subjects  are  occasionaily  u 
tundaa  Haxa  p]uuiit,  Ihe  slinks  rain  stoms. 

b.  Verbs  of  feeling,  where  the  person  who  is  the  proper  subject 
becomes  the  object,  as  being  himself  affected  by  the  feeling  expressed 
in  the  verb  (§  ixi.  b).  Such  are:  miseret,  it  grie^'es ;  paenitet 
(pOAnltat),  it  repents;  piget,  it  disgusts ;  pudei,  it  s/iames ;  taedet, 
it  wearies  :  as,  mlseret  mfi,  / pity  (it  distresses  me). 

NOTK.  —  Such  verbs  often  have  also  a  passive  Ibrm :  as.  mlsereor,  I  pity 
(am  moved  to  pity) ;  and  occasionally  other  parts :  as,  paenitOrus  (as  fhim 
tpaenlfi),  pasnlteiuluB,  pudendus,  pertaeeuin  est,  plgltuDi  eat. 

c.  Verbs  which  have  a  phrase  or  clause  as  their  .subject  (§5  270.  t 
330.  332.  a):  as,— 

acoidlt,  contingit,  Svenit.  obtingit,  obveiiit,  fit,  it  k 

Ubet,  il  pleases. 

lioet,  it  is  pcrmilteci. 

OBrtum  eat,  it  is  resolved. 

c5natat,  it  is  clear. 

placet,  videtur,  it  seems  good. 

decet,  it  is  becoming. 

delectat,  iuvat,  it  delights. 

opoitet,  necesse  eat,  it  is  needful. 

pracBtat,  it  is  better. 

interest,  tfifert,  il  concerns. 

vacat.  there  is  leisure. 

restat,  supereat,  (/  remains. 

Note.— Many  of  these  verbs  may  be  . 
tha  Ihe  passive  forms  libitum  (llcitui 
and  llOfina  are  used  as  adjectives. 

d.  The  passive  tf  intransitive  verbs  is  very  often  uaed  impersonally : 
as,  pagnfttur,  there  is  fighting  (it  is  foughl) ;  Itm,  some  one  ^es  (it  is 
gone)  ;  paroltur  mtlil,  /  am  spared  (it  is  spared  to  me,  see  §  230)-' 


I 

I 

h 

1° 

L 


I  5  147.]  Origin  and  History  of  Verb-Forms. 

Peripbrastic  Forms. 
14:7.  The  following  periphrastic  forms  are  found  in  thd 
inflection  of  the  verb  :  — 

a.  The  so-calied" Periphrastic  Conjugations"  (see  5  129). 

b.  The  tenses  of  completed  action  in  the  passive  formed  by  ti 
enses  of  esse  with  the  perfect  participle :  as,  amatus  eet. ' 

c.  The  future  infinitive  passive,  formed  as  follows  :  — 

1.  By  the  infinitive  passive  of  e5,  ^0,  used   impersonally  with  thel 

supine  in  -tun:  as,  amatttm  Mi. 

2.  By  fore  (or  fntflrum  esse),  with  the  perfect  participle  Qa. 
amatiw  fore). 

3.  By  fore  with  ut  and  the  subjunctive  (cf.  §  288. _/^. 

NOTE. 
Origill  and  HiBtory  of  Verb-Forms. 

The  forms  that  make  up  the  conjugation  of  a  verb  are  composed  of 
formations  from  a  root,  originally  separate,  but  gradually  grouped  to- 
gether, and  afterwards  supplemented  by  new  formations  made  on  old 
lines  to  supply  deficiencies.  Some  of  these  forms  were  inherited, 
already  made,  by  the  Latin  language;  others  were  developed  in  the 
couree  of  the  history  of  the  language  itself. 

I.  Present  Stem.  —  The  Present  slem  is  a  modification  or  develop- 
ment of  the  root  (see  §  123).  In  regular  forms  of  the  First,  Second, 
and  Fourth  Conjugations  it  appears  in  all  the  other  parfs  of  the  verb 
(ioduding  noun  and  adjective  forms)  as  well,  and  is  accordingly  called 
the  Verb-Stem. 

The  tenses  of  the  Present  system  are  made  from  the  Present  stem 
as  foUows :  — 

a.  In  the  Present  Indicative  the  personal  endings  are  added  direcdy 
to  the  present  stem.  Thus  root  ar,  present-  (and  verb-)  stem  arl-; 
arfi-B,  arft-miis,  arA-tiB. 

b.  In  the  Imperfect  Indicative  tlie  suffix  -bam,  -ba»,  etc.  (originally  a 
complete  verb),  is  added,  bam  is  probably  the  imperfect  of  the  root 
BHlf  (cf.  ful,  futflniB,  Ho,  ifiwi,  be),  meaning  Iivas.     This  was  added 

complete  word  originally  a  case  of  a  noun,  as  in  I  -was  a-ploKghtng, 
hence  arS-bam.  The  form  probably  began  in  the  second  or  the  third 
conjugation  and  from  that  was  extended  to  the  otiiers. 

In  the  Future  Indicative  a  similar  suffix,  -bo,  -bia,  etc.,  is  added 

(by  the  same  process}.    b6  is  probably  a  preacnX  itynn  «i.  'iie  «axMc 

with  a  future  meaning:  as,  arSi-bo. 


I  I20  Etymology:    Verbs. 


^P    120 

^H  This  form  once  in  use  in  all  the  conjugations  was  later  supplanted 
^H  In  the  third  and  fourth  by  an  inherited  form,  which  was  originally 
^H  an  optative  mood,  differing  from  the  present  indicative  only  in  the  final 
^F  vowel  of  the  stem  (see  §  126,  c.  i)  :  as,  Bugi-bfi  (old) ;  BQgam,  BtigB«. 
■^  (later).  ] 

V  d.   In  the  Present  Subjunctive  the  personal  terminations  were  added 

to  another  (orm  of  present  stem  of  great  antiquity  with  a  different 

vowel :  as,  amBm,  moneain,  audtam. 

e.  In  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  a  suffix,  -rem,  -res,  etc.,  was  added, 
-ram  is  doubtless  a  very  old  modal  form  of  sum  diverted  from  its 
original  use. 

f.  The  noun  and  adjective  forms  of  the  Present  system  were 
originally  separate  formations  made  from  the  root  by  means  of 
noun-suffixe.s.  These  forms  being  associated  with  the  verb  became 
types  for  the  formation  of  new  ones  from  the  present  stem,  in  cases 
where  no  such  formation  from  the  root  ever  existed.  Thus  regere 
la  originally  a  dative  (or  locative)  of  a  noun  like  b6»ub,  generis ; 
but  as  regere  seems  to  be  roge  +  re,  so  arS-ro  was  made  in  the  same 
manner.  Gerendua  is  the  noun-stem  gerSa-,  i.e.  GER+on-  (gero, 
-&iitB,  §  162.  it)  +  duB  ;  but  it  seemed  to  be  gere  +  adus,  and  thus 
gave  rise  to  ama-ndne. 

1.  Pekpect  Stem.  —  The  Latin  inherited  from  the  parent  Indo-. 
European  speech  preterite  forms  of  two  kinds 

a.  In  the  real  perfect  (perfect  with  havi  in  English)  the  proper 
terminations  (see  g  Ii3)  are  added  directly  to  a  root-form,  which  was 
originally  a  reduplication  (doubling)  of  the  root  with  vowel  change. 
Thus  its,  root  STA,  perfect  atetl  (for  fstesti)  ;  cf.  pnugS  (root  fug), 
pnpflgl  (later  pnpugl). 

b.  In  other  inherited  verbs  the  perfect  was  formed  by  a  verbal 
auxiliary  (some  form  of  anm)  added  to  the  root  (or  later  to  the  present 
stem),  Thus  dloS.  root  DIQ  perfect  tdlo-al  (dl»l).  This  auxiliary 
being  a  complete  verb-form,  conlained.  of  course,  the  personal  tenni- 

c.  The  remaining  perfects  were  formed  with  a  suffix  -vj,  of  uncertain 
origin,  but  containing  the  personal  terminations.  But  these  formative 
processes  had  been  forgotten  long  before  the  Latin  language  reached 
the  stage  in  which  we  know  it.  The  form  in  -vl.  however,  became  the 
^pe  for  new  Perfects.  By  the  Romans,  the  first  person  singular  of  the 
Perlect  (however  formed),  losing  its  final  vowel,  was  treated  as  a  new 

\  from  which  other  forms  were  developed  by  the  use  of  added 
r  by  an»log\'  with    those   already  formed,     T\v\s  svewv  ii 


* 


Origin  and  History  of  Verb-Forms. 


r  called  the  Perfect  Stem.  Thus  were  formed  the  Pluperfect  and  the 
Future  Perfect  Indicadve,  the  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  Subjunctive,  and 
the  Perfect  Infinitive,  The  terminations  of  these  tenses  are  parts 
of  Bum  Id  some  form  or  other,  but  precisely  how  they  are  made  is 


1 


3.  StiPiNE  Stem.  — The  Perfect  and  Future  Participles  and  the 
Supine,  though  strictly  noun-forrns,  each  with  its  own  suffix,  agree  in 
having  the  first  letter  of  the  suffix  (t)  the  same  and  in  suffering  the 
same  phonetic  changes  (by  which  the  t  becomes  h,  §  \\,  a.  2). 

Hence  these  forms,  along  with  several  sets  of  derivatives  (see 
S5  162.  a,  163.  *,  164.  w<)  used  as  nouns  or  adjectives,  were  felt  by  the 
Romans  as  belonging  to  one  system,  and  are  conveniently  associated 
with  the  Supine  Stem.    Thus, — 

pmg5,  plctum,  pictus,  pictfiruB,  plctflra,  plctor.  ■ 

TldeS,  TlBum  (for  rid-tum),  tiiua  (part,),  rlsua  (noun),  TlsUnu,.  ] 
tisiS,  riaor,  rislbllls. 

The  signs  of  mood  and  tense  are  often  said  to  be  Inserted  between 
the  Root  (or  verb-stem)  and  the  Personal  ending.  No  such  insertion 
is  possible  in  a  developed  language  like  the  Latin.  All  true  verb-forms 
are  the  result,  as  shown  above,  of  composition^  that  is,  of  adding  to 
the  root  or  the  verb-stem  either  pronouns  (personal  endings)  or  fully  de- 
veloped auxiliaries  (themselves  containing  the  personal  terminations), 
or  of  adding  similar  auxiliaries  to  the  perfect  stem ;  or  of  imitation 
of  such  processes.  Thus  amSbamus  is  made  by  adding  to  amS-, 
originally  a  significant  word,  or  a  form  concoived  as  such,  a  full 
verbal  form  'fbSmas,  not  by  inserting  b&  between  amS-  and  -iaua> 


Btymoiogy:  Parikks. 


Chapter    VII. —  Particles. 

Adverbs,  Prepositions,  and  Conjunctions  are  callem 
Particles. 

In   their  origin   these  words  are  either  (i)  casc-for 
actual  or  extinct,  or  {2)  compounds  and  phrases. 

Particles  cannot  always  be  distinctlj'  classified,  for  many  adverbs  i 
used  also  as  prepositions  and  many  as  conjuDctions  (§§  153  ajid  I, 

l.-ADVERBS. 
1.    Derivation. 

148.  Adverbs  are  regularly  formed  from  adjectives  as  ' 
follows :  — 

a.  From  adjectives  of  tht  first  and  second  declensions,  by  changing 
the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  stem  to  -C:  as.  cftrB,  dearly,  from 
oBruB,  dear  (stem  oaro-). 

Note.— The  ending  -S  is  a  relic  of  an  old  ablative  in  -6d  (ct  f  36./), 

b.  From  adjectives  of  the  Ifiird  declension  by  adding  -ter  10  t' 
stem.  Stems  in  nt-  (nom.  -hb)  lose  the  t-.  All  others  are  treated  a 
i-stems.    Thus, — 

fortiter,  bravely,  from  fortls  (stem  forti-).  brave. 
acriter,  eagerly,  from  Seer  (stem  5cn-),  easier. 
vigilanter,  watchfully,  from  Tigilana  (stem  vigilant-). 
prfidenter,  prudently,  from  prudSne  (stem  priideiit-). 
aliter,  otherwise,  from  alius  (old  stem  all-}. 
Note.  — This  suffix  is  probably  the  same  as  -tor  in  the  Greek  -Ttpoi 
Uter,  alter  (p.  49,  n.  i).    It  so,  diese  adverbs  are  nculer  accusatives  (cf.  d). 

e.  Some  adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  declensions  have  adverbs 
of  both  forms  (-8  and  -ter).  Thus  dflrua,  ferrf,  has  both  dfirE  and 
dOrlter ;  miser,  ■wretched,  has  both  miaera  and  miBeriter. 

d.  The  neuter  accusative  of  adjectives  and  pronouns  is  often  used  as 
an  adverb :  as,  multum,  much ;  facilS,  easily;  quid,  why. 

So  regularly  in  the   comparative  degree  r   as.  SoriuB,  more  keenly 
(positive  acriter) ;  faciliua,  more  easily  (positive,  facilS). 
Note.  —  These  adveibs  are  slriclly  cognate  aceusalWcs  l.sec  tj  1^,  a'). 


Derivation  of  Adverbs. 


I 


•  neHter  or  (less  commonly)  fe 

i,  may  be  used  adverbially ;  as,  i^^h,  falsely  i  oltS, 
^^uklyi    rSota   (via),   straight   {straightway);    crSbrB,   frequently { 
fort£,  by  chance}  spontS,  of  one's  own  accord, 

f.  Some  adverbs  are  derived  from  adjectives  not  in  use :  as,  abtmdB, 
plentifully  (as  if  from  f  abnndos,  cf.  abondS,  abound)  ;  saepS,  oftt 
(cf.  Baepfia,  hedge,  and  aaepiS,  fiedge  in)  ;  propS,  almost  (as  if  from 
tpropiB). 

tn  some  the  case  is  doi  obvious,  end  in  some  it  is  doubtful.    Examples  may  be 


(comparative  of  fa),  a  second  lim 
itsl. 

P.  Ablative  or 
iaiidj  ItitrK,  viii 
iM  vain  ;  f  oria,  cu/  tfdoi 

7.  Datives  of  adjccti 
degree;  OltrS,  iryoad;  oltrB.  this  sidt  (as  end  of  motion) ;  rotr5,  back;  OlBo    I 
(for  lllS-ce),  weakened  lo  UlUc, /*iVA(r, 

Remark.  —  Those  in  -trO  are  from  comparative  stems  (cf.  ills,  cla,  re 

J.  Ijjcalive  forms:   Ibl,  lAeref   ubl,  where;  pePBKrf    (pere^rB),  1 
hic  {far ';)ia\-CB),  here;  Interim,  BKoniaijVf  (ot  inter) ;  indS.  Men«.- 1 
/(/.■61im[fromoUitB,oldfonnofll!e),i'«fr.   Also  the  compounds  extrinaeeuB,   j 
BuUide;  hodie  (hoi  +  die),  to-di^:  naiaxiAiS,  day  after  lo-vi^ 

f.  Feminine  accusatives:   Btattm,  dh  iAe  spot;  aBJtlm,   i 
Baltem),  from  last  nouns  In  -tie  (genitive  -tie).     Thus  -tlm  became  a  regui^ 
adverbial  lerminadon:  and  by  means  of  it  adverbs  were  madelrom  many  noun  anif 

accusative  b  -tfm :  as,  separatim,  separately,  from  separatue,  separate.  Som< 
adverbs  that  appear  to  be  feminine  accusative  are  perhaps  localive:  as,  palam, 
epenfy:  perparam,  wrongly;  tain,  sa;  quam,  as. 

i.  Plural  accusatives;  as,  ali&s,  ehevihere;  foraa,  out  of  doors  (as  end  oi 

n-  Of  uncertain  formation:  (i)  tliose  in  -tu9  (usually  preceded  by  1),  within 
■blaljve  meaning:  as,  fUiidittlB,yrBm  the  bottom,  utterly ;  divlnltua,  from  alimie, 
frmiidenlially  ;  iataa,  wilhm  ;  ■psatt.-aa,  within  ;  {2)  those  iti  -dem, -dam, -dS; 
as,  quidem,  indeed;  quondam,  ivicr,-  QuandB  (cf.  dCnec),  -when;  (3)  dum 
(probably  accusative  of  time),  m*i7e/  lam  (perhaps  locadve,  cf.  attro),  bdm. 

9,  Phrases  or  clauses  which  have  grown  togelher  into  adverbs  (cf,  notaitistand- 
ingiHtverlheless,  iesides)  :  anteft.  oldantideEl,  iefire  (ante  eft,  probably  ablative 
01  instrumental)  ;  postniodo,/rzim/^  (postmotlo,  a  short  time  after)  -.  dSnilO, 
anmi  (de  novS) ;  prSrsuB,  absolalefy  (prS  vorsua,  straight  ahead)  ;  qaot- 
onolB,  yearly  (quot  annte,  as  majiy  yean  as  there  art) :  qtiam-ob-rem. 
nhrrifare;  cOmlnua.  hand  to  hand  (Con  mantis);  Sminue  al  long  range 
(ex  manus]  1  ob-viam  (as  in  Ire  obvlam,  logo  to  meet) ;  pridem  (cf.  prae 
and-dem  in  I-dem).  fir  some  time;  foraan  (fora  aa  [sat])  perhaps  (it's  a 
chance  whether);  forBltan  (tors  alt  ao),  perhaps  (it  wouid  be  a.  chante 
whether):  edUcet  (bcI.  Mcetl,  lia!  is  to  lay  (.Vnow.  30M  wiaijl-,  -«\«J&fittV 
frldg.  licet),  ta  ait  (see,  you  may).  '  " 


1 

I 


Etymology :  Particles. 


2.  Clasaifinatlon. 
14».   Adverbs  are  classified  as  follow 

1 

a.  Adverbs  of  Place.^ 

1 

hlo,  h^re.                 hue,  hither. 

Mno,  heuce. 

li.a.ei,byihisivigt* 

ibi,  th^re.                   eo,  thitha: 

inde,  thence. 

e%by  that  way. 

iBtlc.  there.                %MtZa.thither.ia'A-aQ,  thence. 

lftt&,6y  that  way. 

Ullo,  there.                 UlOo,  thither 

illinc,  //iM«. 

iUa(mao), " 

ubi,  where.              tiM^^whiiher.  irnde,  uiheiice. 

q}xSi,6yivhatway. 

alicubi,  somewhere.  aliqii6,/(j,etc 

alicuade,/ry/« 

etc.  aliquft,  Ay,  etc 

ibl&.tia,in  the  same  efidem 

indidem 

eadem 

place. 

alibi,  elsewhere.        aUiS 

aliunde 

aU5 

nbinbi,  iiihereiier.    quoquo 

undecuoque 

quaqu3 

nbivis,  anywhere,    quovia 

uudique 

quSvIa 

tac\],tii,i/anywhere.  alquo 

aicuiide 

alqua 

nSoabl,  ^ef/  >>         nSqufi 

nSounde 

aequft 

uBqae,  all  the  -way  to. 

citro,  /o 

///V  side. 

uBquHin,  aityujhere. 

intrS,  in 

ivardiy. 

noBqaam,  nmvhere. 

•patzt,  further  on.                   1 

flltrB,  beyond  (aT  freely,  i.e.  be 

-one!  whal  is  required).                        fl 

qufirBoin  (for  qnfl  vorBum.  whitlitr     retrorsu 

m,  backward.            m 

turned?),  to  what  endf 

sOraum, 

upward.                    ■ 

hSrBum,  this  -way. 

deorsum 

,  dmuii'inard.            \ 

pi6nvm,/i>nmrd  {prorBiis.  «/ 

crlyy  aeoraum 

apart.                      9 

iatrorsmn,  inwardly. 

aliorsum 

,  anotlier  way.         % 

b.  Advekbs  of  Time. 

1 

quandSf  wA^a-i"  (inierrog.) ;   e 

urn  (quom.    quum),   -.fhen  (relat.)i 

ut,  when,  as. 

nano,  nmui  tunc  {Uiva),  then ; 

max..  presently. 

iam.  already;  dum, 

whih. 

1 


1  The  demonstrative  adverbs  hlC,  ibl,  iatlc,  Ullc,  and  their  correlalives.  cor- 
respond in  signiRcalion  with  the  jironouns  hic,  Is,  iBte,  ille  (see  {  loa),  and  are 
often  equivalent  to  these  pronouns  wiih  a  preposition  t  as,  Inde  ^  ab  eS,  etc. 
So  the  relative  or  intenogative  ubi  corresponds  with  qui  (qiiie) ,  all-cubl  with 
-allqule,  ublubl  with  qulagula,  al-oubl  wiih  alqula  (see  ^  104, 105.  with  the 
table  of  Correlalives  in  }  106).  All  these  adverbs  were  originally  case-forms  of 
pronouns.     The  forms  m  -bl,  -Ic,  -Ino,  and  -onfto  ate  locative,  those  in  -S  and 


Classification  of  Adverbs. 


^Vpilmum  (prlmS),  first;  deinde   (posteS),  nej;t  after ;  poBtrimum4 
H  (poattSai5),fifiaUy;  posteSquam,  postquam,  TiiAeK  {after  that,  f 

mnqiiaiii  (unquatn),  iver;  numquam  (nuuquatu),  never;  semper, 

allqaando,  at  some  time,  at  length ;  quandCque  (quaudSoumquD), 

•whenevei' ;  dCmqns,  at  last. 
qnotiSas   (qnotiSH),  haw  often;   totieua,  so  often;   aliquotiSac 

number  of  times, 
coUdiS  (quoKdiS),  every  day ;  in  diEa,  from  day  to  day. 
nSodiim,  not  yet;   necdum,  nor  yet ;   vixdom,  scarce  yet;    quam   i 

piinnun,  as  soon  as  possible;  aaepe,  often;  arSbxZ,  frequently  i  \ 

lain  noQ,  no  longer. 

c.  Adverbs  of  Degree  or  Cause. 
maasa.,  haw^  as ;  toni,  so;  quamvla,  however  much,  although;  quO- 

modo,  JtB^. 
cflr,  quSre,  why;  quod,  quia,  quoniam  (for  quom-iam),  because;  ^ 

e5,  therefore. 
ita,  ale,  so;  ut  (utd),  as,  how;  utut,  utoumque,  however, 
qaamquam   (quanquam),  although,  and  yet;    et,   etlam,   quoque, 

d.  Interkogative  Particles. 
an,  -ne,  anne,  utrum.  utrumne,  Hum,  whether. 
nSoue,  annOn,  whether  not ;  numquld,  ecquld,  whether  at  all  (ecquid    i 

intellogis?  have  you  any  idea  f  do  you  understand  at  all/). 
ntruin  (num),  -ne,  whether;  ...  an  (aanSn,  necne),  or. 

Ie.  Negative  Particles. 
^u,  not  (in  simple  denial)  ;  liand  (hau,  haut),  miuimS,  not  (in 
tradiction) ;  aS,  not  (in  prohibition);  uSve,  neu,  nor;  uSdum, 
much  less. 
nS,  lest;  nequB,  neo,  nor;  n6  .  .  .  qnidem,  not  even. 
nOn  moda  ,  ,  ,  viram.  (aed)  etiam,  not  only  .  .  .  but  also. 
nSn  modo  .  .  .  aed  nS  ,  , .  quidem,  not  only  not  .  .  .  bui  not  ei 
bI  miiiua,  if  not;  qu6  miaus  (quominua),  so  as  not. 
qala  (relat.),  but  iJial;  (interrog.),  tvhy  not? 
nS,  aec  (i"  compos.),  not;  so  in  neacid,  f  hnmu  not;  negS,  /  say 
HO  (313,  I  say  yes)  ;  negStinm,  business  (neo  fitiam);  nBmS  (uS 
bSmfi),  no  one;  dS  quis,  lest  any  one;  necofXiAtvM,  unex^etlEd', 
^H         aeque  eiiim.^or 


K^" 'M 
136  EtyiKology:  Particles.  \^%  ^^^-^^H 
^^P              f.  Adverbs  of  Manner  (see  g  148).  ^^^H 

HV  g-  Numeral  Adverbs  (see  g  96).  ^^H 


% 


3.  Fecnllar  tTaes  of  Adverbs. 
IBO.   Two  negatives  are  equivalent  to  an   affirmative: 
as, — 

nemo  non  audiet,  every  one  %oi!l  hear  (nobody  will  not  hear) . 

a.  Many  cgmpounds  of  which  nOii  is  the  first  part  express  an  /«• 
definile  affirmative :  as,  — 

nonniillija,  some;  nonnuUi  (=  allqni),  some  fern. 
nonnihil  (=  aliquid),  someOiing. 
nonnemd  (=  aliquot),  sundry  persons. 
nonniimquam  (=  aliquotiena),  somelimes. 
necnSn,  also  (nor  not). 

b.  Two  negatives  of  which  the  second  is  nCn  (belonging  to  the 
predicate)  express  a  universal  affirmative :  as,  — 

nemo  non,  nnllus  non,  nobody  [does]  ho/,  i.e.  everybody  [does]  (of.  nonnemo 

above,  not  nobody,  i.e.  somebody). 
nihil  non,  evtrylking. 
numqunm  non,  never  not.  I.e.  always  (cf.  noDnumquain  above,  not  never, 

Le.  somelimes). 

151.   The  following  adverbs  require  special  notice :  — 

a.  Etiam  (et  lam),  also,  even,  is  stronger  than  quaque,  also,  and 
usually  precedes  the  emphatic  word,  while  quoque  follows  it ;  as,  — 

non  verbis  solum  sed  etiam  vi  (Verc.  ii.  2,  64),  not  only  by  words,  but  also 

l,f.r„. 
hoc  qnoquB  maleficium  (Rose.  Am.  40),  this  crime  bio. 

b.  Nunc  (for  Inma-oe)  means  definitely  novi,  in  the  immtdiate 
present,  and  is  not  med  as  in  English  of  past  time.  Iain  means  now. 
already,  at  length,  presently,  and  includes  a  reference  to  previous  time 
through  which  the  state  of  things  described  has  been  or  will  be  reached. 
Il  may  be  used  of  a«f  time.     With  negatives  it  means  {no)  longer. 

Turn,  t/ieri,  b  correlative  to  cam,  wfieu,  and  may  be  used  of  any 
time.  Tuno,  then,  at  that  time,  is  a  strengthened  form  of  turn 
(ttnm-ce,  cf.  nuno).    Thus  — 

ut  iftin  antea  AM,  a!  [have  already  said  before. 

Eiiam  satis  aetatia  etque  roboris  haberet  (Rose.  Am.  51,  149),  if  ke  had 
allained  a  suitable  age  and  strength  (Ut.  if  ke  now  had,  is  he  will  bv 
andhy). 
non  est  ixra  JenitSl!  locus,  there  is  no  longer  reom  for  mercy. 


I  ii  151, 152.]  Prepositions.  izri 


F 

^^H         quod  ia.m  erat  inslitatum,  lahUk  had  cemt  la  be  a  priitliee  (had  now 

^H  cstabUsbed). 

^^^k        riimc  quidem   dilela   est,  tuna   florcbut     (Lxl.   4),  null)   ('tis   true)  sk*^ 

^H  [Greece]  11  ruined,  then  ike  was  in  ksr  glory. 

^^H        torn  com  r^nobaC,  al  the  time  when  he  reigned. 

^^P       c.  Certs  means  certainly i  certS  (usually),  at  any  rate:  as,  certS 

^M    Bcio,  I  know  far  a  certainty  i  ego  ceitS,  I  at  least. 

d.  Pnmum  meansjfrj-/,  ^^ firstly"  (Jirst  in  order^oT far  the  first  time)\ 
3nd  implies  a  series  of  events  or  acts.  Pritnfi  means  at  first,  as  opposed 
to  afterwards,  giving  prominence  merely  to  the  diiference  of  time : 

■         hoc  primnni  senlio,  this  /  hold  in  the  first  place. 
aedEs  prlmo  mere  rebamur,  at  first  we  thought  the  house  ■was  falling. 
In  enumerations,  primum  (or  prImO)  is  often  followed  by  deinde, 
secondly,  in  the  next  place,  or  by  turn,  then,  or  by  both  in  succession. 
Delude  may  be  several  limes  repeated  {secondly,  thirdly,  etc.).    The 
series  is  often  closed  by  dSniqne  or  pOHtrBmS,  lastly,  finally.   Thus, — 
^_  primiun  de    genete   belli,    dainde   de   magnitudine,   turn   de   impecataie 

^L  deligendo  (Mnnil.  2),  first  of  the  kind  of  war,  next  of  its  magnitude,, 

^H  iien  of  the  choice  of  a  commander. 

^V        e.  Quldem,   indeed,   gives   emphasis,    and   often   has   a  concesswV' 
'  meaning,  especially  when  followed  by  Bed,  autem.  etc. :  as,  — 

hoc  quidem  vid ere  licet  (Lad.  15),  this  surely  one  may  see.   [Emphalic] 
(seciiritas)  specie  quidem  blanda,  sed  reapse  inullis  locis  repudianda  (idt 

113),  {tranquitUCy')  in  appearaiu/,  'tis  true,  allractitie,  biilin  reality  tv 
be  rejected  for  many  reasons.   [Concessive.] 
NS  .  .  .  quidem  means  not  even  or  not  .  .  .  either.     The  emphatic 
word  or  words  must  stand  between  uB  and  quidem. 
senexQe  quod  speret  quidem  habet  (C.  M.  19),  an  old  man  has  tior  aay-i 
thing  to  hope  for  F.VE(^.  ' 

sed  ne  lugurlha  quidem  quietus  eral  (Jug.  51),  but  Jagurtha  was  aotqid^\ 


II. -PREPOSITIONS. 
162.   Preposition.';^  are  regularly  used  either  with  the 
I  Accusative  or  with  the  Ablative. 


Prepositions  are  not  originally  diEtinguished  from  Adverbs  in  form  or  meaning, 
but  only  specialized  in  use.  Moil  □[them  aic  mie  case-forms;  as.  the  comparative 
lis  contra,  infra,  suprS.  and  the  accusatives  (c£  {  88.  d)  clrcum. 
coram,  cum,  clrciter,  praeter  (comp.  ofprtie),  propter  (comp.  of  prope). 
Of  Ihe  remainder,  versus  is  n  pelrified  nominative  (participle  of  vertO\-, 
adversua  is  a  compound  of  veraUB ;  while  the  origin  rf  ftve  ^itwi  tocma.  «2q. 
All,  lis.  ex,  oil.  (rSna,  is  obscure  ,tnd  doublfu\. 


128 


Etymology :  Pariicles, 


.  The  following  are  used  with  the  Accusative :  — 


r 

^H     ad,  to.  extrS,  oiUside. 

^H  advemus,  againsl.  in,  into. 
^H  adveraum,  towards.  Infra,  below. 
^H      ante,  before.  inter,  among. 

^V      apud,  al,  near.  intra,  inside. 

circa,  around,  luztS,  near. 

oiroum,  around.  ob,  en  account  of. 

oiroiter,  about.  penee,  in  the  povjt 

IoiB,  oitiS,  this  side,    per,  through. 
contra,  against.  pSne,  behind. 

ergS,  itnvards. 
b-  The  following  are  use 
a,  Sb,  abB,  away  from,  by. 
absque,  without,  but  for. 
cSram,  in  presence  of. 


[S§  152.  id 


praeter,  beyond. 

propter,  on  account  of. 
Becandum,  next  to. 
Bnb,  under. 
BuprS,  above. 

altrS,  on  the  further  sidt.  I 
versoa,  towards. 


i  with  the  Ablative '; 


as.froi 


'.of 


pra.e,  in  comparison 
pr5,  in  front  of,  for. 
Bine,  without. 
flub,  under, 
tenuB,  up  to,  as  far 


e.  The   following  may  be  used  with  either  t!ie  Accusative   c 
Ablative,  but  with  a  difference  in  meaning:  — 
In,  into,  in.  aab,  under. 

Bnbter,  beneath.     Buper,  aboiie. 
In  and  enb,  when  followed  by  the  accusative,  indicate  luotien  lo, 
when  by  the  ablative,  rest  in,  a  place :  as,  — 

venit  in  aedea,  he  came  into  the  house  ;  erat  in  aedibus,  he  was  in  the  house. 
disciplina  in  BritBiiniS  reperta  alquc  inde  in  Galliun  Ironslata  esse  existi- 
matur,  the  system  is  tAuught  to  have  been  diseovered  in  Great  Britain 
and  thence  brought  over  to  Gaul. 
sab  iliee  consederat,  he  had  sealed  himself  under  an  ilex. 
sub  leges  mittere  oibcm,  to  subject  the  world  to  laws  (tn  send  the  wurUl 
under  laws). 

153.   The  uses  of  the  Prepositions  are  as  follows  :  — 
A,  ab,  AWAY  FROM,'  FROM,  OFF  FROM,  With  the  ablative. 

«.  or  place :  as,  ab  aibe  profectus  est,  he  set  oat  from  the  city. 

b.    Of  tune  (l) /-Dm-  as,  ab  hora  tertia  ad  vesperiun._/^tfHj  i(;  rfiri/ianr /i// 
CT/eiiiiig;  {2)  Just  after.-  as,  ab  eS  magistratii,  a/fer  [holding]  Ihiit 


LI 


For  polam,  etc,  see  (  s6i.  i,  e. 
.Ab  signifies  direction  from  the  object,  b 
'v/f-nm,  and  ex,  ant  of. 


n  tataardi  the  speaker;  com- 


I 


Prepositions.  129  I 

malic  ases;  a  reliqais  difFeruiit,  Uity  differ  from  Ikt  olhtrs;  ab  parvulis, 
frem  early  <hildhs<id :  pcope  ab  urbe,  Bi-af  (not  fat  from)  &e  city, 
libeiare  ab,  to  set  frie  from ;  qccIsus  ab  hoste  (periit  ab  hoste),  slair, 
by  an  enemy;  ab  hac  pacle,  ch  t!iis  side  ;  nb  le  eius,  A>  Ais  odvanlagi , 
a  repnblica.y^/'  the  interest  of  the  state. 
td,  TO.  TOWARDS,  AT,  NEAR,  with  the  accusative  (cf.  in,  into). 
a.  or  place;  ^s,tAia\x.'aiyixiV.,he  catiii  Is  the  city  ;  ad  meridiem,  Aiwun/i- rji 
south ;  ad  exercitum,  with  the  army ;  ad  hostem,  toward  the  enemy , 
ad  orbem,  near  the  city, 
h.  Of  time:  o!,,  aAnaaamhatam,  till tkt  ninth  himr. 
c.  With  pecaons :  aa,  ad  eum  venit,  he  came  to  hint. 

Idiomatic   uses:    ad   supplicia    descendunl,   they    resort  la  punishment;    ad 
haec  respondit,  to  tkit  he  answered;  ad  tempua,  at  the  [fit]  time;  adiro 
ad  rcmpublicam,  to  g»  into  public  life;  ad   petendam  pacem,  to  si 
peace;  ad  latera,  on  theflank;  ad  arma,  to  arms;  ad  tunc  modum, 
this  way;  quera  ad  modum,  hom,  as;  ad  centum,  near  a  hundred;  ad 
hoc,  besides;  omnes  ad  unum,  all  to  a  man  ;  ad  diem,  on  the  day. 
Anta,  IN  FRONT  OF,  BEFORE,  With  the  accusative  (cf.  post,  after). 
.  Ofplace:  z,%^xAk '^Qx\^xa,in  front  of  the  gate  ;  ante  exercitum,  ik  ffiA'a/i 
efthe  army, 
_      i.  Of  time :  as,  ante  bellum,  before  the  :var. 

^^tUomatic  aseE:  ante  urbem  captain,  before  the  city  was  taken;   aiite  die 
^K  quiatum  (a.d.v.)  Kal.,  the  fifth  dny  before  the  Calends  (tbc  3d   daf 

^H  before  the  last  of  the  mcnth) ;  ante  quadriennium./aHr  years  before  a 

^^r  ago;  ante  tempus,  too  soon  (before  the  time). 

1^^    Apnd,  AT,  BY,  AMONG,  with  the  accusative. 

a.  Of  place  (rare  and  archaic)  :  as,  npud  forum,  at  the  forum  (in  the  marlset 

^^A  With  reference  to  persons  or  communities;  as,  apud  Helvetios,  among  tk. 

^^^L  Helvetians ;  apud  populum,  before  the  people;  apud  aliquem,  at  onf. 

^^B  house;  apud  se,  at  home  or  i»  his  senses ;   apud  Oceronem,  in  [ihi 

^^H  works  of]  Cicero. 

^^  Ciroum,'  clroS,  ciroiter,  ABOUT,  AROUND,  with  the  accusative. 

a.   Ofplace:  circumhaecloca,  fo/vaiflu/,- clrcase  habent,  Mfy^awjim'^iifw/. 

*.  Of  time  or  number  (circa  or  circitcr,  not  circum)  :  as,  circa  eandem  hocam, 

about  the  same  hour  ;  circiter  pasEus  mille,  about  a  mile.    Especially  about, 

in  regard  to;  circa  quem  pugnaest  (Quintil.),  with  regard  to  -wham,  etc. 

Contra.'  OPH>SlTE,  AGAINST,  with  the  accusative :  as, — 

contra  Italiam,  over  against  Italy;  contra  haec,  in  anSTC'er  to  thil. 

Often  as  adverb:  as,  haec  connS,  this  in  reply;  contra  autem,  but  on  the 
Btker  hand ;  quod  contra,  -whereas,  on  the  other  hand. 


J  Olroum  is  an  accusative  form  :  circft,  Is  inslruroental;  otetttt«T,  aKcaiaSn*  J 
cf  a  eompamrive.    For  ihe  slem,  cf.  clroua. 
{»Ctmtra  Is  insinimental  comparative  of  Cum  toon-"). 


130  E'ymology:  Particles.  \%  153. 

Ciiin,  wtTR,  TOGETHER  WITH,  with  the  ablative.  ^| 

a.   Of  place;  as,  vade  meciun,^!™*  km,-  coin  onmibBs  irapedimenlis,  wi^B 
all  [their]  baggagf.  • 

h.    Ofliinc;  as,  prima  cnm  luce,  a/ *ar^  fl^™™  (with  fiisl  light). 
Idiomatic  nscs :  magno  euro  dtilore,  mrf  grtat  sorrow ,-  coromnnicSre  aliquid 
cam  aliquo,  short  somrthitig  with  some  am ;  cmn  malo  Buo,  ia  his  earn 
hurt;  confligetecum  hoae,  i»_^,pS/imM  Ike  en/my;  esse  cum  telo, /o 
gt  armed;  com  rilentio,  in  silencr. 
Di,  DOWN  FROM,  FROM,  with  the  ablative  (cf.  a'b,  a'way  from ;  ez, 

a.  Of  place:  as,  de  caelo  demissus,  sent  dinan  frem  heaven;    di   nivibus 

deailire,  la  jump  down  from  the  ships. 

b.  Figuratively,  coKCEiUJiNa,  about,  of;'  as,  cognoscit  de  Oodi  caede,  he 

learns  of  the  murder  ofClodius;  consitia  de  bello, /^ni  efioar. 

c.  la  a  partitive  sense  (compare  ez),  ou/^  0^'  as,aDasdeplebe,  ime  of  the  people. 
Idiomatic  uses :  tnultii  de  cauEiB,^r  many  reasons ;  qim  de  caiisa,^r  which 

reason;    de  improviso,  of  a  sudden;   de  indostria,  oh  purpose;   de 
integro,  anew;  de  Eertia  vigilia,yivi^  a/  midaighf  (starting  at  the  third 
watch);  de  mease  Decembn  nivigare,  to  sail  as  early  as  December, 
Ex,  S,  FROM  (the  midst,  opposed  to  in),  out  of,  with  the  ablative 
(cf.  abanddfi). 

a.  Of  place :  as,  ex  omnibus  parlibus  silvae  evolaverunt,  they  Jtevi  out  from 

all  parts  ef  the  forest ;  ex  Hispania,  [a  man]  y^-o/n  Spain. 

b.  Of  time:  as,  ex  eo  die  qaintos,  the  fifth  day  from  that  (four  days  after); 

e»  hoc  die,  from  this  day  forth. 

Idiomatically  or  less  exactly:  ex  consulatii,  right  after  his  consulship;  ex  cius 

Bcutentia,  according  to  his  opinion;  ex  atqao,  justly ;  ex  improvTso, 

unexpectedly ;  ex  tua  re,  to  your  advantage;  magna  ex  parte,  in  a  great 

degree;  ex  equo  pugniire,  to fykt  on  horsdack;   ei  iisn,  expedient; 

e  tegione,  opposite  ;  quaerere  ex  aliquo,  to  ask  of  some  one;  ex  senatna 

cotisallo,  according  to  the  decree   of  the  senate;  ex  fuga,  in  ftheit] 

fiight  (proceeding  immediately  from  it) ;  unus  e  filiis,  one  of  the  sons. 

In,  with  the  accusative  or  the  ablative.  _ 

I.  With  the  accusative,  into  (opi'osed  to  «z).  ^1 

a.  Of  place:  as,  easm  siivas  K\tixxiio.t,  tbiy  drove  them  back  into  the  waodt..^^ 

b.  Of  time,  TILL,  (tntil:  as,  inlucem,  ftV/i/ocAir^.  ^% 
Idiomatically  or  less  exactly:    in  meridiem,  towards  the  south;    amor  in 

(ergi  or  adversus)  patrem,  love  for  his  father ;  in  iram  confugit,  he 
ficdia  the  altar  (on  the  steps,  or  merely  /o);  in  diea.yVoin  day  to  day  ; 
in  longitudinem,  in  length;  in  haec  verba  iurare,  to  smear  to  these 
■words;  banc  in  modum,  in  this  way;  oratio  in  Catillnam,  a  speech 
against  Catiline;  in  perpetuum,  far  ever;  in  peias,  for  Ike  worse; 
in  diem  vivere,  to  live  from  hand  to  mouth, 

cyoiiglaally  bad  Ihe  same  meaning  as  dB  (oom^iai':  ofTi- 


■3.]  Prepositions. 

.  With  the  ablative,  in,  on,  among. 


Ini 


:ryvar 


n  the  a 


■p  (cf,  ad  ci 


n  doabt. 


im,  by  the  ua  6elir.ii  the  h 


near  Ike  camp');  in  man,  en  the  sea;  in  urbe  c! 

tempore,  in  leasan  ;  ii 

I  have  it  in  mind;  in 

of  this  man;  In  dubio 

Infra,  BELOW,  with  the 

r.  or  place:  aa,  ad  maj'e  ii 

caelum,  under  Ike  sky. 
.    b.  Figurativelyj  as,  infra  Homerum,  later  than  Homer;  infra  trea  peiiia,  lest 

than  three  feet :  \a^^  As^xn.^,  smaller  than  aiefhanis ;  infra  infimn. 

omnes,  the  loviesl  of  the  low. 
later,  between  (with  two  accusatives),  among;  as, — 

tm  et  ^a'plonem,  between  myself  and  Stipie ;  inter  09  et  a^T^m,  between 

the  cup  and  the  lip  (the  mouth  and  the  morsel);  inter  hostium  lila, 

amid  Iht  weapons  of  the  enemy  ;  inter  omnes  primus,  jlrj/ a/"  n//,-  inter 

bibendum,  while  drinking;  inlet  si  loqauntur,  they  tali  together; 

inter  nos,  between  ourselves. 
Ob,  TOWARDS,  ON  ACCOUNT  OF.  with  the  accusative, 

a.  Literally:  (r)  of  motion  (ircliilc) :  as,  obEomaiji,/(ra«flri4  J('»i*(EnQiu»)( 

obviam, /a  rffrofli/ (preserved  aa  adverb,  in  the  way  of),  (z)  Of  place 
in  which,  before,  in  a  few  phrases :  as,  ob  oculos,  before  the  eyes. 

b.  Figuratively,  IN  retijeN  fok  (mosLly  archaic,  probably  a  word  of  account, 

balancing  one  thing  against  another)  !  as,  ob  mulierem,  in  pay  for  the 
woman;  oh  tern,  for  gain.  Hence  applied  to  reason,  cause,  and  Ihe 
like,  ON  ACCOUNT  OF  (a  similar  mercantile  idea),  for:  as,  ob  earn 
cau3am,_^r  that  reason  ;  quam  ob  rem  (quamobrem),  wherefore,  -why. 

or,  THROUGH,  OVER,  With  the  accusative. 

f  molion:  as,  per  urbem  ire,  to  go  through  the  city;  per  muros,  over  tht, 

\  h,  Oftiioe:  aj^frViemsTa,  throughout  the  winter. 

-.  Figuratively,  of  persons  as  means  or  instruments :  as,  per  homines  idoneos, 
through  the  instrumentality  of  suitable  persons  ;  licet  per  me,  j'ou  (etc.) 
may  for  all  me.     Hence,  slat  per  me,  it  is  through  my  instrumentality. 
So,  per  se,  in  and  of  itself. 
I  d.  Weakened,  in  many  adverbial  expressions:    as,  per  locum,  in  jest;  per 
specie m,  j'n  show,  ostentatiously. 
Prae,  in  front  of,  with  the  ablative. 
I  a.  Liletally,  of  place  (in  a  few  conncctionG)  :  as,  prae  se  portire,  to  earry  in 
en/s  arms;  prae  se  fcrre,  to  earry  before  one  (hence  figuratively),  e.i:- 
kibit,  proclaim,  ostentatiously  make  known. 
I  b,  Rgurativelj-,  of  hindrance,  as  hy  an  ol)stac\c  w  ?toiv\.  t^>: 
/er):  as,  frae  fiaudiJ  conticuil,  hetoas  silent  for  joy. 


1 


4 


^ 


I 


132  Etymology:  Particles.  [§ 

,  or  comparison:  as,  prac  magnkudhic  corpoium  suorum,  fVi  i ffin/ariVDR 
iktir  awn  griat  siii. 
'Sta.tittsx,  ALONG  BY,  BY,  With  the  accusative, 
t.  Literally:  as,  praetet  castra,  by  tht  camp  (along  by,  !□  front  of);  praetei 
ocalos,  before  the  eyes. 

.  Figuratively,  BEYOND,  BESIDES,  MORE  THAN,  IN  At)Dmo«  TO,  EXCEPT:  »B, 
praeter  spem,  beyond  liepe;  praeter  alios,  mare  than  olhers;  praetei 
paucos,  viith  the  ixeeplien  efafew, 

Pr5.  IN  FRONT  OF,  wjth  the  ablative ;  as,  — 
Beden*  pro  aede  Castoris,  silting  in  front  of  Ihe  temple  of  Castor;  pro  populo, 

in  presence  of  the  people.     So  pro  roatris,  oh  [(he  front  of]  the  rostra  : 

pro  contione,  before  the  assembly  (in  a  speecb). 
1  vsnoos  idiomatic  uses:  pro  l^e,  in  defence  oflhelaia;  pro  vitula,  instead 

1^  a  heifer;    pro  centum  milibus,  as  good  as  a  [hundred]  ttiousand; 

pro  rata  parte,  in  due  proportion;    pro  hac  \k£,forlhis  once;  pro 

conaule,  in  ptact  of  consut ;  ^to  virAias,  considering  Ais  strength ;  pro 

virili  parte,  lo  Ihe  best  of  one's  ability. 
Propter,  near,  by,  with  the  accusative : 

propter  le  sedel,  *ir  jj/r  next  you.  Hence,  ON  ACCOITHT  OF  (ef.  alt  along  ef)\ 
as,  propter  melum,  Uiroughfear. 

BecundllIIl,>  JUST  BEHIND,  FOLLOWING,  With  the 
J.  Lileially :   as,  ite  secundum  ine  (Plant.),  go  behind  me;  secundum 
near  Ihe  shore ;  secundum  flumen,  along  Ihe  stream  (cf.  secundo  ilui 
dswn  slreara), 
2.  Figuratively,  ACCORDING  to:  aa,seaixii\imsia)^t^ra,  according  to  nalt 
Sub,  UNDER,  UP  TO,  with  the  accusative  or  the  ablative. 

a.  Of  motion,  with  the  accusative :  as,  sub  monteni  succedere,  to  come  close  te 

the  hilt. 
Idiomatically;  sub  noctem,  towards  night;   sub  luccro,  near  daylight;  sub 
haec  (iicta,  lU  (following]  these  words. 

b.  Of  rest,  with  Ihe  ablative :  as,  sub  love,  in  Ihe  open  air  (under  Ihe  heavi 

personiRed  as  Jove);  sub  monte,  at  the  fool  of  Ihe  hill. 
Idiomatically:  sub  eodem  tempore,  about  Ihe  some  time  (just  after  it) 
Snpei,"  ABOVE,  OVER,  with  the  accusative  or  ablative :  as,  — 
Tolnus  super  vulnos,  tpound  upon  mound ;  sa^ilaAos,  beyond  the  IHndoot, 
super  tali  re,  about  such  an  affair. 
SaprS,*  ON  TOP  OF,  above,  with  the 

n,  on  the  surface  efihe  earth.  So  also  figuratively ;  as,  supra  banc 
loriam,  before  our  remembrance;  supra  morem,  more  than  usual; 
a  quod,  besides. 

"  Comp.  of  sub.        •  lnstrimieota\  oi  aw,-parMa,  (,  qi,  fcj 


ub 

4 


153.  154.]  CimjuHctioiis.  133  J 


TiEiui,>  ACROSS,  OVER,  THROUGH,  BV,  with  the  ai 

Of  motion;  as,  trans  tnare  cuirunt,  Ihiy  run 

ferce,  to  carry  evtr  a  river;    trana  aelhera,  ihrgugh  Ike  sky:    tiim  1 

caput  iace,  ihrvai  micryeur  head. 
Of  rest:    as,   trans  Rhenum  incolont,  Ikty  live 

Tiberlm,  ncrass  tie  Tiber. 
'ai1a:4,  BEYOND  (on  the  further  side),  with  the  ai 
^  Padum  Sltraque,  Bit  Ikis  side  a/lhe  Po  and  beyond;  ultra  ei 

viBrc  than  that  namher ;  ullta  ildeni,  incredible;  ultra  moduB 

aioderate. 

[For  Prepositions  in  Compounds,  see  j  170.I 

Ill.-CONJUNCTIONS. 
164.  Conjunctions  connect  words,  phrases,  or  sentences.! 
They  are  of  two  classes  ;  — 

a.  Co-ordinate,   connecting   conirdinate   or  similar  c 
eeSiSo.a).    Theseare:  — 

1.  Copulative,  implying  a  connection  of  thought  as  well  as  of  words;   I 

aa,  et,  and. 

2.  Adversative,  implying  a  connection  of  words,  but  a  contrast  t 

thought:  as,  Bed,  611/. 

3.  Causal,  introducing  3.  cause  or  reason :  as,  nam.  /br. 

4.  Illative,  denoting  aa  inference :  as,  Igitur,  therefore. 

b.  Subordinate,    connecting  a   subordinate   or  dependent   clause 
ih  that  on  which  it  depends  (see  §180.  b).    Theseare:  — 

1.  Conditional,  tlenoting  a  condition  or  hypothesis :  as,  si,  ifi  nial, 

a.  Comparative,  implying  compari.'ion  as  well  as  condition :  as,  ao 

"'■"/■ 

3.  Concessive,  denoting  a  concession  or  admission ;  as,  quamquam, 

atihough  (lit.  however  much  it  may  be  true  that,  etc.). 

4.  Temporal !  as,  postquam,  after. 

5.  Consecutive,  expressing  result :  as,  ut,  so  that. 

6.  Final,  expressing  purpose ;  as,  Bt,  in  order  thai;  nS,  thai  not. 

Note  t.  —  Conjunclions,  liha  adverbs,  arc  eilher  petrified  cases  of  nouns,  pro- 
nouns, and  adjectives,  or  obscured  phrases:  as,  aed.an  old  ablative  (c£,TSd,pr6d) : 
quod.an  old  accusative;  dum,  an  old  accusative  (cf.  turn,  cum) ;  TSrfl,» 
nblaiive  of  vBruB;  nihilSmlntie,  Bflne  Me /eji.-  ■pToinAa.Wt.firwardJrom 

Note  a.  — a  phrase  used  as  a  conjunction  is  caUed  ^  conpmctive phrasi 
quA  i)TO[)ter.  quS  clrc&,  whtrcfore. 


Etymology :  Particles. 


[s 

165.   Conjunctions  are  more  numerous  and  more  accu- 
rately distinguished  in  Latin  than  in  English.     The  follow- 
ing list  includes  the  common  conjunctions^  and  conjunc«J 
live  phrases :  — 

1.  Co-otdinate. 
a.  Copulative  and  DisjuNcirvE. 
et,  -que,  atque  (ao),  and. 
et .    ,  et ;  et .  .  .  -que  (atque) ;  -que  .  .  .  et ;   -que  . 


etiam.,  Quoque,  neque  n 


),  quloeti; 


-que  (poet.), 
u,  itidem  (Itemjjfl 
"//k  .  .  .  but  aha-  , 


I 


qua  .  .  .  qu£,  on  oh 

modo  ,  .  .  modo,  tiow  .  .  .  nc. 

sive  (sen)  .  .  .  slve,  -whether  , 

HBc  (neque)  .  .  .  neo   (neque)  ;    neque  .  .  .  i 

(rare),  neither  .  -  .  /mr. 
et .  .  .  neque,  &ol&  .  .  .  and  not. 
nee  .  .  .  et :  nee  (neque)  .  .  .  -que.  neither . 

b.  Adversative. 
aed,  autem,  vfirum,  v§rS,  at,  atqul,  but. 

tamen,  attamen,  sed  tamen,  -vSrumtainen,  but  yet,  nevertheless. 
nihilSmtuus,  none  the  less. 
at  v5r6,  but  in  truth;  eniniTSro, yir  in  truth. 
cSterum,  on  the  other  hand,  but. 

c.  Causal  anu  Illative. 
nam,  namque,  enim,  etonim,  _/»>■. 
quia,  quod,  because. 
quouiam,  quippe,  oum  (quom,  quum),  quandS,  quaudSquldem, 

elquidem,  utpote,  since,  inasmuch  as. 
proptereS  (,  .  ,  q;ao&),  for  /his  reason  (.  .  .  thai). 
quSpropter,  qu3r6,  quamobrem.  quScirca,  unde,  ■where/ore,  whence. 
ergS,  igitur,  itaque,  ideo,  idcirco,  proinde,  therefore,  accordin^y. 


Note,  — Of  ihese  quia,  quod,  quouiam,  quippe,  ci 
ntmduce  subordinate  cinuses.  As  dU  subordinate  clauses 
-om  douses  once  co-ordinale  (p.  i&fl,the  diaiinciioti  belwee 
iuns  and  subordinale  la  often  obscure. 


1,  Blqufdem,  often 
ve  been  developed 


teotthess  have  been  included  in  the  classification  of  adverbs.    See  alio 


■^ 


Conjunctions, 


I 

I 


quidem.  to  be  sure,  it  is  Iriie. 

2.    Subordinate. 

e.  Conditional. 
al,  if;  Bin,  but  if;  nial  (nlj.  unless,  if  not',  quod  si,  but  if. 
modo,  dum,  dununodo,  si  modo,  if  only,  provided. 
dmamodo  n8  (dum  nS,  modo  n%),  prmnded only  not. 

f.  Comparative. 
at.  uti.  sicut,  velut,  prout,  praeut,  ceu,  as,  like  as, 
tajnquam  (tanquam),  quasi,  ntal,  ac  si,  velut,  velutl,  velntal,  asif..  I 
quam,  atque  (ac),  as,  than. 

g.  Concessive. 
n«tBl,  etiamsT,   tametsT,   tamGnetsI,   quamquam  (quanquatn),  ai-% 
though. 
quamvla,  quantumvls,  quamllbet,  htrwever  much. 
licet  (properly  a  verb),  ut,  cum  (quom,  quum),  though,  suppose, 
whereas. 

k.  Temporal. 
cum  (quom,  quum),  cum  primum,  abi,  ut  primum,  pDntqaam 

(poateSquam),  ttihen. 
piluB  .  .  ,  quam,  ante  .  .  .  quam,  before  f  nGn  ante  .  .  .  quam,  not 

quaadfi,  aimul  atque  (simut  it),  simul,  as  soon  as. 
dum,  nsqae  duni,  dCnec,  quoad,  nnlil. 

t.  CoNSECUTrvE  AND  Final. 
nt  (uti),  quO,  so  that,  in  order  that. 

ue,  ut  nB,  lest  {that . . .  not,  in  order  that  not);  nSve  (neu),  nor. 
qaln  (after  negatives),  quOmiuaa,  but  that  (so  as  to  prevent) , 

156.  The  following  are  the  principal  conjunctions  whose 
meaning  requires  to  be  noticed  :  — 

a.  Bt,  and,  simply  connects  words  or  clauses ;  -que  combines  more 
closely  into  one  connected  whole,  -que  is  always  enclitic  to  the  word  con- 
nected or  to  the  first  or  second  of  two  or  more  words  connected.    Thus, 

euin  eoniugibua  et  liberiB,  wilk  [their]  wivis  and  children. 

ferto  igniqoe,  tu/fti  fire  and  snaord.  [Not  as  separate  things,  but  as  the 
combined  means  of  devastation.] 

•qua  el  ign!  interdictia,  farbidden  Ae  uu  ofwattr  and  )ir(.  ^■ft».\e!^ 
fomittla,  wbete  tbey  are  considered  sepwalcY^.'i 


136 


Etymology :  Patiicles. 


[51 


Atqae  (ac)  adds  widi  some  emphasis  or  with  some  implied  re- 
flection on  the  word  added.  Hence  it  is  often  equivalent  to  and 
so,  and  yet,  and  besides,  and  Ihen.  But  these  distinctions  depend 
very  much  upon  the  feeling  of  the  speaker,  and  are  often  untrans- 
latabie:  as,— 

omnia  boncsta  atque  inhonesta,  evtryiiing  honorable  and  dishenorailt 
(too,  witliout  the  slightest  distinction). 

iisus  alque  disciplina,  pracHci  and  theory  beside  (the  more  important  or  less 
expected). 

atqne  ego  credo,  and yil  I  believe  (for  my  part). 

In  the  second  of  two  connected  ideas,  and  not  is  expressed  by 
usque  (nee)  ;  as, — 

neque  vero  hoc  solum  dixit,  and  he  not  only  said  lAis, 

Atqne  (So),  in  the  sense  of  as.  than,  is  also  used  after  wards 
of  comparison  and  likeness :  as,  — 


B  (aliter)  i 


IS  my  duly  (in  ac 

isyau. 

ciuni,  they  do  jus 


../ 


■jlky. 


ought), 
aequi  ac  tu,  «  . 

simul  atque,  as . 

b.  Bed  and  the  more  emphatic  vStum  or  TSt5,  but,  are  used  to 
introduce  something  in  opposition  to  what  precedes,  especially  after 
negatives  (not  this  .  .  .  but  something  else).  At  introduces  with  em- 
phasis a  new  point  in  an  argument,  but  is  also  used  like  the  others. 

At  enlm  is  almost  always  used  to  introduce  a  supposed  objection 
which  is  presently  to  be  overthrown.  At  is  more  rarely  used  alone  in 
this  sense.  Autem,  however,  now,  is  the  weakest  of  the  adversatives, 
and  often  has  hardly  any  adversative  force  perceptible.  AtquI, 
hmutver,  now,  sometimes  introduces  an  objection  and  sometimes  a 
fresh  step  in  the  reasoning.  Quod  bI,  but  if.  and  if,  now  if,  is 
used  to  continue  an  argtmient.  Ast  is  old  or  poetic  and  is  equivalent 
to  at. 

:oncessive  is  often  follou'ed  by  an  adversative  either  in  a  co- 
ibordinate  clause:  as,  etlamal  quoil  acrlbfts  nCn  taabeble, 
n  (Cic.) ,  thangh  yoK  have  nolhiitg  to  wrile,  siOI  vritt  all  lie  same. 


NOTE.— 
ordinate  or 
Bcrltiitfi  ts 


c.  Aut,  or.  excludes  the  alternative;  vel  (probably  imperative  of 
vol6)  and  -ve  give  a  choice  between  two  alternatives.  But  this  dis- 
tinction is  sometimes  disregarded.     Thus,  — 

led  quii  ego  sum  ant  quae  est  in  ine  facullas,  iiU  u/io  am  I  er  what  special 
eafiatily  have  I?     [Mere  vel  could  not  be  used,  because  in  fact  a  neg- 
IS  implietl  and  liolh  allernalives  ate  eiic\u4ta^. 


I 

I 


ant  nulla  potiiu  vilcluilinc.  -aikal  ftchlc  health  [be  had],  orB 

raiatr  noni  al  ail.     [Here  vd  aiiglit  be  used,  but  would  refer  o  ' 

(he  expression,  nol  lo  Ihc  foci], 
ant  hibat  ant  abeat,  iti  iim  drini  or  (^if  lie  won't  do  that,  then  let  him)J 

jhH.     [Here  vel  would  mean,  let  him  du  either  aa  he  chooses], 
viu  talis  fuit  vel  forluni  vel  glortS,  /<i.(  /i/e  was  such  lilher  in  rtsptct  i 

forlHHt  or  fatal  (vhicbever  W»y  yuii  Ijok  at  it). 
SI  propinquoB  habeant  inbedlUoiit  vel  animo  vel  fortun^  ifihty  have  re, 

stives  beneath  &tm  ritktr  in  spirit  or  in  forlune  (in  either  respec 

for  example), 
cum  cogniti  sunt  at  m4  d«»a«  ant  regum  filii  inventi,  sons  rilher  of  gads  J 

or  of  kings.     [Hw*  OBt  oue  would  exclude  the  other.] 
implicttti    tbI   iJNl   ^Intna   Tel    etiam    ofEciis,  entangled   eitlicr  by  close,  I 

intimacy  or  eve»  iy  tUtg»tians.    [HerB  the  second  case  might  exclude   I 

the  first.] 

Sire  (oeu)  is  properly  used  in  disjunctive  conditions  {if  either  . 
if),  but  also  with  alternative  words  and  clauses,  especially  with  tt 
rnies  for  the  same  thing ;  a.s, — 
idve  arridens  Mve  quod  ita  putaret  (Dc  Or.  i.  20,  91),  either  laughingly  or 
because  he  really  thought  so. 

Vel,  even,  for  instance,  is  often  used  with  no  alternative  force;  as, — 

vel  minimus,  the  very  least. 

d.  Nam  and  najiique,^r,  usually  introduce  a  real  reason,  formally 
CJtpressed,  for  a  previous  statement;  enlm  (always  postpositive),  a 
nportant  explanatory  circumstance  put  in  by  the  way;  etenlm 
you  s£e ;  for,  you  know,  for,  mind yoii)  and  its  negative  neqae 
inim  introduce  something  selfevident  or  needing  no  proof. 

(en  vita)  quae  est  sola  vita  nominanda.  nam  dum  sutnus  in  his  incliisi 
comp^bus  corporis  munere  quodam  necessitatis  et  gcavi  opere  per- 
fungimur.    est  enim  animus  caelestts,  etc.  (Cat.  Maj.  21). 

hartun  trium  sententiarum  null!  prorsus  assentior.  nee  enim  ilia  prima 
vera  est,  for  of  course  that  first  one  isn't  true. 

I.  Brg3,  tlurefore,  is  used  of  things  proved  formally,  but  often  has 

5  weakened  force.    Igitux,  then,  accordin^y,  is  weaker  than  ergfi  and 

3  used  in  passing  from  one  stage  of  an  argument  to  another.    Itaque, 

trefore,  accordingly,  and  so,  is  used  in  proofs  or  inferences  from  the 

■iture  of  things  rather  than  in  formal  logical  proof. 

All  of  these  are   often  used  merely  to  resume  a  train  of  thought 
token  by  a  digression  or  parenthesis.    IdciicS,  far  this  r 
is  accauni,  is  regularly  followed  (or  preceded)  by  a  correlative :  a 

I,  quod,  tl,  ut,  nh,  and  refers  to  the  special  ^voX  \tiaad»):je&.Vj.J 
e  correlative. 


(J' 


138  Etymology:  Partklfs.  [1 

neaegri  qaidem  quianon  omnei  coiiviileacQat,ldoiro3anDalta  mediciaaE  est. 

primum  igitnr  aut  negaiidum  est  ei5e  deoE ...  nut  qui  deo9  esse  con- 
cedaDt  eis  fatcndum  est  c5s  altquid  ^ere  idque  praEciirumi  nihil 
est  autem  praeclarius  mundi  siIliiiinBtTilioiie,  deucum  igitnr  cgnsilio 
administiitur.  quod  si  alitor  c^t,  aliqnid  profecto  sit  necesse  est 
melius  et  moiurs  vi  praeditum  qMin  deut.  .  . .  non  est  igitnr  nalura 
deoram  praepotens  nequc  enccHSli^  &  qaidem  ea  subiecia  est  ei  vel 
necessitali  vel  naturae  qaa  caelum  ttuia  teiTui  ragantur,  nihil  est  aulem 
praestanlius  deo,  ab  eo  igitor  munrfum  necene  e^t  regi.  niilli  igitnr 
est  naliirae  obocdiens  aut  aubiectu*  dciu:  omnem  ergo  regit  ipse 
natHcatn.  etenim  si  concedinius  iDttlltf[cnfis  esse  deos,  concedimus 
eliam  providentts  et  rerum  qaidem  maximirain.  ergo  utrum  ignorant 
quae  res  maxamae  sint  quoque  eae  modo  trmctandae  et  tuendae  an 
vim  nqn  habent  qui  tantai  res  sustineanl  et  geranl?  (N.  D.  ii.  30.) 

malum  mihi  videtur  mors,  est  miserum  igitnr,  qnoniam  malum,  ccrtc. 
ergo  et  el  qnibus  evenit  iam  ut  morerentur  et  el  quibus  eventurum  est 
miseri.     mihi  ita  videtur.     nemo  ergo  non  miser.  (Tusc.  i.  5.) 

meministis  enim  cum  itlius  nefaiii  gladiatoris  voces  percrebuissent  quas, 
etc.  — turn  igitnr  (Mur.  15,  50), 

f.  Quia,  because,  regularly  introduces  a.  feet ;  quod,  either  a  feet  or 
2  statement.     Quoniam  (for  quom  iam),  masmuck  as,  si-iue,  ivhen 

u,  now  that,  has  reference  to  motives,  excuses  or  justifications,  and 
the  like.     Quandfi,  since,  is  mostly  archaic  or  late. 

possunt  quia  posse  videntur,  ikey  can  becavse  they  think  tluy  eaa. 
locas  est  a  me  quoniam  ita  Murena,  volnil  retraclandus  (Mur.  26,  54), 

must  review  the  pointy  since  Murena  has  so  wished. 
me  repreheodis  quod  idem  dcfendam  (as  he  had  not)  quod  lege  piinierim 

(Mur.  32,  i>-f),yiiu  blame  me  beeause  Qas  you  say]  /  defend  the  same 

charge  which  I  have  punished  by  the  law. 
leprehendis  me  quia  defendam  (as  he  had)  (Snll.  iS,  50). 
cur  igitnr  pacem  nolo?     quia,  turpis  est  (Phil.  vii.  3,  gj,  lehy  then  do  I  not 

lidsh  for  feaee  f    Because  it  is  disgraceful. 

In  the  denial  of  a  reason,  ndii  qn6  is  used  as  well  as  nCii  quod, 
ii5a  quia,  and  ufia  quiu,  but  not  nSn  quoulam.     Thus, — 

ion  quia  multls  debeo  . . .  sed  quia  sacpe  concurrent  sliquorum  bene  de 

me  meritorum  inter  ipsos  contentiones  (Plane.  32,  7S),  net  because  I  am 

indebted  to  many,  but  because,  etc 
ion.  quin  pari  virlute   et  voluntate  alii  fuerint,  aed  tantam  causam  non 

hnbuerunt  (Phil.  vii.  2,  6),   not  thai  there  were  not  ethers  of  equal 

courage  and  good-will,  but  they  had  not  so  much  reason. 

g.  Com  (quom),  -when,  is  always  a  relative,  and  is  often  correlative 
with  turn  (see  h.  t,  below);  quaudS,  when  (rarely  since),  is  tised  as 

inierrogntive,  relative  and  indefinite;  as,  quaadO?  hodiS,  •aikent  to- 
r'~-  ^IgaaadO,//'mer. 


id 


I 


156.]  Conjunctions ;  Interjections. 

r.  Conjunctions,  especially  those  of  relative  origin,  frequently^ 
a  correiative  in  anotlier  clause,  to  wliich  they  correspond ;  as 
ut  (ementem  leceris,  ita  melis,  aiyou  sow,  so  shall  you  reap. 
oti  inidura,  MC  finis  est,  as  is  Ikt  ifgtMning,  so  is  tie  end. 
turn  cam  Catilinam  eiciebam  (Cat.  iii.  2,  3),  at  the  lime  when,  etc. 

Ofien  the  same  conjuaction  is  repeated  in  two  co-ordinate  clauses^  I 


^H  iam  . . .  lam,  now  . . .  now. 

^B  Blmul , . .  Bimul,  at  once  (this)  and  aha  (that), 

^B  qua  ...  qua,  bulk . . ,  anii,  as  well ...  as,  alike  (tins)  and  (that). 

^F    (.  The  concessives  (etsi,  quamvls,  etc.,  aUheugh')  may  introduce 

^jKther  a  fact  or  a  mere  supposition,  and  are  often  followed  \yj  the  cor- 

I       relative   tamen,  yet,  ttcverlAeless  j  qnamquam   is   regularly   used  to 

introduce  an  admitted  fact  and  not  a  mere  supposition. 
,  Qnamquam   (and  rarely  etal,  tametsi),  in  the  sense    of  though 

I  (and  yet,  but,  however)  are  also  used  to  introduce  an  independent 
statement  made  to  limit  or  correct  the  preceding  {quamquam  corric- 
ttvum) :  as,  — 


nie  volt  dia  vivere,  hie  diu  vixit,  quarnqniuii,  o  di  bant,  quid  est  in  bominii  I 
vitttdiii?  (Cat.  M.  19,  6S),  i/ie  one  wis/ifs  to  lii'e  hag,  the  elier&as  lived  \ 
lang,though  (after  all)  Good  Heavens  I  what  is  there  thai  is  long  in 
lif,.fmanl 


k.  Antom,  enlm,  and  vBrS  are  postpositive,  /.*.  they  always  follov 
one  or  more  words  of  their  clause;    so  generally  igitur  and  often  I 

INTERJECTIONS. 
O,  6n,  ecce,  ehem,  papae,  v5h  {a'i  astonishment). 
io,  §vae,  Svoe,  euhoe  {o^  joy), 
heu.  eheu,  vae,  alas  (of  sorrow). 
heuB,  eho,  ehodum,  ho  (of  calling);  st,  hist. 
§ia.  euge  (of prnise). 
piO  (oi atlestatian):  as,  pr3  pudor,  shamel 


I 


Etymology:  J-'ormaCioH  nf  Words. 


Chapter  VIII. — Formation  of  Words. 

Note, — All  fonnalion  of  words  is  originally  a  process  of  composilio: 
element  significant  in  itself  is  uddeii  lo  another  significant  element,  and  thus  the 
meaning  of  the  two  is  combined.  No  other  combination  is  possible  tor  the  forma- 
lioa  either  of  inflections  or  of  stems.  Thus,  in  fact,  visrds  {since  roots  and  stems 
are  significant  elements,  and  eo  words)  are  first  juxtaposed,  then  brought  under 
one  accent,  and  finally  fell  as  one  word.  This  gradual  process  is  seen  in  ua 
chiast,  sea~nynph,  uosidt.  But  as  al!  derivation,  properly  so-called,  appeara  as  a 
combination  of  uninflecled  stems,  eveiy  type  of  formation  in  use  must  dale  back 
of  inflection.  Hence  words  were  not  in  strictness  derived  either  from  nouns  or  froni 
verbs,  but  from  slums  which  were  neither,  because  they  were  in  feci  both ;  for  the 
distinction  between  noun-  and  yerh-slems  had  not  yet  been  made. 

After  the  development  of  Inflection,  however,  that  one  of  several  kindred  words 
which  seemed  the  simplest  was  regarded  as  the  Primitive  form,  and  from  this  the 
other  words  of  the  group  were  thought  to  be  derived.  Such  supposed  processes  of 
formation  were  then  imitated,  often  erroneously,  and  in  this  way  tiew  model  o/deri- 
valiirn  arose'.  Thus  new  adjectives  were  formed  from  nouns,  new  nouns  from 
adjectives,  new  adjectives  from  verbs,  and  new  verbs  from  adjectives  and  nouns. 

In  course  ol  time  the  real  or  apparent  relations  of  many  words  became  con- 
fused, so  that  nouns  and  adjectives  once  supposed  to  come  from  nouns  were  often 
assigned  to  verbs, and  others  once  supposed  to  come  from  verbs  were  assigned  to 

Further,  since  Uie  language  was  constantly  changing,  many  words  went  out  of 
use,  and  do  not  occur  in  the  literature  as  we  have  it.  Thus  many  derivatives  sur- 
vive of  which  the  Primitive  is  lost. 

Finally,  since  all  consdoui  word-formation  is  imitative,  intermediate  steps  in 
derivation  were  sometitncs  omittet^  and  occasionally  apparent  derivatives  occur 
for  which  no  proper  Primitive  ever  existed. 

I.-ROOTS    AND    STEMS.  ^| 

157.   Roots ^  are  of  two  kinds: —  fl 

1.  Verbal,  expressing  ideas  of  action  or  condition  (sensi- 
ble phenomena). 

3.  Pronomimil,  expressing  ideas  of  position  and  direction. 

Stems  are  divided  into  (i)  Noun-  (including  Adjective-) 
stems,  and  (2)  Verb-stems. 


I  158-60.] 


Primary  Suffixes. 


158.    Words  are  formed  by  inflection  :^ 
.   From  roots  inflected  as  stems  :  — 

.  Without  change :  as,  duc-ia  (dux),  dug  ;  neo-is  (uez)  ;  ia.  Id. 
n  verbs:  as,  eat,  fert,  68t  (cf.  p.  86), 
b.  With  change  of  the  root-vowel:  as,  IQc-la  (lax),  Luc;  pSo-la 
'  (pii).  So  in  verbs :  I-a  for  feiB,  from  cB,  Ire ;  Htur  from  for,  fSrI, 
Note.  —  lo  these  casts  it  is  impossible  to  say  with  cetlainly  whether  Ihe  form 
ot  root  in  aot'm  i  is  the  original  one.    But  for  convenience  the  above  order  ii 

^k        c.  With  reduplication :    as,  fur-fur,  mar-mor,   mur.mur.      So  in 

^nerbs :  as,  sl-eto  (root  sta). 

H    2.  From  derived  stems;  see  §  159. 

W  1 


r  from  otlier  stems 


ll.-SUFFIXES. 

159.  Stems  are  derived  from  roots  c 
by  means  of  suffixes.     Tliese  are  :  — 

1.  Primary:  added  to  the  root,  or  (in  later  times  by  analogy)  to 
verb-atems.  The  root  has  either  the  weaker  or  the  fiiller  vowel  (c£ 
§  ii«. fl.  b). 

2,  Secondary:  added  to  a  noun-  or  adj'ecdve-stem. 

Botti  primary  and  secondary  suffixes  are  for  the  most  part  pronom- 
inal roots  (S  157.  2),  but  a  few  are  of  doubtful  origin. 

NCTTE. —  Tlie  dislinclion  between  primary  and  secondary  suffixes,  nol  being  orig- 
inal (see  p.  140,  head-note),  is  constanliy  lost  sight  of  in  Uie  development  of  a  lati- 
gui^^  Suffixes  DDce  primaiy  are  used  as  secondary,  and  those  once  secondary 
arc  used  as  primary.  Thus  In  hoeticuB  (taoBti  -v  cus)  the  suffix  -cob.  originally 
ka  (see  j  160,  A)  primary,  as  in  paucua,  has  hetorae  secondary,  and  is  thus 
regularly  used  lo  toim  derivatives;  but  in  pudlcuB,  apriCUB,  it  is  treated  as 
primary  again,  because  these  words  were  really  or  apparently  connected  with  verbs. 
So  in  English  -aili  was  borrowed  as  a  primary  suffix,  but  also  make^i  ibrms  like 
tluiiaile,  lalailt:  -some  is  properly  a  secondary  suffix,  as  in  toilsome,  ianesomt, 
bnl  makes  also  such  words  as  meddUsome,  T'en/aresome. 

X.    Primary  Suffices. 

160.  Tlie  words  in  Latin  formed  immediately  from  tlie 
root  by  means  of  Primary  suflSxes,  are  few. 

a.  Inherited  words  so  formed  were  mostly  further  developed  by  the 
addition  of  other  suffixes,  as  wc  might  make  an  adjective  lone-ly-soiiie-ish, 
meaning  nothing  more  than  lone,  lonely,  or  lonesome. 

b.  By  such  accumulation  of  suffixes,  new  compoaivi  sM^i^e^  -«i:s* 
\ed  which  crowded  out  even  the  old  types  of  AerwatTOTi-.  ■&«.=. — 


I 


Mif>nn< 


r 


142  Etymolo^:  Formation  of  Words.  [§  160. 

A  word  like  mCoB,  meiitiB,  by  the  suffix  on-  (nom.  -S)  gave  mentio. 
and  this  being  divided  into  men-f-tiS,  gave  rise  to  a  new  type  of 
abstract  nouns  in  -ti5  (phoni:ticalIy  -st5) :  as,  ICgStlS,  embassy. 

A  word  like  auditor,  by  the  suffix  Jo-  (nom.  -iua),  gave  rise  to 
adjectives  like  andltoiitiB,  of  which  the  neuter  is  used  to  denote  the 
place  where  the  action  of  the  verb  is  performed.     Hence  torlo-  (1 
-tOrlnm),  m.,  becomes  a  regular  suffix  (%  164.  i.  ;). 

So  in  English  such  a  word  as  mechanically  gives  a  suffix 
making  telegraphically,  though  there  b  no  such  word  as  telegraphicalt 

£.  Examples  of  primary  suffixes  are :  — 
I.  Vowel  suffixes :  — 

a,'  found  in   nouns  and  adJEclives  of  a-  and  o-stctns,  as  a 
vagUB,  acriba,  toga  (root  TE<:). 

i,  less  common,  and  in  Latin  f[e<iuently  changed,  as  in  rapes,  or  lost,  as  in 
scoha  (acobia,  root  scab). 

U,  dinguised  in  most  adjectives  by  an  additional  i,  qs  in  sua-vis  (for 
tBD&dns,  cf,  ifiit),  ten-nia  (root  ten  in  tendo),  and  remaining  alone 
only  in  nouns  of  the  fourth  declension,  as  aooa  (root  AK,  iharf,  in 
acer,  aciea,  ixiii),  pecQ  (root  PAC,  bind,  in  paciaoor). 

z    Suffixes  with  a  consonant:  — 

n.  ta  (in  the  form  to-)  in  (he  regular  perfect  passive  participle,  as  tectas, 
tectum;  sometimes  with  an  sclive  sense,  as  in  p5t(ls,  pranaua:  aod 
found  in  a  few  words  not  recognized  as  participles,  as  putns  (cf.  pu- 
ma), altos  (aid). 
R.  ti  in  abstracts  and  rarely  in  nouns  of  agency,  as  meBsia,  vestis,  para, 

mens.     But  in  many  the  i  is  lost. 
7.  tn  in  abstracts  (including  supines),  sometimes  becoming  concretes,  as 

actoB,  luctns. 
!.  na,  forming  perfect  participles  in  other  languages,  and  in  Latin  making 
adjectives  of  like  participial  meaning,  which  often  become  noum,  as 
magnna  (=  mactns,  root  MA<;),  plenna,  regnum. 
t.  ui,  in  nouns  of  agency  and  adjectives,  as  ignis,  aegnia.  < 

i.  nn,  rare,  as  in  manue,  tdnns.  ^ft 

Tj.  ma  with  various  meanings,  as  in  animua,  ahnua,  firmna,  formft.         ^B 
B.  va  (commonly  W0-)  with  on  active  or  passive  meaning,  as  in  eqniu^ 

armm,  oSnapicnua,  exigaua,  racTvaa  (vacuna). 
t.  ra  (or  la,  a  passive  parlicii^le  termination  in  other  languages), 'usually 


§^  160-«2,] 


Signi/icant  Endings. 


143  ^ 


«.  ya  (fbnnlng  gemndivea  in  other  languages) ,  in  adjecliv 

indtidlng  many  of  Ihe  lirst  and  fifth  declensions,  iia  e) 

Florentia,  pemicies. 
A.  ka,  sometimes  primary,  as  in  paatn  (if.  i-aCpm),  locus  (for  stlocas).  1 

In  many  cases  the  vowel  of  this  termination  is  lost,  leaving  a 

nant-stem:  as,  apex,  cortex,  loqaax. 
li.  an  (ia-,  &a-),  in  nouns  of  agency  and  absiiacts:  as,  aBpergo,  co: 

(-Inia),  gero  (-dnia). 
v.  man  (men- :  also  used  in  (he  form  men-  as  a  conscious  derivative)  I 

expressing  MtANS,  often   passing   into    the  action    itself: 

finmen, 
i-  tar,   forming   nonns  of   AGENCV:    as,  pater   (i.e.  froletlor),   liitet  I 

(Le.  mpporlsr),  orator. 
a.  tnt,  forming  nonns  of  MEANS :  as,  claUBtmm,  molctnim, 
ir.  tM  (sometimes  phonetically  changed  into  er-,  or-),  forming  n 

actions :  as,  genua,  furor. 
p.  ant,  forming  ac 

The  above,  with  some  sidiixes  given  below,  belong  to  the  Indo-   ! 
iEuropean  parent  speech,  and  most  of  thern  were  not  felt  as  living  for-  j 
s  in  the  Latin, 

2.    SigDiflcont  Endlnga. 
161.    Both  primary  and  seconiiary  suffixes,  especially  in 
fthe  form  o£  compound  suffixes,  were  used  in  Latin  with 
more  or  less  consciousness  of  their  meaning.     They  may 
therefore  be  called  Significant  Endings. 

They  form :  i .  Nouns  of  Agency ;  2.  Names  of  Action ; 
3.  Adjectives  (active  or  passive). 


Ill.-DERIVATION    OF    NOUNS    AND    ADJECTIVES. 

1,  Nouns  of  Agency. 

162.    Nouns  of  Agency  properly  denote  the  agent  or 

w-r  of  an  action^     But  they  include  many  words  in  which 

3ae  idea  of  agency  has  entirely  faded  out,  and  also  many 

(rords  used  as  adjectives.   Their  significant  endings  are :  — 

ir  (-8or),  M.,  -titE,  F.,  added  torootaor  vetb-&tftta&^ 

'  or  i&er  of  an  action. 


144  Etymology :  Fontiation  of  Words,     [gj  162,  ] 

cans,  sing  (can,  supine  toanttim);  cantor,  singtr;  oantrlz,  ji 

vino&  (vie,  supine  victum),  conquer:  victor,  Tictrti,^oHy»CT 
{victorious). 

tondeS,  shear  (tond  as  root,  sup.  tonaum) :  tSnsor,  tonati' 
hair-cutter. 

pets,  seek  (petl-  as  stem,  sup.  petJtttm)  :  petltor,  candidate. 

sen&tor  (lost  verb  JBenS,  -Sre),  senator. 

By  aaalogy  -tor  is  sometimes  added  to  noun-stems,  but  these  n 
>e  stems  of  lost  verbs  (ef.  senStor  above) ;  as,  viator,  traveller,  from 
via,  vay  (but  cf,  invio). 

Note  i.  —  The  terminalion  -tor  {-Bor)  has  ihe  same  phonetic  change  as  llic 
supine  ending -tum  (-sum)  (p.  isi.  3I,  and  is  added  to  the  same  form  of  root  or 
verb-slein  as  that  ending  (see  ^  125), 

Note  9.  —  The  feminine  form  is  atwaj^  -triz.     Masculines  in  -aor  lad 
feminine,  except  sxpvilsor  (expultiiz)  and  tSuaor  (CSnatrix). 

Note 3. — tor  is  aji  inherited  tentiinaiion  (ct  f,  p.  143).  The  feminine  is*. 
further  fbrmalion  in  -oa  which  has  lost  its  final  vowel  (cf.  {  16a.  A). 

b.  t-  (originally  ta-,  cf.  §  160.  a),  C,  added  to  verb-stems  making 
nouns  in  -e»  (-itie,  -eOa,  stem  -it-,  -ot-)  descriptive  of  a  character: 


miles  (verb-stem  mile-,  as  in  mills,  thousand),  a  soldier  (i 

the  crowd). 
tegea  (verb-stem  tege-,  cf.  tegS,  cirver).  a  coverer,  a  mat. 
comes,  -itis  (con-  and  med,£ii,  cf.  ttSmea,  aBmita),  a  comfianioM. 
c.  -o   (gen.    -onifl,    stem  on-),  u.,  added   to   stems   conceii'ed 
verb-stems   (but  perhaps  originally  noun-stems)   to  indicate  a  person 
employed  in  some  specific  art  or  trade :  as,  — 

gerS  (ges  in  ^ttS,  gerere,  carry,   but  compare  -ger 

{squire),  a  carrier. 
com-bib5  (BIB  as  root  in  bibS,  bibere,  drink),  a  pot-compi 

also  used  to  fiarm  many  nouns  descripdve  erf  per- 


1^ 


2.  Names  of  Actiona. 
163<  Names  of  Actions  are  confused,  through  their 
suffixes,  with  real  abstract  nouns  and  nouns  denoting 
means  and  instruments.  They  are  derived  (1)  apparently 
or  really  from  roots  and  verb-stems  {firimary)  or  (2)  from 
noun-stems  (s^^ondat^. 


Names  of  Aclions. 

I.  Significant  endings  giving  real  or  apparent  primary  1 
formations  are:  — 

a.  -or  (at.  5r-,  earlier  5b-),  h.,  -8s  (gen.  -ia,  st.  i-,  earlier  ea-),  F., 
(st.  es-,  earlier  68- or  OB-),  n.,  added  to  roata  or  forms  conceive! 

timeB._/^itr;  tlm-or,  dread. 

aedeS,  siti  aCd-fis,  seat, 

decet,  it  is  dicomiiig;  deo-uB,  grace,  beauty. 

jfaelnS  (old  form  of  faoio,  do)  ;  facin-aa,  a  deed. 

Note.  —  Many  nouns  of  Ihis  class  are  formed  by  airalogy  from  imaginary  rt 
■s,  factnus  above  (from  a  supposed  cool  PAC[N). 

b.  -ia  (sL  i6n-),  -tia  (st.  tion-},  -tara  (st  tfltS-),  F-,  -tus  (st  tu-),  M.,  ( 
(phonetically  -8i6,  -sSra,  -sua),  apparently  added  to  roots  or  verb-  i 
stems,  making  verbal  abstracts  which  easily  pass  into  concretes. 

leeSjgaiier,  enroll;  leg-ifi,  a  legion  (originally,  the  annual  conscription), 

regS,  direct;  reg-i6,  a  direction,  a  region. 

iDserS  (sa),  implant;  Zaai-tlG,  grafting. 

voo5,  call;  Tooa-tl3,  a  calling. 

molior,  toil;  mSlI-tifi,  a  toiling. 

pingS  (fig),  paint;  pio-tflxa,  a  painting. 

BBntiS,/cel;  afia-sua  (for  aent-tus,  §  ii.  a.  ■£), perception. 

fruor,  enjoy  (for  ffruguor) ;  frilc-tuB,  enjoy mettt,  fruit. 

NOTEl. — tlO, -tCras -tuB  are  added  to  roots  or  Terb-stEma  precisely  as -tor, 
with  the  same  pbonelic  change.  Hence  they  are  conveniently  associated  with  the 
supine  stem  (see  p.  lai).  They  sometinies  form  nouns  when  there  is  no  corre- 
sponding verb  in  uw :  as,  aenatua,  unatt  (ct  senoi) ;  mectlO,  mintion  (e£ 
mens);  fetnrs,  offspthig (d.  (6tU8);  lltterftttira,  iUcruture  (dL,  Utterae) ; 
cOuBulatus,  coHiutship  (cC  consul). 

Note  a,  — Oftheseeodinga,  -tua  was  originally  primary  (cf;  §  i6d.  t)  ;  -10  is 
a  compound  formed  by  adding  On-  to  a  stem  ending  in  a  vowel  (originally  1)  ;  as, 
dlclO  (of,  -dlcus  nnd  diets)  ;  -tiO  is  a  compound  formed  by  adding  On-  lo  slems 
in  tl-:  as,  pradatlO  (cf.  gradBtlm) ;  -tOra.  is  formed  by  adding -ra,  feminine 
of-ruB.  lo  stems  In  tu-:  as.  aafOra  from  n5tua;  atatflra  from  Status  (gf. 
flg'flra.,of  like  meaning,  from  a  simple  u-slem,  tflBU-a;  and  matOrus,  MfttOta). 

c.  -men,  -mentum,  -mSnium,  N.,  -monia,  f.,  apparently  added  to 
roots  or  verb-stems  to  denote  acts,  or  means  and  results  of  acts, 

AG,  root  of  agS,  lead;  Sg-men,  line  of  march. 

wgl-  (stem  seen  in  tegS,  direct) ;  5  ^^^-'^^'^^  "'^'^■ 

<  regi-mentum,  rule. 
So  oola-men,  pillar;  mC-men,  movement;  nfi-men,  namt. 
fruor,  enjoy;  txtk-Taentvaa, grain. 
teator,  witness ;  tesU-manluni,  testimony. 
,         queror.  e^i/ijt/ar'n ;  qiieri-infinia,  complaint  (bulMetiiV^, 


146  Etymology:  Formation  of  Words.  [§  163. 

Abo  flS-men  (m.),  a  priest  (from  flS,  blow,  in  reference  to  the  sacri- 
ficial fire). 

Remark  :  'mSnlum  and  ~in6nia  are  also  used  as  secondary,  fonn- 
ing  nouns  from  other  nouns  and  from  adjectives;  as,  sanoti-inonia, 
siai£tily  (sanctnB,  holy)  ;  mStri-moiiiuin,  marriage  (mater,  mother). 

Note.  — Of  these  endinES.  -men  b  primary  (cf.  } 
funherdevelopmeni  of-men  made  by  adding  to-,  and  appears  for  Ihr 
laler  in  the  language  lha.n  -taan ;  as,  mSniGn.  movement  (Lucr.)  ;  m 
(later).  So  elemeDtum.  Is  a  developmenl  from  L-M-N-a,  l-m-n's  [letters  of  the 
siphabel),  changed  to  elemeata  along  with  other  nouns  !□  -men.  -mSnlum 
and  -mCnla  are  componnd  secondary  suf&ies  formed  from  mo-,  as  in  the  series 
etao.-aa,  fosttrin^ ;  AlmSn,  a  river  near  Rome;  allmOnia,  support.  But  the 
last  was  formed  from  olC  later,  when  -mSnia  had  become  established  as  a  sup- 
posed primary  suthx. 

d.  -bulnm,  -oalum,  -brum,  -orum,  -trum,  N.,  added  to  verb-stems 
or  roots  (rarely  to  noun-stems),  to  detiote  means  or  INSTRUMENT :  as, — 

pSsco,  feed  i  p5-bulum,/(fi/rfir. 

Hto,  stand;  sta-bnlum,  stall. 

tua  (gen.  tiiris),  incense  j  turi-bulum,  a  cittser. 

TOoB,  ealli  vooS-bolum,  a  name,  a  "word. 

lateS,  kidti  lati-bnlum,  hiding-place. 

veli5,  carry  i  vehl-colum,  ■uiagon. 

•pia,  purify  \  pl3-culum,  an  expiatio/t. 

cerno  (orBvI),  sift\  crl-bmm,  sieve. 

flO,  blowi  fla-bra  (p!.),  blasts. 

candfila,  a  candle;  candeia-brum,  a  candlestick. 

ambuIO,  -walki  ^xnXixH^-crrxTa.,  place  for  walking. 

sepellS,  bury\  sepul-crum,  tomb. 

Bimvlo,  pretend;  BimulS-crttm,  image, 

claudfi,  s^ut;  clans-trum,  a  bar. 

aiS, /plough;  aii-trara,  a  plough. 

A  few  Masculines  and  Feminines  of  the  same  fo 
nouns  and  adjectives :  as,  — 

for,  speak;  ^-bula,  tale. 

ndeS,  laugh;  ridi-oulna,  laughable. 

faoiS,  make;  fa-ber,  smith. 

Ia.te5,  hide;  late-bra,  hidingplace. 

terC,  bore;  tere-bra,  auger. 

mnlgefi,  miUt ;  mfllc-ti'a,  milk-pail. 

ItrS,  burn;  Ano-ter,  South  wind. 

Note. — These  arc  no  doubt  compound  nomlaa]  suffixes,  bo- + 10-,  eo-  +  Ia-, 
bo-  4-  ro-,  CO'  +  ro-,  to-  +  ro-,  but  the  series  cannot  be  distinctly  made  out. 
They  had  became  fully  welded  into  independent  su!&i.es\ic\oveftie\MWjra3!iv««>i 


Toation  occur  as 

1 


Abstract  Nouiis,  147 

2.  Significant  endings  entirely  secondary  forming  Ab- 
ttract  nouns  are: — 

t.  -ia,  -tia  (-iSB,  -tiBs),  -tito,  -tua,  -tfldo,  F.,  added  to  adjective  stems 
and  a  few  to  nouns.  So  -do  and  -gS,  p.,  but  associated  with  verbs, 
and  apparently  added  to  verb-stems.    Thus: — 

aud^  bsld;  audSc-ia,  An/aJHwj.    So  fld11c-ia,c«4)!ij!»i«  (ffiailx}. 

prOdena,  -wise;  'pi^&on-ti.a,  wisdom. 

BupBihuB,  ^roKd  i  BMpeib-ia.,  ^iJg. 

bbtiB,  sad;  trlsti-tia,  sadness. 

panper,  poori  pauper-iCs,  poverty. 

aSgnis,  lazy;  sSgni-tiSe,  lashiess, 

l>onjia,good;  boDi-tiB,  gotjdtt^s. 

c/tria,  tithen  ;  clvi-tas,  diizcnship. 

Benex,  eld;  senec-tuB,  agg, 

■5I11H,  alone%  iSli-tfidS,  solitudt. 

dulols,  sweet ;  dnlcC-dS,  sweetness  (probably  from  a  lost  stem  duloS-, 
cf.  dolcS-BcS). 

cnpIS,  I  desire 'i  cupl-dfl  (as  if  from  stem  cnpl-,  cf.  oupT-vi). 

ImnbuB,  the  loin}  lumb3-go,  lumbago  (as  if  from  fItimbS,  -are), 

plumbum,  leadf  plumbS-go,  black  kad. 

robna,  bramble  (red  bush) ;  lUbl-gS,  rust  (redness). 

prfiiio,  itch ;  pratf-gS,  itching. 

albuH,  white;  albfl-gO,  a  disease  of  the  eyes  (whiteness,  as  it  from 
I  falbuB). 

I       Stems  ending  in  o-  or  4-  lose  these  vowels  before  -la  (as  snperb-la), 
r  and  change  them  to  i  before  -tSs,  -tfls,  -tta  (as  boui-tSB,  above). 

Consonant-stems  often  insert  -i  before  -tSa :  as,  loquSx  (stem 
loqnac-),  loquSci-tSs  ;  but  honea-t5a,  mSies-tSa  (as  if  from  old  ad- 
jectives in  -ea),  ttber-taa,  Tolnp-taa,  o  after  i  is  changed  to  e:  as, 
piuB  (stem  pio-),  pie-t3a ;  Hooiua,  aooie-taa  (see  §  1 1,  e). 

Note.  —  Of  these,  -la  b  inheriled  aa  secondary  (cf.  {  160.  k)  ;  -tla  is  formed 
by  adding  -la  to  slems  v-iih  s.  tsuflixi  as,  sdlltla,  from  mfiea  (s).  ndllt-) ; 
molestla  from  OiolestuB;  dementia  from  Clemens;  whence  by  analogy, 
mall-tla,  avftri-tia.  -t&a  Is  inheriled,  but  its  component  parts,  ta,-  +  tl-,  are 
found  as  suf&xes  in  the  same  sense:  as,  senecta  from  senex;  sgmen-tis  from 
Bfimen.  -tils  Is  tU-  +  tt-,  ct  aervltQ-da.  -dfl  and  -gS  oppour  only  with  long 
vowels,  asfi-om  verb-stems,  by  3  false  analogy;  but  -dfl  is  do-t  On-;  ss.cupidue, 
cupldS;  gravidua,  ffravSdS  (cf.  gravS-scO):  albldus,  albedO  (ct 
albe-acO) ;  fonnlduB,  hoi,  formldS  (cf.  fOnnldulCsus),  (iofJlaiAf)  fiar; 
•e^  is  possibly  co-  -t-  Bn-;  ct  vora^x.  vorag-S,  but  ct  CethSg-ua.  -tDd5  is 
compounded  of -dfl  with  tu-slems.  which  acquire  a  long  vowel  from  associalion 
with  verb-stems  in  a- (cf.VDinmen,  from  VOlVfl);  as.  c6tlBViStt-fiB  ,'Vb^\^ 
I   fiS,  bablta-dS,  BoUlolta-dQ ;  whence  BervltUdfi  (,cl.&eir>iV'C^B,-VU:^. 


1 


M 


148  Etymology:  Formation  of  Words.    [§§163, 

J.  -ium,  -Hum,  added  to  noun-  and  perhaps  verb-stems,  forming 
neuter  abstracts,  which  easily  pass  into  concretes  denoting  offices  and 
GROUPS:  as, — 

liDBpes  (gen.  boBpit-ie),  aguestf  hospit-imn,  hospitalily,  a»  inn. 

aarvus,  a  slave ;  aervi-timn,  slavery,  the  slave  class. 

coliega,  a  colleague  i  coliee-iiun,  colleagaeship,  a  college. 

auapex,  a  soothsayer;  auapic-ium,  soothsaying,  an  omen. 

^onAeo,  rejoice;  g^ud-ium./y. 

benefacio,  be/iefil;  benefio-ium,  a  kindness  (but  cf.  benefious). 

de-BiderO,  miss  (from  fdB-aidBs,  out  0/ place,  of  missing  soldiers)  ; 
deaider-ium,  longing. 

effugiS,  escape;  effag-ium,  an  escape  (cf,  profugua). 

ad  verbum,  [added]  to  a  verS;  adverb-ium,  an  adoeri. 

inter  Iflnaa,  ielween  moons ;  interlim-ium,  time  of  new  moon. 

rSgIa  i.-as^,fliglit  of  a  king;  r§gifue-lum,y?^:W  of  kings. 

Vowel-steina  lose  their  vowel  before  -Ium,  as  colieg-lam,  from 
oollSga. 

-Note. — Imn,  neuletof-IUB()  164.^), -la  (c£i),  is  an  Inherited  primary  suffii 
{cf.  }  160.  «),  bill  is  used  with  grcal  freedom  as  secondary;  -tlum  is  formed  liltc 
-tia,  by  adding  -ium  lo  siems  wilh  t:  as,  esdt-ium,  eQult-lujn  (cf.  exitua, 
equltSa) ;  so,  by  analogy,  calvl-tlum,  eerv!-tlum  (from  calvus,  Horvua). 

g.  Less  commonly -iiia,F,,  -niani, -linm, -ciniam,  N.,  added  to  aoun- 
slems,  but  confused  with  verb-stems:  as, —  ^^ 

peoil,  cattle;  pecfl-nia,  money  (chattels).  ^^H 

contJcescB,  hush ;  contici'iilniii,  the  hush  of  night  ^^H 

(ox^eS,  increase ;  auzi-lium,  ^ir/^.  ^^1 

pecQ,  cattle;  pecfi-lium,  private  property  (cf.  poefilor,  implying  a 

noun  tpecaium). 
IStrS,  robber;  IStrO-cinitun,  robbery  (cf.  lattOciuor,  rob,  implying 

an  adj,  -flatrdcinuB), 

3.  AdJeoUves. 
104.   Derivative  adjectives  are  Nominal  (from  nouns  or 
adjectives)  or  Verbal  (as  from  roots  or  verb-stems). 
Their  significant  endings  are :  — 
J,  NoinNAi. 
a.  •olns  (■a.-uin)  (afteravowet-olti8).-culiu,-elliu,-llliiB, making 
an  important  class  of  adjectives,  which  are  usually  appropriated  to  one 
gender,  that  of  the  Primitive,  and  used  as  DlMlSinVJ^'Sovss-.  a&,— 


§  164.]  Nominal  Adjectives. 

iTrns,  a  brook  j  rlr-ulua,  a  streamlet. 

gladioa,  a  sword;  gladi-oliiB,  a  small  siuord. 

filina,  a  son;  fni-olaa,  a  little  son. 

(Ilia,  a  daughter;  HU-ola,  a  little  daughter 

Sbrium,  a  hall;  Btrl'Olom,  a  little  hull. 

boms,  a  man ;  bomtm-culiis,  a  dwarf. 

aoriB,  an  ear ;  auri-cula,  a  little  ear. 

mflnnfi,  S.,  a  gift;  mOiJUB-cnliim,  a  little  gift. 

fpiiGra  (cf.  puer,  a  boy) ;  puella  (for  fpuer-ula),  a  girl. 

cSdex,  a  block  ;  oSdlo-ilU,  ■u/riting-tablets. 

miser,  -a/retched;  miB-elluB,  rather  -wretched. 

liber,  a  took;  lib-ellus,  a  little  book. 

aureus  (-a,  -um),  gulden  i  aure-olus  (-a,  -um),  golden. 

parvus  (-a,  -um),  little;  parr-olufl  (later  parv-iilua),  very  small. ' 

mSior  (old  ra&iSa),  greater  {  mfiiua-oulua,  somewhat  larger. 

Note  i. —  These  are  all  formed  by  adding  JU8  (originally  -rua,  cf.  }  i6o.  i> 
lo  various  stems,  torming  adjectives.  The  formadon  is  the  same  as  that  oF  -ulua 
in /below.  But  these  words  became  settled  as  diminulives,  and  relaired  their  con- 
Jicclion  with  nouns.  So  in  English  the  diminutives  w/tUisi,  rtdiish,  are  of  thesamo 
formation  as  iookisK  and  snafpah.  -cuius  comes  from  -lus  added  to  adjectives 
in-cus  formedfrom  stems  Inn- and H-:  as, luvan-cus,  Aupun-cuB  (cf.Aurun- 
CUlSius),  pria-CUfl,  whence  the  C«  becomes  a  part  of  the  termination,  End  the 
whole  ending  is  used  elsewhere,  but  mostly  with  n-  and  6-stems.  in  accordance 
with  its  origin. 

Note  a.— Diminutives  are  often  used  to  express  nffeclion.plly.  or  contempt: 
as,  dellciolae,  lUttt  fet;  mulleroiila,  apoar  (feeble)  ■ummait;  bomunoulua, 
wretchtd  man. 

Remark:  -ci5,  added  to  steins  in  n-,  has  the  same  diminutive  force, 
but  is  added  to  masculines  only:  as,  lioimin-ci6,  a  dwarf  (bom  homS, 

b.  -Bd6s,  M.,  -aa,  F.,  -idea,  -IdSs,  m.,  -is,  -6iB,  F,  -*u«.  -ous,  m., 
added  to  proper  names,  forming  Patronymics  to  indicate  descent  or 
relationship. 

These,  originally  Greek  adjectives,  have  almost  all  Ijecome  nouns 

Tyndareas :   Tyndar-ldSs,   Caster  or  Pollux;   Tyndar-lfl,  Helen, 

daughter  of  Tyndarus. 
AOas :  Atlaati-adSs,  Mercury  t  AtlanU-adSs  (Gr.  pi.),  the  Pleiads. 
Sclpio  :  Scipi-adSB,  son  ofScipio. 
AnchlaSs :  Aiichisi-adea,  jEneas. 
Theseus :  ThSs-IdBa,  soti  of  Theseus, 
Tyaeas  :Tyd-IctSa,  D/omedes,  son  of  J^deus, 
■    OHeaa:  AJSx  OnSua,  son  of  Oileui.  ^^^ 


I 


150  Etymology:  Formation  of  Words. 

TliaumSs:  Ttaaumautl-Ss,  Iris^  daughter  of  Thaumas. 
Hesperus:    Hesper-ides    (from    Hesper-is,    -idla),    f.    pi.,    the 
daughters  of  Hesperus,  the  Hesperides. 

c.  -Sniia,  •SnUB,  -inus;   -Sb,  -SubIb,  -acus  (-Sjdiih),  -icuH ;   -6ns 
(generally  shortened  to  -Sub),  -Eius,  -iciuB,  forming  adjectives  with 


mons  (st.  monti-),  mountain\  mont-anua,  of  the  mountains. 

vetuB  (st.  voter-),  old\  veter-BmiB,  veteran. 

ante  lilcem,  before  light;  cLateluc-aiiuB,  before  daylight, 

egeo,  lack\  eg-Snus,  needy  (see  note  below). 

terra,  earth ;  terr-SnuB,  earthly. 

sSruE,  late;  aer-Bmia,  calm  (of  evening  stillness). 

colliB,  hi/l;  ooll-lniis,  a/a  hill. 

Atvne,god;  dlv-InuB,  divine. 

llbertUB,  ott^s  freedman ;  libart-Inua,  of  the  class  offreedmen. 

vituluB,  a  calfi  vitul-iua  (sc.  car5),  veal, 

qulB,  -wkof  c<U-5b,  of 'what  country  f 

IntimuB,  lowest;  Infim-aa,  of  the  lowest  rank. 

forum,  a  tnarket-plaee;  for-Susia,  of  a  niarket-piac, 

uiBTum.,  pure  ■a/ine ;  mmi-iaaB,  pure. 

olvia,  a  citizen ;  eiv-lcua,  civic,  of  a  citizen. 

fulia,  afuller;  fuUSn-icua,  of  a  fuller. 

femiua,  a  woman  %  fSmlu-eua,  of  a  worn 

ISo,  milk  (st.  lactl-) ;  lact-euB,  milky. 

piebSa,  the  commons ;  pieb-eiuB,  oft/ie  commons,  plebeian. 

■pAX,ei,  father ;  patr-ioius,  patrician. 

2.  But  especially  from  proper  nouns  (names  of  places,  peoplt 
persons),  denoting  belonging  to  or  coming  from:  as,— 
RCma :  R5m-3nua,  Roman. 
Bulla:  Sull-BinS,  Sulla's  veterans. 
CyaicuB:  Cjzic-Snl,  CysiceKes,  people  of  Cyzicuj. 
Liguria:  lAgar-inua,  of /Jgiiria. 
Arplaum:  Arpin-Sa,  of  Arpinum  (cf,  Samnium:  Sanmli 

-itlB,  a  Samnile). 
Slotlia :  Siclll-6iiaia,  Sicilian. 
Iliuin,  Troyi  Ili-acus,  Trojan  (a  Greek  form). 
FlatO:  PiatSn-Icus,  Platonic. 
A.quila !  A.quil-Biua,  a  iioman  name  \  AcL\:^SYa.,  a  town  in 


«,fi 


l.h 


5  164,]  Nominal  Adjectives.  igr  I 

3.  Many  derivative  adjectives  with  these  endings  have  by  usage 
become  nouns.    Thus, — 

Bilva,  Wii0(/j;  Silv-anna,  K.,  a  god  0/ tlie  ivootls. 

membrum.  limb;  membr-Sna,  F.,  stilt. 

Aemilia  (gSiia)  ;  Aemili-^uB,  m.,  fiaiiie  ofSdpio  Afric 

laniiiB,  butcher  i  ISnl-Sna,  F.,  a  butcher's  stall. 

I Aufidius  (Anfidos),  m.  ;  Aufidl-Eaos,  a  Roman  name. 

Incola,  an  inhabitant  %  inquil-Inue,  m.,  a  lodger. 

oaecus,  bHnd\  Caeo-Ina,  used  as  M.,  a  Roman  name. 

galluB.  a  cock;  gall-tna,  f.,  a  hen. 

raS./all  (no  noun  existing)  j  m-Ina,  f,,  a/all. 

doctor,  teacher^  dootr-Lia,  f.,  learning. 

Note.  — Of  Ihese  terminatians,  Anus,  ^BtiuB, -InuB  are  compounded  from 
-nus  added  to  a. slem-vowel :  as.arco,  arc&nus;  colliB.  colIlnuB.  The  long 
vowels  come  from  a  coiiKisioawilbierI>slem3.asinpIg-iius,  tlnl-tua,  trlbQ-tUB, 
Bssisled  by  the  noun-slem  in  &•:  oa,  BPcanuB,  A  few  nouns  occur  of  similar 
formation,  as  from  verb-slems  in  S-  (which  were  lost  in  tat  later  language)  and  in 
0-:  aa,  colflnua  (col9,  c£  Incola).  patrOmia  (cf.  patrS,  -are),  trlbtliiuB 
(o£  trIboO.  trltniB),Portanua{c£,portua),  VacOaa  (ct  vacC,  vacuus). 

d.  -aito,  -SriB,  .eiia,  -Ilia,  --Qlifl,  -nus,  PERTAINING  TO,  of  various 
modes  airelation  ox  possession,  but  not  used  as  Gentile  adjectives :  as, 

nStOia,  nature;  nitur-aila,  natural. 

popaloB,  a  people  I  fap-al-iiiB,/ellow-coiitUryman. 

patraaa,  uncle;  patTU-Slls,  caitsin. 

hoBtla,  an  enemy  i  boat-IUB,  hostile. 

cuiros,  chariot i  Bella  cur-OUs,  mruU  chair. 

vfir,  spring;  vBr-nuB,  vernal. 

Note. — nus  is  inheriied  (cf.  J  160,  B)  and  used  as  secondary.  The  others 
^ax  weakened  forms  of  ra-  ({  160.  i)  added  lo  various  vowcl-slenis.    The  long 

'el  comes  partly  from  confusion  with  verb-stems,  cf.  Aprilia  (apertO),  odHUs 

10),  and  the  suffix  is  afterwards  used  indiscriminately,  as  in  bqhIUb  (eenez). 

-ter  (-tris),  -ester  (-BBtrls),  -tlmus,  -emus,  -urnus,  -terniui 
(-tumuB),  BELONGING  TO,  ol  piocts,  Hmes,  and  the  like  (but  some  are 
general  adjectives). 

paltlB,  a  tnarsA;  pallU-ter,  e/  the  marshes. 

^eA^a,  a  footman  i  peAea'toi,  0/ the  Jbot. 

■extnSnsSe,  six  months;  sSmH-tria,  semi-annual. 

stlvB,  a  wood;  sllv-eater,  ellT-eBtris,  -woody. 

flniB,  an  endi  flnl-tlmus,  neighboring,  on  the  borders. 

Lert  (old  ^^fX),  yesto'day ;  tiBS-ternuB,  of  yesterday. 

dlO,  lang(S^  time),  diflturnnfl,  lasting. 

hodlB.  tff-dayi  haSi-exaMo,  ofto-^iy, 

OiSm,  dajfi  dt-arauM,  e&iify. 


1 52  Etymology:  Fonnation  of  Words.  [§  in 


rNoTK  —  Of  these,  -ester  is  formed  by  adding  trl-  (cf.  tro-,  §  160)  10  s 
Id  I-  or  d-  (phonciically  B-).  Thus  pedet-trl-  becomes  pedestri-,  and  o 
follow  ihe  analogy,  -emus  and  -urnas  are  formed  by  adding  -dus  10  s-si 
as,  dlur-nua  (for  tdlue-nus),  and  hence,  by  analogy,  hodiemuH  (hodiS]. 

f.  -Itua,   -ItuH.   -atua,   PROVIDED  WITH,   making  adjectives 
partidpial  ending,  fotmed  from  nouns,  but  in  reference  to  an  imaginary 
verb-stem  (cf.  tlie  English  Iwrned,  crested,  kooked). 

baiba,  a  beard;  barb-Staa,  bearded. 

amla,  an  ear;  aur-itua,  long-eared. 

Teraua,  a  lurningi  vorB-utuB,  crafty,  adroit  (flill  of  turns). 

So  -tua,  added  direcdy  to  nouns  witliout  reference  lo  any  verb : 

fGsiiB,  death;  fOnea-tua,  deadly. 

honor,  kenor;  honea-tnia,  honorable. 

fa.-vot,  favor;  faua-tus  {(or  ^ia-v ea-toB),  favorable. 

g,  -ens,  -ina,  -Sceua,  -Iciua,  -aneua  (neua),  -ticna,  made 
BELONGING  TO,  forming  adjectives  of  very  various  meanings;  as,- 

a.-ai-ax&,  gold i  «ox-ti\i%,  golden. 

pater,  a  father;  •p^.tz-ma,  paternal. 

uxor,  a  laife  i  uzSr-lua,  uxorious. 

xoaa,  a  rose;  roa-aoeua,  of  roses. 

later,  a  brick;  latei-Iolus,  of  brick. 

piaeaioM,  present ;  praesell^&l]eus,  operating  instantly. 

extrS,  ■without;  extt-Sneua,  external. 

anb  teirEl,  underground;  subterr-Sneua,  subterranean. 

iiillK,  •aiillmv;  sallg-neus,  of  willow, 

Toia,^;  vQ\S.-ticaB,  winged  (yalStoE,  ajlighf). 

domus,  a  house;  domea-Ucua,  ofihs  house,  dameslk. 

■ilva,  a  wood;  allva.-ticuB,  sylvan. 

Note. — iua  Is  originally  primilive  (f  160.  k)  ;  -tcius  and  -ftoeuB  are  formed 
by  adding  -iua  and  -sua  lo  stems  in  I-C-,  5-0-  (suflii  CO-,  oiig.  ka-,  }  160.  X) ; 
-eus  corresponds  to  Greek  -not,  -»o!,  and  has  lost  A  y-sound  (cf.  ya~,  }  160.  '). 
-neua  is  no-  +  -eus  (}  160,  S) ;  -fiaeus  is  [ormed  by  adding  -neiia  fo  &-siems. 
For  -tlous,  see  {  159.  n, 

h.  -Arina,  -tCiiua  (-BCilua),  BELONGING  TO,  making  [tiaoy  adjectives 
often  fixed  as  nouns  (see  i). 

firdS,  rant,  order;  Srdln-Srlus,  regidar. 

■rgeiitum,  silver ;  argeatatlua,  of  silver  or  monef. 

extrK,  outside;  extr-ariua,  stranger. 

merituB,  earned;  merl-tSriua,  profitable. 

A%vonua,  turned  aside;  dSvor-aorina,  i^<j«  wi«  (cf.  t.  s)- 
fiOTB.—Hen!  -tua  (f  ifo.  1)  is  addf:dloslnineiio™!,m-to\*ai.a-W.  »i, 
JtVoatOMua  (from  peoQ114riB).  beUitOrtua  ltrom\)eA»,«(rV 


try 

1 
I 


Nominal  Adjectives. 

'.  Many  fixed  forms  of  the  above  adjective  suffixes  make  noi 
e  or  less  regularly  used  ia  particular  senses :  as,  — 
'.  -Srlus  (regular), /wjow  employed  about  anything:  as,  — 
argent-Sriua,  sil-uersmith,  broker  (from  argeutum.). 

2.  'Srla,  thing  connected  with  something: — 
aten-firiae,  f.  pi.,  sandpits  (from  arfina,  sand). 
Aaln-arla,  p.,  name  of  a  play  (from  asinua,  ass). 

3.  -3x111111  (regular), //a«  0/  a  thing  (with  a  few  of  more  gen 
neaning):  as,— 

Ber-firiam,  N.,  treasury  (from  aei,  eopper) 
tepid-axinm,  n.,  warm  bath  (from  tepiduB,  warm). 
Bild-&Tiaiii,  N.,  a  towel  (cf.  BddS,  -are,  sweat), 
sal-3Tiiim,  N.,  saU  money,  salary  (from  aSl,  salt). 
calend-Siinm,  n.,  a  note-book  (frora  oalendae,  calends). 

4.  -toria  (-B5ria)  :  as, — 

Agita-tSrla,  f.,  aplay  of  Plautus,  The  Carter  (from  agitator). 
Tor^Eoria,  f.,  a  tack  (from  voiHua,  a  turn). 

5.  -tSrium  (-aorium)  (regular), //^t^^  of  action  (with  a  few  of  n 
'   general  meaniug):  as, — 

aSvor-BSrium,  n.,  an  inn  (as  from  dSvorto,  turn  aside) 
aadl-toiium,  n.,  a  lecture-room  (as  from  audiS,  hear). 
ten-tBrium,  u.,  a  tent  (as  from  teado,  stretch). 
tSc-tfirium,  n.,  plaster  (as  frora  tego,  tfiotua,  caver). 
por-tdiium,  n.,  toll  (cf.  portC,  carry,  and  portua,  harbor), 

6.  -De,  animal-stall:  as,  — 

boT-He,  N.,  cattle-stall  (bSa,  bSvls,  ox,  com). 
ov-De,  sheep/old  (ovia,  st.  ovi-,  sheep). 

7.  -9X  (or -Sle,  thing  connected  with '^tpTmi\^\\e:  as,— 
capital,  Nt  headdress,  capital  crime  (caput,  head). 
penetr-aie  (esp.  in  pi.),  N.,  inner  apartment  (cf  penetrB). 
Satnm-aiia  S.  pi,  (the  regular  form  for  names  of  festivals),  feasi   \ 

of  Saturn  (from  BSturntis). 

8.  -Etnm,  K.  (cf. -fitus. -tttua,  %iQ  f),  place  of  a  thing:  as,— 
qaBTC-Btaia,  n.,  cakgrove  (from  querouB,  ooM). 

^T^l-etam,  AT.,  Tke  Clay-fiit  (from  argilla,  ciay"J. 


154 


Etymology :  formation  of  Words. 


9.  -oua  (sometimes  with  inserted  i, 
genders,  with  various  meanings :  as, — 

vlH-cuB,  M.,  Tlll-oa,  F.,  a  steward  (stewardtis)  (fr 

haitse). 
fabr-ioa,  F.,  a  workshop  (frc 
bflbul-cnB,  M.,  ox-tender  (fr 
cant-icnin,  n.,  song  (from  01 
mbr-Ica,  F.,  red  paint  (iron 
10,  -euB,  -oa,  -eum,  with  varii 
alv-eua,  m.,  a  trough  (ft 


n  faber,  ■workman'). 
m  bflb-ulna,  dim.,  cf.  boa,  ca). 
QtuB,  act  of  singing'). 
ruber,  red). 
us  meanings:  as, — 
alvuB,  the  belly). 


e  (from  caper,  he-goai). 

a  bridal'veil  (from  flamma, _^aOTf,  from  its  color). 

1 1,  -ium,  confounded  with  the  primary  suffix  (see  %  163. y). 

12.  -ter  (stem  tro-)  and -ter  {stem  tri-), -aster  -eater:  as,— 
AuB-ter,  M.,  South  •wind  (from  firo,  burn), 

eques-ter,  M.,  knight  (for  -j-equet-ter,  see  e,  note). 

sequ-ester,  M.,  a  staie-holder  (from  derivative  of  BBquor.yo/foTf). 

ole-aater,  M.,  wild  olive  (from  olea)  (cf,  surd-aster,  from  stirdoa),! 

k.  -5sus,  -{o)15na,  -(o)lentus,  full  of,  prone  to  :  as 

flflotUH,  wave\  flOctu-oans,  billowy. 

forma,  beauty  \  form-oaua,  beautiful. 

periculum,  ^^n/;  ■peiic-al.-Qa-aB,  full  of  danger. 

paaUA,  pest ;  peati-lSaB,  peafA-leatMe,  pestilent. 

vlnuiu,  vn'fte;  Tlno-lentus,  viu-oaus,  given  to  drink, 

II.  Verbal. 

/,  -Bx,  -IdaB,  -uluB,  -voa  (-uus,  -Iths,  -Hvna),  frqne  TO,  fitted 
TO,  apparently'  added  to  verb-stems,  forming  adjectives,  to  express  the 
action  of  a  verb  as  a  quality  or  tendency.  -5x,  denotes  a  faulty 
or  aggressive  (endency;  -tlvua  is  oftener^aj-j-/7«.     Thus, —  ' 

pQgaS,  to  fight  \  p^s'^-^lX^  pugnacious.  fl 

aodefi,  to  darei  aud-Sz,  bold.  1 

cuplS,  to  desiref  oup-idua,  eager. 

bibS,  to  drink;  bib-ulua,  thirsty  (as  dry  earth,  etc). 

prOterC,  to  trampU;  proter-voa,  violent,  -wanton. 

DooeO,  do  harm;  noc-uus  (noc-Ivua),  hurtful,  injurious. 

oaplS,  take;  cap-tlvua,  captive^  M.,  a  prisoner  of  war. 

TBoida,  fall  back  i  recld-Ivua,  restored. 
'  The  forms  felt  as  verbat  are,  like  the  nominal  lotms,  dentci  ininiTiQui«'«ta, 
coiutaiill/  confounded. 


I 


I 


Verbal  Adjectives.  ISJ 

Note.  — Of  Ihese, -axisareducllonof-acua  (slem-VDwcl  ft-  + -cub),  become 
independent  and  used  with  veib-slenis,  Similnr  fornis  in  -Sx,  -fix,  -Vs.,  and  -Hz 
ue  found  jt  i.nplLd  in  derivatives:  ag,  imbrex,  M^  a  rain-tile  (from  Imber) ; 
senex,  eldifiom  senl-e);  leiOx, JSera  {from  forua);  atrSi,  savofr  (from 
Bter.  ilaci)  :  CelSx,  F.,  a^acit  (ct  CellO)  ;  fSHi,  Aa/tfy,  ong.  firlile  (from  fSUJ, 
tuci  [?]) ;  ndflcia,  F.,  canfidiitce  (aa  from  tfldOi);  cfL  aiso  Victrii  (from 
Victor).    So  mandQcnlB,  cAnoing  (ham  mandS). 

-idUB  i;  no  doubt  denominative,  aa  in  berbl-dilB,^rj/  \,MToi6MB,  swolltn 
(dl  tumu-luB,  Ai//;  t\ua-al-taB,tiproaT);  CBSHiMa, loagi, cunning {d.  callum, 
laugh JUsh)  ;  mllci-duB,  i/iai^  (cCnmQUS.j/iiRir);  t&blduB,  n«i//i^ (ct  t&b6B, 
waning  disime).    But  later  it  was  used  to  form  adjectives  directly  from  verb-stems. 

-iilUB  Is  the  same  suffin  as  in  diminutives,  but  attached  to  verb-stems.  Ct 
aemtiliiB,  HvaUiiig  (ct  bnltor  and  imigS) ;  BSdiilna,  tilling  by,  eltcniivt  (cf. 
doml-BBda,  ^flffir-i'ay/'^.  and  aSdS,  calm) ;  penduluB.  ;{i»,;i>^(ctpond8,  abl., 
IB  v)eight;  perpBUdictllum,  a  plummet;  appendix,  an  addition) ;  strSgtilua, 
fffMi-Wjf  (ct  Btrftg-Sa) ;  legulus,  o^riiO,;r(cf.sftcr!-IegiiB,  o/iirifrii^otlhings 
sacred).    But  they  were  thoroughly  attached  to  verbs. 

-VU8  seems  originally  primary  (cf.  {  i6q.  e),bul-Ivwsand  -tlvua  have  become 
secondary  and  are  used  wilh  nouns:  as,  aeatlvua,  cf  summer  (from  aeatiie, 
heal) ;  tempeaijvua,  limely  (from  tempua) ;  cf.  domea-tlcus  (from  domua). 

m,  'Via,  -'bUia,  -lua,  -tiUa,  (-Bilia),  expressing  passive  qualities, 
but  occasionally  active :  as,  — 

frangO  (frag),  break}  tra^-iliB,  frail. 

ndsco  (gno),  knmv^  no-bilia,  well  known,  fa/noui, 

eximS,  take  out.,  select  f  exim-iua,  cltoice,  rare  (cf.  e-greg-lua) 

agB,  drive;  ag-illa,  active. 

hatieS,  Aoldi  bab-iliB,  handy. 

alo,  nourish  %  al-tilis,  fattened  (see  note) . 

Note. — Of  these,  -lua  is  primary,  but  is  also  used  as  secondary  (cf.  )  163./). 
-Uia  Is  certainly  secondary:  as,  HimillB,  liit  (cL  li^ot,  Eng.  same)  \  agllla,  active 
(ct  prCdlgua,  cypaTTiyh,  so  agO-  +  -Ub)  ;  facille,  ea^  (cf.  bena-flcua)  ; 
rragilla,_i9-ovV  (cE  (oederl-tragua),  -biila  also  is  probably  bo-  +  -11a  (d;  -bus 
in  morbus, -butum,-buiii1iis,-brum,-brla;  ctaiso-Uleand -tilla);  in-tllie 
and  -elUa,  -11a  is  added  to  to- (so-),  stem  of  the  perfect  participle:  as,  fOsBilla, 
rfitf  Bfi  (from  tOssua,  di^) ;  voJatlUs,  winged  (Irom  volfitua,/ifiW). 

n.  -minuB,  -nmnB.  These  endings  are  property  participial  (cl. 
Greek  -//eras,  and  am5-mini).  They  form  a  few  nouns  in  which  the 
participial  force  is  discernible:  as,— 

tz.  produce  I  fS-miua,  'woman  (the  producer). 

ale,  nourish ;  alu-mnus,  a  foster  child,  Hursling. 

«,  4idiiB  (the  same  as  the  gerund-ending)  forms  a  few  lutivi  or  re- 
tfwiw  adjectives:  as,— 

*equor,^/jW;  seou-ndua,  secanil  (fi\e  toWovnrt^,  favoraile. 

rots,  whirl  (from  rota,  wheel)  ;  rotu-ndua,  round,  ^^^w&as^y 

I  Compote  volvendis  menalbus,  in  ike  reiiolw'g  months  V^'vt^^- 


I 


IS6  Etymology:  Formation  of  Words.    [§§164,161 

Note.— Thi!  sutfin   Is   no  doubt   on.  +  -<lU8;   as,  fserua  (si.  gcrS-,  t 
armiger),  gerB  (at.  e'erSa-),  tBTerondua  (e£.  .'buiidua  and  -ctuidaB; 
turunda,  a  faslr-iall). 

p.  •bundua,  -cundus,  with  3.  participial  va&amag,  but  denoting  « 
tinitanci  of  the  act  or  quality, 

loouB,  a  jest  %  iVl-cixnd'a.B,  pleasant  (cf.  1iit3,  -Sre). 

vlt5,  shnni  vltS-bundue,  dodging  about. 

tremo,  trembhi  treme-bunduB,  trembling. 

morior,  diei  mori-bunduB,  at  the  point  of  death. 

for,  speak  ;  fet-onndus,  eloquent. 

'Bi':,  produce;  K-cuadTiB,/ndt/i/l. 

So  ta,  anger;  Ir5-onndu8,  irascible  (cf.  IrS-acor). 

Note.— These  must  have  been  oriEinally  nominal:  as  in  the  Sei 
red  bush;  rubldua  (but  no +rubleu9),  rerf;  Eubicou.  A'frf  A'imt  ( 
river  af  Etrfria :  ISiaiMa,  a  river  of  Lunlania) ;  rublCunduB  (as  in  Bverrun- 
CUa.  hOmun-CulUB).  So  turba,  ci>i';wo/ion,-  tur'  S,  a  top;  turbidua,  roily, 
etc.    Cf.  apexabS,  lonK&bC,  KravSdO,  dulcedS, 

III.  Irregular  Derivatives. 
q.  The  primary  suffix  on-  (nom.  -6)  is  used  as  secondary  to  form 
nouns  denoting  posskssed  of  (originally  adjectives),  and  so  expressing 
a  character,  and  often  used  s,%  proper  namesi^  as,  — 
opulae,  a  feast;  epal-3,  afeaster. 

ii9bus,  a  nose;  nas-S,  ■aiilh  a  large  nose  (also  as  a  proper  name). 
-ToluH  (In  bene-volua),  wishitig;  vol-finSa  (pi.),  volunteers, 
IrGoB,  forehead;  front-5,  big-head  (also  as  a  proper  name). 
So  oiitia,  a  curia;  oilri-o,  head  of  a  curia  (also  as  proper  name), 
isBtiB,  a  rope;  resti-o,  a  rope-maker, 
fveapertHiB,  of  the  evening;  veapertlli-B,  a  bat. 
r.  Rarely  suffixes  are  added  to  compound  stems  imagined,  but  not' 
used  In  their  compound  form:  as, — 

ad-veib'iuin,  adverb;  ad,  to,  and  verbum,  verb,  but  without  the 

intervening  fadveibus. 
l%tl-fund-ium,  large  estate;  IStUB,  tvide,  funduB,  estate. 
Bu-ove-taur-illa,  a  sacrifice  of  a  sheep,  a  swine,  and  a  bull;  alia,  swtne, 
ovia,  sheep,  taurua,  bull,  where  the  primitive  would  be  impossi- 
ble in  Latin,  though  such  formations  are  common  in  Sanskrit 

IV.-DERIVATION    OF   VERBS. 
J6B.  Verbs  may  be  classed  as  Primitive  or  Derivative. 

I  Thia  suffix  is  (he  same  as  in  f  162.  J,  butnot  cormecVedw\\iiB.ieAi. 


I 


IS  165,  166.] 


Deiivation  of  Verbs, 


:   formed   directly   from 
as,  f\ie,s.,  Jlighl  i  fugS, 


I 

I 


,  Primitive  verbs  are  those  inherited  by  the  Latin  from 
the  parent  speech. 

,  Derivative  verbs  are  those  formed  in  the  development 
of  the  Latin  as  a  separate  language.  They  are  of  two  main 
classes :  — 

,  DENoMiNATn'E  VERBS,  formed  from  nouos  or  adjectives. 
b.  Verba  apparently  derived  from  the  stems  of  other  verbs  (see  J  167). 

1.  Denominative  Verbs. 
166.   Verbs  were  formed  in  Latin  from  almost   eveiy 
form  of  noun-  and  adjective-stem. 

Verbs  of  the  first  conjugation'  ai 
regularly  with  a  transitive  meaning 
put  tofiigkt. 

Note.  —  No  doubt  originally  particular  forms  of  Elein  formsd  particular  con- 

gadons  of  verbs,  but  from  changes  of  slem  and  from  various  cross-analogies  the 

elation  belvcen  conjugations  and  stem-forms  became  entirely  confused.    Thus 

poena  should  make  tpanare,  but  it  realij  makes  pflnlre.  in  accordance  with  an 

l-stem,  as  in  Imptliil-a ;  aervua  makes  aervBre  in  one  sense,  serviro  In  another. 

Many  verbs  of  the  First  Conjugation  are  formed  fi^m  o-steinSi 
changing  the  o- into  S-.   These  are  more  commonly  transitive.   Thus,  —  , 

Btimuliis,  agoad  (stem  stlmtilo-) ;  stimulS  (-3xe),  incite, 

aeqnns,  even  (stem  aequo-)  ;  aequO  (-5re),  make  even, 

Iilberiiiis,  of  tlie  winter  (stem  hrberno-) ;  hibernO,  pass  the  i 

Blbus,  white  (stem  albo-) ;  albo  (-3re),  ■whiten. 

pltiB,  jJa«  (stem  pio-)  ;  pio  (-Sre),  expiate. 

3.  A  few  verbs,  generally  neuter,  are  formed  by  analogy  from  conso- 
nant-and  n-stems,  adding  3  to  the  stem:  as, — 

Ti6il,aa'<2^^;  vigUe  {^a),-watch. 

exBul,  an  exile  %  exsuld  (-Sre),  be  in  exile. 

blempa  (slem  hiem-),  winter  i  hiemo  {jixei),  pass  the  winter. 

aeetns,  tide,  seetMngi  aestuo  (-5re),  surge,  boil. 

levlfl  (stem  levi-),  light  i  levo  (-5re),  lighten. 

b,  A  few  verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation  (generally  intransitive) 
are  recognizable  as  formed  from  noun-stems,  but  most  are  inherited, 
or  the  primitive  noun-stem  is  lost:  as, — 

conjugation  are  inheriled.  These  are  (i)  formed 
a  vowel,  asdfi-re  (_D.\),  Bt6.I6  l,?,-\K"\,Ti&te  Vlif^i 
E6J,  B9  voc&re ;  01  \X\  unceiVi 


I 
I 


I 


^1     15S  Etymology:  Formation  of  Words.    [§£  16€,U^^H 

^H  albas,  white ;  albeS,  be  white  (cE  albS,  -Sre,  whitest  under  eu  3)^^^^| 

^H  oanoB  (stem  c3jio<),  ^nar/;  c3jie5,  ^^(^izr/.                               ^^^| 

^H  tmnnlnH,  i(»?  (implying  \  tumaa,  swelling)  ;  tomeO,  sweU,            ^^^^k 

^H  pi5-TlduB,^^fjf<ri/r^j  pio-'videQ,/ciresM.                                         ^^^H 

^1  But  moneo,  remind;  cf.  memiul,  rem*mber.                                     ^^^^k 

^P  algeo,  jf  fnit/;  cf.  algidos,  cold.                                                           ^^^| 

Note.— TliB,  second  conjugation  has  nQdoubledly  been  formed  partly  Ihrough 
the  BEency  of  sterna  like  those  of  the  fitlli  dedension  In  S-,  originally  Ss-:  as, 
tsordes,  As,  filth;  SorileS,  be  dirty,  cC  Eng.  iu>jr//  tfibSs,  -la,  waiting: 
tabeS.  wasle  away  (cf.  also  pQbSs,  pQb8ac5) ;  rea,  tiing;  reop,  reckon. 
Bui  the  traces  of  Ihe  original  IbrmaJion  of  these  verbs  are  almost  lost  from  tlia 

c.  Some  verbs  in  -uo,  -uere  are  formed  from  noun-stems  ia  u- 
where  probably  an  I  has  been  lost :  as,  —  ^^^ 

BtatnH,  fosiiian ;  etatuo,  set  up.  ^^^^| 

tzi.ti'baa,fear\  metnio. /fizA  ^^^^| 

Indu  (old  form  of  in).  (»,  on\  InduS,  put  t/n.  ^^^| 
So,  by  analogy,  exnfl,  do^,  from  ex,  out  of. 

Note.  — Many  verbs  in  u  ate  inherited,  being  formed  from  looS  in  O:  ss, 
fluS.  fluere;  ao-lvC,  aolvere.  Some  raots  have  b  parasitic  Q:  as,  iDQUor, 
locQtua, 

d.  Many  verbs  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation  are  formed  from  i-stemsta 

molSs  (-Ib),  mass  ;  mSllor,  -Ir^  toil. 

HuiB,  endf  flnlS,  -Ire,  bound. 

Bltls,  thirst  i  sitiS,  -Ire,  thirst. 

Btabllia,  stablej  stabilio,  -Ire,  establish. 
Some  arise  by  confusion  from  other  stems  treated  as  if  i-stems :  a 

bulla,  bubble;  bulli8,  -Ire,  boil. 

conduB,  storekeeper  J  oondio,  -Txa,  preserve. 

InaantiB,  piad;  Insanlo,  -ire,  rave. 

genW,  gesture}  gestiS,  -Ire,  shimi  wild  longing. 

cuBtSs,  guardian ;  cuatSdl5,  -Ire,  guard. 

Note.  —  Some  of  this  form  are  of  doubtful  origin:  as,  Ordlor.  i<yi>,  c£  SrdS 
and  ezOrdium.  The  formalion  is  closely  akin  10  thai  of  verbs  in  -IQ  of  (he  (bird 
conjugation  (p,  100) 

2.   Verbs  from  Other  Terba. 
167.   The  following  classes  of  verbs  regularly  derived 
from  other  verbs  have  special  meanings  connected  with 
t£e/r  terminations. 

mi 


of  Vtrbs. 


I 


Inchoatives  add  -bcS  to  the  present  b 
verbs.    They  denote  the  beginning  oi  ^a  action.    Of  some  there  b  u 
simple  verb  in  existence.    Thus, — 

cala6,  be  warm  ;  csl%^ob,  grow  warm. 

labo,  totteri  Iaba-Bc5,  bigtn,io  toiler. 

soi5,  know;  bcI-bcS,  determine. 

cupiS,  desirei  con-cupi-ecB,  conceive  a  desire  for. 

alSj/eed;  ale-Bc6,  grrw. 

So  ba-scor,  gei  angry  ;  cf,  IrS-tos. 

iavene-aco ,  ^-ow  young ;  cf.  iixveaiM,  young  man. 

taIte-Bc6,grow  milJi  cf.  mltis,  mild. 

vesperS-acit,  it  is  getting  late  %  cf.  veBpei,  evening. 

Note. — Inceptives  properly  have  only  Ihe  present  stem,  but  many  use  the 
petfett  and  supine  syslems  of  simple  verbs:  as,  calSaco,  calul;  proflclacor, 
prof  actus. 

h.  Intensives  or  Iteratives  end  in  -t5  or  -ita  (rarely  -95),  and 
Acante.  A  forcible  QT  repealed  zc&aa:  as, — 

iaclS,  throw;  iac-tS,  hurL  J 

dicS,  sayi  dict-ita,  keep  on  saying,  H 

qaatia,  sAaie;  quaa-sfi,  shatter,  ^\ 


They  are  of  the  first  conjugation,  and 
derived  from  the  participle  in  -tua  (stern  fc 

Note. — But  they  were  originally  denominativ 


s  properly  denominative, 


D  of  e) 


\ 


tdlctStO,  &oni  diota. 

called  Meditadves,  or 
>).    These  denote  a  ccr- 


5,  age,  EiKltO  (not-tactC) ;  eo,  dlctitS, 

c.    Another  form  of  Intensives  — 
vixha  oi  practice — ends  in.  -eaao  (rarely 
tain  ettergy  or  eagerness  of  action :  as,  — 

capia,  take;  cap-eaao,  lay  /mid on. 

facia,  do;  fao-essa.  do  (with  energy). 

peta,  seek;  pet-Uao,  seek  (eagerly). 

These  are  of  the  third  conjugation,  usually  liaving  me  perft 

IBUpine  of  the  fourth ;  as,  — 
lacesafi,  laceeaSre,  laceaalvl,  laceaattam,  provoke. 
d.  Diminutives  (derived  from  real  or  supposed  dimw-vi'TOie. 
eod  la  -ills,  and  denote  a  feeble  or  pdly  act\Oti 


Etymology:  Fonnation  of  Words.    [§§  167, 


1 


cants,  st'ng;  cant-illS,  cii'rp  or  laar&le. 

*.  Desideratives  end  in  -turlo  C-Baii5),  and  express  longing  or  kw*-' 
ing.    They  are  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  and  only  three  are  la  comraoQ 

emS,  buy;  emp-turlS,  want  to  hef. 

edS,  eati  S-sari5,  be  hungry.  ^ 

paxlS,  bring  forth ;  par.turiS,  be  i»  labor.  I 

Others  are  used  by  the  dramatists.  j 

Note. — Desideratives  are  derived  from  i 
from  emptor,  iigier,    YIbB,  ^  ia  in,  la  an 

3.    Camponnd  'Words. 

A  CompouniJ  Word  is  one  whose  stem  is  made  up  of 
two  or  more  simple  stems. 

Only  noun-stems  can  be  thus  compounded.  A  preposition,  how 
ever,  often  becomes  attached  to  a  verb. 

168.   New  stems  are  formed  by  composition  as  follows ;' 

a.  The  second  part  is  simply  added  to  the  first:  as, — 
Bu-ove-taurllia  (sQs,  ovla,  tatirusj,  the  sacrifice  of  a  h<fg,  ihtep, 

andbuU{ci.%  164.  r). 
aepten-decim  (aeptem,  decern),  seventeen. 

b.  The  first  part  modifies  the  second  as  an  adjective  or  adverb 
{Determinative  Compounds)  t  as,  — 

lati-fundiiun  (IStuB,  fundus),  a  targe  landed  estate. 

c.  The  first  part  tias  the  force  of  a  case,  and  the  second  a  verl>a1 
force  [Objective  Compounds'):  as, — 

I  In  these  compounds  only  the  second  pari  receives  InflecdDn.  This  U  most 
commoni)'  the  proper  inflection  of  the  last  stem ;  but,  ns  lliii  kind  of  composition 
is  In  fnct  older  tlian  infleeiion,  the  compounded  stem  sometimes  has  an  lliflection 
of  ill  own  (as,  coruloen,  -ciuls;  lucUer,  -feil;  index,  -dlds),  from  stems 
not  occurring  in  Latin.  Espeeially  do  compound  adjectives  In  Latin  lake  the  form 
of  l-s1ems :  as,  anlmuB,  exanlmlB ;  nOiTiiLa,  abnOrmls  (see  tiote,  p.  30).  In 
composition  stems  iegular)y  have  their  untnflecled  form:  as,  tsnt-splcluln, 
divining  iy  Jlrt,  But  O-and  K-alems  weaken  the  fhial  vovrel  of  the  stem  to  1-.  as  in 
Ul-p6s  [torn  Bla,  si.  fllft-) ;  and  1-  is  so  common  a  termiaation  of  compounded 
stems,  thill  il  (s  offen  added  to  stems  which  do  not  properiy  have  it  r  as,  fOAderk 
traruB  (for  ffOBder-Jragaa :  toodUB,  ttre.gviB'j,  tnaly^rtakiiig. 


i 


P|g  168-70.]  Compound  Words.  i6jj 

agri-cola  (ager,  fcola  akia  to  oolO),  afartner. 

aimi-ger  (arma,  \%&s  akia  lo  gero),  armor-deartr. 

cornl-ceD  (oorntl,  -fcen  akin  to  cano),  hern-blower. 

carui-fex  (oard,  ffex  akin  to  faciS),  executioner, 

d,   Compounda  of  the  above  kinds,  ]n  which  the  last  word  is  a  n 
acquire  the  sigDtficaliaii  of  adjectives,  xntamag  possessed  ^tb«  quali^    I 
denoted  {Possessive  Compounds');  as, — 

au-p68  (aia,  pSa),  wing-footed. 

mSgn-anlmas  (magnue,  oj^myM),  greiU-souled, 

con-cora  (con-,  cor),  harmonious. 

an-cepa  (amb-,  oaputj,  double  (having  a  head  at  both  ends). 

Note. —  Many  compounds  of  the  above  classesQppear  onlyin  Iheform  oflorae    ] 
'    Iher  derivalive,  the  proper  compound  being  ImpoSEible  in  Latin  (c£  {  164.  r). 

169.  In  many  apparent  compounds,  complete  words  —  I 
lot  stems — have  grown  together  in  speech. 

These  are  not  strictly  compounds  in  the  etyraoJogica!  sense.    They  j 
are  called  Syidiutic  Compounds.    Examples 

a.   Compounds  of  faoiS,  facts,  with  an  actual  or  formerly  existing   ' 
noun-stem  confounded  with  a  verbal  stem  in  e-.     These  are  CAUSATIVE 
in   force;    as,   oCnsuS-facid,  habituate   (cf.  cSnsaS-soo,  become  ac- 
customed) \  oale-faci5,  cale-facto,  to  lieat  (cf.  caI6-scd,  ^O'.o  warm), 

h.  An  adverb  or  noun  combined  with  a  verb:  as,  bene-dloO  (beao 
dlcB),  to  bless ;  Bat-ago  (aatia  ago),  to  be  busy  enough, 

t.   Many   apparent   compounds   of   stems :    as,   £dl-lube6    (fidel 
Iv.'bKQ),  io  give  surety  t  mSn-au§tii9  (manul  suStus), /awi^j  luppiter 


I 


(tJOa-pater) ;  M3ici-por  (Marcl  puer),  slave  of  Marcus.  ^^M 

d,  A  (ev  phrases  forced  Into  the  ordinary  inflections  of  nouns;  as, —  ^^| 

piS-cSnanl,  proconsul  (for  pro  coaauU,  instead  of  a  consul),  ^^B 

^tiinm-Tir,  triumvir  (singular  from  txiuin  vliSmin).  ^^| 

aepten-trio,  the  Bear,  a  constellation  (supposed  singular  of  aeptem  ^H 

txlonSB,  The  Seven  Oxen).  ^^| 

170.   Many  syntactic  compounds  are  formed  by  prefix-  ^H 

g  a  Particle  to  some  other  part  of  speech  : —  ^H 

a.   Prepositions  are  prefixed  to  Verbs  or  Adjectives.     In  these  com-  ^H 


pounds  the  prepositions  retain  tlieir  original  adverbial 

im,  tr&ns,  and  gove 
(-s«^239.  i.  Rem.), 


IT 


62  Etymology:  Fonnalton  of  Words.  [§  170. 

fi,  ftb,  AWAY :  au-ferre  (ab-ferB),  to  take  away, 

ad,  TO,  TOWARDS ;  at-tette  (ad-ferS),  to  bring. 

ante,  sefoke:  ante-ferre,  to prefer\  ante-cellere,  to  excel. 

olrcum,  around:  olromn-junnlro,  to  fortify  completely. 

oom-,  eon-  (oum),  togetjier  or  forciblvj  con-ferre,  to  bring 

together  i  col-locSao,  to  set ^rm. 
dB,  down,  utterly:  dB-apicere,  despise^  dCstxaere,  destroy. 
8,  ex,  out:  et-ferxo  (eo-ler5),  to  carry  forth,  uplift. 
in  (with  verbs),  in,  on,  against:  In-ferre,  to  bear  against. 
Inter,  bet\veen,  to  piecks  :  inter-rumpere,  to  interrupt. 
ob,  towards,  to  meet:  of-ferre,  to  offers  ob-veniro,  to  meet. 
■ub,  UNDER  :  Bub-otxnere,  to  build  beneath. 
■aper,  upon,  over   and   above:  super-fluere,  to   overflow ^  i 


i 

ing 

i 


NOTK. — In  Ihcse  eompoands  short  B  of  Ihe  root  is  weakened  lol  before  one 
conionatii.  to  e  befors  tuo:  as,  laciC,  cfliiflclfi,  cflnfectus:  laclO,  SiciO, 
Blaotus.    Bui  long  a  Ii  retained :  as,  perftctue. 

k.  Verbs  are  also  compounded  with  the  following  inseparable  parti- 
cles, which  do  not  appear  as  prepositions  in  Latin :  — 

amb-  (am-,  an-),  around:  amb-&e,  togo  about  (cf.  ifi^  abauf). 
dla-,  dl-,  ASfSDER,  APART ;  dis-oSdere,  to  depart  (cf,  <lu5,  two). 
por-,  FORWARD:    por-tendere,  to  Add  forth,  predict  (cf,  ponO, 

rtd-^   re-,   BACK,   Aa«N;   rod-b«,  /*  relumi   re-clfldeie,  J>  (^w< 

(from  elands,  shut) ;  re-Gcete,  to  repair  (make-again). 
•td-.  sS^  APART ;  sS-cetnfi.  to  stpiirate  (dl  sed,  but). 
t.  An  Adjective  is  sometimes  raodiSed  bj  an  adreibial  prefix. 
Of  these,  pel  (less  commonl)'  ^i*»),veryi  iib,  MmtaJtati  iar,mat, 
uc  regular,  and  may  be  prefixed  to  almost  any  adjecdn:  as, — 


PART   SECOND.— USE    OF   WORDS 
(SYNTAX). 


INTRODUCTORY   NOTB. 

The  shidy  of  formal  grammar  arose  al  a  lale  period  in  ihe  history  of  language, 
and  deals  wi!h  language  as  fully  developed.  The  terms  of  Synian  correspond 
accordingly  to  Ibe  logical  babitB  of  thought  that  have  grovm  up  at  such  a  period, 
and  have  therefore  a.  logical  as  well  as  a  si mpl]' grammatical  meaning.  But  Syntax 
as  (hu5  developed  is  not  essential  lo  latiguage^  A  form  of  words — like  0  puerum 
pulcruml  bA/  itaulijkl  ioy—may  express  a  thought,  and  in  some  languages 
might  even  be  a  sentence ;  while  it  does  not  logically  declare  anything,  and  does 
□ot,  strictly  speaking,  make  what  we  call  a  sentence  al  alL 

Al  a  very  early  period  of  spoken  language.  Roofs  were  no  doubt  significant 
in  themselves,  and  constituted  the  whole  of  language, — just  as  to  an  in&nl  the 
came  of  some  &juillar  object  will  stand  for  all  it  can  say  about  iL  At  a  somewhat 
later  stage,  two  simple  roots  pot  side  by  side'  made  a  rudimentary  form  of  propo- 
sidon  :  as  a  child  might  sayjf™  bright;  horse  run.  With  this  be^ns  the  first  form 
of  Ic^cal  distinction,  that  of  Subject  and  Predicate;  but  as  yet  there  is  no  dis- 
tinction between  noun  and  verb  either  in  form  or  function.  Roots  were  presently 
specialized,  or  modified  in  meaning,  by  Ihe  addition  of  other  roots  either  pronom- 
inal or  verbal,  and  Stems  were  formed;  but  the  same  stem  could  still  be  either 
nominal  or  verbal.  In  this  period  composition  is  the  only  form  of  syntax.  Still 
later  —  by  combination  chiefly  of  different  pronominal  elements  with  verb-steins 
and  with  noun-stems  — Inflections  were  developed  to  express /it/-jp»,  iense,  case, 
and  other  grammatical  relations,'  and  we  have  true  parts  of  speech. 

Not  until  language  reached  this  last  stage  was  there  any  limit  lo  the  association 
of  words,  or  any  rule  prescribing  the  manner  In  which  they  should  be  combined. 
But  gradually,  by  custom,  particular  forms  came  to  be  limited  to  special  uses,  or 
were  produced  to  serve  those  uses;  and  rules  were  established  for  combining  words 
in  what  we  now  call  Sentences.  These  rules  are  in  part  general  laws  or  forms  of 
thought  (Logic),  resulting  from  our  habits  of  mind  (General  Grammar)  ;  and  in 
pari  are  what  may  be  called  By-Laws,  established  by  custom  in  a  given  language 
(Par/iailar  Grammar),  and  making  what  Is  called  the  SyntaK  of  that  language. 


most  languages  there  still  lemai 
s,  for  example,  the  nominative  oi 
ission  of  the  Copula  (j  ao6.  c), 
>  ofEUIipsis.    Compare 


le  laarganhed  forms  of  e^rei 
n  Exclamations  ({  240.  d),  and 
i  wrongly  regarded 
e  of  Interjections  generaUy. 


164  Syntax:  Introductory  Note. 

In  the  fully  deirelaped  melhods  of  expression  lo  which  we  are  almost  eiclusircly 
itcuWomurt,  (he  unit  of  eipression  ts  the  Sentence';  that  is,  the  completed  slale- 
ment,  wllh  lli  disdnci  Subjecl  and  Predicate.  OrigiQaily  every  sentence  Is  sioiple. 
But  two  liinple  leatences  may  be  used  logether.  wilhoul  (he  subordioatian  of  either, 
to  express  a  more  complex  form  of  thought  than  can  be  denoted  by  one  alone. 
Tills  is /arfl/iwii  (arranBeraeQl  aideby  side).  In  dme  two  sentences,  thus  habitu- 
ally used  in  connection,  come  to  be  regularly  associated  with  each  other,  in  certain 
reladoni,  as  parts  of  one  logical  idea,  and  the  one  is  felt  to  dtpind  upon  the  other. 
'Hiis  Is  sytilaxii  (arrangement  together).  In  this  way,  through  various  courses  ot 
dcvelopinen(,  which  correspond  lo  the  growth  of  our  habitual  forms  of  thought, 
there  are  produced  various  forms  of  camflcr  seattncis.  Thus  timeS  He  Id 
aooldat  was  originally  two  simple  sentences:  Jfiar.  Lit  Ikai  not  happen!  and 
Iheie,  becoming  attached,  formed  the  complex  sentence:  I  /ear  (lest)  thai  wac 
AaffiH,  The  results  of  these  processes  constitute  the  subject-matter  of  Syntax  as 
shown  in  the  annexed  Oudine. 


I.  A  Sentence  may  be  elUier  Simple  or  Compound 
:onlaining  a    slo, 
Predicate)  ({ 
r.  Containing  two 


i.  SiMPLBj  \  Containing  a    single    statement   (Subject  and 

I  Predicate)  ({  iBo). 


a.  COMPOUND-  J  (ilSo-")- 

j  *.  Modified  by  Subordinate  Clauses  (compUi) 
'  (j  180.  6). 

II,  ThiEisenliat  Purls  of  the  Sentence  are  — 

I.  The  Subject  r   consist-  (  j.  Noun  or  its  equivalent  (}  174, 1). 

ing  o(  1  *.  Pronoun  contained  in  verb-ending  (J  174.  a). 

ia.  Neuter  (intransitive)  Verb  (}  175.  a), 
i.  Copula  wldi  Predicate  Noun  or  Adjective  (j 
17a.  no(e). 
f.  Verb  »i(h  Object  (}  j  175,  *,  177). 
111.  TtnSulijec(  and  Prediiale  may  be  Modified  as  foUows:^ 
a.  Noun  in  Apposition  [j  134). 
*.  AdjecHre  or  Participle  ({  186). 
«.  Noun  in  ObliqiK  Case  (}  178.  a,  < 
d.  Pnposillan  wiih  its  cose  ({  ato). 
t.  Relative  Clause  ({  iS&  t). 


€  *.  Adverb  u  Adveifanl  Phrase  (f  f  179, : 


&  TImVbm  (/)«&«*)  bjiK  Predicate  Adfxtne  (f  191). 

1 1.  Sabordinile  Ouise  (f  iSc^  i). 
IV.  H«M*t  \  *>  ^'^'^  "^  AOkBUItKT  (Mf  Aw^  Cmnr^  (f  iBi), 


I  171-73.]  Subject  and  Predicate.  165I 


Chapter  I. —  The  Sentence. 

1.   DeSnltioiis. 


r 

■  171.    A  Sentence  is  a  form  of  words  which  contains  a  I 

■  Statement,  a  Question,  an  Exclamation,  or  a  Command,      ^1 

a.  A  sentence  in  the  form  of  a  Statement  is  called  a  DECLARATrVE    ' 
Senteince  :  as,  equua  cuirit,  the  horse  r\ 

b.  A  sentence  in  the  form  of  a  Question  is  called  an  InterrogativB 
^LSentence  :  as,  equuane  currit?  does  the  horse  r. 

H      £.  A  sentence  in  the  form  of  an  Exclamation  is  called  an  EXCLAMA- 
^^^DRV  Sentence:    as,  quam  oeleriter  currit   equus!  how  fast  the    ' 

korse  runs  I 

d.  A  sentence  in  the  form  of  a  Command,  an  Exhortation, 
Entreaty  is  called  an  Imperative  Sentence  :  as,  ourrat  equuB,  let  the 
horse  run  ;  i,  ourre  per  AlpSs,  £i7,  run  across  the  Alps. 

172.  Every    sentence    consists   of    a    Subject   and   a 
Predicate. 

I  The  Subject  of  a  sentence  is  the  person  or  thing  J 
spoken  of. 
,  The  Predicate  is  that  which  is  said  of  the  Subject, 
Thus  in  equuB  currit,  the  horse  runs,  equua  is  the  subject,  and  ■ 
^nrrit  the  predicate. 
Note. — Every  complete  senlence  must  conlain  a  subject  ({  174)  and  a 
The  verb  ilself  is  usunlly  Ihe  predicate,  but  «hcn  any  form  of  8um  is  used  simply 
(o  conned  a  noun  or  adjective  as  an  ailribuie  with  the  subject,  such  word  is  called 
the  fredUatf  notei  or  adjective,  and  sum  is  known  as  the  copula  (or  conneciive) 
(j  176.  a).  Thus  in  Coesar  oflnsul  erat,  C<i3ar  -anis  coasul,  Caesar  is  the 
subject,  Ofioaul  the  predicate  noun,  and  evat  Ihe  copula. 

~hjl  Bum  in  the  sense  of  exist  malies  a  complete  predicate  alone.    It  is  then 
d  the  substanHve  verb :  as,  aunt  Vlri  tortSa,  thrrc  an  (exist)  irave  mra. 

2.  Stibjeot  and  Predicate. 

173.  I.  The  Subject  of  a  Finite  verb  is  in  the  Nomi- 
native Case  :  as,  — 

equus  curiit,  tht  horse  runs.  regina  sedet,  the  queen  siti. 

12.  The  Subject  of  an  Infinitive  is  in  the  Accusative 
|(Bee  §  240./)- 

■A  Unite  vCTb  13  a  verb  in  the  Indicalive,  SiiOjiinc 


1 

1 


66  Syntax:   The  Sentence.  [§§  i74-7e. 

174.    I.  The  Subject  of  a  sentence  is  usually  a  Noun  or 
some  word  or  phrase  used  as  a  Noun :  as,  — 

uminum  est  errare,  to  irr  i,  human.  J 

uaeritar  num  mora  malum  ait,  the  guislion  is  ■whether  death  is  an  evil.  ^H 
enit,  iDcertum  est  unde,  he  came,  where  from  is  unterlain-  ^^ 

:.  But  in  Latin  the  subject  may  be  implied  in  the  ter- 
mination of  the  verb  (see  §  206.  a,  b) :  as,  — 

sede-mua,  inc  sit,  curri-tiB,  you  run.  inqoi-t,  says  he. 


175.   Verbs  are  either  Transitive  or  Intransitive. 
a.  An  Intransitive  (or  Neuter)  verb  contains  in  itself  an  ( 


4 


cado,  //all  (am  faUing). 

bol  lucet,  the  sua  is  shining. 

sunt  viri  fortes,  there  are  bra-ue  men. 

b.  A  Transitive  (or  Active)  verb  has  or  requires  a  Direct  Object  to 
complete  its  sense  (see  §  177)  :  as, — 

frittem  cecidic,  he  slew  his  brother. 

Note  i. — Among  transitlvE  verbs  Factitative  Verbs  are  sometimes  dis- 
tinguished as  a  separate  class.  These  state  an  act  whidi/rdifBCfi  the  thing  expressed 
by  the  word  which  completes  their  sense.  Thus  mSnaam  fSclt,  he  made  a  taiU 
(which  was  not  in  existence  before),  is  distinguished  from  menBam  percussit, 
he  struck  a  lahte  (which  already  existed). 

Note  a.  —  A  transitive  verb  may  often  be  used  absolultly  without  any  object  ex- 
pressed: as,  arat,  hi  is  ploughing,  wheie  the  verb  does  not  cease  to  be  transitive 
because  the  object  is  left  indefinite,  as  we  see  by  adding,  —  quid,  tohalt  agrum 
Huum,  his  land. 

3.   Predicate  Noun. 
1 76.   An  intransitive  verb  is  often  followed  by  a  noun  or 
adjective  to  describe  or  define  the  subject.     This  is  called 
a  Predicate  Noun  or  Adjective :  as,  — 
mortauB  cecidit,  he  fill  dead. 
Quintus  s«det  iudex,  Quinlus  sits  as  Judge. 
CaesajT  victor  incidit,  Ctssar  advances  victorious  (a  victor), 
a.  The  copula  atun  especially  is  used  with  a  predicate  noun  or  adjec- 
tive (§  172.  note).    So  also  verbs  signifying  to  become,  to  bt  made,  to 
be    named,    to  appear,    whence    these  are  tailed  Copin.ATivE  {i.e. 
coujiling^  verbs. 
NoTB.  — A  noun  Jn  agreement  with  some  part  ol  liie  pIe4\t»^e  is  tomwiiu'a  a, 
Prediaiie  Noun  (see  §  185.  e}. 


S 176, 177.]  Object.  167I 

b.  A  Predicate  noun  or  adjective  after  the  copula  aum  or  a  copulative 
irb  is  in  tlie  same  case  as  tlie  subject  (see  §  185.  a). 
Roma  est  patria  nostra,  Rome  is  our  country. 
stellae  laddAa  etant,  the  stars  were  irigAl  (cf.  stellae  luceliant^ 
consul  cceitus  est,  he  leas  elected  consul. 
mors  finis  esse  videlur,  dea/A  seems  to  be  the  end. 
dicil  non  omnes  bonos  esse  beatoa,  ke  says  thai  not  all  good  nun  are  happy,  ] 

4.   Object 

177.   The  person  or  thing  immediately  affected  by  the  i 
action  of  a  verb  is  called  the  Direct  Object, 

A  person  or  thing  indirectly  affected  is  called  the  Ik-  ' 
DIRECT  Object. 

Only  transitive  verbs  can  have  a  Direct  Object;  but  an  I 
Indirect  Object  may  be  used  with  both  transitive  and  in- 
transitive verbs  {§§  225,  226).     Thus  :  — 

pater  vocal  filitim  (direct  object),  the  father  calls  his  son. 

Tiiihl  (ind.  obj.)  agmm  (dir.  obj.)  ostendit,  hi  shovied  me  afield. 

mihi  (ind.  obj.)  placet,  it  is  flensing  la  me. 

Note. — The  distinction  between  transitive  and  Intransitive  verbs  Is  not  fixed, 

1  most  transilive  verbs  may  be  used  inlransllively,  and  many  verbs  usually  in- 

nsitive  may  take  a  direct  object  and  so  become  transitive  ({  237.  i). 

a.  When  a  transitive  verb  is  changed  from  the  Active  to  the  Passive 
ice,  the  Direct  Object  becomes  the  Subject  and  is  put  in  the  nom- 

Active:    pater  llUum  vocat,  tht  father  calls  [hia]  son. 
Passive:  EUnsS  patre  vocator,  rte  jon  is  called  by  his  father. 
Active  :    loaam  et  Stellas  videmus,  it>e  see  the  moon  and  Ike  stars. 
Passive:  lona  et  itellae  videntur,  the  mson  and  stars  are  seen  (appear). 

b.  With  certain  verbs,  the  Genitive,  Dative,  or  Ablative  is  used 
rhere  the  English,  from  a  ditTerence  in  meaning,  requires  the  Objective. 

hominem  video,  Isa  the  man  (Accusative). 
hominl  serviQ,  I  serve  Ihe  man  (Dative,  see  §  227). 
hominis  mlsereor,  I  pity  Ike  man  (GENITIVE,  see  %  221.  a). 
homine  amico  utor,  I  treat  Ihe  man  as  a  friend  (^A&LATlVE,  see  §  249). 
C.  Many  verbs  transitive  in  Latin  are  translated  in  English  by  a 
atransitive  verb  with  a  preposition :  as,  — 
pctil  apcum,  ie  aims  at  Ihe  boar, 
laudeiD  aSectat,  Ae  sirives  after  praise, 
curat  taletHdinem,  Ae  lakes  cars  of  his  health. 


Syntax:   The  Sentence. 


Note.  —  One  or  more  words,  essenlial  t 
tntence,  but  cicar  enough  lo  the  mind  of  a  1 
ion  is  called  ELLIPSIS,  and  Ihe  sentence 
u,  odeat,  it  is  here;  quia?  (sc.  adest),  i 

5.  MocUficatioii. 

178.  A  Subject  or  a  Predicate  may  be  modified  by  a 
single  word,  or  by  a  group  of  words  (a  Phrase  or  a  Clause, 
see  §§  179,  180). 

The  modifying  word  or  group  of  words  may  itself  be 
modified  in  the  same  way. 

I.  A  single  modifying  word  may  be  an  adjective,  an  adverb,  an 
appositive  (§  184),  or  the  oblique  case  of  a  noun.  Thus  in  the  sentence 
vir  fortiH  patienter  fert,  a  brave  man  bears  pal ieiiify,  the  adjective 
fortls,  brave,  modifies  the  subject  vir,  atan,  and  the  adverb  patienter, 
patienlly,  modifies  the  predicate  fert,  bears. 

b.  The  modifying  word  is  in  some  cases  said  to  limit  the  word  to 
which  it  belongs.  Thus  in  the  sentence  pueri  patrem  vide6, 1  see 
the  boy's  father,  the  genitive  pueil  limits  patrem  (by  excluding  any 
other  father). 

179.  A  Phrase  is  a  group  of  words,  without  subject  or 
predicate  of  its  own,  which  may  be  used  as  an  Adjective 
or  an  Adverb. 

Thus  in  the  sentence  vir  fnit  siunma  nSbilltSte,  he  was  a  man  c/ 
the  highest  nobitity,  the  words  summa  nSbilitate,  of  the  highest 
nobility,  are  used  for  the  adjective  nSbillB,  noble  (or  nSbilisBimaB, 
very  noble),  and  are  called  an  Adjective  Phrase.  In  the  sentence 
mSgnSl  celetitate  v§nlt,  he  came  iviik  great  speed,  the  words  mSgnS 
celerltSte,  with  great  speed,  are  used  for  the  adverb  oelerlter, 
quickly  (or  oelerrimB,  very  quickly),  and  are  called  an  Adverbial 
Phrase.  ' 

180.  Sentences  are  either  Simple  or  Compound. 

A  sentence  containing  a  single  statement  is  called  a 
Simple  Sentence. 

A  sentence  containing  more  than  one  statement  is  called 
a  Compound  Sentence,  and  each  single  statement  in  it  is 
called  a  Clause. 


r 


Modification.  169  I 

0.  If  one  statement  Is  simply  added  to  another,  the  clauses  are  said  1 

be  Co-ordinate.  They  are  usually  connected  by  a  Co-ordinate 
Conjunction  {§  154.(2);  but  thisissometimes  omitted  (§  208.^).   Thus: 

divide  et  iinper£,  divide  and  conquer,     llul, - 

veni,  vidi,  vici,  /  came,  I  taw,  I  conquered, 

statement  modifies  another  in  any   way,   the   modifying    ' 

ta  be  SuBoRDtNATE,  and  the  clause  modilied  b  called  the  ' 

.Main  Clause. 

This  subordination  Is  indicated  by  some  connecting  word,  either  a  ' 
Subordinate  Conjunction  or  a  Relative  (§  154,  ij  !  a 

Dderiat  dam  luetuant,  lei  them  kale  so  long  as  they  fiar. 

qaem  secum  habebat,  he  sent  Die  slave  'whom  he  had  wilh  him, 

A  sentence  containing  one  or  more  subordinate  clauses  is  sometimes 

led  Complex. 

Note.  —  A  subordinate  clause  may  itself  be  modified  by  another  subordinate 

c.  A  clause  introduced  by  a  Relative  pronoun  or  adverb  is  called 
a  Relative  Clause. 

A  clause  introduced  by  an  adverb  of  time  is  called  a  TEMPOitAL 
Clause,     Thus :  — 

doia  tacent  clamant,  vihile  they  are  silent  they  cry  atoud. 

homines  aegri  morbo  gravi  cum  iactantur  aestii  febriqae,  ^  aqoam  Eelidam 
biberint  primo  relevan  videntur,  men  suffering  -with  a  senere  sickness, 
luhen  they  are  tossing  leiih  the  heat  of  fever,  if  thry  drink  cold  ■water, 
seem  at  first  to  be  relieved, 

d.  A  clause  containing  a  Condition,  introduced  by  al,  if,  or  some 
[uivalent,  is  called  a  Conditional  Clause.  A  sentence  containing 
conditional  clause  is  called  a  Conditional  Sentence. 

lus,  al  aquam  ETslids 
;)  is  a  Conditional  Seniei 
A  clause  expressing  the  Purpose  of  an  action  is  called  a  FINAL 

edo  ut  vivam,  /  eat  to  live  (that  I  mjy  live). 

legatos  qui  diceretit,  he  sent  ambassadors  to  say  (who  should  say). 
A  clause  expressing  the  Result  of  aa  action  is  called  a  Consecutive 

.USE.' 

,m  longe  abeiam  nt  Hon  viderem,  Iwas  too  far  away  to  see  (so  far  away 
that  I  didn't  see). 

1  Obsarre  that  the  classes  defined  in  ri-<f  are  not  mutually  exclusive,  but  that  a 
jingta  clause  may  belong  10  several  of  ihem  al  once,    T\\ua  a.  ve\a)ine  iiNa.\sseLia 
iaborxiiDa.se,  and  ma/  be  at  the  same  time  coo^triatiai-,  Bni  vioQt^iKoUaL 
lay  be  co^idinaxe  wilh  each  other.  J 


I 


t/O  Syntax:   The  Senlettce.  [%%  180-84. 

/.  Sentences  or  clauses  are  regularly  connected  by  means  of  CON- 
JUNCTIONS; but  frequently  in  Latin  —  more  rarely  in  English  —  inde- 
pendent sentences  are  connected  by  Relative  Pronouns  or  Adverbs. 
In  this  case,  the  relative  is  often  best  translated  in  English  by  a  con- 
juncrion  with  a  demonstrative  (cf.  §§  2ol.  «,  336.  #.  Rem.):  as, — 


AQREEMENT. 


181.  A  word  is  said  to  agree  with  another  when  it 
is  required  by  usage  to  be  in  the  same  Gender,  Number, 
Case,  or  Person. 

182.  The  following  are  the  general  forms  of  Agreement, 
sometimes  called  the  Four  Concords  :  — 

1.  Theagreementof  the  Noun  in  Apposition  or  as  Predicate  (§§  184, 
i8s). 

2.  The  agreement  of  the  Adjective  with  its  Noun  (§  1S6). 

3,  The  agreement  of  the  Relative  with  its  Antecedent  (§  198). 

4,  The  agreement  of  the  Verb  with  its  Subject  {§  204). 

a.  A  word  sometimes  takes  the  gender  or  number,  not  of  the  word 
with  which  it  should  regularly  agree,  but  of  some  other  word  impliid 
In  that  word.  This  use  is  called  Synesis,  or  cBnstr&ctid  ad  sensum 
(construction  according  to  sense). 

I.-NOUNS. 

183.  A  noun  used  to  describe  another,  and  denoting 
the  same  person  or  thing,  agrees  with  it  in  Case  ;  as,  — 


Servius  rai,  Srrvius  the  king. 

ad  urbeni  Athenas,  is  iht  n'ly  [of]  Alltrm. 

Cicero  oSnatll  crealur,  Cicero  is  thosen  connii 


a 


The  descriptive  noun  may  be  either  an  Appositive  (§  184)  or  a  Predi- 
cate noun  (§  iSs). 
■  1.   Apposition. 

184.  The  descriptive  noun,  when  in  the  same  part  of 
the  sentence  with  the  noun  described,  is  called  an  Apposi- 
T/VE,  and  is  said  to  be  in  ApPOsn:ioti  -.  a.s, — 


i5  184, 185.]  Ap'eement  of  Nouns. 


m  concordiae  Tincttlom,  inngebat  ojiimoa  (Ui 
fiar  oflliffortigiitr,  the  chief  bond  of  harmony,  untied  their  kii 
[Here  the  deacriplive  noun  belongs  to  the  su^ect7\ 
quattuor  hie  priDiimi  omen  equos  vidi  (■En.  iii.  537),  /  saw  here  fo\ 

harm,  the  first  omen.     [Here  both  DOUia  are  in  the  Jiredicale:] 
lieieras  Graeciis  senex  didia  (Cat,  M,  8),  tlfarned  Greek  when  an  old  man. 
[Here  senex  is  in  apposition  with  the  anbject  of  didici,  and  expresses 
the  time,  condition,  etc.,  of  the  act.] 

a.  An  appositive  with  two  or  more  douhs  is  in  the  plural :  as,  — 
Gnaeus  et  Publius  Scipiones,  Cnei%a  and  Ptdlius,  the  Scifios  (Cneius  and 

Publius  Scipio). 

b.  An  appositive  generally  agrees  in  Gender  and  Number  when  it 


1 


Eequuntor  naturam,  optimam  ducem  (Lid.  19},  they  fBllem  nature,  the  it3f\ 


oniniuni  doctrinainm  inventricis  Athenas  (De  Or.  i  4%  Athens,  discevei 

of  all  learning. 
Note. — But  such  agreement  is  often  Impossible :  as, — 
olini  tmncna  eram  ficulnns  inutile  lignum,  I  once  laas  a  Jlg-lree  trunk,  a 

meUss  kg  (Hot.  Sat.  i.  8.  1). 

c.  A  common  noun  in  apposition  nith  a  Locative  {%  Z5S.  c)  is  put 
o  the  Ablative,  with  or  without  the  preposition  in :  as,  — 

Antiochiae,  celebrifinondam  nrbe  (Atch.  3),  o( /^H/iDci,  onceafamimscity. 
Albae  conaliterunt  in  urbe  miinila  (Phil.  iv.  2),  they  halted  at  Alba,  a  farti- 
fiedto^n. 

d.  A  possessive  pronoun  or  an  adjective  implying  possession  may 
take  an  appositive  in  the  genitive  case  agreeing  in  gender,  number,  and 

e  with  an  implied  noun  or  pronoun  (S  197.  e):  as, — 
in  nostro  omnium  fletu  (Mil.  34),  amid  the  tears  of  us  all. 
EX  Anniani  Milonis  domo  (Att.  iv.  3)  [—  ex  Anni  Milonis  domo],  out  of 
Annias  Afilo's  house. 

t.  A  genitive  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  an  appositive  (see  § 
214./).     So  also  a  dative  in  certain  constructions  (see  §  231.  6). 

2.  Predicate  Agreement 

The  Predicate  noun  may  agree  (i)  with  the  subject,  being  connected 
with  it  by  the  copula  or  a  copulative  verb  (§  176.  a),  or  (z)  with  the 
direct  object  of  a  verb. 

186.  A  descriptive  noun  used  to  form  a  predicate  is 
called  a  Predicate  Nominative  ^oi  ot^k&i  ca&^  assKitSaisfe. 
to  the  construction). 


I/Z  Syntax;  The  Sentence.  [SS  185,  186. 

a.  The  case  of  the  predicate  aAer  the  copula  and  copulative  verbs  ts 
the  same  as  that  of  the  subject  (5  176.  *)  :  as,  — 

pads  semper  anctor  fui  (Lig.  19,  aS),  I  have  ahaays  ittn  an  adviser  of ftact. 
quae  pertinacia  ijuibusdam,  eadem  aliis  conatantia  videri  potest  (Marc  lo, 

31),  'Uthal  may  seem  ohUnacy  to  some,  may  seem  to  alktrs  consiilency. 
eius  mortis  sedetis  nltorea  (Mil.  29,  79),  you  sit  as  avengers  efhis  death. 
habcatur  vir  egiegius  Paulus  (Cat.  iv.  10,  21).  let  Paulus  be  regarded  as  on 

ego  patronuB  exstili  (Roac.  Am.  2,5),  I  have  come  forward  as  on  aduocale. 

b.  A  predicate  noun  referring  to  two  or  more  singular  nouns  is  in  the 

ConsuleB  creantar  Caeaar  et  Servilius  (B.C.  iii.  ij,  Cssar  and Strviiius an 
elected  consuls. 

c.  For  Predicate  Accusative,  see  under  that  case,  §  239. 

II. -ADJECTIVES. 
1.   Rules  of  Agreement. 

186.   Adjectives,  Adjective  Pronouns,  and   Participles 
agree  with  their  nouns  in  Gender,  Number,  and  Case. 

vir  forlis,  a  brave  man. 

ilia  mulier,  that  vmman. 

urbium  magnarura,  of  great  cities. 

cum  ducentis  militibus,  with  joo  soldiers. 

impecatoc  victus  est,  the  general  was  b/alin. 

Note. — All  rules  for  the  agreement  of  adjeciives  apply  also  lo  adjeclive  pro- 
nouns and  lo  participles. 

Adjectives  are  either  Attributive  or  Predicate. 

a.  An  Attributive  adjective  simply  qualities  its  noun  without  the 

intervention  of  a  verb  or  participle,  expressed  or  implied, 
bonus  imperator,  a  good  commander. 

atellae  liicidae,  bright  stars.  I 

6.  All  other  adjectives  are  called  Predicate  adjectives.  I 

1.  A  predicate  adjective,  like  a  predicate  noun,  maybe  connected 

with  the  subject  by  OBaa  or  a  copulative  verb  expressed  or  implied  (see 

5  i?6.  .).  »,,- 

stellae  lucidac  eraiit,  the  stars  were  bright. 

3.  After  verbs  of  naming,  calling,  making,  etc.,  an  adjective  may  be 
used  as  a  predicative  accusative  like  a  noun  (see  §  239.  a). 

J.  A  predicate  adjective  may  be  used  in  apposition  like  a  noun  (see 
below). 


|ni: 


186,  187.1 


Agreement  of  Adjectives. 


173    ■ 


e.  Predicate  adjectives  in  apposition  follow  the  rules  of  agreement 
of  other  adjectives  (see  §  186,  above)  :  as,  — 

Scipionem  vivnm  vidi,  T  saw  Scipio  in  his  Hfitime  (lit.,  living). 
d.  With  two  or  more  nouns  the  adjective  is  regularly  plural,  but 
^s  agrees  with  the  nearest  (especially  when  attributive).    Thus 
,    Niaus  et  Euryalus  primi  (^n.  v.  294),  Nisus  and Euryalus first, 

Caesiris  omm  et  gtalia  et  opibus  fruor  (Fam.  i.  9),  Itrtjoy  all  Casar'sfavoi 


In  adjective  referring  to  two  nouns  connected  by  cum,  is  occasionaUjr    I 
Labieno  oapti  (B.  Afr,  51),  Juba  and  LaMtnus  -uitrt  lak, 


I 


I 


187.   One   adjective   may  belong   in    sense   to   two  or  J 
;  nouns  of  different  genders. 
In  such  cases, — 

An  attributive  adjective  agrees  with  the  nearest :  as,  — 
mnlt&e  operae  ac  laboris,  of  much  trauhle  and  toil. 
loresque  mei,  my  life  and  characUr. 

si  vir,  ai  tempus  nllnin  Jignum  fuit  (Mil.  7),  if  any  thing,  if  any 
an,  if  any  linu  ^«sfit. 

2.  A  predicate  adjective  may  agree  with  the  nearest,  if  the  r 
form  one  connected  idea:  as, — 

faetuB  est  slrepilus  et  admunouratio  (Verr.  i.  15),  a  ttoise  of  assen 

made  (noise  and  muimur). 
Note.— This  is  only  when  the  Copula  agrees  with  the  nearest  subject  (§2 
b.  But  generally,  a  predicate  adjective  will  be  masculine,  if  nou 
different  genders  mean  living  beings ;  neuter,  if  things  withoul  life 
nxor  deinde  ic  llben  amplexi  (Liv,  ii.  40),  then  his  wife  and  children 

embraced  him. 

lahor  (m.)  volnptaaque  (f.),  societate  quidam  inter  se  natiitilT  sunt  ioneta 

(N.)  (id.  v.  4},  labor  and  delight  are  bound  together  by  a  certain  natural 


Note.  —  If  nouns  of  different  gendeis  include  both  ma! 
nilhoul  lile,  a  predicate  adjective  is  sometimes  masculine,  si 
agrees  in  gender  wlUi  the  nearest  if  that  is  plural: 


beings  and  things 


.  xii.  50) ,  tie  king  and  ike  royal  fleet 

nilura  inimlca  sunt  libera  civitas  et  rex  (id,  xliv.  2/^},  by  nature  a  free  state 

and  a  king  are  hostile. 
legitos  BortcEgue  oraculf  exapect,andas  (id,  v.  15),  that  tXe   unba^dan 
aa'/Mere/>/iisi^(iearacle  should  be  ■wailed  for,  '"    '' 


174  Syntax:   The  Sentence.  [§§  187,  isa 

e.  Two  or  more  abstract  nouns  of  the  same  gender  may  have  a  predi- 
cate adjective  la  the  neuter  plural  (cf.  §  1S9.  e);  as,  — 

Etultitia  et  [emeritii  et  iniuEtitia  .  . .  sunt  fagienda  (Fin.  iii.  it),  /ally, 
rashness,  and  injustice  are  [thirgs]  is  ie  shunned. 

d.  A  collective  noun  may  take  an  adjective  of  a  different  gender 
and  number  agreeing  with  the  gender  and  number  of  the  individuals 
implied  {Syneds,  %  182.  0)1  as,— 

para  certire  pariti  (.-En.  v.  108),  a  pari  ready  ta  conleneL 
dno  milifl  reliota  (Liv.  xxuvii,  39),  iivB  thousand  were  lift. 
coloniae  aliquot  deduclae,  Prisci  Latiui  appellSU  (id.  i.  3),  several  cnhnies 

were  planted  (led  out)  [of  men]  called  Old  Latins. 
inigna  para  laptae  (id.  i,  9),  a  large  pari  [of  Ihe  women]  were  seined. 
omnis  aeCas  currere  obvii  (id.  xxvii.  51),  [people  of]  every  age  ran  to  meet 

e.  A  superlative  in  the  predicate  sometimes  takes  the  gender  of  the 
partitive  genitive  by  which  it  is  limited ;  as,  — 

vaocissimura  animaium  delphlnus  est  (PHn.),  the  dolphin  is  tie  swiftest 
[creature]  0/ creatures. 

2.   Adjeotivea  naed  Subatantivelj. 

188.  Adjectives  are  often  used  as  Nouns  {substantively), 
the  masculine  usually  to  denote  men  ox  people  in  general 
of  that  kind,  the  feminine  women,  and  the  neuter  things 


omnes,  all  men  (everyhodyj . 

maiorea,  ancestors. 

Romani,  Jfomans.  barbari,  barbarians. 

Ubeita,  a  freedaioman.  Sabinae,  Ihe  Saiine  vii 

Eapiens,  a  sage  (philosopher).  amicus,  afi-iend. 

boni,  the  good  (good  people).  bona,  goods,  property. 


I 


Remark,— The  plural  of  ai 
in  this  use.    The  singular  is  rare  except  in  a  few  words  which  have  become  practi- 
cally nouns.    See  below  and  j  189.  a. 

a.  Certain  adjectives  have  become  practically  nouns,  and  are  often 
modified  by  other  adjectives.    Thus,  — 

tnua  vicinus  yxotXmvs,  your  next-door  neighbor. 

propinqui  ceteri,  his  other  relatives. 

meos  aeqaalis,  a  man  of  my  awn  age. 

famililris  tuus,  an  inHmaU  friend  of  yours  (cf.  %  zi8.  rf)- 

^.   When  nay  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  aubstantiv*  use  of  an 
adjective,  a  noun  must  be  added.     Ttius, — 


t  las,  189.]       Adjectives  used  Substanlively. 

I    bom,  eif^uo'i',' omnia,  nvr^Mfn^  (all  thingi);  bnt, — 
I    poCentia  omninin  reram, /0avr  over  tverylAttig.     [oi 

.  Many  adjectives  are  used  substantively  either  ii 


auric  like  those  in  {  iSg,  a 

adjective,  and  may  then  be    , 


Africus  [ventua],  lAi  saulk-ivnl  wind. 
vilulina  [carS],  veal  (calTs  flesh), 
[bestia],  a  wild  btast. 
ia  Ctena],  tht  falhtrlattd. 
Gallia  [terra].  Caw/ (the  land  of  the  Galll). 
hibema  [castra],  winter  quarltrs. 

"s  [navis] ,  a  Iht  ee-iankrd galley,  trirc 
argenlirius  [faber],  a  silverstnitk. 
■egia  [domns].  Ike  palace. 
Lalinae  [feriae],  Ike  Lalin  feslival. 
Tuaci  [filndi],  a  Tuscan  estate. 

—  These  are  specific  in  meaning,  nol  ge 

d.  A  noun  is  sometimes  used 
modified  by  an  adverb :  as,  — 

execcilus,  Ihe  vicUrious  army. 
seivum  pecus,  a  servile  troop. 
admodum  puer,  guile  a  hoy  (young), 
magis  vir,  more  of  a  miH  (more  manly), 

e.  A  few  adverbs  appear  to  be  used  like  adjectives.     Such  are;  — 

1.  obviam :  as,  — 

Et  obviam,  he  goes  to  meet  (becomes  in  the  way  ofl. 

2.  contiS,   contradicting 
anaer  repeating  it :  as,  — 

alia   piubabilia,   contra  alia   dicimiis   (Off.   ii 
prohnhle,  others  the  opposite  (nol  probable). 

3.  palam :  as,  — 
palam  res  est,  the  thing  is  all  out. 

4.  So  also,  rarely,  by  a  Creek 
etl  semper  lenitas  (Ter.  Andr.  l; 


previous    adjective, 
0,  ^e  . 


It  (aiways)  gentle- 


189.  Neuter  adjectives  are  used  substantively  in  the  fol- 
lowing special  senses  :  — 

a.  The  neuter  singular  may  denote  uthet  a  un^e,  (itiiwS.  ™  ■*-f 
Slmtract  qaality :  as, —  ■  ■■     •■  -      — *-  _»■,«.     .— 


I 


1^6  Syntax:   The  Sentence.  [§5 189,  isa 

rapid  Tliere,  lo  livt  iy  flumJer. 

In  irido,  BH  dry  ground. 

honeMuni,  an  honorabU  act,  or  virlui  as  a  qnilitf. 

opnt  cM  mituiala,  Mcr^  I'j  Hied  ofhasU  (cf.  impersonal  pi 

b.  The  neuter  ^/uro/ is  used  lo  signify  objects  in  general  having  tiie 
quality  denoted,  and  lience  may  stand  for  the  abstract  idea:  as, — 

honeila,  konarable  dnJi  (in  general),  ^H 

praeteriCa,  the  pas!  (lit-,  bygones).  H 

omnes  fortla  laudant,  all  men  f  raise  bravery  {brave  things),  ^| 

c.  A  neuter  adjective  may  be  used  as  an  appositive  or  predicate^ 
noun  with  a  noun  of  different  gender  (cf.  §  187.  c):  as, — 

turpitiido  pcius  est  qunm  dolor  (Tusc.  ii.  13),  disgrace  is  [a  thing]  uifrse 

trl»te  lupus  atahulis,  lit  Tool/is  a  grievous  Ikittgfor  lie  sketpfeld. 

varium  et  mutibile  semper  femina,  woman  is  eoer  a  changing  and  fickle 

thing. 
malum  mih!  videtut  esse  mots  (Tusc.  i.  5,9),  dtatk  scents  la  me  to  be  an  evil 

(■bad  thing). 
rf,  A  neuter  adjective  is  used  in  agreement  with  an  Infinitive  or  a 
Substantive  Clause  :  as, — 

hluc  ipsum  non  ctsc  (Tusc.  i,  6,  11),  thai  very  •' not  lo  be." 

hunianuin  est  eirare,  to  err  is  human. 

klind  CM  errarc  Cacsarcm  nolle,  ftliad  nolle  misered  (Lig.  5),  ^iinrtfMinif 

tv  he  HMwilliitg  thai  Cittar  should  err,  another  to  ie  un-willing  tial  kt  7 

thouUfity. 

3.   PoHesalveH. 

100.  Possessive  and  other  derivative  adjectives  are 
often  used  in  Latin  where  the  English  has  the  possessive 
case,  ur  a  noun  with  a  preposition  (compare  §§  i%^  d, 
197. »t):  as,— 

^Sna  CVineDsb,  lh*/ight  at  <'imim'. 

U  Blijt^ua  Cumumt,  Cairn  Bl-tsiimi  ofCumm. 

•llcna  Joniiu.  mtoiher  amm's  htmir. 

CMWjhia  cehrilM  (.ML  svL  10).  AyUnt  Ur  Omt*!  CTIifmi  qndc- 
B«a). 

«.  I'teMSUTC  and  otbo-  derintit*  adjcctms  ve  oAcn  osed  9 
ti<(vly  to  denote  soaw  specul  cbo  or  ic^tion  (see  J  197.  ^}:  m 

noMri  Mr  iifJijaac  w  atna  ^Jf/mp. 


re 

t^e 

4 


:.]       Comparatives  and  Superlativei 


t 


i  190-93. 

i.  A  possessive  or  derivative  a.djet:tive  sometimes  appears  to  be  i 
)r  the  Objective  Genitive,  see  §  2ij.  a. 

4.  AdjeotiTes  ivith  Adverbial  Foroe. 

191.  An  adjective,  agreeing  with  the  subject  or  object  I 
often  used  to  qualify  the  action  of  the  verb,  having  the  \ 

Tce  of  an  adverb  :  as,  — 

primus  veoit,  A/  cami first  (was  Ihe  firsl  to  cooie). 

nullus  dubito,  /  «d  ■way  doiidl. 

laeti  audiere,  Ihey  vitre  glad  la  krar. 

cral  Romae  frequens  (Rose.  Am,  6),  he  taat  oflen  at  Romr. 

Berus  in  caelum  redeas  (Hor.  Od,  i.  i),  may'st  theu  return  lale  to  heave 

5.   Comparativea  and  BuperlatlTeB. 

192.  When  two  qualities   of  an  object  are  compared, 
)th  adjectives  are  in  the  comparative  :  as,  - 

longior  quam  litior  acies  erat  (Liv.  xxvii.  48),  the  line  viat  longer  than  it    I 
mas  braaJ  (or,  rather  long  than  broad). 

a.  Where  magiB  is  med,  both  adjectives  are  in  the  positive :  a 

clSri  magis  quam  honesti  (Jug.  8),  rriare  renowned  than  honorable. 

b.  A  comparative  and  a  positive,  or  even  two  pasitives,  are  sometimes   ] 
connected  by  quam :  as,  — 

claru  maioribus  quam  vetnaiaH  (Ann,  iv.  61),  of  a  family  more  famous 

old. 
vehementiua  quam  caule  (Agric.  4),  viilh  more  fary  than  good  heed. 
Note.— This  use  is  rater  and  less  elegant  than  those  before  noticed. 

193.  Superlatives  (and  more  rarely  comparatives)  de- 
noting order  and  succession  —  also  medius,  oetertii,  rell- 
quuB  —  usually  designate  not  what  object,  but  what  pari 
of  it,  is  meant :  as,  — 

summus  mons,  the  top  of  the  hill. 
in  ollimi  pUtea,  at  Ihe  end  of  the  plate. 
prior  actio,  the  earlier  pari  of  an  action. 
reliqui  captiyi,  Ihe  rest  of  Ihe  prisoners. 
in  cotle  mediS  (B.  G.  L  2+>,  on  the  middle  of  the  hill. 
inter  citeram  plSnitiem  (Jug.  92),  in  a  region  elseiuhere  level. 
Note.— A  similar  use  is  found  in  such  Bipressions  as  B6r&  (multB,)  nocM, 
late  at  nighi.    Bui  medium  vla«,  the  middle  of  the  m^ ;  T&iitt'aatt  4^eL,««K>i 


I 


m^" 


r 


178  Syntax:   The  Sentence.  [§5 194,  i 


lll.-PRONOUNS. 

Note. — A  pronoun  indicales  some  person  or  filing  witboirt  eilher  naming  or 
describing  il.  Pronoun!  are  derived  from  a  distinct  cla&9  of  roots,  whicli  seem  to 
have  denoted  only  ideas  of  place  and  directioa  (j  157,3),  and  from  which  nouns  or 
verbs  can  very  rarely  t>e  formed.  They  may  therefore  stand  for  Nouns  when  Uie 
person  or  Ihing,  being  present  lo  the  sensesar  imagination,  needsonlylo  be  pointed 
ouL  Soma  pronouns  indicate  the  object  in  itself,  without  lefetence  to  its  class,  and 
hare  no  disiioction  of  gender.  These  are  Personal  Pronouns.  They  stand 
syntactically  for  Nouns,  and  have  Ihe  same  construction  as  nouns.  Others  designate 
a  particular  object  of  a  class,  and  take  the  gender  of  the  individuals  of  that  class. 
These  are  called  ADpmVE  PRONOUNS.  They  stand  for  Adjectives,  and  have  the 
same  construction  as  adjectives.  Others  are  used  In  both  ways ;  and,  though  called 
adjective  pronouns,  may  also  be  treated  as  personal,  taking,  however,  the  geader 
of  the  object  indicated. 

1.  Personal  Ftohouus. 

194.  The  Persona]  Pronouns  have,  in  general,  the  same 
constructions  as  nouns, 

a.  The  personal  pronouns  are  not  expressed  as  subj'ects,  except  for 
distinction  or  emphasis  (compare  §  346.  d) :  as,  — 

le  voco,  I  call  you  ;  but 

quis  me  vocal  ?  ^ole  voco,  who  is  eallingme  f  /(emphatic)  am  calling  you. 

b.  The  personal  pronouns  have  two  forms  for  the  genitive  plural, 
that  in  -flm  being  used  partitively  {%  216),  and  that  in  -I  oftenest 
objectively  (cf.  §213.2):  as,  — 

maior  Teatrnm,  Ihi  elder  of  you. 

babeCis  ducem  memorem  vestn,  oblilum  sui  (Cat.  iy.  8),  jw«  have  a  leader 

■who  liinis  (is  mindful)  o/you  and  forgets  (ia  forgetful  oV)  himself. 
[jars  noatrSra,  a  pari  (i.e.  some)  of  us. 
noatri  melior  pars  animus  eat  (Sen.),  the  beHer  farl  of  us  (_i./.  of  man)  is 

US  ex  aula  or  tp^B  (rarely 
1,  veBtrCtm  are  occasionally 

used  objectively  (J  217);    as,  cupidua  vestrOm  (Verr.  iii.  g6) , /oad  0/ yjn ; 

oQatBo  voatrtlm  (Cat  iii.  12),  thi  guardian  of  you  (your  guardian). 

c.  The  Latin  has  no  personal  pronouns  of  the  third  person  except 
the  reflexive  (Ȥ).  The  want  is  supplied  by  a  Demonstrative  or  a  Rela- 
tive (§§  180./,  19s,  201.  ^). 

2.   Bemonstrative  Pronottna. 

195.  Demonstrative  pronouns  are  used  either  adjec- 
tiucly  or  substantively. 

As  adjectives,  they  follow  the  rules  for  the  agreement 
of  adjectives  (§§  i86,  187). 


I 


( 


Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

I  As  substantives,  they  are  equivalent  to  personal   pro-   \ 
fOuns.     This  use  is  regular  in  the  oblique  cases,  especially 
""of  i».     Thus  :  — 
.  Persona] ; — 

Caesar  et  eierdlus  eiQB,  Cicsar  and  his  army  {aoK^'i.M^.    [Bui,  Caesat  ei 

ercitum  Bnuitt  dimisit,  Ctsar  dishandtd ki$  [own]  armi'.] 
»i  obddis  ab  eis  dnrenlur,  i/Aoslages  should  bt  given  ty  them  (persons  ju: 

hia  Caesar  ila  respondif,  to  ihrm  Casar  thus  rtplUd, 

ille  minimimi  propter  adolescenti'am  poterat,  he  (emphadi:)  had  very  Utile 

power,  c»  account  of  his  yonlh. 
hi  sunt  extra  provinciam  trans  Rhodanum  primi,  ihey  ( those  just  mentioiied) 

art  the  first  [inhabitants]  otrojj  Ihi  Rhone. 

:.  Adjective:  — 
h5c  proelio  ^axXa,  after  tkis  battle  was  fought  (this  battle  having  been,  el 
eodem  proelio,  in  the  same  battle. 
EtDS  rei  peiiti,  men  aefuainliJ  with  that  business. 

[For  special  signifiealions  of  the  demonstratives,  see  J  loa.] 

a.  The  demonstratives  are  sometimes  used  as  pronouns  ofreferei 
|to  indicate  with  emphasis  a  noun  or  phrase  just  mentioned:  as, — 

nuHam  virtus  aliam  roercedem  deaiderat  praeter  hano  laudis  (Arch,  ii), 
virtue  tfants  no  other  reward  ixeept  that  [just  spolien  of]  ofpraisi 

b.  But  the  demonstrative  as  a  pronoun  of  reference  is  commonly 
omitted,  or  some  other  construction  is  preferred:  as, — 


\ 


memoriae  arlera  quam  oblivioiiis  via\a,  I  prefer  (like  more)  the  art  of 
memory  to  (than)  [that]  of forgetfitlness. 

CaesBris  exercitus  PompeianoB  ad  Pharsalum  vicit,  the  army  of  Ctesar  de- 
feated that  ofPompcy  (the  Pompcians)  at  Pharsaliis. 

c.  When  a  quality  or  act  is  ascribed  with  emphasis  to  a  person  or 
thing  already  named,  is  or  Idem  (often  with  the  contressive  quldein) 
used  to  indicate  that  person  or  thing:  as, — 

vincula,  et  ea  sempiterna  (Cat.  iv.  4),  imprisonment,  and  that  perpetual. 
legionem  neque  earn  plenissunam  despiciebant  (B.  G.  iii.  i),  they  despised 

the  single  legion,  and  that  not  a  very  full  one. 
luus  dolor  hiimanus  la  qnidem  sed,  etc.,  your  grief  is  human,  to  be  sure, 

et  enm  ei  gladiatorio  liido  (AtL  L  16.  5),  by  means  of  a 
single  slave,  and  that  too  one  from  the  gladiatorial  school. 
Ti.  Gracchus  regnum  occupace  conatuB  est,  vel  regnavit  ia  qnidem  paucos 
"a  fC  M.  13, 40),  Tiberius  Graechvi  tried  to  uswrf  royal  ^m 
ie  /itheally  reigned  a  few  months. 


l8o  Syntax:    The  Sentence,  [S  X^H 

d.  Aa  adjective  pronoun  usually  agrees  with  an  appositive  or  predi- 
cate ncun,  if  there  be  one,  rather  than  with  the  word  to  which  it  refers 
(cf.Si99):i»,- 

hie  kbor  hoc  opu;  est,  thU  is  Iht  toil,  this  the  task  [namely,  Tevociire 

gradum,  which  wonld  regularly  take  a  neuter  pronoun], 
lecum  caput  hoc  eraC,  hie  foils  (Hor.  Ep.  i.  17.  45),  ikis  was  Ihc  kiedej 

things,  this  the  source. 
earn  sapicnliun  interpielantuc  qaajn  adhnc  mortilis  nemo  est  cansecutus 

[for  id  .  .  .  qaod]  (Licl.  5),  they  explain  tint  [thing]   to  be  ■aisdani 

which  no  man  ever  yit  attained. 

e.  Idom,  the  same,  is  often  equivalent  to  an  adverb  or  adverbial 
plirase  (also,  too,  yet,  at  Ike  same  time) :  as,  — 

oratio  splendida  et  grandis  eC  eadem  in  pcinils  faceta  (Bml.  79),  an  oration, 

brilliant,  able,  and  very  -willy  loo. 
cum  [haec]  dicat,  negat  idem  in  Deo  esse  g^atiam  (N.  D.  i.  43),  vrhen  hi 

says  this,  he  denies  also  that  there  is  mercy  wilh  C<»/(he,  the  same  man). 

ie  as  in  c.  above,  hul  in  this  ease  the  pronoun 
n  English. 

self,  is  used  with  any  of  the  other  pronouns 

turpe  mihi  ipa  videbatur  (Cic),  even  to  nie  (to  me  mysclQ  it  seemed  dis- 

id  ipsum,  that  very  thing. 

quod  ipsum,  which  of  itself  alone. 

in  eum  ipsum  locum,  to  that  very  place. 

Remark.  — The  emphasis  of  ipse  is  often  expressed  in  English  hyjusl,  very, 
mere,  etc.  (see  above  examples). 

g.  Ipse  is  often  used  alone,  substantively,  as  an  emphatic  pronoun 
of  the  third  person :  as,  — 

mihi  satis,  ipsia  non  satis  (Cic),  enough  for  me,  not  for  themselves. 

omnes  boni  quantum  in  ipns  fuit  (i<^.),  all  goad  men  so  far  as  was  in  their 
power  (in  themselves). 

beitos  illoB  qui  cum  adesse  ipaia  non  IJcebat  aderant  tamcn  (id.),  happy 
they  who,  lahen  it  was  net  allowed  then  la  attend  in  person,  still  were 
there.  -m 

di  capiti  ipmos  geneiique  reservent  (i£n.  vii.484),  may  the g^ds  hold  in  re- 
serve [such  a  fate]  to  fall  on  his  own  and  his  son-in-law's  head. 

k.  Ipse  is  often  used  alone,  substantively,  to  emphasize  an  omitted 
subject  of  the  first  or  second  person :  as,  — 

vohiscum  ipni  recordamini  (Cic,'),  rtmem6rr  in  your  own  minds  (youiielvei 


B  195. 196.]  Reflexive  Pronouns. 


I 

^B    (.  Ipse,  used  substantively,  sometimes  refers  t( 
^■Kmage,  to  distinguish  him  from  subordinate  persons 

■  N( 

■  k. 


Ipse  dixit  (cf.  ni-rit  t^tC),  UK  (Ihe  Master)  said  il. 

Nomenlinua  erat  super  ipauin  (Hor.),  Nomenlaiais  -was  abavi  [the  boat]    ' 

■•     -//[at  table]. 


k.  Ipse   is  often,  is  rarely,  used  instead  of  a  reflexive.     See  under   J 
Reflexives,  §  196.  /". 

/.  Ipae  usuaily  agrees  with  the  subject,  even  when  the  real  emphas 
in  English  on  a  reflexive  in  the  predicate ;  as,  — 

ma  ipHB  coraolor,  I  console  mysrlf.     [Not  mi  ipsttm,  as  Ihe  English  would 
lead  US  to  expect]. 

m.  For  adverbs  used  instead  of  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  see  §  207.  a, 

3.   Reflexive  FronauiiB. 
196.   The  Reflexive  pronoun  (aB),^  and  usually  its  cor- 
responding possessive  (auua),  are  used  in  some  part  of  the  j 
predicate  to  refer  to  the  subject  of  the  sentence  or  clause : 


virllis  86  novit,  virtue  inim/s  tlsilf. 

promialt  ae  veutiiruni  [esse],  ht  promised  that  he  mould  come. 
Brutus  amicum  aoura  occidit,  Brutus  killed  liis  friend. 
Caesar  statuit  aibi  Rhenum  esse  Iranseundum  (B,  G.  iv.  16),  Casar  decided  \ 
rial  hi  must  crass  the  Khine  (the  R,  must  be  crossed  by  himself). 

a.  In  a  subordinate  clause  of  a  compound  sentence  there  I 
)s  a  double  use  of  reflexives. 

The  Reflexive  may  always  be  used  to  refer  to  the  subject  of  its 
own  clause  {Direct  Reflexivi)  :  as,  — 


ex  qno  indiciri  potest  quantum  habeal  in  M  boni  constantia  (B.  G.  i.  40),    1 

from  which  it  can  be  deltrmined  haw  much  good  Jirmnes!  possesses  (hat 

in  itself). 
[CaesarJ  noluit  Eura  locum  vacire,  ne  German!  e  saTs  fiiiibus  Irausireal 

(B.  G.  i.  aS),  Casar  did  not  wish  (his  place  to  lie  vacant,  for  fear  Ihi 

Germam  viould  cross  ever  from  their  territories. 
si  qua  s^niEcitio  viitiitia  elaceat  ad  quam  ai  similis  animus  adplicet  el 

adiungat  (Cat.  M.  14,  48),  if  any  sign  of  virtue  shine  forth  to  which  a 

rimilar  dispesitioH  may  attach  itself. 

1  This  leemi  lo  have  been  orieinally  Ihe  persona\  ptonouTi  ol  *» 
tr.  jtia  and  Gr.  •rf'Ts),  but  il  came  by  use  to  be  puie\]  reft'^.Vje. 


I 


I 


82  SyKtax:   The  Sentence. 

2.  If  Uk  subordinate  clause  expresses  the  words  or  thought  of  the 
subject  of  the  main  riausc.  the  retlexive  is  regularly  used  to  refer  to  that 
subject  {J*dirtit  R^Uxive) :  as, — 

peliiniiit  at  rild  liccrcl  (B.  G.  i.  30),  lief  ieggrJ  Ikat  it  might  be  atlamfd 

tkem  (the  pedlionen). 
Iccios  nantiam  ad  cum  roiltil,  oisi  snbiidinm  ribi  submiltitui,  etc.  (B.  G.  ii, 

6),  stinii  him  a  mtssage  thai  unUu  rilitfbe  fitrnUhtd him  (IccioB),  elc. 
qaem  aalatem  snam  credltunuii  aibi  (Q.  C.  iii.  8),  mto  shculd  trust  his  safety 

[Caesar]  his  ati  eonqnirerent  ct  reducerenl,  si  «hi  potgali  esse  veilent  im- 
peravit  (B.  G.  i.  aS),  Casar  erdirtd  Ihini  (the  Gauls)  /»  hunt  up  and 
bring  iaci  [the  fugitives]  //  they  (the  Gauls)  miihcd  lo  be  free  from 
fault  loTBords  Aim  (Cesar). 

bostinm  Be  habilunim  numeto  confirmal,  si  aut  Ambiorigem  aat  eios  legatos 
finibHS  EOis  lecepissenl,  [Qesar]  said  that  he  should  treat  [them]  as 
enemies  if  they  received  either  Amiiorix  or  kit  envoys  into  their 
territeries. 

deoma  1^3  ei  g^iis  egiC,  quod  de  ae  optimum  indidam  fetHsset  (B.  G.  i. 
41),  the  tenth  legion  thanked  him  ieeaiae  [they  said]  he  had  expressed  a 
hi^  epinioH  efthem. 

si  obsides  ab  taa  (the  Helvetians)  dbi  (Cxsar,  wbo  is  the  speaker)  darentuc, 
se  (Qesar)  cum  ras  pflcera  esse  factQrum  (B.  G.  i.  14),  [Gear  said]  thai 
if  hostages  -aiere  gi-uen  him  by  them  he  would  make  peace  with  them. 

Tarqainium  dixisse  ferunt  hI  intellixisse  quos  fldos  amicos  babuissel,  etc. 
(C.  M.  15,  53),  they  say  that  Torguin  said  that  he  tindenloed,  etc. 

Note. — Sometimes  la  or  Ipse  is  used  as  an  Indirect  Refleiiva  either  from 
areless  writing  or  to  avoid  ambiEuity  (ct  i)  :  as, — 

qui  si  ex  his  minus  [imidos  exislimari  veilent,  non  bS  hostem  vereri,  sed 
angustiis  ilineris  et  magnitiidineni  silvarum  quae  intercederent  inter 
ipaSa  (the  persons  refeired  to  by  Be  above)  atque  Atiovistum  .  . .  timere 
diccbant  (B.  G.  i.  39),  Ihasi  efthem  who  wished  to  be  thought  less  timid 
said  they  did  not  fear  the  enemy,  but  vrere  afraid  ef  the  narrows  and 
the  vast  extent  of  the  forests  which  were  between  themsehies  and  Ariovis- 
tus. 

aodiatis  naper  dicere  legatos  Tyndaritanos  Metcorium  qoT  sacris  annlver- 
saiiis  apad  eos  coleietur  Verris  imperio  esse  sublatum  (Vetr.  iv.  39), 
you  have  fust  heard  the  ambassadors  from  Tyndaris  say  that  the  statue 
of  Mercury  which  was  -worshipped  loxth  annual  rites  among  them  was 
taken  away,  etc.  [Here  Cicero  wavers  between  apud  eoa  colebator, 
■  remark  of  his  own,  and  apivd  h§  coleretar,  the  words  of  the  tegaii. 
e5s  does  not  strictly  refer  to  the  ambassadors,  but  to  the  people  —  the 
Tyndaritaiii.] 

3.  If  the  subordinate  clause  does  not  express  the  words,  etc.,  of  the 
main  subject,  ibe  reflexive  b  not  regularly  used,  though  it  is  occastonally 

fouoti.     TbuBi^ 


(  196.J  Reflexive  Pronouns. 

sunt  ita  multi  at  eSa  career  capere  non  possit  (Cat.  ii.  to,  ja),  Ihty  are . 
many  that  tke  prison  cannat  io,':  Jiem.     [Here  83  could  not  be  used. 

ibi  in  proximlg  villis  ita  bipaitiio  faecant,  ut  Tibens  inter  bos  et  pons 
leiesset  [Cat  ia.  a,  5),  ikire  ihiy  jtationtd  themsdves  in  the  neat 
farmheuia,  in  two  divisiem,  in  such  a  manner  thai  the  Tiber  and  the 
bridge  viere  betaieen  ihem  (the  divisioos).  [Here  inter  Be  might  be 
used,  bar  it  would  refer  to  a  pnrposE  of  the  soldiers.] 

noD  Cuit  CO  contentus  quod  ei  praeter  spem  acuiderat  (Leg.  Man.  9,  35}, 
he  was  not  loatent  luilh  that  whiik  had  happened  to  kim  beyond /tii\ 
hope. 

Compare ;  qui  fiX  Maecenas  uC  Dcmo  qusm  aibi  sortem  seu  ratio  declerit  si 
fois  obiecerit  ilia  contentus  vivat   (Hor.  Sat.  I.  i.  l),  A<rw   comes  i^9 
Macenas,  Ihaf  nobody  lives  contented  with  that  lot  -aihich  choice  hiu^k 
assigned  him  or  dance  has  throvm  in  Ais  icaj'  ?    [Here  elbi  is  used  to* 
pat  the  thought  into  the  mind  uf  the  discontented  man.] 

But, —  Melellus  iu  eis  arbilius  qu&e  ad  Be  defecerant  praesidia  impoait  (Sail. 
Jug.  61),  Metelltts  posted  garrisons  in  those  cities  mhich  had  revolted  ta 
him.     [The  author  vacillates  between  the  thought  of  Metellus  and  his 

b.  The   reHexive  in  a  subordina.te  ckuse   sometimes  refers  to  tbcS 
Wibject  of  a  suppressed  main  clause:  as, —  I 

Paetos,  omnea  libroa  quos  frater  anna  reliquisset  mihi  donavit  (Alt.  ii.  l),   1 
PiEtm  gave  me  all  tke  books  ■which  (as  he  Said  in  the  act  of  donation) 
his  brother  had  left  Aim  (cf.  a). 

r.  The  reflexive  may  refer  to  any  noun  in  ita  own  clause,  which 
o  emphasized  as  to  become  in  a  manner  the  su^ect  of  discourse  (c£  J 
the  note)  :  as, — 

Sooratem  cives  BUi  inlcrfecerunl,  Socrates  was  put  to  death  by  his  irwn/el-M 

qui  poterat  salus  ttae.  ctuqusm  non  probari  (Mil.  30,  81),  how  can  arty  01 
fhil  to  appravi  his  own  safety?     [In  Ihia  and  the  preceding  example  J 
the  emphasis  ia  preserved  in  English  by  the  change  to  the  passive.] 

hunc  !H  seeiili  erunt  sni  comites  (Cat.  I.  v.  10),  this  man,  if  his  compnnioi 

ftUam  him. 

Note.  — Occasionally  Ihe  clause  fo  which  the  reflexive  really  beloogs  is  al 

Mndeo  wnare  sibi  ipsBB  (Cat.  ii.  8,  17),  /  am  anxious  to  cure  these  me 

for  their  own  benefit  {i.e.  ut  Bin!  aibi  sint). 
Buo  Bihl  gladio  (Plautus),  witli  his  own  niiard.     [Here  the  clause  is  tc 

indefinite  to  be  supplied.] 
ti.  The  reflexive  may  follow  a  verbal  noun  or  adjective :  as,  — 
n^  tans,  self-praise. 

impotins  Bni  fQ.  C.},  wilhaul  self-control, 
bomina  cum  aoTsiniiljIjus  servis  (Phil.  i.  a),  men  uiilJi  ilavei  life*  tKimsi 


.rf^I 


i 


184  Syfitax;   The  Sentence.  [§§  196, 3i 

t.  The  reflexive  may  rerer  to  the  subject  implied  in  an  infimtive  or 
verbal  abstract  used  indefinitely:  as, — 

bellDOi  est  sna  vilia  iiossc  {S^\z^,Uis  ajiiie  thing  to  hune  on^s  awn  fauits. 
cui  propoaila  sit  consetvatio  Btli  (Fin.  5,  13),  eiu  'whost  aim  is  self-priur- 

vation, 

f.  Inter  sS,  among  thetnselvis,  is  regularly  used  to  express  recipro- 
cal action:  as, — 

cohaerentia  inter  se,  iMnp  comittent  laiib  each  other. 

g.  8aiu  is  used  for  one's  trwn  as  emphatically  opposed  to  Ikai 
others,  in  any  part  of  the  sentence  and  with  reference  to  any  word  iu 
it:  as,— 

BHia  flammis  delete  Fidenas  (Liv.  iv.  33),  dalroy  Fidena  wi/h  its  uwitjiret 
(the  fires  kindled  by  tfaat  city,  figuiativel)').     [Cf.  Cat.  i.  13,  32.] 

h.  For  reflexives  of  the  first  and  second  persons  the  oblique  cases  of 
the  personal  pronouns  {mel,  tnl,  etc.)  are  used  (see  p.  63)  :  as, — 
morii  mS  obtidi  (Mil.  34,  94),  I  have  exposed  myself  to  death. 
bine  to  reginae  ad  limina  pcrfet  (jEn.  i.  389),  do  you  go  (bear  yourself) 

hence  to  Ike  queens  Ihreshold. 
quid  est  qood  tantis  hub  in  laborifans  exetceimas  (Aicb.  11,28],  what 

reason  is  there  why  wi  sAouId  exert  ourselves  in  so  great  toils  f 
riiignliB  voKb  novinoa  ex  turmis  manipulisque  vealri  similes  eligite  (Liv. 

"JO-  ^1^1  f'"'  ""^  of  you  pick  out  from  the  squadrons  and  ntaniftei 

nine  like  yourselves. 

i.  Ipse  is  often  (Ib  rarely)  used  instead  of  an  zndired  reflexive,  to 
avoid  ambiguity ;  and  in  later  writers  is  sometimes  found  instead  of  the 
direct  reflexive  (cf.  a.  3  and  3) ;  as,  — 

ciic  de  sail  virlute  aut  de  IpasB  dlligentia  desperarCDt  (B.  G.  i.  40),  why 

(he  aslied)  should  they  despair  of  their  aam  courage  or  his  diligence  f 

qui  mortuo  Dareo  IpBaB  tuereluT  reppetisse  (Q.  C  x.  5),  id^  found  one 

(said  she)  to  protect  us  afltr  the  death  of  Darius. 
omnia  aut  ipsos  aut  hostes  populatos  (id.  iii.  5),  [ihey  said  that]  e 
they  themsehies  or  the  enemy  had  laid  all  viaste. 

4.   FoaseBsive  Pronomis. 
197.   The  Possessive  pronouns  are  derivative  adjectives, 
which  take  the  gender,  number,  and  case  of  the  noun  to 
which  they  belong,  not  that  of  \.\ie:  possessor :  as,  — 

way  hit  loife. 

t.  pL,  Ihoogtl 


Caesar  uxorem  snam  re 

udiivi 

,  Ctcsar  put  azaajf  hit  tuife. 

haec  aaat  fflea  ornSm'^ 

til,  th. 

e  are  my  jewels,     [maa  is  n 

ibc  speaker  is  a  wan 

an.] 

Possessive  Pronouns. 

nea  deacriptio  (C.  M.  17. 59),  mine  are  Ike  raaa, 
the  arraiigsmnit.     [mea  la  fern.,  though  the  speaker  is  Cytus.] 
multa  in  nostro  collegio  praeclata  (C.  M.  18,  64),  [there  are]  many  fin* 
ikitigs  in  CUT  celiegt.     [noatro  is  neut.  sing-,  though  mm  ug  lefeiredj 
la] 
a.  The  possessive  pronouns  are  used  instea.d  of  the  genitive  of  a] 
personal  pronoun. 

1.  Always  instead  of  the  Possessive  Genitive;  as, — 
domus  mea,  my  kousi.     [Never  domuB  mei.] 

pater  nosier,  our  father.     [Never  pater  noatrl.] 
^L      patriraonium  ta\iia,  your  inheritance.     [Not  tol] 

^B      Note  i. — In  difFerenl  languages  the  ideas  associated  with  possesslves  are  no 
^R|]wtiys  (he  same,  and  hence  idiomalic  uses  differ.    Thus  my  tulogisi  may,  in  Latin 
^be  laudator  nostrl  (Att  i.  14.  6).  or,  like  the  English,  laudator  nOBtor  (sei 
AIL  i.  16.  5),  with  a  different  conception  of  the  relation. 

Note  a. — The  Possessive  oQluS,  -a,  -UEQ,  is  rare:  as,  cQlum  peouB?  whusi 
jlMif    The  genitive  cQlua  is  generally  used  instead. 

2.  Rarely  instead  of  the  Objective  Genitive  {§  217,  cf.  note  I,  above). 
Thus,  regularly:  — 

eni  despiciens,  disdainful  of  himself,  ' 

riion  solum  sui  deprecitorem,  sed  etiam  accusatorem  mei,  not  only  a  — '-'- 
lor  for  himself  hU  an  accuser  of  m     '        "" 
t  occasionally,  — 
ca  quae  faciebat,  toa  se  fidacia  facere  dicehat  (Verr.  v.  68),  tohat he  iiias    \ 
doing,  he  said  he  did  relying  on  you  (with  your  te 
neque  negligeniia  toa,  neque  id  odio  fecit  too  (Ter 
neglect  or  hatred  of  you. 
b.  The  possessives  have  often   the   acquired   meaning   of  peculiar 
to,  or  fa-uerabli  or  propitious  towards  the  person  or  thing  spoken 
of:  as,— 

[petere3  ut  sua  demenlii  ac  minsuetiidine  utatur,  they  asked  (they  said) 

thai  he  -aa-uld  shorn  his  [wonted]  clemency  and  humanly. 
tempore  too  pugnastf,  didyoufighiat  a  fit  lime!  (lit.,  your  own).  I 

ignoranti  quem  portom  petat  niillua  sntti  venlus  est  (Sen.  £p.  70),  lo  hint   \ 
vAo  knows  Hot  what  port  he  is  bound  lo,  no  -wind  is  fair  (his  own). 
^L       NOTK.  —  This  use  is  merely  a  natural  development  of  the  meaning  of  the  pos- 


•.c  (Att  ii.  8 


3i6),/r« 


.  The  possessives  are  regularly  omitted  (like  other  pronounsj  when 
■e  plainly  implied  in  the  context;  as,— 
anicum  gratnlitur,  he  greets  his  friend,     [amicum  Huum  would  he  distin[>   ] 
've,    his  friend  (and  cot  another's);  su 


i86  Syntax:   The  Sentence.  [g  197. 

d.  Possessives  are  often  used  subslaAtivel;  (§  190.  a) :  as,  —    ^^| 

nostri,  our  ^auHtrymin.  or  men  cf  our  parly.  ^| 

iuoB  coQlinebat  [B._C.  i.  ii),ki  hild  hii  mcH  in  thick.  ^" 

flamma  eitrema  meoruai  (/En.  ii.  431).  iasl/ames  efmy  cattntrymtn. 
Note.  — There  is  no  reason  lo  suppose  an  eiiipsis  here.    The  adjective  becomes 
B  noun  like  other  adjectivea  (see  }  18B). 

e.  A  possessive  representing  a  genitive  may  have  a  genitive  in  appo- 
sition (§  184.  rf);  as,— 

mea  solius  causa, /b/-  my  saki  only. 

nostra  omnium  paltia,  the  country  of  tu  all. 

suum  Ipsius  tegnum,  his  oviii  tingifom. 

f.  A  possessive  representing  a  genitive  may  serve  as  an  antecedent 
to  a  relative  (see  §  199.  6.  note).  ^_ 

g.  For  the  special  reflexive  use  of  the  possessive  suub,  see  §  196.  ^^| 

5.  Relative  Pronoona.  ^H 

Note.  —  A  Relative  pronoon  is  properly  an  Adjective,  (n  agreement  with  some 
word  expressed  or  impUed  either  in  its  own  clause,  or  (often)  in  the  antecedenl 
(demonstrali™)  clatise.  The  Ml  construction  would  require  the  antecedenl  to 
be  expressed  in  both  clauses,  with  more  commonly  a  corresponding  dtftionsiraitui 
lo  which  the  relative  would  refer:  as, — 

iter  in  ea  locft  facere  c 
G.  iv.  7),  he  began  la 
the  Germans  were. 
But  one  of  these  nouns  Is  commonly  01 
frequently  (rarely  in  English)  found  in  1 
in  the  antecedent  clause.    Hence  relatives  serve  two  uses;  — 

I.  as  Nouns  (or  adjectives)  in  their  own  clause:  as, — 

ei  qnl  Alcsiae  obsidibantur,  those  vihii  were  buieged  al  Alesia. 

T,  Balventio,  qui  superiore  anno  primum  pilum  itiixecat,  Titvs  Balventio, 
•who  lie  year  before  had  been  a  ceiilurion  of  Ike Jir si  rani. 
In  t>.!3  latter  use  they  ore  often  equiviilent  merely  to  a  demonstrative  with  a  con- 
junction ;  as, — 

qoAS  cum  ita  sint  (=  et  cum  en  ita  sinl),  [and]  since  these  things  are  so. 
This  connective  force  does  not  belong  lo  the  relative  originally,  but  is  developed 
from  an  Interrogative  or  indefinite  meaning  specialiied  by  use.    The  clauses  were 
originally  co-ordlnalc.     Thus,  qui   quietus   &nlniO   est,  Is   est   BaplSne 
originally  meant.  Who  is  imdisluried  in  soulf     Tint  [man]  is  a  sage. 

A  Relative  pronoun  inijicates  a  relation  between  its  own 
clause  ant3  some  substantive.  This  substantive  is  called 
the  Antecedent  of  the  relative. 


^  198, 199.]  Relative  Pronouns. 

Thus,  in  the  sentence^ 

eiim  nihil  delei:labit,  quod  fas  esset,  nothing fliastd  Aim  which  was  right, 

the  relative  quod  connects  its  antecedent  nihil  with  the  predicate  fS«  J 
let,  indicating  a  relation  between  the  two. 

198.  A  Relative  agrees  with  its  Antecedent  in  Gender  J 
and  Number  ;  but  its  Case  depends  on  the  construction  of.a 
the  clause  in  which  it  stands  :  as,  — 

pner  qni  venil  abiit,  Ihe  boy  leha  came  has  goaf  aioay. 

liber  qnam  legjs  meus  est,  the  book  you  are  reading  is  mine. 

via  qua  Bmbulat  dadt  ad  acbcm,  Ike  path  he  walks  in  leads  to  l!te  di 

This  rule  applies  to  all  relative  words  so  far  as  they  are  vari; 
form :  as,  quSUs,  quaottis,  qtilcamqne. 

3TE.  — The  relative  may  be  ihe  subject  or  object  of  its  dwu  claus 


:t  (Phil.  xiv. 
a  relative  has  two  or  more  antecedents,  it  follow; 
the  agreement  of  predicate  adjectives  (§§  i86,  187):  as,— 

fTIiom  et  fniam,  qaoa  valde  dileidt,  uno  [empore  ImTsit,  he  lost  a  sen  and  am 

daughter  at  the  same  lime,  whom  he  dearly  loved. 
grandes  natu  matres  et  parvuli  Uberi,  qaoram  ntrorumqae  at 

diam  nostram  requirit  (Ven.  v.  49),  aged  matrons  and  little  children,    1 

whose  time  of  life  in  each  case  demands  our  cii 
otium  atqae  diivitiae  quae  prima  mortHea  putant  (Sail,  Cat.  36),  idltiusx   . 

and  wealth  which  men  count  the  first  (objects  of  desire). 
e>e  fiiiges  et  friictus  qDOB  terra  gignit  (N.  D.  iL  14),  these  frui, 

which  the  ear  A  produces, 

199.  A  relative  generally  agrees  in  gender  and  number  1 
■with  an  appositive  or  predicate  noun  in  its  own  clause,/ 
rather  than  with  an  antecedent  of  different  gender  or  1 
number  (c£.  §  195.  d)  :  e 

mare  edaio  qnam  Neptunum  esse  dlcebaa  (N.  D.  iii.  ao),  &e  sea,  too,  lufwA  I 

you  said  was  N'eplune.     [Not  qnod.] 
Thebae  ipsae,  quod  Boeotiae  caput  est  (Li?,  xxiii,  44),  even  Thebes,  which 

is  Ike  ehitfcity  of  Bsotia.     [Not  qnae.] 

NOTK.— This  rule  is  occasionally  violated  r  as,  - 

.  11'),  a  riuer  tohUli  «  coUed  ft* 


1 88  Syntax:   The  Sentence.  [§§199.200 

a.  A  relative  occasiooaJlj  agrees  with  its  autecedeDl  ia  case  (by  at- 
tratiion) :  as,  — 

si  aliqnid  agis  eomm  qnomm  eonsnesu"  (Kam.  t.  14),  ij  you  ihould  da 
ionulking  o/ivhaT yoH  are  used  to  do.     [For  eoDUn  quae.] 

i.  A  relative  may  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  an  implied  axiie- 
cedent;  as, — 

quartuiD  genus  .  .  .  qui  acre  vetere  alieno  vacillant  (Cat  ii.  10),  a  fourlh 

class,  that  are  staggering  under  old  debts. 
iJQUs  ex  CO  numeio  qui  pitati  etml  (Jug.  35),  anr  of  Ike  n-umber  [of  thorej 

who  -were  ready. 

,  de  qui  [iJT.  eoniuradone]  dicam  (SilL  Cat.  l8),  a 


I 


Note. — So  nsularly  when  the  anlecedenl  is  implied  in  a  possessive  pronoun 
(cf.Ji97./l:  as,- 

nostia  qui  adsumus  saliis,  the  Siiftly  of  iis  luko  are  present.  [Here  qui 
agrees  with  the  nOBtrum  implied  in  nostra]. 

200.  The  antecedent  noun  sometimes  appears  in  both 
clauses ;  but  usually  only  in  the  one  that  precedes.  Some- 
times it  is  wholly  omitted.     Thus  — 

a.  The  antecedent  noun  may  be  repeated  in  the   relative  clause  r 

loci  nitura  etjt  hacc  quern  loctun  nostri  delegerant  (B.  G.  ii.  18),  Sit 
nature  of  the  ^ound  ■mhtck  our  men  had  chosen  was  this. 

b.  The  antecedent  noun  may  appear  only  in  the  relative  clause: 
as,— 

quis  rea  In  consulatii  nostro  sessimus  altigit  hie  versihua  (Arch.  11'),  ie  Am 
tomied  in  verse  tie  things  -which  I  did  in  my  consulship. 

urbem  quam  staluo  vestra  esl  (/En.  i.  ^-j^,  yours  is  the  city  lohick  I  am 
founding. 

Note,  — In  this  case  a  demonsiralive  (la,  Ule.  oihic)  usually  stands  in  Ihe 
.nlecedenl  clause  L  as, — 
iitos  caplivSa  duos,  beri  quos  eoii  de  ptaeda ...  his  indito  catenas  singula- 
rias  (Plaut,  Capl.  1  lO),  those  two  prisoners  thai  I  bought  yesterday,  — 
put  fetters  0  J  them. 
qoae  pars  civitilia   calamitatcm  populu   Romano  intuleral,  ea  princeps 
poenas  pcrsolvit  (B.  G.  i.  13),  that  fart  of  the  slate  -.uhieh  had  6reu^ 
disaster  BH  the  Roman  people  was  the  firsHo  pay  the  penalty. 
Tn  a  lenience  of  this  class  ihetelative  c\uisc  iisiu.\V|  sMndt  font  in  LAdn  (ct  | 
I.  e).  as  JD  the  ejtample.  | 


IS  200,  201.]  Relative  Pronouns.  I 

e.  The  antecedent  may  be  entirely  omitted,  especially  if  it  is 
efinite:  as,— 
qni  decimoe  legiouis  aquilam  fercbat  (B.  G.  iv.  25),  [the  man^  -akis  h 

tht  eaglt  of  the  Unlh  le^on. 
qui  cognoscerent  raisit  (id.i.  21'), htsenl  [men]  to  reconnoitre  (whoahould,  | 

etc.). 

d.  A  predicate  adjective  (especially  a  superlative)  agreeing  with  it^'fl 
atecedent  in  gender  and  number  may  stand  in  the  relative  clause:^ 


n  viderat  {Verr.  iv.  27),  ihos. 
at  /lis  house.     [Nearly  equivalent  lo  I 
\r  -Dfry  beautiful  attes.'^ 


vasa  ea  quae  ptHcherrima  apud  e 
beavliful  visstls  which  lif  had  set 
Ike  vessels  ofiuhich  he  had  seen  s: 

e.  The  phrase  id  quod  or  quae  rBa  is  used  (instead  of  quod  alone)  J 
I  refer  to  a  group  of  words  or  an  idea :  — 
[obtrectatum  est]  Gabinio  dicam  anne  Pompeia?  an  utrique — -id  quod  es 

virius?  (Manil,  19),  an  affront  is  offered— shall  I  say  la   GaHnim 

or  lo  Fompey  ?  or  —  which  is 
mullmn  sant  in  venationibus  . .  .  quae  lis  vires  alit  (B.G.iv.  i),  Oiey  spend  ■ 

much  time  in  huniing,  which  [practice]  increases  their  strength.     [Cf.  | 

B.  G.  ii.  5.] 
Note. — But  quod  alone  often  oocura:  as,— 
Cassioi  noster,  quod  mibi  magnae  voluplati  fuit,  hoslem  leiecerat  (Fan 

10),  ourjriind  Cassias — mUich  was  a  ^real  salisfaction  to  me— 

driven  back  the  enemy. 

201.  In  the  use  of  relatives,  the  following  points  are  to 
s  observed : — 

a.  The  relative  is  never  omitted  in  Latin,  as  it  often  ia  in  English. 

liber  qnem  milii  dedisli,  ike  book  you  gave  me. 

is  sum  qui  semper  fai,  I  am  the  same  man  I  always  was. 

eo  in  toco  est  de  quo  tibi  locutus  sum,  he  is  in  the  place  I  told  you  of 

b.  A  relative  clause  in  Latin  often  takes  the  place  of  some  other 
instruction  in  English ;  particularly  of  a  participle,  an  appositive,  or  a 
lun  of  agency ;  as, — 

leges  quae  nunc  sunl,  &e  existing  Iotbs  (the  laws  which  now  exist). 
Caesar  qui  Galliain  ricil,  Ci^sar  Vie  conqueror  of  Gaul  (who  conquered 

Gaul). 
JDBta  gloria  quae  «t  fcuctua  virtntis,  true  glory  [which  is]  the  fruit  of  virtue. 
qui  ^tgit,  a  reader  (one  who  reads). 
ille  qoi  petit, /Ae  f/aiKtiff  (yts  viVa  'i\^^.  '    ' 


r 

I 


SpUax;  TJu  Senteitce.  {%  201 

the  TctadTe  clause  usaally  comes 
DOtm  (cf.  f  200. b):  as,  — 


1    such    cases    olifi 
e  ptWKW  wtocti  properij  belongs  io   (he  antecedeo 


Wm  i)n  coniahe  . . .  eatct,  dntiBc  11&  d  bene  licet  partum  bene  (Plaut. 
RuL  la|D},  if  aab  ufa  iiigaarJ,  Jke  may  enjoy,  etc 

^  The  antECcdeM  bodd,  when  in  a^^iositioii  with  the  main  clause,  ot 
with  scMBCvotd  of  it,  b  pot  in  the  iclative  clause:  as, — 

finn  ■■ici,  <VBi  gwtril  at  nai|[iui  pcnuna,  jlatdfasC  friend!^  a  elass  of 

wkidk  tttrt  UgrtmtUd  (c/vbidi  das). 
(,  A  TclaliTe  nnj  sXxaA  (ctcd  nth  another  relative  or  an  interroga- 
tnc)  at  the  b^ianiiig  of  a  sentence  or  clause,  where  in  English  a 
iff  180./):  as,— 

t,  a»iAat  wlt»  ktardAis  (vhich  things). 
a  Aae  tiiiigj  are  m. 
qairani  qaod  sinuk  bctsm  (CaL  ir.  8),  'xltat  deed  of  Aeirs  like  Ikitf 

f.  I.  \  relatiTe  adverb  is  ngulariy  'ised  in  referring  to  an  antecedent 
in  the  LocaiiTC  otxe:  as,  — 

■portms  C&mi  qnS  si  contoletat  (liv.  iL  2t),  iatrii^  died  at   Cuma, 
wiidter  it  iad  rttired.   [Here  in  qnain  nrbem  might  be  used,  but  not 

2.  So,  often,  to  express  any  relation  of  place  instead  of  the  fonnal 
idative  pioDoan  (c£  wluma,  mktrtia,  wiUrewiH) :  as,  — 

k>cns  qnS  arditns  noa  ent,  aftaet  tB  taiiei  (whither)  Here  mas  no  acetss. 
ngjxt,  nnde  geniB  dnds,  Ae  Hitgitm  from  oMckyoa  dirioe  your  race. 
nnda  petitur,  Ae  d^mdanl  (he  wherefrum  somethiiie  ia  demanded,  cf. 
§»;.-). 

g.  The  relatives  qui.  qoSlin,  qnnnlnu,  qnot,  etc.,  are  often  rendered 
simply  by  as'  in  Ei^jtsh  (§  106.  ^ :  as,  — 

idoD  quod  aempar,  dte  tamt  ai  ahtvys. 

lilil  dox  qulam  Huuubalcm  novimas,  smi  a  chief  as  -.nt  tnow  HanniiiU 

[to  h«ve  been], 
tanta  dimicado  qaanta  numqnam  foil,  sick  a  figii  as  ntver  wai  iefii 
lot  mala  qnot  ^era,  oj  many  troui/et  as  stars  in  the  siy. 


'  Tbf  £QgIisb  as  in  this  use  ia  atricAi  ».  re\aii™.ftio>i^  WixrUMft"' 


^ 


t  201.  203.] 


Indefinite  Pronouns. 


\   k.  The  general  construction  of  relatives  is  found  ia  clauses 
iced  by  relative  or  temporal  adverbs:   as,  ubi,   quo,  unde, 


6,  Indefinite  Pronouns. 
203.   The  Indefinite  pronouns  are  used  to  indicate  that  ] 
mte  person  or  thing  is  meant,  without  designating  wliat  I 


NoriL  —  For  tlie  meanings  of  the  compounds  of  QUI  and  Quia,  see  }  105. 

o.  Of  the  particular  indefinites  meaning  some  or  any  {quia,  quia-  1 

plam,  neeoiS  quis,  aliquis,  qaldam),  the  simple  qois  is  least  definite,    | 

qnldam  most  definite :  as, — 

dixeril  quia  (qnispiam),  some  one  may  say. 

aliqui  philosophi  ita  pulanl,  some  philosofhirs  Ihitik  so.     [quidar 

mean  certain  particular  persons  defined  lo  the  speaker's  mind,  though    I 
not  nnuied.] 

habitant  hie  qnaedam  luulieres  pauperculae,  some  poor  ivomtn  live  ken  J 
[i>.  Jome  women  he  Itnows  of;  somewomen  or  other yiayAi.  be  aliqusA  J 
or  neicio  quaej. 

b.  In  ^.particular  negative  ediqnls  (allqnl)  is  regularly  used,  where  ' 
.in  a  universal  negative  quiBquam  (subst.)  or  fillua  (adj.)  would  be 
required:  as,— 

iiislitia  Qunquam  nocet  cniqnam  qui  earn  habet  (Cic),  justice  never  does 
harm  to  anybody  who  possenes  it.    [alicui  would  mean  lo  somebody  whe 
possesses  .v.] 
sine  aliqud  melu,  [you  cannot  do  this]  tvitkoiil  some  fear. 
sine  Silo  melii,  [you  may  do  this]  iBithaul  any  fear. 
_       cum  aliqnid  non  habeas  (Tusc  i.  36),  when  there  is  something  you  have  not. 
m   ■  Note.  — These  pronouns  aie  used  in  like  manner  in  conditional  and  other    | 
fci.lences(i.o5.i):as,-  I 

r       si  quiaqoam,  ille  sapiens  fnit  (LieL  z),  if  any  man  was  (ever)  a  Sage,  he  was. 
dum  praesidia  ulla  fuetunt  (Rose.  Am.  4J),  while  there  wtrt  any  armed 

forces  (till  they  ceased  lo  be). 
d  qnid  in  te  peccavi   (^A.a.'m.  1$,  ^^i  r/ /have  done Tarw^lowardt you 

[in  any  particular  case  (see  a,  above)]. 
C,  Of  the  general  indefinites,  quivia  and  qnllibet  (any  yott  will), 
ntervla  {either you  ■will,  of  two),  are  used  chiefly  in  affirmative,  quio- 
n  and  Ollua  {any  at  all)  m  negative,  \ntMYOg,a,iive,  t 


^^uses 


k 


192  Syntax:   The  Sentence.  fS  9 

cni^^B  potest  accidere  quod  omquam  potest,  what  can  happin  fa  any  [one] 

man  can  happm  to  any  man  [^whatever], 
non  eniviH  homini  contingit  adire  Corinthum,  ii  is  nut  every  man'i  luck  to 

ga  to  Catinlh.     [nou  cniqnani  would  mean  not  any  man's^ 
minus  habeo  viiium  qusm  vcstrum  aterviB,  I  have  less  strtn^  than  either 

of  you.     [For  the  form  utervia,  see  g  83.] 
qnidlibet  modo  aliqaid  (Cic),  anything  you  will,  provided  it  be  seme- 

cur  cuiqaam  misi  prius,  why  did  I  send  to  anybody  be/ore  [yonj? 

sT  qaisquam  est  timidus,  is  ego  sum,  if  any  man  is  timorous,  I  am  he. 

cum  haud  cniqaajn  in  dubio  easel  (Liv.  ii.  3),  when  ii  was  not  a  matter  0/ 
doubt  to  any  one. 

si  tempus  est  allam  iiice  hominis  necandi  Qi\\o,^g),  if  there  is  any 
occasion  whatever,  etc 

Note.  —  TIih  use  of  these  indefinites  is  very  various,  and  must  be  learned  from 
the  i^exicon  anil  from  practice.  The  choice  among  Ihem  often  depends  merely  on 
the  point  of  view  of  tlie  speaker,  bo  that  they  are  often  practically  inEerchangcable. 
The  differences  are  (with  few  eieeptions)  those  of  logic,  nol  of  syntax. 

rf.  The  distributives  qulaque  (<W£^),  utergue  (fad),  and  flons 
qulBque  (every  single  one),  are  used  in  general  assertions.  They  are 
equivalent  to  a  plural,  and  sometimes  have  a  plural  verb  (cf.  §  Z05.  c. 

bonus  liber  melior  est  quiaque  quo  maior,  the  larger  a  good  book  is,  the 
better  (each  good  book  is  better  [in  the  same  measure]  as  it  is  larger). 

ambo  exercitiU  suas  qoisqne  aheunt  domos,  both  armies  go  away,  every 
man  to  his  home. 

nterque  ntrique  erat  exerdlus  in  conspectS,  each  army  was  in  sight  of  tiu 
other  (each  to  each) . 

ponite  ante  ocalos  untunqueniqne  legnm,  set  before  your  eyes  each  of  the 

e.  Quieqae  is  regularly  placed  in  a  dependent  clause,  if  there  is  one : 

quoqnisqne  eat  sollerlior,  hoc  docel  iracundiu»(Rosc,Com.  \l),tAekeener' 
willed  a  man  is,  the  more  imfa/ie?ttly  he  teaches  (in  »'hat  measure  each 
is,  etc.,  in  that  measure  lie  teaches,  etc.). 

f,  NSmS,  no  oni,  is  tised  r  — 

1.  As  a  substantive :  as, —  ^B 
cSmd  lie  repeolc  turpissimus,  no  one  suddenly  becomes  absolute//  iase.  .^H 

2.  As  an  adjective  pronoun :  as, —  ^M 
vir  nintO  bonus  (Leg.  li.  16),  no  good  man. 

Note. — Even  when  used  as  a  subslantivc,  Ii6m0  may  take  a  noun  m  apposi. 

nemo  scriptoT,  nobo^  [who  Is^  a  v.<r\UT.  -^^^^^^M 


Alius  and  Alti 


193  { 


7.  Alius  and  A.lter. 
203.   The  expressions  alter  ,   ,   .  alter,  the  one  .  .  .   tke% 
other,  alius  .   .   .  allna,  one  .  .   .  another,  may  be    used    in; 
pairs  to  denote  either  division  of  a  group  or  reciprocity  0 
action  :  as,  — 

alu  gladiis  adociuDtuT,  alii  frigmentia  saeptocnin  (Sest.  42),  some  make  on  | 
attack  ■with  swords,  others  ■milh  fragments  of  the  railings. 

anna  ab  aliia  posita  ab  alila  erepta.  sunt  (Mbtc.  10,  31),  arms  were  laid  % 
dovm  by  some  and  werg  snatched  from  others. 

dnSbna  Roaciis  Amerinis  quorum  alternm  sedere  iu  acciisalocuni  aubselliil  | 
video,  altemm  tris.  hiiiusce  praedia  possidere  audio  (Rose.  Am.  6,  17),  I 
ftiw  Roscii  of  Amtria,  one  of  ■whom  I  see  sitting  on  the  benches  of  tit  I 
prosecution;  Ike  other,  J  hear,  is  in  possession,  etc. 

alteri  dimicant,  alter!  victocem  timeoC  (Fam.  vi.  3),  one  party  fights,  tht  I 
other  fears  tht  victor. 

hi  fritres  alter  alterum  amant,  these  brothers  love  one  another. 

alina  alinm  percontamur,  we  ash  each  other. 

a.  Alina  means  simply  other,  another  (of  an  indefinite   number); 
alter,  the  other  (of  two),  often  the  second  in  a   series;    cfiterl  and  | 
■yeJlquI,  all  the  rest,  the  others;  alteruter,  one  of  the  two.    Thus,- 

quid  alind  afiis,  ishai  else  are  you  doing  (what  other  thing)  ? 

cum  etiom  hi  quibul  ignoviati,  nolint  te  esse  in  alioB  miseiicorilem  (IJg.  J 

5,  15),  Tvhen  even  those  whom  you  have  pardoned  are  uniailli 

ycH  should  be  mtreifu!  to  olliers. 
ttHi  epistnlae  respoudi,  venlo  ad  alteram  (Faro.  ii.  17,  6),  one  Utter  I  haut^ 

answered,  T  come  to  the  other, 
OD1U  atque  item  alter,  one  and  then  [Ukewise]  another.     (|Of  an  indefinite  \ 

number,  but  strictly  lefening  only  ta  the  second.] 
altenuu  genus  (Cat.  iL  9,  19),  Ae  second  class. 
iecissem  ipse  me  potius  in  profundum  ul  oeterdi  conscrvarcm  (Seat.  2 

I  should  have  rather  tkrmim  myself  into  the  deep  to  save  the  rest. 
horum  nCro  uti  nolumus,  altero  est  uCendum  (Sest.  42,  92),  whichever  of  I 

the  Add  wi  do  not  wish  to  have,  we  must  take  the  other. 
Servilios  consul,  reliqnique  magistcatos  (B.  C.  iii.  21),  Servilitu  the  eaiatU  ] 

artd  the  rest  of  the  magistrates. 
cum  sit  Decease  altemtmm  vincece  (Fam.  vl.  3),  when  it  must  be  that  t 

of  Ike  two  should  prevail. 


b.  AUhb  and  alter  are  often  used 
(the  other)  of  the  objects  referred  to : 


well  as  another 


194  Syntax:    The  Sentence.  [§g  203,  204. 

c.  AAliiB  repeated  in  another  case,  or  with  an  adverb  from  the  same 
tern,  expresses  shortly  a  double  statement ;  as,  — 
alius  iliud   petit,  one  man  setks  one  thing,  one  onolker  (another  seeks 

Bnother  thing), 
alius  alia  via  civitSlem  auxiruiit  (Liv.  i.  21 ),  Ihiy  enlarged  ike  Stale,  each 

mudigi, 

1  used,  especially  with  n^atJTes,  in  reTerence  lo  an  In' 
is  opposed  lo  all  the  rat  taken  singly :  as,  — 

qui  iltsrum  incusal  probri  cum  ipsum  sc  intueri  opoctet  {Phaed.  i.  19),  ke 
uiAo  aecuses  Ail  neighbor  of  ^orang  ought  tg  look  at  himself  {&e  Biker, 
Ihete  being  al  the  moment  only  two  concerned). 

dum  ne  sil  te  ditior  »lter  (Hot.  Sat  L  1,  40),  so  long  as  anolher  is  not 
rickrr  tAaH  yoH. 

non  ul  ais£is  alter,  amicus  (Hot.  Sal.  i.  5.  33),  a  friend  such  that  no 

IV.-VER8S.  ^1 

1.   Verb  and  Snbjeot.  ^H 

201.   A  Finite  verb  agrees  with  its  Subject  in  Number 
and  Person  :  as,  — 

ego  stituo,  /  rrsoihr. 

senitOS  decrevit,  the  smatt  orelereJ. 

nient  lega  inter  amo,  tit  laas  are  Jtimt  im  Hmt  if  war. 


m.  A  verb  hating  a  relative  as  it;  sobject  takes  the  posoQ  of  tbe  exr 
iRSsed  or  implie<i  antetedeat:  as, — 
aiknmqni  Ra  r.Eii.  ix.  ^SJ\^ert^mIwi^J^fit. 
t.  The  Tab  sonietiiDes  agnes  im  a 


Double  Subject. 

2.   Double  Subjeot. 
205.   Two  or  more  singular  subjects  take  a  verb  in  thel 
■  plural :  as,  — 

pater  et  avus  mortol  Bnnt,  hiifatkir  and  grandfather  an  dead. 
Note.  — So  rarely  (by  a  eanalmclloQ  according  10  the  sense.  }  iBi)  v 

i.  (xi),  the  general  a, 


si  tu  e(  TulHi  valetia  egq  et  Cicero  TalemoB  (Fam.  xiv.  5),  if  yea  a 
Tultia  are-aiell,  Cicero  and  I  are  laell.     [Notice  that  the  first  person 
is  ahajirsi  in  order,  not  last,  as  by  courtesy  in  English.] 

Note.  —  In  case  of  different  genders  a  participle  in  a  verb-form  follows  the  rule 
far  predicate  adjectives;  see  }  1B7.  *,  c. 

b.  If  the  subjects  are  connected  by  disjunctives,  or  if  they  are  con- 
sidered as  a  single  whole,  the  verb  is  singular:  as,  — 

quern  neqaQ  fides  neqne  iiiaiiirBiiduni  neqae  ilium  misericordia  repressit 

(Ter.  Ad.  306),  not  faith,  nor  oath,  nay,  nor  mercy,  checked  him. 
Senalus  populusque   Romanus  mtellegit  (Fam.  v.  8),  the  Roman  Senate 

I  and  people  understand.     [Here  the  phrase  Senitna,  etc,  19  the  officiil     ^^^ 

desiguation  of  the  government.]  ^^H 

C.  A  collective  nouti  commonly  takes  a  verb  in  the  singular :  as,  —      ^^H 
Senalul  haec  intelligit  (Cat.  i.  i,  z),  the  Senate  is  aware  of  this.  ^^H 

ad  biberna  exeicitus  redit  (Liv.  xxi.  zz),  tht  army  returns  to  Tninter-juar-  ^^^| 
I.  But  the  plural  is  often  found  with  collective  nouns  when  individ-  ^^H 

\ 


Mais  are  thought  of;  a 

pajspraedas  agibant  (Jug-  32),  a  part  braught  in  booty. 

cam  lanla  multitndo  lapides  conioerBnt  (B.  G.  ii.  6),  -when  such  a  crojcd 

vias  IkroToing  stones. 
Note.— The  point  of  view  may  change  in  the  course  of  a  sentence:  as,-  J 

equitilum  omnem  . .  .  qnam  habebat  praemittit,  qui  Tidsant,  (B.  G.  i.  15),    1 
hi  sent  ahead  all  the  cavalry  he  had.  to  see  (who  should  see).  H 

:.  Qnlaque  has  very  often  a  plural  verb,  but  may  be  considered  as 
in  apposition  with  a  plural  subject  implied  (cf  §  202.  rf)  ;  as,  — 

Mbi  quisqae  habeant  quod  suum  est  (Plaul.  CuTt.'),  Ift  rufj  onitetJlB* 
I  atea  (let  tbeai  keep  every  man  his  own'). 


rgfi  Syntax:   The  Sentence. 

d.  When  a  verb  belongs   lo   two   or   more   subjetts   separatefy, 
may  agree  with  one  and  be  understood  with  the  others :  as,  — 
intercedit  M.  Antotiius  el  Ca^siua  Iribuni  plebis  (B.  C.  i,  z),  AiUonji 
Canius,  tribunes  of  Ihe  people,  inlerpose. 

3.   Incomplete  Sentences. 

206.  Thesubjectof theverbissometimesomitted.  Thu^' 

a.  A  Personal  pronoun,  as  subject,  is  usually  omitted  unless  emph: 
Thus,— 

loquor,  I  speak.    But,  ego  loquor,  it  is  I  that  sptai. 

b.  An  indefinite  subject  is  often  omitted. 
This  is  usually  a  plural,  as  in  dicunt,  fenint,  perhibent  {they  say) 

but  sometimes  singular,  as  in  inqnit  (Tusc.  i.  39),  one  says  (1 
to  a  class  of  leasoners  just  spoken  of). 

c.  The  verb  is  often  omitted.    Thus, — 

1 .  Died,  facld,  ago  and  other  verbs  in  familiar  phrases :  as 

quotsum  haec  [apectant],  ivkal  does  this  aim  at? 
ex  ungue  leonem  [cognosces],  you  roill  hnme  a  lion  ly  Ail  elaw. 
quid  multa,  what  need  of  many  words  ?  (why  should  I  Say  much?) 
quid?  quod,  wAal  of  this,  that,  etc?  (what  shall  I  say  of  this,  that, 

[A  form  of  transition.] 
Aeolua  haec  contra  (jDn.  i.  76),  jEolus  thus  [spoke]  in  reply. 
turn  Cotta  [inquit],  then  said  Colla. 

di  meliora  [duint],  Heaven  forefeitd  (may  the  gods  grant  better  thingi)l- 
unde  [venis]  et  quo  [tendisj,  lahere  are  you  from  andvihere  bound? 

2.  The  copula  aiiin,  very  commonly  in  the  indicative  and  infinitive, 
rarely  (except  by  late  authors)  in  the  subjunctive :  as,  — 

tSconiSnx  C^n.  iv.  llfj, you  Xyx^l  his  wife. 

omnia  praedara  rata  (LseL  20>  all  the  best  things  are  rare. 

potest  incidere  saepe  contenlio  et  comparatio  de  duobus  honestii  ntrum 
honestiua  (Off,  i.  43),  a  comparison  of  two  honorable  actions,  as  to 
■whiek  is  ihe  more  honorable.  [Here,  if  any  copula  were  expressed,  it 
would  be  Bit,  but  rhe  direct  question  would  be  complete  witboul  any.] 

accipe  quae  peragenda  prius  (^n.vi.  136),  hear  -uihat  is  first  to  bi  aeeoni- 
ptished.     [Direct:  quae  peragenda  prina?] 

Cf.,  for  omission  of  a  Subjunctive,  —  cum  ille  fer5citet  Bd  haec  [diceret] 
(Liv.  i.  48),  vpon  his  replying  luitk  insolence  to  this,  that,  etc. 

V.-PARTICLES. 
1.    Adverbe, 

207,  Adverbs  are  used   to  modify  Verbs,  Adjectives, 


1 

,u^^ 

V  say) ; 
:ferrin^^ 

1 

i)i^H 


Adverbs.  r97i 

lerivadon  and  classiRcatioD  of  adverbs,  see  W  148, 149. 
:  proper  funclions  of  Adverbs,  ss,  peliified   case-tonna,   ia 
lodl^  Verbs:  as.  cslerlter Ire. /n ,fVi  viitk  spied,     ll  h  from  this  use  Ihat  th^  I 
derive  their  name  (advorblmn,  from  ad,  la,  and  Verbum.  vcri;  see  §  163./),  1 
They  alKi  modi^  ailjeclives,  showing  in  what   manner  or  degree  the  qualltf  I 
described  is  manifested ;  as,  Bplendide  JnoTiA&i,  gloriQusfy  falsi .     More 
Ihey  modify  other  adverbs ;  as,  nimia  ^raviter.  taa  smriiy. 

Note  3. — 'Many  adverbs,  especially  reladve  adverbs,  serve  as  connective 
are  hardly  lo  be  distinguished  from  conjunctions  (see  }  25,  k.  note). 

a.  A  Demonstrative  or  Relative  adverb  is  often  equivalent  t> 
corresponding  Pronoun  with  a  preposition  (see  §  201.  f) :  as,  — 

eo  (^—  in  ea)  impooit  visa.  (Jug.  75),  ufian  thtm  (thitlicr,  thereon,  c 

beasts)  hi  puis  Iki  cantf-ulinsils. 
eo  milites  imponere  (B.  G.  i.  42),  an  Ikim  (thereon)  hi  puis  thi  soldiirs. 
apud  eos  qao  (=  ad  qnos)  se  contulit  (Verr.  iv.  18),  among  iha: 

(whither)  At  resorlid. 
qui  eum  necasset  nnde  ipse  natus  esset  (Rose.  Am.  26),  oni  ■aiho  should   I 

have  kilhd  ku  mm  father  (him  whence  he  had  his  birth). 
□  miseras  condiciones  adminislrandarum  provinciamm  nbi  [=  in  quibus] 

Kveritaa  periculosa  est  (Flacc  87),  ok!  ■wrelchid  terms  of  m 

Ihe  provincis,  ■aihere  strictness  is  dangerous. 

b.  The  adverbs  propiuo,  near;  proxiinB,  next  (like  the  adjectives 
proplor,  prozimuB) ;  piidiS,  the  day  before;  pOBtrldiS,  the  day 
after,  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  accusative  {see  §  261.  0). 

The  adverbs  palam,  openly ;  prooul,  afar%  Bxra\d,  at  tie  same  lime, 
are  sometimes  followed  by  the  ablative  (see  §  261.  i). 

Note.  — PridiSondpoBtrldie  are  often  used  with  the  genitive  (j  333.1.11.3). 
Clam,  wilioHt  Iht  kmrmledge  of,  may  take  Ihe  accusative,  the  abladve,  or  the  get 

c.  Many  perfect  participles  used  as  nouns  regularly  retain  the  adver! 
I   which  modified  them  as  participles ;  as,  — 

praeclate  factum,  a  glorious  died  {s.  thing  gloriously  done). 

d.  Very  rarely  adverbs  are  used  with  nouns  which  contain  a  verba 
a(cf.  §  188.  rf):  as,— 

populuB  lale  rex  (JFja.  i.  zi),  a  people  ruling  far  and  wide. 
hioc  abitio  (Plant.),  a  going  away  from  here. 

quid  cogitem  de  obTia.ni  itione  (Alt.  xiii.  50),  whal  I  think  about  going  t 
meet  £biro].     ^Perhaps  fell  as  a  compound.] 


For  adverbs  used  as  adjec 


t Note.— In  som 
adjective  modifyi 
1  adjective  (as  In 


■ 
I 


igS  Syniax:   The  Sentence.  [§  20ft 

2.   Conjnnctloiis.  ^^H 

Note.  — For  ihe  ciassificalion  of  conjunctions,  see  {{  154, 153.  ^^| 

208.   Copulative  and  Disjunctive  Conjunctions  connect 
similar  constructions,  and  are   regularly  followed  by  the 
same  case  or  mood  that  precedes  them  :  as, — 
acriptum  senntui  et  populo  (Cat.  iii.  5,  lo),  wrih 
ut  eas  [parlis]  sanarea  et  conrirmares  (Mil.  25,6 

strengthen  those  parts. 
neque  mea  priidentia  neqne  iumania  consiliis  fi 
ing  neither  an  my  av>n  foresight  nor  an  hum 

a.  Conjunctions  of  Comparison  (as  at,  qoam,  tanquam,  quasi)  ajso 
commonly  connect  similar  constructions:  as,— 

his  igilur  quam  physidB  potius  credendum  exialimas  (Div.  ii.  26),  do  yaa 
ikini  these  are  more  to  be  trusted  than  ihe  natural  philosophers  ! 

hominem  callidioiem  vidi  neminem  qaam  PhonmaiiEin  (Tcr.),  a  shrewder 
man  I  never  taw  than  Phormio  (cf.  §  247.  a). 

65),  as  every  wine  does  not  sour  •with  age,  so  [does]  not  every  natttre. 
Cf.  perge  ut  inBtituIsti  (Rep.  ii.  i'),^  on  as  you  have  begun. 
in  me  quasi  in  tyrannum  (Phil.  xi».  6, 15),  against  me  as  against  a  tyrant. 

b.  Two  or  more  co-ordinate  words,  phrases,  or  sentences  are  often 
put  together  without  the  use  of  conjunctions  {Asyndeton,  %  346.  c);  as,  — 

orancs  di,  homines,  all  gods  and  men. 

summi,  medii,  infimi,  the  highest,  the  middle  class,  and  the  tovtesl. 

libecl,  Becvi,  freemen  and  slaoes. 

1.  Where  there  are  more  than  two  co-ordinate  words,  etc.,  a  conjunc- 
tion, if  used  at  all,  must  be  used  with  all  (or  all  except  the  first)  :  as,  — 

aut  aere  alieno  aut  magniludine  tribulonim  ant  iniuiia  potentiorum  (B.  G. 
vi.  13),  by  debt,  excessive  taxation,  or  oppression  on  the  part  of  the 
powerful. 

summa  Sde  ot  constanlia  et  iuslitia,  viilh  perfect  good  faith,  [andj  consist- 
ency, and  justice.     [Not  fide  coDHta.ntia  et  iustitiS,  as  In  English.] 

2.  But  words  are  often  so  divided  Into  groups  that  the  members  of 
the  groups  omit  the  conjunction  (or  express  it),  while  the  groups  them- 
selves express  the  conjunction  (or  omit  it) ;  as,  — 

propudium  illud  et  portentum,  L.  Anlonius  insigDe  odium  omnium  bomi- 
num  (Phil.  xiv.  3,  S),  that  wretch  and  monster,  Lucius  Antonius,  the 
abominaltan  af  all  men. 

ntrumque  egit  graviter,  auctoritale  et  oRensione  animi  non  acerba  (Lirl. 

B/,  77),  he  acted  in  both  casts  with  dignity,  ■uiitkaut  lott  Oj 

■i^a/i/A  no  hitterness  of  feeling. 


i  208,  209.]     Conjunctions ;  Negative  Particles. 

3.  The  enclitic  -que  is  sometimes  used  with  the  last  member  of  « 
;ries,  even  when  there  is  no  grouping  apparent :  as,  — 
voce  vultu  raotu^ne  (Brut.  1 10),  by  voice,  exprenioiit  and gtslrire. 
ciiiam  consilium  vigilantiamqtie  (Phil.  vii.   10),  care,  •misdom,  a 

multo  sudoce  Ubare  vigiliisqiie  (Div.  72),  •milk  mikh  fatigue,  1 

viaiing. 
qaocum  auctoritalem  d^;nititem  voluntatemqua  defetideras  (Fam.  i.  7,  2),  I 

■uiAosc  dignity,  honor,  and  wishes  yau  had  defended. 

c.  Two  adjectives  belonging  to  the  same  noun  are  regularly  coi 
oected  by  a  conjunction ;  as,  — 

mulloe  et  graves  causae,  many  weighty  reasons. 

d.  Many  words  properly  adverbs  may  be  used  correlatively,  and  s 
iKcome  conjunctions,  partly  or  wholly  losing  their  adverbial  force  (see  1 
'5  107)-     Such  are, — 

cum  . .  .  tnm,  nhils  ...so  also  {both  .  .  .  and-). 

tiua  .  .  ,  tum,  riffiu  ,  .  .  HoiL\ 

modo  . .  ■  modo,  7iow  , .  .  now. 

Bimnl..  .aimal,  at  the  same  lime  . .  .alike  same  timt  (at  once  .  ..as  well  as), 

qua  . .  .  qua,  now . .  .  now.  . 

Thus,  — 

com  difficile  est,  turn  nS  aequum  quidem  (Liel.  S,  26),  not  only  is  il  diffi- 
cult, but  even  unjust. 

erumpant  saepe  vilia  amicorum  torn  in  ipsos  amicos  ti 
21,  76),  the  faults  of  fritnds  sometimtt  break  out, 
friends  themsehiis,  now  against  strangers. 

modo  ait  modo  negat  (Tec.  Eun.  712),  now  he  soys  yes, 

aimnlgralias  agit,  udmiI  giitulatur  (Q.  C  vi.  t),  he  thanks  him  and  at  tht  J 
lame  time  congratulates  him.  I 

qna  maris  qnS  fiminas  (Plaut.  Mil.  1 1 13),  both  males  and  females. 

e.  Two  conjunctions  of  similar  meaning  are  often  used  together 
4he  sake  of  emphasis  or  to  bind  a  sentence  more  closely  to  what  pre- 
cedes:  as,  at  T8r6,  iul  in  truth,  bill  surely,  still,  hirweveri  itaqne 

accordingly  then',  namqae,  for;  et-enlm,  for,  you  see,  for  of 
(5  i!6.  i). 

f.  For  conjunctions  introducing  subjunctive  clauses,  see  Chap.  V.        I 

3.   Ifegative  Particles. 

Note. — For  the  list  of  neEalive  particlea,  see  \  149.  e. 
209.   In  the  use  of  the  Negative  Partides.the  fallQwiii^, 
nnts  are  to  be  observed  :  — 


20O  Syntax:    The  Stnte»£e.  [§  209. 

a.  Two  negatives  are   equivalent  to  an  affirmative,  as   in   English 
(§  150):  as,  ttCnio  uSn  videt,  everybody  sees. 
But  ^general  negation  is  not  destroyed  — 
I.  By  3  ibllowing  nS  . . .  quidem,  not  even,  or  nSn  modo,  not  only: 

noinqnam  tu  non  modo  otium,  sed  ne  bdlum  C[nidem  nisi  nefariam  con- 
cuplati  (Cal.  i.  lO,  25),  nol  only  havtyou  never  desired  repose,  but  you 
have  never  desirtd  any  a'ar  txeefl  otie  inhich  iiias  itifameus. 

i  separate  subordinate 


3.  By  neque  introducing  a  co-ordinate  member:  as, — 

neqaeo  satis  mirari  neqne  conicere  (Ter.   Eim.  547),  I  cannot  luonder 

b.  The  negative  is  frequently  joined  to  some  other  word.  Hence 
the  forms  of  negation  in  Latin  differ  from  those  in  English  in  many 
ejtpressions.    Thus,  — 

neqne  (nee)  (not  et  non),  and  no/,  hut  not  (neither  .  .  .  nor). 

nee  quiaquam  (nol  et  nemo),  and  no  one  (nor  any  one). 

niilli  or  ueatri  credo   (not    Don    credo  nlli),  /  da  not  believe  either 

(I  believe  neither). 
neg5  haec  esse  vera  (nol  dico  non  ease),  /  say  this  is  net  true  (1  denji 

that  these  things  are  true). 
eino  alio  periculo  (less  commonly  com  unllo),  laith  na  danger  (without 

any  danger). 
liTiil  nnqnam  audivi  iiicundius,  /  never  heard  anything  mere  amusing 

(nothing  mace  amusing  tiave  I  ever  heard). 


i   often   made  emphatic   by  denying   its   contrary 
■  {Utotes):  as,— 

non  haec  sine  niimine  divani  eveniaot  (^n.  ii.  777),  these  things  da  hM 

occur  -wilhoui  the  will  of  the  gods. 
haec  non  nimis  exquiro  (Att.  vii.  iS,  3),  not  very  much,  i.e.  very  little. 

tNoTC  —  Compare  nSnailllua,  aOnnSmS,  eic.  (j  150.  a). 
d.  The  particle  linmS,  nay,  is  used  to  contradict  some  part  of  a 
preceding  statement  or  question,  or  its  form ;  ia  the  latter  case,  the 
same  statement  b  often  repeated  in  a  stronger  form,  so  that  immS  be- 
comes nearly  equivalent  \fiyes  {nay  but,  nay  rather)  :  as,  — 
caasa  igitut  non  bona  est?  immo  optima  (Att,  is.  7),  ii  the  came  then  net 
agvudoneF  on  the  contrary,  the  best. 


i§  209,  210.] 


Questions. 


order  thai') ,  and  I 


.8  possunt,  if  they 


e.  Minus,  Uss  (especially  with  bI,   if,   qaS,   in 
I,  least,  often  have  a  negative  force.     Thus,  - 

[For  quo  minnB,  see  §§  3"9-  '.  331-  '-ll 
inime  (Rose.  Am.  i).  am  I  the  boldcsl\ 
of  them  all?  by  ho  means  (not  at  all). 

[For  do  nol  in  Prohibilions,  see  {  269.  a.] 

Vl.-QUESTIONS. 

210.   Questions  are  either  Direct  or  Indirect. 

I.  A  Direct  Question  gives  the  exact  words  of  the  speaker 

quid  est  P  what  is  it  f 

z.  An  Indirect  Question  gives  the  substance  of  the  question,  adapted  1 
to  the  form  of  the  sentence  in  which  it  is  quoted.     It  depends  < 
terb  or  other  expression  of  asking,  doubting,  knowing,  or  the  like :  a; 


Questions  in  Lati 
rogative  words,  and  a 
words,  as  in  English. 

Note.  —  For  the  list  of  Inti 


■Qgative  Particle 
a.  A  question  of  simple  fact,  requiring  the 
led  by  adding  the  enclitic  -ne  to  the  emphatic  word 

mfearlhal? 
morietur  (Mil. 
native  lattdf 


sign  of  inlerrogatioQ  appears 


c.  When  the  enclitic  -ne  is 
nSntie,  —  an  affirmatrue  answer 
gests  a  negative  answer.    Thus,  — 

uGnne  animadverli*  (N.  D.  iii,  35),  da  you.  hoI  observe  ? 
K      nan!  dabiuai  at  fRosc.  Am.  37),  tkere  is  no  doubt,  is  Ihere? 


are   introduced   by   special   inter-  1 
;  not  distinguished  by  the  order  of  ] 


202  Syntax:   The  Sentence.  [JS  210, 211. 

d.  TTie  particle  -ne  often  when  added  to  the  verb,  less  commonly 
when  added  to  some  other  word,  has  the  force  of  noiuie:  as.  — 

merainislme  mi  in  senatu  dicere  (Cat.  i.  3),  don'l  yau  rsmtmber  my  say- 
XTig  in  Iht  Stnali  ? 

rectene  intcrpielat  senlenliam  tuam  (Tusc.  iii.  17,  37),  du  I  tiol  righlly 
inlcrprtl  yeur  meaning  f 

NOTK.  — This  was  eyidentlj  (he  original  meaning  of -ne;  but  in  most  cases  ihe 
negative  force  was  lost  and  -ne  was  used  nierelj  lo  express  a  question.  So  ihe 
English  inwrtogative  noT  shades  off  inlo  ehf 

Remark.— The  encliiic-ne  is  sometimes  added  to  other  inlerrogaiive  words; 
as,  utrumne,  vikether;  anna,  or;  quantane  (Hot.  Sal.  iu  3.  317),  kOTB  iigf 
quOce  molS  \\ii.^i^),iyvi&.il curse  f 

e.  A  question  concerning  Jiiww  spheral  circumstaKce  is  formed  by 
prefixing  to  the  sentence  an  interrogative  pronoun  or  adverb  (§  io6j, 
as  in  English:  as, — 

qnid  ell  quad  lam  amplius  exapectes  (Cat.  L  3),  what  is  there  for  you  & 

look  for  any  more? 
jd5  ieilur  haec  spectant  (Fant.  vl.  6),  ■whither  thtn  is  aH  tiis  tenttingf 
Icare,  nbl  es  (Ov.  M.  viii.  232),  Icarus^  where  ariyauT 
Remark. — A  question  of  Ihis  form  becomes  an  exclamatioa  b;  changing  Ibr 
inSecrlon  of  Ihe  voice:  as,  qUEUIs  vir  erati  wkata  man  Aeimsf  quot  cola- 
mitatSa  paaal  aumua  I  Amo  mimy  misfortunts  have  vn  safertdJ 

f.  The  particles  nam  (enclidc)  and  tandem  may  be  added  to  Inter- 
rogative pronouns  and  adverbs  for  the  sake  of  emphasis ;  as,  — 
qnianam  aX,  prayivho  it  itf     [qnia  tandem  eat?  would  be  Btronger.] 
ubiaam  gentium  sumiis  (Cat.  f,  4),  laltere  in  the  leorld are  we! 
in  qua  tandem  urbe  hoc  disputant  (Mil.  3,  7),  t»  ivkat  ei^%prajr,  do  Aey 

mainlainlhisf 
Noi'E.— Tandem  Is  someCtmei  added  lo  veibs:  as,— 
aln  tandem  (Fam,  k,  zi),y0u  don'l  soy  sof  (say  you  so,  pray?) 
ilane  tanrlera,  (juaeso,  est  (Ter.  Heaat,  954),  iV'j  so,  is  il  then  f 
itane  landenj  uxorem  du^it  Antipho  (Ter.  Ph.  331).  *"  t^'".  '^  ?  AHlipho's 

got  married? 
Remark.— The  form  of  Indirect  Qiiesdons  (in  English  Inlroduced  by  lehtlher, 
□r  by  an  inletrogative  pronoun  or  adverb)  Is  in  Latin  the  same  as  thai  of  Dired; 
the  difference  being-  only  in  (he  verb,  which  in  indirect  quesliona  regularly  laket 
the  Subjunctive  ({334). 

In  indirect  questions  ntim  loses  its  peculiar  force  ()  aio.  <)' 

Double  QneatioiiB. 

211.   A  Double  or  Alternative  Question  is  an  inquiry 

as  to  which   of  two  or  more  supposed  cases  is  the  true 


S  211,  212.] 


Questions. 


^W  211,  21 

^1     In    Double    or    Alternative   Questions, 
^^v^kether,  stands  in  the  first  member;  an,  an 

necne,  or  not,  in  the  second ;  and  usually  an 

there  be  one :  as,  — 

26),   < 


ntmm  or  'net  1 
me,  or ;  annSn,  I 
in  the  third,  if  1 


ia,  an  pio  nihaS  Id  pulas  (Fani.  x.  26),  IJ  it  that  you  don't   j 
■  ds  you  Ihink  Holhing  of  it? 

.  libetoa  (Rose  Am.  27),  I  ask  TiiAclkcr  ilavn  or  free. 
atmm  hostem  an  vos  an  forlunam  utriusque  popuU  ignoratis  (Liv.  xxi. 
10,  6),  is  it  tki  enemy,  or  yourselves,  or  Ike  fortuni  of  Ike  two  peoples,   j 
that  you  do  no!  knsniif 
Remakk.— AnaOn  is  more  common  In  direct  questions,  necne  in  indirect. 
a.  The  interrogative  particle  is  often  omitted  in  the  first  member;  | 
which  case  -ne  (anne,  necne)  may  stand  in  the  second ;  as,  — 
Gabinio  dicam  anne   Pompiio  an  utrique  (M^nil.    19),  shaU  I  say  ti 

Gatinius,  or  la  Poinpey,  or  to  both  ? 
sunt  haec  tua  verba  necne  (Tusc.  iii.  18),  are  these  your  -words  or  not? 


b.  Soi 
lone  : 


m^a 


the  first  member  is  omitted  or  implied,  and  an  (anno)   J 

ks  the  question,  —  usually  with  indignation  or  surprise :  as,  ■ 

D.  tii  miseros  putaa  illos  (Tusc.  i.  7),  what!  da  yea  think  t/iosc  « 

wretched?  I 

Sometimes  the  second  member  is  omitted  or  implied,  and  utrum    , 

ask  a  question  to  which  there  is  no  alternative :  as,  —  I 

ntnun  in  claiissimis  est  civibus  is,  qucm  .  .  .  (Flacc.  id),  is  he  among  lAt   | 

Holiest  citizens,  whom,  etc.? 
J.  The   following   table   exhibits  the  various   forms 

utrum  .  .  .  annSn 


Question  and  Answer. 

212.   There  is  no  one  Latin  word  in  common  use  mean- 
Dg  simply  _]'^j  or  no.    In  answering  a  question  affinnatively, 
the  verb  or  some  other  emphatic  word  is  generally  ; 
peated ;  tn  ansvirering  negatively,  the  veib,  etc.,  Vv^  i 
a  similar  negative  :  as,  — 


r 


Syntax:   The  Sentence.  [%  212 


valetne,  is  ht  -will?  valet,  yts  (he  is  well). 

eralne  tecum,  wai  he  Toilh  you  ?  nSn  erat,  »o  (he  was  not). 

numquidnam  navl  tktre  is  nolhing new,  is  tkert?  niMl  aane,  oh!  ni 

a.  An  intensive  or  negative  particle,  a  phrase,  or  a  clause  is 
ties  used  lo  answer  a,  direct  question ;  thus,  " 


uie  quidem,  jres,  no  douit,  < 
its,  so,  Irtit,  etc.  ita  eat,  if  u  so,  true,  etc. 

tane,  surety  (soundly),  no  doubt,  doubtless,  etc. 
certe,  certainly,  most  assuredly,  unquestionably,  etc. 
factum,  true  (it  was  done),  its  a  fael,  you're  right,  etc. 
2.  For  NO ;  — 

non,  not  [so].  nullo  modo,  by  no  means. 

nunimi,  not  at  all  (in  the  smidlest  degree,  cf.  §  209.  e). 

non  qnidem,  lohy,  no;  certainly  not,  etc. 

non  hercle  viro,  why, gracious,  no  (certainly  not,  by  Hercules)  1 

Examples  are: — 

quidnam?  an  laudaliones?  ita,  why,  whaif  is  it  tulogies  ?  jasi  so. 

But  etiam  aut  D&n  respondere  (Acad.  ii.  jz,  lO)),  to  answer  (categorically) 

yes  or  no. 
estne  ut  fertut  foiina?  BfinS  (Tec.  Eun.  360),  ii  [she]  as  handsome  as  they 

say  she  is  (is  hec  beauty  as  it  is  said)  f  eh  .'yes. 
fugiane  hinc?  ego  v5r3  ac  lubena  (Ter.  And.  337),  will  you  clear  out  from 

here  ?  indeed  I  will,  and  be  glad  lo. 
miser  ergo  Acchelaus?  certS  si  iniuslus  (Tusc.  v.  iz,  35),  was  Archelaus 

wretched  then  ?  certainly,  if  he  was  unjust. 
haec  canlemnitis?  minime  (De  Or.  ii.  73, 295),  do  you  despise  these  things  f 

not  at  all. 
voluciibnsne  et  feria?   minime  vero  (Tusc.  L  43,  104),  to  tlie  birds  and 

beasts?  why,  of  course  not. 
ex  lui  aniini  sentenlia  tu  uxorem  habea?  Don  tercle,  ex  me!  animl  sen- 

tcnlia  (De  Or.  ii.  64,  260),  Lord!  no,  etc. 
b.   In  answering  a  double  question,  one  member  of  the  alterna- 
tive, or  some  part  of  It,  must  be  repeated;  as,-^ 

liine  an  fritec  ecal,  was  it  you  or  your  brother?    ego  [cram],  it -was  I. 
Remark.  — From  double  {allerniOive')  queations  must  l>c  distinguished  Ihose 
which  are  in  themselvea  single,  but  of  which  jomfift/ji/o«^  is  allernalivo.    These 
have  (he  common  disjunctive  particles  ftut  or  vel  (-ve).    Thus.— 

qnaero  num  iniiiste  aiut  improbe  feceril  (Off.  iii.  13),  I  ask  whether  He  acted 

unjustly  or  even  dishonestly. 
Here  there  Is  no  double  question.     The  ort^  \tu\u\iv  \^  ~H\tfShei  ft«  man  did 
^  of  the  Iwo  Ihings  supposed,  not  which  otlte  wo\ie  4v4.  J 


I 


r  Construction  of  Cases.  20j  ^^^| 

Chapter  II, —  Construction  of  Cases.  ^^H 


i5  Iheirrelallonsto  other  words  In  Ihese 


root?  or  stem 

».    Floir 

1  ihls  arises  in  lim 

e  composilion, 

the  growing  together  of  sle 

by  means  of. 

which  B. 

complex  expressio 

s  parts  mutually  depends 

Thus  such  a 

complc 

X  as  Brmo-Bflro 

an  arm-itai-mg:  fldi-co 

fluymg  on  t). 

i,/jr<. 

Later.  Cases  an 

;  form. 

neans  of  suflixes  to  expr 

more  definll. 

ely  such 

L  relations,  and  Syntax  begins. 

But  the  primillve  meth 

ofcompositic 

m  stiU  a 

iDtinues  to  hold  ai 

1  Important  pli 

ice  even  In  the  most  hig 

developed  languages. 

Originally  (he  ^mily  of  languages  to  ^^'hlch  Latin  belongs  had  at  least  seven 
cases,  besides  the  Vocative.  Bui  in  Lalln  the  Locallve  and  Inslrumental  vfere 
lost  except  in  a  few  words  {where  they  remained  without  being  recogniied  as 
cases]  and  their  functions  were  divided  among  the  others  (}}  224,  24a), 

The  Nominative,  Accusative,  and  Vocative  express  the  oldest  form*  of  case- 
relations  {Direa  dues,  }  Ji.g.  note).  The  Nominative  Is  the  case  of  the  Subject, 
uid  the  -a  in  which  it  generally  ends  is  thought  to  be  a  demonstrative  pronoun 
(§  32,  n.  a).  The  Vocative,  usually  without  a  lerminalion,  or  like  the  Nominative 
(f  33-  ").  perhaps  never  bad  a  suffix  oi  its  own.  The  Accusative,  most  frequently 
formed  by  the  suffix  -m  {doubtless  another  demonstrative),  originally  connected 
the  noun  loosely  with  the  verb-idea,  not  necessarily  expressed  by  a  verb  proper, 
but  as  well  by  a  noun  or  adjective  {see  page  235,  head-note). 

The  other  cases  were  formed  by  combination  with  various  pronominal  suffixes, 
and  at  first  probably  expressed  relations  of  place  or  direction  {to,  from,  at, 
with:  litdirtet  Casts,  f  31. f.  note).  But  these  original  meanings  have  become 
confiised  with  each  olher,  and  in  many  instances  the  cases  are  no  longer  distinguish- 
able either  in  form  or  meaning.  Thus  the  Locative  was  for  the  most  part  lost  from 
its  confusion  with  the  Dative  and  Ablative;  and  its  function  was  often  performed 
by  the  Ablative,  which  is  freely  used  to  express  the  placi  -wktre  (j  358,  /),  To  indi- 
cate relations  of  place  more  precisely,  Prepositions  (originally  Adverbs)  gradually 
became  necessary.  These  by  degrees  rendered  the  case-endings  useless,  and  so 
have  finally  superseded  them  In  all  modem  languages  derived  from  Latin.  But  in 
Latin  a  large  and  various  body  of  relations  was  slill  expressed  by  case-forms.    It 

in  ibm  figuralivt  uses  to  retain  the  old  construction.     (See  Ablative  of  Separation, 
}  143 :  Ablative  of  Place  and  Time,  {}  254,  236.) 

The  word  C&B11B,  case,  Is  a  ffanslation  of  the  Greek  irruirit,  a/ailing  away  (from 
the  erect  position).  The  term  ttbiti!  was  originally  applied  to  (he  Oblique  Cases  (j 
3i.,f),  to  mark  Ihera  as  variations  from  the  Nominative,  which  was  called  opH  (casta 
rictus).  The  later  name  Nsminaiive  (casus  ndminaCivu!)  is  from  ngmlng,  and 
means  the  ■amifly  ease.  The  other  case-names  (except  ailalivt)  are  of  Greek  origin. 
The  name  Ctnilhic  (casus  geittCnjui)  Is  a  translation  of  ^t¥^Kh  [ttSois],  from 
yiiiBt  (class),  and  refers  to  Ihe  dassXa  which  a  thing  belongs.  Dative  (casus daHinis, 
from  dO)  is  translated  from  Sdtiic^,  and  means  the  case  ol  giving.  Accusative 
(atcSsa/nms,  from  accflsfi)  is  a  mistranslation  of  oirinTix^  (the  case  of  cauiiag), 
from  ahla,  cause,  and  meant  to  the  Romans  Ihe  case  of  accusing.  The  name 
yocatiae  (vocathms,  from  vooO)  is  translated  from  kXijiikA  (^(he  caseoS  tantng^. 
The  name  Ailatrnt  {ailatiiais,  from  abl&ttlB,  auIerG)  means  laJniif  front,  "Yi^ 
■  oBSe  the  Greek  had  lost. 


I 


I 


;o6  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.  [S  213. 

I.-GENITIVE. 

Note.—  The  Geniiive  la  r^^larly  used  to  express  the  relation  of  one  noun  lo 
noiher.  Hence  il  is  sometimes  called  Ihe  adjicliiic  case,  lo  distinguish  it  (ram 
le  Dative  and  the  Ablative,  which  may  be  called  aifoerju/ cases.  Its  uses  majbe 
lassified  a^  follows :  — 

1.  Ot  Possession  (}  214). 

>.  OfSoutcedevelopedinloMaterUl(§»i4.*). 
3.  OtQtitility  (fits). 

Of  the  Whole,  after  words  designating  a  Part  (Partitive, 
i  ai6). 
S.  With  Nouns  otAcIion  and  Feeling  (Jir?), 
11.  Genitive  WLTH  (1.  Relative  adjective  (or  Verbal) (jaiS. a.*).  .^^ 

Adjectives:   ]  9.  (3fSpecificHtion  (later  use]  \^s\%.c).  ^^H 

III.  GENLTIVEWITH  t  I.  Of  Memorr,  Feeling,  etc.  (§§  aig,  aai-^).  -^^H 

VersS:  la.  Of  Accusii^,  etc  (Charge  or  Penalty)  (^  st2o).      ^^| 

1.   Genitive  with  Noons. 

213.  A  noun  used  to  limit  or  define  anotlier,  and  fwt 
meaning  the  same  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  the  Genitive. 

This  relation  b  most  frequently  expressed  in  English  by  the  prepo- 
sition of:  as, — 

libri  Cicerpnis,  the  beats  of  Cicero. 

talenluin  auci,  a  laltnt  of  gold. 

vir  sommae  virtutis,  a  man  of  the  greattsi  couri^, 

pan  mililum,  a  part  of  the  soldiers. 

cnllus  deorum,  viorsAip  of  ihr  gods. 

vacatio  laboris,  a  respite  from  toil. 

victor  omnium  gentium,  eonqueror  of  all  nations. 

In  mcst  constructions  the  genitive  is  either  Subjective 
or  Objective. 

r.  The  Stjbjective  genitive  denotes  that  to  wliich  the  noun  limited 
belotigs,  or  from  which  it  is  derived  {§  214). 

2.  The  Objective  genitive  denotes  that  toward  which  an  action  or 
feeling  is  directed  (§  217  9i.'). 

This  distinction  is  illustrated  by  the  following  example.  The  phrase 
amor  patils,  Imie  of  a  father,  may  mean  love  felt  by  a  father,  a 
father's  Imii  (subjective  genitive),  or  love  tomards  a  father  (objective 
genitive). 

Note.— The  genitive  seems  to  have  denoted  originally  that  lo  which  something 
belongs,  and  hence  it  was  originally  subjective,  llie  objective  genitive  is  a  later 
development,  through  such  expressionsas  mellaiUdBitOrea,  wf  iufnirm,  in  which 
the  admirirs  are  first  conceived  as  bthngmg  lo  me,  and  afterwards  felt  as  adwrninf 
me  (ct  §  aij.  note).  For  this  reason  the  dislinntion  between  Ihe  subjective  and 
the  objective  geniUve  is  very  unstable  and  constan\Vj\ow.si^'M,tStiA.>l  vj],  li^. 


114.]  Possessivi-  Genitive.  207  ^^| 

214.   The  Subjective  Genitive  is  used  with  a  noun  to  ^^H 
denote  (i)  the  Author  or  Owner,  (z)  the  Source  or  the^^H 

Htfaterial,  (3)  the  Quality.  ^^| 

^B  1.  PoBseesive  Genitive  ^^^H 

■  fa  o 


1.  PoBseesive  Genitive 

I.  The    Possessive  Genitive  denotes   the   author   or 


pwner :  as,  — 

ri  Ciceronis,  Ihf  books  of  (wrMlea  by)  Cieero. 
Alexandri  equus,  Alexander's  horse. 

.  For  the  genitive  of  possession  n  possessive  or  derivative  adjectivi 
i  often  used,  —  regularly  for  the  possessive  genitive  of  the  personal    I 
pronouns  (§§  190.  iijy.a):  as, — 

liber  meus,  my  book.     [Not  liber  mel,] 

aliens  peticala,  other  men's  dangers.     [But  also  aliomm.] 

>SuIlina  tempoca,  the  limes  of  Sulla..     [Oftener  Sallae,] 
b.  The  noun  limited  is  understood  in  a  few  expressions :  as,  — 
ad  Castoria  [aedM],  to  the  [temple]  of  Castor. 
Hcctoris  Andromache  (vEn.  hi.  319),  Hector's  [wife]  Andromache. 
Flaccus  Claudl,  Flaccus  [slave]  of  Claudius, 
c.  The  possessive  genitive  is  often  in  the  predicate,  connected  trith  I 
its  noun  by  a  verb :  as,  — 


haec  domus  est  patria  raei,  Uds  house 
tutelae  nortrae  [e^s]  d^imus  (Liv.; 

11  my  father's. 
),TBe  held  them 

[10 

be] 

frolec- 

compeniK  facere,  to  save  (make  of  sa 
Incri  facere,  to  gel  tie  benefit  q/'{maki 
iam  me  Pompei  tolum  esse  scia  (Fair 
Fenipey  (all  Pompey's). 

™g). 

E  of  profit). 

L.ii.  .3),^««^, 

,™ 

la 

m  now 

allfor 

Remark. —These 

u  a  ptediiale  noun  t 

genitives  hear  the  : 
lears  lo  an  apposiiivi 

■-  (hh  184,  1B5). 

th( 

.  e* 

mples 

in  §  2.3 

d.  An  infinitive 

or  a  chuse,  when  used  as  a  no 

■un. 

is 

often  limited 

a  genitive  in  the  predicate :  as,^ 

neque  BUi  iudioi  [eral]  decernere  (B.  C.  i,  35),  nor  was  itferkisju^-  I 
It  to  decide  (nor  did  it  belong  to  hia  judgment). 
[a  hominis  eat  errare  (Cic),  it  is  any  man's  [liability]  to  ei 

\  (Verr,  ii.  zS),  ke  said  it  was  not  the   (uslom   0/  Ifie   GrtOa,  f 
left  /e  o/i/ear  ai guests  (recline)  at  the  banquets  of  nltn.    ^  *  ~ 


!o8  Syntax:  Co?tstniction  of  Cases.       [§§  214, 2ia 

timidi  est  oplire  nEccm  (Ov.  M.  iv.  15),  (^  u  for  the  coward  to  wish  fir 

dialh. 
aiulU  eiaC  sperue,  suadcre  impudentis  (Phil.  ii.  10),  it  was  folly  to  kept, 

tffroHtiry  lo  urgt  (it  was  the  part  of  a  foul.  etc.). 
sapientis  (not  aapiena)  est  pauca  loqul,  it  is  wist  (the  part  of  a  wise  man) 

lo  say  Hull. 

Remakk.  — This  conslniclion  is  regular  with  adjectives  of  the  third  declension 
35lead  of  the  neuter  nominative  (see  the  last  two  samples). 


bnnianDm  (for  hominifl)  est  errare,  it  is  man's  nature  to  err  (lo  err  ii 

human). 

2.  Genitive  of  Material. 

e.  The  genitive  may  denote  the  Substance  or  Material 
of  which  a  thing  consists  (compare  §§  216,  244) :  as, — 

talentum  auri,  a  talent  of  gold. 
fliimina  lactis,  rivers  of  milk. 

of  source  (cf.  ei  aurO  factual,  made  [out] 

f.  A  limiting  genitive  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  a  noun  in  appo- 
sition {§  1S3):  as,- 

nomen  lOBaniae  {for  nomen  inaania),  the  word  madness. 
Dppidum  Antiochiae  (^ar  oppidum  Antiochla,  the  regnlai  foim),  the  city 
ofAntioth. 

g.  For  the  genitive  with  the  ablatives  causS,  giS.\A&,for  tfie  sake  of; 
exsfi,  because  of;  and  the  indeclinable  Inatar,  M«;  also  with  prIfliB, 
the  day  before;  poHtildie,  the  day  after;  tenuB,  us  far  as,  see  § 
223.  e. 

h.  For  the  genitive  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive,  see  §  298. 

3.  Genitive  of  Quality. 

216.  The  genitive  is  used  to  denote  Quality,  but  only 
when  the  quality  is  modified  by  an  adjective  :  as,  — 

vir  Bumroae  virliitis,  a  man  of  the  highest  icurage.     [But  not  vir  virtitia.] 
magnae  est  deliberationis,  it  is  an  affair  of  great  dttiberation. 
magni  formica  lahoris,  the  ant  [a  creature]  of  great  toil. 
iile  aulem  sai  iijdici  (Nep.  Atl,  9),  but  he  \v.  ni»o^  of  independent  (hi" 
o  wn)  j'tii^miHl. 


Hbtii 


1^  215,  216.]  Partitive  Genitive.  20g  \ 

Note.  — Compare  Ablative  of  Quality  (}  351).  In  expressions  of  quality,  the 
Eenilive  or  the  ablative  may  often  be  used  indifferentlj :  as,  praoatantl  pi^l- 
deDtl&  vir.  a  man  B/turfassiHff  wisdsm ;  mfixjmi  animi  bomS  (Cic.),  a 
''  tAr  griatisl  couToge.  But  in  general  the  Genilive  is  thus  used  railier  of 
•.t,  the  Ablative  of  special  or  tncidmlal  characteristics.  The  Genilii 
'  was  no  doubt  originally  saijnlive. 


The  gemlive  of  quality  is  found  in  the  adjective  phrases  Ciiis 
modi,  cuius  modi  (equivalent  to  t&lis,  such ;  quSlia,  efwhat  sort). 

b.  The  genitive  of  quality,  with  numerals,  b  used  to  define  meas- 
ures ailength,  depth,  etc.  {Genitive  of  Measure):  as,— 

(ossa  Irium  pedum,  o  trenih  ef  three  fett  [in  depth], 
murus  sedeeim  pedum,  a  wait  af  sixteen  feet  [high] . 

c.  For  Genitives   of  Quality  used   to  express  indefinite  value,  see 

^H  4.  Partitive  Oenitive. 

H     216.   Words  denoting  a  Part  are  followed  by  the  geni- 
^■tive  of  the  Whole  to  which  the  part  belongs, 
H"    a.  Partitive  words,  followed  by  the  genitive,  are  — 
^1     I,  Nouns  or  Pronouns :  as, — 

V 


pars  militum,  pari  of  the  totdiers. 

qnis  nostrum,  vihirh  if  us  (cf.  e,  below)  ? 

nihil  erat  reliqui,  there  was  nothing  ieft. 

2.  Numerals,  Comparatives,   Superlatives,  and    Pronominal   words 
aliuB,  etc.:  as, — 


I 


alter  consulum,  ani  of  the  [two]  consuls. 

iinus  tribiinSrum,  ont  of  the  tribunes  (cf.  c,  below), 

plurimum  totius  GaUlae  equititQ  valet  (B.  G.  v.  4),  11  strongest 

of  aU  Caul. 
octavns  sapientum  (Hor.),  He  eighth  viisi  man  (eighth  of  the 
Hispanocum  slii  vigilant  alii  student,  0/  the  Sfc 

■aiatek,  ethers  are  eager. 
maior  fralrum,  the  elder  oj  the  brothers. 
animBlium  fortiora,  Iki  stronger  [of]  animals. 

3.  Neuter  adjectives  and  pronouns,  used 

lantiun  spati,  so  much  [of]  space. 

aliquid  nummoruni,  a  few  pence  (something  of 

id  loci  (er  locorum),  thai  spot  0/ ground. 

id  tempons,  at  that  time  (§  240.  b). 

plana  uibis,  the  level  farts  of  the  town. 

gaid  novi,   n^a/ nearj  (what  of  new)}  « 


2IO  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.  [§  216. 

REMAKK.^The  genitive  of  adjectiras  of  the  third  dtdemhti  is  rarely  used 
panitively.    Thus  — 

nihil  novi  (gen.),  nothing  ntw  ;  but 

nihil  memor&bile  (nom.)>  nothing  worth  mttttion.     [Not  nihil  memo- 
rabiliH.J 

4.  Adverbs,  especially  of  Quantity  and  Place:  as, — 

sULS  pecuniae,  money  taoiigk  (enough  of  money).  ^^Dl 

parum  8tl,  not  much  tase  (too  little  of  ease).  ^^H 

inde  \oa,  next  in  ordtr  (thence  of  pkce).  ^^| 

turn  temporis,  al  that  point  of  time  (then  of  time),  ^H 

CO  miseriirum  (Sail.),  to  that  [pilch]  of  misery. 
ubinam  gentium  »umus,  -where  in  the  -aiorld  are  loe  (where  of  iiations)? 

b.  The  poets  and  later  writers  often  use  the  partitive  genitive  after 
adjectives,  instead  of  a  noun  in  its  proper  case:  as, — 

sequimur  te   sancle  deorum  (.^^n,   iv.    576),  a/f /o/Zow  thee,  O  holy  deity. 

[For  sancte  deoa.] 
nigtae  lanirum  (Plin.  H.  N.  viii,  48),  blaik  wools.     [For  nig^ae  lanae,] 
ilecti  iuvennm  (Liv.  xxx-  9),  chosen  youths.     [For  electi  iuvenes,] 
ciinctos  hominnm  (Ov.),  a//  men.     [For  cfinctoB  homines,  compare  ;,] 

c.  Cardinal  numerals  regularly  take  the  Ablative  with  6  (ox)  or  dS 
instead  of  the  Partitive  Genitive.  So  also  quldam  commonly,  and 
other  words  occasionally :  as, — 

unua  ex  Iribunis,  one  of  the  tribunes.     [But  also,  Shqb  tnbDtLomm.j 

minumus  ex  illis  (Jug,  m'),  the  you^eil  of  them. 

medius  ex  tribus  (ib.),  Ike  middle  sne  of  the  three. 

quidam  ex  militibus,  certain  of  the  soldiers. 

hominem  de  comitilius  meis,  a  man  of  my  companions. 

d.  ntorque,  both  (properly  lacK),  and  quisque,  each,  with  Nouns 
are  used  as  adjectives  in  agreement,  but  with  Pronouns  always  take  a 
partitive  genitive :  as,  — 

uterque  conanl,  bath  the  consuls;  but,  uleique  nostriim,  both  of  us. 
Unas  quisque  voBtriim,  each  one  of  you. 

e.  Numbers  and  words  of  quantity  including  the  whole  of  any  thing, 
take  a  case  in  agreement,  and  not  the  partitive  genitive.  So  also  words 
denoting  a  part  when  only  that  part  is  thought  of.    Thus, — 

>        nOB  omnes,  all  of  us  (we  all).     [Not  onmeB  uostrnm.]  ^_ 

^^^B         quot  sunt  hostes,  how  many  of  the  enemy  are  there .'  ^^H 

^^^P        CBvi  inimicos  qui  niulti  sunt,  beware  of  your  enemies,  who  are  many.       ^^H 
^^^K        ronJti  inHiles,  many  of  the  soldiers.  ,^^^H 

^^^^^^Bora  Romanas,  not  one  Koman.  W^^^^^H 


^H$  217.  218.] 


Objective  Genitive. 


Objective  Oenitive. 

The  Objective  Genitive  is  used  with  Nouns,  Adjective^J 
and  Verbs. 

SI  7.    Nouns  o£  action,  agency,  and  feeling  govern   the  1 
genitive  of  the  object :  as, — 

desiderium  oli,  loHgiHg/or  rcsl. 

vacitio  munetis,  riHeffrom  duly. 

gratia  benefxi,  gra/iliti/t/iir  kindHtss. 

fuga  malornm,  rtfugc  from  duaster. 

precatio  deorum,  frayer  lo  the  gods. 

contentio  hondrum,  struggle  for  o^i. 

opinio  virliitis,  riputalion  far  valor. 

Note.— This  usage  ia  an  eilension  of  the  idea  of  *(/DWfvn.^  Co  (Possessiv 
idve].    Thns  in  tlie  phrase  odium  Caeaaria,  halt  of  Caiar,  ihe  hate  in  a  passive 
belongs  lo  Caaar,  as  odium,  though  in  its  active  sense  he  is  the  oiject  of  it. 


><(rf.i.i3.n 


n  of  such  ideas  often  v. 


\ 


a.  The  objective  genitive  is  sometimes  replaced  by  a  possessive  o 

ler  derivative  adjective  (see  g  197.  a.  2)  :  as,  — 

mea  invidia,  my  UHfefulariiy  (the  dislike  of  which  I  am  the  object). 

nieus  laudator,  my  eulosisl  (one  who  praises  me). 

caedes  Clodiana  (Oc),  the  murder  of  Ciodius  (the  Godiaa  mntder  '), 

metiiE  hostilis  (Jug.  41), ^dr  nflAe  e?iemy  (hostile  fear). 

Note. — These  possessives  really  represent  possessive  genilives  (see  note  a.bove) 

i.  Rarely  the  objective  genitive  is  used  with  a  noun  already  limited  I 
by  another  genitive :  as,  - 

animi  multiinun  rernm  petcursio  (Tusc.  iv.  13),  tAe  mind's  traversiHg  of  \ 
many  things.  f 

I        c.  A  noun  with  a  preposition  is  often  used  instead  of  the  objective  I 
\   genitive:  as, — 

odium  in  Caesarem,  hate  of  Cirsa- 

mmtt  »gi  mi  (ClcO,  "«•«"  e  «<■ 

auxiliom  adversua  inimicos  (id.),  help  against  enemies. 

impetus  in  me  (id.),  atlad  on  me. 

eicMSOi  i  vita  (id.),  departure  from  life.     [Also,  excesstts  vitae,  Cic] 

Note.  — So  also  in  late  writers  the  dative  of  reference  {cf.  {336.*):  us, — 

longo  hello  materia  (Tac.  H.  L  81)),  resources  for  a  long  war. 

II.   Genitive  with  Adjectives. 
218.    Adjectives  requiring  an  object  of  reference  govern 
ithe  objective  genitive. 


[Cf.  odium  Caeaaris,  noti 


212  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.  [§  2ia 

These  are  called  Relative  Adjectives  {adiecifva  relottva)  or  Trans- 
itive Adjectives,  and  include  the  following:  — 

a.  Adjectives  denoting  desire,  krwa/ledge,  memory,  fulness,  pmutr, 
sharing,  guilt,  and  their  opposites :  as,  — 

avidos  laudis,  greedy  of  praise. 

faatidioEus  litteiamin,  disdai»iHg  leliers. 

iiiris  pcritus,  skilled  in  law.     [So  also  the  ablative,  if 

sui  o'0\\tm,/argeiful  of  himself. 

ratiouis  et  orationis  expeites  (OIF.  i.  1 6),  devoid  oj  se 

rei  militaiis  impEcitus,  unskilled  in  military  science. 

voatri  memor,  mindful  of  yau. 

plEnns  lA^ifullofgaodfttilh. 

cgEQUs  omnis  spei,  deslitute  ofallhcpe. 

potens  tempestatum,  having  sway  over  the  storms. 

impotens  icae,  ttngovernable  in  anger. 

particeps  coniiirationiE,  sharing  in  the  consfiiraty. 

atHnis  rei  capitalis,  involved  in  a  capital  crime. 

iiisons  culpae,  innocent  of  guilt. 

b.  Verbals  in  -5i  {§  164.  /)  ;  also  participles 
adjeclives,  i.e.  to  denote  a  disposition  and  not  ^particular  act:  as,— 

iuslum  et  tenacem  propoaiti  virum  {Hot.OA.nS.l'j,  a  man  jml  and  stead- 
fast to  his  purpose. 

citcus  capii  popnli  (Ov,),  a  circus  big  enough  lo  hold  the  people. 

eibi  viniqne  capacissimos  (Liv.),o  very  great  eater  and  drinker  (very  able 
to  contain  food  and  wine). 

si  quem  tai  amanliotem  c^novisti  (Q.  Fr,  vt.  1),  if  you  have  become  ac- 
quainted ivith  any  one  more  fond  of  you. 

multitudo  insolens  belli  (B.  C.  ii.  36),  a  crowd  unused  to  war. 

sitiens  Bangninia,  thirsting  for  blood  {i.e.  habitually  bloodthirsty). 

Note  i.  —  Participles  in -ns,  when  used  as  fartic^tts,  ttiie  the  case  regularly 
governed  by  the  verb  to  which  they  belong :  as,  — 

Tiberius  sitiens  Baogninem  (Tac),  Tiberius  [then]  thirsting  for  blood. 
Note  2.  — Occasionally  parlicipial  foims  in  -nB  are  treated  as  participles  (see 
note  i)  even  when  they  express  a  disfosttmn  or  character :  as,  — 

virliil  quam  alii  ipsam  temperantiam  dlcuot  esse,  alii  obtempeiantem  tcm- 
perantiae  praeceplis  el  earn  subsequenlem  (Tusc.  W.  13,  30),  ebservatU 
of  the  teachings  of  temperance  and  otiedient  to  her. 

C-  The  poets  and  later  writers  use  the  genitive  with  almost  any 
adjective,  to  denote  that  vdth  reference  to  which  the  quality  exists 
{Genitive  of  Specification)  :  as,  —  ~ 

eallidus  rei  militaris  (Tac.  H.  ii.  31),  skillid  in  soldiership. 

panpet  aquae  (Hor.  Od.  iii.  30.  11),  scant  of-waler. 
nolus  animi  patetni  (id.  ii.  2.  (i),fatnfd  for  a  f ottrnal  sfirtt.   . 


quality  exists 


His  218,  219.]  Genitive  with    Verbs.  3I3^H 

^V     fessi  lerum  ^Ma.  i.  1 7S),  vitary  of  toil.  ^^^^k 

^H      integer  vilae  scelcrisque  pucus  (Hor.),  upri^it  in  life,  and  unstained iy^^^^k 

W         guilt.  ^1 

I  Note  i.  —  For  (he  Ablalive  of  Specification,  Ihe  prose  conslruclion,  see  f  353. 

Note  a. — The  Geniti*^  of  Specification  is  only  an  extension  of  the  construe. 

lion  with  relative  adjecdves.    Thus  Cftllldua  denotes  kKoviledgc  ;  pauper,  1110311! 

pdruB,  innettnci;  and  so  these  words  in  a  manner  belong  to  the  classes  unde 

Remark.— Adjectives  oi  fieling  are  followed  by  the  apparent  genitive  ac 

(really  locative,  cf,  f  393.  c) :  as, — 

aeger  animi,  sici  at  biart. 

confiisug  animi,  dislurhid  in  spirit. 

"LSobyimitadon  — 

sanus  mentis  et  animi  (Plant.  Trin.  454),  sound  in  mind  and  heart. 
audai  ingenii  (late),  bold  in  disposition. 

d.  For  adjectives  of  likeness,  etc.,  with  the  genitive,  apparently  ob- 
iJective,  see  §  234.  d. 

III.  Genitive  with  Verbs. 
The  Objective  Genitive  is  used  with  some  verbs. 

3.   fiemem'bering  and  Forgetting. 
219.   Verbs  of  Remembering  and  Forgetting  take  the  I 
Genitive  of  the  object  when  they  are  used  of  a  continued  \ 
state  of  mind,  but  the  Accusative  when  used  of  a  single  1 
:  as,  — 


recocdana  snperioris  trSnamiaiidnia  (Att.  iv.  17),  r  emembering year  for  n 


I       animus  tneminit  ptaeteritornm  (Div.  i.  30),  llie  soul  rimembtrs  the  fast. 
venit  mihi  in  mentem  ilUuB  diet,  /  bttkink  me  of  that  day  (it  comes  into 
mymiudof  that  day), 
obliviscete  caedis  alque  ittcendiomm  (Cat.  i.  3),  turn  your  mind  fram 
slaughter  and  coafiagrations. 
nee  unqnam  obliviscar  iUiOH  noctis  (Plane.  42,  io\) ,  and  /  shall  never  for- 
get thai  night. 
2.  Accusative :  — 
tolam  oanHam  oblitus  est  (Brut.  60),  ie  forgot  the  whole  case. 
pueritiae  mamoriam  recordari  (Arch,  i),  to  reeall  the  memory  of  childhood. 
a.  The  Accusative  is  almost  always  used  of  a  person  or  thing  re- 
membered by  aa  eye-witness :  3«,  — 

meminerani  Paullum  (Lad.  a),  I rememhered PauU 

..    d.  Reoordor,  reeoOect,  recall,  denotes  a  single  oct  3.tii■^s  fci«^\a«i 
^  almost  always  followed  by  the  Accusative 


fxb^^^ 


often 

k 


214  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.      [§§219.220. 

recordoce   canBensom  ilium   theiiri   (Phil.  i.  30),  ritatl  that  unatiimoHs 

agreement  of  ike  [ttudieoce  in  tlie]  Ikcatre. 
TCcordaininl   oiniiis   clvilis  disBensioneB  (Cat.  iii.  24),  recall  all  Iht  dvil 

c.  Verbs  of  reminding  take  with  the  accusative  of  the  pierson  a 
genitive  of  the  thing;  except  in  the  case  of  a  neuter  pronoun,  which  is 
put  in  the  accusative  (cf.  §  238.  *). 

CaliliDB  sditionebBt  aliam  egeatatia,  aUnm  cnpiditatiB  suae  (SnU.  Cat. 
21),  Catiline  remifided  one  of  his  f  overly,  another  o/his  cupidity. 

unuin  illnd  raonere  te  poaaum,  I  can  remind  you  of  this  one  thing. 

So  admoueS,  oommoneS,  commonefaotS,  oommoaefio.  But 
moneO  with  the  genitive  is  found  only  in  late  writers  (cf.  §  238.  &. 

Note.— AH  these  verba  often  lake  d6  with  the  ablative,  and  the  accusative  ol 
nouns  u  well  as  of  pronouns  is  somelinips  used  with  them:  as, — 

saepins  le  admoneo  de  Byjtgrapha  Sittiana  (Faro.  viii.  14),  /  rtminJ  you 

again  and  again  of  the  bond  of  Sittius, 
offloium  vcslrum  ut  vos  malo  cogatis  coromonerier  (Plaat,  Ps.  150),  to  be 

reminded  of  your  duty, 

2,   Cbarge  and  Penalty. 

220.  Verbs  of  Accusing,  Condemning,  and  Acquitting, 
take  the  genitive  of  the  charge  or  penalty :  as,  — 

arguit  roe  fnrti,  he  acraas  me  oftkefi. 

peculatttB  damnatus   (pecflniae  pQblicae   damnatus)    (Flac.    18),   eon- 

deniHedfor  embeixiemenl. 
video  non  te  absolutimi  esse  improbit«lia,  sed  illos  damnilos  esse  caedia 

(Vert.  ii.  28),  /  Iff,  not  tlsat  you  -were  acquitted  of  outrage,  but  that  Ikty 

Tuere  condemned  for  hojnicide. 
a.  Peculiar  genitives,  under  this  construction,  are  — 
capitis,  as  in  ijamnare  capitis,  to  sentence  to  death. 
mBJeBtatis  [laesae],  treason  (crime  against  the  digtiity  of  the  Slate). 
repetundamm  [renun],  i!'jr/D'~i'i0R  (lit.of  an  action  for  f/aimi>^^ai^:f  money 

wrongfully  taken). 
voU,  in  damnatus  or  reus  voti,  bound  [lo  the  payment]  afone'!  i 

SHcceisfiJ  in  one's  effort. 
pocfiniae  (damnare,  iudicare,  see  note  under  3,  below). 
dnpU,  etc.,  as  in  dupli  condemnnre,  condemn  fa  pay  twofold. 
i.  Other  constructions  for  the  charge  or  penalty  are  — 

The  ablative  of  price :  regularly  of  a  definite  nmoant  of  fine,  and 
often  of  indefinite  penalties  fcf.  §  252.  note)  ;  as. — 
IhisinSles  tertifi  parte  3gr<  damnati  (Ui.x.\'^,iFif  ftoffc  o/ft-ij^w^ 
flS-wwrt/fto  forfeit]  a  third  part  i^f  their  land. 


oney 
Le. 

4 


1220.221.]      Ge?iilive  wtl/i   Verbs  of  Feeling.  2i5i 

vitia  auteni  hominum  atquf  fTaiides  dainma  ignSnunua  vincnlls  yeib»>« 
ribas  eiailiiB  morte  damnantur  (DeOr.i.43),  iK/*4^w«aHrf,;n»Mll 
of  men  are  punished  -jiilh  fines,  dishonor,  chains,  scourging,  t.xi!e,  death.  I 

2.  The  ablative  with  d6,  or  the  accusative  with  inter,  in  idio 


de  aXti,  for  gambling. 

di  ambilii.yiw'  bribery. 

inter  Eicarios,  as  an  assassin  (amoig  the  assaaains). 

de  n  et  miiestatia  damnati  (Phil.  1,9,  Zl),  eonvielcd  of  assault  and  Ire, 

3.  The  accusative  vsith  ad  or  in  to  express  the  penalty  {late) :  a 

ad  rooctem  fTac),  t-}  death.  ad  (in)  melalla,  ts  the  mines. 

Note.  —  The  origin  of  these  genitive  constructions  i3  pointed  at  by  peoilniaA  1 
flanmara  (Aul.  Gell.  xx.  1,38),  Iq  condemn  to  pay  maaey,  in  a  case  of  injury 
person ;  Qtiatitae  pecOnlae  laolc&tl  eBsenC  (id.  xx.  i.  47),  haul  much 
they  vierc  adjudged  to  pay,  in  a  mere  suit  (or  debt;  cCnfeesI  aerls  fto  dSblU 
iQdlO&tl  (ibid.),  adjudged  to  ouie  an  adoiilled  sum  due.     These  expressions  show 
Ibat  the  genitive  of  the  penalty  comes  from  the  use  of  the  genilive  of  value  lo  enpress 
a.  sum  of  money  due  cither  as  a  debt  or  as  a  Sne.    Since  in  early  civilizations  all 
ofiences  could  be  compounded  by  the  payment  of  &nes,  Ihe  genilive  can 
used  of  other  punishmenls,  not  pecuniary.    From  this   Id  the  genilive 
actual  crime  is  an  easy  transition,  inasmuch  as  there  is  always  a  confusion  txttveen  J 
crime  and  penalty. 

3.   Verba  of  Feeling. 

221.   Many  verbs  of  Feeling  take  the  genitive  of  the 
tobject  which  excites  the  feeling.     Thus  — 

a.  Verbs  of  pity,  as  toisereor  aud  miserSscS,  are  followed  by  the  J 
'genitive :  as,  — 

miseieadte  regla  (/En.  viii.  573), /j'^  tlie  iiiig. 

miserere  animl  non  digna  ferentia  (id.  ii.  144),  pity  a  snul  tlmt  endiiri 

■worthy  things. 
It  miseror,  commiaetor,  bewail,  take  the  accusative :  as,  — 

communem  condicionem  miserati  (Mur.  27,  55),  hmiiail  the  common 

b.  The  impersonals  miseret,  paenitet,  plget,  pudet,  taedet  (or  1 
p«rtaesum  eat),  take  the  Genitive  of  the  cause  of  the  feeling  snA  the  ( 

U:cusative  of  the  person  affected:  as,  — 

hos  hominaa  inlamiae  suae  neque  pudet  neque  taedet  (Verr.  i.  tz),  thete  A 

men  are  neitlier  ashamed  nor  vieary  of  their  dishonor.    \Ci.  it  repenUlk  I 

kim  of  the  evil.-]  \ 

me  quidem  miseret  pariettim  ipsorum  (Phil.  \i.3%'),formyfartIfitytit  I 

T/ery  loatls.  1 

mS  dvitatia  inQnim  piget  laedetque  (Sail.  Jug.  4),  lam  siei  and  disgusted  ] 

vriA  the  -ways  of  the  state. 
deeemvi^zaia  ros  pertaesum  est  (liv.  iu.  iffi^  yow  lecftnu  6irti.  a{  4 


"1 


2l6  Syntax:  Constniction  of  Cases.      [§§221,222 

e.  Att  infinitive,  a  clause,  or  the  accusative  of  a  neuter  pronoun  may 
be  used  with  these  impersonal  verbs  (except  nlBerot)  instead  of  the 
genitive  of  a  noun:  as, — 

me  punilet  haec  f  eciase,  /  reptnt  of  having  done  Ihis. 

nihil  qnod  paenilere  possil  (Cic),  nolking  that  may  cause  rifmlance. 

d.  Miseret,  etc.,  are  sometimes  used  personally  with  a  neuter  pro- 
noun as  subject  r  as,  — 

nonne  te  haeo  pudent  (Ter.  Ad.),  da  tial  these  things  shams  you? 

4.  Interest  and  Refert. 
aaa.    The  impersonals  intereat  and  rSfert  take  the  geni- 
tive of  the  person  (rarely  of  the  thing)  affected  :  as,  — 
ClSdl  intercTiit  Milonem  perlrc  (Mil.  21),  it  itias  the  interest  of  Clodim 

that  Milo  should  die. 
hciundum  esse  aliquid  quod  jUornin  magis  qnam  suS  retolisse  videretui 
>  CJUB'  111)1  **"'  something  must  be  done  lahieh  seemed  to  be  more  fur 

U  their  interest  than  his  own. 

video  «niia  quid  mca  intersii,  quid  ntrinaqae  oostrSm  (Fam.vii.  23),/iiry 
!  tee  vikal  is  for  my  good  and  fir  the  good  of  us  both. 

The  subject  of  the  verb  is  a  neuter  pronoun  or  a  substantive  clause. 

a.  Instead  of  the  Genitive  of  a  Personal  Pronoun  the  corresponding 
Possessive  is  used  in  the  ablative  singular  feminine  after  intereat  or 
xMvtt:  as,— 

quid  taa  id  referl?  mogni  (Ter.  Ph.  7*3),  kma  does  that  concern  yonf 

much,     [See  also  the  last  two  enamples  obove.] 
vehemenler  inlererat  vestrS  qui  palcEs  C5lis  (Plin.  Ep.  iv.  13),  i^iMu/i/i^ 

very  much  to  your  advantage,  yoa  ■a'ko  are  fathers. 

b.  The  accusative  with  ad  is  used  with  Interest  and  rSfert 
press  tlie  thing  -with  reference  to  which  one  is  interested :  as,  — 

miigni  ad  honorem  noalrum  irtereal  (Fam.  svi.  l),  it  is  of  great  conse\ 

tefett  eliam  ad  fructna  (Varr.  R.  R.  i.  16),  it  makes  a  difference  eu  to  the 

Note.  —  Very  rarely  the  Person  is  expressed  by  od  and  the  Accusalivo,  or 
(with  rSfort)  by  the  Daiive  (probably  a  popular  camiptioD)  :  as, — 

quid  id  ad  me  aut  ad  meam  rem  refert  (Plaut.  Pers.  iv.  3,  44),  tohat  dif- 
ference does  that  make  to  me  or  ta  my  interests? 
„  quid  lefeiat  intra  naturae  fines  viTsntl  (Hor.  Sat.  i.  1.49)1  vihat  difference 

1  does  it  maie  to  me  ivho  live  within  the  limits  of  natural  desire  ? 

I         So,  nil  referre  dedecori  (Tac.  Aun.  m,  65),  ikai  it  maka  no  differetKe  as 
V  /0  tie  disgrace.  — .^^^^^^ 


i 


5  223.]  Genitive  with  Verbs  of  Plenty,  etc. 

5.  Verbs  of  Plenty  and  Want 
323.    Some  verbs  of  Plenty  and  Want  govern  the  geni-,1 

live:  as,— 

quid   est  quod  deffinaionis  indigeat?  (Rose.  Am. 

nteds  dffente  ? 
satagic  remm  suarum,  he  has  his  hands  full  Toilh  hi 

Note.  — Bui  verbs  of  pleniy  and  want  more  commonly  lake  the 
tS  *43'  "■  =4^'  '■)■  except  egreO,  indlg'eS.  sataKS. 

6.   Other  VerbB. 

.  The  genitive  sometimea  follows   potior,  get  pos. 
always  in  the  phrase  potiri  rfirmn,  to  be  master  o/qffaii 

illiuB  regnl  potirl  (Fam.  i.  7,  S),  te  bicome  mailer  of  that  kingdom 
Cleanthes  solem  dommiiri  et  remm  potiiT  pulat  (Ac.  ii.  41,  iz6),  Clear/Met  u 

IkinJks  ike  sun  hatds  sway  and  is  lard  of  the  universt. 
But  potior  usually  lakes  the  ablative  (see  |  249). 

b.  Some  other  verbs  rarely  take  the  Genitive :  — 

1.  By  analogy  with  those  mentioned  in  §  221  ;  as,  — 
nequc  hiiius  sis  Veritas  feminae  primariae  (Tcr.  Ph.  971)'  "'"'  J"" 

Hff  rei/ief/ for  this  highborn  lady. 

2.  As  akin  to  adjectives  which  take  the  genitive :  as,  — 
faslldit  mel  (Plaut.  Aul.  243),  he  disdains  me.     fCf.  faHtidi5siia.] 
Btudet  tuT  (quoted  N.  D.  iii.  zgj,  he  is  zealous  far  yau.    [Cf.  atudioaus.] 

3.  In  imitation  of  the  Greek ;  as,  — 
iostitiaene  prius  mirer,  belline  lahSmm  (/En.  iii.  iz6),  shall  I  r> 

admire  [his]  justice  or  his  tails  in  war  f 
neque  i!le  seposili  ciceris  nee  longBe  invidit  avenae  (Hor.  Sat.  ii.  6.  S4),  1 

nor  does  he  grudge  his  garnered  peas,  etc,     [But  cf,  invidua,  pwctui.]   T 
abslineio  irarnm  (Hor.  Od.   iii.  27.  69),  refrain  from  wrath   (but   cf.J 

§§223,  243./ Rem.), 
labomm  decipitur  (Hor.  Od.  ii.  13.  38),  he  is  beguiled  of  his  -woes. 
nee  aennonis  fallebat  (Plaut.  Ep.  240),  nor  did  I  miss  the  ionvenaiiau, 
me  labonun  levas  (Plaut.  Eud.  H'j'),you  relieve  me  of  my  troubles. 

c.  The  apparent  Genitive  animi  (really  Locative)  is  used  with  i 
few  verbs  of  feeling  and  the  like  (cf.  g  2i8.  c.  Rem.);  as, — 

Antipho  me  eiciiiciat  animi  (Tet.  Ph.  187),  AnHpho  tor/urei  my  mind  \ 

(me  in  my  mind). 
aidnu  pendeo  (PI.  Merc.  127),  lam  in  suspense. 
me  »niiai  falht  (Lucr.  i.  922),  my  mind  deceivis  me. 
So,  by  analogy,  desip'iebam  mentia  (PI.  Ep'vd.  l^").  1  "Jius  c 


r 


t 


2r8  Syntax:  Comtriiction  of  Cases.  f§  a2a 

IV.  Peccuar  Genttives. 

d.  A  genirive  occurs  rarely  in  ExclamatioDS,  in  imitation  of  the 
Greek  {Genitive  of  Exclamatiok)  :  as, — 

di  immoTlalea,  mercimonl  lepidi  (Flaut.  Most,  895),  goad  keuvens  !  what  a 

charming  bargain. 
foederis  heu  tadli  (Prop.  iv.  7.  23),  alas  for  the  unspoken  agreement. 

e.  The  genitive  is  often  used  with  the  ablatives  canaa,'  grStia.yyr 
tke  sake  of;  ergS,  because  of;  and  the  indeclinable  Instar.  like;  also 
with  prIdiB,  tke  day  before;  postxidiS,  the  day  after;  tenua,  as  far 

honoris  causa,  viili  due  respect  (for  the  salte  of  honor). 

TCrbi  gratia,  _/or  example. 

eiua  legis  ergo,  on  account  cf  this  lain. 

eqnus  instar  mantis  {Xia.  ii.  15),  a  horse  like  (the  image  of}  a  mounlain. 

Note  i.  — Of  these  Ibe  genitive  with  caue&  is  like  that  in  nSmen  Inaaniae 
(§  314./).    The  others  are  of  various  origin. 

NOTE  a.  —  In  prose  of  (he  Republican  Period  pridlS  and  poStiidJB  aie  Oius 
used  only  in  the  eipressions  prtdiS  (postrtdie)  eluB  di§I,  the  day  before  {afier) 
thai  (ci.  the  eve,  the  morrow  nf  thai  day).  Tacitus  uses  Ihe  conslrucdon  with  other 
words :  as,  postrldlS  InBldiarum.  lie  day  afler  the  plot.  For  the  ai 
}  j6i.  a.    TenUB  lakes  also  the  abladve  (}  360.  e). 


he  Localive  [c(.  o^o-.  at  home. 

.e  poets  (}  225.  b.  3)  and  in 
i01e.>). 
anings :  — 

:d  by  the  action,  or  direct^ 
:ciproca]1y  sharing  in  (he  acdon  or 
in  dedlt  puerS  llbrum,  he  gave  the 
boy  a  book,  01  tSclC  m\h\  Iniarlam,  he  did  au  a  wrong,  there  la  an  idea  of  the 
boy  receiving  the  book,  and  of  my  feelijig  the  ^iirong.  Hence  eipressions  denoiing 
persons  or  things  with  personal  atlriiutes  are  more  likely  lo  be  in  the  dative  than 
those  denoting  mere  things.'    See  eiamples  under  }  93^ 

This  difference  between  Ihe  Accusative  and  the  Dative  {i.«.  between  Ibe  Direct 
and  the  Indirect  Object)  depends  upon  the  point  of  view  implied  in  Ihe  verb  or 
existing  in  the  mind  of  the  writer.  Hence  verbs  of  similar  meaning  (to  an  English 
mind)  often  differ  in  Ihe  case  of  their  object  (see  }  aaj.  a  and  i). 

The  Dative  is  used  to  express  the  purpose  of  an  action  or  that  for  which  il 
^fnies  (see  \  333).  This  construction  Is  especially  used  with  abstract  expressions,  ot 
implying  an  action. 


11. -DATIVE. 

Note.— The  Dativ 

'e  seems  to  be  closely  akin 

whh  oDcy,  to  a  house).  1 

ind  must  have  had  the  pr: 

But  this  local  mcanin 

g  appears  in  Latin  only  i 

some  adverbial  forms  ( 

as  eO,  Uia,  thitier.  cf  }  i^ 

In  Latin  die  Dative 

I.  The   Dative   dei 

loles  an  object  not  as  e. 

afected  by  it  (Uke  the 

,  Accusative),  but  as  recip 

^Compare  Ibe  Engiish/or  hit  sate,  i 
"  "   61  Span/sh  Ihe  dative  is  used  w 
~  -ee  [10]  Ike  man. 


S  224, 225.]  Dative  with   Transitii'es.  21 

These  two  classes  of  Datives  approach  each  other  in  some   cases  anil  i 
ccasionally  confounded,  as  in  j  Z34  (cf.  especiall]'  \  234.  b). 

The  uses  of  the  Dative,  arranged  praclically,  are  the  following:  — 
I.  As  INDIRECT  OBJECT   f  ..  With  Tr»nsitlves  (§  235), 

(gCDeral  use) :  1  a.  With  tnlransiUves  ({j  aaS-zB,  930). 

..  Of  Pas«ssion  {with  ease)  {j  =3.). 
„       .,  ,,.  ,         o.  Of  Agency  (withGerundive)  ({  23a). 

^  Specral  or  Idtoma.lc       ^_  Of  P^e  or  End  (pradicaVL)  (}  ,33). 
*^"^-  4-  Of  Fitness,  etc.  {with  Adje«lves)(j  334). 

5.  Of  Reference  {rffl/raai  cflWMofi)  (}}a35,a3fi). 

224.   The  Dative  is  used  of  the  object  indirectly  affected  I 
(y  an  action. 

This  is  called  the  Indirect  Object  {|  177).     It  is  usually  denoted  in  J 
English  by  the  Objective  with  lo  at  for.     Thus,  - 
dat  libcam  puero,  he  gives  a  book  to  the  boy. 
cedite  tempari,  j'lni/ to  the  oc 


provincia  Ciceroni  obligit,  the  prmiinre  fill  by  lot  lo  Cicero. 

civitalis  saliiti  consulite,  consult  for  Iki  safety  of  the  Stale. 
sic  mihi  videlut,  so  il  seems  to  me. 
indicavit  mihi  Pansa,  Pansa  has  made  known  to  me. 
hoc  libi  spondeo,  I  promise  [to]  you  this. 

1.  Indirect  Object  'with  Transitives. 

225.  The  Dative  of  the  Indirect  Object  with  the  Accu- 
k'Sative  of  the  Direct  may  be  used  with  any  transitive  verb 
Fwhose  meaning  allows  {see  §  177) :  as, — 

do  tibi  librum,  I  give  you  a  book, 

illud  tibi  affirmo  (Fam.  i.  -j),  this  I  assure  you. 

coromendo  tibi  eius  omnia  negotia  (Fom.  i.  l),  I  put  all  his  ago 

your  hands. 
dabis  profecto  miaericordiae  qitod  Irfioandiae  negavisCi  (id.  ia^,yott  will 

rely  grant  lo  mercy  -what  yon  refused  to  wrath. 
litteris  a  te  mihi  slalor  tuus  reddidit  (Fain.  i.  17),  delivered  ta  me  a  letter. 

.  Many  verbs  have  both  a  transitive  and  an  intransitive  use  (§  177. 

note).    These  take  either  the  Accusative  with  the  Dative,   or  the 

Dative  alone :  as,  — 
^^  banc  pcciiniam  tibi  credo,  I  trust  this  money  loyou.  [Trajisitive.] 
^^L  ID  bac  ic  tibi  credo,  I  trust  you  in  this,  [Intransitive.] 
^H  h,  Cert^  verbs  implying  motion  vary  in  their  construction  between 
Affile  Dative  of  the  Indirect  Object  and  the  Acct»a.>Avt  ol^'&^'o&.dL 
^kotioa  CS  338.  f).     Thus  —  J 


I 


r 


L 


220  Syntax:  Coiistmciion  of  Cases.  [§  225. 

1.  Some  verbs  lake  the  Accusative  (with  or  without  a  preposition) 
instead  of  the  Indirect  Object,  when  the  idea  of  Motion  prevails 

lilleias  quas  ad  Pompeium  scripsi  (Att.  iii.g)i  the  Ittler  vrhick  lAavevrril- 

Un  [and  sent]  to  Pamfty.     [Cf.  non  quo  baberem  qnod  tibi  scribecem 

(Att.  iv.  4),  not  that  I  had  anything  to  ■a/rite  to youI\ 
litteme  extemplo  Bomam  scriptae  (Liv.  x!i.  l6),  a  letter  'wai  immtdialet) 

arittia  [and  sent]  to  Rome. 
hoslis  in  fngam  dat  (B.  G.  v.  51),  he  puts  the  inemy  to/tght.     [Cf.  ul  mi 

deal  {aga»  (AtL  viii.  23),  to  take  lofitght.'] 
Cui  sseplus  ad.  mS  litleras  dedisses  (Fam,  iv.  4),  why  you  had  several  limts 

itirittm  tetters  [addressed]  to  me. 
nullis  eis  pcaeterquam  ad  tS  eC  ad  Bratom  dedi  lilteras  (id.  iii.  7),  I  have 

given  to  them  (the  messengers)  no  letters  except  (addressed)  to  you,  etc. 
omnes  rem  ad  Pompeinm  deferri  volunt  (id.  i.  i),  all  wish  the  matter  to 

be  put  in  the  hands  of  Pompey. 
an  ilerum  le  reddal  in  arma  (;En.  it.  6S4),  or  should  tkrvvi  himself  agaia 

into  the  fight  (only  poetic). 
3.  On  the  other  hand,  many  verbs  usually  followed  by  the  Accusative 
with  ad  or  in,  take  the  Dative  when  the  idea  of  motion  is  merged  in 
some  other  idea:  as, — 

nee  quicquam  quod  aon  rnihi  Caesic  detulerit  (Fam.  iv,  13),  and  nuthing 

■which  CiESar  did  not  communicate  to  me. 
mihi  littecia  mittere  (Fnm.  vii.  12),  to  send  me  a  letter. 
earn  libcnm  tibi  mlsi  (id.  vii.  19),  I  sent  you  that  ioet. 
Catonem  tuum  mihi  mitte  (id.  vii.  24),  lend  me  your  Colo. 
curia  ul  mihivehantur  (id.  viii.  4,  end),  taie  care  that  they  be  conveyed  to  me. 
cum  dUus  alii  subaidium  ferrent  (B.  G.  ii.  z6),  luhi/e  one  lent  aid  to  another. 
quibus  (copiis  rex  Deiotarus)  imperatoribas  nostris  auxilia  milteret  (Dciot. 

S,  22),  viUh  which  (troops)  king  D.  might  send  reinforcements  to  our 

3.  In  poetry  the  End  of  Motion  is  often  expressed  by  the  dative 
(see  §258.  note  1). 

c.  For  the  Dative  of  the  person  and  the  Accusative  of  the  thing  after 
verbs  o(  threatening  and  the  like,  see  §  227./. 

d.  Certain  verbs  may  take  either  the  Dative  of  the  person  and  the 
Accusative  of  the  thing,  or  (in  a  different  sense)  the  Accusative  of  the 
person  and  the  Ablative  of  the  thing :  as,  — 

donat  coronas  huih,  he  presents  wreaths  to  his  men  ;  or, 
donat  Buos  cotoiuh,  he  presents  his  men  viith  wreaths. 
vincnla  exuere  dbi  (Ov.  M.  vii.  772).  to  shake  off  the  leash  (from  himself). 
onuiei  armiB  exuil  (B,  G.  v.  51),  he  stripped  them  aU  of  their  arms. 
Jrsffl  BABgnine  adspergere  (N.  D.  tii.  jfeS. '"  ifnnklt  At  altar  with  UtM. 
irae  ssnguuKun  adspergere,  to  sprinklt  fclood  ufon  the  oltar.  ^^1 


SS  225.  226.]         Dative  with  Intraitsitives. 

Such  are  dSnC,  impeitiS,  indyiS,  exuo,  adapergC,  Inspergfi, 
circmndS,  oircumfando,  prohibeS,  interclfldo,  and  in  poetry 
accIngS,  implies,  and  similar  verbs. 

Note  I,  — InterdIcO,^r*irf,  lakes  cilher(i)  (he  dative  of  Ihe  peraon  and  fha 
accusaliveof  lhelhing,or(a)  the  dative  of  the  person  and  the  ablative  of  Ihe  thing: 

interdixit  htstrionibas  scaetiam  (Suet.  Dom.  7),  ke forbade  Ikt  acton  Qto 

appear  on]  the  stage  (he  prohibited  the  stage  to  the  actors},    [Cf.  in. 

lerdictum  est  mare  Autiiitj  poptllo  (Liv.  viii.  14),  the  sea  -,oas forbidden 

to  the  people  of  Anlium.'\ 
feminis  (dat.)  purpurae  dsq  interdieemna  (Liv.  xxxiv.  7),  shall  Tue  forbid 

viomeit  Ike  wearing  of  purple  f 
aqua  et  igni  alicni  interdiccre,  to  forbid  the  use  of  fire  andvialir. 

Note  a.  — The  Dative  wfth  the  Accusative  is  used  in  poetry  widi  many  v( 
oJ  prevsTifin^^  protect in^j  and  the  like,  which  naualJy  take  the  Accusative  and  Abla- 
tive.   iDterolSdS  and  arceS  sometimea  lake  (be  Dative  and  Accus    ' 

huce  omnis  aditfia  ad  Sallam  inlercludere  (Rose.  Am.  38,  110),  to  shut 
these  men  off  from  all  aicea  to  Sulla  (close  to  them  every  approach). 

[Cf.  uli  frumento  commeatnque  Caesareni  tntercluderet  (B.  G.  i.  4S) 

tc  skul  Casar  off  Jr am  grain  and  supplies.'^ 
hnao  (oealtttin)  arcebis  pecori  (Georg.  iii,  154),j'iim  shall  keep  this  away 

from  Ihefiotk.    [Cf.  ilium  arcnit  Gallia  (Phil.v,  \z),ie  excluded  Aim 

from  Cfl«i] 
solatitinm  pecori  defeodile  (Ed.  vil.  47),  keep  lie  summer  heat  from  the 

fiock. 

e.  Verbs  which  b  the  active  voice  take  the  accusative  and  dative 
ntain  the  dative  when  used  in  the  passive :  as,  — 

haec  ll6Ma  nuntianfur,  Otese  things  art 

tidbis  nnntiat.] 
ClaBB&  diviliae  non  invidcntur,  Crassus  is  not  envied  for  his  wealih.   [Active: 

CraBB5  divitiaa  non  invidet,] 
decern  (aleiita  oppidaniB  iniperantur,  ten  talents  are  exaeled  of  the  to 

people.     [Active  :  imperat  oppidaaia  decern  talenta.] 

2,  Indirect  Object  -with  IntrajieitiVGB. 
226.   The  Dative  of  the  Indirect  Object  may  be  used 
with  any  Intransitive  verb  whose  meaning  allows  :  as,  — 
cedant  arma  togae  (Pbil.  i.  8),  let  arms  give  place  to  the  gown. 
Caemri  respondet,  he  replies  to  Casar, 
Caesaii  reipondetur,  Casar  is  replied  la  (see  §  230). 
aedimiu  nnnlio,  we  belitve  the  messenger, 
BantiS  creditor,  iif  messenger  is  believed. 


r 


222  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.      [§5  226,  j 

TCtpondi  muiims  crimuubin  (PhO.  1  14),  /  km/e  atawertJ  lie  keavied 

tharges, 
at  ita  cuique  eveiua.t  (id.  46),  Aal  U  may  so  turn  out  to  each. 
Note  I.  —  Intransillve  verbi  have  no  Direct  Object.      The  Indirecl  Object, 
therefore.  In  these  cases  Elands  alone  (bul  c£  {  225.  a). 

N0T8  a.~C6dO,j'«/if.  somelinies  lakes  the  Ablative  of  the  thing  along  with 
the  Dadve  of  the  peisoni  as. — 

cedere  slicui  poBsessione  hortorum  (Mil.  27,  75),  ta  give  up  te  one  Ou 
possession  of  a  garden. 

a.  Many  phrases  consbting  of  a  noun  with  the  copula  »om  or 
a  copulative  verb  are  equivalent  to  an  intransitive  verb  and  take  a  kind 
of  indirect  object  (cf.  %  235)  :  as, — 

auctor  esse  ^Cni,  to  aihiise  or  instigate  one  (cf.  perEuadeo). 
quishuiorei  testis  est  (Quinc,  II),  ifA? /«/)/«  (is  witness) /e/^ii/orf;' 
is  finis  populationiboB  fuit  (Lit.  iL  30),  His  put  an  end  to  the  raidt. 

b.  The  dative  is  sometimeB  used  without  a  eoptdatlve  verb  in  a  sense 
approaching  that  of  the  genitive  (cf.  §§  227.  d,  235.  a):  as,  — 

le^tos  Caessri,  a  lieulenaul  la  Ctesar  (ij.  a  man  assigned  to  Csesat). 

heres  frntri  suo,  his  brother's  heir  (heir  to  fais  brother). 

ministri  sceleiibus,  agents  of  crime. 

Note.  — The  cases  in  a  and  b  differ  from  the  conslnictions  of  {  33?.  note  a. 
and  {  335  in  that  the  dative  ia  more  closdyoonnecied  in  idea  with  some  singes  -voni 
10  which  It  serves  as  an  uidirect  object. 

3.  Dative  with  Speolal  Terba. 

Many  verbs  of  apparently  transitive  meaning  in  English  correspond 
to  verbs  intransitive  in  Latin.     Thus:  — 

237.  Most  verbs  signifying  Xo  favor,  help,  please,  trust, 
and  their  contraries ;  also  to  believe,  persuade,  command, 
obey,  serve,  resist,  envy,  threaten,  pardon,  and  spare}  take 
the  dative :  as.  —  h 

cnr  mibi  invides,  lohy  do  you  envy  tnef  ^^^M 

mihi  paccit  atque  ignoscit,  he  spares  and  pardons  me.  ^^H 

ignosce  patrio  doldri  (Liv.  iii.  4S),  excuse  a  father's  grief.  ^^1 

aontibuB  opitulari  poteram  (Fam.  iv.  13),  I  vias  ahit  to  help  the  guiUy. 
non  Onmibna  servia  (id.  xvi.  13),  I  am  not  il  servant  le  every  man. 
cum  ceieria  lutn  mihl  Ipu  displiceo  (id.  iv.  13),  I  dissatisfy  elktr  people 
andmyulfloo. 

I  These  include,  among  others.  Ihe  fotlouing:  adversor,  credS,  taveS. 
ndS,  IgnOBcO,  tmperfi,  iDvldefi,  IrSiScor.  sQacenaefi.  resists,  noceO. 
p»ecO,  p&rsS.  places.  servlQ.  attideO,  w^A^  io^c«<iKdoS),  trnxqwiO, 
fabtomparS),  dJctO  audlBns  aum. 


I 


(  227.]  Dative  with  Special   Verbs. 

noD  parcam  operoe  (id.  xvi.  13),  Ivsittspare  no  pains. 

«c  iniTii  persuasl  (Cat.  M.  21),  so  Ihave persuaded  myself . 

mihi  Fabius  igniiscerc  debcbit  li  minus  eius  f  Amas  paicere  videbor  quam  I 

ante  consului  (TulL  3),  Fabius  iiiill  have  to  pardon  me  if  I  st 

spare  his  refiulalion  less  than,  etc. 
bnio  legionl  Caesar  confldebat  maxime  (B.  G.  1 40),  in  this  legion  Casar  1 

trusted  most. 
Nora  I.  —  In  these  verbs  the  Latin  retains  an  original  intransitive  meaning 
rbus:  iaviAAva,U  em!y,tiai.oTi^o^y  to  toakaikaiue  atoHe;  eervlre  is  la  bi , 
lave  to;  Su&dSre  is  to  make  a  thing  pleasant  (sweet)  to  one. 

Note  a. — Some  common  phrases  regularly  take  the  dative  precisely  like 
rerba  of  similar  meaning.    Such  are — 
praestd  esse,  be  on  hand  (cf.  adease). 
marem  geiere,  humor  (cf.  mSrigeran), 
gratum  facere,  do  a  favor  (cf.  grati£csri). 
dicto  audiens  esse,  ie  obedient  (cf.  oboedu'e). 

cui  lidem  habebat  (B.G.i.  19),  in  whom  he  had  confidence  (cf.  cBnfidebat). 
So  also  many  phrases  where  no  corresponding  verb  eiisls.    Sucli  are — 
bene  (male,  pulchre,  aegre,  etc.)  esse,  to  be  well  (ill,  etc.)  off. 
ininriaiQ  facere,  do  injustice  to. 
dicra  dicere,  bring  to  trial  (name  a  day  for,  etc.). 
agere  gialias,  io  express  one's  thanks. 
habere  gratiam,  to  feel  ihanhfut. 
refene  gtat' 

damnum  dare,  inflict  an  injury. 

acceptum  (expensuro)  fecre  (esse),  to  credit  (charge).  | 

honorem  habere,  to  pay  honor  to. 

a.  Some  verbs  apparently  of  the  same  meanings  take  the  Accusative. 
Such    are   iuvo,    adiuvo,  heipi    laedo,  injure  \   iubeS,  order  % 

dS&cio./ail;  AfHoato,  f>lease.    Thus, — 

hie  pulvis  ocQlam  meum  laedit,  this  dust  hurls  my  eye.    [Cf.  multa  octiHa 
nooont,  many  things  are  injurious  to  the  eyes,'] 

b.  Some  verbs  at^  med  transitively  with  the  Accusative  or  inlransi' 
■lively  with  the  Dative  without  perceptible  difference  of  meaning. 

Such  are  advUor  (generally  accusative),  aomulor  (rarely  dative), 
oomltor,  dSapSto,  praeatSlor,  medeor,  medicor.     Thus,— 

adulatuE  est  Antonio  (Nep.  AlL  8),  he  flattered  Antony. 

adulari  Neronem  (Tac.  Ann.  xvi.  19),  to  flatter  Nero. 

e.  Some  verbs  are  used  transitively  with  the  Accusative  or  intransi- 
tively with  the  Dative  with  a  difference  of  meaning.' 


e,  be  nee, 


'orepaya/a^, 
■sary. 


7enl6,  cupiQ,   tuslstA.  'ma.'an&^  ycBiB^WJiKJ 
ccsdB,  caveO,  ^l^JM^^^BdH 


SjntMi:  C^mUnKtum  i^  Casts. 


1 


iiifiiiiifnj  Im  iiij).  iiiifi  11/   iaii[iTji   II  

■  III  BiiM^  iliiii  CTii  nil      i).iiij/i    iiir  I   I  m  i  r    [Soiiio 

pmipidte  filiilll  (Cm.  ir.  s),  iiov  tygmrdfir  lit  State. 

p—pt'*"'  ^^»^  jmj.'tii;  (liT.iT.4g),  tifnridea  iaiitation  fornid  agt. 

N<n£. — na6>adeSBll(15,*«<takcMwTAeDalinorlheAbtaliTB:  as,— 
k^Doii  dec»ae  cu  qua  ■■ii»~  coafldaM  (B.  G.  i.  42),  of  tht  taUk 

b^tm,  im  wUet  ie  iaJtk  mimmt  amfiJatre. 
mBboDi  BitixB  kxi  coaftdAul  (B.  G.  L  9),  Aff  iadg^eat  confidence  in 

Ar  iliiMgit  tfAeirfmMtm  (die  nataic  of  the  place). 

d-  Some  vobal  boobs — as  Timi8iae,  ambush;  Invidia,  em/y^ 
take  the  dadre  like  tbe  rctte  from  whicfa  tfaej  are  derived :  as,  — 
inTidis  coDSuti  (SalL),  iU-mll  againU  Ike  consul  (cf.  iovideo). 
oblcmpcniio  l^ibns  (Leg.  15],  attdiettct  ta  tie  Jazas  (cf.  obtempero], 
ubi  ipa  [esponao  (De  Or.  UL54),  am  amsteer  to  himself  {<£.  reBpondeo). 


c.  The  Dative  is  also  used :  — 

1.  With  the  impersonals  libct  (Inbet),  ii  pita. 

allowed:  as,  — 

quod  mihi  mixiioe  kbet  (Fait 
quasi  tihi  non  liceret  (Fam.  vi 

2.  With  verbs  compounded  with  satis,  beno,  and  male ;  as,  — ^^| 
mihi  ip^  numquam  salisfaciS  (Fam.  i.  17),  I  never  saHsJy  myself.  .^H 
optijno  viro  maledicete  (Deiot.  10),  to  speak  ill  of  a  most  excellent  man. 
pulchrum  est  lienefacere  reipublicse  (SalLCaL  3),  il  is  a  glorious  lAingta 

benefit  the  Stale. 
Note.— These  are  not  real  compounds,  bul  phrases,  and  were  appaienlly  fcU 
as  such  by  the  Romans.    Thus:  — 

satis  ofBdo  meo,  satis  tlloruin  voluntati  qui  a  me  hoc  petiverum  factum 

esse  arbitribot  (Veir.  II.  v.  49, 130),  that  enough  has  been  done  fi>r,  elc 

3.  With  the  following :  gratifioor,  grStnlor,  baereS  (t^rely),  Dflbfi, 
permlttS,  platidiS,  probo,  studeo,  snppllco,  ezcellS:  as, — 

haptentem  capitj  coronam  (Hor.  S.  1.  10),  a  ■Kirtalh  clinging  to  the  head. 
Fompeio  le  gratilicari  pulant  (Kam.  i.  i),  Ikey  suppose  they  are  dainf 

Pompey  a  service.  _ 
tibi  petmitto  lespondete  (N.  D.  iii.  1),  I gi-oeyoa  have  to  aasuier. 
gtitalot  (ibi,  mi  Balbe  (Fam.  vi,  la),  /  can^alvXatt  you,  my  dear  Baltmi, 
mihi  phudO  ipse  dotnt  (Hor.  S.  i.  i.  66'^,  I  nffloMd  myself  at  Komt,     JH 


\ 


§§  227.  228.]  Dative  with  Compounds.  22J  J 

cuctibihoc  non  gritilicer  nescio  (Fam,  L  lo),  ■why  I skoidd nol gratify yettik 

in  this  I  don't  kttimi. 
cum  ininuci  M.  FontS  vobis  ic  popul5  Romano  minentor,  amlci  a 

pinqui  suppliceni  vobu  (Fonl,   15,  35),  vihih  the  enemies  of  M.  Fori-  f 

teitu  are  threaUning  you  and  Uk  Raman  people  loo,white  kh  friendl  1 

and  relatives  are  teseeeking  yoti. 
at  volaecint  popttlB  supplidire  (L^.  Ag.  ii.  7,  18),  wAeit  ihey  inished  A 

mate  supplication  to  Ike  people. 

iomelimes  lake  Ihe  dative  (see  {  148.  u.  Rem.), 

/.  Many  verbs  ordinarily  intransitive  often  have  an  Accusative  of  the 
direct  object  along  with  the  Dative  of  the  indirect  (cf.  §  225.  a)  :  a 

cni  cum  tex  omcem  minitaretur  (Tusc,  i.  43),  when  the  king  threatened   1 

him  -wilh  the  cress. 
imperat  Dppidai^  decern  talenta,  he  exacts  of  the  totonspeople  ten  talents. 
omnia  ribi  ignoscere  (Veil.  ii.  30),  la  pardon  one's  self  everything. 
CraaaQ  divitiaB  non  invideo,  I  do  not  envy  Crassus  his  wealth. 

4.   Dative  witb  CompoundB. 

228.   Most  verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante,  con 

inter,  ob,  poat,  prae,  pr5,  Bub,  super,  and   some  with   oiroum, 

are  followed  by  the  dative  of  the  indirect  object :  as,  — 

neque  enim  adsentior  bib  (Lael.  '^,for  I  do  not  agree  with  them. 

tempBHtati  obseqiu  arlis  est  (Fam.  i.  9),  it  is  a  point  of  skill  to  yield  to 

weather. 
omnibus  negotiiH  non  iaterfait  solum  sed  praefuit  (id.  i.  6),  he  not  only  had    1 

a  hand  in  all  matters,  hit  took  tile  lead  in  them. 
quanlum  ualura  homiuia  pecndibuB  autecedit  (Of£  i.  30),  so  far  as  1 

nature  is  superior  to  irutes. 
nec  nnqnam  auccumbet  inimiciB  (Dei.  \-g),  he  imll  neotr  yield  to  his  fits. 
illia  libelliB  noraen  suuin  inscribunt  (Arch.  13),  they  put  their  own 

to  Otose  papers. 
cut  mihi  te  offers,  ac  meis  commodw  oliicis  et  obstas  (Rose.  Am.  38),  why 

do  you  offer  yourself  to  me,  and  then  kinder  and  laithstand  my  ad 

vanla^f 

Note  r.  —  In  these  cases  the  dative  depends  not  on  the  preposition,  but  on 
iha  compound  verb  in  its  acquired  meaning.  Hence  if  the  acquired  meaning 
is  nol  suited  to   an  indirect  object,  the    original    construction    of  the    simple 

hi  calls  his  men  tagether.  the  Idea  of  calliHg  is  not  so  modified  as  to  make  an  indi- 
rect object  appropiiale.  So  homlnem  Interfloere,  to  make  way  viith  a  man 
(tdllhim].  Bui  in  praeflcere  ImperatSrem  beua,  to  put  a  man  as  commander- 
in-chief  in  charge  0/  a  uiar.  The  idea  resulting  tromftie  iioni^QKiS«JO.i&K0S»A\a«i 
3  iadiiect  object  (see  also  a  ^adc,  and  \  3,-ij.  d). 


r 


Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.      [§§  228,  229. 


15  and  326;  bul  Ihe  compound  verbs  make  a  convenifnl  group. 

r.  Some  compounds  of  afl,  ante,  ob,  with  a  few  others,  have  acquired 

ansitive  meaning,  and  take  the  accusative  (cf.  §  237.  rf)  ;>  as, — 

LOS  oppSgnal  CFam.  i.  i),  he  opposa  us. 
quis  audeat  bene   comitatmn  aggiedi   (Phil.  xii.  23),  win   TDOuld  dart 

tncountera  man  wea  attended ? 
mnnUH  obTre  (Lael,  2),  to  attend  la  a  duty. 

b.  The  adjective  obviaa  ajid  the  adverb  obviam  with  a  verb  take 
.  the  dative :  as,  — 

si  iHe  dbvius  ol  faturua  non  erat  (Mil.  iS),  if  he  isas  not  iniending  to  get 

in  his  Toay.  , 

mihi  obviam  venisS  (Fam.  ii.  16), yen  eame  la  meet  »i« 
£.  V/hen  place  OT  mo/iori  is  distinctly  thought  of,  the  verbs  mentioned 
in  §228  regularly  take  a  noun  withapreposition,  instead  of  the  dative:  as, 
in  nBceribna  inhaercre  (Tnsc.  iv.  1 1,  14),  ii  remains  fixed  in  tht  vitals. 
honiini  coniuncto  mienm  (Tnll.  2,  3),  to  a  man  united  to  me. 
convenit  mihi  cum  adveraario  (Tnll.  9,  23),  my  adversary  and  I  agrti  (it 

agrees  Co  me  with  ray  adversary). 
cum  hSo  concurrit  ipse  Eumenes  (Ncp.  Eum,  4,  l),  tnlh  him  Eumtnts 

himself  engages  i«  comial  (runs  together), 
quae  a  ceterSrum  genlium  more  disscntiunt  (Font.  13,  30),  ■which  differ 

from  Ihe  custom  of  all  other  nations. 
inserite  oculos  in  CDiiam  (Foul.  19,  ^Ji},  fix  your  eyes  on  the  senate-hotae. 
ignis  qui  est  ob  OB  ofTiisus  (Univ.  li^,thefireiBhich  is  diffused  before  the  sight. 
ohicitur  contra  istonim  impetus  Macedonia  (Font.  20,  44),  Macedonia  is 

Sit  to  withstand  their  attacks.     [Cf,  si  quis  vSbis  error  ohiectus  (C^, 

3,  5),  if  any  mistake  has  been  caused  you.     sc  iniectiicos  vobia  caoSBm 

deliberandi  (Oec.  2,  4),  that  they  itioidd  give  you  occasion  far  coh- 

tidering."] 
in  aegetem  flamma  incidit  (jEn.ii.  Tpt,"),  the/ire  falls  t4j>0H  the  standing  corn. 
Note.  — But  ihe  usage  varies  in  different  aulhore,  in  different  words,  and  often 
in  the  same  word  in  the  Eame  sense.   'Mie  dictionary  musltie  consulted  for  each  verb, 

229.  Many  verbs  of  taking  away^  and  the  like  take  the 
Dative  (especially  of  a  person)  instead  of  the  Ablative  of 
Separation  (§  243)  t^  as, — 

1  Such  verbs  are  agffredior,  odefi,  antecSdS,  acteeS,  aategrodlor, 
oonvenlo,  toeO,  obeC,  oftendO,  oppHgnO,  aut>ed,  praecedB. 

*  The  dalive  in  these  constructions  represents  the  action  as  done  to  the  objecl, 
and  is  thus  more  vivid  than  the  ablative. 

rcfi  verbs  are  compounds  of  ab,  dB,  ex,  and  afe«  lAftA. 


5§  229-31.] 


Dative  with  Cmnpounds. 


ilium  MC  perioulo  eripuit  (B.  G.  iv.  u),  hf  dragged  him  out  of  dan 
.  Sometimes  the  dative  of  the  person  and  the  ablative  of  the  thing 
a  preposition  arc  both  used  with  the  s; 


mnlieii  annlum  detraxit,  he  look  a  ring  from  the  -ai 

bora  miM  abslulisli,  j'ou  have  robbed  me  of  my  gains. 

I  vitam  aduleHoeutibuB  vis  aufeit  (C  M.  ig),  violence  depri 

I    nihil  enim  tibi  delcaxit  senectus  (id.  \),for  age  Aas  robbed  you  ofnclking. 
I    nee  n''!''  hunc  cnorem  extorquen  volo  (id.  23),  nor  do  I  wish  this  err»r  I 

[    a.  The  distinct  idea  of  motion,  — and,  in  general,  t 
Rquire  the  ablative  with  a  preposition  (§  25S.  a) : 

[::■ 

Kth 

I    e.  The  dative  is  often  med  by  the  poets  i 
would  in  pro-se  require  a  noun  with  a  preposition, 
verbs  of  contending  {§  248.  b):  as,  — 

contendis  Homero  (Prop.  i.  7,  f),you  vie  with  Homer.     [In  pi 

Homeio.] 
plaeitone  eliam  plignabis amori  (.^n.  iv.  T,%),ioillyau  struggle e^ 

a  love  UiaC  pleases  you! 
tibi  certit  (Ed.  v.  8),  via  mth  you.     [tecnm.] 

diffettHerni5nI(Hor.  S.  i.  4.  48),i^i^B»-j>-om/rDii,    [fi  aermone,  g  243.]    ' 
Bolslitium  pecori  defendite  (Eel.  vii.  47),  t:eep  the  noontide  lieat  from  the 

flotk.     [a  pecore.] 
Jateri  abdidil  ensem  (_Mn.ii.  ^^3),  buried /Ae  swgrd  in  Us  side,   [in  latere    ! 

S  260.  fl.] 
[For  the  Dative  instead  of  ad  with  the  Accusative,  see  {  235.  i.  3.]  I 

230.  The  passive  of  intransitive  verbs  that  govern  the 
dative  can  be  used  only  impersonally  (§  146.  d).  Such 
verbs  retain  the  dative  in  this  use  (cf,  §  225.  e). 

ctti  parci  potuit  (Liv.  mi.  11),  vMo  could  bt  spared? 

I  Don  moda  non  invidetur  iUI  aetati  verum  etiani  faveli 
Upr  (youth)  is  not  only  not  envied,  but  is  even  favored. 
tempon  aerviendum  est  (Fam.  ix.  7),  we  must  serve  the  exigency  of  ike  ocea- 
liou  (the  lime). 


5.  Dative  of  PosBeBaion. 
231.   The  Dative  is  used  with  eaae  and  si.m.\VM  ■wwi'i.x.'i  , 

ote  Possession  :  as,  — 


228  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.      [§§  231, 232. 

homini  cum  deo  Biinilitndo  est  (Cic), man  hai  a  Uiiness  to  God  (Otcie  is 

qnibna  opes  niillae  sunt  {Sail.  Cat.  37),  [those]  ivha  have  no  vieallh. 

est  mihi  domi  patei  (Eel.  iii.  33),  I  have  a  father  at  heme. 

Remark,  — The  Genitive  or  a  Possessive  wiih  ease  emphasizes  (he /otjewor; 
tbe  Dative,  the  fact  of ponession :  as,  liber  est  meue,  tie  book  is  iKtne  (and  no 
one's  else) ;  eat  mlhi  liber,  I  have  a  ioak  (among  other  things).  The  latter  is 
the  usual  fnrm  to  denote  simple  fiaaeiiion,  since  babeO,  iave,  generally  si(|;nifies 
iaid,  often  wilh  some  secondary  meaning:  as, — 

legionem  quara  secum  babebat  (B.  G.  i.  8),  the  legion  which  he  kept  with 
him. 

domitSs  habere  libidines  (De  Or.),  to  keep  Ike  passions  under  control. 

a.  Compounds  of  ease  take  the  dative  (except  abesaa  and  pOHse) : 

deest  mihi  pecunia,  I  lack  money. 

quid  mihi  proderit?  in  wial  iiiiU  it  kelp  me  (what  will  it  profit  me)? 

b.  After  nSmeii  eat,  and  similar  expressions,  the  name  is  usually 
put  in  the  dative  by  a  kind  of  apposition  with  the  person  .'as,  — 

cui  A&jcano  tiiil  cognomen  (Liv.  xxv.  2),  whose  (to  whom)  surname  was 

pueto  ab  inopia  Egerio  inditum  nomen  (Liv.  i.  34),  the  name  Egeriuswas 
given  the  boy  from  kis  poverty. 

c.  The  name  may  also  be  in  apposition  with  ufimen ;  or  in  later 
Latin  in  the  genidve  (cf.  §  214./")  :  as,  — 

cui  nomen  Arethnsa  (Verr.  iv.  52),  [a  fonat]  called  Arelhnsa  (to  which 

is  the  name  Arethusa). 
pueto   nomen    est   Marcos  (MSrci),  the   boy's  name  is  Marcm  (to  [he 

Q.  Metello  Macedonici  nomen  inditum  est  (Vel.  Pat.  i.  11),  to  Q.  Metellta 
the  name  of  Macedonicus  -was  given. 

6.   Dative  of  the  Agent. 
23a.   The  Dative  of  the  Agent  is  used  with  the  gerun- 
dive, to  denote  the  person  on  whom  the  necessity  rests : 
as, — 

haec  TobiH  provbcia  est  defendenda  (Man.  6),  this  province  it  for  yau  te 

defend  (to  be  defended  by  you). 
mihi  est  piignaitdum,  /  have  to  fight  (i.e.  the  need  of  fighting  li  to  me: 

compare  mihi  est  liber,  /have  a  hook,  §  231.  Rem.). 
Note.  — This  is  the  regular  way  of  expressing  ihe  agent  with  the  Second  or 
Passive  Periphrastic  Conjugation  ({  113.  d.  1).     But  when  a  dative  is  eipressed 
governed  by  the  verb  itself,  and  rarely  at  otbet  twnes,  live  agjw.  is  denoted  by  the 
■MlMfar  with  ab  (}  246)  10  avoid  ambiguitj ;  as, —  ^h 


1$  232,  233.] 


Dative  of  tlie  Agent, 


qaibaa  est  a  Tobu  consulenduia  (Manil.  2,  &),for  whom  you  must 

(for  H-hom  it  must  be  consulted  bjr  yoa). 
rem  ait  omnibiiB  Tobia  pruvidendun  (Rab.  2,  4),  tAat  Ike  malle 

be  altended  lo  by  all  of  you. 
(Cf.  isti  pnndpes  et  aibi  et  ceteris  popuU   Romatu  universi  auc 

parendum  esse  fateantui  (ManiL  22,64),  Itt  (kese  leading  mm  adn 


M 


after  perfect  pariiciphs  (eape- 
:),  but  rare  after  other  parts  of  the 


I 


a.  The  dative  of  the  agent  i 
cially  when  used  in  an  adjectii 

mihi  delibetatum  et  constitutum  est  (RuU.  i.  8),  I  Jucve  ddiberaud  and  ri 

solved  (it  has  been  deliberated  by  me). 
miM  tes  lota  provisa  est  (Vetr.  II.  iv.  42,  91),  thf  mailer  has  been  fully  ^ 

provided  fir  by  me. 
SIC  dissimillimis  faeatiolis  commiiiiiter  cibus  quacritur  (N.  D.  ii.  48),  10  l^  1 

very  different  creatures  fnod  is  sc 

b.  The  dative  of  the  agent  is  used  by  the  poets  and  later  v 
after  altnost  any  passive  verb  :  as, — 

neque  cernitur  tUli  (^En.  i.  440),  nor  is  seen  by  any. 

fell X  eat  dicta  aorori  (Ov.  Fast.  \\\.),  she  iBas  called  happy  by  ker  si 

c.  The  dative  of  the  person  wl 
after  videor,  seem:  as, — 


videtuc  mihi,  i 

dia  nliler  visum  [est]  {J&n.  ii.  428),  it  seem/d  olksrwise  lo  the  gods. 
vidcor  mihi  perspicere  ipsius  animum  (Fam.  iv,  13),  I  seem  (lo  myself)  to    I 
ser  the  soul  (f  Iht  man  hinisilf. 

NOTB.  —  The  verb  probftre,  o/i/foi'i! 
Dative  of  Reference  {\  335),  wbich  lias  became  so  nrmiy  aiiacDea  ta 
with  the  passive,  seemingly  as  Dative  of  Agent :  as,  — 

Ihaec  sententia  et  ill!  et  a&bia  probabatur  (Fam.  i.  7,  4),  this 
his  approval  and  mine  (was  made  acceptable  both  to  hiir 
mihi  egregie  probata  eat  oralio  tua  (Tusi 
satisfactory  to  me. 
Lnd 
•n 
: 


7.  Dative  of  tile  Purpose  c 
233.   The   Dative   is   used  to   denote  the    Purpose  1 
End. 

This  construction, 


230  Sj'nfiix:  Covstnt£tio7i  of  Coses.       [§§  233,  234. 

a.  The  dative  of  an  abstract  noun  Is  used  to  show  that  far  whick  a 
thing  serves  or  which  it  accomplishes  (Dative  of  Service),  often  with 
another  dative  of  the  person  or  thing  affected : '  as,  — 

rei  publicae  cladi  sunt  (Jug.  85),  Ihey  art  ruin  io  Ihe  State  (for  a  disaster), 
magno  asol  nostria  foit  (B,  G.  iv.  25),  itvias  of  great  senice  to  our  me* 

(for  great  use). 
Icrtiamaciem  nustris  anhaidio  misit  (id.i.  51),  he  sent  the  third  line  as  a 

oama  deeTa.nt  quae  ad  reRciendas  naves  erant  uani  (id.  iv.  29),  all  things 
viere  ^panting  mkicA  ■mere  cf  use  for  repairing  the  ships. 

evenit  facile  quod  dia  oordiest  (Liv.  i.  39),  that  comes  to  pass  easily  whici 
is  desired  iv  the  gods  (is  for  a  pleasure  [lit.  heart]  to  the  gods). 

Note.  — The  word  tragi  used  as  an  adjective  b  a  dalive  of  this  kind :  a?,— 

cogisniedicereinimicumfriigi(Cic.),j'oucom/rfni^ftt^Bi!?pyi™™j'^iin«(. 

homines  satis  fortes  et  place  &iigi  (Verr.  ii.  3,  27),  men  brave  enoiigk  and 
ihoreugHy  honest. 

(Cf.  ero  fragi  bonae  (Plant.  Pseud.  ^6S),pro//aile  to  his  master.^ 

b.  The  Dative  of  Purpose  of  concrete  nouns  is  used  in  prose  in  a 
few  tnilitar)'  expressions,  and  with  treedom  in  poetiy:  as, — 

leceptnl  canere,  io  sound  a  retreat. 

lacnm  caatria  capere,  ta  select  a  site  for  a  camp, 

optavit  locum  regno  (^n.  iii.  log),  he  chose  a  place  for  a  hingdam. 


8.    Sative  with  AdjeotiTeB. 

234.  The  dative  is  used  after  adjectives  or  adverbs,  to 
denote  that  to  which  the  given  quality  is  directed,  for  which 
it  exists,  or  towards  which  it  tends. 


I  The  following  characlerislics  have  been  observed  in  the  use  of  Ihe  Piedicale 
Dadve  (dative  of  Service}:  i.  Ihe  noun  is  semi-abslract;  a.  it  is  so  used  only  lu  the 
singular;  3.  il  is  "used  predicaiivcly " ;  4.  generally  with  eaae;  5.  rarely  qualified 
by  an  adjective ;  6.  or  by  a  genitive  or  a  phrase;  7.  but  few  nouns  are  used  in  this 
way;  8.  Ihc  use  and  its  limilaiions  appear  to  be  governed  by  cuslons,  not  by  any 
principle.  It  is  common  wiih  about  40  nouns,  and  is  found  with  1S5  in  all.  Of 
these  dSnO,  m-Qnerl,  vltiO,  are  noi  used  wiih  ease.  The  verbs  with  which  it 
exists  are  habed,  dS,  dlcfi,  dQcQ.  pSriS,  Tsr-tQ,  with  ease  nnd  iis  equivalents, 
as  Herl,*lc.  Tlie  nouns  most  commonly  found  in  Ihis  conslniclion  are.  adlQ- 
mentO,  auxlllfi.  cordl.  cilmlnl,  cnrao.  darnnO.  decorl,  dSdecorl,  dSnfl. 
exemplC,  exltl5,fra'udl  (i/.inor^fj.honSri,  indlciQ,  Invldlae,  Impediments. 
iBudl,  IQdlbrifi,  mats,  morae.  odiO,  oneri,  Smameiita,  praedae.  prae- 
aidlO,  probrO,  pudSrl,  receptul,  remea\6.  bb.\^v\,  aMtoaWia.  torrerl 
VOJuptStI,  asui.— Roby'sLatiiiGtammM.xV.i^ti.TO.M'^.  ,-■ 


Dative  with  Adjectives.  231 


K3..1 

^Kt.  The  dative  is  used  with  adjectives  (and  a  few  adverbs)  ol  fitne 
^BVneiJ,  likeness,  service,  inclination,  and  their  opposites :  as,  — 
W  Biha  e5t  tam  natiirae  aptum  (Ijel.  5),  ncthiHg  is  so  fitted  to  nature. 

nihil  difficile  amanta  puio  (Or.  10),  I  think  nothing  hard  la  a  lertr. 

pompae   quam  pugnae  aptius   (ii   1^,  filter  for  a  procisHon  than  for 
balllt. 

Tebos  ipsis  par  et  aequalis  oratio  (id.  36),  a  speech  tqual  and  level  w 

oastria  idotieum  locnm  deligit  (B.  G.  i.  49),  a  suitable  plate  for  a  ca; 
tribSiii  Bobii  sunt  amici  (Q.  Ft.  1.  2),  &e  IriivTtes  are  friendly  to  us. 
i«npidia  lerum  talium  odioaniQ  fortasse  et  moleBtnm  est  carere  (Cat.  Maj. 

14,  47),  to  those  who  are  desirous  of  such  things,  it  is  perhaps  hateful 

and  disagreeable  to  do  wilhoid  them. 
aec  eum  . . .  aut  inviaam  deo  aut  ntglectura  a  deo  iudicemus  (N.  D.  ii.  66, 

167),  and  let  us  not  Jeeni  him  either  hateful  to  Cod  or  disregarded  by 

God 
esse  propilius  potest  n5aiini(N.  D.  i,  44, 12^),  he  ean  be  gracious  la  nobody. 
eat  hominura  generi  prosperus  et  aaliitaris  ilje  fulgor  (Rep.  vi,  17,  17J,  that 

radiance  is  favorable  and  beneficial  to  the  race  of  m 
.  ceterae  res  quae  eipetaotur  opporiunae  sunt  singulae  rebus  singulis  (I.sel. 

6,  21),  all  other  things  thai  are  sought  after  are  suitable  each  la  some 

particular  thing. 
magnis  aulem  viria  prosperae  semper  omnes  res  (N.  D.  ii.  66,  167),  but  to 

great  men  everything  is  aheays  favorable. 
■edes  huic  nostro  non  iraportiina  sermoni  (Dc  Or.  iii.  5,  iS),  a  place  not 

unsuitable  for  this  conversation  of  oars. 
advecsissimi  aavigantibtiB  venti  (B.  O  iii.  107),  winds  most  adverse  for 

those  who  sail. 
ted  non  quicquid  tibi  sudire  utile  est,  Id  mihi  dicere  necesse  est  (OfL  iii. 

12,  ^2),  but  not  everything  that  is  useful  for  you  to  hear  is  necessary 

for  me  to  Say. 
eui  fluids  erat  BfTints  M.  Tallius  (Tull.  6,  14),  to  which  estate  M.  TuUius 

was  next  neighbor. 
I  conveiiienter  naturae  vivere  (OB.  iii.  3,  13),  to  live  in  accordance  z 

nature  (_i^o\oyouiiirut  rij  pioti'). 
eongiuenler  naturae  (Fin.  iii.  7,  26),  in  harmony  with  nature. 
Note  I,  —  So,  also,  in  poetic  and  colloquial  use,  witli  Idem ;  as,  — 
invilum  qui  servat  idem  facit  Occident*  (Hor.  Ep.  ii.  3.  467),  he  loha  11 

a  man  against  his  vdH  does  the  same  as  one  who  iills  him. 
Note  3.— Adjectives  of  likeness  are  often  followed  by  atque  (fto),  at.    So  also 
■  'erbs  aequS,  parlter,  similiter,  eie.    The  pronoun  Idem  has  regularly 


I 


parem  Ecntentiam  htc  habet  &c  formam  (Flaut.  Mil.  1340),  ifkehas  se 

tqual  la  his  beauty  (like  as  his  beauty), 
suspicor  eJadem  rebus  qntbna  me  ipsum  coniiQO\«\.y;.M.,'^i'i.  i.,Vy 
/^jus^e/jvu  are  liislurbed  by  Ike  same  things  by  wkiA  I  am.  ' 


232  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.  [%  234. 

b.  Adjectives  oi/llness  or  use  take  oftener  [he  Accusative  with  ad  (0 
denote  the  purpose  or  end;  but  regularly  the  Dative  of  persons:  as, — 

aplns  ad  rem  miiitstem.Ji/ /or  a  iolditr's  duly. 

locus  ad  ipsidias  aplior  (Mil.  20),  a  place  filler  for  lyiugin  •atail. 

nobis  utile  est  ad  hanc  rem,  it  is  of  use  la  us  for  this  thing. 

c.  Adjectives  and  nouns  of  inclitiation  and  the  like  may  take  the 
Accusative  with  in  or  ergS :  as,  — 

comia  in  uxorem  (Hor.  Ep.  l!.  i),  kind  to  His  wife- 

divina  bonitis  erga  homines  (N,  D.  ii.  23),  the di'vine geodnts!  towards  men. 

de  bcDevoIentia  qoam  quisque  habeat  ergi  DOS  (Off.  i.  15,  47).  in  regard 

to  each  man^s  good  vtill  "fDhiek  ke  has  toioards  us. 
gratiorem  me  esse  in  le  (Fam.  xi.  lo),  that  I  am  more  grateful  to  you. 

d.  Some  adjectives  of  likeness,  nearness,  belonging,  and  a  few  others, 
ordinarily  requiring  the  Dative,  often  tal^  the  Possessive  Genitive.' 
Thus, — 

qaod  ut  illl  propriom  ac  pecpetuum  sit . . .  optare  debetis  (ManiL  1 6,  4S), 

which  you  ou^tto  pray  may  be  secure  (his  own)  and  lasting  to  him. 
fuit  hoc  quondam  proprinm  populi  Roman!  (id.  iz,  32),  this  was  eitct  &e 

peculiar  characteristic  of  the  Roman  people. 
id  quod  reo  maxime  necegaiuiuia  est  (Caec.  iz,  38),  a  thing  which  is 

tspecially  necessary  for  the  defendant. 
com  ntncina  ^s  maximi  uecesaarins  (AtL  ix.  7),  since  yeu  art  tspeciallj 

ioundta  both. 
piocuratoT  aeque  ntriasqae  necessaritu  (Quinct.  28,  %fi),  an  agtni  equally 

closely  connected  with  both. 
Note.  — The  genitive  In  this  conslnicdon  is  not  objective  tike  those  above,  but 
possessive  (cl  {  S14.  a). 

1.  The  Genitive  is  especially  used  with  these  adjectives  when  they 
are  used  wholly  or  approximately  as  nouns.    Thus,  — 

amicus  fjicvrbti,  friendly  to  Cicero.    But,  Ciceronia  amicus,  a  friend  0/ 

Cicero  ;  and  even,  CiceroniB  amidssimus,  a  very  great  friend  of  Cicero. 

Ccelicus  et  eins  aequalis  Paeon  (Or.  64,  215),  the  Crelie  and  its  equivalent 

tie  Faeon. 
hi  eiant  affines  istatti  (Vert.  iv.  14),  these  were  this  man's  fellows. 

2.  After  BlmlliB,  Hie,  the  genitive  is  more  common  in  early  writers. 
Cicero  uses  the  genitive  of  living  objects,  and  either  the  genitive  or 
dative  of  things ;  as,  — 

domini  similis  ea  (Tet.)  you're  Hie  your  master  (your  master's  like). 

1  Sucli  are  aequaiia,  aCBnls.  anilcuB.  cCa'nH.tua.  communis,  cSnsan- 
IffulneuH.  dlspSr,   famlliarlB,   finltiniua.   inlmicus,   neceaBSrius.  par, 
proplaquus.  proprlua  ^leguWVj  geiv\\\ve),&\mUla,auDarBtee^ 
Alienua.  coatrarlue.  sacer.  J^H 


^|gp. 


I  234,  235.]  Dative  of  Reference.  ^l%\ 

nt  deBmra.  dmilSa  essemus  C^.D.i.  35,97)^  that  ■wi  migil  Be  H&t  ihi  gBdk,% 

Bimia  quam  siinilia  lurpissima  bestia  nobis  (N.  D.  i.  jz,  91,  quoted  froniV 
'e.'aa.'),kB'ai  likt  us  is  tkal  wreUked  icasl  the  ape  ! 

si  enimhoc  ill!  simile  sit,  es  I  illud  hnic  (N.D.  i.  33,  ^'),  fir  if  this  i 
that,  thai  is  like  this. 

filius  patn  similis  (Fin.  v.  5,  iz),  a  son  lite  hii  father. 

est  Bimilis  maiocuia  suoro  [Ter,  Ad.  411),  h^s  like  his  ancestors. 

e.  The  adjectives  propior,  ptoxlmus  sometimes,  and  the  adverbs  J 
propitu,  proximfi  more  commonly,  take  the  accusative,  as  if  prepo^  1 
tions,  lilie  props  (see  §  z6i.  a). 

propius  periculum  (Liv,  xxi.  1),  nearer  tv  danger, 

ptoxime  deos  accesait  Clodius  (Mil.  22,  59),  Cladiut  has  come  ver_ 

pcQximus  Pampeium  Bedebam  (Cic),  I  was  iitling  next  le  Pompey. 
proximus  mare  oceanum  (B.  G.  iii.  7),  nearest  the  cctan. 
Note.— These  woida  take  also  the  ablative  with  abl  (cf.  \  s6o.  J) 

9.  DatlTO  of  Heference. 

235.  The  Dative  is  often  required  not  by  any  f  articular 
Worii,  but  by  the  general  meaning  of  the  sentence :  as, 
tibi  araa  (PI.  Mere,  L  t'),youplough  fir  yourself. 
res  tuas  tibi  habe  (foriniila  of  divorce),  keep  ycur  goods  to  yourself . 
laadavil  mihi  it^tte-ai,  he  praised  my  broAer  (oi(t  of  regard  for  mej  lauds' 

Tit  fratrem  meam  would  imply  no  such  motive). 
nieritM  mactavit  honores,  launun  Neptuno,  taunim  tibi,  pulcber  Apollo 
(j€n.  iii.  z\%),  he  offered  the  sacrifices  due,  a  bidt  to  Neptune,  a  buU  to 
thee,  beautiful  Apollo. 
Curioni  nostro  tribiinatus  conglaciat  (Fam.  viii.  6),  our  friend  Curio's 

tribttneship  is  frozen  up  (the  tribuneship  is  frozen  up  for  Curio). 
Note.  —  The  daUve  in  this  construction  is  often  called  ihe  Dative  of  Advantage 
ir  Disadvantage  (liatajui  commas  out   i/Kantmodi),  as  denoting  the  p 
'  thing  for  whose  benefit  or  to  whose  prejudice  Ihe  action   is  perfonnf 
meaning  of  the   sentence  is  complete  without  the   dative,  which   is  n 
Ihe  preceding    constructions,   closely  connected    with    any    single  word.      Thus 
the   Dative  of  Reference  is  easily  disUnguishahli 
Ihe  sentence  consists  of  only  two  words,  as  in  the  fi 

ta.  The  Dative  of  Reference  is  often  used  to  qualify  a  whole  idea, 
DBtead  of  the  Possessive  Genitive  modifying  a  single  word 
: 


Poeula  vel  coqioribus  auls  obatmete  (Cat.  Maj.  20),  to  block  the  march 
of  the  Carthagiaians  eiien  with  their  own  Indies  (to  block,  etc.,  foe  the 
disadvantage  of,  etc.),  . 

SC  in  conspectum  nautiB  dedil  (Verr.  vi  53),  ke put  himself  in  sight  of  tht    i 
sailors  (he  put  himself  to  the  sailors  info  sight), 
'  This  comes  from  llie/r  original  meaning  of  0^,  asvjeaa^  of  NfiupQ' 


I 

Iht   ^M 


234  Syntax:  Construction  of  Casfs.      [§§  235,  236 

vcrBfltur  tnilii  nnte  oculoa  fid.  47),  it  cemts  befort  my  eya  (it  comes  to  me 

before  the  eyci). 
b.  The  dative  is  used  of  the  person  from  whose  point  of  view  a  dtu- 
ation  or  direction  is  deftned. 

This  construction  answers  to  the  English  as  you  go  in,  and  the  like. 
The  person  is  commonly  denoted  Indefinitely  by  3  participle  in  tlie 
plurnli  as.— 

oppidiim  primum  Thessnliae  venientibna  ab  Epiro  {B.  C  iii.  80),  Ihtfira 

Imva  ff  I'hfSsaly  as  you  come  from  Epirus  (to  those  coming,  etc.). 
I«eva  parte  sinum  intrantibna  (Liv.  xivi.  26),  on  lir  lift  as  you  sail  up  lii 

itil/{to  ihuae  enlering). 
e«t  urbe  igreaaia  tumulus  (^^a.il.  'jl^'),iAertii,  as  you  cume  out  of  Ihe  city, 

a  maund  (t>i  those  having  come  out). 
t.  The  dative  of  reference  is  (by  a  Greek  idiom)  rarely  mtxJified  by 
nSliiu,  TOlBna,  participles  of  ii51S,  toIo,  or  by  some  similar  word :  as, 
ut  qnibusquQ  helium  invitis  nut  voIantiboB  etat  (Tac.  Ann.  i.  59),  as  taek 

mlghl  rtcflvt  Ikt  war  rcluctanlty  or  gladly. 
ut  mlUtibus  l«l>5>  volantibuu  essel  (Jug.  100),  thai  the  soldiers  mi^ 

Oisumi  Ikt  task  taitHngly, 
d.  The  dative  of  reference  is  used  idiomatically  without  any  verb  In 
colloquial  questions  and  exclamations:  as, — 

quo  iniM  fortfiniim  (Hor.  Ep.  i.  5.  12),  o/wkatuse  to  me  is  fortune  f 
uni1e  mlhi  Inpidem  (IIoi'.  Sat,  ii.  7.  116),  where  can  I  get  a  stone? 
quo  tibl,  Tilli  (Har.  Sat.  i,  6,  24),  vikat  use  for  you,  TiUiusl 
t.  The  dative  of  reference  is  sometimes  used  after  Inteijections; 
as, — 

vae  vlctll,  HW*  to  Ike  cvni/Hered. 

em  tibi,  there,  late  thai  Ohcre,  for  you) !    [Cf,  %  236.] 

belmlht,  ak,  me! 

10.  BthioBl  DatiTe. 

230.  The  Dative  of  the  Personal  Pronouns  is  used  to 
show  a  certain  interest  felt  by  the  person  indicated  :  ^  as,  — 
quid  mihi  Cebus  ngil  (Hor.),  pray  ivhat  is  Ctlsiis  doing f 
luo  iibi  servit  palri  (Plaul.  Capl.  Prol.},  he  serves  his  awn  fa&er. 
at  tibi  repenle  venit  mihi  Cominius  (Fam.  U,  2),  but,  look  you,  of  a  sudden 

hem  tibi  talenlum  argenti  (PI.  Trin.  v.  1),  hark  ye,  a  talent  ofsiher, 
quid  tibi  lis,  v.'hat  vfould you  have  (what  do  you  wish  for  yourself)  ? 

This  construction  is  called  the  Ethical  Dative  idaltvus  Itkkus),     It  is 

really  only  a  special  case  of  the  dative  of  reference. 


■"  Compaic  '"  I'll  rhyme  you  so  eigVit  yeais  vojeftvEi."'  —  -Ai  Yen  Lihill. 


^■§236.237.]         Accusative  of  Direct  Object.  235  ^^| 

^H      Remark.  — Toeitpress  FOR— meaningi«J/tflrfo/;w<fe/Jiu:efl//n  behalf  of —^^^k 
^^Hte  ablative  with  prfi  must  be  used ;  as, —  ^^^H 

^B      pco  patria  moii  (Hor.  Od.  iii.  2),  lo  die  for  ont's  country.  ^^H 

^H      pro  r^e,  lege,  grege  (pror.},^r  iing,  lirw,peapti.  ^^^H 

^B       ego  ibopro  li  (Plaut.  Most.),  I  will  go  instead  of  yau.  ^^^^k 

111. -ACCUSATIVE. 

Note,— ThE  Accusative  originally  served  to  connect  the  noun  loosely  with  the 
verb-idea,  whether  CKpresscd  by  a  verb  proper  or  by  a  verbal  noun  or  adjeelive. 
Probably  its  earliest  use  was  to  repeat  the  verlj-idea  as  in  Ihe  Cognate  Accusative 
(run  a  race.fighi  a  ialtU,  see  §  03B).  From  this  it  would  be  a  short  step  to  the 
Facdlative  Accusative  (denotiag  Ihe  result  of  an  act,  as  in  niaie  a  lable.  drill  a 
hoU.  d  \  175.  note  1).  From  this  last  could  easily  come  the  common  accusative 
(of  Affecting,  brtaka  lailt,fltig  a  Aalt,  see  J  337).  Traces  of  ail  these  uses  appear 
In  the  language,  and  the  loose  connection  of  noun  With  verb-idea  is  seen  in  the  me  ^^H 
of  stems  in  composition'  (d.  p.  305,  head-note).  ^^^B 

The  t;ses  of  the  accusative  may  be  classified  as  follows:  ^^M 

(  I.  DirecUy  sflected  by  the  Action  ()  237).  ^^ 

uPw«ABYOB,.CTt   1       g^^^^j,^^^^^    .Thi^gproducedO^g?). 

I  (  Cognate  Accusative  ( j  23B), 

f  1.  Predicate  Accusative  (of  Naming,  etc.)  (§  839.  a). 

§a.  Two  Accusatives  :  J  stOf  Asking  or  Teaching  (}  239,  f). 

l3.0fConcealing{}239.^). 

(I.  Adverbial  ({  a^o.  a,  b). 
2.  Of  Specification  (Greek  Accusative)  (j  S40.  c), 
3.  or  Extent  and  Duration  (§  240.  /). 
4.  Of  Exclamation  (J  340.  d). 
5.  Suhjaci  of  Infinitive  (}  S40./I. 

1.   Direct  Object. 

237.   The  Direct  Object  of  a  transitive  verb  is  put  in  1 
the  Accusative  (§  177).  J 

The  accusative  of  the  Direct  Object  denotes  (a)  that  which  is  directly  \ 
affecUd,  or  [V)  that  which  is  caused  or  produced  bj'  the  actioti  of  the 
verb  :  as,  — 

(a)  Briitiis  CaeBarem  intetfecit,  Brti/us  killed  Ceesar. 

(j)  aedem  faceie,  to  make  a  temple.     [Gimpate  proelinm  pDgnare,  la 
fight  a  battle,  %  238]. 

Note.  —  There  is  no  definite  line  by  which  transitive  verbs  can  be  distinguished 
from  intransitive.  Verbs  which  usually  lake  a  direct  object  (expressed  or  implied) 
are  called  transitive,  but  many  of  these  are  often  used  intransitively  or  absolutely. 

t  Compare  annlKer.  armor-bearer,  with  anua  Kecere,  ta  icar  arnu  ;  fi.'ii' 
CBU,  }yrf^i^er,  with  fidibus  oanero,  to  (play  on)  sing  to  lfc(  tft.  CQniv«'^'i^^^ 
t&ctiS  IPJauL),  (At  fact  ofj  touching  her,  witb  llftHC  lanRava.to  towK  tm- 


v 


^"•j' 


236  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.  [§  237 

Thus  tlmeS,  /  fiar,  is  iransilive  in  Ihe  sentence  Itilmlcuin  timeS,  I  fiar  117 

rneray,  bul  inlransilivc  (aisBlulc)  in  nOU  timSre,  don'l  be  afraid.  Again,  manr 
verbs  are  IiansiHve  in  one  sense  and  intransitive  in  aaotlier:  as,  HelvStlSs 
BUperavBlunt  ROmftot,  tkt  Komam  tnicrcame  the  ffcltvliani :  bui  nihil 
BUperHbat,  nothing  remaiTltd  (wai  left  over).  So  also  manj  verbs  usuallj 
Intransitive  may  be  used  transitively  with  a  slight  change  in  Ihdr  meaning:  u. 
ildAe,  yau  are  laughing;  but  1116  tlASa.yaa're  laiighing  alme. 

a.  The  object  of  a  transitive  verb  in  the  active  voice  becomes  its 
subject  in  the  passive,  and  is  put  in  the  nominative  (5  177.0);  as, — 

Brutus  CaeBarem  itilerfecit,  Brutus  killed  Casar, 

Caesar  a  Biuto  intcifectus  est,  Casar  was  kiUtd by  Brutus. 

domum  aedificat,  hi  builds  a  house. 

domoB  acditicalur,  the  house  is  building  (being  built). 

h.  Many  verbs  apparently  intransitive,  expressing  feeling,  take  an 
accusative,  and  may  be  used  in  the  passive :  as,  — 

meum  caHlun  IttotumquB  doluerunt  (^e^X.fi^'),lliey  grieved  \3X\  my  calamity 

si  non  AcriEiiltra  risissenl  luppiter  et  Venus  (Hor.  O.  iii.  16.  5),  ifyufiter 

and  Venus  had  not  lulled  [at]  Acrisius. 
ridetur  ab  omni  conventu  [Hot.  S.  i.  7.  22),  hi  is  laughed  [at]  by  the  wkote 

assembly. 

c.  Verbs  of  tastt,  smell,  and  the  like  take  an  accusative  of  the 
quality :  as,  — 

vinum  redolens  (Cic),  smelting  [of]  wine. 

herbara  mella  sapiunt  (Plin.),  Ike  honey  tastes  [of]  grass, 
L  Note.  —  These  are  properly  Cognate  Accusatives  (}  238). 

H  li.  Verbs  ofmDtion,compounds  ofciroum  and  trSnB,and  a  few  others, 

^^        frequently  become  transitive,  and  take  the  accusative  (cf.  g  338.  a)  :  as, 
^1  mortem  obite,  to  die  (to  meet  death). 

^B  consulatum  ineunt  (Liv.  iii.  4),  th^  enter  upon  the  consulship. 

■  ,i„io=m  convim  (Fun.  I,.  14),  /  m,l  n.  .»,. 

^1  si  Insulam  adisset  (B.  G,  iv.  20),  if  he  should  go  to  Ihe  island. 

H  transire  flumen  (id.  11.  23),  to  cross  the  river  (ef.  g  239,  i). 

H  cTves  qiu  circumstant  senatum  (Cat.  i.  &),  the  cititens  who  stand  aboul  th^ 

I 


'.  The  accusative  is  used  after  the  imperaonals  deoet,  dCleotat, 
luvat,  oportet,  falllt,  fugit.  piaeteiit :  as,  — 

on  praeterit  (Fam.  i.  8),  it  does  not  escape  your  notice. 
il  v5a  deed  (Plaul.  Most.  714),  so  as  b/fits  you. 
\  pedibus  dSectal  claudere  verba  (Hor.  SaL  ii.   I.  a8),  my  delight  is 
(it  pleases  me)  to  arrange  laords  in  measure. 
~  animi  falliC  (Luce.  i.  13b),  nor  dan  H  ncapt  my  aOenlian  (dude 


^^m   nisi  mB  ndiit,  unltss  I  am  mistaken  (onless  it  deceives  me). 

^H  iuvit  me  tibi  tuns  Ullctas  profuisse  (Fain.  v.  21 },  il  pltaied  mi  that  yea 

^^B  Hterary  studies  had frofiltd yau. 

Boafi 

V     lati 


7,]  Accusative  of  Direct  Object. 


0  after  latet  in  poetry  and  post'Classical  prose : 

latel  plerosque  (Plin.  il.  82),  it  is  uninewit  to  most 


I 

I 


Note  i. — These  verbs  are  merely  ordiaary  tranaidTes  with  an  idiomadc  signifi- 
aliDD.     Hence  most  of  them  arc  also  used  personaliy  (ct.  j}  217.  a,  239.  d). 
Note  a.  — Decet  and  latet  somelimes  lake  the  dative:  as,— 

hostique  propinquo  Roma  latet  (Sil.  It.  xii.  614),  and  Hume  lies  hidden 

from  tkefae  close  by. 
ita  nobiB  decet  (Ter.  Ad.  928),  ihm  il  befits  us. 


t 


multa  gcmens  ignominiam  (Georg,  iii.  226),  p'oaning  muck  at  the  dis- 

grace.     [Cf.  doleo,  §  237.  i.] 
featinare  fugam  (Mn.  iv.  575),  to  hasten  their fiighl.     [Cf.  accelerd.] 
cotnptOB  arsit  crines  (Hoc.   Od.    iv.   9.   13),  she  burned  with  love  for  his 

well-tombed  locks.      [Cf.  adamo,] 

/.  In  early  and  popular  usage  some  nouns  and  adjectives  derived 
from  transitive  verbs  retain  verbal  force  sufficient  to  govern  the  accusa- 


quid  tibi  banc  tactio  est  (Plaat.  Poen.  1306),  what  business  have  you  la 

touch  her?     [Cf.  tango.] 
miiiibundi  bestiam  (App.  Met.  4),  /iill  of  wonder  at  the  creature.     [Cf. 

yitnbundus  Castra  (Liv.  ixv.  13),  trying  to  avoid  the  camp.     [Cf.  vito.] 

g.  In  early  usage  the  impersonal  gerundive  vi^itb  csae  governs  the 
accusative  (§  294.  c):  as,  — 

qnam  nobis  ingrediendnm  sit  (Cat.  Maj.  2,  6),  which  (road)  wi  must  enter 

upon.     [Here  Ciceco  purposely  uses  an  archaic  construction.] 
poenss  in  niDTte  timendumst  (Luce.  i.  Ill),  we  have  to  fear  punishment  in 
_  death. 

^■^    >i.  Many  verbs  ordinarily  transitive  may  be  used  adsclulefy  (p.  234, 
^B^te),  having  their  natural  object  in  the  ablative  with  dfi :  as,  — 

L 


priusqaam  Fompoaius  de  eius  adventa  cognoscerel  (6.  C.  iii.  loi),  before 
Pomfonius  could  learn  of  his  coming.  [Cf.  elaa  adventu  cognito, 
kit  arrival  being  discovered.'] 

£  For  Accusative  and  Genitive  after  Impevsonals,  see\  ai\.b. 


33^  Syntax:  Construction  of  Casa.  [f  a3& 

2.    Cognate  AocnaatiTe. 

238.  A  neuter  verb  often  takes  the  accusative  of  a 
noun  of  kindred  meaning,  usually  modified  by  an  adjective 
or  in  some  other  manner. 

This  cons (ruclion  is  aHed  the  Cognate  Accusative  or  Accusaihi  ej 
Kindred  Signification.    Thus,  — 

vlltni  tiitlareni  vivete  (Hor.),  lo  live  a  safer  life. 

Icflioui  lam  letiilcm  hominum  vivebat  (Leel.  lo,  31),  ke  was  now  living  ihi 
third  gmeralioH  of  men . 

cpire  tocielHlcm,  lo  [go  logelher  a.ai']  form  an  alliance. 

scrvUulcm  servire.  lo  it  in  slavery. 

a.  The  Cognate  Accusative  is  often  loosely  used  by  the    poets: 

hule  error!  slmilem  [errorem]  tDsioBe  (Hor.  Sal.  IL  3. 6z),  la  suffer  a  Jelu- 

sitH  Hie  this. 
ultaic  Cxdopa   (Hor.  Sat  L  5.  63),  ta  dance  the   Cyclops   (represenl  in 

daiidng).  ^^ 

nacchSnikliR  vivere  (Juv.  ii.  a),  to  live  in  revellings.  ^H 

AmarylUda  rc«onare  (Eel.  i.  5),  lo  re-echo  [the  name  af]  Amaryllis.         H 
inlmiuil  laevuin  (.^n,  ii,  693),  it  Awndered  on  the  left.  ■ 

Hnlcc  t^enlem  (Hot.  Od.  i.  aa.  33),  neeelly  smiling: 
■cerba  luens  (Lucr.  v,  34),  IttHngfiercety.     [Cf.  Eng.  "  lo  look  doners."] 
NOTK.  —  In  Ihe  last  ih™?  eiamples  the  cognale  aceusative  has  an  adveriial 
■ignincallon.    See  Adverbial  Accuulive.  {  140.  a. 

A  A  neuter  pronoun  or  colorless  noun  or  adjective  is  very  common 
ai  cognalc  accusative  (cf.  §§  148.  d  and  340.  0).    Thus,  — 

Empcitvicleg  multk  ftlik  peccal  (N.  D.  i.  12, 19),  Emftdocles  commits  many 

eAer  slips. 
ega  illnd  uaenltor  Theophraito  (Or.  3, 48),  im  Ais  I  agree  miCk  Theo- 

phr/ulMS. 
moltnilt  ic  ofKuio  Ula  fefellit  (Verr.  i.  3S),y«t  were  mud  deceived  ist  Ihis 

exptclalitm  (this  e^)>ectalion  deceive)  you  mach}. 
quid  me  isu  laedant  (Agr.  ii.  t i),  aitHarm  do  Hose  Mugs  da  me  f 
ai  Credo  «ul  grando  qnipjUMa  nocuit  (N,  D.  iii.  35),  if  Avught  or  hail  lua 

dene  «ny  injury  (hu  harmed  at  all). 
hBo  te  moneo,  [give  you  this  miarninff  (cf-  note  bdow). 
Mlaetnr,  /  rejoice  of  this  (^c(.  nott). 
4«M  bominet  arant,  nii-igant,  etc.  (Sail  CmL  a,  fi,  mUt  a 
ii^,  ati/tifff,  etc 
So  la  many  common  phrases :  as,  — 

«i  qpU  ille  *e  v«lit  {KG.i.  n),  if  it  dt*mUu>tnl  awytiii^e/ Urn  Q 
mat  him  in  isittune^. 


i  238,  239.]  Two  Accusatives. 


^B33 

^H     munqnid  me  via,  can  t  do  anything  mere  far  you  f  (there  is  nothing  you  1 
^B  want  of  me,  is  Ihcte?).     [A  common  form  of  leave-taking.] 

^f      quid  possum,  what  can  I  [do]  7 
id  volet,  it  amaunU  Is  this. 

Note.  — In  these  cases  subEtantives  luiMu  rf^/Kj/iffKawin^  would  bi 
other  conslnicdon:  as,— 

n  hoc  eSdem  pcccat,  he  errs  in  this  same  poial. 
bonis  rebus  Inetari,  to  rtjoicc  at  prosperity.  [Also  ;  in,  de,  or  ex,_ 
de  lestamenlo  monere, /o  remind  one  of  tie  wit!.  [Later:  genitive,  §  219.  cj 
ofiici  admonere,  to  remind  one  of  his  duty.  [Also ;  de  offioiB.] 
e.  A  few  verbs  in  isolated  expressions  take  the  accusative  from  a 
forcing  of  their  meaning.    Such  expressions  a 

ferire  foedua,  to  strike  a  treaty  (ij.  to  sanction  by  striking  down  a  victim). 
^_       vincere  iudicium  (sponsionem,  tern,  hoc),  to  prevail  on  a  trial,  etc.      [A»    I 
^L  if  the  case  were  a  diEculty  to  overcome;  cf.  vincere  iter,  .^Ji.  vi.  68S.]    [ 

^H      tcrram  navigire  (Fm.  ii,  34,  112),  lo  sail  aver  til  land.     [Perhaps  quoted   J 
^H  from  a  poet.^ 

^H     aeqnor  navigare,  to  sail  the  sea.     [As  if  it  were  trinwre,  §  237. 1/.] 
B    mariaasperaiSro  (*n.vi.3Si),/™^flrivM^  ro«£-i  jMi.     [The  ai 
^H  live  with  verba  of  smearing  is  chiefly  poetic] 

^H    noctes  dormire,  to  sleep  [whole]  nights  (to  spend  in  sleep). 
^B     Note.—  These  accusaiives  are  of  various  kinds.    The  last  example  approaches 
^^■te  cognate  construction,  cf.  the  second  example  under  \  233. 


I 


I 


3.   Two  AcousativeH. 
Some  ti^nsitive  verbs  take  a  second  accusative  in 
addition  to  tiieir  Direct  Object. 

This  second  accusative   is   either  (i)    a  Predicate  Ac- 
cusative or  (2)  a  Secondary  Object. 

a,.  Predicate  Accusative. 
An  accusative  in  the  Predicate  referring  to  the  same 
person  or  thing  as  the  Direct  Object,  but  not  in  apposition 
with  it,  is  called  a  Predicate  Accusative  (cf.  §  185,  head- 
note). 


note  J.  ^_ 

a.  Verbs  of  naming,  choosing,  appointing,  making,  esteeming,  show-  ^^| 

ing,  and  the  like,  may  take  a  Predicate  Accusative  along  with  the  ilirect  ^^| 

CnW-ct:  as,—  ^1 

I  Sputace,  qnem  enim  te  potius  appellem  (Phi!,  xiii.  10),  O  Sparlacus,  ^H 

for -whal  else  shall  I  call  you  (than  Sparlacus)?  ^^| 

iceronem  consulem  creare,  to  elict  Cicero  conml.  ^^| 

■ct£t6rem  dicere,  fo  name  [a  man]  dittatoT  {t^.  Q)waViaYi!at^.  ^H 


!40  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.  [§  239. 

me  augnrem  n5niinivenint  (Phil.  ii.  2,  4),  ik^  nominated  mt  for  at^ur. 
gratias  agibat  quod  si  oonsDleiii  ficissel  (Cic.),  hi  thanked  him  btcause  ht 

had  madf  him  consul  (supported  his  candidacy), 
homiueni  prae  eg  uemmem  puCSvit  (fZic.'),iit  eheu^  nobody  a  man  in  lem- 

parison  ivith  himself. 
dncam  se  mililibua   tuis  praebuit  (Val.   33),  he   offired  himself  to  your 

soldiers  as  a  leader. 
omneB  Catiliuia  Acidin^  postei  reddidit  (At(.  iv.  3),  he  has  made  all  lit 

Calilines  [seem]  Acidini. 
Note  i.  — The  predicale  accusative  may  be  an  adjective!  as,— 
homitiea  ex  feriset  inuaanibus  mitea  reddidit  et  mansnetos  (lor.  i,  2),  has 

made  men  from  vtild  and  barbarous  [creatures]  gentle  and  mild. 

Note  a.  —  In  changing  from  the  active  voice  lo  Ihe  passive,  the  predicate 
sccusalive  becomes  predicate  nominative  {{  185) :  as, — 

rex  ab  suis  appellalur  (B.  G.  vii.  4),  he  is  calUd  king  by  his  [subjects]. 

b.  Secondary  Object. . 

3.  The  Accusative  of  the  Secondary  Object  is  used 
(along  with  the  direct  object)  to  denote  something  more 
remotely  affected  by  the  action  of  the  verb. 

b.  Transitive  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions  Bomerimes  take 
(in  addition  to  the  direct  object)  a  Secondary  Object,  originally  gov- 
erned by  tlie  preposition :  as, — 

Caesar  Germanos  flnmen  triicit  (B.  C.  i.  S3),  Cesar  thrmas  the  Germans 
a,:ross  Ihc  river. 

Note  i.  — But  with  these  verbs  the  preposition  Is  more  commonly  repealed, 
or  sometimes  the  ablative  is  used :  as,— 

donee  res  suas  trana  HaJyn  tllimen  traicerent  (Liv.  xxxviii.  25),  till  they 

should  gel  their  possessions  across  Ihe  river  Hatys. 
(exercitus)  Pado  traiectus  Cremonam  (Liv.  xii.  56),  the  army  ■teat  conveyed 

across  ihe  Po  to  Cremona  (by  way  of  the  Po,  %  258.  g). 
Note  a. — The  secondary  object  may  be  retained  with  a  passive  verb;  as, — 
Belgae  Bbenam  IrSducii  aunt  (B.  G.  ii.  4),  Ihe  Belgians  were  led  ever 

Ihe  Mine. 
Note  3. —  Sometimes  the  Secondary  Object  appears  to  become  the  subject  of  a 
rb ;  but  this  comes  from  a  change  of  meanmg,  and  Ihe  object  is  really 

Remark.  — The  double  cutislruclion  indicated  in  i  is  possible  only  when  ihe 
force  of  the  preposition  and  Ihe  force  of  ihe  verb  are  each  distinctly  fell  in  the 
compound,  (be  verb  governing  the  Direct,  and  ftie  pteijoiiUon  the  Secondai^ 


Two  Accusatives, 


I 

I 


\ 


But  oRen  rhe  two  parts  of  the  componnii  bEcome  closelir  united  to  (brm  a  transi- 
tive verb  ot  simple  meaning.  In  this  case  the  verb-element  loses  its  power  to 
govern  the  accusative,  and  the  compound  verb  is  transitive  solely  by  virtue  of  its 
prepositional  pail.  Thus  used  the  compound  can  have  but  one  accusative,  —  the 
Banie  which  was  ibrraerly  the  secondary  object,  but  which  now  becomes  the  direct. 
So  tr&lclfl  comes  to  mean  either  (i)  lo  pierce  (anybody)  [by  hurling]  or  (a)  la 

(1)  ^aS\aYiorcanera\.taieat,  he  pierced  the  man  viilk  a  sword.     [Here  iainS 

has  lost  all  Irausitive  force,  and  serves  simply  lo  give  the  force  of  a 
verb  to  the  meaning  of  traDS,  and  to  tell  the  mannir  of  the  set.} 

(a)   Rhodanum  ttaiecit,  ke  trossed  the  Rhone.     [Here  iacio  has  become  simply 
a  verb  of  motion,  and  traicio  is  hardly  distinguishable  from  tranaeo,] 

In   these  examples  homlnem  and   Bhodanuia,   which  would  be  secondary 

objects  if  trftlSclt  were  used  in  its  primary  signilication,  have  become  the  direct 

objects.     Hence  in  the  passive  construction  they  become  the  subjects  and  are  put 

in  the  nominative.    Thus.— 

homo  traiectus  est  gladio,  tht  man  was  pierced  wilh  a  iioord. 
Rhodanus  traiectus  est,  the  Rhone  a/as  crossed. 

The  poetical  trtUeotua  lOra.  (.En.  ii.  aijs). pureed  witi  thongs,  comes  from  a 

mixture  of  two  constructions;  — 

(l}  cum  triiecit  lora,  ke  rove  Ihongs  through  him,'  and 

(2)  earn  traiecit  lore,  he  pierced  him  wi/h  thongs. 

In  putting  the  sentence  into  a  passive  form,  the  direct  object  of  the  former  (ISra) 
is  irregularly  kept,  and  the  direct  object  of  the  latter  (eum)  is  made  the  subjecL 

c.  Verbs  of  asking  aud  leaching  may  take  two  accusatives,  one  of  the 
Person  {direct  objecf),  and  the  other  of  the  Thing  {secondary  objecty.  as, 
me  senlentiam  rogavit,  he  asked  me  my  opiniou. 
olium  divos  rogal  (Hor.  Od.  ii.  16.  l),  he  prays  the  gods  fir  rest. 
haec  cum  praetorem  pustulabas  (Tull.  39),  when  you  demanded  this  of  the 

aedilis  populum  rogite  (Liv.  vi.  42),  to  ask  the  people  [to  elect]  adites. 
docere  pneros  elementa,  to  leach  children  Iheir  A  B  Cs. 

Note  1.  —  Some  verbs  of  oji/i^take  the  ablative  of  the  person  with  a  preposi- 
tion instead  of  the  accusative.  So.  always,  petS  {ab),poStUlC  (ab),qaaei<i 
(ex,  ab,  dS),  and  occasionally  others:  as, — 

pacem  ab  BomaniB  petienint  (B.  G.  il.  13),  they  sought  peace  from  the 

Eomam. 
quod  qoaesivit  ex  mi  P.  Appuleius  (Phil.  vi.  1),  lahai  Publi-us  Appuleim 

asked  of  me. 
Note  a.  —  With  the  passive  of  verbs  of  asking  or  leaching,  "^^  person  or  tho 
''  Otag  may  be  used  as  subject  (ct  d,  note)  :  as,  — 

Caesar  senlentiam  rogalus  est,  Ciesar  was  asked  his  opinion. 

id  ab  eo  flagitabatur  (B.  G.  i.  71),  this  loai  urgently  demanded  of  him. 


1 

1 


I 


I 


I 


242  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.     [§§  239,  240. 

i^F.MAKK.^The  accusnlive  of  Ihe  thing  may  be  relained  wilh  Ibe  pa£sive  ol 
rOK^,  and  of  verba  of  leaching,  and  occasion allif  with  a  few  other  veibs:  as, — 

fuerant  hoc  rogati  (Qcl.  64),  ihty  had  besn  ashed  iMs, 

poscor  meum  Laelapa  (Ov.  Met.  vii.  771),  I  am  asked  for  my  Lulaps. 

Cicero  per  legatoa  cnncta  edoctos  (Sail.  Cat.  45) ,  Cicero  being  informed  0] 
everything  through  the  ambassadors. 
But  with  most  verbs  of  asking  In  ptose  the  accusative  of  the  thing  becomes  the 
subjecL-naminative,  and  the  person  is  put  in  the  ablative  with  a  pcepositiDn:  as, — 

ne  postolaDtur  quidem  vires  a  seneotute  (Cat.  M.  1 1),  strength  is  not  even 
expected  of  an  old  matt  (asked  from  old  age). 

d.  The  verb  c815,  conceal,  may  take  two  accusatives,  and  the  usually 
intransitive  lateo,  tie  Aid,  an  accusative  of  the  person  (cf.  §  337.  e):  as,— 

non  te  celavi  Hennonem  T.  Ampi  (Fam.  ii.  16J,  I  did  not  conceal  from  yoK 
the  tali  of  T.  Ampins. 

nee  lotuere  doll  fritrem  luoonis  (^En.  i.  134),  nor  did  the  -wiles  of  Jiiao 
escape  the  notice  of  her  brother. 

NoTK.  —  All  the  double  constructions  indicated  in  c  and  rfarisefrom'lhe  waver- 
ing meaning  of  Die  verbs.  Thus  dooeS  means  both  to  shcui  a  thing,  and  to  instruct 
a  p<nson ;  oelO,  to  lUep  a  person  in  the  dark,  and  to  hide  a  thing ;  FOEtS.  to  qius- 
iiaa  a  pei^on,  and  to  asi  a  gveilion  01  a  thing.  Thus  either  accusative  may  be 
r^^ded  as  the  direct  object,  and  bo  becotne  the  subject  of  the  passive  (cf.  c,  note 
a,  above),  but  for  convenience  the  accusative  of  the  thing  is  usually  called  second- 

4.    Idiomatic  TTBea. 
240.   The  Accusative  has  the  following  special  uses:  — 
'  a.  A  neuter  pronoun  or  ailjective  is  used  as  cognate  accusative  with 
an  adverbial  force  (^Adverbial  Accusative,  cf.  §  138.  6):  as,  — 

quid  moror,  ivky  do  I  delay  ? 

dulce  loquenlem  (Hor.  Od.  i.  aa.  24.),  sweetly  speaking. 

acerba  tuens  (^n,  ix.  793),  looking  cruilly. 

torvum  clamat  (id.  vii,  599),  hi  cries  harshly. 

Note, — This  use  does  not  differfrom  the  cognate  accusative  except  that  in  some 
cases  the  connection  of  the  accusative  with  the  verb  has  bded  out  so  that  the  words 
are  real  adverbs.     But  no  fixed  line  can  be  drawn  between  Ih 

b.  The  accusative  is  found  in  a  few  adverbial  phra 

Id  lemporis,  at  that  lime. 

id  (iatuc)  aetalis,  at  that  age. 

id  (quod)  genus,  of  that  (jvAat)  Sort  (perhaps  origitially  m 

mcam  yiceia,  en  my  part. 

maximam  partem, /oi-  the  most  part. 

bonam  partem,  in  a  great  measure. 

virile  secua,  of  tie  male  sex  (probably  originally  in  appositit 

,  in  other  respects, 
qaod  si,  iut  (as  to  which)  if. 


^H 


r 


240.]  Idiomalic   Uses  of  the  Accusative,  343 

c.  The  so-called  synecdochkal  or  Greek  accusative   is  used  by  the 
poets  to  denote  the  part  affected ;  as,  — 

caput  neclenlur  (iEn.  t.  309),  Ouir  head  ihall  be  bcmid  (Ihey  shall  tic 

hound  about  the  head), 
ardends  octiJoa  suffecli  sanguine  et  %[)!  (id.  ii.  210),  Iheir  gl<a-ing  ty/s 

bloodshot  and  blwdng  with Jtrc  (suffused  as  to  their  eyes,  etc.). 
tiiida  geaa  (id.  i.  320},  bare  la  the  knee. 

Note,  —  In  many  apparendy  similar  expressions  the  accusative   may  he  ri 
garded  as  the  direct  object  of  a  verb  in  the  middle  voice  ({  ill.  a):  as, — 

iniitiie  femun  cingitur  (.*ji.  ii.  t^ia^,  he  girds  en  the  useless  steel. 
L       nodo  ainos  colleota  SaealSi  (}d.\.  310),  iavingAer  Jloaiing /olds  ga/A/red 
I  in  a  knat. 

I        umeroB  insternor  pelle  leonia  (id.  ii.  722),  I  toner  my  shoulders  -with  a 
I  lion's  liin. 

prolinus  indnitur  faciem  cultomque  Dianae  (Ov.  Mel.  ii.  ^^.ferth-M 
she  assumes  the  shafe  and  garb  of  Diana. 


I 


d.  The  accusative  is  used  in  exclamattoi 


O  fbrliiDalam  rempiiblicain,  eh,  fortunate  republic!     [Cf.  O  fortunata  moi 

(Phil.  xiv.  12,  31),  nh,  happy  dialh!  {§  241.  e).] 
me  miserum,  all,  wretched  me  ! 
in  quatuor  aras  (Ed.  v.  65),  lo,fo}ir  altars  I 
ellum  (=  en  ilium),  there  he  is! 
eccos  (=  ecce  eos).  there  they  are,  look  at  Ikem  ! 
pro  denm  %Acai,  good  heavens  (oh,  protection  of  the  gods)  ! 
hocine  aaeclum  (Tet.  Ad.  304),  oh,  this  generation  ! 
hnociae  hominem  (Vert,  v,  29),  this  man,  good  heavens  ! 
O  me  infelicera  (Mil.  37,  loj),  oli,  unhappy  II 

Note  1.  —  Such  expressions  depend  upon  some  long-forgollen  verb.    The  us 

f-ne  in  some  cases  suggests  an  original  question,  as  in  quid?  whalf  -ahyf  tettm, 

Note  a. — The  omission  of  the  verb  has  given  rise  lo  some  other  idiomalic  ai 


|., 


laliiteni  (ac.  dicit)  (in  letters),  ^f^A'r^. 

quo  niihi  foitunam,  of  what  use  is  fortune?     [Here  no  verb  is  though!  of.J 
unde  mihi  lapidem,  inhere  cart  I  gel  a  stone ! 
le  dius  Hdius  (sc.  adiuvel),  so  help  me  heaven  (Ihe  god  of  failh). 

e.  Duration  of  time  and  extent  of  space  are  expressed  by  the  accusa- 
(see  §5  256,  257). 

f.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  mood  is  in  the  accusative.  This  is 
especially  frequent  after  words  of  knowing,  thinking,  telling,  and  per- 
ceiving {verba  sentiendi  et  dedarandt.  see  %  T,Ti). 

g.  The  accusative  in  later  wtitera  b  sometimes  used  in  apposition 
jrilli  3  clause ;  as,  — 


244 


Syntax:   Cotutmctioti  of  Cases. 


§240-43. 


I 


deserunt  tribunal  .  .  .  maaus  ialentantes,  caDsain  discardiae  et  initiiUB 
annorum  (Tac.  Ann.  i.  ^f), finally  tkiy  abandon  ihi  tribunal  ikakaif 
their  fills,  —  a  cause  of  diisemioa  and  the  btginningof'Wttr. 
Note.  —  This  oonslraclion  [s  an  extension  (under  Greek  influence)  of  i.  uiagE 
more  nearly  within  the  ordinary  rules,  such  as, — 

Eumcnem  prodideie  Antiocho,  pacia  mereedem  (Sail.  Ep.  Mith.),  &ij 

betrayed  Eumenes  to  Antiachia,  the  price  of  peace.     [Here  Eomenei 

may  be  considered  the  price,  although  the  real  price  is  the  betrayal.] 

h.  For  the  accusative  of  the  End  of  Motion,  see  §  258 ;   for  that 

after  poatridiS,  propior,  etc.,  see  §  261.  a. 

[For  ihe  Accnsaiivo  willi  Preposilions,  see  \  15a.  o,  c^ 


IV. -VOCATIVE. 
341.   The  Vocative  is  the  case  of  direct  address:  as, 
TiberinB  pater,  le  aancte  pcecor  (Liv.  ii.  103),  O,  father  Tiber,  thte,  hatf 


apposition  with  the 
used  instead  of  the 


fa*     ] 


subject  of  the 
imperative  mood  is 

audi  15,  popnlna  Albanna  (Liv.  i.  24),  hear,  thou  people  of  Alba. 

b.  The  vocative  of  an  adjective  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the 
nominative,  where  the  verb  is  in  the  second  person:  as, — 

censorem  trabeate  lalillaa  (Fers.  iil.  29),  robed  you  salute  the  censor. 

c.  The  nominative  may  be  used  in  exclamations  (ef.  §  240.  d)  \  as, — 

en  dextra  fidesque  (^n.  iv,  597),  lo,  the  faith  and  plighted  toord ! 

d.  The  vocative  macte  is  used  as  a  predicate  in  the  phrase  mScta 
eats  (virtftto),  success  attend  your  (valor).    Thus, — 

iuberem  te   macte  virlute  esse  (Liv.  ii.  fl),  f  should  bid  you  go  on  and 

prosper  in  your  valor. 
Note.— As  the  quantity  of  the  final  e  in  mSote  is  not  determinable,  ii  may 
be  thattheword  was  an  adverb,  as  in  bene  eat,  and  the  like,     (See  American 
Journal  of  Philology,  VoL  1.) 

V, -ABLATIVE. 

242.   The   Ablative   is   used   to   denote    the    relations 

expressed  in   English   by  the   prepositions  from,   in,  at, 

WITH,  BV  :    £ 


liberare  metii,  la  deliver  from  fear. 
ia,  blind  1111111  avarice. 
0,  slain  by  Ihe  sword. 
excaUus  doclrina,  Irainid  in  learning 
hoc  ipso  tempore,  at  this  very  lime. 


J 


§§  342,  243.] 


Ablative  of  Separation. 


Note.  — The  ablative /9;-iKcon(ains  three  d 
expressing  [he  relation  FROM;  the  Locative,  IN; 
Thi3  confusion  has  arisen  partly  from  phnoeiic 
three  cas«s  have  become  identical  in  foim,  ai 
which  they  have  approached  one  unother  in  mi 
like  forms  of  llie  dative  and  ablative  plural,  the 
uon  (\  74.  a),  and  the  loss  of  the  original  -d  ir 
d,  the  phrases  S  parte  deztrS.  c 


—  the  Ablative  propi 
enlil,  WITH  or  B 


lEcay(j8),by 

d  pajtly  from  the  development  by 
aning.  Compare,  for  the  fitsl,  the 
lid  dative  In  -S  of  llie  tifth  declen- 
Ihe  ablative  (jj  36./  62.  a)  ;  and, 
Ihi right;  Qiiam  Ob  cauaam. 


1 


M  Tahick  came:  ad  Rtmom,  at  (in  consequence  of)  tki  r 
~he  relation  ofFKOU  includes  itparaiicn,  laurce,  lauu.  agent,  and  camfarhon; 
of  WITH  or  BY,  accemfOBiment.  initnaiani,  miam,  maiaier,  gualily,  undf^ici; 
of  IN  or  AT,  flaci,  lime,  etreamslann.  It  is  probable  that,  originally,  the  idea 
comfaHimrnt  had  a  scparale  case,  which  became  confounded  with  the  ii 
tal  before  Latin  was  separated  from  the  kindred  tongues. 


■eihel 


\ 


I.  Of  Separation,  Privalioti,  and  Want  (J  !!43). 
a.  Of  Source  (participles  of  origin,  etc.)  ()  044). 

3.  Of  Cause  {gaudefi,  dlgnuB,  etc.)  (}  345). 

4.  Of  Agent  (with  ab  after  Passives)  ({  246). 

5.  Of  Ccmparison  (than)  (}  247}. 

1.  Of  Manner,  Means,  and  iDSlrumenl  (j  148). 

2.  Of  Accompaniment  (with  Cum)  (J  24B.  a). 

3.  Of  Object  of  the  Deponents  tttor,  etc.  ({  249). 

4.  Of  Degree  of  Difference  ({  350). 

5.  Of  Quality  (with  AdJEclives)  (fast). 

6.  Of  Price  and  Exchange  (f  25a). 

7.  Of  Specification  ({  353). 

I  I.  Of  Place  where  (commonly  with  to)  {)  354). 
3.  Locative  Ami.A-      I  a.  Of  Idiomatic  Expressions  (J  254.  a). 
TiVE  (.«,  o«.  al) :  1  3,  Of  Time  and  Circumstance  (j  356). 
I  4.  Ablative  Absolute  (}  =55). 

1.  Ablative  of  Sepatatlon. 

343.  Words  signifying  Separation  or  Privation  are  fol- 
lowed by  the  ablative,  with  or  without  a  preposition. 

a.  Verbs  meaning  to  remove,  set  free,  be  absent,  deprive,  and  want, 
require  the  ablative :  as,  — 

ocuIb  si  privavit  (Fin.  v.  29),  he  deprivtd  kimself  0/ eyes. 

legi'"'s  solutua,  reliciiid from  the  ehligalioK  o/lmas. 

omm  Gallia  inlecdidt  Romanos  (B.  G.  i.  46),  6e  (Arioviatus)  ban  the 
Jtomans/rom  ike  juholc  of  Gaul. 

ei  aqna  et  igni  interdicitur  (Veil  Pat.  ii.  45),  he  is  debarred  Ihi  use  uf  fire 
andwa/er. 

voluptatibua  carere  (Cat.  Maj,  3),  to  lack  enjeymena. 

non  egeo  medicina  (Lasl.  3),  Iwant  no  physic. 

mi^o  jne  iDetu  liberabxs  (Cat.  i.  s),  j-tfJI  vAU  reXxeot  mi  of  grtot  ftar. 

Bphoraa  calcSn'bus  eget  ((juiat.),  EphoruS:  needi  the  ifur. 


r 


I 


246  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.  [{•243. 

levamor  superstitione,  Iiberimur  mortis  melu  (Fin.  i.  19),  we  are  reliroti 

from  superstition,  we  are  fried  from  fiar  of  death. 
coDsilia  Et  aucloiiUte  orban   (Cat.  Maj.  6),  to  be  bereft  of  ceuititt  and 

a-utkority. 

b.  Verbs  compounded  with  a,  ab,  dB,  ox,  take  the  simple  ablative 
when  M^zA  figuratinely  i  but  when  used  literally  to  denote  separatim 
or  motion,  they  usually  require  a  preposition  (see  §  258).     Thus, — 

conalu  degistere  (B.  G.  i.  8),  to  desist  from  the  aUempt. 

desine  comniiinibus  Ipch  (Acad.  ii.  25),  quit  eommonplaces. 

abire  magistiatu,  to  leave  one's  office. 

abstinere  iniurii^  to  refrain  from  wrong. 

Bat,  —  aberrire  a  pioposito  (Cic),  la  -wander  from  the  point, 

de  ptovioda  dceedere  (Verr.  ii.  46),  to  ■witAdraie  frost  site's  province. 

ab  iuie  abire  (id.),  to  go  outside  of  the  law. 

es  civitate  eicessere  (B,  G.  vi.  8),  they  departed  from  the  state.     [But  cf. 

finibus  suis  excesserant  (id.  iv.  18),  Ihey  had  left  their  ojon  territory.'] 
a  m^no  demiasum  nomen  lulo  (^n.  i.  2SS),  a  name  desiended  (seat  down) 

from  great  lulus. 
Note.  —  For  the  Dative  used  instead  of  the  Ablative  of  Separation,  see  f  029. 

c.  For  the  ablative  of  the  actual  place  whence  in  idiomatic  expres- 
sions, see  §  258.  a,  and  note  3. 

d.  Adjectives  denoting  freedom  and  want  are  followed  by  the  abla- 

urbs  nuda  praesidio  (Att.  vii,  13),  theeity  naked  of  Jefenee,  ^^ 

immiinis  militia  (Liv,  i.  ^^,free  of  military  service.  ^^H 

plebs  orba  tribunis  (Leg.  iii-  3),  the  people  deprived  of  tribuna,  ^^^k 

Note.  —  Some  adjectives  of  want  take  the  genitive  (see  j  ai8.  o),  ^^H 

e.  Opua  antl  {taus,  signifying  tued,  are  followed  by  the  ablative:' 

magi  strati  bus  opus  eat  (Leg.  iii,  2),  ihtre  is  need  of  magistrates. 
nunc  viribus  usu9  (_,¥ii.  viii.  441),  ame  there  is  need  of  strength. 
Note.  — Wilh  Iheae  words  the  ablative  ot  the  perfect  parlie^le,  viilh  or  with- 
out a  noun,  is  often  found  (}  aga.  b) :  as, — 

opus  est  tua  exprompta  memoria  alquc  astijtia  (Tei.  And.  733),  I  must  have 

your  good  memory  and  cleoerness  set  to  work. 
properato  opus  erat  (Mil.  iq),  themoas  need efJiaste. 
facto  Esus  est,  it  is  desirnile  la  do  (there  is  need  of  the  thing's  beiag  done). 
Remark.  — Frequently  optts  is  in  Ihe  predicate,  with  the  thing  needed  \a  the 
■       ■  iubjecl:as.- 


TWj  coaslruction  is  properly  aa  ii 
id  service,  and  the  ablative 
•  service  rendeied. 


^^^— 


243,  244.]         Ablative  of  Source  and  Material.  34/ J 

dnx  ooba  et  anotor  opus  est  (Fam.  ii.  6),  wi  need  a  chief  and  reifonsiitl  J 
adviser  (a  chief,  etc.,  is  necessary  fur  us).  T 

^  quid  ipsi  opus  esset  (B.  G.  i.  34),  if  he  himself  wanUd  anylking  {^l  aaj-  i 
thing  should  he  necessary  for  him). 

quae  opus  sunt  (Cato  R.  R.  14,  3),  Ihtng!  whick  are  reguired. 

f.  Bge5  and  indlgeo  are  often  followed  by  the  genitive  {§  223) : 

□e  qois  anxili  egeat  (B.  G.  vi.  1 1),  lest  any  rehire  aid. 

quae  ad  consolandum  maioris  ingeiu  et  ad  fetendum  singulariE  virtotia    I 

indigent  (Fam.  vi.  4),  [sorrows]  ■uihichfer  thtir  lemfarting  need  mart   I 

ability,  and  for  ettdurance  unusual  courage. 

Remark.  —  The  Genitive  is  by  a  Gieek  idiom  often  used  in  poetry  ins 
e  Ablative  with  all  words  oi afaratimi  and  want  {\  323.  6.3)  I  as. — 
ttbstineto  iranun  (Hot.  Od.  iiL  27.  70),  abstain  from  wrath. 
operum  soliitia  (id.  17,  xd),  free  from  toili. 
desine  moUiam  querelatum  (id.  ii,  9.  1 7},  have  done  -aiilh  iiieak  lomplainb.    \ 

2.   Ablative  of  Soutoe  and  Katetial. 

244.  The  Ablative  with  or  without  a  preposition  is  used  j 
jto  denote  the  Source  from  which  anything  is  derived,  or  J 
the  Material  of  which  it  consists. 


Rhinus  oritur  ex  Lepontua  (Ii.  G.  v.  4),  lAe  Rhine  rises  in  (from)  tk^m 

country  of  the  LeponlH, 
&b  aliqDD  sermd  oritur  (Ltel.  I,  5),  the  conversation  is  begun  by  (arise* 

ciiius  rationis  vim  atque  uttlttiCem  ex  iUo  caelesti  Epicuii  volnniine  accqn- 
mus  (N.  D,  i,  i5,  45),  of  this  riasouing  -me  have  learned  Ike  foToer  I 
and  advantage  from  that  divine  took  of  Epicurus. 

suavilatem  odorum  qm  aflliirentur  i  floribtu  (Cat.  Maj.  17,  59),  i^r  sjueel-  ; 
ness  of  the  odors  vihici  breathed  from  the  flowers. 

3.  Material:  — 

erat  totns  ex  frattde  etmeo.dSiCi6lnctai(C[a.  26),  he  tvas  entirely  made  up   I 

offra  lid  and  falsehood. 
valvig  m^nificentiores,  ex  anro  alquc  ebore  perfeciiores  (Verr,  ii.  456),  1 

mare  splendid  doors,  mare  finely  leroughl  of  gold  and  ivory. 
factum  de  caulilinB  antrum  (Ov.  Met.  i.  575),  a  cave  formed  of  rocks. 
templum  de  marmore  ponam  (Georg.  iii.  \i).  Til  bitiid  a  temple  of  marble. 
NOTS  I.  —  In  poetry  the  preposition  is  often  omitted. 

JVor«  s.~The  j^blaKve  of  Material  is  a  deve^opmeW  q(  fco  ^ai^^c  ASCTasfc 
/««1  ■-' 


248  Syntax:  Constmction  of  Cases.  [§  244. 

a.  Participles  denoting  birth  or  origin  are  followed  by  the  Ablative 
of  Source,  generally  without  a  preposition ;  1  as, — 

love  nitus  et  Mail  (N.  D.  iii.  za),  son  of  Jupiler  and  Maia. 
edite  t^bus  (Hot.  Od.  i.  i.  l),  discendatU  of /rings. 
quo  saoguine  cretus  {J&a.  ii.  74),  horn  efvihat  blood. 
genitae  Pandlone  (Ov.  Met.  vi.  666),  dai^ilen  af  Partdion. 
Remark.  —  A  preposition  (ah,  (15.  ex)  is  usually  eipreBseil  with  Ihe  name  dI 
the  molker,  a-ni  often  with  tlial  of  otiicr  anceslors;  as, — 

cum  es  ntraqne  [uxore]  filius  natus  esset  (Dc  Or.  i.  40,  1S3),  tac/i  ifife 

having  had  a  son  (when  a  son  had  been  horn  of  each  wife). 
Tros  est  generatus  ah  illo  (Ov.  Fasl.  iv.  33),  Tros  7oas  sprung  from  Aim. 
ex  me  hie  nSlus  non  est  sed  ex  frStre  me5  (Ter.  Ad.  40),  Ihis  is  not  my  son, 

bat  my  brothtr's  (not  born  from  mc,  etc.). 
Belus  el  omnes  a  Bal5  (.En.  i.  730),  Btlus  and  alt  his  descendants. 

b.  Rarely,  the  place  of  birth  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  of  source : 
as,— 

desidecivit  C.  Felginatem  Flaceutia,  A.  Granium  Fateolis  (B.  C.  iii.  71), 

he  last  C.  Felginas  of  Haeeniia,  A.  Granius  of  I'uUoli. 
Note.  —  The  Roman  tribe  15  regularly  expressed  by  the  ablative  alone:  as, — 
Q.  Verrem  Eomilia  (Verr.  i.  8,  23),  Quintus  Verris  of  the  Romilian  tribe. 

c.  Some  verbs  may  take  the  Ablative  of  Material  without  a  preposi- 
tion. Such  are  constate,  cSnslBtere,  and  contmerl.^  But  with 
cdnat&ie,  ex  is  more  common.     Thus:  — 

domiis  anioenitas    non  aedificio  seii  Bilva  consliibal  (Ncp.  Att.  13),  the 

charm  of  Ike  house  consisted  not  in  the  buildings  but  in  the  viBods. 
exanimo  consianius  et  corpore  (Fin.  iv.  S),  we  consist  of  soul  and  body. 
vita  oorpore  et  apiritS,  continetur  (Marc.  9),  life  consists  of  body  and  spirit. 

d.  The  Ablative  of  Material  without  a  preposition  is  used  with  faoere, 
fieri,  and  similar  words,  in  the  sense  of  do  ■with,  become  of:  as,  — 

quid  hoc  hoitline  facialis  (Verr,  i.  16),  what  are  you  going  to  do  viith  this 

quid  Tnlliola  mea  fiet  (jTaa.-Ai.tO.-whalTvill  become  of  my  dear  Tidliaf 
quid  te  futiirum  est  (Veer.  ii.  64),  iiihat  will  btcome  of  you  ? 

e.  The  Ablative  of  Material  with  ex,  and  in  poetry  without  1^ 
preposition,  sometimes  depends  directly  on  a  noun ;  as,  —  ^H 

oon  pauca  pocula  ex  anro  (Verr.  iv.  27),  not  a  few  cups  of  geld.  ^H 

BCOpnliB  pendentibuB  antrum  (,^n.  i.  i65),  a  cave  of  hanging  rocis.       ^H 


1  Such  are  nfttua,  satuB,  Sdltus,  genltuB,  ortus,  prOanfttuB,  gana- 
rAtus,  cretus.  creatua,  orl  undue. 

«  Tbe  ablative  with  oOaaiBtara  and  coattoft-rt  te  IwaiivB  la  origin  (ct ) 


K  244. 245,]  Ablative  of  Cause.  249 

f.  For  Genitive  of  Material,  see  §  214.  e. 

g.  For  Ablative  of  Source  instead  of  Partitive  Genitive,  see  §  31(3.  c. 

3.   Ablative  of  Cause. 
245.   The  ablative  (with  or  without  a  preposition)   is 
used  to  express  Cause. ^ 

nitniu  gandio  paenc  dcsipifljam  (Fam.  i.  13),  I-aias  almost  wild  from  teg 

much  joy. 
neglegentiA  pleclimur  (Lael.  22),  n'e  art  ehastiicd for  negligince. 
gubemaloris  BIS  ntilitite  non  arte  laudator  {Ynm.i.  i^^,  ihe  pilots  still  U 

f  raised  for  ils  stniice,  not  its  skill. 
certfe  de  cansu,  for  certain  reasons. 

ex  vnlnere  aeger  (Rep.  ii.  21),  disabled  by  (.from)  a  wound. 
mare  »  Bole  lueet  (Acad.  4,  33),  the  sia  gleams  in  Ike  sun  (from  the  aun). 
e3t  Opportiinitate  loci  (Jug.  4S,  2),  from  the  advantage  of  position. 
a.  Certain  verbs  and  adjectives  regularly  take  the  ablative  of  cause 
irithout  a  preposition.     These  are  :  — 

.  The  adjectives  dlgnns,  indlgnua :  as, — 

it  patre  avo  raaioribnB  sais  digiiissimus  (Phil,  iii.  10),  a  man  mosl~jiortky 

of  his  falher,grandfatktr,  and  ancestors. 
i   omm  honore    indignissimum    iSdicat   (Vatin.  16,  29)>  he  judges  you 

tntirtly  vmnorlhy  of  every  honor, 
.  The   verbs   dignor,  labStS   (also  with  ex),  exsiliS,  exauItS, 
bltimpIiO,  lacrimS,  SxdeS :  as,  — 

hand  equidem  tSli  me  dignor  honore  (/En.  i,  339) ,  /  do  not  deem  myself 

leortky  ofsitch  an  honor. 
doleo  te  aliis  maliB  labocare  (Fam,  iv,  3),  I  am  sorry  thalyeu  suffer  with   , 

other  ills. 
ex   aere   alieno  laborare   (B.  C.  iii.  22),  to  labor  under  debt  (lit,,  fron 

another's  money), 
eisultare  laetitia  ac  Iriumphire  gaudlo  coepit  (Ciu.  5),  she  began  to  exult  in 

gladness,  and  triumph  in  joy. 
eiailui  gandio  (Fam,  xvi,  16),  I  jumped  for  joy. 
iBCrimo  gaudio  (Ter.  Ad,  411),  I  vie/p  for  joy. 
L       delicto  dolere  (Liel,  24),  to  grieve  for  the  fault. 

■        ardere  dolore  et  ira  (Att,  ii.  19),  to  be  on  fire  loith  pain  and  anger. 
w       Note  i.  —  For  BOUdeS  and  alOrlor.  see  !j  254.  4. 

'  The  auise,  in  the  ablative,  is  originally  source,  as  is  shown  by  the  use  of  ab, 

dS,  •»;  but  when  the  accusative  with  ad,  Ob  is  used,  the  idea  of  cause  arises 

IraiDHiamtss,    Occasionally,  however,  it  is  difficult  10  distinguish  lietween  came  and 

meoKi  Iwbicb  is  the  old  /nslnimetilai  Case)  or  tiralmitann  (^\ciiaiia  cVtosa** 

IXiJtanVe  or  the  Iastrumenta.U.  A 


I 


SJO  Syntax;   Comlruction  of  Cases.       [§§245.246, 

Note  s.  —  Dtgnus  and  Indlafnua  aomelimes  take  the  genitive  in  colloquial 
laage  and  in  poetry  ;  as, — 
curam  dignissimam  taste  virtatis  (Balbus  in   Alt.  riii.   15),   care  mssl 

worthy  of  your  noble  iharacler. 
digitus  saintia  (Plant.  Trin.  1153),  taarlAy  of  safety. 

mognonun   baud  umquam  indignus  avomm  (./En.  xii.  649),  never  un- 
worthy my  great  ancestor!. 

with  verbs,  see  \ 

b.  The  motive  which  influences  the  mind  of  the  person  acting  is 
expressed  by  the  ablative  of  cause ;  the  object  exciting  the  emotion 
often  by  ob  1  or  propter  with  the  accusative :  as,  — 

non  ob  praedam  aut  apoljandi  capidine  (Tac,  U.  i  63),  not  for  booty  or 

through  lust  of  plunder, 
amidtia  ex  bS  et  propter  se  expelenda  (Fin.  ii.  26),  friendship  must  lie 

sought  of  and  fir  itself 
Note.—  But  these  conslruclions  are  often  confused ;  as,  ^ 
parere  legi bus  propter  metnm  (Parad.  5,  i),  lo  obey  the  laws  en  account  ej 

fear.     [Here  metum  is  almost  equivalent  to  "  the  terrors  of  the  law," 

and   hence  propter  is  used,   though    the   ablative  would  he  more 

natural] 

c.  The  ablatives  causEl  and  gratia,/or  the  sake  of,  are  used  with  a 
genitive  preceding,  or  with  a  pronoun  in  agreement;  as, — 

ea  C3.\i^  en  account  of  this  ;  qiKi  gratia  (Ter.  Ean.  gg),  for  what  purpose  f 
mea  causa,  ^r  my  sake;  meii  gratia  (Plaut.) , /iir  my  sake. 
ex  mea  et  reipublicae  causa,  yiir  my  own  sate  and  the  repi^lir's. 
piaedictionis  causa  (N.  D.  iii.  z,  5),  by  way  of  prophecy.  ^H 

exempli  grStii  (verbi  gralii),/i.r  example.  ^^| 

sui  purgandi  gratia,  for  the  sake  of  clearing  themsekies.  ^^^^ 

Note.  —  Bui  KT&tift  with  possessives  in  this  use  is  tare.  ^1 

4.   AblatlTe  of  Agent. 
346.   The  Voluntary  Agent  after  a  passive  verb  is  put  in 
the  ablative  with  a  or  ab :  as,  — 

laudalur  ab  hia,  culpitur  ab  illia  (Hot.  Sat.  i.  2.  11),  he  is  praised  by  these, 
blamed  by  those. 
\>  animo  tuo  quidijuid  agitur  id  agitur  a  t§  (Tasc,  i.  22),  whatever  is  done 
by  your  soul  is  done  by  yourself. 

''hisase  of  ob  was  originally  mercaTitiVe ;  cS,  oti  iaewstfa 
■•-«.«■»  (seep.  131). 


5§  246,  247.]     Ablative  of  Agent;  of  Comfiarisov.  25 

a,  filiiB  in  iudicium  vocatns  eat  (Cat,  Mnj.  7,  za),  he  was  trougkt  to  trial 

cum  a  coscto  conaeBSD.  plausus  esset  multiplex  datus  (Cat.  Maj.  iS,  63), 
wliin  great  applause  had  &itti  given  by  ihe  whole  audience. 

ne  virtus  ab  andicia  vincerctur  (Sest.  43),  thai  valor  niiglil  tint  be  trver- 
home  by  audacity. 

Note.— This  construction  is  developed  from  the  Ablative  of  Source.  The 
^ent  is  conceived  as  the  source  qt  aalhor  fA'tiis  action. 

Remark. — The  ablative  ofthei^m/ (which  requires  &  or  ab)  must  lie  care- 
fully distinguished  from  the  ablative  of  inslntment,  which  has  no  preposition  {{ 
=48.1.1),    Thus  — 

occiBUS  gladio,  slain  by  a  sword;  but,  occisus  ab  hoste,  shin  by  an  enemy. 

d.  The  ablative  of  the  agent  with  ab  is  sonietinies  used  al^er  neuter 
verbs  that  have  a  p>aEsive  sense:  as, — 
periie  ab  Itoste,  to  be  slain  by  an  enemy, 

b.  The  agent,  when  considered  as  instrument  or  means,  Is  ex- 
pressed by  per  with  the  accusative,  or  by  opeiK  with  a  genitive  or 
possessive.    Thus,  — 

Caesar  certior  factaa  est  a  legatia,  Casar  ■mas  informed  fy  the  ambassadort 

(inperaon).    But,— 
Caesar  certior  faclns  eat  per  lagatoa,  Ciesar  was  informed  by  ambassadort 

(I.C.  by  means  of  ambassadors), 
elaatoe  opera  Neptuni  (Plant.  Rmi.  699),  ■waAedtlean  iy  the  services  of 

Neptune. 
non  mea  opera  evinit  {Ter.  Hec.  228),  it  hasn't  happentd  iHrou^  w*(by 

my  eiertions), 
Note  i.  —  An  animal  is  usually  regarded  not  ai  the  ^fvn^,  but  as  the  (nAsir  or 
insirumenl.      Hence  Ihe  timple  ablative  li  used.      But  ab  sometimes  occurs. 
Thu^  — 

eqa9  vehi,  Ai  ride  an  ioriebati  {be  conveyed  by  means  of  a  horse).   [Not 

ab  equo.]     But,— 
LueanS  cum  sic  laceceris  ah  urso  (Mart.  Ep.  8),  tinee  yon  are  am 

mangled  by  a  Lucanian  bear. 
Note  a.  —  For  the  Dative  of  the  AEcntwilh  the  Gerundive,  see  (  933. 

5.  Ablative  of  Comparison. 
247.  The  Comparative  degree  is  followed  by  the  abla 
tive^  (signifying  than)  :  as, — 

Cato  est  Cicerona  eloquentior,  Cats  is  more  eloquent  than  Cieera. 
quid  noblB  duobuB  laboriosius  est  (Mil.  2),  what  more  burdened  milk  toil 
than  we  tivo  f 

1  This  is  a  branch  of  the  Ablative  of  Separation,  The  object  with  which  an^- 
tb'mga  compared  Is  the  atarting-point  from  vilikh  We  TecVan.  TWia,"  Cictro  i 
*i%w«/";  bill  starting /i-ain  him  we  come  lo  Cato.w^vQ '^s^mort  lo  thwilwr  J 


!S<| 


I 


252  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.  [J  247, 

vilius  acgentum  esl  anrS,  TirtutibnB  nurum  (Hor.  Ep,  i.  \.^i),sibier  isltsi 
prttiotis  Aan  gold,  gold  iltan  virtue. 

a.  The  comparative  may  be  followed  by  quam,  than.  When  quam 
Is  used,  the  two  things  compared  are  put  in  the  same  case  (cf.  §  208.  a). 

The  construction  ivilh  qnam  is  required  when  the  first  of  the  things 
compared  is  in  any  other  case  than  the  nominative  or  accusative. 
With  those  cases  its  use  is  optional.     Thus, — 

contionibns  accommodaliot  eat  quam  indiciia  (Clu.  -i).  filler  for  pop  uUir 

assemblies  ikan  for  courts. 
misericordia  dignior  cjuam  contumelia  (Piso  33),  more  loorlhy  of  pity 

than  of  disgrace. 
non  callidior  ea  quam  hio   (Rose.  Am.  49),j'utf  an  not  more  cunning 

definite  antecedent  never  take  quam 

X  crat  Aeneas  nobis,  qu5  iiistior  alter,  etc.  (.'En.  I.  545),  j^neai  vias  our 

/ling,  than  Tnkom  no  other  was  more  righteous,  etc 
OTE.  —  The  poets  sometimea  use  the  ablative  of  comparison  where  the  prose 
ruction  requires  quasi;  as, — 


b.  The  idiomatic  ablatives  opIniSae,  spS,  solitS,  dlotS,  aeqnfi, 

ciSdibill,  andiiiBto  are  used  after  comparatives  instead  of  aclause:  as, 
gravius  aequo  (Salt.),  mere  seriously  than  vias  right, 
celerina  opinione  (Fam.  xiv.  z^,  fatter  than  one  iBotiid think, 
amtiia  aolito  citatior  (liv.  xxii,  19),  a  stream  nuifler  than  its  iiiont. 
sinus  spe  omnium  (Liv.  xxvi.  z6),  later  than  all  hoped  (than  the  hope 
of  all). 

c.  After  t3ie  comparatives  pl-Oa,  minua,  amplius,  longiaB  without 
quam,  a  word  of  measure  or  number  is  often  used  with  no  change  in 

plus  septingeiiti  capti  (Liv.  xli.  1 2),  more  than  700  were  taken. 

plus  tertia  parte  intetfecta  (Css.),  more  than  a  third  fart  being  slain. 

ipatium  non  Aa\^l\imex.eea&Tom  fedwsa.  {^d..),  a  space  of  nol  mare  than 

bcafeei. 
Note.  —  The  noun  takes  faa  case  required  by  the  context,  without  itrerence  to 
becomparative,  whichisrealljlnaaort  ofapposltion,"f«wr  hundred  am  lakin 
[and]  mcre.- 

d.  Alius  i.";  sometimes  followed  by  the  ablative  In  poetic  and  colloquial 
ise';  in  formal  prose  it  is  followed  by  ac  (atque),  nlel,  quam.    Thus, 


§1  247,  24B.]  Ablative  of  Manner. 

nee  quicquam  Blind  libertate  communi  (t'ain.  li. : 

common  libtrty. 
alius  Lysippo  (Hor.),  anolhcr  Ihan  Lyiippus. 
alium  aapieote  bonoque  (Hor.  Ep.  i.  i6.  20),  nilier  than  Ihi  lais 
alio  ingcnio  ac  tii  (Plaul.),  of  a  diffircnl  dispositiuH  from  yeu. 
ecat  bistoria  nihil  lllind  nifd  annSHoni  confectio  (De  Or.  ii.  1 

was  nolhing  tlsi  but  a  compiling  of  records. 
nil  alittt  niri  quod  sibi  placet  (Plaut,  Trin.  -i^^),  nolhing  eist  than  iiihiA 

pliascs  him. 

e.  The  comparative  of  an  adverb  is  usually  fallowed  by  qaam,  rareln 
by  the  ablative  except  in  poetry.     Thus,- 

tempuE  te  citius  qtuun  oratiS  deRceret  (Rose.  Am.  89),  Hmt  vnmld fitil yitt 

iDoner  Ihan  werds.    But,  — 
cur  Sybaiis  ollvum  saugaine  vipenuo  caulius  vitat  (Hor.  Od.  i.  E.  9),  -why 
dots  Sybaris  skun  oil  iimr/  cartfiilly  Uian  vifrr's  Mood? 

6.   Ablative  of  Manner. 
Note.— Accompanimenl.  Manner,  Means,  and  Instrument  are  denoled  by  Ihe 
instrumental  abladve  (Ese  p.  245),  but  some  of  (hese  mote  commonly  lake  a  prepo- 
.    As  Ihey  all  come  from  one  source  (the  old  Inslramcnlal  Case)  no  sharp 
an  be  drawn  between  them,  and  indeed  the  Romans  themselves  never  thought 
of  any  distinciion.    Thus  in  omnlbua  preclbua  Bribaat.  they  entreaicd  with 
every  [kind  of]  prayer.  Ihe  ablative  is  properly  that  of  J»  ' 

tingnished  from  manatr, 

248.  The  manner  of  an  action  is  denoted  by  the  Abla-J 
live;  usually  with  cum,  unless  a  limiting  adjective  is  useciv 
with  the  noun.     Thus,  — 

cum  csleritate  venit,  he  camewilh  speed.    But, — 

SDnuna  celeritate  venit,  he  tame  -Jiith  the  greatest  speed. 

i\a\A  refert  qua  me  ratione  cogatis  (Liel.  8,  z6),  vlhat  differe 
mate  in  -whal  way  you  compel  me? 

Note. —  But  otim  is  otien  used  even  when  the  ablaUve  has  a  limiting  adjeo- J 

quants  nun  peifcolo  id  fecerit  (B.  G.  i.  17),  c 
DOn  minBre  com  taedio  rccubant  (Flin.  Ep.  ix 

Remark. —With  such  words  of  ma 

■Ift,  and  with  slock  eipressions  vrhich  ha 
inlllriS),  cum  is  very  rare.    Thus,— 

apii  Matinae  more  modoque  cannina  ftngo  (Hor.  Od.  iv.  2.  zS), 
liylt  and  manner  of  a  Maliitian  bee  /fashion  songs. 
So  In  poetry  the  ablative  of  manner  often  omits  cum;  as, — 

in*  aqnac  sequilut  cnmnl5  (<^n.  t.  105!,  a  mauniam  efvia(tr  fnUmn 
a  mats.    [a.  murmare  (id.  124V,  Timia  (\4-  va-i"l-'\ 


tht 


254  Syntax:   CoHsirticlion  of  Cases.  [S  ?*a. 

7.  AblaUve  of  Aocompanimaat. 

a.  Accompaniment  is  denoted  by  the  ablative,  regularly 
with  cum  :  as,  — 


anBgres 

crossed  tht  rifir  v)ilk  the  arekirs  and slingtrs. 
quae  soppUcalio  si  cnm  ceteris  cdnferatiir  (Cat.  iii.  6,  15),  if  this  lianks- 

giving  be  compared  ivitk  othirz. 
qnae  [lex]  esse  cum  tSo  velat  (MiL  4.  1 1),  d<  Uxm  whUkJariids  [one] 

to  go  armed  (be  wilh  a  weapon) . 
El  Becnm  suos  eduxerit  (CaL  L  13,  33),  if  he  leads  eui  iiHth  Aim  his  assori- 

Ma.    [Fi)ti«oiun,ra5  99...] 

NOTB.  —  The  ablative  is  used  wfiihout  cum  in  mililary  phrases,  and  here  and 
Ihete  by  early  wrilers;  as,^ 

Bubsequebatiir  onmibna  copiis  (B.  G.  ii.  19),  ht  foUovied  clese  with  all  its 
fir,,,. 

hoc  praesidio  profeclus  eil:  (Verr.  ii.  34),  zeiA  Aisforee  he  set  out. 

Remark.  — MIbobO  and  iUnffO,  «-i[h  iheir  eompounds,  and  coDfundS  may 
take  either  (1)  the  Ablalive  of  Accompaniment  with  or  wlfhoul  cum,  or  (a)  some- 
times the  Dadve;  as,— 

mixta  dolors  voluptas  {B.  Al.  56),  fleasu 

with  his  mun. 
iletumque  cmori  miscuit  (Ov.  Met.  iv.  14a),  and  mingled  tears  with  blood. 
CBesHi  eIs  cohortes  com  huo  exercita  coniunxit   (B.  G.  L  18),   Ctesar 

tmiitd  those  lohorls  ■with  his  mim  army. 
aec  caniiinctua  tema  (Lucr.  v.  562),  air  unilrdmiA  earth. 
hiiiiiano  ca,piH  cetvitem  equinam   iungere   (Hor.  A.  P.  l),  to  join  to  a 

b.  Words  of  Contention  and  the  like  require  oum:  as, — 
armis  cum  hoste  certare,  to  fight  iviA  the  enemy  in  arms. 

libenicr  haec  cum  Q,  Catulo  disputarem  (Manil.  22,  66),  /  should  ^dty 

discuss  these  matters  ifith  Quintus  Calulus. 
Note.  — But  words  of  conlention  may  take  the  Dative  in  poetry  [see  j  atg-i). 

8.   Ablative  of  Means. 

c.  I.  The  Ablative  is  used  to  denote  the  means  or  in- 
sirutnent  of  an  action  :  as, . — 

certantes  pilgnui,  oalcibus,  nngaibas,  morsn  denique  (Tusc.  r.  27,  77), 

fighting  ■with  fists,  keels,  nails,  and  even  teeth, 
cam  pngniB  el  calcibna  concisus  esset  (Verr.  iii.  56),  wktm  ht  kmdttat 
fummelled with  their fisis  and  hiets. 


248,  249.]  Ablative  of  Means. 

m^  labSribtta  inlcritu  rcmpulilicam  lilieravi  (SulU,  33),  Jf  my  toils  I  kt 

savfJ  iht  ilaiefrom  ruin. 
niultae  istinim  arborum  mea  mMta  sunt  satae  (Cat.  Maj.  17,  59),  m 

thasf  Ireis  wire  scl  oul  with  my  bwh  hands. 

2.  The  Ablative  of  Means  is  used  with  verbs  and  adjectives  oi/iUiHg,\ 
ttioutiding,  and  the  like :  as,  — 

Deus  faonia  onmibuB  cxplevit  mundum  (Univ.  3),  Gad  has  filled  the  wor^ 

7vith  all  good  Ihiag!. 
aggers  et  critibuB  f^sas  explent  (B.  G.  vii.  S6),  they  fill  uptht  ditckt. 

■with  earth  and  fastittcs. 
totum  roontem  hominibna  complevit   (id.  i.   24),   ke  filled   the  ■aihoU^ 

•soimfain  with  men. 
opimus  praeda  (Veer.  i.  50),  rich  with  spoils. 
vita  plena  et  conferta  volnptatibuH  (Sest.  10),  a  life  filled  and  cro^adedm 

with  delights. 
Foram  Appi  differtum  na,iiliB  (Hot.  Sat.  i.  5.  4),  Forum  AppH  crammed^ 

nrith  bargemen. 

Remark.  — In  poetry  the  Genitive  is  ohea  used  witli  these  words  by  a  Greek! 
)<3ioni.    Bui  compleC,  ImpleC,  plenus  and  retertus  aRen  take  the  ) 
prose  {cf.  J  333).    Thus, — 

omnia  plena  luctia  et  maeroris  fuerunt  (Sest.  128),  everything  was  /ull  0/^ 

grief  and  mourning. 
ollam  dSnarionmi  implete  (Fam.  ix.  18),  to  fill  a  pot  Tisilh  momy.     [Her 

evidently  colloqui^  otherwise  rare  in  Cicero.] 
convivium  Ticinonim  compleo  (Cat.  Maj.  14,  46,  in  the  mouth  of  Cato),  j 
I  fill  up  the  banquet  -with  my  neighbors. 

249.  The   deponents  fitor,  fruor,   faugor.    potior,    veacor,  I 
with  several  of  their  compounds,^  govern  the  ablative:  as, 

ntar  vestra  btaiigiiititB  (Arch.  8),  [-will  avail  myself  of  your  kindness. 
sagScitate  canum  ad  iitilititem  nostram  abatintnr  (N.  D.  ii.  60),  ive  taigm 

advantage  of  the  sagaeily  of  dogs  for  our  own  benefit. 
ita  mihi  salva  lepnblica  vobisciun  perfrnl  liccat  (Cat.  iv.  6,  11),  so  may  I  1 

enjoy  with  you  the  stale  secure  and  prosperous. 
anifiheros  potittir  (Ov.  Met.  vii.  155),  the  Aero  lakes  the  gold, 
Nnmidae   plecnmque  laote   et  ferina  cama  veacebaJitui'  Qug.  8 

Numidians  fed  mostly  on  milk  and  game. 
fungi  inani  manare  (.TJi.  vi.  8S5),  lo  perform  an  idle  service. 

Note.— This  is  really  an  Ablative  of  Means  and  the  verbs  are  really  in  the  1 
tnlddle  voice  (J  in.  a).    Thus  Dtor  signifies  /  employ  myself,  or  avail  myself  by  M 
I  of,  etc.    But  these  earlier  meanings  disappeared  from  the  language,  leaving  | 


reabator.  defltor,  dSdinBor.dStmoi.pBTtraoi.-v 


356  Syntax;  Construction  of  Cases.      [§§249, 250. 

a.  Potior  sometimes  takes  the  Genitive,  as  always  in  the  phrase 
potiri  rSrum,  io  get  control  01  be  master  of  affairs  {§  223.  a):  as,  — 

tdtius  Galliae  sese  poUri  posse  aperant  (B.  G.  i.  3),  thry  hnpe  thry  cam 
gtl  fiassrssioii  of  the  luhBlt  of  Gaul. 

b.  In  early  Latin,  these  verbs  are  often  transitive,  and  take  the  ac- 


Note.  —  The  Gerundive  of  these  verbs  is  used  personally  in  the  pasMve  as  U 
the  verb  were  transitive  (but  ef.  \  294.  i):  as, — 

Heradia  omnia  utenda  ac  possidenda  tradiderat  (Veil.  ii.  46),  kt  hadgivin 
ever  evtrything  to  Heractius  for  his  me  and  possession  (to  be  used  and 


9.   Ablative  of  Degree  of  Difference. 

250.  With  comparatives  and  words  implying  compari- 
son the  ablative  is  used  to  denote  the  Degree  of  Differ- 
ence :  as,  — 

duobus  tnilibus  pIQces,  two  thousand  more  (moce  by  two  thousand). 

quinque  milibus  passuum  distat,  it  is  five  miles  distant  (it  stands  off  by  live 

aliquot  ante  anois  {Tusc.  i.  2,  4),  several  years  before. 

aliquanto  post  suspexit  (Rep.  vi.  9),  a  while  after  A:  looked  up. 

inulto  me  vigilare  aciius  (Cat.  i.  8),  that I-jialch  much  more  sharfly  (more 

shaq)ly  by  much), 
nihilo  erat  ipse  Cyclops  quam  aries  prudentior  (Tosc.  v.  39,  115),  fir  lit 

Cyclops  himstlftuas  not  a  itihit  luisir  than  the  ram. 

Remark.  — This  use  is  espeoially  frequent  with  the  eblalives  QuO  . . .  eB 
(hOo) ;  quants  . . .  tantS  {d.  }  106.  e)  :  as,— 

qu6  minus  cupiditalis,  eo  plus  aucluritatis  (liv.  xxiv.  zS),  the  less  greed,  thi 

more  weight  (by  what  the  less,  by  that  the  more). 
quants  eral  gravior  oppugnalio,  tanto  crcbriores  litterae  mitlebanlur  (B.  G, 

V.  45),  the  severer  the  siege  Tims,  the  mare  frequently  letters  were  sent. 

eO  with  a  comparative  even  when  they  ha^ 
and  approach  the  Ablative  of  Cause;  as,— 

eSque  me  mintia  paenitet  (N.  D.  i,  4,  8),  and  for  thai  rtason  I  regret 
less,  etc,  (by  Bo  much  the  less  1  regret) . 

a.  The  Ablative  of  Comparison  (g  347)  and  the  Ablative  of  Dqjree 
of  Difference  are  often  used  together  with  the  same  adjective:  as,— 
multo  divitior  Crasso,  much  richer  than  Crassi 


j§  251,  252.]         Ablative  of  Quality  ;  of  Price. 


2s; 


^b  la   AblatlTe  of  Quality. 

^P     351.   The  quality  of  a  thing  is  denoted  by  the  Ablative 
~  with  a  Modifier  (either  an  adjective  or  limiting  genitive). 
This  is  called  the  Descriptive  Ablative  or  Ablative  of  Qualify. 
ftnim5  meliore  aunt  gladiatores  (Cat.  ii.  12,  2(>),  the  gladialeri  are  a/ a 

belter  mi  tut. 
qase  cam  esset  dvitia  aeqaiasimS  ifire  ac  foedere  (Arch.  4, 6),  a 

a  city  laili  ferfectty  equal  eonUiSuiional  rights. 
miilierem  exinuii  pnlchrituduio  (Verr.  i.  64),  a  vioman  ef  extra 

beauty. 
Hortenaus  memori&  tantii  fuil  nl,  etc.  (Brut.  SS,  301),  Hcrlimius  had ia 

good  a  memory  that,  etc  (was  of  Bo  great  memory), 
quam  6I£td  animo  est  (Tberamenea)  (Tusc.  i  40,  96),  ko^  bfly  a  spirit 

Thtramena  displays. 
Arislotelis,  v!t  BommS  IngeuiS,  scieutia,  cOplS  (Tusc. !.  4,  7),  Aristotle, 

a  mail  0/  the  greatest  genius,  learning,  aitdgift  of  ex 
qaara  tentll  aat  nfilla  poCius  valetndine  (CaL  Maj.  1 1,  35),  -what  feeble 

health  he  had,  or  rather  none  at  ail  1 
de  Oomitio  dixit  veraam  Graccum  sadem  Benteatia  (Deiot.  25),  coHi 

ir^  Domilius  ht  recited  a  Greek  line  cf  the  same  Icnor, 
Note,— Tho  Ablative  of  Qualiiy  (like  the  Genin've  of  Qualify)  modifies  a 
iBiitive  by  detaihirfg  il.    It  is  Iherefnre  equivaleot  to  an  adjective,  and  may  be 
ilher  attributive  or  predicate.    In  this  it  dilTers  from  other  ablatives,  which  a: 
quivaleut  to  adverbs.    Compare, — 
mutier  pulchca,  a  beaulifat  -aioman. 

inulier  magna  pulchritudioe,  a  woman  ef  great  beauty,  with  — 

mulier  palcbiitiidiiie  Troiam  delevtt,  by  her  beauty  aiaoman  dcstreyed  Troy. 

mulier  encellens  pulchritiidine  (g  253),  a  woman  prSminenl  in  beauty. 

a.  In  expressiotis  of  quality  the  Genitive  or  the  Ablative  may  often 

>e  used  Indifferently;  but/5^_CJiV3/ qualities  are  oftener  denoted  by  the 

Ablative  (cf.  {  215,  note)  ;  as, — 

capillo  sunt  promisso  (B.  G.  v,  14},  thty  have  long  hair. 
ut  capite  operto  sit  (Cat.  Maj.  10,  34),  to  have  his  head  covered  {fa  he  of 
covered  head). 

U.   Ablative  of  Frioe. 
262.  The  Price  of  a  thing  is  put  in  the  ablative :  as,  — 
agrura  vendidil  sesieriium  sex  milibuH,  he  sold  the  land  for  6000  si 
Antonius  t^na  addixil  pectlnia  (Phil.  vii.  5,  15),  Antony  sold  thrones  for 

logSi  ridicnlost  qui  cSn£  poscit  (PI.  Stich.  22^\  jokes;  whs  wants  theat 

for  (at  the  price  of)  a  dinner/ 
raSgnSilli  ea  cunciatio  stetit  (Liv.  ii.  36),  that  Hattalia-n  tmt  kin  iva. 
A'OTE  —  ro  li/s  head /s  (0  be  referred  the  Ablallve  o!  toe  ¥CTii\'q , 'l  iio- Il  A, 


2S8  Syntax;  Construction  of  Cases.  [§  352. 

a.  Certain  adjectives  of  Quantity  are  used  in  the  Genitive  to  denote 
indefinile  value.  Such  are  m&gnl,  parvl,  tanti,  quantl,  plfliii, 
minSils:  as,— 

est  mihi  tantt  (Cat.  ii.  7),  it  is  worth  thr  price  (it  is  of  bo  much). 

mea  magni  iutereat,  it  is  af  great  consequence  to  me. 

illud  parvi  rEfeit  (Manil.  18),  this  is  of  small  aciBunl. 

Verresne  tibi  tanU  fuit  (Verr.  i.  77),  -mas   Verres  of  so  much  acamnt  to 

tanlone  minBria  decamae  venierunt  (Veir.  iii.  106),  Tvere  lie  tithes  sold  for 
so  mack  less  f 

ul  te  redimoE  captum  quam  queas  mlnimS :  si  ncqueas  panlnlo,  at  qnuiti 
quels  (Tcr.  Eun.  74),  to  ransom  yourself,  when  captured,  al  the  cheap- 
est rate  you  can;  if  you  can't  for  a  small  sum,  then  al  any  rate  for 
what  you  can. 

Note.  —  These  are  really  genitives  of  qualily  (J  215.  f). 

b.  The  genitive  of  certain  colorless  nouns  is  used  in  the  same  way. 
Such  are  mhlli,  nolhingi  IbbIs,  a  farthing',  flood  (a  lock  of  wool),  a 
straw.    Thus, — 

non  flocci  fac!5  (Att.  Jtiit.  50),  feare  not  a  straio. 

utinain  ego  bffic  abs  te  factum  nihlli  penderem  (Ter,  Ean.  94),  oA!  thati 

cared  nothing  for  this  being  done  by  you! 
ego  non  flocci  pendere  (Ter.  Eun.  410),  /  did  not  care  a  strata. 

c.  With  verba  o(  exchanging,  either  the  Ihiag taken  at  &elAiag given 
in  exchange  may  be  in  the  Ablative  of  Price.  Such  are ;  mfitajB. 
comm&t&je,  penniitSTe,  Tertare.     Thias,  — 


fidem  suam  et  religionem  pecuniS  commutaie  (Cluent.  46,  139),  te  iarttr 
his  faith  and  conscience  for  mcney. 

vertere  faueriboB  triumphos  (Hor.  Od.  i.  35.  4},  to  ekange  (he  triumfH  It 
the  funeral-train  (exchange  tniunphs  for  funerals), 

exsilium  patria  aede  mutavit  (Q.  C.  iii.  8),  he  exchanged  his  nalivt  Imi 
for  exile  (he  took  exile  in  exchange  for  his  native  land). 

viloK  amocnum  saepe  Lucrelilem  mutat  LycB«o  Faunua  (Hor,  Od.  i.  17.  X), 
nimble  Faunus  often  changes  Lycaus  for  Lucretilis.  [He  takes  Lucre- 
tills  at  the  price  ofhyaeas.,  i.e.  he  gac^from  Lycseus  to  Lucretilis.] 

Note. — With  verbs  of  eitchangirg  Oum  is  often  used,  perhaps  wilh  a  differenl 
onceplionoflheaciion:  as,— 

ariea . . .  cum  ci:oce5  mutabit  vellera  IfltS  (Eel.  Iv.  44),  the  ram  shall  change 
his  fleece  for  [one  dyed  with]  the  yellow  Sap-en. 

d.  With  verbs  of  buying  and  selling  the  simple  ablative  of  price 
nusl  be  used,  except  in  the  case  of  tautl,  quantf,  plflris,  minSiia : 

quuM  cam  (mit?  vHI  . . .  qwot  minfe?  (\«adraginia  minb  (PI.  Epid. 
4g),  wha/ did  he  buy  htr  for  ?    Cheap.    For  h™  many  mina  I    FoUrj, 


f  253.] 


Ablatwe  of  Specification. 


-59  J 


^H  12.  Ablative  of  Bpecifioatlon. 

^P    253.   The  Ablative   of    Specification  denotes   that    in  \ 

F    respect  to  which  anything  is  or  is  done:  as,  ■ 

virtiite  praecedunt  (B.  G.  i.  l),  itiy  excilin  courage. 
claudus  allcro  pede  (Nep.  Ages.  S),  lams  B/cneficl. 

Iliugaa  haesitantes,  v5ce  absuni  (De  Or.  i.  25,  115),  kfsitatiisgin  spitck, 
harih  in  voice, 
tanta  ciiilos  patriae  est,  ut  earn  nun  eeUBU  nostro  aed  salute  ipsiui  n: 
Smur  (Tusc.  i.  37),  sucA  is  ear  love  0/  country  that  we  nieaiure  it 
by  our  eri'/t  feeling,  but  by  kir  awn  welfare. 
soDt  enim  homines  nSn  re  sed  nomine  (OfT.  i.  30,  105), /ar  Ihey  a. 


\»fau 


muor  natfi,  older;  hubot  T^%.,younger  (cf.  §  gi.  e), 
inrirmus  molH&que  naturS  (Lsl.  zo,  75),  iiieak  and  yielding  by  nature. 
paulimi  aetate  progresai  (Cat.  Maj.  10,  33),  somewhat  advanced  in  age. 
corpore  senex  esse  poluiC  animo  nunquam  erit  (Cat.  Maj.  1 1,  38),  he  nu 

have  been  an  eld  man  in  body,  he  never  will  be  [old]  at  kearl. 
nan  solum  re  et  aententia  sed  verbis  ijuoque  hoc  interdiutum  ita  esi 

compositura  (Csecin.  85),  this  prohibition  ■was  so  conceived  not  only  1 

tubstante  and  egict,  but  also  in  language. 
homo  meS  sententia  prudentiasimna  (Cjecio.  22),  a  man,  in  my  opinio. 

eqnitatn  pulsi  erant  {B.  G.  vii.  68),  Uiey  had  been  bealen  in  Iheea'nalryjight. 

Note, — To  this  head  ore  to  be  referred  many  expressions  where  the  abli 
expresses  that  h  atcordance  wilk  which  anylhing  is  or  is  done.    But  as  the  Ron 
had  no  such  categories  as  we  malie,  it  Is  impossible  lo  classi^  all  uses  of  the  ab-    I 
lative.    Hence  the  ablative  of  specification  Is  closely  akin  to  that  of  manner, 
many  ablatives  which  have  been  developed  from  olher  fundamental  ideas.  Thus,— 

me6  iore,  -with  perfect  right;  but,  meo  modo,  in  my  fashion. 

mea  sententia,  in  my  opinion;  but  also  mote  formally,  ex  mea  sententia. 
[Here  the  sense  is  the  same,  bu(  the  tiist  ablative  is  specification 
second,  saurce.'^ 

propnqnitate  caniSncios  atque  natfira  (Lsel.  14,  49),  closefy  allied  by 

I  ttindred  and  nature.     [Here  the  ablative  is  not  differenl  in  sense  from    ] 

[hose  above,  but  no  douht  is  a  development  of  means.l 
qui  vincit  vmhus  (Uel.  15,  ii),who  surpasses  in  strength.     [Here  it  is   1 
impossible  to  tell  whether  vTrihaB  is  the  means  of  the  superiority  01 
that  in  respect  to  ■aihich  one  is  superior.] 
neque  enim  nlla  alia  condicione  betla  gesserunt  (R  G.  vii.  if),  fir  et 
ether  terms  did  they  tarry  on  wars. 
a.  The  Supine  id  -fi,  used  chiefly  with  adjectives,  is  equivalent  I( 
ablative  of  specification  (cf.  S§  1 14.  b,  303) ;  as,  — 
nurabile  dicta,  marvellous  lo  tell. 
NoTK.~In  this  use  of  ^ejtjjplBt^dMive  and  ublaflie  cons^Turficros  \ia.'iei^«  J 


26o  Syntax:   Coiistniction  of  Cases.      \%%  254,  355. 

13.   Ablative  of  Place. 

Note, — The  Lecativi  Cast  was  originally  used  (literally)  to  denote  th£/J«( 
wkert  and  (figuralirely)  lo  denote  the  /imr  aini  (a  developmeni  from  the  Idea  oi 
place).  But  this  case  was  pnaerved  only  in  names  of  towns  and  a  few  other  wnrds, 
and  tae  filatt  jnhert  is  usually  denoted  by  the  Ablative.  In  this  constructiDn  (he 
Ablative  was,  no  doubt,  used  at  fust  without  a  preposition,  but  afterwards  it  became 
associated  with  in  In  most  casei. 

254.  The  Ablative  is  used  to  denote  the  /i/ac£  when 
(usually  with  the  preposition  In,  §  258.  c). 

a.  The  ablative  of  the  place  where  is  retained  in  many  idiomadc 
expressions  (cf.  g  S59.  a)  which  have  lost  the  idea  of  place :  as,  — 

pendemus  aninula  (Tusc.  I.  40),  lee  ore  in  suifeiae  0/  mind  (}d  out  min<b). 
socius  pericallB  vobiscum  ariera  (Jr^.  8$),  /  vrU/ ie  present  vid  yen,  » 

tampanion  in  dangtrt. 
pcemit  altum  corde  dolorcm  (^n.  L  2og),  ke  keepi  down  ^  pain  dafbt 

hit  heart. 

b.  I.  Several  verbs  are  followed  by  the  locative  ablative.  These  are: 
acqnleaoo,  dfileotor,  laetor,  gaudeS,  glorlor,  nltor,  st<S,  monaB, 
fido  (CQsndS),  oCDBlstS,  contineor. 

nomialbuH  veterum  glorianlur  (Oral,  jo),  thry  glory  in  the  names  af  At 
ancitnls.   [Also,  de  divitiis  (in  viclute,  circa  lem,  aliquid,  haec)  gloriin.] 

»pE  nid  (Att.  iii.  9),  Ic  rily  on  hop,. 

prudentia  fidens  (Off.  i.  33),  Irtuling  in  prudenee. 

2.  The  verbals  frBtaa,  coutentua,  and  laetUB  take  the  locatilC 
ablative:  as,—  JH 

fretus  gratia  Brati  (All.  v.  2t),  relying  en  Ihe  favor  cf  Brutus.  ^H 

laetus  praeda,  rejoicing  in  Ike  booty.  ^^| 

contentua  sorte,  content  with  his  lot.  ^H 

Remark.  —  The  ablative  with  the  above  veria  sometimes  takes  the  prepodlkl*    ' 
In  (but  ndO  In  is  lale) :  as,— 

in  quibus  causa  nililur  (Crel.  25%  en  ivhom  ike  case  depends. 

With  leveral  of  these  verbs  Ihe  neuter  accusative  of  pronouns  Is  ofien  fotind, 

14.   Ablative  Absolute. 

25B.   A  noun  or  pronoun,  with   a  participle,^  may  be 

put  in  the  ablative,  to  define  the  time  or  circumstances  fS. 

an  action  :  as, — 

■  In  this  construction  the  noun  was  originally  in  the  Locative  Case,  and  dmoHd 

considered  as  place  or  time.    Alierwards  a  participle  wu  added  to 

idify  the  noun,  and  the  Iwo  words  became  fused  in  a  single  idea  equivalnil  to 

It  contaiaed  in  a  subordinate  clause  (cf.  ati  urba  condlC&,y!-«>i  IktfHmdbig^ 

"jf^Mt  JrotH  the  fouKied  tity).    Mei  *e  tQn!,ttutl.iQo.  *m  cWabUshed,  oBwt 

--  )l  locative  no  doubt  became  coiilQUnaei-«Vii\\ie -reel  Ai\»a,-«»A>rt^^ 


Ablative  Absolute. 

I  TooSUs  ad  se  nndique  mercatoribna  (B.  G.  Iv.  zo),  having  calUd  to  him 
I  the  traders  from  all  quarters  (traders  having  been  calledj. 

L  qnitma  rebiu  cognitis  Caesar  apud  mllites  conduaalur  (B.  C.  L  7),  having 
[  Itariiid  this,  Ca:sar  makes  a  speech  la  the  soldiers. 

I  ac  si  iU5  aablato  depelli  a  vobia  omne  pericutuin  iudicBrem  (Cat.  fii.  2,4), 
and  if  T  Ihaugkt  thai  wilk  his  removal  (he  being  removed)  all  danger, 
etc. 
indum  hleme  cSufectS  (B,  G.  vi.  3),  Oifo, 
impress!  conaliis  suIL5  tamnltS  publics  concitato  (Cat, 

attempts  -were  put  down  vnthoui  txHlitig  any  general  alarm. 
i  vobls  quidem  omnibus  re  eliam  turn  probata  (Cat  ii.  2,  4),  sinee  at 
thai  lime  the  facts  were  nol  yet  proved  even  lo  all  of  you. 
Y  impradeatibaa  uoHtna  aCque  ocoapatls  tn  miinitione  castroruni  (B.  G.  v. 
15),  while  BUT  men  were  off  their  gitard  and  busy  in  the  fortification 
cfthe  camp, 
fu^to  omni  equitatu  (B.  G.  vii.  68),  all  the  cavalry  being  pal  to  flight. 
inteifecto  lodulioniaro  (B.  G.  vL  2),  upon  the  death  of  Indnliomarus. 

a.  An  adjective,  or  a  second 
\  in  the  Ablative  Absolute 


orlgui  parte  aestalis  reliqua  (B,  G.  iv,  30),  Tvhen  bat  a  small  part  of  the 
summer  was  left  (a  small  part  of  the  summer  remaining). 

M.  MessBa  et  M.  llsone  conBalibna  (id.  i.  a),  in  the  consulship  of  Mess 
and  Piso  (Marcus  Mcssala  and  Marcus  Piso  being  consuls).     [The 
regular  way  of  expressing  dates,  see  §  259.  e.'\ 

i,  A  phrase  or  clause,  used  substantively, 
absolute  with  a  partidple  or  an  adjective ; 

;5  quid  peterent  (Uv.  ntviii.  36),  as  it 
ai«  at  (it  being  uncertain,  etc.). 
imperto  vanum  esse  farmidinem  (Tac.  Ann.  i.  66),  w/ien  it  w 
the  alarm  was  groundless. 


262  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases. 

d.  The  Ablative  Absolute  in  its  developed  form  often  takes  ihe 
place  of  a  Subordinate  Clause.  In  such  cases  the  noun  is  equtvaleni 
to  a  subject,  and  the  other  word  to  the  predicate.     So  may  be  re- 

1.  Temporal  clauses  (§  322.  ff.) :  as,  — 

patre  interfecto,  [hii]  father  hailing  bitn  hilled.  [This  corresponds  in 
cmn  pater  interfectns  esaet,  lohen  hisfatitr  had  bren  killrd.'\ 

reeenlibus  sceletis  iius  vcsligiis  (Q.  C.  vil.  11),  vihile  the  tracts  of  Ikr 
crime  were  fresh.     [Cf.  dmn  reoentia  annt  TBstigia.] 

2.  Causal  clauses  (g  331):  as, — 

Bl  c\  qui  Alesi&e  i)b5ldeb3.nlur  praeterita  die  qua  anxilia  saomm  eispcc- 
taveianC,  coneampto  omni  frnmeutS,  condlio  coicto  conaoltabuil 
(fi.G.y\\.  ■J-]),  but  those  wha  ■were  imdir  siege  a 
etc,  had  expired,  and  Iheir  grata  had  been 
«w«ci/(Eee5below),  eonsulted  together.   [Cf  cnm  dies  praeteriisut, 

Alexander,  deapSrata  paca,  ad  reparanills  vires  intendit  snimum  (Q.  C  iv. 
6,  23),  Alexander,  since  he  despaired  of  peace,  devoted  his  tHerpis  A 
recruiting  his  forces.^    [Cf.  cnm  pacem.  desperaret.] 

3.  Concessive  dauses  (§  313)1  as, — 
at  e5  repugnante  fiebut  (consul),  immo  vero  eo  fiebot  magii  (Milo  13, 

34),  btit  though  he  (Clodius)  opposed,  he  (Milo)  was  likely  ta  be  tUctd 

consul;  nay,  rather,  etc. 

4.  Conditional  dauses  (§  304) :  as, — 

occurrebat  ci,  mancam  eC  debilem  practuram  fntumn  smun,  eSusnla 
MUone  (Milo  9,  25),  it  occurred  to  him  that  his  praelorship  would  it 
maimed  and  feeble,  if  Milo  were  consul.     [^  Milo  oonsnl  OBSet.] 

qnS  (regione)  attbaotfi  licibit  decorrere  in  illud  mare  (Q.  C.  ix.  38),  ^ 
this  region  is  subdued,  we  shall  be  free  ta  run  down  info  that  sea. 

qua  quidem  ditracta  (Aich.  1 1,  2S),  if  this  be  taken  away. 

5.  Clauses  of  accompanying  circumstance  :  as, — 

ego  liaec  a  Chrvsogono  mei  sponte,  remoto  Sex.  BoMoQ,  quftero  (Rose. 
Am.  45),  of  my  own  accord,  without  reference  la  Sextus  Jteseius  (S.  R- 
beingput  aside),  I  ash  these  questiotts  of  ChrysegoHut. 

nee  impetanle  nee  sciente  nee  praesente  domino  (Milo  10,29),  ■o'ilhoul 
their  master's  giving  orders,  or  knowing  it,  or  being  present. 


F 


255-57.] 


"  At  Hit,   Mirmissi   ipafia,   impra-  "  Bui  they,  AaviKf  pttutd  a  ipaet, 

daUiiHS    iKitris.    alque    occupalls     in  wii/e  our  men  viere  unawartBJiaiisicd 

monltione  caattotum,  subito  se  ex  silvis  in  (orii^ng  the  camp,  suddenly  threw 

eiecetunt :  imfe^qwe  in  eds  facto,  qui  Ihemaelves  out  of  the  woods ;  then  mak- 

erant  in  alalione  pro  castr!s  collocaii,  ing  a«  allack  npon  IhosB  who  were  on 

Scriter  pugniveiunt;   ditaiusgiit  rn'issis  guard  in  front  of  the  camp,  Ihey  fought 

subsidi5    coiortiius    a    Caeaare,    cum  fiercely;    and,  though  twa  cohorts  had 

hao    (ficrtxigud   Mcrmiiso  loci  ipa/ia  been  sent  by  Ctesar  as  reinforce  roenls, 

inter    se)     conalidssent,    novo    genere  afterthesehadlakentheirposition  (i 

pugoae  ferterrU'is  nes/ris,  per  medios  in^  very  little  space  of  ground  betw 

audacisaime   permperant,   aeque   indc  (tiem),  as  our  men  vrere  aIanBed\iyt^K 

incolumea  receperunt."  —  Cssak.  B.  G.  strange  kind  of  fighting,  Ihejr  das' 

,.v.  If.  most   daringly    through    the    midsl 
them,  and  got  off  safe." 

[For  the  Ablative  with  Preposilions,  see  }  15a.] 


VI.-TIME   AND    PLACE. 
1.   Time. 

256.   Time  when,  or  iviihin  wliich,  is  put  in  the  Ablative ; 
sne  how  long  in  the  Accusative  :  as, — 
Ablative:  — 

an  Ike  appointed  day  ;  prima  luce,  at  daybreak. 
quota  hota,  at  what  o'clock  ?  tertiS  vigilii,  in  the  third  toatck. 
tribus  proxuinia  annia  (Jug.  11},  within  the  last  three  years. 
2.  Accusative;  — 

dies  continuos  tiigiiita,y^r  thirty  days  together. 
cum  triduum  Iter  ficiaaeC  (B.  G.  ii.  16),  when  ht  had  marched  tkree  days. 

Note.— The  ablative  of  time  is  locative  in  its  origin  ({  354,  head-note) ;  the 
accusative  is  the  same  as  Ihal  of  the  extent  o/ipace  (§  257), 

a.  Tlie  Ablative  of  time  luilhm  which  sotnetimes  takes  In,  and  tlie 
Accusative  of  time  h<rjj  long,  per  for  greater  precision :  as,  — 
in  diibus  proximis  decern  (Sail.),  within  the  next  ten  days. 
in  brevi  spalio  (Ov.  Met.  L  \li),  within  a  brief  space  (of  time). 
Hdi  per  decern  dies  (Cat.  lii.  8),  games  for  ten  days, 

h.  Duration  of  time  is  occasionally  expressed  by  the  Ablative ;  as, 
mllilis  qoinque  boris  proelium  sustinuerant  (B.  C.  i.  47),  the  men  had  s 

tained  the  fight Jiue  hours. 
Note.  —  In  this  use  the  period  of  time  is  regarded  as  that  vritAin  tohich  the 
I  is  done,  and  it  is  only  Implied  that  the  act  lasted  through  the  period. 

2.  Space. 
SifT.   Extent  of  space  is  put  in  the  A.ccu&at\\& -.  ■as,,- 


264.  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cas^s. 

losaas  qi^doaim  pedSs  latis  {B.  G.  vii.  72),  tnnchfS  fiftten  feet  bread. 

in  omnivLta  sna  quemque  a  recia  consciencia  transversiun  uiLgaemnoj 
opotlet  diicEdere  (quoted  in  Alt.  xiii.  10),  in  aU  on^i  life,  ene  shaaii 
noldiparta  nail's  br/adlhfraitt  itraighlforward  ca 


a.  Measure  is  often  expressed  by  the  Genitive  of  Quality  (§  315.  b) ; 

vallo  pednin  duodecim  (15.  G.  ii.  Jo),  in  a  rampart  of  twelve  fill  (in 
lieight). 

b.  Distance  when  considered  as  extent  of  space  is  put  in  the  Ac- 
cusative ;  when  considered  as  degree  of  difference,  \a  the  Ablative 
(S  250);  as,— 

quinqae  diemm  iter  abest  (Liv.  xxjt.  29),  il  it  dislaiU  Jive  days'  march. 
triginti  milibas  passuum  infra  eum  locum  (B,  G.  ri.  35),  thirty  mills  beima 
that  place  (below  by  thirty  miles). 

3.   Place  from  'Which,  and  End  of  Motion. 

258.  The  place  from  which^is  denoted  by  the  Ablative 
with  ab,  d8,  or  ex ;  the  place  to  which  {the  End  of  Motion) 
by  the  Accusative  with  ad  or  in  :  as,  — 

1.    Place  from  which ;  — 

a  septentrione,  from  the  north.  Jj^^H 

cum  a  vobts  discesaero  (CaL  Maj.  21),  when  /teaznyeM,  ^^^H 

de  pTovincia  decedere,  ia  comi  away  from  one'i  prooinee.  J^^H 

di  monte,  down  from  Iht  mountain.  .^^1 

negotiator  en  Africa  (Verr.  ii.  I,  5},  a  merchant  from  Africa. 
inHSxit  E  Graecia  riviilua  (Rep.  ii.  19),  Ihtre  floToed  in  a  rUl  from  Greece. 
ex  Britannia  obsidcs  miseriuit  (B.  G.  iv.  38),  lAey  sent  hostages  from  Britain. 
Mosa  proBuit  ex  monte  Vosego  (id.  iv.  10),  tht  Menu  (flowa  from)  riia 

in  the  Vosgel  meunlaiHS. 
quas  (nivis)  ex  Pictonibus  ct  Santonts  celiqniaqae  pacitis  tegionihua  con- 
venire  iuaaerat  (id.  Hi.  11),  the  shipt  -which  he  had  given  orders  should 
collect  front  the  [country  of  tlie]  Piclimes  and  the  Santoni  and  from 
the  other  conquered  regions. 

1  Originally  all  these  relations  were  expressed  with  all  these  words  by  the  cases 
alone.  The  accusative  denoted  the  end  of  tnoiion  as  In  a  certain  sense  the  object 
of  the  action  (cf.  IlOma.m  petllt),  and  the  ablative  in  its  proper  meaning  of  sepa- 
ration denoted  the  place  from  which.  The  prepositions,  originally  adverbs,  were 
added  lo  define  more  eitaclly  ihe  direction  o(  tootion,  as  in  (o  01  mvd,  limard  m, 
and  by  long  association  became  indispcnsab\e  exce;*  a*  \ii4\ca\e&  Amm.  ^^ 


8.]  Place  from  Which;  End  of  Motion. 


» 


^^k   2.  Place  to  which :  — 

^^P    ad  finis  Hytcaniae  penelrat  (Q.  C.  vi.  4),  hr  penelraUi 
■  Jfyrcania. 

II  odibam  ad  Islum  fundum  (Csec  29),  1  was  going  to  that  eslali  (cf,  §  nyj.  d). 

ID  Afiicam  navigivit,  he  sailed  to  Africa. 
in  Italiam  piofeclus,  gone  lo  Italy, 
le^tum  in  Trevetoa  mittil  (B.  G.  iii.  1 1),  he  sends  his  lieutenant  into 

[counlry  of  tlie]  Treveri. 
in  Hraea  com  exissem  (Att.  vi.  9,  1),  wHen  I  hnd  landed  at  the  Pira 
[Admitted  by  Cicero  htmEelf  lo  be  wrong,  the  Finsus  being  a  tc 
(see  t,  below].    Tbe  passage  is  discussed  by  him  in  Alt.  vii.  3.] 

Note  i.  —  In  poe(i7  the  end  of  motion  is  often  expressed  by   the  Da 
«=iS.*.3):  as.- 

it  clamor  caelo  (^n,  v.  451),  a  skmtl goes  up  la  Ike  sky. 

Note  a.— With  the  name  of  a.  country,  ad  denotes  to  the  borders ;  In,  into 
Ihe  conntry  itselt  Similarly  ab  denotes  oiooj'  from  the  outside;  ei,  oat  of  the 
oilerior.  Thus  ad  Itallam  pervenlt  would  mean,  ie  came  to  the  frontier,  regard- 
less of  die  destination  1  In  Itallam,  he  loent  la  Italy,  i.e,  to  a  place  wiihir 
Rome,  for  in5la.nce.  So  ab  Italia  proCectuS  est  would  mean,  he  cami 
from  the  fnnlier,  regardless  of  the  original  starting-point;  ex  ItaJift,  h, 
from  liafy,  from  vrithin,  as  from  Rome,  for  instance. 

ta.  The  names  of  towns  or  small  '^\3.ads  from  which,  as  abo  domua  j 
d  itls,  are  put  in  the  Ablative  without  a  prepositioa:  a 
Roma  profectus,  having  set  out  from  Rome, 
riire  teversus,  having  returned  frsm  the  country. 
Roma  abesse,  to  be  absent  from  Rome. 
domo  abirc,  to  leave  home. 
No' 
mth 
:. 
pro 


Note  i.— With  names  of  towns,  eic,  ftb  is  often  used,  commonly  |< 

:/»;/)<  0/.- as. - 

it  a  Mutilm  discEderet  (Phil,  xiv.  2,  4),  that  he  should  retire  from 
(which  be  was  twsieging). 

a  Gergovia  despectus  in  castra  (B.  G.  vii.  45),  t/iire  -uias  from  . 
I  view  into  the  camp. 
profccli  a  domo  (Uv.  x!.  33),  setting  out  from  horn/. 
loca  quae  a  Brundi^o  piopius  abaunt  (Att.   vili.   14),  places  wi 
'o  Brundisium  (nearer  from). 


Notes.— The  ablative  without  a  preposition  is  used  lo  dem 
m*iV*  in  certain  idiomatic  cipressions;  as, — 

cessisset  patria  (Mil.  25),  he  ■aiontd have  left  his  country. 
patcia  pellere,  /a  drive  out  of  the  country. 
mann  mittcre,  to  emancipati  (let  go  from  the  hand). 
Note  3. — The  poets  often  omit  the  preposition  where  it  wou 

■       mania  Acbeconte  vemissos  (.En.  v.  <jg)i  the  spirits  retUT<\ 


266  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.  [§  25B. 

b.  The  Dames  of  towns  or  small  islands  to  which  as  also  domns 
and  rua,  are  put  in  the  Accusative  without  a  preposition ;  as,  — 

Romam  rediit,  hi  riturntd  to  Rami. 

Delo  Rhodum  navigace,  lo  sail  from  Dclos  te  Jt/iodes. 

lus  ibo,  I  shall ^  into  the  country. 

Aomwra'aX,  he  wsnt  home.     [So,  suas  domos  abire,  logo  lo  Iheir  homes  !\ 

Note  i.  —  In  this  use  domum  maybe  modified  by  a  possessive  prononn  or» 

genilive.  Wbenolhenvise  modified,  domum  requires  the  preposition  la.  Thus,— 

doinum  regis  (Deiot.  6),  to  the  kings  Aousf.     [But  also  in  M.  Laecu 

doraimi  (Cai,  i.  4),  to  M.  Lisia'i  hi)nse.'\     But,  — 
in  domuni  magnani  venire,  lo  lomi  into  a  large  house. 

NOTE  2.  —  Wilh  ihe  names  of  towns,  etc,  ad  may  be  used  in  tbesenuol 
iBviards.  to  the  luigkiorhood  of;  ss.  — 

ad  Alesiam  pcoficiicuntur  (B.  G.  vii.  76),  thiy  set  out /or  Alesia, 

ad  Alesiam  perveniunt  (id.  vii,  79},  tkey  arrive  at  Alesia  (come  through  to)i 

ad  Athenas  navigare,  to  set  sail  for  Athens  (landing  in  the  harlior). 

Note  3.  —  The  general  words,  urba,  Oppldum,  Insula  require  a  preposftian 
in  either  construction  [lo  vihich  at  from  ii/iicA);  as,  ad  Urbem,  ab  urbe,  ad 
urbem  BSmcuii,  BOmam  ad.  urbem,  ex  urbe  B6m&. 

Note  4.  —  Two  or  more  nouns  are  sometimes  expressed  after  one  verb  as  limits 
of  motion  (see  §=59.  A). 

Note  5. — The  poets  often  omit  the  preposition  with  any  noun:  as, — 

Italiam  Lavinlaque  venil  litora  (^n. !.  2),  he  came  to  Italy  and  the  Lovin- 

finis  Italos  niiltere  (id.  ill.  440),  you  skali  be  allimred  to  reach  tht  Italian 

boundaries. 
lerritQ  Hespcriam  venies  (id.  ii.  78iJ,_j'iib  shall  come  to  the  Hesperian  land. 
Remark.  —  The  preposition  is  omitted  with  the  supine  in  -Um  {{  303)  and  iu 
the  following  old  phrases;  — 

exseqnias  ire,  logo  to  the  funeral.       infitias  ire,  to  resoti  to  denial. 
pessum  ire,  to  go  to  ruin.  pessum  dare,  to  ruin  (cf,  perdS). 

venum  dare,  lo  seU  (give  to  sale).    [Hence  venders.] 

venom  ire,  lo  be  sold  (go  to  sale).    [Hence  venire.]  ^H 

foriia  (nsed  as  adverb),  out:  as,  fotas  egredl,  logo  out  ofdoart.  ^H 

4.  The  Place  'VThere.  ^1 

c.  1,  The  place  where  is  denoted  by  the  Ablative  with 
the  preposition  In  {Locative  Ablative) :  as,  — 

in  hoc  urhe  vitam  digit,  he  passed  his  life  in  Ihit  city, 
si  in  Gallia  remanerent  (B.  G.  iv.  8),  if  thty  shauld  slay  in  Gaul. 
dum  haec  in  Venetis  genintur  (id.  lii.  17),  ■aihile  this -was going  on  among 
Me  P'eneti. 
■    oppidum  in  Insula  positiitn  (id.  fii.  ^81,  n  lon'"  siluudil  o«  an  laand.   ^M 


■asa]  The  Place   Where.  267 1 

But  names  of  towns  and  small  islands  are  put  in  the  I 
Locative  Case. 

This  has  In  the  first  and  the  second  decleasion  singular  the  £a.mel 
as  the  Geoitive,  in  the  plural  and  in  the  third  declension  ths," 
«anie  form  as  the  Dative  or  Ablative :  as,  — 


Romae,  at  Rome  (Roma), 
Rhodi,  al  Rhodes  (Rliodua), 
Sam!,  at  Samas, 
Tiburi  orTlbnre.  al  Tibur. 
PhilippJE,  at  Philipfi. 


Albenis,  atAthfns  (Athenae). 

Cypri,  at  Cyprus. 
CSrilia!,  et  Cures. 
Caprels,  at  Capri  (Capreae). 


REMARK.  —  Large  islands,  and  all  places  when  thought  of  as  a  lerrU. 
as  a  locality  are  treated  like  naines  of  countries;  as, — 

n  Sicilia,  in  Sicily. 

in  Ithaca  lepores  illat]  mortunlur  (Plin.  M.  N.,  cf.  g  256,  a),  in  Ilkaatt 
hares  when  carried  there  die.     f  Ulysses  lived  al  Ithaca,  would  require 
Ithacae.] 


Note  i.— With  all  ran 
d.  or  apud  with  Ihe  Acci 
olrcK  with  the  Accusative ; 


es  of  places  AT,  meaning  (leor  (not  iii),  is  expressed  by  1 
salive.  in  the  ncighborhiod  of  may  be  expressed  ly  1 
among,  by  apud  with  the  Accusaiive.    Thus,  — 


pugna  ad  Cannas,  thejighl  al  Cannae. 

conchas  ad  CSetam  legunt  (Or.  ii.  6),  at  Caiila  (along  the  shore). 

ad  (apud)  Inferos,  in  the  world  below  (neat  er  among  those  below), 

ad  fores,  at  the  doors.  ad  iaouam,  at  the  door. 

apnd  GraecSs,  among  the  Greeks.       apud  me,  at  my  house. 

apud  Solos  (LrCg,  ii.  i6),  al  Soli.       circa  Capuam,  round  about  Capua 


apud  Xenophontem,  in  Xenophott.     But,- 
in  Xenophontis  Oeconomico,  in  Xenopho; 

d.  The  Locative  Case  is  also  preaer 


'i  (Econcmicus, 

'ed  ]n  the  following  common  \ 


domi  (rarely  domni),  e 
belli,  mOitJae  (in  conti 
hnmi,  on  the  ground. 
foria,  eul'of-doors. 


These  a 
abo,— 


sed  like  r 


harl  i-t)),  yesterday, 
Infelici  arbon  (Liv. !.  26),  i 


),  abroad,  in  military  service. 

terra  mairqne,  by  land  and  sei 
[owns,   without  a.  preposlttoa. 

veapBtl  (-&\  in  the  cuMhii^. 


268  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.       [§§  258,  2 

e.  The  locative  domi  may  be  modified  by  a  possessive  adjective 
\  limiting  genitive ;   but,  when  It  would  be  otherwise  modified  st 
s  used  instead  of  the  Locative.     Thus, — 


dond  Caesans,  at  Cmat'i  house. 

donu  suae  vel  alienae,  at  his  own  or  aiiothtr's  house.    But, — • 

in  Marei  Crass!  castiaaima  domo  (Cx\.  4,  g) ,  in  the  chaste  Aome  of  Manus 

Crassus.     [Cf.  Bx  AnDiana  Milonis  domo,  £  1S4.  </.] 
/.  The  place  -ajhere  Is  denoted  by  the  Ablative  without  a  preposition 

1.  Regularly  in  many  indefinite  words,  such  as  loc3,  parte :  as, — 
quibus  loco  poaitis  (Or.  iiL  38),  lolun  these  arc  set  its  position. 

qna  parte  victi  erant  (Alt.  ix.  11),  on  the  side  where  Iheyaiere  beaten.  But, 
exeicitum  ca.atriB  conlinuit  (B.  G.  i.  4S),  he  kept  his  army  in  camp, 
[Here  tlie  cansttuclion  is  inHucnced  by  means^ 

2.  Frequently  with  nouns  which  are  qualified  by  adjectives  (regu- 
larly when  totua  is  used)  ;  as,  — 

media  uibe  (Liv.  i.  33),  in  the  middle  of  the  city. 

tota  Sicilia  (Vetr.  Iv.  43),  throughout  Sicily  (in  the  whole  of  Sicily).   So,— 

tQta  Tartacina  (De  Or.  ii.  59),  in  oil  Tarracina  (cf,  e.  s.  Rem.)- 

3.  Freely  in  poetry:  as, —  _ 

litore  CDrvo  {J^a.  lii.  16),  an  the  -minding  shore.  ^| 

snlio  aecluaa  relinquit  (id.  iii.  446],  she  leaves  them  shut  up  in  the  eavt.   ^^k 
Epiro,  Hesperia  (id,  iii.  503),  in  Epirus,  in  Hesperia.  ^| 

g.  The  nvay  by  which  is  put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition: 
viabreviore  equiles  praenim  (Fam.  x.  9),  /  sent  forward  the  eatialry  by  a 


Aegaeo  mari  trsiecit  (LIv.  xxxvii,  14),  he  crossed  by  toay  ef  the  .Mget, 
provehimur  pelago  {Miu  iii.  506),  vie  sail  forth  aver  the  sea. 

Note.— In  this  use  the  viay  iy  viiich  is  conceived  as  the  means  of  passa 


5.  Special  Usee  of  Time  and  Place. 
259.  The    following    special    uses   require   to   be   ob- 


1 


served :  — ■ 

a.  Many  expressions  have  in  Latin  the 
where  in  English  the  main  idea  is  rather  o^ places  as, — 
pSgna  Conncnsi  (or  opud  Cannas),  in  the  fight  at  Canna. 
ludis  RomSnis,  at  the  Roman  games. 

"  'S  Callicis  belli,  in  all  the  Gallic  wan. 


if  lime  w/un. 


S  2S9.]  Special  Uses  of  Time  and  Place.  26 

b.  la  many  idiomatic  expressions  of  time,  the  accusative  with  ad,  In 
ir  Bub  is  used.    Such  are  the  following :  — 

Bupplicalio  deciela  est  in  Kalentlas  lanuariSs,  a  thanksgiving  wm  voted fn 

Ike  \sl  0/ yanaary. 
convenerunt  ad  diem,  they  essemhkii  at  the  [appoinlcd]  day. 
&A  vesperum,  till  evtning;  sub  vesperum,  towards  evening. 
aub  idem  tempus,  abnul  the  same  time. 
sub  noctem,  at  ntgit-fail. 

e.  Time  during  which  or  ■mihin  •which  may  be  expressed  by  thi 
ablative  of  a  noun  in  the  singular,  with  an  ordinal  numeral :  as,  - — 

quinto  die,  within  |juEt]/o«r  days  (lit.,  on  the  fifth  day).     [The  RumiB 

counted  both  ends,  see  %  J76.  d^ 
regnat  iam  sexlum  annum,  he  has  reigned  going  on  six  years  (he  istcigninj 

now  the  sixth  year). 
But  also, — regnavil  iam  sex  annoa,  he  has  already  reigned  for  six  years. 

d.  Distance  of  time  before  or  after  anything  is  variously  expressed 


post  (ante)  tres  BI11109,  post  tertium  annum,  lies  post  aonos, 
annum,  tiibus  post  annis,  tertio  post  anno,  three  year:  after 

tribus  annis  {lertio  anno)  post  exsilium  (poslquam  eiectus  est),  three  yeart 
after  his  exile. 

his  tiibuB  proximis  annis,  within  the  last  three  years. 

panels  annis,  a  fern  years  hence. 

abhinc  annoa  ties  (ttihus  annis),  ante  hos  ties  annos,  three  years  age. 

triennium  est  cum  (tres  anni  sunt  cum),  il  is  three  years  since. 

octavo  mense  quam  (see  §  262.  note  2),  llie  eighth  month  after. 

e.  In  Dates  the  phrase  ante  diem  (a.  d.)  with  an  ordinal,  or 
ordinal  alone,  is  followed  by  an  accusative,  like  a  preposition ;  and 
phrase  itself  may  also  be  governed  by  a  preposition. 

The  year  is  expressed  by  the  names  of  the  consuls  in  the  ablativB 
absolute,  often  without  a  conjunction  (§  255.  a) ;  as, 

is  dies  eiat  a.  d.  quintum  Kalendaa  Aprilis  L.  Pisone  A.  Gabiniii  consalibns 

(B.  G.  i.  6),  that  day  was  the  Sth  iefore  the  calends  of  April  (March 

aS),  in  the  consulship  ofPiso  and  Gaiinius. 
in  a.  d.  v.  Kal.  Nov.  (Cat.  i.  3),  to  the  S'h  day  iefore  the  caiinds  of  Novi 

her  (OcL  28). 
XV,   Kal.  Sexfflis,  the   l^th    day   before  the  calends  of  August  (Jtdy  18), 

[Full  form:  qointo  decimo  die  ante  Kalendas.] 

f.  For  AT,  meaning  near  (not  in),  see 

Ncn-E.  —  Fai  TO  and  from  ivilh  names  of  plf 


zyo  Syntax:  Construction  of  Cases.      [If  259, 260. 

g.  When  motion  to  a  place  is  implied  in  Englisli,  though  not  ex- 
pressed, the  accusative  with  or  without  a  preposition  must  be  used  m 

coniiirati  in  cnriam  cotirenerunl,  Ihe  lonipiratBTS  mit  in  &e  Senaic-iouir, 

(came  together  into  the  SeDate-honse). 
concilium  domain  Eaaic  convocavtl,  Ae  called  a  coaiieil  at  Ail  own  hauif. 
h.  When  two  or  more  names  of  place  follow  a  verb  of  moliou,  each 
must  be  under  its  i 


qnadridno  quo  hacc  gesta  sunt  res  ad  Cb^BOgonuin  in  castra  L.  Sallie 
Vol&terrM  defcttiir  (Rose.  Am.  7),  ■wilhia  four  days  afitr  this  twj 
dme,  thi  sialler  viai  reported  TO  Chrysogontis  IN  Sulla't  camp  AT 
Volaterrii. 


VII.-USE   OF   PREPOSTTIONS. 
260.   Some  Prepositions  are  used  with  the  Accusative, 
some  with  the  Ablative,^  and  a  few  with  both. 
Note. — For  the  list  of  Prepositions,  see  §  151 

a.  Verbs  o^ placing,  though  implying  motioti,  take  the  construction 
of  the  place  in  wltich. 

Such  are!    ponS    and   its    compounds    (except    ImpSti5),    locS, 
ooUooO,  statud,  cOnstituo,  etc. 

qui  in  Bade  &c  doni5  collocavit  (Parad.  iii.  2),  vAi  put  [one]  iiUa  kit 

place  and  home, 
statuiluc  cques  Rominus  in  Aproni  conviviO  (Verr.  Hi.  61),  a  Soman 

knight  is  brought  into  a  banquet  of  Apronius. 
insula  Delos  in  Aegaeo  man  posica  (L^.  Man.  jj),  the  island  of  Dclos, 

situated  in  At  j'Egean  Sea. 
si  In  un&  PompeiS  omnia  pooeietis  (id.  59),  if  yau  made  every^ing 

depend  on  Pompey  alone. 

b.  Position  is  frequently  expressed  by  the  Ablative  with  ab  (rarely 
X),  properly  meaningyViij/: ; '  as, — 

a  lergo,  in  thi  rear. 

a  parte  Pompeiana,  en  the  side  of  Pompey,  ^^B 

a  sinistra,  on  the  left  hand.     [Cf.  hinc,  on  this  side^  ^H 

ex  altera  parte,  en  the  other  side.  ^H 

magna  tx  parle,  in  a  great  degree  (Jrem,  i.e.  in,  a  great  part).  ^H 

1  The  force  lies  strictly  nilh  Ihe  Case,  aod  the  preposition  only  Indiotei  more 
dearjj'  direction  at  place, 

tM\y  Ihe  direction  whence  the  kumoiu  WfieuVia  <» 


1 260,261.]  Use  of  Prepositions.  271 

c.  Buper  in  the  sense  of  conctrning  takes  the  Ablative ;  in  all  other 
!iises  it  takes  the  Accusative:  as, — 

hac  super  le  (CicOi  conctrning  this  thing. 
super  tali  causa  miss!  (Nep.  Paus.  4),  sent  en  suck  an  errand. 
led  hie  te  sapet  mmis  (AtL  x.  S),  but  more  than  eneugk  an  that poinl. 
super  eulmina  tecti  (jEn.  ii.  695),  aiove  the  houie-top. 
super  vallum  praedpilari  (Jug.  58),  to  he  hurled  over  Ike  rampart. 
super  lateris  coria  indiicuntur  (B.C  ii.  10),  Af'Ai  are  drawn  over  the  tricks. 
super  Numidiam  (Jag,  ig),  tej/Dnd  Nitmidia, 
super  lerrae  lumulura  (Legg.  26),  en  the  mound  of  earlh. 
super  vinum  (Q.  C.  viii.  4),  over  [hia]  wine. 

Note.  —  The  ablative  Is  used  in  poEliywilh  super  in  olher senses:  as, — 
ligna  super  toco  large  reponens  (Hor.  Od.  L  9.  5),  fiHng  logs  generously 
I  ike  fire. 
super  media  {N^.  ix.  59),  afier  midnight. 

d.  Bnbter  takes  the  Accusative,  except  sometimes  in  poetry.  Thus, 
sublet  logani  (Uv.),  under  his  vianlh.    But, — 

Bubter  litore  (Calull.),  below  the  shore. 

.  TsDaa  (which  follows  its  noun)  regularly  takes  the  Ablative,  but 
^metiines  the  Genitive  (§  223.  e).    Thus,  — 
TEuro  lenus  (Deiot.  13),  as  far  as  Taurus. 
capulo  lenus  (.?En.  v.  55),  up  to  the  hilt, 
Corcyrac  tenus  (Liv.  xxv.  24),  as  far  as  Corcyra. 

ed  with  the  (eminine  of  an  adjective  pro- 

hactetius,  hitherto  ;  qualenus,  so  far  as. 

de  hie  re  haclenus,  so  much  for  that  (about  this  matter  so  far). 

261.  Many  words  may  be  construed  either  as  Preposi- 
tions or  as  Adverbs :  thus,  — 

a.  The  adverbs  pridle,  poatrldie,  propius,  pTOxlmS,!  tuque  — 
dso  (less  frequently)  the  adjectives  propior  and  proaimus  —  may  be 
fallowed  by  the  Accusative  (cf.  g§  207.  b,  234.  e):  as,  — 

pridie  Nonas  lunlis  (Cic),  Ike  day  before  the  Nenes  of  June  (Jane  4). 

postcidie  ludos  (Att.  xvi.  4),  the  day  after  the  games. 

ipse  propior  montem  suos  collocat  (Jug.  49),  ke  stations  his  men  nearer 

the  hill. 
pro^ilme  Pompeium  sedebam  (Alt.i.  14),  I  sat  next  to  Pompey,    [Cf.  proxi' 
moa  Pompeium  sedebfun] 


<  CC  prope.  \  t^a.  a. 


2/2  Syntax:  Constrtutunt  of  Cases.  [S  261 

p«*  mmilae  qou  nt  propid*ioGioccii^  CK&  fr.  aS),iie  part  ef  iki 

idanJvAitk  it  ntarrr  Oe  wot  (nmset). 
tenniDoi  luqac  libjse  (Jiut.),  le  At  bottndt  ef  Libya. 

Note.— PtMIS  and  poetildia  lake  aho  Ihe  Genitive  <)  aas.  c.  nole  a). 
Proplar,  propius,  prozimiis,  and  prozlinS,  lake  also  ihe  Dsiive,  or  Ihc 
Ablaiive  wiLb  Bb.    Uaque  h  comnuml;  IbllaiFed  by  ad.   Tbus, — 
propiu*  Tlberi  (Nep.),  nearer  the  Tiber. 
ptxjpios  ab  otbe  ( I'lin.),  nearer  the  cily 
luque  ad  mare,  te  the  tea, 

b.  The  adverbs  palani,  proctil,  eimal,  may  be  used  as  prepositions 
and  take  the  Ablative:  as,— 

rem  credilon  pakra  popnlfi  coHt  (LSr.  tI.  14),  he  paid  the  debt  in  tit 

preiente  of  Hie  ftopU. 
hand  procul  castns  in  modam  mnnfdpii  exstratda  (Tac  H.  iv.  22},  not  far 

frem  Ike  tamp,  built  up  like  a  town. 
simul  nobis  habilat  barbams  (Ov.  Tr.  v.  lo.  29),  close  among  as  dinells 
the  barbarian. 

Note.— 

Thu».~ 

proeolSmari.^r/rom  Aetea. 

noblscum  limul,  at  the  tame  time  milk  ounetva. 

e.  The  adverb  olam  is  found  with  the  Accusative  or  Ablative,  rarely 
with  the  Genitive  or  Dative :  as,  — 

clam  matrem  suam  (Plaut.),  tintn<nBn  to  his  mother- 

clun  mihi  (id.),  in  secret  from  me. 

clam  pallia  (id.),  -withcut  his  father's  hmnoledge. 

dam  vobis  (B.  C  ii.  32),  -aiithoul  ycttr  kno-dedge. 

ei.   Preposidons  often  retain  their  original  meaning  as  adverbs.     So 
especially — 
I,  Ante  and  poet  in  relations  of  time :  as,  — 

quae  paulo  ante  praeeepta  dedimus  (Cic),  a  Unit  while  ago,  c 
post  lribusdiebiis,rt<-/ei/Bj'jo/5',rf  (cf.  §  259.1/). 

z.  AdverBus,  oontrB,  circlter,  prope:  as,— 

Bdversas  reaiatere,  to  hold  out  in  epposition. 

Aeolua  haec  contrS,  Aut  Molus  in  reply, 

circiter  pars  quarta,  abaui  At  four  A  part. 

prope  cxanimalus,  nearly  lifeless. 
3.  In  general  those  ending  In -S:  as,— 

forte  fuit  iiSxta  tumulu.'i,  Ihere  happened  la  be  a  mound  chte  fy 

NOTK  —  Clam  and  versUB  arehj  ma^n^  eictaded  ftom  the  list  of  preposillon 
P^'or  the  use  of  Preposiiions  m  Coip^o^'i'.mn,  ™e  \  i-pCi 


I 

siltona. 

J 


F 


262, 263.]  Use  of  Prepositions.  273 1 

262.  Some  prepositions  or  adverbs  which  imply  Com- 
parison are  followed,   like  comparatives,  by  quam,  which  ] 
may  be  separated  by  several  words,  or  even  clauses. 

neque  anta  dimlsit  euni  quam  fidem  dedit  (Ijv.  jxxix,  10),  nor  did  hi  Ut  I 

Aimga  until  he  gavs  a  pledge. 
post  diem  lerdum  quam  dixerat  (Man.  16),  the  third  day  after  he  said  it. 
Note  i.^Such  words  are  ante,  prius,  post,  prfdi$,  poBtridlS;   also  I 
and  profi  in  compounds ;  as,— 

Cato  ipse  iam  servu'e  qnam  pugniire  mavnlt  (Alt  vii.  15),  Cate  himself  fy  \ 
this  time  leauld  rather  be  a  slave  thanji^. 

si  iam  pcindpalum  Galliae  obtinere  non  possint,  Gallomm  quom  Romi 

rum  imperia  proefeire  (B.  G.  i.  17),  if  they  eatt  no  longer  hold  Ihe  chief   j 
rank  in  Gaul,  [they]  prefer  the  rule  of  Gauls  10  that  of  Romans. 

NOTE  a.— The  ablative  of  lime  (}  256)  is  EOmedmes  followed  bj  quam  In  Iha    I 

octavo  niense  quam  (Liv.  xxi.  15),  -wilhin  eight  months  after,  etc. 

263.  For  fi  or  ab  with   the  Ablative   of   Agent,   see 
246. 

Note. — The  following  prepositions  sometimes  follow  their  nouns:  ad,  oltrR, 
QircS,  contrR,  as,  S  (ex),  inter,  IQxta,  penes,  projiter.  Ultra,  t 
(regularly),  and  occasionally  others:  as, — 

[usus]  qneni  penes  arbitrium  est  et  ius  et  norma  loquendi  (Hor.  A.  P,  73), 
custom,  under  whose  control  is  the  choice,  righl,  and  rule  of  speech. 

cuius  a  me  corpus  est  creuiitum,  qaod  contra  decuit  ab  illo  meum  (C.  M, 
23),  whose  body  I  burned  [on  the  funeral  pile],  iBhile  on  Ihe  contrary 
(lit.  contrary  to  ■which')  mine  should  have  been  burned  by  him. 


Chapter    [II.  —  Syntax  of  the   Verb- 

1,  — MOODS  AND  TENSES. 


Note.  — The  Syntax  of  the  Verb  relates  chiefly  Ic 


the  u 


of  Ihe  ^ 


ved)  and  the  Tenses  (ejpiess- 
n  mood  and 


I 


Ing  the  time  of  Ihe  action}.  There  is  no  difference  in  origin  b 
lenae.  The  tnoods,  except  Ibe  infinitive,  are  only  speeiaiized  tenses ;  ana  Hence  Be 
uses  of  mood  and  tense  frequently  cross  each  other.  Thus  Ihe  tenses  someliiDes 
hive  modal  significations  (compare  indicattre  in  apodosis,  \  311,  e;  future  lor 
imperative,}  369./);  and  the  moods  sometimes  express  lime  {compare  subjunc- 
tive in  fiitiire  condilions,  \  307.  b,  and  notice  (he  want  of  a  future  subjmicIiFe 
ii,o.a). 

The  parent  language,  besides  the  Imperative  mood,  had  two  distinct  forms  with 
modal  fliKnification :  ihe  Subjunctive,  expressing  an  action  as  wilUd  or  vividlj  (0»- 
lavtd;  and  the  Optative,  expressing  an  action  as  wishid  far  01  vaguely  cemeived. 

Of  these,  the  Subjunotiva  was  developed  from  a  Preaeot  Tense,  by  which  ai 
action  continued  in  present  lime  was  represented  as  fiilure :  compare  in  EngBi, 
Ue  army  marches  to-mwroio.  Such  an  action  came  to  be  conceived  on  Ihe  one 
hand  as  command;  compare  Ihe  military  order,  Ihi  regiment  will  advance;  aad 
on  the  other  as  a  possibillly  or  a  mere  conception ;  compare  aHyioify  will  under- 
ilandUiat. 

The  Optative  has  had  a  similar  development.  It  was  originally  a  lense-fonn 
compounded  with  YA,and  probably  denoted  past  time  (cf.  Eng.  should asiAvvuld): 
but  like  the  subjunctive,  it  lias  acquired  Ihe  two  meanings  of  conception  and  com' 

11  must  not  be  supposed,  however,  [hat  in  any  given  construction  either  Ibe 
subjunctive  01  the  optative  was  deliberately  used  iecauit  it  denoted  conception  ot 
possibility.  On  the  contrary,  each  construction  has  had  lis  own  line  of  deveiopcnent 
from  more  tangible  and  literal  forms  of  thought  to  more  vague  and  ideal;  and  by 
this  process  the  mood  used  comes  to  have  In  each  case  a  special  meaning,  which  k 
afterwards  habitually  associated  with  It  in  that  construction.  Thus  in  English  lh« 
expression  Itoeald  de  thii  has  become  equivalent  to  a  mild  command;  while  by 
analysis  it  Is  seen  to  be  the  apodosis  of  a  present  condition  contrary  to  fact  (f  30S): 
if  I  were  jou,  etc.  By  further  analysis,  /  mwb/i/^  is  seen  to  have  meant,  originally, 
/  iheuld  have  wished  (or  /  did  leish)  toga. 

In  Latin,  the  original  subjunctive  and  Ihe  optative  became  confounded  in  form 
and  meaning,  and  were  merged  in  the  present  subjunctive.  Then  new  lensc-formi 
of  (be  Eubjunclive  were  formed  by  composition ;  ^  and  <o  these  the  original  as  well 
ail  the  derived  meanings  of  both  moods  became  attached  (see  \  36$).  All  the 
iuitpeniail  uses  of  the  Latin  subjunctive  are  thus  to  be  accounted  for. 

The  dependtnl  uses  of  the  subjunctive  have  arisen  in  evciy  case  (torn  the  employ- 
ment of  some  ixdependeul  subjunctive  construction  in  co-ordituition  with  a  main 
nent.    In  time  the  two  clauses  have  so  grown  together  as  to  form  a 


V 

j  264.]                       Tke  Indicative  Mood.                           375  ^^k 

relations  loward  ihc  olher  clause.    The  original  meaning  of  Ihe  mood  has  disap 

peared,  and  a  new  meaning  has  aiisea  by  impUcalion.    Thus,  mlalt  Igg'StSs  qui 

dicerent,  he  seat  amiassadsrs  to  sa.^  (■>.  who  iiieHid  Jaj  in  a  supposed  cHse).l      ^^ 

Simiiar  processes  may  be  seen  in  Uie  growlh  of  Apodasis.    Thus,  toUo  hano    ^^H 

with  grief:  U.  if  you  remove,  elc).                                                                              ^^H 

The  InRnilive  Is  originally  n  verbal  noun,  modifying  a  verb  like  other  nouns;    ^^H 

VOl3  vldero,  lit.  "  I  wish  for-seeiDE":  compare  English  whatiocnt  ye  nut  fir  t»    ^^H 

lee  f    But  in  Latin  it  has  been  suipiisinf^y  developed,  so  as  to  have  forms  for    ^^^| 

tense,  and  some  proper  modal  characteristics,  and  to  be  used  as  a  subsHtule  for    ^^H 

other  moods.                                                                                                                               ^^^| 

ways,  which  are  treated  under  their  respecdve  heads  below.                                             ^^H 

1        I.  tKDlCA-riVB:  Direct  Assertion  or  Question  ()  264}.                                                     ^^| 

B 

«.  Independent:  j  Wish.  E^ortaUon,  Command,  Question  ({    ^H 

^H 

I.  Purpose  '(with  ut,  nS)  {j  317).                     ^| 

a  Result  (with  ut,  ut  nOn)  (}  319).                ^H 

3.  Characteristic  (Relative  ClauseJ  (j  330).       ^H 

i  Dependent          4'  Time  (with  oum)  (}  3=5).                               ^H 
(C^nvw        .r.„di,lnnJFuture(lessvi.id)(}yv.A,0.   ^M 

^^B                         ^                                                    tConiraiyloFact  (J3oa).         ^^H 

^H                                                                  e.  IntermediatellndirectDiscourse)  (^3)1).    ^^H 

^^r                                                                 7.  Indirect  Questions  or  Commands  (|j  334,     ^^^| 

■                                                                                                                       ^H 

^H                             ri.  Direct  Commands  [ollcn  subjunctive)  ({369).                          ^^1 
^■k  Imperative:      a.  Statutes.  Laws,  and  Wills  (§  aSg.  rf).                                               ^H 

^1 

b  Obiective           f '■  Complementary  Infinidve  (}  371). 

Constructions-    "■  ^''^'""''^   Discourse  (with  suhj^t-accnsa- 
■  I         live)  {}  272). 

^H  Infinitive: 

,  ..  Purpose  (poetic  or  Greek  use)  ((  273). 

■.                         '     Usesr              1         ^4). 

^^■^^^                                                1 3.  Historical  Infinitive  ( j  =75}. 

^^^^^B                                                         ^^1 

^^^^^f^                        I.  The  Indicative.                                            ^^| 

2e4.   The  Indicative  is  the  mood  of  liirect  assertions  or 

questions  when  there  is  no  modification  of  the  verbal  idea 

except  that  of  time.                                                                          ^^ 

^K,    a.  The  Tenses  of  the  Indicative  generally  denote  time,  ^%  present,      ^H 

^^t»j/,  ax  future,  with  reference  to  the  speaker  (§  a;6  ff.).                             ^| 

^1         J  Compare  note  on  /he  developmenl  of  lynMrJj  iiom  f  aralicii,?- if^V              ^^| 

276  Syntax:   The   Verb.  [§5  264,  aes, 

NcrTC  — Time  Ihm  draoted  is  oReo  called  atieltitt  lime,  as  dm  being  relalin 
10  ani'  other  lime  than  Ihe  speaker's  own. 

6.  Tbe  Indicative  is  sometimes  used  where  the  English  idiom  nwild 
suggest  the  Subjunctive :  as, — 

longum  est,  it  would  be  Icdiota  [it,  etc.], 
■alius  etat.  it  woulii have  been  better  [if,  etc], 
persequi  paiisum,  /  mighC/oliaar  up  [in  detail]. 

c.  The  Future  Indicative  is    sometimes  used  for   the    Imperative 

■d.  The  indicative  b  used  in  some  tdnds  of  conditions  (see  g§  306, 
308). 

t.  The  place  of  the  indicative  in  narration  is  sometiraea  supplied  bj 
the  Historical  Infinitive  (§  275). 

f.  In  Indirect  Discourse  a  narrative  clause  has  its  verb  in  the  Infini- 
tive (see  S§  272,  336). 

II.  The  SuBjiracTivE. 

265.  The  Subjunctive  in  general  expresses  the  verbal 
idea  with  some  modification^  such  as  is  expressed  in  Eng- 
lish by  auxiliaries,  by  the  infinitive,  or  by  the  rare  subjunc- 
tive (§  112.  b). 

The  uses  of  the  subjunctive  are  independent  or  depend- 
ent (cf.  head-note,  p.  274). 

a.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  independently  to  express  — 

1.  An  Exhortation,  Concession,  or  Command  {^Hortatory.  %  266). 

2.  A  WUh  {optative,  %  267). 

3.  A  Question  of  Doubt  or  Deliberation  (Deliberati-ve,  %  368). 

Note.— These  conslruetions  (wilh  Ihe  esceplion  of  some  forms  of  Deliberalivt 
Suhjunclive)  are  merely  diflerent  phases  of  the  same  use. 

Remark.— In  the  conclusion  [apedasis)  ot  Condllional  Sentences,  the  subjunc- 
tive ia  grammatical ly  independent,  though  logically  il  depends  on  some  condition 
expressed  or  implied  ({304),  The  so-called  Potential  Subjunctive  comes  undei 
this  head  (see  {  311.  a), 

i.  The  aubjuncdve  is  tised  in  dependent  clauses  to  express  — 

1  These  modificalions  ate  of  various  kinds,  each  dT  which  box  had  its  own 
special  development  (compat«  introductory  note,  p.  274).  The  sulijiuiclivc  in 
tJitln  haa  also  many  idiomatic  uses  (see  clauses  of  Resull  and  Time),  where  Ihe 
EntUsh  does  not  niod%  the  vertnl  idea  at  all,  but  expresses  it  diiectlj ;  but  in 
rAes*  cue*  rhe  Latii)  rnetdii  takes  a  ^Buua  <i^eii  <A  ^:Ml  a«iiaK,aad  hai  devet 
opad  tb  cAiiiIrvcdon  diflenntly  tioin  the  EnK^x^  "^m 


i  265, 26G.]  Hortatory  Subjunctive. 

1.  Purpose  {Final,  §  317). 

2.  Result  {Consecutive,  §  319). 

3.  Characteristic  (§  320). 

4.  Time  {Temporal,  §  325). 
5-  Indirect  question  (§  334). 
6.  Condition :  future  or  contrary  to  fact  (§§  307.  t,  c, 

c.  The  subjunctive  is  also  used  with  Particles  of  Comparison  (§  31 2)^8 
and  in  subordinate  clauses  in  the  Indirect  Discourse  (g  336). 

1.   Hortatory  Subjunctive, 
i.   The  Hortatory  Subjunctive  is  used  to  express  an 
fX/iortatioti,  a  command,  a  concession,  or  a  condition. 

The  Present  tense  refers  to  future  or  indefinite  time; 
the  Perfect,  to  past  time  or  completed  future  time;  the 
Imperfect,  to  present  or  past  time;  the  Pluperfect,  to  com-  . 
pleted  past  time :  as,  — 

liQs  latrones  interficUtmia  (B,  G.  vii.  58),  Irt 
caveant  inlEmperaotiain,  meminerint  verecu 

shHH  exciss  and  ehtrisk  modesty. 
Epicurus  hoc  videtit  (Acad.  ii.  7),  lit  Epicun 

Note  i. — The  simple  subjunctive  of  exhorlBIian  and  command  lakes  the  pres-    ' 
triK  leuae,  less  commoDiy  the  perfect.    The  Perfecl  represents  an  actioQ  as  com- 
pitted  Iti  future  time;  but  in  most  cases  is  hardly  to  be  distinguished  from  the 
Present.      Other  tenses  are  used  in  some  varieties  of  this  constmclion  (see  c. 

Remark,  —  The  negative  particle  used  with  the  hortatory  subjunc 

.  The  Second  Person  is  used  only  of  an  indefinite  subject,  except  Injl 
prohibition,  in  early  Latin,  and  in  poetry  (cf.  g  269.  b").     Thus,— 

initiriiLS  fortunae,  quas  fecre  neqne&,  defugietido  rellnqniU  (Tusc.  v.  4t),'^ 

heTBrongs  of  fortune,  which  you  cannel  tear,  leave  betiind  iy^igkt. 
ezoriire  oliquis  ultor  (id.  iv.  625),  rise,  son:  a-oenger. 
lo  bono  utare  dum  adsit,  cum  absit  ne  requlr&a  (Cat,  Maj.  10),  use  tk 

tlessiHg  while  it  is  present;  Tiiien  it  is  ivaating,  do  not  regret  it. 
i  confer&B  culpam  in  me  (Ter.  Eun.  387),  don't  lay  the  blame  an  me. 
oihil  IgnSveris  (Mur.  2^'),parAin  nothing. 

doceSa  iter  el  sacra  oslia  pandas  {/E.-a.  vi.  109),  shoJo  us  lie  way  and  lafM 
fen  Ike  sacred  portals. 

b.  In  Prohibitions  addressed  to  a  definite  persao,  the  ^rfect  t&  morail 
D  than  the  present  (cf.  §  269,  a)  : 


278  Sy/irax:   The   Verb.  [j  366- 

hoc  lacilij:  hoc  ni  fSceria  (Div.  ii.  61),  Ihou  shall  da  this;  then  shahm 

do  Ikal. 
tu  ne  qaaesieTis  (Hor.),  do  not  inquire, 
□ec  mihi  Ulad  dizeris  (I'm.  i.  7),  and  do  nut  say  that  la  me. 

c.  The  hortatory  subjunctive  is  especially  used  to  express  a  ConCes- 
Sio.v,  sometimes  willi  ut,  nC,  quamvia,  quamlibet,  or  similar  words 
(cf.  §3i3.fl):as,- 

iiierit  aliis!  tibi  quando  esse  coepit  (Vcrc.  i,  41),  suppost  he  ■u'a;  [su]  Is 

eikei-s,  alien  did  he  begin  to  be  to  you  ? 
nt  talionem  Plato  oiillam  aflerret  (Tusc.  i.  ji),  lAough  Plata  addueidm 

nemo  ia  nnquam  fuit:  ne  fnerit  (Or.  29),  there  never  was  sueh  a  one  [you 

will  say]  :  granted  (let  there  not  have  been). 
uS  Edt  sumtnum  malum  dolor,  malum  eerie  est  (Tusc.  ii.  ^"^j  granted  Ikal 

fain  is  Ttot  the  greatest  evil,  at  least  it  is  an  evil. 
qnsmvu  sceleiati  ill!  iiiisseiit  (De  Or.  i.  53),  ieteeaer  guilty  Aey  migAl 

have  beetle 
qaamvis  comis  in  amicitiis  tuendls  faerit  {Fin,  ii.  25),  amiable  as  he  may 

have  been  in  keeping  his  friendships  (let  him  have  been  as  amiable  »i 


mfleted fshire  time,  the  Plupeifeel  10  comfleled  action  in  fast  ti 
in  being  usually  unlrue]. 
Note  a.  —  The  Indicative  is  oRen  used  in  concessions  (see  J313). 


d.  The  hortatory  subjunctive  may  be  used  to  denote  a  Proviso  (see 
§  3"4). 

e.  The  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  of  the  hortatory  subjunctive  denote 
an  unfulfilled  obligation  in  past  time  ;  as,  — 

moreretar,  inquies  (Rab.  Post.  10),  he  should  have  died,you  viill  say. 
potius  dlceret  (Off.  iii.  22),  he  should  rather  have  said. 
ne  poposcisBeB  (Atl.  11.  i),  you  should  not  have  asked. 

saltern  aliquid  de  pqndere  ^triiiasBt  (Fin.  iv,  20),  al  Itatl  ke  liauldhaoe 
taken  something  from  the  laeight. 

Remark.  — This  useoflhesubjun 
use  in  apodosis  {poleHtial,  {  311.  a).  T 
should  or  CBghl  (not  looali). 

Note.  —  f n  this  use  the  Plnpeifect  dWcTs  from  the  Im^ifcel  aoly  in  own 
clearly  represenling  the  time  (or  action  a^  monscnlcay  ot  a*  post,        _^^^^^_ 


I 


optative  Subjunctive.  279,  j 

2.  Optative  SubjuuctiTe. 
2B7>  The  Subjunctive  is  used  to  express  a  Wish.  The  I 
■  present  tense  denotes  the  wish  2&possible,  the  imperfect  as  1 
unaccotnplisked  in  present  time,  the  pluperfect  as  unacconf  | 
plished  in  past  time.     Thus,  — 

ita  Tivam  (Att.  v.  15),  m  may  I  live  (as  true  os  I  live). 

ne  vivain  si  seio  (id.  iv.  ih'),  I  wish  I  may  not  ii-ue  if  line 

tli  te  perdnint  (Deiot.  7),  tkt  goJs  confiunii  Itite  ! 

valeajit,  v^leant,  cives  mei;  TfileaJit,  waxt  incolumes  (^lil.  34),  farewell  I 

[he  says],  my  felleiu-cilixens  ;  may  Ihty  ht  if  cure  /rem  harm.  I 

di  facerant  sine  patie  (brem  (Ov.  Met.  viii.  72),  would  thai  /kt  gods  allowed  1 

metabe  viilhout  a  fal/icr  (but  Ihey  do  not)  1 

a.  The  Perfect  in  this  use  is  antiquated :  as,  — 

male  di  tibi  faxint  (Flaut.  Cure.  I3l)>  '""y  the gedi  do  Ihee  a  mischief. 
quod  omen  di  aveiterint  (Phil,  xii  6,  14,  in  a  religious  formula),  and  1 
may  the  gods  avert  this  omen. 

b.  The  Optative  Subjunctive  is  often  preceded  by  the  particles  utl  I 
(ut),  utinam,  o  si:  as, — 

nt  pereab  positum  riibigiae  teluui  (Hoc.  Sat.  ii.  l),  may  the  weapon 

used  perish  with  ritst, 
falsua  utinam  vales  aim  (Liv.  xxi,),  Iiiiisk  T  may  be  a  false  prophet. 
utinam  P,  Clodius  viveret  (Mil.  38),  -would  that  Clodius  were  now  al 
utinam  me  martuum  vidisaes  (Q.  Fr.  i.  3),  wouldyou  had  seta  me  dead. 
o  M  angulus  ille  acoedat  (Hor.  Sat  ii,  6.  8),  vh  I  if  that  corner  migUM 

only  he  added. 

Note  1.  — The  subjunctive  wilh  uM,  etc.,  was  ongiaaWy  deliierati-ae,  n 
haw  aay  !,  ele.  ({  96B),    The  subjunctive  with  5  sl  {fcelical)  is  a  protasis  (f  31a 
r)  ;  hI  alone  is  someliines  used  to  express  a  wish  in  the  same  way :  as, — 
a  none  se  nobis  ille  aureus  ramus  oetendat  (^n.  vi.  iS;),  if  now  thai 

golden  branch -jioutd  only  show  i/self  la  us  I 
Note  a. — The  subjunctire  of  Wish  without  a  particle  la  rarely  found  !n  the 
iperfecl  or  pluperfect  except  by  sequence  of  tenses  in  Indirect  Discourse  ({  386): 

:  veneriila  Ceres  ita  cuhno  Hiirgeret  alto  (Hor.  Sat.  i!.  2.  124),  and  Ceres 
worshi/tpcd  [with  libations]  thai  so  she  mighl  rise  with  tail  stali.  [Di- 
rect :  ita  BOrgas.] 

.  Telim  and  vellem,  and  theu-  compounds,  with  a  subjunctive  or 
e  often  equivalent  to  an  optative  subjunctive;  as, — 
di  Menedemo  vellem  veruin  fuisset,  de  rcgina  velim  verum  «dt  (Att.  ir. 
16),  ab^Ht  Menedemta  I  wish  it  had  betjt   irvt ;   about  the  q«cm  1 
liejfe  1/  ma_y  it. 


28o  Syntax:   The   Verb. 

nBUem  acddisset  tempos  (Jam.  iii.  lo'i,  I  wish  the  time  never  Had  eomi. 

miillem  Cerberum  memeres  (Tiisc.  i.  6),  I  had  ralher  have  kaJ  you  ajrai' 
of  Ctrbfna  (I  shonld  have  preferred  Ihat  yon  feared  C.J. 

Note. — VBllin,elc..in  ibis  use.areslricllyapodoses  with  ihe  protasis  omineJ 
(}  311.  i).  The  Ikmgvntkti  is  leaUy  a  substantive  clause  used  as  abject  ol  tbe 
verb  of  wisliing  ({  331.  i). 

[For  Concessive  Subjunctive,  ser  {  313 ;  for  Pole^al  Subjunctive,  5ee  \  311.] 

3.  Deliberative  Subjnnctive. 

268.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  questions  implying 
(i)  doubt,  indigHation,  or  {2)  an  impossibility  of  the  thing 
being  done :  as,  — ■ 

quid  hoc  homine  &cias?  qnod  supplicium  dignum  libldini  eius  ilkVenUi 
(VeiT.  ii.  16),  tekat  art  yeu  le  do  teilk  this  man  t  vihal fit  penalty  can 
yeu  devise  fir  hii  tiiantenaess? 

an  ego  non  Tenirem  (Phil.  ii.  a),  lokat,  should  I  not  have  come? 

quid  dicerem  (Alt.  vi.  3),  iBhalmos  I  to  say  f 

mibi  umquam  boiioEuni  piaesidium  defutiinuii  pntarem  (Mil.  34],  caulJ  1 
tiini  lhat  the  drftnte  ef  good  mtn -would ever fnil  tntt 

quia  eniiti  cel&verit  ignem  (Ov.  Her,  xv.  7),  who  could  conceal  thefiame  f 

Remark.— This  use  is  apparently  derived  from  the  Hortatoty  Subjunctive: 
Quid  Iftciainus?  =  tacl&mus  [oUauid],  qi:iJd7  lilusdo — lahalf  Onceestob- 
lished,  it  uos  readily  transferred  10  the  past:  quid  faclam?  what  AM  I toi»f 
quid  facerem?  vAatyiki  I  to  doT  Queslioiw  implying  impossibiiily.  however, 
cannot  be  distinguished  from  Apodosis  (cE  {  305).  ^^ 

Note.— The  Deliberative  Subjunctive  is  somediiies  called  Duiilative.         ^^H 

III.  The  Imperative.  ^^| 

269.  The  Imperative  is  used  in  Commands  and  En- 
treaties :  as,  — 

conBolite  vobis,  proBpicIte  pBtriae,cSnierviitevas(Cat.iv.  2),  itoivacitrr 

fir  your sfh'es,  guard  the  country ,  preserve  yourselves. 
die  Maice  Tulli  aententiam,  Marcus  Tullius,  stale  your  opinion, 
ie  ipsum  concnte,  examine yeursilf. 

Tive,  vftleqne  (Hor,  Sal.  ii.  5.  iici),  farewell,  bless  you  (live  and  be  well) ! 
miserere  animi  non  digna  feientis  {Mn.  ii.  144),  pity  a  soul  hearing  un- 
deserved mots. 
Note.— In  Negative  Commands  {prohliitions)  the  PieBCOt  Imperalive  with 
nS  is  used  by  early  writers  and  the  poets:  as, — 
ne  time  (Plaut.  Ctu-c.  520),  don't  be  afraid 

nimium  ne  crede  coloii  (Eel.  ii.  1 7),  trust  not  too  mtuh  to  eomplexian. 
e^uo  ne  credite  (^n.  ii.  4S),  trust  not  the  horse. 
^^■riUte  Future  Imperative  wiihiiBinla>*'3  anafoima\-5iece^,Vita,'i.\i*5™\ 


g  ae9.J  The  Imperative;  Prokibilion.  281 

a.  Prohibition  is  regularly  expressed  in  classic  prose;  — 

1.  By  ne  with  the  second  person  of  the  Perfect  Subjunctive:  as, — 
DC  teiritus  fueris  (Tac.  H.  1.  16),  dott'l  A-  alarmed. 

nS'vos  quidem  iudices  ci  qui  me  absolviatis  murtem  timueiitiB  (Tusc.  L 
41),  nor  mtatyouftar  death,  you  jud^a  ihat,  etc. 

2.  By  nSH  with  the  infinitive :  as,— 

noli  pntire  (Fam.  liv.  2),  ds  not  suppost  (be  unwilling  to  suppose), 
nolite  cogere  socioa  (Verr.  i.  82),  do  not  compel  Ike  allies. 
Note.— The  poets  frequcndy  use  instead  of  nOlI  olher  words  of  similar  m*»tf 
to8{cf,  §a73,()!  OS,— 

parcepias  scelciare  manus(jSi,  iil.  4a),  jtrfcnr  A)  difiU  your  piaushamA. 
cetera  nutte  loqui  (Hor.  Epod.  13,  ■j'),  forbear  to  say  the  rest. 
fllge  quaerere  (Hot.  Od.  i.  9.  13),  do  not  inquire'. 

3.  By  oa-ve  with  or  without  118  (colloquially  fao  nS)  with  the  Present 
or  Perfect  Subjuactive  •  (§  266.  d) :  as,  — 

cave  pules  (Att.  viL  20),  don't  tiini. 

cave  dixeris,  don'l  say  so. 

cave  faxiB  (Ter.  Heaut.  187),  don't  do  it. 

fac  neqaid  aliud  cutea  (Fam.  xvi.  11),  see  Ihat  you  alliitd  lo  nothing  else. 
I       Note.  —  Olher  nCEativea  aomelimes  [ake  the  place  of  OS :  as,  — 
B    non  dubilaveria  (Sen.  Q,  N.  i.  3,  3), you  must  not  doubt. 
W^   nihil  ignoveria  (Mur.  6^),  grant  no  pardon  (pardon  nothing), 

6.  General  Prohibitions  addressed  to  no  definite  person  are  regularly 
expressed  by  the  Present  Subjunctive  with  116  (cf.  c,  below) :  as,  — 

denique  islo  bono  iJtare  dum  adait :  cum  obsit  ne  requiraa  (Cat.  Maj,  10), 
ttt  shor/f  use  this  good  vihiU  present ;  ivhen  ivantingt  do  not  regret  it. 


Note. — The  poets  and  early  wtifers  sometimes  use  the  Present  Subjunctive 
iih  d3  in  prohibitions  not  general:  as, — 
inolcslus  ne  ais  (Plant.  Most.  771),  don't  be  troublesome. 
ne  sis  patruus  mibi  (Hor.  Sal.  ii.  3.  S3),  doiCt  be  a  [hatsb]  uncle  to  me. 
c.  The  third  person  of  the  imperative  b  antiquated  or  poetic :  — 
oUis  saliis  populi  supceina,  ISk  estS,  &e  safety  of  Ike  people  shall  be  their 

first  law. 
iijsla  impetia  eantS,  eisque  elves  modesli  parentfi  (Leg.  iii.  3),  let  there 

be  lawful  authorities,  and  let  the  citizens  strictly  obey  them. 
NoTK.— In  prose  the  Hortatory  Subjunclivo  is  commonly  used  instead  (f  a55):  as, 
haec  Igrtor  lex  in  amicitia  Banciatur  (Lxl.  iz),  let  this  lajo  then  be  laid 
of  friendship. 


\      1  In  prohibitions  the  Subjunclivf  v.iili  nS  is  honatOY^  ■,  &aX  •nftv'SK^* 'i*  «»■ 
MJect  claiae  (originally  hoilalory,  cf.  }  331./  Rem.l.  ^^J*^^^^^" 


282  Syntax:  The    Vtrb.  [S  269, 

d.  The  Future  Imperalive  is  used  in  commands,  etc.,  where  there  is 
R  distinct  reference  ta/itliire  time:  viz., — 

1.  In  connection  with  some  form  that  marks  a  condition  precedent 
(as  7i  future,  a.  future-perfect,  or  an  imperative').    Thus,  — 

Pliyllida  mitle  mihi,  meus  est  natalis,  lolla;  cum  faciain  vitula.  pro  frugibiu 
ip»e  venitA  (Kcl.  iii.  76),  undPhyUii  to  me,  it  is  my  tirttuiay,  Mas: 
u-Atn  I  [shall]  sacrifice  a  keif cr  for  ihi  harvisl,  came  yourself 

die  quibus  in  lerris,  etc.,  et  Phyllida  solus  habeto  (id.  iii.  107),  felt  in 
nJlul  lanilSt  etc.,  and  have  Phyllis  for  yourself , 

2.  With  adverbs  or  other  expressions  of  Time:  as, — 

eta»  petita,  ilabilur  (PI.  Mere.  769),  asli  lo-merrirw  [and]  il  shall  degipiH. 

3.  In^fM/'d/f/tm'fMWj,  as  Precepts,  Statutes,  and  Wills:  as, — 
cum  vklctQdini  consulueris,  lum  consolito  nSvigationi  (Fam  xvi  4),  vAe* 

ytu  have  attended  to  your  heallh,  then  took  lo  your  sailiug. 
1)  luris  civilii  ciislos  esto  (Leg.  iii.  3),  let  him  (the  prastor)  be  the  guardian 

tf  civil  right. 
DoTei  flante,  ni  ftiatO,  semen  ne  iaeitfi  (Plin.  H.  N.  xviii.  77),  -^ehen  du 

Korlh  teiiut  iltnvs,  fflou^'A  not  nor  loui  your  seed. 

t.  Tlie  verbs  boIB,  meminl,  and  habea  (in  the  sense  oi  consider), 
rcgulftrly  use  the  Future  Imperative  instead  of  the  Present:  as, — 
filiolo  me  auclum  •cit6  {All.  \.  2),  learn  that  1  am  blessed -aiitk  a  Utile  hey. 
Bie  hftbitiO,  nii  Tito  (Fam.  xvi.  4),  so  understand  it,  my  good  Tire. 
de  pnlla  memento,  amabo  (PI.  Asin.),  pray,  dear,  remember  aioul  tit 

f.  Tlie  Future  Indicative  is  sometimes  used  for  the  imperative;  and 
quln  {why  noti)  with  the  Present  Indicative  may  liave  the  force  of  a 
command:  as, — 

u  quid  nccidetit  novi,  fkciea  ut  sciam  (Fam.  xlv.  S),  yeu  will  let  me  knew 

if  anything  new  happens. 
quin  accipis  (Ter.  Heaul.  iv.  7)?  here,  take  it  (why  not  take  il?). 

g.  Instead  of  the  simple  Imperative,  ctlrS,  tac,  or  velim,  followed 
by  the  subjunctive  with  or  without  ut  (§  33 1-/-  R.)  is  often  ui 
especially  in  colloquial  language :  as,  — 

curi  ut  R5mae  sis  (Alt.  i.  1),  lake  care  to  be  at  Rome. 

&C  cSres  Qt  5ri3  (Ter.  Eun.  500),  do  try  to  induce  [him]. 

fao  ut  valeludinem  cures  {Fam.  xiv.  17),  see  that  you  take  care  of  yom 

health.     [Cf.  Tus  eo.    fac,  amabo  (Ter.  Eun.  531),  I'm  going  into  tit 

country.    Ho,  flense, 
donu  adsltis  faoite  (id.  505),  tc  at  home,  do. 
earn  mihi  velim  minis  (Att.  v"m,  i\),  I  luisH  jou  ■mould 


fym 
ntotii 

J 


IS  269,  270.]  The  hifimtive.  283: 

'   h.  In  the  Indirect  Discourse  all  imperative  forms  of  speech  are  rep*] 
esenled  by  the  Subjunctive  (see  §  339). 

i.  The  Imperative  sometimes  has  the  force  of  a  Conditional  Clausftl 
[see  §  310,  *). 

IV.  The  Infinitive. 

Note. — The  Infinitive  is  properly  a  noun  denoting  llie  action  of  the  verb  ab- 

tradly.    II  diflers,  however,  firom  otlier  abslmct  nouns  in  the  following  points: 

1}  it  admits  in  many  cases  of  the  dislincUon  ol  lense;  (aj  il  is  modihed  by  od- 

tris,  not  by  ad/iclivts:  (3)  it  governs  the  same  case  as  its  verb ;  (4)  il  is  limited 

The  Lalin  Inlinilivs  is  the  dative  (or  locative)  caie  of  such  a  noun  and  was 
>riginally  naed  to  denote  Purpose;  but  it  has  in  many  consiruclions  developed  into 
L  substitute  for  a  finite  verb.     Hence  the  variety  of  its  use. 

In  its  use  as  a  verb,  the  Infinitive  may  lake  a  Subject- Accusative  (f  ^40,/), 
priginally  (he  object  of  another  vetb  on  which  the  Infinitive  depended.  Thus  iU't)eS 
tB  vaJSre  a  ]iieiBi\y,  I  a/nmand  you  fir  dcrng  tm/Ucf.  substantive  clauses,  ^330], 

1.  InSiiitive  as  Subject,  etc. 
270.   The  Infinitive,  with  or  without  a  subject -accusa- 
tive,  may  be  used  with  est  and  similar  verbs  (i)  as  the 
Subject,  {2}  in  Apposition  with  the  subject,  or  (3)  as  a 
Predicate  Nominative.     Thus,  — 

1.  Subject;  as,  — 

dolere  malum  est  (Rn.  v.  28,  84),  /o  iuffeT pain  is  an  evil. 
bellum  est  sua  vitia  nosae  (Alt.  ii.  17),  il's  a  fine  thing  la  know  one's  owm 

fault! . 
pulchrmn  est  benefacere  rei  publlcae  (Sail.  Cat.  3),  it  is  a  noble  thing  is 

htnejil  the  state. 
motos  praestat  componere  Hiictiis  {Ma.  i.  135),  it  is  better  to  ealm  tkt 

Irouiled  waves. 
hoc  facers  illnm  mihi  quam  prosit  nescio  (Alt.  ii.  1   6),  /  don't  know  kw 

his  doing  this  ben/fits  me. 

2.  Itt  Apposition  with  the  Subject;  as, — 

proinde  quasi  iniuriam  facere  id  demum  esset  imperio  iitl  (Sail.  Cat.  iz), 
just  eu  if  this, — to  mmmit  injustice,  were  to  tise  power.  [Here  facere 
is  in  apposition  with  id.] 

3.  Predicate  Nominative :  as, — 
id  est  convenientec  naturae  vivere  (Fin.  iv.  i;,  41),  that  is  to  live  in  coit- 

fermily  with  nature.     [Cf.  ttti  in  the  last  example.] 


284  Sj'n:ax:   The   Verb.  [|  270. 


tkit  vtry  fkirtg  iHBst  -airttifud,  not  Ib  it  ahtn  em  has  been. 

utvidere,  gestire.  laetiii,  hacc  omoia  morbos  Graed  ippdlant 
(Tusc  nL  4,  7],  lb  feci  fity,  envy,  deiire,  jay,  —  all  lAeu  lAirfp  Ai 
Greiis  eaS  diieatei. 

Note  a. —  An  Apposilive  or  Predicale  noun  uied  wilh  an  tnlinitiTe  in  anj  of 
ihese  constiuctions  is  pui  in  the  Accusative,  whether  the  infinitive  has  a  subject  ei- 
pressed  or  not.    Thus, — 

non  esse  CapidDin  peconia  (Paiad.  63),  to  be  free  from  desires  (nol  U  be 
desirous)  is  money  in  hand. 

a.  I.  The  infinitive  as  subject  is  not  common  except  with  est  and 
simQar  verbs.     (See  examples  above.) 

Note.  —  Id  this  use  the  abstract  idea  expressed  by  the  infinitive  is  represented 
as  haiHng  mBU  fualigi  or  bihnging  to  sone  Iking. 

3.  But  occasionally,  especially  in  less  careful  writers  and  in  poetry, 
the  infinitive  is  used  as  the  subject  of  verbs  which  are  apparently  more 
active  in  meaning;  as, — 

quos  omnis  cadem  capere,  eadem  Sdisse,  eadcm  metnere  in  iinuni  coe^l 

(Jug.  31),  allafTukem  the  fact  of  desiring,  hating,   and  fearing  the 

same  things  has  united  into  one. 
ingenuis  dididsse  fideliter  arlei  emollit  mores  (Ov.  ex  P.  ti.  9.  ^),failk- 

fvlly  to  have  learned  liberal  arts  softens  the  manners. 
pOBSe  loqui  eripitUT  (Ov.  M.  ii,  483),  the  power  of  speech  is  taken  away, 
non  cadil  invidere  in  sapienletn  (Tosc.  iii.  id,  zi),  the  sage  is  not  liable  to 

envy  (to  envy  does  not  fall  upon  the  sage), 
iitiic  nihil  dolere  non  sine  magna  meccede  contingit  (Tusc.  iii.  6,  12},  that 

apathy  is  not  ta  be  had  except  at  great  cost  (does  not  fall  to  one'l 

lot). 

b.  The  infinitive  is  used  with  many  impersonal  verbs  and  expressions, 
partly  as  subject  and  partly  as  complementary  infinitive  (§  371). 

Such  are  libet,  licet,  oportet,  decet,  placet,  visum  est,  pudet, 
piBBt,  necease  eat,  opus  eat,  etc. 

id  primum  in  poetis  oerni  licel  (De  Or.  iii.  7),  this  iiiay  be  seen  first  is 

p«ls. 
reperiebal  quid  (Kdopus  esset  {Gtvt.  $•)),  he  favnJ  U'hal  needed  to  be  said. 
haec  praescripta  servanlem  licet  magnilice   rtvere   (Off.  L  i6),  one  miff 

observes  these  precepts  may  litt  nebly. 
C>to  negal  ius  esse  qui  miles  non  sit  pngiMre  cum  hoste  (Off.  I.  tO> 

Caf  says  it  is  net  right  that  one  who  it  not  a  sotSer  iMomU  fi^  aiA 

est  morf  (Tiisc.  ii.  1).  it  is  tucesvtry  ta  die.  ^^^^^H 


270,  371.J  Complementary  Infiiiitive. 


quid  Bttinel  gloriosc  loqnl  nUi  conitanter  loquare  (Fm.  ii.  27,  89),  loAo/'l 
good  dors  it  do  ta  talk  boastfully  unless  you  sprak  eimsistinlly  ? 

noQ  lubct  enim  mihi  deploriire  vllam  (Cat,  Maj.  23.  84),y^r  it  does  net  \ 
please  me  to  lament  my  life. 

neque  me  nxisae  paenitet  (id.  23,  84),  /  do  not  feel  sorry  lo  have  lived. 

iam  pridem  gttbemirB  me  taedebat  (Alt.  ii.  7,  4),  I  had  long  been  iirtdti/% 
ieing  pilot. 

Note  i.— These  are  not  generally  real  cases  of  the  infinilive  used  as  subject,    ' 
Jnu  approach  Iha!  construction. 

Note  a.  — For  the  subject  of  such  infinitives,  and  ; 
djecdves  agreeing  with  the  subject,  see  f  f  aji.  c,  373.  a, 

e.  Rarely  the  infinitive  b  useil  exactly  lilce  the  accusative  of  a 

beate  Tivere  alii  in  alio,  vos  in  yoluptite  ponitis  (Fin,  ii.  27,  86),  a  iafpy  \ 

Ufe  different  [pliilosoplieis]  iase  on  different  things,  you  on  pleasure. 
quBin  multa  . . .  facimuE  causa  amicorum,  precari  ab  indigno,  suppUciurs  1 
etc.  (LecL  16,  57),  hoai  many  things  vie  do  for  our  friends  sake,  ask   1 
favors  from  an  unworthy  person,  resort  to  entreaty,  etc. 
nihil  explo^tum  habeas,  ne  amire  quidein  aut  amari  (Lcel.  26,  97),  j*! 

have  nothing  assured,  not  even  loving  and  ieing  loved. 
Note.  —  Many  complemenlary  and  other  constructions  approach  a  proper  J 
ccusalive  use  of  the  infinitive,  but  their  development  has  been  different  from  \ 
dat  of  the  examples  under  c.    Thus,— 
avaritia . . ,  superhiam,  cradelilitem,  deos  neglegere,  omnia  venalia  }is,bei«    | 
edocuit  (Sail,  Cat.  10),  avarite  taught  pride,  cruelty,to  n/glici  the  gods, 
and  to  hold  everything  at  a  price, 

2.   Complementary  InfinitiTe. 

271.   Verbs  which  imply  another  action  of  the  same  sub- 
ject to  complete  their  meaning  take  the  infinitive  without  1 
a  subject-accusative:  as, — 

hoc  queo  dicere  (Cat.  Maj.  10),  this  I  can  say. 

mltto  quaereie  (Rose.  Am.),  I  emit  to  ask. 

veteot  laudare  praeaentem   (N.  D.  i.  21),  I  fear  lo  praise  a 
face  (one  who  is  present). 

oro  Bt  matiires  venire  (Att.  iv.  1),  I  begyou  leill  make  haste  to  a, 

oHivisci  noa  possum  quae  volo  (Fin.  it.  32,  104),  /  eaiinot  forget  that   J 
■which  I  wish. 

desine  me  id  docere  (Tusc.  ii.  is,  29),  eease  . 

audeo  dicere,  /  venture  to  say. 

tloqiu  posse  coepi  (Cic),  /  tegan  to  be  able  lo 
Such  are  verbs  denoting  to  be  able,  dare,  undertake,  remember,  for- 
,  be  tUCttstomed,  iegitt,  continue,  cease,  Aesitaie,  leant-,  kitovl  kow^ 
•r,  2nd  the  like. 


Syntax:   The   Verb.  [g  271.     I 


Note.— 


Bijecls  can  hardly  be  dislinguished  from  this  consi 
subject  exp[E55ed.  Thus  T0I6  dicere  and  volo  me  dlcere  mean  the  same 
thing,  Iwishlo  sfeak;  bm  the  laller  is  objecl-infinilive,  while  the  tbimet  is  mn 
apparently  different  in  origin  and  cQn5iniciion  from  quefl  dicere  [cemplemaitari 
injSniUvt),  and  again  TOlfl  eum  dicere,  /  ictiA  Sim  to  speai,  is  essentially  dit 
ferenlftom  either, 

a.  Many  verbs  take  either  a  subjunctive  clause  or  a  complementary 
infinitive,  without  difference  of  meaning.  Such  are  verbs  signifying 
•ttiillmgKess,  necessity,  propriety,  resol-ve,  coiMmand,  prohibiiicn,  effort, 
andthelikeCcf.  §331):  as.- 

Btudent  eioellere  (Off.  i,  32),  l&ey  aim  lo  excel. 

catn  statuisacm  Bcribere  ad  te  aliquid  (Off.  i.  z),  when  I  had  resehed h 

addrea  something  to  you. 
islam  ezheredare  in  animo  habcbat  (Rose.  Am.  iS),  he  had  it  iu  mindto 

depriiie  him  of  Ike  inheritanee. 

Note  i,— Whh  some  of  these  verbs  an  infinitive 
be  used  as  object,  taking  the  place  of  a  comfteiaealat 
subject  of  the  infinitive  and  that  of  the  main  verb  are  c 


Note  a.— Some  verbs  of  these  classes  never  lake  ilie  subjunctive,  but  are 
quos  tneri  debenl  deaeruat  (Off.  i.  2),  they  forsake  those  whom  they  ihavli 

non  lubet  fugete  aveo  pngnare  (Alt.  xviii.  3),  /  have  no  desire  to  rvn 
aviity,  Pm  anxious  tofighi. 

b.  Some  verbs  of  these  classes — iubeB  and  vetfl  regularly — may 
take  (as  object)  the  infinitive  with  a  subject'  different  from  that  of  the 
main  verb  (see  §  331.  a):  as,  — 

ragua  Inferrl  inbet  (Liv.  xlii.  39),  he  orders  the  standards  to  he  advaHced. 
Pompeius  .  . .  rem  ad  atraa   ditlflci  studebat   (B.  C  i.  4),  Pomfey  was 

c.  A  Predicate  Noun  or  P 
takes  the  case  of  the  subject  ( 

fierique  studebam  eiu»  priidcntia  doctior  (lal.  1,  1),  f  loas  eager  to  ieconie 
more  vise  through  his  wisdom. 

1  This  construction,  though  in  many  cases  different  from  the  two  preceding 
shades  off  imperceptibly  into  them.  In  none  of  the  uses  under  f  aji  is  the  infini- 
tiVeswierflySubject  or  Object;  butilsmeaTimg,ii4ENe\05e4bow.  the  orif^nal  oh 
of^nr^e  (cf.  §  273.  a).  *^H 


§5  271,  272.] 

Infinitive  with  Subject-Accusative.             : 

scio  qnam  soleas  ease  occnpatni 

i'           bravia  esse  laboto  obHcnrus  fio 

^B             become  obscurt. 

(Hot.  A. 

vi.  21),  /  knim  Ami:  iusy  you 
P.  25).  Jslrusgl/  to  he  briif.  1  \ 

Hi  Note.- If  1 

is  impersonal,  a  predicate  n 
:..  see  J  >rz.  a.  a).    Thiis.- 

1 

fpetegnni  oEGctum  est  caiaime  xa  alien!  esse  cepiiblica  coiioanm  (Off.  i.  34),  J 
1/  ii  titi  du^  o/a  stranger  In  ie  by  ns  means  curUus  in  a  foreign  state,  1 
d.  For  the  infinitive  in  poetry  instead  of  a  substantive  clause  of  X 
rpose,  seeS33i.^. 
3.  Infinitive  with  Subject-Acoueative. 
272.   The  Infinitive,  with  Subject -Accusative,  is    used  I 
with  verbs  and  other  expressions   of  knowing,  thinking,  ] 
telling,  and  perceiving  {Indirect  Discourse,  §  336) :  ^  as,  — 
(licit  montem  ab  hostibus  teneii  (B.  G.  i.  22),  kt  says  that  the  kilt  is  hetd 

by  the  enemy.     [Direct;  mons  ab  hostibus  tenetnr.] 
Remark.  — The  Infinilive  Clause  may  he  — i.  (he  Dlrec!  Object  of  the  verb: 
Hs,  Oaesarem  adesae  nnntlftvlt,  he  rrported  that  Casar  was  present;  3.  ihe 
Subject  of  the  same  verb  in  the  passive;  as,  Caeaarem  adesse  n" 
oat,  (/  lofli  reported  t&at  Casar  was  present;    3.  the  Predici 


a.  I.  With  certain  impet^onal  verbs  and  expressions  that  take  the 
infiifltive  as  an  appareni  subject  (5  270.  b),  the  personal  subject  of  the 
action  may  be  expressed  — 

II.  By  a  dative,  depending  on  the  verb  or  verbal  phrase :  or, 
2.  By  an  accusative  expressed  as  the  suliject  of  the  infinitive.    Thus, 
rogaiit  at  id  aibi  facere  liceat  (B.  G.  i.  7),  they  ask  that  ii  be  allowed  them 
to  do  this. 
SI  licet  vivere  enm  qnem  Sex.  Naevins  non  voit  (Quinct.  94),  if  it  U  alimaed 
a  man  to  live  against  the  luill  of  Sextus  Nxvius  (whom  S.  N.  does  not 
wish). 
ijuid  est  tam  secundum  naturam  quam  aenibuB  emoci  (Cat.  Maj.  19,  71), 
what  it  so  mud  in  accordance  with  nature  as  for  aid  men  to  die? 
exstingni  bomim  suo  tempore  optabile  cat  (id,  23,  86),  it  is  desirable  for  9 
man  to  die  at  the  appointed  lime. 

2.  With  Uoet  regularly,  and  other  verbs  occasionally,  a  predicate 
noun  or  adjective  following  the  infinitive  may  be  in  the  dative :  as,  — 


■ 
t 


!S8  Syntax:   Tlie    Verb.  \%%  272. 273, 

licuil  esse  otiSsO  Thcroislocli  (Tuse,  i.   15,  33),  Thcmiitaclet  might  ham 

i/m  itiaelizii  (it  11  as  allowed  to  T.  to  be  inactive), 
mihi  n^legenti  esse  non  ^KiX.^M,t.\.\^),  I  must  noi  bitugiigtnl.    [But 

also  D^legeDtem.] 
cur  his  esse  HberoB  noD  licet  (Flacc  71),  aikj/  is  il  net  aUewtd  that  nn 

Ub,fr,,t 
ron  est  stantibns  omnihus  necesse  dicere  (Marc  11),  it  is  noi  neciisary 

for  all  to  sptak  standing.  ^- 

expedit  bonis  ease  vobis  (Ter.  HeauL  ii.  4,  8),  it  is  for  your  admintagi  le  ' 

be  g0t}ti. 
mediocribus  esse  poetis  non  homines  non  di  coocessere  (Hor.  A.  P.  37a), 

neiihtr  gods  nor  men  ha-oe  granted  to  ordinary  men  to  be  poets. 

\e,  atr^5^\ 

vcl  pace  vel  bcllo  clunia  fieri  licet  (Sail.  Cat.  3),  anr  can  become  illuslrioia 


b.  In  poetry,  by  a  Greek  idiom,  a  Predicate  Nouq  or  Adjective  in 
the  indirect  discourse  sometimes  agrees  with  the  subject  of  the  mMi 

vir  bonus  et  sapiens  ait  ease  paratos  (Hor.  Ep.  i.  7),  a  good  and  wise  man 
says  he  is  prepared,  iK.     [In  prose:  ait  aa  ease  paratum.] 

sensil  medios  delapEma  iu  hostes  (/En.  ii.  377),  he  found  himself  /alien 
among  the  foe.     [Id  prose:  ae  esse  delapanm.] 

4.  Infinitive  of  Purpoao. 
273.   In  a  few  cases  the  Infinitive  retains   its  original 
meaning  of  Purpose. 

a.  The  infinitive  is  used  aAer  luibeS,  d5,  miniatrO,  in   isolated 
passages  instead  of  a  subjunctive  clause :  as,  — 

tantum  habco  polliceti  (Fam.  i.  5),  so  mueh  I  have  to  premise.     [Here 

(he  Tnore  formal  construction  would  be  qnod  pollicear.J 
ul  lovi  bibere  ministcaret  (Tusc,  i.  26),  to  serve  Javr^itk  wine  (lo  drink), 
meridic  bibere  ilalo  (Cato  R.  R.  S9),  give  (to)  drink  at  noonday. 

b.  ParStua,  BuGtus  and  their  compounds  (used  as  adjectives)  take 
the  infinitive,  like  the  verbs  from  which  they  come:  as, — 

id  quod  parati  aunt  facere  (Quin.  2),  tliat  which  they  are  rrady  to  do. 
adauefacti  auperSri  (B.  G.  vi.  24),  used  lo  being  conquered. 
currii  stiocadere  sueti  (.Cn.  iii.  541).  accustomed  la  being  harn/ssed  to  the 
fAariat. 
copiSs  beMre  consuetas  (B.  Att.  ii),  form  «i(il  lo  JigMl* 


Infinitive  of  Purpos 


\ 


\ 


Note. — These  words  n 
conarucHon  (J  396  ff.)  eilhe 
Thus,— 

alendis  liberis  sail!  (Tac.  Ann.  xiv.  27),  accialBnted lo  supporting  children. 

insnetus  navigandi  (B.  C.  iJi,  49),  unttsed  to  making  voyages. 

corpora  inauita  ad  onera  portanda  (id.  i.  78),  bodies  unaccialomed  le  carry 

{,  In  poetry  and  later  writers  almost  any  verb  may  have  the  infini- 
tive, after  the  analogy  of  verbs  of  more  literal  meaning  that  take  it  in 

furit  le  repcriro  (Hot.  Od.  i.  15.  17),  he  rages  lo  find  Ihee.     [A  forcible 

way  of  saying  cnpit  (|  271,  3).] 
■aevit  exslingucre  nomen  (Ov.  M.  i.  200),  ht  rages  to  blol  out  the  namt. 
fuge  quaerece  (llor.  Od.  i.  9.  13)  forbear  lo  ask  (of.  %  269.  a.  2.  note), 
parce  icelerare  (^^n.  iii.  ^^,  forbear  lo  follule. 

d.  Many  adjectives  take  the  infinitive  in  poetry  following  a  Greek 

Idurua  eompSnere  versus  (Hor.  Sat.  i.  4.  8),  harsh  in  eompasiag  verse. 
cantari  dignua  (Eel.  v,  54),  viarthy  lo  bi  sung.     [In  pcoae ;  qui  caatetnr.] 
forlis  Iractare  serpentis  (Hor.  Od.  i.  37.  26),  iravi  to  handle  strpenls. 
periti  canlace  (Eel.  x.  32),  skilled  in  sang. 
fadlea  aurem  pracbere  (Prop.  ii.  21.  15),  ready  to  tend  an  ear. 
lescia  vinci  pectora  (jt^n.  xiL  527),  hearts  not  knowing  how  to  yield. 
e  videre  aegroti  (Plaut.  Trin.  75),  sick  0/ seeing  you. 

:  The  poets  and  early  writers  often  use  the  infinitive  to  express 
purpose  when  there  is  no  analogy  with  any  prose  construction :  as,  — 

loricaim  donal  habera  viro  (.^n.  v.  262),  he  gives  the  hero  a  breastplate  to 
I  luear.     [In  prose:  habendam.] 

IfiHus  turn  inlroiit  videre  quid  agat  (Ter,  Hec.  iii.  2,  10),  tlu  son  Ihin  wen/ 
in  to  see  what,  etc.      [In  prose  :  the  supine  viaam.] 
non  fenro  Lihycos  populire  Pcnilea  venimus   (.^n.  i.  527),  wi  have  no! 
come  to  lay  wasle  with  the  sword  the  Libyan  homes. 
Note. — So  rarely  in  prose  wrilers  of  the  classii:  period. 
f.  For  the  infinitive  used  instead  of  a  substantive  clause  of  purpose, 
see  §331.0-^. 

Note,  — For  tompue  est  abire,  see  }  298,  nole. 

g.  Rarely  in  poetry  the  infinitive  is  used  to  express  reiuUi  as,  — 

Ifiagit  equum  tenera  docilem  cervicc  magisler  il 
2.  64) ,  makes  the  horse  gentle  so 
luc  levSre  . . .  pauperem  laborihus 
mien  caUe<f,  Aesn,  so  as  to  relieve,  e 


290  Syntax:   The  Verb.  [|S  273-75. 

NOTB. — These  poetic  consUiiclions  (fi-g)  were  no  doubt  or'-g^nallir  rcgnki  and 
belong  to  the  Inlinitive  as  s,  noun  In  the  Dative  01  Loi^live  case  (p.  2S3,  head-nelt). 
They  had  been  supplanted,  however,  by  other  more  fonnal  conslnictioiiB, 
aflerwacds  restored  through  Greek  influence. 

h.  In  late  or  poetic  usage  the  infitiitive  occasionaJIy  occurs  a: 
noun  limited  by  a  possessive  or  other  adjective !  as,  — 
nostrum  vlTBre  (Pers.  Sat,  1.  9),  our  lift  (to  live). 
scire  tQum  (id.  27),  your  knomUdgt  (to  know). 

5.  ZizclamatoTy  Inflnlttve. 

274.  The  Infinitive,  with  subject-accusative,'  may  be 
used  in  Exclamations  (cf.  §  240,  d) :  as,  — 

te  in  tan^  aenimnas  propter  mi  incidisBa  (Fam.  xiv.  I ),  alas  !  &at  yat 

should  have  fallen  into  such  grirffor  me. 
mene  incepto  deaiatare  victam  (JEa,  \.  37),  ii^t!  I  beaten  desist  from  n/ 

purpose  f 
Note.  —  The  Present  and  the  Perfect  Infinitive  are  used  in  this  construaiMl 
with  their  ordinary  disliiiciion  at  time. 

6.   Hiatoiloal  Infinitive. 

275.  The  Infinitive  is  often  used  for  the  Imperfect 
Indicative  in  narration,  and  takes  a  subject  in  the  nomi- 
native :  as,  — 

turn  Catilina  polliceri  novas  tabulis  (Sail,  Cat.  3i),  then  Catiline  promised 

abolition  ef  debts  (clean  ledgers), 
ego   inatara  ut  mihi  reapondecet  (Vert.  iL  77),  /  kept  urging  Aim  W 

pais  cedere,  alii  inaeqaX;  neque  signs  neque  ordines  BerrSre;  aU 
quemque  periculum  ceperat,  ibi  reaiatere  ac  pTopulsare;  arma,  leli, 
equi,  viii,  hostes  atque  cives  penniitij  nihil  consilio  neque  imperia 
a^;  fors  omnia  regere  (Jug.  51),  a  far! give  loay,  others  press  oh; 
they  iold  neither  lo  standard!  nor  ranis;  where  danger  overtoek,  Ikerl 
each  ■wottld  stand  and  fight;  arms,  ■aieaptms,  horses,  men,  fie  anJ 
friend,  mingled  in  eonftition;  nothing  ■wait  by  counsel  or  eemaioHd: 
chanee  rulid  all. 

Note.— This 


lis  constmction  is  elliptical  I  that  is,  the  thought  is  quoted  In  Indirect  Dii- 
though  no  verb  of  laying,  etc.,  appeais,  or  perhaps  is  Ihought  of  {compare 
the  French  dire  que') .    Passages  Uke  ti&itc^ae  ego  Bd  Tern  n&toji)  mlsarui 
imorfibfi  (PlauL  Rud.  1881?  point  to  (tie  o\\^ii  oV&e  cooaxioj^ssa,    ^h 


((.-TENSES. 


Note. — Tbe  numbEi  of  possible  Tenses  is  scry  great.  For  in  eacli  of  tha 
Ibree  times,  Present,  PasI,  and  Future,  nn  action  may  be  represented  as  going 
compleled,  or  beginning;  as  habhual  or  isolated;  aa  defined  in  time  or  iadeSnile 
{aoriitii)  ;  as  determined  with  reference  to  the  time  of  the  speaker,  or  as  not  itsell 
so  determined  but  as  relative  to  some  lime  which  is  detetmined;  and  the  past  and 
fiiture  limes  maj  lie  aem  or  remole.  Thus  a  scheme  of  tKlny  or  more  tenses  might 
be  devised, 

Bui,  in  tbe  development  of  foims,  which  always  takes  place  gradually,  no 
language  finds  occasion  for  mar;  than  a  small  pail  of  these.  The  most  obvious 
disdnctions,  according  lo  our  habits  of  tltought,  appear  !□  the  following  scheme:^ 

rl.  D£nNiT£  (fixingihe  time  of  the  action),  a.  INDEFIKITB. 

Present;  a.  lamwriting,  8.  I  ham  wriittn.  v-  I-ariii. 

PAST:  0.IwasiBritms.  e.  t had ■wrUtm.  S.ItarBU. 

Future;  y.  I  shall  it  virUmg.  C  1  shall  hioii  writtm.  i.  1  shall  writi. 
Most  languages  disregard  some  of  these  distinctions,  and  some  make  other  dis- 
tinctions not  here  giveiL  The  Indo-European  patent  speech  had  a  Present  lenss 
lo  express  a  and  1,  a  Perfect  to  express  3,  an  Aorist  to  express  fl,  a  Future  to 
express  f  and  i,  and  an  Imperfect  to  express  S.  The  Latin,  however,  confounded 
the  Perfect  and  Aoriat  in  a  single  form  (the  Perfect  SCilpal},  thus  losing  all  distinc- 
tion of  form  between  S  and  9  and  probably  In  a  greal  degrea  the  distinction  of 
meaning.  The  nature  of  this  confusion  may  be  seen  by  comparing  dixl,  dicavl, 
and  dldicl  fall  Pctfccts  derived  from  the  same  root,  DiC),  with  «.i£a,  Slir. 
adikiham,  HiltiXa.  Skr.  rf/Afn.  Latin  also  developed  two  new  forms,  those  for 
t  (scrfpserajn)  and  f  (BcrlpserS),  and  thus  possessed  six  tenses,  as  seen  in 

The  lines  between  these  six  lenses  in  Latin  are  not  hard  and  fast,  nor  are  they 
precisely  the  same  that  we  draw  in  English.  Thus  in  many  verbs  the  form  corre- 
sponding to  I  ham -atitttn  (!)  is  used  for  those  corresponding  to  I  am  iBritiag  (a) 
and  I  write  (i))  la  a  slightly  different  sense,  and  the  form  corresponding  to  /  had 
mriHtn  (c)  is  used  tn  like  manner  for  that  corresponding  to  /  leas  writing  {B). 
Again,  the  Latin  often  uses  the  form  for  1  shrill  ha-JS  lerilten  (f)  instead  of  that  for 
IihalltBrili  (i).  Thus  liSvI.  I  have  Uamrd,  is  used  for  /  tnoja:  cOnstiterat, 
hi  had  iaien  hiifaiition,  for  he  stood :  cagn6ver8, 1  shall  ham  liamed,  ibr  /  shall 
it  aaare. 

L  I.   Tenses  of  Incomplete  Action. 

K  1.   Present  (Oeneral  Use). 

'  276.  The  Present  Tense  denotes  an  action  or  state 
(l)  as  now  taking  place  or  existing;  and  so  (2)  as  incomplete 
in  present  time,  or  (3)  as  indefinite,  referring  to  no  par- 
icular  time,  but  denoting  ^general  truth.     Tlius, — 

s  haec  intelliglt,  consul  videt,  hie  tamen  vivit  (Cat-  I   l),  tht 
Smate  knoxm  this,  tht  consul  stcs  il,  yet  this  man  lives, 

diclls  poBtqiliie  (Tei.  A.ad.  &wV  even  nma  -jm 
rfectiag,  etc. 


1 


I 
I 

I 


292  Syntax:   The   Verb.  {%  276. 

tibi  c6nc8dB  meas  sedea  (Div.  i.  46,  104),  r  give  you  my  seat  (an  offer 

which  may  or  may  no!  be  accepled). 
exapecto  quid  velia   (Ter.  And.  34),  f  await  your  pleasure  (wbal  fog 

™h). 

tii  ictionem  inititnia,  ille  aciem  inatmit  (Mur.  9),  you  arrangt  a  caa, 
he  arrays  an  army.     [The  present  is  here  used  of  regular  emfl^ 

minora  di  neglegnnt  (N.  D.  iii.  35,  86),  Ihtgods  disregard  trifia.    [Of  1 

general  tr«lli. J 
obsequium  amicos,   viiiias   odium   ptirlt  (Ter.  And.  68),  flattery  gaini 

friends,  truth  hatred.     [General  Iruth.] 

a.  The  Present,  ivilh  expressions  of  duration  of  time,  especially  iatn 
diu,  iam  diiduiii,  denotes  an  action  continuing  in  the  present,  bul 
begun  in  the  past  (cf.  §  277.  b):  as,— 

iam  diu  ignoro  quid  agas  (Fam.  vii.  <fi,for  a  long  lime  I  have  not  iiiffitn 

vihal yoa  are  doing. 
te  iam  dudum  hortor  (Cat  I.  5,  12),  I  have  long  urged  you. 
patimnr  iam  mullos  annos  (Vetr.  vi.  48),  we  suffer  now  Aese  many  years. 

[The  perfect  would  imply,  we  no  longer  suffer^ 
aiiDi  sunt  octo  cum  ista  causa  versatur  (Clu.  30),  it  is  now  ti^  years 

thai  Ihis  cast  has  been  in  hand. 
annum  iam  audla  Cratlppum  (Off.  i.  i),  for  a  year  yot^vt  been  a  iearirtf 

Cralippus. 
Note  i.  — In  this  use  the  present  Is  commonly  lo  be  rendered  by  Ihe  perfect 
in  English.  The  difference  in  the  two  idioms  is  thai  the  English  states  the  Ijcgin- 
ning  and  leaves  the  continuance  10  be  interred,  while  the  Latin  states  the  coq- 
linuance  and  leaves  (he  beginning  to  be  in/erred.  Compare ;  ht  has  long  sufferii 
(and  still  suffers)  with  f  ;  still  suffers  (and  has  suffertd)  long. 

Note  a.  — Similarly  the  Present  Imperative  with  lam  dQduin  indicates  thai 
the  action  commanded  oyght  to  have  been  done  or  vias  wished  for  long  ago  (ct  the 
Perfect  Imperative  in  Greek) :  as, — 

iam  dudum  BDmite  poenas  (/En.  ii.  103),  exact  Ike  penally  long  delayed. 

b.  The  Present  sometimes  denotes  an  action  attempted  or  begun  in 
present  time,  but  never  completed  at  all  (CffwaiiVf/VeJin/,  cf.  §  277.  f): 

iam  iamque  manu  tenet  (Mn.  ii.  530),  and  now,  even  nirw,  he  attempts  to 

grasp  him. 
densos  fertnr  in  hoitis  (id.  i.  511),  he  starts  to  rush  into  the  thickest  of  Ihi 

/•■■ 

deiKTiiS  quinquaginta  dierum  supplication cs  (Phil.  xiv.   11),  I  move  for 
fifty  days'  thanksgiving.     [Cf.  Benatas  deeravit,  ^senate  ordained.] 

e.  The  Present,  especially  in  colloquial  language  and  poetry,  is  ofien 
used  for  the  Future :  as,  — 
iinnMie  sessum  (DeOr.  iii.  5I,  sAaHw*  mfee  o  Kot!  (,a:lft■wcl'sv■Bl^a<*-T^ 


Present  Tense. 

I   luud  milts  (actam  (Ter.  And.  40],  /  ih  nolwish  to 

trying  to  change). 
I    quod  si  fit  pereo  funditus  (id.  244),  i/lkis  happtns,  1  am  utterly  ttudcHe. 
■a  ^as  {\&. '^'2.1'),  are  you  to  bt  married  lo-day? 
ftbin  hinc  in  malam  lem  (id.  317),  viiUyoube  off f  go  and ie  hanged ! 
si  pereo  hominmn  manibas  petiisse  iuvabil  {Mrt.  iii.  6o5),  if  1  ferish,  ii'\ 

■wilt  be  pleasant  lo  perish  a!  the  hands  of  men  (cf.  g  307.  a,  n 
ecquid  me  adiuvaa  (Clu.  26),  woiClymt  give  me  a  little  help  ? 
"    ""         ""        "neo.     noais  (PI.  As.  48o)?/ji 
Jwen'tgo.     Yoa  won^i? 


Note, — BO  and  ifc 


re  you  going  to 
Remark.— 

ions  ({  307),  c 


jounds  are  especially  frequent 


2.   Historical  Present. 

lively  narrative  is  often  ui^ed  for  the  Historical 


d.  Tiie  Present 
Perfect  {^Historical  Present)  :  as, 

affertnr  niintius  Sytaciisis;   ciirritar  ad  praetocii 
quam   nox  erat,  lamen  in  publi 


Geomenes,  quam- 
erat,  lamen  in  publico  esse  non  aadet;  includit  se  domi 
(Veir.  vi.  35),  ibe  news  is  brought  to  Syracuse;   they  run  to  head-  \ 
quarters  ;  Cleomenes,  though  it  titas  night,  dees  not  venture  lo  be  abroad; 
he  shuts  himself  up  at  home. 

JOTE.  — This  usage,  con 

ts  as,  going  on  before  our  eyes  (rep? 

3.  Present  ■vritli  dnm. 
.  Dum,  while,  regularly  takes  the  Present  Indicative 
past  events. 

In  translating,   the    English  imperfect 
Thus,— 
^k     haec  dnm  agnntnr,  intecea  Cleo 
H  vi.  35),  while  this  was  going 

■  la  ike  cpast  at  Elorum. 

^B      hoc  dtun  narrat,  forte  audivi  (Te 


nse  wilb  dum  (usually  so  long  as) 
oast.    But  a  lew  irregular  cases  of  dum  with 
il  is  intended.    Thus, — 

enim  dnm  aiam  vobiscum  animum  meum  videbatis  (Cat.  Maj.  us), 
while  I -aias -wM yeu,  you  couldn't  see  my  soul.  \_'fteit'i^  "Snon'^'Dii 
be  was  alive  is  contrasted  with  that  attei  his  deaA.'\ 


294  Syntax:    The    Verb.  [§§  276, 277, 

cootta  est  pugna,  par  dam  coDatabant  otdines  (Liv.  xxii.  47),  a  enj^d 

bigan,  well  malcked  as  long  as  the  ranks  stood  firm. 
But,  —  dam  oimjIos  hoslium  ceitamen  averterat  (id.  xxxii.  24],  vjkiU  tki 

strugglv  kfpt  the  ly/s  of  Ike  rntmy  turned  amay. 
dnm  unum  adscendcre  grndum  coBfttiw  est,  vinit  in  periculuni  {Mur.  27), 

while  he  allempled  to  dimb  one  step  [in  rank]  he  fell  inla  danger. 

f.  The  present  is  regularly  used  in  quoting  writers  whose  works  are 

Epicurus  vera  ea  dlcit  (Tusc.  ii.  7),  hill  Epicurus  says  such  things. 
apud  ilium  Ulises  lamentatnr  in  vulnere  (id.  21),  in  Aim  (Sophocles) 

Ulysses  beivails  mier  his  wound. 
Polyphemum  Homerus  cum  ariete  colloquentem  fadt  (Tuac.  v,  39,  115), 

Homer  brings  in  (malies)  Folyphemus  talking-mith  his  ram. 

4.  Imperfeot. 
377.   The  Imperfect  denotes   an  action  or  a  state  as 
continued OT  repeated \n  past  time:  as, — 

hunc  aadiebant  antea  (Man.  5),  they  used  to  hear  e/Aim  before. 
Soctales  ita  cenaebat  itaque  disseruit  (Tusc.  i.  30),  Socrates  thoagid  so 

(habitually),  and  so  he  spoke  (then), 
priid^ns  esse  putabatur  (Lxi.  2,  6),  he  was  (generally)  lAou^l  wise. 
[The  perfect  would  refer  to  some  particular  case,  and  not  to  a  state  oi 
things.] 
iamque  rubeacehat  Aurora  {Mn.m.  121"^,  and  H0-.0  the  dawn  vias  Hushing. 
ara  vetus  atibat  (Ov.  M.  vii.  \'),  an  old  altar  stood  there. 
NOTE.^ThB  Imperfect  is  a  descriflive  tense  and  denolea  an  acdon  cancerved 
as  inprogress  or  a  slate  of  Ihings  as  acltially  oiiinied.    Hence  in  many  verbs  it 
does  not  differ  in  meaning  from  tlie  Perfect.    Thus  rSx  erat  and  rSx  (ult  maj 
ofieu  be  used  indifferently;  but  the  former  descriiei  the  condition  while  the  laliet 
only  slates  it.    The  English  is  less  exact  in  distinguishing  these  ma  modes  of 
statement.    Hence  the  Latin  Imperfect  is  often  translated  by  the  English  Prcierile. 
Thus:  — 

Aedui  graviter  ferebant,  neque   legatos   ad  Caesarem  mittere  andSbant 
(B.    G.   V.    6),    the   Mdui  were  displeased,    and  did  not  dare,  etc. 
[Here  the  Imperfects  describe  the  state  of  things.]     But, — 
id  tulit  factum  graviter  Indntiomarus  (id.  v.  4),  InduHamarus  Teas  dis- 
pleased, etc.     [flere  the  Perfect  merely  states  (he  fact.] 
aedificia  Yicosque  bababant  (id.  iv.  4),  they  had iuildings  and tiillages. 
Remark. — The  Imperfect  represents  a  present  lense  transferred  to  past  Hme. 
Hence  all  the  meanings  which  the  present  has  derived  from  the  continuance  of  the 
action,  belong  also  to  the  imperfect  in  reference  to  past  time  (see  details  below). 

a.  The  Imperfect  is  used  in  descriptions ;  as,  — 

.  .  .  motii  a\\\ss\TOiw  \m.-5ei\a5i\ifcV  (^,  ^i.  v  Sy, 
■lay^  ...  1  -veTy  hig'i  imjunlain  oTjirXuHj.  ^^H 


S  277.] 


Imperfect  Tense. 


b.  With  lam  dtfl,  iam  dfldnm,  and  oiher  expressions  of  duradoi 
if  time,  the  Imperfect  denotes  an  action  continuing  in  the  past  h 

begun  at  some  previous  time  (cf.  g  115.  a,  2)  r  as,  — 
iam  diidum  flebajD  (Ov.  M.  iii.  656),  1  had  beta  loeiping  for 
capias  quas  dia  eompariibant  (F'am.  x.  Ij),  Ihe  fercn  -which  ihty  had  U 

btert  gelling  ready. 
Note.— In  this  consfruclion  the  Imperfect  is  rendered  by  (he  English  Pliti 

pertect.    Compare  Ibe  Presenl  in  similar  ph cases  (J  276.  a). 

c.  The  Imperfect  sometimes  denotes  an  action  as  begun  (^Incepim 
Imperfect),  or  as  attempted  or  only  intended  {Conative  Impcrfsci 
(cf.  §276.*): 

in  exsilium  eiciebam  quern  iam  ingrcEEum  esse  in'belliun  videbein  (Ci 

ii.  6),  viits  I  sending  (i.e.  trying  lo  send)  into  exiU  one  tvia  /  sc 

already  ^ne  into  tiiar  ? 
banc  igilur  diem  sVo\  prnponens  Milo,  ciuentis  manibus  ad  ilia  augugttf 

centuiiarum  auspicia  veoiebat  (Mil-  id),  was  Milo  earning  (,i.e. 

Ukely  that  he  would  come),  etc.? 
si  licitum  essel  Teniebant  (Verr.  vi.  49),  Ihey  -were  coming  if  it  had  ieOf^ 

alltnoed  (they  were  on  the  point  of  coming,  and  would   1 

so  if,  etc.). 
Note. — To  this  head  may  be  referred  the  imperfecl  with  lam,  it 
tegwHing  a{ an  acWan  OS  aaXs:  as,— 

iamqne  arva  tenebant  iilliina   (.-En.  vi.  477),   and  ninu  lluy  lucrt  /ad  ■ 

gelling  to  the  farthesi fields. 

d.  The  Imperfect  is  sometimes  used  to  express  a  surprise  a 
present  discovery  of  a  fact  already  existing:  as,  — 

O  tii  quoque  hie  adarSB  (Ter.  Ph.  858),  oh  !  yea  are  here  loo. 
ehem  paler  mi,  In  hie  eras  (Plaut.),  -ajkat!  you  here,  father! 
ah  miser !  quanta  laborabaa  Charyhdi  (Hor.  Od.  i.  27,  19),  unhappy  boy,  .1 
■what  a  ■whirlpool you  are  struggling  in  £and  I 

e.  Tile  Imperfect  is  often  used  in  dialogue  by  the  comic  poets  wherft  I 
later  writers  would  employ  the  Perfect:  as, — 

ad  lunicuni  Calliciem  quoi  rem  alhat  mandosae  iiic  suam  (Plaut.  Trin.  956), 

to  hit  friend  Callicles,  to  viliom,  he  said,  he  had  intriisled  his  properly. 
praeMglbat  animus  fruslri  me  ire  quom  exibam  domo  (Plaut.  Aul.  2zs), 

my  mind  mislrnsled  when  I  went  from  home  that  I  went  i> 
NOTB. — So   also,  in  convErsation,  the  imperfect  of  verbs  of  aaying  (ct  as  /fl 
uts  a-sayiag) :  as,— 
at  rocdici  quoque,  its  enim  dicebiis,  saepe  falluntur  (N.  D.  iii.  6,  15), _/ 

Ihaf  was  w&alyou  were  saying  jusi  now. 
haec  mibi  fere  in  mentcm  veniebant  (id.  ii.  67,  168),  this  is  about  la. 

etevrrtd  to  me,  etc    J|In  a  stiaightfaiwaid  nana^n.  thJa  «aa!4.  \ 

-    -    IBt] 


1 


296  Syntax;   The   Verb.  [§§  277-79, 

f.  For  the  Imperfect  Indicative  in  apodo»s  contrary  to  fact,  see 
§  308.  b. 

g.  The  Imperfect  with  negative  words  often  has  the  force  of  the 
English  mxi&sx^ could aT  would :  as,— 

itaquE  (Damocles)  nee  pulchros  illM  ministratorea  adapiciebat  (Tust  v, 
zi,t),tA/rt/brt  he  cottld  ftot  lB6k  upon  those  heaidiful  slaves.    [In  Ihis 
case  did  nol  would  not  express  the  idea  of  continued  prevention  of 
enjoyment  by  the  overhanging  sword.] 
nee  enim  dum  eram  vobiscum  animum  meum  videbatia  (Cat  MaJ.  22, 79), 
for,  you  knovi,  Ttlhile  I  was  laith  you,  you  could  not  see  my  setil.  £Here 
[he  Perfect  would  refer  only  to  one  moment,'] 
h.  For  the  Epistolary  Imperfect,  see  §  282. 
5.  Fnttue. 

278.  The  Future  denotes  an  action  or  state  that  will 
occur  hereafter. 

12.  The  Future  sometimes  has  the  force  of  an  Imperative  (see 
S  1S9./). 

b.  The  Future  ia  often  required  in  a  subordinate  clause  In  Latin 
where  in  English  futurity  is  sufficiently  expressed  by  the  main  clause! 

cum  ftderit  videbil,  -wkin  he  is  there  he  will  see  (cf.  §  325.  c). 
sanabimur  si   volemua   (Tusc.  iii.  6),  we  shall  ie  liealed  if  we  unii 
(cf.  §  2P1-  "')■ 

II.  The  Tenses  of  Completed  Action.  ^^| 

1.  Perfect.  ^H 

279.  The  Perfect  denotes  an  action  either  as  no-a/ com- 
pleted {Perfect  Definite),  or  as  having  taken  place  at  some 
undefined  point  of  past  time  {Historical  or  Aoristic  Perfect). 
Thus,— 

(1)  at  ego  fed,  qui  Graecas  litteras  senex  didici  (Cat.  Maj.  8),  as  I  Aait 
done,  -who  have  learned  Greek  in  my  old  age- 
diiitumi  siienti  finem  hodietnus  dies  attulit  (Marc.  \'),tkis  day  has  put  aa 
end  to  my  lojig-eontinued  silence. 
(z)  tantum  helium  eslrema  hieme  apporavit,  ineunte  yere  snacepit,  mediii 
aeslale  odnfecit  (Man.  12),  10  great  a  war  he  made  ready  for  at  the 
end  of  winter,  undertook  in  early  spring,  and  finished  by  midsiimmeT. 
NOTK.  — The  distinclion  between  these  Wo  uses  of  Ihe  perfect,  which  is  rapre- 
aeoled  by  two  forms  in  most  ofher  Indo-Eurofwan  languages,  was  almost  If  nol 
wholly  lost  to  the  minds  ot  the  Romans.    \lTO>35(\>e  ■nmicei.^iwut'jtt.on.oocQiuil 
t^lbe  laatlced  disdaetion  in  English  (see  aVso  Ij  iit,-  c\.  ^ 


I 
I 


5  279.]  Perfect  Tense. 

a.  The  perfect  is  Gometimes  used  emphatically  to  denote  tha.t  x\ 
thing  or  condition  of  things  that  once  existed  no  longer  exists :  as 

filit  ista.  quondam  in  hac  re  puhlica  viriiis  (Cat.  i.  l),  Ihere  was  once  sudk  I 

z-irtue  in  this  common-wealth. 
tiabnit,  non  habet  (Tusc.  i.  36),  hi  had,  he  hat  no  longer. 
(ilium  habeo  . . .  immo  hobiUi    nunc  habeam   necne   incertumst   (Ter. 

Heaut.  9^),  /  have  a  son,  no,  I  had  one ;  -aiAether  J  haiie  one  m 

not  il  uncertain, 
tmmaa  Troes,  fiilt  Ilium  {vEn.  ii.  325),  we  have  ceased  to  be   Trojans, 

Troy  is  no  more. 

b.  The  Indefinite  Present,  denoting  a  customary  action  or  a  general  I 
truth  (§  276),  often  has  the  Perfect  in  a  subordinate  clause  refer-  f 
ring  to  time  antecedent  to  that  of  the  main  clause :  as,  — 

qui  in  compedibus  corporis  semper  faeront,  etiam  cum  soluti  Btmt 
(aidiui  ingrediontnr  (Tu3c.  i.  31),  they  -ako  have  aheays  been  in  the 
fetters  of  the  body,  even  ■when  released  move  more  slowly. 
haec  morte  eflnginntor,  eliam  m  non  evenenutt,  tamen  quia  possont 
evenire  (id.  36),  these  things  are  escaped  by  death  even  if  they  have 
not  [yet]  happeiud,  etc. 
^mul  ic  mihi  collifaitoio  est,  prae^to  est  imago  (N.  D.  i.  38),  as  soon  as  I 
have  taien  a  fancy,  the  image  is  before  my  eyes. 

protasis  of  general    1 


\ 


c.  The  perfect  is  sometimes  used  of  a  general  truth,  especially  w 
.negatives  (finomic Perfect):  as,— 

qui  atudet  cootingece  metam  multa  tnlit  fedtqne  (Hor.  A.  P,  412),  ht  I 

Toho  aims  to  reach  the  goal,  fist  bears  and  does  many  things.  | 

noD  aeris  acervus  et  aud  didnxit  corpore  fibres  (id.  Ep,  i.  2,  47),  the  file   I 

of  brass  and  gold  removes  not  fever  from  the  frame. 
Note.  — Tile  gnomic  perfect  strictly  refers  to  past  time;  bul  ia  use  implies 
lal  something  which  never  did  happen  in  any  knoun  case,  never  does  happen,  and    ' 
Ijtever  will  (ct  the  English  "  FaiiU  heart  never  won  fair  lad/')  ;  or  without  a  nega-     I 
'  lal  has  once  happened  will  atways  happen  under 

tl.  The  Perfect  is  often  used  in  expressions  containing  or  implying  a 
fga/ion,  where  in  affirmation  the  Imperfect  would  be  prefer) 
dicebat  melius  quam  Bcripait  Hortensius  (Or.  38),  Horlensius  spoke  beller 

than  he -wrole.      [Here    the    negative   is   implied  in  the   comparison; 

compare  the  use  of  qnisqaam,  uIlUB,  etc,  (§  303.  f),  and  the  French 

ne  after  comparatives  and  superlatives.] 

e.  The  completed  tenses  of  some  verbs  are  ei^ulvakut  W  ttt  w 
ifcfe  tenses  of  verbs  of  kindred  meaning. 


298  Syiilax:    The    Verb.  [§§  279-31. 

Such  are  the  preteritive  verbs  OdI,  I  hale;  memial,  /remember; 
novi,  f  know,  oonauSvI,  /am  accustomed,'^  with  others  used  preieri- 
tively,  as  vfinerat  (=  adexat,  he  was  at  hand,  etc.)  (see  §  143,  noK). 
Thus,— 

qui  dies  aeslus  maximos  efficere  conHuevit  (B.  G.  iv.  29),  which  day  ginit- 

ally  makes  the  highest  tides  (is  accualomed  to  make), 
cuius  splendor  obsoUvit  (Quinc.  v.  l8),  ■aihese  splendor  is  new  all  fadid 

(has  become  old). 
Remark.  — Many  olhar  verbs  are  occasionally  so  used :  as,— 
dum  oculos  certamen  iiverterat  (Liv.  xxxii.  24),  -JikiU  the  conlat  iai 
turned  their  eyes  (kept  them  turned),     [Here  averterat  =  tenabat] 

2.  Pluperfeat. 

280.  The  Pluperfect  is  used  (i)  to  denote  an  action  or 
state  completed  in  past  time ;  or  (2)  sometimes  to  denote 
an  action  in  indefinite  time,  but  prior  to  some  past  time 
referred  to ;  as,  — ■ 

(1)  loci  natura  erat  baec,  quern  locum  nosCri  castiis  delegerant  (B.G.ii.18}, 

this  teas  the  nature  of  the  ground  which  our  men  had  chosen  far  s 
camp. 
Viridovix  summam  imperi  tenebat  earum  omnium  clvitatum  quae  dafece- 
raJit  (id.  iii.   17),   Viridmiix  held  the  chief  command  of  all  Ikssi 
tribes  which  had  revolted. 

(2)  neque  vero  cum  aliquld  mandaverat  confectum  putabat  (Cat.  iii,  7),  tul 

when  he  had  given  a  thing  in  charge  hi  did  not  look  on  il  as  done. 
quae  si  quando  adeptik  e9t  id  quod  ei  faerat  conoupltnm,  tani  feit  alacci- 

tiilem  (Tusc.  iv.  15),  ifil  (desire)  ever  has  gained  what  it  had  \^^en- 

ously]  desired,  then  it  produces  joy. 
a.  For  the  Epbtolary  Pluperfect,  see  §  282. 

3.  Future  Perfect. 

281.  The  Future  Perfect  denotes  an  action  as  com- 
pleted in  the  future  :  as,  — 

uC  sementem  feceriH,  ita  metes  (Or,  ii.  65),  as  yen  sow  (shall  have  sown), 
Sa  shall  you  reap. 

camiina  torn  melius  cum  venerit  ipse  canemua  (Eel.  ix,  6;),  then  shall  wt 
ling  our  songs  hitter,  when  he  himself  has  come. 

si  illius  insidiae  clitiorea  hac  luce  fnerint  turn  denique  obsecribo  (Mil. 
2,  6),  when  the  plots  of  that  man  have  ieen  shown  to  be  as  clear  as  day- 
light, then,  and  not  till  then,  shall  I  conjure  you. 


iS  281-84.]     Epislolary  Ttiiscs;    Tenses  of  Subjunctive. 

ego  certc  meum  ofiicium  praestitero  (B.C.  iv.  25),  I  al  Itml  ■wil 
dt>ite  my  duty  ^i.g.  when  [he  time  comefi  to  reckon  up  the  rnatteCi 
be  found  lo  have  done  it,  whatever  the  event). 

Remark.  —  The  Fuwre  Perfect  is  med  wiiii  much  greater  exBctneas  in 
han  in  English,  and  may  even  be  used  instead  of  the  Future,  fram  the  fbndi 
the  Latins  for  representing  an  action  as  completed :  as,  — 

quid  inventum  ait  paulo  post  videro  (Acad.  ii.  24),  what  has  bien_ 

out  I  iiiiU  sec  presfntly. 
qni  Antonium  oppreaserit  helium  taeterrimum  confecerit  (Fam.  x 

Ttrhofver  eruskfS  (shall   have  crushed)    AnhnyioiU finish  (wUl  have 

finiated)  a  most  loathsome  war. 
NOIE.  — For  the  future  perfect  in  future  conditions,  s< 

III.  Epistolary  Tenses. 

282.  In  Letters,  the  Perfect  Historical  or  the  Imperfect 
may  be  used  for  the  present,  ami  the  Pluperfect  for  any 
■past  tense,  as  if  the  letter  were  dated  at  the  time  it  is 
supposed  to  be  received:  as,  — 

Deque  tamen,  cum  baecsciibebain,  eram  nescius  quantis  oneribuspremerere 
(Fam.  V.  iz),  nor  white  I  tarile  this  am  I  ignorant  under  what  bur- 
dens you  are  aietghed  down. 

ad  tnas  omnes  [epistulas}  Teacripaeram  pridie  (Att.  ix,  10),  /  [have] 
answered  all  your  letters  yesterday. 

cum  quod  icriherem  ad  te,  nihil  habereni,  tamen  has  dedl  litleris  (Alt.  ix. 
16),  rifltgr*  I  have  nothing  la  -arite you,  still  I  write  this  letter. 

Note. —  In  this  use  these  lenses  are  called  the  Epistolary  Imperfect  and  Pluper- 
fecl.  The  epistolary  lenses  are  not  tised  with  any  unifbrmily,  but  only  when  alten- 
tioti  is  particularly  directed  to  the  timi  Bfwrit'mg.  (So  espei;ially  acilbetiam, 
dabam,  etc.), 

IV.  Tenses  of  the  StJBjirNcrivE. 

283.  The  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  in  Independent  j 
Clauses  denote  time  in  relation  to  the  time  of  the  speaker.  1 
The  Present  always  refers  Xa  future  time,  the  Imperfect  to  | 
either  past  OT /ircseut,  the  Perfect  to  either  _/"«/wrjr  or  fa  si,  \ 
the  Pluperfect  always  to  fast. 

284.  In  Dependent  Clauses  the  tenses  of  the  Subjunc- 
tive were  habitually  used  in  certain  fixed  connections  c 
termined  by  the  time  of  the  main  verb  and  the  time  < 

le  dependent  verb  together. 


I 


300  Syntax:   The    Verb.  [§§  285, 286 

Note. — The  leases  of  the  Subjunctive  were  origlnaJIy  used  in  Dependeni 
clauses  (as  in  IndepeDdent),  each  wilh  its  own  time  in  relatiun  to  Ihe  point  of  view 
of  the  speaker;  but  in  consequence  of  Itie  natural  tendency  of  language  lo  lefeial 
the  parts  of  a  complei  sentence  to  oni  lime, — namely,  thai  of  the  speaker,— Iho 
conDectionE  in  which  these  tenses  were  used  became  fixed.  Hence  the  rules  foi  the 
Seguttice  of  Tin3£S.  These  are  by  no  means  rigid,  but  allow  many  varieties,  es  is 
patund  from  their  origin. 

SequeDce  of  TeDses. 

285.  The  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  in  Dependent 
clauses  follow  special  rules  for  the  sequence  of  tenses. 

With  reference  to  these  rules  all  tenses  when  used  in 
Independent  claiises  are  divided  into  two  classes,  — primary 
and  secondary. 

1,  Primary.  The  primary  tenses  include  all  forais  that  express 
present  or  future  time.  These  are  the  Present,  Future,  and  Future 
Perfect  Intiicative,  the  Present  and  Perfect  Subjunctive,  and  the  Present 
and  Future  Imperative. 

Note.  —  The  Perfect  Definite  is  sometimes  treated  as  primary,  but  see  {  287.  j. 

2.  Secondary.  The  secondary  tenses  include  all  fonns  that  refer  to 
pasl  time.  These  are  the  Imperfect,  Perfect,  and  Pluperfect  Indicative, 
the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  Subjunctive,  and  the  Historical  Infinidit. 

NOTB  I.  —  To  these  may  be  added  certain  forms  less  commonly  used  in  Inde- 
pendent Clauses.  Such  are;  (i)  Primary:  Present  luEnitive  in  Exclamations; 
(a)  Secondary :  Perfect  Infinitive  in  Exclamations  (see  j  sB/.  a.  note). 

Note  3.  — For  the  Historical  Present,  see  §  =87,  <;  for  Uie  Imperfect  Subjunc- 
tive in  Apodosis,  see  }  sSj.j. 

286.  The  foliowingis  the  general  rule  for  the  SEQUENCE  OF  tenses; 
In   complex  sentences   a   Primary  tense   in   the   main 

clause  is  followed  by  the  Present  or  Perfect  in  the  depend- 
ent clause,  and  a  secondary  tense  by  the  Imperfect  or 
Pluperfect :  as,  — 

scribil  at  nos  raoneat,  he  wri/cs  lo  warn  iit. 

scribet  at  no*  monest,  it  will  virile  to  ivarn  us. 

scribe  (senbito)  ut  nos  moneas,  virile  Hal  you  may  vmrn  u 

scripsit  nt  nos  moneret,  he  wrote  to  warn  us. 

scribit  quasi  oblitns  sit,  ke  virilts  as  if  he  had  forgotten. 

scripsit  quasi  oblitus  esaet,  he  -wrcle  as  if  hi  hadfirgoUeH. 

rogo  quid  factiirus  sis,  I  ask  whatyeu  are  going  to  da. 

Note.— The  beginner  must  observe  that  the  nils  afftets  only  the  tenses  of  ih 
Subjunctive  in  dependent  cl^ises.  The  tenses  of  the  other  moods  and  (hose  of  ih 
Sabjaoctive  in  independent  CDnslmctiona  (.as  \n  a.-^6<«;\s  ujoMan  \b  ^i«.,  4  ™b 
■Jfccled  by  Ihe  sequence  of  tenses.    tBa\  ct-  ^'l  ^i^-  a 


;ct  Of 

I 

s  of  the 


i,  287.] 


Sequence  of  Tenses. 


I 


indary   tense,   but  1 


Remarc — In  applying  the  rule  Tor  (he  sequence  of  tenses,  observe  (i)  whether 
the  main  verb  is  (a)  primaiy  or  (^)  Becondaiy,  (a)  wbelher  the  dependent  verb  is 

plete  (»^.  present  or  fiiliire  with  reference 

(a)  If  the  leading  verb  \!,  primary,  the  dependent  verb  must  be  in  the  Frisetii^  | 
It  denotes  incompttte  actisH,  in  the  Ptrfeci  If  it  denotes  compUttd  action. 

(b)  If  the  leading  verb  is  «coHa!flf7,  the  dependent  verb  must  be  in  the  Impei- 
ficl  if  ll  denotes  hicompUte  aclioH,  in  the  Pluperfict  if  It  denotes  (omptetid  action. 
Thus,— 

he  ■uiriltl  (priroary)  /o  viarn  pncompletej  in,  SCtibit  Dt  nos  moneat. 
/  ask  (primary)  vihalyou  vire  doing  (now  past),  rogo  quid  feceris. 
Notice  that  the /^iiAiTir/VT^ff  denotes  action  completed  (at  the  time  referred  I 
to),  and  hence  is  represented  in  tlie  Subjunodve  by  the  Perfect  or  Pluperfect    [ 
Thus.— 

implUhcd,  rogo  quid  perfecetis. 
aecampluhfd,  rogavit  quid  petfedaset, 

387.  In  the  Sequence  of  Tenses  some  special  points 
are  to  be  noted  :  — 

a.  The  Perfect  Indicative  is  ordinarily  a 
allows  the  primary  sequence  when  the  present 
writer's  mind.    Thus, — 

ut  satis  esBst  praesiili  proTisam  est  (Cat.  ii.  \i),  prevision  hat  htm 

that  then  should  be  ample  guard.     [Secondary  sequence.] 
addiixl  hominem  in  quo  satisfacere  exteris  nationlbus  pOBsetis  (Verr.  1. 1), 

/  ha-ve  brought  a  man  in  luhose  person  you  can  make  salisfaci' 

foreign  nations.     [Secondary  sequence.] 
eat  enim  res  iam  in  eum  locum  adducta,  vt  quamquam  muUum  intersit  I 

inter  eorum  causas  qui   dimicanl,  tamen  inter  victorias  nan  muUum    \ 

fntcrfutiirnin  pntem.  (Fam,  v,  ar,  3),  for  affairs  have  been  Itrougkt  U 

atch  a  pass  that,  Ihtn^h  then  is  a  great  digirenee  between  the  causes  af  J 

those  who  arc  fighting,  still  I  do  not  think  there  11101  be  much  different  J 

between  their  trietories.     [Primary  sequence.] 
ea  uDiibltia  doctrina  est  quae  vel  vitiosiBsimam  naturam  excolere  poasli  1 

(Q.  Fr.  i.  I,  7),  such  instruction  has  been  given  as  can  train  even 

faultiest  nature.     [Primary  sequence.] 
Note. — The  Perfect  Infinitive  in  eiclamations  follows  the  same  rule:  as,— 
adcon  rem  redisse  patrem  u<  extimescam  (Ter.  Ph.  153),  to  think  fft^  \ 

things  have  come  to  such  a  pass  that  I  sliould  dread  my  father. 

h.  After  a  primary  tense  the  Perfect  Subjunctive  Is  regularly  used  to 

denote  *ny  past  action.    Thus  the  Perfect  Subjunctive  may  represent,— 

I.  A  Perfect  Definile:  as,— 

non  dubilognin  omnes  tui  Bcripaerint  (Favn.  v.S"!,  I  ilo 
j/omr/HetKA  Aai/i  written.     [Din 


302  Sj'fUajtr:    The    Verb. 

qtiare  non  ignoro  quid  accidat  in  nltimis  terns,  cum  andierim  in  Inlii 
quetelis  civium  (Q.  Fr.  I.  I,  33),  Ikire/ore  I  knirai  well  what  kappaa 
at  tki  ends  e/  Ike  earth,  ■ai/ica  I  have  heard  in  Italy  the  eemplaii 
lilizens.     [In  e.  direct  stalemeat,  aodiTi.] 

2.  A  Perfect  Historical:  as,— 

me  auteni  hic  laudat  quod  retnlerim,  non  quod  paiteficerini  (Alt,  xii.  ii), 
me  he  praises  because  I  brouslit  the  matter  ([before  the  Benale],  iM 
because  I  iroiighlit  to  li^.     [Direct  statement:  retDlLt.3  I 

3.  An  Imperfect:  as, — 

si  forte  ceciderint  torn  intellegitot  quam  fuerlnt  inopra  amicomni  (L^ 
I  J,  53),  if  iji  chance  Ihey  fall  Quivti  fallen),  then  one  can  see  howpsor 
they  were  in  friend!.     [Direct  question :  qtiara  inopea  erant  T\ 

qui  status  rerum  faerit  cum  bos  litteras  dcdl  scire  poieris  ex  C,  Tidlo 
Stcabone  (Fam.  xii.  6},  vhat  the  coHdition  of  affairs  ■aias  ■when  Iwrali 
this  letter,  you  can  learn  from  Strata.     [Direct  quealion  :  qui  erat?] 

qnam  civitali  cirua  fderit  maeroce  fHiieras  Indicatum  est  (Lxl.  3,  li),hs» 
dear  he  was  to  Ike  Stale  has  been  shown  by  the  grief  at  his  funeral 
[Direct  qnesticin:  qoam  caiua  erat?] 

ex  epistulis  intellegi  licet  quam  frequens  fherit  PlutoniB  auditor  (Or.  4), 
it  may  he  understood  from  his  letters  haw  constant  a  hearer  he  taat  ^ 
Plats,     [pirect  question:  qnam  freqnena  erat?] 

Note.  —  Thus  the  Perfect  Subjunelive  may  represent,  not  only  a  Perfect  Defin- 
ite or  a  Perfect  Historical  of  a  direct  Btatemenl  or  question,  but  an  Imperfect  is 
well.  This  comes  from  the  want  of  any  special  tense  of  the  subjunctive  to  eiprsj 
continued  action  afier  a  primary  lense.  Thus,  miror  quid  tecerit  may  roran 
(1)  I  wonder  what  he  has  diiae,(s)  I  wonder  what  he  did  (hist,  pert),  or  (3)  I 
VTonder  whal  he  was  doin£. 

c.  In  clauses  of  Result,  the  Perfect  subjunctive  Is  very  often  (the 
Present  rarely)  used  after  secoiidary  tenses :  as,  — 

Hortenaius  ardebait,  dicendi  cupiditate  sic  ut  in  nilllo  unquam  t^agrantiiu 
studium  yidBrim  (Brut.  &&),  fforlensiusivas  sa  hot  with  desire  af  speak- 
ing that  I  have  nez/ir  seen  a  more  burning  ardor  in  any  man. 
Siciliam  Vecris  per  triennium  ita  vexSvit  ac  perdidit,  ut  ea  restitid  id 
antiquum  statum  niillo  modo  poBBit  (Verr.  i.  a^.for  three  years  Verris 
so  racked  and  ruined  Sicily,  that  she  can  in  no  -way  be  restored  to  her 
former  stats.     [Here  the  Present  is  used  in  describing  a  state  of  things 
actually  existing.] 
videor  esse  tionaecntuB  ut  non  possit  Dolabclla  in  TtaBam  perrenitt 
xii.  t^).T  seem  to  have  brought  it  about  that  Dolaiella  tanHOl 
<lo  Italy. 

Remark, — This  cotialmction  emphasiies  the  result;  the  regular  conalraetion 


^H      liib< 

^^^B         Note,  —  There  Is  a  special  Eocdnesiioi  ttie  ¥«^«ASi'JEisancA:qB^o  ^gyqaat 

^^B   Pti^t  Indicative.    Thus,—  ^h 


Sequence  of  Tenses.  3031 

lliDrius  erat  ita  non  supersticiosui  uC  iUa  plutima  in  soa  patria  ct  tacriHcia 
et  lana  contemneret;  ita  non  dmidus  ad  mortein  ut  ia  acie  ait  ob  re 
pQblicam  interfectaa  (Fin,  IL  20,  63),  Thorita  was  so  Utile  sup, 
(ieus  that  he  ii!u/t'jn/ [contemnebat]  the  many  sacrifices  and  skrin 
kii  tottntry ;  so  Utile  timorous  about  dfolh  that  he  was  tilled  [intet-fl 
rectus  est]  in  ialllt,  in  defence  of  the  State.  4 

Zena  niillu  modo  is  erat  qui  necvos  viitiitis  incideiit  (cf.  g  279.  i/);  sedl 
cont^  qui  omnia  in  una  vlrtule  ponerat  (Acad.  i.  la),  Zeno  was  fy  n 
means  eai  to  cut  the  sinetni  of  virtue ;  but  one,  on  the  contrary,  % 
made  everything  defend  On  virtue  alatte.     [jncndit . , .  ponSbftt.] 

eranl  enim  nobis  periraH,  quasi  quicqnam  di  nostra  saliilc  decraviBBeniM  "[ 
quod  non  idem  illts  censaissemus  ant  quasi  utilius  rei  piiblicae  fiierit 
COS  etiara  ad  bestiannn  auxiliom  confagere  quara  vel  emoii  vel  cum  spe 
vivere  (Fam.  a..  6,  i),fiir  th/y  were  very  angry  vrilk  us,  just  as  if  loe 
had  voted  for  anything  in  regard  to  ear  own  preservation  which  a 
had  Hot  advised  theni  also,  or  as  if  it  were  more  advantageous  to  & 
slate  for  them  to  fly  fir  help  to  brutes  than  either  la  die  or  to  live  i 
hope.    [Without  quH.81,  decreveriunua  and  fnit  would  have  been  used.]]   j 

d.  A  general  iriiih  after  a  past  tense  follow.s  the  sequence  of  t( 


I 


ex  his  quae  Iribuisset  sibi  quam  mut^ilis  esaet  ceputibat  (Q.  C  iii.  9), 

from  what  she  (Fortune)  had  bestowed  on  hint,  he  reflected  how  into: 

slant  she  is.     [Direct:  matiibiliB  est.] 
ibi  qaanlam  vim  ad  slimulandos  animoa  irn  haberet  appacnit  (Liv.  xxxi 

37),  here  il  appeared  what  power  anger  has  to  goad  the  mind.  [Dircctfl 

habet.] 
Note.  — In  English  the  original  tense  is  more  commonly  tepL 

e.  The  Historical  Present  (§  276.  1/)  is  sometimes  felt  as  a  primary,\ 
\  secondary  tense.     Accordingly  it  is  followed  by  either  J 

*he  primary  or  the  secondary  sequence,  more  commonly  by  the  second-J 
BTj'.     Thus,  — 

TOgat  ut  caret  quod  dixisset  (Qdnct  5),  he  asks  him  to  attend  to  the  thing  J 

he  had  spoken  of 
castella  comma  nit  qua  facilius  ptohibere  poaaet  (B.  G.  i.  S),  he  streugi 

the  forts  that  he  might  more  easily  keep  them  off. 
Note.— After  the  hislorical  present,  cum  lemjioral  with  the  subjunctive 
How  the  secondary  sequence. 

f.  The  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  in    conditions  contrary  to  fact  1 
(8  30S)  are  not  affected  by  the  sequence  of  tenses :  as,  — 

quia  tale  sit,  ut  vel  si  IgnSrJirent  homines,  etc.  (Fin.  iJ.  15,  49),  hteause  it 
is  such  that  even  if  men  WERE  ignorant,  etc. 

£•  The  Imperfect  Subjunctive  in  present  conAifioia  cnWowrj  Xa  Wj^ 
'§  308)  is  regiH^rly  {oMo-vi^d.  by  the  secondary  setpencft--  ^a, —  ^ 


304 


Syulax:    The    Verb. 


[§S  387,  3BB 


li  alii  coDsoles  essent,  ad  te  potiaslnum,  PauUe,  nutterein,  nt  eoi  mOii 
(juam  amicissimos  redderaa  (Fam.  xv,  13),  if  there  tuere  oti/r  lanmls, 
I  should  send  le  yau,  Paaim,  in  prrference  19  all,  that  you  laighl  mat/ 
Iheni  as  friendly  to  mi  as  fossttle. 

si  CDS  (^cerea  miseioE  quibus  monendum  eieet,  neminem  exciperes  (Tusc. 
i.  5),  if  you  called  thost  -wr etched  wha  must  die,  you  would  except  na  oni, 

h.  The  Present  is  sometimes  followed  by  a  secondary  sequence, 
seemingly  because  the  writer  is  thinking  of  past  time  {Synesis)  :  as,— 

sed  si  res  coget,  est  qniddam  (ertinm,  qund  ncque  Selicio  nee  raihi  dispii- 
cibat;  ut  ne<]uc  laceie  rem  pateremur,  etc.  (Kazn.  1.  5.  a),  but  if  the 
case  shall  demand,  there  is  a  third  [course]  which  neither  Selieius  nir 
myself  disapproved,  that  -we  should  not  allow,  etc.  [Here  Cicero  is  led 
by  the  time  of  diapllcehat.] 

sed  tainen  ut  srarea  haec  tibi  scnbo  (Fam.  niii.  47),  but  yet  that  you  maj 
know,  I  virile  thus.  [As  if  be  bad  used  the  commOQ  epistolary  imper- 
fect Bcrlbehani  <§  3S2).] 

tribuerettir  (Leg.  i.  22),  such  is  the  force  of  this  precept,  that  it  -•lai 

ascribed  not  to  any  man,  but  to  the  Delphic  god.     [The  precept  was  in 

old  one-] 

Note.  — The  rules  for  ihe  sequence  of  tenses  must  not  be  regarded  as  inflen- 

ble.    They  were  ofteu  disregarded  by  the  Romans  ihemselves,  either  from  careless. 


*'.  When  a  clause  depends  upon  o 
becomes  secondary  as  soon  as  the  ti 
any  form  that  represents  past  time : 

seii  lanien  qua  re  aceiderit  ut  ex  me 


s  already  dependent,  the  sequence 
e  is  thrown  back  into  the  past  by 


I  superioribus  litteris  id  suspicKrirs 
■tspected  Ikts 


nescio  (Fam.  ii.  16),  but  yet  hovi  it  happened  that  yoi 

from  my  previous  letter,  1  don't  know. 
tantuiu  profecisse  videmur  ut  a  Graecis  ne  vecbocum  quidem  copia  vlnn- 

Temor  (N.  D.  i.  4,  8),  we  seem  la  have  advanced  so  far  that  eoen  in 

fulness  of  words  vie  are  not  surpassed  by  the  Greets. 
But,  —  bcale  radsse  videor  quia  cum  Scipionc  Tixerim  (Lael.  4,  15),/ 

seem  to  have  lived  happily  in  that  I  have  lived  with  Sdpia  (who  had 

just  died). 
Note,  — For  Ihe  application  of  (his  rule  to  Indirect  Discourse,  see  5336.  B.tiote. 


28& 

^^  theyd 


V,  Tenses  of  the  Infinitive. 
288.   The  tenses  of  the  Infinitive  denals present,  past, 
■future  time,  relatively  to  the  time  of  the  verb  on  which 
they  depend  :  as,  — 

8se  inferioies  ititeWexit  (,^.  G.  \\.  %"),  ht  lucertafiurf  AUf  mt 
not  inferior.     tDviect-.  iralA.A  


Tenses  of  the  Infinitive. 


30s 


IF- 
I     qaam  ISao  feituc  tetria  magis  omnibus  ooluissa  {J^.  i.  15),  whick  Juno  I 
I  ii  taidto  hast  ckerishtd  above  all  lands.     [Direct ;  oolebat.] 

spirant  se  miximuni  fructum  esae  captaroa  (Luel.  21),  ihey  hope  they  shall   1 
receive  iht greattst  advatUage.     [Direct;  capiemuB,] 
a.  After  past  tenses  of  verbs  of  necessity,  propriety,  and  pnssibUUf  I 
(as  potui,  dEbuI,  and  oppoituit)  tlie  present  infinitive  must  be  ren- 
dered by  the  Perfect  infinitive  in  English !   as,  — 
■tare  potuit  (Milo,  \-f),  ht  might  have  knonm. 

qui  videbiliir  omnino  mori  non  dehuisse  (Arch.  3),  -Jiha  snmed  [one 
that]  flight  not  la  have  died  at  all 

h.  For  the  tenses  of  the  infinitive  in  Indirect  Discourse,  see  §  336.  A. 
c.  Except  in  indirect  discourse,  the  Present  is  the  only  tense  of  the 
infinitive  in  comtnon  use.   It  has  no  distinct  reference  lo  time.    Thus, —    ^ 


:e  Ait  elders. 


S  vereri  (Off.  i.  34),  il  is  [the  duly]  of  a  youth 


',  After  verbs  of  vjishing,  necessity,  and  the  lilce,'  the  Perfect  Passive 
ifinitive  is  often  used  instead  of  the  Present :  as,  — 


^BDfini 

^1      nollem  f(ictnin,/»-igrrf(i'(I  could  wish  il  not  done).     [The  lUtin  form 

■      ./..%,.] 

^H      domestica  ciira  te  levatiua  [esse]  volo  (Q.  F.  iu.  9),  /  wish  you  relieved  J 

^H  of  household  care. 

^H      quod  iam  pcidem  factum  enaa  oportuit  (Cat.  i.  a),  which  oa^t  te  have  been  I 


I 


domestica  ciira  te 
^f  household  ca 
quod  iam  pcidem  factum  enaa  opoctuit  (Cat.  i. 

doat  long  ago  (cf.  a,  above) . 
Note.— The  paniciple  in  this  case  is  rather  in  predicate  agreemenl  (with  o 
wilhout  ease)  than  used  to  form  a  strict  perfect  Infinilive,  though  Ilie  full  form  cai 
hardly  be  dietinguished  from  that  construction ;  cf.  m&tar&tC  Opua  oat,  there  i 
need  of  haste  {}  293.  A)  and  I p-ay  thee  have  me  excused, 

ReuaEK. — In  early  and  lale  Lafin,  and  in  poetry,  rarely  la  good  prose,  Ihi 
tfecl  Active  Infinilive  is  also  used  insfead  of  the  Present,  and  even  after  other    | 
Hertjs  than  those  of  loci^iiir^  and  the  like :  as, — 

conunlHiBH  cavet  (Hor.  A.  P.  16S),  he  is  eaatioas  of  doing. 

baud  equidem  ptemendo  alium  me  eitnlisao  vellm  (Liv.  xiii.  59),  Iwaiild  j 

not  by  crushing  another  exalt  myself. 
lunC  qui   nolint  tetigisBB  (Hor.  Sat.  L  2),  there  are  those  who  iBouldiiol 

statim  viciaae  debeS  (Rose.  Am.  27),  /  ought  lo  win  my  case  (I  must  be 

regarded  as  having  won  it). 
Bollem  dixisse  (Verr.  v.  20),  /  would  net  say 

After  verba  oi  feeling  the  Perfect  infinitive  is  used,  especially  by 
poets,  to  denote  a  completed  a 


Syntax:   Tin:    Verb. 


[gg  384889. 


So  also  with  satlB  est,  aatls  babefi,  melias  est,  contentua  aum, 
and  in  a  few  other  cases  where  the  distinction  of  time  b  important. 
Thus,  — 

non  pa.eiiitebat  intercapedinem  scribendi  fEcisee  (Fam.  xvi.  21),  Iiaas  M 

iorry  to  have  made  a  respile  of  writing. 
pudet  me  non  praeatitiaBe  (id,  xiv.  3),  I  aia  ashatited  not  to  have  siavm. 
sunt  qiiDS  curriculo  pulverem  Ol^picum  <!ollegisae  luvat  (Hor.  Od.  L  I.  j), 

Ihire  art  thine  -.vUo  dtligAI,  etc. 
qniease  erit  meliua  (Liv.  iii.  48),  U  will  lit  teller  ta  have  kepi  quiel. 
nil  ego  si  pccccm  possum  neaciase  (Ov.  Her.  xvii.  47),  if  [  shauM go  wrm^, 

I  catinet  have  done  il  in  ignorance  (a.m  not  able  not  to  have  known). 

/-  The  Future  infinitive  is  often  expressed  by  fore  (or  futuium 
eaae)  ut  with  the  subjunctive;  so  necessarily  in  verbs  which  have  do 
eupine  stem  (cf.  §§  302.  Rem.,  332,  e).    Thus,  — 

Epero  fore  nl  contingat  id  nobis  (Tusc.  i.),  I  hope  that  wilt  be  our  hapfyltl. 


II.  — NOUN  AND   ADJECTIVE   FORMS, 
eral  Noun  and  Adjective  forms  associated  with  the  verb  ai 


Present 
Perfec 

nd 

Future 

'' 

AtlribulLve  (}  =91  and  a). 
Simple  Predicate  {{  agi.  *). 
Periphrastic  Perfect  [passive)  (§  3i}I.  R.). 
Predicate  of  Circumstance  [^  393). 
Descriptive<In(Iirecl  Discourse)  ({si9a.(). 


Periphra: 


B(}» 


3.  a). 


Ls  Objeci 


Periplirastic  with  ful  (=  Piupertecl 

junclive)  (}  =93.  0. 
As  Descriptive  Adjective  ({  394.  a). 
Periphtastic  with  esse  ({  394. 1). 
3.  Of  Purpose  with  certain  verbs  (}  394.  li). 


e  Genili 


;({! 


Dalive.wilhAdjectives  (of  Filness),  Nouns.  Verba  <}  399). 
Accusative,  with  certain  Prepositions  {}  300). 
Ablative,  of  Means,  Comparison,  or  with  Prepositions 

Former  Supine  (in  -um),  with  Verbs  of  Motion  (}  301). 
Latter  Supine  (in  -Q),  chiefly  with  Adjectives  (}  303.) 


I.-PARTICIPLES. 


389.  The  Participle  expresses  the  action  of  the  verb  in 
the  form  of  an  Adjective ;  but  has  a  partial  distinction  of 
tease,  and  may  govern  a  csl^c.  ^^^^^^^ 


Va89,290.]     Distinctions  of  Tense  in  Participles. 

Note.  —  Thus  Ihe  parficiple  combines  all  tlie  funeiioQS  of  an  adjecii 
of  Ihe  functions  of  a  verb.  As  an  adjeclive,  ii  limits  subslantivcs,  ant 
them  in  gender,  number,  and  case  (J  iS6).  As  a  verb,  it  has  distinct 
M  390),  and  often  takes  an  object. 

P  I.  Dlstlnctioiis  of  Tense. 

"    290.   Participles  denote  time  ^s  present,  fast,  or  ftitiire 
with  respect  to  the  time  of  the  verb  in  their  clause. 

Thus  the  Present  Participle  represents  the  action  as  in  progresi  at 
the  time  intiicated  by  the  tense  of  the  verb,  the  Perfect  as  completed, 
aoi3  the  Future  -as,  still  to  talte  place. 
-.     a.  The   Present  Participle  has  several  of  the  special  uses   of   the 
Present  Indicative.     Thus  it  may  denote:  — 

I.  An  action  continued  in  the  present  but  begun  in  the  past 
<5  276- «):"•.- 

qnaeienii  mihi  iamdiu  certa  res  nulla  venieba.t  in  menlEm  (Fam.  iv.  13), 
though  I  had  long  iouglit,  no  certain  thing  camt  to  my  mind. 

13.  Attempted  action  (§  276.  *)  :  as,— 
C  Flaminio  teatitit  agrum   Picenlem  dividentj  (Cat.  Maj.  4),  hi  misted 
Flaminius  lohen  attempting  to  divide  Ihe  Piiem  territory. 
3.  Futurity  (§  276.  f)  :  as,  — 
iena  in  Pompeianum  bene  mane  haec  scripsi  (Att,  iv.  9),  /write  this  when 
about  going  very  early  la  my  plan  al  Pompeii. 

b.  The  Perfect  Participle  of  a  few  deponent  verbs  is  used  nearly  in 
the  sense  of  a  Present. 

Such  are,  regularly,  ratus,  Eolitms,  veiitus ;  commonly,  flsus, 
ausus,  BecfltuB,  and  occasionally  others,  especially  in  later  writers. 
Tlius,  — 

cohortatna  mililes  docuit  (B.  C.  iii.  80),  eneonragiHg  the  men,  he  she-.oid 

iratna  dixisti  (Mur.  lp),you  spoie  in  apassion. 
)       obUtuB  auspicia  (Phil.  i.  \i),/argeltiHg  the  auspices. 
ft   insidias  veritns  (B,  G.  ii.  11), /earing  aaiiuscnde. 
■     impcrio  potitns  (Liv.  »xi.  2),  holding  Ihe  cemmand. 
I       ad  piigtiam  CongresBT  (id.  \i.  10),  meeting  infi^. 

rem  incridibilem  rati  (Sail.  Cat.  48),  thinking  Ihe  thing  imredible. 

c.  The  Ladn  has  no  Present  Participle  in  the  passive.  The  place  of 
such  3  form  is  supplied  usually  by  a  clause  with  dum  or  oum,. rarely 
by  the  participle  in  -dna  (cf.  p.  3 [4,  foot-note):  as,  — 

nullis  evidcntibus  causis  obiere  dnm  calceantnr  matiitino  duo  Caesarel 

(Plin.  N.  H.  vii,  181),  from  no  obvious  cauu  Iwc  Catari  ditil  -mkiit 

I  iai/if^  lieir  sAoes  put  on  in  the  morning. 


308  Syntax:    The  Verb.  [SS  2 id.  291 

meque  tsta  delectant  aaxa  Laline  dloimtiir  (Ac.  Filor.  i,  5),  liose  Aingi 

pltasi  rut  ToiiH  they  are  spoktH  in  Latin. 

crucibus  adfixi  aut  flammandl  (Tftc  Ann.  xv,  44),  crucified  or  let  en  fat 
(in  Samei), 

Note, — The  constructions  withduia  and  cum  see  often  used  when  a  pardd- 
ple  might  be  employed:  as, — 

dk,  hospes,  Spait^e,  nos  te  hie  vi^sae  iacentes,  dnm  Sanctis  patriae  Iq^bu 
obseqnimnr,  tdt  it,  stranger,  al  Spar/a,  that  you  saw  us  lying  hiri 
ot'cdient  lo  OKf  country's  sacred  laias.  [Here  dum  obseqnimnr  is  a 
tranalation  of  the  Greek  present  participle  rtiflrf^ti'Di.] 

dum  [Ulixes]  sibi,  dam  sociis  redilnin  parat  (Hor.  Ep.  i  a,  ai),  Ulysiis, 
■while  securing  the  return  of  himself  and  hit  companions.     [In  Greek: 

d.  The  Ladn  has  no  Perfect  Participle  In  the  active  voice.  Tbe 
defidencyis  supplied  — 

1,  In  deponents  by  the  perfect  passive  form  with  its  regular  active 
meaning ;  as, — 

nam  singulis  [naves]  nostri  consectaU  expiigniviriint  (B,  G.  Hi.  I5)>/"' 
eur  men  having  overtaken  Ihem  one  by  one,  captured  them  by  boarding- 

2.  In  other  verbs,  either  by  the  ablative  absolute  with  a  change  of  voice 
C§  255-  d,  note)  or  by  a  clause  (especially  with  oum  or  dam):  as,  — 

itaque  oouvocatls  centimdmbiui  milites  certioies  facit  (B.  G.  iii.  5),  aHd 
so,  having  called  the  centurions  together,  he  informs  (he  soldiers  (the 
centurions  having  been  called  together}. 

cum  vinisBet  animadvertit  collem  (id.  vii.  44),  having  tome  (when  he  hid 
come),  ht  noticed  a  hill. 

Note.  —  The  perfect  participle  of  several  deponent  verlre  may  be  either  actJTt 
or  passive  in  meaning  ({  135.  b). 

2.  Adjective  Use. 
201.   The   Present   and    Perfect    participles    are   used 
sometimes  as  attributive,  nearly  like  adjectives  :  as,  — 
cum  antiquissimam  sententiam  turn  comprobalam  (Div,  i.  j),  a  viea  at 

once  most  ancient  and  -will  approuid. 
signa  nunquam  fere  Smentientia  (id.  9),  si^ns  hardly  ever  deceitful. 
Buspiciis  Stantor  coaotla  (id.  15),  Ihey  use  forced  auspices. 
a.  Participles  often  become  complete  adjecdves,  and  may  be  com- 
pared or  used  as  nouns.    Thus,  • — 

quo  mulieri  esaet  res  cautior  (Cscin.  4,  1 1),  that  the  mailer  migil  be  mere 
(nMsarlibuspr»eBt*ntiawmtt»tpeOi.\.  t)0,a\i^,  fi 


i  291,  292.]        Predicate  Use  of  Participles.  309  j 

vbi  indolgentis  et  corpori  diBervientfis  (Leg-  i.  13),  thi  lelf-indulgmti  I 
and  slavei  la  Ihs  body  (indulgiag  themselves  and  serving  Ihe  body). 

recie  facta  paria  esse  debent  (Par.  iii.  i),  right  ditdi  (things  rightly  done)  I 
eu^t  to  be  like  in  value  (see  §  207.  c). 

mile  part*  male  dUibaQtur  (Phil.  ii.  27),  ill  got,  ill  afenl  (things  at  I 
acquired,  etc). 

c5n5iiitSd5  Talentia  (De  Ot.  ii.  44),  the  kahii  of  a  man  in  health. 

b.  Parljctplea  are  often  used  aa  Predicate  Adjectives.  As  such  ihey  I 
□ay  be  joined  to  the  subject  by  esse  or  a  copulative  verb  (see  §§  186.  b, 

Gallia  est  divTea  (B.  G.  I.  i),  Caui  is  divided.  « 

locus  qui  nunc  saeptna  eat  (Lir.  L  8),  tiie  place  which  is  naio  enclosed. 

videtis  ut  senectus  sit  operosa  et  semper  agena  aliquid  et  molieua  (C,  M.  S) 
ymt  see  hsvi  busy  eld  age  is,  ahaays  aiming  and  trying  at  something. 

nemo  adhiic  convenire  voluit  cui  fucrim  occapatus  ((^t.  Maj.  10,  32}, 
noiody  hilherlo  hat  [evei^  wished  to  converse  with  me,  to  vihom  I  heme   1 
been  "engaged." 

Remark. — From  this  pretticale  use  adse  the  compoand  tenses  of  the  p 

the  participle  of  completed  action  with  the  Incomplete  lenses  of  esse  developing   1 
:  idea  of  past  time :  as,  Interlectus  eat,  In  laas  (or  has  been]  hilled,  \\U,  he  it 
%aDing-teea-iilled  {^.e.  already  slain). 

In  Ihe  best  writers  (as  Cicero),  the  perfect  participle,  when  used  with  ful,  et 
tetains  lis  proper  force;  but  in  later  WTilers  the  two  sets  of  tenses  (as  EUnKtUS 
Mora  orlul}  are  often  used  indiscriminately  to  form  Ihe  tenses  of  the  perfect  sj^tcm 
fcl  the  pas^ve :  as, — 

[leges]  cum  quae  lataa  sunt  turn  vero  quae  promolgatae  faerunt  (Sest. 
25),  Ike  laws,  both  those  which  were  frsposed,  and  those  which  viete 
published,     [The  proposal  of  the  laws  was  a  single  act ;  heuce  lataa   I 
Hunt  ia  a  compound  perfect.     The  publishing,  ot  posting,  was  a  COU'    1 
tinned  state,  which  is  indicated  by  the  participle  promulgatae,  and  | 
fulrant  b  the  perfect  of  the  copula.]  I 

anna  quae  fixa  in  parietibiis  faerant,  hum!  invenla  annt  (Div.  L  34),  tkt  J 
ariHtTvhich  had  been  fastened  on  the  walh -were  found  upon  the  ground.   ' 
[Cf.  occnpati  anat  et  fulrant  (Off.  i.  17),  are  and  have  bten  engaged. 
The  difference  between  this  and  anna  quae,  etc.,  is,  that  oocupatua  in 
this  sense  is  used  only  aa  an  adjective.] 

3.  Predicate  tTae. 
292.   The  Present  and  Perfect  paitJciples  are  often  used  J 
Ss  a  predicate,  where  in  English  a  phrase  or  clause  would  I 
te  usual. 

In  this  use  the  participles  express  time,  cause,  occasion^  \ 
ptmdition,  coTicession,  characteristic  (or  description\y  manncTyj 
W^a^s,  af/^/ic/a/t/  circumstances.     TVius,  - 


310  Syntax:   The   Veti.  [s  392. 

volveutea  hostilia  cadavera.  smlcum  reperiebant  (Sail.  Cat.  61),  mifb 

relHiig  ever  ike  corpses  of  the  enemy  Ikey  foand  a  friend.     [Time.] 
paululam  commorSitaB,  signa  canere  iubeC  (Sail.  Cat.  J9, 1),  afier  delaying 

a  Utile  Tiikiie,  he  orders  to  give  Ae  signal.     [Tiioe.] 
loDgiui  prosequi  Teritna,  ad  Ciceionem  peivenit  (B.  G.  v.  52),  decause  lu 

feared  to  foUaw  further,  he  came  to  Cicero.     [Cause.] 
quo  sclret  laiis  dare  iaanu  habenia  fJEs,.  \.  63),  mhf  mi^  know  kme  It 

give  them  loose  rein  when  bidden.     [Occasion.] 
danmatom  poenam  sequi  oportebat  (B.  G.  i.  4],  if  etmdemneJ,  fimisk- 

otenl  mast  overtake  him.     [Condition.] 
Balutem  InapSrantibna  reddidiali  (Marc  7),  you  have  restored  a  safrlj 

wA^A  we  did  not  hope.     [Conceaaion.] 
Dardaniua  caput  ecce  puer  detectua  {^En.  x.  133),  Oit  Trajan  boy  uirf 

kii  head  uncovered.     [Deacriplion.] 
nee  ttepides  in  iisum  poacentia  aevi  pauca  (Hor.  Od.  ii.  11.  5),  kiKl 

anxious  for  Ike  nleds  of  age  that  demands  little.     [Characteristic] 
indtaU  fuga  montci  allissimos  petebant  (B.  C  iii.  93),  in  headlong  figil 

tkey  made  for  the  highest  mountains.     [Manner.] 
mililes  Hublevati  alii  ab  aliis  magnani  partem  tlineris  conficerent  (B.  C  1. 

G8) ,  the  soldiers  helped  up  by  each  other,  etc.     [Means.] 
hoc  Ia.udans,  Pompeius  idem  iuravit  (B.  C.  iii.  S7),  approving  &is.  Pirn- 

Pey  took  the  same  oath.     [Attendant  circumetance.] 
ant  HedloB  aut  BmbatmnH  disputabam  (Tusc.  f .  4,  7),  /  conducted  the  dii- 

cussion  either  silling  or  Tvaliing.     [Circumstance.] 
Remark. — These  uses  are  especially  frequent  in  (he  ablative  absolute  ({  s^i-d]. 
A  co-ordinate  clause  is  someiimes  compressed  into  a  perfect  participle:  as, — 
Inairueioa  ordines  in  locum  aequum  deducit  (Sail.  Cat.  59),  he  drans  »} 

the  lines,  and  leads  them  to  level  ground. 
ut  hos  transduclos  necacet  fB.  G,  v,  5),  that  he  might  carry  them  ever  anJ 

put  them  to  death. 
Note  i. — A  pardciple  with  a  negative  often  expresses  (he  same  Idea  which  in 
English  is  given  by  viithuut a.ai  a  verbal  noun:  as, — 

miserum  est  nihil  pro&cieutem  angi  (N.  D.  iii.  5),  it  is  wretched  la  vex 

oneself  laithoul  effecting  anything. 
Note  a.  — Acceptum   and   eipBnaum   as   predicates   with   terre  and 
reterre  are  book-keeping  terms:  as, — 

is  expensBB  (Vcrr.  ii.  170),  ■what  sums  he  ckarg/J 

a.  A  noun  and  a  passive  participle  are  often  so  united  that  the  parti- 
ciple and  not  the  noun  contains  the  main  idea:  'as,  — 

conditam  condendamve  urbcm  (Liv.  Pref.),  before  tlie  eily  -was  b^ill 
building. 

Compare  Ihe  participle  In  Indirect  discourse  in  Greek  (Goodwin's  Greek 
Grammar,  i  2B0)  ;  and  the  E.ne\U\\.  "'T^as  av  ftie  tcisl  ^eaSi  fir  Pirtw^w" 
(DrydeoJ,  u.  for  the  conquest  of  Persia.  '"^^^^^^M 


B  >  Cor. 

^B^       Grammar 
^^(DtydeD). 


I  292.]  Predicate   Use  of  Participles.  3 1  wk 

Uli  libectiteni  eivium  Romanorum  inuninatam  non  tulerunt;  vos  vitom 
erepttkin  neglegctis  (Manil.  5),  l&ey  did  nal  endure  llie  infringimcnl 
of  the  cUisins'  literly  :  will  you  disregard  Ihi  deslruclien  of  their  life? 

post  homines  natoii  (Brut.  Gz,  224),  since  the  creation  of  man. 

iam  i  conditi  ucbe  (Phil.  iii.  9),  even  from  the  founding  of  the  l 

b.  The  perfect  participle  with  a,  noun  in  agreement,  or  in  the  neutti 
5  an  abstract  noun,  is  used  in  the  ablative  with  opuB,  need  (ef. 
S  243-  0  :  ^.  - 

opus   tactO   est  viatica   (Plaat.  Ttin.   887),  there   is   need  of  laying   i 

maturato  opus  est  (Liv.  viii.  13),  tlitre  is  need  of  haste. 

Note.  — The  omission  of  Ihe  noun  in  agreement  gives  rise  to  comple*  cm 

quid  opus  factost,  what  must  be  done?     [A  mixtore  of  qnid  opus  eat  fieriZ 

and  quo  facto  opoB  eat  ?] 

e.  The  perfect  participle  with  habed  (rareiy  with  other  verbs)  baa 

almost  the  same  meaning  as  a  j>erfect  active,  but  denotes  the  costtintui 

effect  of  the  ataion  of  the  verb ; ' 

Bdem  qnem  habent  apectatani  iam  et  diii  cognitam  (Div.  C.  4),  my 

fidelity,  -aikich  l/iey  haxe  proved  and  long  knoTon. 
cohoites  in  acie  Ixxx.  cQuHtlttttaa  habebat  (B.  C,  ii 

cohorts  stationed  in  line  of  battle. 
nefirioB  duces  captoH  iam  1 1  comprehinsoa  tenetia  (Cat.  iii.  7,  16),  yoU 
have  captured  and  hold  ill  custody  the  infam, 

d.  A  verb  of  effecting  or  1  he  like  may  be  used  in  combination  witb 
the  perfect  participle  of  a  transitive  verb  to  express  the  action  of  that 
verb  more  forcibly:  as, — 

praefectos  suos  multi  uubbob  feeerunt  (Verr.  iv.  58),  many  diseharg, 

their  officers  (made  dismissed), 
hie  tranaactam  reddet  omne  (Plant,  Capt.  345),  he  will  get  it  all  dotU 

(restore  it  finished). 
ademptnm  tibi  iam  fexo  omnem  melum  (Ter,  Haut.  341),  Iioill  relieve 

you  of  all  fear  (make  it  taken  away), 
illam  tibi  incenaani  dabo  (Ter.  Ph.  974),  T  iidll  tnahe  her  angry  with  yau^ 
Note.  —  Similarly  TolS  (with   its  compounds)  and  CUplC,  with   a  perfeol' 
participle  without  esse  (ct  }  =38  d.  note  )  :  as,— 

me  ejtcnsStnm  volo  (Verr.  i.  40),  I  wish  to  be  excused  (I  want  myself  e: 

cused,  ef.  T pray  thee  have  me  excused). 
qui  te  conventnm  cupit  (Plant,  Cure,  304),  who  wants  to  meet  you  (wan 

1  TbB  perfect  wilb  have,  in  modem  languages  of  LaUq  s-toek,,  bas  ^ravm  oi^ 


312  SjiHtitr:   The   Verb.  [§§292,293 

e.  After  verbs  denoting  an  action  of  the  senses  the  present  participle 
in  agreement  with  the  object  is  nearly  equivalent  to  the  infinitive  of 
indirect  discourse  (§  336),  but  expresses  the  action  more  vividly:  as,— 


Note. —  The  same  construciion  is  used  after  foclO,  IndQcO,  and  the  like, 
is-ilh  Ihe  name  of  an  aullior  as  subject:  as,— 

Xenophon  facit  Socratem  diBputantetn  (N.  D.  i.  i;),  Xcnofkon  rtfratnli 
Socratts  disfiuiing. 

4,  Future  Participle. 

393.  The  Future  Participle  (except  futnrna  and  ventfinu) 
is  rarely  used  in  simple  agreement  with  a  noon,  except  by 
later  writers. 

a.  The  fiiture  participle  is  chiefly  used  with  Baae  (which  is  often 
omitted)  in  the  active  periphrastic  conjugation  (see  §  129)  :  as, — 

morcte,  Diagora,  non  eaim  in  caelum  adBcensoma  ea  (Tusc.  i.  46),  dii, 

for  you  are  nol  liiely  to  i-isi  to  heaven. 
aperat  adoleacens  diii  ae  Tictnnun  (Cat.  Maj.  19),  tlu  young  vian  hofrsli 

Hoe  long  (that  he  shall  live  long), 
neque  petitama  unijuam  consulalum  videretur  (Off.  iii.  20).  and  did  net 

setm  likely  nirr  la  be  a  eandidale  for  the  eensulshifi. 

h.  By  later  writers  and  the  poets  the  future  participle  is  also  used  in 
simple  agreement  with  a  substantive  to  express ;  — 

1.  Likelihood  or  certainty:  as, — 

aufius  est  rem  plus  famae  habituram  (Liv.  ii.  10),  he  darid  a  thir^  wkiik 
■would  have  more  repute. 

2.  Purpose,  intention,  or  readiness;  as, — 

cum  leo  regem  invoBDraa  ineurrcret  (Q.  C.  viii.  1),  ToAen  a  Uoh  ruiAtdoH 

to  attack  the  king. 
rediit  belli  casnm  de  integro  tentatiirus  (Liv.  xvii.  6i),  Ae  relitriudto  try 

the  chances  of  war  anew. 
dispeisos  per  agros  milites  equitibus  inTaBoira  (id.  xmi.  36),  -while  thi 

horse  were  ready  lo  attack  the  soldiers  scatlertd  through  IkefitUs.    [A 

rare  use  of  the  Ablative  Absolute.] 
si  peritoras  abis  (^u.  ii.  675),  if  you  are  going  a-ojay  to  perish. 

3.  Apodosis:  as, — 
dedit  mihi  quantum  maximum  potuit,  datoma  ampliut  i^  potuisset  (Plin. 

Ep.  iii.  21),  he  gave  mi  as  much  (U  fu  <ould,  rtady  la  (iiie  aw  MMfv  1/ 
Ae  had  been  able.  -  ^^^^^^^^m 


I 


iH  293,  294.]      Gerundive  {Future  Passive  Participle).      313  1 


With  past  lenses  of  eaae,  the  iiiture  participle  is  often  equivalent  I 
the  pluperfect  subjunctive  (see  §  308.  d }. 

.   Gerundive  (Future  FasBive  Participle). 

NOTE.— The  participle  in  -due,  gomnionly  called  the  Gerundive,  hi 
linct  uses ;  — 

(1)  Us  predicate  an 

(2)  Its  use  with  thf 

294.   The  gerundive  when  used  as  a  Participle  < 
Adjective  is  always  passive,  denoting  necessity  q\ propriety,  I 

In  this  use  of  the  gerundive  the  following  points  are  to  1 
be  observed  («-« 

a.  The  gerundive  is  sometimes  used,  like  the  present  and  perfect 
participles,  in  simple  agreement  with  a.  noun  :  as,  — 

fuctem  et  conserraiidiiiri  virum  (Mil.  38),  a  brave  man,  and  -worlhy  la 

h.  The  most  frequent  use   of  thb  form  is  with  ease  in  the  second  \ 
•    {passive)  periphrastic  conjugation  (see  §  129) :  as,  — 

■aaa    agitajida    res  erit   (Verr.  vi.    70),  taill  not  the   thing  havt  t 


c.  The  neuter  of  the  gerundiv 
witli  an  object.  The  object  is  i] 
verb.     Thus,  — 


s  occasionally  used  impersonally  1 
e  case  regularly  governed  by  the   1 


agitandtunst  vigilias  (PI.  Tr.  869),  I  have  got  to  stand  guard. 
'a  quam  nobis  ingTediendnm  sit  (Cat.  Maj.  2),  thi  way  we  have  to  enter. 


:h  laliG  Iheir  object  in  the  dative  i 


legibus  parendnm  eat,  llie  laws  mast  be  obeyed. 
ntendnm  execcitiiionibus  madicis  (Cat.  Maj.  u 


e  mederalfm 


^L     No 

■      >eg 
■ 

^P      d.  After  verbs  signifying  to  gfve,  deliver,  agree  for, 

undertake,  demand?  a  gerundive  in  agreement  with  the  object  is  used 
to  express  purpose ;  as,  — 

1  Sometimes  called  Nominative  of  the  Genind.    Compare  Greek  verbal  in -Woi 
{Goodwin's  Grammar,  f  281). 

I  Such  verb?  are  accipiS.  adnStS,  attribuQ.  condQcfl,  cflrS,  dSnCtS, 

dSposcB,  dS,  diTidS,  dSnS,  SdlcS,  3doceS,  ferS,  habeS,  locO,  mandO, 

oblclO,  permltta,  peta,  pdaS.  praebeG,  pr&pOiA.  reaoigpS . Toa^ . bo*- 

V  alptO,  trSdS,  voveO. 


fell 


[I4  Sjii/ax:    The    Verb.  [§§  294-M. 

ledemptor  qui  columnam  illam  conduxerat  faoiendam  (Div.  ii.  ai)<  l^' 

contractor  -.vho  had  vndcrlakcn  to  make  that  column.      [The  regular 

construction  with  this  class  of  verbs.] 
aedcm  Casloria  habuit  tnendwn  (Vcrr.  ii.  ^o) ,  At  kaJ  Iht  letnflc  0/ CaMr 

lo  take  care  of. 
naves  atque  oncra  diligenter  adservanda  curabat  (id.  vi.  56),  he  looi  rdR 

tiat  the  ships  mid  cargaes  should  be  kept. 


II.-GERUND   AND   GERUNDIVE. 

295.   The   Gerund  expresses  an  action  of  the  verb  in 

the  form  of  a  verbal  noun.     As  a  noun  the  gerund  is  itself 

governed  by  other  words  ;  as  a  verb  it  may  take  an  object 

in  the  proper  case.     Thus, — 

ars  bene  disserendi  ct  vera  ac  falsa  diiodiivuidi  (De  Or.  ii,  3S),  Iht  ari 

of  discoursing  well,  and  dislingiiisking  Ihe  true  and  false. 
RIMAHK.  — The  nominalive  of  the  gerund  is  supplied  by  the  infinitive.    Thus 

in  the  nominative,  would  be  eipressed  by  the  infiniiives  dlsaerero  and  dlitl- 
dlc&re. 

290.  When  the  Gerund  would  have  an  object  in  the 
accusative,  the  Gerundive^  is  generally  used  instead.  The 
gerundive  agrees  with  its  noun,  and  takes  the  case  which 
the  gerund  would  have  had  :  as,  — 

paraliores  ad  ainnia  pericula  Bulietuida  (B.  G.  i.  5),  readier  la  undergo  aU 
dangers.  [Here  sabennda  seiees  with  peticnla,  which  is  itself  gov- 
erned by  ad.  The  construction  with  the  gerund  would  be,  ad  Hubeun- 
dom  pericula;  ad  governing  the  gerund,  and  the  gerund  governing 
the  accusative  perlcttta.] 

exercendae  memoriae  gratia  (Off.  i.  15),  for  the  saie  of  training  Ike 
memory.  [Here  the  gerund  construction  would  be  memoriam  eier- 
cendi  gratia.] 

plerisqne  in  rlbua  gerendia  tarditas  odlosa  est  (Phil.  vi.  3),  in  the  con- 
ducting of  most  business,  sloth  is  odious. 

1  The  gerundive  construction  is  probably  the  original  one.  The  participle  in 
-duH  seems  lo  have  had  a  present  passive  force  (as  in  aate  condendam  urbem 
(}39a.a).rotundus,voIveadadieB  [Virg.),flMi]mcuuII(Tac.).} 390.0  Iron 
which  the  idea  of  necesEily  was  developed  through  that  of  futurity,  as  In  the  devekip- 
tnent  o(  the  subjunctive  (see  p.  374).  COnelUum  urtila  dfilendae  would  have 
meant  a  f ion  of  a  city  ieiiig  diitroyid  [in  process  of  destruction] .  then  aioul  la  be  it- 
'Ihytd.  then  to  be  destroyed,  Iben  a  plan  0/  dtstroying  the  c>tj,\'nE\MiQ-«wd&beCM- 

~  fo^reiher  as  in  ab  urbe  coTid.VA.  ^^^| 


a  296-98.]  Gt'mnd  and  Gerundive.  3lf 

Note.—  In  ibis  use  Ibe  gerund  and  Ihe  gcruodive  are  translaled  in  the  same 

1,  bul  have  really  a  differenl  conslruclion.    The  Gerundive  ia  a  paisivi  particl- 

.  and  agrees  wilh  its  DDiin,  though  in  tianslatioa  we  change  the  voice,  jusi  as 

may  Iranslale  vlerillae  ag'taiiilaa  Bunt  {guard  must  bs  kspl)  by  /  nmit 

aand  guard.    The  Gerund  is  (he  neuter  of  the  gerundive  used  impersonally,  but 

letaining  the  verbal  Idea  sufficiently  to  govern  an  object,  as  in  agttandiiQiBt 

Vlsill&B(j  394.;).     It  may  therefore  be  considered  as  a  noun   (cC  opuB  est 

matUrftta,  i  29a.  i)  wilhaverbalforce(tf.  banc  tactlfi.  p.  335,  foot-nole).    See 

3.4.  foot-note. 

The  following  examples  illustrate  the  parallel 
and  gerundive :  — 


\hi  allends  la  tilling  the  Jitlds. 


Abl.  tcrit  tempu*  J  ^"^endo  epislulaa  1  ^^      ^^^  ,.^^  .^  u.riHng Ult^,. 
"^      I  scnbendis  cpislulia  i 

Rgmakk.  — In  the  gerundive  constmclion  Ihe  verbs  Otor,  fruor,  etc.,  are 
Irealed  like  Iranaitive  verbs  governing  the  accusadve,  as  they  do  in  early  1-atin 
{1  149.*):  as,- 

expetuntnr  divitiae  ad  perfmendas  voluptates  (Off.  i.  8),  riches  an  ssi^dl 
for  the  tHjoymcnl  of  flcasHres  (for  enjoying  pleasui 

&07.  The  Gerund  and  the  Gerundive  are  used,  in  the 
oblique  cases,  in  many  of  the  constructions  of  nouns. 

1.  Genitive. 
208.   The  Genitive  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  i& 

used   after   nouns   or   adjectives    either   as   subjective    or 
objective  genitive :  as,  — 

neque  consilit  babendi  neque  arma  capiendi  spatio  dato  (B.  G.  iv.  14)*, 
time  bdng  given   neither  for  farming  flans  nor  for  latins   arms, 
[Objective.] 
ne  aonBervandae  quitiem  patriae  cauaa  (Olf.  i.  45),  not  even  for  the  satt 

of  saving  the  cBuntry.      [Originally  subjective  genitive.] 
Vivendi  finis  eat  optimus  (Cat.  Maj.  20),  it  is  the  best  end  nf  living.     [Sub- 

non  tam  commiitandarum  rerum  quam  evertendarnm  cupidos  (OCT.  ii.  i), 

desirous  not  so  much  of  changing  as  of  destroying  Ihe  stale.    [Objective.] 

Note.— In  a  few  phrases  the  Infinitive  is  used  vfith  nouna  ■ 

rre  xhe  genitive  of  the  Gerund  or  Gerundive,    Tims  \«IEB'^ 


3i6  Syntax:  The  Verb.  [§§298.299. 


qaac  res  Tertend&e  reipublicae  aolent  esse  (Vert.  iii.  53),  things  lAiA 
generally  tend  to  the  mierlhrBio  of  the  cammQmaealA. 

si  arborum  ttunci  deiciendi  operis  essenC  missae  (B.  G.  iv.  17),  in  can 
truiiis  of  trees  should  be  sent  dawn  [with  the  object]  of  BVertArim/itii 
Ike  -work.     [Peed.  gen.  like  quas  anl  commodi  fecerat  (v.  8).] 

Aegyptum  pioliciscitnr  cognoscendae  aatiqaitatia  (Tac.  Ann.  ii.  59),  ir 
sell  out  for  Egypt  lo  study  old  times. 

nc  id  aaaentandi  magis  quam  quo  habeam  gritum  facere  existimies  (Tcr. 
Ad.  2-;o),  for  fear  you  should  Ihiiti  that  I  da  it  more  far  the  saie  ej 
/lattery  than  because,  etc. 

a.  The  genitive  of  the  gerund  is  occasionally  limited  by  3  noun  or 
pronoun  (especially  ani)  in  the  objective  genitive  instead  of  taking  a 
direct  object:  as, — 

eias  videndi  cupidus  (Ter.  Hec.  372),  eige'  to  see  her  (eager  for  a  leeiog 

reiciendi  triom  iiidicam  potestis  (Inv.  ii.  ^jjthe fovier  ef  ehalienging  Ikrii 

jurors  (of  the  rejecting  of  three  jurors). 
Bni  coUigendi  facultis  (B.  G.  iii.  6),  the  opportunity  to  recover  Ikemuhies. 
Note.  —  This  construction  undoubtedly  arose  from  the  fact  that  the  genini, 

noun  (or  adjective)  governing  an  objective  genitive  [cf.  f  317.  i).  Thus  sul  col- 
llgecdl  faeultaa  would  be  literally,  a  chance  of  a  recovering  ef  theirs.  Tins 
consiniction  is  easily  disdnguished  fiom  that  of  the  gerundive  by  the  feci  that  llit 
gerund  does  not  agree  with  the  substantive  in  gender  and  number. 


b.  In  genitive  constructions  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  are  abc 
equally  common. 

c.  The  genitive  of  the  Gerund  or  Gerundive  is  used  with  causS 
gratia  to  denote  purpose  (see  §  318). 

Note.  — Thip  is  merely  a  special  use  under  the  main  hsad  of  \ 


2.   Dative. 
299.   The  Dative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive 
after  adjectives^  which  take  the  dative  and  rarely  after 
234.  a) :  as,  — 

1  The  dative   of  the  gerund  and  gerundive  occurs  most  commonly  after  the 

adjeciives  accommod£tua,  aptus,  Ineptue,  bonus,  habills,  IdfineuA.  p&r, 

,      ataia,  lallCUia.     But  the  accusative  wtfti  bA  ia  tommon  tiVSi  wjw.  o(  Uteu 


i3e^^ 


I  299, 3O0.]  Gerund  and  Gerundive.  317J 

;nus  arniorum  aptnm  tegendia  corporihna  (Ijv.  xxxli.  lo),  1 
armBr  sitittd  to  the  dtfence  ef  Ike  body, 
sociam  siudeo  acribendia  veraibna  esse  {Luer.  i.  25),  /  dedre  b 
IhoH  (Venus)  be  my  farltier  in  inriliHg  verses. 
reliqua  tempoia  demetendis  fraetibas   ct  percipiendia  acoommodUa  1 
sunt  (Cat.  Maj.  19),  Ae  other  seasons  are  Jilted  to  reap  and  gathir  in 
Ike  harvest. 
perfereadia  mllitum  mandatJB  idonens  (Tac.  Ann.  I,  23),  suilabU  for 
carrying  out  the  insirutlians  of  the  soldiers. 

,  The  dative  is  used  in  a  few  expressions  after  verbs ' ;  as,  — 

diem  ptaeslilil  operi  faoiendS  (Vetr.  ii.  56),  he  appointed  a  day  for  doing 
the  work. 
-aeesse  agto  colcndo  (Rose.  Am.  l3),  to  take  charge  of  cultivating  the 


■.e  8olvend5,  to  be  able  to  pay  (to  be  for  paying). 


i.  The  dative  is  also  used  ii 


I 


the  office,  etc. :  as,  — 

comitla  coosulibos  togandia  (Div.  i.  17),  elections  for  nominating  consuls. 
triumvir  coloniia  deducundis  (Jug.  42),  a  Irivmvir for  planting  colonies. 
triomviri  relpublicae  constituendae  (title  af  the  Triumvirate),  triumviri  (1 
commissinn  of  three)  f>r  settling  the  government. 

3.   Accuaative. 

300.  The  Accusative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  is 
used  only  after  the  prepositions  ad,  inter,  circa,  ob  (and 
rarely  m  and  aute) ;  most  frequently  after  ad,  denoting 
Purpose  (cf.  §  318.  b):  as,  — 


4 

t 


INoTC  —  Tlie  Accusative  of  the  gerund  widi  a  preposition  never  lakes  a  direct 
[ed,  the  Ablative  of  the  gerund  very  rarely.  The  GerundivB  is  used  instead 
396}. 


is  ad  Bcribendnm  (Or.  la), you  summon  me  to  write. 

in  ad  deponendam  sed  ad  confirmaiidaia  attdaciam  (Cat.  i. 
you  live,  not  to  put  off,  hat  to  confirm  your  daring. 

IS  aditiis  ad  ea  conanda  (Ii.  C.  i.  31),  having  found  means  to  ua. 
take  these  things. 
T  agendum  (Eel.  Ix.  24),  while  driving. 


i  Sacb  are praeeBtte,  operam  dare,  dlemdioare.'Vocinn  cK^etfe. 


318  Synlax:  The   Verb.  [SS  301,301, 

4.   AblatiTB. 

301.  The  Ablative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  is 
used  (i)  to  express  Manner,^  Means,  Cause,  etc.;  and 
(2)  after  Comparatives;  and  {3)  after  tlie  prepositions  ab, 
dS,  81,  in,  and  (rarely)  pt3  and  oum :  as,  — ■ 

(1)  muUa  pollicendo  persuadet  (Jug-  46),  he  persuades  by  largi  promise!. 
Latine  loqaendo  cuivk  par   (Brut.  34),  equal  ta  any  man  in  sfeiiinf 

nuUu  viitutis  prieceptis  tr£dendli   (Off.  i.   3) ,   -wiAoul  delivering  any 

precepts  of  virtue  (by  delivering  no  pteceptK) . 
his  ipsis  legendu  (CaL  Maj.  7),  by  reading  these  very  things. 
obscjiram  alque  humilem  conciendo  ad  be  mullifiidineai  (Liv.  i.  8),  calling 

to  them  a  miati  and  obscure  /nullitude. 

(2)  niillum  ofRcium  rsterenda  grmtia  msgis  neccssiiriuTn  est  (Off.  i.  15),  hi 

duty  is  mare  important  than  repaying /avers. 

(3)  in  re  gerenda  vetsari  (Cal.  Maj.  6),  to  be  employed  in  conducting  again. 
Note. — The  Ablalive  of  Ihe  Gerund  and  Gerundive  is  also  very  rarely  os«l 

with  verbs  and  adjectives :  as,  — 

Appius  non  abstitit  oontiuaiuido  magistralum  (Liv.  in.  34),  Appius  did  not 

desist  from  continuing  his  magistracy. 
Remark.  —  The  gerund  i^  often  found  co-ordinated  with  nominal  ci 
in  apposition  with  a  noun :  as. — 


(1)  in  foro,  in  curia,  in  amicorum  pBricolis  pulsandia  (Phil.  vii.  3),  in  Ihi 

forum,  in  the  senate-house,  in  deftnding  my  friends  in  jeopardy. 

(2)  ad  les  diversissimas.  parendnm  atque  imperaudum  (Liv.  xxi,  3},  for  At 

most  widely  different  things,  obeying  and  commanding. 

Ill.-SUPINE. 

NOTB.  —  The  3uplae  is  a  verbal  abstract  of  the  fourth  declension  (f  71.  u) ,  having 

no  distinction  of  lense  or  person,  and  limited  to  two  uses.     (1)  The  farm  in  -um 

is  the  accusative  of  Ihe  end  0/ motion  [5  358.  *,  Rem.),    (a)  The  form  in  -Q  is  usually 

dative  oipurpase  (j  333),  though  probably  the  ablalive  has  been  confiised  with  it. 

302.  The  Former  Supine  (in  -um)  is  used  after  verbs 
of  motion  to  express  purpose.  It  may  take  an  object  in 
the  proper  case.     Thus,  — 

I  In  this  use  the  ablative  of  the  gerund  is,  in  later  writers  nearly,  and  in  medieval 
wrllers  entirely,  equivalent  to  a  present  participle :  as,  cum  Qnft  difirum  flendO 
BSdlsset,  quidajn  mtlea  generfislis  IQxta  earn  E<;)it(TAM>0  T&nlt  (Gesia 
Romftnorum,66  [58J),  as  one  day  she  sat  weeping,  a  certain  knight  came  riding 
(Compare  f  301,  fifth  example.)    From  the  gerund  used  as  ablative  of  manner 
Ihe  ifaJiaJi  and  Spanish  forms  of  1,\ie  pirsraA  v"*'^^^* *.»*  -maiulinidi.aft- 
rue  participial  form  becomitig  a.u  ad'iM&vc\w'emiK\M.ts>atpi.         ^- 


r 


302, 303.]  Supine. 

quid  est,  imusne  sSssnm?  eUl  monitiim  venimus  tS,  riaa  flagitfitom  CI^I 
m.  S}, hownow,  ikall  wt  ht sealed f  though  we  have  loml  to  remind,^ 
to  entreat  you? 

nuptnm  date  (collocare),  lo give  in  marriagi. 

veneiunt  queatam  iniuriu  (LJv,  iii.  25),  they  came  to  lomplain  of  wrongu.  \ 

RKMARK.  —  The  supine  in  -utn  is  especially  common  willi  eS;  and  willi  tt 
passive  infinitive  tri  Torms  llie  fulura  infinitive  passive.    Thus.— 

fuiie  cives  qui  Tempiiblicam  perditum  irent  (Sail.  Cat.  36),  there  wer§  % 

eitiiens  viho  ivent  about  la  rain  the  rspnUii  (ef.  %  258,  b.  Rem.) 
noa  Graig  gervitum  malribusibo  {/i.-a.  ii.  7S6),  I  shall  not  go  to  be  a  slavt  A 

lo  the  Grecian  dames. 
d  Ecisset  Be  tmciditom  in  (Div.  ii.  9),  i/Ae  (Pompey)  had  inmoH  that  ■ 

ie  was  going  to  be  murdered.     [For  the  more  usual  form  of  the  future  J 

inHnitive,  see  g  147.  c.'] 

303.   The  Latter  Supine  (in  -fl)^  is  used  only  with  1 
■few  adjectives,  with  the  nouns  fas,  nefSs,  and  opus,  and  I 
.rarely  with  verbs,  to  denote  an  action  in  reference  to  which  I 
the  quality  is  asserted  :  as,  — 

O  rem  non  modo  nan  foedam,  sed  etiam  aatHtu  (Fhit.  ii.  25),  a  thing  net  J 
only  shocking  to  see,  but  even  lo  hear  of. 

quaerutit  quid  oplimum  faotu  sit  (Veir.  ii.  27),  they  ask  what  is  lest 

hiiminnm  factn  aut  inceptii  (Ter.  Andr.  236),  a  human  thing  It 

si  hoc  ias  esl  dictfi  (Tuac.  v.  13),  if  His  is  lawful  to  say. 

vidctis  nefas  esse  dictfi,  miseram  fuisse  talem  senectiitera  (Cat.  Maj.  5), 

you  see  it  is  a  sin  to  say  that  such  an  old  age  was  wrelcked. 
pudet  diota  (Agric.  32),  it  is  shame  to  tell. 

Note.— The  lalter  supine  is  thus  in  appearance  an  ablative  of  specification 
353),  but  see  {  303,  hEad-note. 

Remark.  — The  supine  in  -H  is  found  esped ally  with  such  adjectives  as  indi- 
te an  effect  on  the  senses  or  the  feelings,  and  those  which  denote  ease,  dificully, 
A  the  like.     But  with  faollie,  dIfflclliB,  lucundtiB,  od  with  the  gerund  ii 
ore  common.    Thus,— 
necTisa  facilis  nee  dicta  adflbilis  ulli  (.^.  iit.  Bzi), 

for  any  man  lo  look  nl  or  address, 
didtcilis  ad  diBtrngaendiml  siniilitudo  (De  Or.  il  53),  a 
distinguish. 
With  all  these  adjeclives  the  poets  often  use  the  InHnilive  in  Ih 
faciles  aurem  ptaebere  (Prop.),  indulgent  to  lend  an  eai 

>  The  only  lalter  supines  in  common  use  are  aUdltO,  dicta,  facta,  inventa, 
Bwmoi4cn,  nfttQ,  tIbO.    Jn  classic  use  this  supine  i&  iound.ui  ailkjis-^wnto)- 
rrbs.     Jl  is  never  followed  by  an  object-case. 


I 


Syntax:  Conditiotiat  Seiiteiices. 


Chapter  IV. —  Conditional  Sentences. 

Note. — THh  Conditional  Sentence  differs  from  other  compound  senleii«si» 
this,  that  the  form  of  Ibe  mala  clause  (APODOSIS)  is  detetmined  ii 
by  the  nature  of  the  subordinate  clause  (PltDTASls),  upon  ths  truth  of  whidi  the 
whole  statement  depends.    LJke  ali  compound  sentences,  however,  the  Condilioiul 

time  became  so  closely  united  as  to  make  one  rnodified  stalemcnL  Thus  — i]»Mi 
Ihr  wordi  up)  strvant  thall  it  iialedis  an  earlier  farm  of  expression  than  l/lia 
sptak  the  word,  tic. 

The  CondidonaJ  Particles  were  originally  independent  pronouns ;  thusd,i/iii 
a  weak  demonstrative  of  Iho  aame  origin  as  bIo,  jd  (^-oe  like  M-ce,  see  fool- 
notes  at  pp.  65,  67),  and  Leis  the  primitive  meaning  of  in  that  -may,  or  in  so<Ht  auf. 

Id  its  origin  the  Condition  was  of  two  kinds.  Either  it  was  assumed  and  slaial 
as  a  fid,  or  it  was  expressed  ai  a  mild  cetamand.  From  the  first  have  came  all 
the  uses  of  the  Indicative  in  protasis;  from  the  latter  all  the  uses  of  the  Subjancliic 
in  protasis.  The  Apodosis  has  either  (i)  the  Indicative,  expressing  the  concIusiHi 
a]  afict;  and  the  Present  and  Perfect  Subjuncdve,  expressing  it  originallj  u 
/»A<w— andhencemoreorleESifaB*(rti/— or  (a)  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  Sub- 
junctive expressing  W-a/ifiiluram  iafratterUi}  andm  >oi/uI/!I2ed  in  the  present  or 
past  Thus  lides,  millSre  CadJnnS  concutitur,  you  latigA,  he  liaits  wiH 
marl  bo'ulirous  lausMer,  is  the  original  form  for  the  Indicative  in  protasis  and 
apodosis;  bI  lldSS  originally  means  merely  you  hmgk  it  some  loay  et  o/irr.  and 
so,  later,  w  you  laugh.  So  toeqs  ArtatSnem,  De^t,  aiiAttsto,/U -would  S{^ns, 
is  the  original  form  of  the  subjunctive  in  protasis  and  apodosis;  b1  rogSa  would 
tae3:atak  in  some-wayer  other.  In  rf  rogftrea,  neBftret,  the  Imperfcti  rogftrBs 
transfers  the  command  of  rogea  to  past  lime,*  with  the  raennmg  supfase you  hoi 
aj&rf,  and  rf  would  have  the  same  meaning  as  before;  while  negftret  transfers  the 
future  ideaof  noget  to  past  lime,  and  meases  he  was geir^lo  deny.  Now  the  slating 
of  this  supposition  at  all  gives  rise  to  the  implication  that  it  is  laitrtie  in  feint  a/faa. 
— because,  if  it  were  true,  there  would  ordinarily  be  no  need  to  stale  it  as  a  sup- 
position :  for  it  would  then  be  a  simple  fact,  and  as  such  would  be  put  in  the  indic- 
ative.' Such  a  condition  or  conclusion^  originally  past,  raeaaxag  svfifioieyou  had 
asked  [yesterday] ,  A(  was  going  to  deay  —  caraeto  express  an  unfulfilled  condition  in 
the  present;  suppose  (or  if)  yoaioere  how  asiing,hev/ov!d\Tiavi\  rfn^-jusl  as  in  Eng- 
lish oMghl,  which  oiigiaally  meant  owed,*  has  come  to  express  a  present  obligation. 

1  The  fiitHrum  in  praelerito  is  a  tense  future  relatively  to  a  lime  absotulily 
fast.  It  denotes  a  future  act  transferred  to  the  faint  of  view  o/pait  liMe,  and  hence 
is  naturally  expressed  by  a  past  tense  of  the  Subjunctive :  thus  dlxlsset,  he  would 
have  jaii/=  dicttlnia  fuit,  ke  was  aioni  ta  say  [but  did  not].  As  that  which 
looks  towards  the  future  from  some  point  in  the  past  has  a  natural  limit  in  present 
time,  such  a  tense  (the  Imperfect  subjunctive]  came  naturally  to  be  used  to  express 
a  present  condition  purely  ideal,  that  is  to  say,  coutrary  to  bet, 

i  Co-nipaTc-^oVlxaSlcerai,  he  should  rather  have  said  {^  266.  e). 

S  There  are,  however,  some  cases  in  which  this  implication  does  not  arise:  as. 
aeciSns  centSca  dedlsaea,  lA  erat  in  loculls  (Hor.  Sat.  L  3, 15),  if  you'd 

*"Thetevas  a  certain  lender  wYikh  ou^^am  &re \«iE&re4 \ivtKiet."  —  7j» 


304.]  Protasis  and  Afodosis. 

Conditional Seotences  may  be  classified  as  follows;  — 
I.  Simple  Present  or  Past  Conditions,  noihing  implied  as  lo  fulfilment  I 
US'*)-  ■" 

S.  FUTURE  CONDITIONS:       (  f  ?'°" _!"!¥  ^  S"?)- 
ii.  Less  vivid  ({31^), 

3.  Conditions  Contrary  f  0.  Preseni  ( j  308). 

TO  Fact:  U.  Past  (}  308). 

4.  General  Conditions  :  f  f" '"'''^''""f  ^"'jJ^Jf  3=9- ■>). 

I  i.  Repealed  Aclion  (}  309.  S.  c), 

f  I.  in  clause  of  Fact,  Wish, 
Commando  310.  i,0. 
2.  inPailicipialExpre: 


1.   Protasis  and  Apodot 

304.  A  complete  conditional  sentence  consists  of  two 
clauses,  the  Protasis  and  tlie  Apodosis. 

The  clause  containing  the  condition  is  called  the  Prota- 
sis;   the   clause  containing  the   conclusion   is   called   the  I 
Apodosis:  as, — 

ai  qui  enire  volunt  [protasis],  conivere  possum  [Apodosis]  (Cal.  H.  11), 

if  any  mish  lo  depart,  I  can  kctp  my  eyes  shut. 
Ei  est  in  exsilio  [protasis],  quid  amplius  posiulatis  [apodosis]  (Lig,  4), 

if  he  is  in  exile,  what  mere  dtiyau  askt 
Note. —  It  should  be  carefully  noted  Ihal  Ihe  Protasis  is  Iho  ettpendntt  ettuat, 
a.  The  Protasis  Is  regularly  introduced  by  the  conditional  particle  1 
(if)  or  one  of  its  compounds.  ' 

Note.  —  These  compounds  are  bIq.  nlal,  atiama!,  etal,  tamstBl,  tamenetd 
(see  Conditional  and  Concessive  Particles,  }  155.  e,g).  An  Indefinite  Relaiive,  or 
«ny  lelative  or  concessive  word,  may  also  serve  lo  introduce  a  conditional  clause 
(see  {316). 

^Lr    b.  The  Apodosis  is  often  introduced  by  some  correlative  word  or 
B))hrase:  as,  bIc,  Ita,  tnin,  ea  ooudlcifine,  etc.     Thus, — 

^B  ita  enim  senectiis  honesta  est,  si  si  ipsa  dcfendit  (Cat.  Maj.  11),  en  (Air 

^H  eaniiitian  is  eld  age  honorable,  if  it  defends  itself. 

^K  n  qnidem  me  amaret,  turn  istuc  pr^dessel  (Ter.  Eun.  446) ,  if  he  loved  me, 

H  then  Ail  would  be  f>ref  table. 

H  KOTE.  ~  In  this  use  sic  and  ei  coodlclSne  ate  ra 


1 


I 


322  Syntax:  Conditional  Sentences.      [§§  304.  305. 

C.  The  Apodosis  Is  Ihe  principal  clause  of  the  conditional  sentena, 
bul  ma/  at  the  same  time  be  subordinate  to  some  other  clause,  and  m 
be  in  the  form  of  a  Participle,  an  Infinitive,  or  a  Phrase;  as, — 

Ecpultuca  quoque  prohihitEirl,  ni  rex  human  iusBisset  (Q.  C  viii.  2),  tVuM^ 
ing  also  la  deprivi  him  of  burial,  unless  thf  king  had  ordertd  him  lik 
interred. 
quod  SI  praeterea  nemo  seijuaLur,  tomen  se  cam  sola  decima  legionc  iturlB 
[esse]  (B,  G.  i.  40),  iuli/ne  one  ilse  taould fiHinii,  he  -would go  wiA  Ar 
l/nlh  Ifginn  alone. 
N  quos  adversum  proelium  cominoverel,  hoa  reperire  posBe  (id.  J,  if  the  las 

of  a  bailie  alarmed  any,  Ihey  might  find,  elc. 
Note.  — When  the  Apodosis  ilself  is  in  Indirect  1 
conslruclion,  Ihe  verb  of  Ihe  Protasis  is  regularly  in  I 
two  of  Ihe  above  examples,  see  J  337). 

d.  Conditions  are  either  (l)  Particular  or  (2)  General. 

1.  A  Particular  Condition  refers  to  a  definite  act  or  series  of  acts 
occurring  at  some  definite  time, 

2.  A  General  Condition  refers  to  any  one  of  a  class  of  acts  which 
may  occur  (or  may  have  occurred)  at  any  time. 

2.    ClasBificatioil. 
303.   The   principal   or  typical   Forms   of    conditional 

setitences  may  be  exhibited  as  follows:  — 

a.  Simple  Conditions,  with  nothing  implied -s^  to  fiilfilment. 

1.  Present,  nothing  implied.    Present  Indicative  in  both  clauses. 

si  adest,!  bene  est,  if  hi  is  [now]  hire,  it  is  ■will,      • 

2.  Past,  nothing  implied.    Some  past  tense  of  the  Indicative  in  both 

si  aderat,  bene  erat,  if  he  was  [thenj  hire,  it  mas  wtU. 

si  adfuit,  bene  fuil,  if  he  has  been  here,  it  has  teen  tveli. 

I.  Future  Conditions  (necessarily  as  yet  unfulfilled). 

I.  More  vivid. 

(a)  Future  Indicative  in  both  clauses. 

si  adetit,  bene  etit,  rfie  is  (shall  be)  Aeri,  it  will  bi  ■aiell. 

(i9)  Future  Perfect  Indicative  in  protasis,  Future  Indicative  in  apodo- 
sis (condition  thought  of  as  completed  before  conclusion  begins). 

Cf.  the  Greek  forms  -.  —  a.  I.  .;  ,pA<,aii  toCto,  «aA£.  txti. 

!.  ti  lirpaooe  toEto,  koXus  tlx'"'     «'  ^irpajt  Toiro,  KaKws  fax*'- 
'    iity  irpiaTit  tai'to,  KoXas  i^tu  2.  ti  itpoijaai  tovto,  voXut  &v  fx^' 

•I  twpaanf  toIto,  KaXus  \v  «txtv.     i.  tl  (T(iat«  Toiro,  uiUit  &•<  ttxtt, 


S  305.]  Classification.  335I 

si  adfaeiit,  bene  erit,  if  hi  is  (shall  h&ve  been)  hire,  ilwill  [tbea]  ti  weB' 

(but  it  will  not  begin  to  be  well  until  he  actually  ia  here). 
2.  Less  vivid. 

(a)  Present  Subjunctive  in  both  clauses. 

si  adsit,  bene  sit,  if  hi  should  be  (or  were  to  be)  here,  it  wiiuld  he  wiH. 
(;3)  Perfect  Subjunctive  in  protasis,  Present  Subjunctive  in  apodt 
Rconditioa  thought  of  as  completed  before  conclusion  begins), 

i  adfuerit,  bene  sit,  if  Ae  sAould  It  (ahould  have  been)  Aere,  it  loauld 
tiben]  6e  -.uell. 

:  Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact. 

I.  Preseut,  contrary  to  fact.    Imperfect  Subjunctive  in  both  dauses. 

li  adessel,  bene  esset,  if  he  -mere  [nowj  here,  it  -mould  be  ■aieU  (bnt  he  is 

NOT  bete). 
!,  Past,  contrary  to  fact.     Pluperfect  Subjunctive  in  both  dauses. 
i  adfuissel,  bene  fuisscf,  if  he  had  [then]  been  here,  it  tmuld  ham  been 

well  (bul  he  was  not  here). 
d.  General  Conditions.     Usually  not  differing  in  form  from  Par- 
ticular Conditions  (a,  b,  and  c)  ;  but  sometimes  distinguished  in  the 
cases  following :  — 

I.  Present  General  Condition  (Indefinite  Time), 
(a)  Present  Subjunctive  second  person  singular  in  protasis,  Present 
Indicative  in  apodosis, 

I       si  hoc  dicas,  creditur,  if  any  one  [ever]  says  this,  il  is  [always]  believed. 
(j8)  Perfect  Indicative  in  protasis.  Present  in  apodosis. 
si  quid  dixit,  creditur,  if  he  [ever]  says  anything,  it  ii  [always]  believed. 
2.  Past  General  Condition  (Repeated  Action  in  Past  Time). 
(a)  Imperfect  Subjunctive  in  protasis,  Impterfect  Indicative  in  apod- 


.1  quid  diceret,  credebatnr,  if  he  [ever]  said  anything,  it  was  [alwajj] 

believed  (=  whatever  be  said  was  always  believed). 
(^)  Pluperfect  Indicative  in  protasis.  Imperfect  in  apodosis. 
i  quid  dixerat,  crcdebalur,  if  he  [ever]  said  anything,  it  was  [always] 

believed. 


Remark.  — The  use  of  tenses  in  Protasis  is  very  loose  in  English.  Thus  if  he 
h  aiivt  new  is  a  PRESENT  condition,  fo  be  expressed  in  Ijtin  by  the  Present 
Indicative;  if  he  is  alive  next  year  is  a  FUTURE  condition,  expressed  in  Latin  by 
the  Future  Indicative.  Again,  if  he  were  here  now  is  a  present  condition  con- 
trary to  fact,  and  would  be  expressed  by  llie  Imperfect  Subjunctive ;  if  he  were  la 
a  FUTUHE  condition  less  vivid  to  be  expieMeA'b'^  fts^riSK*.^"*!- 
)  too,  t/yau  advised  him,  he  would  atUni  ma^  tie  ViB.\Hi\ew.-iw^&^J 


324  Syntax:  Condiliona!  Sentences.  [S  SOi 

3,  Freaent  and  Fast  Condltfons — Xfotbing  Imjiliecl. 

306.  In  the  statement  of  present  and  past  conditioDS 
w^ose  falsity  is  not  implied,  the  present  and  past  tenses 
of  the  Indicative  are  used  in  both  Protasis  and  Apodosis, 
Thus,— 

Bi  tu  exerdtosque  valeCia,  bene  est  (Fam.  v,  2),  if  you  and  iht  army  an 
will,  it  is  ■anil.     (^Present  Condition.] 

huec  igitur,  si  Romae  es;  sin  abes,  auC  etiam  si  ades,  haec  negotia  sic  sr 
tibent  (Alt.  v.  l8),  Ihis,  then,  if  yea  art  at  Rome;  but  if  you  art 
a-aiay  —  or  evett  if  you  are  then  —  these  mailers  are  as  feWns. 
[Present.] 

si  qoi  ntagnia  ingeniis  in  eo  genera  exstitecunt,  non  sails  Graecoruni  gloriu 
respondcnint  (Tusc.  I.  z,  3),  if  any  men  Have  appeared  of  great  gtmia 
in  Ihat  branch,  iHty  have  failed  to  compete  wilk  Sie  glory  of  the  Grith. 
[Past  Condition.] 

accipi  Goma  sineepistula  tim  fasciculum  littetarumin  quasi  modaTatoutti 
et  Romae  foisK  Philotlmi  dnco  esse  cuipam  non  tuam  (Att.  v.  17),  I 
have  received  from  Rome  a  bundle  of  tellers  ■aiilhout  any  from  you, 
■aihich,  provided  you  have  been  viell  and  af  Rome,  I  take  to  be  tki  faidt 
of  Fhilotimus,  not  yours.  [Mixed;  Present  condition  and  Past  con- 
clusion.] 

qiuB  littecas,  si  Romae  ea,  videbls  putesne  reddendas  (Alt  t.  iS],  m  A 
this  letter,  if  you  are  at  Rome,  you  v4U  see  whether  in  your  opinion  U 
ought  lo  be  delivered.     [Mixed!  I^esent  and  Future.] 

st  nemo  impetravit  adcoganter  rogo  (Ijgar.  10,  31),  if  ho  one  has  lui- 
eeededin  obtaining  il,  my  request  is  presumptuous.    [Past  and  Present.] 

a.  In  these  conditions,  the  apodosis  need  not  always  be  in  the  Indica- 
tive ;  but  may  assume  any  form,  according  to  the  sense.     Thus,  — 
si  placet . ,  .yide£iQlu  (Cat.*lBJ.  l"),  if  you  please,  let  us  see.    [Hortalotj,^ 
faerit  hoc  censoris,  si  iudicabat  (Div.  i.  16),  si^pose  it  was  Che  ctnior'i 

duty,  if  he  judged  it  false.     [| Hortatory  Subjunctive.] 
si  nondum  satis  cernitis,  roDOrditmilu  (Milo,  23,  61),  if  you  do  net  yH  ui 

clearly,  reicllecl.     [Impetativc.J 
SI  quid  haties  cerlius,  velim.  scire  (Alt.  iv.  10),  if  you  have  any  trust- 

worthy  information,  I  should  like  to  inaw  it.     [Subjunctive  of  Mod- 

«t7.§3"-M 
Note.  —  Allhough  the  /arm  of  these  conditions  does  not  imply  anything  as  to 
the  Irulh  of  the  supposition,  the  sense  or  (he  context  may  or  couise  have  some  such 

L  in  nostro  omnium  llelii  niillam  lacilmam  aspexiertia  Miloms,  hoc 
a  ei  parcere  (Milo,  34,  92),  da  not,  if  am ul  the  weeping  of  us  all 
hase  seen  no  tear  [to  llic  c^ea\  «/  Milo,  ifari  Inm  (iw  teu  ^ 


i  306,  307.] 


Fiitttre  Conditions. 


3251 


petimos  a  vobis,  iiidices,  si  qua  divina  in  Eanlis  iogeniia  comtncodslia 
debet  esse,  ut  euro  in  veslcam  nccipialis  tidem  (Aicb.  12,  31),  let  ask 

.JiWi  j'"^S'h  if  Ihtrt  ought  la  be  anything  in  iiici  genius  to  rccommtad 
U  to  ta  as  by  a  reeommendaliou  of  thirds,  that  you  recmi  him  undtr    \ 

your  freterlion. 

In  these  two  passages,  the  protasis  reall;  expresses  cause  :  but  the  cause  is 
I  the  speaker  in  (he  fonn  of  a  non-commillal  condition.    His  hearers  ai 
raw  the  infecence  for  themselves.    Id  this  waf  the  desired  impression  is  mads  \ 
1  their  minds  more  efTectiirely  than  if  an  outspoken  causal  clause  bad  been  J 


4.   Future  CondlUons. 

307.   Future  Conditions  may  be  more  or  less  vivid. 

1.  In  a  more  vivid  future  condition  the  protasis  makes  a  i 
distinct  supposition  of  a  future  case,  the  apodosis  express-  I 
mg  what  will  be  the  result, 

,  In  a  less  vivid  future  condition,  the  supposition  i 
less  distinct,  the  apodosis  expressing  what  would  be  the  I 
result  in  the  case  supposed. 

,  In  the  more  vivid  future  condition  the  Future  Indicative  is  used  ] 
!tti  both  protasis  and  apodosis :  as,  — 

sanSbimni  si  volamuB  (Tusc.  iii,  S),  we  shall  be  healed  if  we  wish. 
qaod  si  [egere  aut  audite  vnletia , , .  reperietia  (CaL  Maj.  6),  ifyeu  ■aiiU  \ 
[shall  wish  to]  read  or  hear,  you  -01111  find. 

Note.  — Id  English  the  protasis  is  usuallj'  expressed  by  Ihe  Present  Indicative,    | 
«jely  by  the  future  with  SHALL.     Often  in  Latin  tlie  Presenl  Indicative  is  fo 
'     '  :  pcolasis  ofa  condition  of  this  kind  (cf,  \  276.  e) :  as, — 


u  cesaerimas,  eadem  illk  | 
er,  all  things  will  be  safe  \ 
\  same  things  will  becomt  \ 


advoisa  fient  (Sail.  Cat.  58,  3),  if  -we 
for  vs  ;  but  if  ive  yield  through  fear 
hostile. 

A  pereo  bominutn  manibus  peiiisse  iuvabit  (/En.  iiL  60G),  if  I  perish,  it  I 
v)iU  be  pleasant  to  have  perished  at  the  hands  of  men. 

i.  In  the  hsi  vivid  [\iVaTe  condition  the  Present  Subjunctive  la  used  ] 
I  both  protasis  and  apodosb :  as,  — 

haec  SI   lecura   pafria  loqufitur,   nonne  impetrarc   debeat   (Cat.  L 
i/  your  eounlry  should  thus  speak  with  ihee,  oughl  she  not  to  _ 

quod  si  quis  ieas  mihi  largiatttr  . . .  vaUe  lewLaem  (,C»X,  ■^fcwj,  I'i^, 
rytf/iu  jv,/ Ti^^re  /ogratil  me  this,  I  should  iivully  rej\ 


Syntax:  Conditional  Sentences. 


[}307, 


REMARK.— The  presen 


C.  If  the  conditional  act  is  regarded  as  completed  before  that  of  the 
apodosis  begins,  the  Future  Perfect  is  substituted  for  the  Future  Indic- 
ative in  protasb,  and  the  Perfect  Subjunctive  for  the  Present  Subjunc- 


tiill  excaieytt. 

a  Ihe  apodosis  of  a  liiliKC 


sin  cum  poluera,  Don  venero,  turn  erit  inimicus  (Att.  ix.  2),  tut  i/Idt  lu 
CQOit  when  I  can,  he  will  bt  unfriendly. 

si  noD  feceris  ignasc^m  (Fam.  v.  19),  if  you  Jo  ni 

Remark.— The  Futuie  Perfecl  is  very  often  used  ii 
conditian:  as, — 

vehemenler  mihi  giitum  feceria,  ^  hunc  adolescentem  hiiiiianilate  tH 
comprehenderis  (Fam.  xiii.  15),  you  iBtU  do  (will  have  done)  au  ( 
greatfavor,  if  you  receive  Ihis  young  tnan  iBilkyour  usual  courtesy. 

d.  Any  form  denoting  or  implying  future  time  may  stand  in  ihe 
apodosis  of  a  future  condition.  So  the  Imperative,  the  participles  in 
-dua  and  -mo,  and  verbs  oi necessity , possibility,  and  the  like:  as, — 

alius  fin  in  conBtituendaa  eat  ^  prins  quid  maxime  reprehendece  Scipio 
solilas  sit  dixeto  (Lsel.  16),  anoOter  Hmit  must  be  set  if  I  finl  sldU 
jvhat  Scipio  -mas  -wont  most  to  find  fault  -with. 

si  me  piaeceperit  ^tum,  vus  mandisse  memento,  if  fate  cuts  me  off  If 
soon,  do  you  remimherthat  I  ordered  this  (Q.  C,  iic.  7,  Ii). 

nki  ocidis  videritis  insidias  Miloni  a  Ciodio  factas,  nee  deprec4tnri  somia 
nee  poatnlitnri  (Milo,  2,  6) ,  unless  you  see  inith  your  crwn  eya  lit 
plats  laid  against  Mlto  by  Clodius,  I  shall  neither  Ay  nor  demand,  elc. 

nSn  possum  istura  acciisare  si  cupiam  (Vor.  v.  41),  /  cannot  accuse  kim 
if  I  skotdd  desire  to. 

e.  Rarely  the  Perfect  Indicative  is  used  In  apodosis  with  a  Present 
or  even  a  Future  in  protasis,  to  represent  the  conclusion  rhetorically  as 
already  accomplished:  as,  — 

si  hoc  bene  fixum  in  animo  est,  vioiatb  (Liv.  wii.  44),  iftkis  is  welt  fid 
in  your  minds,  you  have  conquered.     \Yi>t  you  wilt  have  conquered.'] 

si  enndein  [animuro]  babueritis,  vioimna  (id.  43),  if  you  shall  *aw  t^ 
the  same  spirit,  ve  have  canjuered. 

f.  A  future  condition  is  frequently  thrown  back  into  past  time,  with- 
out implying  that  it  is  contrary  to  fact  (§  30S).  In  such  cases  the 
Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  may  be  used ;  as,  — 


1 II  often  depends  entirely  upon  the  view  of  the 
upon  Ihe  nature  of  the  condillon.  whether  ll  shali 
e  proverbial  "  If  Ihe  sky  lalls,  we  shall  calch  larl 
licalty  pal  in  Ihe  vivid  form,  to  WusWaW 
condilion  slated  by  some  one  else. 


t  the  moment,  and  ni 


15  307,  308,]  Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact.  32;:] 

non  poterat  niat  vellet  (B,  C  iii,  44),  imi  hoI  able  un/ist  he  wished  (c 

Cacsac  si  petetet . . .  non  quic<juam  proficeret  (Hot,  Sat,  i.  3.  4),  (/ 
Cissar  were  le  ash  he  would  gain  nothing.  [Here  ihe  coaatructit 
not  contrary  to  fact,  but  la  simply  si  petut  nott  proflclat,  thrown 
past  time.] 

Imnolus  apparuit . . .  u  lace  palam  iretnr  hoslia  prat^venturus  etat  ( 
nil,  24),  a  hitt  appiand . . .  if  Ihey  sAoiildgo  eptitly  by  light,  the  ei 
■uiBuld  prrvenl.    [If  independent  of  appjiruit,  this  would  be,  si  eitur, 
praeventaruB  eat  (forpraeveniat),] 

Note.— This  conslruction  Is  not  common  excepf  in  Indirect  Discourse  {}  337), 

5.    Couditloiis  ConttarT  to  Faot, 

308.    In  the  statement  of  a  supposition  known  to  be\ 

false,  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  Subjunctive,  are  used] 

both  Protasis  and  Apodosis.*     The  imperfect  refers  t(>; 
Present  Time,  the  phiperfect  to  Past :  as,  — 

quae  m  exseqnl  neqairem,  lamcn  me  Icctulus  oblectaret  mens  (Cat.  Maj,  I 

11),  if  I  could  not  [nowj^^uio  iliis  (an  active  \\ifi),  yet  my  couch  loowWB 

afford  me  pleasure.     [Present.] 

nisi  tu  anuEiases,  nunquam  recepissein  (id.  4),  unless  you  had  lost  it,  I'M 

should  not  have  recovered  it.     [Past.] 
El  meum  consilium  auctoril^ue  valnisset,  til  hodie  eg§r&,  nus  liberi  1 
eBsemiiB,  respnblica  □□□  tot  duces  et  execciliis  imlsisset  (Phil.  iL  15},  ] 
if  my  Judgment  atid  authority  had  prevailed  [as  they  did  not],  _ 
would  this  day  be  a  i/ggar,  we  should  be  free,  and  the  republic  would 
not  have  loil  so  many  leaders  and  armies.     [Mixed  Present  and  Past.] 
qui  nisi  levertiaget,  in  eo  conclavi  ei  cubandura  ftdsaet,  quod  proiiinia 
nocte  conruit:   niina  igitur  oppreasoB  eeaet;    at  id  neque  si  fatum 
fuerat  eHogiwet,  nee  si  non  fuerat  in  eum  cisum  incidiBBSt  (Dir.  ii. 
8),  ifii  had  been  decreed  by  fate,  he  imtdd  noPhave  escaped,  etc,    [TTie 
Bpodosis  of  faeiat  is  not  efingisBet,  but  the  whole  conditional  sen- 
tence of  which  effagisaet  is  the  apodosis;   the  real  protasis  of  efiSgia- 
aet  is  cevertisBot  (cf.  §  31  [.  </).] 
a.  In  conditions  contrary  to  fact  the  Imperfect  often  refers  to  ^luf'l 
lime,  both  in  protasis  and  apodosis,  especially  when  a.  repe- 
Mnued  actiott  is  denoted,  or  when  the  condition  if  trut  ■would  still  fl 
.Mxist:  as,— 


] 


-  The  iropllcaiion  of  fiilsiiy,  in  this  consnuclion,  is  not  inherent  In  the  L_..jiu«.^  _ 
Itre;  but  comes  from  tie  transfer  of  a  fixture  coadition  ta  past  time.  Thus  lh«.l 
^'niefor  the  happening  of  the  condition  has,  at  Ihe  lime  of  writing,  already  passed;  J 
that,  if  the  condition  remains  a  condition,  it  must  be  contrary  to  &ct.  So  pafl:] 
■ms  implTJnj  a  future  frequently  take  the  place  o{  fticEKbyiacjareiB  '  '  ' 
!  coDslruction  (see  d,  below,  and  head-note,  p.  320^, 


Sf/Kax:   Conditional  Settlences.  [§  31 


btc  si  mends  easet  suae,  ausus  esset  iducece  exercitum  (Pis.  ai),  ifht  vitrt 
ofsani  mind,  ivbuIJ  ht  havi  dared  le  lead  out  Ihe  army  f  [Here  eoat 
dcnolea  a  continued  state,  past  as  well  as  present,] 

non  canddissent,  nisi  illud  receptaculum  dassibus  nostcis  p«iteret  (Ver.  iL 
I ),  [t^B  ^ower  of  Carthage]  taould  net  have  fallen,  anless  that  staluii 
had  been  open  to  eur fleets.     [Without  the  condition,  patebat] 

Remark.  — This  use  necessarily  arises  from  (he  fact  that  the  pluperfect  is 
equivalent  lo  a  future  perfect  in  fraetrrilo,  and  so  represents  the  action  as  com- 
pleted and  iKomcHbuy,  rather  than  as  continuing. 

b.  In  the  apodosis  of  a  condition  contrary  to  fact  the  Past  tenses  of 
tlie  Indicative  may  be  used  to  express  what  was  intended,  or  liktly,  or 
already  begun;  as, — 

si  licitum  esset  mattes  veniebaJit  (Verr.  vi.  49),  the  mothers  were  coming 

if  it  had  been  all<nved  (see  §  305.  c.  2). 
in  aniplexus  filiae  mebat,  nisi  lictorea  obstitissent  (Tac.  A.xvi.  32),  he  was 

about  rushing  into  his  daughters  arms,  unless  the  lictors  had  oppcsid. 
iam  tuta  lenebam,  ni  gens  crildelis  ferro  invasisset  (£n.  vi.  35S),  /  inu 

just  reaehing  a  placi  of  safely,  had  not  the  fierce  people  attacked  me. 
Note.  —  In  such  cases  the  apodosis  any  be  regarded  as  elliptical.  Thus, — 
mitres  veniebant  (et  venissent)  si  licitum  esset,  the  matrens  inert  coming 

(and  would  have  kept  on)  if  it  had  been  aWmied.     [And  so  in  the 

other  examples:  tilta  tenebam  (et  Cenuissem)  si,  etc.] 

mperfect  indicative  corresponds  in  lime  lo  the 
:t  or  pluperfect  indicative  to  the  pluperieci 
suojuncuve. 

c.  Verbs  and  expressions  denoting  necessity,  propriety,  possibilily. 
duty^  when  used  in  the  Apodosis  of  a  condition  contrary  lo  feet  are 
regularly  put  in  the  Imperfect,  Perfect,  or  Pluperfect  Indicative  instead 
of  the  Subjunctive  1  as,  — 

^ila  puta3«et  certe  optabilins  Miloni  fait  (Mil.  11,  31),  if  he  had  tioH^ 

so,  surely  it  would  have  ieen  preferable  for  Milo. 
El  Romae  priviitua  esset  hoc  tempore,  lamcn  is  erat  deligendtu  (Manil, 
17),  if  he  (Pompey)  were  at  this  time  a  pri-uale  citizen  at  Rome,  yd 

he  ought  to  be  appointed. 
quod  ease  caput  debebat  si  probati  posset  (Fin.  iv.  9),  what  ought  lo  k 

the  main  point  if  it  could  be  proved. 
nam  nSs  decebat  lugire  (Tusc.  i.  48,  ii^),  for  U  would  befit  us  to  mourn. 

1  Such  are  poBaum,  deoet,  oportet,  dSlieo,  and  the  Second  Penphrastic 
CoaJugatiOQ.  Observe  that  all  these  expressions  contain  the  idea  of  fiiturily  {ci, 
note  above).  Thus,  docet  m5  [hodlB]  Ire  CrOs,  means  it  is  proper  for  ml 
[lo-day]  lo  go  to-morrow ;  and,  decSbat  mS  [herl] ,  Ire  hodlS,  it  was  propir 
~  ■  mt  {yeUtiiXa.y\  logo  to-day,  yxi\^Xi'j  w\&  fee  vrnv^itaiitm  vWl  f  haut  not  gent  ai 


K  308,  309.] 


General  Conditions. 


il  is  only  the  thing  m 
elf.  U  ihe  Hiceaify 
Tbs.    "ITie  difference  i 


fuarv  (etc.)  Ihit  is  ci 
self  is  conditic 
aflen  imperceptible,  I 


Note  1.— In 

I  the  necessity  ii 
bjunclive  is  used  as  with  nlher  > 
y  be  seen  in  the  following  eiam 
quid  farere  pottdssem  niu  torn  consul  fuissem?  consul  a 

potni  nisi  eum  vilae  cursum  lenuissem  a  pucritia  (Rep.  i.  6),  ; 

roald  1  Aaiie  done  if  I  had  not  Iheit  been  comul ;  and  hmo  could  /M 

have  been  censidif  I  had  not  followed  Ihal  courst  of  lift  from  boyhood,    j 
Note  a. — This  eonslrucliDn  is  sometiinea  carried  still  further  hi  poety : 
d  HOD  allum  jactaret  odorem,  lanrus  erat  (Georg.  ii.  133)1  il  -were  a  lauril^  1 

bul  for  giving  vut  a  different  odor. 

d.  The  participle  in  -finiB  with  eram  or  fnl  may  take  the  place  (rf  J 
an  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  in  the  Apodosis  of  a  conditloil  \ 
contrary  to  fact :  as,  — 

quid  eaim  f^torom  fait  [=  fuisset],  si . .  .  (Liv,  ii.  i),  vihat  ■mould  havg  4 
happened  if,  etc. 

neque  amhigitur  quin  ...  id  factama  fnerit,  si  . .  .  (id.),  nor  it  litre  a\ 
question  he  would  have  done  it  if,  etc.     [Direct:  feciaaet.] 

ex  quo  intellegi  potest  quam  aciiti  nitHra  »nt,  qui  haec  sine  doctnua  oredi- 
tnri  fiiermt  (Tusc.  i.  21),  hence  il  may  be  underslecd  how  keen  tkey 
are  by  nataref  who,  without  instruction,  vronld  have  believed  this. 
QHete  the  condition  is  contained  in  Ihe  words  sine  doctirin&.] 

adeo  parata  sidilio  fnil,  nt  Otbonem  rspturi  fderint,  1 ' 

timuissent  (Tac,  H.  i.  26),  10  far  advanced  was  the  conspiracy  that  J 
Ihty  woald  have  seised  upon  Olho,  had  Ihey  not  feared  the  hanards  of  1 
the  night.     [In  a  main  clause :  ra.pDiBsent  ui  timoiseent.] 

Note.— This  construction  is   regularly  used  when  the  apodosis 


Discourse  ti:dsse  replaces  erom  or  ful  (i 

'.  The  Present  and  Perfect  subjunctive  are 


Indi 

poetiy  I 
in  the  protasis  and  apodosis  of  conditions  contrary  to  fact :  as,  — 

ni  comes  admoneat,  inruat  (.'^.  vi.  293},  had  not  his  companion  warned  \ 

hint,  he  lOBuld  have  rushed  on. 
ni  facifct,  maria  ac  terras  ferant  (id.  i.  58),  unless  he  did  this,  Ihty  looald  I 
hear  aioay  sea  and  land. 


6.  General  Conditions. 

309.  General  Conditions  (§  304.  d)  have  usually  the  | 
same  fomis  as  Particular  ContJitions.  But  they  are  some-  j 
times  distinguished  in  the  followmg  tViiee  CEAe,?.'.-^ 


33°  Sytitax:  Conditional  Sentences.      {%%  a^^.ZVl 

a.  The  Subjunctive  is  sometimes  used  in  the  second  person  sitigular, 
to  decote  the  act  of  an  Indefinite  Subject  (^yau  —  any  one}.  Here  the 
Indicative  o{  a.  general  truth  may  stand  in  the  apodoais :  as,  — 

men)  prope  ati  fecrom  est :  si  exerceaa  couieritur;  nisi  axerceit,  ribi- 
ginem  contraMt  (Cato  de  Mot.},  Ihe  mind  is  very  like  iron  :  ijyox 
sue  it,  il  wears  aiuay  ;  if  you  daiCl  use  il,  it  gathers  rust. 

viiliitem  neccssario  gloiia,  etiimi»  tii  id  non  agia,  conse^oitur  (Tusc.  L 
^^t  glory  neeessarily  follows  virlue,  even  if  thai  is  not  one's  aim. 

si  piohilnta  impane  trmnscendBriB,  neque  metus  ultra  ncque  pudor  ett 
fTac  A.  iii.  54),  if  yen  tmci  overstep  lie  bounds  viilA  impunity,  there  il 
no  fear  nor  shame  any  more. 

si  (^eiea  placabilis  (Tac  Ann.),  \keviits\  easily  appeased  if  one  yielded. 

b.  In  later  writers  (not  in  Cicero),  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect 
Subjunctive  are  used  in  protasis,  with  the  Imperfect  Indicative  in  apod- 
osis,  to  state  a  repeated  or  customary  action  in  past  time ;  as,  — 

■cciisalotes, si  faculras  tuoideret, poenis  adCcietiaiitnr  (Tac.  k.-rLyi),lki 
accusers,  whenever  opportunity  ojered,  viere  visited  with  puniskmenl. 

c.  In  a  general  condition  in  present  time,  the  protasis  often  takes 
the  Perfect,  and  tlie  apodosis  the  Present  Indicative.  For  past  time, 
the  Pluperfect  is  used  in  the  protasis,  and  the  Imperfect  in  the  apodosis. 
Thus,— 

H  quoB  aliqaa  mcmbroram  parte  iaiililis  notivSmnt,  nccan  iabent  (Q.  C. 
i*-  '»  3)>  if  they  fever}  mark  any  infirm  in  any  part  0/ their  limh, 
Guy  [always]  order  them  to  be  put  to  death.     [Pcesenl.] 

si  H  persequendu  hostes  detenere  neqniveiaiit  ab  lergo  circDinvemEbaJil 
(Jug'  5°)»  'XLevet]  Ihey  were  unable  to  prevent  the  enemy  from  par- 
siiing,  ihey  [always]  surrounded  Ihem  in  the  rear.     [Past.] 

d.  In  all  other  cases,  general  suppositions — including  those  intro- 
duced by  Indefinite  Relatives — are  not  distinguished  in  form  from 
Particular  Conditions. 

7.  Conditton  Disguised. 

310.  In  many  sentences  properly  conditional,  the  Prot- 
asis is  not  expressed  by  a  conditional  clause,  but  is  stated 
in  some  other  form  of  words  or  implied  in  the  nature  o! 
the  thought.     Thus, — 

a.  The  condition  may  be  implied  in  a  Clause  or  in  a  Paiticiple. 
Noun,  Adverb,  or  some  other  word  or  phrase.     Thus,  — 

facilE  me  palercr  —  illo  ipso  iudice  quaerente  —  pro  Sex.  Roscio  dicere 
(Rose.  Ara.  30,  85),  /  should  readily  allow  myself  to  speak  for  Koiiim 
iftiat  very  judge  taert  conducting  (lie  irial.  ^tssent.  conmry  to  boll 
siquAereret,  etc.^ 


3ia]  Condition  Disguised.  33I 

con  mihi,  nisi  admonito,  venisseC  in  mentem  (De  Or.  ti,  42),  it  svi 
kaue  come  into  my  mind  un/ess  [I  had  beenj  rtminded.  [Phi 
triiiy  Co  fact :  nisi  admouitna  eaBem.]  _ 

nulla  alia  gene  tanta  roole  cladia  non  obcula  esset  (Liv,  xxii.  54),  tAire  il~ 
na  oiker  fiopU  that  wonld  not  iavi  itm  crushed  by  such  a  joHghl  of 
disaslcr.     [Past  contrary  to  fact:  n  alia  fniuet.] 

nemo  unquam  Bine  magna  spe  immortBlilatis,  se  pro  patiia  oETeiret  ad 
moitem  (Tusc.  i.  15),  no  am,  ■without  great  hope  of  immortality, 
evir  expose  himself  It)  death  for  Ais  country.    [Present  contrary  ti 
nisi  magnam  Hpem  liabeiet.] 

quid  banc  pauconun  aiiDorum  aecessio  iuvare  potuisset  (Lxl.  3), 

goad  could  the  addition  of  a  few  years  have  done  kirn  (if  they  had  been 
added)?     [Fast  contiHcy  to  fact :  m  accsBHiBaent.] 

qui  igituT  mihi  feiaruni  lanialug  oberit  niMl  sentientl  (Tusc.  1.  ij,  104), 
■aihat  harm  laiH  the  mangling  by  wild  beasts  do  me  if  I  don't  feel  any- 
thing (feeling nothine)?     [Future  more  vivid:  Bi  nihil  aentiam,] 

incitiita  semel  proclive  labunlur  (Tusc.  iv.  18),  if  once  given  a  push, 
slide  down  rapidly.     [Present  General ;  a  incitata  stmt.] 

b.  The  condition  may  be  contained  in  a  Wish  {optative  subjuttcii 
or  expressed  as  an  Exhortation  or  Command  {hortatory  subjunctive^ 
imperative)  :  as,  — 

ntioam  quidem  foiaBem !  molestus  nobis  non  esset  (Fam.  xii.  3),  /  wiilt 

I  had  been  [chief] :   he  would  not  now  be  troubling  us  {i.e.  if  I  had 

been).     [Optative  Subjunctive.] 
naluram  expelliui  furca,  tamen  usque  recurret  (Hor.  Ep.  i.  to.  24)  drive  out 

nature  with  a  pitchfork,  still  she  will  ever  return.     [Hortatory.] 
rogea  enim  Aristonem,  neget  (Fin.  iv.  25),  for  ask  Aristo,  he  would  deny. 
manentingemasenibus,  modo  pennaneat  sludium  et  industria  (Cat.  Maj.  7), 

old  men  keep  their  mental  powers,  only  let  them  keep  ihtirstal  and  iHli- 

genee  (§  366.  d).     [Hortatory.] 
tolls  haoc  oplnionem,  Inctum  susluleris  (Tusc.  i.  1 3),  remove  this  notion, 

and  you  ■aiill  have  done  away  with  grief.     [Imperative.] 
Note. — The  so-called  concessive  subjunctive  wilh  ut  and  nS  is  really  hortatory, 
id  often  has  the  force  of  protasis  ({  313.  a):  as,-^ 
nt  enim  rationem  Plato  nullam  afferret,  ip 

i.  zi,  49).  even  if  Plato  gave  no  re,. 

e.  Rardy  the  condition  takes  the  form  of  an  iniiependent  clam 

ridlH:   maiore  cachinno  concutitnr  (Juv.  iii.  106),  you  laugh;  he  thai 
wilh  louder  laugiter  (=  if  you  laagh,  he  shaUes). 

t  This  usage  is  probably  the  origin  of 

an  iDdefiniie  pronoun  (see  head-note,  p.  saol, 


1 

re  tr^^ 

Mof 

t  ad 

oouiilr^^m 
fact^H 

04). 
any- 


n 


Sytitax:    Cofiditiotial  Sentences.       [SS  310,  31L 

wntiei  (Tasc.  iv.  24),  sHr  him  vp  \«B.ii\  ytm'U  find,  etc. 
de  pauperlats  agitnr:  muUi  patientes  psuperSi  commeniorantnc  (Tiuc. 

iii.  24),  -we  speak  nf poverty  ;  many  patient  poor  are  mentioned. 
d.  The  condition  is  often  contained  in  a  Relative  Clause  (see  §  316}. 
Remark. — For  the  use  of  a  participle  as  Apoimsis,  see  j  304.  c. 

8.   Condition  Omitted. 
311.   The  Protasis  is  often  wholly  omitted,  but  maybe     I 
inferred  from  the  course  of  the  argument.     Thus,  — 

potetat  Sexlilius  impune  negare  :  quis  enim  redargueret  (Fid.  ii.  1 7],  Sis- 
lilius  might  kaiie  denied  with  impunity ;  for  iiiho  -aiould  prove  him 
wrong  (if  lie  had). 
REMARK.  — Under  this  head  belongs  the  so-called  POTENTIAL  SUBJUNCTIVE. 
I.    POTENTIAl.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

a.  The  Potential  Subjunctive  is  used  to  denote  an  action  not  as 
actually  performed,  but  as  possible. 

In  this  use  the  Present  and  the  Perfect  refer  without  distinction  to 
the  immediatey«/«^« ;  the  Imperfect  io  pas/  time.  The  second  person 
is  common,  indicating  an  Indefinite  Subject  (cf.  §  309.  a).    Thus,  — 

hie  qnaerat  quispiam  (N.  D.  ii.  53),  here  some  one  may  ast. 

asaimilire  frelo  poHsis  (Ov.  M.  v.  6), you  might  rompare. 

ut  aliquis  forta5se  dixerit  {Off,  iii.  6),  as  one  may  perhaps  say. 

foraitan  haec  illi  mirentnr  (Verr.  v,  56),  they  may  perchante  marvel  at 
these  things. 

turn  in  lecto  quoque  vjderei  susucro*  (Hor.  Sat.  ii.  8. 77),  Aen  ore  each  couch 
you  might  hear  whisperings. 

NOTE!.— ThePreBenllsBomelimeatispdforlhelDipertte:  as,— 

migranlis  cetnas  (JED.\\,^\),yotf  might  have  seen  them  mavittg. 

Note  2.  —  The  Pluperfect  is  rare  ia  Ihis  construction.     Its  place  is  supplied  by 

putftsaSa  eius  luctiia  aliqnem  finem  esse  debere  (Sen.  Dial.  6j  13),  yeu 
vould  have  thought  there  ought  to  be  some  end  to  his  grief  . 

Bubjunclive  with  forsltan  does  not  differ  in  meaning  from  the 
ealiy  an  Indirect  Question  ( j  334.  g). 

unciive  is  strictly  an  apodosis  wilh  omlned 
,  may  be  easily  supplied,  but  often  none  is 
cr.      So  also  the  Subjunctive  of  Modesty  (i. 


II.    SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  MODESTY". 
.  The   Subjunctive  is   used   in   caulious,   modest,   or  hypothetical 
ijifltements  (coniunctlvus  madestiae).    THs  use  is  capeciaUy  commaa 
apofite  wish,  with  velim  or 'veU.em.    '^us., —  ^^^^^^_ 


I  311.]  Cojidttioit  Omitted. 

pu:e  tni  dizaim  (MQ.  2S),  Iwemldsay  iyyvur  Ittmt. 

hsud  sdunan  (De  Or.  i.  80),  f  Aould  inciint  la  tidiii. 

lu  velimsic  eidslimes  (Fam.  xii.  6),  I  iheuld  lilu  yeu  ta  ikink  le. 

vix  auBun  ciedere  (Ov.  M.  vL  561),  I  ikould  kardfy  dart  itlieue. 

vellem  adesset  M.  Anlonins  (Phil,  i.  7),  /  lould  jeisi  ArUeny  a 

[Here  vellem  implies  an  imrDlfilled   wiib  in  pccsent  time;   Tola 
nolo  would  express  s  peremptory  wish.] 

haec  erant  fere  quae  tibi  nala  esse  Tellem  (Fun.  xii.  5),  this  is  aioul  Teial 
I  shimld  Hie  you  to  know.  [Here  vellem  is  simplj  velim  transTcrred 
to  past  lime  on  account  of  enX  (epistolary),  1^  sequence  of  tenses, 
and  does  not  impl;  an  impossible  wish.]  ' 

m.   VERBS  OF  NECEESITV. 
C.  The  Indicative  of  verbs  signifying  necessity,  propriety,  and  the 
like,  may  be  used  in  the  apodosis  of  implied  condidoDS,  either  future 
ir  contrary  to  feet :  as,  — 

longom  ert  ea  diccre,  scd  . . .  (lis.  to),  it  would  be  iedioui  to  tell,  etc. 

[Fulure.]  _ 
illud  e»t  uptiaB,  aequum  cuique  concedece  (Fin.  iv.  1),  it  would  be  more 

JiUitig  to  yield  each  one  his  rights. 
quanto    meliOB   fnerat    (OSl  iiL   25),   how   much    better   it   ■mimid  hai 

quod  centra  decnii  ah  illo  meum  [corpus  cremari]  (Cat.  Maj.),  wluru 

on  the  other  hand  mine  ought  to  hat-e  been  burnt  by  him. 
ipsum  enim  exspectare  magnum  fait  (Fhil.  ii.  40},  -mould  it  have  been  c-J 

great  matter  to  wail  fir  the  man  himself? 
nam  nos  decebat  domum  lugire  ubi  esset  aliqois  in  liicem  editus  ( 

48),  for  il  were  fitting  to  mourn  the  house  where  a  man  has  bet 

(but  we  do  not). 

erat  dapibaa  aodales  (Hor.  Od.  i.  37.  l),  i.e.  it  would  be  time  (if  it 
were  for  us  to  do  it,  but  it  is  a  public  act). 

Remark.  — Notice  that,  in  Ihi?  conslmction,  the  Imperfect  indicative  refers  lo 
resent  time;  the  flaperi 
leans  ;/  oiigkl  la  it  [no» 


X  tbird  example  above). 

9.  Complex  Conditions.  ' 

d.  Either  the  protasis  or  the  apodosis  may  be  a  complex  idea  iti 
which  the  main  statement  is  made  with  expressed  or  implied  qualifica- 
tions. In  such  cases  the  true  lo^cal  relation  of  thft  gatts  Is  s 
disguised:  as,  — 


1 

Ide^H 


I 


Syntax:   Conditional  Sentences. 


si  qui&  horum  dixisset , . .  e!  veibDm  de  lepublica  fedsset , . .  inulU  plura 
dixisse  qnam  dixissel  put^ritur  (Rose.  Am.  l),  i/  any  of  Ihesi  had 
spoktn  in  cast  he  had  said  a  ■word  aboui  polities,  he  woatd  br  lia^l 
to  have  said  much  more  than  he  did  say.  [Here  tbe  apodoaU  nf 
dixiaaet  is  tbe  whole  uf  Che  following  statement  (si  . . .  putaietor), 
which  is  itself  conditioned  \fj  a  protasis  of  its  own  :  ^  Terbnm,  etc.], 

qaod  si  in  hoc  mundo  Retl  sine  deo  nan  potuit  ne  in  sphoern  quidcm 
eosdem  motiis  sine  dIvTno  ingenio  potoisset  imitiri  (Tnsc.  i.  25),  turn 
if  thai  cannot  be  done  in  this  univtrsi  ■widtaiit  divine  agency,  no  tmrt 
eeidd  [Archimedes]  in  iis  orrery  have  imitated  the  same  revoluHoni 
'  without  divine  genius.  [Here  u  potuit  (a  protasis  with  nothing  im- 
plied) has  for  its  apodosis  the  whole  clause  which  follows,  but  potoisset 
has  a  contrary-to-fact  protasis  of  its  own  implied  in  line  . .  .  ingenta,] 

peream  male  si  non  optimum  erat  (Hor.  Sat  ii.  I.  6),  confannd  me  (may  1 
perish  wretchedly)  (/  it  wouldn't  be  better.  [Here  peream  is  apoilosi* 
to  the  rest  of  the  senteoce,  while  the  true  protasis  to  opttmniu  era,t, 
t-ontraiy  to  fact,  is  omilled.] 

10.  Partdclea  of  Comparieon  (Conolueiou  Omitted). 
313.  The  particles  of  Comparison  —  tamqnam,  tamquam 
tX,  quael.  Seal,  utsl,  velutEl,  veluti,  and  poetic  oon  (all  meaning 
as  if),  and  quam  bI  {than  if)  —  take  the  Present  or  Perfect 
Subjunctive,  unless  the  sequence  of  tenses  requires  the 
Imperfect  or  Pluperfect.     Thus, — 

lamijuam  clausa  sit  Asia  (Fam.  xii.  9),  as  if  Asia  were  closed. 

lamquam  ai  claudus  aim  (Plaut.  Asin.  ii.  4,  il"),  just  as  if  I  viere  lame  (i.e.\ta\ 

as  it  would  be  if  I  should  be  lame), 
ila  bos  [honores]  petunt,  quasi  honeste  Tixerint  (Ja^.  85)1  they  teek  tken 

(officSa)  _/'ai?  oj  if  they  had  lived  honorably. 
quasi  vero  non  specie  visa  iudicentur  (Acad.  ii.  tS),  at  if  forsooth  visiMt 

things  TOere  not  Judged  b}'  their  appearance. 
similiter  fads  ac  si  me  TOgea  <^.%.i\\.fi,youdo  exactly  as  if  you  ashed  me. 
aeque  ac  si  mea  negotia  eaaent  (Fam,  siii.  43),  as  much  as  if  it  were  my 

own  business. 
velut  si  coram  adeaaet  (B,  G.  i  31),  as  if  he  were  present  in  person. 
ceu  cetera  nnsquam  bella  forest  (-En.  ii.  43B),  as  if&ere  were  nofigkHag 

elsewhere. 
magis  qnam  si  domJ  eaaea  (Att.  vii.  ^,  more  than  if  you  were  al  home. 
Remark.  — The  English  idiom  would  lead  us  to  expecl  the  Imperfect  anil 
Ruperfect  Subjunctive  with  these  particles;  but  the  point  of  view  is  different  in 
the  two  languages.  Thus  the  second  example  above  Is  translated  just  as  if  I  teert 
lame,— as  if  it  were  a  present  condition  contrary  10  fact;  but  it  really  means/iut 
as  [il  would  be]  1/  /  sioK/d  [at  some  future  lime]  ie  laae,  and  so  is  a  leu  mid 
future  condition  requiring  the  present  subjunctive.  Similarly  Quaal  Iioiiastfl 
vtxeriat,as  if  they  had  lived  honorably. \i.  TeaWT  m  \.ftiwi  ■«wjld  do  In  the  ' 


m 


Concessive  Clauses.                                335  ^^H 

Note. — These  subjonclfve  clauses  are  really  future  conditions  with  apodosis 
implied  in  the  particle  itself.    Thus  in  tarotjuara  al  Olaudua  Eim  the  protasis 
,       is  Introduced  by  A,  and  Ilie  apodosis  implied  in  tamquam. 

^L                                    11.   ConcGSBivQ  Clauses.  ^^H 

H     313.   The  particles  of   Concession  (meaning  although,  ^^| 

^granting  that)    are    the    following:    quamquam,    qnatnlibe^  ^^| 

qaanrvls,    qnaotiim.    vis,    nt,    nS,    onm,    licet,    ets^    tameto^  ^^| 

etiamBt  ^H 

^Some  of  these  take  the  Subjunctive,  others  the  Indica-  ^H 

ve.     Thus,  —  ^H 

a.  Qnamvls,  nt,  and  nB  take  the  Subjunctive  (§  266.  c) ;  as,  —  ^H 
qnami^  ipsi  infantes  Hint,  tamen  , .  .  (Or.  23),  however  incapable  of 

speaking  they  themselves  may  he,yct,  etc, 
ut  neminem  alium  rogaBSet  (Mil.  17),  irvea  if  he  had  ashed  no  ether, 

nBsit  sSnesummum  dolor:  malum  certe  est  (Tusc  IL  5,  M^,  suppose  pain  ■ 

I              it  net  the  greatest  evil,  still  it  surely  is  an  evil.  ^^^ 

Note.  — Quamvis  means  literally,  iuiR»i:4ajjv»»></A    Ttius  in  ihe  cxampla  ^^| 

tfMve,  Ullheta  be  as  incapaile  as  yon  will,  still,  etc.    Tlie  subjunctive  with  qualii-  ^^| 

via  andnfi  Is  hortatory;  that  with  ut  is  of  uncertain  origin.  ^^| 

b.  IiicBt  (properly  a  verb)  takes  a  Substantive  clause  in  the  Sub-  ^H 

Junctive  (§  331.  c)  :  as.—  ^H 

licet  omnes  in  me  terrotvs  pcticulaque  impendeant  (Rose  Am.  1 1),  theiigh  ^^| 

all  terrors  and  perils  should  menace  me.  ^^| 

Note.— The  subjunctive  with  licet  is  by  the  sequence  of  tenses  necessarily  ^^| 

limited  Id  the  Present  and  Perfect  tenses.  ^^| 

c.  Xitel,  ettamnT,  tamets^  even  if,  take  the  same  constructions  as 
•I  (§305):  as.- 

etsi  abeat  maturitas  (Fam.  vi.  18),  Aougk  ripeness  of  age  is  wanting.  ^^^ 

ctsi  Dunquam  dubium  fiiit  (id.  v.  19),  although  it  has  never  been  doubtful.  ^^H 

etsi  stataeram  (id.  v.  5),  though  I  had  determined.  ^^H 

etsi  nihil  aliud  abstulisBetia  (Suit,  '^i'),  even  if  you  had  taken  away  nothing  ^^B 

"      else.  ^H 

ctiam^  qaod  scribas  non  habSbls,  scribito  tamen  (Fam.  xvi.  z6),  even  if  ^^H 

you  [shall]  have  nothing  to  write,  still  write.  ^^H 

sed  ea  tametsi  v5s  parvi  pendebatia  (Sail.  Cat.  52),  but  although  you  re-  ^^H 

garded  those  things  as  of  smalt  account.  ^^^ 

d.  Cum  concessive  takes  the  Subjunctive  (see  §  336) :  as,  — 

onmmibi  non  omnino  eTcidisBet  (Fam.  v,  l^^t^u^h  it  had  nut  itUirelf 

tur/tsiei/ [from  loy  mind]. 


r 


336  *        Syntax:  Conditional  Sentences.      [§§  313, 4 

Note. — In  eariy  LaUd  cum  (ijaam)  concessive  osuallj  lakes  ihe  Indies* 

nil  qnom  eat  nil  defit  tamcn  (Ter.  Eun.  Z43),  vihiU  I  Savf  no/king,  iHU 

Holhittg  is  wanliMg.     [See  also  §  326,  note  3.] 
(.  Qnamquam  introduces  aa  adtnilted  fact  and  takes  the  Indica- 

omnibus  —  qa&inqnam  mit  ipse  sais  cladibus  —  pestem  dennntiat  (PbiLidv. 
3),  though  hi  ii  ireaking  do-am  under  his  disasters,  still  he  threaleHS 
alt  with  destructien. 

f.  Qnamquam  more  commonly  means  and  yet,  introducing  a  new 
proposition  in  the  indicative ;  as,  — 

quamquBm  haec  quidem  tolcrabilia.  videbantur,  etsi,  etc.  (MiL  2S),  ani 
yel  these,  in  truth,  seemed  now  bearable,  though,  etc. 

g.  The  poets  and  later  writers  frequently  use  quEunvb  and  quam- 
gnam  like  etal,  connecting  them  witli  the  Indicaiive  or  the  Subjunctive, 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  condition.    Thus,  — 

quamqnam  moreretoT  (Liv.  Kiivi.  34),  allhoagh  he  was  moved. 

PoUio  amat  nnstram,  quamvis  eat  tSstica,  musam  (Eel.  iiL  S4),  Pollio  lova 

my  must,  though  she  is  rustic. 
quamvis  perveneriia  (Liv.  Ii.  40),  though  you  had  came. 
Note, — Even  Ocero  oceaaEonallj  uses  quamquam  wilh  the  Suhjunclive; 

quamquam  ni  Id  quidem  suspicionem  coitionia  habuerit  (Pli 

net  even  Ifiat  raised  any  suspicion  of  a  caalitiim. 
k.  The  Relative  pronoun  qui  is  often  used  with  the  Subjunctii 
express  concession  (see  §  320.  e). 

i.  Concession  Is  often  expressed  by  the  Hortatory  Subj'i 
out  a  particle  (§  266) :  as,  — 

Bit  clarus  Scipia,  6metnr  eximia  laude  Africanas,  habeatnr  vir  egregins 
Paullus  . . .  erit  profeclo  inter  hoium  laudea  aliquid  loci  nosttac  glJriae 
(Cat.  iv,  10,  ai).  '■''  S'ipi''  be  rtaawned,  let  A/ricanus  be  honored  with 
especial  f  raise,  let  Paulas  be  regarded  as  a  remarkable  man.  [still] 
Aeri  will  surely  it  some  room  for  my  glory  amid  the  fraiitt  of  these 

13.   Fro  via  o. 
314.    Dum,  modo,    dummodo,    or   tantum,   introducing  a 
Proviso,  takes  the  Subjunctive;  as, — 

oderint  dnm  meittttni  (Off.  i.  aS),  let  them  hale,  if  only  they  fear. 
valetudo  modo  bona  ait  (Brut,  id),  provided  the  health  is  good, 

\odQ  inter  me  alque  te  mucuj  iDietnt  (i^t'^'  ^V  t^amded  ffm^  du 
waU  (of  Ihe  city)  i;  betaitcn  ui.  ^^^^^^H 


Aoi^ 


i^  valel 


S  314,  315.] 


Provh 


•e  proviso  n5 

modo  He  sit  ex  pecudum  gen 

not  oftht  htrd  ofiaUU. 

id  facial  saepc,  dum  ne  lassoin 

provided  he  den  not  get  tir, 

a  (severitaa)  ne  vaxietur  (Q.  Fr. 


used,  with  or  without  modo,  < 

:  (Off.  i.  ia-).fr^idfd  [in  pleasure]  * 


nafc(CBioR.  R.v.4),/f/ 
d. 

) ,  prmidid  only  il 


).  only  let , 

lo  is  hortatory  ( j  266.  if) ;  that  wi 

se  of  ihe  Subjunctive  with  dum  in  temporal    . 

10  loitg  as  my  htallh  is  good,  1  don' 

2   without   i 


it  (Ov.  M.  is.  J 

Note.— The  Subjunclive  wilh  mo 

modo,  a  development  from  the 

;,  j  33E  (compare  Ihe  colloquia 

b.  The  Hortatory  Subjuncti' 
presses  a  proviso  (see  §  266.  rf); 

sint  Maeccnates,  non  deerunt,  Flacce,  Mi 

Iie  Matctnasts,  Virgils  will  not  bs  lacking. 
Note.  — -  For  a  clause  of  Result  expressing  provi 
13.   Use  of  SI  and  ita  Componnda. 
315.   The  uses  of  some  of  the  more  common  Conditional 
rticles  may  be  stated  as  follows  :  — 

a.  I.  SI  is  lased  for  affirmative,  nial  (nl)  and  al  nfin  for  negative   I 
conditions.     With  niai  (generally  unless)  the  apodosis  is  stated  a 
versally  true  exceft  in  the  single  case  supposed,  in  which  c 
(impliedly)  not  true.     Thus,  — 

niai  Conon  adest  maeieo,  unUss  Conon  is  here,  I  mourn  (i.^.  I  am  always  I 

ia  B  state  of  grief  except  in  the  single  case  of  Conon's  presence,  i 

which  case  I  am  not). 
With  8l  nSn  {if  nof)  the  apodosii 
tive)  case  supposed,  but  as  to  other  c; 

ri  Conon  non  adest  maereo,  i}  Conon  is  not  here,  I  mourn  (i.t 

ihe  single  case  of  Canon's  absence,  nothing  being  said  as  to  other  a 

in  which  I  may  or  may  not  mourn). 
Note.  — It  often,  however,  mates  no  difference  in  which  form  the  slfltemont 

2.  HI  is  an  old  form  surviving  in 

leappearing  in  poets  and  later  writers. 

Sometimes  niai  si,  except  if,  utiless, 

noli  putare  me  ad  quemquam  longioris  epialuli 
me  pliira  scripsit  (Fam.  xiv.  2),  «f«^/  in  cay 

b.  HiBl  vBro  and  niai  forte   regularly  introduce 
exception  iraiiua/fy,  and  take  the  Indicative ■,  as,— 


338 


Syntax:   Conditional  Sentences. 


nisL  vSr5  L.  Caesar  cnidelior  viani  eat  (CaLiv,  6),  unless  indeed  Z-  Casar 

seemed  Ino  cruel. 
nial  forta  Tolnmas  Epicuteomm  apmionem  sequi  (De  Fato,  l6),  unlus  lo 

be  sure  we  choose  in/otimo  Ihe  notion  of  the  Eficurtani. 
Note. — This  islhe  r^ular  way  of  Introducing  a  rfi/u-dM  ad  atmrdiim  in  Latin. 
Nlel  aloneis  sometimes  used  in  this  scDBc;  as, — 

niai  unum  hoc  faciam  ut  In  puteo  cenam  coquant  (Plaut.  AnL  363),  uhUh 

J  da  this  one  thing,  [make  them]  cook  dinner  in  Ihe  latU. 

c.  SIve  (aeu) . .  .  sive  (sea),  whether ,,  .or.  Introduce  a  condition 
in  the  form  of  an  aitcr/iative.  They  may  lie  used  with  any  form  of 
condition,  or  with  different  forms  in  the  two  members.  Often  also  they 
are  used  without  a  verb.     Thus,  — 

nam  ilia  loco  fibentissime  soleo  nil,  mve  quid  mecum  ipse  cogil5,  mve  quid 
aut  Bctibo  aut  lego  (De  I^g.  ii.  i),  for  I  rajoy  myself  most  in  that 
place,  ■whether  I  am  thinking  by  myself,  or  am  either  writing  or 
reading. 

Note.  —  SIve  . . .  seu  and  mea  . . .  bItq  are  tate  or  poetic 

d.  KiBi  is  often  used  loosely  by  the  comic  poets  in  the  sense  of 

ecce  autem  cle  integco:  nisi  quidquid  est  volo  scire  (Ter.  Ad,  153),  M 
there  it  is  again  ;  only  whatever  it  is  I  want  to  knaai  il.  '^" 


Chapter  V.  —  Dependent  Conslructions. 

I.-RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 

The  Relative,  behig  In  origin  a  weak  demonslraiiTe  (or  possibly,  in  some  caseSr 
D  inleiTogalive) ,  may  be  used  indifferently  with  cither  the  indicative  or  the  sul>* 
Janctive.  A  simple  relative,  inlraducing  a  merely  descriptive  feet,  takes  llie 
Indicative,  as  any  demonstrative  would  do.  Thus,  tellQa  quae  fuerftt  nldla, 
Bui  many  relative  constructions  take  the  subjunctive  to  indicate  a  closer  logical 
connection  between  Ihe  relative  clause  and  the  main  clause. 

These  constructions  have  grown  up  from  Ibe  future  meaning  of  the  subjunctive, 
each  with  its  own  special  development.  In  geoerat  they  are  of  two  kinds,  which 
are  no^  however,  very  distinct  in  meaning :  i,  clauses  where  the  implied  logical 
connection  is  that  of  Purpose;  b.  clauses  which  express  more  or  less  distinctly 
some  Characieristio  of  the  antecedenU  Of  these  last  Ihe  most  common  Is  the 
ordinary  clause  o[  Result.  Besides  these  two  classes,  however,  there  ate  general 
relalJTes  ot  Protasis,  in  which  the  indefinite  relatives  lehotxvr,  whtncucr,  etc^,  are 
r^arded  ^  oondidonal  expressions,  equivalent  to,  ifiotf  one,  if  at  at^  lime,  etc.! 

Dependent  Relative  Clauses  may  be  thus  classified: — 

1.  Conditional  Eelafive  Clauses  (j  316). 

s.  Qauses  of  Purpose  {Final  Clausn)  (j  317). 

3.  Clauses  of  Characteristic,  iocludiag — 

a.  Simple  Result  [CamecuthK  Clausn)  {j  319), 

i.  Clauses  of  Characteristic  (including  iauseaad  Aiadraact)  (})  310.  321). 

tt.  Clauses  of  Time  ({  322  ff.). 
1.   ConditiODoI  Relative  ClauHes. 
316.   A  clause  introduced  by  a   Relative   Pronoun  or 
Relative  Adverb  may  be  treated  as  a  conditional  clause 
and  take  any  of  the  constructions  of  Protasis^  (§  305):  as, 

■         qui  enim  vitiis  modum  apponit,  is  partem  su^cipit  vitiorum  fTusc  !v.  i8), 

H  ie  whe  [only]  sett  a  Hmii  to  fatdis,  takes  up  the  side  of  Iht  faults. 

H  C—  ^  1"^^  apponit.] 

B       qtiicqtiid  potnit,  potuit  ipsa  perai  (Agr.  1,  7),  ivkalever  ptniier  she  had, 

^F  the  had  by  herself.    [—  si  quid  potuit.] 

^K      qnod  qui  &ciet,  noa  aegritiidine  solum  vadQnt,  led,  etc.  (Tusc.  iv.  17}, 

V  aad  he  viho  does  [sliall  do]  this,  wiU  be  free  not  only,  etc.     [=  A  qnis 

H  bdst.] 

^K       qnisqnis  hue  venerit  vapulabit   (Plaut.   Am.   153),  ■whoever  tema  htre 

^1  shall  get  a  thrashing.     [=  bi  qnis  venerii.] 

B      1  As  in  the  Greek  U  i-,  5™,  etc.;   and  in  statutes  ^u  Yx.\ 
^mfbiases  i/'a^pensu  liall  And  w*of!/(r  lAaJf  are  used  \nd\RticB.\\- 


I 


340  Syntax:  Dependent  Constnu-liotis.      [fg  316,  317 

philosophia,  cui  qui  pareat,  omne  tempkis  ^i^lis  »iie  molc&tia  possil 
degere  (CaL  Maj.  ij,  pkUosofhy,  ■which  \s  anyotu  should  obey,  hi 
■would  be  able  to  spend  his  lahsle  life  ■without  vexation.     [7=  la  quia 

poreat.] 
quaecamqile  causa  vos  hue  altulisset,  laetaier  (De  Or.  u.  4),  /  shnuIJ  it 
glad,  whatevir  cause  had  ireughl  yott  here  (J.e.  if  any  other,  as  well  a* 
the  one  which  did).     [=  ^  . . .  attuliBset.] 

Note. — The  relative  iu  this  consltudion  is  always  Indefinite  In  meanbfg.tt^ 
usually  lufintHi 

a.  The  special  constructions  of  General  Conditions  arc  soraelimes 
found  in  Conditional  Rela.tive  Clauses :  viz.,  — 

I.  The  Second  Person  Singular  of  the  Subjunctive  in  the  protasis 
with  the  Indicative  oK s. gentral truth  in  the  apodosis  (§  309.  a)  :  as, — 

bonus  aegnior  fit,  ubi  neglegaa  (Jug.  31),  a  good  man  becomes  less  dilipat 

taken  you  don't  ■waleh  him. 
3.  In  later  writers  the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  in  the 
protasis  and  the  Imperfect  Indicative  In  the  apodosis  (g  309.  b):  as,  — 

secuni  trahebat  (Liv.  vi  8),  whertvtr 

*Tied  victory  ivith  him. 

3.  The  Perfect  or  Pluperfect  Indicative  in  the  protasis  and  the 
Present  or  Imperfect  Indicative  in  the  apodosis  (§  309.  c);  as, — 

cam  ad  villam  veni,  hoc  ipaum  nihil  agere  me  delectat  (De  Or.  ii.  6), 
■whenever  I  tome  to  the  ■villa,  this  very  doing  rtuthing  delights  me  (when- 
ever I  have  come,  etc.),     [Present  General  Coodition.] 

cum  tosam  viderat,  turn  inciperc  vir  arbltribSlar  (Verr.  v.  lo),  irhenertr 
he  saw  (had  seen)  a  rose,  then  he  Ihoi^hl  spring  -was  BegiMning. 
[Past  General  Condition.] 

2.   Claueea  of  Purpose. 

iG  of  Purpose  has  arisen  either  from  the  oiigiiul 
or  from  its  hortatory  use.  Sther  affords  a  satis- 
factory analysis.  If  developed  from  Ihe  hortatory  subjunctive,  the  Subjunctive  ol 
Purpose  has  come  through  a  kind  of  indirect  discourse  construction  (for  which  sec 
(340).  Thus  mlBit  1€k3.C53  qui  dlcerent  means  either  he  sent  amhaisadors 
who  would  say  (future  use),  or,  he  siiil  amiassadors  -who  should  say,  i.e,  Utlhtm  i^ 
(ct  hortatory  subjunctive  ia  past  tenses,  }  a56.  e,  and  hortatory  clauses  in  lodirecl 
Discourse,  \  339). 

As  ut  (uU)  is  of  relative  origin,  the  construction  with  Ut  Is  the  same  u  thsl 
of  relatives.    That  wilh  ne  is,  no  doubt,  in  origin,  a  forta/oiy  subjunctive. 

317.   A  clause  expressing  purpose  is  called  a  Final 


I 


Clauses  of  Purpose,  34I  J 

Final  clauses  take  the  Subjunctive   introduced   by   «tl 
F(nti),  negative  nS  (ut  hb),  or  by  a   Relative  pronoun  1 
adverb. 

Final  clauses  may  be  divided  into  Pure,  Relative,  and 
Substantive. 

Pure   Clauses   of  Purpose   are   introduced   by  nt   (uH)   or  dS. 
They  express  the  purpose  of  the  main  verb  in  the  form  of  a  modifying    I 
'  clause. 

Relative  Clauses  of  Purpose  are  introduced  by  the  Relative  pro-  ] 
qnl,  or  by  the  Relative  adverbs  ubi,  unde,  qn5,  etc.  The  ante-  I 
It  is  expressed  or  implied  in  the  main  clause. 

Substantive  Clauses  of  Purpose  are  introduced  by  at  (utl),  negative 
nS.     They  differ  from  Pure  tinal  Clauses  in  having  the  construction  <A 
a.  substantive.     (For  Substantive  Clauses  of  Purpose,  see  §  331.) 
Examples  of  Pure  and  Relative  clauses  of  purpose  are :  — 

ab  aralTD    abdiiitecunt   Cincinnatum,  tit   dictolor  eaaet   (Fin.  IL  4),  Ihgi 

troagkt  Ciruinnaius  frain  thi  ploiigh  tliat  hi  might  be  dictator. 
ne  qna  SiiU  adventiis  procul  significalio  fiat  (B.  G.  vi  29),  that  no  iig» 

e/his  arnval  may  te  madr  at  a  dUlanfe. 
nt  ne  dt  impune  (Mil.  \z),  ikatiibi  not  with  impunity. 
sciibebat  oraliones  qnas  alii  dicerent  (Bnit.  56),  ke  wrote  spe^chis  for  other 

men  to  deliver. 
nihil  habeo  quod  BCnbam,  I  have  nothing  lo  write, 
to  exstinctu   furs  unde   dlBcerem  neminem   (Cat.   Ma;.  4),   that  ■when   | 

Ac  was  dead  there  would  be  noiody  from  whom   (whence)  /  eould   I 

baic  DC  ubi  consiateret  quidem  contra  te  locum  leliquisti  (Quinct.  32), 

you  have  left  him  no  ground  even  to  make  a  stand  against  you. 
habebam  qno  confugeTem  (Fam.  iv.  6),  I  had  [a  retreat]  ■aiAither  I  migit'l 


[  =  iit  la   (etc.),  Ubl  =  ut  Ibl,  ani 

r  conjunction  lias  a  correlative  in  the   I 

legom  ideirco  omnes  servi  sumus,  nt  liberi  ease  poasimna  (Qu.  53),  far^ 

this  reason  we  are  all  subject  to  the  laws,  thai  we  may  be  free. 
eo  consilio  , , .  ut  (regularly),  with  this  design,  that,  etc. 
e£  causa  . .  ■  ne,/or  this  reason,  lest,  etc. 
1^  consilio  ut  mooiium  legerentut  altitudiue  (Ne^,  WiU,  tj'j.iiri.lh  ih^vfl 
fiutfssi,  Mateiej'  might  be protecttd  by  the  height  0/  Ihe  mount 


r 


342  Syntax:  Dependent  ConsinicHons.      [55  31T, 


^  318 

^^^  var 

^^L  the  six 

Ik 


^.  The  ablative  qu5  (=  ut  eG)   is  used  as  a  conjunction  i 
clauses  which  contain  a  comparative : 

Kbrrtate  iiEus  est,  qu6  impiinius  dtcan  esaet  (Quinct.  3),  he  tcok  advattt 
I// liberty,  ikal  Ai  might  bluster  with  mare  impunity  Qiy  which  lie 

Note  i. — So  quBminus  {=  ut  e8  mlaus}  introduces  a  subjunctive  clause 
afier  vsrbs  ot  hindering  (see  {  331.  e) . 

NOTK  s.  — Occasionally  qtlS  introducea  final  clauses  which  do  not  coalabi  a 
compatadve:  as, — 

qno  sibi  (exerckum)  Fidum  fiiceret  (Sail.  Cat.  ti),  in  order  it  make  At 

army  devoted  to  himself. 
C.  The  Principal  clause,  on  which  a  final  clause  depends,  is  often 
to  be  supplied  from  the  context.    Thus,  — 

ac  ne  longum  sit . . .  iossimus  (CaL  iii.  5),  and,  net  lo  be  tedious,  we  ordered, 

etc.    [Strictly,  in  order  net  to  be  tediem,  I  say,  we  ordered^ 
sed  ut  ad  Dionysium  redeimus  (Ta'iC.  v.  zi),  but  lo  return  to  Dianyaus. 
aed  ut  eodem  revetlar,  causa  haec  fuiC  timoiis  (Fam.  vi.  7),  but,  to  return 

lo  the  same  point,  this  toas  the  cause  of  fear. 
satis  inconsideraCi  fuit,  ne  dicam  audacis  (Phil.  xii.  5),  it  inas  the  act  of  one 

rask  enougk,  not  to  say  daring. 
Remark.  —  By  a  similar  ellipsis  the  subjunctive  is  used  with  nSdum  (same- 
'imKsv.i), still less.ttotto  menHoK  that:  as, — 

aednni , , .  salvi  esse  pos^nns  (Cu.  35),  muck  less  could  we  be  safe. 
nSduin  isti , . .  non  statimcouquisitiiriiiDtaliquid  sceleriset  fi^ti  (Lcg.Ag. 

ii.  ^e^'jifar  more-will  they  hunt  up  at  once  some  sort  of  crime  and  scandal. 
nSdmn  in  man  et  via  ait  facile  (Fam.  xvi.  8) ,  still  less  is  il  easy  at  sea,  and 

quippe  secundae  res  sapientium  animos  fatlgant;  nS  illi  corrupls  moribus 
victotiae  temperarent  (Sail.  Cat.  11'^,  for  prosperity  overmasters  the 
soul  even  of  the  wise  ;  muck  less  did  they  with  their  corrupt  ntorals  put 
any  ehect  on  •uictory. 

Note.  — With  nedum  the  verb  i 

aptius  huminitaii  luae  quam  to 
aSi  ')i  fiH""  far  your  refine 
ofPatra. 

Remark.  — Clauses  of  Purpose  are  sometimes  rendered  In  English  by /*tf.  or 
aiwoVr  Mi:;,  with  may  or  m(jA/,- but  more  frequently  by  the  Infinilivcwith  to:  as.— 

veni  ut  viderem,  I  came  to  see  (that  I  might  see). 

318.  The  Purpose  of  an  action  is  expressed  in  Latin 
in  various  ways ;  but  never  (except  rarely  in  poetry)  by 
the  simple  Infinitive  as  in  Eu^Ush  (^  273'). 

sentence,  they  came  to  seek  peace,  mi-^N^.tew&.tx* 


rlfls  often  omitted:  as,— 

Petoponnesns,  nedum  Pair 
ent  than  all  Peloponnesus,  to 

ae  (Fam.  vii, 

■  say  nothing 

S  3ia.]  Clauses  of  Pmfose;  of  Result.  3431 

(i>  vinSrnnt  nt  pieem  pelerent,     [Final  clause  will)  at  (§  31 7).] 

(a)  yenerunt  qui  pacem  pelerent     [Final  clause  wiih  Relative  (§  317).]    ( 

(3)  [veneruDtadpetendumpacem.]  (Not  found  with  transitive  verbs  (§  300 
note), but  cf,  ad  parendiim  aeii^taL)    [Gerund  with  ad(g  300).] 

(4)  venerunt  ad  petendam  pacem.     [Gerundive  with  ad  (§  300).] 

(5)  venerant  pacem  petendi  causa  (gratia).    [Gen.  of  Gerund  with  can 

(6)  venitunt  pads  pete ndae  causa  (gratia).   [Gen,  of  Gerundive  with  01 

C§  298. 0-] 

(7)  venerant  pacem  petituri.   [Future  participle  (§  293.  b)  :  not  in  Cicero.]'J 

(8)  vEnerant  pacem  petitum.     [Former  supine  (§  302).] 

These  forms  are  not  used  indifferently,  but  — 
a.  The  usual  way  of  expressing  purpose  is  by  nt  (negatively  n8),  I 
closely  connected  with  some  one  ward,  in  which^ 
Thus.— 


V 


Arria  gladium  dedit  mnrito  nt  ae  intcrticeret,  Arria  gave  htr  husiand  A 

sword  to  as  himself  ^}baX  he  might  kill  himselQ. 
Ania  gladium  dedit  marilu  quS  se  interliceret,  Arria  gave  her  husband  »^ 

rmardto  MH  Aimsalf  vvra  (with  which  he  might,  etc.). 

b.  The  Gerund  and  Gerundive  constructions  of  purpose  3 
limited  to  short  expressions,  where  the  literal  translation  of  the  phrase,  1 
though  not  the  English  idiom,  is  nevertheless  not  harsh  or  strange. 

c.  The  Supine  is  used  to  express  purpose  only  with  verbs  of  motion, 
d  in  a  few  idiomatic  expressions  (§  302), 

d.  The  Future  Participle  used  to  express  purpose,  is  a  late  construc- 
tion of  inferior  authority  (§  293.  i), 

3.  Clauses  of  Reeult. 
Note.  — The  use  ot  the  Subjunctive  to  express  Result  comes  from  its  use  in 
■Clauses  of  Characteristic.  The  clause  of  Characteristic  is  a  development 
peculiar  to  Latin,  and  has  its  origin  in  ibufolintialxas  of  the  subjunctive  ({^ti.  a). 
A  Protasis  was,  perhaps,  originally  itnplied,  though  this  is  not  necessary  to  ibe 
analysis.  The  difference  between  the  Subjunctive  in  such  clauses  and  the  Indica- 
tive of  simple  description  is  that  the  subjunctive  expresses  what  would  hafpen  fti 
a  apposed  cast,  while  the  Indicative  states  what  does  or  dtd  isfatt  take  place.  The 
most  common  and  obvious  use  of  this  construction  is  to  express  a  quality  ot 
characteristic  of  an  Indefinite  antecedent  (either  expressed  or  bnplied).  Thus,  M' 
[Epkurua]  qui  pOnftt  summum  ioaum  in  validate  would  mean,  literally, 
vio  aumld  (/■  ally  SKfifioiaile  cast)  mate  the  highest  good  eonsist  in  pliasure.  Thl( 
serves  lo  express  a  characteristic  of  the  indefinitG  person  referred  to  by  is.  making 
him  one  of  a  class ;  while  Is  qui  pflnit  would  meati  ths  man  (Epicurus)  icfc  tn 
fact  does,  etc.  So,  not  sum  Ita  hiies  Ut  ita  dlcam  would  mean,  literally.  I  am  not 
iuB  in  the  mamer  (degreel  in  viieh  I  should  lay  that.  Since  in  these  charao- 
taisilc  clauses  the  ^ality  often  appears  in  the  (oTra  o(  a  suf fostd  resutl.'&m 
ttmclioa  readi/j- passes  over  into  Pure  Resist,  viifti  i\0  \4ea  tA  c'oaiaKMi'taSif 


I 


1 


344  Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions. 

tiDtos  lerror  namea  occupavic  at  etiam  ipse  icx  ad  flumen  perfngi 
great panie  Stiad  all  that  Oil  king  himstlffltd 

319.  A  clause  that  expresses  Result  is  called  a  Con- 
secutive Clause. 

Consecutive  Clauses  take  the  Subjunctive  introduced  by 
nt,  so  that  (negative,  ut  nSn),  or  by  a  Relative  (pronoun  or 
adverb). 

Consecutive  Clauses  may  be  divided  into  Pure,  Relative, 
and  Substantive  (cf.  §  317). 

1.  Pure  Clauses  of  Result  are  introduced  by  nt  or  nt  nOn.  They 
express  the  result  of  the  main  verb  in  the  form  of  a  modifying  clause. 

2.  Relative  Clauses  of  Result  are  introduced  by  the  Relative  pro- 
noun qnl,  or  by  the  Relative  adverbs  wbl,  unde,  qaJS,  etc.  The 
antecedent  is  expressed  or  iniplied  in  the  main  clause. 

3.  Substantive  Clauses  of  Result  are  introduced  by  Dt  or  nt  nou. 
They  differ  from  Pure  consecutive  clauses  in  having  the  construction  of 
a  substantive.     (For  Substantive  Clauses  of  Result,  see  §  332.) 

Examples  of  Pure  and  Relative  Qauses  of  Result  are, — 

tanla  vis  piohitalis  eat  nt  earn  in  haste  dUigiimna  (CaU  M.  9),  so  great  is 

the  fewer  ef  goodness  that  we  love  it  even  in  an  enemy. 
nam  est  innocentia  afTectio  talis  animi,  qnae  noceat  nemini  (Tusc.  iii.  EJ, 

far  innoeerue  is  such  a  quality  of  mind  as  to  do  harm  to  no  ene. 
sunt  aliae  causae  qnaa  plane  efficaant  (Top.  15),  there  are  ether  tausis 

such  as  to  bring  to  pass. 
nulla  est  celeritas  qnae  poaait  cum  aniiiu  celcrilate  contendere  (Tusc.  L 

I9i  43).  there  is  no  swiftness  which  can  compare,  etc. 
Note.— The  Relative  In  this  coTisln; 
sponding  demonslialive.    Thus,  qid=>u. 
{  317.  now). 


a.  A  negative  result  is  regularly  eitpressed  by  nt  or  qui  with  uSn, 
ofimS  and  similar  negatives  (not  aS).     Thus, — 

multis  gravibusijue  vulneribus  confectus  nt  iam  se  sustinitc  Hon  poaaet 
(B.  G.  ii.  25),  used  up  juilh  many  severe  wounds  it  that  he  could  no 
longer  stand. 
nemo  eat  tam  scnex  qol  se  annum  nSn  patet  posse  vivere  (Cat.  Maj.  7, 24), 

nobody  is  so  old  as  not  to  think  thai  he  can  live  a  year. 
Note.  —  When  ihe  result  implies  oTt  ((f<clinl(iulei(,T>oi.3.  v.m^"iftTpBV5«t\^i 
"  ~  ■  1  a5\)emg^ess'[>os\tVje'i:natv'>iJ."aB^-,  »5,^  JH 


I  319.] 


Clauses  of  Result. 


It  (Fan 


i.  7),  CDtrcil  Ike  hook  i 


that    I 


F 

^H     [librom]  its  corrigis  ta  mihi 
^H  it  may  nol  kurlnif. 

\  b.   Frequently  a  clause  of  result  is  used  in  s  reslrictive  sense,  and  a 

amounts  to  a  Proviso  (cf.  §  314)  ;  as,  — 

hoc  est  ita  utile  ut  ne  plane  illiidamui  ab  accu^toribus  (Rose.  Am  20] 

J  this  is  sa  far  ustfulthat  wi  arc  not  alttrty  meckid  iy  the  accusers  (i.i 

I  useful  only  on  this  condilion,  that,  etc.). 

I     nihil  autem  moleEtum  quod  non  desideres  (Cat.  Maj.  14,  47),  iiit  nolkitig    I 
is  troublesome  lehich  (=  provided  that)  yau  do  r, 
tlti 


I 
\ 


.  The  subjuDctive  with  the  Relative  quSminns  (—  at  eS  minua) 
I  Inay  be  used,  to  express  a  result,  after  words  of  hindering  at  refusing    , 
Lirf-§3'7-*.  notei):  a 

nee  ael^  impedit  quominuH  agri  colendi  stadia  teneamns  (Cat.  Maj. 
\-f),  nor  does  age  prevent  us  from  retaining  a\ 

d.  A  clause  of  result  is  introduced  by  quln  after  general  negatives, 
where  quia  is  equivalent  to  qui  (quae,  quod)  n5ii ;  so  also  after 
negative  clauses  of  hindrance,  resistance,  doubt,  hesitation,  and   the 

e.  Thus,  — 

nihil  est  illocum  quin  [=  quod  non]  ego  illi  dixerim 

tiure  is  nothing  of  this  thai  I  have  not  told  Mm. 
non  duhito  quin,  I  do  not  doubt  that  (cf.  the  Eng.,  I  da  not  doubt  but  thai). 
aegie  (vix)  abslinui  quin  . . .,  T kardiy  refraimd from,  el 
nihil  impedit  quin  , . .,  there  is  nothing  to  prevent,  etc. 
abesse  non  potest  qnin  (Or,  70) ,  it  cannot  be  but  that. 

Remark.  — It  is  lo  be  observed  that  the  eonslniclions  of  Purpose  and  ResuH 

[In  Latin  are  precisely  alike  in  ihe  a^nnafiM.bul  (hat  in  ^enegative  Purpose  taltes 

Result  ut  nOo,  etc.    Thus,— 

»cape. 


\ 


maid  sunt  imhedlli  seni 
Maj.  II,  35),  many  old  i 
duties  to  society. 

(Off.  i.  I,  5),  -who  has  so 


3  nt  nalliim  ofGci  munus  exsequi  possint  (Cat. 
ten  art  so  feeble  that  tiiey  cannot  perform 

tituit  nt  nihil  babeat  cum  viiliite  coniiin 
ulthdlke  highest  good  that  it  has  nothin 


u  quis  contingeic  posset  (_jEn,\.  ^\'Sl. 


34^  Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions.     [§§  31^3 

ns  qnando  liberis  ptoscriplorum  bona  p&tria  reddoa tut  (Rose.  Am.  50,451), 

Icit  tvtr  the  patrimony  of  Ihe  proscribed  should  be  reslored  to  their 

children. 
ipse  ne  quo  indderein  reverti  Formias  (An.  viii.  3,  7),  Aat  I  mi^  ki-1 

ceme  upon  him  anyaihere. 
dispotiSs  expliiratoribus  necabi  Raniiiii  capias  Iranaducerent  (B.  G.  vii.  35), 

having  stationed  scouts  here  and  thtre  test  the  Romans  should  liad  tiuir 

troops  across  anywhere. 
tu  taTnen  eas  episloliu  conccrpito  nequando  quirl  cmanet  (Att.  x.  12,  3], 

lest  anything  ever  leak  out. 
The  clause  of  Result  Is  sometimes  expressed  in  English  by  Ihe  Infinitive  with  TO 

(am  longe  aheram  ut  non  viderem,  Itbos  toe  far  a-aiay  to  see  (so  fai  ihnt  I 

did  not  see;  cf.  §  320.  0- 
Note.  —  Result  is  never  ejipressed  byihc  Infinitive  in  Ijtin  eicepl  by  Ihepoeis 
in  a  few  passages  [§  273.  Rem,). 

4.   ClauHes  of  Characteristic. 
-  320.   A  relative  clause  with  the  Subjunctive  is  often 
used  to  indicate  a  characteristic  of  the  antecedent,  where 
there  is  no  idea  of  Result  (see  §  319^  head-note) 

This  construction  is  especially  common  where  the  antecedent  is 
otherwise  undefined.     Thus,  — 

neque  enim  Cn  is_es,  qni  neaciia  (Faro.  v.  l3),foryott  are  not  tuek  a  one, 

multa  diciitit  quae  vix  intellegaut  (Fin.  iv.  i.  i),  they  say  many  Aings 

■which  (such  as)  they  hardly  understand. 
paci  quae  nihil  habitura  sit  Insidianim  semper  est  consulendum  (OfT.  L  1 1), 

we  must  aheays  aim  at  a  pea\.t  lehich  shall  have  no  plots. 
unda  agger  comportarl  posset,  nihil  erat  reliquuin  (B.  C.  ii.  15),  there  aa) 
-  nothing  left,  from  vthicA  an  embanimenl  could  be  got  together. 

a.  A  relative  clause  of  characteristic  's  used  after  general  expres- 
sions of  existence  or  non-existence,  including  questions  implying  a 
negative. 

So  especially  with  Buut  qui,  there  are  [some]  -who;  qols  eat  qui. 
who  is  there  ivhof    Thus,  — 

sunt  qni  discessum  animi  a  corpoce  putent  esse  raorleni  (Tusc.  I.  9),  Iheri 

are  some  isho  think  that  the  departure  of  soul  from  body  constitutes  death. 

erant  qui  Helvidium  miserarentur  (Ann.  ivi.  29),  Ihert  ■were  same  toia 

pitied  Helvidius.     [CC.  eat  cum  (§  322,  Rem.).] 

q>n»  est  qui  id  non  raan'imia  eSeiai  \aua\\nii  IJsA.  i"^,  mhg  i\  Aw*  ^ 

not  extol  it  ■with  (A*  AigrttK  faisef 


32a] 


Clauses  of  Characteristic. 


3471 


Bant  aliae  causae  qaae  plane  efficiant  (Top.  i;),  then  a 

which  clearly  effeet,  e(C. 
Note.— These  are  Bomedmes  called  Relalive  Clauses  wiih  an  Indefinite  Ante-  j 
ictil,  but  are  lo  be  carefuUy  dislingulslied  from  the  IndeHnil 
*h  316). 

b.  A  relative  clause  of  characteristic  may  follow  fintu  and  solua; 

nil  admlriii  prope  ces  est  ana  Bolaqns  qaae  posait  facere  et  servire  b 
tum  (Hoc,  Ep.  i.  6.  l),  lo  laonder  al  nothing  U  almost  the  sole  and  01 
thing  that  can  maie  and  keep  one  kafpy. 

sSltLB  es  cuius  in  victoria  oeciderit  nemo  nisi  srmatus  (Deiot.  12,  34),  you  1 
are  the  only  man  at  lokose  victory  no  one  has  fallen  unless  armed. 

c.  A  clause  of  result  or  characteristic  with  qnam  ut,  quam  qui, 
tnay  be  used  after  comparatives :  as,  — 

maiSrSs  arboiis  c^cdebant  quam  qaas  fcrre  miles  poaaet  (Uv.  xniii.  5),  j 

they  cut  larger  trees  than  what  a  soldier  could  carry  (too  large  for  a 

soldier  to  carry). 
Canaclu  aigna  rigidiora  sunt  qaam  ut  imitentur  verilatem  (Brut,  iS), 

the  statues  of  Canachus  are  too  stiff  lo  refreitnl  nature  (sliffer  than  J 

that  they  should), 
Note,  — This  consttuclion  corresponds  to  the  English  ton 

d.  A  relative  clause  of  characteristic  is  used  in  expressioas  of  Re- 
Btriction  or  Proviso  (cf.  §  319.  b):  as,— 

quod  sciam,  so  far  as  T  knojv. 

Catonis  otaaones,  qnaa  quidem  invenarim  (Brut.  17),  lie  sfciekes  of  Calo, 

at  least  such  as  I  have  discovered. 
semis  est  nemo,  qui  modo  tolecabilj  condicione  ait  servitutis  (Cat.  iy.  8),   I 

there  is  not  a  slave,  at  least  in  any  tolerable  coniiition  of  slavery, 

e.  A  relative  clause  expressing  cause  or  concession  takes  the  sub- 
junctive (§5  313.  h,  321.  b)  :  as,— 

virura  siinpHcera  qui  nos  nihil  cilet  (Or.  69),  oh  I  guileless  man,  whe 

hidts  nothing  from  -us!    [Causal.] 
peccasse  nuhi  videor  qui  a  ti  dijcesseritn  (Fam.  xvi.  l),  I  seem  to  myself  to 

have  done  wrong  because  I  have  left  you.     [Causal.] 
^omet  qnl  sero  Giaecas  littecas  attigisBem  tamen  complures  Athems  dim 
sum  commoratos  (De  Or.  \^),  I  myself  though  /began  Greek  literaturt  ] 
Iate,yet,  etc.  (lit.  [a  man]  who,  etc.).     [Concessive.] 
Note  i.  — In  this  use  the  relative  b  equivalent  lo  Cum  Is.  etc.    It  is  ofiea    1 
'preceded  by  Ut,  utpote,  or  qutppe :  as,—  J 

:  consul,  at  qui  id  ipsum  qnaesTaset,  mornin  certaniLui  fecit  (Liv.  xtil.  •} 
nor  did  the  consul  delay  the  fight,  since  he  had  sought  thai  very  ti 
(as  [being  one]  who  had  sought,  etc.). 
DOS,  ntpote  qui  nihil  contemnece  BoleamoB,  noii  ^ei^v 
tt  24,  4),  as  iiing  men  who  are  accustomed  to  dcifui 


348  Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions.     [§§  320,  321 

convivia  cum  patrp  nan  inibat,  qnippe  |]iu  tie  in  oppidum  quldem  nisi 
perrito  venvret  (Rose.  Am.  18),  since  ke  did  not  irvcn  eami,  etc. 

Note  a. — The  Relalive  of  Cause  or  Concession  is  merely  a  varie^  of  ita 
CharacleiiBtic  conslruction.  The  qualily  expressed  by  the  subjunctive  is  conneaed 
with  the  Kctlon  of  the  main  verb  either  as  canst  on  accoiml  of-aihich  (since)  or  as 
kiadrance  la  spite  a/which  (ALTKOUaH). 

f.  Dlgnus,  indlgniiB,  aptus,  idSnena,  take  a  clause  of  result  with 
a  relative  (or  rairely  with  ut)  :  as,  — 

(ligna  in  qTiibna  eiaborirent  (Tusc.  i.  i,  i),  (things)  ■aiorlh  spcndiHg  Ikeir 

toil  Bit  (worthy  on  which  ihey  sbould,  etc.). 
digna  [cs  eat  nbi  tu  neivos  intendas  tuos  (Tec.  Eun.  313),  ikt  affair  ii 

■u-ortky  of  your  sirdching  your  sinfws  (worthy  wherein  you  should, 

«c.). 
indignus  eras  qui  faoereB  iniiiTiam,  iV  was  beneath  you  la  do  a  wrung  (you 

were  unworthy  who  should,  etc.). 
idoneus  qui  impetrel  (Manil.  I9),jil  to  obtain. 
indigni  ut  redimeremtlr  (Liv.  xxii.  59),  unworthy  to  be  ransomed. 
Note.  — Wilh  these  words  the  poets  often  use  the  Infinitive  :  aa.— 
diEnum  notari  (Hot.  Sat.  L  3,  24),  ■worthy  to  be  stigmatiwd. 
fons  [ivo  dare  nomen  idoneus  (Hor.  Ep.  L  16,  13),  a  source  fit  to  give  a 

actas  mollis  el  apta  regi  (Ov.),  a  time  of  Hfe  soft  and  easy  to  be  gjiidtd^  ^_ 

5.    Catisal  CUubsb.  ^^ 

Note.  — Causal  clauses  lake  eilherthe  IndlcaliveortheSulijunctive.accoKUng 
to  Iheit  construction ;  the  idea  of  Cause  being  contained,  not  in  the  mood  itseH 
but  in  the  form  of  the  argument,  or  in  the  connecting  particles, 

321.   The  Causal  Particles  quod,  quia,  and  quonlam  take 

the  Indicative,  when  the  reason  is  given  on  the  authority 
of  the  writer  or  speaker ;  the  Subjunctive,  when  the  reason 
is  given  on  the  authority  of  another:  as, — 

1,  Indicative;  — 

cum  tibi  agam  gralias  qnod  me  vivere  ooSgiaU  (Att.  iii.  3),  when  I  may 

thank  you  that  you  have  forced  me  to  live. 
qoiapoattema  aediScata  est  (Vert.  iv.  53),  became  it  -uias  bvill last. 
qnoniam  de  iitilitate  diximus,  de  efficiendi  latiune  (Or.  Part.  26),  sinii  ti't 

have  spoken  of  its  advantage,  let  m  speak  of  the  method  of  effecting  it. 

2.  Subjunctive:  — 
mihi  gratulibate  quod  audiBBea  me  meam  pristinam  dignitatem  obtinctc 

(Fain.  iv.  14,  1),  you  tangralulaled  me  tttauii  ^»»  -^a.iaid^  jw«  iW 


§§321.322.]      Causal  Clauses  i  Relmion^  of  Time.         349^ 

noctu  ambulabat  Themislaclcs  quod  somnum  capere  nSn  posset  (Tus 

ig),  Tktmisloiles  usid  to  iBttlk  about  at  nighl  btcaiae  \sa  be  said]  he    { 
lautd  not  sleep. 
mea  malcr  iiata  est  quia  dod  Tedierim  (PlauLCist.  i.  1, 103),  nty  milker  a 

angry  beeause  I  didn't  return. 
nan  qconiain  Ldc  ait  Decease  (Verr.  ii.  9),  not  thai  this  is  neicssary. 
Note  1.  — The  Subjunctive  in  this  use  depends  on  Ae  principle  of  Intermediate  I 
Clauses  (f  34..  d). 

Note  a.  —  Under  this  head  *ha.1  the  speaker  himself  Ihoughl  u 
circumstances  may  have  the  Subjunctive  (i  341.  d.  Rem.):  as,— 

ego  laeta  visa  sum  qoia  soror  venisaet  (Plant.  Mil.  3S7),  I  seemed  (in  n\j  1 
dream)  gtad  because  my  sister  had  come. 
So  with  quod  even  a  verb  oi  laying  may  be  in  the  Subjunctive:  as, — 

rediil  quod  se  oblitum  nescio  quid  dioeret  (Off.  i.  13),  he  relumed  teeaia 

he  said  ke  had  fergotlen  something. 
N0TB3.— The  Subjimclive  with  aula  is  rare.    The  causal  panicle  qotuidS  1 
takes  the  Indicative:  as, — 

qnando  ita  via,  di  betie  vortant  (PlauL  Trin.  573),  since  yon  so  jaisi,  r. 

the  gods  bless  the  undertaking. 
REMARK. —  NSn  quod,  ii9ii  quia,  nfin  quoniatc,  introducing  a  rea 
tfressfy  to  dtny  it.  lake  (he  Subjuncllve.     NOn  quO  and  nOn  quin  introduco   1 
Result  clause,  but  with  nearly  the  same  meaning  (i  341.  d.  Rem.).    Thus,— 
pngiles  ingemiscunt,  non  qtiod  doleant,  sed  quia  omne  corpus  iutendittir 
(Tusc.  ii.  23),  boxers  grosa  nol  hiiause  Ikey  are  in  pain,  but  because,  etc 
non  qnia  philosophia  percipi  nan  posset  (id.  i.  i),  not  that  philosophy 

eannot  be  acquired. 
non  qnoniam  hoc  ait  necesse  (Verr.  ii.  9),  not  thai  this  is  necessary. 
non  qnin  enitendum  flit  (De  Or,  ii.  ^i),  not  thai  pains  must  net  be  taken. 

a.  Causal  Clauses  introduced  by  quod,  etc,  take  the  Subjunctive  in 
Indirect  Discourse,  like  any  other  dependent  cJause  (see  §  336). 

b.  A  Relative,  when  used  to  express  causi,  regularly  takes  the  Sub- 
junctive (see  §  320.  e). 

c.  Cum  causal  takes  the  Subjunctive  (see  §  326). 

Note. — In  earl;  Latin  Cum  causal  lakes  the  Indicative  (J  336.  note  3). 

6.  RelatiouB  of  Time. 

Note.— Temporal  clauses  are  introduced  by  particles  which  are  almost  all  of 
relative  origin.  They  are  constnied  like  other  relative  clauses,  except  where  they 
have  developed  into  special  idiomatic  constiuclions.  (For  list  of  Temporal  Parti- 
cles, see  p.  114.) 

322.  The  particles  ubi,  ut,  eum,  quandS,  either  alone  or 
compounded  with  -cumquo,  may  be  used  as  Indefinite  Rela- 
tives, and  have  the  constructions  of  protasis  (cf.  §  316). 
Thus,  — 


r 


3SO  Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions.      [§§  32J 

oom  id  maJiuD  esse  negas  (Tusc.  ii.  12),  wkm  yau  (the  uidi\-iduBl  S^ 

pulanl)  dmy  it  to  be  on  evil.     [Ptcsenl,  nothing  implied  (cf.  §  306).] 
quod  profecto  cum  me  nulla  vis  oogeret,  facere  ndn  andeceni  (FhiL  v.  iS). 

which  I  ■aiouiJ  surety  not  venture  to  do,  as  long  as  no  force  comfcllti 

me.     [Present,  contrary  lo  faotj  cf.  \  308.] 
cam  videaB  eos  . . .  dolore  non  lirang!  (id.  27),  -when  you  see  thai  those  art 

not  broken  by  pain,  etc.      [General  condition!  cf.  §  309.0.] 
id  ubi  dixisaet,  hastam  in  fines  eonun  emittebat  (Liv.  i.  32),  when  kehad 

said  this,  he  used  lo  rail  the  spiar  into  their  territories.     [Repeated  ' 

action  :  see  g  309.  *.] 
cnm  rosani  viderat,  turn  incipere  yex  atbitrabatur  (Verr.  y.  10),  vihennvr 

ke  had  seen  a  rose  he  thought  spring  had  begun.     [Past  general  con- 
dition: cf.  §  309.  c.~\ 
Remark, — The  ptiraseaOBt  cum,  fuit  cum,  etc,  are  used  in  general  eipna- 
EioD5  like  eat  qui,  sunt  qui  (J  320.  a) :  as, — 

ac  fuit  quidem  eum  mibi  quoque  initium  requi^cendi  fore  iiistum  aibitiarer 

(De  Or.  i.  l)>  and  there  was  a  lime  when  I  thought  a  beginning  of  rest 

TBould  be  justifiable  on  my  part. 

323.  Temporal  clauses  have  two  uses  :  ^  — 

1.  They  themselves  liefine  (with  reference  to  the  time  of  the  speaker) 
the  time  of  the  clause  on  which  they  depend. 

2.  They  describe  by  its  circumstances  the  time  of  the  main  clause, 
which  is  defined  not  by  them,  but  by  the  main  clause  itself. 

Thus,  in:  When  did  Ike  Emperor  Frederid  die  T  He  died  while  the  fitople  mre 
still  mourning  Ike  death  of  his  Jalhit,X\\fi  Ume  of  the  main  clause. -!;■  died,  i«  defi- 
nitely fixed  by  the  temporal  clause,  while  the  people,  etc.,  as  is  seen  by  the  feet  thai 
thelenlporalelaiiseanswerBthequ«tion,WHENrfl'rfi<rf«?  But  In:  Tie  Emperor 
Predirici  died  while  the  people  were  ttUl  mourning  the  death  of  his  father, iae  lime 
of  the  main  clause  is  not  defined  by  the  temporal  clause,  but  is  r^arded  as  suffi- 
ciently definite  in  itself  (or  from  the  context).  The  temporal  clause  is  added  to 
describe  that  time  by  the  circumstances  oF  the  people's  grief. 

These  two  sorts  of  temporal  clauses  the  Romans  distinguished  by 
means  of  the  mood,  invariably  using  the  ladicative  in  the  first  and  the 
Subjunctive  in  the  second.  They  commonly  also  used  the  paiticles  and 
the  tenses  in  accordance  with  this  division. 

1.    POSTQUAM.   UBI,  ETC. 

324.  The  particles  poetquam  (poste&quam),  ubi,  ut  (at  prl- 
mum,  ut  semel),  aimul  atque  (simul  So,  or  simal  alone)  take  the 
Indicative  (usually  in  t\\<i  perfect  or  tht  historical  present):  as,  ■ 

•  The  terms  Absolute  and  Relative  Time  naturally  applied  to  these  two  uses 
have  lieen  abandoned  in  this  book  because  they  have  given  rise  to  misapprehension 
aad  hare  often  been  used  by  lesjnen  as  p\%eoD-^D\e  n.ficui\aits  ta  conceal  awut 
afltnowledge  of  the  subject. 


PosTQUAM,  I/bi,  etc.  351 

milites  postquam  victoriam  adept!  annt,  nihil  reliqui  victis  fecere  (5all..| 
Cat.  11),  whin  the  armies  Aadwan  lAc  victory,  lAey  lift  nothing  Ct 

poHtaaqaam  fotum  attigLali  (Fam.  xv.  16},  since  you  came  to  Ikt^ 
fir,  " 

nbi  aninea  idem  sentire  intellexit  (B.  G,  iii.  23),  whia  hi  understood  thai  I 
all  agreed  (thought  the  same  thing) . 

Catihna  ubi  eos  convinisse  ridet  secidit  (Sail.  Cat.  zo),  when  Catiline  fl 
sees  Ihiy  karue  come  together,  he  retires. 

quod  (sc  agmen)  nbi  pergere  vident  (Q.  C.  V.  3,  12),  and  iiiken  Ihey  11 

Pompeiin  nt  equitatum  saum  pulaum  vidit,  acie  exeesait  (B.  C.  iii.  94),  ' 

wAea  Fompty  saw  his  csTialry  beaten,  he  left  the  t 
simul  ac  persensit  (.En.  iv.  90),  as  soon  as  he  perceiz 

Note,  —  These  panicles  ate  appropriated  to  time  dtjuied,  and  laie  the  histori-  1 
cat  tenses  in  accordance  with  the  distinction  sel  forth  in  {  303.    When  they  take  I 
the  descriptive  lenses  (see  a,  below),  they  do  not  describe  the  time  by  its  circum 
stances,  but  still  define  it,  referring  it  to  a  then-existing  stale  of  things  {Imperfect')  01 
the  then-existing  result  of  o  completed  action  {Pbiperflct). 

a.  These  particlea  less  commonly  take  the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  I 
indicative.  The  Imperfect  denotes  a  continued  state  of  things;  the  | 
Pluperfect,  an  action  completed  in  past  time.    Thus,  — 

poitqtuun  instrncli  alrimqae  stahant,  duces  in  medium  procEdnnt  {Liv. 
i.  23)1  vihen  Ihty  stood  in  array  on  both  sides,  Ihe  generals  advance  into 
the  midsi. 

P.  Africanus  posteaqnam 
■when  Africanus  had  bt 
consul  and  censor. 

poHtqaam  id  dif^ciUus  visiuil  efft,  neque  facullos  perficiendi  dabatur, 
ad  FompEJum  transierunt  (B.  C.  iii.  60),  when  this  seemed  toe 
hard,  and  no  means  of  effecting  it  were  given,  Ihey  passed  aver  la 
Ptmtpey. 

pott  diem  quintiun  qtiam  barbari  ilerum  male  p&gnaverant  (=  victi 
sunt),  legafi  a  Boccho  veniunt  (Jug.  no),  Oii  Jiflh  day  after  the  bar- 
barians were  beaten  Ihe  second  time,  envoys  tome  from  Bocchus. 

haec  inventiitem,  ubi  famillE^es  opes  dSfeoeiant,  ad  facinara  incendebant 
(Sail.  Cat.  :3),  when  their  inherited  resources  had  given  out. 

nbi  pericnla  virtiite  propulerant  (id.  ft),  when  they  had  dispelled  Ihe  dangers 
by  Ouir  valor. 

h.  Rarely  some  of  these  particles  seem  to  take  the  subjunctii 

posteaqnajn  maximis  aedificasBel  ornaBsetqae  clashes  (Manil.  4),  imiing   1 
built  and  equipped  mighty  fleets  (after  he  had,  etc.).     [But  the  n 
approved  edilians  have  pontea  Cttm.^ 


I 


353  Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions.  [j^ 

II.     CVif  TEMPORAL 

325.  Cum  (quom),  TEMPORAL,  meaning  ivhen,  takes  the 
Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  in  tiie  Subjunctive,  other  tenses 
in  the  Indicative.     Thus, — 

cum  servili  bclla  premeritur  (Manil.   1 1),  ifhtn  the  (Ilaly)   inas  unJcr 

Hit  load  oftht  Servile  War. 
cam  id  nSntiiltiuii  eaaet,  miturat  (B.  G.  L  7],  ■when  Ihishad bteit  rtferltd, 

he  made  (makes)  hasle. 
com  occiditur  Sex.  Roscius,  ibidem  fiiirunt  scrvi  (Rose.  Am.  61),  mhat 

Soscitts  was  slain,  the  slaves  were  en  the  sfol. 
ncmpe  c5  [litno]  regioncs  dicexit  turn  com.  utbem  condidit  (Div.  L  17}, 
he  traced  with  it  the  quarters  [of  the  sky]  at  the  time  he  founded  Ike 
eity. 

[For  eiumples  with  Ihe  Future,  see  c  below.] 

Note. — The  Present  lakes  the  Indicative,  because  present  time  is  geneially, 
from  its  very  namre,  defined  la  the  mind;  and  It  Is  only  when  the  circumstances 
are  described  as  causa!  or  adversative  (see  below,  {  316).  that  the  Subjunctive 
13  used.  The  Perfect  taltes  the  Indicative  as  Ihe  letise  of  nairalion,  as  with  poat- 
quam,  etc.  The  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  are,  from  their  nature,  fitter  lo  descrikr 
than  to  de/ine  the  time^ 

a.  Cum,  temporal,  sometimes  takes  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect 
Indicative  to  indicate  a  definite  past  time s  as, — 

lis  cum  bacc  sciibebam  eraC  in  extremum  adducCa  discrunen  (Fam  lii. 
6),  at  tJie  time  I  write  (epistolary)  ihe  affair  has  been  braag^  info 
great  hazard. 
quem  quidem  onm  ex  urbe  pellebam,  hoc  providebam  animo  (Cat.  iii.  7). 
■when  IioaJ  trying  to  force  him  (conative  imperfect)  from  the  city,  ! 
looked  forward  to  this. 
fulgetites  gladios  bostitun  videbant  Decu  ottm  in  aciem  eorum  inmebant 
(Tusc.  ii.  24),  Ihe  Decii  saw  the  /lashing  swords  of  the  enemy  when 
they  rushed  upon  their  line. 
luoi  cum  in  Asia  res  mi^^  permulti  amiserant  (ManiL  7),  at  thai  time, 

when  many  had  lost  great  fortunes  in  Asia. 
Note.  — The  distinction  explained  in  }  3:13  is  unknown  to  early  Latin.     In 
Plaulus  quom  always  has  Ihe  Indicative  unless  the  Subjunctive  is  required  for 
some  other  reason. 

H  i.  When  the  clauses  are  inverted,  so  that  the  logical  temporal  clause 

^h  becomes  the  main  clause,  and  the  main  clause  becomes  the  temporal 

^H  clause,  the  Indicative  must  be  used  with  cum ;  as, — 

^^^^  dies  nondum  decern  inlercesaerant,  cum  ille  alter  filius  inflni  aecitnr 

^^^h  (Clu.  9),  ten  days  had  not  yet  passed,  when  the  ether  infant  sen  wai 

^^^B  iitled.     [Instead  of,  whin  ten  days  had  not  yet  passed,  etc.] 

^^^B  hmqae  liix  apparebat  imm  procadit  ad  milites  (Q.  C  vii.  8,  33),  and  dof 

^^^E  awflj  already  damning  whin  ht  afpcan  bcfart  r'--  — "-  — 


SS  325,  326.]  Cum  Causal  and  Concessive. 


i  familiac  repente  in  publicil 


e.  To  denote  future  time  cam  takes  the  Future  or  Future  Perfect  \ 
idicative:  as,—  ( 

nijn  dubit3})5  dar«  operam  ut  <i  videam,  cnm  Id  satis  commade  fBcere  i 

potero  (Fam.  xiii.  i),  /shall  nut  hesilate  la  lake  fains  Id  see  you,  when    ' 

lean  da  it  convenieulfy, 
longiim  niud  tempns  cum  non  crB  (Alt.  »L  iB),  that  long  time  vihen  1   \ 

skaB  be  no  I'lore. 
cum.  veneris,  cognosces  (Fam.  v.  7),  iiAen  yau  come  (stall  have  con 

yoa  will  find  out. 

III.    CVM  CAUSAL  OR  CONCESSIVE. 

326.   Cum  CAUSAL  orcoNCESSiVEtakes  theSubjunctive:  j 

cum  solitudo  . ,  .Insidianim  et  metus  plena  sit  (Fin.  L  20],  since  soHludt  1 

is  fidl  of  treachery  and  fear.     [Causal.J  1 

com  inilio  non  amplius  duobus  milibus  habuisset  (Salt.  Cat  56),  though 

at  Iht  ttart  he  had  had  not  more  Ikan  two  thousand,     [Concessive.] 
cum  prind  ordines  .  .  .  concidisBent,  lamcn  acerrime  reliqni  resistebant    ' 

(B.  G.  vii.  61),  Ihoiigh  the  first  ranks  had  fallen,  slill  Ike  others  reHsled 

vigorously.     [Concessive.] 
Note  i.  —  Cnm  ja  Ihese  uses  la  oHen  emphaatied  by  nt,  utpota,  quippe,    ' 


nee  leprehendo;    qtlippQ  cam  ipse  islam  reprehension  em  non  fagerbn    1 

(Att.x.  3),  I  find  ns  fault:  since  !  myself  did  not  esci^  thai  ilame, 
NOTSb. — These  causal  and  concessive  telaiions  are  merely  variations  of  the    . 
Idea  of  time.    The  altendani  circumstances  are  regarded  HS  Ihe  cause  of  the  action, 
or  as  tending  to  hinder  it  (cf.  qui  causal  and  concessive,  )  320.  e). 

Note  3.— In  early  Latin  cxaa  (quom)  causal  and  concessiva  nauaUy  takes 
the  Indicative:  as. — 

qaom  tna  res  distrahitnr,  utinam  videam  (Plaut.  Trin.  573),  since  your 
property  is  torn  in  pieces,  ok  !  that  I  may  see,  etc    [See  also  §  313.  d,    ' 

ReMAKIC— Cum  causal  may  usually  be  translated  by  Jiff«;  oum  concessive 
by  although  or  while. 

a.  Ciun  in  the  sense  of  quod,  en  the  gnmnd  thai,  frequently  takes 
the  Indicative!  as, — 

gritulor  tibi  otun  tantum  ralSa  apud  Dolabellam  (Fam.  i\.  I4),  Itangraiu- 
laleyou  that  you  are  so  strong  with  Dolaiella. 


^•Hdlr. 


354  Syntax:  Dependent  Cotisiriictions.         [§§  326-2a 

b.  Com  , . .  turn,  signifying  b^h  . . .  and,  usually  takes  the  Indica- 
tive ;  but  when  oum  approaches  tlie  sense  of  ■ai/it/e  or  though,  it  may 
have  the  Subjunctive  (§  326).     Thus, — 

com  multa  non  probS,  tam  illud  in  primTs  (Fin.  i.  6),  wkiU  Airi  art 

many  things  I  A'  not  approvf,  there  is  this  in  chief.     But,  — 
cam  res  lota  ticts.  sit  puerHiter,  turn  ne  efRcit  quidem  quod  vult  (lb.), 
■uihile  the  ■whole  iking  ii  childishly  gel  up,  he  does  not  a'en  make  hi! 
point  (accomplisii  what  he  wisteal, 

IV.  ANTEQVAM   AND  PRIUSQUAM. 

327>  Autequom  and  prluaquam,  before,  have  in  narration 
the  same  construction  as  oum  temporal  (§  325) :  as,  — 

antequam  tuas  legi  litteras  (Att.  ii.  7),  be/ore  I  read  your  lelter. 

neque  ante  dimisit  eum  quam  Hdeni  dedit  adulescens  (Liv.  xxxix.  10},  ike 

did  not  let  the  young  man  gs  till  he  picked  his  failh. 
antequam  homines  nefarii  di  lueo  ailventu  audice  potaiflBent,  in  Mucc* 

doniam  petrexi  (Plane.  41),  before  those  evil  men  could  leant  of  my 

coming,  I  arrived  in  Macedonia. 

a.  Antequam  and  prlttsqaam,  when  referring  to  future  time,  talce 
the  Present  or  Future  Perfect  Indicative ;  rarely  the  Present  Subjunc- 

prinaqnam  de  ceteris  rebus  reapondeB,  de  ainicitia  pauca  dicam  (Phil.  ii. 

I ),  before  I  reply  to  the  rest,  I  ivill  say  a  little  of  friendship. 
non  defatigaboc  anteqaam  illorum  aucipiles  vias  perciper5  (De  Oi.  ilL 

36),  I  shall  not  -aieary  till  I  have  traced  oui  their  doubtful  Ways. 
antequam  veniat  litteris  mittet  (Ag.  2,  20),  before  hi  comes,  he  will  send 

a  letter. 

b.  In  a  few  cases  the  Subjunctive  of  protasis  Is  found  with  autoquan 
and  priuBquam  (cf,  §  309.  a)  :  as, — 

priusquam  incipiai  conEulto  et  ubi  cotisulueris  mitiire  facto  opuii  c^t 

(Sail.  Cat.  1),  before  beginning  (before  you  begin)  ^j-ph  nerd  reflection, 

and  after  reflecting,  prompt  action. 
in  omnibus  negoliis  prinsqnam  aggrediare,  adhibenda  est  piaeparalio 

diligens  (Off.  !.  21,  73),  in  all  undertakings  before  yeu  JiroceeJ  ii 

action,  careful  preparation  must  be  used. 

V.  VUSr,  J30.VEC,  AND  QUOAD. 

3B8.    Dum,  dSnec,  and  quoad,  implying  purpose,  doubl, 

or  futurity,  take  the  Subjunctive,  otherwise  the  Indicative, 
I.  Subjunctive:  as,^ 

ex^ectBS  tbrtasse  dum  dlcat  (Tuac  ii.  -j^,  jiou  an  MiaiHng  perhtfi  fir 
Aim  to  say  (till  he  say). 


I  328,  339.1 


Substantive  Clauses. 


355 


f    (CO 


itis  sublrahendi  sunt  e 
colligant  (Tusc.  iv. 

EneSii  morando  snalinuit  dam  genitor  ptotectui  abtlet  (^Mxi.  Ti.  Soo),  ht    J 

kfpt  yEneas  in  cheek  till  his  father  could  get  away  in  safely. 
duxjt  lougE  donee  curvSta  coirent  inlcr  se  capila  (id.  xi.  S6o),  and  drn 
it  (ihe  bow)  until  the  eurved  tips  touched. 

pominondas  cxercebaty  plurimum  Ikictanda  ad  cum  finem  quoad  stan 
complecti  poBBet  atque  conlendete   (Nep.  Epam.  2),  Epamincndas    ' 
trained  himself  in  Toreslling  so  far  as  ta  be  able  to  grapple  standing    j 
anJfgil  (in  that  way). 

2,  Indicative  (cf.  a,  below)  :  as, — 
3c  feci  drun  licnit,  interniiBi  quoad  nonlicnit  fPhU.  iii,  13),  I  did  this  se 

long  as  it  was  allowed,  I  discontinued  it  so  fang  at  it  mas  nut, 
lusas  innecle  morandl  duiu  pelago  desaevit  hiemps  (.*ji,  iv.  51),  weave 
excuses  for  delay  until  Ihe  storm  upon  the  sea  hath  spent  its  rage. 
donee   rediit   silentium    fuit    (Liv.  ixiii.    31),    there   was   silence   till  ht 

quoad  potnit  reslilil  (Cat.  Maj.  4,  I  i),  he  resisted  as  long  as  he  could. 

Note  i. — Qutundid  takes  ihe  Indicalive  only :  as,— 

SB  oppido  lam  dju  (enuit  qnamdia  in  piovincia  Parthi  fnemnt  (Fani.  xii. 

»I9),  he  kept  himself  within  the  town  so  long  as  the  Parthians  were  in    ' 
Ihe  prmiinie. 
Note  a.— Foe  dum  and  dummodo  introducing  a  proviso,  see  {  314. 
a.  Dum  in  Ihe  sense  of  whiU  usually  takes  the  Present  Indicative 
to  indicate  a  continued  action  In  past  time,  if  that  time  is  not  contrasted 
with  any  other  (g  276  e.  and  note)  :  as, — 

dum  haec  geruntur  (B.  G,  i.  46),  while  this  was  going  on. 

tNOTK,  — Dutn,  dOneO,  and  quoad  in  later  writers  sometimes  take  Ihe  Sub-    | 
DEC  obstilit  fals^  donee  tempore  ic  spatio  vanesoerent  (Tac.  Ann.  ii 
nor  did  he  contradict  the  falsehoods  until  they  died  out  from  lapse  of    ' 


Iiepidibant  elephanti  donee  Ci 

(Liv.  iid.  28),    the  elephants  iheiaed  no   nlnr. 

they  went  over  Ihe  continuous  bridge,  as  it  weri 

Remark. — With  all  temporal  particles  the  Subjuncd 

ing  on  some  other  principle  of  construction.     (See  Inti 

p.  378.) 


is  often  fou 


e  Clauses  below, 


II. -SUBSTANTIVE    CLAUSES. 
'  320.  A  clause  useti  as  a  noun  is  called  a  Sui.batisi.\.v» 


356  Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions.      [§§  329.  33a 

A  Substantive  Clause  may  be  used  as  the  Subject  or 
Object  of  a  verb,  as  an  Appositive  or  as  a  Predicate  Nom- 
inative or  Accusative. 

Note. — Many  ideas  which  In  English  lake  the  rorm  of  sn  abstiacl  noun  may 
be  rendered  by  a  suijstantive  clause  in  Lalin.  Thus,  he  demanded  an  inveitigaliot. 
may  be  postlilUbat  Ut  quoostiS  boberetur.  The  common  English  cipres- 
sion  FOR  with  the  infinitivE  also  corresponds  lo  a  Lalin  subslanlive  clause:  m, 
rlremains/ar  me  tB  sfeako/ tie  piratic -lear.rtMttaaxa  out  Ut  d6  bellS  dicam 
pIr&ticS. 

Remark.— When  a  Sulistantive  Clause  is  used  as  Subjecl,  Ihe  verb  lo  which 
it  is  subjecl  is  called  impirsoHul,  and  Ihc  sign  of  Ibe  constiuciion  in  English  is  Ihe 
so-called  e^letine  IT. 

Substantive  Clauses  are  classified  as  rollowsi— 

Clauses  ■       \  "'  '"''"''''^  clause  as  Subject  {}  a^o). 
'  6.  Infinitive  clause  as  Object  ({  3,--  "' 


a.  Subjunctive  Clauses  r     ,   _  ^f  Purpose  (command,  wish,  fear)  {}  jji). 

3.  Indicative  Clause  with  quod;  Faei.  Specification,  Feeling. 

4.  Indirect  QuestIOKS:  Subjuncllve,  introduced  by  Inleirogalive  Word. 

1.  Infinitive  Clatues. 

330.  A.  The  Infinitive  with  Subject-Accusative  maybe 
used  as  the  subject  of  sum  and  of  many  impersonal  verbs 
(sec  §  270). 

B.  The  Infinitive  with  Subject- Accusative  is  used  as  the 
object  ^  — 

I.  Of  all  verbs  and  expressions  of  hiirwing.  thinking,  telling,  and 
perceiving  {Indirect  Discourse")  (§  272). 

mi  spero  Uberatum  [esae]  metu  (Tusc.  ii.  27),  I  Irust  f  have  bei»  friii 

dicii  moatem  ab  hostibus  teneii  (B.  G.  i.  li),  kt  says  that  Ikt  keig^U  is 

held  by  the  enemy. 
negat  tlllos  patera  portns  (I,iv.  xxviii,  43),  he  says  thni  ae  forts  an  open. 

'  The  accusative  with  Ihe  infinitive  is  found  with  about  80  verbs  and  verbal 
phrases,  Ihe  most  common  being:  (t)  acciplS,  afnnnS,  aninliMlYertO,  orbl- 
tror.  audiS,  ceciseO,  cSgltS,  dicS,  disputS,  doceS,  exlatlma.  fftma  est, 
(ateor,  intellBKB,  memlnl,  nirrB,  nag's,  puts,  rscordor.  rOmor  flW, 
aentJS,ap6r5,8usplcor.tradltur,vSriim6at,Tlde8,Tid8tur;  (a)  lub«a, 
VBtS.  patlor.  cSgS.  elnO  ;  (3")  ciip\6,VO\R,"ii6W,inM.^\  VfiN  4&iiat,  blTi' 
asguum  eat.  oportot,  opviB  est,pVB.C6t,WiiS6a^,ii6TO»«*.,'a««Mp-"  ■* 


UsmmI^^H 


Infinitive  Clauses. 


357 


.  Of  Inbed  and  vetS,  and  rarely  ai  other  verbs  of  commanding, 
^requesting,  admonishing,  and  the  like  (§  331.  a).    Thus,  ^ 

vetuere   [bona]  reddi,  vetuere  in  pnblionm  redigi  (Liv,  ii.  4),  Ihey  far- 
bade  Ike  return  a/ the  goods  (that  ihey  be  relurned),  etc, 

LabienomiugummontisadscBniiereiubet  {'&.GA.2l),he  erdtn  Labi 
to  ascend  Ike  ridge  of  the  hill. 

3.  Sometimes  of  verbs  of  WMAi>(f  (§  331.  li) ;  as, — 

in^cem  me  esse  non  doclorem  volo  (Or,  33),  /  wish  to  be  a  judge,  r 

REMAkK.  — The  Infinitive  with  Subjecl-Accusative.IhouEh  nol  stricily  a  Clause, 


a.  If  the  main  verb  is  changed  to  the  Passive,  either  — 

I.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  (like  other  objects  of  active  verbs) 

becomes  nominative,  and  the  infinitive  is  retained  (^Personal  Canstruc- 

mons  didtui   ah  hoslibus   teneri,  the  mountain  is  said  to  be  held  by  the 


e  iubetur,  Labiinus  1. 


\ 


I         Labienua  iugnm  montis  a 
I  the  ridge  of  the  hill. 

2.  The  passive  is  used  impersonally,  and  the  clause  retained  a 
subject  (^Impersonal  CoHstruction)  :  - — 

dkiluc  montcm  ab  hostibus  lencri,  it  is  said  that  tht  mountain  is  held  by 
tie  enemy, 

ships  oflkepiriUes  a. 
I.  Verbs  ai  saying,  thinking, 
the  Personal  or  the  Impersonal 


complete  action.    Thus, 
beate  vixisse  videor  (Lid. 


n  pottu  (Verc.  v,  24),  il  is  told  that  Ikt 

I. 

,  may  take  in  the  Passive  either 
But  the  Personal  con- 
egularly  used  in  Ihe  tenses  of  in- 


_i_5).  Ise. 


I 


rm  to  have  lived  happily. 
fidibus  praeclare  ceciniaae  dicitur  (Tusc.  i.  I,  4),  Epaminon- 
lid  to  have  played  excellently  on  the  lyre. 
multi  idem  facturi  esse  dicuntar  (Fam.  itvi.  12),  many  art  said  to  be  about 

da  the  same  thing.     [Active :  dicant  mnliwH  fa,d,iiros  (esM).] 
prinu  Iciduntur  arte  quadam  verba  vjnxisse  (Or.  13),  they  first  are  related 
le  have  joined  -words  with  a  certain  skill. 

alur  ia  esse  constilutus  ex  mannore  (Arch.  iS,  2i),he  is  thought  to  have 
been  set  up  in  marble. 
Bibului  audiebatur  esse  in  Syria  (Att.  v.  iS),  it  was  heard  that  Bibu- 
tus  was  in  Syria  (BibuluB  was  heard,  etc.).     [Direct:  Bibulna  esf 
Biae  Illyrici  legiones  secStiirae  apKtabantur  (Tac.  Hist. \\.  "i^"^,  tht 
^M^  f/giens  o/niyricum  were  ejpecled  to  fallow. 


\ 


358 


Syntax:  Dependeytt  Constructions. 


»1 


videmui  enim  quieluri  fuisse  nisi  fssimus  IncessUi  (De  Or.  ii.  56],  it  itenti 
thai  we  should  knve  kept  quiet  if  tat  had  not  been  molested  ^we  seem, 
etc.).     [Direct:  quievisaemna  .  .  .  niai  easemns  lacesaiU.] 

2.  lubeS  and  vetS  always  take  the  personal  construction  of  the 


iussus  es  reniintiari   consul    (Phil.  ii.  32),  ymt  were  under  orders  to  be 

declared  consul. 
Nolani  mucoa  portasque  adire  vetiti  sunt  (Liv.  latiii.  16),  the  men  of  Nola 

■aieri  forbidden  la  go  to  iiisit  the  walls  and  gates. 

c.  In  the  comfjound  tenses  of  verbs  of  saying,  etc.,  the  imper- 
sonal construction  is  more  common,  and  with  the  gerundive  is  regu- 
lar: as,— 


Iraditum  est  ctiar 

Q  Homenim  ca 

a  fuisae  (Tas 

C.  V. 

■  39).  '■''  ■ 

is  a  tradition. 

too,  that  Homer  was  blind. 

ubi 

tj'ra.nnua  est 

.  ibi  noQ  vitio 

sam. 

aed  dicendi 

im 

est  planl 

i  niillBin  esse 

rempiiblicam 

(Rep.  iii.  31), 

■whe 

re  there  Is  a 

■.ty: 

•■ant,  it 

must  be  said. 

is  e% 

■il,  but  that  ii 

■doi 

ri  not  exi 

Isl  at  ail. 

\ 


d.  The  poets  and  later  writers  extend  the  persona]  use  of  the  passive 
to  verbs  which  are  not  properly  verba  senliendi,  etc. ;  as, — 

coUigor  domlnae  placuisse  (Ov.  Am.  ii-  6,  61),   iV  is  gathered  \bom  this 
memorial]  that  I  pleased  my  mistress. 

e.  The  Infinitive  with  a  subject  may  depend  on  any  word  implying 
speech  or  thought,  though  not  strictly  a  verb  of  saying,  etc.  (see  §  336, 

f.  Verbs  of  promising,  hoping,  expecting,  threatening,  swearing, 
and  the  like,  regularly  take  the  construction  of  Indirect  Discourse, 
contrary  to  the  English  idiom :  as,  — 

minalur  Bese  ahire  (Plaut.  Aain.  iii.  3},  he  threatens  to  go  away.     [EHrecl : 

abeo,  J  am  going  away ^ 
ex  quibus  sperant  se  maximum  friictum  esse  aaptaroa  (Lxl.  21),  from 

■which  they  hope  to  gain  the  utmost  advantage.    [Direct :  c&piemiu.  j 
qaem  inimicissimum  fntdrnm.  ease  promitto  ac  spondeo  (Mar.  41),  -mko 
J  promise  and  warrant  iiiill  be  the  bitterest  of  enemies.      [Diceel: 


I.  2T),pain  threatens 


dolor  fortitiidinEm  le  debilitatonun  minatur  (Tusc 
to  wear  doTun  fortitude.     [Direct;  debiUtiibo.] 
Note.— These  verbs,  however,  often  take  a  simple  Complementary  Infinilii'e 
(}  271).    So  regularly  in  early  Latin  (ejicepl  BpSrO).    Thus,- 

poUicentur  obsidcs  dara  (B.  G.  iv.  zi),  lA/y  promise  to  give  hostages. 

[Compare  the  Greek  aorist  infinitive  after  iimilar  verbs]. 
proioM  dolium  vini  dare  (Raul.  Cisl.ii.  1. 1"),  r  ^amiwf  It  give  ttjmt 
^     o/vdHe. 


^K  331.]  SubsCaftlivf  Clauses  of  Purpose.  359 

^^P  2.   Clanaea  of  Purpose. 

^V  Note.  — daiises  of  Purpose  may  be  used  substantivEly  ■  (i)  05  the  Object  of 
^^mpa\&al  admontshing,  tie.  {\  331) ;  (a)  asihe  Subjecl  of  Ihescsameverbsinthe  pa*- 
^^bve  (}  331.  i),  as  well  as  of  cerlain  impersonal  verbs  and  verbal  phrases  ((  311. 1); 
^^^^)  in  apposition  with  anotliec  suljstanlive,  or  as  predicate  nominative,  etc. 

^B  331.  Substantive  Clauses  of  Purpose  with  ut  {negative. 
nS)  are  used  as  the  object  of  all  verbs  denoting  an  action 
directed  toward  the  future? 

Such  are,  verbs  meaning  to  admonish,  ask,  bargain,  command,  decree, . 
determine,  permit,  persuade,  resolve,  urge,  and  wish.    Thus,  — 

monet  at  omnes  suspiciones  vitet  (id.  20),  he  warns  him  lo  az'sid  a, 

le  rogo  alque  oro  nt  euro  inveB  (Faro.  xiii.  66),  /  6tg  and  fray  yen  le 

aid  him. 
Ms  nt  conquirerent  imperavit  (B.  G.  i.  28),  hr  ordsrtd them  ft  search. 
persuadet  Castico  ut  reenura  occupiret  (B,  G.  i.  3),  he  persuades  CasHcu 

to  usurp  royal  fmnir. 
a.  lubeB,  order,  and  -veAJ^,  forbid,  take  the  Infioitive  with  Subject 

itive(§33oB.  2):  as,- 
^eniB  adse  addiiij  iussit  (B.  G.  ii.  5),  he  ordered  the  children  to  be  brought 


ITE  I.  — Some  odier  verbs  ol  camnianding,  etc.,  occasionally  lake  the  Infini- 

monet  cavere  (Sail.  Cat.  52),  Ike  occasion  warns  us  lo  be  on  our  gua 
Verbs  of  •wishing  take  either  the  Subjunctive  or  the  Infinili 

The  Infinitive  is  more  common  when  the  subject  remains  the  san 

the  Subjunctive,  when  it  changes.     Thus,  — 

1.  Subject  of  infinitive  same  as  that  of  main  verb : 
qoos  non  lam  nlcistn  studeo  (]usm  sauiire  (Cal.  ii.  8),  wliom  I  do 

eare  so  much  lo  punish  as  lo  cure. 

2.  Subject  of  infinitive  different  from  that  of  main  verb : 

cupio  ut  impetret  (Plaut.  Capt.  102),  /udsA  he  may  get  if. 

mallem   Cerbcrum  metnerea  (Tnac.  i.   6),  /  iiisuld  rather  you  fea< 


\ 


-  Such  Verbs  or  verbal  phraies  are  Id  ago,  ad  Id  veolS,  caveO   (nS). 

cgnsefi,   cokS,  concSdO,   oSnstltufl,    cQro,   decarnS,    6d!c5.   fiaglto, 

hortor,  imper5,  inatS,  mandS,  matiiB   (n6),  moneS,   negStium   dS, 

operam   d5,  5r6,  persuadefl,  petO,  poetulS,  praectpio,  ?tqoot,  ^i;5. 

I  aHatiS,  guoerS,  rog-o.  scfaco,  tlmeQ,  veveor  Ijioi,  ■q\4B&,-^o'iJi, 


360  Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions.  [S  J 

NoT£.-~VolO  and  CuplS,  bDwever,  lead  !□  lake  Ihe  Accusative  and  Infinilhe 
rather  than  Ihe  SubjunL;live,  even  when  Ihe  subject  changes.  When  U  remains  Ihe 
same,  Ihe  subjecl-accusalive  is  rarely  found.    Thus, — 

vim  volumus  exstingii)  (Sest.  42,  92),  lae  wish  violence  io  befui  dmnn. 
te  tui  frni  virlute  cupimus  (Brut.  97,  331),  we  wish  yau  is  nap  Ai  fruits 

of  your  virluf. 
indicem  me  bbbb,  noa  doctorem  volo  (Or.  33,  117),  /  wiih  to  be  a  jiiJ^t, 

tint  a  teacher. 
cupio  mS  eaae  cleHientem  (Cat.  i.  2),  /  desire  lo  he  merci/u!.      [But  tegu- 
kily,  cupio  esse  cleminH  (see  §  271,  o).] 

c.  Verbs  iA permitting  take  either  the  Subjunctive  or  the  Infinitive. 
Patior  takes  regularly  the  Infinitive  with  Subject  Accusative ;  so  often 
ainS.     Thus,  ■ — 

petmlsit  at  partes  faceret  (De  Or.  ii.  <)d),  permitted  him  lo  make  divisieni. 
concedant  nt  boiu  vid  fuerint  (Lxl.  5,  iS),  let  Ihem  allow  them  I9  have 

nullo  bS  implicari  negotio  pasEUa  est  (lig.  3),  he  suffered  himself  la  he 

vinum  imporlan  non  sinant  (B,  G.  iv.  2),  ihiy  do  net  allow  Toini  to  be 

d.  Verbs  of  determining,  cleereeiHg,  resoliiing,  bargaining;  take  either 

the  Subjunctive  or  the  Infinitive :  as,  — 

constituerant  nt  L.  Bestia  qnereretnr  (Sail.  Cat  43),  thiy  had  dt 
thai  Lucius  B/stia  should  complain. 

proelio  anperaederB  statuit  (B.  G.  ii.  8) ,  hf  determined  la  refuse  battb,-^ 

de  bonis  regis  quae  reddi  censuecant  (liv.  ii.  5) ,  about  Ihe  kings  geeil, 
■which  they  had  decreed  should  be  restored. 

deceroit  nt  consules  delectum  habeant  (Sail.  Cat.  34),  decrees  that  the  con- 
suls shall  hold  a  levy. 

edicCo  ni  quia  iniiissu  pSgnaret  (liv.  v.  19),  having  commanded  thai  none 
should  fight  lailhoat  orders. 

pacto  nt  viclorem  res  Beqnerltnr  (id.  xxviii.  3l),  having  bargained  that 
ihe  property  should  belong  to  the  victor. 

Note  i,  —  Different  verbs  of  these  classes  with  the  same  tneanitig  vary  la  Ifaeir 
construction.    For  verbs  of  iargainirrg  with  the  Gerundive,  see  {  394.  d. 

Note  a. — Verbs  o(  decreeing  sni.  voting  often  take  the  Intinitive  of  the  Second 
Periphraslio  conjugation:  as, — 

Regains  captivos  reddeodos  [esse]  nun  censnit  (OE  i.  13),  Segulm  voted 
that  the  captives  should  not  be  returned.  [He  said,  in  giving  his  for- 
mal opinion :  caplivi  oon  reddendl  sont.] 

e.  I.  Verbs  ni  caution  and  effort  take  the  Subjunctive  with  nt.  But 
oSnor,  try,  commonly  takes  the  complementary  Infinitive.     Thus. — 

cora  nt  quam  primum  intellegam.  C^V&ro.  iva.  \a^,  Ut  tut  know  as  soon  ml 
pojsiili  (lake  coie  that  I  may  underaianOi^ .  ^^H 


;  taKe  eitner 
f  delem^^^M 
tse  batHa.'^^^^ 


331.1  Substantive  Clauses  of  Purpose.  361 

dont  operam  ut  liabeant  (SalL  CaL  41),  i!t<r  laMt  paius  te  have  (^ve  Ihnl    , 

altentioE  that,  etc.). 
Impcllere  nt  Caesar  uominaretnr  (id.  49),  to  iitJucr  tkem  to  name  Casar 

(that  Caesar  should  be  named), 
si  trinBire  conatentuc  (B.  G.  i.  E),  if  tAy  skaulJ  try  lo  ^khs. 

a.  G.  i.  B ;    cf.  miror  Bi.  etc..  }  333. 
effort  (cL 


erbs  of  c 


Rem.). 
Note  a.  —  Ut  n8  o 


ciica  et  piovide  ut  ii§quid  et  desit  (Att.  ii.  3),  laie  care  and  see  that  he 
nothing. 

2.  Verbs  denoting  an  effort  to  hinder  take  either  (1)  a  Subjunctive 
luse  with  quCminoH  or  n6,  or  (2]  the  Infinitive :  as,  — 
non  detenet  sapientem  mora  qnominuB  . . .  (Tusc.  i-  38),  death  does  not 

prevent  the  -wise  man  from,  etc. 
n5  faoerem  impedivit  (Fat.  i.  \),  prevented  me  from  doing. 
obslitisti  ne  tranaire  copjae  poasent  (Verr.  vi.  z),  you  oppmed  the  passage 

of  the  troops  (apposed  leat  the  troops  alioald  cross), 
piohibet  accSdere  (Qcc.  \i>),  prevents  him  from  approaeking  (_to  approach). 
Note.  — For  verbs  of  hindering  T\eg3,\\vei  {noltfi  iiKder),  see  }  332.^. 
/.  Verba  oi  fearing  take  the  Subjunctive,*  with  nS  aifirmative 
I  nSn  or  ut  negative.     Thus,  — 

timeo  ne  Vcrres  fecerit  (Verr.  vi.  l),  T fear  that  Verres  has  done,  etc 
ne  animum  offenderet  verebatur  (B.  G.  i.  19),  he  feared  that  he  should 

hurt  the  feelings,  etc. 
ori^or  metuu  ne  langaSscat  senectute  (Cat.  Maj.  c|,  2S},  I  fear  the  01 

grows  feeble  from  old  age. 
vereoc  ut  tibi  posaim  concedere  (De  Or.  i.  9),  /  fear  \thitt'\  I  ea 

grant  you, 
liaud  sane  periculum  est  ne  nBn  mortem  optandam  pntet  (Tubc.  v.  40), 

Aere  is  no  danger  that  he  -jiill  not  think  death  desirable. 
NOTB,  —  In  this  use  nS  is  commonly  to  be  Itanslaled  by  that  or  lest,  u 
qB  d5d  b;  thai  not. 

ReuaKK. — The  particle  Qt  ia  often  omitted  with  some  verbs  of  the 
classes.  So  generaliy  after  verbs  of  viishimg,  necessity,  permission;  aftei 
fao.  and  frequently  In   Indirect  Discourse  after  vertis  of  commanding  ai 


i  (All, 


1  With  verbs  of  Fearing  the  subjunctive  with  ne  is  horlalory  in  origin :  tlmeO  nS 

acctdat  is  iilerally  I  /ear,  let  it  not  happen.    The  subjunctive  with  Ut  may  have 

been  either  hortatory  or  dBliberalive.— //«ar,  let  it  Aajf 01,  ot  I  ftar;  Ktnu  mm 

\jitAaAi>e>rf^  /  Aofie  if  will  happen,  bat  I  fear  il  will  not. 


362  Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions. 

fac  dilieda  (Alt,  lii.),  do  lifiii. 
die  exeat,  tetl him  toga  out. 

Mnesthea  vocal,  clasaciii  aptent  aocii  (^itji.  iv.  289),  ke  calls  Afna^ 
[and    orders   thai]    his   comrade!   shauld  matt   ready   tkt    pt^\ 
9  339)- 
Note.— SimilarlynS  is  omined  after  cava  in  Prohibitions  (ot  }  afig.  a 
g.  With  any  verbs  of  the  above  classes  the  poets  may  use  the 
live  instead  of  an  object  clause :  as,  — 

hoilamuc  fari  (^n.  ii.  74),  ivt  urge  [him]  to  speak. 

ne  quaere  doceri  (id.  vi,  614),  seek  not  to  be  lotd. 

lemptal  praevertere  (id.  i.  721)1  J*^  ollempls  to  turn,  etc. 

h.  A  Substantive  clause  of  Purpose  used  as  the  object  of  a  verb  be- 
comes the  subject  when  that  verb  is  put  tu  the  Passive.     Thus,  ~~      "^H 

imperatum  est  nt  iter  facerent,  it  was  ordered  that  Ihty  lAautJ  marclL^^M 
penniEsum  est  at  iisat,  permission  was  given  that  they  should  go.         ^^^k 
mihi  persuadelur  ut  exetun,  /  am  persuaded  to  go  out  (it  b  persuaded  ^^ 
mt). 

I.  The   impersonals   lioet   and   oportet   take   as   subject   either  a 
Substantive  clause  of  Purpose,  or  an  Infinitive  with  or  without  subject- 
accusative.    Thus,  —  ^^k 


Bint  enim  opottel  (Tuac.  i.  6),  tkiy  must  exist. 

Note  i.  — The  Subjunctive  wilh  oportet  omits  Ut,  excepl  in  later  writers 
(see  {33,./ Rem.). 

Note  a.— IJcet  may  take  the  Subjunctive,  usually  without  ut,  to  denote  con- 
cession [see  {  313.*). 

Note  s.  —  Lioet  may  take  (i)  the  Subjunctive;  (i)  Ihe  Simple  Infinitive; 
(3)  the  Infinitive  widi  Subject  Accusative;  or  (4)  the  Dative  and  the  infinitive. 
Thus.  /  may  go  is  licet  eam,  licet  Ire,  lloet  mS  Ire,  or  Ucet  mlhl  Ire. 

3.  ClanseB  of  Sesult.  ^H 

Note.  — Clauses  of  Result  may  be  used  substantively.!  (i)  as  the  objeC(j| 
(OciS,  etc.  ( j  332)  :  (2)  as  the  subject  of  these  same  verbs  in  Ihe  passive.  lU  well 
as  of  other  verbs  and  verbal  phrases  (}  332.  a,  d} ;  (3)  in  apposition  wilh  another 
substantive,  op  as  predicate  nominadve,  etc  (see  }  332./). 

ese  cases  the  clause  is  not  strictly  subject  or  object    The  main  verb 

inally  conveyed  a  meaning  complete  in  itself,  and  the  resiilt  clause  was  merely 

'   I.   This  is  seen  by  Ihe  frequent  use  at  Ita  and  the  like  with  the  main  verb 

OCCfdit  ut,  etc.).    In  like  manner  7u[';iouc\a>ntsaie  only  apparently  sutjea 

object  ol  the  verb  with  wUch  tlicj  aie  comwOfiii.  _^h 


332.]  Substantive  Clauses  of  Result.  363- J 

332.   Substantive  Clauses  of   Result  with  nt  (negatived 

t   n6n)   are  used   as   the  object   of  verbs   denoting   the* 

itccomplishme?it  of  an  effort} 

Such  are  especially  faoifi  and  its  compounds  (efficio,  cSnflciS,  eta). 
Thus,- 

efficiani  nt  intellBgiitiB  (Cluent.  3),  I  will  mait  you  utiiicrsliinJ  {\\l.i^etx\ 

that  you,  etc.).     [So,  faciam  ut  intellegatiB  (id.  4),] 
commeatus  at  portari  possent  efEciebal  (B.  G.  ii.  5),  maJc  it  possible  tkafX 

supplies  cotiM  be  brought. 
qiue  Ubeilas  at  laetior  esaet  regis  superbia  fecetM  (Ltv.  ii.  1),  At  a 

gami  of  the  last  Htig  had  atadc  Ihis  liberty  ntore  ittilcomi. 
iviDCunt  iDStando  n.t  litterae  darentnr  (id.  4),  by  insisting  they  gain  IheirM 

Peitil,  —  that  letters  should  be  sent.    [Here  evincunt  =  effieiunt.] 
a.  Substantive  Clauses  of  Result  are  used  as  the  Subject  of  the  fol-  I 
lowing ;  — 

1.  Of  passive  verbs  denoting  the  accomplishment  of  an  effort:  as,- 

impeUrilnin  est  nt  in  senatQ  Tecitarentnr  (litlerae)  (B.  C.  i.  i),  Ihey  si 

ceidid  in  having  the  Itltir  read  in  Iks  s/nali  (it  was  brought  about  1 
lhal,elc.). 

2.  Of  Irapersonals  meaning  it  happens,  it  remains,  it  follows,  it  it\ 
flecissary,  ii  is  added?-  and  the  like :  as,  — 

accidit  at  esaet  luna  plena  (B.  G.  iv,  29),  ''  happened  to  be  full  moon  (it  1 

happened  that  it  was,  etc.).     [Here  at  easet  ia  subject  ofacoidit.] 
reliquum  est  quarla  virlSs  at  Bit  ipsa  frugalitaa  (Deiot.  i),  il  remains  tk. 

the  fourth  virtue  is  thrift.     [So  also  restat.] 
scquitur  ot  doceam  (N.  D.  ii.  32),  t/ie  next  thing  is  to  s/tmi  (il  foUoWS^ 

that  I  should  show), 
acccdil  nt  contnrher  (Deiot.  1),  besides  this  I  am  troubled  (it  ia  added 

that,  etc.). 

3.  Of  est  in  the  sense  of  it  is  the  fact  thai,  etc.  (mostly  poetic)  :  as, 
est  nt  viro  vir  laliua  ordinet  arbusta  (Hor.  Od.  iii.  1.  9),  il  is  the  fact  that 

one  man  plants  his  vineyards  in  wider  rows  than  another.  ■ 

d.  A  result  clause,   with  or  without  ut,  frequently  follows  qoam,    J 
dfter  a  comparative  (but  see  §  336.  c,  note  2) ;  as,  — 

perpcssua  est  omnia  poliui  quam  indicixet  (Tusc.  ii.  22),  Ae  endured  all 
rather  than  betray,  etc. 


Verbs  and  phrases  taking  an  ut-clause  of  reBull  as  subjudl  or  object  are 
accedit,  aocldit,  addltur.  altera  est  rSs,  commltta.  cBnaequor,  con- 
ttaffit,  afflcia,  evenlt,  faclQ.  fit.  fieri  potaat.  lore,  impetrO,  ItitBKrum 
eBt,  mOa  est,  mfinus  eat.  neceaae  eat,  props  est,  rSctum  eat,  relin- 
qnlttir.  reliquum  eat,  restat,  tantl  eat,  ta.n6»im  8.beat,a 
*Sm  the  (Vapersonals  in  the  lial  above. 


364  Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions.  [s  332. 

£.  A  result  da.u3e,  with  or  without  at,  b  often  used  elliptical ly,  in 
exclamatory  questions.  The  question  may  be  introduced  by  the  inter- 
rogative -na     Thus, — ' 

quarnqnam  qaid  laquai?  te  nt  iilta  les  frajigat  (Cat.  i.  9),  yeltuhy  da  1 

sptakt  [the  idea]  lliat anylhiiig should linid youj 
egoncut  le  interpellem  (Tusc.  iL  i8),  what,  I  interrupt  you  f 
ego  te  viderc  noluerim  (Q.  Fr.  i.  ■^,  I  unioilling  ta  see  yeu  f 

ually  refers  \a  samelhing 
mplaled. 

d.  The  phrase  tantmn  abest,  it  is  so  far  [from  being  the  case], 
regularly  takes  two  clauses  of  result  with  nt:  one  is  subsiantivt,  the 
subject  of  aboBt;  the  other  is  adverbial,  correlative  with  tantmn. 
Thus,— 

tantum  abest  ut  no^lra  nurSmur,  nt  usque  eo  difHcile*  ac  morosi  simns,  nt 
nobis  non  Batiafaciat  ipse  Demosthenes  (Or.  39),  sa  far  from  admir- 
ing my  own  -woris,  I  am  difficult  and  laptiout  ia  thai  degree^  Ihat  net 
Danosllienej  hinmlf  satisfiu  me.  [Here  the  first  nt-clause  is  the  su!>- 
Ject  of  abest  (§  332.  1);  tlie  sccand,  a  result  clause,  after  tantum 
(9  3'9)i  "'^'l  '^^  third,  after  naque  eo.] 

e.  The  expressions  facers  ut,  oommlttera  nt  with  the  subjunctive, 
often  form  a  periphrasis  for  the  simple  verb !  as,  — 

in  Vitus  fe(^  at  Flaminium  e  senatii  elcerem  (Cat.  Maj.  tz),  Uwaiwiek  rt- 

luelanet  dial  I  expelled  Flaminius  from  die  senate. 
Note.— With  this  maybe  compared  foraut  for  the  fuiuie  infinitive  ({  aSS,/]. 
/.  Rarely,  a  thought  or  an  idea  is  considered  as  a  result,  and  is 
expressed  by  the  subjunctive  with  ut  instead  of  the  accusative  and  in- 
finitive (§  336.  i).    In  this  case  a  demonstrative  usually  precedes  j  as, — 

praeclaium  illud  est,  nt  eiis  .  . .  amemns  (Tusc.  iii.  29),  this  it  a  iteilt 

thing,  that  lot  should  love,  etc. 
verisimile  non  e^t  at  ills  anteponeret  (Verr.  II.  iv.  6),  il  is  not  likely  Aat 

he  preferred. 

g.  A  Relative  clause  of  Result  with  quia  Is  used  after  verbs  or  other 
expressions  ol  hindering  3.mL  the  like  when  these  are  negatived.    Thus, 

faccie  non  possniu  qnin . . .  (Att.  xii,  27),  I  cannot  avoid,  etc, 

nihil  praeteimi^  quin  acnbam  . . .  (Q.  F.  iii.  3),  1  kavi  Itfl  nething  undone 

ta  write. 
ut  nulla  le  impedirer  qoin  (Alt.  i»,  a),  dial  I  might  it  hindered  by  noAing 

noa  humann  ijlla  ncque  dmoa  cA»tanl  i^om  (,SalL  E\^  Mith.  17},  fM 
Jkumutt  or  divine  lawi  frevenl,  but  thnt,«^  ''^~ 


f  332.]  Sitbstantive  Clauses  of  Result. 

Nr>TK  I. — The  n^alive  ma;  be  expressed  (aslnihe  examples  ebore)  or  t 
implied  (as  la  qulfl  Impedtt  q,ula  ean),  tv^  (Lev  nobody]  Uiidtra  mt 
fhigr). 

:specially  wllti  Ihs  phrase  nOn  dubltO.  /A'l 
*.— 
nun  dnbitabat  qnln  ei  crSderimna  (Alt.  li.  i),  ie  did  not  doiM  that  u 

htlitvrd  him. 
illud  cave  dubiles  quia  ego  omnia  fadiiii)  (Fam.  v.  20),  do  Hal  doubt  that  \ 

I  will  do  att. 
quis  ignorAt  qnin  (flaci;.  27),  viho  is  ignorant  that,  etc. 7 
neque  ambigituc  qoln  Brutus  pessimo  publico  id  faetSma  tberit  ti  priS- 
rum  regum  alicui  regnum  estorsiaset  (Uv,  ii,  l),  nor  it  Aert  ttnjl  quel- 
Hen  thai  Brutus,  if  he  had  lurnted  tkt  Hngdom  frem  any  one  eflhi 
former  iings,  itiould  kavi  done  U  isith  Ike  toorsl  results  It  tht  ttatt. 
[Direct  slatement:  lEcisset.] 


nee  dubitare  iHuni  sppellSre  sapienlera  (Lsel.  i,  :),  and  ttt  la  kesltatt  l»  I 

call  Aim  a  sage. 
dubitandum  non  existimavil  quin  proGciaeerStnr  (B.  G,  IL  a),  St  did  net  I 

lAini  he  ought  to  hesitate  to  set  out. 

h.  Some  verbs  and  expressions  may  be  used  either  as  verbs  of  I 
saying  or  as  verbs  of  commanding,  effecting,  and  tiie  like.  Thes*  I 
bke  as  their  object  either  a  Substantive  clause  of  Purpose  or  Result] 
itt  an   loiiiutive  with   subject  accusative,   according   to   the   sensevl 

sequitut  ilico  esse  canaai  immutohiles  (FaL  11),  it  follems  direetly  th^M 

three  are  vnaUerable  causes.     [Result  clause,  the  reeulac  ConittuctiollJ 

with  sequor  when  used  of  a  logical  stquetice.] 
laudem  sapieotiae  slatuo  esse  maximam  (Oiv.  v.  13),  /  hold  that  the  glory  M 

of  ■wisdom  is  the  greatest. 
staCuunt  nt  decern  milia  hDminuin  mittAdtnr  (B.  C  vil.  Zl),  they  retahit\ 

that  10,000  men  shall  be  sent.     [Purpose  clause,  cf,  |  331,  1/,] 
res  ipsa  monebat  tempaa  ease  (All.  x.  %),  the  thing  ilielf  warned  that  it  M 

was  time.     [Cf.  monere  ut,  warn  to  do  tomelhing.'\ 
fac  mibi  ease  persuaanin  (N.  D.  i.  27),  suppose  thai  /  am  persuaded  b/M 

Hat.     [a.  facete  nt.  aaomplish  thai.-] 
hoc  Yolunt  pcrsuSdere,  non  interire  animos  (B,  G.  vi.  13),  they  wish  A 

eonvince  that  souls  do  not  perish. 
bnic  persiHdct  uti  ad  boslei  transeat  (B.  G.  iii.   iS),  persuades  him  A 
'  pass  ever  to  the  enemy. 

Note.  — The  infmiliTe  wilh  lubjecl  accusa(i»e  In  this  cnnilruclion  is  Indlree 
IHscmme,  aail  is  to  be  distinguuhed  firsm  lYic  siiD9\e\T£»i 
KfiA  ibcsc  veriis  instead  of  a  subjuDciiTc  clatue. 


Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions. 


4.  Indicative  with  Qaod. 

333.  A  peculiar  form  of  Substantive  Clause  consists 
quod  causal  with  the  Indicative, 

The  clause  in  the  Indicative  with  quod  is  used  w 
the  statement  is  regarded  as  a  fact :  as, — 

altecum  est  vilium,  quod  quidajo  nimis  magnum  studiiun  coniieroilt  (OH. 
i.  6),  it  ii  another  fault  thai  some  beslma  loo  much  ttal,  etc.  [Here  Ot 
(wnferant  could  be  used,  meaning  that  some  should  bestow;  or  the 
accusative  atid  infinitive,  meaning  lo  besltnn  (abstractly);  qaod  makes 
it  a  fact  that  men  do  bcstnw,  etc.] 

intei  inanimum  et  animal  hoc  maxime  interest,  qaod  animal  agit  aliquld 
(Ac.  ii.  12),  Uiii  is  til  chief  difference,  etc.,  that  an  animal  aims  al 
somethi,^. 

qnodradilt  nobis  mirSbile  videtuc  (Off.  iiLji),  «a3r^«(Regiiliis)  returtui 
seems  ■amtsderful  te  us. 

veins  illud  Catonis  admodom  Rcitum  est,  qiu  mirari  se  aiebat  qnod  n5n 
nderet  haruspex  haruspicem  cum  vidisset  (Div.  ii.  24),  'tis  an  old 
and  shrewd  saying  of  Cato,  that  he  -aiandired  a  soothsayer  did  net  lavgi 
n^en  he  looted  another  in  the  face.  [Here  ridiret  is  in  the  subjunc- 
tive as  being  a  subordinate  clause  of  indirect  discourse:  see  }  336.] 

NgTE.  —  Like  other  substantive  clauses,  the  clause  with  qnod  may  be  used 
in  apposition  with  the  subject. 

a.  In  colloquial  language,  the  clause  with  quod  sometimes  appears 
as  an  accusative  of  specification,  corresponding  to  the  English  WHEREAS 
(cf.  §326.0)  L  as,- 

qood  de  domo  icnbia  (Fam.  xiv.  z),  as  to  vikal  youiorile  of  the  home. 

quod  mihi  de  nostra  statil  gratnlirifl,  minime  miiamur  te  tuis  praeclaril 
operibus  laetiri  (Alt.  i.  5),  as  to  your  congratulating  me  on  our  <■«•• 
dilion,  no  wonder  you  are  f  leased  -aiith  your  mob  noble  -works. 

b.  Verbs  of  feeling  and  the  expression  of  feeling  take  either  quod, 
quia  (Causal),  or  tlie  accusative  and  infinitive  (Indirect  Discourse): 

qaod  acribb  .  . .  gaudeo  (Q.  F.  iii.  l)>  !  am  glad  that  you  mritt. 

facio  libenter  qnod  cam  non  poranm  pcaeterire  (L^.  i.  24),  I  am  glad  Aai 

I  cannot  pass  it  by. 
qnae  perfecta  esse  vehcmenter  laetor  (Rose.  Am.  47),  I  grtally  rgoiet 

that  this  is  finished. 
Remark.  —  MIror  and  similar  expressions  are  sometimes  followed  b;  a  clause 
pparently  substantive,  but  really  protasis  (ct  f  331.  e.  1.  note  i). 

1  Ct.  tVie  Greet  ^•ix<^^  si. 


.tsofS 

when 


fS  333,  334.]  Indirect  Qu 

miror  n  qnernqoam  amicum  habere  pt» 
tver  have  a  friend.  [Originally,  7 
5.  Indiisct  Q 
Note.— Aq  Indirect  Question  is  any  s> 
object  of  ^  verb,  or  depends  on  anv  exprBssii 
grammatical  fonn.  txclamalory  senlencej  art 
(^e  the  third  example  below). 


Indirect  Questions. 


it  Bi  qnemqoam  amicum  habere  potnit  (La;!.  15),  liiiondir  ifht  i 
T  have  afr^ind.     [Originally,  If  this  is  so,  I  Toonder  al  »V,] 


Indiisct  QuestloilB. 

Note.  — Aq  Indirect  Question  is  any  sentence  or  clause  which  i 
;c.),andwhicii  is  iisetft 
n  implying  uncertaintj'  c 
not  distinguished  from 


introduced  I 
e  subject  or  1 


An  Indirect  Question  takes  its  verb  in  the  Sub-  ] 
^junctive :  as,  — 

quid  ipse  aentiam  eiponam  (Div,  i.  6),  I  mi//  ixflain  what  I  l/iin 

[Direct :  qnld  sentio.] 
id  poBBfltne  (ieri  conauluil  (id.  7),  he  comu/led  luhclher  it  coti/d  be  dan 

[Direct:  poteatne.] 
ClUJWa  ria  audax  omnea  intellegere  potuerunl  (Rose.  Am.  31),  a//  can 

vnderst'ind  how  bo/d yon  are.     [Direct;  qnam  ea  andSxl] 
doleam  uecne  doleam  nihil  interest  (Tusc.  ii.   iz),  il  is  of  no  aecon; 

■whelker  I  suffer  or  not.     [Double  question.] 
Togat  me  quid  Bentiam,  he  asis  me  mhat  I  Ihink.     [Cf.  rogat  ne  tseaiei 

tiam,  he  aski  me  my  p/ibi'dh.] 
hoc  dnbiom  eat,  uter  noatriim  sit  verecundior  (Acad.  ii.  41,  126J,  Ikis  is 

douitfui,  ■which  of  us  ftfw  is  ike  more  modest. 
incerti  quitenas  Volero  exerceret  victoriam  ([,iv.  ii.  55),  uncertain  hua 

far  Voltro  ■woii/d push  victory.     [As  if,  dabitantea  qDateaiui,  etc.] 
Note.— An  Indirect  Question  maybe  the  subject  of  a  verb  (as  in  the  lonrtt  I 
lample),  the  direct  object  (as  in  the  first),  the  secondary  object  (as  in  the  fifth),  I 
-■'e  (as  in  the  sixth).  ' 

The  use  of  tenses  in  Indirect  Question  is  illustrated  by  1 
^the  following  examples  :  — 

:q  quid  fadam,  /  te/l you  -what  I  am  doing. 
o  quid  facturua  sim,  I  ttl/ you  what  J  ■aiitl  do. 
dico  quid  feceriio,  I  te/l  you  what  I  did  (have  done,  'Was  doing;  had  done). 
dixt  quid  facerem,  /  told  you  lahat  I  was  doing. 
dixi  quid  fecisscro,  /  told  you  what  I  had  done. 
J        dixT  quid  facliirus  essera,  I  told  yon  what  I  would  do  (was  going  to  do). 
|L     dhi  quid  facturiu  fuerim,  /  told  yon  what  I  would  have  done. 

^P     a.  Indirect  Questioris  referring  to  fiiture  time  take  the  subjunctive  (rf  | 

Bftie  First  Periphrastic  conjugation ;  as,— 

^B      pcospicio  qui  concursus  futuri  sint  (Div.  in  Csec),  I  foresee  what  throng}    \ 

H  there  will  be  {UancX:  qni  emnt?] 

^t      quid  ait  fulurum  eras,  fuge  quaercre  (Hot.  Od.  \.  q'l,  /orbtar  lo  ailt  ■ 

V  wi// ie OH  Ihe  morrow.     [Direct:  cinid  eTit  ot  to.WHM.-Bi ^A-T^ 


\' 


r 


> 


I 


368  Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions. 

Note.  — This  periphraslio  future  avoids  the  ambiguity  which  would  be  causeil 
bj  using  the  present  subjunctive  to  refer  lo  future  time  in  such  clauses. 

b.  The  Deliberath'e  Subjunctive  (see  §  26S  and  examples)  remains 
unchanged  in  an  Indirect  Question,  except  Boroetiraes  in  tense ;  as,— 

[quaerilur]   ntmm  Carthago  d&nfttiir,  ar    Carthaginiensibus   redditni 

{De  Inv.  i.  la),  [the  question  is]  shal,  Carthage  he  datroYid,  ar  ri- 

stand  lo  the  CaTihagimam. 
nee  quisquam  satis  certum  habet,  qnjd  aut  aperet  sut  timeat  (Liv.  xiii. 

7),  nor  is  any  one  weU  assured  what  he  shall  hope  or  fear,     [Here  iht 

future  participle  with  ait  could  not  be  used.] 
incerta  quid  peterent  aut  vTtarent  (Liv.  xxviii.  36),  since  it  -was  £>ublfm 

(abl.  aljs.)  tohal  they  should  seek  or  shun. 

c.  In  colloquial  usage  and  In  poetry  tlie  subject  of  an  Indirect  Ques- 
tion is  often  attracted  into  the  main  clause  as  object  {accusalivi  of 
aniicipalion):  as, — 

nosti  Marcallam  quam  tardus  sit  (Fam.  viii.  10},  you  tnno  Ami/  stew 
Mareellus  is.  [For  noati  quam  tardus  ait  Marcelliu.  Cf.  /  tnin/ 
thee  who  thou  art.^ 

C{.  potestne  igitur  earum  rerum  quare  futiirae  sint  iilla  esse  praesiosio  (Div. 
ii.  s),  can  there  be,  then,  any  forekiiawlidge  as  to  those  IhingSy  -why  thty 
will  cccurP    [A  similar  use  of  the  objective  genitive.] 

Remark. — In  some  cases  the  Objett  of  aHlicipalloa  becomes  Subject  by  a 
change  ofvoice,  and  an  apparent  mixture  of  relative  and  inlerrogalive  conslrucilon 
is  the  result;  as, — 

qiudam  saepe  in  parva  peciinia  perspiciontur  quam  sint  leves  (Lacl.  fj),  il 
is  open  seen,  in  a  Irijlitig  matter  of  money,  Jtoui  unprincipled  soiat 
people  are  (some  people  are  often  seen  through,  how  unprincipled  they 

■"'■ 

qucmadmodum  Pompeium  oppugnacent  a  ine  indicaLi  sunt  (Leg.  Ag,  i.  2), 
it  has  been  sioain  by  me  in  Tvhal  way  thty  attacked  Pompey  (they  have 
been  shown  by  me,  how  Ihey  attacked). 

d.  Indirect  Questions  often  take  tbe  Indicative  in  early  Latin  and  in 
poetry:  as, — 

non  reputat  quid  laburis  eat  (Plaut.  Am.  172),  ke  does  net  consider  what  a 

task  il  is. 
vlneam   quo   in   agro  conseri  oportet  sic 
■aihal  soil  a  vineyard  should  lie  set  you  it. 
:.  A   few   interrogative   expressions  are  used  parenthetically  in 
indefinite  sense  and  do  not  take  a  subjunctive.    Such  are — 

nescio  quis  (and  kindreil  forms),  T knew  not  who,  somebody  or  other,  el 
nittum  (nimirum)  quam,  marvellously  (marvellous  how), 
mirum  quantum,  tremendously  (marvelloui  how  much). 
rnuDane  quantum,  momlrousty  (monsUoiaVo-* 
ane  quam,  immensely.  vaide  t^viani 


^ 


Indirect  Discourse.  369 

Examples 

qiu  iitam  neaciS  qnam  indolentiam  inignopere  laudant  (Tus. 

grtacly  txlol  thai freedem  from  pain, -a^lever  ikatis 

rum  qHantum  pcofuit  (Liv.  ii.  i),  it  idptd prodigiou 

fato  neicio  qa6  conligisse  arbitior  (Fam.  xv.  13),  I  think  it  hafpened 

IB  iy  somt  fatality  or  other, 

n  sues  Talde  qaam  paucos  habet  (Fam.  li.  l^'},for  ki  has  uncommnnly 

few  efkis  own. 

18  qnam  sum  gavisua  Ci'^-)i  '^wai  intmeiuffy  glad. 

o  et  lucecnis  Medus  Eicinaces  immane  quantum  discrepat  (Hor.  Chi.  i. 

jl),  is  monstreusly  at  varianct. 

f.  An  indirect  question  is  occasionally  introduced  by  bI  in  tiie  se 
■whethtr  (like  if'va  English,  cf.  §  333.  b.  Rem.) ;  as,  — 

circumfundantur  hostea  si  quem  aditum  teperire  poasent  (B.  G.  vi.  37), 

tht  tnimy  pour  round  [to  see]  if  they  can  find  entrame. 
visameadomi  eit  (Ter.  Heaut.  iiV),  I -mi  11  go  see  if  he  is  at  home. 

iuaUy  no  Apodosis  is  thought  oF,  and 


g.  Forsit,  fotaltan,  forsan,  fortaese,  fortaese  an,  pci'haps,  i 
often  followed  by  the  Subjunctive :  as,  — 

Iforsilan  qnaerilfis  qui  iste  tenor  sit  (Rose,  Am.  i),  you  may  perhaps  1 
quire  what  this  alarm  is. 
Note.— The  Subjunctive  Clause  in  Ibis  case  was  originally  an  Indirect  Ques- 
tion.   Thus,  il  would  be  a  chance  mkctier,  etc.    PortaBBe  is  also  followed  by  the       ^^^ 
InfiniUve  with  Subject  Accusative  in  Plaulus.  ^^H 

lll.~INDIRECT  DISCOURSE.  ^^| 

Note.  —  Tbe  use  of  (he  Accusative  and  InRniUve  in  Indirect  Discourss  ^^H 
{araiio  oiligtia)  is  a  comparatively  late  form  of  speech,  developed  in  the  Lalin  ^^H 
and  Greek  only,  and  perhaps  separately  in  each  of  them,  II  Is  wholly  wanting  in  ^^H 
Sanskrit  and  Zend,  but  some  forms  like  It  liave  grown  up  in  English  and  German.        ^^H 

Thees5enlialchara.cterof  Indirect  Discourse  Is,  that  the  language  of  some  other  ^^M 
person  than  the  writer  or  speaker  is  compressed  into  a  hind  of  Substatitive  Clause,  ^^H 
the  verb  of  the  main  clause  becoming  Infinitive,  while  modi^ing  clauses,  as  well  ^^H 
as  all  hortatoiy  forms  of  speech,  take  (he  Subjunctive.  The  person  of  the  verb  is  ^^U 
necessaiily  conformed  to  the  new  relation  of  persons. 

The  construction  of  the  Indirect  Discourse,  however,  is  not  limited  to  reports 
of  the  language  of  some  person  other  than  the  speaker;  it  may  be  used  lo  express 
what  any  one  —  whether  the  speaker  or  some  one  else— loyj,  Ihinis,  ot  periiivis, 
whenever  that  which  is  said,  thought,  or  perceived  is  capable  of  being  expressed  in 
Iha  form  of  a  complete  sentence.  For  anything  thai  can  be  laid,  etc.,  can  also  6i 
ported  hidirectly  as  well  as  directly. 

The  use  of  Iho  Infinitive  in  the  main  clause  undoubtedly  comes  from  its  use  as 
to  complete  or  modify  the  action  expressed  \fj  ttvc  vtrti  oi  Ktjiug.evi^ 
rt  together.     Tljis  object  in  lime  came  W  to  Tc^aiaei  ie,,v.TifiL\i.\aiS.  ^H 


r 


370  Syntax:  Dependent  Constnictiof 

to  bII  Interns  became,  the  subject  of  the  infiniSve.    A  iransi 

Sanskrit,  which,  though  it  has  no  indirect  disoou 

predication  after  vef  bs  of  saying  and  ihe  like,  by  means  of  a  predicative  appoMlioti. 

in  such  expressions  as,  "  The  mnids  told  the  king  [that]  his  danghter  [was]  beidt 

The  simple  fonn  of  indirect  slalemcnt  -with  the  necusadve  and  infinitive  «-as 
afterwards  amplified  byintrodudng  dependent  or  modifying  clauses;  and  in  Latin  it 
became  a  common  construction,  ond  could  he  used  to  report  whole  speeches,  etc., 
which  in  other  languages  would  have  the  direct  form,  (Compare  the  style  of 
reporting  speeches  in  English,  where  only  Ihe  person  and  tense  are  changed,  as 
is  also  occasionally  the  case  in  Sanskrit.) 

The  USB  of  the  Sabjuncdve  In  dependent  clauses  in  Indirect  Discourse  probably 
came  bora  regarding  the  statements  contained  in  them  as  not  absoltMfy  true,  but 
as  csnfi^fuij  upon  the  tmstworthiness  of  the  original  speaker;  that  is,  as  Apodosis 
with  an  implied  Protasis  (i/wt  miy  telievt  iht  tftaiir,arVae\ik.e).  So  the  Freodi 
conditional  is  often  equivalent  to  "it  is  said"!  as,  aimi  it  aittaii  &  fia  fris  dsutU, 
"it  is  said  10  have  nearly  doubled,"  lit.  "would  have  doubled,"  i.e.  if  we  should 
believe  the  report  C;f.  in  CJerman,  Er  soil  trunk  siin,  "  he  is  said  to  lie  sick,"  ht., 
"  he  ought  to  be  sick,  unless  the  story  is  false," 

The  Subjunctive  standing  for  hortatory  forms  of  speech  in  Indirect  Discourse 
is  simply  Ihe  usual  hortatory  subjunctive,  with  only  a  change  of  person  and  tense 
(if  necessary),  as  in  the  reporter's  s^le,  and  in  Sanskrit. 

335.  A  Direct  Quotation  gives  the  exact  words  of  the 
original  speaker  or  writer. 

An  Indirect  Quotation  adapts  the  words  of  the  speaker 
or  writer  to  the  construction  of  the  sentence  in  which  they 
are  quoted. 

Eemars.  — The  term  Indirect  Discourse  iSratia  obllpta)  Is  used  hi  two 
senses.  In  the  wider  sense  it  includes  ail  clauses  —  of  whatever  kind  —  which 
express  Ihe  words  or  thought  of  any  person  oidirccthn  that  b,  in  a  form  different 
from  that  in  which  the  person  said  the  words  or  conceived  Ihe  thought.  In  Ihe 
narrower  sense  the  term  Indirect  Discourse  is  restricted  lo  those  cases  In  which 
some  compUtt  proposilion  is  ciled  in  Ihe  form  of  an  Indirect  Quotation,  which  may 
be  emended  10  a  narrative  or  an  address  of  any  length,  as  in  the  speeches  repotted 
by  Caesar  and  Livy.    In  this  book  the  term  is  used  In  Uie  restricted  sense,  ^^- 

I.  Formal  Indirect  Discourse.  ^^| 

336.  I.  Verbs  and  other  expressions  of  knowing,  thim^ 
ing,  telling,  2jn^  perceiving}  govern  the  Indirect  Discourse. 

'Such  are:  (i)  imi-.ving,  acl8,  cBgnSacfl,  comportum  habeO,  etc.; 
(2)  Ihiniing,  pTJtC,  eiiatimO.  artiltror,  etc.;  (3)  ttUmg,  dloO,  nfllitlS, 
reterO,  polllceor,  prSmlttO.  certlSrem  faciB,  etc.;  (4}  pmervin^,  bod* 
tJS.  comporlQ,  VideS,  audio,  cic.  So  in  gcneml  any  word  thai  denotes 
thought  or  menial  and  visual  peicepRotv  en  Ihriw  c^nesian.  m».i  gorem  the 
^direct  Discourse, 


I 


Indirect  Discourse :  Subject  Accusative.  371 

.  In  the  Indirect  Discourse  the  main  clause  of  a  De- 

iratory  Sentence  is  put   in  the  Infinitive  with  Subject 

Accusative,     All  Subordinate  clauses  take  the  Subjui 

Thus,  — 

Epcro  mS  Hberatum  [egae]  de  mctii  (Tusc.  iii.  37),  /  trust  I  have  6tiH 

/r„d/„„f„r. 
[dicil]  SEBe  noniiQllas  quorum  auctoritas  plurimum  valeat  (B.  G.  i. 

he  sajis  Ihert  art  somt,  xehost  infiueHU  innsl  preeailt.     [In  direct  di»- 

cooise  i  sant  nonnulli , ,  .  Ttilet.] 
iiisi  inrasBet,  scelus  se  factarum  [esse]  arbitrabatur  (Verr.  i.  47),  kt 

thaugkt  he  should  iniur guilt,  unless  ht  sAoulJ  late  the  oalh.     [Direct! 

nisi  inravero,  faciam.] 
Scoici  nfgant  quidquam  [esse]  bonum,  uisi  quod  hoiiestum  sit  (Fin.  ii. 

31),  the  Stoics  assert  that  nothing  is  good  tut  what  is  right.     [The  verb 

&eg5  is  used  ia  preference  Co  dlc5  with  a  negative.] 
Note  i.-~ra  [he  slalemenlorall  speech  or  thought,  (he  Romans  leaded  to  use 
:  Indirect  Discourse,  etc.,  with  verbs  of  the  classes  mentioned,  liut ;  Inguam, 
y/ (etc),  is  appropriated  to  the  Direct  Discourse  eicept  in  poetry. 
Note  a. — The  verb  of  saying,  etc.,  is  often  not  expressed,  but  implied  in  some 
'ord  or  in  the  general  drift  of  the  sentence:  as,— 
consnlis  alteiius  nomen  invisum  civitati  fuit:   nimium  Tarquini^  regno 

adsueue;  initiutn  a  Frisco  factum;   regnasse  dein  Ser.  TuUititn,  etc. 

lIAv.  a.  2),  tie  name  of  the  other  consul  was  hateful  ta  the  state;  the 

Tarquins  [they  thought)  had  become  too  much  accustomed  to  royal 

power,  etc.     [Here  iTlvisDin  implies  a  thought,  and  this  thought  is 

added  in  the  Indirect  Discourse.] 
orantes  ut  urbibus  saltern  —  iam  enim  l^roa   deplorStos   esse  —  opem 

Ecnatus  ferret  (Liv.  xvi.  (>), praying  that  the  senate -would at  least  bring 

aid  to  the  cities— for  the  fields  [they  said]  -were  already  given  up  as 

lost. 
Note  3.— Verbs  ol  framisins.  hopini 
the  like,  regtJarly  take  the  construction 

1.  Snbject  Aoonaative. 

a.   1.  The  Subject  of  the  Infinitive  in  Iniiirect  Discourse  must  reg^^  • 

rly  be  expressed,  even  if  it  is  wanting  in  the  direct;  as,  — 
orator  sum,  T am  an  orator;  dicit  se  esse  oratarem,  h 
Note.  —  But  the  subject  is  often  omiiied,  if  easily  under: 
ignoacere  impriidentiae  dixit  (B.  G.  iv.  27),  he  said  he  pardoned  their 

rashness. 
rogavi  petvenisaentne  Agrigentum;    dixit  pervenisBa  (Verr.  iv.   . 
asked  whether  they  (the  curtajns)  Aoif  conu  (a  Agrigmtiun  U 
L  jaiered  tiitl  they  had. 


I 


372  Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions.  [f  336. 

Remark.  — After  a  rektive.  or  QUBm  (Mm),  if  the  verb  would  be  the  sme 

tE  suspicor  nsdcm  rebus  quibus  meipaiini  commovcn  (Cat.  Mitj.  t),  /  iiu- 
ftcl  thai  you  art  dhlarbed  by  Iht  same  /iin^s  as  I. 

2.  When  the  verb  oi  saying,  etc.,  becomes  passive,  the  construction 
may  be  either  Personal  or  Impersonal. 

Note  i.  — For  rules  in  regard  to  the  choice  between  rhese  constmctioiis,  aDd 
(or  examples,  see  }  330.  a-d. 

Note  i  — An  Indirect  Narrative  begun  In  the  personal  constructiDii 
continued  with  the  Infinitive  and  Accusative. 


,   Subordinate  Clauses. 


"»l|^ 


b.  A  subordinate  clause  merely  explanatory  or  containing 
which  are  regarded  as  true  independently  of  the  quotation,  taltes  Ihe 
Indicative:  as, — 

quiB  neget  haec  omnia  qQEie  videmaa  deurutn  potestlte  administrari  (Cat. 

iii.  9),  who  can  deny  that  alt  Ihtst  things  till  see  art  ruttd  by  the  fmner 

ef  At  gods? 
ciiius  ingenio  putibat  ea  qnAe  geaaerat  posse  celebrari  (Arch.  9),  by  aiair 

genius  it  thought  that  those  deeds  which  he  had  done  could  be  ctUhralrd. 

[Here  the  fad  Expressed  by  qnftB  geaBerat,  though  not  explanatory,  is 

felt  lo  be  trne  without  regard  lo  the  quotation :  qnae  geBaisaet  would 

mean,  what  Marios  claimed  to  have  done.] 
Note.  —  It  often  depends  merelyupon  the  feeling  of  Ihe  writer  whether  he  shall 
use  the  Indicative  or  Subjunctive  in  such  clauses  (cf.  }  j  340-342), 

c.  Clauses  introduced  by  a  relative  which  is  equivalent  to  a  demon* 
strative  with  a  conjuaction  are  not  properly  subordinate,  and  hence 
take  the  Accusative  and  Infinitive  in  Indirect  Discourse  (see  §  180. y") : 

Marcellus  lequtsivisae  dicitur  Archimedem  ilium,  quern  com  aodisset  iuter- 
feotum  permoleste  tulisse  (Verr.  iv.  5S),  Marcellus  is  said  to  h/n'e 
sought  far  Arthtmedts,  and  when  he  heard  that  he  was  slaiit,  la  hai-t 
becK  greatly  dislrtssed.  , 

Ctiumqnemque  nostrum  censent  philosophi  mundi  e»se  partem,  ex  qnS 
[=  et  ex  eo]  illud  nStura  conaequi  (Fin,  iii.  19),  the  philosophers  say 
thai  each  ant  of  us  is  apart  of  the  universe,  from  iiihich  this  naturally 
follows. 

Note  i,— Really  subordinate  clauses  occasionally  lake  this  construction ;  as.— 

qnemadmodum  sT  non  dedatur  obses  pro  nipto  b5  foedus  hahltnram,  sic 
deditam  inviolalam  ad  luos  remissurum  (Liv.  ii.  13),  [he  says]  as  in 
fast  tie  hostage  is  notgivm  «f  Jit  shall  considtr  At  treaty  as  brettn,u 
i/given  up  ht  will  return  her  unhariind  to  her  frw»ds. 


f  1331 

f 


,]  Tenses  in  Indirect  Discourse.  373 


Note  a.  — The  Infinitircconslructloii  Is  regularly  condnued  after  a 

h  quarn :  as, — 

addit  se  prins  occisom  in  ab  eo  qnam  mi  Tiolatnni  In  (Att.  ii.  so),  kt 

adds  &at  hi  kivisclf  imU  bi  kiUtd  by  him,  before  I  shall  be  injured. 
NOTB  3. — The  Suhjunciive  with  or  without  ut  also  occurs  with  <iuam  (m 
'133^*}. 

d.  A  subordinate  dause  in  the  Indirect  Discourse  occasionally  takes 
the  Indicative  when  'Aa/ocI  is  emphasized:  as, — 

factum  eius  hostis  periculum  .  . .  cum,  Cimbris  et  Teatonia  .  . .  pulsis,  non 

minorem   laudem   exercilus   quam  ipse   imperalor  metltus  vidahatar 

(B.  G.  i.  40J,  that  a  trial  of  this  enemy  had  been  made  when,  etc., 

tie  army  seemed,  etc. 

3,  TenssB  of  the  tnfinitlire. 
6.   A.  The  Present,  the  Perfect,  or  the  Future  In- 
finitive is   used  in   Indirect   Discourse,  according  as  the 
time  indicated  is  present,  past,  or  future  with  reference  to 
iHie  verb  of  saying,  etc.,  by  which  the  Indirect  Discourse 
introduced.     Thus,  — 


ceciderS,  I  shall  1  dicit  fore  ut  ceciderit  [rate],  he  says  he  shall  have  fattt 


have  fallen  I  dixit  fore  ut  CBcidisset  [rare],  he  said  he  should  have 
Note  i. — AH  varieties  of  past  time  are  usuallir  expressed  In  Indirect  Discourse 
,  the  Perfect  Infinitive,  which  may  stand  for  the  Imperfect,  the  Perfect,  or  the 
Pluperfect  Indicative  of  the  Direct.  Bui  sometimes  continued  or  repeated  action 
in  past  time  is  expressed  by  the  Present  Infinitive,  which  in  such  cases  stands  for 
tbe  Imperlect  Indicative  of  (he  Direct  Discourse,  and  is  often  called  the  Imperfect 
iHjnilive  (so  regularly  afler  meminl,  cfl  {  383.  f):  Thus,— 

\£  taerawi  ^cere,  I  reniemher  that  you  said.     [Direct:  dicebH.] 
Note  s.  —  For  various  ways  of  expressing  the  Future  Infinitive,  see  S  147.  e. 

\  4.  Tenses  of  tbe  Subjunctive. 

336.  B.  The  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  in  Indirect  Dis- 
course follow  the  rule  for  the  Sequence  of  Tenses  (§  2S6), 
They  depend  for  their  sequence  on  the  verb  of  saying, 

[etc.,  by  which  the  Indirect  Discourse  \a  \u\.TQ6.\iiie.i. 


1 

:■ 
I 

I 


r 


374  Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions.     [§§336,337, 

Thus  In  the  sentence,  dixit  bS  Romam  itDmin  ut  cSnaulem 
TldEret,  he  said  he  should  go  to  Rome  in  order  that  he  tntght  set  (he 
etmsut,  vidEret  follows  Ihe  sequence  of  dixit  without  regard  lo  the 
Future  Infinitive,  itOrum  [esse],  on  which  it  directly  depends. 

Note  i. — Tliis  rule  applies  not  only  lo  Ihe  subjunctive  in  subordinale  clauses 
in  indirect  discourse,  but  also  to  that  which  stands  for  the  imperative,  etc.  {see  ei- 
amples  in  {  339),  and  to  that  in  questions  {)  338). 

Note  2. — A  subjunctive  depending  on  a.  Perfect  Infinitive  is  commonly  in 
Ihe  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect,  even  if  the  verb  of  laying,  etc.,  is  in  a  primary  tense 
(rf.i.S7  0.    Tl,«.- 

Tarquinium  dnisse  fernnt  tam  exsulantem  se  intellexisae  qnos  fidos  amicus 
habaisaet  (Lael.  15),  Aey  tell  us  that  Tarquin  said  that  then  in  his  ixili 
III  had  found  out  what  faithful  friends  he  had  had.  [Here  the  main 
verb  of  saying,  fBTOnt,  is  primary,  bat  the  time  is  carried  back  by 
djxiaae  and  intellBxiaae,  and  the  sequence  then  becomes  secondary.] 
tanlum  profecisse  videmur  at  a  Graecia  ne  yerborum  quideni  copia  TincB- 
rimna  (N.  D.  L  4,  8),  -jie  snm  la  have  advanced  sn  far  thai  evin  in 
fulness  ofiaords  we  are  not  surpassed  by  the  Greeks. 

a.  The  Present  and  Perfect  Subjunctive  are  often  used  in  dependent 
clauses  of  the  Indirect  Discourse  even  when  the  verb  of  saying,  etc,  is 

dicebant . . .  lotidetn  Necvios  (polliceri)  qui  longissime  absint  (B.  G.  ii.  4^ 
Otey  said  that  ihe  Nervii,  wke  live  farthest  iijf,f  remised  as  many. 

Note  I. — This  constmclion  comes  from  Ihe  tendency  of  language  lo  refer  all 
lime  in  narration  to  the  time  of  Ihe  speaker  {RipraismlStia).  In  Ihe  course  of 
a  long  passage  in  the  Indirect  Discourse  the  lenses  of  the  subjunctive  often  vary, 
sometimes  following  the  Sequence,  and  sometimes  affected  hy  Repratstntilii. 
Examples  may  be  seen  in  B.  G.  L  13,  vii.  ao,  etc. 

Note  2.  — Certain  constructions  are  never  affected  by  Rtpraesent^hS.  Such 
are  the  Impetfecl  and  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  with  cum  temporal,  antequam. 
and  prluaquam. 

5.   Conditions  in  Indirect  Disooorae. 

337.  Conditional  sentences  in  Indirect  Discourse  are 
expressed  as  follows  :  — 

1.  The  Protasis,  being  a  subordinate  clause,  is  always  in  the  Sub- 

2.  The  Apodosis,  if  independent  and  not  hortatory  or  optative,  is 
always  in  some  form  of  the  Infinitive. 

a.  The  Present  Subjunctive  in  the  apodosis  of  less  vivid  future  con- 
ditions (§  307.  A)  becomes  the  Future  Infinitive.  Thus  there  is  no  dis- 
liuctJon  between  more  or  less  vivid  future  conditions  in  the  Indirect 
IXscourse.  ,^^ 


337.] 


Conditions  in  Indirect  Discourse 


375 


Examples  of  conditional  sentences  in  Indirect  Discourse  are :  — 

1.  Simple  Present  Condition  (g  306). 
(dixit)  si  ipse  populo  Romano  non  praeBCriberet  quemadmodum  sua  iiire 

nteretur,  non  opori«re  sese  a  popolo  Romano  in  suo  iure  impediri 
(B.  G. !.  36) ,  hi  said  that  if  he  did  not  dictate  to  tht  Ronmn  ptople  him    ' 
Hey  shoidd  use  their  rights,  he  eught  not  to  it  interfered  with  iy  tht 
Soman  peopit  in  the  exercise  of  his  rights.     [Direct:  a  non  praB-    , 
scrlbo , . ,  nSn  oportet.j 
praeiiicavic . . ,  ai  pace  uli  velint,  iniquum  esse,  etc,  (B.  G.  i.  44),  he  as' 
serled  that  if  they  wished  to  enjoy  peace,  it  -mas  unfair,  etc,     [Direct: 
Hi  volnnt . . .  eat.     Present  tense  kept  by  RepraesentatQ  (§  336.  B.  a, 
note  .)■] 

2.  Simple  Past  Condition  (§  306). 
non  dicam  ni  illud  quidem,  d  maxime  in  culpa  fiieTili  Apolloniui,  ta 

hominem  bonealissimae  uvitatis  honcstissimum  tam  graviter  animad'    I 
veiti  caasi  indicta  non  oportoiaae  (Ven,  II.  v.  S,  ao),  /  will  not  say 
this  either,  that,  even  if  Apollonius  was  greatly  in  fault,  still  an  honor' 
able  man  ought  not  to  have  been  punished  so  severely,  etc.     [Direct ! 
A  fnit . .  .  non  oportuitN] 

3.  Futm^  Conditions  (§  307). 
Aeduis  se  obsides  redditiirum  non  esse,  neque  eis  . . .  bcllum  iU&tSmm,  n 

in  eo  maiiirent,  quod  convenisset,  stipendiumque  quotannis  pende-    { 
rent;  si  id  non  feciBsent,  longe  eis  fralernum  nomen  populi  Romoai 
abfntartun  (B.  G,  i,  '^d'),  he  said  thai  he  would  not  give  up  the  hostages 
la  Ike  jEdui,  but  would  not  mahe  war  upon  them  if  they  observed  tht    j 
agreement,  etc.,  and  paid  tribute  yearly;  but  if  they  should  not  dt 
tht  name  of  brothers  to  the  Roman  people  would  be  far  from  aiding 
Hem.     [Direct :  reddam . . .  inferam  . .  ,  n  manebnnt .  .  .  pendent  i 
a  non  fecerint . . .  aberit.] 
(dixit)  quod  31  praeterea  nemo  sequatur,  tamen  si  cum  sola  decinia  legione 
itnrnni  (B.  G.  i.  40),  but  ifnohoiiy  else  should  follow,  still  he  would  go 
■with  the  tenth  Itgion  alone.     [Direct:   si  aeqaetar  .  .  .  ibo.    Present 

id  Dalamet  tit  audivit,  sensit,  si  in  turbam  exisset  ab  homine  tam  necessa- 
lio  se  Telictum,  Attornm  [ease]  ut  ceteri  consilium  aeqnantnr  (Nep. 
Dat,  6),  if  it  should  get  abroad  that  he  had  been  abandoned  by  a  man 
so  closely  tonneclid  with  him,  everybody  ebe  would  follow  his  example. 
[Direct:  A  exlerit . . .  aeqaentor.j 

(diiemnt)  nisi  me  civilate  expnlisaeat,  obtinere  se  non  posse  liceatiam 
capiditatum  suanun  (Att.  x.  4),  they  said  that  unless  they  drove  me  out 
of  Ike  state,  tkey  eoidd  not  have  free  play  for  their  desires.  [Direct!  nioi 
(Ciceronem)  expnlerimiiB,  obtinere  n5n  poterinmH.] 

b.  In  changing  a  Condition  contrary  to  fact  (§  308)  into  the  Indirect   , 
SSscourse,  the  following  points  requite  nolice. 


3/6  Syntax:  Dependent  Constructions.  [5 


1 


1.  The  Protasii  always  remains  unchanged  in  tense. 

2.  The  Apodosis,  inactive,  takes  a  peculiar  infinitive  farm,  mad( 
combining  the  Participle  in  -iirua  with  fuiase. 

3.  If  the  verb  of  the  Apodosis  is  passive  or  has  no  supine  stem,  the 
periphrasis  fittflrum  falaae  ut  (with  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive)  must 

Examples  are :  — 

nee  se  supetstitem  fllise  fntnrnia  fniaafl,  nisi  spem  ulciscendae  morlis  avs 
in  aunilio  cominilitonum  habaisaet  (Liv.  iii.  50),  and  ikal  he  skeuld 
no!  nmo  be  a  survivor,  elc,  unltss  ie  had  had kope,  etc.  [^Direct;  non 
anperetea  esKem.  nisi  habuissem,] 

illud  Asia  cogitet,  nuUam  a  ae  neque  belli  eilerni  neque  discordiarum 
domeiticamm  ealamitatem  abfutiiram  fuisse,  si  hoc  imperio  nSn  lenere- 
tur  (Q.  Ft.  i.  1, 1 1),  Itl  Ana  (personified)  Ihink  o/lhis,  that  no  disaster, 
etc.,  woidd  not  be  htrs,  if  site  were  not  held  by  this  govimmenl. 
[Direct:  abeasem,  a  non  tenerer,] 

qaid  inimidtiarum  credilis  eKceptamm  fnuse,  si  insontes  lacessissem 
(Q.  C.  vi.  10,  29),  tuhal  enmities  da  you  think  I  should  have  iniurred 
if  I  had  wantonly  assailid  the  innoeint.  [excepisaem  . . .  Bi  laces- 
BiHsem.] 

ancensemus,  siFabio...1audi  datum esset  quod  pingerel,  non  multoseliam 
apud  nos  fnlDrSa  Polycletos  et  Panhasios  fnlsse  (Tasc.  i.  z,  4),  or  do 
■we  think  that  if  praise  had  been  given  to  Faiius  because  he  painted, 
there  woald  not  have  been  many  a  Polycletns  and  Parrhasius  among  us 
too?  [Direct:  ^  datum  asaet  ...  ii5il  fniasent.] 
invitnm  se  dicere,  nee  dJotfirnm  fuisae,  ni  caritas  rei  publicoe  vinceret 
(Liv.  ii,  2),  that  ht  spoke  unTBiUingly  and  should  not  haze  spoken  (al 
vXX),  did  not  love  for  the  commonwealth  prevail  ?  [Direct;  neo  dlxia- 
sem  .  . ,  nl  vinceret.] 

quorum  si  aetas  potuisaet  esse  longinquior,  ftitfimm  fiiisie  at  omnibu« 
perfectis  artibus  hominora  vita,  erudiretoT  (Tuac.  iii.  sS,  69),  if  life 
could  have  been  longer,human  ejtislence  would  have  been  embellished  fy 
every  art  in  ils perfection.     [Direct:  emdita  esaet.] 

Note  i,  —  In  Indirect  Discourse  Present  Conditions  contrary  (o  lacC  are  nol 
distinguished  in  the  apodosis  from  Past,  but  the  prolaiu  may  keep  Ihent  distinct. 
NOTIia. — The  periphrasis  futOrum  lulsae   ul   is  sometimes  used  from 

NOTEj.  — Very  rarely  the  Future  Infinilive  is  used  in  the  Indirect  Discoune 
to  express  the  Apodosis  of  a  Present  Condition  contrary  to  fact.  Only  four  or  live 
examples  or  this  use  occur  in  classic  authors  :  as, — 

Titurius  clainabat  si  Caesar  adesset  neque  Camiites,  etc.,  neque  Eburo- 
nes  tania  cimi  contemplione  nostra  ad  caitra  TsotfiToa  eiM  (B.  G.  v. 
29),  Titurius  cried  out  that  if  Casar  v>ere  present,  neither  teeutd  the 
Carnu/es,  etc.,  nor  woutd  the  Ebui-ond  6(  (oming  (0  our  camp  tidet 
t»cA  contempt.     [Direct ;  al  adeaact  .  ,  .■^emicn.V:\  ^^H 


Ess  338,  339.]  Qiiestiotts  and  Commands. 


Bss3 

^B  6.   Questdona  in  Indirect  DiBGonrse. 

^  33S.  A  QuestioD  in  the  Indirect  Discourse  may  be  j 
either  in  the  Subjunctive  or  in  the  Infinitive  with  Subject  J 
Accusative. 

A  real  question,  asking  for  an  answer,  is  generally  put  1 
in  the  Subjunctive  ;  a  rhetorical  question,  asked  for  effect  \ 
and  implying  its  own  answer,  in  the  Infinitive,  Thus, — 
quid  sibi  Tollot?  cur  in  suas  posessiones  venlret  (B.  G.  i.  44),  ■what  did  J 
he  -ujanl?  why  did  hi  comt  ia/a  /lis  Urrilsricsf  [Real  question.f 
Direct:  qnid-riaT  cfir  renia?]  J 

tium  recentiam  iniiiriinini    memoriam    [se]   depiSuere    pOBse  (id.  i.   14),,] 
could  he  lay  aside  the  memory  of  r/cent  wrongsT    [Rhelorical  Que 
tioD.     Direct;  nam poaanu 7] 
quern  ^gnum  dnCurum  fugientibus  ?  quern  ausucum  Alexandro  succedete 
(Q.  C.  iii.  5),  tiiAa  will  give  the  signal  on  the  retrial?  taha  wll  dare 
sficcetd Alexandtr f    [Rhetorical.     Direct:  qois  dabit . . .  tilidebit. ] 
NOTBl. — No  sharp  line  can  be  drawn  between  the  Subjunctive  and  the  Infini- 
tive in  questions  in  the  Indirect  Discourss.    Whether  llie  question  iato  be  regarded 
ai  rhelorical  01  rtjl  ofitn  depends  merely  on  liie  writer's  point  of  view.    Thus,— 
ntrtun  partcoi  regni  petitortim  esse,  an  totnin  erepliirum  (LIv.  xlv.  19), 

v/illyeu  ask  ptsri  of  lie  re^l pmiicr  (he  said),  or  seize  the  ■aiholtf 
quid  tandem  praeluri  faciendum  faiBse  (id.  xxxi.  48),  what,  pray,  eughl   j 

a  prater  In  liave  done  ? 
quid  repente  factnm  [esse]  ciir,  etc.  (id.  xxxiv.  54),  -what  had  suddeufy  | 

happened,  thai,  eic.l 

Note  a. — Questions  coming  immediately  after  a  verb  ol  asiin^  ore  treated  U 

Indirect  Questions  and  take  the  Subjunctive  (see  j  334),    This  is  true  even  when 

die  verb  of  asking  serves  also  to  inboduce  a  passage  in  the  Indirect  Disoounc 

The  question  maybeelther  real  or  rhetorical.   See  quaealvlt,  etc,  (l.iv.  ixxviL  rj), 

Note  3,— For  the  use  of  tenses,  see  §  336.  B,  note  1. 

a.  A   Deliberative   Subjunctive   in   the  Direct  Discourse  b  always  I 
retained  in  the  Indirect  r  as, — 

cfir  aliquos  ex  suis  Smitteret  (B.  C  1.  72),  luiy  (thought  he)  should  At  ' 

Use  seme  o/his  men  ?    [Direct :  Onr  imittam?]  ' 

7.  Commands  In  Indirect  SiooouTaa. 
339.   All  Imperative  forms  of  speech  take  the  Suhjunc- 
live  in  Indirect  Discourse  :  as,  — 

renuniaceritOT  velcris  Incommoili  (B.  G.  i.  13).  remember  (said  he)  t 

ancient  disaslir.    [Direct:  reminiBoare.] 
nnem  facuit  (id.  2o),  lei  him  make  un  eni.    y)\<tW,  ^»*r\ 


iJS 


Syntax:  Dependent  Constniciions.      [|5  339,  340 


ferrent  ojwni,  adinTirent  (Liv.  ii.  6),  l^i  them  bring  aid,  l/t  ihim  help. 

Remark,^ This  rule  applies  nol  nnlylo  Ihe  Imperative  of  Ihe  direct  discourse, 
bul  10  Ihe  hortatory  and  the  optative  subjunclive  a^  we!l. 

Note  i.— Thoueh  these  subjiinclives  stand  for  independent  clauses  of  the 
direct  discourse,  they  follow  the  rule  for  the  sequence  of  tenses,  being  in  kxX 
dependent  on  Ihe  verb  at  saying,  etc.  {cf.  }}  aSS,  336.  B,  note  i). 

Note  2,  — A  Prohibition  in  the  Indirect  Discourse  is  regularly  expressed  by  nS 
with  the  Subjiincdve,  even  when  n3Ii  with  the  InfinitivE  would  be  used  in  Ihe 
Direct:  as,— 

nc  pcrlurbarenlur  (B.  G.  vii.  29),  do  not  (he  said)  bf  troubled.     [Direct: 
nolite  pertnrbiri.     But  sometimes  ndUet  is  found  in  Ind.  Disc] 


The  following  example  illustrates  si 
a  connected  address ;  — 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE. 
Si  picem  populua  Rominus  cum 
Helvetiis  faceret,  in  earn  partem  itu-  ] 
roH  atque  ibi  fatoroa  Helvatioa,  ubi 
COS  Caesar  constitaiaaet  atque  esse 
voIiiiBBet  1  sin  bello  persequi  perse- 
veraret,  TeminisceTetiir  et  veteris 
incomraodi  populi  Romani,  et  piisti- 
nae  virt^tis  Helvili5tuni.  Quod  im- 
proviso  iinLiin  piguiu  adortus  asset, 
cum  ei  qui  niimen  tran^aent  suis 
auiilium   fcrre    non    poasent,   ne  ob 

tuti  tribaeret,  sut  ipsoa  deapiceret ; 
ae  ita  a  pa.tribu;  maiocibusquc  eitis 
didicisse,  ut  magis  virtute  quam  ilolo 
contenderent,  aut  inEidiis  nltereu- 
tur.  Quare  ne  conmiitteiet,  ut  ia 
tocus  ubi  constitiBsent  ex  calatnitatc 
populi  Romani  et  internecione  exerci- 
tiis  nomED  capeiet, 
proderet. —  B.  G.  i.  r 


e  of  the  foregoing  prindples 


Si  pacem  populus  Rotnanus  cum 
Helvetiis  faciet,  in  earn  partem  ibuiit 
atque  ibi  amnt  Helvetil,  ubi  eus  tu 
conatitaeriB  atque  esse  volneria :  sin 
bello  persequi  peraevBribiB,  remini- 
fwere  [inquit]  et  velerts  incotomodi 
populi  Romani,  et    pristinae  virtuti^ 


Helvet 
pagum  adorti 


Quod  i. 


lUn  ei  qui  tlum 
silium  ferte  n. 
1  rem    aut  ta, 

i  tribtieriB,  q 


inaioribusque  noalris  didicimna,  ut 
magis  virtute  quam  dolo  contenda- 
muB,  aut  insidiis  nitamnr.  Quari 
noli  committere,  ut  He  locus  uli 
coQEtitiinas  ex  calamitate  populi  Ru 
mani  et  internecione  exerciCus  nomei 
capiat,  aut  memoiiam  piodat. 


<.  Clauses. 
340.  A  Subordinate  clause  takes  the  Subjunctive, 
when  it  expresses  the  thought  of  some  other  person  than 
the  speaker  or  writer  (Jnfonnal  Indu-ect  Discourse),  or 
(2)  when  it  is  an  integral  part  of  a  Subjunctive  clause  or 
equivalent  Infinitive^  {Attraction). 


§ 


1  Seem 


It  head  qI  Induced 


is  341.]  Informal  Indirect  Disctm 


VS34 

^K  X  Informal  Indirect  DiscouTae. 

H  341.  A  subordinate  clause  takes  the  subjunctive  whei 
H  it  expresses  the  thought  of  some  other  person  than  tbi 
H   writer  or  speaker.     Thus  :  — 

V         a.  In  subordinate  dames  in  formal  indirect  discourse  (§  336)  ;  I 
also  in  Informal  Indirect  Discourse  in  the  following  cases  {b-d):  — 

b.  When  the  clause  depends  upon  another  containing  a  imsh,  a  cc 
taand,  or  a  question  expressed  indirectly,  though  not  strictly  in  1 
form  of  Indirect  Discourse;  as, — 

animal  aentit  quid  sit  qnod  deoea.t  (Off.  i.  6),  an  animal  feels  vAat  il 
thai  is  fit. 

honcsilH  exanimascriipaluni,  qui  si  dies  noctesque  stimnlet  ic  pnngat,  u 
eveUatis  postulat  (Rose.  Am.  z),  he  itgs  you  /o  pluck  fron, 
this  doubt  that  goads  and  sHitgs  him  day  and  night.  [Her 
live  clause  is  not  a  part  of  the.  Purpose  expressed  in  eveUStia,  but  il 
an  assertion  made  by  the  subject  of  postulat.] 

c.  When  the  main  clause  of  a  quotation  is  merged  in  the  verb  o 
taying,  or  some  modifier  of  it : 

«i  quid  de  his  libus  dicere  vellet,  feci  polestitem  (Cat.  lii.  5,  ll),  ifii 
■mished  to  say  anything  about  these  matters,  I  gave  him  a  ehaHce. 

tulit  de  caede  quae  in  Appia  viii  facta  esset  (Milo  5,  15),  he  passed  a 
eanctrning  the  murder  which  (in  the  language  of  the  bill)  taoi  floA 
in  til  Afipiau  Way. 

ni£ileBtibiiBHenlstatnas,vehementeTeisniinatar(Ve[r.  iii.  df),  hi  threatens 
them  violently  unless  they  should  restore  i/it  statues.  [Here  the  main 
claute,  "  that  he  will  inflict  punishment,"  is  contained  in  minBtm.] 

eis  BDxilinin  auam  pollicitus  si  ab  Suevis  premereattuc  (B.  G.  iv.  19),  he 
fremised  them  his  aid  if  Ikey  should  be  molested  by  the  Suevi,  [=  pol- 
lieitoB  se  aoxitinm  latonun,  etc.] 

piohibitia  tallendi,  nisi  pactas  easet,  vim  adhibebat  paction!  (Verr.  iv.  14), 
the  fiirhidding  to  lake  away  unless  he  came  to  terms  gave  force  to  the 
bargain.  I 

d.  When  3  reason  or  an  explanatory  fact  is  introduced  by  a  relativej 
or  by  qaod  (rarely  quia)  (see  §  321)'    Thus, —  \ 

Paetus  omnes  libros  qa5a  pater  suus  rel^iuBset  mihi  donavit  (Att.  iii.  l], 

Patus  f  resettled  me  all  the  books  lohich  (he  said)  his  father  had  left. 

Remark,  — Under  this  head  even  what  the  speaker  himself  thought  under 

Iher  circnmslances  may  have  the  Subjunclive.    So  also  wiih  quod  even  the  verb 

of  jaymj' may  be  in  the  Subjunctive.     Here  belong  also  nfin  quia,  nOa  quod, 

introdncinE  a  reason  expressly  to  dci^  it.     (See  ^  3^1.  Rem.  and  note  a.) 


380  Synlax:  Dependent  Constructions,  [§  342. 

2.   BubjuaotlTe  of  Integral  Fart  (Attraotioii). 

343.   A  clause  depending  upon  a  Subjunctive  clause  or 

an  equivalent  Infinitive  will  itself  take  the  Subjunctive  if 
regarded  as  an  integral  part  of  that  clause :  ^  as,  — 

impecat,  dam  res  adiudicetor,  hominem  ut  adscrvcnt :  cum  iudicaUim  ait, 
ad  Be  addQcant  (Verr.  iv.  22),  At  orders  Ikem,  till  Ike  affair  should  be 
decided,  to  keep  the  man  ;  vihen  he  isja^ed,  ta  bring  him  to  him. 
etenim  quis  tuin  dissoluto  anima  est,  qui  haec  cum  videat,  tacece  ac  negle- 
gere  possit  (Rose.  Am.  11),  for  leho  is  so  reckless  of  spirit,  thai,  tt'kiH 
he  sees  these  things,  he  can  keep  iUfnl  and  pass  them  byf 
mos  est  Athenls  laudari  in  contione  e^  qui  Hint  in  proeliis  inlerfccli 
(Oc.  44),  it  is  the  custom  at  Athens  for  those  to  be  publicly  ttdogiied 
■bAo  have  been  slain  in  bntlle.     [Here  laadaii  is  equivalent  to  nt 
landentoT.] 
a.  But  a  dependent  clause  may  be  closely  connected  grammatically 
with  a  -Subjunctive  or  Infinitive  clause,  and  still  take  the  Indicative,  if 
it  is  not  regarded  aa  a  necessary  logical  part  of  that  clause :  as,  — 
quudam  laaAa  postulat  nt,  quemadmodum  eat,  sic  eliam  appelletur,  tynm- 
nos  (Att.  X.  4),  IK  a  manner  he  demands  that  as  he  is,  so  he  may  be 
called,  a  tyrant. 
a  mea  in  te  essent  ofticia  solum  tanta  quanta  magis  a  te  ipso  pracdicici 
quam  a  me  pondetiri  aolent,  verecundius  a  te  .  . .  peterem  (Fam.  ii.  6), 
if  my  good  seruicis  to  you  were  only  so  great  as  they  are  wont  rather  to 
be  called  by  you  than  to  be  estimated  by  me,  I  should,  etc. 
natura  fert  ut  eia  faveamtis  qui  eadem  pericula  qnibns  noi  perfonetl  anmna 
ingcediuntur  (Mur.  2, 4J, /la/H/'^/foin/Wli  us  to  fiel  friendly  tovmrcb  tkoii 
svho  are  entering  en  the  same  dangers  which  we  have  passed  through. 
ni  hosles,  quod  taiitum  mullitudine  poterant,  suos  ciicumvenire  possent 
(B.  G.  ii.  8),  lest  the  enemy,  because  they  were  so  strong  in  stumpers, 
should  be  able  to  surround  his  men. 
Note. — The  use  of  the  Indicative  !n  such  clauses  sometimes  serves  to  emplia- 
siie  the  fati,  as  true  independently  of  the  statement  contained  in  the  suhjunclive 
or  intiniilve  clause.    But  in  many  cases  no  sucti  dbtinctSon  between  (he  Indicative 
and  Subjunctive  Is  percepdble, 

1  The  Subjunctive  In  this  use  is  in  a  manner  of  Ihe  same  nature  as  Iho  Sub- 
jutictive  in  Ihe  main  clause.  A  dependent  clause  in  a  clause  of  Purpose  ia  really  a 
part  of  thepurpose.as  is  seen  from  the  use  al  should  and  other  auxiliaries  in  English. 
In  a  Result  clause  this  is  less  clear,  but  the  result  constmetion  is  a  branch  of  the 
characteriitic,  to  which  cslegoty  the  dependent  clause  in  this  case  eridenlly  belongs, 
when  ft  takes  the  Subjunctive. 

It  Is  often  difficult  to  dislinguish  between  Informal  Indirect  Discourse  and  tiie 
Integral  Part.  Thus  In  ImperKvlt  ut  eft  tlerent  quae  opus  eaaent,  eaaeDt 
may  stand  for  sunt,  and  then  will  be  Indirect  Discourse,  being  a  part  of  the  thou^l. 
but  not  a  part  of  Ihe  order;  or  il  maj  stani  Sm  •TMJiS.B.wUhen  will  be  Inl^fal 
Part,  ^Ing  a  part  of  the  order  itscll,  ^h 


Syn[ax:  Important  Rules. 

IMPORTANT   RULES   OF  SYNTAX. 

t.   A  noun  used  to  describe  another,  and  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing, 
agrees  with  it  In  Case  (g  183). 
.    Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles  agree  with  Iheii 
gender,  mmher,  and  ease  (§  186). 

3.  A  Relative  pronoun  agi^es  with  its  Antecedent  '\a  gender  and  nuatber, 

but  its  case  depends  on  the   construction  of  the  clause  in   which  it 
slanda  (g  19E). 

4.  A  Finite  Verb  agrees  with  its  Subject  in  number  and  fienan  (§  204). 

5.  Superlatives  (mote  rarely  comparatives)  denoting  order  and  succession 

also  mediiu,  oeterna,  reliquna—  uauaUy  designate  not  viae  ebj, 
but  ■what part  efil,  is  meant  (J  193). 

6.  The  Personal  Pronouns  have  two  forms  for  the  genitive  plural,  that 

-nm  being  nscd/flrft/ii'?/i',  and  that  in -i  ofleneat  oiiyW/iVf^  (§  194.*), 

7.  The  Reflexive  pronoun  (hS),  and  usually  Ihe  coriesponding  poa 

(miiB),  are  used  in  some  part  of  the  predicate  to  refer  to  the  subject  of 
the  sentence  or  clause  (§  196). 

8.  The  Possessive  Pronouns  are  used  instead  of  the  genitive  of  a  personal 

pronoun:   (i)  always  instead  of  the  possessive  genitive,  (2)  rj 

stead  of  an  objective  genitive  (§  197.  a). 
.        9.   A  Possessive  representing  a  genitive  may  have  a  genitive  in  apposition 
L  (!i97-<)- 

I    lo.   Adverba  are  used  to  modify  verbs,  adjectives,  and  other  adverbs  (§  207), 
f     II,   A  question  of  simple  fact,  requiring  the  answer  YES  or  NO,  is  formed  hf 

adding  the  enclitic  -ne  to  the  emphatic  word  (§  210.  a). 

12.  When  Ihe  enclitic  -db  is  added  to  a  negative  word,  —  as  in  nonne,— 

affirmative  answer  is  expected      The  particle  nnm  suggests  a  negn- 
ftW  answer  (5  2.0.0- 

13.  Thesubject  of  a  finite  verb  is  in  the  Nominative  (§  173.  «). 

!•(.  A  nonn  used  to  limit  or  define  another,  and  net  meaning  the  same  perso 
or  thing,  is  put  in  the  Genitive  (g  213). 

15.  The  Subjective  Genitive  is  used  with  &  ngun  to  denote  (i)  the  Author  e 

Owner,  (2)  the  Source  or  the  Material,  (3)  the  Qnallly  (§  214). 

16.  Words  denoting  a  Part  are  followed  hy  the  genitive  of  the  Whole  t 

which  the  part  belongs  {Partitive  Genitive,  %  216). 

[17.  Noons  of  action,  agency,  and  feeling  govern  the  genitive  of  the  object 
{Obj'eHve  Genitive,  |  817). 
I&  Adjectives  denoting- Arir/,  knuvile^e,  t/iemtry,  fulness,  power,  sharing, 
guill,  and  their  opposite*;  verbals  in  -ai,  and  participles  in  -ni  when 
used  aa  adjectives,  govern  the  Genitive  (|  2  * 
19.  Verbs  of  rimembering,  forgetting,  take  the  Genitive  of  the  object  whea 
they  aie  used  of  a  continued  state  of  mini,  but  the  Accuiatlve  ntien 
used  o/a  single  act  (J  zig). 


r 


382  Syntax:  Important  Ruhs. 

JO.  Verba  of  accusing,  condimning,  and  acquitting  taka  the  Genitive  of  Ihe 
Charge  or  Penalty  (J  220), 

21.  The  Dative  b  used  of  the  object  indirectly  affected  by  an  action  (^Indi- 
rect O^nl,  %  224), 

Z2.  Mostverb»ineaningtoj^nwf,i,r^,/itai^,A-»ar,Bnd theirconttaries;  also. 
to  iih'eiv,  persuade,  command,  obey,  serve,  resist,  enny,  threaten,  farjon., 
and  spare,  take  the  Dative  (§  227). 

13.  Mnsl  verbs  compounded  with  &d,  anie,  oon,  in,  inter,  ob,  post,  prae, 
pro,  sub,  Hnper,  and  tome  with  oircaro,  are  followed  by  the  Dative 
of  the  indirect  object  (§  2z8). 

24.  Many  verbs  of  taking  a'oiay,  and  the  like  take  the  Dative  (especially  of  a 

pertari)  instead  of  tlie  Ablative  of  Separation  (§  229). 

25.  The  Dative  U  used  with  esae  and  similar  words  to  denote  Possesion 

«  231). 

26.  Tbe  Dative  of  the  Agent  is  used  with  the  Gerundive,  to  denote  the 

person  on  wham  tbe  necessily  testa  (§  232}, 

27.  The  Dative  is  used  to  denote  the  Purpose  or  End,  often  uilli  another 

Dative  of  the  person  or  thing  alTecled  (J  233.  a). 

28.  The  Dative  is  used  with  adjectives  (and  a  few  adverbs)  of  fitness,  near- 

ness,  service,  inclination,  and  their  opposites  (g  234.  o) 

29.  The  Dative  is  often  required,  not  by  any  particular  word,  bat  by  (he  gen- 

eral meaning  of  the  sentence  {Dative  of  Eeference,  %  235), 

30.  The  Direct  Object  of  a  transitive  verb  is  put  in  the  Accusative  (f 

31.  A  neuter  verb  often  take*  an  accusative  of  kindred  meaning  (§  238). 

32.  Verbs  of  naming,  choeHng,  appBinting,  raaiing,  esteeming,  sA»wing,  and 

Ihe  like,  iriay   lake   a    Predicate   Accusative  along  with   the  direct 
object  t§  239.  o). 

33.  Transitive  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions  sometimes  take  (in  addi- 

tion to  the  direct  object)  a  Secondary  Object,  originally  governed  by 
the  preposition  (|  239.  S). 

34.  Verbs  of  asMag  and  teacMrig  may  take  two  Accusative^  one  of  the  fer- 

sun,  and  the  other  of  the  tfiiiig  (g  239,  <). 

35.  The  subject  of  an  Inlinitive  is  in  the  Accusative  (f  173.  2). 

36.  Duratba  of  Hme  atid  Extent  of  Space  are  expressed  t^  tbe  Accmadve 

(S  240.  *)• 

37.  The  VoCATIVEiithecaaeof  direct  address  (j  241). 

38.  Words  signifying  sepafbtien  or  prioation  arc  followed  by  the  Ablahv^ 

with  or  without  a  preposition  {Ahlativi  cf  Separation,  %  243). 

39.  Opm  and  ftsns,  signifying  need,  are  followed  by  Ihe  Ablative  (§  243.  r). 

40.  The  ablative,  with  or  without  a  preposition,  is  used  to  denote  the  seure* 

frota  which  anything  Is  denved  ot  (Wi  mokriot  tiJ  ^VahMtcoa^sa 


Synlax:  Important  Rules. 


383 1 


a  preposition,  is  used   to   expre^   c 


w 


The  Ablative,  with  01 
(S  245). 

IHgniia  and  iudignns,  coatentns,  laetas,  praeditns,  etc.,  take  the  Abla- 
tive (5  245- «)■ 

The  Voluriary  Agent  after  a  passive  verb  is  put  in  the  Ablative  with 
ab  (§  246). 

The  Comparative  degree  is  followEd  by  the  Ablative  (signifyiug  Tli 

(S  Ml)- 

The  Comparative  may  be  followed  by  qttam,  Ihan.  When  qaam  is  used, 
the  two  things  compared  are  put  in  the  same  case  (g  247.  a). 

The  manner  of  an  action  b  denoted  by  the  Ablative,  usually  with  cum, 
unless  a  limiting  adjective  is  used  with  the  noun  (§  24S). 

AaompanimiiU  is  denoted  by  the  Ablative,  regularly  with  cum  (J 
24S.B). 

The  Ablative  is  used  to  denote  the  means  or  inSlrtuKent  of  an  aclioD  (| 

248.  <.  I). 

The  deponents,  (Ltor,  fhior,  fimgor,  potior,  and  veacoi-,  with 

of  their  compounds,  govern  Ihe  Ablative  (g  249), 
With  comparatives  and  words  Implying  comparison  the  Ablative  is  used 

lo  denote  the  degree  of  difference  (S  350). 
The  quality  of  a  thing  is  denoted  by  the  Ablative  with  a  moditieri  usually 

an  adjective  or  limiting  genilive  (§  251). 
The/ri«  of  a  thing  is  put  in  the  Ablative  (§  252), 
The  Ablative  of  SpeciGcation  denote*  that  in  respeet  lo  which  anything  u 

oxUdontt^  253). 
A  noun  or  prononn,  with  a  partidple,  may  be  put  in  the  Ablative,  to 

define  the  Ume  or  tircunutancet  of  an  action  {Ablative  Atsoluli). 

An  adjective,  or  a  second  noun,  may  take  (he  place  of  the  participle  la  Ihe 
ablative  absolute  cooatmctloa  ({  355  and  a). 
Time  when,  or  iniSiin  tuhicA,  is  put  in  the  Ablative;  time  hoai  laisg  in  the 

Accusative  (5  256). 
The  place /mw  wiich  ii  denoted  by  the  Ablative  with  ab,  d^  or  ex;  the 

flact  b  vAieh  (Ihe  end  of  motion),  by  Ihe  Accusative  with  ad  or  in 

(MsS.<). 

The  names  o[  towns  or  smalt  islands  ^nin  lotifA,  as  also  domoa  and  rOe^ 

are  put  In  Ihe  Ablative  without  a  preposition  (j  Es3,  a), 
Tba  names  of  towns  or  imalt  Islands 'i>u';iic4,  as  also  domus  and  rOs.arB 
pal  la  the  Accusathrc  without  a  prepoatlon  ({  353.  i). 
T^zphee  whrre  (s  denoted  by  the  Ablative  with  the  prepowtlon  In  {leca- 
livt  Atlaiive)\  but  names  of  towns  and  smaU  island*  are  put  In  the 
Locative  Case  (g  258.  e). 

The  Locative  Case  is  also  preserved  in  doiI)i,\MMIl,Ti£^MtAiB.\»:idiv 
totia,  rtlrl,  terra  trtarlqiia  U  258.  ^ 


■ 
I 


I 


384  SjinCax:  Important  Rules. 

58.  The  Infinitive,  with  01  wilhout  a  subject  accusative,  may  be  used  with  al 

and  similnr  verbs  (1)  as  Ihe  atbjecl,  (2)  as  in  apposition  with  the  snb- 
jecl,  or  (3)  aa  a.pridicale  neminative  (g  270). 

59.  Tbo  Infinitive,  withoat  a  subject  accusative,  is  used  with  verbs  wliich  imp!)' 

another  action  of  the  same  subject  to  complete  their  meaning  {Comple- 
mentary Infiiiitivi,  I  271). 

60.  The  Infinitive,  with  subject  accusative,  is  used  with  verbs  and  other  expres- 

sions of  knowing,  Ihitiking,  htling,  and  perceiving  [^Indirect  Disciurse, 
see  S  272). 

61 .  llie  Infinitive  is  ofien  used  in  narrative  for  the  Imperfect  Indicative,  and 

takes  a  subject  in  the  Nominative  (Jiistoricat  Infinitive,  §  275). 

62.  Sequence  of  Tenses.     In  con'.pleic  sentences,  a  primary  tense  in  the 

main  clause  is  followed  by  the  Present  or  Perfect  Subjunctive;  a  leain- 
dary  tense  by  the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  (g  aS5). 

63.  The  tenses  of  Iha  Infinitive  denote  time  as  present,  past,  or  future  with 

respect  lo  the  lime  of  the  verb  on  which  they  depend  (g  288). 

64.  Paktictples  denote  time  ts  present,  past,  qt  future  y/\lh  respect  lo  Ihe 

lime  of  the  verb  in  their  clause  (g  290). 

65.  The  Gekuno  and  the  Gerundive  aie  used,  in  the  oblique  cases,  in  many 

of  the  constructions  of  nouns  {§  297). 
For  particulars  see  {{  298-301. 

66.  The  Former  Supine  (in  -nin)  is  used  after  verbs  of  maiion  to  express 

Purpose  (§  302). 

67.  The  Lalter  Sui'lNE  (in  -fi)  is  used  only  with  a.  few  adjectives,  with  the 

nouns  faa,  nefas,  and  opns,  and  laiely  wilh  v'erbs,  to  denote  an  aclion 
in  reference  ta  ■which  the  quality  is  asserted  (§  303). 
6S.  The  Horlatoty  Subjunctive  is  used  to  express  an  exhortation,  a  tern- 
mand,  a  ceneession,  or  a  condilisn  (g  266). 

69.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  to  express  a  wisk.    The  present  tense  denotes  [he 

wish  as  possible,  the  imperfect  as  unaeamplisked  in  present  lime,  the 
pluperfect  as  unatcmnplished in  past  time  {Optative  SMijunciiiie,  %  267). 

70.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  questions  implying  dvutt,  indiptaiian,  or 

an  imposnbility  of  the  thing  being  done  {DeUberalive  SubjuneHve, 
5268). 

71.  Prohibition  b  regularly  expressed  in  classic  prose  (0  ''y  ^  ^^'i  ^^ 

second  person  of  the  Perfect  Subjunctive,  (2)  by  uSli  with  the  Inlini- 
live,  (3)  by  cave  with  the  Present  or  Perfect  Subjunctive  (g  269.  a). 

72.  The  Potential  Subjunctive  is  used  to  denote  an  action  not  as  aclually  per- 

formed,  but  as /WliJJIf  (§  311.  a), 

73.  Data,  modo,  dominodo,  and  tantnin,  introducing  a  Proviso,  take  the 

Subjunctive  (5  314). 
/f   PfNAL  clauses  take  the  Suhjiinctwe  introduced  by  nt  fnU),  negative  u 

Cat  na),  or  by  a  Relative  tpioTvowo  or  sAfwW^  ^.\  '^n'^v^^^^^ 


Syntax:   Important  Rules 


38s , 


,   Consecutive  ctanses  take  the  Subjunctive  inCioduced  by  at,  so  thai  (neg'  4 
alive,  lit  nCn),  or  by  a  Relative  (pronoun  or  adverb)  (§  3(9). 

I.  IKgnm,  md!gniiH,  aptuB,  and  iddnena,  lake  a  clause  of  result  with  a  | 
relative  (rarely  with  nt)  (g  320./). 

.  The  Causal   Particles  quod,  quia,  and   qaouiam  take  the  Indicalive   | 
when  the  reason  is  given  on  the  authority  of  the  speaker  or  v, 
the  Subjunctive  when  the  reason  is  given  on  the  authority  of  ana/Her 

(5  3"i)- 

1.    Cnin  TEMPORAL,  meaning  xuhen,  lakes  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect 
Subjunctive,  other  tenses  in  the  Indicative  (§  325). 
^   Ctun  CAUSAL  or  concessive  Ukes  the  Subjunctive  (g  326). 

For  other  conces^ve  particles,  see  }  313. 
:^   In  the  Indirect  Discourse  the  main  elause  of  a  Declaratory  Sentence  is 
put  in  the  Infinitive  with  Subject  Accusative.    All  subordinate  clauses 
take  the  Subjunctive  (g  336,  2), 
.   In  the  Indirect  Discourse  a  real  qaesliBit  Is  generally  pat  in  the  Subjunc- 
tive; a  rhelorical  question  in  the  Infinitive  (g  33S). 
iS2.   All  Imperative  forms  of  speech  take  the  Subjunctive  in  Indirect  Dis-   | 
ot,™  0  339). 

.   A  Subordinate  clause  Ukes  the  Subjunctive  when  it  expresses  the  Ihaught  I 
of  tome  other  person  than  the  writer  or  speaker  {Jnformal  Indire, 
Discourse,  §  34i}> 
'S4.   A  clause  depending  on  a  Suhiunclive  clause  or  an  equivalent  Infinltlva   1 
will  itself  take  the.  Subjunctive  if  regarded  as  an  inligral  part  of  that    I 
clause  (AUraition,  \  34*). 

For  Prepositions  and  fhelr  cases,  see  §§  15a,  153, 
For  Conditional  Sentences,  see  g  304.  ff.     (Scheme  in  §  305.) 
For  ways  of  expressing  Pubfose,  see  §  31S. 


I 


Sj'fitax:   Order  of  Worth.  [§§  3« 


Chapter  VI. —  Order  of  Words. 


impartancE  of  (he  ideas  in 

343,  As  in  other  languages,  the  Subject  tends  to  stand 
first,  the  Predicate  last.     Thus,  — 

PanBaniaa  l^cedaeraonius  magnos  homo  sed  varius  in  omm  genere  vitae 
fliit. 

Note. — This  happens  because  from  the  speaker's  ordinary  point  of  vie*  the 
subject  of  his  discourse  is  the  most  important  (hing  in  it.  as  singled  out  from  all 
olher  things  to  be  spoken  o£ 

There  is  in  I-atin,  however,  a  special  tendency  to  place 
the  verb  itself  last  of  all  after  all  its  modifiers.  But  many 
writers  purposely  avoid  the  monotony  of  this  arrangement 
by  putting  the  verb  last  but  one,  followed  by  some  single 
word  of  the  predicate. 

344.  In  connected  discourse  the  word  most  prominent  in 
the  speaker's  mind  comes  first,  and  so  on  In  order  of 
prominence. 

This  relative  prominence  corresponds  to  that  indicated 
in  English  by  a  graduated  stress  of  voice  (usually  called 
emphasis). 

Note. — This  stress  or  emphasis,  however,  in  English  does  not  necessarilyshow 
any  vlolenl  contrast  to  the  rest  of  the  words  in  the  sentence,  but  is  infinitely  varied, 
constantly  increasing  and  diminishing,  and  often  so  subde  as  lo  be  unnoticed  excepi 
in  careful  study.  So,  as  a  general  rule,  the  precedence  of  words  in  n  Latin  sentence 
is  not  mechanical,  but  corresponds  lo  the  prominence  which  a  good  spfraVer  would 
mark  by  skilfully  managed  stress  of  voice.  A  Latin  Twillen  sentonce,  (herefbre,  has 
all  the  clearness  snd  expression  which  could  be  given  to  n  ifoitn  discouise  by  the 
best  aclor  In  English, 

Rrmark.— Some  eieepfions  to  this  rule  «in  be  treated  later. 

Thus  the  first  chapter  of  Cksm'i  GaUv;  War  rendered  so  as  to  bring 
out  so  fir  as  possible  the  shades  ot  em^>Ms\5,'SQ'Ai-TO'o.  *»?.-.—     ^^ 


1 344.]  EmplMsis.  l%f 


H|34- 

^1       GAUL,'  in  Ihe  widest  sense,  is  di-  Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  paitii 

^K  vided'  into  tLree /ar^,"  which  are  tres,  quarum  iinam  iiicoiunt   Belgae, 

f  tMAabiliJ*  (as  follows)  ;  one  '■  by  the  aliam  Aqaitani,  terliam  qui  ipEonim 

Belgians,  another'  hy  the  Aqaitani,  lingua  Celtae,  nostra  Galii  appellan- 

Uie  third  by  a  people  called  in  ihtir  lur.    Hi  omnes  lingua,  insiiiulis,  leglr  J 

bwh'  language  Celts,  in  ours  Gauls.  bus   inter   se    differunl.       Gallos    i" 

These,^  in  their  laiigaage,^  institu-  Aquitanis  Gacumna  flumen,  a  Belgis  fl 

tiona,  and  lawi  are  a// of  them'"  dif-  Matrona  et  Sequana  dividit.    Horum  ■ 

ferent     The  GAULS"  (proper)  are  omni\im  fortissimi  sunt  Belgse,  prop.  1 

separated'^  from  the  Aquitaoi  by  terei  quod  a  cullil  atque  bunianitit«  I 
the  liver  Goranne,  Grom  the  BelgiaoH 

by  ihe  Marne  and  Seine.    Of  these'"  (tribes)  the  bravest  of  all"  are  the  \ 

f  Bel^ans,  for  the  reason  that  they  live  ^theat'^  away  from  the  c 

'  GAUL:  emphatic  a! 

1  Divided;  apposed  to  the  tajse  conceplion  (implied  in  the  use  of  omujs)  that  I 
country  called  Gallia  by  the  Romans  is  one.  TTiis  appeal 
fact  that  Csesar  later  speaks  of  the  Galji  in  (he  narrower  se 
other  two  tribes,  who  with  Ihem  inhabit  Gallia  In  the  wider 
'  Parts:  continuing  the  emphasis  begun  in  lilvlsa.  Not  W 
I  to  any  other  number,  but  \Mo  parts  at  all. 

*  Inhaiited:  emphatic  as  the  nejrtEubject,"7Hf)Hifl*(i'3/i/ioflhesepartsare,ete." 
0  One :  given  more  prominence  than  it  otherwise  would  have  on  account  of  its 
I    close  conaeclion  with  gu&rum. 

>  Anolber,  etc :  opposed  to  ii«i._  I 

'  Zt/ir-ffom,  dHTj."  strongly  opposed  <o  each  other.  I 

«  These  (tribes)  :  the  main  sabject  of  discourse  again,  collecting  under  one  head  ■ 
:  names  previously  mentioned.  ^ 

»  IiansruaiSG,  etc. :  these  are  the  most  prominent  Ideas  as  giving  the  striding 
I  points  whitJi  distinguish  the  tribes.  The  emphasis  becomes  natural  in  English  il 
I  we  say  "  these  have  a  different  language,  different  institutiiini,  different  taws." 

»  Alt  of  Ihem :  the  emphasis  on  all  marks  the  distributive  character  of  the 
I  Adjetftive,  as  if  it  were  "  every  one  has  its  own,  etc." 

■1  GAULS:  emphatic  as  referring  to  Ihe  Gauls  proper  in  distinctloQ  from  the 
I  Other  tribes. 

'*  Separated:  though  this  word  contains  an  indispensable  idea  in  the  connection, 
I  yet  il  has  a  subordinate  position.    II  is  not  emphatic  in  Latin,  ss  is  seen  ^omlhe&ct 
ffl»t  it  cannot  be  made  emphatic  in  English.    Thesenseis:  The  Gauit  lie  between  J 
P  Qie  Apiilani  on  the  one  side,  and  the  Be/ga  on  the  other.  ■ 

M  Of  THESE:  the  subject  of  discourse.  I 

M  AU:  emphasizing  the  superlativeideain bravest;  thcy,asGauls,areassumed   H 
lolM  warlike,  but  the  most  so  of  all  of  Ihem  are  the  Bedpans. 

"  Farthest  aa^;  one  might  expect  abauot  (are  away)  to  have  a  more  em- 
phatic place.bat  h  is  dwarfed  in  importance  by  the  predominance  of  the  main 
idea,  the  effeminat'sng  iijlutiicts  from  which  tliE  Belgas  are  said  lo  be  free.  It  is 
not  thai  they  live  farthest  off  that  is  insisted  on,  but  that  the  civilaatios  of  the 
/rai-iJKj,  etc.,  which  would  so/iiit  them,  comes  less  in  their  way.  Il  is  to  be  noticed 
also  that  abeust  has  already  been  anticipated  by  the  construction  of  OiUttl  and 
»tin  more  by  longisBlme,  so  that  when  il  eomes  it  amounts  only  to  a  formal  part 
of  the  sentence.  Thiis  because  the  (™';U(rfi«l,etc,,rf  ttie  ■StOT™*V^'Wi'3& ■^'siii- 
t^en  tbem)  is fir/iesi  from  '  '~ 


r 

I 


Syntax:   Order  of  Words. 


[§344. 


le  absuni,  n 


of  the  Prov- 
ince, and  because  they  are  least 
of  all  of  them  subject  to  the  visila  i 
fr«fltrj,"and  to  the  (consequent)  in 
portalion  of  attot  thinga  as''  tend  I 
soften  "  Iheir  warlike  spirit;  and  ai 
also  naarost*'  lo  the  Germans,  wi 
live  acroi!  the  A'iiHf,^^  and  with 
whom  they  are  incesiaiifly^ 
For  the  same  reason  the  Hglvetii, 
as  well,  arc  superior  to  all  the  olier 
Gauls  in  valor,  hecause  they  are  en- 
gaged in  almosl  daily  battles  with  the 
Germans,  either  defending  their  own 
boundaries  from  titta,  or  theinselveB 
making  war  on  those  of  ike  Gera 
Of  ALL  TKis  country,  one  part,  the 
one  which  as  has  been  saiii  the  Gaul! 
(proper)  occupy,  begins  at  the  rive 
Rhone.  Its  honndarieB  are  the  rive. 
Garonne,  the  ocean,  and  the  eonfint! 
of  the  Belgions.  It  even  reaches  on 
the  side  of  the  Sequant  and  Helve- 
(iani  the  river  Rhine.  Its  general 
dirietion  is  towards  the  north.  The 
Belgians  begin  at  the  extreme  Um- 
(i^ofGaul;  they  Teach  (on  this  side) 
as  far  as  the  lower  part  of  the  Rhine. 
They  spread  lo  (he  norlhwarii  and  eastward. 

Aqihtania  extends  from  the  GaroDue  to  the  Pyrenees,  and  that 
part  of  the  ocean  that  liea  towards  Spain.  It  raui  off  westward  and 
northward. 


provinciae  longissii 
que  ad  eos  mercatores  saepe   corn- 
meant  atque  ca  quae  ad  elfiminandos 
animos  pertinent,  important,  proximi- 
que  sunt  Germanis,  qai  trans  Rhcnnm 
incolunt,  quibuscutn  continenter  hel- 
ium gerunC,    Qua  di  causa  Helvelii 
quoque  reliquos  Gallos  vlrtilte  praece- 
nt,   quod    fere    cotidianis    proeliis 
m  Germanis  contendunt,  cum  lul 
is  finibus  era  prohibent,  aut  ipsi  in 
rum  finibus  helium  gerunt.    Konun 
a  pars,  quara  Gallos  obtinere  die- 
■n  est,  initium  capit  a  fliirainc  Rho- 
dano;  continentiir  Gammna  Riimine, 
Oceano,  finibus  Belgorum;    attingit 
n  ab  Sequanis  et  Helvetiis  flumen 
Rhenum;     vcrgit    ad    seplenlrioncs. 
Belgae   ab   extremis  Galliae  finibus 
oriuntur:  pertinent  ad  inferiorem  pat- 
tern liiiminis  Rheni;  spectant  in  Sep- 
tentrionem  et  orientem  sotem.   Aqui- 
lania  a   Gammna  fliimine   ad    Pyre- 
naeos  montes  et  earn  partem  Oceini, 
quae    est   ad    Hispaniam,  perlinet; 
spectat  inter  occasom  soils  et  septen- 


<n  Latin  order, — the  tkiaimia  (see 
mas  opposed  lo  culttl  and  hfl. 


M  Least:  made  emphatic  here  by  a  cm 
/p-390). 

W  traders:  the  fourlh  member  of  the  1 
mftnlt&te. 

IB  Such  thiSKS  ftS:  the  impoitsnce  of  Ihe  nature  of  the  importations 
overshadows    the    fact    that    [hey    are    imporltd.    which    lact    li    anticipaled   in 

U  Hofltn:  cf.  what  is  said  in  note  15,  They  are  hrasit  because  they  have 
less  to  aoftm  them,  their  nafivo  barbarily  laeing  sssamed. 

*  Nearest  i  the  same  idiomalie  prominence  as  In  16,  bul  Varied  by  a  ipe- 
cia]  usage  (see  f,  p.  390)  combining  thiasmus  and  anapkera, 

1  Across  the  Rhine ;  I.e.  and  so  are  perfect  savages. 

■  licessanify:  the  continuance  of  the  watfere  becomes  the  all-impanant 
Idea,  as   if  it  were,  "»nd  not  ft  4b3  -^um^  \tt  ••\iVii  \'t«i  am  t  - 


special  Rules  of  Order.  389 

Remark.  —  The    more   important   word   is   never    placed   last   for 

lemphasis.     The  apparent  cases  of  this  usage  (when  the  emphasis  U 

I'ed)  are  cases  where  a  word  is  added  as  an  afterthought, 

■  cither  real  or  aiTecteiJ,  and  so  has  its  position  not  in  the  sentence  to 

■  which  it  is  appended,  but,  as  it  were,  in  a  new  one. 
.  In  any  phrase  the  determining  and  most  significant  word  coraet 


.  Adjective  and  Noun :  — 

;cet,  EVERY  man  ought  (opposed  to  aome  who  do  not). 
IS  Catilina  nobili  genere  natus  fuit  migni  vi  et  animi  et  corporis  sed 
ingenio  roaJo  piavoque  (Sail.  Cat.  5),  Lucius  Catiline  viai  born  of  a 
E  family,  viilh  great  force  of  mind  and  body,  but  with  a  katube 
ttta!  -was  evil  and  depraved.   [Here  the  adjectives  in  the  first  part  are  the 
emphatic  and  important  words,  no  antithesis  between  the  nouns  being  as 
yet  thought  of;  but  in  the  second  branch  the  noun  is  meant  to  be  opposed 
to  those  before  mendoned,  and  immediately  takes  the  prominent  place, 
n  by  the  natural  English  emphasis,  thus  making  a  ckicamus^ 
.  Word  with  modifying 
cui  tei  magis  Epaminondam,  ThebonSmm  imperatorem,  quxm  vlctSriaa 
Thebanorum  consulere  dccuit  (Inv.  i.  38),  ivhal  should  Epaminondas, 
.,  toiamandir  of  the  Thebans,  have  aimed  at  more  than  the  VICl^OKY  a/ 

L  the  Thebans  f  ' 

■  lacriioa  nihil  citius  arescit  (id.  i.  56),  nothing  dries  piicier  than  a  tear. 

P         nemo  fere  landia  cupidus  (De  Or.  i.  4),  hardly  any  one  desirous  of  CLORir' 
'  (cf.  MaoiL  3,  avidi  laudis,  eager  for  glory). 

6,  Numeral  adjectives,  adjectives  of  quantity,  demonstrative,  relative, 
and  interrogative  pronouns  and  adverbs,  tend  to  precede  the  word  w 
words  to  which  they  belong :  as,  — 

tcum  aliqua  perturbitione  (Olf.  i.  3S),  ivith  some  disiuriance. 
hoc  ijno  praesfamus  (De  Or.  i.  8),  in  this  one  thing  wi  excel. 
ceterae  fere  acles,  tie  other  arts. 

Note.— This  happens  because  such  words  are  usually  emphalio; 
words  connecled  with  Ihem  are  more  so, and  in  such  cases  the  prono 
the  emphatic  place :  as, — 

caiua  aliqua  (De  Or.  i.  5S),  some  case. 

Iatilna  die  tnus  (id.  i.  60),  that  STYLE  of  yours  (in  an  andthesis;   see  pu>  j 
sage). 
Romam  quae  asportita  sunt  (Verr.  iv.  54),  ooio/  were  carried  to  RoME  (in 
contrast  lo  what  remained  at  Syracuse). 
c.  When  anin  is  used  as  the  Substantive  verb  (§  i?^,  note),  it  regu- 
larly stands  first,  or  at  any  rate  before  its  subject :  as,  — 
est  viri  magni  piinire  sontes  (Off. ).  14),  tV  is  Ikt  duly  of  a  grtut  n 
/iimisAtAe  guilty. 


I 


r 


390  Syntax :  Order  of  Words.  [%  i 

d.  The  verb  iray  come  first,  or  have  a  prominent  position  eitlitr 
(1)  because  the  idea  in  it  is  emphatic:  as,— 

dieabat  idem  Cottn  (Off.  ii.  17),  Coiia  und  to&Kf  lie  same  iiing  (ofpiiKi 

to  others'  boasting) , 
idem  fecit  sduliscens  M.  AntQniu9  (id.  ii.  14),  the  saint  thing  ivas  liosi 

by  M.  Antonias  in  his  youth.     [Opposed  to  dixi  just  before.] 
facia  henigni  (Lsl.),  you  act  iindly.     [Ci.  ben^[ae  iaoia,  yau  art  very 

KIND  (yoa  act  KINDLY}.] 

(fi)  or  because  ih^  predication  of  the -uihole  sttttemtHt  \a  emphatic:  as, 

propensioT  benlgnUas  esse  debehit  in  calamitos^  ni^  forte  emnt  digni 

calainitate  (Off.  Ji.  18),  unless  perchance  they  REALLY  DESEKVK  tkiir 

praeierlira  cum  Bcrihat  (Panaelius)  (id.  iii.  2),  especially  is/ien  hi  does 
SAY  (in  his  books).     [Opposed  to  something  omitted  by  hun.] 

(3)  or  tlie  tense  only  may  be  emphatic;  as, — 

flumuH  Troes,  faitTlium  (J?a.n.'i2^,'we  have  ceased  te  be  Trojans,  Tray 
loquor  autem  de  communibus  amicittis  (Off.  iii.  10),  hut  I  am  speaking 

e.  Often  the  connection  of  two  emphatic  phrases  is  brought  about 
by  giving  tlie  precedence  to  the  most  prominent  part  of  =ach  and  leav- 
ing the  less  prominent  parts  to  Ibllovi'  in  inconspicuous  places :  as,  — 

plurea  soletit  esse  causae  (Off.  i.  9),  there  are  usually  several  reasons. 
quos  amisimus  civis  cos  Miirlis  vis  peiculil  (Maic  6J,  what  /eUata-citiiens 
■we  have  lost,  have  been  slriciia  dawn  by  the  violence  efioar. 

'bi   omnea  gratias  agimus  (Marc.    11),  aw  ALL  render  you  the 

hacc  res  iimus  est  propria  Caesaris  (Ware.  4),  this  exploit  itlangi  to  Casar 

obiurg^tionis  etiam  ndnnunqua 


f.  Antithesis  between  two  pairs  of  ideas  is  indicated  either  (1)  by 
placing  the  pairs  in  the  same  order  {atiaphord)  or  (2)  in  exactly  the 
opposite  order  (c/iiasmus^). 
(0  rernra  copia  verbonim  copiam  gignit  (De  Or.  iii.  3.  3 1),  abundance  0/ 

MATTEH  produces  Ci:iPIOI!SNESS  o/" EXPRESSION. 

(a)  leges  supplido  improbos  afficiiint,  defendunt  ac  tuenlur  bonos  ( Fin.  iii-  5)1 

/.(C /nWJ  VISIT  PUNISHMENTS  B/OB  rft  WICKED,  4B/i*/ GOOD  l-*y  UEFEND 


.  344.]  Special  Rules  of  Order. 


Note.  — Chiasmus  is  very  common  in  Lali 
taatllficial  consiniciion.  In  an  artless  narrative  on 
«I1  drituMtd,  ihey  laiiid  the  men," 

non  igitiir  utilitatem  amicitia  sed  utilitas  amlcitiaiii  consecuta  eat  (Liel.  14), 
ilii  not  then  that  fritndskip  has  fsllmutd upon  advantage,  but  advan- 
lage  ttpcn  frifndship.  [Here  the  chiasmus  is  only  grammatical,  the 
ideas  being  in  the  parallel  order.]  (See  also  in  (he  example  from 
Cxsar,  p.  3SS ;  longiBsiml,  mini  me,  proxiai.) 
g.  A  modifier  of  a  phrase  or  some  part  of  it  is  often  embodied  within 
he  phrase  (cf.  a)  :  as,— 

de  communi  hominum  7iicmoria  (Tusc.  i,  24),  in  regard  !s  the  UNlVEBaAL 

mimory  of  man. 
h.  A  favorite  order  with  the  poets  is  ^^interlocked,  by  which  the  attri* 
liuteof  one  pair  comes  between  the  parts  of  the  other  {synchykis):  as,— 
et  supeiiecto  pavidac  nataiunt  aequore  damne  (Hoi.  Od.  i.  z.  1 1). 
Note. — This  is  often  joined  with  chiasmus :  as, — 
anna  nondum  expialis  uncta  cruoribus  (Id.  ii.  i.  j;). 
(',  Frequently    unimportant    words    follow  in    the  train    of  more 
emphatic  ones  with  which  they  are  grammatically  connected,  and  so 
acquire  a  prominence  out  of  proportion  to  their  importance ;  as,  — 
dictitabat  se  horlulos  aliquos  emcre  velle  (Off.  iii.  14,  5S),  gave  out  that  kt 
wanted  lo  buy  some  garden!.     [Hete  aliqnoa  is  less  emphatic  than 
emere,  but  precedes  it  on  account  of  the  emphasis  on  hortnlos.] 
J.  The  copula  is  generally  felt  to  be  of  so  little  importance  that  It 
may  come  in  anywhere  where  it  sounds  well ;  but  usually  under  cova 
if  more  emphatic  words:  as, — 
cotisul  ego  quaesivi,  cum  vos  mihi  essetis  in  consiho  (R.  P.  iii.  iS,  2S), 
comal  I  held  an  invesligatien  in  lehickyeu  attended  me  in  eouncil. 
falaum  est  id  totuni  (id.  H,  15,  28),  that  is  all  fake, 
k.  Many  expressions  have  acquired  an  invariable  order:  as,— 
res  publica;   populus  Romanus;  honoris  causa;   pace  tanti  viri. 
Note. — These  had,  no  doubt,  originally  an  emphasis  which  required  such 
arrangement,  but  in  the  course  of  lime  have  changed  their  shade  of 
Thus,  aenfttuB  populusque   BSmftaua  originally  slated  widi  emj: 
■official  bodies,  but  became  fixed  so  as  to  be  the  only  permissible  form  of  expressi 

/.  The  Romans  had  a  fondness  for  emphasizing  persons, 
name  or  a  pronoun  often  stands  in  an  emphatic  place !  as,— 

[<U)dt}  venalis  quidcm  ae  hortos  non  habere  (Off.  iii.  14,  5S),  [said]  &at\t 
£dn't  have  any  gardens  far  sate,  to  it  sure.     [A  representation  of  the 
direct,  I  have  no  gardens,  etc.] 
m.  At  the  end  of  a  sentence  the  Romans  arranged  the  wotrds  so 
to  give  an  agreeable  succession  of  long  atid  sWrt  ^-jWiHwii. 


^ 


I 

the 

.. 

the^H 


] 


392  Syntax-:   Order  of  Words.  {%% 

Special  Rnlsa. 
345.   The  following  are  special  rules  of  arrangement 

a.  r.  Prepositions  (except  teniu   and   Tersua)    regularly  precei 
their  noUQS ;  2.  but  a  monosyllabic  preposition  is  often  placed  between 
a  noun  and  its  adjective  or  limiting  genitive :  as,  — 

([ucm  ad  madum;    quarn  ob  rem;  magno  cum  roetu;    omnibus  cum  copiis; 
.1511:1  in  r5  (cf.  §  344-  0- 

b.  Itaque  regularly  comes  first  in  its  sentence  or  clause ;  enim, 
autem,  v6r5,  quoque,  never  first,  but  usually  second,  sometimes  third 
if  the  second  word  is  emphatic ;  quldem  never  first,  but  after  the 
emphatic  word ;  nfi  ■  .  .  quidem  include  the  emphatic  word  or  words. 

c.  Inqnam,  iuquit,  are  always  u^ed  parenthetically,  following  one  or 
more  words.    So  often  orCdo,  opinor,  and  in  poetry  sometimes  precor. 

'  d.  The  negative  precedes  the  word  It  especially  affects ;  but  if  It  be- 
longs to  no  one  word  in  particular,  h  generally  precedes  the  verb;  if  it  b 
especially  emphatic,  it  begins  the  sentence.    (See  example,  344./,  note.) 
e.  In  the  arrangement  ofdauses,  the  Relative  clause  more  often  comes 
first  in  Latin,  and  usually  contains  the  antecedent  noun :  as,  — 

quoB  amislmus  cjviH,  eos  Martis  via  percalil  (Marc.  6),  those  cilisens  ivhsm 
■me  have  lost,  etc 

Straotiue  of  tlie  Period. 

Note. — I^lln,  unlike  modem  languages,  expresses  the  relation  of  words  to 
each  other  by  infiecthn  rather  Ihati  by  fmition.  Hence  its  atruclure  not  only 
admits  of  gieat  variety  in  Iho  arrangement  of  words,  but  is  especially  favorable  10 
that  form  of  sentence  which  is  called  a  Period,  In  a  period,  the  sense  ia  eiipreascd 
by  the  sentence  as  a  w4o/«,and  is  held  in  suspense  IlU  the  deliveiy  of  the  last  word. 

An  English  sentence  does  not  often  exhibit  this  form  of  structure.  It  was  imi- 
tated, sometimes  with  great  skill  and  beauty,  by  many  of  the  earlier  writers  of  English 
prose;  but  its  etiecl  is  belter  seen  in  poetry,  in  such  a  passage  as  the  following; — 


But  in  argument  or  narrative,  the  best  English  writers  more  commonly  give 
short  clear  sentences,  each  distinct  from  the  rest,  and  saying  one  thing  by  Itselt 
In  Latin,  on  the  contrary,  the  story  or  argument  Is  viewed  as  a  whole;  and  the 
logical  relation  among  all  Its  parts  Is  carefully  Indicated.    Hence— 

340.    In  the  structure  of  the  Period,  the  following  rules 

are  to  be  observed:  — 
a.  In  genera]  the  main  suV^ecl  ot  oViiert  \a  -^V  la  the  niaia  cbuse, 
not  in  a  subordinate  one  (accordvtvg  lo% -i^Vl'-  »»,—        ,^^^^^1 


If  346.] 


Structure:  the  Period. 


Hannibal  cum  lecensuiaset  auxDia  Gu1i«  prafEctuB  est,  itihtit  Hannihal\ 
had  rtvieaieJ,  etc. 

VotscI  exiguun  spem  in  armis,  alia  undique  abscissa,  cum  tentassent,  prae< 
let  cetera  adversa,  loco  quoijue  iniquo  ad  pugnam  congressi,  iniquiore 
ad  fugam,  cum  ab  omnI  parte  caederentui,  ad  prec&  a  certamine  veisi 
dedilo  impecitore  traditisque  armis,  sub  iugum  miasi,  cum  singulis  vesli- 
mentis,  ignominiae  dadisque  pleni  dimittunluc  (Liv,  iv.  lo).  [Heie 
the  main  fact  is  lAc  return  efihe  I'olsdans.  But  tLe  striking  circum- 
stances of  the  surreniler,  etc.,  which  in  English  would  be  detailed  in  a 
number  of  brief  Independent  sentences,  ate  put  la  the  several  subardi- 
nale  clauses  within  ihe  main  cla,uae,  so  that  Ihe  passage  gives  a  com- 
plete  picture  in  one  sentence.] 

b.  Clauses  are  usually  arranged  in  the  order  of  praminence  la  the 
rinind  of  the  speaker;  so,  usually,  cause  before  result;  purpose,  itiatt- 

tier,  and  the  like,  before  the  act. 

c.  In  co-ordinate  clauses,  the  copulative  conjunctions  are  frequentljr 
omitted  (asyndetsn).  In  such  cases  the  connection  is  made  clear  by 
some  antithesis  indicated  by  the  position  if  words, 

tl,  A  change  of  subject,  when  required,  is  marked  by  the  introduc- 
tion of  a  pronoun,  if  the  new  subject  has  already  been  mentioned.  But 
such  change  is  often  purposely  avoided  by  a  change  in  structure,  —  the 
less  important  being  merged  in  the  more  important  by  the  aid  of  parti- 
dpies  or  of  subordinate  phrases :  as,  — 

quem  ut  barbaii  inccndium  eflugisse  viderunt,  telis  eminus  emissis  into 
fecerunt,  Jiiheit  ihe  lariariam  saw  dial  ht  had  escaped,  THKV  threw 
darts  at  KIM  and  iiUed  am. 

celeiiter  confecto  negotio,  in  hiberna  legiones  icvetlirant,  tie  matter  woi 
seenfiniAed.,  and  &e  legions,  etc. 

e.  So  the  repetition  of  a  noun,  or  the  substitution  of  a  pronoun  for 
|(it.  Is  avoided  unless  a  different  case  is  required :  as,  — 

dolotetn  si  non  potero  frangete  occult abo,  if  T  cannot  conquer  6u  pain,  I 
viillhidevr.     [Cf.  if  f  eannol  conquer  !  will  hide  Ihe  Jiain.} 


393^1 

nniiat:  ^^^H 

prae-  ^^H 
iauiore  ' 


I 
I 


PART  THIRD. - 


PROSODY 

VERSE). 


(RULES 


Chapter  I. —  Quantilv. 


I 


Note. — Thepoetty  of  the  Indo-European  people  seems  originally  to  have 
been  somewhal  like  our  own,  depending  on  accent  for  its  melie  and  discegarding 
tlic  natural  quantity  of  syllables.  Tlie  Greeks,  however,  developed  a  form  of  poetry 
which,  like  music,  pap  close  altention  to  the  natural  quantity  of  syllables ;  and  the 
Romans  borrowed  their  metrical  tbnns  in  classical  times  from  the  Greeks.  Hence 
Latin  poetry  does  not  depend,  like  ours,  upon  accent  and  rhyme ;  but  is  measured, 
like  musical  strains,  by  the  length  of  syllables.  Especially  does  It  difler  from  our 
veise  in  not  regarding  the  prose  accent  of  the  words,  but  subslitudng  Tor  that  an 
entirely  different  system  of  metrical  accent  or  JcAa  (see  {358.11).  This  depends  upon 
the  character  of  die  measure  used,  foiling  regularly  on  certain  long  syllables.  Eacli 
syllable  is  counted  as  either  longer  short  in  Quantity;!  anda  longsyllable  is  gen- 
erally reckoned  equal  in  length  to  two  short  ones  (tor  exceptions,  see  \  355.  c-t). 

The  quantity  of  radical  or  stem-syllables — as  of  short  a  in  lAtOr  or  of  long 
a  in  m&ter  —  can  be  learned  only  by  observation  and  practice,  unless  detenniued 
by  the  general  rules  of  quantity.  Most  of  the  rules  of  Prosody  are  only  arbitrary 
rules  devised  to  assist  the  memory;  the  syllables  being  long  or  short  iecaustihi 
imcimis pronounced  fhem  so.  The  actual  practice  of  the  Romans  in  regard  to  the 
quantity  of  syllables  is  ascertained  chiefly  bam  the  usage  of  Ihe  poets;  but  the 
andent  grammarians  give  some  assistance,  and  in  some  inscriptions  the  lorg 
rowels  are  distinguished  in  various  ways, — by  marks  over  the  tetters,  for  ioatance, 
or  by  doubling. 

Since  Roman  poets  borrowed  very  largely  from  Ihe  poetry  and  mytholt^  of 
the  Greeks,  numerous  Greek  words,  especially  proper  names,  make  an  important 
part  of  Latin  poetry.  These  words  are  generally  employed  in  accordance  widi  the 
Greek,  and  not  the  Latin,  laws  of  quantity.  Where  these  laws  vary  in  e 
11  be  noticed  in  the  rules  below. 


1.    Oeneral  Rules. 

347.  The  following  are  General  Rules  of  Quantity  (cf. 
§  IS):- 

a.  Vowel.  A  vowel  before  another  vowel  or  h  is  short:  as,  Tia, 
trShS. 


I  347.1 


General  Rules  of  Quantity. 


395  1 


I 


Exceptions,     i.  Th  the  genitive  form  -iua,  I  is  long,  except  usually  I 
b  alterius.    Thus,  utrlus,  afllHua.    It  is,  however,  sometimes  made  J 
bhort  in  verse  (§  S3,  b). 

.  Id  the genitiveand  dative  singular  of  the  fifth  declension,  e  is  long  .1 
jetneen  two  vowels  :  as,  diei;  but  it  is  short  in  fidfil,  rfii,  spfit 

Note.  — It  WHS  once  long  in  these  also:  as,  plSnus  fldH  {Ennius,  at  c 
I'&exameler). 

Lisalsolong  before  lin  the  old  genitive  of  thefirst  declension  :as,BtilU.  ^ 
.  In  the  conjugation  of  KB,  1  is  long  except  when  followed  by  e: 
1^,  fI5,  fifibatn,  flam,  but  fieri,  fletem ;  so  also  flt,  by  g  354.  a.  3. 
..  In  many  Greelt  words  the  vowel  in  Latin  represents  a  long  vowel 
w  diphthong,  and  retains  its  original  long  quantity ;  as,  Troes  (Tpiots), 
llTbalia  (0aXeot),  hBroae  (j/paias),  ftSr  (aijp). 

ei:k  u'Ord'i  a.re  more  or  less  Latjaized  in  this  respect :  as, 
I  AcadSmSa,  ctaoria,  MalSa,  platSa. 

5.  In  Bheu  and  diua,  and  sometimes  in  DIKna  and  Sho  the  first 
vowel  is  long. 

b.  ^KHIKGtH;.     A  Diphthong  is  long:  as,  fOfedoo,  cui,  dEIade. 
Exception.      The   preposition   prae   in    compounds   is   generally   i 
shortened  before  a  vowel:  as,  pi&e-uBtia  {M.n.  vii.  524),  prie-euutd   J 
(id.  V.  i36). 

Note. — D  following  q,  b,  or  sr,  docs  noi  make  a  diphihong  wUli  a  fol 


=l(see}4. 


=)■ 


CONTKACTION.     A  vowel  formed  by  contraction  (crasis)  is  long: 

«s,  nil,  from  nihil ;  ourrOs,  genidve  for  oulrula. 

But  often  two  Eyllablfs  are  united  bj  Synasresis  without  eonlraclion:  as  wliaii 

j(B>riatIli(iB  is  pronounced /ao'''"*"*' 

d.  Position.    A  vowel,  though  short,  followed  by  two  cotisonants  ] 
a  double  consonant,  makes  a  long  syllable :  as,  adventua,  cortex. 


followed  by  1  or  r  the  syllable  I 
:)  ;  as,  alaorla  or  alSoria ;  patria  I 


ong  syUabie  (eitcepl  ii 


^  (lie  vowel  w 


But  if  the 
may  be  either  long  or  short  (c 
or  piltila. 

Note  i.  —  Any  vowel  before  t 
bnugls,  quadiSuBla). 

But  it  is  probable  tliat  In  all  such 
rfilciO,  e(c.  (from  rS-lociC),  cf.  note  2. 

Note  a. — The  compounds  of  laciO,  though  wriltEO  with  one  1,  ci 

I  before  a.  consonant,  and  lengthen  the  short  as  if  by  PosiUon.     (But 
Ijllablea  were  pronounced  is  uncertain.)     Thus,- 
QbtolB  hoBtl  (at  the  end  of  a  hexameter.  Ma.  jr.  549) . 
Jnlcit  et  BaltQ  {at  Die  beginning  of  ahexamaei,  ffi.ti.'\x.^ija>,. 
prBicB  tSiamantt  (at  the  beginning  uf  aUesame^et,  iE.w.V\.^-5fil 


r 


396  Prosody:  Quantity. 


The  later  poets  aometimes  aliorlen  the  prepositfon  in  Irisyllaliic  Ibnns, 
ncted  as  If  the       "    " 


(i)  lurpe  pu|lSs  abljci  (Ov.  PonL  ii.  3,  37). 

curan|Dos  9bi|ci5  (Claud.  Cons.  Hon.  iv.  364). 
(2)  i^cS  cSlpe1l£s  (EcL  iii.  96,  at  end). 
Remark.— They  otwsound  resulting  from  jjWfErii/r  has  the  effect  of  a  con- 
sonant in  making  position:  as,  nbietla  (abyetis),  fluviSniin  l^fiitvyorum).    Con- 
versely, when  the  semivowel  becomes  a  vowe!,  position  is  lost;  as.sllQaiB.lorailvae. 
e.   In  early  Latin,  b  at  [he  end  of  words  was  not  sounded,  and  hence 
does  not  make  position  with  another  consonant. 

Rf.MARK.  — Aj^'/ZdJ/fmadelonEb;  the  mie  in  if.  but  containing  a  short  iviw/, 
is  said  to  be  long  hy  Position  :  as  in  dooStne.  Tlie  rules  of  Position  do  not,  in 
general,  appiy  to  Gaal  vowels. 

2.  Final  SyUablsB. 
348.   The  Quantity  of  Final  Syllables  is  determined  by 
the  following  Rules: — - 

1.  Words  of  one  syllable  ending  in  a  vowel  are  long:  as,  m8,  tfl, 
hl,ne. 

The  attached  particles  -n5,  -quS,  -vfi,  -cS,  -ptB,  and  rS-  (rSd-)  are 
short;  sS-  is  long.  Thus,  sBofidit,  ezercitiimquS  rfidflcit.  But  re- 
is  often  long  in  rSUgio  (telUgiC),  tfitull  (rettuli),  rSpuU  (reppuU). 

2.  Nouns  and  adjectives  of  one  syllable  are  long:  as,  b51,  5a  (firiB). 
boB,  p3r,  via. 

Exceptions.  c5r  (sometimes  long),  fei,  15o,  in61,  Ss  (oBaU), 
vir,  tSt,  quSl. 

3.  Most  monosyllabic  Particles  are  short;  as,  5n,  In,  ola,  n6o.  But 
So,  crSa,  citr,  Sn,  u5a,  quia,  ala  ^  with  adverbs  in  c  :  as,  blc,  taao, 
Bio  — are  long. 

4.  Final  a  in  words  declined  by  cases  is  short,  except  in  the  ablative 
singular  of  the  first  declension ;  in  all  other  words  final  a  is  long.  Thus, 
ea  BtellS  (nom.),  cum  e&  atellK  (abl.)  ;  frOstra,  vooft  (iroperat,), 
poBtea,  trigiiita. 

Exceptions.  618,  itS,  quiS,  puta  {suppose):  and,  in  late  use. 
tilginta,  etc. 

5.  Final  e  is  short,  as  in  nilba,  dfloltS,  laepi.     Except  — 

1.  In  nouns  of  the  fifth  declension:  as,  fidfi  (also  famS),  hodie 
(hoi  die),  quSiS  (quS  r6J. 

2.  In  Greek  nettters  plural  of  the  second  declension ;  as,  cStO. 

3.  In  adverbs  formed  from  adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  declen- 
sion, ivilh  others  of  like  foni\-,  as,  alte,  laiaeiB,  apeitC,  BK«piBum& 

So  ferS,  fermS,  probably  of  same  ougLU.  ^^m 


i  348.]  Quantity  of  Final  Syllables. 

In   the   Imperative  singular  of  the  second   conjugation :    as, 


I 


Exceptions.    To  3;  benB,  male ;  InfernS,  enpemS.    To  4:  some- 
itimes,  cstB,  habS,  tacS,  valS,  vidS  (cf.  @  375.  b"). 
Final  i  is  long:  as  in  tnini.  fQT,  audi. 

t  it  is  common  in  mihi,  tibl,  albi,  ibl,  abi ;  and  short  in  nial, 
quasi,  oul  (when  making  two  syllables),  and  in  Greek  v( 
Alezl. 

7.  Final  o  is  common ;  but  long  in  datives  and  ablatives,  also, 
almost  invariably,  in  verbs,  and  in  nouns  of  the  third  declension. 

Exceptions,  cite,  modO,  ilicS,  profectd,  dummodS,  imni8, 
OE^i  du8,  octd. 

8.  Final  u  is  long.     Final  y  is  short. 

9.  Final  as,  eB,  OS,  are  long ;  final  is,  UH,  ya,  are  short ;  as,  nefaa, 
tflpgH,  aervoH  (ace),  honSs ;  hoBtls,  atnlcfia,  Tetbya. 

Exceptions,   as  is  short  in  Creek  plural  accusatives,  as  lampadls; 

ea  is  short  in  nouns  of  the  third  declension  (lingual)  having  a  short 
vowel  in  the  stem';  as,  mllBs  {-itiB),  oba63  (-Wis),  —  except  abiSs, 
arifis,  paiiea,  pfis ;  in  the  present  of  esse  (Sb,  adfie)  ;  in  the  prepo- 
sition penSs,  and  in  tlie  plural  of  Greek  nouns,  as  lifiroSs,  lam- 

OH  is  short  in  compfia,  impSs ;  in  the  Greek  nominative  ending,  as 
baxbitSa ;  also,  in  the  old  nominative  ending  of  the  second  declension, 
as  aervfia  (bter  servua), 

is  in  plural  cases  b  long,  as  in  bonis,  nObb,  vobb,  omi^ 
(accusative  plural). 

Is  is  long  in  Ha,  sla,  vis  (with  quivia,  etc.),  tbITb,  mSllB,  ndlls ; 
in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  as  audli 
(where  it  b  the  stem-vowel) ;  and  sometimes  in  the  forms  in  -eria 
(perfect  subjunctive),  where  it  was  originally  long. 

ua  b  long  (by  contraction)  in  the  genitive  singular  and  nominative, 
accusative,  and  vocative  plural  of  the  fourth  declension;  and  in  nouns 
of  the  third  declension  having  fl  (long)  in  the  stem :  as,  virtSs  (-fltia), 
incilB  ('ildia).     But  peoSa,  -Qdia. 

10.  Of  other  final  syllables,  those  ending  In  a  consonant,  except  -c, 
are  short.    Thus,  amSt,  amS.ttlr ;  but.  istSo,  SlSc. 

ExcEPnOKS.  dSaSc,  Ac,  nSo,  sometimes  hlo ;  &6r,  aetliBr,  oratSr, 
liBn,  aplBn. 

J  TTie  guanlilyo/the  alem-vowel  may  be  seen  in  ftve  gpiivuse  vm^ias. 


[98  Prosody :   Quantity.  [§§  349, 350. 

3.    Fenultlmate  Syllabloa. 

34J1.  A  noun  or  adjective  is  said  to  increase,  when  in 
any  case  it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  nominative  sin- 
gular. 

A  verb  is  said  to  increase,  when  in  any  part  it  has  more 
syllables  than  in  the  stem.  Thus,  ami-tis  (stem,  ami-), 
tegi-tifl  (stem,  tege-),  capi-unt  (stem,  oapi-). 

In  such  words  as  atellarum,  corpSris,  amStis,  tegltis,  Ihe  penitl- 
imate  syllable  is  called  the  incrsmenty  In  itinSribnH,  amSvSiitis, 
the  syllables  marked  are  called  the  first,  second,  and  third  increments 
of  the  noun  or  verb. 

Note.  —  In  such  words  as  Iflppitor,  IQviB ;  Benai,  eBnla,  (he  syllables  ivhoM 
Yowel-quanlity  la  marked  are  called  inerEmEnta.  These  forms  must  be  referred  In 
'3st  nomlnadTes  from  the  same  stems  [cf.  {J  6d,  6l,  Ibot-note} .  So  Itlnerlbus  bai 
eally  only  two  increments  as  from  "titlnuH, 

350.  In  increments  of  Nouns  and  Adjectives,  a  and  o 
ire  generally  long ;  e,  l,  u,  y,  generally  short:  as, — 

aet3s,  aetStla  ;  honor,  honSrie  ;  eervoB,  aerrSriun ;  optu,  opS- 
la;  oatman,  carmlnia;  murmur,  murmiiria;  pecus.  pecfidis; 
oMamys,  chlamydia.     Exceptions  are ;  — 

i:  short  in  baocar  (-Siia),  hBpar  (-Stia),  jubar  (-aria),  ISr  (Jaria), 
mSa  (mSris),  neotax  (-Sris),  pSr  (pSria),  sal  (aSlia),  vaa  (vSdla), 
dapa  (dapia),  faz  (facia),  anthrax  (-Scia). 

o :  short  in  neuters  of  tlie  third  declension  (except  fia,  6ii«) :  as, 
oorpaa  (-Sris) ;  also  in  atbor  (-Sria),  aerobe  (ecrSbie),  ops  (fipis), 
bSs  (bSvia),  memor  (-Bria),  lOppiter  (Iflvia),  Hector  (-Bris), 
and  compounds  of-pfla  (as,  triptts,  -pBdia). 

e :  long  in  increments  of  fifth  declen.sion  :  as,  diSa,  diBi ;  also  in  h6rSa 
(-edia),  lex  (ISgia),  locuplEa  (-etis),  mercSs  (-Sdis),  pleba  (plSbia). 
qulBB  (-eUs),  rSx  (rBgia),  vEr  (vfiria),  ciSter  (-Sris).    But  see  §  347.  3. 

1:  long  in  most  nouns  and  adjeclives  in  iz:  as,  fSUcis,  radicia 
(except  mix,  nix,  atrix)  ;  also  in  dls  (dltia],  gUs  (gUria),  He  (Iltia), 
via  (virea),  Quiritea,  SajnnltSa. 

a:  long  in  forms  from  nouns  in  -fia:  as,  palfla,  paladia;  tellite,  tel- 
Ifliia;  virtOa,  virtfltia ;  also  in  Iflx,  lucia;  [frilx],  frflgiB;  fOr,  fOiis. 

1  The  rules  of  Increment  ate  purely  atbittary,  as  Ihe  syllables  are  long  or  short 
according  to  the  proper  quantity  of  the  Stem  or  of  the  formative  terminadoos.  The 
quaodly  of  noun-stems  appears  in  the  schedule  of  the  third  declension  (see  }  67)  ; 
and  (Tie  quantity  of  Inflectlon-endrngs  is  seen  under  Ihe  varioos  inSectiona,  wbera 
iV  is  better  to  leam  it.    For  quamiVieBQiGteeV  stem*, ™k\^  ^_ 


Ij§  351,  352.J  Penultimate   Syllables.  399  ] 

351.   In    the    increment    of    Verbs   the   characteristic  \ 
^Vowels  are  as  follows :  — 

,    In  the  first  conjugation  5 :  as,  amSie,  amatnr. 

.    In  the  second  conjugation  S :  as,  monSre,  monBtnr. 

,    In  the  third  conjugation  B,  I :  as,  teggre,  tegJtur, 

,    In  the  fourth  conjugation  i;  as,  audire,  audltur. 
Exception,    do  and  its  compounds  have  S:  as,  dSre,  circnmdSbat   I 

.  In  oilier  verbal  increments  (not  stem-vowels)  — 
a  is  always  long:  as,  iiioi]ea.ris,  tegSmua. 
B  is  long:  as,  tegebam,  audiSbar. 

Note.  — Bme  is  short  before -ram,-rlm,-rS;  in  the  future  personal  endinj 
B6riS,-b5re;  nnd  somerinics  in  tlie  perfect -firunt  (as  8t6t6runtque  Ooma 

i  is  long  in  forms  which  follow  the  analogy  of  the  fourth  conjugatior 
as,  petlvi,  laceseittis  (in  others  short :  as,  tuonltaB) ;  also  in  tl 
subjunctive  present  of  Bsae  and  velle  (alniua,  veUmue)  ;  and  (rarely) 

I  in  the  endings  -rimua,  -ritia.    It  is  short  in  the  future  forms  amabltis, 
etc. 
o  is  found  only  in  imperatives,  and  is  ahv.iys  long:  as,  monetS,  etc. 
u  is  short  in  aftmua,  vollimua,  quaeattmua ;  in  the  Supine  and  its 
derivatives  it  is  long ;  as,  solfltflma. 
b.  Perfects  and  Supines  of  two  syllables  lengthen  the  first  syllable: 
as,  iiSvI,  latum  (iavo),  vidi,  visum  (vlde5) ;  fBgi  (fOgio). 
Ekceptioss.   bibl,  dSdI.  Hdl,  acldl,  atfiti,  sMtl,  tOli;  — oltum, 
dlltiun,  Itum,  lltum,  quitum,  rStum,  rQtum,  sStum,  situm,  Bt&tum. 
In  some  compounds  of  ato,  statum  is  found  (long),  as  prdstatum. 
c.  In  reduplicated  perfects  the  vowel  of  the  reduplication  is  short ; 
the  following  syllable  is,  also,  usually  short;  as,  cficldi  (o5do),  dIdlcT 
(dbo5),    pHpfigi    (pungS),    oiiouiTi    (ourrS),    tStendl    (tendfi), 
mSmordl  (moideS).     But  cficIdT  from  caedS,  pepSdl  from  pEdB. 

(353.   The  following  terminations  are  preceded  by  a  long 
Vowel. 
I.   -al,-ar;  as,  vecHgal,  pnlvlnar. 
Exceptions,  animal,  cSpltal,  iiibar. 
1.   -brum,  -crum,  -trum :  as,  l^vacrum,  dElabrum,  TerS.triim. 
3.   -dfl,  -ga,  -gS;  as,  formido.  aurlga,  iraSgo. 
ExCEPTioss.   cSdo,  divIdS,  6dfi,  mSdo,  sdlldS,  apadS.  trCpIdB ; 
oallfa,  ffiga,  tSga,  plSga  ;    3.g3,  t6g5,  nfigo,  rSgo,  harpSgS,  llgS, 
IBgo.     So  Sg5. 

-lea  f-ies),  -Ua:  as,  anoUe,  mUea,  Cii^6.%'aa,VQ!i<S6a.- 


L 


4DO  prosody:  Quantity,  [55  352,353. 

Exceptions.  mdlS  ;  Indfiiea,  HfibSlfia ;  graoIUs,  bOmllla,  slmillB, 
BtStSia  ;  and  verbal  adjectives  in  -Ilia ;  as,  dScIliB,  facllia,  tenlb:- 
lia,  itoabllia. 

J.   -ma,  -men,  -mentum :  as,  poSma,  fl&niea,  inmentum. 

Exceptions.  Snlma,  lacrlma,  victima;  tSmeo,  colfimen;  with 
ifigiroen  and  the  like  Iroiii  verb-stems  in  e-. 

6.  -tnua,  -nua,  -rua,  -aua,  -tua,  -neus,  -rius  :  as,  extrSmua,  afipl- 
QUB,  octSnl,  aSvfirua,  fumoaua,  pCritus,  senSrius,  extrciiieuB. 

Exceptions,  (li.)  I  before  -mua  :  as,  fmltimua,  mSrltlmaB  (except 
bimus,  trlmus,  quadrimUB,  opTmua,  mlmua,  lltnua)  ;  and  in  supei' 
latives  (except  Imua,  prlmua)  :  also,  dSmua,  httmua,  ii6iiias,  caiS- 
mus,  thaiKmna. 

(i.)  I  before  -nua ;  as  in  oraatlnuB,  frajclnua,  etc.  (except  dlvinuH, 
m^tuHnuB,  veapertlnua,  tSpentinos)  ;  Sclnua,  Salnua,  cfiminua, 
cfiphluUB.  emlnua,  ddmluus.  faciuits,  fraxluue,  prStlnua,  termt- 
uua,  vitlcInuB ;  also,  manua.  5ce^us,  pllit^us ;  ggnua,  T6nua. 
So  S  in  bdniiB,  Caua,  sfinua,  tOnus. 

(f.)  S  before  -raa  (-ra,  -rum) ;  as.  mfirua.  hSdSra  (except  procE- 
rtia,  aincSrua,  sBTBrua).  In  lilie  manner,  barbSrus,  chSrua,  nOxus, 
plrus;  aStlra,  amphSra,  ancfira,  IJra,  p?ta,  purpiira ;  fSrum, 
BuppSbnm,  gdj'um,  pcLrum. 

[d.')  IStuB,  mStua,  vgtus,  anhslltua,  digitua,  aervltaa,  aplrltiis ; 
qafitOB,  tStuB  ;  arbKtus,  liSbltue,  and  the  like. 
.    7.   ~iia,  -ne,  -nis :  as,  caiTna,  mSne,  inania. 

Exceptions,  ad  v  Sua,  angina,  dSmlua,  ffimlna,  mBchlna, 
mlaa,  gfiia.  pSglna,  pStlua.  aatclna,  trCtlna,  and  compounds  with 
-gena ;  bSne,  aine;  cSiiia,  cluis,  iavguia. 

E,   -re,  -ria,  -ta,  -tie:  3.%,  altSre,  aSlfitails,  mSnSta.  immltta. 

Exceptions.  mSre,  MiaxlB,  rata,  nSta,  satis,  sltlB,  pStda,  and 
most  nouns  in  -Ita. 

9.  -tim.  -turn,  and  syllables  beginning  with  v:  as,  prlvStim, 
queroBtum,  Sliva. 

Exceptions,  affatim,  ata.tlni ;  nlvia  (nix) ;  brfivia,  grivia, 
ISvfa  {li^i)\  nSvuB,  nSvem ;  and  several  verb  roots  (as,  iiivo, 
fS.vefi)  ;  also,  8vU,  bSviB,  Ifivia. 

10.  -dez,  -lex,  -mex,  -rex,  -dix,  -nix:  and  the  numeral  endings 
-ginti,  -ginta :  as,  ifldex,  Hex.  rSdIx.  vlgintl.  trtginta. 

Exceptions,  oillex,  allex,  rfimex. 

353.  The  following  terminations  are  preceded  by  a  short 
vowel:  — 


Ml  353,  354.] 


Penultimate  Syllables. 


401 


■  H  3 

H       I.  -CQA,  duB, -lua:  as,  rOstlcua,  cUIdus,  gl^difilui 

P       Exceptions.  SpSouB,  Amicus ;  aatlcua,  aptlcus,  flcus,  mendl- 
cus,  pOBtScus,  pQdlcas ;  fidua,  nidus,  Bidue ;  and  Q  before  -diia  :    , 
.T.S.  ctfldua,  nuduB ;  S  before  -lus,  ^a  phiUelus  (except  gfilua,  Bcfilus) ; 
Sallua ;  liicus. 

2.  -n5,  -nor,  -ro,  -ror,  ia  verbs :  as,   destlno,  crimlnor,  g6r3. 

Exceptions,  dlvlno,  featmo,  prfiplnd,  Blgino,  Spioor,  inoliuS  ; 
dCclaiS,  epSrS,  spiro,  oro,  duro,  mirar. 

3.  -ba,  -bfi,  -pa,  -p3 ;  as,  ISha.,  bIbS,  lilpa,  cr6p5. 
Exceptions,    glfiba,  ecriba ;  bub5,  nQbS,  Bcrlbo ;  pSpa,  pflpa, 

rlpa,  acSpa,  stapa;  cap5,  rep5,  stipS. 

4.  -tSfl  (in  nouns),  -ter  and  -tus  (in  adverbs)  :  as,  civItSta,  fortl- 
ter,  pSnitua. 

5.  -culuB,  'CelluB,  -lentuB,  -tild5 :  ss,  faBCicillus,  ficellua,  IQcil- 
lentus,  magnltado. 

354.    Rules  for  the  quantity  of  Derivatives  are  :- 

a.  Forms  from  the  same  Stem  have  the  same  quantity:  as,  SmS, 

amSTlBti;  gSunB,  gSneri: 

Exceptions,     t.  bBs,  15r,  mSs,  pSr_  pSa,  aftl,  vSa  —  also  arbO» 

—  have  a  long  vowel  in  the  nominative,  though  the  stem-vowel  is  short 

fcf.  genitive  bSvia,  etc.). 

2.  Nouns  in  -or,  genitive  -oria,  have  the  vowel  shortened  before  the 
final  r:  as,  lionSr,  (But  this  shortening  is  comparatively  late,  so  that 
in  Plautus  and  inscriptions  these  nominatives  are  often  found  long,} 

3.  Maay  verb-forms  with  vowel  originally  long  shorten  it  before  final  -r 
or  -t :  as,  amSr,  dioergr,  amSt  (compare  amSmua),  dIcerSt.  audit,  fit 

Note.  — The  final  syllable  in  -t  of  the  perfect  seems  to  have  been  otiginallj 


ong,  b, 


;r  this 


4.  A  few  long  Stem-syllables  are  shortened,  apparently  under  the 
influence  of  accent :  as,  5oer,  Scerbus.  So  dS'iSro  and  pe-i6rS,  weak- 
ened from  iilro. 

i.  Forms  from  the  same  Root  often  show  inherited  v 
quantity  (see  §   10) :  as,  dioS  (cf.  maledlctie),  dfloS   (diicifl),  Hda 
(perfldus),  vSoia  (vSoS),  ISgia  (legO). 

c.  C0MP0t;NDS  retain  the  quantity  of  the  words  which  compose 
them  :  as,  oo-cldo  (oadS),  oc-cido  (oaedo),  in-Iquua  (aequus), 

d.  Greek  words  compounded  with  trpo  have  o  short:  as,  prSphSta, 
praiSgiiB.  Some  Latin  compounds  of  pro  have  o  short;  as,  prBEeia- 
cor,  prSfiteor.  Compounds  mtb  nS  vary:  aa,  iifi^a,a8g'9,a!S^i)ft&- 
BSquiB,  aSqaam,  '      ~ 


Prosody:  Jihytkm. 


Chapter  II.  —  Rhythm 


I 


Note. — The  essence  of  Rhylhm  in  poeliy  is  ihe  regular  re 
pronounced  with  more  stress  Itian  those  intervening.  To  produce  (his  effect  In  ite 
perfection,  precisely  equal  times  shonid  occur  between  the  lecurrcnces  of  the  stress. 
But,  in  the  application  of  rhythm  to  words,  the  exactness  of  these  intervals  is  sacri- 
ficed somewhat  to  the  necessaiy  length  of  the  words ;  and,  on  the  other  hand,  Ihe 
words  are  forced  somewhat  in  their  pronunciation,  to  produce  more  nearly  the 
proper  Intervals  of  time.  In  different  languages  these  adaptations  take  place  in 
difierent  degrees;  one  language  dlErt^arding  more  the  intervals  of  time,  another 

The  Greek  language  early  developed  a  very  st 
in  which  the  intervals  of  time  were  all-imporlant. 
hand, — as  in  the  Salumian  and  Fescennine  verai 
Ihe  purely  metrical  forms  were  afterwards  adopted  from  the  Greek,  and  supplanied 
the  native  forms  of  verse.  Thus  the  Latin  poetry  with  which  we  have  lo  do  fol- 
lows for  the  most  part  Greek  rules,  which  require  the  formal  division  of  words 
(like  music)  into  measures  of  equal  times,  technically  called  Feel.  The  strict 
rhytlim  was  doubtless  more  closely  followed  in  poetry  (halwasjui^  than  in  that 
which  was  dtclmmed  or  inlontd.  In  neither  language,  however,  is  the  lime  per- 
fecdy  preserved,  even  in  single  measures;  and  (here  ere  some  cases  in  which  Ihe 
n^larity  of  Ihe  time  between  Ihe  ictuses  is  disturbed. 

The  Gieeks  and  Romans  disdngulshed  syllables  of  two  kinds  in  regard  to  (he  lime 
required  for  their  pronunciation,  a  /i>;rj' syllable  having  twice  the  metrical  value  of  a 
shioioa^.  But  it  must  not  be  supposed  that  all  long  syllables  were  of  equal  length, 
or  even  that  in  a  given  passage  each  long  had  just  twice  the  length  of  ihe  condguoos 
shorts.  The  ratio  was  only  approximale  at  best,  though  necessarily  mote  exact  in 
singing  than  in  recitation.  Nor  are  longs  and  shorts  the  only  forms  of  syllables 
thai  are  found.  In  some  eases  a  long  syllable  was  prolracled.  so  as  lo  have  the 
lime' of  three  or  even  of  four  shorts,  and  often  one  long  or  two  shorts  were  pronounced 
in  less  than  their  proper  lime,  though  doubtless  always  distinguishable  in  time  from 
one  short  (see  {355.  c,  rf).  Somerimes  a  syllable  naturally  short  seems  to  have 
been  slighdy  prolonged,  so  as  to  represent  a  long,  though  in  most  (not  all)  cases 
the  apparent  irregularity  can  be  otherwise  explained.  In  a  lew  cases,  also,  a  [lause 
takes  the  place  of  one  or  more  syllables  to  fill  out  the  required  length  of  Ihe  mcas- 
This  could,  of  course,  take  place  only  at  the  end  of  a  word;  hence  the  impor- 


tance of  Ciesura  and  Diaeresis  in  prosody  (set 


}358). 


j^^^^ciei 


1.  Heastire*. 

355.    Rhythm  consists  of  the  division  of  musical  sound 

into  MEASURES  Or  FEET. 

The  most  natural  division  of  musical  time  is  into  meas- 
ures  consisting  of  either  two  or  three  equal  parts.  But  the 
tcienfs  also  distmgma'heilmea.^vKesci^^Nt  ewpiiiigMNA^^ 


^Sf  355,  356.J 


Measures. 


403, 


REMARK. — The  divisions  of  musical  lime  are  marked  by  a  siress  of  voice  o 
one  Qr  Ihe  olher  pari  of  (he  measure.  This  slresB  is  called  the  ictUB  (beat),  a 
metrical  accent  (see  {  358). 

a.  The  unit  of  length  in  Prosody  is  ove  short  syllable.  Tliis  i 
called  a  Mora.  It  is  represented  by  the  sign  ^,  or  in  musical  nota 
tion  by  the  quaver  (P). 

d.  A  long  syllable  is  regularly  equal  to  two  marie,  and  is  represented  J 
■  by  thesign  _,  orby  thecfofc^/  (P). 

c.  A  long  syllable  may  be  protracted,  so  as  to  occupy  the  time  of  "I 
tfluree  or  four  mora.  Such  a  syllable,  if  equal  to  three  mora,  b  repre-  j 
'(ented  by  the  sign  l_  (or  F-);  if  equal  to  four,  by  i_j  (or!*'). 

d.  A  long  syllable  may  be  contracted,  so  as  to  take  practically  the  time  1 
of  a  short  one.    Such  a  syllable  is  sometimes  represented  by  the  sign  >. 

e.  A  short  syllable  may  be  contracted  so  as  to  occupy  less  than  one  I 


y.  A  pause  sometimes  occurs  at  the  end  of  a  vers 
Terses,  to  fill  up  the  time.  A  pause  of  one  mora  in  a  1 
cated  by  the  sign  A  i  one  of  two  mora  by  the  sign  7\- 

g.  One  or  more  syllables  are  sometimes  placed  before  the  proper  1 
beginning  of  the  measure.  Such  syllables  are  called  an  AnacrOsis  or  J 
preluded 

The  asacrusb  is  regularly  equal  to  the  unaccented  part  of  the  J 


350.  The  measures  most  frequently  employed  in  Latin  I 
I  verse,  together  with  their  musical  notation,  are  the  follow-  ; 
I  ing:  — 

a.  Triple  or  Unequal  Measures  (J).' 

I.  Trochee      (£  w     =^f)-  as.  regis. 

2    Iambus        (^  —     =  f  ^) :  as,  d^cis. 

3.  Tribrach*  (,i  w  ■^  =  fTD  ■  ^  Mmlnts. 

I  The  same  thing  occurs  in  modem  poelry,  and  in  modem  music  any 
cenled  syllables  at  the  tx^inning  aie  treated  as  an  anacrusis,  ij.  Ihey  make  an 
incomplete  measure  before  the  first  bar.  This  was  not  Ihe  case  in  andent  music, 
Theancients  seem  lo  have  treated  any  unaccented  syllable  at  the  b^ianingas  belong, 
ing  lo  the  following  accented  ones,  so  as  to  make  with  them  a  fool  or  measure. 
Thus  it  would  seetn  that  the  original  form  of  Indo-European  poetry  was  iambic 
Id  its  structure,  or  at  least  accented  the  second  syllable  rather  than  the  first 

5  Called  diplasic,  the  (wo  parts  (Thesis  and  Arais)  being  in  the  ratio  of  a  lo  i. 

*  Not  fennd  as  a  fundamenlal  foot,  but  only  as  the  cesolutioo  q(  a.  tvaiiwi  <». 


404 

Prosody 

Rhythm. 

[» 

3$& 

« 

Double  or  Equal  Measures  (J). 

A 

I 

Dactyi, 

t^-"-rD' 

:  as.  cBnsiilU. 

■ 

3 

ANAPjEST 

c-^-^-trr 

■ 

3 

Spondee 

c.  Six-timed 

as,  r/^/A 
Measures  (J.> 

1 

I 

Ionic  a  tna 

(■^-r  ( w  w  = 

p  |»  ^•)  !  as,  cSnflclrlU. 

■ 

a- 

lasicamt 

^r/(w  ^ 

f*  *  p ;  as,  ritulisseni. 

■ 

3 

CHORIAMBUS       (_  vj  w  _  = 

•  ff  p)  i  as,  cSntaUrani 

■ 

d.  Quinary  or  Hemiolic'  Measures  (|). 

1.  Cretic  C_  w  _      =  p  f  fj  !  as,  cSusSlis. 

2.  ^san primus  (^  i>  ^  \j  =*  T_T_f^'  ^'  '^^"^"^^^i^^' 

3.  P^ON  quSrtus  ( vvy  ^  _  =  ^  ■  *  p  :  as,  »r«iVf. 

4.  BaccHIus  (u  _  _       ■=  r  r  P) !  as,  imlcSs. 

i.  Several  compound  measures  are  mentioned  by  the  grammarians, 

viz.,  Antibacchius  ( i_;),  Proceleusmatic  (^  w  vj  u),  the  2d  and 

3d  Paofi,  having  a  long  syllable  in  the  2d  and  3d  places,  with  three 
short  ones;  1st,  2d,  3d,  and  4th  EfUritus,  having  a  short  syllable  in 
the  1st,  2d,  3d,  and  4th  places,  with  three  long  ones.  None  of  them, 
however,  are  needed  to  explain  rhythmically  all  the  forms  of  ancient 

/.  Feet  with  these  apparent  quantities  do  not  always  occupy  the 
same  time  in  the  measure,  but  may  be  contracted  or  prolonged  to  suit 
the  series  in  which  they  occur.  They  are  then  called  irrational, 
because  the  thesis  and  arsis  do  not  have  integral  ratios.    Such  are:  — 


Irrational  Spondee  :  _  >  =  J  J*  ■ 

Cycuc  Dactyl:  — ww  =  J     >    N  (or  nearly  >      t    ^)i 


*  CsUed  Aemiolic,  the  two  parts  being  in  toe  ra 


1 


i,  357.] 


Cyclic  AsAfssr:  =  the  same  reversed. 

Irsatiokal  Trochee  :  _  >  =  J   h  • 

JiCfTS, — Of  fce(  £.nd  combinalions  ot  feel  (somelimes  cjctend 
d  controlled  hy  a.  Bingle  leading  accenl),  (he  following 
Lmlng  1 10  be  the  uail  of  muaica]  time :  — 


Nartatlve  poetry  was  wrilleii  for  rhythmical  recilatioo,  or  Chant,  with  instru> 
mental  accompaniment;  and  Lyrical  poetry  fbr  rhythmical  melody,  or  singing.  It 
must  be  borne  in  mind  thai  in  ancienl  musio— which  Id  this  differs  widely  from 
modern  — Ihe  rhylhm  of  the  melody  was  identical  with  the  rhytlim  of  Ihe  le^tt. 
The  lyrio  poetry  waa  to  be  sung;  the  poet  was  rruslciaa  and  composer,  as  well  as 
author.    To  this  day  a  poet  is  said  conventionally  to  "  Eing." 

Thus  a  correct  understanding  of  the  rhythmical  slniclure  of  Ihe  Verse  gives  ul 
the  eiact  Umi,  though  not  Ihe  tii«e,  to  which  It  was  actually  Bung.  The  exact  lime, 
however,  as  Indicated  by  the  succession  of  long  and  short  syllables,  was  varied 
according  to  certain  hws  of  so-called  "  Rhythmic,"  as  will  be  explained  below.  In 
reading  andent  verse  II  is  necessary  to  bear  fai  mind  not  only  the  variations  In  the 
relative  length  of  syllables,  but  the  occasional  pause  necessary  to  Ell  out  the  meas- 
ure; and  to  remember  that  the  rhythmical  accent  is  the  only  one  of  importance, 
though  the  words  should  be  distingoished  carefiillf,  and  the  Mnse  preserved.  Do 
not  scan,  but  read  metrically. 

367.   In  many  cases  measures  of  the  same  time  may  be 

substituted  for  each  other,  a  long  syllable  talcing  the  place 
of  two  short  ones,  or  two  short  ones  the  place  of  one  long 
one. 

In  the  former  case  the  measure  is  said  to  be  contracted ; 
in  the  latter,  to  be  resohed.     Thus :  — 

a.  A  SponiJee  ( )  may  take  the  place  of  a  dzctyl  (_  ij  ij)  or  an 

anapiest  (v  u ) ;  and  a  Tribrach  (>j  ^  vj)  may  take  the  place  of  a 

Trochee  (_  "j)  or  an  Iambus  (\j  _).  The  optional  substitution  of 
one  long  syllable  for  two  short  ones  is  represented  by  the  sign  cc. 

i.  Another  form  of  daclyl  when  substituted  for  a  trochee  is  repre- 
sented thus, 1^. 

A  spondee,  similarly  substituted  for  a  trochee,  is  represented 
thus,  _  >■ 

c.  When  a  long  syllable  having  the  Ictus  (§  358.  a)  Ls  resolved,  the 
ictus  properly  belongs  to  both   the  resulting  short  syUables;  but  for 
convenience  the  mark  of  accent  is  placed  oa  the  first:  as,— 
_    ,      Bdnc  expeciar  /  sftn'  aceto  (  tibi  cot  act'  \n\-pfec\.OTe.— 


I 


6  Prosody:  Rhythm.  [S  3sa 

2.  The  Musical  Accent. 

358.  That  part  of  the  measure  which  receives  the  stress 
of  voice  (the  musical  accent)  is  called  the  Thesis;  the 
unaccented  part  is  called  the  Arsis.^ 

a.  The  stress  of  voice  laid  upon  the  Thesis  is  called  the  ICTUS 
{peat).     It  is  marked  thus :  ^  w  w 

*.  The  ending  of  a  \vord  within  a  measure  is  called  CjEsura, 
When  this  coincides  with  a  rhetorical  pause,  it  is  called  the  Cxsura  ol 
the  verse,  and  is  of  main  importance  as  affecting  the  melody  or  rhythm. 

c.  Ths  coincidence  of  the  end  of  a  word  with  that  of  a  measure  in 
Prosody  is  called  Dleresis. 

1  The  Thesis  signifies  properly,  itic  pullirig  dawn  {B4aa,  from  tWtjju)  oflfie  fool 
in  beating  time,  in  Ihe  marcli  or  dance  ("downward  beat"),  and  llie  Arsis, Ihe 
railing  {&pait,boTri  adfw)  of  the  foot  ("  upward  tjeal").  By  the  Latin  grammoHuts 
these  terms  were  made  to  mean,  tespecliveiy,  the  ending  and  banning  of  a  meas- 
ure.  By  a  misunderstanding  which  has  prevaiJcd  tilJ  lecently,  since  the  time  of 
Bendey,  their  true  signification  has  been  reversed.  They  will  here  be  used  in 
accordance  with  Iheir  andent  meaning,  as  has  now  become  more  common.  This 
metrical  accent,  recurring  at  regular  intervals  of  time,  is  what  constitutes  Ibe  essence 
of  the  rhythm  of  poetry  as  disiinguished  from  prose,  and  should  be  constantly  kept 


Chapter  III. —  Versification. 

1.  The  Vetse. 

350.   A  single  line  of  poetry  — that  is,  a  series  of  meas- 
Ipres  set  in  a  recognized  order — is  called  a  Verse.^ 


Note.  — Most  of  Ihe  comr 

Wmchs') ,  bul  Ihe  joJDt  between  th 

Ijr  the  Diaresis,  in  Dactylic  He 

,  A  verse  lackiog  a  ! 
is,  having  a  pause  t< 
i  not  lacking,  the  verse 


em  is  often  obscured,    ll  is  marked  In  Iambic  ver 
xamelei  by  the  Ccssura. 

ij-llable  at  the  end  is  calleti  CATALEimc, 
]  fill  the  measure;  when  the  end  sylkble 
is  called  Acatalectic,  and  has  no  such 


b.  To  divide  the  verse  into  its  appropriate  measures,  according  t( 
I   the  rules  of  quantity  and  versification,  is  called  scanning  o 
(Bcansio,  from  scando,  a  climbing  or  advance  by  steps). 

Remark,  — In  rtading  verse  rhythmically,  care  should  lie  taken 
the  measure  Di  time  of  the  syllables,  bul  at  the  same  time  not  to  destroy  or  ranfuie  \ 
the  words  themselves,  as  is  often  done  in  scanning, 

e.  In  sianning,  a  vowel  or  diphthong  at  the  end  of  a  word  (ualcsB  ] 
an  interjection)  is  partially  suppressed  when  the  next  word  begins  with  I 
a  vowel  or  with  h.    This  is  called  EiisiON  (bruising).^ 

In  reatiing  it  is  usual  entirely  to  suppress  elided  syllables.    Strictly, 
however,  they  should  be  sounded  lightly. 


cailed   by   Ihe    Greek    i 


Remark.  — Elision   is  s 
{smioting). 

Rarely  a  syllable  is  elided  at  the  end  of  a  verse  when  1 
HTOwel:  this  is  called  Synapheia  (iiading). 

1  The  word  Verse  {vtrsus)  signifies  a  turning  bach,  i. 
manner,  as  opposed  to  Prose  {fronus  qt  frovirsas),  whic 
s  The  practice  of  Elision  is  followed  in  Italian  and  Fn 
times  adopted  in  English,  particiJarly  In  the  older  poets :  as,- 
T  inveigle  and  invite  th'  unwary  sense. —  Com 
In  early  Latin  poetry  a  final  syllable  ending  Iti  s  often  loses 
it(cf.  jia.ijras.- 
senio  confectu'  quiescit. — Rrmwa  (C.'^.  ^. 


:    Sytial^^ha 


muL 


408  Prosody :    I  'ersification. 

d.  A  fin^  -m,  with  the  preceding  vowel,  is  suppressed  in  like  man- 
ner when  the  next  word  begins  with  a  vowel  or  h;*  this  is  called 
ECTHLiFSis  (squeesirig  otif)  :  as, — 

roonstr""  honend""",  inform',  ingens,  cid  lumen  ademptum. 

—  j^n.  iii.  658, 
Final  -m  has  a  feeble  nasal  sound,  so  that  its  partial  suppression 
before  the  initial  vowel  of  the  following  word  was  easy. 

Remark. — The  monosynable;;  dS,  detu.  epe,  apem,  aim,  etc,  etecQ,  qui 
(plural)  are  never  elided ;  nor  is  an  iambic  word  elided  in  dactylic  verse.  Eli»on 
is  often  evaded  by  skiirul  collocation  of  words, 

e.  Elision  is  sometimes  omitted  when  a  word  ending  in  a  Towel  has 
a  special  emphasis,  or  is  succeeded  by  a  pause.  This  omission  is 
called  Hiatus  (gaping). 

The  final  vowel  is  sometimes  shortened  in  such  cases, 

f.  A  final  syllable,  regularly  short,  is  sometimes  lengthened  before  1 
pause :  *  it  is  then  said  to  be  long  by  Diastolsi  as,  — 

noslror""'  obruimur,  —  oriturque  miserrima  caedes. 

g.  The  last  syllable  of  any  verse  may  be  indifferently  long  or  short 
isyllaba  ancaps). 

Forms  of  Verse. 
360.  A  verse  receives  its  name  from  its  dominant  or 
fundamental  measure  :  as,  Dactylic,  Iambic,  Trochaic,  Aiia- 
ptesHc ;  and  from  the  number  of  measures  (single  or 
double)  which  it  contains :  as,  Hexameter,  Tetrameter, 
Trimeter,  Dimeter. 

Remark. — Trocliaic,  Iambic,  and  AnapKBtic  verses  are  measured  not  by 
single  feel,  but  by  p3.irs  [dipsdia),  so  thai  six  Iambi  malce  a  TVimiltr. 

301.  A  Stanza,  or  Strophe,  consists  of  a  deiinite  num- 
ber of  verses  ranged  in  a  fixed  order. 

Many  stanzas  are  named  after  some  eminent  poet :  as, 
Sapphic  (from  Sappho),  Alcaic  (from  Alcasus),  Arckilochiati 
(from  Archilochus),  Horatian  (from  Horace),  and  so  on. 
1.   Dactylic  Hezameter. 

362.  The  Dactylic  Hexameter,  or  Heroic  Verse,  consists 
theoretically  of  six  dactyls.     It  may  be  represented  thus :  — 

»  Hence  a  final  syllable  In  -m  is  said  10  have  no  quanliiy  of  1(8  own— its  vowel, 
in  any  case,  being  eilher  elided  or  else  made  long  by  Position. 

'  This  usage  is  compaialWdj  raic,  raoal.  cawa  ■w\«:it  \!l  bi;i^bus  to  be  fanDd 
being  caused  by  the  retention  of  an  oii¥.\iia.\\-j  \(ine  oi>i«o!Qq-  "^H 


Dactylic  Hexameter. 


or  in  musical  notation  as  follows  :  — 


is\rd\nis\tu\riS\r^,-'\ 


a.  For  any  one  of  the  feet,  except  the  fifth,  a  spondee  may  be  si 
Btituted,  and  must  be  for  the  last. 

Rarely  a  spondee  is  found  in  the  fifth  place ;  the  verse  is  then  called  | 
■  spondaic.    Thus  in  Ed.  iv.  49  the  verse  ends  with  incrementtim. 


-Wllab 


iiallys. 


xcipal  c. 


ss  commonly  h 
o  parts  in  sensed  ■ 


n  the  second,! 


*.  The  hexameter  has   always   one  fri. 
wo  —  almost  always  accompanied  by  a  pause  in  the  '. 

The  principal  Kesum  is  usually  after  Ihe  thesis 
he  arsis)  of  thd  third  foot,  dividing  the  verse  into 
,  and  rhythm. 

It  may  also  be  after  the  thesis  (less  commonly  h 
fourth  foot.  In  this  case  there  is  often  another  cks 
foot,  so  that  the  verse  is  divided  into  three  parts ;  as,  — 

parts  fe  [  r5x  II  5r  I  dEnsqu'  ocu  |  lis  1|  et  |  siliila  |  coUa.  — -««.  v 
Remark. — Often  Ihe  only  indication  of  ihe  pnrtcipat  among  a  number  ot| 
lesuras  is  the  break  in  [he  sense. 

A  csEsura.  Dccurring  ailer  the  fjrsl  syllable  of  a  foot  is  called  masaiii^t. 
Eesura  occnrring  alter  the  Eecoiid  syllable  of  a  foot  is  called  fctainme  (as  in  1 
fifth  fool  oT  the  3d  and  4th  verses  in  f).    A  csesura  may  also  be  found  in  any  foot"! 
of  Ihe  verse,  but  a  proper  cttsuralfame  could  hardly  occur  in  Ihe  Srst  or  sixth.        ■ 
When  the  fourth  fool  ends  a  word,  Ihe  break  (properly  a  dixresis)  is  somelinial  J 
'  Impropetly  called  bueolic  acsxra,  from  its  frequency  in  pastoral  poetry. 

.  The  introductory  verses  of  the  .Cneid,  divided  according  to  the.l 


foregoing  rules,  will  appear  as  foUow.s.    The  principal  c 

verse  is  marked  by  double  lines :  — 

AmuL  vi|Tuini]UG  ca|nD  ||  Trojiae  qui  {  primus  ab  {  gris 
ltaS|am  fa|to  piofulgus  II  La|viiii3que  j  venit 
Klora,  I  mult''"'  ill'  j  et  ter|ris  |1  iacjtatus  et  |  alto 
vi  EupSlrim  saelvae  Ij  m5m5]rem  ISInonis  ob  I  iram; 
mnlla  qao|qu'  et  bel|Io  paa|9us  ||  dum  |  conderet  |  urhem, 
tnrerJTetqui  df|os  Lati|o,  ||  geniis  |  unde  Lajtlnum, 
AIba|niqu2  pi[tres,  H  atjqai  altae  |  raoeiiia  |  RoEoae. 
Yhefemtmne  casura  is  seen  in  the  following :  — 

DSs  genii  li  p3t!i|ere:   II  telnent  medi|"  aronia  |  silvae.  —  ^w.  vi.  ; 
Note.— The  Heiameler  is  thus  illuslraled  in  English  verse :  — 
"  Over  the  sea,  past  Crete,  on  the  Syrian  shora  to  the  southward. 
Dwells  in  the  well-tilled  lowland  a  dark-haired  jElhiop  people. 
Skilful  with  needle  and  loom,  and  the  arts  of  the  dyer  a 
SJtiJ/i(I,butfeebIeof heart;  forlheyVnoi 


^ 


prosody  :    Versification.  [SS  3fi2,  361 


Lovers  of  men ;  neilher  broad-browed  Z«U5.  nor  Pallas  Athene, 
Teachet  of  wisdom  lo  heroes,  beslower  of  might  in  Ihe  battlE; 
Shaie  not  Ihe  cunning  of  Hermes,  nor  lisl  lo  Ihe  songs  of  Apollo, 
Fearing  Ihe  slari  of  the  sky,  and  the  roll  of  the  blue  sail  wafer." 

—  Khigsliy's  Andtorntda 


2.  Elegiac  Stanxa. 

363.   The  Elegiac   Stanza  consists   of  two  lines, 
hexameter  followed  by  a  pentameter.^ 

The  Pentameter  verse  is  the  same  as  the  hexameter, 
except  that  it  omits  the  last  half  of  the  third  foot  and 
of  the  sixth  foot.     Thus,  — 


I 


'ij\'ts\'  AriS\^u 


a.  The  Pentameter  verse  is  thus  to  be  scanned  as  liuo  half-iiirsii. 
the  second  of  which  always  consists  of  two  dactyls  followed  by  a  single 
syllable. 

b.  The  Pentameter  has  no  regular  Ctesura;  btrt  the  first  half-verse 
must  always  end  with  a  word,  which  is  followed  by  a  pause  lo  complete 
the  measure-^ 

vill    illustrate   the   forms   of   the   Ele^c 


m  subit  I  illijuE  tns[tisatma  |  noclia  i|migo 
qua  nubi  |  supre  |  mum  X  II  tempus  In  ]  urbE  fu  \  it, 

m  repe|t5  noc|tem  qui  |  tot  mihi  |  cara  rejliqul, 
labitur  |  ex  ocu|liE  /?  ||  nunc  quoquS  |  ^tta  mfjiF. 

n  prope  |  liix  adejrat    qua  |  me  dis  j  cc^^ere  |  Caesar 
finibiis  [  extrB{mae  TT  ||  iiissGrat  |  Ausonijae. 

—Ovid,  Trisl.  i. 


Note.  —  The  Elegiac  Stanza  differs  widely  in  character  from  hexai 
(of  which  it  is  a  mere  modification)  by  its  division  into  Disticbs,  each  of  which 
must  have  its  own  sense  complete.  It  is  employed  in  a  great  variety  of  composi- 
tions.—  eplEtolary,  amatory,  and  moumfijl, — and  was  especially  a  favorite  of  llic 
poet  Ovid.  It  has  been  illustrated  in  EInglish  verse,  imitated  from  Ihe  Germaji:  — 
"  In  the  He3[[ameter  |  rises  the  [  fountain's  |  silvery  |  column; 
In  the  Penllameler  |  aye  ||  falling  in  |  melody  |  back." 

1  Called  frntamrlrr  by  the  old  grammarians,  who  divided  il,  formally,  into  live 
feet  (two  dacEyb  or  spondees,  a  spondee,  and  two  anapssts),  as  follows: — ■ 

r,  may  be  filled  by  the  frottaclisn  of  the  pre- 


I 


fc\ 


iS  364,  365] 


Iambic  Trimeter. 


4H 


3.  Otliei  Dactylic  VerseB. 

304.   Other  dactylic  verses  or  half-verses  are  occasion-  ] 
ally  used  by  the  lyric  poets.     Thus  :  — 

a.  The  Dactylic  Tetrameter  alternates  witli  the  hexwneter,  formiag  I 
the  Alcmatiian  Strophe,  as  follows :  — 
'  O  forltes  pelioraque  |  pass!, 
I                      inecum  |  saepe  vilri  ]|  none  |  vino  {  pelllte  |  curnsi 
I  crn9  inlgens  itelrsbimus  |  aequor. 
,  — lIuR.  Od.  i.  7  (ao  i8;   £/.  I2). 

NOTE.  —  This  verse  is  a  single  viemare,  its  lime  being  represented  by  V  |}  356. 1 
/nole). 

b.  The  Dactylic  Penthemim  (five  half-feet)  consists  of  half  a  pen 
tameter  verse.  It  is  used  in  combination  with  the  Hexameter  to  forn 
the  First  Archilochian  Strophe :  as,  — 

difTQIgere  nih'es  {|  ledelunt  iam  |  gramina  |  campis, 

arborijbuaque  colmae; 
miilat  1  lerta  vilces  ||  et  |  aecrea | cenliB  1  ripas 

flumina.  1  praetere|unt.  —  HOR.  Od,  iv.  7. 
[For  the  Fourth  Arohilochiaa  Strophe  (Archilochian  Heplameler,  alteniatinj*J 
wilh  iambic  trimeter  cataleclic),  see  f  372. 11.] 

4.   Iambic  Trimeter. 
365.   The   Iambic   Trimeter   is  the  ordinary  verse  of  J 
dramatic  dialogue.     It  consists  of  three  measures,  each  | 
containing  a  double  Iambus  {iambic  dipody).     Thus,  — 


It  is  seen  in  the  following  : 


•  efiica 


s|s. 


supplcK  el  5|to  regna  per  |  Proserpinae, 
per  et  Dialnae  non  in3ven|(]a  numina, 
'  p2r  alquE  li|br55  carminum  |  vilentiuin 

defixa  cac|lS  dSvac^jrS  udSra, 
Canidia  parlcS  vocibua  |  tandem  Mcris, 
cilumquS  re|lr3  retro  sallvS  lutblnem.  —  Yiav..  Epod.  l^. 

The  last  two  lines  may  be  thus  translated,  to  show  the  I 
movement  in  English  :  — 

"  Oh  !  stay,  Canidia,  slay  thy  rites  of  sorcery. 
Thy  charm  unbinding  backward  let  Ihy  swil^  wheel  fly ! " 
a.  The  Iambic  Trimeter  is  often  useii  in  lyric  poetry,  al 
with  the  Dimeter  to  form  the  Iambic  StrophA: 


412  Prosody:    Versification.  [§  369, 

b^tua  ajK!  qid  pr3cnl  [  nSgotus,  ^^| 

ut  piiscEL  gens  |  mortaliDiu,  ^^H 

paterna  culra  bubus  exjercet  suis,  ^^H 

soliitus  om|ni  fenorif; 

n£qu'  EXCitB|tur  cliaslco  |  miles  Cruel, 

nSqu'  liorret  i[rBluni  mat£.  —  HoR.  Epod.  z. 

b.  In  the  Iambic  Trimeter  aa  irralional  spondee  (> )  or  its  equiv- 
alent (a  cyclic  anaptest  kj  \j~  or  an  apparent  dactyl  >  ^^  ^j  (|  356./)) 
may  be  regularly  substituted  for  the  first  iambus  of  any  dipody.  A  Tri- 
brach (v/  (j  w)  niay  stand  for  an  Iambus  anywhere  except  in  the  last 
place. 

In  the  comic  poets  any  of  tliese  substitutions  may  be  made  in 
foot  except  the  last ;  as,  — 

O  lucis  al|mS  tectur  |I  eC  |  caelt  dSciist 

qui  alterna  cui-|ni  spatia  |l  Ramltnifei^^ambieDS, 

illdstre  laejtis  1|  fxsJEris  {  tents  caput. 

— Seneca,  Here.  Far.  592-94. 
quid  quaeiis  ?  an  |  nos  |I  sf  xagin  I  tS  nitus  es. 

—  Terence,  Heaul.  10. 
bomo  s"";   humijni  H  nihQ  a.  mP  aliliofini  pu(5. 
veI  mf  monejr/  hoc  n  v^  peicon|tatt  piita. 

— Ifcaut.  77,  78, 

c.  The  Choliambic  (Jaaie  famiic)  substitutes  a  trochee  for  the  last 
iambus :  as,  — 

aequ=  est  bealtuB  ac  poejma  cfira  scribitt 
tarn  gafidet  !□  |  se,  tdnique  s*  iplse  nuratur. 

— Catoll.  xxil.  15,  16. 

d.  The  Iambic  Trimeter  Catalectic  is  represented  as  follows :  — 

It  is  used  in  comblnatloa  with  other  measures  (see  j  372. 1 1),  and  is 
showaia  the  following!  — 

Vulciuus  ar|den9  uiit  ofl ficinas.  —  Hor.  Oif.i.4. 
or  in  English :  — 

"On  purple  peaks  a  deeper  shade  descending."  —  Scatt, 

Note, — The  Iambic  Trimelar  may  be  regarded,  melrically,  as  "a  single  fool" 
(its  time  being  represented  by  V)>  consisting  of  three  dlpodies,  and  bavtog  its 
principal  accent,  probably,  on  Ibe  second  syllable  of  Ibe  verse,  though  ibis  is 
mailer  of  dispute.    The  spondee  in  Ibis  verae,' 
irratieBol,  and  must  be  shortened  to  ta  toe 


I 

:Iasl 

1 


SS  366,  367.]  Other  Iambic  Measures. 

5.  Other  Iambic  Measttres. 

366.  Other  forms  of  Iambic  verse  are  the  following :  - 

a.  The  Iambic  Tetrameter  Cataleclic  {SepUnBrhis),    This  coikJ 
sts  of  seven  iambic  feet,  with  the  same  substitutions  as  in  lambicj 
Trimeter.     It  is  used  in  lively  dialogue :  as,  — 

nsHi  idcfrc^  arceslsor,  nfiptiSs  ]  quod  ml  £dplia|ri  stnsit. 
qmbus  quldlm  quam  facijl?  pdtuecat  ]  qmesci  si  hie  |  quiSsaeCI 
—  Ter,  Aitdria,  690,  691. 
The  rhytliin  of  the  Iambic  Septenarius  may  !«  thus  represented  I 
according  to  our  musical  notation  (see  p.  403,  foot-note  l) !  — 
llci^^„^|^v._..|^w_  wli An 

icircrPircr:ircrcirT-^i 

lis  movement  is  like  the  following :  — 
"In  goSd  ting  Charles's  gulden  days,  when  liSy  ally  no  hSrm  m 

—  Vicar  of  Bray, 
h.  The  Iambic  Tetrameter  Acatalectic  (DfWw^rjwf).    This  consists  J 
of  eight  full  iambic  feet  with  the  same  substitutions  as  in  Iambic  Tri-  \ 
Iter.    It  is  also  used  in  lively  dialogue :  as,  — 
hucin&t  hama|niim  f£ct*  aut  iii{cepti?  lii^cineat  oflfTcitim  pacrie? 
quid  (lliid  est?   pro  [  dedm  fidcm,  |  quid  eat,  si  h6c  nCn  CDn|IuniiliaBt? 
—  Andria,  236,  237. 
C.  The  Iambic  Dimeter,     This  may  be  either  acataleclic  or  catar-  \ 

I.  The  Iambic  Dimeter  Acatalectic  consists  of  four  iambic  feet.    It.l 

used  in  combinatioii  with  some  longer  verse  (see  §  365.  a). 

i.  The  Iambic  Dimeter  Ca tale ctic  consists  of  three  and  a  half  lambic'i 

feet    It  is  used  only  in  choruses:  as,— 

\'&.  Ma£nii, 
praecjps  lnio{r?  s3§vo, 
rapltdr  quod  im[potenli 
Ecindsparat  |  fiu-Sre?  —  Sen.  J/a/^ii,  850-853, 

6.   Trochaic  Verso. 

367.  The  most  common  form  of  Trochaic  verse  is  the  I 
Tetrameter  catalectic  {Septenarius),  cpnsj sting  of  four  1 
dipodies,  the  last  of  which  lacks  ^^|H^Jt  is  repre*  1 

seated  metrically  thus,  — 


[ 


aea 

I 


414  Prosody:    Versification.  [§§  367,  36a 

ll:l^_>l^v>_>  ll:Lw_>|^w_Ml 
or  in  musical  notation, 

ircrcircrcircrnrcr-i 

td  P  advenio,  spem,  salulcm,  II  cfinsili*""  adxaii""  expeten 
— Ter.  Andr. 

In  English  verse :  — 

"Tell  me  not  in  mournful  numbers  life  is  but  an  empty  dream." 

—  Longfillaai. 

a.  The  spondee  and  its  resolutions  can  be  substituted  only  In  the 
even  places;  except  in  comic  poetry,  which  allows  the  substitution  in 
any  foot  but  the  last :  as,  ^ 

Ftiidr'n  habet  pela|s«'"  Sc  vestitum:   [  tim  consinulist  |  atqu'  ego.   ^^H 
sfira,  pes,  sla|Iiirs^  tonsus,  )  dculi,  nasum,  |  vjl  labra,  ^^^k 

milae,  mentum,  |  blirba,  collus;    |  iStosI  quid  ver|b(s  opust?         ^^H 
si  lergum  d  { cttncoBum,  |  nihfl  hoc  similist  |  slmilius.  ^H 

—  Plaut.  Amphitr.  443-446. 

b.  Some  other  forms  of  trochaic  verse  are  found  in  the  lyric  poets, 
in  combination  with  other  feet,  either  as  whole  lines  or  parts  of  lines: 

n6n  ebur  ne|qu'  adreum.     [Dimelec  Catalectic.J  ^^H 

m^  renijdet  tn  domolla  dinar,     [Iambic  Trimeter  Catalectic.]  ^^| 

—  HoK.  fV.  ii.  t&^H 
7.  Mixed  Meaaaies. 

Note.  —  Different  measures  may  be  combined  in  Ihe  same  verse  in  two  difleiem 
ways.  Either  (i)  a  series  of  one  kind  is  simply  joined  to  a  seiies  of  another  kind 
(compare  the  changes  of  rhythm  not  uncommon  in  modem  miiHc)  ;  or  (3)  single 
feet  of  other  measures  are  combined  with  the  presailing  raeaaures.  in  whicli  case 
tliese  odd  feet  ate  adapted  by  changing  their  quantity  so  that  they  become  irratioHal 
(see  5  356,  Note). 

When  enough  measures  of  one  hind  occur  to  form  a  series,  we  may  suppose  a 
chan^  of  rhythm  ;  when  they  are  isolated,  we  must  suppose  adaptation.  Of  the 
indefinite  number  of  possible  combinations  but  few  are  found  in  Latin  poetry. 

368.  The  following  verses,  combining  tiiffercnt  rhyth- 
mical series,  are  found  in  Latin  lyrical  poetry :  — 

I.  Greater  Archilochian  (Dactylic  Tetrameter;  Trochaic 
Tripody)  :  — 

Il_i5c|_ivrjl_;^l^ooll_wl_ty  |_>ll 

Bolvitur  I  acrishi|emsgra|tirfce  II  viris  |  eC  Fa|voni.  — HoR.  Orf.  i.  4. 

,YoTE.  — It  is  possible  that  the  dact;)\s 'were  lJ^^l\lE^.^l^i■^bad^^a^|i  aim 

probable.        .  t 


5§  368-70.]  Logamdic   Verse.  415  J 

2.  Verse  consbting  of  Dactylic  Trimeter  caialectic  {padylic  Penr  I 
themim)\  Iambic  Dimeter:  — 

scribere  |  versicu|los  i|  amore  per]calsuni  iuvat.  —  id.  Ep.  l 

8.  Iiogaoedic  Verse. 

369.  Trochaic  verses  containing  in  regular  prescribed  I 
positions,  irrational  measures  or  irrational  feet,  are  called  I 
LoGAtEDic.     The  principal  logacedic  forms  are :  - 

1.  Logacedic  Tetrapody  (/oz«-/^i-/) :  Glyconic. 

2.  Logaffidic  Tripody  {Ihrecfest) :  Pherecratic. 

3.  Logacedic  Dipody  {tivo  feet) :  this  may  be  regar(3ed  as  a  shariA 
Pherecratic. 

Note.  —  Irrational  measures  are  those  In  which  the  syllables  &a  not  correspond' 
itrictlylQthenornial  ratio  of  length  (see  i  335).  Such  are  the /rrH^ioBo/S/BBi' 
(he  Cyclic  Dactyl.  This  mixture  of  various  ratios  of  length  gives  an  effect  approadi- 
ing  Ihat  of  prose;  hence  the  name  Logacedic  (Aifyoi,  ioiS^).  ~ 
originated  in  the  Greek  lyric  poetry,  and  were  adopted  by  the  Romans,  All  the 
Roman  lyric  metres  not  belonging  to  the  regular  iambic,  trochaic,  dactyli 
ayalems, were  conslrucled  on  the  basis  of  thethreefotrasgiven  above;  vi 
die  systems  consisting  respectively  of  four,  three,  and  two  feet.  The  so-called 
Logacedic /Vii'ti^t^  consists  of  live  feel,  but  is  to  be  regarded 
of  the  others, 

370.  Each  logaceciic  form  contains  a  single  dactyl,* 
which  may  be  either  in  the  first,  second,  or  third  place. 
The  verse  may  be  catalectic  or  acatalcctic.     Thus,  - 

Gfyionic.  PhtrecroHi. 

i.  ^  w  1  _  w  I  _  w  |_  (w)  II  ^  w  1  _  w  I  _  Cw)  II 

ii._w    |-^w|_wUCw31l^w   |^wl_C^)ll 

iii.  _w    |_w|^w|„Cw)ll^^|_(w)ll 

Note.  — The  shorter  Pherecratic  {rfi^oi^i) ,  if  catalectic,  appears  to  be  a  simple 

Choriambus  {_\j\j  1 A);  and,  in  general,  Ihe  effect  of  the  logacedic  forms  is 

Choriambic.  In  fact,  Ihey  were  so  regarded  by  the  later  Greek  and  Latin  melri- 
,  and  these  metres  have  obtained  the  general  name  of  CHOKIAMBIC,  But 
are  not  true  choriambic,  though  they  may  very  likely  have  been  feW  to  be  such 
by  the  composer,  who  imitated  the  forna  without  much  thought  of  Iheir  origin. 
'  may  be  read  (scaimed},  therefore,  on  that  principle.  But  it  is  better  to  read 
as  hgaadic  measures;  and  that  course  is  K:>llowed  here,  in  accordance  with 
lost  approved  opinion  on  the  subject. 

Different  Greek  poets  adopted  fixed  types  in  regard  lo  the  place  of  Ihe  dactyls, 
>o  a  large  number  of  verses  arose,  each  following  a. 
fcled  by  Ihe  Komans  as  distinct  metres. 


I 


4i6  Prosody:    Versification. 

371.   The  verses  constructed  upon  the  several  Logacedic 
forms  or  models  are  the  following : — 

1.  Glvconic  {Second  Glyconie,  catalectic)  \  — 

'-"|-"|-"|-"ri;ir5circir-<"r-^i 

Romae  [  prindpis  |  urbilum. 
In  English :  — 

"  Fonna  mote  real  than  living  raan."  —  Shellty. 
Note. — In  Ihis  and  most  of  the  succeeding  forms  ihe  first  foot  ii  alwiji 
irralional  in  Horace,  conasling  of  an  apparent  spondee  ( >). 

2.  AriSIOPHAnic  (First  Pherecratic)  :  — 

'--"'—'-^'c-ecircirn 

tempernt  [  oia  |  ftenia.  —  Hor. 

Note. — It  ii  very  Ufcely  that  this  was  made  equal  in  time  to  the  prece 
protracting  the  last  two  syllables  I  ihns, — 

"-"'-"'-i-^'Tscircifirii 

3.  AuoKic  {First  Pherecratic,  shortened)  :  — 

'--!-=•  cenrti 

Terrult  ]  urbero.  —  Hbr. 
Or  perhaps  t  — 

4.  Pherecratic  {Second  Pherecratic)  : — 

'-='-'"_"7^"'^'r_cic"5cir"ir^i 

eras  donaberis  haedo.  — ■  ffor. 

5.  Lesser  Asclepiadic  {Second  and  First  Pherecratic,  both  cata- 
lectic) ;  — 

MaecenSs  atavfs  Sdite  tJgiblSs.  —  Nor, 

6.  Greater  Asclepiadic  (the  same,  with  a  Logacedic  Dipo^  iai 
posed} :  — 

e  qunesieris  —  scire  neffis  —  quern  mihi  quem  tiU.  —  Har. 

7.  Lesser  Sapphic  {Logaiedic  Petttapody,  with  dactyl  in  ll 
place)  :— 

Il_^l_>l^^\_^l^la  AB 
(nteger  vitae  scE\ei\i.i\ue  ij4tu^.  —  Hor,  « 


^L         7.  Les 
^K  place)  :- 


I 

i 

.ingty 

I 

aU 

I 


f  371,  372.]  Melres  of  Horace. 

It  in  English:— 

"Brillisnt  hopes,  all  woven  in  EMgeoufl  tissues."  —  LangfiUow. 

8.  Greatek  Sapphic  {Third Glyconki  First  Pherecratic):- 

||_ul_>I^v^[i_ll^w|_wli_loAa 

iS  defls  oiS  Sybarin  ||  cftr  propctSs  amando.  —  Hor. 

I.  Lesser   Alcaic   {LogaiEdic  Tetrapo^,  two  dactyls,  tw 

vtginibfis  pucrfsque  canto.  —  Har. 
a  Englisli  (nearly) :  — 

"Blossom  by  blossom  the  Spring  begins."  —  Alalanla  in  Calydon. 
I.  Greater  Alcaic  {Logaadic  Pentapody,  catalectic,  with  Ana- 
■  crusis,  and  dactyl  in  the  third  place,  —  compare  Lesser  Sappkic) :  — 
U  ^  ■  _  v^  !  _  >  1 -^  vy  1  _  w  I  ^  A  II 
iust"™  *!t  tenScem  propositi  vitfim.  —  Nor. 
Note.  —  Only  the  above  XjigaiediE  forms  are  employed  by  Horace, 

11.  PhaLjECIAN  {Lagaasdic  Pentapody,  with  dactyl  in  the  second 
pbce):- 

ll^>l^wl_wl_wli_l_AII 

quaenani  1*  mala  mSns,  miselli  Riaidi, 

agit  praecipit'">  In  meos  iainbos? —  Calull,  xl. 

In  English: — 

"Gorgeous  flowerets  in  the  sunlight  shining."  —  Longfellow, 

12.  Glyconic  'V-iK-ES.Y.c^P^'ic  (^Metr urn  Satyr icufn):  — 

ll_wl^y^l_wll_II_wl^/wll_l_AII 
0  Col6nia  quae  cupis  ||  p6nte  liSdere  Iflngo.  —  Calull.  xvii. 

9.   Metres  of  Horace, 
372.   The  Odes  of  Horace  include  nineteen  varieties  of 

stanza ;  these  are ;  — 

I.  Alcaic,  consisting  of  two  Greater  Alcaics  (lo),  one  Trochaic 
Dimeter  with  anacrusis,  and  one  Lesser  Alcaic  (9) ' :  as,  — 

iiistim  et  lenacem  propqaid  vicflra 

non  cfvi"™  Srdor  prSva  iubentiilni 

non  vlSltus  Instantts  tyranni 

m^nte  quatft  solidi  nequ'  Adstcr.  —  Od.  iii.  3. 
(Found  In  Od.  i.  9,  16,  17,  26,  27,  29,  3t,  34,  35,  37:    ii.  i,  3,  5,  7, 9,  1 
13,14,15,17,19.20;   iii.  1.3,3.4,5,6,  17,21,33.36,29;   iv.4,  9,  14,  ij,), 

t  J  The  figures  refer  lo  the  ioreftoina'"!*  IJi'ST'i-'l- 


4i8  Prosody:    Versification.  \%  372. 

Note.  — The  AlcaJcSirophe  was  a  special  (avorite  with  Horace,  of  whose  Odes 
Ihirty-SEven  aje  in  lhl3  farm.'  It  is  somelinies  called  Ihe  Horatiaa  S/ania.  The 
verses  were  formerly  described  as,  I,  a.  spondee,  bacchius,  two  dactyls ;  3.  spondee, 
bacehius,  two  trochees;  4.  two  da.clyls,  two  irocbeES, 

3.  Sapphic  {minor),  consisting  of  three  Lesser  Sapphics  (7)  and 
one  Adonic  (3)  :  as, — 

ilm  sath  tents  nivis  Atque  dtrae  ^^m 

grindinrs  niTsIt  pater  et  nibfnte  ^^^U 

dfxterS  sacrSs  iaculitus  arces  ^^^| 

terruit  drbem.—  Oii.  L  2.  ^^| 

(Found  in  Od.  L  2,  10,  12,  20,  22,  25,  30,  31,  38;   ii.  2,  4,  6,  8,  10,  i6) 

iii.  8,  u,  14,  18,  20,  22,  27;    iv.  2,  6,  11.     Carm.  Sac.') 

Note.  — The  Sapphic  Slania  Is  named  after  the  poetess  Sappho  of  Lesbos, 

Odes — more  frequently  than  any  other  except  the  Alcaic  The  Ltsscr  S^kic 
vecsewas  formerly  described  as  consisting  of  aChorlamhus  preceded  by  a  trochaic 
dipody  and  followed  by  a  bacchius. 

3.  Sapphic  {major),  consisting  of  one  Aristophanic  (2)  and  one 
Greater  Sapphic  (S)  ;  as, — 

Lydia  dtc,  pec  6mnes 
iS  deoa  orS,  Sybarin  ci5r  propcr6s  amando.  —  Od.  i.  8. 

4.  AscLEPiADEAN  I.  {minor),  consisting  of  Lesser  Asclepiadies 
CS) :  as,- 

fciegi  monumSntKw  a^ce  pec^miillis 
tSgalfquE  si'i  —  pyramid""'  altilis.  —  Od.  iii.  30. 
(Found  in  Od.  !.  l;  iii.  30;  iv.  S.) 

5.  ASCLEPIABEAN  II.,  consisting  of  One  Glyconic  (l)  and  one 
Lesser  Asclepladic  (5)  :  as,  —  ^^1 

NSvis  quae  libi  creditdm  ^^| 

dtbea  Virgilidm,  — ffnihusAtdcfa  ^H 

rSddas  fncoluraem,  precdr,  ^^ 

^t  aervSs  animae  ~  dimidifira  meal,  —  Od.  i.  3, 

(Found  in  Od.  i.  3,  13,  19,  36;  iii.  9.  15,  19,  24,  25.  28;  iv.  1,  3.) 

6.  AscLEPiADEAN  111.,  Consisting  of  three  Lesser  Asclepiadies ,(< 
and  one  Glyconic  (i)  ;  as, — 

Qu's  deafderiS  sit  pudor  alSt  modds 
tim  cart  capitis? —  praecipe  lllgubtfe 
cinliis,  Melpomene,  —  cut  liquidam  patir 
v8cem  cfim  cythaiS  dedtt. —  Od.  i.  24, 
(Fonnd  in  0(1.  i.  6,  15,  24,  33;  Ii.  12;  iii.  10, 16;  Iy.  5, 12,) 

1  See  the  lndes\ie\ow  V??-  ^™.  'i**^' 


^d  i.  3. 

1;  iv.  I,  3.) 
Asclepiadies  ,CS^^ 


Metres  of  Horace. 

f.  AscLEPiADEAtr  IV.,  consisting  of  two  Lesser  Asdepiadics  (5),  I 
e  Pherecratic  (4),  and  one  Glycooic  (1)  :  as,  — 

O  (ons  Bindusia.^  spl jndidifr  vhrfi, 
dlilci  dtgnc  merS,  non  sine  floriUds, 
eras  donaberis  ba£d3 
col  frons  Ilirgida  cdriubds. —  Od. 
(Found  in  Od.  1.5,  14,  21,23;  '■•  7J  "i- ?•  ': 
1.  AscLEPiADEAN  V.  (major'),  consisting  of  Greater  Asdepiadics  I 

(ft  tie  quaes! eris  —  BcIce  nefSs!  —  quem  mihi,  qi 
ffncm  dt  dedertnt  —  LeSconoS  —  nic  BabjloniSs 
tfntarts  numerSs.  —  Od.  i.  1 1. 
(Found  in  Od.  L  11, 

g.  Alcmanian,  consisting  of  Dactylic  HcKameter  (g  362)  alteroadng  1 
with  Tetrameter  (§  364.  a).     (Od.  i.  7,  28 ;  Epod.  1 

10.  Arckildchian  I.,  coasisting  of  Dactylic  Hexameter  alteniat*  J 
ing  with  Trimeter  Catalecdc  {Dactylic  Fenthembn,  see  §  364.  i),l^ 
(Od.  iv.  7.) 

It.  Archilochian    IV.,   consisting    of   a     Greater     Archilochiau  I 

(hcptanuter,   §    368.    l),    followed    by    Iambic    Trimeter    Catalecdc  I 

(S  365'  ^)-     The  stanza  consists  of  two  pairs  of  verses:  as.- 

EiSlvitur  tcris  hiems  gritS  vice  []  VSris  et  Favdai, 

trahlintqiie  aiccos  m!icbinae  carinas; 
tc  neque  i&m  stabults  gaud^t  pecus,  ||  afit  arSlar  ^t, 
ncc  prita  citnis  filbicant  prutnis. —  Od.  i  4. 

12.  Iambic  Trimeter  alone  (see  §  365).    (Ep.  17.) 

13.  Iambic  Strophe  (see  §  365-  «)■     (Ep.  i-io.) 

14.  Dactylic  Hexameter  alternating  with  Iambic  Dimeter: 

n&t  erat,  £t  caelS  fulgebat  Iflna  serSno 

inter  minora  stdera, 
cfim  tii,  mSgnonSm  niimen  lacslSra  deSruni, 

in  verba  iiicabSs  raea.  —  Epod.  15.    (So  in  E 

15.  Dactylic  Hexameter  with  Iambic  Trimeter  (§  365) ;  a 

altera  iam  leritdr  bellfs  clvflihos  actas, 
suis  et  ipsa  E5ma  viribfis  ruit.  —  Epod,  16. 


16.  Verse  of  Four  Lesser  Ionics;  a 


ori  I  date  ludraa  \  T*CQp.t  &aici. 


Prosody :    X'ersificntion.  [§  372. 

:  Penthemim    (g  364.  b) ; 


8.  Dactylii 
(§  364.  b)  ■■  aa 


e  vereiculos  —  amflre  perculsfim  gravi,  —  Epod.  I 
Hexameter;    Iambic  Dimeter;    Dactylic 


hdnida  tfmpestts  caelflm  conti&iit,  ct  Imbres 
nivSsque  deducdnt  lovem:  nflnc  mare,  nfinc  ailOae.  .  . 
_  Epod.  1 


» 


ig.  Trochaic   Dimeter,   Iambic 

Trimeter,  eacli    catalect 

j.b). 

INDEX  TO  THE 

Lib, 

,  :. 

pF  HORACE. 

1.  Maecenas  alavis :  4. 

ao. 

Vilepotabis;  a. 

3.  lamEaOsterrii:  a. 

Dianam  lEEerae:  7, 

3.  Siowaifars. 

33. 

Integer vitae;  a. 

4.  Solvimracrishiemsr  11. 

33. 

Vitas  hinnuieoi  7. 

S.   Quismulta:  7. 

Qiiisde5iderio;6. 

6.  ScriberisVarioi  6. 

35. 

Parcius  iunclas:  a. 

7.  Laudabuntalii:  9. 

36. 

Musis  amicus:  r. 

8.  Lydiadic:3. 

az- 

Natisinusum:  i. 

9.  Videsulala:  i. 

28. 

Te  maris:  9. 

10.  Mercmi  bcnnde  nepos:  s. 

=9- 

IccibeaHs:  i. 

II.  Tunequaesietis:  B. 

3°- 

0  Venus:  a. 

13.  Quem  viium :  a. 

Bi- 

Poscimur; a. 

14.   0  navis :  7. 

as- 

AIbi  ne  doleas :  6. 

IS,   Pastor  cum  iraherel:  6. 

34- 

Patcus  deorum;  i. 

16.  Omatrepulcra:  i. 

33- 

0  diva:  I.  ■ 

17.  Velou  amoenum  :  i. 

36. 

Et  ihure :  5. 

18.  NullamVare:  8. 

37- 

19.  Mater  saeva:  s- 

Persicosodi:  a. 

.  Motum  ex  Metell 


4.   Ne  sit  ancillaE :  a. 

■4- 

Eheufugaces:  i. 

S.  Nondumsubacta:  i. 

^5- 

lampauca:  i. 

6.  Scptimi  Cades:  2. 

16. 

OliumdiToa;  i. 

7.  Osaepemecum:  I. 

8.  UUflsiiuris;  a. 

Nonebur:  19. 

9.   Non  semper  Imhtes;  1. 

.  ■6awi.um'm.i«»B«M 

a.   Rectius  vives'  3- 

a.  ■»oTi«4ttB\a.-.  l.^B 

' 

' 

H  372.  373.]         Index  to 

Metr£S  of  Horace.                     421 

Ub.  rii. 

1.  Od<  profanum  :  I. 

■6.   Indu5amDanaen:  6. 

a,  Anguslamamic-e;  i. 

.7.  Aeliveiuslo;  i. 

iB.  Fauna  nympharum ;  2. 

4-   Descendecaelo:  i. 

19.  Quantum  distet  r  5. 

5-  Caelalonamem:  i. 

ao.  Non  vides:  3. 

6.  Delinamaiorum:  i. 

7-  Quid  fles !  ^. 

33.  Montium  cuslos:  a. 

B.  Martiiscaelebs:  a. 

33.  Caelosupinas:  i. 

9.  Donee  Eratus ;  5. 

W.  ExtremumTanaln:  & 

as-   Quo  me  Bacche :  5. 

a6.  Vixipuellis:  i. 

la.  Miseraruraest:  i5. 

a7.    Impiosparrae:  a. 

13.  0  foD5  Bandusiae!  7. 

aB.  Festoquid;  3. 

14.  Hetculisrilu:  2. 

ag.  Tynhena  regum ;  I. 

15.  Uxor  pBupeiis ;  5. 

Lib.  IV. 

I.   Inlermissa  Venus:  5. 

9.  Ne  forte  credas!  1. 

a.   Plndanim  qui^uis:  3. 

10.  Ocniddissdhuc;  8. 

3.  Quern  lu  Melpomene;  5 

II.  Estmihinonum:  3. 

4.  Qualemminiswum:  i. 

13.   lamveriscomilesre. 

5.   Dlvis  orte  bonus  r  6. 

13.  Audivere  Lyce:  7. 

6.  Dive  quem  proles :  2. 

14.  Qua  ciira  pattum:  i. 

7.  Diffi^ereniyes;  10. 

15.  Phoebus  volenlem  :  i. 

8.  Donarem  paleias ;  4. 

Carmm  Satculart:  2. 

Epodes. 

I.  njlsIJbuniiSi  13. 

IQ.  Malaaoluta:  13. 

0.  Beatusille:  13. 

II.   Pecti nihil:  17. 

3,  Parentis  olim:  13. 

13.   Quid  libi  vis:  9. 

4.  Lupiselagnis;  13. 

13.   Horrida  lempeslas ;  18. 

5.  Al  0  deonini :  13. 

14.  MolUs  inertia:  14. 

6.  Quidimmerenles:  13. 

7.   Quoquoseelesti:  13. 

16.  Altera  iara:  15. 

a,   Rogare  longo:  13. 

17.  lamiameaicad:  la. 

9.  Quanda  reposcum :  13. 

873.   Other  lyric  poets  use  other  combinations  of  the  ^| 

above-mentioned  verses. 

Thus,-                                         H 

a.  Glyconics  with  one  Pherecratic  (both  imperfect) :  m,  —                  ^^ 

Di5|na 

sumus  1  in  fidE                                                        ^H 

pud  11- 

etpuerMinl^gri:                                           ,^H 

Dialna 

■a,  piierl  |  inlegri                                                ^| 

puelllaeque  ca|na|niuB Catull.  34.                  ^H 

A  Jfl/>A/M,Inaseriesofs 

ngle  lines,  closing  with  an  Adonici  as,  —    ^H 

^^^^^                Anmalgiaili 

ri  ttEm\i\eie  \  Maiiei                           ^^^^^^B 

^^^^L 

\  sum  c^ia  \  VnKVotxmx             ^^^^H 

li 


Prosody :    Versification.  [5§  373,  OT*. 

fn^t  I  abrapltis  trSpildus  cSltenis? 
fsllilmuti  laeltevenit  ]  eccX  \  vultu, 
qnein  lu  I  lit  Pae  I  as ;   liumelrisque  |  tela 
gestat  I  et  n5|tEs  popullts  phalcFtras 

Hercnlis  1  hires.  —  Sen.  If/rr.  (El.  1600-6. 


c.  Sapphics  followed  by  Glyeonics,  of  indefinite  number  (id.  Hi 
Fur.  830-874,  875-894). 


^gj^_ 


10.   Miscellaneous. 
374.    Other  measures  occur  in  various  styles  of  poetry: 
viz.,  — -^ 

a.  ANAP.ESTIC  verses  of  various  lengths  are  found  in  dramatic 
poetry.  The  spondee,  dactyl,  or  proceleusmatic  may  be  substituted 
for  the  anapsst:  as,— 

hie  homo3t  |  omnixm  homilnum  praelcipiios 
Toliiplaltibus  ^u|i!iTsqu<  an{t£p5tens,  ^k 

ita  comlmoda  quae  {  cupi^  e{veiiiunt,  ^| 

quod  ago  |  s^lut.  ad  |  secue  |  sSquIlur :  ^| 

itaEBuldium  suplpEditat.  —  PiAirr.  Trin.  1115-19.  I 

b.  Bacckiac  verses  (five-timed)  occur  In  the  dramatic  poets,  —  very 
rarely  in  Terence,  more  commonly  in  Plautus,  —  either  in  verses  of 
two  feet  (Dimeter)  or  of  four  (Tetrameter).  They  are  treated  very 
freely,  as  are  alt  measures  in  early  Latin.  The  long  syllables  may  he 
resolved,  or  the  molossus  (three  longs)  substituted :  as,  — 

multaa  res  1  simit*  in  1  meo  corldg  vorso, 
mult""  in  colgifando  |  dolor""  ioldipiscor 
egdmet  mc  |  cog^  et  malcec*  et  de|fatigo; 
niSgister  t  niih'  exer|dl6r  i.m|mus  nunc  est 

—  PiAUT.  Trin.  213-226. 

€.  Cretic  measures  occur  in  the  same  manner  as  the  Baccbiac,  with 
the  same  substitutions.     The  last  foot  is  usually  incomplete:  as, — 

amor  amilcus  tnihi  1  ne  fias  |  unquam. 
his  ego  I  d'  artibua  |  gralinm  |  facio. 
ni!  gg"  isltos  moror  |  faeecos  1  mores.  — id.  267,  293,  297. 

d.  Saturnian  Verse.    In  early  Latin  is  found  a  rede  form  of  w 
not  borrowed  from  the  Greek  like  the  others.    The  rhythm  is  Iambic 
Tetrameter  (or  Trochaic  with  Anacrusis),  but  the  Arsis  is  often  sjnt 
pzted,  especially  in  the  m\dd\e  aoA  a*.  \\\&  ctiA  at  vhe  verse ;  as,  — 
dabfint  1  raaWm  \  ■^IrteWW  — WSs.fe-A\^i^\;a>*- 


■ 

rilh 


L 


5  375.]  Early  Prosody. 

11.   Early  Prosody. 
375.   The  prosody  of  the  earher  poets  differs  in  severa 
respects  from  that  of  the  later.^ 

a.  At  the  end  of  words  s  was  only  feebly  sounded,  so  that  it  dc 
not  makt:  position  with  a  following  consonant,  and  b  sometimes  cut 
before  a  vowel.  This  usage  continued  in  all  poets  till  Cicero's  tii 
(§  347'  «)■ 

b.  The  last  syllable  of  any  word  of  two  syllables  may  be  made  shi 
if  the  £rst  is  short.    (This  eifect  remained  in  a  few  words  like  pnti^ 
oavS,  valB,  vidB;  cf.  §348.)    Thus, — 

Ibeal  (Ciii,  ii.  I.  12);  apiid  test  (^Trin.  196);  s3r5r  dxctast  fBWu.  157I] 
honas  (^Slich.  99);  domi  dSaeque  (^Psiud.  371;  dami  (^Mil.  194). 

:.  In  the  same  way  a  long  syllable  may  be  shortened  when  precedf 
by  a  short  monosyllable :  as,  — 

Id  &t  profecto  (jl/<"/-f.  372);  5ril  et  tib' Sioptatum  (jW/.  1011);  m  quid' 
h3rcle  (^Ji«,  414);   quid  esl  si  hoc  {jhidria,  237). 

d.  In  a  few  isolated  words  position  is  oftea  dbregarded.*  Such  a; 
Hie,  jHte,  lode,  llnde,  nempe,  Sase  ( ?).    Thus,  — 

Acquis  his  in  aedibuEl  ^Baeih.  5S1). 

e.  In  some  cases  the  accent  seems  to  shorten  a  syllable  preceding 
a  word  of  more  than  three  syllables,  as  in  BenSctriltr,  SyrScfiaae. 
/.  At  the  beginning  of  a  verse  many  syllables  long  by  position  stao 

for  short  ones :  as,  — 

idne  tii  (,Pseud.  442);  eslne  consiinilis  {Epid.  v.  i.  18). 
g.  The  original  long  quantity  of  many  final  syllables  b  retained. 
Thus;  — 

Final  -a  of  the  £rst  decletision  b  often  long :  as,  — 

nl  eplstultt  quid""  fllla  sit  In  aedibus  {Asin.  762), 
Final  -a  of  the  neuter  plural  is  sometimes  long  (though  there 
seems  no  etjTnological  reason  for  it)  :  as, — 

ndnc  et  amico  ]  prosperab'  cl  I  gfnio  meo  mul  |  ta  bona  faciam  (^P'rs.  2G3] 

1  Before  the  I.atin  language  was  used  ia  lilemture,  il  had  become  macb  changet 
by  the  lou  of  final  consonants  and  the  shortening  uf  final  syllables  under  the 
influence  of  accent  (which  was  originally  free  in  its  posilion,  bul  in  Latin  became 
limited  lo  the  penult  and  antepenult),  lliis  tendency  was  arrested  by  the  study  of 
grammar  and  by  liierature,  but  shows  itself  again  in  the  Romance  languages.    In 

Ihis  change  was  slill  in  piogiess  in  <,he  ime  c>{\\ke  ^i^.tV)  '^ot^. 

3  are  nolyel  agreed  upon  the  principte  at Vne  eiJ.tWiA'Wa\Tt'aei«i«' 


424  Prosody:    Versification. 

3.  The  ending  -or  b  retained  long  in  nouns  with  long 
(original  r-stems  or  original  a-stems)  :  as,  — 

mi^do  qiiom  diet"  in  mt  ingerebis  6diuni  non  iix5r  eram  (Adn.  937). 
i\3.  m'  in  pcctoir  itque  coide,  facit  amQr  incendium  {Merc.  500). 
aique  quanto  n^  fuisti  16iigi5r  hiic  prdxumi  {Ampk.  548). 


4.  The  termination  -ea  (-itifl)  is 
mllfiB,  HuperstSs. 

5.  All  verb-endings  in  -r,  -o,  and  -1 
vowel  is  elsewhere  long  in  inflection : 


1 


retained   long, 
may  be  retained  long  where  the 


gredi5r«ud 


^udtsse  me  {Capl.  loaj);  £lqu<  ut  a4  Tueris  et  qui  nunc  (id 
e  nSniinat  haec  {Epid.  iv.  I.  8);  faciat  ut  semper  {Poen.  iL 
^£)\  infuscabal,  amiba  (Crctics,  Cist.  L  at);  qui  amel  {_Mert.  1021); 
at  nt  in  bcllo  capitur  alter  filius  ((Tn//.  35);  tibi  sit  nd  me  revtul 
(J-™.:.  11.4.79).. 


h.  The  hiatus  is  allowed  very,  fteely,  especially  a 
ense,  or  when  there  is  a  change'of  the  speaker.' 


among  scholars ;  hut  in 


b^       J 

^^^M  MISCELLANEOUS.  ^^H 

1.   Reckoning  of  Time.  ^H 

Note,— The  Roman  Yaar  whs  designaled,  in  earlier  limes,  byihe  names  of  the  ^^ 
insula;  bul  was  afletwMls  reckoned  from  the  building  of  thenar  (oj  Hrie 
tfendita,  axni  uriii  coniiiiae) ,  the  dale  of  which  was  assigned  by  VarWio  a  period 
correaponding  with  B.C.  753.  In  order,  therefore,  to  reduce  Romun  dates  to  those 
of  the  Christian  era,  titytar  of  the  city  iilo  hi  avbtracted  from  754:  e.g.  A-U-CCgi 
f  (the  year  of  Cicero's  consulship)  =  B.C  63. 

Before  Cesar's  reform  of  the  Calendar  {B.C.  46),  the  Roman  year  consisted  of 
355  daysi  March,  May,  Quintilis  0"'y)i  ""^  October  having  each  31  days;  Feb- 
ruary havhig  aS, and  each  of  the  remainder99.  As  this  Cajendar  year  was  loo  short 
for  (he  solar  year,  the  Romans,  in  Bltemate  yaarSial  the  discretion  of  the  Pontifices, 
inserted  a  month  of  varying  length  (mSniii  iaitrcalSrii)  aiter  February  23.  and 
omitted  the  rest  of  February,  , The  "Julian  year,"by  Cesar's  reformed  Calendar, 
bad  365  days,  divided  into  maaths  as  at  present.  Every  fourth  year  the  a4lh  of 
February  (vl.  leal.  Mart.)  wa^  counted  twice,  givinf  29  days  to  that  month ;  hence 
Ibe  year  was  called  BisajcfiHs.  The  month  Quintltis  received  (he  name  fiiliai 
(July),  In  honor  of  Julius  Ciiesar;  and  Senilis  was  called  .^it^vifiu  (August),  in 
bonor  of  his  successor.    The  Julian  year  [see  below)  remained  unchanged  till  the 

Bdoption  of  the  Gregorian  C^endar  (A.D.  1582),  which  omics  leap-year  three  times 

Jn  every  four  hundred  years.  I 

37G.    Datfe,    according    to    the    Roman    Calendar,    arcB 
reckoned  as  follows  :^  I 

a.  The^nt  day  of  the  month  wa-s  called  Kalendae  (Calends).  I 
Note.  — Kalendae  is  derived  from  CEtl&re,  lo  fa//,  — the  Calends  being  tbaJ 

day  on  which  the  pontiffs  publidj  announced  the  New  Moon  in  the  CsmiHa  Caim^-M 
which  Ihey  did,  originally,  from  actual  observation.  M 

b.  On  ^tf-fteenth  day  of  March,  May,  July,  and  October,  but  the  /Au^ 
UtHth  of  the  other  motiths,  were  the  Idus  {Ides'),  the  day  of  Full  Mood.  I 

C.  On  the  seventh  day  of  March,  May,  July,  and  October,  but  the 
fiflh  of  the  other  months,  were  the  NSnae  {Nones  or  ninths). 

d.  From  the  three  points  thus  determined,  the  days  of  the  month 
were  reckoned  backwards  as  so  many  days  before  the  Nones,  the  Ides, 


or  the  Calends.  The  point  of  departure  was,  by  Roman  ci 
in  the  reckoning,  the  j«:(>«rf  day  being /ArMilays  before,  e 
the  following  rule  for  determining  the  date  -.  — 


r 


426 


Miscellaneous. 


If  the  given  date  be  Calends,  add  two  to  the  number  of  days  in  th 

month  preceding,  ^  if  Nones  or  Ides,  add  one  lo  that  of  the  day  d' 

which  they  fall,  —  and  from  the  number  thus  ascertained  subtract^ 

given  date :  thus,  —  J 

viii.  Kal.  Feb.  (33  -  8)  -  Jan.  as.  I 

iv.  Non.  Mar.  (B -4) -Mar.  4.  ^ 

iv.Td.  Sepl.  [14-4) -Sept.  la  ' 

For  peculiar  constructions  in  dates,  see  §  259.  e. 
e.  The  days  of  the  Roman  montli  by  tlie  Julian  Calendar,  as  thu 
ascertained,  are  given  in  the  following  Table :  — 

I.  Kal.  toj.        Kai_  Feb. 

a.  IV.  Non.  lan.    IV.  Non.  Feb 


March. 

Kal.  Martiae 

VI.  Non.  Miitl. 


4.  prtd.  ■*       "       prid. "       " 

5.  NoM.  Ian,       N6n.  Feb. 

6.  viii.  Ta  ISn.     Vlll.  Id.  Feb. 


Non.  AprIlK^ 
VIII.  Td.  Apr, 


ijs  IXn.        Idus  Feb. 

K.  KaL  Feb.  xvi.  Kal.  Marliis 


Note.  — Observe  that  a  date  before  Ihe  Julian  Reform  (B.C.  46)  la  K 
not  by  the  above  lable.  but  by  taking  Ihe  earlier  reckoning  of  Ihe  number  of  di 
In  the  moalh. 


4Z]S 

,  but 

■0- 

-half 

1 


5S  377-ai.]  Measures  of  Value,  etc. 

2.  MeastiTes  ofValue,  eto. 

377.  The  money  of  the  Romans  was  in  early  times  wholly  of  cc^^ 
per.    The  unit  was  the  as,  which  was  nominally  a  pound  in  weight,  but 
actually  somewhat  less.     It  was  divided  into  twelve  uuciae  (puttees). 

In  the  third  century  b.C.  the  Ks  was  gradually  reduced  to  one-hall 
of  its  original  value.    In  the  same  century  silver  coins  were  introducedM 
—  the  Dinarius  and  the  Sestertius.     The  Denarius  = 
Sestertius  =  2}j  asses. 

378.  The  Sestertius  was  probably  Introduced  at  a  time  when  the  ■ 
Ss  had  been  so  far  reduced  that  the  value  of  the  new  coin  (2^  asses) 
was  equivalent  to  the  original  value  of  the  3b.  Hence,  tht^estertius 
(usually  abbreviated  to  liSor  HS)  came  to  be  used  as  the  unit  of  value, 
and  nummuB,  coin,  often  means  simply  seslertius.  As  the  reduction  of 
the  standard  went  on,  the  sestertius  became  equivalent  to  4  asses. 
Gold  was  introduced  later,  the  aureus  being  equal  to  loo  sesterces. 
The  value  of  these  coins  is  seen  in  the  following  table :  — 

z^  asses  =  i  sestenjus  or  nummas  (ks),  value  nearly  5  cents. 
10      asses  or  4  seiterlii  =  I  denarius ..."         "      30    " 

Note.  — The  word  BSetertlua  is 
ttirrf  one,  a  half.  The  abbreviation  11! 
iaif. 

379.  The  Sfistertiiim  (probably  originally  the  genitive  plural  of 
■Catertius)  was  a  sum  of  money,  not  a  coin;  the  word  is  inflected 
regularly  as  a  neuter  noun ;  thus,  tria  sSstertia  =  $150,00. 

When  sestertium  is  combined  with  a  numeral  adverb,  centina  mllia,  i 
hundreds  of  thousands,  is  to  be  understood :  thus  deciins  sesferiiumm 
(deciins  hs)  =  f  so-ooo. 

In  the  statement  of  large  sums  sestertium  is  often  omitted:  thutl 
texSgilns  (Rose.  Am.  2)  signifies,  sexagiens  \cenliua  mliia^  sestertium^ 
(6,000,000  sesterces)  =  $300,000  (nearly). 

380.  In  the  statement  of  sums  of  money  In  cipher,  a  line  abowa 
the  number  indicates  thousands ;  lines  above  and  at  the  sides  al3<v9 
hundred-thousands.      Thus  HS.  DC.  =  600  sistcrtU ;  HS,  DC  =  6oo,oo*J 
tlsterlif,  or  600  slstertia ;  h.S.  [dc]  -  60,000,000  slslertit. 

381.  The  Roman  Measures  of  Length  are  the  following!  — 
13  inches  (uneiae)  —  1  Roman  Foot  {pis  .■  I  r.65  English  inches). 

Iji  Feet  =  I  Cubit  (rt(*iV«w).  — 2}^  Feel=  1  Degree  or  Step  (fra^nsV 
J  Feet  -  I  Pace  (^sjjhs). —  looo  ¥acw  (_iniU(  f  as5uum^  = 


'T 


The  Roman  mile  was 

The  Ifigiritm,  or  unit 

leet  long  and  120  broad 


Miscellaneous, 


[S5  3 


4850  English  feet 
of  land,  was  an  area,  of  240  (Ron 
little  less  than  |  of  an  English  acre. 


382.  The  Measures  of  Weight  are  — 

12  unciae  jounces)  —  one  pound  Qiira,  about  \  lt>.  avoirdupois). 
Fractiotial  parts  (weight  or  coin)  are  — 

1.  (A).  «»«■<..  5.  i^^-),qutncun:c.  9.  {%■),  dodrSnl. 

2.  Ci),  sexlin,.  6.  (S),  ""."".  »0.  (I),  d.xia,,^. 

3.  Q).fHaJra?u.  7.   Wi),  "J>"""-  "■  (!!).■'"""■ 

4.  (i)^rKw.  8.  Cf),WM».  la.  a». 

The  Talent  {laletilum)  was  a  Greek  weight  (roAaiTtni)  =  60  lih-ae.  \ 

383.  The  Measures  of  Capacity  are  — 

1 2  c^alhi   =  I  sixiarius  (neaAy  a  pint). 
16  seiiliiii=  I  modius  (peck), 
6  aeitarit  =  1  congius  (3  quarts,  liquid  measare)> 


384.   The  following  are  SOI 

ne  of  the  commonest  abbreviations  found 

1  Latin  inscriptions  and  somei 

times  in  editions  of  the  classic  authors. 

A.,  absotvo,  nnAfuo. 

P.  C,patrfs  conscriph. 

A.  v.,  aiiao  uriis. 

^\..pmu.                         ^m 

A.  u.  c,  ai  urbe  condita. 

pont.  msx.,  pentifix  maximas.       ^^^| 

pQp.,/0/«/»J.                                                       ^H 

cai.,cBHsul(,consuU). 

P.  R.,p<'pulus  Komantis.                   ^^^ 

COS!.,  eonsuHs  (coHoiHbus). 

pr.,firatA>r. 

D.,  dtvus. 

pToc.praidnjii/. 

D.  D.,  dond  dedit. 

Q.  B.  F.  F.  Q.  s.,  good  ienum  fitia 

D.  D.  D.,  dal,  dical,  didicat. 

fauslumgui  sil.                                 _^^ 

des^  dcagnatus. 

Quic,  Qu'inSs.                                ^^1 

D.  M.,  i/ii  manfj. 

resp.,  respibluo,  rtspondtl.             ^^H 

eq.  Rom.,  eques  Romania. 

S.,  satiilem,  sacrum,  stnatus.          ^^| 

¥.,filiu!,fastus. 

s.  c,  scnalus  consHllum. 

Ictus.,  iurisconsullui. 

s.  D.  P.,  salulem  didi  pliriinam. 

Id.,  Idm. 

S.  P.  Q.  R,  5^«a/«i  Papulusqui  Hi- 

imp.,  imperalar. 

manas. 

1. 0.  M.,  /i^  0^010  maxima. 

s.  V.  B.  E.  B.  v.,  li  fOi&t  f^H/  enl,  igc 

valto. 

N.,  ne/ffs,  Hi/aslut. 

V\.  ^^.,  ti-itimu  f  Siti, 

S.L.,„3nligu.l. 

\3.(U.f.^),uliri>eu.    ^^^^^^H 

GLOSSARY 

OF    TERMS    USED    L 


Note.  —  Many  of  these  tenna  are  pedantic  names  given  by  early  grammariansfl 
to  forms  of  speech  used  naturally  by  writers  who  were  not  conscious  that  they  we: 
using  figures  at  all — as,  indeed,  they  were  not.    Thus  when  one  says,  "  It  gave  n 
no  little  pleasure,"  he  is  unconsciously  uung  Ulotes;  wheo  he  says,  "John  weiit4 
op  [he  street,  James  down,"  AtitiiheHs;  when  he  says,  "  High  as  the  sky,"  Hyptry^ 
Hie.   Many  were  given  under  a  mistaken  notion  of  the  nature  of  tlie  usage  referred ~n 
to.    Thus  mSd  and  tSd  (\  98.  c)  were  supposed  to  owe  ihdr  d  to  Paragtgt, 
eDmpsI  its  p  to  Epenlhtiis.   Such  a  sentence  as  "  See  my  coat,  how  well  it  iits  I " 
was  supposed  lo  be  an  irregularity  to  he  accounted  for  by  Pntepsis, 

Many  of  these,  however,  are  convenient  designations  for  phenomena  which  often 
ir;  and  most  of  them  have  a  historic  interest,  of  one  kind  or  another. 

3S5.    I,  GrammAticai.  Terms. 

Anacoluihom  a  chatige  of  construction  in  the  same  sentence,  leaving' I 
the  first  part  broken  or  unfinished. 
'   Anastrophes  inversion  of  the  usual  order  of  words. 

Apodosiss  the  conclusion  of  a  conditional  sentence  (see  Protasis), 

Archaism  i  an  adoption  of  old  or  obsolete  forms. 

Asyrtdeions  omission  of  conjunctions  (§  2o8.  b). 

Barbarisms  adoption  of  foreign  or  unauthorized  forms. 

Brackylqgy:  brevity  of  expression. 
.  Crasis:  contraction  of  two  vowels  kito  one  (§  10.  c). 

Ellipsis:  omission  of  a  word  Or  words  necessary  to  complete  the  sense  I 
'  (§  177.  note). 

Enallage:  substitution  of  one  word  or  form  for  another. 

Eptnthesisi  insertion  of  a  letter  or  syllable  (§  ir.  c). 

Hellenism :  use  of  Greek  forms  or  constructions. 
j  Hindiadys  {%v  iA  Ivoiv)  :    the  use  of  two  nouns,  with  a  conjunction,  J 
,  instead  of  a  single  modified  n 

I   Jiypallage:  interchange  of  C' 

Hysleron  protiron :  a  reversing  of  the  natural  order  of  ideas. 

This  term  was  applied  to  cases  where  the  natural  sequence  of  events  is  violated 

in  language  because  the  later  event  is  of  more  importance  than  the  earlier  and  so 

comes  first  to  Ihe  mind.    This  was  supposed  lo  be  an  atliiicial  embellishment 

in  Greet,  ond  so  was  imitated  in  I^tin.     It  is  u\\\  to\m&.  va  uC«£&  T>xm!»t«~t  >&■ 

"Bred  and  Bom  in  a  Brier  Bush  "  (Uncle  Remua>.  j 


430  Glossary. 

Metathisht  transposition  of  letters  in  a  word  (§  ii.  d). 

Paragogei  addidon  of  a  letter  or  letters  to  the  end  of  a  word. 

Partnthesist  insertion  of  a  phrase  interrupting  the  ci 

Periphrasis  !  a  roundabout  way  of  expression  (circumltKution). 

Pleonasm:  the  use  of  needless  words. 

Polysyndeton  i  the  use  of  an  unnecessary  number  of  copulative  con- 
junctions. 

Prolepsis  i  the  use  of  a  word  in  the  clause  preceding  the  one  where  it 
would  naturally  appear  {anticipaSion). 

Protasis  t  a  clause  introduced  by  a  conditional  expression  {if,  ivken, 
■whoever),  leading  to  a  conclusion  called  the  Apodosis  (§  304). 

Syncope:  omission  of  a  letter  or  syllable  from  the  middle  of  a  word 

(§■'•«)■ 

Synesis  {cdnstrUctid  ad  sinsum):  agreement  of  words  according  to  the 

sense,  and  not  the  grammatical  form  (§  182). 
Tmesis;  the  separation  of  the  two  parts  of  a  compound  word  by  other 

words  {cutting). 

This  term  came  from  the  Earlierseparatjon  of  prepositions  (originally  adverbs) 
froni  ihe  verba  with  which  ihey  were  afterwards  joined ;  so  in  per  ecestorscItUB 
ly\iBT,avery_^iiiy,fgjdt    As  Ihis  was  supposed  [0  be  inlentional,  ii  was  ignoranily 

ated  in  Latin;  as  in  cere- oomminult -brum  (Ennius). 
Zeugma:  the  use  of  a  verb  with  two  different  words,  to  only  one  of 

which  it  strictly  applies  {yoking). 


386.     II.   Rhetorical  Figures. 


Allegory:  a  narrative  in  which  abstract  ideas  figure  as  circumstances, 

events,  or  persons,  in  order  to  enforce  some  moral  truth. 
AllileratioH  :  the  use  of  several  words  that  begin  with  the  same  sound. 
Analogy:  argument  from  resemblances. 

Anaphora :  the  repetirion  of  a  word  at  the  beginning  of  successive 
clauses  (§  344./).  ~ 

Antithesiss  opposition,  or  contrast  of  parts  (for  emphasis :  §  344)1 
Antonomasia  :  use  of  a  proper  for  a  common  noun, 

Bint  Maecenatia  non  deernnt  Flucce  Maronla,  so  there  be  falrens  (lI 

Maecenas) ,  foets  (like  Virgil)  will  not  hi  lacking. 
ilia,  fiiria  et  peatis,  l/ial  fury  and  plagiie  {i.e.  Cbdius) ;  Homeronuutix, 
scourge  of  Homer  (i.e.  Zoilus). 
Aposiapeiis :  an  abrupt  pause  for  rhetorical  effect. 
Catachresis :  a  harsh  metaphor  (abiisis,  misuse  of  words). 
CAiasmus!  a  reversing  of  the  OYder  of  words  in  corresponding  paire  of 
ies(§344-/)- 


.  ni^^ 


Glossary. 

'!  a  gradual  increase  of  emphasis,  or  enlargement  of  meaning. 
\. Euphemism :  the  mild  ftiq>ression  of  a  painful  or  repnlsive  idea;  as, —  | 

to,  quid  el  accident,  if  anylJiing  kapptHS  io  Mm  {i.e.  if  he  dies). 
m^phonyt  the  choice  of  words  for  their  agreeable  sound. 
\Hyperbatcm!  violation  of  the  usual  order  of  words. 
^iJyperboU :  exaggeration  for  rhetorical  effect. 
^ony:  the  use  of  words  which  naturally  convey  a  sense  contrary  b 

WUtotes :  the  affirming  of  a  thing  by  denying  its  contrary  (§  209.  c). 
T  Metaphori  the  figurative  use  of  words,  indicating  an  object  by  som 
resemblance. 
Melanymy:  the  use  of  the  name  of  one  thing  to  indicate  some  kindred   | 

thing. 
Onomatop<Eia :  a  fitting  of  sound  to  sense  in  the  use  of  words. 
Oxym&ron  ;  the  use  of  contradictory  words  in  the  same  phrase ;  ; 

InBaniens  aapientia,  fooluh  leisdom. 
Paronomasia!  the  me  of  words  of  like  sound. 
Prosopopmiai  personification. 
Synchysis:  the  interlocked  order  (§  344.  ^), 
Synecdoche:  the  use  of  the  name  of  a  part  for  tlie  whole,  or  the  reverse.  | 


387.     111.  Terms  of  Prosody. 

I  Acaialtctic:  complete,  as  a  verse  or  a  series  of  feet  (§359.  a). 

I  Anaclasisi  breaking  up  of  rhythm  by  substituting  different  n 

I  Anacrusis:  the   unaccented   syllable    or  syllables   preceding   a   versel 

(§3SS-^)- 

Antistropke:  a  series  of  verses  corresponding  to  one  which  has  gon«  1 

before  (cf.  strophe). 
Arsis:  the  unaccented  part  of  a  foot  (§  358). 
Basis :  a  single  foot  preceding  the  regular 

Ceesura:  the  ending  of  a  word  within  a  metrical  foot  (§  358.  b). 
Catatexisi   loss  of  a  final   syllable   (or  syllables)   making   the   series   ( 

cataUctic  (incomplete,  §  3S9.  a). 
Contraetiom  the  use  of  one  lOng  syllable  for  two  short  (§  357). 
CorreptioK!  shortening  of  a  long  syllable,  for  metrical  reasons. 
Dueresis:  the  coincidence  of  the  end  of  a  foot  with  the  end  of  a 

C§  358-  •■)■ 

\  Dialysis:  the  tise  of  I  (consonant)  and  v  as  vowels  (siliia^silva;  I 
g  347.  d.  Rem.). 

.'  the  lengthening  of  a  short  ajWaiAc  \>'3  em^\a^'ei  ^^  Vfl-  J^- 


432 


Glossary. 


1  -m  before  a  word 


Dimeien  consisting  of  two  like 
Dipodyi  consisting  of  two  Iil:e  feet. 
Distich:  a  system  or  series  of  two  verses. 
Ecthlipsisi   the  suppression  of  a  final  syllable 

beginning  witii  a  vowel  (§  359.  d'). 
Elision :  tlie  cutting  olF  of  a  final  before  a  following  initial  vowd 

(§  3S9-  <:')■  m 

Heptameteri  consisting  of  seven  feet.  ^H 

Hexameter:  consisting  of  six  measures.  ^H 

Hexapody:  consisting  of  six  feet.  .^1 

Hiatus:  thenieetingoftwovowelswithoutcontractionorelision(g359.*). 
Ictus:  the  metrical  accent  (g  358.  a). 
Irratiotialz  not  conforming  strictly  to  the  unit  of  time  (§  356.  note). 

axdie:  varying  in  rbytbm,  making  the  effect  resemble  prose  {§  369). 
Monomtten  consisting  of  a  single  measure. 
Mora:  the  unit  of  time  =  one  short  syllable  (§  355.  a). 
Pentameter,  consisting  of  five  measures. 
Penlapody :  consbting  of  five  feet. 
Pentbemimeris :  consisting  of  five  Aa^'^erf. 

Protraction :  extension  of  a  syllable  beyond  its  normal  length  (g  3SS- 
Resolution:  the  use  of  two  short  syHables  for  one  long  (§  3S7l- 
Strophe:  a  series  of  verses  making  a  recognized  metrical  whole  (j/oMsa), 

which  may  be  indefinitely  repeated. 
SyHoresis:  1  (vowel)  and  «  becoming  consonants  before  a  vowel. 
Synalaphu :  the  same  as  elision  (§  359.  c.  Rem.). 
Synapkeia:  elision  between  two  verses  (§  359.  e.  Rem.). 
Synisesis:  the  combining  of  two  vowels  in  one  syllable  (§  347,  e). 
Syncope:  loss  of  a  short  vowel. 
Systole:  shortening  of  a  syllable  regularly  long. 
Tetrameter :  consisting  of  four  measures. 
Tetrapody:  consisting  of  four  feet. 
Tetrastich:  a  system  of  four  verses. 
Thesis:  the  accented  part  of  a  foot  (§  358). 
Trimeter:  consisting  of  three 
Trifiody:  consisting  of  three  feet. 
Tristich :  a  system  of  three  verses 


IW 


^ 


APPENDIX 


Latin  was  originally  the  language  of  the  plain  of  Latimn,  lying  I 
south  of  the  Tiber,  the  first  territory  occupied  and  governed  by  tha  I 
Romans.  This  language,  and,  together  with  it,  Greek,  Sanskrit,  Zeitd-fl 
(Old  Persian),  the  Sclavonic  and  Teutonic  families,  and  the  Celtic,  araJ 
shown  by  comparative  philology  to  be  offshoots  of  a  common  stock,  I 
a  language  once  spoken  by  a  people  somewhere  in  the  interior  of  Asia,  M 
whence  the  different  branches,  by  successive  migrations,  passed 
Europe  and  Southern  Asia. 

This  Parent  Speech  is  called  the  Indo-European,  and  the  languages  I 
descended  from  it  are  known  collectively  as  the  Indo-European  Family.  ' 
By  an  extended  comparison  of  the  corresponding  roots,  stems, 
forms,  as  (hey  appear  in  the  different  languages  of  the  family,  the  I 
ori^nal  Indo-European  root,  stem,  or  form  can  in  very  many  cases 
determined.  A  few  of  these  forms  are  given  in  the  grammar  for  ci 
parison  (see,  especially,  p.  83].  Others  are  here  added  for  fiirthet  | 
illustration:  — 

1.  Case  Forms  (Stem  yak,  Tfoue). 


ImcEim. 

SANSKurr. 

Crssk. 

u™. 

Sing.  Ndhi. 

■viksl 

viks 

S^ 

Gen., 

vaki» 

vichSs 

M, 

vocis 

Dat. 

vakii 

v5ch6 

irl 

Ace. 

vikam 

vicham 

Swa 

vocem 

Abl. 

vakat 

vich&i 

(gen.o 

dat.) 

v5eo(d) 

Loc. 

vaki 

vichi 

(dat.) 

(dat.) 

Inilr. 

vakS 

(dal.) 

(abl.) 

Plub.  Norn. 

vSkas 

v^chas 

fcf« 

Gen. 

vakim 

vSchIm 

iw£y 

Dat. 

vaUbhynms 

vagbhyds 

i^i 

v5cibQS 

Ace. 

vakams 

vSchSs 

Km 

Abl. 

vSkbhyams 

(as  dat.) 

(gen.o 

dal.) 

vocibus 

Loc. 

vaksvas 

vEkEd 

(dat.) 

(dat.) 

Tnstt. 

vakbhia 

vSgbhfa 

(dat.) 

(abl.) 

1  To  avoid 

unsellled  ques 

ons  of  Comparati 

e  Grammar,  the 

stem-vowel  ti 

here  given  aa 

a,  IhouEh  .he 

vowel  undoubledi 

had  app 

raachcd  o  before  tha 

(nu  ^WRV  w^aaix. 

1 

Appendix. 

^H 

■ 

2.   Cardinal  Numbers. 

^H 

iZr 

[;"]" 

^H 

2  dva 

3  tci 

dva 

duo               ^^M 

4     kvatval 

chatur 

T^op., 

qualtuoi         ^^^H 

5     kvankva 

panchan 

TflT. 

^^H 

6     ? 

shasb 

•-{ 

7    septip 

saptan 

iwri 

septem           ^^H 

3    aktam 

Bshlun 

hrrA 

^M 

io    d=kra 

dasan 

Si^a 

decern          ^^H 

12    dvadckm 

USlK 

^^^1 

13     tridekm 

Irayo-dasan 

Tp.O* 

liSfHa 

^^H 

20    dvideknta 

vinsati 

fhoat 

^^1 

30     ttideknlB 

ttinsati 

ICO    kntom 

5a.am 

iKa.T6r 

^m 

3- 

Familiar  an 

D  HOUSEHI 

DLD  Words.                  ^| 

INDO-EUE. 

Sanskwt. 

GsaEK. 

^^^M 

/art^r. 

palat- 

[■iui- 

waH? 

^^1 

Molhir. 

matat- 

matri- 

p.'fymp 

FalAfr-in-laiB. 

svakuia- 

^vagura- 

ix-vit 

soccc         ^^^1 

.       snnsha- 

Bnusha- 

Wj 

Brathtr. 

bhratar- 

bhrilri- 

fpdrw' 

^^^1 

Sister. 

EvaEar-  (?) 

svasar- 

[ia,x^] 

Eoror          ^^H 

MasUy. 

pati- 

r&Ti, 

^H 

muse. 

ti^c. 

domus        ^^M 

Sent. 

Ead^is- 

Sadas. 

J!o, 

•^^..jM 

Field. 

agra- 

ajra. 

iyji. 

agcr          "^^1 

Ox,  Cmu. 

gau- 

go- 

fioui 

H 

Sheep  iEwe). 

s« 

H 

Swiiu  (_Smv). 

Sf.ai' 

Vaie. 

yuga- 

yuga- 

i^i' 

iu^m        _^H 

Wason. 

[SMta] 

rola  (^.^.tjfH 

MiddU. 

rnadhya- 

medius            ^ 

SweeL 

svidu- 

svSdu- 

*K. 

suivis 

The  emigrants 

\¥ho  peopled 

the  Italian 

I  peninsula 

abo  divided  inlo 

|»              several  branches, 

and  the  language  of  each  branch  had 

1  its  own  develop- 

^^      ment,  until   all   the  rest  were 

crowded  out  by  the 

dominant  Latin. 

^^^     These  dialects  have  left  no  literature,  but 

fragments 

of  some  of  them 

^^^B^                                                                       C\aiismKD.                                .^^^^^^^^^Bi 

Appendix. 


I  liave  been  preserved,  in  inscriptions,  or  as  uited  by  Romaa  a.iitlqi 
prians!  and  other  fragments  were  probably  incorporated  in  that  ]>op- 
I  ular  or  rustic  dialect  which  formed  the  basis  of  the  modern  Italian. 
I  The  most  important  of  these  ancient  languages  of  Italy  were  the 
.  of  Campania,  and  the  Umbrian  of  the  northern  districts. 
D  these  should  be  added  the  Etruscan,  which  is  of  uncertain  origin, 
^ome  of  their  forms,  as  compared  with  the  Latin,  may  be  seen  in  the 
jHowing :  — 


I 


Umb 


alteri  (loc.)  slttrci 


daodedm 


factnd 
fefacust 


ibi 

Imperatoi 
■     Intel 

magistio 

mcdiui 

_    [mlgiatui 

L^ulCacG 


tieque  nep 

per  petum 

quodrupedibus 
quattuor      petora 
qui  n  que      pomtis 
qui,  quis 


Umbr 


pis 


putrespe 


inscriptions  dating  back 
a;  and  some  Laws  a 


L 


Fragments  ot  early  Latin  are  preserved 

the  third  century  before  the  Christian  era;  ar 
attributed  to  a  much  earlier  date,  — 10  Romulus  (B.C.  750),  to  Numa 
(B.C  700)  ;  and  especially  to  the  Decemvirs  (Twelve  Tables,  B.C.  450) ; 
but  in  their  present  form  no  authentic  dates  can  be  assigned  to  them. 
Specimens  of  these  are  tisuaJly  given  in  a  supplement  to  the 
(See  also  Cic.  De  Legiius,  especially  ii.  8 ;  lii.  3,  4.) 

An  instructive  collection  of  them  is  gvea  in  "  I 
>LaOn/'fc/F.  D.Allen:  Ginn  &  Co. 


nt  to  the  Lexicon.   ^^^ 


436  Appendix. 

Latin  did  not  CTcist  as  a  literary  language  until  about  B.C.  2so. 
The  language  wa.s  then  strongly  influenced  by  the  writings  of  llie 
Greeks,  which  were  the  chief  objects  of  liteiary  study  and  admiration. 
The  most  popular  plays,  those  of  Plautus  and  Terence,  were  simply 
translations  fi-om  the  Greek,  introdudag  freely,  however,  the  popular 
dialect  and  the  slang  of  the  Roman  streets.  As  illustrations  of  life  and 
manners  they  belong  as  much  to  Athens  as  to  Rome.  Thus  the 
natural  growth  of  a  genuine  Roman  literature  was  very  considerably 
checked.  Orations,  rhetorical  works,  letters,  and  histories,  —  dealing 
with  practical  ailairs  and  the  passions  of  politics,  —  seem  to  be  nearly 
all  that  sprang  direct  from  the  native  soil.  The  Latin  poets  of  the 
Empire  were  mostly  court-poets,  writing  for  a  cultivated  and  luxurious 
class;  satires  and  epistles  alone  keep  the  flavor  of  Roman  manners, 
and  exhibit  the  ^miliar  features  of  Italian  life. 

In  its  use  since  the  classic  period,  Latin  is  known  chiefly  as  the 
language  of  the  Civil  Code,  which  gave  the  law  to  a  large  part  of 
Europe  ;  as  the  language  of  historians,  diplomatists,  and  philosophers 
during  the  Middle  Ages,  and  in  some  countries  to  a  much  later  period ; 
as  the  official  langimge  of  the  Church  and  Court  of  Rome,  down  to  the 
present  day ;  as,  until  recently,  the  common  language  of  scholars,  so 
as  still  to  be  the  ordinary  channel  of  communication  among  many 
learned  classes  and  societies ;  and  as  the  universal  language  of  Science, 
especially  of  the  descriptive  sciences,  so  that  many  hundreds  of  Latin 
terms,  or  derivative  forms,  must  be  known  familiarly  to  any  one  who 
would  have  a  clear  knowledge  of  the  (acts  of  the  natural  world,  or  be 
able  to  recount  them  intelligibly  to  men  of  science.  In  some  of  these 
uses  it  may  still  be  regarded  as  a  living  language ;  while,  conven- 
tionally, it  retains  its  place  as  the  foundation  of  a  liberal  education. 

During  the  classical  period  of  the  language,  Latin  existed  not  only 
in  its  literary  or  urban  form,  but  in  local  dialects,  known  by  the  col- 
lective name  of  lingua  riistka,  far  simpler  in  their  forms  of  inflection 
than  the  classic  Latin.  These  dialects,  it  is  probable,  were  the  basis 
of  modem  Italbn,  which  has  preserved  many  of  the  ancient  words 
without  aspirate  or  case-inflection:  as,  orto  {hortus),  genie  {genient\. 
In  the  colonies  longest  occupied  by  the  Romans,  Latin,  in  its  ruder  and 
more  popular  form,  came  to  be  the  language  of  the  common  people. 
Hence  the  modem  bnguages  called  "Romance"  or  "Romanic'';  vii., 
Italian,  Spanish,  Portuguese,  and  French,  together  with  the  Catalan 
of  Northeastern  Spain,  the  Provencal  or  Troubadour  language  of  the 
Sbutii  of  France,  the  "  RDUTnan"  or  Wallachian  of  the  lower  Danube 
i),  and  the  "RouKiaustV  ol  same  fivii.Ac'is.  o'v^-^-Sj 


■ 

P 

Appendix. 

1 

A  comparison 

if  words  i 

several  of  these  tongues  with  Latin  nQ^^| 

serve  to 

illustrate  that  proce 

ss  of  phone ti 

dec. 

o  which  referenoS^H 

has  been  made  in 

the  body 

of  this  Grammar  (§  8 

2),  as  well  as  ths'^H 

degree  i 

n  which  the  substanc 

of  the  language  has  remained  unchangedv^^H 

Thus,  in 

the  verb 

ia  bt  the  Romance  languages  have  preserved  fron^^H 

the  Latin  the  general  tense- 

ystem,  logeth 

er  with  botji  the  stems  OI^^H 

which  the  verb  is 

buiJt.     Th 

personal  endings  are 

omewhat  ahradedJ^H 

but  can 

be  traced 

throughout.    The  following  table  shows  the  fortna^^ 

by  MM  ir 

five  of  the  Romance  languages. 

In  the  others,  the  ^H 

alterations  are  mo 

e  marked. 

■ 

Latin. 

SPAHSH 

PqI.TL'G1..B5H 

PsOVENtAL.                  ^H 

■am 

so  no 

sjy 

sQu 

suis 

■ 

cs 

sei 

eres 

es 

es 

ses  (e.1)              ■ 

est 

Eumui 
estis 
sunt, 

Biamo 

ir 

hi 

s5mos 

s3i3 

es  (eO                H 
Bern  (em)            ■ 
c>^  (cs)               ■ 
sont  (son)          ■ 

«.m 

er> 

«a 

era 

£tais(tlsTA)era                    ^^k 

wM 

ell 

e.T 

erT 

ilail 

eta 

eramiu 

eravama 

^ramo5 

6ranio9 

aions 

eratn 

eiitis 

erais 

ireis 

erali 

rrant 

it3.no 

eran 

JraD 

£laienl 

eran 

fax 

fui 

fui 

fui 

fus 

fui 

fuisti 

tosti 

fuiste 

fSsle 

fua 

fust 

fuit 

(u 

fue 

IBi 

fut 

fo  (fon) 

Fiuioua 

fuinmo 

fuimos 

fSmos 

ran.es 

fum 

fuislis 

fosle 

fSslos 

fQles 

fotz 

fuerunt 

ffiroiiD 

fueron 

forao 

futent 

foren 

.im 

9ia 

sea 

seja 

sois 

sia 

MS 

tit 

sia 

sea 

seja 

aoit 

si  a 

atis 

siana 

sejamoE 

sejaiE 

sejao 

^oyel" 

si  am 
sian 

fiiissem 

foiai 

fuMC 

fSsse 

fu3se 

fi« 

faissSs 

fossi 

fueses 

ISsaea 

fusses 

foissct 

fosse 

fuese 

ffissc 

fill 

foMB  (fot) 

his^maa 

fossirao 

fufseiD 

«      rasaemos 

fussion 

fwnem 

fosle 

fuescis 

fQxieis 

fussiei 

foiWlI 

tmaeni 

fdssero 

fuesen 

(Bsfltni 

luswii 

\«v«^ 

I 

438  Appendix. 


PliJNCIPAL   ROMAN   WRITERS. 
Republican  Writsbs. 


T.  Maecios  Plautug,  Comidiis 

Q.  Ennius,  Annals,  Satira,  etc.  (Fragmeiila) 

M.  Forcioa  Calo,  Ifusiandiy,  Antigui/ies,  etc. 

M.  Pacuvjns,  Tragidiet  (Fragments)    . 

P.  Terentius  Afer  (Tkrence),  Comedies 

C.  Lucilius,  Satins  (Fragmenls) 

L.  Attius  (or  Acclus),  Tragedies  (Fragments) 

M.  Terentins  Veno,  Httsbandry,  AniiquUies,  etc 

M.  Tullius  Cicero,  Oralions,  Letters,  Dialogues 

C  Julius  Gesar,  Commentaries     . 

T.  Lucretius  Carus,  Poem  "  De  Recuin  Natura  " 

C  Valerius  Catullus,  Miscellaneous  Poems    . 

C.  Salluatius  Ctispus  (Sallust),  /histories   . 

Cornelius  Nepos,  Lives  of  Famous  Commanders 


Wki 


E  Alia 


P.  Veigilius  Maro  (Virgil),  Eclogues,  Georgia,  JEneid 
Q.  Horalius  Flaccus  (Horace),  Satires,  Odes,  Epistles 

Albius  Tlbullus,  Elegies 

SextuB  Propertius,  Elegies 

T.  IJviua  Patavinus  (Liw),  Roman  History 
P.  Ovidius  Naso  (Ovid),  Metamorphoses,  Fasti,  e 
M.  Valerius  Maximos,  Anecdotes,  etc.   . 
C.  Velleius  PatctculuB,  Roman  History 
Pomponiua  Mela,  Husbandry  and  Geography 


^^  A.  Feisii 
^^^b  L.  Anns 
^^H       M.  Ann? 


Writers  o 


A.  Peisiua  Flaccus,  Satires  . 

L.  AnniBus  Seneca,  PkiUsapkical  Letter!,  e 

M,  Annreus  Lucanua  (LucAN),  Historical 

Q.  Curtitts  Rufus,  History  of  Atexandir 

"     Secundus  (PUNV\iValiii-ai  HisWj.ete. 


B.C. 

154-184 
139-169 
134-149 

I95-:S9 
148-103 
170-75 
116-2S 
iofr-43 
100-^(4 
95-52 
87-47 


7CKi^ 


Appendix. 


439 


C  Valerias  Flaccos^  HeroU  Poem  "  Argoiuuitica  " 

P.  Papinins  Statins,  HeraU  Poems  "  Thebais,"  etc. 

C  Silios  Itaficns,  Heroic  Poem  **  Pmuca"    . 

D.  Joniiis  Jnvenalis  (Juvexal),  Satires 

L.  Annxas  Floras,  Hisi4frual  Abridgmeni   . 

M.  Valerias  Martialis  (Mastial),  Epigrams 

M.  Fabias  Qnintilianas  (QinNTOiAN),  RhetorU  . 

C  Cornelius  Tacitns,  AnnaJSj  History^  etc  . 

C.  Plinins  Caecflins  Secnndas  (PuxY  Jonior),  Letters 

C  Suetonias  TranqaOlos,  The  Twelve  Casars 

AppnleinSy  Pkilosophical  Writings^  **  Metamorphoses 

A.  Gellins,  Miscellanies^  •*  Noctes  Atticae  " 


i» 


-88 

25-100 

40-120 

-120 

43-104 
40-118 

60-118 

61-115 

70- 

IIO- 

about  I  So 


Writers  of  Christiax  Period. 

t  Q.  Septimius  Florens  Tertullianus  (Tertlxlian),  Apologist  160-240 

t  M.  Minucius  Felfac,  Apologetic  Dialogue about  250 

t  Firmianus  Lactantius,  Theology 250-325 

D.  Magnus- Ausonius,  Miscellaneous  Poems -380 

Ammianus  Marcellinus,  Roman  History -395 

Qaudius  Qaudianus  (Claudian),  Poems,  Panegyrics,  etc.    .  -408 

t  Aurelius  Prudentius  Qemens,  CiftrMA'aw /V^^/wj  .         .         .         .  348-410 
t  Aurelius  Augustinus  (St.  Augustine),  Confessions,  Discourses,  etc.     354-430 

fHieronymus  (St.  Jerome),  Homilies,  Dialogue:,  Epistles,  etc.  -420 

Anicius  Manlius  Boethius,  Philosophical  Dialogue         .         .         .  470-520 

Maximianus,  Elegies about  500 


t  Christian  writers. 


^^^V                                OF                                  ^^M 

H                Is  this  indei  Bre  gLv™  all  Ox  limplt  irrtgular  vetbj  that  !he  snidml  wUI  find  in  tU 

^P           rcadbg.    Conipoundi  are  to  be  looked  Tar  under  siinpk  vrtlx.    If  Ihc  ilmple  vrcb  it  giicn 

the  simple  verb  a  compound  form  »  added  (ws  "statoC  [cSiiBtltDO]"],  t>>e  cooipoundi 

vaiy  from  Ihe  simple  veib,  at  may  be  seen  under  the  pmtioular  compound  mentioned.     If 

aie  appended  lo  (he  .imple  «ib  (see  e.f.BKt)'    Full-face  figuiei  (Ihui,  91)  dcngnUe  the 

_              moBunportani  among  senral  references.    Refeiencei  ate  Lo  Mction*.  unless '■  p."  is  used. 

1            ab-do,  3,  -didi.  -dhuni ,  130.  N. 

regular  conips.,  see  ad-igo ;  for  olheis, 

■            ab-eo,  see  eo. 

see  cjigo,  eircum-.  per-,  sat-ago.] 

■            ab-nu5,  3,  -QUI,  -nuil.m  (-nGlum)  I-nu3]. 

Bio,  IB./  N.  144.  a.                                 

■          abKileo,  a,  -evi  (-ul),  -ifum.  131. 

Blbeo,  a.  -m.  —,  166.  i.                       ^^M 

■          alM.lEsc5,  3.  -evi,  -  [aboleo] . 

Blbo,I,ng..l(A.a.l.i.                                ^^M 

■           abs-ctmd5,3,-di(-didr),-diluni  [candq. 

aJesco,  3.  -ui,  — ,  167.  a.                        ^^H 

^r          HiH:eno,  see  aixesso. 

algeq,  a,  ala,  -,  181, 166.  i.              '^H 

"           aoddil  (impera.) ,  14S.  146.  -;. 

sl-IegS,  3.  -^Ef.  -swum  [1^  -                 ^^ 

tto-ei6.4,reE.  [-do]. 

al-licio,  3,  -lexi,  -lectum  I-Iicio], 

ac*ol5,3,-ut.-[«)lB]. 

al5, 3,aliu,  altutn  (aUtum),  133.  i.  13B.  e. 

ac-eredo.  see  credo. 

ambio.  -ire,  -ii  (^n).  -itum  <aiDbIbalJ, 

ae-cumbo.  3,  -cubut,  -ilum.  132.  c. 

141.  e,  170.  *. 

^          acuo.  3,  -ul,  -utum.  p.  86,  123.  A 

amiciS,  4,  amiri  (-cul),  amictum,  133. 

■          ai*5,  see  eo. 

an.5,  pp.  92,  95  r  {}  laa.  f,  125,  a.  u5. 

■          ad.lg5,3,-egi.-5cwmri.g51. 

tt,  (>-^,  137  (synopsis),  p.  120,  p.  iii 

1^          ad-lmo,  3,  -etni,  -emptum  [emo] . 

(amit,  9.  e,  37$- ^-  S'<  amarat,  10.  i. 

smins.  113. 1 ;  amarim,  amasse,  amis- 

ad.*iu5,3.-nui,-iiQtum[-iiH. 

sem.  128.  a.   i;    amassis,    138.  t.  5; 

ad-oleo,  3,  -evi  (-ul),  -ullum,  131. 

amaliinis  sum,  amandus  sum.  lag,  p. 

ad^leaoD,  3,  -eri.  -ulram  [adole5]. 

157.  foot-n.). 

ante^apio,  3,  -cepi,  -captum  [c^«6].  ,^^ 

ad..3perf[5. 3,  -spersi,  -spersum  [apargEJ] . 

BDte-cella,  3.  — .  —  [-oello].                  ^^^1 

ad^Jlo,  i.-alifi,— .  i3aN. 

BDte-fero.  Uke  lero,  170.  o.                     ^^H 

ad.3utn.-eEse,-fi£,ii./3.». 

aole-sto,  I,  -stetf,  — ,  130.  N.                 ^^H 

aequo,  i,  reg..  166.  0.  a. 

Bnli-sta,  I.  -sleti.  — ,  130.  N.                  ^^M 

aestno,  i,  reg.,  123.  d,  166.  a.  3. 

aperio,  4,  apenil.  apenum,  133. 

af.Sri,  aflSlus,  144.  c. 

apiscor.  -I,  apms  [ad-ipbcor] ,  135.  *■ 

af-fero.  -ferre,  attuli,  allalum,  170.  4 

af-fligo,  3,  -a.  -ctum  IBigo] . 

arceo,  a,  -iJ,  —  [co*rceb] ,  131.  K. 

^.            ag-gredior,  -i.  -gresaus,  135.  i. 

areesso    (accetsS),  3.  -iri,   arcessilum. 

^k          agilo,  I.  teg.,  167.  *.  N. 

13a.  rf. 

■        l^osco.  3,  -ovi,  ggnlium,  13a.  c. 

Stdeo.  a,  itsl.  aisiun,  131. 

^L      ago,  3.  egf,  aclum,  9.  e,  m.  d.  \%%.  t. 

■1 

^^^^^P                        Index  of  Verbs.                               441-^1 

H*ro,  I,  reg.,  pp.  119,  lao. 

certum  est  (impers.),  146.  c. 

^B  ■r-rigo.  3.  -reii,  -rectum  [rego] , 

cieo    (^5).   dSre    (^Ire).    oivl,    cihuOi 

^^  aspicio,  3,  -eii,  -cctum  [-spicio]. 

131  [ac-cio.e)i-do]. 

^V  ■BSuiD,  lale  Ibrm  of  adsuin,  11.  f.  N. 

cingo,  3,  ciiua,  cinctum,  132.  a. 

H  aMoUS.  3,  — .  —  polio] . 

-cio,3eecie6. 

^B  Audeo,  audeie,  ausus,  136  (ausim,  128. 

circmn-ago,  3,  -egi,  -actum  [ago]. 

H      rf,3;  sodSs,  13.  £). 

ciicum-dD,  -dire,  -dedJ,  -dilum,  13a.  N, 

■  ■udio,  4,  audivi.  auditum,  pp.    104-a. 

■       }}  122.  c,  124.  0,  125.  fl,  126.  li,  p.  lao 

circum-slo.  I,  -sleb  (-slili),  — ,  130.  N. 

■        (conlrarted  ibrais,  128.  a.  a). 

elango.  3.  clanll,  -,  132.  a. 

B  anfero,  -ferre,  abstuD,  ablatuni,  170.  a. 

claudeo,  a,  — .  — .  see  claudo  (lioif). 

^F  augeo,  2,  auid,  auclum,  131. 

Clauds  [ia^).  3,  — .  -.  132-/  N- 

^     avE{hftvE),ayae,aYEl5, 144./ 

claud5  (dose),  3,   claust,  clausum    [ea* 

ave5.2,-,— .  131.  N. 

diidS],  13a.  a. 

clepo,  3,  clepa,  cleptum,  13a.  0, 

bene-dico,  3,  -h,  ■dicliun,  169,  *. 

clueo,  2,  — ,  — ,  13E.  N. 

bene-facio.  3,  -fed,  -faclum,  19.  d.  i. 

co-emo,  3,  -emi,  -emplum,  13a.  a. 

bibo,3,bibI,bibinin.,  13a,/ 

coepi,  -isse,  -plums,  143-  «■ 

ballio,  4.  reg.,  166.  d. 

co-erce5,a,-m.-iwm[arceo]. 

c5-£no5CO,  3,  -gnovt,  -gnltum.  13a.  t. 

cad5.3,cecld!,  caaum  [oc-cldo],  138.  6. 

togo,  3,  co-egT,  co^ctum,  10.  d  [ag5]. 

ir.o.2,isi4.i.  las.*. 

collieo,  3.  -legi.  -ledum.  132.  i. 

caeco.  I,  r^.,  130. 

col-loco,  I,  reg,,  r7o,  a. 

caecutio,4,4vI.— .  133. 

Colo,  3,  eolui,    cultum    [ei-.  ac.    i&.], 

caedo.  3,  ceddt,  caesum  [oc-cldol ,  10.  a. 

133.  e. 

IJ3.  c.  1, 18S.  b. 

comburo,  3,  -Bssi,  -iistum  [iir5]. 

cale-fecio,  like  &ci5,  i6g.  o. 

com-roiniBcor,  -i,  -mentus,  135,  k. 

calefect5,i,-.-,i69.o. 

como,  3,  compH,  coraptum.  13a.  s. 

caleo.  3,  -d!.  caUtSrus,  181, 167.  a.  N. 

cal&co.  3.  -ui,  — ,  181,  167.  0.  N.,  169.  0. 

comperior,  -M,  compenoa,  135.  k.  N. 

calle6.a,-ui.— ,181.  N. 

coni-pesoo,  3,  -cui,  — ,  132.  c. 

<aneo,3,-iii,18lN.,  i66.i. 

com-pleo,  a.  -«vi,  -etura,  131, 

cano,3,  cecim.tcanmm  [con-cinoj,  133.  £. 

coiQ-pango,  3,  -nri.  -nchro  lpungo|. 

oantUlo.  I,  r^.,  167.  d. 

con-lino,  3,  -ui,  t-c«itum  [cano]. 

capesso,  3,  capessivIi-Itimi.lSB.  ft.  167.  c. 

con-cupIscB,  3,  -cupM,  -cupltum,  167.  a. 

In^ipiss6,3,— .— . 

con-culio,  3,  -cusBi,  -cussum,  132.  a. 

oapiD,  3,  cEpJ.  caplum    [ac^:ipi5,  e(c.; 

condio,  4,  reg.,  166.  d. 

also  anle-eapio],  125.  *,  la6.  j,  132.  r. 

con-do,  3,  -didi,  -dimm,  13a  n. 

p.lOO(capia.p.  B9,foot-n.3). 

c5-nedo,  3,  -nexui,  -nexum,  11.  /  N. 

■      qareo,  2,  -ui,  -ilCrus,  131.  N. 

con-fero.  -ferre,  -tulF.  eol-latum,  170.  a. 

■    caip5,  3,  -psl,  -ptum  [di-ccrpo],  124.  i. 

eon-fido,  3.  -fed,  -fecium.  17a  a.  M. 

■        13S.a. 

eon-eteor,  -eri,  -fessus  [faleor]. 

W    caveo,  2,  <avl.  cautiun,  131. 

con-grTi5.3.-iu,—  [-^nio]. 

cavillor.  iri,  -atoa,  167.  d. 

cou-icio,  3,  -iecT.  -ieotum  {iacio],  ir.  *.  & 

cedo  (Imperalive),  cedite  (celle),  144.;^ 

co-nitor  [nitor],ii./N. 

ced5,3,ce3si,ii./i.c&™n.,u.fl.a,138. 

co-myeB[-nlTe5].ii./N. 

a;ac-ced5,.i./3. 

con-stat,  ^je,  ^(urum,  146, 146.  e. 

-cello,  13a,  c  (only  in  comp,,  see  per- 

con-sliluo,  3,  -id,  -stitutum  [statuo]. 

cello,  ei-call6,  ante-celia,  prae-cello). 

con-slo,  t,  -«liff,  -«tilum  (-slatum),  i3aW. 

-cendS,  3,-cend!,-ceiisuDi  (ooly  in  comp., 

e5n-su5-6ci3,  like  faciS,  169.  a. 

•sin-cendo).  133./ 

cEnseS,  s,  -ui.  censom,  131. 

laS.a.T.'i.VWC-'*--*** ^^^ 

■      eerao.  3.  cretf,  crelum,  13a.  f. 

\  con-t,u\o,  \,  -\\&,-«v&'airo.'i^^^^^^^^H 

r 


Index  of  Verbs. 


P 


■ripio.  3.  -ripui,  -reptuin  [rapio] . 
OOP  ruo.  3, -ui.  —  [raoj,  11./.3. 
credo,  3,  didl,  dltum  [-do], 
crepo,  i.-ui, -itum,  130. 

Criminor,  -£ri,  -alus,  135.  / 

grod5,4,— , -,  133. 

Cuba,  I,  •□!,  oubllum,  130. 

cucurlo,  4,  — ,  — ,  133. 

oudo,  3,  -oiidl,  -cusum  [in-ciido] ,  13a.  f. 

-cumbB  [cun],  (see  ac-cumbo),  13a.  c 

cupiu,  3.  cufdvi,  cu^atiun,  13S.  d,p.it 

-cupisco,  3,  see  con-cupisco. 

ciUTO,  3.  cucum,'cursmn  [in-curro] ,  133.  *. 

cuslodia,  4,  reg.,  166.  d. 


dSbcD,  1. 


de-fetiacor,  -1.  -fessuB,  132.^  f 
de-hisc5,  3,  -hivl,  —  [hi5eo| . 
deleclBt  (impels.),  146.  c. 


3,  131. 


I,  -Ivl.  - 


■33- 


ipsi,  dEinplum.  13a.  a. 

depso,  3,  -sui,  -slum,  13a,  i, 

de-scendo,  3. -dl. -aum  [scando], 

de-silio,  4,  -sflui,  -aulium  [salio], 

de-sino,  3,  -^vi,  -silum  [sipo] . 

de-aipio,  3,  — ,  —  [sapio] . 

dMisio,  3,  -aiifl,  *5iiium  [siBlo], 

de-spido,  3,  -speii,  -spectnm,  17a  a. 

de-spondeo,  a.  -dl,  -sam  fspondeo] . 

de-slnio,  3,  -struifi,  -Mriiclum,  170.  a. 

desuin,  -esse,  -fill  [sum]. 

de-vertor.  A.  -aus,  135.  i. 

dico,  3,  dixl,  diElum,  133.  c.  1. 182.  a.  169. 
',  p.  130.  (dixli,  ia&.i;  die,  laS.e). 

diclilo,  I.  reg.i  167.  i  and  N. 

dif-fero,  -ferre,  dia-tull,  di-lStum  [feto]. 

dif-filcor,  -eii.  -fessua,  135.  i. 

dl-^osco,  3,  -^ovl,  —  [nosco]. 

dl-ligo,  3.  -lexl,  -lectum,  p.  103.  fool-n. 
(di-leclus  as  adj.,  113.  «). 

lil-iao,  3,  -lui,  -liJIum  [luoj. 
iS-mico,  I,  reg.,  130.  N. 
"   "    "      — ,-I1uni,  II.  a.  1  tha.'beS\. 


11,  4ecluni  [iacio]. 
dis-pando,    3.  -di,  -pinsum    (-pessug 

[pand5]. 
dis-sideo,  a,  -sSdl,  -aEssum  [aedeoj.  I 


i 

»57- 

1 


'   domo,  I.-ui, -itum,  122.  il,  13a 
duco,  3.  dux!,  ductum,   1S2.  a,  ^ 
(due,  138.  t). 

ebullio,4,— ,  — ,  133. 
do,  3,  edi,  Eaum,  tat,  133.  r,  p.  S6,  iH 
138. 1,  fl. 

-do,  3,  -didi,  -AMara,  put  firth.  130.  N. 
ef-fero,  -ferre,  emuli,  elSlum.  170.  o. 
egeo,  a, -id, — ,131.  N. 
o-icio,  3,  -ied,  -ledum.  170,  a.  N.  [iacio]. 
E-ilcio,  3,  -4U,  -dtum,  133.  a. 
e-mico,  I,  -micaii,  -micatum,  130.  N. 
e-mine5,  a,  -ui,  —  [-mlneo]. 

3,  emi,  emplum  [ad-,  eo-.  dir-imol. 
3. 112. «. 
emplurio,  4,  — ,  ^.  167.  e. 

as  (in  pot-ens,  aee  sum),  iig.  a. 

a.  Ire,  Ivi  (ii},  Hum,  laB.  e.  1. 1«,  158. 
\.i;  (Kbiit,elc.,  taS.',  a;  adiase. 
i.  R.|  ilum  est.  141.0;  ilur,  impers.,  14& 
if;  adeo  (adeoi),  141.0;  ambir 
prodeo,  -ire,  -ii,  -Ilum,  144.  d). 

soil,  eicunC  (see  suni),  119.  '. 

St  (see  sum};  'st  (in  homSst.etc), 

-vido,  3,  -visi,  -vasum,  isB.  t. 
e^renlt  (impers.),  14s,  146.  c. 
""  4,  -il,  -Jtum  (-Hum)  [-eiO]. 
5.  3,  -celiiu,  -celsam,  13a,  e. 
AQ.-i,-ii^\,-«!.5sum  [claudl 


I 


^^^^^p                        Index  of  Vfrbs.                               443^H 

^F  ex-erceo.  a.  -col,  -citum  [nrcEo] . 

(praeGiur.  affari,  profSlus,  inletfStn* 

■    expUc6.i,(w.>M)..uI,-ilmn:  (iajitoB). 

etc..  144.0. 

■        ^vi,  -awm,  130.  N. 

fore,  forem,  etc.  (see  sum).  119.  *.  K.J 

■    ax-plodo,  3,  -El,  -sum  [plaudo]. 

fore,  147.  c.  2. 

H    ex-stiugao,  3,  -sttnxi,  -sdnctuin.  132.  a. 

fbveo,  a,  fovi,  fStum,  131. 

■    exsulo.  I,  reg..  130, 166.  a.  3. 

baago   [FRAG],  3,  fregi,  friclum   [pen 

■     exu5,  3. -uT, -Smni,  166.  <:. 

fringe],  133.*. 

fremo,  3,  fremui,  fremilnm,  13a.  c. 

frendo.  3.  frSsi.  fressum,  13a.  a. 

167.  <:. 

frico,  I.  -m,  friolum  (fiiciilura),  130, 

bcia,3.!£d,  factum,  132.  f ,  14S,  170,  a.  N. 

frigeo,  3,  tin,  — ,  131. 

{tc,  laa.  c;  &xB. -im.  198.  ^.3 :  afficio, 

fngo,  3,  frud.  frldum  (frixum),  132.  a. 

_         H./3-.  cBixfil,  defil,  infil.  eifieri,  inler- 

trilinnio,  4,— ,— ,  133. 

L         fiert,  inleriiat.  superfio,  14a.  i ;  eonfioio 

fruor.  -i.  frSclus  (IVuiluB),  135,  i. 

H         aDd<ithE[Comp5.m-iicio, 142,0;  bene- 

fuam,-5s,elc.  (seesumj.i.g.*. 

■        &do  etc.,i4a.i;  consuefacio,  169,  a; 

ftigio,  3,  fugl,  iiigitum,  23,  a,  laj.  i.  a,  la* 

■        calefacio,  id.;  cale&cto.  id.). 

d.lS2.e. 

■    -bclc,  I  (in  compounds),  169.  a. 

rugo,  1.  reg.,  156.  a,  I, 

■    fe116,3,tyell),&lsura,  13a. 

fillcio,  4.  fulsi.  fullum.  133, 

■     fercio,  3,  &rai,  fardum  (-mm) ,  [re-fercio] , 

fulge5,2,-5r,-,131.e.d,  134. 

\        133- 

fi.lgo,3.-.-.138./N..134. 

■       bleor,  -eri.  fassus,  [cSn-fifeor] .  135.  *, 

fulgurat  (impere.),  146.  a. 

6.S«j5,3.-,-,I3»./N. 

fmido  [FUD] ,  3.  fudi,  fusum,  13a.  t.      , 

faveo,  a,  fiW.  ^mum,  131. 

fungor,  -I,  f ijnetus,  133.  A. 

-fendB,3,-feQd>,-Gnsura,  13a./  (See  de- 

furo,  3.  fond,  — .  13a.  c. 

fendS.) 

fiivimus.  f5vlss«  (see  sum),  119.  i. 

L      ferio,  4   (no    perfett    or   supine).    .33, 

• 

1         144. 

gannio.  4,  — ,  — ,  133. 

■      (ero,  fetTE,  lull,  latum   (fer,  128.  c\  23, 

gaudeo,  gaudere,  gavisus,  131, 136. 

1            123.  e,  158.  I.  a   [af-,  ttu-,  too-,  dif-. 

gemo,  3,  gemui.  gemitum,  13a.  ^. 

et.  in-  of-,  re-fero]. 

gero,  3.  gessi,  gestum,  13S.  u,  p.  lao. 

fcrocio,  4,  -ivE,  — ,  133. 

g«tio.4,-M,— ,133,  i66.rf. 

terveo,  2,  ferbni,  — ,  131. 

glgno  [GF,N],3,genuI,Ei;nilum,9.rf,ia3,«( 

fido,  fidere,  feus,  132.  /  N,  136  [con- 

3. 132. 0. 

fidol. 

glisc5,3,— ,— .  13S./N. 

figo,  3,  fixi,  fixum,  133.  a. 

glodo,4,-Iv,-._  ,33. 

findo  [fib]  ,  3,  fidi,  (issum,  123.  c.  3. 124. 

glSbo.3,_,-,,3a./N. 

<:.N.,I88./. 

giati3.4.reg.,  133. 

fingo  [Fit;],  3,  Bad,  ITctuni,  132  a,  I24.#. 

gradior, -i,  grcBsus  [ag-gredior],  135.  iL 

grandinal  (impers.),  146.  a. 

(inio,  4,  -M,  -Itom,  p.   90,  foot-n.   1, 

-gruo,  3,  see  con-,  In-gruo, 

166  d. 

fio,  fiert,  actus,  14a  (see  fecio),  p,  119 

habeo,  2.  ^,-llnm  [in-hlbeo;    debe&{ 

(fiI,iniperE..i46.«). 

dir-ibeo]. 

flecto,  3,  flExi,  ftemrn,  132,  a. 

haereo,  2,  haesT,  hacsum,  131, 

fl«.  3,  -evi,  -etum,  p.  86,  ^3.  /  .26.  i. 

bauiio,  3,  hausi,  ban^tum  (haus-),  133. 

I81(flelis.i28.a,.), 

havS.  see  avS. 

Jigo,  only  in  comp.,  see  af^lliEo. 

hlbemo,  I,  reg.,  i56.  a.  a. 

flo,  -ate,  -avi,  -alum,  ia6,  0. 

hEemS,  I,  reg,,  166.  a.  3. 

fl6re5.3,-ui,-,i3i.N. 

hInni5,4.-.-.I33- 

fluo,  3,  fluid.  fl5ium,  132.  o,  166.  c.  V. 

hirti5,4,— ,— ,  133. 

fcdio,  3,  f5di,  fossom,  13a.  c. 

hisco,  3,  -,  -  tde-hi5c5\.  13.».  f.  S. 

[forJ.fSii.  G(U5,  126,  a,  144.  c.  IsB.  1.  t\\voneo,  i.\iOTOi\.-,i-b,\.-A.                   ^H 

J 

H    444                                Index  of                               ^^^^H 

H      Ic5,3.M.Ictiim.i3a./ 

laedd,  3,  laesl,  laentm  [il-ltdS],  I3K.^^^| 

^H       ignoscD.  3.  -novi,  -nolum  [nosco] . 

lambo.  3,  Iambi,  lambilum,  13a./;    ^^H 

H        il-Hdo,  3,  -5si,  Jlium  [Uedo] . 

laagueo,  a,  langui,  — ,  131,                  "^^H 

^H       hnbuo,  3,  -ul,  -ulum  (cf.  acuo). 

lav5,-ere,lSvI.lolum  (laulum)  (akoT^^™ 

H       im-mmeo,  -ere.  — ,  —  [-mineo] . 

of  isl  con].).  132-  '.  134- 

H       impero,  i.i^..  ii./a. 

legB,  .,  3,  l£gi,  iSclum  [colligS.  10.  d;  see 

H        im^llo,  3,  -pull,  -pulaum  [pell6]. 

also  dellgo,  ditigo,  intellega,  neglegoj. 

^H       im-peiro,  i,  leg.  (-asserc,  laS.  f.  5}. 

■31  ',  9.  0. 

■        im-pingo,  3,  -pegi,  -laotum  [pango]. 

ievo,  I.  -avi,  ^tmn  (-is»3,  laS.  *.  5). 

^B        itn-plica,   i,  -avi  (-uI),  4luin    (-ilum). 

libel  (lubef,  10.  fl),  -ere,  -uit,  146.  c.  (lilH- 

■             13°.  N. 

tuniesl.[d.N.;libgns.  id.). 

■         in-cend5,3,-di.-5Ura..3*/ 

licet,  ^re.  -ilurum,  145.  146.  c.  (lidtuni 

V          incessa,  3,  incEssTvi.  — ,  ija.  d. 

est.I46.i:.  N.:  Ui^ns,  id.). 

W          in-cidB,3.-ciiJi,.casuni  [cttd5]. 

.Iicio.3[t.nlyiiicomp..seciil-lido.e-lid6. 

■           incipio,  3,  -eepi,  -ceplum,  10.  d.  143.  0. 

pel-licio],.3a.a. 

P            in-CQl6,3,-colur.-[i:Dlo]. 

lingo.  3.  linid.  linctum,  133^  a. 

■             in-cudo.  3, -cudi. -eusiun  [cudo]. 

lina[u],3,le»I(U-*I),litiun,i3a.t           .        , 

In-curro,  3,  -cum    f-cucurri},  -ciirsum 

linquo  [uc] ,  3,  Eqm,  -lictum,  13a.  «.  ^^J 

[=urr5]. 

Uqueo,  a,  Kqui  (Ucul),— ,  131.             ^H 

induigeo,  a,  indulsl,  tadulhini,  131. 

liquor,  -I,  — ,  135.  i.                            ^^H 

ioduo,  3.  -ul,  -utum,  III.  a,  166.  c. 

loquor.  -i,  locutus  (loquutus),  ISB.  )k,. 

ineplio,  4,-iri,— .133. 

166.  c.  N. 

in-fero,  -ferrc.  -luli.  illalum,  17a  a ;  pro- 

IBceo, a,  ISxi,  Juchmi.  131  {liicet,  impers.. 

nunciation,  18.  d. 

14G.  fl). 

tn-R[,  see  Ho. 

ludo,  3,  luai,  lusnin,  13a.  a. 

In-«ru5,3,-uT.-[.«ruo]. 

lugeo,  2,  liixi,  luduni.  [31.                       ^^^_ 

fn-hibeo,  a, -ui, -ilum,  131  [habeo]. 

lua,  3,  lul,  lultum  [de-luo],  132./        ^^^1 

inquam,  144.  *. 

Insanio,  4,  reg.,  166.  rf. 

maereo,  a,— ,  — ,  144.                            ^^^1 

intelltso,  3,  -lexi,  -ledum,  p.  103,  fool-n. 

mand5,  3,  mandl,  mansum,  132./.        ^^ 

Inler-do,  -dire,  -dedi,  -dalum,  13a  k. 

maneo,  2,  micsl,  mansum.  [per^maneo] , 

inlereal,  -esse,  -fuit  (impers.),  146.  c. 

...  a.  2,  lai.  N.  a,  188.  d.  131. 

inler-falur,  144.  c  [t  lor] . 

medeor,  -eti,  — ,  135.  i. 

inler-nimpQ,  3,  -rupi,  -ruptum,  170.  a. 

men.ini(-t5,-t6le,-«ns),i43.«- 

inter-slo,  i,  -steS,  — ,  130.  N. 

mereo  or  mereor,  meteie  or  -rl,  merita^  ' 

in-tueor,  -eii,  -tuitus  [tueor]. 
in-vSdo,  see  vido. 

135- .f-                                     m^ 
metga.a,  mersi,  mersuro,  13a.  a.         ^^H 
maior,  -in,  mensum.  135.  *.                  ^^ 

irbcor,-i,iritus,i3S.*.i67.fl: 

meto,  3,  messui,  mcssuro,  13a.  e.              1 

iaoeo,  a.  -ul,  -itiiras,  131. 

metuo,3,-ui.-utuni.  166.*:. 

lacio,  3,  ied,  lactum,  13S.  t.  17a  a.  N. 

mico,  I,  mioul,  — ,  130. 

[c5n-ici5,  etc.;  dis-icio.  porriciB]. 

-mineo,  a,  -ul.  —  [e-.  iro-,  pi5-mine6] . 

hibe5,3,iussl,iuuuni,i3i(iiissD,  138.^.3}. 

-miniscor,  4,  -menlus,  135.  k  [com-,  re-] . 

ludico,  r,  r^.  (4[!sit,  laS.  e.  5}. 

rainuo,  3,  -m,  -iilum  (ot  acuo). 

iungo,  3,  iunn,  iiinctum. 

miror.  miraiT,  mirStus,  135. 

iuvenescor.  3,  -venul,  — ,  167.  a. 

misceo,  a,  -cui,  mlaum  {mfelum),  11.  d. 

iuv3  (ad-),  I,  iihri.  liilum  (-itums),  130. 

ISl. 

roisereor,  -eri,  mlserituB  (misertus),  146. 

labfcE6.3,— .— ,  i67.fl. 

i.». 

labo,  l,-5vi.— ,  130. 

miseret.i46.A 

lEbor,  -I,  JSpsus,  135.  A. 

mllesco,  3.— .— ,  167.  a. 

lacesso.  3,  lacessivi,  lacesaUum,  \Vl.  d. 

\m\«o,^,uoa,ttSs«HO,1«v*- 1.1st.* 

i^.t. 

^^^^^B                          Index  of  Verbs.                                   445  ^H 

^^no15,  3,  molnl,  molilum,  13s.  e. 

odi,   odisse,  nurus   (perosus).  143.  h. 

B  moneo.  3,  -ui,  -ifum,  laa.  (,  pp.  96-97, 

■       \\  133.  0, 124.  a,  las.  b.  136.  *.  I.  a.  (, 

of-fero,  -ferre,  obtull,  oblitum.  170.  a. 

■       i6£l  b,  p.  130. 

-oleo  igtovi)  [see  ab-,  ad-],  131. 

^■-jBUTdeo,  3,  momotdl,  morsum.  121.  N.  a, 

oleo  [saiea).  a.  olui,  — ,  131. 

■     ISl. 

operio,  4,  operui,  operlum.  133. 

■  morior,  -i  (-In),  mortuus,  (monlurus). 

opoctei,  -ere.  -uil  (impers.) ,  146.  c. 

r      I3S-  ^■ 

op-pang6,  3,  -pip,  -pictum  tpango]. 

moveo.  3,  movi,  motum,  131  (commSrat, 

opperior,  -iri,  oppertus,  135.  *. 

138.  0.  I). 

ordior,  -M,  orsus,  135.  A,  166.  d.  N. 

muEio,  4,  reg.,  133. 

orior   (3d),   -iti,   orWs,   (oriturus)   (so 

mulceo,  a.  mulsi.  mulsum,  131. 

comps.).  13S.  ft,  p.  86. 

_    mulgeo,  a, -si  l-xi),  mulsum  (mulclum), 

\      131- 

Hi  mulli-plico,  I,  reg.,  130.  K. 

ov*re,  ovalus,  144.  t. 

[dciscor,  A,  pactus,  135.  h. 

■.Biutti5,4,-lvl,— ,  133. 

paenilet    (impers.).    -ere,   -uil,    146.    i 

r 

(-tarns,  -lendus.  146.  &.  N.). 

nandscor,  -I.  nactus  (nanctus) ,  135.  *. 

pando,  3,  pandl,  pansum  (passum,  11.  A 

DBSCor,  -!,  nalus.  135.  h. 

3).[diS-].I33./ 

necesae  esl  (impers.).  146.  c. 

pango  [PAG],  3.  pSgi  (pepigi).  pSdiun. 

neco,  I,  -Qi,  neMum,  [e-neco].  130. 

[im-pinEo;  op-pango].  13Z.  6,  33.  a. 

nectS   [NEC],  3,  nexi  (nexui),  nexum, 

parco,  3,  peperci  (parsi),  parsum.  13a.  J 

133.0. 

(parcilur.  impers..  146.  rf). 

negli^o,  3.  neElexi,  -ledum,  p.  103,  fool- 

pareo,  a,  -ui,  pariliirus,  131, 

pario,    3,    peperi,    parlum    (paritunu). 

oeS.  3,  -Evi.  -etum.  ia6.  *,  181. 

[com-,  re-perio] ,  13a,  b. 

nequeo,  -Ire,  nequiOis,  144.  g  (nequitur, 

parlio.  4.  reg..  but  see  next  word. 

etc,  id.  N). 

partior,  partTri,  partitus,  135. 

□lugit  (impers.),  nlnxit,  146.  a. 

panurio,  4,  -ivi.  — ,  167.  t. 

>.!lor..I,i.Bas  {nl»ua)  [c5-nilor].  135.  *. 

pasco,  3,  pavi,  pastum,  13a.  c. 

niveo,  a,  niri  {niid),  131. 

pateo.a,  palui.— ,  13..  N. 

no,  I.  nari,  — ,  laS.  a,  p.  157.  foot-n. 

paiior,  -i,  passus   [per-petiorl    II.   a.  at 

n5sc5  [GNO],  3,  novi.  notum  [Sg-,  co-, 

13S.  ft. 

di.,  Ig-nosco]  132.  s,  143.  f.  N.  (nasse. 

paveS,  a.  pivi,  — .  131, 

laS.  fl.  I). 

peelo,  3,  pea  (pesui).  p&ram.  133.  a. 

nubo,  3,  nupBi,  niiptum,  133.  0. 

pel-licio,  3, -led, -ledum  [-licao]. 

nSaeio.  lale  form  of  niintio.  la.  a. 

pello,  3.  pepulf.  pulsum    [ira-pello.  re- 

nuntio,  i.  reg..  la.  a. 

pello] ,  10.  a.  p.  Si5. 133.  b.  i,  132.  b. 

-nuo,  3,  -nul,  nullum  [ab-,  ad-nuo] ,  133./ 

pendeo,  a,  pependi,  pensum,  131. 

pendo,  3,  pependi,  pensum,  13a.  i. 

per-ago,  3,  -egi,  -Sctum,  170.  a.  N. 

obs-olesco.  3.  ^vi,  -«nis  (adj.)  [-oleo] , 

per-cell5,  3,  -culi,  -culsum.  133.  c. 

oMngil  (impers.),  146.  c. 

per-cio,  see  -do. 

ob-tineo.  3, -m,-lenlum  [teneo]. 

pet-fringD,  3.  -fregi,  -friictum  [pango]. 

ob-tundo,   3,   ^di,   ^Qsum    (tQnsum) 

petg5,  3.   (11.    *),   perrEri,   perrectum. 

[lundo]. 

132.  a. 

ob-venio,  4,  -veni,  -venlum,  170.  a. 

per-ie6o,3,-leg.-.-le<:tum[leE5]. 

ob-venit  (impers.),  (46.  ■:. 

per-roaneo.  a, -mansTi-manaum  [maneo]. 

oe-dd3, 3,  *idi,  -cSaura  [cado] ,  ii.  /  3. 

per-osus  [odj] ,  143.  h. 

oo*Id3, 3,  *.-di-.  ^esum  [caedo] . 

per-petior,  -I.  -pessus,  135.  h. 

OCCnlD.  occului.  occullum,  13a.  c. 

per-terre3,  a,  -uI,  -itum,  170.  c.  S. 

oc-cuRo,  3,  -ounf  (-cucurri),  -cursum, 

pessum-d5. -daie,.dEi^,-dttp~  Tg»i!!i» 

■         t'-/-3- 

\l>cti&^,^,-,-.v«n-<.-  ^|B|^^_ 

446                                Index  of  Verbs.                   ^^^^^^H 

pelo,  3,  pefivi,  pEBlu.i),  IBB.  A,  124./ 

pio-videS,  a.  •WdT,  -visam,  [66.  c.      ^^^^^k 

135.  b. ».  3,  ISB.  d. 

piibesco,  3,  pubui.  166.  i.  N.               ^^H 

piget  (impG.s.),-ere,piem.,  .46.  *  (pigi- 

pndel  (impers.),  pudere,  146.  *  (pndenddCFn 

fum  est,  id,  N). 

id.N.),puduitorpuditumesi.             ~    ' 

pingB  [FIG],  3,  pinil,  pictam,  188.  «,  p. 

pugno,  I,  Kg. 

pugnatur   (impets.),  -ari,  -alum.   146, 

pinso,  3,  -ai,  pna-  (pinatum,  ptstoin),  13a./ 

T46.  d. 

pio,  ..  reff..  166.  a.  2. 

pungo  [puG],3,pupu^-,punctum  [com-], 

placeo,  a.  -1^,  -Slum  (placer,  impers.,  146. 

132.  K  p.  lao. 

0. 

pSnio,  4,  4vr,  -Hum,  166.  a.  i.  N. 

plango,  3.  planrf,  planMum.  13a.  a. 

pkudo,  3.  Plausi.  plausum   [ex-pl6d5, 

qiiaero,3,quaeByr.quaesrium  [re-quito], 

elc;  ap-plttudo],  13a.  a. 

13a.  d  {c£  qoaeso). 

pleclo,  3,  plexl  (-xui),  plexum,  123,  *.  1. 

quaeso,  -ere,  144.  rf  {cE  quaero). 

182.  a.  p.  S6. 

quasso,  !,  reg,,  167.  i. 

^lector,  -1,  -plexus.  135.  *. 

qualio,  3,  — ,  quassum  [eoo-euliS].  133.* 

■ple5,  a,  -plevi,  -pletum  (only  in  comps., 

queo,  quire,  quivi,  quiius,  144.^.  (qnibj^^— 

»         as  com-p1e5).  131. 

etc,ueque5,id.N.).                          j^H 

plico.  I,  -plicul,  -piiciium,  130.  N.  [com- 

queror, -1,  questus.  135.  h.                ^^^H 

pounds].  130. 

quiEsco,  3.  quievf,  quiStum,  133.  c.     ^^H 

pluit.  3,  pluit  (pliivit),  p.  85,  IM.  0  (plu- 

unt,  id.  K.). 

rabo,  3,  -,  -,  .32./  N. 

pono    [Pos],  3,  posul,  positum,  131.  c. 

rido,  3,  rSd,  raaum.  13a.  a. 

porr-icio,  3,  no  pert,  -rectum    [iado], 

rapio,  3,  rapi^,  raptum,  132,  c  (erepse- 

17a*. 

mus,  laB.  *)  [cor-ripio]. 

poscfl,  3,  poposci  (posciliinis) ,  132.  b  (50 

raucio,  4.  rausi,  ramum,  133. 

comps.j. 

re-ci[u6,  3,  -cepi,  ceplum    [capio]    (re- 

possideo,  2,  sedi,  sessum  [sedeo] , 

ceps5,  laB.  (.  3). 

posBum,  posse,  polul.  — ,  137. 

re-cmd5,  3,-si,-sum,  170.*. 

po(-ens,  119.  0  (see  sum). 

red-dS.  3.  reddidi.  redditnm  [do]. 

potior,  -iri,  pofitua. 

re-fcrdo,  4.  -fetst,  -fcrtum  [fareioj. 

poto,  (,  ivi,  potoro,  130. 

reJerS,  -fcrre,  rettuH   (retuS),   re-lStara 

praebeo  [ii.  i.  i],  3,-uI,-itum. 

[fcrii]. 

prae-cello.  3,  no  petf.,  no  sup.  [-cello] . 

re-fert,  *rre,  -flilit  (Impera.).  146.  c. 

prae-falur,  144.  c. 

re-fici5,3,  -fed,  -tectum,  170.  b. 

prae-Iiga,  3,  legt,  lectum  peEo]. 

rego.3,teii,  04.  N.,  rectum  [ar-iigo,  etc. : 

prae-sHns.  119.  a  (see  sum). 

pJrgo,  EurgcG,lSB.  «,p.iacL 

praestat  (impers.),  146.  c. 

re-linquo,  3.  Hqul,  -licwm  [Unquo]. 

prae-smn,  .esse,  -ful,  137,  347.  *. 

rerainiscor.-I,-,  135.*:                                  , 

prandeo,  2,  prandi,  piSnsum,  131. 

reor,  tetf,  ratus,  ia6.  *.  13B.  *,  166.  ijl^j 

prehendo    (prendo),  3,  -dl,  prehensuiu. 

le-pello,  3,  reppull,  repuUum  (peU^.J^^I 

n'^-f- 

repetlo,  4,  repperf,  reperlum,  133.       ^HH 

premo,  3,  ptesst.  11./  i.press-  [re-primo] , 

,e-pUc5. 1,  r^..  130.  N.                        TH 

133.0. 

repo,  13a.  a.  repai.  leptnm,  13a.  a. 

ptendo,  see  prehendo. 

pr5d-e6,4.-ii,-itum.  144.  ■'. 

re-quiio.  3,  -sM.  -atum  [quaeio] . 

pto-tilus,  144.  c 

re-sipisco,  3,  -siptvi  (-aipui).  -  [wplo]. 

pro-ficio,  3,  -fed,  -fcclura. 

pro-ficiscor.  -i,  profeclus,  13B.  h,  167. 0.  N. 

restat  (impers.).  146.  c.                     .^^H 

pro-fiteor,  -eti,  -fessus. 

resto,  I,  .Slid.  — ,  130.  N.                      ^^H 

_              pro-mineo,  ^re,  — ,  —  [-mineoj. 

reverter,  -i,  reversus.  135,  k  (B.  H,},c^^H 

^^^orSiDO,  3, -mpsi,  -mplum.  tga.  a.                \6aeo.a,flfi,«SQin,VKi.,^2£_J^^^H 

3,  sarpsi,  sarptai 

4.-M(-m),  - 
sal-^0,  3,  like  ago. 
satis-do,  -daie,  -dedi,  -daium,  13a.  I 
acabo,  3,  scabJ,  — ,  133.  e. 
scalpo.  3,  scalpEi,  Ecalplum,  132.  a. 


.  133- 


-,  134- 


||.*caDdo,  3,  scand!, 
I      '3a-/ 

f  Kan'  (-sdsne),  13.  e, 
Edndo  [sciii] ,  3,  scii 
N.,l!8./. 


.(*C] 


laS.  d). 
rascS,  3.  5<nvi.  scitum,  188.  e.  167.  a. 

~  scrlptum,ii./a.l33.« 
L  aculpOf  3,  sculpsi,  aculpliun,  \^  a. 
3,  3,  -crevi,  -cretum,  170.  i. 
.,  'i^,  secluoi  (a)sa  secaturus) ,  130. 
3,  sedf,  seESum    [dis-,  pos-sideo, 
super-aedeo] ,  131. 
s,  ilg.  a  (la  piaesena,  abseos). 
'~  4,  aeiisf.  seDSum,  132. 
4,  sepellvT,  SEpultum,  133. 
«quor,  J,  aeciitus  (aequutus),  135,  A. 
aero,  3,  semi,  soitum,  enfviini,  132.  c, 
sero,  3,  scTi,  satuin,  Jaw.  taS.  c,  13B.  e. 
aerpo,  3,  scip^,  serplum,  133.  a. 
aervio,  4,  -ivi,  -Itum,  166.  a.  i.  n. 
aerro,  i,  -IvI,  -ilum,  166.  a.  1.  N. 
aido,  3,  aldl  (sedi),  -aeaaum,  13a./  6. 
aiem,  sies,  siet,  ajent,  119.  i  (see  aura), 
sileo,  a,  -ul,  — ,  131.  N. 
initio.  4,  -Irf,  aingultum,  133. 


llsto  [: 
I        fooi- 


.,  133.  a 


t.  18S. 


p.  77._foo 

sponde(i.3,spapondi,;panaum  [re-],  13T.  I 
'sf,  for  est  (in  homost,  etc.).  13.  i. 

slatuo,  3, -ui, -uitim  [con-stituo] ,  123.  i<  I 


(,  isa.  <■, 


.  I3».  '■ 


r(slerfi),- 
imulo,  I,  reg.,  16S.  a.  a. 
linguo,  3,  -BlinKi,  -slinclum    [only  ii 
oomp.,  as  ex-] ,  13a.  a, 
-     '  -  ■     'i-).  180,  p.  14. 


foot-n.  I,  III 

p.    ISO,  p.   157.  fool-n.    [bompoonds, 

130.  K.]. 
Bttepo,  3,  strepui,  atrepitum,  13a.  ft 
strideo,  a,  stridi,  — ,  131. 
slTido,  3,  stndi, — ,  133./ 
5lringo.  3,  strinii,  alriclum,  13a.  a. 

sludeo,  3,  -ui,  — ,  131.  N. 
suadE6,  3,  aui^.  suasum,  131. 

sub-struo,  3,  -struiti,  -structum,  170.  a. 

-sueaco,  3,  -luevi,  -suEtnm,  13a.  (. 

auf-fero,  ct  lollo. 

lugo.  3,  aGid,  sucfum  (aflgeba,  p,  lao). 

>uliia  (=5i  vullis),  13.  c  (seevolo), 

mm,  ease,  133.  c;  iiii.  119,  laa  N.,  13S.  t. 
a.  p.  119,  p.  110,  p.  lai,  15B.  I.  a  (aiem, 
1:19.  i ;  fote,  147.  ft  3 ;  eaci^  escunt, 
iig.  b\  fcrem,  iig.  b.  H.;  fuam,  iig.  b\ 
fuvimua,  luTOset,  119.  *;  ~ 
119.11:  homost,  etc.,  13.  j). 

iiimo,  3,  sumpal,  aiimpnini,  11.  c,  13a.  £, 

auQ ,  3.  sui,  ^5*TOO ,  WK  wivR , 


I 


448                                Index  of  Verbs.                   ^^^^^H 

super-flno,  3,  — ,  —  [fluo] . 

turgcii,  2,  lursi,  — ,  131.                     ^^^^^| 

super-sedeS,  Uke  sedeS. 

ti.sEi5,4.-.- .33.            ^^m 

super-sio,  i,-sleG,  — ,  130,  N. 

super-sum,  see  sum   (auperest,  impers., 

ulciscor.  -I.  ultuB,  135.  A.                       ^^^ 

Hfi.  (). 

iup-plico,  I,  wg.,  130.  N. 

urgeo,  a.  ursl,  — ,  13.. 

uro,  3,  US51,  ustum  {so  compa..  cf.  also 

comburo).  132.  a.                                ^^^^ 

l5beo,a,-uI.— ,  166.*.  H. 

-i,  usus,  135.  A.                            ^^^M 

taedel  (Impers,),  -ere,  laeduit,  pertaeaum 

vacal  (Impcrs.},  146.  c.                       J^^^ 

esl.  146.  *. 

vado,  3,  viai.  -vasura  [S-] ,  132.  a.  >4^^| 

Iang5  [TAG],3,letigT.(aclum  [con-tingo], 

1=3,^.3,  18B.S. 

veho.'  3^  v^-,  tectum.   ISB.  a.  p.  87. 

lego,  3,  lexi,  teclum :  laa.  c.  123.  *,  114.  b. 

foo(-n. 

.36.^..,i3».'..PP.9B-99. 

vcllo,  3,  vein  (™1m),  vulsum,  13a./ 

lemno.  3,  tempa,  lemplum.  123.  *.  i. 

ven-do,  3,  -didi,  -ditum,  238.  *.  R. 

138.  a. 

YEneo,  4,  Avi.  -Stum  (*«  i/>id}.  258.  «.  R. 

tendo  [TEN],  3,  tetendi  {-lendl}.  132.  6; 

venio,  4.  veni,  ventum  (come).  133.  p.  86, 

teasum  (lenlum),  135.  b.  n.  1. 

YBDmn-do,  -dSre,  -dcdi,  -datum,  130.  N, 

leneo  (-tineB) ,  a.  lenui,  tentum  [ob-tiaeB] . 

vereor,  vereri,  veritus,  135. 

131. 

«rE5.3.— — . '3a-/"- 

tergeo,  2,  lersl,  lereom,  131. 

verro,  3,  verri,  versuro,  133./ 

tei^,  a,  lersi,  lersum,  13a.  0. 

verto  (Torto.io.i0,3,vcni.veraum,13a. 

lero,  3,  trivi.  trituin,  13a.  d  (con-,  11. 

f;    mid.,  III.  a,  ia4.  *. 

/a). 

veseor,-l.-..3S.i. 

leno,  3,  texul,  lexWm,  13a.  <;, 

vesperasd.  (impers.),  146.  a.  167.  a. 

timeo,  a.  -ui,  — ,  131.  N. 

veto,  i,-ui.-inim,.30. 

tings  (lingud),  3,  i!nxl,  linctum,  .25.  i. 

video,  a.  vidl,  visum.  13I. 

N.  J,  132. .. 

videor.-eri,visus(«™j  tvidelur. impen. 

tinnio,  4.  reg.,  133. 

•46. 0-               ji^i 

lollo,  3,  sushili,  sublahim  [at-tollo] ,  132. 

vieo,      — ,  -«IUm.  131.                          ^^^H 

/N. 

yigll5, 1,  reg..  i6fi.  a.  3.                        ^^H 

londeo.  2,  tolondi,  lonsum,  131. 

vin  {-  vlsne.  see  yolo).  13.  c.             ^^M 

lono,  I,  -ui,  -iium,  124.  c,  180. 

vind3,  4.  vinri,  vioctum,  122.  .f,  IBB.  ^^^ 

torqueo,  a,  lorai,  lortum,  131. 

vineo  [vie],  3,  via,  viclum,  133.  *. 

torreo,  a,  lorrui,  losWm,  131. 

viso    [VID],  3.  via.  visum,   133.  /,  .67. 

tralio.  3,   Dajd.  U^lum,   133.  a  (Oaxe. 

128.  *). 

vivo.  3,  vtxT.  victuro,  13a.  0  (vixel,  123,  *). 

Iremo,  3,  (remul,  — ,  132  c. 

voco,  I,  -avi,  ^tum.  see  p.  87.  tool-n.,  p. 

(ribuo,  3,  tribnl,  tributum,  ct  acuo. 

157.  foot-n.  (voiarier,  128.  e.  4). 

truda.  3.  triisi,  triisum,  132,  a. 

volo,  velle,  voluT,  133.  *.  12B.  t.  a  (vuH 

tueor,  -erf,  luitua  (Hitus) ,  135.  *  [in-lueor] . 

ia3.i:  sultis,  13.^;  -rtn.  I3.(). 

tumeS.  a,  — ,— ,  166.*. 

volv5,  3,  volrt,  volStum.  13a./          ^^H 

lundo  [tud],  3,  tuludi,  IQnsum  (-[Gaum) 

vomo.  3,  vomuT,  vomilum,  13a.  e.      ^^^1 

voveo.  a.  vovi,  voluu,  131.                 ^^^^| 

^^^^^^^^^H^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^vl^^H 

W     INDEX   OF   WORDS    AND   SUBJECTS.       H 

^M     HoTE.— T)ia  nmnsricn]  cefcRDca  aie  10  leclions,  witfa  a  feir  ««ptiiins  in  which  the    '^^H 

m    Keourk.     AbL.  =.  nblitlve;  ace  -=  accuullve;  adj.  =  adjudve:  adv.  »  adYCrb;  apod.  >        ^^ 

Eend.-Ecndei;  Eod-diK.  >^bi<IIrect  dlicounx:  !»<:.'■  Incative:  prep.  .^  pcepoiiliDa ;  hqIiJ.- 

freedom,   etc.,   id,  (;   w,  opuB  and     ^^M 

lilyafafinal,348.4. 

llBiia,  id.  e.      Source  and    material,      ^^H 

&  or  0.  Indo-Eur.  vowel,  p.  14s.  foot-n.; 

primary  suffiit,  160.  c.  i. 

stKre,  etc.,  id.  c;  w.  facere,  id.  d;     ^H 

a,  charaderislic  of  decL  I.,  3a;   ace  of 

w.  nouns,  id.  /.    Cause,  345 ;  w.  dl(r- 

Gr.  nouns  Id.  63./:  m  nom.  ending. 

inia,eic.,id.a;  causa,  gfrStia,  id.  e. 

deoL  III,  gend.,  65.  c,  67.  rf. 

Agent,  345.    Comparison,  347 ;  Oldnl- 

ft,  in  dec!.  I.,  3a;  slem-vowel  of  conj.  I., 

Bno,  sp6,  etc.,  id.  i;  w.  allua,  id.  d; 

123,  133,  ia5.  a,  i56.  a;  In  subjunclivB, 

w.  advs.,  id.  I.    Manner,  348 ;  aceom-       ^_ 

ia6,  A-rf;   prepa.  in  -ft,   adv.  use  of, 

paniment,  Id.   a;     means,  id.   e;    w.      ^H 

a6i.rf. 

dQufl,  etc.,  335.  if;   w.  Qtor,  fnior,      ^^^| 

ft  (ab,  aba),  use,  153.  i,  ]S3,  260.  i,  363 ; 

etc,  249.     Degree  of  difference.  350;      ^^H 

compounded  wilh  vte,,  170.  a;   with 

qua  . . .  88,  106.  ^,  350.  E.    Quality.       ^M 

abL  of  agenl,  146;    with   place  from 

sji;    price,  353;    charge   or  penally. 

which.  358;  with  names  of  towns,  id. 

320.*.    Specification,  353.    Place,  354: 

a.  H.  I :  expressing  position,  aSo.  * ;  in 

w.  verbs  and  frStuB,  id.  t.    Abladve 

conip.,  with  dal.,  aag;  with  abl.,  343. 

absolute,  955 ;  adverbial  i;se,  id.  c;  re- 

*; with  abL  of  gerund,  301, 

placing  subord.  clauses,  id.  <i;  supply- 

Abilily, verbs  of,  conalr.,  371;  in  apod.. 

ing  place  of  pert  ael,  part..  39a  J.  Abl. 

308..:. 

of  lime,  356;  of  titne  w.  quam,  a6i, 

Abbreviations    of    pra^nomens,    So.    d; 

N.3;  of  place  from  which,  258;  names 

other  abbreviations,  p.  438. 

of  towns,  domus,  rOs,  id.  a;    ex 

ABLATIVE,  BfymirlBgy;  meaning,  3t./; 

iirbe  BOm&,  id.  i.  S.  3;    Locative 

in  -ftbuB,  36,*;  in-d,35./  ^o.g.6:.. 

abL,  id.  e,/;  way  by  which,  id.;;  wdlh 

■1,70.^:  of  l-slems,  ded.  III.,  55.  i; 

transitive    compounds,  239.  i.  K.   1; 

rules  of  form,  57!   tiouns  having  abl. 

time  within  which, asg.e;  distance  of 

in  J.  57.  0,  *;  of  dee!.  IV.,  in  -ubuB, 

70,  d;  abU  used  03  supine,  71.  a;  of 

153,  i,  c.  sfa-b^ ;  with  ex  for  part,  gen.. 

«dja,  decL  111..  87.fl,i;  prepositions 

3i6.f;  with  pro  («  difinct  of). 3^6. 

R.;   with  palum,  etc,  36i.i;  abL  of 

o^  148.  *,  ct  3J.  p. 

gerund.  301;  equi^r.  10  ptes.  Dart.,  id. 

ABLATIVE,  ^m/ax  (}}  343-355)  ;  mean- 

fool-n,    (See  N.,  p.  245. 

ing    and   classiGcation,    343  and  N. ; 

Abonnding,  words  of,  w> 

Separation.  343;    w.  vbs.  of  freedom, 

EBT..,  aa^. 

ere.  Id.  a ;  w.  comp.,  id.  i ;  w.  adjs.  of 

Abaeuce.Nbs.tA,-"-" 

■ 

f 


4S0 


Index  of  Words  and  Subjects. 


Absolute  uso  of  vb,  175.  i.  N,  a,  337. 
N.i  absolute  case,  see  e.bt.  absolute. 

Abstract  nouna,  gend..  ag.  2;  in  pi.,  75. 
c\  endings,  163.  i,  i,/\  w.  neut  adj, 
1EI7.  (,  189.  a,  i;  abstract  qualltir  de- 
noted by  neut.  adj,,  189,  a. 

abaum,  conslr..  231.  a. 

-&buB,  in  dat  and  abl.  pi.,  decl.  I.,  36.  e. 

Ko,  see  atQue ;  Be  d,  see  Bed. 

accSdlt  ut,  33a. 

Accent,  rules  of,  19:  marks  of.  id.  d.  v.; 

in  decL  Il.,40.  i;  in  comps.  of  faclO, 

143.  i ;  musical,  35S. 
acceptum,  sga.  n.  x. 
Accidents,  p.  163,  fool-n.  2. 
aocldit.  syncqrais,  145 :  consfr,  33a.  a. 
acoingO,  constr.,  335.  A 
accommod&tuB,  w.  dat  of  E^mtid, 

etc.,  399,  Ibot-n. 
Accompaniment,  abL  of.  348.  a;    orig. 

separate  case,  p.  345. 
Accomplishment,vbs.of,  w.  snbjunc,  33a. 
AcctMATiVE,  Efymotogy,  31,  d\    in  -m 

and -a,  33.  c;  origin  of-ni,p.20s;  in 

Jm.  decl.  III.,  56.  a.  i;  in  -la  (pl.),s8 ; 

in  -9.,  63./;  ace.  of  decL  IV.,  used 


supint 


I4S.i/,cf.  N..;  fem.  usedasa 
AcctraATIVE,  ^alax,  237-40  (see  notes 
pp.  20s,  335);  V.  verbs  of  rememberinE. 
aigando.i;  and  gen,  w.  vbs.  of  remind- 
ing, id. c;  w.lraperaonals,a2I./,337. «; 
w.  dat,  3z5;w.  com  pound]  of  ad.  ante, 
Ob.  338.  a;  verbs  varying  between  ace. 
of  end  of  motion  and  dat.,  925.  b\  w. 
B4l,  for  dat.,  334.  h ;  afier  proplor, 
etc.,  id.  t ;  direct  object.  177.  337 ;  w. 
1ut8,  etc.,  337.  a ;  ace  or  dat.  w.  vbs., 
337.  *,  c\  aoe.  w.  verbs  alfielaig  and 
tasti.  337.  *,  c ;  with  comps.  of  cir- 
cum  and  tFftOS,  id.  d;  aognate  ace., 

pass,  of  verbs  of  taking,  etc,  339.  K. ; 
adverbial  use  of,  340.  a,  b  \  syuecdocb- 
ical  Bcc.,  id.  c;  in  exclamations,  id.  d\ 
duration  and  extent,  id.   t.  356,  337 ; 

domuB,  rQs,  id.  b;  &flinam  ad 
urbem,  id.  N,3;  ate.  w.  ante  diem, 
359.?;  subject  of  int.,  173.3,0; 

330;  w.  prepositions.  15a.  a. 

or  In  to  denote  penalty,  ^k 


ad  w.  rSfert,  etc.,  333^  * ;  w.  prid 
proplna.  etc.,  361.  a  1  ace.  ofgeiu 
300;  of  anticipation,  334.  c\  snbjeci 
indirect  discourse,  336.  end  ii. 
Accusing  uid  acquitting,  vbs.  of,  coni 

Acer,  decl.,  S4.  a;  conip.,  89.  a. 

'Ilceiis,  adj.,  ending.  164.^. 

aoiSe,  decl.,  74.  d, 

B<:(iul68CS,  with  abl,.  254.  b. 

RchI,  with  subjunc,  312. 

Actions, camesof,  193;  nounsof.w.p 


e,  loS.  a 


317. 
Active  1 


Acts,  nouns  denoting,  163,  e. 

aeuB.  gender,  69,  a. 

-acuB  (-ttcua),  adj.  ending,  164, «. 

ad.  use,  152.  a.  153;  in  eomp.,  170.  a 


ace.,  22B.  a\  w.  ace  w,  adjs.,  234.  i; 
endof  motion,  358,  cC 23^.  J;  iv.namet 
of  towns.  358.  j.  N.  3;   w,  names  ol 


gilsm 


1,  363.  N. ;  w.  gerund. 


decl,  63.,. 
addltur,  conslr..  331.  ^^^b 

ade3  (verb),  conslr.,  338.  a.  ^^H 

adeS  ut,  319.  K.  ^^^1 

-adSa.  patronymic  ending,  164.  t,  ^^^H 
adlmis,  constr.,  331).  ^^^1 

Adjective  phrase,  179. 
Adjective  pronouns,  see  Pronouns. 
AdjbcTIVES,  Efynohgy.    Definition,  35. 
b\  formed  like  noitns,  P.47J  stems,  id. 
foot-Q.  I,    Declension,  81-87;  "J"!-  ■■ 
and  II.,  81-83;  decU  III,,  84-87;  detl. 
111.,  three  terminations,    84.  a;    one 
lermination,  85,     Comparison,  89-91 ; 
decl.  of  comparative,  86,  a ;  advi.  de- 
rived from  adjs.,  148;   numeisl  adjs., 
94.  95 ;  derivative  adjs.,  164. 
ABJEirrtvES.  ^/ax  and  Kit.    As  advs.. 
88.  d  (cf.  93).  14S.  d,  I.  191 :  as  nouns 
8B.  a,  188,  189,  318.  d;  masc.  adjs..  88. 
i;  adjs.  of  com.  gend.,  88.  i;  nouns 
used  as  adjs..  88. .;,  1B8,  d;  advs.  used 
,     e.^  ad^&.,  1.88.  t;    participles  used  si 
e-.  •N.aa.'i      ails.,  *)V.     Kpfieostw.  <A  *fi<^^s6,, 


of  neut.  adj).,  1B9;  two  compara- 
s  with  qiiam,  iga.    Adja.  w.  ad- 
bial  force,  igij  adj,  pronouns,  195- 
.    Gell,ofailjs.ofdecLin.inalead 
lom.,  214.  d,  K.  Adjs.  w.  pari,  gen., 
;  w.  dal.,  ^4;  w.  ace.  037.  /;  w. 
inf.,  373.  rf;  w.  supine  In  -11, 303.    Po- 
■     n  of  adjs.,  344.  a,  i.     Adjecdve 
se.  179. 
»diuvS,  w.  ace.,  axj.  B. 
I  odmodiim,  use,  93.  d, 
I  admoueS,  c 


Index  of  Words  and  Subjects. 
atflnla,  decl.,  57,  S; 


I   Admonishing, 
[   Adonii 


■  otc 
e,  371.  3. 


[■  adaperffC,  conslr.,  335.  d. 

ftdOlor,  conslr,  337.  *. 
Adverbial  ace,  340;  a,  i,  d.  338.  a.  V. 
Adverbial  conjunctions,  33.  i.  N. 
Adverbial  phrases,  148.  N.  #,  179. 
Adversative  conjunctions.  154.  a.  -. 
adveratts,  13a.  foot-o. ;  w.  act 


155-^ 


\ 


■emiHor.  constr^  227.  i. 
AeaSodeB,  decl.,  37, 
AeneSa,  decL.  37, 

aequ&lle,  decl.,  37.  a;  constr.  w.  gen., 
ai3.  d. 

aequS  &c,  234.  a.  n.  2. 

aequo  (abl.),  w.  camp.,  247.  i, 

osquor,  decU  4^. 

ftBr,decl..63./;  U5B0fpl.,75.#. 

I  aee,  decl.,  67.  ^ ;  i^se  ofpl.,  75.  J. 

I  aetKs,  decl.,54. 

[  aethSr.  decl.,  63./. 

V  Adverbs,  defined,  25./;   formed  from 

■  adjs..  88.  rfand  N.,92,  148;  ease-forms 
or  phrases,  p.  123.  N.;  comparison  ol 
advs.,  gai  numeral  advs..  96;  correlar 
live  advs.  used  as  conjs..  107,  208.  d. 
Classilicationof advs.,  149;  correlative 
forms  of  advs.  of  place.  149.  fool-n. 
Advs.  used  as  adjs..  18S.  i;  adjs.  w. 
adverbial  force,  191;  adverbial  ace, 
;  adverbial  abl.  abs.,  233.  c. 
Special  uses,  150,  iji.   Syntax,  saj- 

advs.,  siS.  a.  4;    dal.  w.  advs..  234. 
a ;  comp.  of  adv.  followed  by  quam, 
a^.  ex  Bffr.  as  protasis,  310.  a. 
w,o(p.335. 


Agent,  dat.  ■ 
perf,  parts., 

Offer,  decl,  3 
aeEredlor,  conslr 
Agnom 


J,  farms  of,  o 


nonns,  19; 
197;   of  r 


id  open,  2+,  N, 

5  of,  162 ;  rel.  clause  eqnlv- 

'f,  '»•  gerundives.  332;  w.  ^^H 
,  id.  a ;  abl.  of,  346 ;  ageot  ^^H 
\  means,  id.  bi  animal  B**^^! 

>,.ilM,«,5.,.  ^H 

u  of.  Viith  gerundive,  394.  <'^^^| 

li;  fornis  of,  182;  ofnouiu,  ^^^| 
ios„  1S4;  in  predicate,  i8Si  "^^^ 


1.  P-  =9. 


rophe,364.fl 
iding,  164.  i. ; 

1,  83.  foot-n. 


sllSnua,  for  ] 

83.  i,  190, 214.  a. 
allqid  (.quia),  decl..  105.1/;  derivatlaii 

and  use,  id.  N. ;  meaning,  20a.  a,  b. 
aliquot,  indeclinable,  use,  106.  a. 
-fills,  -&riB,  adj.  endings.  164.  d, 
alius,  decl..  B3  and  foot-notes;  gen.,  id. 

^,c£9i4.ii;  compounds,  83.  j;  alius 

wlih  abl,  fi.o,  uiBl,  quam,  247.  d. 
alius  . . .  alius,  alter  . . .  alter,  203. 
Alphabet,  p.  I;  vowels  and  diphthongs. 


;  table  of  vi 


arly  forms  of  letters, 


w 

^r       452                     /tidex  of  Words  and  Subjects.                    ^^H 

altar , . .  alter,  am. 

altera  eat  rSa  ut,  331,  (oot-n. 

Antithesis,  344.  y^                               ^^^| 

anuB,  gend.,  69.  a.                           ^^H 

alteruter,  decl.,  83.  b-,  use.  303.  a. 

■Anus,  adjs.  in,  164.  c.                       ^^^H 

Although,  hQw  expressed,  313,  3*i  e. 

Aorist  (-  hist,  perf.),  115.  c.  a,  379-^^H 

alvoB  (alvua),  Bcnd.,  39.  a. 

apase,  144-/.                                ^H 

am-,  see  Bjnb-. 

aparte,  i|a.  N.;  !i6o.  J.                   ^^^H 

amb-  (am-,  an-),  insf^parable  preRi, 

apertua.  comp.  of,  89.  e.                  ^^^| 

170.  b;  -am,  adv.  ending,  148.  N.  t. 

aplB,  decl..S9. 

ambages,  deel.,  59. 

Apodosis,  defined,  304;  inlroducedbycor- 

ambO,  decl.,  94.  h. 

rel.,  id.  i  and  N.  1  rosy  be  subord..  id.  i ; 

amens,  decl.,  87.  a. 

forms  o(,  30s,  306  n.;  potential  subj.. 

ampllua,  wiihouf  quam,  147.  c. 

311.  aandB.;  subj.  of  modesty,  id.  * ; 

verbs  of  necessity,  etc,  id.  c ;  complex 

an-,  see  amb-. 

an,  anne,  annOn,  in  double  queaiions. 

apod,  iti  Ind.  Disc,  337. 

■             an  (In,  on),  primary  suffii,  i6a.  ^. 

^H           AHOcrusis, 'i^t,.  g. 

183,  1S4.  b\  w,  locative,  id.  c;  gen.  as 

W               374-1. 

"             A«apk«r<,.^f. 

gen.  used  for  app.,  214./  so  dal.,  231, 

anas,  deol.  67.  d. 

b ;  rel.  clause  equivalent  to  appositive, 

anoepB,  decl.,  87.  a. 

AnchisSB,  deol.,  37. 

f ;  appositive  instead  of  voc,  a4I.<i; 

AndromachS,  decl.,  37. 

app.  in  connection  with  inf.,  170.  N.  2. 

■             -aneua,  adj.  end[nE,  164-i'. 

aptua  ad,  234.  b;    aptus.  w.  dat  ol 

^H            animal,  decl,,  53. 

gerund,  etc.,  299,  foot-n.;  aptua  qui, 

^1            Animals,  gend.  of  names  of,  29.  2,  30,  id. 

320./ 

^1                A ;  regarded  as  means,  246.  b.  N. 

apud,  152.  a :  use,  153 ;  in  quoting.  ^8. 

■          anlml  (loc).  w.  adjs.,  218.  c.  r.;   w. 

■                verbs,  «3-  '^. 

aqu&lls,  dec!.,  57.  a. 

■            AnlS,  decl.,  67.  i». 

-ar.  nom.  ending,  decl.  III.,  51.  e,  53.  r. 

■            anoRliB,  decl.,  57.  a. 

57.  n;p.3o,  foot-n.  1;  gend.,  65. 1.67.0. 

■             Answers,  forms  of,  a.a. 

-ar,  -aria,  nouns  in.  67.  *.                   ^^_ 

aat,  primary  auffiit,  i6a  .;  ant-,  ent-. 

arbor  (-Sa),  decl..  48.  d.                ^^^M 

aroeS,  constr..  225.  d.  N.  a.               ^^H 

ante,  159.  u;    uses,  153;   compounded 

Archilochian  verse,  368.                     ^^^^H 

arctus,  gend.,  39.  a.                      ^^H 

aaS,  w.  ace.,  id.  0;  adverbial  use  of. 

arous,  gend.,  69.  a.                           ^^^H 

a6i.  d\  followed  by  quam,  a62. 

ftrdeS,  w.  BbL,  245.  a.  a.                   ^^H 

ante  diem,  359.  e. 

-&ria,  suffix,  164. 1,  a.                     ^^^^^ 

Anlecedenl,  ils  use  wilh  relative,  198,  200; 

-aria,  adj.  ending,  i^.  d.                 ^^M 

undefined,  conslr.,  310;  see  indefinile 

■B.rlam.  noun  ending.  164.  i.  3.       ^^H 

anlecedent. 

-AriuB.  ad),  ending,  164.  »;  noun.f^^H 

antecedS,  constj.,  aaS.  0. 

Arisiophanic  verse,  371,  a.                 ^^^^| 

anteeO,  consir.,  aaS.  a. 

Arrangement  of  words,  343-^46.         ^^^^| 

antegredlor,  constr.,  aiB.  a. 

Arsis  and  thesis,  35S  and  foot-n.       ^^^^| 

Anlepenuit,  19.  dtf. 

Arts,  names  of.  detd.  I.,  37,  i.            ^^H 

antequam,3a7;  in  ind.  disc.,335.  B.  u. 

arCuB,  decl.,  70.1&                              ^^^1 

as,  primary  suffix,  160.  ..                  ^^H 

k           AiifiiacMus.  356.  t. 

\Jfia,ma=c.,V.<.tGt.  nouns,  63./.^^^ 

^^L^AnricipalJon,  ace.  of,  334.  c;  become 

H                        Iti^ex  of  U'imis  and  Subjects.                   453   ^^^ 

H  (end.  of  nouos  in.  65.  b:  -Ss,  -fitla, 

bacoar,  decl.,  57.  a. 

^K  67.  i',  see  &t- :  adjs.  in  -as,  164.  c. 

Bacchiac  vene,  374.  i. 

HKb,  decL  67.  rf;  value  of,  377;  gen.  of. 

Bacaius,  356.  d. 

K  asii. 

-bam,  lense-anding,  p.  rig. 

■lAscIepiadic  verse,  37".  5.  6, 

HABking,  vbs.  of,  w.  two  aoc.sqg.c;  w. 

294.  d:  clause,  331.  d. 

W     abl.,  339.  <r.  N.  I;  w.  subjunc.  clause, 

Baae.p.  i3,foot-n.3,3i.<-.  N. 

■         331- 

baale,  decl.,  64. 

Aspliales,  a.  a.  3, 

-asaere,  in  fuC  perf..  laS.  «. 

Believing,  verbs  of,  with  daL,  227. 

Assertions,  direct,  in  Indie.,  in,  a. 

bom,  locative  use  of,  25B.  d. 

bellum,  decl..  38. 

belluB,  comp.,  gt.  d.  2, 

&BBlH,Een.  of  value,  952.  i. 

Belonging,  adjs.  of,  w.  gen..  234.  d. 

-ftBsS,  -&Bsere,  in  fut.  pert,  laB.  (.  s- 

aat.  isG.  *. 

constr..  227.  t. 

-aster,  as  noun  ending,  164.  i.  12. 

Benefiting,  verb5  of,  conslr..  227, 

aetua,  delect.,  77. 3. 

-ber,  names  of  months  in,  decl..  84.  3. 

Asyndeton,  208.  i,  346.  c. 

bi-color,  decl.,  87.  d,/. 

At,  meaning  near.  25B.  c.  n.  i. 

bi-corpor,  85,  6.  N. 

at.  use,  156.  *;  atenlm,  id.;  at  verS, 

-bUlB.  verbal  adj.-ending  in,  164.  m. 

203.  *. 

bipennla,  decL,  87.  t. 

&t-,  pattial  stem-ending.  54. 3 ;  decl.,59', 

Birds,  gend.  of  names  of,  29.  a. 

Sl.i. 

Birth  or  origin,  nouns  of,  derivation.  164. 

fiter,  decl.,  8a.  c\  not  compared,  89.  N. 

i:  parts,  of,  with  abl.,  334.  a. 

AtMa,  decl.,  43. 

-bO,  tense-ending,  pp.  119.  lao. 

Atlfta,  decl.,  63.  e,  64. 

bonua,  decl.,  90;  w.dat.  of  gerund,  etc. 

atque    (50),   use,    136.  a;    after  adJEi. 

2gg.  (oot^. 

of  likt-'ness,  334.  a.  v.;    aflet  allue. 

bSa,  decl..  60.  i.  6!. 

m-d. 

brl-,  slems  ending  in,  51.  *;   adjs.  in, 

atdul,  use,  156.  i. 

84.  a. 

atrSx,  decl.,  85.  a. 

-brum,  Buffix,  163.  d. 

Attraclion  of  cose  of  relative,  199.  a. 

-ba,  nouns  in,  67.  c. 

Aflraclion.  subjunctive  of,  340,  342. 

-bulOTQ,  suffix,  163.  d. 

Attributive    adjective    defined,    1S6.    a ; 

-bundua,  verbals  in,  164.  p:  w.  aec. 

number,  186.  d;  takes  gender  of  near- 

237-/ 

est  noun.  .87. «. 

barie,  decl.,  56.  a. 

-atua.  adj.  ending,  164./ 

Buying,  verbs  of,  conslr.,  252.  d. 

at  vSrO,  so3.  e. 

audacter,  comp.,  92, 

0  for  K,  in  early  use  and  as  abbreviation, 

aula,  decl..  37. 

6;  forqu,7;  gend.of  nouns  In -C,  65. 

auTQUS,  not  compared,  91.  d.  N. 

c;  quanlily  of  final  syllables  ending  in, 

auaua  as  pres,  part.  290.  i. 

348-  to- 

aut.  use.  Is6.e;  212.  R, 

oaedSa,  decl.,  59. 

autom.  use.  156.  *,  *:  345.  *, 

c»ei§a,  decl..  87.  b. 

Aulhority  in  Prosody,  p.  394. 

caelum,  niih  masc.  pi.,  78.  2  *. 

Author  w.  apud,  95S.  c.  S.  2. 

Caere,  decl.,  57.  a. 

aviB,  decL,  57.  i. 

caeelua,  comp.,  91.  d. 

-Ax,  verbal  adj.  ending,  164./;  adjs.  in, 

Ciesura,  35B.  *;  masc.  and  fern,  36a.  *. 

With  gen.,  218.  d. 

R.;  bucolic  «esura.  id. 

Calendar,  Roman,  37G. 

1,     AVA.  as  origin  of  verlJ-forms,  123.  fool- 

Ca\end&,^(i.  a.       .^^^^^^^^^^^^_ 

k 

\  calT.,  dec\.,  1-7.  b.  ^^^^^^^^^^H 

^M       454                   /rit^ex  of  Words  and  Subjects.                  ^^H 

Ceasing,  vbs.  of,  w.  complem.  inl^^^H 

G6da,  constr.,  226.  N.  a.                 ^^H 

■          canalla.decl..S7.*. 

oeleber,  decl.,  84.  a.                         ^^^1 

H          oante,  decl.  and  slem,  47.  c,  51.  a. 

osier,  forms,  84.  <i,                            ^^^| 

■          CAP.  root.  45.  a. 

CSIS,  w.  ace,  939.  d.                          ^^H 

■            Capacity,  measures  of.  3S3. 

CeltlbSr,  decl.,  41.  d.                    ^^H 

^T          Cftpltla,  gen.,  with  verbs  of  actusing. 

csaaefl.  constr.,  331  and  d.            ^^H 

certe,  certO.  use,  151.  c\  In  ansiS^^ 

caput,  decl.,  46. 

CapyB,  decL,  63.  j-,  64. 

cSte,  Greek  pL,  39.  h. 

CarbaBua,  gend.,  39.  a ;  plur..  78.  2.  *. 

cStera,  82.  d\    adverbial  use.  240.  i; 

Cardinal  numbers,  94.,  replaced  by  dis- 

-UB,  use,  193;  -I,  use,  203.  0. 

Iribullves,  95  h,  d.\    infleclion  of  id. 

cou,  use.3ia. 

iM\  with  ex.,  116.  c. 

-OOU3,  ad.,  ending.  164..?. 

OftrS.  oomp.,  CB. 

Oiaructeristic.  clause  of,  320. 

Cbaracleiistic,  expr.  by  participle,  291 

cirua,  compared,  89. 

Characteristic  vowel,  32,  351.            _^^H 

Charge  and  penalty,  gen,  of,  22a.     ^^^^| 

Case-endinip.  31.  1.  N.;  final  vowels  in, 

cbelys.  decl.,  b^.g,  64.                     ^^1 

33.^;  table,  34. 

Ckmtau!.  344.  /  and  H.                     ^^H 

Case-forms,  words  defect,  in,  77. 

Cases,  defined,  31 ;  position  of  modifyng 
case,  344.  a.  a;    agreement  in,    1S3; 
origin  and  meaning  of,  p.  205 ;  case  of 

Chooair^,  vba.  of,  w.  2  hcc„  239,  <>-^^^| 

Chotiambic  ver^e,  370,  N,                  ^^^^^^| 
Ckariambus.  356.  t.                            ^^^1 

rel.  pron.,  igB,  199.  a;  same  case  after 

Qi  and  tl.  Interchange  of,  12.  a.       ^^^1 

as  before  certain  conjs.,  ao8.  a.     Con- 

-clnlum,  noun  ending,  163./         ^^^^H 

□iiuia.baTl.  indecl.  67.  a.                 ^^H 

ais-aas;  Dative,  224-236;  Accusative, 

-ciS,  diminutive  ending.  164.  a.  lU-^^H 

s37-a40i  Vocative,  241;  Ablative,  243- 

oip-,  stems  in.  decL  111..  45-  a-        ^j^^H 

ass:  time  ai"l  p'ace,  256-259;  cases 

c1tc&,  circum.  ctrciter,  use,  ipH^^ 

with  pteps.,  260,  258.  foot-note. 

153;  as  advs.,  261.  <;. 

caasem,  dec!..  77.  5. 

circa,  after  a  noun,  263.  N. ;  w.  gerund. 

castruta,  costra,  7B.  c. 

30Q. 

Catalectic  verse,  359.  a. 

oauaa.  w.  gen.  223.  e.  245.  c;  w.  gen.  of 

dat.  w.  such  comps.,  ia8;  ace.,  ^d^^ 

gerund.  318. 

clroumdO,  constr.,  aas-  d.             -^^1 

Causal  clauses,  w,  indie,  or  subj.,  quod, 

Circumflex  accent.  19.  N.                   ^^fL 

quia.  {cf.  N.  3),  quoniam,  32.;  w. 

clroumlundB,  consir..  335.  rf.         ^^M 

quBiiidS,  id.  N.  3;  w.  qui,  320.^;  with 

Circumstances  of  act,  355  and  d,  5 :  pal^ 

cum,  id./;  n6n  qula.nOn  quod. 

ticiple  implying,  39'. 

etc..  in  the  denial  of  a  reason,  321.  R.; 

Ola,  oiterior,  91.  a. 

causal  clause  replaced  by  pan.,  393 ;  by 

Cities,  gend.  of  names  of,  39,  a  and  ». 

abl.  abs.  255.  d.  2. 

cltra,  after  its  noun,  363.  N.                  ^^_ 

Causal  conjuQcIions.  154.  0,  3,  155.  c. 

cirla,  -6a,  decL,  51.  a.                      -^^^k 

particles,  321. 

cl&d6a,  decl.,  59-                                ^H 

Cause,  abL  ol,  245, 

clam,  constr.,  361.  i,                      ^HH 

Cause,  adverb  of,  149.  c. 

Classes,  names  oi;  gend.  of,  BE.  d;  «H»  | 

Caution  and  elfon,  vbs.  of,  constr.,  337.  t. 

in  plu..  76.  2. 

oeive,  in  probibiiUms,  269. 0 ;  nS  omit- 

Clauses, defined,  kinds  of,  iSo;  repluLi-.l 

ted  after,  331./  S. 

by  abl,  aba..  355,  d;    used  as  nouns. 

OSVed,  eonsfr,,  331. 

i.\\.  d:  dependent,  syntax  of,  316-341 

^^^Htatdilic.  too  and  foot-n.,  101.  a  aiv4\    \uc\.'.  «>«&•««,■*.,,*.,  ««<.!.. ^jiug^ 

Index  of  Words  and  Subjfcts. 


tempoial,  33>-338;  sabstanttve,  33^ 
339  incl. ;  infinitive  clauses,  330;  sub- 
maotive  clousf  s  of  purpose,  331 ;  of  re- 
anll,  33a;  indie,  with  QUOd,  333;  in- 
direct questions,  334;  Indirect  dis- 
couise,  335-34a- 

oiavla,  decl.,  57.  b, 

DllBnta  (lem.  form),  38.  b\  85.  e. 

Close  syllables,  14.  d. 

ooeid,  143.  a. 


1..  237- ' 


Cognomen,  So.  a. 

Collective  noun  with  pi,  verb,  205.  e, 

ooluB,  gend,,  69.  a;  ded.,78.  i.  a. 

ipounded  w.  vbs..  170. 


Coral 


13  of  w. 


comittum.  CI 
comltor,  constr.,  927. 
Command,  see  Imperil 

subj.,  a66. 
Commanding,  vbs,  o^ 
f-.  330-  = 


(of.  331.  i). 


.,  al8.  d. 


commUiiiB,  w. 
aODUnllt&Fe,  conslr.,  23a.  e. 
Comparative  eonj unctions,  154 

ia  conditions,  313. 
Comparative  suffii.  Bg.  fool-n 

148.  (/. 
Comparalivea,   dccl.,  86;    ste 


osillve 


Btives,  193;  comp. 
quam,  id. ;  abl.  w.  comp^  347  j  quam 
w.  comp.,  id.  a;  compar.  w,  quam 
(ut),  Quaia  qui,  320.  c,  33a,  b. 

Comparison,  conjunctions  of,  ao8.  a. 

Compartson  of  adjs.,  E91  irregular,  90; 
detecllve,9i:w.ina^andm&xllu3, 
89.  d\  of  ad  vs.,  9a;  prepositions  im- 
p'jinfi'.  "I'''  quam,  363. 


Comparison,  particles  of,  tamqi 

Complementary  infinil. 

subject,  id.   N. ;    pted,  noun   or  ad]^ 

aher.  id.  c  \  inf.  partly  subject,  partly 

complementary,  ayo.  b. 
Completed  action,  lenses  or,  115; 

formed,  \^.f,g\  in  the  pass.,  14 

compleS,  constr.,  a4B.  c.  R..  223. 
Complex  conditional  sentences,  311. 
Complex  sentence,  180.  b. 
oomplQr69,  oomplOiia,  36.  b. 
compos,  deck,  87.  b,  d 
Composition,  all  word-tdrmalion  a 

cess  of)  p.  140;  comp.  to  express 

tions  of  words,  pp.  305.  335. 
Compound  sentence,  defined,  iBo. 
Compound  stems,  imaginary,  1G4.  r 
Compound  suffixes,  160.  b,  161. 
Compound  verbs,  170;  comps.  of  faclO, 


I 

r  adji^ 

7-*; 

\ 


;ompounds  of  preps.,  V 
d6,  ex,  aag;  w.  ace 
quantity  of,  35+.  c. 


.f'^SH 


Conailve    present,    376.    *;     imperfect, 

377.  e. 
conofidS,  constr..  331  and  c. 

c  (cf,  3r3.  a.  i)  I  particles  of,  yi; 
quamvlB, ut,BS,3i3.  a;  lloet,  \A.b\ 
etsl,  elc,id.  c;  Cum,  id.  d;  quam- 
quam,  id.  i,  g\  quftmvls,  w.  indie, 
id.^j  vbs.  of,  w.  Ut,  331.  e;  abl.  abs, 
for  concess.  clause,  355.  d.  3;  conces- 
sion implied  in  part.,  39a;  qui  con- 
cessive, 330.  e. 
Concessive  clauses,  see  Concession. 
Concessive  conjunctions,  154.  b.  3,  155, 
d,  g\  foil,  by  adveisative,  156.  b.  N, ; 
particles,  use  of,  313.  1 

Conclusion,  see  Apodosis.  J 

Concords,  the  four,  183.  I 

concoFs,  dec!.,  85.  b,  87.11.  I 

Condemning,  vbs.  of,  constr.,  sao. 
Conditional  clauses,  defined,  iSo.  d. 
Conditional    cottjunclions,    154.    b.    i, 

"55.  '■ 
Conditional  s 
\      4ffie\o^tw 


4S6 


Index  of  Words  and  Subjects. 


and  apodosls,  304 :  classificalioii,  305; 
Pres.  and  Past,  nolhing  implied. 
Future  conditions,  3C7 ;  fiit  mote  i 
id.  B.  (;  fut,  less  vivid,  id.  *,  i;  perf. 
indie,  in  ftil.  cond,  id.  c\  Conltaty  to 
bet,  308 :  indie,  in  cont.  10  ^1  condi- 
llan,  id.  j,  cC  c;  General  candician, 
309 1  eondition  disguised,  310  i  as  pa; 
etc.,  id.  a\   as  exhortation  or  co 
mand.id. ;  protasis  omitted, 311;  Potr 
liaj  Subjunc.,  id.  a;  Subjucc.  of  Mod- 
esty, id.  b ;  vbs.  of  neceaaily,  etc.,  id.  c 
eoniplex  conditions,  Id.  i;  Particles  d 
Comparison  (conclusion  omitted]  ,313 
Concessive  clauses, 3r3;  Proviso,3i4 
use  of  sisnd  its  comps.,315;  eondl 
tional  relative  clauses,  316;  tempoTal 
33a,  327,  i\  conditional  sentences  li 
ind.  disc,  337. 

Conditional  Partictcs,  312. 

oflntldS,  conslr.,  254  b.  and  N. 

Conjugation,  defined,  26.  Conjugation 
of  verbs,  123-147;  bow  distinguished, 
139,  a\  regular  fbrms  of,  125.  c\  mixed 
forms,  id.  (f;  parallel  forms,  134 ;  stem- 
vovielsof  conjugations,  122-195:  stems 
of  the  four  conjugations,  how  modified, 
116;  paradigms  of  the  four r^ular  con- 
jugations, pp.  92-105. 

Conjunelions,  defined,  25.  h ;  classes  of, 
154;  list  ot  iss;  use  of,  156;  correla- 
tive use,  id.  h\  conjs.  repeated,  id. 
Syntax  of  conjs.,  208;  amitied.id.*; 
use  together,  id.  e. 

Conjunctive  adverb.  25,  h.  H. 

Conjunctive  phrase,  154.  H.  a. 

ConiancHvia  rxedcs/iae,  ^ii- 1. 

Connectitig  vowel  (so-called),  p.  87, 
foDl-n, 

Conn 


Consecutive  clauses,  defined,  iSo.  t;  of 


I',  319,  3' 


3, 154.*.  4, 155.1. 


Consf 

cSnsequor  uli,  332. 

cOnsistere,  w.  abL,  244.    c,   foot-n., 

"54  *■ 
Consonants,  classification,  b;    changes, 

ii;    omission,  id.  i;  insertion,  id.  c; 

Iransposilion.id.  d.  124.  a.  N.*,  tjissimi- 
latlon,  XI.  <;  assimilation,  M.  f;  v^o- 


5  apparentlf  ending  ia 


of  adjs.,  B; 
case-forms,  87  j  of  verbs,  166.  a.  3. 
Consonant  suflixea  (primary),  160.  c.  3 

ibL,  244.  c 
cOiiBtitiiO,  eonsir..  331.  rf. 
ConitrUctid  ad  shtsuM.    See  ^nttis. 
CBttslruclii  fratgaoHS,  338.  i. 
Constructions   of  cases,    213-263   (sc 

under  abl.,  etc.). 
cSnsiiert,  use,  379.  e. 
cCdsuI,  decl.,  49. 
cOnaularia,  decl.,  57.  a. 
cSneulS,  w,  dat  or  ace.. 
Contention,  words   of,   1 

w.  abl,,  354.  i  \  w.  pert 


ContinSrl,  w.  abL,  344,  e,  foe 
oontlnslt  at.  33X 
Continued  action,  tenses  of,  i 
Continuing,  vbs.  of,  w.  compl. 
Contrft,  derivation,  14S.  N.  ^ 

a.  153,  i8fl.  e.  a,  354.  i;  as 

position ,  063.  K. 


« 


n  prosody,  347.  f ;  of  ayllnble^, 


Copula,   J; 

3+1./ 
Copulative 


176.   a;    poutic 

ictions,  154.  a.  I 

ao8 ;  use  of,  aoB. 

.,176  a. 


Copulative  verbs,  179. . 
decl,  67.  4.  77.  6. 

corpus,  decl.,  49. 

;latives,  106,  107;  rendered 

>.  i;  by  tht.,.tAt,  id.  1:-.  sdvs.  ol 


■■■  "49-  " 


onjs.. 


V  final 


f  Countries,  namea  of,  gcnd,,  sg.  i  and  t 
as  end  of  molion,   and    place  trocr 
which,  058.  N.  3. 
o 
I 


Index  of  Words  and  Subjects. 


\ 


Drater.  decl.,  63./: 
Crfber,  decL,  89.  c. 
crfidlbill,  w.  comparative.  247,  i. 
crBdO.  posilion  of,  343.  e. 

toot.  356.  rf;  veirse,374.A 
or  charge,  gen.  of,  330. 
-CFum.  noun-ending,  163.  d. 
X,  decl.,  77.  6. 
iiomlB.  decl..  56.0. 
cvdculmodi,  Tos.i.  N. 
cillSa,  ctUua,  105./ 
cOiusmodl,  215.  a. 
-culUiB.  noun  suffix,  163,  d. 
-cuius,  dim.  ending,  1&4.  a. 
Ouiii,quam  (conj.),fD[m,  104./;  mean- 
ing, is&f:  cum  ,  .  .  torn,  107.  136. 
A,  x^.d't  with  clause  for  part.,  290.  f, 

d;   causa]  or  conces.,  336;  temporal, 


chatige,  351  c;  w.  abL  of  gerund,  301. 
-comiiue,  added  to  relatives,  loj.  aand 

a. ;  lempoial  particles  with,  33a. 
-CUudoa,  verbal  adj.  ending,  164./. 
GU|^-.  stem-ending,  45.  a. 
CuplS,  conslr.,  331.  i  and  N. 
Cflra,  constr..  331;   cflra  (imv.),  use, 

-CUB,  nouns  in.  decL  lV.,70.rf;  -CUB,  suf- 
fix, 159.  N.,  164.  i.  g. 
Customary  action,  377. 309.  i. 
cUBtSs,  dccl.,  67.  d. 


D  changed  10  B,  It.  a,  s;  -d  final 
denlly  t,  13.  e\  -d  in  abL,  decl.  I., 
/:  decL  U..v>.g;  decl.  HI.,  63. 
decl.  IV..  70.  H;  mfid,  ted,  98.  i 
-fi  in  advs.  originally  .fid.  14B. 
-d  as  neul.  proo.  ending,  p.  49. 
9 ;  loss  o(  -d,  p.  345. 


Dactjlio  Terse,36o|  hexntneti 
giac  stanza,  363 ;  other  forms.  364. 

-dam,  adverbial  ending,  146.  ~ 

danmRa.  indecl.  ad].,  87./. 

t>Bplme.  decl.,  37. 

Daphala.  decl.,  63. 1, 64, 

daps,  defect.,  77.  7 ;  Increment  of,  jgoh. 

Dales,  haw  expressed,  369.  t,  376. 

Dating,  vbs.  of,  w.  compl.  inf.,  371. 

Dative  defined,  31. 1;;  in-fil.ded.  I..3G. 
a;  in-ft'bus,  dccl.  I.,  36.^;  in -Is  for 
-Qa,  decl.  II..  40.  i;  in  -ubus,  decl, 
IV.,  70.  d;  in  -1  (of  UnuB.  etc.),  83; 
as  adv.,  p.  133.  N.  v. 
.Dativk,  Syntax,  33:4-336.    WHirecl  ob- 

ilves,  335:  use  of  dOaO,  etc,  id.  d\ 
in  pass.,  335.  t;  with  intransillves, 
336;  Willi  phrases,  id.  a;  like  gen., 
id.  i\  with  intransitives,  verbs  mean- 
ing/itv<»-,  etc., 337;  veriM  having  dat. 
or  occ.  337.  e\  with  verbal  nouns, 
id.  d;  with  comps.  of  aatla,  etc.,  id. 
e;  with  comps.  of  prep,  ad,  ante, 
etc.,  338 ;  with  comps,  of  ab,  d6,  ex, 
3391  poetic  use,  339.  c\  with  pusslvs 
used  Impersonally,  330.  Of  Possession. 
331 ;  with  comps.  of  eeae,  id.  a;  with 
nOmen  eat,  id.  i.  Of  Agency,  333. 
Of  Service,  333;  with  adjs.  or  adverbs, 
334;  with  adjs.  of  Rlness,  etc.,  334,  u ; 
wilhslmlUB.id.R.  Ol  Reference,  33s ; 
ethical  dat,  336.  With  -words  of  con- 
tention (poetic),  348.  t.  Of  End  of 
Motion,  358.  N.  1;  w.  InRn.,  373.  a; 
dat  of  gerund,  399.  (Note  on,  p,  biS.) 
Dafivia  commadi  tail  iKCBKimadi,  335.  N, 
IS*  *,  153;  In  comp.  w.  vbs.. 
In  comp.  w.  v1».,  w,  dal.,  339; 
ip.  *■  vbs.,  w.  abL,  343.  i;  w, 
utead  of  part,  gen.,  3I&  t;  w. 
reminding,  319.  f,  N.;  w.  abl. 


1 


'^'Oyl.  55S-  ':  «7cJic.  id 


Index  of   Words  and  Sitbjefts. 


Declension  defined,  96:  clmraclei 
»(.  33;  general  rules  for,  33;  len 
iions,34.  Of  Nouns,  I,  35-37;  II.,38- 
43;  IIIt«-67;  1V.,6B-7I;  V.,72-74; 
decL  IV.  compared  wilh  III.,  68.  N. ; 
dccl,  V.  comp.  wilh  I.,  74.  t.  Of  Adjs., 
decL  1.-11,  ei-83;  decl.  III.,  B+-B3; 
of  comparatives,  86;  of  participles,  E5. 
a,i. 

Dccrcting,  verbs  ol,  331.  d. 

dftdl,  as  rtduplicated  slem,  1 17.  M.  i 
quanlity  of  pcnuU,  351.  *. 

Defective  nouns,  75;  in  number,  76;  in 
case-forms,  77;  of  deoL  IV,,  71,  i;  al 
decL  V,  74.  d. 

Defective  adjectives,  82.  d,  t^,/. 

Defeclive  comparison,  91. 

Defective  verbs,  143-144. 

Defeclive  verb-forms,  no,  143, 144. 

dSFendS,  conslr.,  2x7.  b. 

dSflciO,  constr.,  337.  a. 

Definite  perfect,  113.  c.  i,  379;  aeqi 


0f,2i 

DefiniU. 


I-lBl:  offigun 


\ 


d6greD«r,  83.  i,  N.,  S7,  a. 

Degree,  adverbs  of,  149,  i. 
Degrees  of  Comparison,  8g, 
Degree  of  difference,  abl.  of,  250;  dis- 

lance  expressed  by,  237. 
deiade,   dSnique,   in   enumerations. 

■St.  d. 
deiectat,  constr.,  asf.  t. 
deieotd,  w.  ace.,  027.  i. 
dglector,  w.  abl.,  934.  i, 
Deiiberatlve  subjunctive,  263;  In  indlr. 

questions,  334.  i;  in  indir.  disc,  338.  a. 
dSllcium,  -la,  -loe,  7S.  a.  i. 
Delivering,  vbs.  of,  w,  genilive,  a^  d, 
DeiOB.  decl,  43. 
dolphin,  decl.,  63.  a,  d.  67.  b. 
-dem,  adverbial  ending,  14S.  h,  >i. 
Demanding,  vbs.  of,  vr.  gerundive,  394.  d, 
Demonsltalive  adverbs,  as  correlatives, 

107 ;  equivalent  to  demonslr.  pron.  vr. 

prep.,  307.  tt.    Position,  344.  t, 
Demonstrativepronouns,  loo-ioa;  decl., 

loi ;  of  ist  person,  102.  a;  of  ad  pers., 

id.  c  of  3d  pers.,  id,  i ;  supply  pli 
otpers.  protis.  of  3d.  pers.,  194. 
ibrniBlion,   p.  65,  foot-note. 

'1 


195;  in  relative  clause,  901.  i.  ir     n> 

sition,  344.  i. 
dSn&rluB,  value  of,  377, 
UenDminative  verbs,  165,  i65. 
Dependent  clauses,  subj.  used  in,  263.  i. 
Dependent  construct] cms,  N.,  p.  237, 
Deponent  verbs  defined,    iii.  i;   how 

conjugated,  taa.  H,;  paradigms,  135, 

participles,  id.  o;  fiit  int,  id.  e;  used 

refleidvely,  135.  t;    in  passive  sense. 

id.  /;    list  of  irreg.  deponent  verbs, 

135,   A;    defeclive    deponents.    idL   1; 

semi-deponents,  136. 
Depriving,  conslr.  vrilh  verbs  of,  243.  a. 
Derivatioa  of  Words,  157-170. 
Derivadve  forms  of  nouns,  i6a,  163;  ol 

adja,  164:  of  verbs,  166,  167. 
Derivative  verbs,  defined,  165. 
Derivatives,  quantity  of,  354. 
-dea,  nouns  in,  164.  *. 
Description,  impeit  used  in,  113.  f'i 

scription  implied  in  part.,  392. 
Descriptive  abJ.,  see  abl.  of  quality. 
dSses,  decl..  87.  i, 
Desiderative  verbs  (in  -uriiS}.  167.  t, 
Desire,  adjs.  of.  <K.  gen.,  aiB.  fl. 
dSapfirB,  constr.,  337.  i. 
deterior,  comp.  of,  91.  d. 
Determinative  compounds,  16S.  i. 
Determining,  vbs.  of,  constr.,  321,  A   1 
deuB.  decl.,  40./ 
dexter,  decl.,  8a.  i ;  comp.  90. 
tli-scedia-. 

dio,  imperative,  138.  c 

diciCnlfl,  defect.,  77, 5, 

dIcO,  forms  of,  omitted,  xA.  e. 

diets,  w.  comp,  347,  i.  _ 

imparison  o^  B9,  <v 
DIdB.  decL,  63.  h.  64. 

dlcere,  w.  dat,  of  gerund,  etc. 


299.  J 


decl..  : 


gender,  73;   fbrm  dtl, 


degree  of,  250. 


ditflclllB.  comparison,  89.   b\ 


lacB  I      Clause,  320.  / 
195-.\V)meWt,\™\i 


^H 

Index  of  Worih  and  Subjects.                     45^^| 

Sg.  f;    Doani  and  adjeclives,  164.  a\ 

■verbs.  167.  rf. 

duo.  decL.  94.  b,                                        ^^H 

flln-,  slem-ending,  4B.  *. 

dCtpli,  with  verba  of  condecnning.  3ao,l^^^| 

Duration,  ace.  of,  240.  r.  256;   abL  SS^ 

li^,  le.  i,  347.  *. 

^H 

Diptotes.77.3. 

^us,  participle  in.    See  Gerundive.        ^H 

Direclcases,  31.^.  K. 

Duty,  vbs.  of,  in  apod.,  308.  c.                    ^^^k 

Diiecl  object.  177,337, 

duz,  decl.,  46.                                              ^H 

Direct  qacEtiDii,  defined,  p.  aoi. 

Direct  quotation.  335  and  H. 

e.  inserted  in  decl.  1I„  43;  abl.  of  neu- 

Direct reflexive,  196.  a.  x.  i. 

ters  in,  57.  B.  3 ;  final,  quantity  ol,  348. 

Direction,  233.  b. 

S;  i,  stem-vowel,  conj.  II.,  12a,  123.  0, 

i        die-  (dl).  inseparable  prefix.  170.  h. 

126.*!  1,  stem.vowel.  conj.  HI..  122. 

Disjunctive  conjunctions.  155.  a  \  case  of 

.23.  h.  .26.  L. 

nouti  after,  ao8. 

B  as  adv.  ending.  148.0,  e. 

-e  neuters  in.deol. m.. 57.0,  65. e,67.n. 

aiBalmlliB.  conip..  89. 4. 

Distance,  ace.  or  abl,  357.  ».'.  of  time. 

84.  «■ "-.  ss.  37.  a.                          -^m 

=39- A 

6  shortened  in  future,  p.  89,  foot-n.  3.     , 

Distributive  numerals,  95;  n^e,  95  £. 

6  in  stem  of  decl.  v.,  73. 

Distributive  pronouns,  uoa.  d.  e. 

S  (prcjiosllion).    See  ex. 

<lia,  comp.,  ga. 

-6.Gr.voc.,63.i;  in  gen.  of  decl.  V..^ 

dives,  dec!..  85.  a.  87.  A 

a;  indat.,id. 

divam  (divSm).  for  deOrum.  40./ 

-S  forae  (oe),  la.  c,  16.  N.3. 

dO.  vrilh  Inf..  273.  s. 

ea  oauaft,  3.7.  a. 

-dO,  adverbial  ending,  148.  N.  ,. 

.ebuB,  107.  c. 

-dO, nouns in.fiom  SI. dlii-,48.i;Eend., 

6s-*;67-*- 

Early  foims  of  alphalict, 6-7;  ofptusoilj^ 

doceO,  eonstr.,  339.  c  and  d.  N, 

p.  413. 

domi,  locadve,  25S.  d. 

ebur.  decl.,49. 

domua.  Bend.  69.0;  ded.,  70./;  double 

Bcoa  (ecoum,  etc.).  loi.  rf. 

stem  0^70./!  locative  fomi,7o. ,?,  p. 

eciluis.  decl..  105.  d\  menning,  i. 

40,  fool-n. 

Ecllilipsis,  359.  d. 

domum,  358.  Id.  a ;  domS,  id.  h. 

edlcS,  eonstr..  331.  d.  2. 

dSneC,  337;  with  subj.,  328. 

edC  (ifl/),  conj.,  140. 

dSnS,  double  conslr.  of,  235.  d. 

Effecting,  verbs  of,  with  perf.  paH.,  aji] 

d08,  decU  54-  2. 

d  \  with  tlt-clauae,  333.  k. 

Double  consonants,  3.  o.  iB.  d. 

efBctO  ut,  333.                                    ' 

Double    questions,    211;     answers    to, 

elHetl.  143.  c. 

3X2.   j. 

efflffi58,decl.,74.rf. 

Doubting,  vba.  of,  eonstr.,  319.  d. 

Effort,  verbs  of,  with  perl  part.,  392,  i; 

Doublfid  gender.  30.  0. 

with  clause  of  result,  331.  *. 

Dualforms,p.6o,foot-n. 

eSfSiiS,  decl.,  E5. 

Dubitative  suhj..  see  Deliberative. 

effflO,  eonstr.,  223,  =43-/                            ^ 

dubita  an,  210.  /R.;   non  dubltS 

effo,  decl.,  9S.                                       ^H 

qjjn,  332.^,  R.;  nOn  dubit6,w.  inf, 

el.diphthong,!!  soundof.16.17.ft   ^^H 

id.  N.  2. 

\        dQc,  imperative,  I2B,  c. 

dum,  derivation.  148.  N.  t, ;  with  present, 

-eius.adj.  ending,  164.  c;  in  Prosoi^^H 

276.  §\  with  past.  id.  N  i  wiUi  clause  for 

^H 

pretend peitpErtic.,290.*, if;  W.aub- 

eiuamodl,  lot.  f,  3<s.  1                        ^M 

juncllva  of  proviso,  314, 328 ;  of  time, 

EllQCtTe.,dad.,'>.7.                               ^^M 

1            527;  0/ purpose,  3 sB. 

\^\^^^^^^^^^^v^.^^      ^^^^^m 

46o 


Indtx  of  Words  mid  Subjects. 


^llB.  ^nuB,  adj. 

ndings. 

164.  c.  d. 

Elision,  359.  c. 

Ellipsis,  177.  c.  N. 

Elliplieal  senlence 

177. 1.  ^ 

Cllum,  etc,  loi.  d 

-eUuB.  diminutive 

ending. 

64.0. 

eiuvlSa,  decl,74. 

d. 

Empliasis,  344. 

-6n.  nouns  in,  67. 

i;  -8n,  nouns  in,  id. 

in,  M>.  demonslrati 

™,  toi.  d. 

EncJitics,  accent,  19,  * ;  qua 

ntity,343.  i; 

cum,99.,f.  ta|. 

t,-te,-pte. 

99./;-pBO.ioo. 

.p.67.foot-n.j-que, 

rd. 

End  oi  motion,  ac 

of.ss8 

w.vbs.lhal 

Endings,  signification  of,  161-167;  SI'S- 

ings  of  verb,  117.3,  jiS,    See  Personal 

Endings,  ond  Terminaiions. 
English  derivatives  from  Lai.,  spelling 

of,  is;  Eng.  words  cognate  with  I.al., 

id. 
English  method  of  pronuhclaljon,  17, 
eolm,  use,   156.   d\   position,  156.  k, 

345-  *■ 
-6iiBliiiu3  (or  -Seitaus],  numeral  adj. 

ending,  94.  N. 
-€iial9,  gentile  ending,  164.  c. 
Enumeiation,    prlmum  ,  ,  ,  delnde, 

15..  d. 
-Snua,  adj.  ending,  164.  f. 
Ejivy,  verbs  of,  w,  daL,  227. 
e6,  used  w,  supine  in  'Um,  358.    R., 

302,  R, 
eO,  used  with  quC.  io5.  c;  w.  compar.. 

350,   R.;    approaching  abl,  of  cause, 

=50.  N. 
eO  cOiiBillS  Ut,  317.  a. 
Epicene  nom 
Epistolary  tei 
BpltomS,  dE 
epulum,  pi,  -ae,  78.  2.  h. 
equester,  decl.,  B4.  a. 
er,  primary  mffiit,  see  as. 
er-,  siem-ending,  4S.  A, 
-er, nom.  ending,  decl.  IT.,  41-43;  decl. 

lll.,48.  c,S3.  *,  54.1;  gend.,  65.  .1,67. 

a,  i;  -er  in  adjs.,  62,  S4,  a;  comp.  of 

these,  Sg.  a. 
grgt,  w.  sec.  afler  adjs..  934.  <;■ 


,282. 


er^B,  use,  156.  t\  w.  gen.,  333.  », 
-erioi,  -erd,  as  tense-ending. 
-emUB,  adj,  ending,  164.  t. 
Bro-,noun  stems  in,  decL  II.,  41;  SrtS, 

-6a,  in  nom.  pL  of  Gr.  nouns,  .63,  /; 
gend.  of  nouns  in,  65.  a. 

-ea.-liUa (4tia);  -Sa.-adis;  •es,-€diB; 
-Sa,  -6tlB;  -Sb,  -Stls,  nouns  in,  67.  d. 

-£b,  nom,  ending,  67.  <i;  Usi  of  nouns  in, 
51,  fooi-n.;  gend.,  65.  i;  formalion, 
.63.1. 

-Sa,  gen.  of  Greek  nouns  in,  decl.  It., 43. 
a;  gen.  ending,  decl.  v.,  74.  a. 

ease,  conj,,  119;  forms  of,  in  other  lan- 
guages, p.  83.  note;  compounds  of, 
130;  case  after,  176.  i\  dal.  of  poss. 
w.,a3t:  future  part,  w.,  393.  o,  c;  po- 
sition of  forms  of,  344.  i,j. 

eat,  united  with  other  words,  13.  i;  eat 
quI,33o.ii;eBt  cuin,3aa.  h.;  estut, 
33a.  a.  3. 

Esteeming,  verbs  of,  constr..  339.  a. 

-eater  (-estrla),  adj.  ending,  164.  t;  a 
noun-ending.  164.  i.  12. 

et, use,  156.  a;  et . , . et,  156.  A 
pealed  or  omitted,  208.  i.  i. 

Ethical  dative,  336. 


313.  c 


I 


Euphonic  change,  see  Phonetic  changev 
-sua, Greek  names  [n,  43;  -eua  (-6ua), 
ronymic  ending,  164.  i;   adj.  end- 


E  (S),  152.  i;  use,  153,  ftfio.  *.  244.  «. 

vr..  Instead  of  part,  gen„  916.  c;  ex- 
pressing position,  260.  S;  in  vbs.  w. 
dat.,a29;  to  express  place  from  WhJch, 
358;  after  its  noun,  963.  N.;  w,  abl.  "t 


-Sx  (^i),  nouns  10.(7. 
lUfl,  w.  dat,  327.  a. 
Exchanging,  vbs.  o^  35!!. 
Exclamation,  form  of. 


m 

Index  of  Words  and  Subjects.                   46^^H 

Exclamatory  sentences,  171.  e\  ace  In, 

■fer.  compoundi  of.  41 ;  decL.  Sa.  I.      ^H 

S40.<(:i>om.in.a4i.f. 

ler,  lluperalive,  taB.  c.                              ^^^M 

Exctainalory  questions,  asa.  e. 

ferS,  conj..  139;  acceptuTQ  (expft^^H 

Existence,  general  expressions  of,  320.  a. 

Biun)  feire,  392.  n.  3.                     ^^H 

Bilei,delect„B7./3. 

Festivals,  plural  names  ot,  76.  i.             ^^H 

Expecting,  hoping,  etc.,  vbs.  ot  w.  inBn. 

-flcUB,  adjs.  in,  comparisoo  of,  69.  c.    ^^^| 

clause,  330./ 

fldSB,  dec!.,7a.                                         ^H 

expeusum.  29a.  n.  a. 

fldO    (cOnfldfi),  semi-deponenl.  isA^^I 

Explosives,  see  Mules. 

with  abl.,  254.  i.                                    "^H 

exslUO,  exeultO,  v.  abl.,  245.  a.  a. 

fldUB.  comp..  91.  d.                                   ^^M 

exepea,  defect,  87./ 

fieri,  coustr.  vrilh  abL,  344.  d.                   ^H 

eXBultO,  w.  abl..  245.  a.  2. 

Fifth  declension,  72-74.                          ^^U 

Oiteri,  use,  gt.  I. 

OUa,  decl..  36. 1.                                       ^H 

exterior,  gi.  i. 

fniuB,  voc,  4a  e.                                  ^^H 

eitremOB,  form,  p,  56,  fool-n. 

FilUng.  words  of,  with  abl.,  248.  c.  a.      W^M 

Final  Clauses, defined,  iBn.e;  constr.^^^^ 

317, 31S ;  as  subst.  clauses,  331.           1^^^| 

(aber,  decL.  8a.  c. 

Final  conjunctions.  154.  >.  5,  155.  i.       W^M 

(bc.  imv.,  laB.  c,  14=:  use,  869.  jf;  fao 

Final  syllables,  rules  of  quantity,  ifi^^M 

US,  in  prohibition,  269.  a. 

vowels,  id.  IS.                                        ^H 

faciSa,  deoL.  74  A 

flnla,  decl.,  57.  t.                                       ^^M 

faciUs,  comp.,  89.*;  eonstr.,  303.  R. 

Finite  verb,  defined,  173.  N.;  subject  olj, 

facie,  forms  oi,  omitted.  ao6.  t;  w.  nbl.. 

■73'  ■■ 

344,  d;  accent  of  comp.  of,  ig.  rf.  i ; 

fI5.  conj,,  14a;  in  compounds,  id.  J;  de- 

raclS, w.  names  of  authors,  S92.  r.  N. ; 

fective  compounds  o^  id.  c;   quantity 

tocere  ut,  333  and .;. 

of  i  in,  347.  a,  3. 

Factiwtive  ace,  p.  135;  verbs,  175.*.  N. 

First  declension.  35-37. 

-facts,  in  compounds,  i6q.  a. 

First  conjugation,  prin. parts,  133.^;  pres. 

faenebrlB,  decL,  B4.  a  ». 

stem,  how  formed,  123.  a;  formation, 

faex,decl.,77.6. 

fault.  w.Bcc,  337.*. 

verbs  of,  130;   verbs  0^  how  foime^l^H 

f»l8a8,comp.,9i.rf. 

166.0.                     ^m 

famSs,  abl.  of,  57.  c,  cf.  p.  41,  fool-n.  i. 

flHUB,  as  pies,  part,  390.  i.                       ^^M 

fammarifl,decl.,S7.*- 

fit  Ut,  333-  "■                                              ^M 

f amlll&e.  in  pater  famlllilB,  etc.,  36.  i. 

Fitness,  sdjs.  of.  w.  dat.,  334.  a,  t.          ^^M 

far,  decU,  67. « 

fl&eltS,  eonstr.,  331.                                  ^H 

ffts.  indecL,  77-  IT  w.  supine  in  -Q,  303. 

flocci,  gen.  of  value,  23a.  I.                     ^^M 

faux,  decl.,  S4-  a.  77-  S.  79-  <^- 

For.  when  expressed  by  prO,  336.  K.       ^^M 

Favor,  verbs  of,  w.  dat.,  327. 

forftS.77.3>HB.N.f.                                ^M 

fax.  decl.,  77.  6. 

fore,  147.  c,  fore  ut.  388./  333.  t.        ^^M 

Fearing,  verbs  of.  w  inf.,  S71;  (a6,  Ut). 

foi^m,  119.  R.                                        ^H 

331-/ 

forga.  pi.  only,  76.  3.                              ^H 

febria,decL,56.*.S7.*. 

Forgetting,  vbs.  of,  319;  w.  inf.,  aji.       '^^^ 

f       Fee!inB,noun30f,wilhgen.,ai7;  imper- 

forla  (locative).  77.  3,  i+B.  N.  P.  358.  A^^H 

L          Eonal  verbs  of,  146.  i,  aai.  i;  aalml, 

Formation  of  words,  157-170.                 ^^^H 

■          with  adjs.of,  aiB.^.  F.;  gen.  with  verbs 

Forms  of  the  verb.  117.  ff.                          ^^M 

P           of,  321  i  anlml,  w.  vbs.  of,  223.  c,  bcc. 

tons.  tone.  77. 3.                                  ^H 

'            with,237.i;  with  quod-clause,  333.  *. 

f  oraitan  {tora  alt  an) ,  148.  n.  « j  ((OP-  ^B 

Feel  In  Prosody,  355-35?:  N.,  p,  405. 

(ol,  decl„  67,  i. 

Founh  Conjugation,  prin.  parts,  laa.  c; 

fSlIx,  eorap.,  89. 

pres.  stem,  how  formed,  133.  a,  laS.  if; 

Fem/nine,  rule  for  gender,  39. 

Tiataai\™i.  -Q,  Aai,\  ■*«■  *  ""*»i  "^"SS- 

1      Aanur,  decl.,  78.1./                               \     ncAa.Wi-h  V^'i^t^^.'^S^i^^^^^H 

H     462                   Index  of  Words  and  Subjects.                      ^^^| 

65;  according  to  stems,  fi6]  of  ooiuu. 

■        Fractional  eiipressiors,  97.  d.  382. 

decl.  IV.,  69J   decl.  v.,  73:    Syntax. 

W        Freedom,  adjs.  of.  with  abl.,  243.  d;  «l)s. 

■            oC  243-  a- 

1S4.  b;  of  adjs..  186;  adjs.  with  nouns 

of  different  genders,  187,  ct  1B9.  £;  oi 

French,  derivations  through,  15,  foot-nale. 

pbL,  199.  b. 

tretus,  with  ohl..  254.  b. 

General    conditions,    defined,    304.    d.\ 

Fricaiives.i". 

coustr.  of,  309;  relatives  in.  316.  a. 

■         frtlel,  deTect.  noun,  77.  51  as  adj..  87, 

General    truths    after    past    tense    (in 

B           /;  eDmparison.tc:  cou5tr..a33.  o.  N. 

sequence  of  tenses),  387.  d\  in  pres. 

H        fruop,  fungor.  with  abl.,  249;  w.  ace., 

276;  in  general  condition,  309.  a. 

W            id.*;gEn.ndiv>.,296.R. 

Genitive.  Efymohgy.  Definiiion.^i.j; 

"          fuglt,  w.  ace.  237.  i. 

terminations  0^32;  plural  iti-nm,33; 

gen.  in  -U  and  -Ss,  decl.  T.,36.a,^; 

I'ulncss,  adjs,  of,  alB,  a. 

in-IforiI,decl.II..4o.*:  in -I  of  prop. 

rUnebriH,  decl„  B4.  a.  N. 

nounsofdecLI1I.,43.fl;  gen.plut.  in 

fungor.  see  fruor. 

-Qm  (-Sm),  for  -Arum,  40.  e\  -tun 

rar,  decl,,  54-  '^ 

for-luiil,decllII.,59i  -SB  for -is.  63. 

Future  Conditions,  307;    in  ind,  disc.. 

/i  contracted  in  ded.  IV.. 68.  N.;  gen. 

337.  a- 

plur.  in  -um,  70.  c;  in  -t  or  -S  Ibr  -ei. 

Future  Tense,  use.  113.  a,  1.  27B ;  of  in- 

decl. v.,  74.  a;  gen.  plu.  wanting,  77. 

finitive  pass.,  how  formed,  147.  c;  Indic- 

6;  of  adjs.  ia  -lua,  83:  gen.  plur.  in 

alive    for  iniper.,  064.  e.  269.  /;    of 

-ium  or  -um.  87.  c,  d. 

GiiNITlVE.     Synl,ix.    213-^133:    general 

indirect  questions.  334.  a ;  ful.  ind.  for 

use,  213.    Subjective  gen.,  214.    Pos- 

_             iniv..269./ 

sessive  gen.,  id.  o-rf;  inappos-w.poss. 

K         Future  Perfect,  115.  a,  i;  use  of,  a8i; 

pron.,  197.  i;  compared  w,  dat.,  331. 

K.;  gen.  in  predicate,  914.  e,  d\  gen. 

■             tlons,  307.  c. 

of  adj.  for  neul.  nom.,  314.  R. ;  gen.  of 

■         Future  IniinitivG,  bow  formed,  110.  d.; 

substance  or  material. 314.  t;  for  ap- 

B           eipressed   with   fore  or  futtlrum 

positive,  314.  /;  gen.  of  quality,  915. 

■             eese.  28B.  /;  (rarely)  in  contrary  .a 

Partitive,  2i5.    Objective  gen.,  317  ;w. 

■           (kcl  conditions  in  ind.  disc.,  337,  b.  N. 

adjectives,  3i8,  334.  rf;    »-,  verbs  of 

\ 

memory,319;  charge  and  penalty,  aao; 

~           Future   Participle,  use,  113.  i,  sijo,  293, 

of  feeling,  aai ;  w.  impers,  miseret, 

3o3.  d\  ful.  pass,  part.,  394. 

etc,  aai.  b;   w.  rSfert  and  Inter- 

Future  PerfetJ  Subjunc.  wanting,  110.  a. 

eat,  aaa;  of  plenty  and  want,  323;  of 

l-^ulure  Subjunctive  wanting,  110.  0. 

exclamation,  223;  w.  potior,  id.  a :  w. 

f utDrum  esse  Ut,  see  fore  at ;  futQ- 

other  vbs.,  id.  i ;  w.  egeS  and  indlg- 

rum  fuisse  ut.  337.  ,*.  3  and  N.  a. 

e5.3a3.a43./:  gen.  for  abl.,  id./ R.t 

Fulurum  atfratenlo,  p.  320.  foot-uole. 

gen.  replaced  by  dal.,  336.  *;  of  value. 

215.^,352.  a,*;  gen.  of  gerundive,  396. 

G  (the  character).  6. 

geiduB,  voc.  of,  4a  c. 

Games,  plural  names  of,  76,  I. 

gens,  or  lamily,  names.  80.  a.              ^^m 

gaudeB,  conj.,  136;  with  abl..  234.*;  w. 

Gentile  adjectives.  164.  C                      ^^^1 

auod  or  ind.  disc,  333.  *. 

gentnia,  57.  a.                                 ^^^M 

Gems,  gender  of,  names  of.  a  and  b,  29, 

genQ,  decl.,  68 ;  gend.,  69,  *.              ^H 

39.<«. 

genua,  decL,  49.                                  ^^ 

Gender,  kinds  of,  aB;  general  rales  for. 

29;   common,  doubtful,  epicene,  30; 

Gerund,  form,  109.  *;  use,  114.  a;  gei^ 

cftange  ofgend.,  p.  tit,  fooi-n,-,  nouns. 

uTiAVitt  ijwid  instead,  396.      SYNTAX, 

I^ded,  ;.,gend.,a5;ded.n..y>-,tioun5,\    aqs"^'.  .»^-  ^  "^;  V'-'^-  ™' 

^B|^;.,  gend.  accoTding  10  ending^.X    v-v.?^,  v4-  ■»-■,  •«.  ^^V-  ^^^-^^i^J 

Index  of  Words  and  Sulijects. 


.  of,  399 1  i"  '^'*'  pbrases ;  etc.,  id.  * ; 
.  of^  3<U|   B^A,  of,  301;  gerund  \a 
apposition,  301,  r. 
Gerundive,  meaning  and  form,  109.  a, 
I.,  113.   d;     in  -enduB  or  -Un- 
dtlB,  12.  d,  p.  Sg,  tool.n.  a ;    of  dep. 
,   135.  d;    use   as    part,  or   adj., 
of  Otor,  id.  c;  lo  denote  puip. 
certain   vbs..   id,    d;     used    for 

I  in  coses,  gen..  298;    dat..  299; 
300:    a.bl.,  301.      Impersonai  w, 
I.  w.  ace,  xij.g. 
Bibber,  decl.,  Sz.  i. 

item-ending.  48.  i. 
Giving,  vbs.  of,  w.  gerundive,  294.^, 
g]ab«r,  decl.,  83.  ^ 
(rlaciee.  decl..  74.  d. 
fflls,  decl.,  54.  a. 
fflSrlor.  w.  £dil.,  254.  f, 
Glyconic  verse,  369. 370,  371.  i,  12. 
Gnomic  peifecl,  279.  c. 
-SC.  nouns  in,  fiom  stem  sin-,  49,  i; 

geud.,  65.  j,  67.  3, 
BraCiUa.decl.,  87,/;  conip.,  89.*. 
Grammar,  how  developed,  pp.  163. 164. 
Gtammatical  gender,  z3.  c. 
gratia,  w.  gen.,  223.  t,  243.  c;  v.:  gen, 

of  gerund,  318, 
err&tlae,  defect.  77,  4. 
grUtlflaor,  vr.  dal..  227.  c, 
giiXvUoT,  w,  dat,  227.  c. 
Greek  accusative  {syntcdachical),  a^a.  c. 
Greelc  forms  compared  w,  lalin,  pp.  14, 

19.  sa,  26,  47,  SI,  55,  59,  7S,  fli,  83.  113. 

119,183,143,143,152,155. 
I    Greek  nouns,  dec].  I.,  37;  decl.  il.,43; 

decLIlI.,63,64. 
Greek  proper  names,  quantity  of,  347. 


ffumml,  indecl.,  67.  a. 

H  (breathing),  3.  h\  omitted  in  sound 
11.  i.  I;  omitted  in  spelling,  12.  b;  ii 
Prosody,  347,  a ;  359,  c. 

babefl,  with  infinitive,  273.  a;  with  pet 
feclparticiple,a9a.c;  fultue  imperaliv 
habStO  in  sense  of  considir,  396.  t. 

iiablltB,  IT.  dat.  of  gerund,  etc.,  291 


bactenus,  a6o.  K. 
Hodria,  gender,  35, 
baeo  for  hae,  loi.  a. 
baer©5,  w.  dat,  237.  d;  w.  abl.,  id.  m 
Happening,  verbs  of,  constr.,  33a.  a. 
Have,  peri  with,  origin,  093.  c,  i 
bare  (av5),  defeciiire  verb,  144./. 
Having,  vljs,  of,  w.  gerundive,  214.  d. 
bsbsB,  decl.,  87.  a;  comp,  89. 
Help,  verbs  of,  with  dat,  227, 
Hemiolic  measures,  356,  d. 
hepar.  deeL,  67.  d. 


Hen 
hSrSH,  d 


e,36=. 
^1..fi4- 


Hial 


■.  359. '. 


bibus,  1 

hie,  p.  65,  foot-note;   decl, 

io2.n,/|  quantity, 343. 10,  Eit. 
hlempa  (for  hlemB),  11.  c,  (rj.  c 
hllariB  (-Tia).87,/  • 

//iwjs^(lpB6.  ae),  102.  N. 
Hindering,  verbs  of.  with  nfl  or  quO- 

mlnufl,    or    Inf.,    341,    c.    a;      331. 

c.d. 
Hindrance,  verbs  of,  with  quSmlnvus, 

319.  c;    with   negatives,  followed    by 

qtdn,  id.  rf;  33a.  j. 
Historical  infinitive,  375. 
Historical  present,  276.  d\  followed  Oy 

primary  or  secondary  lenses.  387.  c     _ 
Historical  perfect,  115  ;.  3,  379.  .^k 

hodie,  loc.  form,  74.  c,  148.  N.  8.  ^^ 

honor  (-Ba),  dec!.,  318.  d.  ^^ 

Hoping,  verbs  of,  With  Infinitive  clani^l 

33a/. 
Horace,  metres  of,  pp.  287-291. 
horlzSii,  dec).,  63.  d. 
Hortatory  subjunctive,  266;    in  conces- 
sion, id.  c  (c£  313.  i);  in  proviso,  314; 

in  obligation,  266.  a ;  w.  force  of,  prot 


hortor,  constr,,  331. 

hoapea,  decL,  87.  b. 

boBplCa.  (fern,  of  hoapea],  85. 

haiusmodi,  loi.  t. 

bumi,  40.  a,  locative  use  of,  258.  d. 


464 


^^M      I,  as  vowel  and  as  cons.,  p.  i,  4. 
^^M      1,  primary  suffix,  160.  c.  i. 
^^M      I,  in  Greek  vac,  63. 1,64:  for  S  in  conj. 
^^1  11.,  ia6.i.a;  for -S  in  conj.  III.,  19& 

^B         c.  i;  vbs.iDiO-orconj.III.,  id.  e;  in 
^^1  verb  replaced  by  cons.,  123.  i.  i ;  in- 

^^M         serted  In  vb.  slem,  id.  a;  Eupprftscd  in 
^H  ol^loit,  etc.,  10.  d;  I  (linglt)  in  gm.  of 

^H  nouns  in  -luB  (-lum),  40.  i;  in  gen. 

^H  of  noun  in  -€s,  43.  a ;  in  abl.  of  decL 

^1  III.,  £7;  in  neut.  nom..  65.  c;  in  gen. 

^r  dccl.  IV.,  70.  a ;  in  gen.,  dal.,  decl.  V., 

74,  a;  in  dal.  of  Qntis,  etc.,  83. 

-I,  in  perfect,  118.  N. 

1-  stems,  decl.  111.,  51-59;  confused, 


Index  of   Words  and  Subjects. 


signs 

tives,  Bi,  foot-n.,  84;  1 
B4-  *,  cf.  53, 57,  87.  a ; 
136.  d. 


of,  5; 


in  adjec 
lainiug  -1 


I 


Ibfir,  dect.,  41.  d. 
-IbS  for  -iam,  138,  c 

-Iciua,  164.  ,p. 
/ftor.  19  i.  N.,  164.^ 

-ICUB,  -loiUS,   164.  C, 

Id-,  Stem-ending,  63. 
Id  genua,  aja  i. 
id  quod,  aoo.  t. 
Id  temporlB,  ai6,  a 
idOlrcB,  as  correl,  1 
Idem,   decl.,    loi ; 
w.  dat,  034.  or  N.  I 
id.  M.  a;    used  en 
'.,  id.  e. 


se,  360;  Irimeler,  365;  oihe 

S. 

6.  a. 

-rSbam,  conj.  IV.,  ij8.  r. 


calij,  I 


Ides  (13th  or  151I1  of  monlli),  how  ret 

oncd.  376.  *. 
-IdBa,  (-IdSs)  In  patronymics,  164.  i: 
IdOneuB,  comparison,  89.  d:  w.  dat  of 

gerund,  cie.,  299,  fooi- 
idSneuB  qui,  320./ 
Idas,   decl.   IV.,  gendi 

Ides.) 
Jdtu,  verbal  adj.  endin 
of  adjs.  in  -1 


ending  in. 


lena  (pBtl  of  efl),  dec!.,  85.  i. 

•ler  in  inC  pass.,  138.  <!.  4. 

-lea,  in  decl.  V.  =  -la,  decl.   1., 

sucli  ate  ft-sfems,  id.  fool-n. 
-ISs,  nam.  ending,  163.  e. 
JglCui*,  meaning,  156,  e;  position 
Ignia,  deel.,  37.  i. 
a.  Ha,  for  I,  Is,  from  is,  101.  c. 
-a  {or  -1),  in  gen.,  decl.  II.,  40. 

foot-n.;  of  adjs..  Si.  K. 
-He,  noun-ending,  164. 1,  6. 
JllS,  -blUs,  verbal  adj.  ending,  164.  n. 
-His,  nominal  adj.  ending,  164.  d. 
Illative  conjunctions,  154.  a.  4, 155.  c. 
lUe,  forms  100.  a;  decL.  I 

ilUc.  de 

-ilia,  ve 

lIlUB,  diminudve  ending,  164. 

illtiatrlB,  d(  "    " 

-Im,  accus.  ending,  decl  lit.,  p.  20,1 
''■=;SS.5S- 

-tm  in  pres.  subj..  ra8.  t,  a, 

imber,  decl.,  5r.  i.  54,  57.  i.  67. 

imm&ne  quautuin,  334.  t. 

imrnO,  how  used,  209.  d. 

Imperative  mood,  loS.  5,  tenses  of,  110. 
c;  how  used,  iia.i;  terminations,  116. 
i,  196.  t;  w.  lam  dUdum.  376.  a.  n. 
a;  in  commands.a69;  3d.pers.,a69.  f  i 
forms  in  indirect  discourse.  339:  luL, 
069.  d.  e;  lUc,  dHo,  fac,  fer,  laS.  c: 
some  verbs  used  chiefly  in,  144.  /; 
variotrs  periphrases  Jbr  imv.,  id.  f,g\ 
Imperative  as  protasis,  31a  t. 

Imperative  Sentence,  171.  d. 

Imperfect  tense,  defined,  115.  i\  use, 
Z77;  in  descriptions,  id.  a;  with  lam 
dID,  etc.,  id.  6;  inceptive  and  cona- 
tive,  id.  c;  with  lam,  id.  n.;  of»r- 
>rirf,  id. if;  in  dialogue,  id.<;  —  etuid. 
etc.,  id./;  epistolary,  38a ;  represented 
by  peri  subj..  287.  i.  3:  imperf.  subj., 
sequence,  287./^. 

ImperB,  conslr.,  331. 

Impersonal  construction  of  pass.  w.  infin. 
clause,  330.  a.  3,  #.  I,  c. 

Impersonal   Verbs,    synopsis   of    145; 

classified.  146;  passive  of  intransitives, 

146.  c,  330;   impeisonais,  mlearet, 

etc.,  with  gen.,  331.  *;  llbet.   llcM, 

\      wrfn  iax.,  isci.  t\  aEs.-«.  4,«oat,  etc 


I 


Index  of  Words  and  Subjects. 


ImpetrO,  cDnsir^  331. 

Impetue,  defect^  77. 4. 

bnpleO,  constr^  033.  248.  c.  S. 

Implies,  constr,  aas  d. 

ImpanS,  conslr.,  aSo,  a. 

Impure  syllables,  14.  c. 

Imus,  p.  56,  toot-D. 

In,  neg.  prrSx,  17a  c. 

In,  prep.,  use,  15a.  c.  153 ;  comp.  w. 
170.  a;  In,  w.  ace  or  abl.,  B59.  i  (cf. 
a6o.'i);  w.  Bcc,  penalty,  330.  i\ 
comp.,  w.  dal.,  aafl ;  In  w.  acc^  w.  adjs., 
■05.  358.  c.  a.  ( 


w.  abl.  of  gerund,  301. 
hi-,  slem-eniling,  48.  i;  In-,  63.  a. 
In,  priniaiy  sufRi.    See  an, 
Inceplive  or  Inchoative  verbs,  1G7.  a. 
Inclination,  adjs.  ot  constr^  034.  a,  c. 
Inolutue,  comp.  91.  d. 


d  action 


nable  t 


s  o£    ; 


of,  ag.  c 


Indefinite  aniocedent,  relative  with,  v,-ith 
subjunc,  330.  a  and  N. 

IndeSnils  proDOuns.decL,  104,105.  Syn- 
lai,  ana,  303 ;  Indef.  relative  may  Intro- 
duce conditional  clause.  304.11.  H.,  316. 

Indefinite  subject  omitted,  306.  J;  use  of 
ad  person  for,  a66.  a ;  in  general  con- 
ditions, 309,  a;  lloet  cl&nun  fleii. 

Indefinite  value,  252.  a,  b. 

Indicative  mood,  loS.  b  \  bow  used,  Ila. 


;1,  308.  b,  c,  311.  c\  in  causal 
clauses,  311 ;  in  clause  with  quod,  333. 

IndlgeS,  with  j^n.,  333,  343./ 

bidlgnua,  with  abL,  345.  a ;  w.  qnl  and 
subjunc,  310/. 

Indirect  Cases,  31.  N. 

Indirzct  Discourse,  origin,  etc,  nole, 
p.  369 :  list  ol  verbs  thai  take  Ind.  disc., 
p.  370,  foot'Ti.  i  direct  and  indir.  quola- 
11011,335.  Moods  in  ind.  disc,  336;  verb 
of  saying  implied.  Id.  N.  a.  Subj.  ace. 
id.  a.  Subord.  clause  wben  eiplHna- 
tory,  id.  i;  clauses  w.  rel.  which  is 
egiuV,  (o  demonslr.,  id.  c.    Tenses  ol 


inlin.  In  ind.  disc,  336.  A; 
subjunc,  336.  B;  subjunc.  dependii 
on  per£  lot,  id.  N.i  prea. 
afler  secondary  tense  (,Rtprmsad3r 
lid),  id.  a.  Condillonal  sentences  in 
ind,  disc,  337 ;  Questions  in  ind.  disc, 
336;  Deliberative  subiunc  in,  id.  a; 
Commands  in  ind.  disc,  339;  prohibi- 


1 


I,  id.  I 


laformal  ii 


-,  S+o. 


Indirect  Questions,  defined,  p.  aoi;  syn- 
o..M=./R..334;I"l.lm.«l»,W..; 
deliberative  subj.  In,  id.  i;  Indic  in 
(early  Lai.), id.rf.   (See  Note,  p.  367.) 

Indirect  quotation,  335. 

Indirect  object,  177,  224,  and  N.  aas,  afl6. 


196.0. 


IndUcS,  w.nai 
Indue,  double 

Ineptus,  conslr.,  399.  foot-n, 

inonnlB  or  -us,  87./ 

Infera,  defect,  8a.  d,  cf.  p.  56.  foot- 

loCeil,  use,  91.  b. 
iaterior,  compaiison,  iji.a. 
Infinidve  used  as  noun,  gender, 

with  gen.,  ar4,rf.    (See,  also,  I r 

Mood,  SyntiLi.) 


\ 


Mood,  Etymology.  108,  b, 
.;  tenses  oC  no.  d\  how 
d\   how 


inf.  of  .^ 


and  Jbot- 

pass.  in  -ier.  laS.  e.  4;  tul 
deponents,  135  i,  f:  subject 
373.  a,  840.  / 
Infinitive  Mood,  Syntax,  370-275; 
used  as  subject,  270;  complementary 
inf.,  371 :  verbs  having  subj.  or  inlin., 
id.  o,  cf.  331;  inf.  for  subjunc.  clause, 
33r.f ;  with  subject  ace,  273;  case  of 
predicate  noun,  id.  b\  inf,  of  purpose, 
373;  w.  adjs.,  in  poeUy,  id.  ^;  of  re- 
sult, ii  f  i  as  pure  noun,  id.  i;  in 
exclamations,  274  (sequence,  385.  N.  i). 
Historical  inf.,  375.  Tenses  of  jnt, 
a88;  perf.  Instead  of  pres.,  id.  d,  t; 
lore  nt,  etc.  for  fiit.  itif.,  id,/  Int  in 
Indir.disc.,336;  tenses,336.A.  (Nole 
oii!ii6ii.,p.a8'i\ 


1 


■  466 

^B  Inflect:. 

■  U 

^F  inBuen 


/neifx  of  Words  and  Subjects. 


;  of  decl.  and 


s.  of,  w 


I 

I 


Informal  Indirect  Discourse.  340,  341. 

Infra,  use,  152.  a,  153. 

IngSos,  decL,  87.  n ;  cump.,  91.  if. 

1  nherilcd  differences  of  form,  S.  1 1  in 

vowels,  9,  a-d\  transposition  of  vowel 

and  liquid,  id.  d. 
Loldrtft,  as  abL  of  manner.  248.  R. 
tniOBsn,  defect.,  71,  *. 
Inope,  decl.,  67.  a,  d. 
InQuam,  loqult,  144.  b\  position  of, 

345.  c\  in  direct  quotation,  336.  N.  i. 
Inseparable  particles,  170.  b. 
Insertion  of  consonants  (p  in  sQmp^), 

II.  t;  p.429.  N. 
Inaldloe,  dat  with,  227.  d. 
iQspererS,  constr.,  215.  d. 
IllBtEU*,  inded.,  77.  i ;  w.  gen.,  233.  r. 
InstS,  constr,,  331. 
Inaulam.  ad,  25S.  b.  n.  3. 
Instrument,  abl.  of,  348.  c. 
Instrumental  ease,  31,  (  [cf.  pp.   205, 

243)  ;  as  adv.,  p.  133.  lt.^\  source  of 
j^    several  abl.  constructions,  343.  head-n. 
[Integer,  deck,  3  3.  c. 
rintegral  part,  subjunc.  of.  340,  342. 
jlntegrum  eat  ut,  333. 
I  Intensive  pronoun,  100.  c.  102.  e.  and  N., 
1,    i93->-'. 
Intensive  verbs,  167.  i  (cf.  c). 
Inter,  use  152.  n,  153 ;  in  comp.,  170,  a : 

vbs.  comp.  with,  238 ;  position,  263.  N : 

liiter  bS,  99.  d,  I'^f;  Inter  slcftrios, 

220.  i:;  Inter, w.  gerund, 300. 
Inter  aS  (reciprocal), 99.  d,  196./ 
InterclDilS,  constr.,  225.  d  and  n.  3. 
InterdlcO,  constr.,  325.  d,  N.  i. 
Interest,  constr.,  322;  with  ad,  id.  b. 
Interior,  comp.,  91.  a. 
Interjections,  def.,  25;    list,  p.  139:    w. 

dal..H34.c, 
Interlocked  order  of  words.  344.  h, 
InterraeiliHte  Ctanses,  Syntax  of,  340-342. 
InlctTOgatlve  advs.,  use,  210.  e\  position. 


Interrogative  pronouns,  104,   105;  u^e, 

210.^;  position,  344.  J. 
InieirogBtiVB  sentences,  171.  b;  forms  of. 

Intrfi  (Interior),  91;  derivation,  143. 


5  ff.;  u 


-  .  /(cf.237... 
-Inua,  adj.  ending.  164. 
in&tllis,  w.  dat.  of  gerund,  etc, 

Invictus,  comp.,  91.  d. 
InvldiEi,  w.  dat.,  227.  d. 
invitue,  comp.,  gi.  d. 
■10,  noun-ending,   1^.  b;   gend.,  ^ 

67.3. 
-13,  verbs  in,  conj.  III.,  123.  *,  2;  foiros 

of.  136.  c,  i\  paradigm,  p.  100;  conj. 

1V„  126.  d\  derivation,  166.  d. 
Ionic  measure,  356.  ^;  verse,  372.  16. 
Ip-.  stem-ending,  43.  a. 
Ipee,  formation,  100.  c\  decl.,  loi;  use. 

I02.if  and  N.,  195.^:  used  instead  ol 

reflexive,  196.  a,  9.  N.  i. 
tri,  in  fill,  infin.  pass.,  141. 147.  e. 
Ironical  statement  not  diff.  in  form  from 


Irrational 

la,  decl., 
emphatically,  195.  ■ 
reflexive,  196.  a,  9. 


3S6,  N.,  369.  N. 


.,   65.  * 


list  o 


ords,  67.  a;  -ia,  -erla,  67.  *; 

-Idia,  id.  d\  -la,  patronvmic,  164.  ^. 
-Is-,  -iaa-,  -Bis-,  dropped  in  perf.,  laS.  b. 
-la,  nom.  and  ace.  pi.,  decU  HI.,  58  (et 

p.  30,  fool-n.  b}  ;  of  adjs,.  84.  b,  87.  t; 

Greek  nom.  ending,  63.  e, 
-l8,S«It-. 
Islands,  names  of.  loc  use,  258.  c,  a  and 

K. ;  to  whieh.  258.  i,  from  which,  a. 
-iase.  -Issem,  verb-ending.aee  N.,  p.  1 19  ff. 
-IbbO,  verbs  ending  in,  167.  e. 
iate, shortened  toBto.ioo.  4;  deeU  lol, 


iWe/rpgative  particles,  \isl  ol,  !«■  ''"A     a-,  \ta.M.t.,^it).» 


lersonals.  145,  foot-n. 
B.4S-*;  deeU,  59, 87.  *. 
It, 107;  la  Bn«wers,Bii. 


■                         Index  of  Word 

s  and  Subjects.                   467  ^^H 

Ktwiue,  BCCEHt.  19.  c;   compared  wilh 

Kindred  forms,  Latin  and  English,  15,  A    ^^H 

P    ofbO,  156.  <;  used  wilh  ersO.  308.^1 

Appendix.                                                     ^H 

m        position  of.  34S.  h. 

Kindred  significaiion,  ace.  ot;  338.                ^^^H 

iter,stemot6D.c,cf.M9.3. 

Knowing,  verbs  of.  w.  aec.  and  inf.,  271,    ^^1 

[leralive  verbs  (-t6.  -ItO.  -85),  167.  b. 

273. 330-1-                                         ^^B 

-itO,  verbs  in,  167.*. 

Knowledge,  adjs.  of.  w.  gen.,  ai3.  a.             ^^H 

-itua,  adj.-ending,  164./ 

■L:  nouns  in -l.Bend., 65.^,67.*;  adj.-  ^H 

-llim,  gen.  ptur,  decl.   lit.,  55.  a;    of 

stems  in      S5-                                        ^H 

adj5.,  84.  *,  85,  B7.  c. 

see  ra.                                                  ^H 

-luB,  gen.  sing,  ending,  83;  quanlity,  id. 

Labia!s,3:  stems. decl.  III.. 45- a;  geiid„    ^^^| 

fbol-n.,347.0, 1. 

66-^;  f6rmsofiniiecdons,67.,;.               ^^1 

Jus,  adjs.  in, gen.,  voc.,  81.  a.\  forniaiion 

labOrO,  w.  abl.  :H5.  a.  9.                               ^^H 

ofadJ5.in,i64.^,  ».. 

ia<;,  dci:<.,67.  </.                                               ^^1 

-Iv-,  in  perf.,  13a.  a. 

lacua,  deel.,  63;   dai.  and  abl.  pi.  in   ^^1 

-Ivus,  verbal  adj.-ending,  164.  k. 

-ubns.  70.  d.                                         ^^H 

■IX  (-IX),  nouns  in,  67.'!. 

laedO,  conslr.,  w.  ace,  227.  a.                   ^^1 

laetor.  laetus,  w.  abl.,  354.  b.                 ^^1 

J  (the  cboractec),  4.  N.  i;  Eng.  sound. 

lampaa.  decl..  63.  /  64.                             ^^1 

id.N.x 

lateS.  w.  ace,  239.  d;  w.  dat,  id.  n.  2.      ^^H 

ictet,  w.  ace,  237.  e.                                ^^H 

w.  itnpeif.,  377.  c.  N. 

latUim(llum,i6B.J.                                ^^H 

lamdlD.,  w,  prea.,  276.  a;   w.   imperii, 

=77.*- 

forms  of;  earlier  forms ;  languages  do-  ^^H 

ioindttdum,  w.  pees.,  276.  a;    w.  im- 

pecf.,  177.  *;    w.  impetalive,  276.  a. 

l&tus,  part,  derivation,  139,  foot-n.          ^^H 

Learning,  verbs  of,  w.  inf.,  271.                  ^^^H 

iecup.  decl..  forms  from  differenl  stems, 

Length,  expressed  by  gen.,  315.  b.             ^^H 

60.  f, 78. 1./ 

iocuB.  pi.  in  -1  or  -a,  78.  2.  *. 

leS.  decL,  49.                                           ^^H 

lubar,  decl.,  57.  0. 

I,eO[itdas.decl.,37.                               ^^H 

iuboO,  «.  ace,  227.  a;   «.  inf.,  271.  i«. 

Letters.  classL^icalioii  of,  1-5.                       ^^^| 

330.  2.  *,  2,  331.  a. 

levlB,  decl.,  84;  comp.,  89.                     ^^^^| 

lueundua.  conslr.,  303.  R. 

levlter.  comp.,  93.                                  ^^^^ 

lUgerum,  defect,  77.  4;  decL.yS.  i.  b\ 

liber,  adj.,  dec!.,  41.  c,  83.  t.                      ^^^| 

measure.  381. 

Uber.  decl.,  41.  c.                                    ^^1 

Julian  Calendar,  376,  head-n. ;  376.  e. 

llberl.  noun,  41-  <;,  76-  a.                           ^^1 

iunBO,  w.  abl.  or  dat.,  aa?.  f.  N.,  248. 

Ubet,  impers,  146.  <f ;  w.  dat.  337.  #.          ^^| 

a.  R. 

inpplter,  stem  and  decl..  6a*;  plural. 

w.dai.,  397.  i\  w.  predicate  dat.,  37a. 

75.  0. 

a;  w.  subjunctive,  meaning  although. 

las.  decl..  67.*,  77.  6.  a. 

313.  ^;    licet  earn.  Uoet  me  Ire. 

IObbO  defect.,  71.  *,  77.  a. 

licet  mlhl  Ire,  331.  i  and  N,  3.               ^^_ 

ittatO,  w.  compar.,  247.  b. 

Ukeness,  adjs.   of,  w,  dat,  334.  a;   w.  ^^H 

luvat,  w.  ace.  337.  i. 

id.                                                         ^H 

luvenla,  masc  adj.,  88.  b\  how  com- 

IJmiling  vrord,  meaning  of,  17B.  i.               ^^^H 

pared.gi.c;  decl.,  59. 

Unguals,  31  stems  in.  decl.  1II„  45.  *;   ^^1 

luvO,  wilh  ace,  337.  a. 

gend.  of,  66.  d\   forms  of  inflecdon,    ^^H 

iQxta.  position,  263.  N. 

^H 

lluter.  decl.,  51.  f .  54.  i ;  gend..  67.  a.         ^^H 

K,  suppUmfed  by  0,  6.  N. 

Uqmd3,3.a:  stems  of.  decL  III.,  48-^0;  ^^H 

Icsy  prfjjaiy  luffiit,  160.  A. 

send,  ot,  6b.  b\  Visa^^  "A.  \-i&>:.t'w3«J^^^B 

SioJendse.  371}.  a. 

V 

468                   Index  of  Words  and  Subjects.                  ^^H 

■lis,  adjs.  in.  comp.,  Bg.  b. 

mftlS.                                            ^^H 

UttU!.  aoj.  e. 

maluB,  comparison,  90.                 ^^^H 

mao,  primary  suifix,  160.  v.            ^^^^| 

U-,  as  slem-ending,  48.  e. 

mandS,  constr..  331.                        ^^^H 

Locative  abl.,  354.  258.  c.  t\   Idiomatic 

mane,  defect,  noun.  S7-  -=.  77-  *    ^^H 

use,  id.  a;  adverbial  forms,  14S,  N.  i. 

maneS,  vrith  abl..  254.  b.                ^^^H 

Locative  case,  31.  *,  p.  ai8 ;  akin  to  dai., 

mfinauettiB,  159.  c.                     ^^^H 

id.;  in  abl.,p.a45,  p.  260;  of  decL  1„ 

mantiB,  dec].,  68 ;  gender,  69.         ^^^ 

36.  c;    decl.    11.,  40;   ded.   Ill,  6a; 

Manner,  adv.  of.  148.    AbL  of.  hard  lo 

decl.  IV.  (domi),  7o./:foot-n.;  decl. 

distinguish  from  specification,  253.  K. 

v.,  74.  c\  as  adverb,  tjB.  N.  J;  forms. 

Matiner  implied  in  part..  392. 

as3.f.a,A  With  nbl.  in  apposition,  184. 

Manner,  abl.  of.  248.  and  B.             ^^^ 

c\  re]ative  adverb  i:sed  to  refer  to,  aoi. 

mare,  decl..  37.  0.59.                  ^^H 

/;  fttilml,  218.  c.  R..  333.  c.    Localive 

marl,  loc.,  358.  /.                           ^^H 

compared  with  dat,  334.  N.;  locative 

mas,  decl.,  54.  2.                            ^^^1 

used  10  express  -mhert,  358.  c\  doml. 

Masculines,  rule  for  gender,  29.      ^^^^| 

etc.,  id.  d. 

looS,  Willi  prep.,  360./;  wllhont  prep., 

Masculine  cseaura,  36a.  R. 

id.  a. 

Material,  adjecdves    denodng,    164.  g\ 

locum  oapere.  w.  dat  of  gerund,  etc.. 

gen.  of,  214.  e,f\  abl.  of,  344.  and  i-t. 

399.0, 

lootia,  pi.  -I  or  -a,  78. 2,  *. 

Miy,  how  expressed  In  Lalin,  31a.  b.  N. 

Logaoedio   Verse,  3^37"-     No'e   "". 

Means,  nouna  denoting,  163.  e;  abl.  of. 

369. 

248.  and  c;  participle  implying  means. 

Long  and  Short,  see  Quaniiiy. 

292. 

longluB,  wiihom  quam,  247.  c. 

Measure,  gen.  of,  215.  t  (cf.  357.  a). 

lOtUoer,  decl.,  Ba.  c 

Measures  in   Prosody,  355-357;    names 

1US8,  defect.,  77.  4. 

"^1  35^:  conlracled  or  resolved,  357. 

lQ3(,decL.77.6. 

Measures  of  value,  377-38°;  of  ^rnffb. 

lynx,  decl..  63./ 

381;  of  weight,  382;  of  capacily,  38J. 

medeor,  medicor,  with  dat.  or  ace. 

M,  tinal,  elision  of,  359.  b.  K.,  d-.  inserted 

227.*. 

in  verb-root,  133.  c.  3, 

medlocrla,  decl..  84.  a.  N. 

-m,  sign  of  ace.,  origin,  p.  005 ;  omitted 

Meditrflive  verbs,  167. ,:.                      ^^^ 

medlUB  imiddUparlBf),  193.       ^^^H 

mediuB  fldlviB,  240.  </.  n.  a.          ^^^H 

ma,  primary  suffiit,  160.  t^. 

mel.  decl.,  67.  b.                                 ^^1 

macer,  decl.,  Sa.  c. 

meliar.  decl.,  86.                           ^^H 

mftcte  TlrtQto,  use  and  eonslr.,  241,  d 

melius  est.  with  infin.,  a88.  e. 

memiDl.conJ.,i43.i;inpres.  sense,  143. 

maKla,  as  sign  of  comparative,  89.  d\ 

comps.  of,  w.  quam.  26a.  N. 

tnlDl  Hith  pres.  infin.,  336.  A,  N.  I. 

maKn),  gfn.  of  value.  25a.  a. 

memor.  decl.,  87.0. 

m&snUB,  comparison,  90. 

Memory,  adjs.  of,  constr.,  218.  a ;  verb* 

Main  clause,  defined,  180.  b. 

of,  constr..  Big. 

mEUestStis,   with  words  of   accusing, 

men,  primary  suflii.  i6g. ,.. 

etc.,  aaa  j. 

-men.  -mentlim,  noun-endiogs,  tfi^tj 

m&lor  QfttH.  tji.c. 

-men,  gend.,  65.  €,  67.  i.             J|H 

mSlOrea,  significalion  of.  76.  a,  76.  b. 

mSnsls,  decl,  59.                             ^^H 

93-/ 

merldiee,  gend.,  73-                        ^^H 

B              A/at/ng,  verba  of,  constr.,  335.  a. 

-m«t  (endidc),g9./                     ^^H 

k          mala    comp.    03*  compounds  of. '<N\^'^\'^^E^:AV'ne!:<&.ll.d,1.1vW^^^^^^^■ 

Index  of  Words  and  Subjects. 


469 


metuS,  with  dat.  or  ace,  227.  c ;  w.  sub- 
junc,  331./^ 

metus,  with  dat.  or  ace,  227.  c. 

xneus  (voc.  ml,  81.  a,  n.)»  40.  c,  81.  a, 
99.  a ;  syntax  of,  197.  a,  214.  a. 

Middle  voice,  iii.  a,  and  N.,  118.  N., 
240.  c,  N.,  249.  N. 

Mile,  English  feet  in,  381. 

miles,  decl.,  46. 

Military  expressions,  dat.  in,  233.  b ;  abl. 
dat.  in,  233.  h ;  abl.  of  accomp.  without 
cum,  248.  a.  N. 

mHitlae  (locative),  258.  d, 

mille  (milia),  decl.  and  constr.,  94.  e, 

-mini,  as  personal  ending,  p.  78,  foot-n. 

minimS,  compar.,  92;  use,  93.  e\  w. 
neg.  force,  209.  e\  in  answer  ("no"), 
212.  a, 

ministrO,  w.  infin.,  273.  a, 

minor  nfittl,  91.  c, 

min5ris,  gen.  of  value,  252.  a,  d, 

min5r@s,  signification,  93.  f, 

minus,  compar.,  92 ;  use,  93.  e ;  with  si 
and  Qu5,  a  not^  209.  e ;  constr.  without 
quam,  247.  c, 

-minus,  -mnus,  verbal  adjective-end- 
ings, 164.  n, 

mlj^or  si,  333.  b,  r. 

mirum  quam  (quantum),  with  in- 
dicative, 334.  e, 

mIsceS  with  abl.  or  dat.,  227.  e,  N.,  248. 
a,  R. 

mis,  tis,  98. 1,  c, 

miser,  decl.,  82 ;  comp.  89.  a. 

miserS,  comp.,  92. 

misereor,  with  gen.,  221.  a. 

miserSsco,  with  gen.,  221.  a. 

miseret,  146.  b\  with  gen.  and  ace, 
221.  b ;  other  constr.,  c^  d, 

miseror,  with  ace,  221.  a. 

misy,  decl.,  67.  a, 

-mnus,  see  -minus. 

Modem  languages  compared  with  Latin, 
see  Appendix. 

Modesty,  subjunc.  of,  311.  ^. 

Modification  of  subj.  or  pred.,  178. 

Modifiers,  position  of,  343,  344 ;  of  nega- 
tive, 345.  d, 

modo . . .  modo,  208.  d, 

modo  (modo  n§)  with  subjunctive  of 
proviso^  314. 

mod5  as  abL  of  manner,  248.  R. 

molSLTia,  decl,  S7  ^ 


moneS,  conj.,  p.  96;  constr.,  219.  c,  238. 

b.  N. 
-mSnia,  -mSnium,  noun-endings,  163.  c, 
Monoptotes,  jj.  2. 
Monosyllables,  quantity,  348. 1-3. 
Months,  gender  of  names  of,  29.  i  and  a ; 

decl.  of  names  of  in  -ber,  84.  a ;  names 

of,  376,  head-n ;  divisions  of,  in  Roman 

Calendar,  376. 
Moods,  names  and  uses  of,  108  b,  112: 

note  on  origin  and  nature  of,  p.  274 ; 

Syntax  of,  264-275. 
Moods  in  temporal  clauses,  how  distin- 
guished, 323. 
Mora,  in  Prosody,  355.  a, 
mSrigrerus,  decl.,  82.  a. 
m5s  est  ut,  332. 

Mother,  name  of,  w.  prep.,  244.  a.  R. 
Motion,  how  expressed,  225.  b,  229.  a, 

243.  b ;  indicated  by  compounds,  237, 

d\  implied,  259.^. 
Motion,  end  of,  see  End  of  Motion. 
Motive,  how  expressed,  245.  b. 
Mountains,    names    of,   gender,    29.    z 

and  a, 
-ms  (-mps),  noun  in,  &/,c, 
Mulciber,  decl.,  41.  e. 
muliebris,  decl.,  84.  a.  N. 
multfi  nocte,  193.  n. 
Multiplication  by  distributives,  95,  c, 
Multiplicatives,  97. 
multum  (-5),  comp.,  92. 
multus,  comparison,  90. 
manus,  decl.,  78.  i./;  manus  est  ut, 

332. 
mas,  decl.,  54,  cf.  54.  2. 
masica  (-€),  decl.,  37. 
Musical  accent,  358, 
mtlt&re,  constr.,  252.  c. 
Mutes,  2.  fl,  3;    mute-stems,  decl.  III., 

44-47;  apparent,  47.  a,  54. 
m^thos,  decl.,  43. 

N,  2.  ^ ;  n  adulterlnum,  id. 

N  as  final  letter  of  stem  (leOn-),  48.  a, 

n,  preceding  stem-vowel  of  verb,  123.  b.  1 ; 

inserted  in  verb-root  (frangrG),  123.  c, 

3 ;  124.  b,  N. 
na,  primary  suffix,  160. 6, 
nfiis,  decl.,  64. 

nam  (enclitic),  in  questions,  210.^^ 
nam,  namque^  use^  ic/S,  <£^7o&,  e. 
\  Names  oi  vcveii  axA  v^orn^exv^^ci. 


^H        470                   Indfx  of  Words  and  Subjects.                ^^H 

H            Naming,  »bs.  ^  vr.  two  .ccs..  =39.  a. 

nequeO,  conj.,  t44.f. 

^H            Nasals,s.j,  3:inser1cHiinverb-ioot,  133. 

n8...qiiidem,  use,  151.  e;  after  nOn, 

V 

209.  a;  position  of,  345.  i;  after  nOn 

^            nfttUlB,decl.,57.^. 

modo.  149.^. 

oKttl  (m&tor,  mlmar) ,  91.  ;. 

nSquIa,  decL.  103.  d. 

natUB,  etc.,  w.  abL  of  source,  144.  a. 

nesciO  an,  xia./.  R. 

navla,ded..57.A. 

neBcia  quis,  use,  aoa.  a;  as  indefiniie 

-nd,  -nt,  vowel  short  before,  iB./ 

without  subj.,  334.,. 

-BdllB,  verbal  adj.-endjng,  164.  o\  ger- 

-neua.  adj.-ending.  164.^. 

nndlvo  in,  113.1/. 

Neuter  ace  as  adv..  148.  d,  cf.  t.  N. 

-no  Ccnclitic),  use  in  quesUons,  3id.  a^; 

Neuler  adjs..  special  uses  of,  1B9. 

in  double  questions,  an;  w.  force  of 

n6nnB.  310 ;  orig.  meaning,  id.  H. ;  in 

cases  alike  in,  33.*:  endings  of  decL 

tiiy,  348. 1. 

III..  6s.  c. 

116,  neg.  of  hortatory  subj.,  a56.  R.;  w. 

Neuter  pron.  as  cogQalo  ace.  338.  *, 

subjunirtive   of  proviso,   313.   a\    in 

Neuter  passives,  136, 

Neuter  verbs,  175, 1761  wllh  cognate  ace. 

313.  a;   in  final  clauses,  317;  -nS- 

33B;  having  passiva  leniie,  with  f.b. 

346.  fl. 

wilh  verbs  of  hindering,  331.  ».  3;  of 

Neuter  passives,  136; 

fearing,  id.  /;    omitted  after  cave, 

nex,decL.77.6. 

id.N. 

nl,  primary  suffix,  160.  .. 

nS  nOn,  w.  vbs.  of  fearing,  331./ 

nl,  nisi,  304,  V. ;  use  of;  315.  a. 

Nearness,  sdjs.  of;  with  dat,  234.  ■>;  w- 

-nla  -Mum,  noun-endings,  163./ 

gen.,  id.  d. 

nlgrer,  decl„Sa)  distinct  from  ater,9[. 

nee  enlm,  156.  d. 

d.H. 

necesse,  indecl.,  171;   neoeeee  est 

nibll,  IndecL,  77.  i ;  oontr,  to  nH,  347.  c. 

Ut,333. 

ndhiJl  gen.  of  value,  352.*. 

Necessity,  verbs  of,  with  pert  pass,  Inf, 

nlmlnim   quam,   used    as    indefiniTe 

a8e.if;  inapodosis,3o8.f,3ii.i:;  with 

without  subjunc,  334.  i. 

Tit-clause,  331.  c. 

□inslt,  146.  a. 

necne  in  double  qaestions,  an. 

nisi  and  sl  nOa.  315,  a;   nisi  sI.  Id.; 

nedum,  317.  c.  R.  and  H. 

nlsl  v6re  (forte},  id.  J ;  slsl  in  sense 

neraa,  indecl.,  77.  i;  with  latter  Bupiee, 

of  only,  id.  d. 

303. 

nisi  v6rt5,  nlal  lorte,  315,  *. 

Negation,  perfect  preferred  in,  279.  d. 

Ditor,  widi  abL,  354.  *. 

Negative  answer,  310.  c;  sia.  and  a. 

nix  (stem  and  decl.),p-aG.  fool-n;  plur., 

Negative  particleE,  list  of,  149,  1%   (wo 

13- <• 

n^alives,  150,  aog.  a;   use  of,  209; 

itfb.  in  answers,  now  expressed,  911. 

form  dlfierenl  ftom   English,  aog.  i; 

nOH.  in  prohibilioni,  369.  a. 

neg. answers, aia;  ncg.proviso,3i4.o; 

nfilS,  conj..  138;  part.,  as  daL  of  refei^ 

neg.  conditton.  315.  0;  purpose,  317; 

ence,  335.  e. 

result.  319.  a,  d,  R.;  position  of.  343.  d. 

iiSmeii,decL,491  »3«in«,denQtinggBni, 

nagO,  better  than  dloB  . .  .  nOn,  aog. 

'.  336(3l^quo'a''°'')■ 

n5raen  eat,  with  pied,  dat.,  331.  *,  e. 

tlesfittutn  dli  ut,  331. 

tiSmO,useof;aoa./i  nBinfi  aOn,  150.  #. 

Nominal  adjectives,  164.  a-*. 

neque  (nee),  and  nsl,  156.  a;  noQue 

Nominative  defined, 3i.a;  howfatmeil 

onlm,  use.  156.  d;   neque  after  a 

from  stem,  3a.  f  j  nom.  suffii.  p.  305 ; 

neg.,  aog.  a. 

nent.  pi.  00m.  and  ««.  alike.  33.  i;  in 
\      6sc\.\\..tv.,-?.ib\\t,4Bd,  111,44, 

n§guam,  fn  dec!,.  By./;  comparison  a\. 

Index  of   Words  and  Subjects. 


in  a^tens,  ded.  IV.,  p.  40,  n.;  in 
B-stems,  decL  V.,  p.  32,  N. 
NOHIHATIVE,  ^lax  (tee  p.  303) :   Bs 
sahject,  173.  1 ;    in  predicale,  176.  *. 

185;   verb-agreemenl  wilh,  ao4;    used 

id.   c  (cf.   240.   d) :    Viilb   opua   in 

predicate.  343.  t.  E.;  nom.  of  gerund 

supplied  by  ace..  395.  R. 
nSn,  derivation.  148.  N.  «;  compoandi 

of^  150.  a,  ^  k  in  answers,  aia.  d. 
nSa  dubteS  dulo.  319.  d;  333.^.  R. 
n5a  modo,  afier  a  aegaiive,  339.  a. 
aSa  modo  . . .  ne  ,  . .  quidem,  149.  t- 

nSii  nemo,  nOn  nQllua.  cic..  15a  a. 
nflQ  quia.  nOa  quod,  nfln  qu8,  nCn 

(luin,etc.,i56./33i.B. 
aOn  Batls,  93.  t. 
Nones  (nOnaa).  376.  c. 

'irego,  98. 1,  i. 


r.  for  1 


s.  gen..  99.  u, 


objecdve  gen.,  99.  c,  194.  i. 
as  parlidve  gen.,  99.  J,  194.  h. 

naTendecim,  94.  c. 

Noun  and  adj.,  farms  of  verb,  109,  p.  lao. 

Noun^stem.  treated  as  root,  123.  d. 

Nouns  defined,  ly.  a;  in  decl,,  gend.. 
39.  ff;  declension  of,  33-78;  deriwative 
forms  rX,  161-163  \  "^^  ^  adjectives, 
88.  ',  188,  d\  lule  of  agreement.  1S3-. 
w.  part  gen.,  ai6i  w.  obj.  gen.,  3171 
governing  ace,  337.  /;  notin  as  piol- 


Nouns  of  agency, 

BOX,  decL.  54. 

-116,  as  noun.ending,  67.  d\  as  adjective- 
ending.  85.  a;  participles  in,  ded.,  85, 
87.  d',  VI.  gen.,  aiS.i;  «.  BCC,  id.  N. 
lands. 

-at.  stems  in.  dec!.,  87.  i. 

nabea,  dccL,  5a. 

nabS.  with  dat.,  327. 1. 

nOUue,  decL,  83. 

num,  force  of,  31a  c ;  in  indirect  ques- 
tions, id./ R. 

Number,  31 ;  nouns,  defecl 


6.76; 
id.*,  e 


triable  I 


,79. 


inveibs,  108.  rf;  agree- 
at;  Willi  appositives,  184.  a; 
,  1S6, 187,  d;  with  verbs,  204, 


M-97:  ' 
94 ;  distributives.  95 ;  advs..  gi 
97.    Position  of  numeral  adjs.,  344.  *. 
nomqula,  decl..  T05.  d-    meaning  Emd 


1 

bers. 
[.6. 

I 


O  or  a,  Indo-European   vowel,  p.    141, 

foot-n,  p.  433,  foot-n. 
o  foraarteruotv,7i  in  decL  1I.,38.  N. 
-6  final  in  ain8  =  &+ni.  iiG.  .N. 
-5  in  nom.,  48.  a;  gend.,  6s.  a,  bj.  i;  in 

fem.  abL  of  Gr.  adjs..  8j.  rf.  K. 
-0.  -5iila,  nouo-enditig,  163.  e,  164.  f. 
o-5!em3,  decl.   11.,  38,  p.  sa.  fooT-n.;   in 

adjs,,B3,  83:  tabs  bom  o-slems,  166. 

O  ^w.subjuncof  wbh,367. 3.  and  N.  i. 
ob, use,  153^0, 153;  in  coQip..  170.  o;  in 

comp.  w.  vbs.,  w.  dai.,  338 ;  to  express 

cause,  345.  i;  w.  gerund,  300. 
obeO,  conslr.,  338.  a. 
Obeying,  vbs.  of,  say ;  w.  ace,  id.  n. 
Object  cases,  177.  *. 

Object  clauses,  infin.,  330;  subj.,33i,33a. 
Object  defined,  177;  becomes  subject  of 

pass.,  id.  a,  337.  a;   ace.  of  direct  w, 

dat  of  indir.  obj.,  395 ;  secondary  obj.. 

339.3;  obj.  of  anticlpalion,  334.  c. 
Objective  case  expressed   in   Latin  by 

gen.,  dat..  act,  01  abl,,  177.  i. 
Objective  compounds,  16B.  £. 
Objective  genitive,  mel, etc. ,99.f;  defined, 

a[3.a;  with  nouns,  317 ;  wilh  adjs.,  ai8. 
Obligation,  tmfulfilled.  hort  subj.,  a6&  t. 
Oblique  cases,3i.f;  origin  of  names  of, 

P.30S- 


Numeral  advs,,  g6. 


5oior,  comp.,  91.  d. 
Occasion,  expressed  by  participle,  293. 
oatSdeclm,  94.  c. 

Odl,  conj.,  143.  o;  w.  meaning  of  pres- 
ent. 379.  '■ 
oe,  writicn   a   (long),  11.  c;  for  -I  in 

nom.  pi.,  decl.  II.,  43.  d. 
Offends,  constr..  338.  a. 
I  Old  (ociDsof  pronouns;  ndB.tls.t^.i-f; 


H    472                    Index  of  Words  and  Subjects.                    ^^^k 

^B        ^16na,  -olentus,  adj.  endings,  164.  *. 

-5a,  -Odifl,  67.  rf. 

H       oUus(me),  100.0. 

OB-.  Stem  of  comparative!,  86.  a. 

^P        -oluB,  diminmive  ending,  164.  a. 

-OB  for  -UB.  in  nom.  sing.,  decl.  II..  3B. 

^         Omission,  of  oonsonani,  11.  *:  of  pos- 

N.;     as  Greek  ending,  43;     as,  gen. 

sessive,  197.  e;  of  anieeedent,  aoo.  c. 

ending   in  Greek   nouns,   decl.   III., 

oinn9B;  nBa  omn6B  ( instead  of  omnSs 

63./ 

noatrQm),  316.  e. 

Oa,  Brla,  docL,  77.  *. 

-On.  Greek  ending,  dec).  11.,  43. 

oa.oealB,5lem,p.96,fbol-n.a:  decL,6i. 

-On,  -finla,  nouns  in.  67.  *. 

Oscan  forms  compared  with  Latin.  Ap- 

-On.gen.plur., dec].  II.,43.c. 

pendix,  p.  435. 

-8n,  nom.  ending,  63,  c,  d. 

08BU,  osaua  (det).  69.  (oot-n. 

-Ssue,  -olens,  -olentus.  adj.-ending^ 

H           Sn-.  slem-ending,  63,/. 

164.  k.                                            i^^ 

K         ont,non..-5n.63.i 

ovat  (defective),  144.  '.                     ^^H 

■         onyx,  decL,  67.  c 

DVlB,  dEcl.,  57-                                            ^^H 

■         Open  ayllables,  14.  d. 

-ox.  nouns  in,  67.  €.                            ^^H 

1         oper&,  wilh  gen.,  246.  b. 

0x7s,  decl.,  67.  a.                                ^^^H 

oporamdO.w.dal.  of  gerund,  e1e.,a99. 

a;  wilh  subjunc,  331. 

P,  paiasilic  aflerm  (aOmpal).  tr.i^^^| 

Operafions  of  nature,  146.  0. 

pftCtO,  as  abl.  of  manner,  a^Z.  R.      ^^^H 

Paeon.  356.  d.                                         ^^H 

oiOiior,  position  of,  345.  (. 

paeniWt,  146.  *:  constr.,  aat.  *^ 

oportet,  146.  c\   wilh  ace.  of  object, 

palam,  as  apparent  adj..  188.  t.  3:  wilh 

337.  <;  in  apod.,  30B.  c;  impetfeel  re- 

abl., 207.  b.  361.  i. 

fers  to  present,  plupf.  to  past,  311.  c.  r.; 

Palalais,  3:     stems,    deel.    III.,   45.  ,:; 

w.  subjunc.  or  inf.,  331.  i. 

oportult,  w.  pres.,  inf..  288.  a. 

67.*. 

palHBter,  decl..  84.  a. 

oppQgnS,  w.  ace.  aaB.  a. 

Panthfls,  vocative  of,  43.  f,  63- 1. 

opa,  deel..46;  defect.,  77.  5. 

pSr,  dec1.,8s.  *.  87.  a;  with  gen.,  aig.rf; 

w.  dal.  of  gerund,  etc..  agg.  faat-n.     J^^^H 

H             subjunc.,  p.  274. 

Parallel  verb-forms.  134.                       ^^H 

H         Oplatiye  subj.  (mtiA),  067;  w.  Utlnam, 

Parasitic  sounds,  i                                 ^^^1 

H             elc,  id.  i\  velim,  etc,  w.  subjunc. 

Parataxis,  p.  164,  p.  874.                       ^^H 

■             equiv.  to,  id.  c. 

parKtua,  with  intin..  973.  i.               ^^^H 

■         optlniRtSB,  54.  3,  76.  a.  fl. 

Pardoning,  verbs  of.  with  dat.,  1197.     ^^H 

■         OpUB,  indecl.,  77.  1;  optia  and  Qaua, 

parSllon,  decl.,  43.                           ^^^^| 

■             w.  abl.,  243-  ';  as  pred.  nom.,  id.  k.; 

Parisyllabic  nouns  of  decL  111..  3>!^^| 

■              w.  participle,  29a.  6;  w.  supine  in  -fl. 

adjectives,  84.                                        ^H 

3°3' 

parlter,  use.a34.a.N.  3. 

or,  suffix,  see  as. 

partem,  adverbial  use.  34a.  i. 

or-,  siem-endine,  decl.  III.,  48.  d. 

■or.  noun-ending,  163.  a. 

258./ 

or,  -6ria,  nouns  in,  67.  i. 

pwOoepa.  decl.,  87.  *,  d. 

or  or  -Oa,  nom.  ending,  4B.  d;  gend.. 

Participia!  clause    Implying    condition. 

63.  a,  67. 

Oratii  ehn^a,  see  Indirect  Discourse. 

Order  of  words,  343-346. 

of,  89.*;  number  of,  log.  0;  how  used. 

L            Ordinal  Numbers,  94;  decl.,  94./ 

113:  as  adjs..  Id.  <;  as  nouns,  id./; 

1            -Jtrius,  adj.-ending,  164.  k. 

used  predicalively  as  adjs.,  id.g;  parts. 

in  -UB,  used  as  adjs.,  with  gen..  ajS.  t; 

^MfTPlieus,  decl.,  43. 

c\aaae  E<vi\-i3i«it.  W  ijaxt^  aox.  1 1  puta. 

^^K(nom.ending,48.^.:eend..6s.a.&7.b 

V    as. 
^     id. 


1.  I86  ai 


/«(/cT  of  Woids  and  Subjects. 


'yntax,  388-a94;    agree 


m  special 
1  suppliei 


pres.  pass.  pari, 
f ;  peif.  acl.,  how  supplied,  id.  d\  parts, 
of  deponent  verbs,  133.  ii,  b,  290.  h.  d\ 
adjective  use,  291 ;  predicate  use,  aga; 
with  OPUB,  id.  b;  perf.  with  habeO, 
id.  c\  present  with  faOiS,  id.  e\  future 
part,  393 ;  with  past  tenses  of  esso,  id. 
c;  gerundive,  use  as  pait.  or  adj.,  394; 
future  part,  in  indirect  questions,  334. 
a\  pan.  as  protasis,  31a  s. 
Particles  defined,  37;  forms  and  classi- 
licalion,  p.  122;  note  on  formation, 
p.  123;  interrogative,  145.  d\  nega- 
tive, id.  t,  309:  in  compounds,  170; 
Syntai,  ao7-2ia;   use  of  interrogative 


Parti 

99-*- 
Pans  of  Speech,  35. 
partus,  decl.,  70.  a. 
pamm,  comp.,  ga ;  meaning,  93.  t. 
parrt,  gen.  of  value,  352.  a. 
parvtlS,  comp.,  go. 
I        l^usive  voice,  loB.  a ;  origin,  i  iB.  fcol-n. 

(fbrms  wanting  in,  no.  i-,  signification 
in;  reflexive  meaning,  id.  K.,  ii8.  (J. 
deponents,  iii.  b\    completed  lenses 
how  formed,  126.  g\  passive  used  im 
personally,  141.  o,  146.  d\  330,  ct  330 
«-f,  331-  A. 
pater  tamlliaa,  decl.,  36.  b. 
patifiDB,  comp.  of,  B9. 1. 
potior,  consir.,  331.  i. 


Ishi-E 


I-.  54-  3.  B 


5  (-adsB,  -ides,  -Sua,  etc.), 


pecQaloe,  gen.,  w.  vbs.  of  occusis 

pedsBt&r,  dec!.,  84.  a. 
pelagUB  (plur.  pelaKS),  gend,  ol 
pelVlB,  decl.,  57-  *. 
Penalty,  gen.  of,  220  and  N.;  abl.o 
PenatSs.  decJ.,S4.3  (cf.76,3). 


penee,  following  noun,  263.  n. 

Pentameter  verse,  363. 

Penult,  defined,  19;    rules  of  qtiantity,  j 
349-354- 

ponuB,  gend.,  69.  a ;  decl.,  78,  i. 

per,  prep.,  153.  a;  use.  153;  w. 

agent,  246.  *.  Adverbial  prefix,  w.  adjs., 
170.  c  (cf.  93  rf);  w.  verbs,  170.  c.  N. 

Perceiving,  verbs  ot  oonsir,,  273,  330, 

parendie  (loc.),  74.  c.  14B.  w. ». 

Perfect  panioiple,  used  to  form  lense! 
iiai;  other  uses,  113.  c.i;  of  depo- 
nents, 135.  i;  used  as  nouns, 
adv.,  007.  c\  dat.  of  agent  with,  23a.  a\ 
ahl.w.  opus  and  Dsue.  343.  e,  29a.  b. 

Perfect  Tense  distinguished  from  im- 
perf.,  115.^,  e;  pert  deC  and  perf. hisi 
id.  c,  379;  personal  endings,  116,  a 
origin  of  I  and  S  in,  iiS.  N. ;  stem,  hw 
formed,  114,  ia6;  of  conj.  I.,  136.  1 
3;  contracted  perl,  ia8.  a,  h;  peiC  J 
sat>j.  in  -slm,  laS.  e.  3;  irreg.  tbrms  of  ■ 
conj.  I.,  130;  of  eonj.  II.,  131;  1 
of  conJ.  III.,  13a;   of  eonj.  IV.,  133.  I 

PERFECTTENsE,i)n«/aj-.    Pert  lod.. use,  f 
279 ;  m  fiit  conditions,  307.  e  \ 
eral  conditions,  979.  b,  309.  c\  gnomia   I 
perf.,  27B.  c.    Pert  Subj.,  horlalory,  a6fi  j 
in  prohibitions,  afi6.  i,  269.  a ;  c^tativo, 
367.  a ;  in  ful.  conditions,  307.  c ;  polen-  I 
tial,3ir.o.     Perf.  Inf..  in  exclflmalions,  -f 
374.  N.;  special  uses,  288.  d,e;  inn 
diBc.,336.A.  N.  I.    Sequence  of  Tei 
pert  ind.,  187.  s ;  subjunc,  id.  *,  ( ; 
335.  B.  N.  ». 

Pericles,  decl.,  63. 1, 

Period,  346 ;  note  on,  p.  39a. 

Periphrastic  conjugwions,  113.  b.  N 
N.;  paradigms,  I39i  periphrastic fc 
in  conjugation,  147 ;  use  in  contrary  to     , 
308,^1  in  ind.  queslioni. 


334-'". 
■erinission,  vbs.  of,  coi 
[lerniittS,  w.  dal.,  227 
permUtfl.  w.  abl.,  25a 
pomoi,  decl.,  87./ 
perpsB,  decl.,  87.  o. 
Pore^B,  decl.,  37. 

,  108.  d\  agreemi 


.,  33I.  «■ 


204  ai 


:h  differe 


L 


r 

I 

I 

I 


474 


Index  of   Words  and  Subjects. 


Personal  endings,  ii6,  and  foot-n.,  i 
Personal  pronouns.  9B,  99,  p.  178,  "bea 
Syntax.  194;  omitled,  194. 3,306.0; 
pi.,  id.  *;  3d  p^ra.,  id.  c. 
perau&deS,  constr..  331. 
Persuading,  verbs  of,  wilh  dal„  aaj. 


Phrase,  dcfiaed.  179. 

Phrases,  neut..  ag.  e ;  phrases  a 
grown  inio  advs..  148.  N,  «; 
phrases^  179;  phra&es  iimile 
214.  d\  phrase  or  clause  in 
355.  *. 

Physical  qualilies,  abl.,  251.  a. 

plg^r,  decl.,  Sa.  e. 

piget,  coDStr.,  zai.  b-d. 

Pily,  verbs  of,  consir.,  aai.  d. 

plus,  eomp.,  39.  d.  ».,  91.  rf. 

pU.  deel,,  77.  6. 

Place,  advs.  of,  149.  0;  relalii 
quire  prep.,  939.  u,  258.  a,  c 
birth,  abl..  344.  i ;  place 
c,  d ;  place  to  or  from  » 


■here,  354, 358. 
ich,as8;  prep. 
-n.,a.*./^i 


Placing,  vbs.  of,  eo 
■    of  n, 


B,  78. 1.  B. 


decl.  of  plant  ns 

plaudS,  w.  dat.,  237.  t. 

Plautus,  use  of  fttrior,  89.  N;  of  quom 
w.  indie,  315.  a.  V.,  3^.  H.  3;  pro- 
aodial  forms,  367.  a,  374.  *,  375. 

Pleasing,  verba  of,  consir.,  227, 

pISbSs.  decl.,  p.  41,  fool-n,  i. 

Plenty,  rerbs  of,  constr.,  3J3,  348.  c. 

plSnus.  conslnicllon,  333,  248,  t.  R. 

■plo*.  numeral  adjectives  In,  97. 

plult  (impers.),  146.^;  used peisonally, 


Id.  N 
Huperfect  Indicartve. 
tohuy,  aSa;   plup.  indie. 


cont,  lo  (acI,3o8.  f ;  in  genera]  cond!' 
tions,  309.  t.  Pluperf.  Subj.,  honaloiy, 
3ti6.e;  optative. 367 :  in  conditions, 30E 
(sequence,  3B7./I;  potential,  311.  a.  N, 
Plural,  wanting  in  decL  V.,  74.  d;  used 
in  Eense  different  from  sing.,  75.  o-t, 
79.  f ;  pi.  alone  used,  76 ;  plur.  ace. 
used  as  advs.,  148.  t;  neut.  pi.  of  adjs., 
1S9.  j. 

plQrlS,  gen.  of  value, 
plOa,  decl.,  86  and  i. 

out  quam.  547.  c. 
poenitat,  see  paenltet. 
poSma,  decl..  47.  i, 
pandO,  detect,  77.  a. 
pOnS,  w.  abl.,  afio.  o. 
por-,  prefix,  17a  *. 
portlcaa,  gend.,  69.  a. 
portus.  decL,  70.  d. 
Position,  expressed  by  ab.  ex,  36a  i 
Position  in  Prosody,  j8,  347,  d ;  does 

affect  final  vowel,  id.  e.  R. 
posse,  as  fill,  lot,  28a,/ 
Possession,  how  expressed.  99.  ui   ( 

ot,  331;  compared  w.  gen.,  id.  R. 
Possessive  compounds,  167.  d. 

E,  314.  a-d;    dat. 


"     J 


refere 


i.  a3S-  " 


id.  i;   omission,  id.  e;   used  substan- 
tively, 19a.  a,  197,  d;    used  for  gen., 
214.  a ;  for  obj.  gen.,  19a  i,  217,  a. 
'ossibilily,  vbs.  o^  in 


.308.^ 


pOBt,  vbs.  c 

post,   adverbial  nse  of,  a6i.  d;   nM 

quam,  36a.  /H 

postera,  defect.,  Sa.  d;  comp.,  9I>  jH 

poatetl.  91.  i.  jH 

posterior,  91.  a,  i.  ^^ 

Postpositive  conjunctions,  156.  JL  * 

postquBjn   (poete&quain),  in  leni' 


po8tr8m5.  in  enumerations,  151.  d. 
poatridlS.  with  gen.,  333.  <;  wiili  ncc, 

207.  i.  361. 1 ;  with  quam.  a6a. 
poBtolO  ab,  339.  e.H.f.  poattilO  ut. 

33t. 
?(AeM,\i\  mood,  how 


Index  of  Words  and  Subjects. 


potla,  pote,  87./  + 

potior  (adj.),  camp..  91.  d. 

potior  (verb),  conj.,  135 ;  wiih  gen.,  323. 


I 


a,  2«.  fl 


'-.149; 


gerundive,  396.  R, 
potliia,  comp..  93. 
potui,  w.  pres.  infin.,  3SB.  a. 
Power,  odjs.  of;  vr.  gen.,  aiS.  d. 
Practice,  vbs.  of,  167.  c. 
prae,i52.j;  use,  153;  in  comp.,  93.  ^; 

in  comp.,  w.  dat.,  aaS;  in  comp.,  w. 

Qliam,  36a.    H.    II    quanlily    of,    in 

compounds,  347.  b. 
praeoedS,  conslr.,  aaS.  a. 
praeoepB,  decL.  83,  h,  87.  a. 

praeotplB,  constr..  331. 

PrBfiiamen,  80,  a ;  abbreviations,  id.  d.  i. 

pnwpes,  deci,,  87,  rf, 

praea,  decU,  67.  d,  77. 6. 

pra«etSIor,  constr.,  337.  b. 

praesum,  w.  dat.  of  gerund,  etc.,  299.  a. 

proeter,  use,  15a.  a,  153. 

praeterlt,  w,  ace,  237.  f. 

preol,  defect.,  77. 5. 

preoor".  conatr.,  331. 

Predicate,  pp.  163,  164;  defined,  173; 
modified,  178;  pred.  noun  or  adj., 
173.  K.,  176;  case,  176,  b\  pred.  nom., 
etc.,  1B5;  pred.  noun  refening  to  two 
or  more  sing,  nouns,  iJ.  i ;  adjective, 
jB6.  h,  c,  d-,  agteement  in,  1B7.  a,  t;  in 
rel.  clause,  199;  pred.  adj.  in  neuC.  pi., 
187.  e\  pred.  ad],  in  rela.tive  clause,  aoo. 
d;  pred.  ace,  339  and  a;  adj.  as  pred. 
acc.,id.N.i;  pred.  ace.  becomes  pred. 
nam.  in  the  pass.,  id.  N.  2;  predicate 
gen..  SI4.  c,  d;  predicale  use  of  parti- 
ciples. 399; 

Predicate  noun  or  adj.  after  inf.,  070.  N. 
3,  271.  (,  37a.  a.  a  and  N.,  i. 

Prepositiota,  assimilation  of,  17./;  de- 
fined, 25.  g\  derivation  oi,  p.  137, 
(bot-n.;  listofpreps.w.acc.,  152.0;  w. 
sbl.,  id.  i;  with  either,  id.  c\  how  dis- 
tinguished from  advs,  p.  127,  (bol-n.; 
idiomatic  uses,  1531  compounded  w. 
vbs.  and  adja..  170.  a.  c  \  noun  w.  prep., 
instead  of  obj.  gen..  217.  c;  in  compo- 
sition w.  vhs.,  w.  dat.,  338,339;  actio 
compos.,  239.  6;  v.  abl.  of  separation. 


243.  a 


i  of 


place,  358.  a,  l,/,g\  use  of,  a6o-a&i', 


preps. followingthe noun, a63.N,;  usual 
position  of.  345.  a.    (See  N.,  p.  205.) 

Present  Participle,  decL,  85 ;  use,  113.  a. 

Present  stem,  how  formed,  pp.  86,  119: 


trom 


1. 123- 


tense,  wilh  lam  dill,  etc.,  276. 
a;  conarive,  id.  i;  for  fut.,  id.  e;  his- 
torical, id.  d;  with  dum,  id.  i;  in 
quotations,  id.  /;  sequence,  a86,  3S7. 
e.h;  pres.  in£  w.  potuI,  etc.,  388.  a; 
participle,  390-392.  Pres.  inf.  in  ind. 
disc,  referring  to  past  time,  336.  A.  N.  i. 


s,  143.  N„  279.  e. 


adv.,  2G1.  a ;  with  qoam,  a6i. 
Primary  suffixes,  defined,  159,  160. 
Primary  lenses,  285.  i,  2B6. 
pilmipll&ris,  d 


s.  165. 


Primi 

-     IS'-*    1 
piimSria,  defect.,  87./  ^^H 

piimue,  form.  p.  56,  foot-n.  ^| 

prIncepB,  deck,  87.  i. 
Principal  parts  of  verb,  laa.  A,  d. 
prior,  comparison,  gr. 
prius,  with  Quam,  262;  prluBquam 

336.  B.  B.  N.  3.       '       ' 
Privation  expressed  by  abi.,  343. 
prO,  153.  b\  use,  153;  In  comp,,  w,  dat, 

228 ;  to  express  for,  236.  R.  ^^ 

PTobO  w.  dat.,  337.  t\  332.  c.  N.  ^^1 

Proceleusmaiic,  356.  t.  ^^| 

procerus,  decl.,  82.  a.  ^^M 

prociJ  with  abL,  261.  i.  i^^f 

prohibeS,  constr.  of.  225.  d. 
Prohibitions,  266.  i,  269  and  a,  i,  K.;  in 

ind.  disc,  339.  H. 
Promising,  etc..  verbs  of,  33a^ 
Pronominal  roots,  157,  139;  as  primary 

suffixes,  id. 
Pronouns  defined,  25.  c;  decL  of,  98- 
105 ;  personal  and  reflexive,  98  j  gen., 
howused,99.fl-c;  demonstrative,  100- 
102;  relative,  intetrog.,  and  indef.,  103- 
ros;  pron.  contained  in  verb*nding, 
116.  foot-n,.  174.  3. 
Pronouns,  Sjittax,  iq^-ao^-.  PscMoal, 


Index  of  Words  and  Subjects. 


t.  t;  Ipsa.  id.  f-i:  Reflexive,  i 
PoBcssve,  197 ;  Relative,  1S6.  N..  i 
nlBHve  in  proMsIs,  316;  Indefir 
Tax.  Prons.  w.  part.  gen..  ai6. 
Position  of  prons,  344.  /,  345.  e.  K 
on  Iheit  ose  and  meaning,  p,  178. 
Pronuodation,  Roman  melhod.  16;  E 
lish  method.  17^ 


,91.  a 


':  33'- 


I 


proi>e  set  u 

Proper  names,  Bo :  plur,  75. 76.  i. 

propenia,  deeU,  83^  a. 
proploquua,  with  gen..  ai8.  i. 
propior  (propiuB). comparison, 9 


of,  ii 


I 


proprius.  with  gen.,  134.  d. 

propter,  use,  153.  a,  153 ;  poiilion.  363. 
N. ;  denodng  moiivt,  245.  i. 

Prosody,  p.  394;  rules  and  defiBlilbns, 
34/"-375;  "riy  peculiarities,  373. 

prosper  (-us),  decl.,  Sa.  i. 

prosplclS,  w.  dat  or  ace,  317.  c. 

Protasis  (see  Conditional  Clauses),  304 
ff. ;  loose  use  of  lenses  in  Eng.,  303.  R. ; 
relative  in  prol.,316;  temporal  panicles 
in,  333 ;  &nta-qua,m,  priuequam  in, 
327.  *;  pro!,  in  ind.  disc.  337.  r. 

Protmcdon  of  long  syllables,  335. .:. 
prSvlde6,  w,  dat.  or  ace,  237.  e. 
Proviso,  sub],  used  in,  a66.  if;  introduced 


-.,  307.  i,  a6r.  a,  334.  t. 


foot-n 


lic).99./i£ 


pQbSa,  decl.,  7S.  1. 1.  87.  t. 
pudet,  I4fi.  b ;  constr.,  321.  i-d. 
pilar,  decl.,  38  (cf.  41.  a). 
puloher,  decL,  83.  e. 
puis,  decU  ^-  ^ 
Punishment,  sbl,  of.  330.  i. 
pupplB,  decl..  56.  *,  57.  i. 
Pure  and  impure  syllables,  14.  «. 
;  373;  exF 

re  afer  certain  vbs..  294.  d 


und  OTgemndivc  as  predicate  gen.,  ^9. 
R.;  waysofeipressing.srB,  Clausesoi, 
iSo.fi  defined  and  classified.317;  use 
of  quS  in.  id.  6 ;  main  clause  omitied, 
id.  c:  nBdum,  id.  n.  and  n.  Sub- 
slantive  clauses  of.  used  after  ocilaln 
verbs,  33r:  of  wishing,  id.  *:  of  per- 
mitting, id, «;  of  determining,  id.  J;  ol 
caution,  etc,  id.  <;  of  tearing,  id, 
(Note  on,  p.  34a) 

Purpose  or  end,  dat.  of,  333. 

-pQB,  compounds  of,  67.  d. 

puter.  decl..  84.  a. 

qu&  .  .  .  quft  aoB.  d. 
quadrupSa,  decl.,  87.  d. 
quae  res  (or  id  quod),  aoo.  e. 
qua«TO,  constr.  (ex  or  1I6),  339, 


subjunc,  331. 


'^ 


quaesS.  conj.,  144.  i/;  positioi 

Qualities  (abstract) .  gend,,  39. 

Qualities  of  an  object  compared,  193. 

Qualttj,  adjs.  of,  164.  l\  gen.  of,  315,  251. 
a;  10  denote  price,  353.  a,  k\  abl.  of, 
=5.  (etais-N.). 

quam.  with  superlative,  93.f;  rXymo\oSf 
of.  p.  133.  i;  correlative  w.  tam,  107; 
w.  compor.  and  positive  or  w.  two  pos- 
idves,  193.  t't  with  comparadves,  347. 
a,  t;  after  allue,  id.  d;  w.  compar.  of 
advs..  id.  t-,  with  ante,  poet,  362; 
with  subj.  after  comparatives.  330.  f ; 
followed  by  tesidt-clause,  33X  * ;  in  in- 
direct queslions,  334,  i\  in  indirect  dis- 
course, 336.  a.  R.,  c.  N,  a.  ^B 

quamdia,  338.  N.  I.  ^M 

quamlibet,  concessive,  a66.  e,  313.     ^^k 

quam  ob  CBUsam,  a^a.  V.  ^H 

quam  qu3,  quam  ut,  widi  subj^  330,  *, 

quamquam,ios.  J.N.;  use,  156. 1 ;  with 
indie.  3t3.  t;  introducing  a  proposi- 
tion=n»rfj^.  id./:  w.  subj..id.^. 

quam  SI,  313. 

quamvlB,  use,  tjfi,  i;  snbj,  with,  a66  t, 
3'3-  ".  g- 

quandS   (interrog.),  derivation, 
11:  meaning,  156. jf:  inttef.,  id.;  carnal 
(«■««), sat. N.3:  temporal,3»         "" 

quantl,  gen.  of  price.  353.  a. 

Quantity,  gen,  of  adji.  ot  deno 


1 


^^^^P             Index  of  Words  and  Subjects.                   47;^H 

^F-  eial  rales  of,  18,  347;  nat.ire  of,  p.  394. 

quia,  dat,  or  abl.  plur.,  104.  d. 

■        N.;  lina1syllablG5,343;  p<^Dull!ma<G5yU 

qulBnam,  .05.  i. 

f        lables,  349-354. 

qulBpiam,  105.  c,    use  of.  105.  d.  N, 

quants,  w.  tantfi,  106.  c,  350.  r. 

quiaquam,  decl..  105,  c;    use,  105.  i. 

question?,  334.  r. 

N.,  id.  h,  20a.  *,  c. 

QuantomT^,  conccssivE.  313. 

quiaquB,  form  and  decl,,  T05,  e;   use 

QUWatUB,  IOS.f. 

with  superlative,  93.  c;  in  general  as- 

dliasl, with  primary  tEnses.  31a.  R. 

sertions,  ao2.  d;  in  dependent  clause. 

QtiaseO  (inlensive),  167.  *. 

id,  t\  wiih  plural  verb,  ao5.  c.  a. 

-que  (enclitic),  added  to  indeGnites,  105. 

quisquis,  decl.,  105,  i. 

t;  as  conjunction,  use,  156.  a,  ao8.  b.  3; 

qui^ia.  decl.,  105.  c;  use,  aoa,  c. 

■          quantity,  348- 1- 

■    queO  (defective).  M4-i-- 

quB   in  final   clauses    (=ut  eO)    with 

■    qaSs,  old  nom.  plur..  104.  d. 

subj,,  317.  b  \  aOn  qui!.  311.  n. 

W     Questions,  direct,  in  indio,,  112,  a.  =10- 

quB  . , .  e5,  106,  e;    10  denote  deg.  of 

■           aia;  indirect,  id.  /  r;  double  ques- 

difference,  250.  R. 
quoad  (purpose,  etc.),  328. 
quod  for  id  quod.  aoo.  i.  K. 

sult  clause  in  exclani.  questions,  33a,  c ; 

mood  in  indirect  question,  334;  in  in- 

quod (conj.).  156./;  mood  with.  321; 

direct  diacourae,  33S ;  in  inlonnal  ind. 

in    indirect    discourse,    id.    a\    subst. 

disc..  341-  "■ 

dause  with,  333;  as  ace.  of  specifica- 

qid (teiadve),  decL,  103;   (inlerrog.  and 

tion,  id.  a;  with  verbs  of  feeling,  id.  b\ 

quod  in  inleimedime  clauses,  341.  c. 

qui— ut  is.  with  subj.,  317,  319 ;  qui 

andK. 

quod  aclam  (proviso).  320.  d. 

qid  (adverbial).  104.  c. 

quod  ai,  use,  156.  b,  240.  b. 

quioum,  104.  c. 

quoin(seeCUD0),7, 156./, 

quia,  use,  156./;  causal,  321;  w.  verbs 

of  feeling,   333.   i;     in    inlermediale 

of  hindering,  317-  *■  N- 1,  319-  C  33i-  '■ 

clauses,  341.  rf. 

quicumquc,  docl.,  105.  a. 

clauses.  321. 

quid,  in  excL,  240.  d.  N.  I. 

quoque,  use,  151.  a ;  position,  345.  *. 

quldam,  decl.,  105.  c;  meaning  of.  ao=. 

quot,  indeclinable.  106,  a. 

Quotation,  forms  of.  w.  apud  and  In. 

quidem.  use.  151.  i\  wiUi  le  ot  idem, 

258.  e,  a,  N.  a ;  direct  and  indir.,  335. 

195.1;  position  of,  345.  *. 

quotua  qulsque.  105.  t. 

qunibet,  decL,  105.  e;  use,  20a.  f. 

quu-(cu-),7. 

quin.  w.  Indic.  equivalent  to  command, 

quum  (conjunction),  7  (see  cum}. 

269./:  in  result-clause  (=quInBii). 

319.  d;   w.  vbs.  of  hindering,  33a.  g\ 

B  subsl.  for  B  between  sonants,  11.  a.  p. 

nOn  dubita  quin,  333.^-.  R. 

26,  fbol-n.  a;  r-  in  adj.  stems,  85;  ir- 

Quinary  or  hemiolic  measures,  356.  d. 

inuoun^tems,4B... 

ra  (la),  primary  suffix,  160.1.                     ^^H 

76.1. 

rftatrum,  plu.  in  -a  and  -I,  78.  a.  *.         ^H 

quippe,  vrith  relative  clause,  3S0.  e.s.i-. 

ratifine,  as  abl.  of  manner,  248.  K.           ^H 

with  cum.  3j6.  K.  i. 

ratufl,  as  pres.  part,  ago.  b.                        ^H 

Qumtea,  79.  c. 

rftvia,  decl.,  56.  n. 

quia,  decl..  104;  distinguished  from  qu] 

re-  or  red-  (prefii),  170.  b. 

in  use,  id.  a.  and  N.;  compounds  of 

rsRpae,  100.  c. 

(aliqulB.   etc.).  .05;   quia  with  al. 

Receiving,  vbs.  of,  w.  gerundive,  294.  rf. 

num,  nS,  105,  d;  indet  use  of.  aoa.  0. 

qtiis  est  qui,  320.  a. 

I 


Index  of  Words  and  Subjects. 


reoordor,  witli  ruc.  zig.  i. 
Fflotum  ent  ut.  351. 
nd-.  we  ro-. 

Reduplioition,  T13.  c.la4.«,p.iao,  isB.f; 
inporfcctolcDDJ.  lll„id,;liBtofverbs, 
131.  # ;  losi  In  fidi,  etc.,  id.  133.  /  n,  ; 
rule  for  ijuanlily,  351.  c. 

rfrtrt,  with  gon,  or  possessive  adj..  aia; 
iilliBr  aomt..  Id.  i. 

Kelerancc,  otijcci  of,  aiB. 

RefEienuD.pranouns  of.  195.0;  comrnonly 
omlltfld.  Id.  t\  dative  o(,  335;  gen.  of 
«pflcincHlion,  aiS.  e. 

Rpflaxlvo  pronouns,  98.  a.  a,  i,  loa.  r.  N. ; 
Syntax  of,  196;  of  1st  and  ad  person, 
Id.  A, 

Kpflcxlve  verbs  (deponent  or  passive), 
118,  fool-n.,  135.  <;  use  of  pHstive,  III, 
N.  t ;  with  object  ace.,  340.  N. 

RofuilnB,  vbt.  uf,  w.  quflmlnua,  319.  c. 

Regular  verb,  isi-136. 

Rolatlonahlp,  tiount  of,  164.  i. 

KelatlveadJoctlvH,  w.gen,.  9:B,wIlha,^. 

RaluUve  advorlis,  mod  correlatively,  107 : 
lued  lo  contiect  Independent  sentences, 
180./  BOI,  *;  -  pronoun  with  prep., 
aof.n;  relisrrinf  lolooadvB.aot./;  used 
Instead  olrcl.proa..ld./a,  307,  a;  used 
In  reintlvB  olauses  of  purpoM.st?;  of 
reiuli,  319;  position,  301,  c. 

Rolatlve ciauBei,  defined,  iSo.  e;  w.  rela- 
lWe»il<i».,3Ci..A.  ^jmtax, ^16-316;  con- 
ditional, 316;  final, 317,318;  consecu- 
llve,  3191  choraclerlslic,  310;  cntisal, 
311 1  temporal,  033-398 ;  rel.  clauses  In 
Ind,  dise.,  340;  position  of  rel.  clause, 
345. 1.  (Note  on  origin  and  olassllica- 
tlon,  p.  339.) 

Kclalive  pronouns,  dec!..  103 ;  forms  how 
distinguished  fi^m  interrogative  and 
Indof..  104.0;  compounds  of,  105 ;  rela- 
tivesasconnectives,  180./  .^j«/<u.i9S- 
301;  rules  of  agreement,  198. 1991  w. 
Iwo  antecedents,  198.0;  rel.  in  agree- 
ment w,  appos.,  etc.,  199:  use  of  the 
antecedent,  aoo;  ipeciai  uses  of  rel. 


nil.  In  L 
verb  agreeing  w.,  004.  a;  ab 
after  conip.,  347.  a.  N. ;  positlo 
Note  on,  p.  186. 
reUnQoitur  ut,  333.  a. 
reJiQuuia  est  ut,  331.  <i. 
'tqaua,  ase,  193 ;  r«llquV  u 


s-of 


Remembering,  vbs,  o£  e 

in£,;z7i. 
Reminding,  vbs,  of.  consir.,  319.  c. 
Removing,  vbs.  of,  «,  abl.,  343.  a. 
[r8n],decl..s4.3. 
repetundBiruin.  tji.  a. 
Repeated  aciion  as  general  con; 

309-  *■ 
RtptaatHlalia,  376.  i  K.;  in  ind.  di 

336-  B.  a. 
Requesting,  vbs.  of,  consir..  330.  a. 
requlfia,  deel.,  p.  41.  fooi-o.  i ;  78.  1 
r6B.  decl.,  71. 

Resisting,  vbs.  of,  constr,  317,  319.  A 
Resolution  of  syllables  in  Prosody.  357. 
,  coostr.  (sobjuna  ~ 


int.),  3 


withu 


roBtie,  decl. 

Restriction  in  subJunctivB  clause,  330. 

Result,  clauses  oi,  180,  e,  p.  343;  se- 
quence of  tenses  in,  387.  c;  infie.  of, 
373.  g.  Subjunctive  witli  relatives  01 
ut,  319;  negative  result  with  ut  &C11. 
etc..  ill.  a,  d.  iu ;  result-clause  equiva- 
lent to  proviso.  Id.  t;  with  quOml- 
nus,  id.  c\  with  Qulo,  Id.  d;  o( 
characteristic,  330;   with  expressions 


I 


id.  a 


with  Qdub  and  eOlus,  id.  i\ 
comparatives,  id.<;;  wilhcUgrmxa, 
id.  /.    Subst.  clauses  of  result  aftei 
faclfl,  etc.,  33a;  as  subject,  id. 
quam.id.j;  in etclamatory  quest 
id.  c;   tantum   e,t>est   ul    " 
thought  as  result,  \i./. 

Result,  ivouns,  denoting,  163.  e. 

rfite,  decl..  57.  a. 

rSx,  decl.,  46. 

Rhetorical  questioni  In  ind.  disi 

rhtls,  decl..  67,  a. 

Rhythm,  development  of.  Note,  p. 
nature  of,  355. 

Rhythmical  reoding,  359. ». 

rt-,  adj.-stem5  in,  84.  a. 

rttO,  abL  of  manner.  348.  R, 

rivMlB,  decL,S7.*. 

Rivers,  names  o^  gender,  39.  i  and  a. 

ro-slems,  decl.  11..  38:  adj.-stems,  83. 


1 


^B                            Index  of  Words  and  Subjects.                     479  '^^H 

Kftoman  writers,  Appendix,  p.  439. 

Saying,  verbs  of,  constr,.  330 ;  in  passive, 

KKomance  (gr  Romanic)  languages,  Ap- 

id.  a.  i.  336. 

■       pendii,  p.  437 ;  eomparalive  forms,  id. 

BC  preceding  stem-vowel  of  verb,  113. 

Root,  deBnod.aa,  iS7:orvbs..  117.1,  N. ; 

*.  I. 

flcaber,  deel.,  82.  c. 

Scanning,  359.  *,  356.  N. 

of  rools  lost  in  Lat.  aa.  N.:  root  used 

acillcet,  derivation,  148.  N.  ». 

H       as  stem,  123.  i,  /  158 ;  as  word,  p.  163. 

Bclii,  contracted  form  for  aclans,  13,  c. 

K«Bb,  deeL,  77.  6. 

SclpladgB,  37. 

Kiv,  as  stem  ending,  48.  '. 

8ClO,  imperative  ol.  269,  i. 

V^.  nouns  in,  67.  d. 

sciscO,  e.instr.,  331. 

»  W-,  stems  in,  deel.,  87.  b. 

setts,  BCltSte,  imperative  forms,  128.  c. 

ruber,  decL,  Ba.  c. 

369.*. 

rOri,  locative,  6a,  258,  d. 

-ecO  (inceptive],  verbs  ending  In,  167.  s. 

rOB,  67.  K  77.  6.  a;  constr,  358.  4,  *,  d. 

sorobs,  deel..  54. 2. 

eS-  or  afid-,  insepar.  prefix,  170.  6. 

■     8  changed  10  r.  1 1.  a.  i ;  p.  a6,  foot.-n.  3 ; 

ae,  reflexive,  ded.,  98.  a.  b;   use,  196; 

k     substituted  for  d  or  1. 11.  0.  a ;  8  final 

Inter  aS,  99.  d. 

■     elided,  II.  i(.  3:  -e  as  sign  of  nam.,  39. 

P    t,  ^^.  iA,  T^  85-  ft""-"-  p.  »s;  -a 

pres.  stem, bow  fonned,  133.  a;  forma- 

■        omitted    in    inscriptions,   38.   N.;    -B, 

tion  of  conj.  II.,  1=6.  b;   paradigm,  p. 

noun-ending.  decL  III.,  gend.,  65.  b; 

Second  Declension,  nonns,  38-43;  accent 

in  early  Lat.,  375.  a. 

of  gen.  and  voc  of  nouns  in  -iua,  19.  d,  a. 

B-  as  stem-ending,  48.  d,  60.  d:    p.  4.1, 

Secondary  accent,  19.  b.  N. 

foot-n.  I ;  of  adjs.,  85.  6.  N. ;  of  com- 

Secondary object,  339,  a. 

paratives,    86.  a;    appareni    a-stcms. 

Secondary  suffixes,  defined.  139. 

p.  a6,  (ool-n.  s. 

Secondary  lenses,  285;    rule  ^r  use  ol. 

B  as  sufBi  of  perfect,  114.  *;  list  of  vbs. 

2B6 ;   pert  def.   more  commonly  sec- 

ofconj.m.w.pert.inB,i32.fl. 

ondary,  287.  a ;  perf.  subj.  in  clauses  of 

safer,  deel.,  Ba.  c\  comp.,  91.  d. 

result  used  after.  2B7.  c;  hist,  pres.,  id. 

t:  imperf.  and  pluperf.  subj,.  id.  /  f. 

aftl,decl..77.6. 

present  used  as  if  secondary,  by  syiuiis, 

SalomiB,  dec]..  63.  a. 

id.  A. 

aalQbor,  deel.,  84.  0. 

Beoundum,  132.  0;  prep,  use,  153.              ^H 

Balvfl,  defective,  144./ 

BecQrlB,  deel.,  56.  6,  57.  a.                               ^M 

B&ne  Quam,  334.  *. 

Becus,  indecl.  noun,  77.  i ;  use,  240.  *.        ^H 

BaBffUis,  deel..  (r;.  b. 

aecua  (adv.),  comp.,  9a.                             ^H 

Sanskrit  forms,  see  notes,  pp.  14,  26,  Si, 

eecQtUB  (as  pres.  part.),  390.  6.                 ^^| 

B3,  433.  434- 

Bed-,  see  a6-.                                                     ^M 

Bapleos,  dec!.,  57.  b. 

Bed  compared  with  verum,  etc,  156.  i.      ^H 

Sapphic  verae,  371.6.7. 

aedes,  deel.,  59.                                          ^M 

Batagffi,  with  gen.,  233. 

eedne,  deel.,  52.                                         ^H 

satl&a,  deel.,  p.  41.  fbot-a.  i. 

Selling,  vbs.  of,  252.  d.                                ^H 

eementta,  dec].,  56.  i,  57.  i.                     ^H 

dat.,  227.  i;  nOn  sailB,  93.  i;  com- 

Semi-deponenis, 136.                                    ^^ 

pounds    of,  w.    dal..   207.    e;    aatlB 

eeb  (satlB  habeS),  uith  per^.  inlin.. 

Semi-vowels,  land  T(u),  4. 

aenatl,  seoKtuoa,  forms  of  gen.  In 

Bat Vtr,  genitive  of,  41.  b;    deel.,  8a,  b\ 

deel.  IV.,  70. 

comp.,  91.  d. 

Beme-x,dec\„to.  c.fev. -i*Lvwa&>i-,'««'-V^^_ 

Sularmm  vaae,  374.  0. 

\      com^a.ruran.s^-'^-                                  ^^H 

48o 


Index  of  Words  and  Subjects. 


bSds,  03  participle  of  esae,  tig.  a. 
Sentence,  deifelopment,  p,  163;    defined, 

171;  simple  or  compound.  180  (com- 
pare Nole,  p.  339)  ;  incomplete,  ac*. 
aentla,  decl.,  77. 7. 
Separation,  dat,  of,  after  comps,  of  ab, 

d$,  ex,  and  after  adi^S,  sag:  ah\., 

343 ;  gen.  for  abL,  323.  i.  3,  243.  /  K. 
Sequeneeoflenses,  385-237;  inind.disc., 

336.  B.;   in  conditional  aenlencei,  in 

ind.  disc,  337.  i. 
sequester,  decl.,  7S.  1. 1. 
sequitiir,  with  ut,  333.  a. 
aequor,  conj.,  135. 
aSrft  nocte,  193.  N. 
aeriea,  decl.,  7+.  d. 
Service,  adjs.  of,  w,  diL,  334.  a. 
Service,  diL  of,  333.  a.  with  tbot-n. 
Serving,  verbs  of,  uilh  dal..  337. 
serruB  (eervoe),  decl.,  33. 
aSstertium,  BSeteittua,  377-379 ;  how 

wrilien  in  cipher,  380. 
Beu(alvo),is6.ir,3rs.£. 
Sharing,  adjs.  of.  with  gen.,  ai8.  a, 
Shavld  (auiUlar]'),  how  expressed  in  Lai,, 

Ml.  *.  N. 
Showing,  verbs  of,  with  two  aces.,  339.  a. 
-A,  perfect  ending,  118.  N. 
bI,  p.3Kii  w.  subj.  of  wish,s67.  #.  N.  i;  A 

and  its  compounds,  use,  304. 0,  N.,  315 ; 

A  nSa  distinguished  bom  nlal,  315. 

a ;  al  ^  ahtlhtr,  334.  /;   miror  al, 

333-  "■ 
Sibilants,  3. 
Blc.correLwithut,  107,319.  R.;  with  Bl, 

304,  i, 
siem  (Bim),  119.  b. 
Significant  endiogs,  161-164. 
aUentlS.  without  preposition,  24S.  R. 
-alila,  adj.-ending,  164.  n. 
BilTBBter,  decl.,  S4.  a. 
-aim,  old  form  of  pert  subj.,  laS.  e.  3. 


dat,  234.  d.  a. 
almlllter,  use,  33 
I..fi4- 


,  iflo. 


Simple  ! 

almul  with  abl,,  aor.  », 

elmul,  Blmul  atque  (So),  334. 
Blmiil .  ,  .  slmul.  3o8.  d. 

oinAfiJ,  indecL,  67.  a. 
L      '^aht,  nouns  defect,  ia,  77. 5. 


SbigiUaria  latUuri,  75. 
BlnlBter,  dect.,  Sa.  a. 
BiniS,  cotistr,,  331.  c. 
•BiS,  noun-ending,  163.  t, 
Eiqula,  tied.,  105.  d. 
-BiB-,  dropped  in  perf.,  Ia8,  i, 
sltis,  decl,  5a,  cf.  56.  a. 
Situation  or  direction.  335.  *. 
bIvo  (bou)  , . .  Mve,  use,  156. 


-sS,  old  form  of  fuL  perfect.  laS. 

BSdSs  (al  audSB).  13.  c,  136.  a 
bOI,  decl.,  77.  6, 
BoleS,  semi-dep.,  136. 
BolltS,  with  comp.,  247,  i. 

aSluB,   dsci.,   83;    with   relative 


SSracte,  decl.,  57.  d. 
aordom.  delect.,  77.  5. 
Source,  expresKd  by  abl.,  044. 
-sSria,  noun-ending,  1&4, 1.  4 ; 

adj-ending,  id.  ^ ;  .sOrlnlQ,  n 

ing,  id.  i.  s. 
Soapita..  fem.  adj.  form,  85.  <:, 


Soun 


e  Pron 


of,  expressed  by  &(%,■ 
Sparing,  verbs  of,  with  dac,  337, 
8i>6,  with  comp.,  347.  i. 
Special  verb-forms,  133. 
speciSs,  decl.,  74.  d. 
SpecificaliDu.  gen.  of,  with  adjs., 

aec.  of,  240.  c ;  ab).  of,  353. 
apecua,  gend.,  6g.  a. 
Spelling,  variations  o^  13. 
apea,  decL,  7a,  N.,  p.  41.  fool-o.  &  3 


127- 

!S [em-building,  aa.  I 
6t5.  w.  ablative,  35; 
Btrig-lllS,  decl.,  57. 
Btrix,  decl.,  54-  a. 

atruSs,  decl.,  59. 
studeS.  w.  dal.,  asj. 
Styx,  decl.,  6j.  i. 
BU&deO,  w.  dat.,  aa?. 
sub,  use,  15a.  r,  153; 

eub-,  in  comp.  w.  adJB..  93. 

verbs,  370.  a.  c,  M. 
EiUbefi,  w.  aec.,  aaS.  a. 
Subjeci,pp.  163,164;  define 

expressed,   173.  174:   mo 

vh.  agrees  w.,  204 ;  Iwo  or 

905 ;   subj.  oirdtted^  2^ ; 

372;  in  indirect  discourse 

tion  of  subject,  343. 
Subject  clauses  (infin.),  370,  330;  (sub- 

junc).  331.  tiead-n. 

a,d. 
Subjt 

914 
Subji 

d  Iranslali 

d;  vowel  of  pres,  subj.,  116.  a.  1, 
i.  I,  c.  I,  d,  p.  120,  Classificaliop  of 
tises,  a6s ;  general  use,  265 ;  hortatory 
sub].,  366;  optative  subj.,  367;  delib- 
jf  subj.,  283-287; 
temporal  clauses,  384;  polenlial  subj., 
311.  a;  subj.  of  modesty,  Id.  i;  subj. 

I       inind,(Usc.,  336;  in  Informal  Ind.  disc, 

I       341;  ofinfegral  part,  341. 

I    BUbOiea,  decl.,  59. 

I   Subordinate  clauses,  defined,  i8a  J;  use, 

[       316-328 :  in  ind,  disc.,  336,  339. 

F    Subordinate  conjunctions,    154.  i.   155. 

Substance,  gea.  of,  314.  e;  abl.  of. 


^f         Sy1labl< 


Index  of   Words  and  Subjects. 


ing,  vbs.  of,  conslr.,  238.  c,  330./ 
rales  for  division  of,  14;  pure 
open,  etc„  id.  d.  i;  long  and  slion,  iS 
Synaresis,  347.  c. 
Sjrnaloapha,  359,  c,  K. 
Synchysis,  344,  k. 
Syncope,  10.  e. 
Synecdoche,  defined,  see  Glossary. 


Synopsis  of  le 


Synlactir 

Syntax,  171-346;    hisiorical    develop- 

menl  of,  N.,  pp.  163,  164;  outline,  p. 

164.      Important  rules  of  !:iyn[ai,  p. 

3Biff. 
Syntaxis  and  parataxis,  p.  164. 

T  changed  to  8,  ii.  a.  a,  135;  t  for  d 
(set.  aput).  la.  e\  t  preceding  stem- 
vowel  of  vb.,  123.  4.  i;  V(B-).  supine 


toedet,  impersonal,  146.  J;  consli.,  aai. 

b-d. 
taster,  decl.,  So.  e. 
Taking  away,  vbs.  of,  sag. 
Talent,  value  o(  sBa. 
tails,  105.  g,  106, 
tallB  ut,  etc.,  319.  R. 
tain,  correL  wilb  quam,  107;  correl.w, 

ut,  319.  H. 
tamen,  156. 1.  k\  as  correlative,  id.  L 
tametal.  concessive  use,  156.  i,  313.  e. 
tamguam,  in  conditional 


%.  id.  R. 


I 


;a/ 


3'4- 

tontum  abeet  ut,  33a.  d. 

tantuB,  .05.^.  106;  tantu 

tar,  primary  suffix,  160.  {. 

-(Ss,  -tlft,  noun-endings,  it 
Tflsle,  verbs  of.  with  ace,  s 
tSt",  as  siem-ending,  54.  3. 


-te  (enclitic),  99.^ 
TeaL-hing.  vbs.  of  (twi 
tegS,  conj.,  p.  9S. 

Temporal  clauses,  d( 


1 

aces.),  a3»i^^^H 


v.poBtquain,ele.,3a4:  w.oum.aas; 
id  prtusquam.  337; 
1,  d3nec,  quoad,  338;   re- 
■j  abl.  absolule,  355.  d. 
numerals,  97.  b\  conjunctlans, 

>st  abire,  298.  V. 


portidpleSj 


clossificBlion,  mnui- 
_  1  of  the  ind.,  id.  fl-c; 
ofthesubj..id.  J- endings.  tiB;  forma- 
tlonof.  iad./j,^i  sycopsisof,  127;  Ind. 
for  Eng.  subjunclive,  364.  6;   of  Ind.. 

Tenses.  ^iCax,  376-183;  classified,  p. 
291;  Present  tense,  376;  Imperieci. 
377:  Future,  37S;  of  Completed  action, 
xjif-Ai. ;  Epistolary  lenses,  aSa ;  of 
subjunctive,  283-385 ;  sequence  rH.  885- 
3S7;  tenses  of  the  infinitive,  a88;  tense 
emphatic,  344.  d.  3;  leases  of  inf.  to 
ind.  disc,  336.  A;  tenses  of  sutjunc^  i> 
ind.  disc,  336.  B;  afieded  by  r^r*- 
imlalia,  id.  a;  in  condition  in  ipd. 
disc,  337.  Notes  on  origin  of  synm, 
pp.  374.  ^i. 


«.  gen., : 


.abl. 


adv.  ending,  148.  *,  c. 
terea,  decl..  87.  a ;  comp..  91.  <^ 
-terlor,  ending,  p.  36.  (bol-n. 
Terminalioru  of  inflection,  meaning  ol 

9o.  i;  open  and  close  affiles,  34.  N 

lerminations  of  nouns,  34;    of  verb; 

Ii3.    (See  Endings.) 
-temuB,  as  adj.-ending.i&|.  f :  as  noun 

terra  mailque,  358.  d, 
terreater,  decl..  84.  a. 
terus.  ending,  p.  56.  fbot-n. 
ibic.  366. 0, 
,>w™  t-EfiBSsed,  !i47. 


\Th,. 


I  Thinking,  vbs. 
int,  173,  330. 

'  d  conjugation,  of  verbs,  ptln,  parts. 
res.  stem,  how  formed,  133.  j; 
1,  133.  i.  laS.  e\  paradigm,  p. 
S,  parad^m.  p.  loo;  list,  p. 
list  of  veibs,  with  principal 
I  parts,  132;  derivation  of  vbs.  in  -uO, 


Index  of  Words  and  Subjects. 
:onstt,  nlth  ace  and 


483   I 


liquid 


13,44-67;   D 


),  51-59;  case  forms.  56; 
peculiar  forms,  60,  61;   Greek  nouns, 
63,  64 ;  rules  of  gender.  65.  66 ;  forms 
of  inflection  classified  by  stems,  67. 
Tliaiigh,  see  Altkougk. 
Tliought.  considered  as  result.  333.  / 
Tbrealening,  »b5.  of,  sar),  ^Jp-f. 

-tia  (-tiSB),  noun-ending,  163.  (, 

-ticuB.  adj.-ending,  164.,^. 

tigrlB,  dec].,  64, 

-tills,  adj.-ending.  164.  m. 

-tlm,  adverbs  in,  56.  a.  3, 14B.  N.  >. 

Time  (see  Temporal  Clauses),  264.  a; 

Time,  advs.  of,  149.  b. 

Time,  duration  of,  356  and  b ;  time  ■mhtn, 
356;  conesponding  to  Eng.^/ate,  259. 
a;  time  during  or  within  which,  w. 
ordinal,  id.  c\  distance  of  time,  id.  d; 
abl.  abs.  lo  denote  time,  355.  and  d.  i. 

Time,  mode  of  reckoning,  p.42S. 

tlmeO,  w.  dat.,  or  ace.  337.  c ;  with  sub- 
junctive, 331./ 

•tlmua,  adj.-ending,  p.  s6,faot-n.;  164.  f. 

-tlS,  noun-ending,  i6a,  b,  163.  b. 

-tl8  (-818).  -ttSra.,-tQa  (-tfltiB),  noun- 
endings,  163.  b. 

-tium,  noun-ending,  163./ 

-tiTUB,  verbal  adj.-ending,  164.  /. 

--tB,-ltO,  frequentative  verbs  In,  (67.  b. 

To  [kos  to),  319,  d.  B. 


7.W., 

-top  (-Bor) ,  -trii,  nouns  of  agoncj  in. 

163.  a:  used  as  adjs.,  BS.  c.  1B8.  d. 
•itfirift,  noun-ending,  164. 1.  4. 
-WJrium,  noun-ending,  160.  b.  164.  i.  j. 
-tOrlus,  adj.-ending.  160.  b;  as  noun- 
ending,  164,  *. 
tot.  use.  106  and  a. 
totlaom.  use,  106.  a. 


tOtuB,  dec!.,  83;  nouns  w.,  in  abl.  wllh- 
oul  ptep.  (fliKe  wheii),  358./  a. 

Towns,  names  of,  gend..  ag,  39. 0 ;  rtames 
of  towns  in  -e,  decL,  57.  d\  locative  et, 
353.  f.  3;  as  place  fiam  which,  id.  a; 
as  place  to  which,  358.  *. 

tr-,  stems  in  (pater,  e 


trfilciS,  cor 
ISra,  id. 

trans,  153.  , 
ace,  337. 
and  R 


,  160.  0. 


;  liUectua 


;  adjective: 


Trans 
Transi 

use,  175.  *.  U. ! 


114.0. 


'owel  and  liquid,  g.  4  j 


tp6B,  decL  94.  c. 

trl-,  stem-ending  of  nouf 

of  adjs,,  84.  a. 
Tribe,  abl.  of,  344.  *.  K. 
Tribrach,  356.  a. 
tribQllB,   decl.,  57.  i. 
tribus.  gend.,  69.  a;  decl 
tiidSns.  tied.,  57.  *. 
Trimeier.  Iambic,  365. 
Tripioies,  77.  4. 
trtrSmla,  decl.,  57.  b. 
•trls,  adj.-ending,  164.  i. 
trlumptiO,  w.  abl.,  245.  a 
-trfi.  see  -tor. 


Trochee,  356.  a ;  irrational,  id.  N.,  369, 
-tnim,  noun-ending,  163.  d. 
Trusting,  vbs.  of,  constr.,  237. 

t<l[  decl.,  93.  1  (see  tOte,  tQtimet). 
-to,  -bQ.  supine-endings,  114.  *. 
-tadO.  -tOB.  noun-endings,  163.  t. 
tml  (tetull).  139;  derivation,  id.,  fbob 

n. ;  quantity.  351.  b.  Ex. 
-turn,  -Bum,  supine  endings,  114.  3. 
turn,  tUDO,  use.i49.f;  correl.w.oiun, 

107,  156  *. 
turn  .  .  .  turn,  aoS.  d. 
-tfirB,  -tna.  noun^nding,  163.  A 
-turlO.  vbs.  in.  ^St],  t. 
tuttto,  4tc\-  ^1  VkX-<}i.*\- 


^m      484                   Index  of  Words  and  Subjects.                  ^^H 

-urlS,  desiderative  verbs  in.  167.  t. 

■              7>.163... 

-urnuB.  adj. -ending,  164.  *. 

H         -tue,  adv.-etiding.  14S.  n.  ... 

-Oros.  tuL  pari,  in,  itj.  *,  293;  w.  tul. 

H          tas  (thOo).  decL,  77.  6. 

H         tuasla.  d™1..56.a. 

a  \  -QraA  miaae,  in  ind.  disc..  337.  i. 

H           tatO,99./;  tfltlmet,  99./ 

■Ufl,nom.-ending.decLII..a8,39;  -uflfor 

■           Two  accusatives,  339. 

-er  in  Gr.  nouns,  decl.  II.,  43.  b;  -oa 

^1           Th'o  datives,  ^3.  d. 

nom.-endingindecl.IIL.48.  rf;  gend., 

■ 

6s.  c,  67.  *;  decL  IV.,  68;  gend..  69; 

^B          D  (t)  ,  ^  consonant.  4 ;  afler  d,  ff ,  s.  4. 

^1             N.  3 ;  noi  10  follow  u  or  V,  7 :  u  fur  a 

-OS,  Gr.  uom.-ending,  63.  t;  -Ob.  -fldle. 

■             inconj.  III,.  I96.C.I. 

67.  d;  .Ob.  -OtlB.  id.                          ^^ 

^B          U.  primary  auffii.  160.  c.  I. 

Use.  adjs,  of,  constr..  834.  #.             ^^M 

H          u-stetns,  of  nouns,  decl.  III.,  60.0.61; 

ueQUELin.  use,  105.  h.                     ^^^H 

H              d«l  IV..  63;  of  verbs,  p.  S6,  123.  d. 

UBQue,  w.  ace,  961.  a.                      ^^^H 

W              166.  a.  3.  <:■ 

OSUB  (mtd).  w.  abl..  243. 1.              4^H 

liber,  decl.,  85.  *,  87.  f. 

utd,  derivHiioo.  148.  N.  a ;  in  temporal 

to  denote  concesson,  11S6.  c,  313.  a ;  w. 

clauses,  333,  334. 

optative  subjunc,  367.  i ;  in  clauses  of 

ublubl.  loj.  *. 

purp.,  317;  of  result,  319;  Tit  na,id.fl; 

-ubus,  in  dat.  and  abl.  pL,  decl.  IV., 70.  d. 

331. «,  I.  N, :  iitn0n,elc.,3i9.if.R.;  ut 

-Ul8  (-UOB),  In  gen.,  decl.  IV.,  68.  H., 

■70.  fl. 

clauses  w,  ut,  331, 33a ;  omission  alter 

-ails,  adj.-i;nding,  164.  d. 

certain  verbs,  331.  /  It.,  ^  N.  i  and  a; 

flllUB,  decl.,  B3 :  use,  105.  i,  203.  t,  c. 

w.  verbs  of  fearing,  331.  /  and  foot-n. ; 

Olterlor,  comparison.  91.  a. 

nitril,i5a.fl:  use,  153;  following  noun. 

Ut.  utpote,  quippe.  w.  relative  clause. 

»63.N. 

320.  r.  N.  1 ;  w.  Ctinl,  3=6.  N,  1. 

Ut  pritnum ,  324, 

adj.-endlnE,  id.  1. 

ut  somel,  384. 

-am  for  ^rum,  36.  d;  lot  -6rum,  40. 

uter,  Interrog.  and  indef.  pron.,  io4.f. 

*;  -Qm  in  gen.  pl-  "i  persona]  prons., 

ater,  decl.,  ji.  *.  54.  i,  88.  a. 

194.*;  -Urn  for  -ium.  decl.  III.,  59: 

Uterque,  form  and  decl.,  loj.  ; ;  use. 

in  gen.  pi.  of  Qdjs.,  S7.  d\  for -uum, 

aoi  d;    constr.  in  agreement  and  as 

decl.  IV.,  6B.  N.,  70.  c. 

utorvto,  use.  aa2.  c. 

435- 

utl,  utlaam,  w.  sub;,  of  wish.  067.  i. 

atlllB.  w.  dat.  of  gerund,  etc.,  199.  IboMi. 

Unorganiied  forms  of  enptession,  p.  163 

utpote  qt^,  320.  *.  N.  1.                      **  fl 

and  tbot-n. 

ator,  etc.,  w.  abl.,  349:  w.  >cc.  iib,4faj 

unquam,  use,  105,  h. 

gerundive  use  of,  394.  <:.  N,  agt  ''•H^M 

flat-,  slem-cnding.  63,  e. 

utrum  .  .  .  an.aiiand<l              -^H 

QnuB,  ded.,83;  meaning,  94.  0,  95.  *. 

utd,  constr.,  312.  and  R.                    ^^H 

llnue  q<Sl,  w,  £ubj.,  330.  i. 

-iltOS,  adj.-ending,  164./                      ^^H 

QnuB  qulsquo,  decL,  105.  / ;  use,  aoi  rf. 

utut.  105.  i.                                       I^H 

uo,  suffix,  see  va. 

-UUS.  rare  nom.-ending,  decl  IV..  «JBH 

-uO,  vb3.  in,  166.  c. 

70.  i :  verbal  adj.-ending,  164.  i,       --'    ^ 

-uos,  see  -UlS. 

-ui  (-Or),  nouns  in,  67.'. 

-ur.  nouns  in.  63.  (;  -Or.  -firla.  67.  *; 

-ttr,  -arlH.  -Qr,  -arlB,  id. 

V  (ul,  p.  3;  4,  7;  omitted.  «.  *.  a;  ia 

—Oft  ded..  54 :  use  in  Klaxons  otplace. 

tenuis,  16.  N.;  suflix  of  pert,  IBf.^ 

^^^^Krbs.  of,  withut,  331.                \    p««eim'e^'A.,i&.o.-,-*».A;||^™ 

m' 

4 

■                           /fidex  of  Words  and  Subjects.                   485! 

conj.  III.  w.  V  in  pert.,  13a.  c\  V  ofien 

336;  passive  use  of,  272.  R..  330.  a-e; 

om.   in   peri',  of  eS   and  it*  comps.. 

in  poets  and  later  writers,  id.  d. 

141.*:  Vbysyn  atresia,  347.  t. 

Verbal  nouns  wilh  dal.,  227.  d. 

TB.  primary  suf&i,  160.  ». 

Verbal   nouns  and  adjs.  wilh  refleiiv(^ 

vafer.decL,  to.  e\  comp.,  91.  A 

196.  i 

TsJde.  use,  93.  rf;  valdS  quam,  334,  *. 

Verbal  adjectives,  164.  l-p\  in  -fti.wUh 

Value,  gen.  of  indefinite,  252.  a. 

gen.,  218.  b. 

Value,  measures  of;  377-3B0. 

Verbal  roots.  157.  t. 

Tannua,  gend.,  39.  a. 

vereor.  with  gen.,  333. 6.1\  w.  subjuBc 

vfipulO,  neutral  passive,  136.  4. 

33t-/ 

Variable  nouns,  78.  79  (cf.  74.*:  p.  4r. 

verituB.  as  pres.  part.,  390.  h. 

fbot-n.  1). 

ver5. 156.  4,  k;  in  answers,  aia.  a;  post- 

Variations,  see  Phonetic  Variations  iind 

.ion  of,  343.  4. 

Inherited  Differences. 

Verse.  359. 

Variations  of  spelling,  13. 

Versification,  359-375;  forms  of  verS(^ 

tRs,  deoL.  77-  6. 

350. 

vBs,  decl..  60.  d\  7S.  I.  6. 

versus,  position  of,  345.  0. 

vRtS8,  decl.,  59. 

verta,  constr.,  252.  c. 

-ve,  vel,  use,  156.  c,  aia.  r. 

Vei^l,  gend.,  69.  i ;  decl.,  70.  d. 

vel  {see  -ve),  w.  superL.  93.  *. 

vorum  or  Verfi,  use,  156.  *,  A 

voacor,  with  abl.,  249;   w.  ace,  id.  i\ 

vellm,  vellem.  w.  subjunc.  (=opi.). 

gerundive,  294.  c.  N.,  396.  R. 

267.<:(=imv.),s69.i'. 

veaper,  decl.,  4t.  b. 

Tellem,  see  vellm. 

vesperi  (loc.),4j.*.2s8.rf. 

velutl,  velutel.  31a. 

vester.  decl.,  82.  c  (see  p.  64). 

vSaeQ  (venuin  eS).  136.  b,  258.  b,  e. 

vesEil  as  obj.  gen.,  99.  c,  194.  i.                  1 

renum,  defect.,  77. 3  {ct  vSnoO). 

veetrtlm  as  part,  gen.,  99.  b.  194.  *,  cI  N. 

TSaemt  =  aderat,  279.  e. 

vet3,  w.  ace.  and  inf..  271.  h.  330.  a,  and 

\ mm.  Etymology.    Verb,  defined,  25.  li ; 

inflection.    loB-iia;    noun  and   adj. 

vetUB,  decl.,  85.  *,  87.  e;  comparison. 

forms  of,  109:   signiEcadon,  of  forms. 

89.  0.  91.  d.                                                   1 

111-115;  personal  endings,  116;  forms 

-VI  in  perfect,  118.  N. 

of  the  verb,  117. 118  (note  on  origin 

via,  abL  of  manner.  24S.  K. 

and  hist  of  vb.-forms,  pp.  119-izi) ; 

vioifl.  decl.  77.  7. 

_           table  of  endings,  118 :  the  three  stems. 

Vicem,  adverbial  use  of.  240.  *. 

^L       lai  i  InSuence  of  analogy,  121.  N,  2 , 

vlclnuB,  with  gen..  21B.  d. 

H       n^larverbs,  I2!!-I36;  the  fbutconju- 

H       gatlons.  laa  and  a ;  prln.  parts  0^  122.  i. 

video  ut.  331. 

vldeor,  with  dat.  232.  c. 

H        lemi-deponeats,  136;   frrqpilar  verbs, 

vin  (TlaQ»),i3.  e. 

H         137-143;    defective,    143,    144;   imper- 

vlr.  decl..  3a.  41. 4. 

■         sonal,   145.   i4-.    periphrastic  forms, 

vlr^S.  decU  4* 

W         147;  compound  verbs,  170;  vowels  in 

viruB,  gender  of,  39.  4. 

■           comp.  verba,  17a  a.  N.     Derivation  of 

vis,  stem.  54.2;  decl..  61. 

verbs.  163-167. 

viscera,  79.  ^ 

Verbs.  Syitlax.    Subject  implied  in  end- 

vlaS,  167. 1. 

'"Br  174-  a;  rules  of  agreemenl,  214- 

vocailB,  decl.,  37.  b. 

ao6:Terbnmitled,si)6.i-;  rules  ofSyn- 

Vocative,  31.  e;  form.  33.  0. 3;  in  -I  of 

tax.  264-342.     Cases  w.  vbs..  see  under 

nouns  in  -lUB,  ded.  11.,  40.  e,  rf;    ot 

Accusative,  etc.     Position  of  verb,  343, 

sdjs.  in  -lus.  Si.  a;  of  Greek  nouns. 

344-'',/    (See  under  the  names  of  the 

43.  h.     SyHtai,  241. 

Moods.  e(c) 

Voices,  108.  a,  wv,  iiAM!*  >ia\ER,,Vi.  1 

■       ftria  seniitnin  et  dUlaranSi,  37a,  530, 

lva.S.,\-iV«' 

4S6 


Index  of  Words  and  Subjects. 


comps.,  con].,  13S;  w,  hifin,, 
.[  part  of, as  dal.  of  reference. 
; ;  w.  pcrC  part..  i83.  d  and  H.,  399. 
1  w.  EubJ.  or  inf.,  331.  i  and  N. 
Tolucer,  decL,  S4.  a. 
volucrlH,  decl.,  ^. 
-volua,  adj.  in,  comparison,  89.  t. 

vBtJ  daJnnfttUB,  230.  a. 

Vowels,  I :  long  and  short,  how  marked, 
5;  vowels  and  consonants  tbnn  icale, 
id.  N.;  inherited  difTerencei  in.g;  eon- 
traction,  10.  i  \  syncope,  id.  e ;  insei^ 
tion,  id.  d;  shortening,  id.  t;  dissimi- 
lation, II.  t;  pronunciation,  16,  17; 
long  and  short,  iS;  quand^  of  Biial 
vomrels  in  case-endings,  33.  g;  vowel 
modiSed  In  nouD-slcms,  decl.  III.,  45; 
lengthened  in  root,  133.  c.  i,  ia(.  d, 
15B.  *,  and  N. ;  list  of  vba.  w.  vowel- 
lengthening  in  perf,  eoa].  III.,  133.  r. 


s,  la6,  a 


inges,  I 
Vowel-roots  of  ve 
Vowel-sufllies  (p 
Vowel-stems,  dccL  III.,  S'"59i 

163  and  foot-n, 
VlllBTUS  (TOlerUfl),  gend.,  39.  *. 
-TUB,  verbal  adj.-ending,  164.  /. 

W,  not  in  Latin  alphabet,  p.  i. 
Want, words  of,  with  abl.,  04.3;  will 
aaa.  "43-/ 


Way  by  which  (abl.),  358,/-. 

Weight,  roeasurei  of,  38a. 

Whole,  gen.  of,  B16;  numbers  expressing 

the  whole,  216.  e. 
Willi,  tut.  imv,  in,  369.  d.  3. 
Winds,  gender  of  names  of,  99. 
Wish,   expressed    by  subj..  267;   as  a 

condition,  3ro,    A;    wish   in  Informal 

ind.  disc,  341.  f. 
Wishing,  Tcrbs  o^  with  in£,  aSa.  d  (tl 

37E.  a) ;   with  subsl.  clause  of  purp., 

317.  d,  331,  i;  with  ace  and  infin., 

330-  3.  33'-  A 
Wil&BHl,  with  verbal  noun,  993.  H.  i. 
Women,  names  of,  80.  c. 
Words,  formation  of,  157-170 ;  arrange- 

menl  of,  3')3-346. 
Would  (Eng.  auxiliary),  how  expressed 


ya  (primary  suffii),  160.  n. 
Year,  p.  435;    months  of,  pp.  435.  436; 
date,  059. 1,  276. 


,  of  Gredc  origin,  p^  I,  6.  H. 


ABBREVIATIONS 


USED  IN  CITING  AUTHORS  AND  THEIR  WORKS. 


Appuleius: 
Met,  Metamorphoses, 

Caesar: 
B.  C,  Bellum  Civile, 
B.  G.,  Bellum  Gallicum. 

B.  Afr.,  Bellum  Africa- 
num, 

Cato: 
R.  R.,  De  Re  RusHca. 

Catull.,  Catullus. 

Cic,  Cicero : 
Ac,  Acad.,  Academica, 
Arch.,  pro  Archia, 
Att.,  ad  Atticwn, 
Caec,  pro  Caecina, 
Cael.,  pro  M.  Caelio. 
Cat.,  in  Catilinam, 
C\\i,^pro  Cluentio, 

C,  M.,  Cat.  Maj.,  Calo 
Major, 

Inv.,  de  Jnventione. 
Deiot,  pro  Deiotaro. 
De  Or.,  de  Oratore. 
Div.,  de  Divinatione. 
Caecil.,  Divinatio  in  Cae- 

cilium, 
Fam.,  ad  Familiares, 
Fat.,  de  Fato. 
Fin.,  de  Finibus, 
Flac,  pro  Flacco, 
Font.,  pro  M.  Fonteio, 
Ad,  Her.,    [ad   Heren- 

nium^ 
Inv.  R.y   de    Inventione 

Rheiorica. 
Lael.,  Laelius  {de  Ami- 

citia), 
Legg-.  ^  Le^ihts. 
Leg.  Agr.,  de  Lege  Agra- 

ria. 


Lig.,  pro  Ltgario, 

Manil.,/r^  Lege  Manilla, 

Marc,  pro  Marcello. 

Mil.,  pro  Milone, 

Mur.,  pro  Murena, 

N.  D.,  de  Natura  Deo- 
rum. 

Off.,  de  Officiis, 

Or.,  Orator, 

Par.,  Paradoxa, 

Part.  Or.,  ^<tf  Partitione 
Oratoria, 

Phil.,  Philippicae, 

Plane,  /rtf  Plancio, 

Pis., ««  Pisonem, 

Quinct,  /r<7  Quinctio, 

Q.  Fr.,  <w?  ^.  Fratrem, 

Rabir.,/rtf  Rabirio. 

Rep.,  ^  Republica, 

Rose.  Am.,  /r^  Roscio 
Amerino, 

Rose.  Com.,  /r^  Roscio 
Comoedo, 

Sest,  /rtf  Sestio, 

Sulla,  //-<?  5«//fl. 

Top.,  Ti^iVfl. 

Tusc,   Tusculanae  LHs- 
putationes, 

Univ.,  <jfe  Uhiverso. 

Vatin.,  in  Vatinium. 

Verr.,  ii«  Verrem, 
Ejin.,  Ennius. 
Gell.,  A.  Gellius. 
Hor.,  Horace : 

A.  P.,  De  Arte  Poetica, 

£p.,  Epistulae, 

Epod.,  Epodes, 

Od.,  Odes, 

Sat.,  Satires, 
Juv.,  Juvenal. 


Liv,,  Livy, 
Lucr.,  Lucretius. 
Mart.,  Martial. 
Nepos. 
Ov.,  Ovid : 

F.,  FasH, 

M.,  Metamorphoses, 

Epist  ex  P.,  Epistulae  ex 
Ponto, 

Trist,  Tristia, 
Pers.,  Persius. 
Phaed.,  Phaedrus. 
Plant,  Plautus. 

Am.,  Amphitruo, 

Asin.,  Asinaria, 

Aul.,  Aulularia. 

Bac,  Bacchides, 

Capt,  Captivi. 

Cist,  Cistellaria. 

Cure,  Curculio, 

Epid.,  Epidicus, 

Merc,  Mercator, 

Mil.,  Jl/i7^J  Gloriosus, 

Most,  Mostellaria. 

Pers.,  Persa, 

Poen.,  Poenulus, 

Ps.,  Pseud.,  Pseudolus, 

Rud.,  Rudens, 

Stich.,  Stichus, 

Tr.,  Trin.,  Trinummus. 

True,  Thtculentus, 
Plin.,  Pliny,  senior : 

H.  N.,  HistoriaNaturalis, 
Plin.,  Pliny,  junior : 

Ep.,  Epistulae, 
Prop.,  Propertius. 
Q.  C,  Q.  Curtius. 
Quint,  Quintilian. 


\ 


488 


Abbreviations  Used. 


Ep.    Mhhrid.,   Epistula 

SU.  It,  Silius  Italicus. 

Mtthrtdatts. 

Suet,  Suetonius. 

Heaut,  Hem^ 

Jug..  Jvgurtha. 

Tac.,  Tacitus: 

memos. 

Sen.,  Seneca: 

Agr.,  Agricola, 

Hec,  Hecyreu 

E^..  Epistulae, 

A.,  Ann.,  Annales. 

Vh^  PManmo, 

Here.  Oct.,  Hercules  Oe- 

H.,  Histartae, 

ViignVirga: 

taeus. 

Ter.,  Terence : 

Mii,,jEsui4L 

Q.  N.,  Quaestiones  NtUu- 

Ad.,  AdelpJU. 

EL,  Eclogue, 

rales. 

And.,  Andria, 

G.,GeorgueL, 

ADVERTISEMENTS. 


n 


n 


j 


ired  maps.        ^^^M 
lalr- 


LATIN   TEXT-BOOKS. 

Allen  &  Greenough's  New  Gcesar. 

Seren  Books.  Illustrated.  With  six  double-page  colored 
Edited  by  Prof.  W.  F.  Allbs,  of  the  Dniveraity  ot  WiBconBiQ,  J,  tt 
AttBN>  ot  Cambridge,  and  H.  P.  Jddson,  Protesaor  of  History,  Uaiver- 
aity  of  Minnesota,  with  a  special  Vooabnlary  by  Prof.  J.  B.  Osebnouqh, 
of  Harvard  College.  ISmo.  xxvi.|-513  page^,  red  edees,  bonnd  in  half- 
morocco.  Mailing  Price,  81.-t6;  lor  intrtxlnction,  SI35;  Allowancefor 
an  old  book  in  eicbange,  40  centa. 

A  TTENTION  is  invited  to  these  features,  which,  with  othe 
merits,  have  gained  thia  edition  an  extraordinary  si 

1.  The  judicioi;s  notea,  —  their  full  grammatical  references, 
crisp,  idiomatic  renderings,  scholarly  interpretations  of  diffictilt 
passages,  clear  treatment  of  indirect  disconrae,  the  helpful  maps, 
diagrams,  and  pictures ;  in  particular,  the  military  notes,  throw- 
ing U);ht  on  the  text,  and  giving  life  and  reality  to  the  niurative.  , 

2.  The  vocabulary,  —  convenient,  oomprehen 
arly,  combining  the  benefits  of  the  full  leaicon  with  the  advantag 
of  the  special  vocabulary,  and  every  way  superior  to  the  ordinarj 
vocabulary. 

3.  The  mechanical  features  of  the  volume,  its  clear  type,  couafl 
venieut  size  and  shape,  superior  paper,  and  attractive  hinding. 

4.  In  genera),  tbis  edition  represents  the  combined  -world 
of  several  specialists  In  different  departmentB,  and  so  ought] 
to  excel  an  edition  edited  by  any  single  scholar. 

The  Notes  on  the  second  hook  have  just  been  rewritten  to  ad^ 
them  for  those  who  begin  Ctesar  with  this  book.    Full  gramm 
cal  references  have  been  given. 


Traoy  Peck,  Pro/,  of  Latin,  Tale 
Cotlene:  Witli  qalte  nnosnal  satis- 
faction I  have  noticed  tbe  beautiful 
paper  and  type ;  the  carefally  edited 
text;  the  truly  helpful  notes,  which 
neitlier  tend  to  deaden  enthusiastn 
with  BupertlnouBgiamiuar.uor  hlink 
real  diScuItiea;  the  very  valuable 
illusCratlonB  and  remarks  on  the 
Roman  military  art ;  and  the  schol' 
arly  and  stimulating  vocabolary. 

Tohn  TetlDw,  FHn.  of  Glrlt'  Hiffh 
und  Latin  SchoaU,  Botton .-  The 
clear    type,    judicious    annotation. 


oopions  pictorial  illustration,  full 
explanation  of  terms  and  usages  be- 
longing to  the  military  art,  and  ex- 
cellent Tocabnlary,  combine  to  make 
this  edition  easily  first  among  the 
school  editions  of  CiBsar, 

G,  W.  Bhurtleff,  Prof,  if  Latin, 
Oberlia  {Ohio)  College:  I  do  not 
heaitato  to  pronoDaee  it  the  best  edi- 
tion I  have  ever  seen. 

J.  L.  Lampion,  Teacher  of  Latin, 
Stiitt  Kormal  Cotiese,  Kathville, 
Tean.:  It  ts  the  best  Ctesar  pab- 
Ushed. 


LATIN    TEXT-BOOKS, 


1 


Allen  &  Greenough's  New  Cicero. 

Thirteen  Orations.  Illuslroted. 
Edifd  by  Prof.  W.  F.  Allbn.  of  tlie  University  of  Wlsconain,  J.  H. 
Aj.i.EK,  di  Cambridge,  and  Prof.  J.  B.  GBBBMOitou,  of  Harvard  Univer- 
Bli.y.  With  a  special  Tdcabulary  by  Professor  Greenangb.  12mo.  Half- 
morocco.  zii+6T0  pages.  Mculmg  Price,  £1.40;  for  mtroducUao,  SIJS; 
Allowance  for  an  old  book  in  otobange,  40  cents. 

rpHIS  editiou  includes  thirteen  orations  airoitged  cbronologi- 
callj,  and  covering  the  entire  public  life  of  Cicero.  The  intro- 
ductions connect  the  orations,  and,  with  them,  supply  a  complete 
hiBtorical  study  of  this  most  interesting  and  eventful  period.  The 
Life  of  Cicero,  List  of  his  Writings,  and  Chronological  Table  will 
be  found  of  great  value.  The  oratioiis  are  ;  Defence  of  Roscius, 
Impeachment  of  Verrea  {The  Plunder  of  Syracuse  and  Crucifixion 
of  a  Roman  Citizen),  The  ManUian  Law,  the  four  orations  against 
Catiline,  For  Archias,  For  Sestiua,  For  Milo,  The  Pardon  of  Jlar- 
cellus.  For  Ligarius,  and  the  Fourteenth  Philippic. 

The  notes  have  been  thoroughlj  rewritten  in  the  light  of  the 
most  recent  investigations  and  the  best  experience  of  the  class- 
room. Topics  of  special  importance,  as,  for  instance,  the  Antitiui- 
ties,  are  given  full  treatment  in  brief  essays  or  excursuses,  printed 
in  small  type.  Eeferenoes  are  given  to  the  grammars  of  Alleu  i 
Greenough,  Gilderaleeve,  and  Harkness. 

this  In  its  praise,  for  I  have-  already 


A.  E.  Ghua,  Prin.  of  High  School, 
Porlland,  Me. :  1  am  full  better 
pleased  with  it  than  with  the  others 
of  the  series,  although  I  thought 
those  the  best  ol  the  kind. 
(Oct.  28, 1886.) 

Alfred  8.  Boe,  Prin.  d/  Hii/h 
School,  Worcester,  Mass.:  It  is  the 
finest  Cicero  I  have  ever  seen,  and  is 
worthy  of  the  very  highest  praise. 

0.  D.  Babinion.  Prin.  of  Bigh 
School.  Aibnn!/,  ^-Y-:  I  &ud  it  a 
worthy  companion,  In  every  way,  ot 
its  two  prodecessors,  the  Tirgll  and 
the  Ctesar.    I  can  say  no  more  than 


John  L.  LampBDii,  Prof,  of  Latin, 
Stale  Normal  College,  XaihvUle, 
Tenn,  :  The  text,  in  appearance  aud 
authority,  is  the  best ;  the  notes, 
ample,  judicious,  modern;  the  vocab- 
ulary is  the  best  school-book  vocab- 
ulary published. 

Xiieiiu  Heritage.  Prof,  of  Latin, 
Univertil]/  of  fViscimiia,  Maditon  : 
It  is  the  best  English  edition  of 
Cicero's  orations  for  the  nse  ot 
schools  that  I  have  seen. 


.^Ilen  &  Greenough's  Cicero.     The  oid  Edition. 


LATIN    TEXT-BOOKS. 


Qreenough's  Virgil. 


■»  Completi 


/CONTAINING    Life   of   the   Poet,   Introductioiis,   a   Synopsis 
precediog  each   Book,  and  an  Indei  of   Plants.      Alao  full 
illufitratioDS  from  ancient  objects  of  art. 

The  text  follows  Ribbeck  in  the  main,  variations  being  noted  in 
the  margin ;  and  the  references  are  to  Allen  &  Greenough's,  Gil- 
deralee?e'3,  and  narkneas'a  Latin  Grammars. 


Trwy  Feok,  Pro/.  0/  Lulin,  Tale 
College :  The  Vocftbulaiy,  both  in 
plan  and  eienution,  is  snpecior  to 
any  schoolhook  vocaijulary  known 

E.  P.  OroweU,  Pro/,  u/  Latin, 
Amherst  Colfeijc:  In  ail  reapects  a 
very  scholarly  and  encellent  edition. 


Jno.  E.  Lord,  Pro/.  0/  Lalin.  Bart' 
mouth  College :  The  best  school  edi- 
tion o{  the  works  ol  Virgil  with  which 
I  am  acquainted. 

F.E.Lord,  Pro/,  of  Latin,  Wellet- 
ley  Calleije:  There  is  an  admirable 
richness  and  appiopriateoess  to  the 


Allen  &  Greenough's  Preparatory  Course  of  Latin 


.    Mailing  Price,  f  1.55;  Introduction,  £1.10;  Allowance  lot  old 


Allen  &  Greenough's  Sallust 


ing  Price,  65  cents;  Introduction,  60  cents. 

Allen  &  Greenough's  De  Senectute. 

Cicero's  rHaloenp  on  Old  Age.  With  Inlroduction  (on  the  adaption  in 
Kome  of  the  Greek  philosophy)  and  Notes.  12ino.  Clotb.  67  pagea 
Mailing  Price,  55  conta;  lotroductiou,  60  centa. 


LATIN    TBXT-DOOKS. 


the  Roibary  LadlS^^I 

Book  and   CoUar't^^^ 


Practical  Latin  Composition. 

Bj  William  C.  Collak,  A.M.,  Head  Master  □ 

Sflhool,  Bfl.iton;  Author  of  The  Bet/inner'a  Latin  Bnok  and  'Coll  _ 
St/tenbiirh.  I2mo.  Cloth,  x  +  268  pages.  Mailing  Price,  Sl.lO;  Intro- 
dnctloD,  81.00. 

"pHE  book  coDsista  of  two  classes  of  exercises,  all  based  on  selec- 
tioua  from  the  Latin  authors  usually  read  in  schools. 
The  first  exercise  of  each  group  contains  easy  sentences  to  be 
turned  into  Latin  orally,  —  sentences  involving  the  use  of  words, 
idioms,  and  constructions  of  the  Latin  text  assigned  for  study  in 
preparation.  The  second  exercise  consists  of  a  short  passage  of  con- 
tinuous English  to  be  written  out  in  Latin,  based  on  the  same  Latin 
text  aa  the  preceiling.  The  book  contains  all  the  selections  upon 
which  the  exercises  are  based.  Notes  and  occasional  gramniati- 
cal  references  accompany  the  exercises,  and  a  carefully  prepared 
vocabulaiy  is  giyen  at  the  end. 


J.  B.  Ontmovgh,  Prof,  of  I^lin, 
Harvard  Ifniveriity :  Latin  Com- 
position is  a  subject  in  which  erery 
teacher  roust  make  his  own  texU 
book,  yst  for  all  who  cannot  do  this 
and  for  the  rest  who  are  glad  of  sog- 
gejtions  or  material,  Mr.  Collar's 
hook  is  Invaluable.  It  bos  the  light 
method  carried  ont  in  the  best  maii- 
ner.  I  coagratolate  the  teacher  or 
the  be;  that  can  have  such  assistance 
in  acquiring  the  gradnally  decaying 
art  oE  Ijitin  CompositiDD. 

Traoy  P«ok,  Prof,  of  Lnlin,  7nte 

College  :  It  is  caose  for  thanks  and 

congratulation  that  Mr,  Collar  has 

done   his   part  to  revive  good  old 

■  Roger  Aacham's  "lively  and  perflte 

H  waie"  o[  teaching  Latin  Composl- 

H  tion.    The  method  of  the  book  is  cer- 

H  tainly  sound  aud  in  accordance  with 

H  nature,  and  Mr.  Collar  has  worked 

H  it    out   with   great    ingenuity  and 

H  attractiveness.     The    editor's    ripe 

H  scholarship  and  experience   in   Che 

^^  school-room  greatly  add  to  the  sclen- 

^K  tific  and  practical  value  of  Che  work. 


Harold  N.  Fowler,  Latin  Inttruo 
(or,  PhUUpt  Academy ,  Exeter,  N.H.  : 
Tlie  book  ought  to  meet  with  a  hearty 
welcome  from  teaeherB  of  I^tln, 

J.  D.  Sewall,  Thayer  Acaidemi/. 
South  Braiidree,  Man. .-  Collar  has 
done  a  fine  thing  In  his  IjLtia  Com- 
position. We  have  giton  It  to  onr 
junior  class  at  once. 

r.  S.  KiUTliDn,  Ciaaieul  Jnstruc- 
tor,  Hartford  Hlph  School:  I  have 
waited  for  it  with  impatience,  and 
have  expected  to  see  the  best  book 
for  this  pnrpi^  in  the  English  lan- 
guage. I  am  more  than  pleased  witli 
it,  and  my  expectations  are  fully 
warranted. 

;.  H.  Sirklutd,  Pro/,  of  Latin, 
Vandcrbilt  Unlrertity.  SaihviUe, 
Tenn. :  I  am  delighted  with  It.  It 
forms  a  fit  continuation  of  Collar  and 
Danlall'a  Boglaner's  Latin  Book,  and 
I  feel  that  this  is  giving  it  higb 
praise.  With  the  introduction  ot 
these  new  text-books  I  look  for  a  vast 
improvement  in  the  classical  teaob- 
ing  ot  our  preparatory  schools. 


LATIN  TEXT-BOOKS. 


INTBOD.  PRICK 

Allen  &  Oreenou^h:  lAtin  Grammar  (Bey.  £d.) 31^ 

CaBsar  (Boy.  Ed.,  7  books,  with  vocab.,  iUastrated) . .  1.25 

Cicero  (BeV.  Ed.,  13  orations,  with  vocab.,  illustrated)  1.25 

Ovid  (with  vocabulary) 150 

Sallnst's  Cataline .60 

Cicero  de  Senectute .50 

Preparatory  Course  of  LAtin  Prose 1.40 

Latin  Composition 1.12 

Allen :  New  Latin  Method .90 

Introduction  to  Latin  Composition .90 

Latin  Lexicon .90 

Remnants  of  Earl^  Latin .75 

Germania  and  Agricola  of  Tacitos 1.00 

Collar :  Practical  Latin  Composition 1.00 

Gradatim .40 

Collar  &  Daniell :  Bennner's  Latin  Book LOO 

L^tine  Beddenda,  Paper,  .20;  with  vocabolary,  Cloth,      ^ 
CoUefire  Series  of  Latin  Authors : — 

Allen's  Annals  of  Tacitus,  Books  L-YI.,  Text  Edi- 
tion, .40;  Text  and  Notes IJiO 

Greenongh's  Satires  and  Epistles  of  Horace,  Text 

Edition,  .40;  Text  and  Notes 1.25 

Greenough's  Livy,  Books  L  and  II.,  Text  fkiitiou,  .40; 

Text  and  Notes 

Kellogg's  Brutus  of  Cicero,  Text  Edition,  .40;  Text 

and  Notes , 1.25 

CroTV^ell :  Selections  from  the  Latin  Poets 1.40 

Catullus  (Part  I.  of  Selections) .20 

Crowell  &  Bichardson :  Brief  History  of  Roman  Lit.  (Bender) . . .  1.00 

Fergruson:        Questions  on  Caesar  and  Xenophou 1.12 

Oepp  Ss  Haifirh :  Lattn-English  Dictionary ItSOu.. 

ainn  &  Compeay :  Classical  Atlas  and  (ireography.  Cloth 2.00     ** 

areenou^h:  Bucolics  and  6  Books  of  .£ueid  (with  vocabulary). ..  1.C0 

For  other  parts  of  Virgil  sco  Catalogue. 

Halsey:  Etymology  of  Latin  and  Greek 1.12 

Leifirhton :        Latin  Lessons 1.12 

First  Steps  in  Latin 1.12 

MadvigT  Latin  Grammar  (Thatcher) 2.25 

Preble  &  Parker :.  Handbook  of  Latin  Writing  (revised) .50 

Preble :  Terence's  Adelphoe .26 

Shumway:      Latin  Synonymes 30 

Stickney :         Cicero  de  Natura  Deorum 1.40 

Tetlow :  Inductive  Latin  Lessons 1.12 

Tomlinson :      Manual  for  the  Study  of  Latin  Grammar .20 

Latm  for  Sight  Beading. l.QO 

White  (J.  T.)  Junior  Students'  Latin-English  Lexicon  (morocco) . .  1.75 

English-Latin  Lexicon 1.50 

Lann-ED|?1ish  and  English-Latin  Lexicon  (sheep) . . .  3.00 

Whiton :  Anxilia  Virgiliana ;  or.  First  Steps  in  Latin  Prosody,  .15 

Six  Weeks'  Preparation  for  Reading  Csesar 40 


Copies  sent  to  Teachers  for  Examination^  with  a  view  to  Introduction,  on 
receipt  of  Introduction  Price.    The  above  list  is  not  quite  complete, 

aiNN  &  COMPANY,  Publishers. 

BOSTON.      NEW  YORK.      CHICAGO. 


CREEK  TEXT-BOOKS. 


Medea  of  Euripidos tlSIO 

Helleaic  Orations  of  Demosthenes 1  jOO 

Seven  againat  Thebea 1^ 


r 

^1      Oood'wln:        Greek  Qrainmiu'. 

^M  Oreek  Reader 1.S0 

■  Greek  Moods  and  TenseH  (Ksv.  EiL) 2m 

F  Selectiona  Sioia  Seaophoa  and  Herodotus 1.G0 

Goodwin  Sc  White:  AnabaaiH,  with  vocabulary IJXI 

Harding:  Hraek  Inflection £0 

Hogue  ;  Tlio  Irregular  Verba  of  Attic  Qreek 1J» 

Jebb  :  iDtrodnction  to  the  Study  of  Homer l.ia, 

Lelf-litoii :         New  Greek  Lessons I3(t  I 

Uddell  Sc  Scott :  Abridged  Greek-EBgUah  Lejioon 1^  -I 

Unabridged  Greek-English  Lexicon "  '" 

Parsons:  Cebea'  Tablet 

Seymour:         Homer's   Iliad   (Scliool  Edition]  vith   vocaliularj,  , 

Books  I.-ni„8I-2S;  Books  L-VI 1.6ft'  J 

Homeric  Vocabnlary 

LangnBge  and  Verse  o{  Homer,  Paper,  .1:0 ;  Cloth . , 

Selectsd  Odea  of  Pindar 

Greek  Prose  Con 


Bldgwlok; 
Tarbeil : 

White: 


Fhiiippica  of  Demoathenes 100  1 

Selections  from  Greek  Ljrric  Poeta l.OO  J 

Beginner's  Greek  Book. . .  " 

First  LeBBOOB  in  Greek. . 

CEdipus  TVrannns  of  Sopl- 

PaBsagea  lor  Translation  at  Sight,  PartlV...  .. 

Orations  of  Lyaias IMI'I 

BeokTTlth:  Euripides'  Bacchantes.   Text  &  Notes,  Pap.  SOJS;  CI0.J 
S1.26.  7 

D'Ooge  :  Sophocles' Antigone.  Text  &  Notes,  Pap.  $1.10 :  Clo.  S1.40.  J 
Dyer:  Plato's  Apology  and  Crlto.  Teitft  Notes,  Pap.81.10:  Clo.«l*)i  ' 
PlagSr;  Enripides'  Iphigenii  —  "' 

SMO;  Clo.  81.40.  , 

Fowler  :Thucydide9,  Book  V.    Text  &  Notes,  Pap.  81.10;  Clo.  81.4a  I 
Humphreys ;  AristophaneB'  Clouds.    Tait  &  Notes,  Pap.  SI.IO;  Clo.  J 
S1.40.  ] 

Manatt :  Xenophon's  Hellenica,  Books  L-IV.    Text  &  Notes,  Pap.  1 
Sfl.35;   Clo.  fl.65.  1 

Morris:  Thucydides,  Book  I.  Text  &  Notes,  Pap.  81.35;  Clo.  &l£S.  4 
Perrin:  Homer's  Odyesoy,  Books  I.-IV.    Text  &  Notes.  Pap.  81.10: 

Clo.  SI. 40. 
BlchardBon :  £schiDes  against  CCeeiphon.    Text  &  N 

Clo.  31.40. 
Seymour;  Homer's  Iliad,  Books  I,-III.    Teit  &  Notes,  Pap.  $1.10! 

Clo.  81.40. 
Smith;  Thnpydldes,  Book  VII.     Text  &  Notes,  Pap.«1.10;  Cla.SI.4a 
Towle:  Plato's  Protagoras.    Text  &  Notes,  Pap.  »0.96 ;  Cli 


GINN  &  COMPANY.  PubliaherB. 

BOSTON.       NEW  YORK.      CHICAOO. 


.3